An admirable statement of the aims of the Library of Philosophy was provided by the first editor, the late Professor J. H. Muirhead, in his description of the original programme printed m Erdmann's History of Philosophy under the date 1890. This was slightly modified m subsequent volumes to take the form of the following statement
'The Muirhead Library of Philosophy was designed as a contribution to the History of Modern Philosophy under the heads- first of Different Schools of Thought — Sensationalist, Realist, Idealist, Intuitivist; secondly of different Subjects — Psychology, Ethics, Political Philosophy, Theology While much had been done m England in tracing the course of evolu- tion m nature, history, economics, morals and religion, little had been done in tracing the development of thought on these subjects. Yet "the evolution of opinion is part of the whole evolution".
'By the co-operation of different writers m carrying out this plan it was hoped that a thoroughness and completeness of treatment, otherwise unattainable, might be secured. It was believed also that from writers mainly British and American fuller consideration of English Philosophy than it had hitherto received might be looked for. In the earlier series of books containing, among others, Bosanquet's History of Aesthetic Pfleiderer's Rational Theology since Kant, Albee's History of English Utilitarianism, Bonar's Philosophy and Political Economy Brett's History of Psychology, Ritchie's Natural Kights, these objects were to a large extent effected.
Tn the meantime original work of a high order was beine produced both in England and America by such writers as Bradley, Stout Bertrand Russell, Baldwin, Urban, Montague, and others, and a new interest m foreign works German
^ 'S^ WlU ? h had eithCT beco ™ classTcd or™ ?e T i£ l pub u° attentlon . ha d developed. The scope of the na?S 2!? ♦ T eXtend t d mto sometlun g more inter- the hoS * w * entermg the fifth decade of to ^tence » Sto2n £ ♦ niay contnbute to that mutual understanding between countries which ,s so pressing a need of the present
prSm^todav *S £ r ° feS n Mmthead StreSSed 18 ™ less a! g A l y i , nd few wU den y that philosophy has much to do with enabling us to meet it, although no onef £ of^t
Muirhead himself, would regard that as the sole, or even the main, object of philosophy As Professor Muirhead continues to lend the distinction of his name to the Library of Philosophy it seemed not inappropriate to allow him to recall us to these aims m his own words The emphasis on the history of thought also seemed to me very timely, and the number of important works promised for the Library in the very near future augur well for the continued fulfilment, in this and other ways, of the expectations of the original editor
General Editor" H. D. Lewis
fjfessor of History and Philosophy of Religion ttt the University >' of London
Action by sir malcolm knox
The Analysts of Mmd bertrand russeu.
Clarity ts Not Enough by h. d lewis
Coleridge as Philosopher by J. H. muirhead
The Commonplace Book of G. E. Moore edited by c lewy
Contemporary American Philosophy edited by G. v adams and
\V P. MONTAGUE
Contemporary British Philosophy First and second series edited
by j. h muirhead Contemporary British Philosophy Third series edited by h. r>,
Contemporary Indian Philosophy edited by radhakrishnan
and j. h. muirhead 2nd edition The Discipline of the Cave by j s. tindlay Doctrine and Argument in Indian Philosophy by kikiak SMART Essays m Analysis by alice Ambrose Ethics by kicolai hartmann translated by stanto.v coit 3 vols The Foundations of Metaphysics in Science by errol e, Harris Freedom and History by H d. lewis
The Good Will A Study in the Coherence Theory of Goodness bv H j paton J Hegel A Re-Examinatton by j n. findlay Hegel's Science of Logic translated by w. h. iohkston and l
G STRUTHERS 2 Vols
History of Aesthetic by b. bosanquet 2nd edition
History of English Utilitarianism by z. albee
History of Psychology by g. s. brett edited by r. s. peters
abridged one-volume edition 2nd edition Human Knowledge by bertrand russell A Hundred Years of British Philosophy by rudolf metz
«JL ^ Inirodwlion ^ Pure Phenomenology by edmund husserl translated by w. r. boyce gibson Imagination by e j. furlong
^ediS^ 3 ' ty RADHAKRI ™ * vols revised 2nd Introdua^toMathenuaical Philosophy by bertrand russell
Kant's First Critique by h w. cassirer
Kant's Metaphysic of Experience by h j paton
Know Thyself by bernadino varisco translated by guglielm o
Language and Reality by wilbur Marshall urban
Lectures on Philosophy by g e. moore
Matter and Memory by henri bergson translated by n m
paul and w s palmer Memory by brian smith The Modern Predicament by h j paton Natural Rights by d g ritchie 3rd edition Nature, Mtnd and Modern Science by e Harris The Nature of Thought by brand blanshard On Selfhood and Godhood by c a Campbell Our Experience of God by H D lewis
Perception and our Knowledge of the External World by DON LOCKE
The Phenomenology of Mind by g w f hegel translated by
sir James baillie revised 2nd edition Philosophical Papers by G E moore Philosophy and Illusion by morris lazerowitz Philosophy m America by max black Philosophy and Political Economy by james bonar Philosophy and Religion by axel hagerstrom Philosophy of Space and Time by michael whiteman Philosophy of Whitehead by w. mays
The Platonic Tradition in Anglo-Saxon Philosophy by john
h muirhead The Principal UpanisJiads by radahkrishnan The Problems of Perception by R j hirst Reason and Goodness by brand blanshard The Relevance of Whiteliead by ivor leclerc Some Mam Problems of Philosophy by g e moore Studies in the Metaphysics of Bradley by sushil kumar sakena The Theological Frontier of Ethics by w g maclagan Time and Free Will by henri bergson translated by f g
pogson
The Transcendence of the Cave by j n findlay
Values and Intentions by j n. findlay
The Ways of Knowing or The Methods of Philosophy by w p
TEbe flButtbeao Xibrars of pbtlosopbB
By RADHAKRISHNAN INDIAN PHILOSOPHY THE HINDU VIEW OF LI*E AN IDEALIST VIEW OF LIFE EAST AND WEST IN RELIGION RELIGION AND SOCIETY THE BRAHMA SUTRA RECOVERY OF FAITH RELIGION IN A CHANGING WORLD THE BHAGAVADGlTA
By A N MARLOW RADHAKRISHNAN AN ANTHOLOGY
(Allen & Unwin)
(Clarendon Press, Oxford)
(Oxford University Press)
INDIA AND CHINA IS THIS PEACE' GREAT INDIANS
(Hind Kitabs, Bombay) Edited by radhakrishnan
(Allen & Unwin) Edited by radhakrishnan and J h muirhead
(Allen & Unwin) Edited by radhakrishnan and p T raju
(Allen & Unwin) Edited by radhakrishnan, a wadia, d m datta and h kabir
(Allen & Unwin)
EDITED WITH INTRODUCTION, TEXT, TRANSLATION AND NOTES BY
GEORGE ALLEN & UNWIN LTD
RUSKIN HOUSE < MUSEUM STREET
7 his book is copyright under the Berne Convention 4parl from any fair dealing for the purposes of private study, research, atticism or review, as permitted under the Copyright Act 1956, no portion may be reproduced by any process without written permission Enquiries should be addressed to the publisher
Cloth bd edition sbn 04 294046 X Paper bd edition sbn 04 294047 8
by Photolithography
Human nature is not altogether unchanging but it does remain sufficiently constant to justify the study of ancient classics The problems of human life and destiny have not been superseded by the striking achievements of science and technology. The solutions offered, though conditioned in their modes of expression by their time and environment, have not been seriously affected by the march of scientific knowledge and criticism The responsibility laid on man as a rational being, to integrate himself, to relate the present to the past and the future, to live in time as well as in eternity, has become acute and urgent. The Upanisads, though remote m time from us, are not remote in thought. They disclose the working of the primal impulses of the human soul which rise above the differ- ences of race and of geographical position. At the core of all historical religions there are fundamental types of spiritual experience though they are expressed with different degrees of clarity. The Upanisads illustrate and illuminate these primary experiences.
'These are really the thoughts of all men in all ages and lands, they are not original with me. If they are not yours as much as mine, they are nothing or next to nothing,' said Walt Whitman The Upanisads deal with questions which arise when men begin to reflect seriously and attempt answers to them which are not very different, except m their approach and emphasis from what we are now inclined to accept This does not mean that the message of the Upanisads, which is as true today as ever, commits us to the different hypotheses about the structure of the world and the physiology of man We must make a distinction between the message of the Upanisads and their mythology The latter is liable to correction by advances in science Even this mythology becomes intelligible if we place ourselves as far as possible at the viewpoint of those who con- ceived it Those parts of the Upanisads which seem to us today
Zt» InH 1 ^' « 10US ai i d ? lmost UIlme ai™g, should have had value and significance at the time they were composed
Anyone who reads the Upanisads m the original Sanskrit will be caught up and earned away by the elevS^n, Se poet™ the compelling fascination of the many utterances thrS which they lay bare the secret and saLd l3SL of the
The Principal Upamsads
human soul and the Ultimate Reality When we read them, we cannot help being impressed by the exceptional ability, earnest- ness and ripeness of mmd of those who wrestled with these ultimate questions These souls who tackled these problems remain still and will remain for all time in essential harmony with the highest ideals of civilisation.
The Upamsads are the foundations on which the beliefs of millions of human beings, who were not much inferior to our- selves, are based Nothing is more sacred to man than his own history. At least as memorials of the past, the Upamsads are worth our attention
A proper knowledge of the texts is an indispensable aid to the understanding of the Upamsads There are parts of the Upamsads which repel us by their repetitiveness and irrelevance to our needs, philosophical and religious But if we are to under- stand their ideas, we must know the atmosphere in which they worked We must not judge ancient writings from our standards We need not condemn our fathers for having been what they were or ourselves for being somewhat different from them It is our task to relate them to their environment, to bridge distances of time and space and separate the transitory from the permanent
There is a danger in giving only carefully chosen extracts We are likely to give what is easy to read and omit what is difficult, or give what is agreeable to our views and omit what is disagreeable It is wise to study the Upamsads as a whole, their striking insights as well as their commonplace assumptions Only such a study will be historically valuable I have therefore given m full the classical Upamsads, those commented on or mentioned by Samkara The other Upamsads are of a later date and are sectarian in character. They represent the popular gods, Siva, Visnu, Sakti, as manifestations of the Supreme Reality. They are not parts of the original Veda, are of much later origin and are not therefore as authoritative as the classical Upamsads If they are all to be included, it would be difficult to find a Publisher for so immense a work I have therefore selected a few other Upamsads, some of those to which references are made by the great teachers, Samkara and Ram ami] a
In the matter of translation and interpretation, I owe a heavy debt, directly and indirectly, not only to the classical commentators but also to the modern writers who have worked
Preface 7
on the subject. I have profited by their tireless labours The careful reader will find, I hope, that a small advance in a few places at least has been made m this translation towards a better understanding of the texts.
Passages in verse are not translated into rhyme as the padding and inversion necessary for observing a metrical pattern take away a great deal from the dignity and concise- ness of the original.
It is not easy to render Sanskrit religious and philosophical classics into English for each language has its own charac- teristic genius. Language conveys thought as well as feeling. It falls short of its full power and purpose, if it fails to com- municate the emotion as fully as it conveys the idea. Words convey ideas but they do not always express moods In the Upanisads we find harmonies of speech which excite the emotions and stir the soul I am afraid that it has not been possible for me to produce m the English translation the richness of melody, the warmth of spirit, the power of enchant- ment that appeals to the ear, heart and mind I have tried to be faithful to the originals, sometimes even at the cost of elegance. I have given the texts with all their nobility of sound and the feeling of the numinous
For the classical Upanisads the text followed is that com- mented on by Sarakara A multitude of variant readings of the texts exist, some of them to be found in the famous commen- taries, others in more out of the way versions. The chief variant readings are mentioned in the notes As my interest is philo- sophical rather than linguistic, I have not discussed them In the translation, words which are omitted or understood in Sanskrit or are essential to complete the grammatical structure are inserted in brackets
We cannot bring to the study of the Upanisads virgin minds which are untouched by the views of the many generations of scholars who have gone before us. Their influence may work either directly or indirectly. To be aware of this limitation to S^. 00 ^^ . of g«*t importance in the study of ancient .texts. The classical commentators represent in their works the great oral traditions of interpretation which W been cumnt in their time. Centuries of careful Shflie behind the exegetical traditions as they finally took shKe It would be futile to neglect the work of th TcWnStoS as there are words and passages in the UpamsSHf w3c? Z
The Principal Upamsads
could make little sense without the help of the commen- tators
We do not have in the Upamsads a single well-articulated system of thought We find m them a number of different strands which could be woven together m a single whole by sympathetic interpretation Such an account involves the ex- pression of opinions which can always be questioned Impar- tiality does not consist m a refusal to form opinions or in a futile attempt to conceal them It consists in rethinking the thoughts of the past, m understanding their environment, and m relating them to the intellectual and spiritual needs of our own time While we should avoid the attempt to read into the terms of the past the meanings of the present, we cannot overlook the fact that certain problems are the same in all ages We must keep in mind the Buddhist saying 'Whatever is not adapted to such and such persons as are to be taught cannot be called a teaching ' We must remain sensitive to the prevailing currents of thought and be prepared, as far as we are able, to translate the universal truth into terms intelligible to our audience, without distorting their meaning It would scarcely be possible to exaggerate the difficulty of such a task, but it has to be undertaken If we are able to make the seeming abstractions of the Upamsads flame anew with their ancient colour and depth, if we can make them pulsate with their old meaning, they will not appear to be altogether irrelevant to our needs, intellectual and spiritual The notes are framed m this spirit
The Upamsads which base their affirmations on spiritual experience are invaluable for us, as the traditional props of faith, the infallible scripture, miracle and prophecy are no longer avadable The irreligion of our times is largely the product of the supremacy of religious technique over spmtual life The study of the Upamsads may help to restore to funda- mental things of religion that reality without which they seem to be meaningless
Besides, at a time when moral aggression is compelling people to capitulate to queer ways of life, when vast experi- ments in social structure and political organisation are being made at enormous cost of life and suffering, when we stand perplexed and confused before the future with no clear light to guide our way, the power of the human soul is the only refuge If we resolve to be governed by it, our civilisation may
Preface 9
enter upon its most glorious epoch. There arc many 'dis- satisfied children of the spirit of the west,' to use Romam Rolland's phrase, who are oppressed that the universality of her great thoughts has been defamed for ends of violent action, that they are trapped in a blind alley and arc savagely crushing each other out of existence When an old binding culture is being broken, when ethical standards are dissolving, when we are being aroused out of apathy or awakened out of uncon- sciousness, when there is in the air general ferment, inward stirring, cultural crisis, then a high tide of spiritual agitation sweeps over peoples and we sense in the horizon something novel, something unprecedented, the beginnings of a spiritual renaissance We are living in a world of freer cultural inter- course and wider world sympathies. No one can ignore his neighbour who is also groping in this world of sense for the world unseen. The task set to our generation is to reconcile the varying ideals of the converging cultural patterns and help them to sustain and support rather than combat and destroy one another. By this process they are transformed from within and the forms that separate them will lose their exclusivist meaning and signify only that unity with their own origins and inspirations
The study of the sacred books of religions other than one's own is essential for speeding up this process. Students of Chris- tian religion and theology, especially those who wish to make Indian Christian thought not merely 'geographically' but 'organically' Indian, should understand their great heritage which is contained m the Upanisads
For us Indians, a study of the Upanisads is essential, if we are to preserve our national being and character. To discover the mam lines of our traditional life, we must turn to our classics, the Vedas and the Upanisads, the Bhagavad-gM and me Dhamma-pada They have done more to colour our minds than we generally acknowledge They not only thought many of our thoughts but coined hundreds of the words thlt we use fj ! y * u fe ; l here ls , much m our that « degrading and
hS? , U - ? 6re 15 alS ° mU ? h that 15 hfe -g ivin S and di5 tmg If the past is to serve as an inspnation for the future we have
to study it with discrimination and sympathy. Again the
highest achievements of the human mind and spint are not
Wh J*/* gates of the futur « are wide open
While the fundamental motives, the governing id?a S Xch
The Principal Upamsads
constitute the essential spirit of our culture are a part of our very being, they should receive changing expression according to the needs and conditions of our time
There is no more inspiring task for the student of Indian thought than to set forth some phases of its spintual wisdom and bring them to bear on our own life Let us, in the words of Socrates, 'turn over together the treasures that wise men have left us, glad if in so doing we make fnends with one another '
The two essays written for the Philosophy of the Upamsads (1924), which is a reprint of chapter IV from my Indian Philo- sophy, Volume I, by Rabindranath Tagore and Edmond Holmes, are to be found m the Appendices A and B respectively
I am greatly indebted to my distinguished and generous friends Professors Sumti Kumar Chatterji, and Siddhesvar Bhattacharya for their great kindness in reading the proofs and making many valuable suggestions
Moscow,
October, 1951
Preface 5
Scheme of Transliteration 13
List of Abbreviations X4
Introduction 15
Vedas
X, Ultimate Reality: Brahman 52
XIII, The Status of the World and the Doc-
trine of Maya and Aviiya 78
XVII Karma and Rebirth tt*
12 The "Principal Upanisads
I . Brhad-aranyaka Upantsad 147
II ' Chdndogya Upamsad 335
III , Attareya Upamsad 513
IV 'TattUrtya Upantsad 525 V *> ha Upamsad 565
VI > Kena Ufantsad 579
IX iMundaka Upamsad 669
X 'Mandukya Upamsad 693
XI * Svetaivatara Upamsad 707
XII Kausitakl Brahmana Upamsad 751
XIII Matin Upantsad 793
XVI Pamgala Upamsad 901
XVII Katvalya Upamsad 925 XVIII . Vajrasiicika. Upamsad 933
Appendices
(a) Rabmdranath Tagore on The Upani- sads 937 (6) Edmond Holmes on The Upanisads 943 Selected Bibliography 949 General Index 951
SCHEME OF TRANSLITERATION Vowels aaiiuurfleaioau
h
Consonants
gutturals
k
kh g gh
n
palatals
c
ch j jh
n
cerebrals
t
th 4 4h
n
dentals
t
th d dh
n
labials
ph b bh
m
semx-vowch
y
r 1 v
sibilants
s
as in sun
s palatal sibilant pronounced like the soft s of Russian
s cerebral sibilant as in shun aspirate h
Attareya Upamsad . . . A U
Anandagiri A
Bhagavad-gUa B.G,
Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad . . . B U.
Brahma Sutra . . B S
Chdndogya Upamsad . . C U.
Indian Philosophy by Radhaknshnan I P.
Isa Upamsad Isa
Jabdla Upamsad .... Jabala
Kena Upamsad . . . Kena
Katha Upamsad .... Katha
Kausitakl Upamsad . . K U
Mahabharata .... MB
Maitri Upamsad .... Maitri
Mandukya Upamsad . . . Ma U.
Mundaka Upamsad ... M U
Paingala Upamsad . . . Pamgala
Prasna Upamsad .... Prasna
Rangaramanuja R.
Ramamrja's Commentary on the
Brahma Sutra R B.
Ramanuja's Commentary on the
Bhagavad-gitd . . . R B G.
RgVeda . . . . . RV
Samkara 5
Samkara's Commentary on the
Brahma Sutra ... SB Samkara's Commentary on the
Bhagavad-gttd . . . . S B G
Subala Upamsad . . . . Subala
Svetdivatara Upamsad . . S U.
Tattttrtya Upamsad TU.
Upam§ad U
Variant V
The Upamsads represent a great chapter in the history of the human spirit and have dominated Indian philosophy, religion and life for three thousand years. Every subsequent religious movement has had to show itself to be in accord with their philosophical statements Even doubting and denying spirits found m them anticipations of their hesitancies, misgivings and negations. They have survived many changes, religious and secular, and helped many generations of men to formulate their views on the chief problems of life and existence.
Their thought by itself and through Buddhism influenced even m ancient times the cultural life of other nations far beyond the boundaries of India, Greater India, Tibet, China, Japan and Korea and in the South, in Ceylon, the Malay Peninsula and far away m the islands of the Indian and the Pacific Oceans In the West, the tracks of Indian thought may be traced far into Central Asia, where, buried in the sands of the desert, were found Indian texts *
The Upanisads have shown an unparalleled variety of appeal during these long centuries and have been admired by different people, for different reasons, at different periods They are said
" 'For the historian, who pursues the history of human thought, the Upanisads have a yet far greater significance From the mystical doctrines of the Upanisads, one current of thought may be traced to the mysticism of the Persian Sufism, to the mystic, theosophical logos doctrine of the Neo-Platomcs and the Alexandrian Christian mystics, Eckhart and Tauler, and finally to the philosophy of the great German mystic of the nineteenth century, Schopenhauer ' Wmtcmitz: A History of Indian Literature E T Vol I (1927), p 266 See Eastern Religions and Western Thought Second Edition (1940), Chapters IV, V, VI, VII It is said that Schopenhauer had the Latin text of the Upanisads on his table and 'was m the habit, before going to bed, of performing his devotions from its pages ' Bloomfield Religion of the Veda (1908) p s<t 'From every sentence [of the Upanisads], deep original and sublime thoughts arise, and the whole is pervaded by a high and holy and earnest spirit In the whole world . there is no study so beneficial and so elevating as that of the Upanisads They are products of the highest wisdom They are destined sooner or later to become the faith of the people Schopenhauer.
i8 The Principal Uflam$ads
to provide us with a complete chart of the unseen Reality, to give us the most immediate, intimate and convincing light on the secret of human existence, to formulate, m Deussen's words, 'philosophical conceptions unequalled in India or perhaps anywhere else in the world,' or to tackle every funda- mental problem of philosophy 1 All this may be so or may not be so But of one thing there is no dispute, that those earnest spirits have known the fevers and ardours of religious seeking, they have expressed that pensive mood of the thinking mind which finds no repose except in the Absolute, no rest except in the Divine. The ideal which haunted the thinkers of the Upanisads, the ideal of man's ultimate beatitude, the perfection of knowledge, the vision of the Real m which the religious hunger of the mystic for divine vision and the philosopher's ceaseless quest for truth are both satisfied is still our ideal A N. Whitehead speaks to us of the real which stands behind and beyond and within the passing flux of this world, 'some- thing which is real and yet waiting to be realised, something which is a remote possibility and yet the greatest of present facts, something that gives meaning to all that passes, and yet eludes apprehension, something whose possession is the final good, and yet is beyond all reach, something which is the ultimate ideal and the hopeless quest' 2 A metaphysical curiosity for a theoretical explanation of the world as much as a passionate longing for liberation is to be found in the Upanisads Their ideas do not only enlighten our minds but stretch our souls
If the ideas of the Upanisads help us to rise above the glamour of the fleshly life, it is because their authors, pure of soul, ever striving towards the divine, reveal to us their pictures of the splendours of the unseen. The Upanisads are respected not because they are a part of intti or -revealed literature and so hold a reserved position but because they have inspired generations of Indians with vision and strength by their in- exhaustible significance and spiritual power. Indian thought
» Cp W. B Yeats 'Nothing that has disturbed the schools to controversy escaped their notice ' Preface to the Ten Principal Upanisads (1937), P 11
» Science and the Modern World, (1933), p. 238
Introduction
has constantly turned to these scriptures for fresh illumination and spiritual recovery or recommencement, and not in vam. The fire still burns bright on their altars. Their light is for the seeing eye and their message is for the seeker after truth 1
THE TERM 'UPANISAD'
The word 'upamsad' is dervied from upa (near), ni (down) and sad (to sit), i e. sitting down near. Groups of pupils sit near the teacher to leam from him the secret doctrine In the quietude of forest hermitages the Upanisad thinkers pondered on the problems of the deepest concern and communicated their knowledge to fit pupils near them The seers adopt a certain reticence in communicating the truth They wish to be satisfied that their pupils are spiritually and not carnally minded 5 To respond to spiritual teaching, we require the spiritual disposition
The Upanisads contain accounts of the nvystic significance of the syllable awn, explanations of mystic words like tajjalan, which are intelligible only to the initiated, and secret texts and esoteric doctrines. Upamsad became a name for a mystery, a secret, r ahasyam, communicated only to the tested few 3 Wen
' Tl * artlcle 011 Christian Vedantism, Mr R Gordon Milburn writes Ctestaamfy in India needs the Vedanta We missionaries have not realised this with half the clearness that we should We cannot move freely and joyfully in our own religion; because we have not sufficient termsand modes of expression therewith to express the more immanen-
£ hnstiamty A - Ver y use£ul ste P ^ the recognition of certain books or passages in the literature of the Vedanta as Consti- tuting what might be called an Ethnic Old Testament The nermann of ecclesiastical authont.es could then be asked fo? reaSin™^ found in such a canon of Ethnic Old Testament at divine seraSl with passages from the New Testament as alternates to £L Testament lessons ' Indian Interpreter S» alternatlves to 0Id
+ ,1 P *l ' T ° ^ ^ Father Md M^er of this universe is a hatrt Sie^^i- ^. * U impossible"^ oVSm
™<l«g«hyam, vedagithyopamsaU;it S Sdhafn.SU V 6.
The Principal Upamsads
the question of man's final destiny was raised, Yajiiavalkya took his pupil aside and whispered to him the truth. 1 According to the CMndogya Upantsad, the doctrine of Brahman may be imparted by a father to his elder son or to a trusted pupil, but not to another, whoever he may be, even if the latter should give him the whole earth surrounded by the waters and filled with treasures 1 In many cases it is said that the teacher com- municates the secret knowledge only after repeated entreaty and severe testing
Samkara derives the word upantsad as a substantive from the root sad, 'to loosen,' 'to reach' or 'to destroy* with upa and m as prefixes and kmp as termination 3 If this derivation is accepted, upantsad means brahma-knowledge by which ignorance is loosened or destroyed The treatises that deal with brahma-knowledge are called the Upamsads and so pass for the Vedanta The different derivations together make out that the Upamsads give us both spiritual vision and philosophical argument 4 There is a core of certainty which is essentially mcommunicable except by a way of life. It is by a strictly personal effort that one can reach the truth
The Upamsads form a literature which has been growing from early times Their number exceeds two hundred, though
guhyalamam Math t VI 29
abhayam vat brahma bhavah ya evam veda, iti rahasyam Nrsxmholiara- tSpani U VIII
d[iarme rahasy itpanisat sySt Amarakosa
upamsadam rahasyam yac cmlyam S on Kena IV 7 The injunction of secrecy about the mysteries reserved for the initiated is found among the Orphics and the Pythagoreans
' B U III 3 13
* III 11 5, BU III 2 13
3 Introduction to the Hatha In his commentary on T U , he says, upantsantiam va asyam param sreya xtt
4 Oldenberg suggests that the real sense of Upantsad is worship or reverence, which the word upSsana signifies UpSsana brings about oneness with the object worshipped See Keith The Religion and Philosophy of the Veda and the Upamsads (1925), p 492.
Introduction 21
the Indian tradition puis it at one hundred and eight.' Prince Muhammad Dara Shikoh's collection translated into Persian (1656-1657) and then into Latin by Anquetil Duperron (1801 and 1802) under the title Oupnckhat, contained about fifty. Colebrooke's collection contained fifty-two, and this was based on Narayana's list (c. A d. 1400). The principal Upanisads are said to be ten. Sarhkara commented on eleven, Ua, Kcna, Kalha, Praina, Mundaka, Mandukya, TaillirTya, Aiiarcya, CMndogya, Brhad-dranyaka and Svctahatara He also refers to the Kau§i- takl, Jabala, Mahanarayana and Paingala Upanisads in his Commentary on the Brahma Sutra These together with the MaitrayaqTya or Maxtri Upamsad constitute the principal Upanisads. Ramanuja uses all these Upanisads as also the Subdla and the Cuhka. He mentions also the Garbha, the Jabala and the Malta Upanisads Vidyaranya includes Nm- mhottarec-tdpanl Upanisad among the twelve he explained in his Sarvopamsad-arthdnubhuii-prakaia. The other Upanisads which have come down are more religious than philosophical. They belong more to the Purana and the Tantra than to the Veda. They glorify Vedanta or Yoga or Sarhnyisa or extol the worship of Siva, Sakti or Vi§nu*
1 See the Muktiks U , where it is said that salvation may be attained by a study of the hundred and eight Upanisads I 30-39
» There is, however, considerable argument about the older and more ongpal Upanisads Max Muller translated the eleven Upanisads quoted by Samkara together with Matirayamya Deussen, though he translated no less than sixty, considers that fourteen of them are original and have a connection with Vedic schools Hume translated the twelve which Max Muller selected and added to them the Mandukya. Keith in his Religion and Philosophy of the Veda and the Upanisads includes the Mahanarayana His hst of fourteen is the same as that of Deussen
^S? I t tlo ^, o£ Upanisads have appeared in the folloW
ffi fJS^i 1 Sacre * B ?°£ of«- East, Mead and Chattopadnyaya ^ f T Kn„ T T h ^ s °P hl «£ Society), Sitaram Sastri and cLgS
The Principal Upantsads
Modem criticism is generally agreed that the ancient prose Upanisads, Attareya, Kausitaki, Chandogya, Kena, Taitttrlya and Brhad-aranyaka, together with Ida and Katha belong to the eighth and seventh centuries b c They are all pre-Buddhis- tic. They represent the Vedanta in its pure original form and are the earliest philosophical compositions of the world. These Upanisads belong to what Karl Jaspers calls the Axial Era of the world, 800 to 300 b c , when man for the first time simul- taneously and independently in Greece, Chma and India ques- tioned the traditional pattern of life
As almost all the early literature of India was anonymous, we do not know the names of the authors of the Upanisads. Some of the chief doctrines of the Upamsads are associated with the names of renowned sages as Arum, Yajnavalkya, Balaki, SVetaketu, Sandilya They were, perhaps, the early exponents of the doctrines attributed to them The teach- ings were developed in pansads or spiritual retreats where teachers and pupils discussed and defined the different views
As a part of the Veda, the Upanisads belong to srutt or re- vealed literature They are immemorial, sanatana, tuneless Their truths are said to be breathed out by God or visioned by the seers They are the utterances of the sages who speak out of the fullness of their illumined experience They are not reached by ordinary perception, inference or reflection, 1 but seen by the seers, even as we see and not infer the wealth and not of colour m the summer sky The seers have the same sense of assurance and possession of their spiritual vision as we have of our physical perception The sages are men of 'direct' vision, in the words of Yaska, saksat-krta-dharmanah, and the records of their experiences are the facts to be considered by any philo- sophy of religion The truths revealed to the seers are not mere reports of introspection which are purely subjective The inspired sages proclaim that the knowledge they communicate is not what they discover for themselves It is revealed to
commentaries are found in the edition of the Upamsads published by the Pamni Office, Allahabad
1 They are relevant in matters which cannot be reached by perception and inference aprapie iastram artkavat MimamsS Siitra I I 5
Introduction
them without their effort 1 Though the knowledge is an experi- ence of the seer, it is an experience of an independent reality which impinges on his consciousness. There is the impact of the real on the spirit of the expericncer. It is therefore said to be a direct disclosure from the 'wholly other/ a revelation of the Divine Symbolically, the Upanisads describe revelation as the breath of God blowing on us 'Of that great being, this is the breath, which is the Rg Veda.'"- The divine energy is compared to the breath which quickens It is a seed which fertilises or a flame which kindles the human spirit to its finest issues It is interesting to know that the Brhad-aranyaka Upanhad tells us that not only the Vedas but history, sciences and other studies are also 'breathed forth by the great God. '3
The Vedas were composed by the seers when they were in a state of inspiration. He who inspires them is God.< Truth is impersonal, apaurussya and eternal, niiya. Inspiration is a joint activity, of which man's contemplation and God's revelation are two sides The Svet&svalara Upanisad says that the sage SVetasvatara saw the truth owing to his power of contemplation, tapal}-prabhava, and the grace of God, devajrasada.i The dual significance of revelation, its subjective and objective character, is suggested here.
The Upanisads are vehicles more of spiritual Rumination than of systematic reflection. They reveal to us a world of rich and varied spiritual experience rather than a world of abstract
1 puru$a-prayalnath vtna prakatlbhuta S BU.II i io, MO II I.6;R.V.X 90 9- u o j 4 i m ^ e *?aiyayttas maintain that the Vedas were comDocsd by God vrhUe the MimSmsakas bold that they were not coml^S either by man or by God, but have easted from all etaS fo™ of sounds It is perhaps a ray of saving that &e S^SthTS eternity exist from everlasting to everlastirm Arisb3u2L»S iJ? faMMrt truths of rebgKm JL etemS^SS ^
The Principal Upanisads
philosophical categories Their truths are verified not only by logical reason but by personal experience. Their aim is prac- tical rather than speculative Knowledge is a means to freedom. Philosophy, biahma-vidya, is the pursuit of wisdom by a way of life.
The Vedanta meant originally the Upanisads, though the word is now used for the system of philosophy based on the Upanisads Literally, Vcddnia means the end of the Veda, vedasya antah, the conclusion as well as the goal of the Vedas The Upanisads are the concluding portions of the Vedas Chrono- logically they come at the end of the Vedic period As the Upanisads contain abstruse and difficult discussions of ultimate philosophical problems, they were taught to the pupils at about the end of their course When we have Vedic recitations as religious exercises, the end of these recitals is generally from the Upanisads The chief reason why the Upanisads are called the end of the Veda is that they represent the central aim and meaning of the teaching of the Veda 1 The content of the Upanisads is vedanta vijnanam, the wisdom of the Vedanta * The Samhitas and the Brahmanas, which are the hymns and the liturgical books, represent the karma-kanda or the ritual portion, while the Upanisads represent the piana-Mnda or the knowledge portion The learning of the hymns and the per- formance of the rites are a preparation for true enlightenment 3
The Upanisads describe to us the life of spirit, the same yesterday, to-day and for ever. But our apprehensions of the ufe of spirit, the symbols by which we express it, change with
1 hlesu tatlavad vede vedantah su-prattsflntali Mttkhka U I 9 Again, vedB, brahmatma-visaya Bhagavata XI 21 35 Stmmkalva-vidyS-prah- patlaye sarve-vedanta Srabhyante S B Introduction vedanto -nama upamsat pramanam Vedanta-sara
* M U III 2 6 S U speaks of the highest mystery m the Vedanta vedanie paramam guhyam VI 22
3 Much of the material in the C U and B U. belongs properly to the Brahmanas
Introduction 25
time. All systems of orthodox Indian thought accept the authoritativeness of the Vedas, 1 but give themselves freedom in. their interpretation. This variety of interpretation is made possible by the fact that the Upanisads are not the thoughts of a single philosopher or a school of philosophers who follow a single tradition. They are the teachings of thinkers v,ho were interested in different aspects of the philosophical problem, and therefore offer solutions of problems v.hich %ary in their in- terest and emphasis There is thus a certain amount of fluidity in their thought which has been utilised for the development of different philosophical systems. Out of the wealth of sugges- tions and speculations contained in them, different thinkers choose elements for the construction of their own systems, not infrequently even through a straining of the texts. Though the Upanisads do not work out a logically coherent system of metaphysics, they give us a few fundamental doctrines which stand out as the essential teaching of the earlv Upanisads. These are recapitulated in the Brahma Stllra.
The Brahma Sutra is an aphoristic summary of the teaching of the Upanisads, and the great teachers of the Vedanta develop their distinctive views through their commentaries on this work. By interpreting the surras which are laconic in form and hardly intelligible without interpretation, the teachers justify their views to the reasoning intelligence.
Different commentators attempt to find in the Upanisads and the Brahma Sutra a single coherent doctrine, a svstem of thought which is free from contradictions. Bhartrp'rapanca who is anterior to Samkara, maintains that the selves and the physical universe are real, though not altogether different from Brahman. They are both identical with and different from fnS^T *? e * be * consti tating a unitv in diversity Ultimate Reahty evolves into the universal creation srsti and theuniverse . retreats into it at the time of dissolution, pralaya *
The advatta of Samkara insists on the transcendenV Sre
1 Even the Buddhists and -the Tafn-ie .,,.,„-<-
1 See Indian Antiquary (1924), pp . 77 _g &
The Principal Upamsads
of non-dual Brahman and the duality of the world including Isvara who presides over it Reality is Brahman or Atman No predication is possible of Brahman as predication involves duality and Brahman is free from all duality The world of duality is empirical or phenomenal The saving truth which redeems the individual from the stream of births and deaths is the recognition of his own identity with the Supreme 'That thou art' is the fundamental fact of all existence 1 The multi- plicity of the universe, the unending stream of life, is real, but only as a phenomenon
Ramanuja qualifies the non-dual philosophy so as to make the personal God supreme While Brahman, souls and the world are all different and eternal, they are at the same time in- separable * Inseparability is not identity Brahman is related to the two others as soul to body They are sustained by Him and subject to His control Ramanuja says that while God exists for Himself, matter and souls exist for His sake and sub- serve His purposes The three together form an organic whole Brahman is the inspiring principle of the souls and the world The souls are different from, but not independent of, God They are said to be one only in the sense that they all belong to the same class The ideal is the enjoyment of freedom and bliss in the world of Narayana, and the means to it is either prapattt or bhakti The individual souls, even when they are freed through the influence of then* devotion and the grace of God, retain their separate mdividuahty For him and Madhva, God, the author of all grace, saves those who give to Hun the worship of love and faith
For Madhva there are five eternal distinctions between (i) God and the individual soul, (2) God and matter, (3) soul and matter, (4) one soul and another, (5) one particle of matter and another. The supreme being endowed with all auspicious qualities is called Visnu, and Laksmi is His power dependent on Him Moksa is release from rebirth and residence in the abode of Narayana Human souls are innumerable, and each of them is separate and eternal The divine souls are destined for salvation Those who are neither very good nor very bad
» CU VI. 8 7, B.U. 1. 4. 10.
* a-prihak-siddha
Introduction
are subject to samsara, and the bad go to hell. Right knowledge of God and devotion to Him are the means to salvation Without divine grace there can be no salvation 1
Baladeva adopts the \iew of actntya-bhedabheda Difference and non-difference are positive facts of experience and yet cannot be reconciled. It is an incomprehensible synthesis of opposites Ramanuja, Bhaskara, Nimbarka and Baladeva believe that there is change m Brahman, but not of Brahman 1
Even the most inspired writers are the products of their environment They give voice to the deepest thoughts of their own epoch A complete abandonment of the existing modes of thought is psychologically impossible The writers of the Rg Veda speak of the ancient makers of the path 3 When there is an awakening of the mind, the old symbols are interpreted m a new way.
In pursuance of the characteristic genius of the Indian mind, not to shake the beliefs of the common men, but to lead them on by stages to the understanding of the deeper philosophical meaning behind their beliefs, the Upamsads develop the Vedic ideas and symbols and give to them, where necessary, new meanings which relieve them of their formalistic character Texts from the Vedas are often quoted in support of the teachings of the Upamsads
The thought of the Upamsads marks an advance on the ntuahstic doctrines of the Brahmanas, which are themselves different in spirit from the hymns of the Rg Veda A good deal of tune should have elapsed for this long development. The mass of the Rg Veda must also have takL time to produce!
X l ?T 3 ™ rStbkyah Ptnebhyah patM-krdbhyaf,
The Principal TJpanisads
especially when we remember that what has survived is probably a small part compared to what has been lost. 1
Whatever may be the truth about the racial affinities of the Indian and the European peoples, there is no doubt that Indo- European languages derive from a common source and illustrate a relationship of mind In its vocabulary and inflexions Sanskrit 1 presents a striking similarity to Greek and Latin Sir William Jones explained it by tracing them all to a common source 'The Sanskrit language,' he said m 1786, m an address to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, 'whatever be its antiquity, is of a wonderful structure, more perfect than the Greek, more copious than the Latin, and more exquisitely refined than either, yet bearing to both of them a stronger affinity, both in the roots of verbs, and m the forms of grammar, than could possibly have been produced by accident, so strong, indeed, that no philologer could examine them all without believing them to have sprung from some common source which perhaps no longer exists There is a similar reason, though not quite so forcible, for supposing that both the Gothic and the Celtic, though blended with a different idiom, had the same origin with the Sanskrit, and the old Persian might be added to the same family '
The oldest Indo-European literary monument is the Rg Veda 3 The word 'Veda,' from vid, to know, means knowledge
1 'We have no right to suppose that we have even a hundredth part of the religious and popular poetry that existed during the Vedic age ' Max Muller St* Systems of Indian Philosophy (1899), p 41
* samskrta perfectly constructed speech
3 'The Veda has a two-fold interest it belongs to the history of the world and to the history of India In the history of the world, the Veda fills a gap which no literary work in any other language could fill It carries us back to times of which we have no records anywhere, and gives us the very words of a generation of men, of whom otherwise we could form but the vaguest estimate by means of conjectures and inferences As long as man continues to take an interest in the history of his race and as long as we collect m libraries and museums the relics of former ages, the first place m that long row of books which contains the records of the Aryan branch of mankind will belong for ever to the Rg Veda ' Max Muller Ancient History of Sanskrit Literature (1859), p 63 The Rg Veda, according to Ragozin 'is, without the shadow of a doubt, the oldest book of the Aryan family of nations ' Vedic India (1895), P rl 4
Winternitz observes 'If we wish to learn to understand the beginnings of our own culture, if we wish to understand the oldest Indo-European
Introduction
par excellence, sacred wisdom Science is the knowledge of secondary causes, of the created details; wisdom is the know- ledge of primary causes, of the Uncreated Principle The Veda is not a single literary work like the Bhagavad-gM or a collection of a number of books compiled at some particular time as the Tn-pitaka of the Buddhists or the Bible of the Christians, but a whole literature which arose in the course of centuries and was handed down from generation to generation through oral transmission. When no books were available memory was strong and tradition exact. To impress on the people the need for preserving this literature, the Veda was declared to be sacred knowledge or divine revelation. Its sanctity arose spontaneously owing to its age and the nature and value of its contents. It has since become the standard of thought and feelmg for Indians
The name Veda signifying wisdom suggests a genuine spirit of inquiry. The road by which the Vedic sages travelled was the road of those who seek to inquire and understand. The questions they investigate are of a philosophical character. 'Who, verily, knows and who can here declare it, where it was born and whence comes this creation? The gods are later than this world's production Who knows, then, whence it first came into being?' 1 According to Sayana, Veda is the book which describes the transcendent means for the fulfilment of well- being and the avoidance of evils *
There are four Vedas. the Rg Veda which is mainly composed
culture, we must go to India, where the oldest literature of an Indo- European people is preserved For, whatever view we may adopt on the problem of the antiquity of Indian literature, we can safely say that the oldest monument of the literature of the Indians is at the same tune the oldest monument of Indo-European literature which possess ' A History of Indian Literature, E T. Vol. I (1927), p. 6 See alsoBloomfield: The Religion of the Veda (1908), p 17. He says that the JRg Veda is not only 'the most ancient hterary monument of India' but also 'the most ancient literary document of the Indo-European peoples' 'This literature is earlier than that of either Greece or Israel, and reveals a high level of civilisation among those who found m it the expression of thexr worship 'according to Dr Nicol Macnicol See his Hindi (Scriptures (1938), p Xrv r ' X rag
The Principal Upamsads
of songs of praise , the Yajur Veda, which deals with sacrificial formulas, the Soma Veda which refers to melodies, and the Atharva Veda, which has a large number of magic formulas Each contains four sections consisting of (1) Samhita or collec- tion of hymns, prayers, benedictions, sacrificial formulas and litanies, (n) Brahmanas or prose treatises discussing the significance of sacrificial rites and ceremonies, (in) Aranyakas or forest texts, which are partly included in the Brahmanas and partly reckoned as independent, and (iv) Upamsads
Veda denotes the whole literature made up of the two portions called Mantra and Brahmana 1 Mantra is derived by Yaska from manana, thinking s It is that by which the contemplation of God is attempted Brahmana deals with the elaboration of worship into ritual Parts of Brahmanas are called Aranyakas Those who continue their studies without marrying are called aranas or aranamanas They lived m hermitages or forests The forests where aranas (ascetics) live are aranyas Their speculations are contained in Aranyakas
Yaska refers to different interpretations of the Vedas by the ritualists (ydjmkas), the etymologists (nairuktas) and mytholo- gists (aiUhasikas) The Brhad-devatd which comes after Yaska's Ntrukta also refers to various schools of thought in regard to Vedic interpretations It mentions atma-vddms or those who relate the Vedas to the psychological processes
The Rg Veda, which comprises 1,017 hymns divided into ten books, represents the earliest phase m the evolution of religious consciousness where we have not so much the com- mandments of priests as the outpourings of poetic mmds who were struck by the immensity of the universe and the in- exhaustible mystery of life The reactions of simple yet unsophisti- cated minds to the wonder of existence are portrayed m these joyous hymns which attribute divinity to the striking aspects of nature We have worship of devas,3 deities like Surya (sun),
1 mantra-brahmanayor veia namadheyam Apastamba m Yajna-pan- bhas a
* Nmtkta VII 3 6
3 The devas are, according to Amara, the immortals, amarah, free from old age, mrjarah, the evershimng ones, devah, heavenly beings, tndaiSh. the knowing ones, vibudhah, and gods or deities, surah
Introduction
Soma (moon), Agni (fire), Dyaus (sky), Prthivi (earth), 1 Maruts (storm winds), Vayu (wind), Ap (water), Usas (dawn). Even deities whose names are no longer so transparent were originally related to natural phenomena such as Indra, Varuna, Mitra, Aditi, Visnu, Pusan, the two Asvms, Rudra and Parjanya Qualities which emphasise particular important aspects of natural phenomena attained sometimes to the rank of inde- pendent deities 1 Savitr, the inspirer or the hfe-giver, Vivasvat, the shining, were at first attributes and names of the Sun but later became independent Sun-gods Some of the deities wor- shipped by the different tribes were admitted into the Vedic pantheon Pusan, originally the Sun-god of a small shepherd tribe, becomes the protector of travellers, the god who knows all the paths. Some deities have their basis m abstract qualities such as sraddha, faith, vianyu, anger.3 We also come across Rbhus, or elves, Apsaras or nymphs, Gandharvas or forest or field spirits.4 Asm as who become the enemies of the gods in the later Vedic works retain in the JRg Veda the old meaning of 'possessors of wonderful power' or 'God' which the corre- sponding word Ahura has in the Avcsta 5
1 In Greek mythology Zeus as sky-father is m essential relation to earth mother See A B Cook Zeus (1914) I, p 779
' The ancient Greeks advanced the natural elements into cods by deifying their attributes Apollo shone in the sun Boreas howled in the &und«bolt laStS Ze " S threatened m the hgMnmg and struck in the
I ™ 6S £ J m r i n the latest h y mns of the tenth bo <* of *e He Veda 1 The Vedic Indians were not phallus worshippers Siina-dcvali (R V
«. * *** 5 ; 3 ' does not mean P h allus-worshippers YSska savs
afrahmacaryaUy arlhah Though it is a bahuvrihi compound inZ those whose deity is phallus, the word 'deva' is toW^a^T^ ™™^^,laksya rtha Jt means those ™ho L adSctS tosex life
*1t '^tS^tnS^f \ th \S™^™ of sex and stomach • mJl^^^^I^; ^ch « the ~ of the of Islam, flS^dwfc ^^^"^ The Mushms of Be™! tend tn^J? gW are not ^^ther effaced, are capabkfo la v^ S ^%°V^ ® urSn wluch
The. Principal Upam$ads
Varuna, a god common both to the Indians and the Iranians, regulates the course of the sun and the sequence of the seasons He keeps the world in order and is the embodiment of truth and order which are binding on mankind He protects moral laws and punishes the sinful The Vedic Indians approach Varuna in trembling and fear and m humble reverence and ask for forgiveness of sms 1 Indra, who is a long among the gods, occupying the position of Zeus in the Greek Olympus, is mvoked by those who are fighting and struggling Agni is the mediator between men and gods The hymns speak of him as a dear fnend, the master of the house, grha-pah He bears the sacrificial offerings to the gods and brings the gods down to
an ancient dynasty and a venerable religion, a change, apparently almost unparalleled in history, was in the course of a few years brought over the land Where for centuries the ancient hymns of the Avesta had been chanted and the sacred fire had burned, the cry of the Mu'ezzin sum- moning the faithful to prayer rang out from minarets reared on the ruins of the temples of Ahura Mazda The priests of Zoroaster fell by the sword, the ancient books perished in the flames, and soon none were left to represent a once mighty faith but a handful of exiles flying towards the shores of India and a despised and persecuted remnant in solitary Yezd and remote Kirman Yet, after all, the change was but skin deep and soon a host of heterodox sects born on Persian soil — Shi'ites, Sufis, Ismailis and philosophers arose to vindicate the claim of Aryan thought to be free and to transform the religion forced on the nation by Arab steel into something which, though still wearing a semblance of Islam, had a significance widely different from that which one may fairly suppose was intended by the Arabian prophet ' A Year amongst the Persians (1927), p 134
1 Varuna becomes Ahura Mazda (Ormuzd), the supreme God and Creator of the world In one of those conversations with Zoroaster which embody the revelation that was made to him, it is recorded, Ahura says, 'I maintain that sky there above, shining and seen afar and encompas- sing the earth all round It looks like a palace that stands built of a heavenly substance firmly established with ends that he afar, shining, m its body of ruby over the three worlds, it is like a garment inlaid with stars made of a heavenly substance that Mazda puts on * Yasht XIII Like Varuna, who is the lord of rta, Ahura is the lord of asa As Varuna is closely allied with Mtlra, so is Ahura with Mtlhra, the sun-god Avesta knows Verethragna who is Vrtrahan, the slayer of Vftra Dyaus, Apamnapat (Apam Napat), Ga-ndharva (Gandarewa), Krianu (Keresani), Vayu (Vayu), Yama, son of Vtvasvant (Yima, son of Vivanhvant) as well as Yajiia (Yasna), Hotr (Zaotar), Atharva priest (Athravan) These point to the common religion of the undivided Indo- Aryans and Iranians
In the later Avesta, the supreme God is the sole creator but his attri- butes of the good spirit, righteousness, power, piety, health and immor- tality become personified as 'the Immortal Holy Ones.'
Introduction
the sacrifice. He is the wise one, the chief priest, purohita, Mitra is the god of light. When the Persians first emerge into history, Mitra is the god of light who drives away darkness. He is the defender of truth and justice, the protector of righteous- ness, the mediator between Ahura Mazda and man 1
Mitra, Varuna and Agni are the three eyes of the great illuminator Sun. 1 Aditi is said to be space and air, mother, father and son She is all comprehending 3 Deities presiding over groups of natural phenomena became identified The vanous Sun-gods, Siirya, Savitr, Mitra and Visnu tended to be looked upon as one. Agni (Fire) is regarded as one deity with three forms, the sun or celestial fire, lightning or atmospheric fire and the earthly fire manifest in the altar and m the homes of men.
Again, when worship is accorded to any of the Vedic deities, we tend to make that deity, the supreme one, of whom all others are forms or manifestations He is given all the attributes of a monotheistic deity. As several deities are exalted to this first place, we get what has been called henotheism, as distinct from monotheism. There is, of course, a difference between a psycho- logical monotheism where one god fills the entire life of the worshipper and a metaphysical monotheism. Synthesising processes, classification of gods, simplification of the ideas of divine attributes and powers prepare for a metaphysical unity, the one principle informing all the deities.i The supreme
1 Mithraism is older than Christianity by centuries The two faiths •were in acute rivalry until the end of the third century a D The form of the Chnstian Eucharist is very like that of the followers of Milfaa s attain devdnam nd agad amkam caksur mihasya varunasyagnch SprS dyava prthivi antanksam siirya atma jagatas tasthusas ca
RV I 151 i
3 adtttr dyaur adtttr antanksam, adtttr mdta, sa pita, sa puirah vtive-deva adilih paiica-jana
adtttr jatant, adittr jamtvavi. RV I 89 10. For Anaximander, the boundless and undifferentiated substance which fills the universe and is the matrix m which our world is formed, is theos. * mahad devdnam asuratvam eham RV III 55 11. 'One fire burns in many ways- one sun illumines the universe, one divine dispels all darkness He alone has revealedhimself mallthesefonns.' eka evagntr bahudlia samiddha ekah suryo vi&vam ami prabhUtah ekaivosah sarvam tdam vibh&ty ekam vatdam vt babhuva sarvam R V VIII 58 2
The Principal Upam$ads
is one who pervades the whole universe He is gods and men. 1
The Vedic Indians were sufficiently logical to realise that the
attributes of creation and rulership of the world could be
granted only to one being We have such a being in Praja-pati,
the lord of creatures, Visva-karman, the world-maker Thus the
logic of religious faith asserts itself in favour of monotheism
This tendency is supported by the conception of rta or order.
The universe is an ordered whole; it is not disorderliness
(akosmia) * If the endless variety of the world suggests
numerous deities, the unity of the world suggests a unitary
conception of the Deity
If philosophy takes its rise in wonder, if the impulse to it
is m scepticism, we find the beginnings of doubt m the Rg
Veda It is said of Indra 'Of whom they ask, where is he' Of
him indeed they also say, he is not '3 In another remarkable
hymn, the priests are invited to offer a song of praise to Indra,
'a true one, if in truth he is, for many say, "There is no Indra,
who has ever seen him? To whom are we to direct the song
of praise ? " '4 When reflection reduced the deities who were
once so full of vigour to shadows, we pray for faith 'O Faith,
endow us with belief 's Cosmological thought wonders whether
speech and air were not to be regarded as the ultimate essence
of all things 6 In another hymn Pra]a-pati is praised as the
creator and preserver of the world and as the one god, but
the refrain occurs in verse after verse 'What god shall we
honour by means of sacnfice ? '7 Certainty is the source of
inertia m thought, while doubt makes for progress
Agni, kindled m many places, is but one, One the all-pervading Sun, One the Dawn, spreading her light over the earth All that exists is one, whence is produced the whole world
See also X 8i 3
1 yo nah pita jamia yo vidhata dhamam veda bhuvanam visva yo devanam namadha eka eva tarn samprasnam bhuvana yanty anya
J See Plato Gorgias 507 E
S II 12 4 VIII 100, 3 if 5 X. 151 5
* Germ of the world, the deities' vital spirit, This god moves ever as his will inclines him His voice is heard, his shape is ever viewless Let us adore this air with our oblation X 168 4
1 hasmai devaya havisa vidhemal X 121
Introduction
The most remarkable account of a superpersonal monism is to be found in the hymn of Creation 1 It seeks to explain the universe as evolving out of One. But the One is no longer a god like Indra or Varuna, Praja-pati or Viiva-karman. The hymn declares that all these gods are of late or of secondary origin. They know nothing of the beginning of things. The first principle, that one, tad ekam, is uncharacterisable. It is without qualities or attributes, even negative ones To apply to it any description is to limit and bind that which is limitless and boundless. 1 'That one breathed breathless. There was nothing else ' It is not a dead abstraction but indescribable perfection of being Before creation all this was darkness shrouded in darkness, an impenetrable void or abyss of waters,3 until through the power of tapasfi or the fervour of austerity, the One evolved into determinate self-conscious being. He becomes a creator by self-limitation. N thing outside himself can limit him. He only can limit himself. He does not depend on anything other than himself for his manifestation. This power of
1 X "9 i SeeBU ni 9 26
3 Cp Genesis I. 2, -where the Spurt of God is said to mo\ e on the face of the -waters, and the Puranic description of Visr.u as resting on the Serpent Infinite in the milky ocean. Homer's Iltad speaks of Oceanos as 'the source of all things' including even the gods 14, 246, 302 Manv others, North American Indians, Aztecs, etc , have such a belief
According to Anstotie, Thales considered that all things were made of water. The Greeks had a myth of Father-Ocean as the origin of all things
Cp Nrsimha-purua-tapanX D'.I 1. 0 '
apo va idam asan sahlam era, sa praja-paiir ehah pushara-barr.e samabhavat, tiuySntor manasi hSmah samavariata mam srjeyam iti
All this remained as water along (without any form). Only PraiS-aiti came to be in the lotas leaf. In his mind arose fie desrre, "lit me'crSte this (the world of names and forms)." create
Two explanations are offered for the presence of identical symbols used m an identical manner in different parts of the world \V. T PerrvandhS
S,^f^ at ^ myths »dj*a*°Is ™» derived orTSyS Egyptian culture which once spread over the world, Ieavin» behmd theS yestigeswhenitreceded This theory does not bear clcS e^Son^ .snot widely held The other expiration is that h2Stw much the same the world over, their minds are similarly consbS their experience of life under primitive condifaonsX^ SviT^ part of the world to another and it * not^SatSfS regarding the origin and nature of the world arSdlr^oSv
< /«M Orally means heat, creative heat by whTdTth J fhr^A 1, produces life from the egg ^ ctt tbe brood hen
B*
The Principal Upamsads
actuabsation is given the name of maya in later Vedanta, for the manifestation does not disturb the unity and integrity of the One The One becomes manifested by its own intrinsic power, by its iapas. The not-self is not independent of the self It is the avyakta or the unmamfested While it is dependent on the Supreme Self, it appears as external to the individual ego and is the source of its ignorance The waters represent the unformed non-being in which the divine lay concealed in darkness We have now the absolute in itself, the power of self-limitation, the emergence of the determinate self and the not-self, the waters, darkness, para-prakrti. The abyss is the not-self, the mere potentiality, the bare abstraction, the receptacle of all developments The self-conscious being gives it existence by impressing his forms or Ideas on it The unmamfested, the indeterminate receives determinations from the self-conscious Lord. It is not absolute nothing, for there is never a state in which it is not in some sense. 1 The whole world is formed by the union of being and not-being and the Supreme Lord has facing him this ^determination, this aspiration to existence 2 Rg Veda describes not-being (asaf) as ljrag 'with outstretched
» See Patngala U I 3
In the Puranas, this idea is variously developed Brahma Purana makes out that God first created the waters which are called nara and released his seed into them, therefore he is called Narayana The seed grew into a golden egg from which Brahma was horn of his own accord and so is called svayambhtt Brahma divided the egg into two halves, heai en and earth I 1 38 ff
The Brahmanda Purara says that Brahma, known as NSrayana, rested on the surface of the waters
Vidyaranya on MahanSrayana U. III. 16 says nara-ianranam upadara-riipai y anr.adi-paiica-bhfitant nara-iabdenocyante, le$u hhulesu yS Spa tnukhySh la ayanam adharo yasya visnoh so'yam itarayanah samudra-jala-iuy t
Cp apo nara tli proktd apo vat nara-siirtavah
ayaram tasya tah proktas Icr.a narayanas smrtah
The 1'tsru-dharn'oltara says that Visnu created the waters and the creation of the egg and Brahma, took place afterwards
1 Speaking of Boehme's mystic philosophy which influenced William Lau, Stephen Hobhouse writes that he beheies 'in the Ungmnd, the fathomless abyss of freedom or indifference, which is at the root, so to speak, of God and of all existences . the idea of the mighty but blind face of Desire that arises out of this abyss and by means of imagination shapes itself into a purposeful will which is the heart of the Divine personality ' Sel'cled Mystical Wnltrgs of Willtam l*w (1948}, p 307
Introduction 37
feet' like a woman in the throes of childbirth 1 As the first product of the divine mind, the mind's first fruit, came forth Mma, desire, the cosmic will, which is the primal source of all existence. In this hama, 'the wise searching m their hearts, have by contemplation (mismija), discovered the connection between the existent and the non-existent' s . The world is created by the personal self-conscious God who acts by his intelligence and will
This is how the Vedic seers understood in some measure how they and the whole creation arose. The writer of the hymn has the humility to admit that all this is a surmise, for it is not possible for us to be sure of things which lie so far beyond human knowledges
This hymn suggests the distinction between the Absolute Reality and Personal God, Brahman and Uvara, the Absolute beyond being and knowledge, the super-personal, super-essential godhead in its utter transcendence of all created beings and its categories and the Real manifested to man in terms of the highest categories of human experience. Personal Being is treated as a development or manifestation of the Absolute.
In another hymn/ the first existent being is called Praja-pati, facing the chaos of waters. He impregnates the waters and becomes manifest in them m the form of a golden egg or germ, from which the whole universe develops.5 He is called the one
1 I. io. 72.
» Kama becomes defined later as ice/ia, desire and knya, action It is the creative urge
Cp with Kama the Orphic god. Eros, also called Phanes, who is the pnnciple of generation by whom the whole world is created.
♦k!L*L * *v iS 3 2 ' where wnter "W **** he wh ° made all this does not probably know its real nature
•He, the first ongin of this creation, whether he formed it
all or did not form it. Whose eye controls this world in highest heaven He, venly, knows it, or perhaps he knows not ' 4 1 xo m X 129 7 ET by MaxMuller.
3R Tlx Principal Ufiav.iftt<te
life or soul of Hip n'"'*' (dfranaw aiitli) « Htranva-^athfsa is Htr first born clt'tcriniiintfi M-.tent whil" !itahnutn-l 'ivani , Absolute - God is in tlu» nuliu of thi it.iriM < iuh itl J 11k* u-otM is <it'l |« be a piojtrttim, < mission or » .\b*iit ligation of t li*- M'.il b inc of (iod, of tlx ctcrn.il ord< r wlmh t. ' l< m.illy }»:* ■■ nt in (h* divine wisdom
"J In- I'uniftt Sft/lif' npt.its m <ori(r<t< f>>im th> id< ,d of a pnmcv.il hi iiii{ f\istirij: In fore inv d< t< rmm.'tt i Mst« nci* ;mrl evolving hnnv If m the « nipmcd rmiv<r" Th* b-iiit; is fori-
nccorduif; to somt nrrmtnt , ft hunu'l \f rV - Iim* ff liro'"> , Thr vi\r, tliwdi (1 inln two InKr lb urn. nut t i'th sln< v'!_, tlr-ur'i ml 1'artli .in thr- l'Mlcr iwl \lnlh< r n( all lif' ttt p! ^ t> s! tr'in- tic tijij"-" Inlfoftht ' f*r» form* llii doiicnf tlcf t rip !■> • » r ronton t m'>' turr- or slum from wliuh tie ttrv I mil (I itthj ani <• V 'vcm ruth ni'd lienii ii npinirr ft n unii;rst puit »ml h'> !• > i> rti inv u ii.i-
ns Phnnt , ) % ro , ^tt-ti J ri< ij> \> n . r'i I tc Inn' <>t tl i -pot. jrt which sc t wis as \cl untlifli n nti iW, v i t'i |vnT.it«* lie ntlW bv tic immtiltntr piojiUion «>f •>..[ f«>nj it Mi nt In uniting tie- mirfcrrtl parents, Htist'ii mil 1" irih in m irri if IU> ui: prw/ r tr Mir. r -nr pursnf suproim f;i>ds On'mu-i.ui'l Ii tli\ ( iirriti"i»t*t<l Jth> i /n" fat\ Jltrji ' Can.bndfe tvtirnt tts'ten. IV (|<»2M. p st'>
Ati.iMinatidcr tlt-idnp. .1 ahrmr MtmUr to tic Hrpliii. cniino'np} (i) I here is ,-i priin.il iindiiiirtnti.-ttttl timu, (-•) \ "-pir.iii"-! «f opjw,.tr'. in pairs to form the v.nrUUirtl«r (\) \ n union of tip *<iunil«n I op^'Urt to generate life 'this form i« It r. statnl In t uripitl' (Mrianpp*. Fragment |8,|) ' J hi tile is not mint. I hitl it from mi niriihrr tint Hea\en and I .irth urn on< com form, and v ?i' n thf \ li itl l»c-n •■imdcn d from one another, ihe\ tnrth to all thmp .itwl h'tmcht t!i> m up into the liRhl '
' It is quite possibk that the S"nukh\a ^\ Um n oVvelnprtunt from the ideis stiKK^Ud in this !i\ inn Prmutui in tltt r (u.ntt rs) is sud to be tsistent indipendentK and frutu^t fir->i conn . into dr-tennm-ite conscioiisiiess in jntellijjince [tntl.at or fmlilli), which is .1 pnyluct of matter (aiyaftla)
5 ho dadar<a pralhamnn. jSyamiirtm asll tin ar'atr 3 .!</ anaslhS bibharti bhiimya asittstgutnta /.nt sul ho t sdi Hiiii'int up'ifi'il ptattumetat RV 1 i0( }
This distinction which becomes esfibhshul in the IJpiiunrts has its parallels in other historical dc\elopments Cp tin three Bodies of the Buddha, Dhatmahaya or the Absolute Htnlitj. Sambhogakfoa, the personal God or the Logos and NtttnSnahuya or" the historical embodi- ment of the I ogos in a niatcnal body born into the world at n given moment of lime See I P Vol I, pp 507-9 I he Sulis regard Al Haqq as the Absolute Reality, the abyss of godhead, Allah as the personal Lord, and Muhammad the prophet as the historical embodiment 3 R V X 90.
Introduction 39
ceived as a cosmic person with a thousand heads, eyes and feet, who filled the whole universe and extended beyond it, by the length of ten fingers, 1 the universe being constituted by a fourth of his nature 1 The world form is not a complete expres- sion or manifestation of the divine Reality, It is only a fragment of the divine that is manifested in the cosmic process The World-soul is a partial expression of the Supreme Lord.
Creation is interpreted in the Vedas as development rather than the bringing into being something not hitherto existent. The first principle is manifested m the whole world. Pttntm by his sacrifice becomes the whole world. This view prepares for the development of the doctrine which is emphasised in the Upanisads that the spirit m man is one with the spirit which is the pmts of the world
Within this world we have the one positive principle of being and yet have varying degrees of existence marked by varying degrees of penetration or participation of nonentity by divine being God as Hn avya-garbha is nothing of the already made. He is not an ineffective God who sums up m himself all that is given
Rg Veda used two different concepts, generation and birth, and something artificially produced to account for creation Heaven and earth are the parents of the gods; or the Creator of the world is a smith or a carpenter.
Again 'In the beginning was the golden germ From his birth he was sole lord of creation. He made firm the earth and this bright sky;'3
In this hymn Pra ]a -pati, the lord of offspring, assumes the name of Hiravya-garbJia, the golden germ, and m the Atharva Veda and later literature Hiranya-garbha himself becomes a supreme deity 4 The Rg Veda is fatmhar with the four-fold distinction of (i) the Absolute, the One, beyond all dualities and
» sa bhumim mhato vrlvd aty atisthad daiangulam I 4 « S Z a mivS bhm ™ tnpadasyamrlam dim.
3 -K V X 121 I
The Principal Upamsads
distinctions, (h) the self-conscious Subject confronting the object, (m) the World-soul, and (iv) the world 1
The monistic emphasis led the Vedic thinkers to look upon the Vedic deities as different names of the One Universal Godhead, each representing some essential power of the divine being ' They call him Indra, Mitra, Varuna, Agm He is the heavenly bird Garutmat To what is one, the poets give many a name They call it Agm, Yama, Matansva '» The real that lies behind the tide of temporal change is one, though we speak of it m many ways Agm, Yama, etc , are symbols They are not gods m themselves They express different qualities of the object worshipped. The Vedic seers were not conscious of any iconoclastic mission They did not feel called upon to denounce
* This list finds a parallel, as we shall see, in the hierarchy of being given in the Ma U with its four grades of consciousness, the waking or the perceptual, the dreaming or the imaginative, the self in deep sleep or the conceptual, the turiya or the transcendent, spiritual consciousness which is not so much a grade of consciousness as the total consciousness
Plato m the Ttmaeus teaches that the Supreme Deity, the Demi-urge, creates a universal World-Soul, through which the universe becomes an organism The World-Soul bears the image of the Ideas, and the world- body is fashioned m the same pattern If the whole world has not been ordered as God would have desired, it is due to the necessity which seems to reside in an intractable material, which was in 'disorderly motion' before the Creator imposed form on it
* I 164 46 ekamsantambahudhakalpayanh EV X 114 4 See B G X 41
Zeus is the supreme ruler of gods and men , other gods exist to do his bidding
Cp Cicero 'God being present everywhere m Nature, can be regarded in the field as Ceres; or on the sea as Neptune, and elsewhere in a variety of forms in all of which He may be worshipped De Nature Deorum
For Plutarch and Maximus of Tyre, the different gods worshipped m the third century Roman Empire were symbolic representations of a Supreme God who is unknowable m his inmost nature
"God himself, the father and fashioner of all is unnameable by any lawgiver, unutterable by any voice, not to be seen by any eye But if a Greek is stirred to the remembrance of God by the art of Phidias, an Egyptian by paying worship to animals, another man by a river, another by fire, I have no anger for their divergence, only let them know, let them love, let them remember '
In the Taitiiriya Samhtta and Saiapalha Brahmana, it is said that Praja-pati assumed certain forms of fish (matsya), tortoise (kiirma) and boar (varaha) for the attainment of certain ends When the doctrine of avataras, incarnations, becomes established, these three become the incarnations of Visnu
Introduction
4i
the worship of the various deities as disastrous error or mortal sin They led the worshippers of the many deities to the worship of the one and only God by a process of reintcrpretation and reconciliation
The reaction of the local cults on the Vedic faith is one of the many causes of variety of the Vedic pantheon. People in an early stage of culture are so entirely steeped in the awe and reverence which have descended to them that they cannot easily or heartily adopt a new pattern of worship. Even when militant religions fell the tall trees of the forest, the ancient beliefs remain as an undergrowth. The catholic spirit of Hinduism which we find m the Rg Veda has always been ready to give shelter to foreign beliefs and assimilate them in its own fashion. While prefemng their own, the Vedic Indians had the strength to comprehend other peoples' ways.
There is no suggestion in the Rg Veda of the illusory character of the empirical world We find varied accounts of creation. The Supreme is compared to a carpenter or a smith who fashions or smelts the world into being Sometimes he is said to beget all beings He pervades all things as air or ether (akdsa) pervades the universe. He animates the world as the life-breath tyrana) animates the human body, a comparison which has been developed with remarkable ingenuity by Ramanuja.
Rg Veda raises the question of the nature of the human self, ko nu atma 1 It is the controller of the body, the unborn part, ajo bhagah 1 , which survives death. It is distinguished from the fiva or the individual souD The famous verse of the two birds dwelling in one body, which is taken up by the Upanisads,4 distinguishes the individual soul which enjoys the fruits of actions from the spirit which is merely a passive spectators This distinction between the individual soul and the supreme self is relevant to the cosmic process and is not applicable to the supreme supra-cosmic transcendence. Those who think that the distinction is to be found in the Supreme Transcendence
> I 164 4 » x. 16. 4.
< SeeM.U III 1 i.SU. IV 6.
5 I 164 17 atra laukika-pahsa-dvaya-drsfantena liva-paramalmanau stuyele Sayana
The Principal Upam§ads
do not know their own origin, pitaram na veda 1 The individual souls belong to the world of Hiranya-garbha
'Let this mortal clay (self) be the immortal god '- 'Vouchsafe, 0 Indra, that we may be you '3 One can become a devata, a deity, by one's own deeds 4 The arm of the Rg Veda is to become like gods The individual soul can become the Universal Spirit
The way to spiritual attainment is through worships and moral life Vestiges of Yoga discipline are found in a late passage 5 which describes the kesins or the long-haired ascetics with their yogic powers that enabled them to move at will in space Of a mum, it is said that his mortal body men see but he himself fares on the path of the faery spirits His hair is long and his soiled garments are of yellow hue Vamadeva when he felt the unity of all created things with his own self exclaimed 'I am Manu, I am Swya '7 So also King Trasadasyu said that he was Indra and the great Varuna 8
The cardinal virtues are emphasised 'O Mitra and Varuna, by your pathway of truth may we cross '9 Mere memorising of the hymns is of no avail if we do not know the Supreme which sustains all 10
Primitive societies are highly complicated structures,
1 yasmm vrkse madhvadah suparna tiwihanie suvate cadhi viive tasyed iihuh pippalam khadv agre tan nonnaiad yah pitaram na veda
RV I 164 az
* RV VIII 19 25
3 tvc mdtapy abhuma vipia dlnyam vawina rtaya sapamtah. RV II n 12
^ BU IV 3 32, see also IV 1 2 devo bhiiwa devan apyett, see also TU II 8
5 The solitary reference to a temple ismKV X 107 10 where the \sord dcva-mana, building of a god, occurs
6 RV X 136 See also Altai eya Brahmana VII 13
7 aham manur abhavam sfttyai caham R V IV 26 1
8 aham lajd varuno RV IV 42 2
9 xtasya pathii vam tatcma VII 65 3
"> tco ahsarc parame vyoman yasmm devil adhi uisuc mscduh yas tarn na veda kirn kamyati ya it tad vidus ta wie samiisatc
SceSU IV 8
Inlroduclioii
balanced social organisations w ith their systems of belief and codes of behaviour. The fundamental needs of society are the moral and the spiritual, the military and the economic. In Indo-European society these three functions are assigned to three different groups, the men of learning and virtue, the men of courage and fight, and the men who provide the economic needs, 1 the Brahmana, the Ksitnya and the Vai£ya. Below them were the Sudras de\ oted to sen ice. These distinctions are found in the Rg Veda, though they are not crystallised into castes. Ancient Iranian society was constituted on a similar pattern
Even the gods were classified into the Brahmana, the IOatnya and the Vaisya according to the benefits which they provide, moral, military or economic Our prayers are for righteousness, victory and abundance Siirya, Savitr are gods who confer spiritual benefits. Indra is a war god and A£vms give us health and food. In Roman mythology Jupiter provides spiritual benefits, Mars is the god of war and Quinnus is the god of plenty.
Piiatas or fathers or ancestral spirits receive divine worship. The king of the ancestral spirits who rules m the kingdom of the deceased is Yama, a god who belongs to the Indo-Iraman period He is identical with Yima of the Avcsta, who is the first human being, the primeval ancestor of the human race As the first one to depart from this world and enter the realm of the dead, he became its king The kingdom of the dead is in heaven, and the dying man is comforted by the belief that after death he will abide with King Yama in the highest heaven The world of heaven is the place of refuge of the departed * In the funeral hymn,3 the departing soul is asked to 'go forth along the ancient pathway by which our ancestors have departed' The Vedic Heaven is desenbed in glowing terms 'where inexhaustible radiance dwells, where dwells the King Vaivasvata '3
There is no reference to rebirth in the Rg Veda, though its elements are found The jpassage of the soul from the body, its dwelling m other forms of existence, its return to human
1 Luther felt that three classes were ordained by God, the teaching ciass the class of defenders and the working class.
3 RV x *4 3 R.V.IX 113
The Principal Upamsads
form, the determination of future existence by the principle of Karma are all mentioned Mitra is born again 1 The Dawn (Usas) is bom again and again* 'I seek neither release nor return 's 'The immortal self will be reborn m a new body due to its meritorious deeds '« Sometimes the departed spirit is asked to go to the plants and 'stay there with bodies '5 There is retribution for good and evil deeds in a life after death Good men go to heaven 6 and others to the world presided over by Yama 7 Their work (dharma) decided their future 8
In the Rg Veda we find the first adventures of the human mind made by those who sought to discover the meaning of existence and man's place in life, 'the first word spoken by the Aryan man '9
Sacred knowledge is irayl vidyd It is three-fold, being the knowledge of the Rg, the Yajur and the Soma Vedas The two latter use the hymns of the Rg and the Athana Vcdas and arrange them for purposes of ntual The aim of the Yajur Veda is the correct performance of the sacrifice to which is attributed the "whole control of the universe Deities are of less importance than the mechanism of the sacrifice In the Aiharca Veda the position of the deities is still less important A certain aversion to the recognition of the Atharva Veda as a part of the sacred canon is to be noticed Even the old Buddhist texts speak of learned Brahrnanas versed in the three Vedas 10
1 mitro jayate punah X 85 19
- punah ptmar jayamana I 92 10
3 na asyah lasmi vimucam na avriam punah V 46 1 * jivo mrtasya caratt svadhabhir amartyo marlyena sa yomh
I 164 30, see also I 164 38
sKV X 16 3
* I 154 5 1 X 14 2 8 X 16 3
5 Max Muller For further information on the R V. see I P Vol I, Ch n
10 Sulta Ktpata 1019
Introduction
Though we meet in the Atharva Veda many of the gods of the Rg Veda, their characters are not so distinct. The sun becomes rohita, the ruddy one. A few gods arc exalted to the position of Prajl-pati, Dhatr (Established, Vidhultr (arranger). Paramesthin (he that is in the highest). In a notable passage the Supreme in the form of Varuna is described as the universal, omnipresent witness. 1 There are references to kala or time as the first cause of all existence, kama or desire as the force behind the evolution of the universe, skambha or support who is conceived as the principle on which everything rests. Theories tracing the world to water or to air as the most subtle of the physical elements are to be met with.
The religion of the Atharva Veda reflects the popular belief m numberless spirits and ghosts credited with functions con- nected in various ways with the processes of nature and the life of man.* We see in it strong evidence of the vitality of the pre-Vedic animist religion and its fusion with Vedic beliefs. All objects and creatures are either spirits or are animated by spirits While the gods of the Rg Veda are mostly friendly ones we find in the Atharva Veda dark and demoniacal powers which bring disease and misfortune on mankind We have to win them by flattering petitions and magical rites We come across spells and incantations for gaining worldly ends. The Vedic seer was loth to let the oldest elements disappear without trace. Traces of the influence of the Atharva Veda are to be found in the Upanisads There are spells for the healing of diseases, bhai$ajyani, for life and healing ayusyani suktani. These were the beginnings of the medical science 3
The liberated soul is described as 'free from desire, wise, immortal, self-born . . . not deficient in any respect . . . wise, unageing, young M
\ f"?^ samnistdhya yau mantmyete raja tad veda varunah trtlyalj.
3 U. VI 4 we read of devices for securing the love of iestructaon of the lover of a wife See also K U. • X. 8 44,
a woman or
The Pnnctpal Upamwds
The elements of the ritualistic cult found m the Vedas are developed in the Brahmanas into an elaborate system of ceremonies While in the Hg Veda the sacrifices are a means for the propitiation of the gods, in the Brahmanas they become ends in themselves Even the gods are said to owe their position to sacrifices There are many stones of the conflict between devas and asuras for world power [and of the way m which gods won through the power of the sacrifice 1
It is not the mechanical performance of a sacrificial rite that brings about the desired result, but the knowledge of its real meaning Many of the Brahmana texts are devoted to the exposition of the mystic significance of the various elements of the ntual By means of the sacrifices we 'set m motion' the cosmic forces dealt with and get from them the de- sired results The pnests who knew the details of the aim, meaning and performance of the sacrifice came into great prominence Gods became negligible intermediaries If we perform a rite with knowledge, the expected benefit will result Soon the actual performance of the rite becomes unnecessary Ritualistic religion becomes subordinate to knowledge 2
The Brahmanas are convinced that life on earth is, on the whole, a good thing The ideal for man is to live the full term of his life on earth As he must die, the sacrifice helps him to get to the world of heaven
While the Vedic poets hoped for a life m heaven after death, there was uneasmess about the interference of death in a future life The fear of re-dea.tti,punar-mriyu becomes prominent in the Brahmanas Along with the fear of re-death arose the belief of the imperishability of the self or the atman, the
« Hatha Samhita XXII. 9, Tailhrlya Samhita V 3 3, Tandya Brahmana XVIII 1 z
» See Franklin Edgerton 'The Upanisads What do they seek and Why'' Journal of the American Oriental Society, June, 1929
Inltoduclion
essential part of man's being. Death is not the end but only causes new existences which may not be better than the present one Under the influence of popular animism which sees souls similar to the human in all pares of nature, future life was brought down to earth. According to the Satapallta Biahmana, a man has three births, the fir^t whicn he gets from his parents, the second through sacrificial ceremonies and the third which he obtains after death and cremation 1
The /hanyakas do not give us rules for the performance of sacrifices and explanations of ceremonies, but provide us with the mystic teaching of the sacrificial religion As a matter of fact, some of the oldest Upam^ds are included in the Aranyaka texts, 5 which arc meant for the study of those who are engaged in the vow of forest life, the Vanaprasthas 3 As those who retire to the forests arc not like the house- holders bound to the ritual, the Aranyakas deal with the meaning and interpretation of the sacrificial cere- monies It is possible that certain sacred rites were per- formed m the seclusion of the forests where teachers and pupils meditated on the significance of these rites The
iav V* mi £ lm,,<> ;a>' n 'f. dan nit eta matus ca adhi ptluS ca agre ath I yam W]" ah upanamah sa yad yajalc, (ad dmtlyam jayale; , ' , J. m py' a ^ yatramam agnav abhyadadhati sa yat talas sambhavah, toUrhya m3 ayatc XI 2 i i See IP Vol I, Ch III A,£.. if ! ncluded m the Aitateya Aranyaka which is tacked on to «H? a i"l™ a KU and TU belon S t0 tbe Brahmanas o£ the wCh IF' 3 * B y 1S found at the end of the Satapmha Brahmana C U of Sffm* v% r} sectlon 1S an Aranyaka belongs to a Brahmana of the BrsL jff T -l\ ( Talav «te™ U ) belongs to the Jaimimya Upamsad BfoT v belongs to the Wfate Yajur Veda, Hatha and S U to the Mali* y g ur ?eda, MU and Praim belong to the Aiharva Veda post -Bnffi? attr ? buted to a school of Black Yajur Veda, is perhaps 3 S ]Udged by Its lan g" a S e . style and contents P
4$ The Principal Uj>anisads
distinction of Brahmana and Aranyaka is not an absolute one.
THE UPA2aSADS
The Aranyakas 1 shade off impeiceptTbfy into the Upanisads even as the Brahman as shade off into the Aranyakas. While the student tyrahnacariii) reads the hymns, the house- holder (grliasfha) attends to the Brahmanas which speak of the daily duties and sacrificial ceremonies, the hermit, the man of the forest (pdnaprasthd), discusses the Aranyakas, the monk who has renounced worldly attachment (samiyasin), studies the Upanisads, which specialise in philosophical speculations.
The great teachers of the past did not claim any credit for themselves, but maintained that they only transmitted the wisdom of the ancients. 2 The philosophical tendencies implicit in the Yedic hymns are developed in the Upanisads.
Hymns to gods and goddesses are replaced by a search for the reality underlying the fmx of things. *What is that which, being known, everything else becomes known?'3 Kena Upamsad gives the story of the discomfiture of the gods who found out the truth that it is the power of Brahman which sustains the gods of fire, air, etc 4 YThile the poets of the Veda speak to us of the many into which the radiance of the Supreme has split, the philosophers of the Upanisads speak to us of the One Reality behind and beyond the fiux of the world. The Vedic deities are the messengers of the One Light which has
* AiiWjZ Arsr-jS's (III. I. I.} bsgfcis -with the H3e 'The Upanisadof t'rt Samhiis; a'.hSias szri h-iay a up3ri:afs^saisoSair?hy ay ana Aranyaka
5 Cp. Confcdus: 'I am not bom endorsed -Kith knowledge I am a man ■vrho loves the ancients ssd has made every effort to acqnire their learning.* L r tr. yj, VH. io.
i M.tT. I i 3;seeElsoT.U. II. S.
* See also 3 U. HI. <j i-io
Introduction 49
burst forth into the universal creation. They serve to mediate between pure thought and the intelligence of the dwellers in the world of sense
When we pass from the Vcdic hymns to the Upanisads we find that the interest shifts from the objective to the subjective, from the brooding on the wonder of the outside world to the meditation on the significance of the self The human self contains the clue to the interpretation of nature. The Real at the heart of the universe is reflected in the infinite depths of the soul. The Upanisads give m some detail the path of the inner ascent, the inward journey b)' which the individual souls get at the Ultimate Reality. Truth is within us. The different Vedic gods are envisaged subjectively 'Making the Man {purusa) their mortal house the gods indwelt him ' l 'All these gods are m me 'He is, indeed, initiated, whose gods within him are initiated, mind by Mind, voice by Voice '3 The operation of the gods becomes an epiphany 'This Brahma, verily, shines when one sees with the eye and likewise dies when one does not see '< The deities seem to be not different from Plato's Ideas or Eternal Reasons.
In the Upanisads we find a criticism of the empty and barren ritualistic religion s Sacrifices were relegated to an inferior position They do not lead to final liberation, they take one to the world of the Fathers from which one has to return to earth again in due course « When all things are God's, there is no point m offering to him anything, except one's will, one's self The sacrifices are interpreted ethically. The three periods of life supersede the three Soma offerings 7 Sacrifices become self- denying acts like ptmisa-mcdha and sarm-vtedha which enjoin abandonment of all possessions and renunciation of the world. For example, the Brhad-aranydka Upamsad opens with an account of the horse sacrifice {aioa-medlta) and interprets it as a meditative act m which the individual offers up the
' Atharva Veda XI 8 18
8 Jaiminiya Vpamsad Brahmana I 14 2
* KausitahiBrBhnanaVll 4
* KU II 12 and 13
« an t 1 2 V £5 X • B U. HI 9 6, ax , C U I 10-12, IV. 1-3. 'CU III ' I g' 2 l6 ' CU V 10 3> PnSml 95 M U.I. 2 10.
5o
The Principal Upamsads
whole universe in place of the horse, and by the renuncia- tion of the world attains spiritual autonomy in place of earthly sovereignty 1 In every Jtoma the expression svaha is used which implies the renunciation of the ego, svaiva- haiiana -
There is great stress on the distinction between the ignorant, narrow, selfish way which leads to transitory satisfac- tions and the way which leads to eternal life Yajfia is Karma, work 3 It is work done for the improvement of the soul and the good of the world, atmonmtaye jagaddhttaya Samkhyaycma Brahmana of the Rg Veda says that the self is the sacrifice and the human soul is the sacnficer, purnso vai yajiiah, atma yajamdnah The observance of the Vedic ritual prepares the mind for final release, if it is in the right spirit <
Prayer and sacrifice are means to philosophy and spiritual life While true sacrifice is the abandonment of one's ego, prayer is the exploration of reality by entering the beyond that is within, by ascension of consciousness It is not theoretical learnings We must see the eternal, the celestial, the still If it is unknowable and incomprehensible, it is yet realisable by self-disciphne and integral insight We can seize the truth not
1 Devi Bhagavata says that the Supreme took the form of the Buddha in order to put a stop to wrong sacrifices and prevent injury to animals dttsia-yajiia-vtghdtaya pasu-himsa ntvrilaye bauddha-rupam dadhau yo'stm tasmat devaya te namah Animal sacrifices are found in the Vedas (inserted) by the twice-born who are given to pleasures and relishing tastes Non-injury is, venly, the highest truth
dvijair bhoga-ratair vede dariitam himsanam paioh jihva-svada-patath kamam ahimsaiva para mala s Yaska explains it thus sit aha lit va, sva vag Slieti va, svam p>aheit va, svahutam havir juholi tti va Ktrukta VIII 21 3 Cp B G III 9, 10
Manu says 'Learning is brahma-yajna, service of elders is pilr-yajna, honouring great and learned people is deva-yajna, performing religious acts and chanty is bhuta-yajiia and entertaining guests is nara-yajiia ' adhyapanam biahma-yajHaJi pilr-yajiias ttt tarpanam homo datvo bahr bhauto nr-yajiio alithi-pRjanam * Laugaksi Bhaskara points out at the end of the Arlha-samgraha, so'yant dkarniah yad uddisya vthilah lad-uddesena knyamanah tad-hetuh, isvararpana-bitddhja knyamanas lit mhsreyasa-heiuh s CU VII 1 2 3
Juiioduclioit
by logical thinking, but by the energy of our whole inner being. Prayer stalls with faith, with complete trust in the Being to whom appeal is made, with the feeling of a profound need, and a simple faith that God can giant us benefits and is well disposed towards us When we attain the blinding experience of the spiritual light, we feel compelled to proclaim a new law for the world
The Upanisad seers arc not bound by the rules of caste, but extend the law of spiritual univcrsalism to the utmost bounds of human existence The story of Satyakama Jabala, who, though unable to give his father's name, was yet initiated into spiritual life, shows that the Upanfcad wnters appeal from the rigid ordinances of custom to those divine and spiritual laws which are not of today or of yesterday, but live for ever and of their origin knoweth no man The words tat fvam asi are so familiar that they slide off our minds without full compre- hension.
The goal is not a heavenly state of bliss or rebirth in a better world, but freedom from the objective, cosmic law of karma and identity with the Supreme Consciousness and Freedom The Vedic paradise, svaiga, becomes a stage in the individual's growth 1
The Upamsads generally mention the Vedas with respect and their study is enjoined as an important duty 1 Certain verses from the Vedas such as the gayabi form the subject of meditations* and sometimes verses from the Vedas are quoted «i support of the teaching of the Upamsads 4 While the Upamsads use the Vedas, their teaching is dependent on the personal experience and testimony of teachers like Yajnavalkya, bandilya The authority of the Vedas is, to no small extent, due to the inclusion of the Upamsads m them
It is often stated that Vedic knowledge by itself will not do. In the Chandogya Upamsad.i Svetaketu admits that he has s JcfJ he sv ^ a off ered as a reward for ceremonial conformity is only a B%«rateXI gr< ™ th ° f thC human SOu1, saUva S wt ° da y«
bJth r ™?h h ° panuad ** efines " var S a a s sat-samsarga Heaven and Hell are tum tne cosmic process atrmvavamkassvargah Bhagavata III. 30 29 5 vi ^ 4 32 ' 1 9- 3 BU VI. 3 6. 4 BU I 3 10
The Principal Upanisads
studied all the Vedas but is lacking in the knowledge 'whereby what has not been heard of becomes heard of, what has not been thought of becomes thought of, what has not been under- stood becomes understood ' Narada tells Sanatkumara that he has not the knowledge of the Self though he has covered the entire range of knowledge, from the Vedas to snake-charming 1
ULTIMATE REALITY- BRAHMAN
To the pioneers of the Upanisads, the problem to be solved presented itself in the form, what is the world rooted m ? What is that by reaching which we grasp the many objects perceived in the world around us' They assume, as many philosophers do, that the world of multiplicity is, in fact, reducible to one single, primary reality which reveals itself to our senses m different forms This reality is hidden from senses but is discernible to the reason The Upanisads raise the question, what is that reality which remains identical and persists through change'
The word used in the Upanisads to indicate the supreme
reality is brahman It is derived from the root brh 'to grow,
to burst forth ' The derivation suggests gushing forth, bubbling
over, ceaseless growth, brhattvam Samkara derives the word
'brahman' from the root brlialt to exceed, ahiayana and means
by it eternity, punty For Madhva, brahman is the person in
whom the qualities dwell in fullness, brhanto hy asmtn gunah
The real is not a pale abstraction, but is quickemngly alive, of
powerful vitality. In the Rg Veda, brahman is used in the
sense of 'sacred knowledge or utterance, a hymn or incantation,'
the concrete expression of spiritual wisdom Sometimes Vac
is personified as the One. 1 Vtsva-karman, the All-Maker is said
to be the lord of the holy utterance 3 Brahman is manira or
prayer. Gradually it acquired the meaning of power or potency
of prayer, It has a mysterious power and contains within
itself the essence of the thing denoted Brhaspati, Brahmanas-
pati are interpreted as the lord of prayer.
' VII i fi » KV X 125, Aeharva Veda TV 30
Introduction 53
In the Brahmanas, brahman denotes the ritual and so is regarded as omnipotent. He who knows brahman knows and controls the universe. Brahman becomes the primal principle and guiding spirit of the universe 'There is nothing more ancient or brighter than this brahman
In later thought, biahman meant wisdom or Veda As divine origin was ascribed to the Veda or brahman, the two words were used with the same meaning. Biahman or sacred know- ledge came to be called the first created thing, brahma pratha- majam and even to be treated as the creative principle, the cause of all existence.
The word suggests a fundamental kinship between the aspiring spirit of man and the spirit of the universe which it seeks to attain The wish to know the Real implies that we know it to some extent. If we do not know anything about it, we cannot even say that it is and that we wish to know it If we know the Real, it is because the Real knows itself in us The desire for God, the feeling that we are in a state of exile, implies the reality of God in us All spiritual progress is the growth of half-knowledge into clear illumination. Religious experience is the evidence for the Divine In our inspired moments we have the feeling that there is a greater reality within us, though we cannot tell what it is From the movements that stir in us and the utterances that issue from us, we perceive the power, not ourselves, that moves us Religious experience is by no means subjective God cannot be known or experienced except through his own act If we have a knowledge of Brahman, it is due to the working of Brahman m us a Prayer is the witness to the spirit of the transcendent divine immanent in the spirit of man. The thinkers of the Upanisads based the reality of Brahman on the fact of spiritual experience, ranging from simple prayer to lUummated experience The distinctions which they make in the nature of the Supreme Reality are not merely logical, iney are facts of spiritual experience
I ^ ata pathaBrahnanaX 3 5. 11 find T P h» St Anse *?- 'I cannot seek Thee except Thou teach me, nor rXed TV, 6 ** 61 ? Thou reveal Thyself, Rwni 'Was it not I who sum- naml ? ,, Ion & servlce - was lt: not I wh o m ade Thee busy with my name? Thy calling "Allah" was my "Here am I".' y
The Principal ZJ-pamsais
The thinkers of the Upanisads attempt to establish the reality of God from an analysis of the facts of nature and the facts of inner life
'Who knows and who can declare what pathway leads
to the gods' Seen are their lowest dwelling-places only, What pathway leads to the highest, most secret
regions'' 1
The Upanisads assume that it is a distorted habit of mind which identifies 'the highest, most secret regions' with the 'lowest dwelling-places ' The Real is not the actual The Upanisads ask, ''What is the tajjalan from which all things spring, into which they are resolved and in which they live and have their being 2
The Brhad-araiiyaka Upanisad maintains that the ultimate reality is being, san-matram hi brahma Since nothing is without reason there must be a reason why something exists rather than nothing There is something, there is not nothing The world is not self-caused, self-dependent, self-mamtaimng All philo- sophical investigation presupposes the reality of being, asti- tva-nislha 3 The theologian accepts the first principle of being as an absolute one, the philosopher comes to it by a process of mediation By logically demonstrating the impossibility of not-being in and by itself, he asserts the necessity of being Being denotes pure affirmation to the exclusion of every possible negation It expresses simultaneously God's consciousness of himself and his own absolute self-absorbed being We cannot live a rational life without assuming the reality of being Not- being is sometimes said to be the first principle * It is not absolute non-being but only relative non-being, as compared with later concrete existence
> RV III 54 CU III 14 i.scealsoTU III i,SU I i
3 Cp 'I hen God said to Moses "I am that I Am" ' Exodus III 14 1 here is a familiar distinction between nastilia and Bslilta The jieTy/t/ifi thinks that nothing exists except what we sec, feel, touch and measure The tlslifra is one who holds with R V X 31 8 naxtavad enu paro anyad astt, there is not merely this but there is also a transcendent other
« rU II 7.CU III 19 t-3
Introduction
Even as the nyagrodha tree is made of the subtle essence which \vc do not perceive, so is this world made of the infinite Brahman 1 'It is at the command of that Imperishable that the sun and the moon stand bound in their places It is at the command of that Imperishable that the heaven and the earth stand each m its own place It is at the command of that Imperishable that the very moments, the hours, the days, the nights, the half-months, the months, the seasons and the years have their appointed function in the scheme of things It is at the command of that Imperishable that some nvers flow to the cast from the snow-clad mountains while others flow to the west '* When Balaki defines Brahman as the person in the sun {adUyc put and successively as the person m the moon, in lightning, in ether, m wind, in fire, m the waters, also as the person m the mind, m the shadow, in echo and in the body, King Ajatasatru asks, 'Is that all?' When Balaki con- fesses that he can go no farther, the king says, 'He who is the maker of all these persons, he, verily, should be known ' Brahman is satyasya satyam, the Reality of the real, the source of all existing things J
In some cosmological speculations the mysterious principle of reality is equated with certain naturalistic elements Water is said to be the source of all things whatsoever 4 From it came satya, the concrete existent Others like Raikva look upon air as the final absorbent of all things whatsoever, including fire and water 5 The Hatha Upantsad tells us that fire, having entered the universe, assumes all forms. 6 The Chandogya Upani- sad, however, makes out that fire is the first to evolve from the Primaeval Being and from fire came water and from water the earth At the time of dissolution, the earth is dissolved in water, and water in fire and fire in the Primaeval Being 7 Akaia, ether, space, is sometimes viewed as the first principle
In regard to the development of the universe, tne Upanisads
' CU VI 12 For the usage of the world as a tree, seeR V I 164 20,
i t? 0 5 ' 43 r
that +1P J? 1 8 9 Au § ustul e m his Conjcssions expresses the thought n» f. 7?1 gs ot the world declare through their visible appearance j ^ttatttey are created XI 4 5 ° y II 1 i B.U V = t
' VI g. 4
< B.U V 5 1 5 C U IV 3 1-2 « II 5
The Principal Upam$ads
look upon the earliest state of the material world as one of extension m space, of which the characteristic feature is vibration represented to us by the phenomenon of sound From akaia, vayit, air arises Vibration by itself cannot create forms unless it meets with obstruction The interaction of vibrations is possible in air which is the next modification To sustain the different forces, a third modification arises, icjas, of which light and heat are the manifestations We still do not have stable forms and so the denser medium of water is pro- duced A further state of cohesion is found in earth The development of the world is a process of steady grossemng of the subtle akaia or space All physical objects, even the most subtle, are built up by the combination of these five elements Our sense experience depends on them By the action of vibration comes the sense of sound, by the action of things in a world of vibrations the sense of touch, by the action of light the sense of sight, by the action of water the sense of taste, by the action of earth the sense of smell
In the Tatthriya Upamsad* the pupil approaches the father and asks him to explain to him the nature of Brahman He is given the formal definition and is asked to supply the content by his own reflection 'That from which these beings are born, that m which when born they live, and that into which they enter at their death is Brahman ' What is the reality which conforms to this account? The son is impressed by material phenomena and fixes on matter (anna) as the basic principle He is not satisfied, for matter cannot account for the forms of life He looks upon life (prana) as the basis of the world Life belongs to a different order from matter Life, again, cannot be the ultimate principle, for conscious phenomena are not commensurate with living forms There is something more in consciousness than in life So he is led to, believe that con- sciousness (manas) is the ultimate principle But consciousness has different grades The instinctive consciousness of animals is quite different from the intellectual consciousness of human beings So the son affirms that intellectual consciousness (vijnana) is Brahman Man alone, among nature's children
> III
Introduction
has the capacity to change himself by his own effort and trans- cend his limitations Ex'en this is incomplete because it is subject to discords and dualities Man's intellect aims at the attainment of truth but succeeds only m making guesses about it; there must be a power m man which sees the truth unveiled Adeeper principle of consciousness must emerge if the funda- mental intention of nature, which has led to the development of matter, life, mind, and intellectual consciousness, is to be accomplished The son finally arrives at the truth that spiritual freedom or delight {ananda), the ecstasy of fulfilled existence is the ultimate principle. Here the search ends, not simply because the pupil's doubts are satisfied but because the pupil's doubts are stilled by the vision of Self-evident Reality. He apprehends the Supreme Unity that lies behind all the lower forms The Upamsad suggests that he leaves behind the discursive reason and contemplates the One and is lost in ecstasy 1 It concludes with the affirmation that absolute Reality is satyam, truth, jMnam, consciousness, anantam, infinity.
There are some who affirm that ananda is the nearest approxi- mation to Absolute Reality, but is not itself the Absolute Reality. For it is a logical representation The experience gives us peace, but unless we are established in it we have not received the highest
In this account, the Upanisad assumes that the naturalistic theory of evolution cannot be accepted The world is not to be viewed as an automatic development without any intelligent course or intelligible aim Matter, life, mind, intelligence are different forms of existence with their specific characteristics
1 Cp Jalal-uddin Ruml
'I died a mineral and became a plant,
I died a plant and rose an animal,
I died an animal and I was man
Why should I fear' When was I less by dying?
Yet once more I shall die as man, to soar
With the blessed angels, but even from angelhood
I must pass on All except God perishes
When I have sacrificed my angel soul,
I shall become that which no mind ever conceived.
O, let me not exist < for Non-existence proclaims,
"To him we shall return " '
The Principal Upamsads
and modes of action, each acting on the other but not derived from each other The evolution of life in the context of matter is produced not by the material principle but by the working of a new life-principle which uses the conditions of matter for the production of life Life is not the mechanical resultant of the antecedent co-ordination of material forces, but it is what is now called an emergent. We cannot, by a complete knowledge of the previous conditions, anticipate the subsequent result There is an element of the incalculable Life emerges when the material conditions are available, which permit life to organise itself m matter. In this sense, we may say that matter aspires for life, but life is not produced by lifeless particles So also life may be said to be aspiring for or be instinct with mind, which is ready to emerge when conditions enable it to organise itself in living matter Mind cannot be produced from things without mind When the necessary mental conditions are prepared, intelligence qualifies the mental living creature Nature is working according to this fundamental intention, which is being accomplished because it is essentially the instrument of the Supreme Being
The world is not the result of meaningless chance There is a purpose working itself out through the ages It is a view which modem science confirms By interpreting the fragmentary relics of far remote times, science tells us how this earth in which we live was gradually adapted to be a place where life could develop, how life came and developed through uncounted centuries until animal consciousness arose and this again gradually developed, until apparently, man with self-conscious reason appeared on the scene. The long record of the develop- ment of the human race and the great guts of spiritual men like the Buddha, Socrates, Jesus make out that man has to be trans- cended by God-man
It cannot be argued that, when material particles are organised in a specific way, life arises The principle of organisation is not matter The explanation of a thing is to be sought in what is above it in the scale of existence and value and not below it Matter cannot raise itself It moves to a higher level by the help of the higher itself It cannot undergo inner development without being acted upon by something above it The lower
Introduction 59
is the material for the higher. Life as the matter for mind and form for physical material- so also intellect is form for the mind and matter for the spirit The eternal is the origin of the actual and its nisus to improvement. To think of it as utterly trans- cendent or as a future possibility is to miss its incidence in the actual We cannot miss the primordiality of the Supreme, 'Verily, m the beginning this world was Brahman ' l There is the perpetual activity of the Supreme in the world
The Upanisad affirms that Brahman on which all else depends, to uhich all existences aspire, Brahman which is sufficient to itself, aspinng to no other, without any need, is the source of all other beings, the intellectual principle, the perceiving mind, life and body It is the principle which unifies the world of the physicist, the biologist, the psychologist, the logician, the moralist and the artist. The hierarchy of all things and beings from soulless matter to the deity is the cosmos. Plato's world-architect, Aristotle's world-mover belong to the cosmos. If there is ordered development, progressive evolution, it is because there is the divine principle at work in the universe.
Cosmic process is one of universal and unceasing change and is patterned on a duality which is perpetually in con- flict, the perfect order of heaven and the chaos of the dark waters Life creates opposites, as it creates sexes, in order to reconcile them 'In the beginning the woman (Orvafi) went about in the flood seeking a master' 1 Indra, for example, divided the world into earth and sky. He 'produced his father and mother from his own body.' This conflict runs through the whole empirical world, and will end when the aim of the universe is accomplished. Creation moves upward towards the divine. When the union between the controlling spirit and the manifesting matter is completed, the purpose of the world, the end of the evolutionary process, the revelation of spirit on earth is accomplished The earth is the foothold of God, the mother of all creatures whose father is heaven 3
1 BU I 4 lo-n.MaitrtVI 17.
1 weftanff sahle pahm Jaimwtya Upamsad Brahnana I 5 6 ivlJ£? C ™ iese behev <* *at Chien (Heaven) is the father and Khan l*iartn) is the mother of all terrestrial existence Zeus as Sky-father is m
6o
The Principal Upamsads
The conflict is not final The duality is not a sterile dualism Heaven and earth, God and matter have the same origin
As regards the primordial God Hiranya-gaibha, a circular process is found The primal being spontaneously produces the primeval water, from this comes the primordial God as the first born of the divine Order, the golden germ of the world 'who was the first seed resting on the navelof the unborn ^Huanya-garbha who is the World-soul expresses his spirit through the environ- ment He manifests the forms contained within himself The world is fixed in him as are the spokes m the hub of a wheel He is the thread, suttatman, on which all beings and all worlds are strung like the beads of a necklace He is the first-born, prathama-ja He is also called Biahma and these Bta/wids are created from world to world 5
In the Rg Veda,3 Huanya-garbha is the golden germ which enters into creation after the first action of the creator In the Samkhya, prakrti is treated as unconscious and develops on account of the influence of the multitude of individual subjects, and the first product of development is mahat, the great one, or buddhi, the intellect It is the development of cosmic uitelli-
essential relation to Earth-mother The two are correlative See A B Cook Zeus (1914), Vol I, p 779
Zoroaster reaches the conception of a single spiritual God, Ormuzd or Ahura Mazda, in whom the principle of good is personified, while the evil principle is embodied m Ahranan, or Angra Mainyu, who limits the omnipotence of Ahura Mazda The whole creation is a combat betw een the t« o The tw o principles strive eternally m life, and in this struggle men take part Man is responsible for his actions, good or bad If he struggles against evil, confesses God and cares for the punty of his body and soul, then after four periods of three thousand years each in the world's history a time shall arrive for the final victory of good over evil, of Ormuzd over Ahnman The general resurrection of the dead and the last judgment will take place then, assuring him of his place among the saved and the righteous
The Jews adopted the two principles of good and evil and they were taken over by Christianity When Blake speaks, of the marriage of Heaven and Hell, Hea'\ en represents the one clear light over all and Hell the dark world of passion and the senses Divided, both are equally barren, but from their umon springs joy 'Oh that man would seek immor- tal moments 1 Oh that men could converse with God' was Blake's cry
« RV X 82, IV 58 5
1 'God once created Brahma Hiranya-garbha and delivered the Vedas to him ' S B I 4 1. 3 X 121 1
Inboduclian
gcncc or Hvanya-garbha On the subjective side, buddht is the first element of the hnga or the subtle body. It js the essence of the individual spirit Buddht serves as the basis for the develop- ment of the principle of individuation, ahamkara, from which are derived, on the one hand, mind and the ten sense organs, five of perception and five of action and, on the other hand, the subtle elements from which arise m their turn the gross elements. Saliva is buddht, the innermost of the three circles, the outer being rajas and lamas which arc identified with ahamkara and manas, which are the emanations of ra;a? and lamas The saliva or the buddht is the btja, the seed of the living individual, since it contains the seeds of karma which develop at each birth into a sense-organism The saliva or lutga is called the ego, the jtva As the buddht is the siilralman of the individual, so is Huaitya-garbha the suUalman, the thread-controller of the world
In the Kalha Upamsad, 1 in the development of principles the great self stands after the undeveloped and the primeval spirit Htranya-garbha, the World-soul is the first product of the principle of non-being influenced by the Eternal Spirit, Isvara. The pviuta of the Sdmkhya is the Eternal Spirit made many Htranya-garbha is the great self, mahan alma, which anses from the undiscriminated, the avyahta, which corresponds to the primitive material or waters of the Brahmanas, or the Prakrit of the Samkhya We have the Supreme Self, the Absolute, the Supreme Self as the eternal subject observing the eternal object, waters or prakrh and the great self which is the first product of this interaction of the eternal subject and the principle of objectivity The Supreme Lord, Isvara, who eternally produces, outlasts the drama of the universe S*amkara begins his commentary on the Bhagavad-gltd with the verse: 'Niirayana is beyond the unmamfest The golden egg is produced from the unmanifest The earth with its seven islands and all other worlds are m the egg.' The names and forms of the manifested world are latent in the egg as the future tree is in the seed
Hiranya-garbha answers to the Logos, the Word of Western 'III io.ii,VI.7.8,seealsoKU.I. 7
The Principal Upam$ads
thought For Plato, the Logos was the archetypal idea For the Stoics it is the principle of reason which quickens and informs matter Philo speaks of the Divine Logos as the 'first born son/ 1 'archetypal man,'* 'image of God,'3 'through whom the world was created '4 Logos, the Reason, 'the Word was in the beginning and the Word became flesh ' The Greek term, Logos, means both Reason and Word The latter indicates an act of divine will Word is the active expression of character The difference between the conception of Divine Intelligence or Reason and the Word of God is that the latter represents the will of the Supreme Vac is Brahman 5 Vac, word, wisdom, is treated in the Rg Veda as the all-knowing The first-born of Rta is Vac 6 yavad brahma tt§thah tavati vak 7 The Logos is conceived as personal like Hiranya-garbha 'The Light was the light of men ' 'The Logos became flesh ' 8
The Supreme is generally conceived as light, jyoti$am jyotxh, the light of lights Light is the principle of communication Hiranya-garbha is organically bound up with the world Himself, a creature, the first-born of creation, he shares the fate of all creation in the end 9 But livara is prior to the World-soul 10 The principle of process applies to God While he is the expres- sion of the non-temporal he is also the temporal livara, the eternal Being functions in the temporal Hiranya-garbha Ramanuja who looks upon livara as the supreme transcendent Reality above all world events treats Brahma as the demi-urge
1 1. 414. 1 I 411 3 1 6 * II 225 5 R v 1 3 21 « A iharva Veda II I 4 See Nama-RUpa and Dharma-Rupa by Maryla Falk (1943), Ch I 7 R V X 114 8
» John I 4, 5 See B F Westcott The Gospel According to St John (1886), p XVH
9 'When all things are subjected to him then the Son himself will also be subjected to him who put all things under him, that God may be everything to everyone ' I Cor XV 28
10 Cp 'Before the mountains were brought forth, or even the earth and the world were made thou art God from everlasting and world without end ' See Hebrews I 10-13
Reltgto Media 'Before Abraham was, I am, is the saying of Christ, yet is it true m some sense, if I say it of myself, for I was not only before myself but Adam, that is, in the idea of God, and the decree of that synod held from all eternity And in this sense, I say, the world was before the creation, and at the end, before it had a beginning '
Introduction <>3 of creation who forms the lower world in the name and bidding of God
Why is the universe what it is, rather than something else? Why is there this something, rather than another? This is traced to the divine will This world and its controlling spirit are the expressions of the Supreme Lord While the World- soul and the world are organically related and are inter- dependent, there is no such relationship between the Supreme Lord and the world, for that would be to subject the infinite to the finite. The relationship is an 'accident' to use White- head's expression. This word 'accident' implies two different considerations, (1) that Divine Creativity is not bound up with this world in such a way that the changes which occur in the world affect the integrity of the Divme, and (2) that the world is an accidental expression of the Divine principle Creativity is not bound to express itself in this particular form If the choice were necessary it would not be free. Creation is the free expression of the Divine mind, %ccha-malram. The world is the manifestation of Hiranya-garblut and the creation oil&ara. The world is the free self-determination of God The power of self- determination, self-expression, belongs to God. It is not by itself. It belongs to the Absolute which is the abode of all possibilities, and by its creative power one of these possibilities is freely chosen for accomplishment The power of manifestation is not alien to being. It does not enter it from outside. It is in being, inherent in it It may be active or inactive We thus get the conception of an Absolute-God, Brahman— Ihara, where the first term indicates infinite being and possibility, and the second suggests creative freedom 1 Why should the Absolute Brahman perfect, infinite, needing nothing, desiring nothing, move out into the world? It is not compelled to do so. It may have this potentiality but it is not bound or compelled by it It is free to move or not to move, to throw itself into forms or remain formless If it still indulges its power of creativity, it is because of its free choice
' In the Taoist Tao T£ Chvng, Tao, literally 'Way,' stands for the Absolute, the drone ground and TS for 'power,' for the unfolding of the divme possibilities Cp also tathala or suchness and Slaya-vijMna the all-conserving or receptacle consciousness
64 The Pnncipal Upanisads
In Isvara we have the two elements of wisdom and power, Siva and Sakti By the latter the Supreme who is unmeasured and immeasurable becomes measured and defined Immutable being becomes infinite fecundity Pure being, which is the free basis and support of cosmic existence, is not the whole of our experience Between the Absolute and the World-soul is the Creative Consciousness It is prajMna-ghana or truth-conscious- ness If sat denotes the primordial being m its undifferenced unity, satya is the same being immanent m its differentiations If the Absolute is pure unity without any extension or variation, God is the creative power by which worlds spring into existence The Absolute has moved out of its primal poise and become knowledge-will It is the all-determming principle It is the Absolute in action as Lord and Creator While the Absolute is spaceless and timeless potentiality, God is the vast self- awareness comprehending, apprehending every possibility 1
Brahman is not merely a featureless Absolute It is all this world Vayu or air is said to be manifest Brahman, pratyaksam brahma The Svetdivataia Upamsad makes out that Brahman is beast, bird and insect, the tottering old man, boy and girl Brahman sustains the cosmos and is the self of each individual Supra-cosmic transcendence and cosmic universality are both real phases of the one Supreme In the former aspect the Spirit is m no way dependent on the cosmic manifold, m the latter the Spirit functions as the principle of the cosmic manifold The supra-cosmic silence and the cosmic integration are both real The two, mrguna and saguna Brahman, Absolute and God, are not different Jayatirtha contends that Samkara is wrong in holding HasXBrahman is of two kinds — brahmano dvairupyasya aprdmdmkatvdt * It is the same Brahman who is described in different ways
J Eckhart says 'God and Godhead are as different as heaven from earth . God becomes and unbecomes ' 'All in Godhead is one, and of this naught can be said God works, but Godhead works not There is no work for it to do and no working in it Never did it contemplate any- thing of work God and Godhead differ after the manner of working and not working When I come into the Ground, into the depths, into the flow and fount of Godhead, none will ask me whence I have come or whither I go None will have missed me, God passes away ' Sermon LVT Evans' E T 1 Nyaya-sndha, p 124
Inhoduclian 65
The personality of God is not to be conceived on the human lines He is not to be thought of as a greatly magnified person. We should not attribute to the Divine human qualities as wc know them.' Wc have (1) the Absolute, (2) God as Creative power, (3) God immanent in this world. These are not to be regarded as separate entities They are arranged in this order because there is a logical priority The Absolute must be there with all its possibilities before the Divine Creativity can choose one. The divine choice must be there before there can be the Divine immanent in this world. This is a logical succession and not a temporal one The world-spin I must be there before there can be the world We thus get the four poises or statuses of reality,' the Absolute, Brahman, (2) the Creative Spirit, Ihiara, (3) the World-Spirit, Hnanya-gaibha, and (4) the World This is the way m which the Hindu thinkers interpret the integral nature of the Supreme Reality. Mandiikya Upam$ad says that Biahman is catus-fiat, four-footed, and its four principles are Brahman, Ihara, Huanya-garbha and Vnaj 1
1 Aquinas says 'Things said alike of God and of other beings are not said either in quite the same sense or in a totally different sense but in an analogous sense ' Summa Contra Gentiles XXXIV God is not good ? r ]S ,n thc ,luman scnsc ' For who ,,atl1 known the mmd of the Lord?' Romans XI 34 God is personal, but, as Karl Barth says, 'personal in an incomprehensible way in so far as the conception of His personality surpasses all our views of personality This is so, 311st because He and He fjone is a true, real and genuine person Were we to overlook this and try to conceive God in our own strength according to our conception of personality, wc should make an idol out of God ' The Knowledge of God "»d the Service of God [1938), pp 3 iff J
1 In Plotmus we have a similar scheme (1) The One alone, the simple, tpXu^ 0ndltl0ned God beyond being of Basilides, the godhead of pv « which can only be indicated by negative terms We cannot thnf ex,stcnce oi rt. though it is not non-existent It cannot be "rougnt of as either subject or object of experience, as in it subject and w™»n!i ar / ,d ,? ntlcal 1S Pure impersonal experience or perhaps the 6 ouna 01 all experience, it is pure consciousness, ineffable supra-
m «f 1S not the fiTSt cause - not the crcator S° d 14 1S cause only h,\ rL S !r Se ~ at Ifc 1S everywhere, and without it nothing could be the JZJi"? „T he tott »]igiMe world which Plotinus calls One— Many, tWht L^h n° mC il rm f ° r archetv P es Not mere Ideas or things Thw rZ 7 Z e Dmne Thmker - not me re passive archetypical pictures UnvL I * C *I e powers ™ thm the Dmne mind 11 is personal God. exmLf . be se P arated from diversity. The most perfect form of Hk£ ZT\? 01 Section, vlpis™, Divine IntellectT^t
™>»ker and thought, the personal Lord, Universal Intelligence^ The
The Principal Upamsads
The conception of tri-suparna is developed m the fourth section of the Taithriya Upamsad The Absolute is conceived as a nest from out of which three birds have emerged, viz Vtraj, Hiranya-garbha and Isvara The Absolute conceived as it is m itself, independent of any creation, is called Brahman When it is thought of as having manifested itself as the uni- verse, it is called Vtraj, when it is thought of as the spirit moving everywhere in the universe, it is called Hvranya-garbha , when it is thought of as a personal God creatmg, protecting and destroying the universe, it is called Isvara Isvara becomes Brahma, Vtsnu and Siva when his thfee functions are taken separately 1 The real is not a sum of these It is an ineffable unity in which these conceptual distinctions are made These are fourfold to our mental view, separable only in appearance If we identify the real with any one definable state of being, however pure and perfect, we violate the unity and divide the indivisible The different standpomts are consistent with each other, complementary to each other and necessary m their
unknowable Absolute is mediated to us through the Divine Intelligence This Intellectual principle of Plotinus is the livara of the Upanisads This universal intelligence makes possible the multiple universe For Plotinus this principle is the totality of divine thoughts or Ideas in Plato's sense These Ideas or Thoughts are real beings, powers They are the originals, archetypes, intellectual forms of all that exists in the lower spheres All the phases of existence down to the lowest ultimate of material being or the lowest forms of being in the visible universe are ideally present in this realm of divine thoughts This divine intellectual principle has both being and non-being It has, for Plotinus, two acts, the upward contemplation of the One and generation towards the lower (m) One and Many The soul of the All is the third, which fashions the material universe on the model of divine thoughts, the Ideas laid up within the Divine Mind It is the eternal cause of the cosmos, the creator and therefore the vital principle of the world God is envisaged as something apart from the world, its creator or artificer Human ideas of God are centred round him Plotinus does not make the sensible world a direct emanation from the Intelligible World It is the product or the creation of the World-soul, the third person of the Neo-Platonic trinity, herself an emanation from the intelligible World, the Nous Our souls are parts or emanations of the World-soul The three hypo- stases form collectively, for Plotinus, the one transcendent being The All-Soul is the expression of the energy of the Divine, even as the Intel- lectual principle is the expression of the thought or vision of the godhead (iv) The many alone It is the world-body, the world of matter without form It is the possibility of manifested form » See also Pamgala U
Introduction 67
totality for an integral view of life and the world If we are able to hold them together, the conflicting views which are emphasised exclusively by certain schools of Indian Vcdanta become reconciled
Absolute being is not an existing quality to be found m the things It is not an object of thought or the result of production. It forms an absolute contrast to, and is fundamentally different from, things that are, as is in its way nothingness It can be expressed only negatively or analogically It is that from which our speech turns back along with the mind, being unable to comprehend its fullness. 1 It is that which the tongue of man cannot truly express nor human intelligence conceive Samkara in his commentary on the Brahma Sutra 1 refers to an Upanisad text which is not to be found in any of the extant Upanisads Bahva, asked by Baskah to expound the nature of Brahman, kept silent. He prayed, 'Teach me, sir ' The teacher was silent, and when addressed a second and a third time he said- 'I am teaching but you do not follow The self is silence.'3
We can only describe the Absolute in negative terms. In the words of Plotmus, 'We say what he is not, We cannot say what he is.' The Absolute is beyond the sphere of predication It is the sunyata of the Buddhists It is 'not gross, not subtle, not short, not long, not glowing, not shadowy, not dark, not attached, flavourless, smell-less, eye-less, ear-less, speech-less, mmd-less, breath-less, mouth-less, not internal, not external, consuming nothing and consumed by nothing '4 It cannot be
' I U. II 4, see also Kena I 3, II, 3, Hatha I 27. 1 S B III 2 17
' upaianto'yam atma Cp the Madhyamtka view— • peramarthalas lu aryanam tiisnbn-bhuva eva
im 1 j ° nly Wl11 you see lt ' when vou cannot speak o£ it; for the raowledge of it is deep silence and the suppression of all the senses ' Hermes Tnsmegistus, Lib X 5
IV B £- Ir 8 8 ' see also 11 3 6 - IIL « 26 » IV 2 4- IV 4 22; I i 5 i4 5 " 7 ' Tlle Buddha ' according to Atnara, is an advaya-vadxn
There was something formless yet complete. That existed before heaven and earth. Without sound, without substance. Dependent on nothing, unchanging. All-pervading, unfailing,
0*
The Principal Upanisads
truly designated Any description makes It into something It is nothing among things It is non-dual, advaita It denies duality. This does not mean, however, that the Absolute is non- being It means only that the Absolute is all-inclusive and nothing exists outside it
Negative characters should not mislead us into thinking that Brahman is a nonentity While it is non-empincal, it is also
One may think of it as the mother
of all things under heaven. Its true name we do not know, Tao is the by-name we give it
Tao TS'Chmg 25 A Waley's E T
The Way arid its Power (1934)
Plato says that the unfathomable ground of the universe, the absolute, is 'beyond essence and truth ' Plotmus describes the utter transcendence of the One thus 'Since the Nature or Hypostasis of The One is the engenderer of the All, it can Itself be none of the things in the All, that is, It is not a thing. It does not possess quality or quantity. It is not an Intellectual Principle, not a soul, It is not in motion and not at rest, not m space, not m time, It is essentially of a unique form or rather of no-form, since it is prior to form, as it is prior to movement and to rest, all these categones hold only m the realm of existence and constitute the multiplicity characteristic of that lower realm ' Enneads VI 9 3 'This wonder, this One, to which in verity no name may be given ' tbtd VI 9 5
'Our way then takes us beyond knowing, there may be no wandering from unity, knowing and knowable must all be left aside Every object of thought, even the highest, wc must pass by, for all that is good is later than this No doubt we should not speak of seeing, but we cannot help talking m dualities, seen and seer, instead of boldly, the achieve- ment of unity In this seeing, we neither hold an object nor trace dis- tinction, there is no two The man is changed, no longer himself nor self belonging, he is merged with the supreme, sunken into it, one with it Only m separation is there duality That is why the vision baffles telling We cannot detach the supreme to state it, if we have seen something thus detached, we have failed of the supreme ' Enneads VI 9 4 and 10
Pseudo-Dionysius, whose utterances were once accepted as almost apostolic authority, observes 'For it is more fitting to praise God by taking away than by ascnption Here we take ,away all things from Him, going up from particulars to universals, that we may know openly the unknowable which is hidden m and under all thmgs that may be known And we behold that darkness beyond being, concealed under all natural light '
Chuang Tzu's vision of the boundless world has this 'You cannot explain the sea to a frog m a well — the creature of a narrow sphere You cannot explain ice to a grasshopper — the creature of a season You cannot explain Tao to a pedant — This view is too limited ' Waley
Inlrodttclton
inclusive of the whole empirical world The Absolute is des- cribed as full both of light and not-light, of desire and not desire, of anger and not-angcr, of Ww and not-law, having verily filled all, both the near and the far off, the this and the that. '» Negative and positive characterisations arc given to affirm the positivity of being
To say that the nature of Brahman cannot be dctmed docs not mean that it has no essential nature of its own We cannot define it by its accidental features, for they do not belong to its essence There is nothing outside it As no inquiry into its nature can be instituted without some description, its sva>upa or essential nature is said to be sal or being, cxt or consciousness and ananda or bliss 1 These are different phrases for the same being Self-being, self-consciousness and self-delight are one. It is absolute being m which there is no nothingness It is absolute consciousness in which there is no non-consciousness It is absolute bliss in which there is no suffering or negation of bliss. All suffering is due to a second, an obstacle, all delight
Three Ways of Thought in Ancient China (1939), PP 55~* H * i?' 05 ' Chuang-Tzu, Mystic Moralist and Social Reformer (1920) Ch XVIII
Anandagin begins his commentary on Katha Upanxsad with this verse
dharma dharmadyasamsrstam karya-kurana-varjitam kaladibhir avicchwnam brahma yat tan namSmy aham Paul speaks of a vision which was not to be told and had heard words not to be repeated II Corinthians 12 ff Cp Hymn of Gregory of Nyasa, 'O Thou entirely beyond all being ' 'O Lord, My God, the Helper of them that seek Thee, I behold Thee in the entrance of Paradise, and I know not what I see, for I see naught visible This alone I know, that I know not what I see, and never can know And I know not how tojnameThee, because I know not what Thou art, and did anyone say unto me that Thou wert called by this name or that, by the very fact that he named it I should know that it was not Thy name For the wall beyond which I see Thee is the end of all manner of signification in names ' Nicholas of Cusa The Vision of God. E T Salter's E T (1928) Ch XIII 'No monad or triad can express the all-transcending hiddenness of the all- transcending super-essentially super-existing super-deity ' 'God, because of his excellence, may rightly be called Nothing,' says Scotus Engena
» BTJ IV 4 5 lia 4, 5 Katha 1 2 20-21, I 3 15, II 6 17 M.U. 1 1 6,1 7 SU V 8-10
* They are not so much qualities of Biahnum as the very nature of Brahman Commenting on the passage Brahman is truth, wisdom and infinity, satyam jUanam anantam brahma, £ wntes
satyadim h% trim vtiesanarthant padam vtiesyasya brahmanah
The Principal Upatusads
arises from the realisation of something withheld, by the over- coming of obstacles, by the surpassing of the limit It is this delight that overflows into creation The self-expression of the Absolute, the creation of numberless universes is also traced to Brahman All things that exist are what they are, because of the nature of Brahman as sat, ctt and dnanda All things are forms of one immutable being, variable expressions of the invariable reality To describe Brahman as the cause of the world is to give its tatastha or accidental feature 1 The defining characteristics are m both cases due to our logical needs 2 When the Absolute is regarded as the basis and explanation of the world, he is conceived as the lord of all, the knower of all, the inner controller of all 3 God has moved out everywhere sa paryagdt The Svetdsvatara Vpamsad speaks of the one God, beside whom there is no second, who creates all the worlds and rules with His powers, and at the end of time rolls them up again * He lives m all thmgss and yet transcends them The Universal Self is like the sun who is the eye of the whole universe and is untouched by the defects of our vision 6 He is said to fill the whole world and yet remain beyond its confines 'Venly motionless like a lone tree does the God stand in the heaven, and yet by Him is this whole world filled "I
The distraction between Brahman m itself and Brahman m the universe, the transcendent beyond manifestation and the transcendent in manifestation, the indeterminate and the determinate, nirguno gunl, is not exclusive 8 The two are like two sides of one reality The Real is at the same time being realised
In the metrical Upanisads, as in the Bhagavad-gUa, the per-
1 iatasthatvam ca laksya-svarupa-bahir-bhulatvam Stddhanta-Ieia-sam- graha (Kumbbakonam ed ), p 53
* They are said to be kalpita or constructed, as the non-dual Brahman is said to possess these qualities on account ,of its association with antahkarana They are manifestations through an imperfect medium and therefore limited revelations of Brahman
3 MaU 6 4 III 2 3, VI 1-12 5BUI47SUII17 <■ Hatha II 5 11 7 S U III 9
8 Cp Eckhart 'The Godhead gave all things up to God The Godhead is poor, naked and empty as though it were not, it has not, wills not, wants not, works not, gets not It is God who has the treasure and the bnde in him, the Godhead is as void as though it were not '
Introduction 7 1
sonal is said to be superior to the superpersonal. 1 puru?an na param Mwit, there is nothing beyond the person. It is doubtful whether the author of the Brahma Sutra accepted the dis- tinction of saguna and mrgwna m regard to Brahman. Even the mrgwna Brahman is not without determinations. The STdrakara makes a distinction between the super-personal (apurnsa-vidha) and the personal {purusa-vidha), i.e. between Brahman and Uvara The latter is not a human fancy or a concession to the weak m mind The ntrakara (formless), and the sakara (with form), are different aspects of the same Reality. The seeker can choose either in his spiritual practices In III. 3 we find that the author maintains that the aksara texts which describe Brahman negatively as 'not this, not this' are 'not useful for meditation ' 2 He holds that Brahman is unaffected by the different states, of waking, dream, sleep. The view that Brahman undergoes changes is refuted on the ground that they relate to the effects due to the self-concealment of Brahman Badarayana denies reality to a second principle.
Hiranya-garbha, the World-soul is the divme creator, the supreme lord Uvara at work in this universe. A definite possi- bility of the Absolute is being realised in this world In the lipamsads the distinction between Uvara and Hiranya-garbha, between God and the World-soul is not sharply drawn If the World-soul is ungrounded in Uvara, if he is exclusively tem- poral, then we cannot be certain of the end of the cosmic process When the Upamsads assert that the individual ego is rooted w the universal self or atman, it would be preposterous to unagme that the World-soul is unrelated to Uvara or Brahman.*
1 Katha I 3 11 M U II 1 1-2.
' adhyanaya ■prayojanabhavat. Ill 3 14 , see also III 3 33 valentmus whose activity may be assigned to a d 130-150, teaches a similar view The primordial essence is the Deep (Bythos) With it
Sri a „ th0Ught called also Gra ? e ( for rt ^ not conditioned) and ouence (for it made no sign of its' existence) Professor Burkitt writes M°Tm ^ "nmeasurable Deep made its own thought fecund and so pmS-i 'f 1 *! came lnt0 bem S. although it was called unique, it had a correlative side to it called Truth " " "
stanrl, 1 V & " "~- ■*» uuutasumu, tiicic i;a.u uc no intelligent 1
Km! Coming Ancient History, Vol XII (1939), p 470
, Kfers t0 w orld-soul and not to the Supreme God m the P*ssage, where he asserts that 'God becomes and disbecomes '
The Principal Upamsads
Htraiiya-garblia who has in him the whole development m germ acts on the waters As we have seen, the image of waters is an ancient one by which human thought attempts to explain the development of the universe The waters are initially at rest and so free from waves or forms The first movement, the first disturbance, creates forms and is the seed of the universe The play of the two is the life of the universe When the de- velopment is complete, when what is m germ is manifest, we have the world-consummation Hvanya-garbha creates the world according to the eternal Veda, which has withm itself eternally the primary types of all classes of things, even as the God of the mediaeval scholastics creates according to the eternal archetype of Ideas which He as the eternal Word eternally possesses Brahman is the unity of all that is named 1 Hiranya-garbha or Brahma is the World-soul 2 and is subject to changes of the world He is karya Brahma or effect Brahman as distinct from Isvara who is karana Brahman or causal Brahman Hiranya-garbha. arises at every world-beginmng and is dissolved at every world-ending Isvara is not subject to these changes For both Samkara and Ramanuja, Hiranya-garbha has the place of a subordinate and created demi-urge livara is the eternal God who is not drawn into but directs the play of the worlds that rise and pensh and is Himself existing transcendentally from all eternity The Vedic deities are subordinate to Isvara and hold a similar position to Him in the formation and control of the world that the angelic powers and directors maintain m the heavenly hierarchy of scholasticism and of Dante
We have thus the four sides of one whole (i) the transcen- dental universal being anterior to any concrete reality, (11) the causal principle of all differentiation, (m) the innermost essence of the world, and (iv) the manifest world They are co-existent and not alternating poises where we have either a quiescent Brahman or a creative Lord These are simultaneous sides of the one Reality
> BU I 5 17
1 For Atman as the World-soul, see Atharva Veda X. 8 44
Introduction
The word 'atman' is derived from an 'to breathe.' It is the breath of life. 1 GraduaEy its meaning is extended to cover life, soul, self or essential being of the mdividual. Sarhkara derives atman from the root which means 'to obtain' 'to eat or enjoy or pervade all.' 1 Atman is the principle of man's life, the soul that pervades his being, his breath, prana, his intellect, prajM, and transcends them. Atman is what remains when everything that is not the self is eliminated. The Rg Veda speaks of the unborn part, ajo bhagah3 There is an unborn and so immortal element in man,4 which is not to be confused with body, life, mind and intellect These are not the self but its forms, its external expressions. Our true self is a pure existence, self-aware, unconditioned by the forms of mind and intellect. When we cast the self free from all outward events, there arises from the inward depths an experience, secret and wonderful, strange and great. It is the miracle of self-knowledge, dbna-jfid'tia.s Just as, m relation to the universe, the real is Brahman, while name and form are only a play of manifestation, so also the individual egos are the varied expressions of the One Universal Self. As Brahman is the eternal quiet underneath the drive and activity
* SttnStevalah R.V. VII 87. 2.
5 apnoter alter atater va § on A.U. I. I. Cp also yac cSpnoti yad Matte yac catti vtsayan tha
yac cSsya santalo bhavas tasmSd atmeti Hriyate. 3 X 16 4
* Sayana says ajah janana-rahttak, ianrer.dri}abhSgavyatiriHah, ^ra-ptmisa-lal'satto-yo'bhSgo'sii. Ecfchart quotes -with approval an wmamed heathen philosopher as saying 'Discard all this and that and nere and there and be thyself -what thon art in thine inner not-being', which he adds is mens
b^x^- lna ^" rnS ^' 3S ^ S ns to m ^. uire ^ xlia *k e BSfrtt" 6 °f our inward
Who am I? How came this world? What is it?
How came death and birth? Thus inquire
Within yourself; great will be the benefit (yon will derive from such foquiry). ro ham, fraiham idam, kith va, Patham tr.arana-jar.mam wcarayantare vetlham mahat tat phalatn esyasi.
The Principal Upanisads
of the universe, so Atman is the foundational reality under- lying the conscious powers of the individual, the inward ground of the human soul There is an ultimate depth to our life below the plane of thinking and striving 'The Atman is the super- reality of the jiva, the individual ego
The Chdndogya Upamsad gives us a story, where gods and demons both anxious to learn the true nature of the Self approach Pra]a-pati who maintains that the ultimate self is free from sin, free from old age, free from death and grief, free from hunger and thirst, which desires nothing and imagines nothing It is the persisting spirit, that which remains constant in all the vicissitudes of waking, dream and sleep, death, rebirth and deliverance The whole account assumes that there is consciousness even in the apparently unconscious states, when we sleep, when we are drugged or stunned The gods sent Indra and the demons Virocana as their representatives to learn the truth The first suggestion is that the self is the image that we see in the eye, in water or m a mirror The con- ception of the self as the physical body is inadequate To indicate that what we see in another's eye, a pail of water or a mirror is not the true self, Pra]a-pati asked them to put on their best clothes and look again Indra saw the difficulty and said to Pra]a-pati that as this self (the shadow m the water) is well adorned when the body is well adorned, well dressed when the body is well dressed, well cleaned when the body is well cleaned, so that self will also be blind if the body is blind, lame if the body is lame, crippled if the body is crippled, and will perish in fact as soon as the body perishes Such a view cannot be accepted If the self is not tKe body, may it be the dreaming self? The second suggestion is that the true self is "he who moves about happy in dreams ' Again a difficulty was felt Indra says that, though it is true that this dreaming self is not affected by the changes of the body, yet in dreams we feel that we are struck or chased, we experience pain and shed tears We rage m dreams, storm with indignation, do things perverted, mean and malicious Indra feels that the self is not the same as dream-consciousness The self is not the composite of mental states, however independent they may be of the accidents of the body. Dream states are not self-existent Indra again approaches
Introduction
Praja-pati who gives him another suggestion that the self is the consciousness in deep sleep Indra feels that, in that state, there is consciousness neither of the self nor of the objective world Indra feels that he does not know himself nor does he know anything that exists He is gone to utter annihilation. But the self exists even m deep sleep Even when the object is not present, the subject is there The final reality is the active universal consciousness, which is not to be confused with either the bodily, or the dreaming consciousness or the consciousness in deep sleep. In the state of deep, dreamless sleep, the self wrapped round by the intellect has no consciousness of objects, but is not unconscious The true self is the absolute self, which is not an abstract metaphysical category but the authentic spiritual self The "other forms belong to objectified bemg. Self is life, not an object It is an experience, m which the self is the knowing subject and is at the same time the known object. Self is open only to self The life of the self is not set over against knowledge of it as an objective thing Self is not the objective reality, nor something purely subjective The subject-object relationship has meaning only in the world of objects, in the sphere of discursive knowledge The Self is the light of lights, and through it alone is there any light m the universe. It is perpetual, abiding light. It is that which neither lives nor dies, which has neither movement nor change and which endures when all else passes away It is that which sees and not the object seen Whatever is an object belongs to the not-self. The self is the constant witness-consciousness 1
The four states stand on the subjective side for the four lands of soul, VatSvdnara, the experiencer of gross things, Tatjasa, ™* expenencer of the subtle, Prdjna, the experiencer of the "^manifested objectivity, and the Tunya, the Supreme Self, ine Mandukya Upamsad, by an analysis of the four modes of consciousness, waking, dream, deep sleep and illumined con- sciousness, makes out that the last is the basis of the other three. S] J n Jkrough all months, years, seasons and kalpas, through all {divi- i ot time) past and future the consciousness remains one and self- ""mnous It neither rises nor sets
fiasabda-yttga-kalpesu gatagamyesv anehatha nodeit nasiam ety eka samvid esa svayam-prabha.
Panca-da&i I 7.
The Principal Upamsads
On the objective side we have the cosmos, Virdj, the World-soul Hiranya-garbha, the Supreme God, Isvara, and the Absolute, Brahman 1 By looking upon Isvara as prajna, it is suggested that the supreme intelligence who dwells m the sleeping state holds all things in an unmanifested condition The divine wisdom sees all things, not as human reason does in parts and relations, but m the orgmal reason of their existence, their pnmal truth and reality It is what the Stoics call spermahkos or the seed Logos which is manifested m conscious beings as a number of seed logoi
In treatises on Yoga, the potential all-consciousness of the state of sleep is represented m the form of a radiant serpent called Kundahni or Vdg-devT We come across this representation m earlier treatises also In the Rg Veda, Vac is said to be the serpent queen, sarpa-rajni * The process of Yoga consists m rousing the radiant serpent and lifting it up from the lowest sphere to the heart, where m union vathprdna or life-breath its universal nature is realised and from it to the top of the skull It goes out through an opening called brahma-randhra to which corresponds in the cosmic organism the opening formed by the sun on the top of the vault of the sky
1 Cp William Law 'Though God is everywhere present, yet He is only present to thee m the deepest and most central part of thy soul The natural senses cannot possess God or unite thee to Him, nay, thy inward faculties of understanding, will and memory can only reach after God, but cannot be the place of His habitation m thee But there is a root or depth of thee from whence all these faculties come forth, as lines from a centre, or as branches from the body of the tree This depth is called the centre, the fund or bottom of the soul This depth is the unity, the eternity — I had almost said the infinity of thy soul, for it is so infinite that nothing can satisfy it or give it rest but the infinity of God ' Quoted m Perennial Philosophy by Aldous Huxley (1944), P 2 Again, 'My Me is God, nor do I recognise any other Me except my God Himself ' St Catherine of Genoa (ibid , p 11 )
Eckhart 'To gauge the soul we must gauge it with. God, for the Ground of God and the Ground of the soul are one and the same ' {ibid , p 12} Agam 'The highest part of the soul stands above time and knows nothing of time ' 'There is a principle m the soul altogether spiritual I used to call it a spiritual light or a spark But now I say that it is free of all names, void of all forms It is one and simple, as God is one and simple '
> 1 X 189, X 125 3 Alharva Veda IV 1
Introduction 77 XII
In the early prose Upanisads, atman is the principle of the individual consciousness and Brahman the superpersonal ground of the cosmos Soon the distinction diminishes and the two are identified God is not merely the transcendent numinous other, but is also the universal spirit which is the basis of human personality and its ever-renewing vitalising power Brahman, the first principle of the universe, is known through atman, the inner self of man In the Satapatha Brahmana 1 and the Chandogya Upanisad 2 it is said 'Verily this whole world is Brahman,' and also 'This soul of mine within the heart, this is Brahman ' 'That person who is seen in the eye, He is atman, that is Brahman '3 God is both the wholly other, transcendent and utterly beyond the world and man, and yet he enters into man and lives in him and becomes the inmost content of his very existence 4
Narayana is the God m man who lives in constant association with nara, the human being. He is the immortal dwelling in the mortals 5 The human individual is more than the universe He lives independently in his own inexpressible infinity as well as in the cosmic harmonies We can be one with all cosmic existence entering into the cosmic consciousness We become superior
\ $tt X * 111 14 1
B»»r . 4 10 C P Keith 'It is impossible to deny that the Atman- ora&man doctrine has a long previous history in the Brahmanas and is
t elopment of the ldea of umt y of * he R S Ve <i<* ' The Religion
•T c ™ l *° s J>P h y of the Veda and the Upamsads, p 494 Heraclitus says 1 searched myself • The Logos is to be sought within, for man's nature is
r w° Sm and re P r esents the nature of the whole MvnS "°^ nus '° n e that seeks to penetrate the nature of the Divine Dovn+ T>, See ^Pty mto ^ natur e of his own soul, into the Divinest wl T 3 ? 511 He must fire t make abstraction of the body, then of the all a™ Wlu ? lx budt U P bodv ' then of a11 the faculties of sense, of tovra^rtt emotions and every such triviality, of all that leans we dK^K ""^ mat K kit after this abstraction is the part which somenf +v e 4 . a ^ the lma S e 01 the Divme Mmd, an emanation preserving <C UTV tDmne Light V 39 6 s R V IV *2 ^ om ^ lva fe vats hs&mahsan&mhyalmanyavasthitam
The Prmctpal Upam$ads
to all cosmic existence by entering into the world-transcending consciousness Answering to the four grades of consciousness, waking, dream, deep sleep, spiritual consciousness, we have the four states of the individual, sthula (gross), sfikpna (subtle), karana (causal) and the pure self As livara is the cause of the world, so the causal self is the source of the development of the subtle and the gross bodies 1
The ecstasy of divine union, the bliss of realisation tempts one to disregard the world with its imperfections and look upon it as a troubled and unhappy dream The actual fabnc of the world, with its loves and hates, with its wars and battles, with its jealousies and competitions as well as its unasked helpfulness, sustained intellectual effort, intense moral struggle seems to be no more than an unsubstantive dream, a phantas- magoria dancing on the fabnc of pure being Throughout the course of human history, men have taken refuge from the world of stresses, vexations and indignities m the apprehension of a spirit beyond The prayer to 'lead us from unreality to reality, from darkness to light, from death to immortality' assumes the distinction between reality, light and immortality and unreality, darkness and death The Katha Upam?ad warns us not to find reality and certainty in the unrealities and uncertainties of this world 2 The Chdndogya Upam$ad tells us that a covering of untruth hides from us the ultimate truth even as the surface of the earth hides from us the golden treasure hidden under it 3 The truth is covered by untruth, anrta The Brhad-dranyaka and the lia Ujximsads speak to us of the veiling of truth by a disc of gold and invoke the grace
' The first taltva is the root of manifestation, called tnahat or the great principle In ahamkara we find individual consciousness which proceeds from the intellectual principle by an individualising deter- mination Sometimes, cttta is said to be the first product of prakrh, with its triple character of buddht or discrimination, ahamkara or self-sense and manas or mind
» II 4 2, 3 VIII 3 1-3
Introduction
of God for removing the veil and letting us see the truth. 1 According to the Svetaivatara Upani$ad, we can achieve the cessation of the great world-illusion, viiva-maya-mvrttih by the worship of God. 3 If this aspect of spiritual experience were all, the world we live in, that of ignorance, darkness and death would be quite different from the world of underlying reality, the world of truth, light and life The distmction would become one of utter opposition between God and the world. The latter would be reduced to an evil dream from which we must wake up as soon as possible 3
Indifference to the world is not, however, the mam feature of spiritual consciousness Brahman, the completely trans- cendent, the pure silence has another side. Brahman is appre- hended m two ways. Sarhkara says, dvirupam ht brahma- vagamyate, nama-rupa-vikdra-bhedopadhi-viiistam, tad vipantam sarvopadhi-warptam Both the Absolute and the Personal God are real, only the former is the logical prius of the latter. The soul when it rises to full attention knows itself to be related to the single universal consciousness, but when it turns outward it sees the objective universe as a manifestation of this single consciousness. The withdrawal from the world is not the conclusive end of the spiritual quest. There is a return to the world accompanied by a persistent refusal to take the world as it confronts us as final. The world has to be redeemed and it can be redeemed because it has its source in God and final refuge m God.
There are many passages where the world of duality is suggested to be only seeming.4 The existence of duality is not admitted to be absolutely real. In the passage of the Chandogya Uj>ani ? ad regarding the modifications of the three fundamental constituents of being, fire, water and food, it is said that just as all that is made of clay, copper or iron is only a modification, a verbal expression, a simple name, the reality being clay, ^Pper or iron, even so all things can be reduced to three
\ r * 5 * * I 10
3 C P Afma-bodha 7
tSvat satyamjagad bhattm iuhtihSr-rajaiam yaihci
4 .^yj, yavan na jnayate brahma sarvadhisthanam advayam
IV , „ ibBn B a duality as it were (tva) ' B U II 4 14, see also
8o
The Principal Upamsads
primary forms of reality It is suggested that all things are reducible to reality, bemg mere modifications All this is to be understood as meaning that the Absolute stands above becoming and passing away which it transcends
In the Maitri Upanisad, the Absolute is compared to a spark, which, made to revolve, creates apparently a fiery circle, an idea expanded by Gaudapada m his Karika on the Mdndukya Upanisad This may suggest that the world is a mere appear- ance Even here the intention may well be to contrast the reality of the Absolute with empirical reality without making the latter an illusion
The assertion that with the knowledge of the Self all is known 1 does not exclude the reality of what is derived from the Self When the AUarcya Upanisad asserts that the universe is founded in consciousness and guided by it, it assumes the reality of the universe and not merely its apparent existence To seek the one is not to deny the many The world of name and form has its roots in Brahman, though it does not con- stitute the nature of Brahman 2 The world is neither one with Brahman nor wholly other than Brahman The world of fact cannot be apart from the world of bemg From one being no other being is born It exists only m another form, samsthanan- tarcna 3
Maya, in this view states the fact that Brahman without losing his integrity is the basis of the world Though devoid of all specifications, Brahman is the root cause of the universe * 'If a thing cannot subsist apart from something else, the latter is the essence of that thing ' The cause is logically prior to the effect 5 Questions of temporal beginning and growth are sub- ordinate to this relation of ground and consequent The world does not carry its own meaning To regard it as final and ultimate is an act of ignorance So long as the erroneous view
< B V II 4 5. 7, 9 C U VI i 2 M U I i 3
» aio ruma-THpe sanavasthe brahmanaw&tmavati, na brahma tad Stmifan f> on 1 V II 6 I
i & on C I' \I 2 2 Irtsrasyajagatobrahma-kSryalvallad-ananyatvae ca SB II i 20
4 s-ni- t!"-a-rahtto'pt jagato miilant $ onKalhall 3 12
5 £ on B U II 4 7
o.'j/ stddhih ptul I dryolpalleh liHrnva sadbhSvah £ onBU I 2 1
Introduction 81
of the independence of the world does not disappear, our highest good will not be realised
The world is the creation of God, the active Lord. The finite is the self-limitation of the infinite. No finite can exist in and by itself It exists by the infinite If we seek the dynamic aspect we are inclined to repudiate the expenence of pure conscious- ness. It is not a question of either pure consciousness or dynamic consciousness These are the different statuses of the one Reality They are present simultaneously in the universal awareness
The dependence of the world on God is explained in different ways In the Chandogya Upanisad, Brahman is defined as tarfalan as that {tat) which gives rise to (?«), absorbs (U) and sustains [an) the world 1 The Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad argues that satyam consists of three syllables, sa, it, yam, the first and the last being real and the second unreal, madhyato anrtam The fleeting is enclosed on both sides by an eternity which is real * The world comes from Brahman and returns to Brahman Whatever exists owes its being to Brahman 3 The different metaphors are used to indicate how the universe rises from its central root, how the emanation takes place while the Brahman remams ever-complete, undiminished 4 'As a spider sends forth and draws in (its thread), as herbs grow on the earth, as the hair (grows) on the head and the body of a living person, so from the Imperishable arises here the universe '5 Again, 'As from a
' HI i 4
n ^ 1 1 Be ^ e te " s of the Anglo-Saxon Council summoned to decide w the question of the acceptance of the Christian faith m 627 One of the th P om P ared 1:116 We of man on earth with the flight of a sparrow storm f ban 1 uet hal1 m winter, 'a good fire in the midst, whilst the one h ram and snow P revai1 abroad, the sparrow, I say, flying in at from tif' and lmmedia *ely out at another, whilst he is withm, is safe immprf 1 y™* 37 storm, but after a short space of fair weather, he he had vamshes out of your sight, into the dark winter from which Went So this hf e of man appears for a short space, but of what
VeneraKit 01 what M to foUow we are utterly ignorant ' Bede the see B G in 28 eStaSftCa ' History of the English Nation (1916), pp 91 ff
; s c MT y iii.bu in s
Pvme its ; if * nuS ' Ima S me a spring which has no commencement, trann.,,11? J° r ^ ^ nv «rs. never exhausted by what they take, ever its full self ' III 8 9 Enneads 5 M U I. 1 7
The Principal Upamsads
blazing fire sparks of like form issue forth by the thousands even so, many kinds of beings issue forth from the Immutable and they return thither too '» The many are parts of Brahman even as waves are parts of the sea All the possibilities of the world are affirmed in the first being, God The whole universe before its manifestation was there The antecedent of the
/ manifested universe is the non-manifested universe, 1 e God God does not create the world but becomes it Creation is expression It is not a making of something out of nothing It is not making so much as becoming It is the self-projection of the Supreme Everything exists m the secret abode of the Supreme 2 The primary reality contains within itself the source of its own motion and change The Sveta&vatara Upamsad mentions the different'views of
//creation held at the time of its composition, that it is due J ' to time, to nature, to necessity, to chance, to the elements, to the Person or the combmation of these It repudiates all these views and traces the world to the power of the Supreme 3
The Svetasvatara Upamsad describes God as maym, the wonder-working powerful Being, who creates the world by His
■II i i
1 In the Rg Veda there are suggestions that the Imperishable is the basis of the world and that a personal Lord Brakmanas-pati (X 72 2), Vt&va-karman (literally the All-maker), Purusa (X 90), Htranya-garbha (X 121 1) produces tiie world The Upamsads refer to the early cosmo- logical speculations, but these are not their real interest
3 Gaudapada mentions different theories of creation Some look upon creation as the manifestation of the superhuman power of God, vtbhutt, others look upon it as of the same nature as dream and illusion, svapna-maya-svarSpd, others trace it to the will of God tcchS-malram prabhoh srstih Still others look upon kala or tune as the source, some look upon creation as intended for the enjoyment of God (bhoga) , still others attribute it to mere sport (krida), but Gaudapada's own view is that creation is the expression of the nature of the Supreme, 'for what desire is possible for Him whose desire 15 always fulfilled 7 '
devasyaisa svabhavo'yam apta-kumasya ka sprka Karika I 6-9
The world is the revelation of God's nature To the question, why does perfect being instead of remaining eternally concentrated in itself suffer the accident of manifesting this world, the answer is that manifesting is of the very nature of God We need not seek a cause or a motive or a purpose for that which is, in its nature, eternally self -existent and free The sole object of the dance of Siva is the dance itself
Introduction
powers. 1 Here mayd is used in the sense in which the Rg Veda employs it, the divine art or power by which the divinity makes a likeness of the eternal prototypes or ideas inherent in his nature Indra is declared to have assumed many shapes by his maya. 1 Maya is the power of I&vara from which the world arises He has made this world, 'formed man out of the dust of the ground and breathed into him a Irving soul.' All the works of the world are wrought by Hrm. Every existence contained in time is ontologically present in creative eternity. The Supreme is both transcendent and immanent. It is the one, breathing breathless, tad ekam, antd avatam. It is the manifest and the unmanifest, vyaktdvyaktdh, the silent and the articulate, iabddiabddh. It is the real and the unreal, sad-asat,3 While the world is treated as an appearance in regard to pure being, which is indivisible and immutable, it is the creation of I&oara who has the power of manifestation. Maya, is that which measures out, moulds forms in the formless. God has control
' III 10 This power or Sahti is contained in the Supreme as oil in oilseeds
itvecchayS para iaklih hva-taltvaikatam gala Jatah pansphuraly Sdau sarge iatlam Mad tva The power is Sakii or Maya. We speak in inadequate ways when we speak of Sakh as Maya Narada tells Rama m the Devi Bhagavaia, that this power is eternal, primeval, and everlasting
Srnu rama sada nitya iakiir adya sanaiani. Nothing is able to stir without its aid:
tasyah iakttth vtna ko'pi spanditum na ksamo bhavel. When we distinguish the creation, preservation and dissolution in the wrm of Brahma, Vtsnu and £iva, then: power is also this Sakti: mstioh palana-iakiis sa karir-iaktth ptltir mama ntdrasya nSia-iaktts sa y, Ivanya-iaktth para itva.
ine energy of everyone is a part of the divine SaHt The Supreme with « power created the creator Brahma, puroam santsrjya brahmadtn
in regard to Rama and Sita, Slta becomes Sakti In the Sila U. she « said to be mCtla-prakrto
V'\l ha ^ va ^}^yamu1a^ahrit-samjiiUS. is non e P evi V- Durga's name is accounted for. 'Beyond whom there B called Dnrga. Because she saves from crisis therefore she a caued Dorga '
yasyah parataram r.asti, satsa durga prdktritia 1 irr attrgal samirayate yasmad devi durgeti kathyate.
j?v 4 V 8:seeBUIL 5 19. *- vx 5 7-MU.II. 2 1 PraSnaU 5 6.
The Principal Upamsads
of maya, he is not subject to it If God were subject to maya. he would not be infinite supreme existence Any being compelled to manifest itself is not free Isvara has m him the power of manifestation, non-manifestation and other-manifestation, kartum, a-kartum, anyatha-kartum Brahman is logically prior to Isvara who has the power of manifestation, and takes him over into His transcendental being when He is not manifestmg His nature
This dual nature of the Supreme provides the basis for the reality of personality in God and man, and so for authentic religious experience This world, far from being unreal, is intimately connected with the Divine Reality This complex evolving universe is a progressive manifestation of the powers of the Supreme Spirit from matter to spiritual freedom, from anna to ananda The purpose of the cosmic evolution is to /reveal the spirit underlying it God lives, feels and suffers m every one of us, and m course of time His attributes, knowledge, beauty and love will be revealed m each of us
When the Katha Upamsad says that the Supreme Lord experiences the results of deeds, 1 it suggests that we are the images and likenesses of God, and when we experience the results of our deeds, He does also There is an intimate con- nection between God and the world of souls *
Deussen holds that the idealistic monism of Yajnavalkya is the mam teaching of the Upamsads and the other doctrines of theism, and cosmogonism are deviations from it caused by the inability of man to remain on the heights of pure speculative thought The view which regards the universe as actually real, the Atman as the universe which we know, and the theistic developments are said to be departures from the exalted idealism of Yajnavalkya It is not necessary to look upon the theism emphasised m the Katha and the Svetasvatara Upamsads
• I 3 i
1 Cp Angelus Silcsius 'I know that without me God cannot live an instant '
Eckhart 'God needs me as much as I need him '
Lad> Julian 'We are God's bliss, for in us He enjoyeth without end ' When Pascal states that Jesus Chnst will be in agony till the end of the world, he means that there is a side to God, the temporal, where he suffers m ctezy innocent man who is persecuted and tortured
Introduction
as a declension from the pure monistic idealism It is m the direct line of development of Upamsad thought
The Absolute is not a metaphysical abstraction or a void of silence It is the absolute of this relative world of manifesta- tion What is subject to change and growth in the world of becoming reaches its fulfilment m the world of the Absolute. The Beyond is not an annulling or a cancellation of the world of becoming, but its transfiguration The Absolute is the life of this life, the truth of this truth
If the world were altogether unreal, we cannot progress from the unreal to the Real If a passage is possible from the empirical to the Real, the Real is to be found m the empirical also The ignorance of the mind and the senses and the apparent futilities ^ of human life are the material for the self-expression of that Being, for its unfolding. Brahman accepts world existence The Ultimate Reality sustains the play of the world and dwells in it <f That is why we are able to measure the distance of the things of the world from the Absolute and evaluate their grades of being 1 There is nothing in this world which is not lit up by God Even the material objects which lack the intelligence to discover the nature of the divine ground of their being are the emanations of the creative energy of God and they are able to reveal to the discerning eye the divine within their material frames What is not possible for inanimate and non-rational beings is open to the rational human being He can attam to a knowledge of the divine ground of his being He is not coerced into it, but has to attain it by the exercise of his choice The mchangeableness of the Supreme does not mean that the universe is a perfectly articulated mechanism m which every- thing is given from the beginning The world is real as based on Brahnan-, it is unreal by itself
Cosmic existence partakes of the character of the real and the
equ^f ^ Bernar d 'God -who, in his simple substance, is all everywhere than f ' nevertne ^ ess . m efficacy, is in. rational creatures in another way than 1 n tff^h 1011 ^* an( * ln g00t * ratlonal creatures in another way is m irrational creatures m such a way as not to comiitt* j j ded by them - b y a11 rational ones, however, he can be comnrlvjT, trough knowledge, but only by the good is he to be comprehended also through love ■
The Principal Upant sads
unreal It is aspiring to become completely real 1 The Chandogya Upamsad rejects the view that the world was originally a-sat or non-being, and from it all existence was produced * It affirms 'In the beginning this world was ]ust being, one only without a second '3
y The Supreme is described as a kavt, a poet, an artist, a maker or creator, not a mere mutator Even as art reveals man's wealth of life, so does the world reveal the immensity of God's life The
I Brahma Sutra refers to the creation of the world as an act of hild, play, the joy of the poet, eternally young
If immutability is the criterion of reality, then the world of manifestation has no claim to reality Change is the pervading feature of the world Changing things imply non-existence at the beginning and non-existence at the end * They are not constantly present Mortality is imprinted on all beings who are subject to birth, decay, dissolution and death This very planet will decline and dissolve While change is the mark of the relative world, this changing world reaches its fulfilment in the Absolute What is incomplete m the relative world of becoming is completed in the absolute world of being
Maya is also used for prakrh, the objective principle which the personal God uses for creation All nature, even in the lowest, is in ceaseless movement, aspiring to the next higher stage, of which it is itself an image or lower manifestation Prakrh, not-self, matter all but cast out from the sphere of being, is tending feebly to get back to the self, receives form and is thus linked up with Absolute Bemg Even matter is Brahman 5 Prakrit by itself is more a demand of thought than a fact of existence Even the lowest existence has received the impress of the Creative Self It is not utter non-existence Abso-
» Cp Vakya-sudha
ash bh&H priyam rupam nama cely amia-paHcakam Sdyam trayam brahma-ritpam jagad-ritpam ato dvayam
"VI 21 3 VI 2 2 sad-aspadam sarvam sarvalra S
4 Sdav ante ca yan nasli vartamane 'pi tat tatha Gaudapada KurikcL
Milarepa, the Tibetan mystic says 'All worldly pursuits end in dispersion, buildings in destruction, meetings in separation, births in death '
5 annam brahmch vyajanSt T U. Ill
Introduction
lute non-being is non-existent. It is impossible in a world which flows freely from the bounty of being Prakrtt is called non- being It is not strictly correct. This description indicates its distance from being. It is the ultimate possibility on the side of descent from the Divine, almost non-being, but not utter non-being.
While prakrtt is said to be the maya of God, its forms seem to us individual souls to be external to us. It is the source of our ignorance of its real nature.
While the world is created by the power of maya of livara, the individual soul is bound down by maya in the sense of mdya, or ignorance The manifestation of Primordial Being is also a concealment of His original nature. The self-luminous moves about clothed in the splendours of the cosmic light which are not His real nature We must tear the cosmic veil and get behind the golden brightness which Savitr has diffused The Upanisad says 'Two birds, inseparable friends cling to the same tree. One of them eats the sweet fruit, the other looks on without eatmg. On the same tree man sits, grieving, immersed, bewildered by bis own impotence (an-Ua) But when he sees the other lord (&«), contented and knows his glory, then his grief passes away '* We mistake the multiplicity for ultimate reality. If we overlook the unity, we are lost in ignorance
When we get to the concept of prakrtt we are in the realm of Btranya-garbha. The similes employed by the Upamsads, salt and water, fire and sparks, spider and thread, flute and sound assume the existence of an element different from being Into the original stillness of prakrti, Btranya-garbha or Brahma sends sound, nada-brahma By his ecstatic dance the world evolves. This is the meaning of the symbol of Nafa-rdja. His dance is not an illusion It is a timeless fact of the Divine Reality The forms are manifestations of the Real, not arbitrary inventions out of nothing. Form, rupa, is the revelation of the formless a-rupa. «a»w, name, is not the word by which we describe the object' out it is the power or the character of reality which the form of a thing embodies The Infinite is nameless for it includes au names The emphasis right through is on the dependence of
» S.U. IV 6 and 7.
The Principal Upamsads
the world on Brahman The relative rests in the Absolute There can be no echo without a noise The world is not self- explanatory, it is not the cause of itself It is an effect The lia Upamsad indicates that the basic reality is the One, and the derivative and dependent reality is the many 1 When the Kena Upamsad says that Brahman is the mind of mind, the life of life, it does not assert the unreality of mind and life, but affirms the inferiority, the incompleteness of our present existence All that we find in the world is an imperfect representation, a divided expression of what is eternally in the Absolute Being
The world depends on Brahman, and not Brahman on the world 'God is the dwelling-place of the universe, but the uni- verse is not the dwelling-place of God' is a well-known Rabbmic dictum The world of experience with its three states of waking, dream and deep sleep is based on the subject-object relation This duality is the principle of all manifestation The objects are perceived in both dream and waking and the distinction of seer and seen is present m both The world of manifestation is dependent on the Absolute The Absolute Spirit which transcends the distinction between the subject and the object is logically prior to the manifested world 1 The world is a process of becoming, it is not being
The Upamsads make it clear that the waking state and the dream state are quite distinct The objects of the dream state are illusory, not so those of waking experience "There are no chariots in that state (of dreaming), no horses, no roads He himself creates chariots, horses, roads '3 Imaginary objects exist only during the time we imagine them, kalpana-kala, but factual objects exist not only when we perceive them but also when we do not perceive them, bahyas ca dvaya-kalah* The spatio-temporal order is a fact, not a state of mmd or a phase of consciousness
Avtdyd is mentioned in the Upamsads as the source of delusion The Katlia Upamsad speaks -of people living in ignorance and thinking themselves wise, who move about wandering m search of reality, like blind men following the
1 4 and 5 1 See Gaudapada Kanka on Ma U II 4 and 5
3 B U IV 3 9 and 10. * $ on Mandttkya Ranks II 14
Introduction
blind If they had lodged themselves in vidya, wisdom, instead of avidya, ignorance, they would easily have seen the truth 1 The Chandogya Upamsad distinguishes between vidya or knowledge which is power and avidya. or ignorance which is impotence 4 While maya. is more cosmic in significance, avidya is more subjective We are subject to avidya when we look upon the multiplicity of objects and egos as final and funda- mental Such a view falsifies the truth It is the illusion of ignorance. The world of multiplicity is out there, and has its place, but if we look upon it as a self-existing cosmos, we are making an error.3 While the world process reveals certain possibilities of the Real, it also conceals the full nature of the Real Avidya breeds selfishness and becomes a knot m the heart which we should untie before we can get possession of the Self in the recesses of our heart 4 The Prahia Upamsad tells us that we cannot reach the world of Brahman unless we have shaken off the crookedness in us, the falsehood (anrtam) in us, the illusion (maya) in us 5
The world has tie tendency to delude us into thinking that it is all, that it is self-dependent, and this delusive character of the world is also designated maya. m the sense of avidya. When we are asked to overcome maya, it is an injunction to avoid worldhness Let us not put our trust in the things of this world. Maya, is concerned not with the existence of the world but with its meaning, not with the factuality of the world but with the way in which we look upon it
There are passages in the Upanisads which make out that the world is an appearance, vacdrambhanam vikdro ndmadheyam, while Reality is pure bemg. There are others which grant reality to the world, though they maintain that it has no reality apart from Brahman Sarnkara tells us that the former is the true teaching of the Upanisads, while the latter view is put forward only tentatively as a first step in the teaching to be later
" Kaiha I 2. 4. 5 * I 1 1
3 Ma y* 13 viewed as the power that makes for delusion 1 I0 ' wSi co mohartha-vacanah yai ca prapana-vacdkah tarn prapayah ya mtyam, sS maya pankirttta <MTJ it T t Brahma-vaivariaPuranaXKVIl.
' • i1,1 - 10 sr. 16
go
The Principal Upanisads
withdrawn The reality conceded to the world is not ultimate It is only empirical
If we keep in mind the fourfold character of the Supreme, we shall avoid confusion in regard to the status of the world If we concentrate attention on Brahman, the Absolute, we feel that the world is not independent of Brahman but rests m Brahman The relationship between the two cannot be logically articu- lated If we turn to the personal livara, we know that the world is the creation of Brahman and not its organic expression The power of creation is called maya If we turn to the world process which is a perpetual becoming, it is a mixture of being and non-being, sat and asat, the divine principle and prakrtt Hiranya-garbha and his world are both subject to tune, and should be distinguished from the eternal But the temporal becoming is by no means false
As to why the Supreme has this fourfold character, why it is what it is, we can only accept it as the given reality It is the ultimate irrationality in the sense that no logical derivation of the given is possible It is apprehended by us in spiritual con- sciousness, and accounts for the nature of experience in all its aspects It is the only philosophical explanation that is possible or necessary
Jiva is literally, 'that which breathes,' from jiv 'to breathe ' It referred originally to the biological aspect of man's nature which goes on throughout life, m waking, dream and sleep It is called purusa in the sense of pun-iaya or 'that which dwells in the citadel of the heart ' This means that the biological serves the ends of another, the soul or psyche 'It is this soul which reaps the fruits of deeds and survives the death of the physical body It is the bhoktr, the enjoyer, hartr, the doer 1 It is the vijMna-tnaya atma The jiva consists of a material body, the
» See Praina IV 9 Kafka I 3 4
Introduction 91
principle of breath {prdna), regulating the unconscious activi- ties of the individual, and the principle of conscious activities {manas) which uses the five sensory organs (indnyas) of sight, hearing, touch, smell and taste and the five organs of action, viz speech, hands, feet, excretory and generative organs. All these are organised by vijndna or buddhi. The basis of the indi- viduality of the ego is vijndna or intelligence which draws round itself mind, life and body. 1 The ego belongs to the relative world, is a stream of experience, a fluent mass of life, a centre round which our experiences of sense and mind gather. At the back of this whole structure is the Universal Consciousness, Atman, which is our true being.
The human individual is a complex of five elements, anna, pram, manas, mjMna and ananda. The Highest Spirit which is the ground of all being, with which man's whole being should get united at the end of his journey, does not contribute to his self-sense. Life and matter are organised into the gross physical body, sthula-ianra, mind and life into the subtle body, suksma-farira, intelligence into the causal body, karana-iarira and Atman, the Universal Self is the supreme being sustaining the others The ego is the manifestation of the Universal Self using memory and moral being which are changing formations. Purusa is sometimes used for the Atman which is higher than buddht Buddhi belongs to the objective hierarchy of being Purusa is the subjective light of consciousness that is reflected in all beings
The natural sciences, physics and chemistry, anatomy and Physiology, psychology and sociology treat man as an object of inquiry. They show that man is a link in the chain of living Jemgs, one among many He has a body and a mind which belong to him, but his self is not derived from any of these, tnough it is at the root of them all All empirical causalities and
be!n£ P Tn He i W * ° lm ? WS more and more clearl y ^ **** stains fuller Thfi «»m « trees sa P onl y K seen > m aiun »als consciousness
mtelWr 1 .^ 6 , 311(1 more clear m man for he 18 most endowed with the S b l to0ws to - morr °w. he knows the world and what is not As for «Lm ^ v morfaI he desures the immortal, being thus endowed num«twf \ Ung f and thust com V^ their knowledge But this tafo Vvo^V 8 , above all-the world Whatever he reaches he desires u E° Beyond it ' Axtareya Aranyaka II 1 3
The Principal Upam?ads
biological processes of development apply to his outer being, but not to his self The physical, the biological, the psychological and the logical aspects are aspects of his nature, his koias, as the Taitttriya Upanisad calls them There are great possibilities of empirical investigation, but man is more than what he knows about himself
The ego is a unity of body, life, mind and intelligence It is not a mere flux, as some early Buddhists and Hindus thought. Intelligence which is the unifying principle gives us the ego- consciousness Memory is one factor which helps to preserve the continuity of the ego which is also influenced by a number of factors which are not present to our memory and are hardly grasped by our surface consciousness The sub-conscious plays a great part in it The nature of the ego depends on the principle of organisation and the experience to be organised As we have an enormous variety of experiences with which we can identify ourselves, an infinite number of objects which we can pursue, fame, career, possessions or power, we have an infinite number of individuals marked out by then: past and present experi- ences, their education and environment What we are depends on what we have been The ego is a changing formation on the background of the Eternal Being, the centre round which our mental and vital activities are organised The ego is perpetually changing, moving up and down, up towards union with the divine godhead or down to the fiendish extremes of selfishness, stupidity and sensuality The self-transcending capacity of the pva is the proof that it is not the limited entity it takes itself to be
The hierarchies of existence and value correspond The order of phenomena which has the lowest degree of reality in the existential scale has the lowest degree of value m the ethical or spmtual scale The human individual is higher than the animal, plant or mineral
What is the relation of the Universal Self to the individual selves? Different views are held on the matter 3amkara believes that the Universal Self is identical with the individual self The individual self is eternally one with and also different from the Universal Self, says Ramanuja The individual self is
Introduction 93
eternally different from the Universal Self according to Madhva. 1 When the soul is said to be an am&a or fragment of the Divine mind, it is to indicate that it is subsequent to the Divine mind, as a recipient of the Divine idea. The souls therefore serve as matter for the Divine Forms. This is the truth indicated in the Samkhya theory of the multiplicity of selves Though the self is one in all, in the manifested world, there is an amia, fragment, part or ray of the self which presides over the movements of our personal lives through the ages. This persistent divine form is the real individuality which governs the mutations of our being This is not the limited ego, but the Infinite Spirit reflecting itself in our personal experience. We are not a mere flux of body, life and mind thrown on the screen of a Pure Spirit which does not affect us in any way. Behind this flux there is the stable power of our being through which the Infinite Spirit manifests itself. The Divine has many modes of mani- festation, and at many levels, and the fulfilment of the purposes of these modes constitutes the supreme scope of the eternal kingdom In the world of manifestation the ground of created being is God's idea of it, which, because it is divine, is more real than the creature itself. The soul, therefore, represents an idea of the divine mind, and the different souls are the members of the Supreme. The soul draws its idea of perfection from the Divine Creator who has given it existence. The soul's substantial existence derives from the Divine mind, and its perfection consists in the vision of the Divine mind, in its effectuating thedivine pattern for it in its consciousness and character.
There does not seem to be any suggestion that the individual egos are unreal They all exist only through the Self and have no reality apart from It. The insistence on the unity of the T^? e Sdf M th& constitutive reality of the world and of the ^dividual souls does not negate the empirical reality of the
indiwrt^?^*"? ° n the ^«. "Mia nSnS-vyapadeiSd anyatha cati (the tC are difiV^V 5 1 th6 W as it i» not taught that
and the tTa , also the contrary), §. indicates that 'the individual
ISTX."**? which h eat » the same (notmth- ttatToiTtL^ J£?^ a Z! ^^fhable from fire)' and concludes mearuneof™^! 2 doctlmes of difference and non-difierence the ^""ng 01 participation, amiatva, follows.' S.B II. 3 43
The Pnncvpal Upamsads
latter The plurality of individual souls is admitted by the Upamsads The individuals do not resolve themselves m the Universal Absolute so long as the world of manifestation is functioning The released individuals know themselves as the Self and not as the psycho-physical vehicles which are animated by the Self and so are incarnations of the Self These vehicles are causally determined and are subject to change
The individual is, m a sense, created by God after His own image and in His own likeness, but he has his creaturely form We do not know our own possibilities The individual ego is subject to amdya or ignorance when it believes itself to be separate and different from all other egos The result of this separatist ego-sense, ahamkara, is failure to enter into harmony and unity with the universe This failure expresses itself m physical suffering and mental discord Selfish desire is the badge of subjection or bondage When the individual shakes off this avidya, he becomes free from all selfishness, possesses all and enjoys all 1
The unity of the Self does not make the distinctions of the individual souls irrelevant There is no mixing up of the fruits of action, as the different individual selves are kept distinct by their association with buddhi 1 Our lives become meaningful in so far as they partake of the divine logos The logos is seen m close connection with the logical or rational element in us The Divine Reason is immanent m our reason The ego's possession of intelligence gives it the capacity for moral choice It may either turn to the Indwelling Spirit or pursue the separate interests of the ego It may open itself to the Self or shut itself away from It One leads to light and life, the other to darkness and death We have the seeds of both m us We may live a life controlled by flesh and blood and earth-born intellect or we may lay ourselves open to God and let Him work m us As we choose the one or the other, we are led to death or immortality 3 When
• Cp Boettuus 'In other living creatures, ignorance of self is nature, in man it is vice '
2 bttddhi-bhedena bhoktr-bhed&l S SB II 3 49
3 Cp MB
amrtam catva ntftyut ca dvayam dehe pratisfhitam mrtyur apadyale mokat, satyenapadyate amrtam 'In each human body the two principles of immortality and death are
Introduction 95
we forget our true nature and lose ourselves in the things of the world, we have evil and suffering
Alienation from our true nature is hell, and union with it is heaven There is a perpetual strain in human Me, an effort to reach from the arbitrary into an ideal state of existence. When we divinise our nature, our body, mind and spirit work flawlessly together and attain a rhythm which is rare in life
Without the individual there is neither bondage nor libera- tion The Eternal in His transcendent form as Brahman or cosmic being as livara does not arrive at immortality. It is the individual who is subject to ignorance and who rises to self- knowledge. The self-expression of the Supreme through the individuals will continue until it is completed The Divine possesses always its unity, and Its aim in the cosmic process is to possess it in an infinite experience through many conscious selves So long as we are subject to ignorance, we stand away from God and are immersed in our limited egos. When we rise to self-knowledge, we are taken up mto the Divine Being and become aware of the Infinite, Universal Consciousness in which we live.
INTUITION AND INTELLECT. yIDYA (KNOWLEDGE) AND AVIDYA (IGNORANCE)
If buddht, vyMna, intelligence, has its being turned towards the Universal Self it develops intuition or true knowledge, Wisdom. But ordinarily, intelligence is engaged in discursive reasoning and reaches a knowledge which is, at best, imperfect, t toough the processes of doubt, logic and skilful demonstration u reflects on the data supplied by manas or the sense-mind with ts knowledge rooted in sensations and appetites At the intellectual level we grope with an external vision of things, bte ?L eCtS are extrmsicall y opposed to one another. We are its ' h ♦ eiTOr Znd capacity. Integral knowledge possesses is o°f? v truly and securel y- Nothing is external to it. Nothing ^ otner than itself Nothing is divided or in conflict within its
0 The Principal Upant$ads
all-comprehensive self-awareness It is the means of knowledge and knowledge itself
Intuitive knowing is immediate as distinct from the discursive and mediate knowledge It is more immediate than sensory intuition, for it overcomes the distinction between the knower and the known which subsists in sense-intuition It is the perfect knowledge, while all other knowledge is incomplete and imperfect m so far as it does not bring about an identification between subject and object All other knowledge is indirect and has only symbolic or representative value The only generally effective knowledge is that which penetrates into the very nature of things But m lower forms of knowledge this pene- tration of the subject into the object is limited and partial Scientific understanding assumes that an object can be known only if it is broken up into its simpler constituents. If anything organic is handled m this manner, its significance is lost By employing intuitive consciousness we know the object with less distortion and more actuality We get close to perceiving the thing as it is
/ Knowledge presupposes unity or oneness of thought and being, a unity that transcends the differentiation of subject and object Such knowledge is revealed in man's very existence 1 It is unveiled rather than acquired Knowledge is concealed in ignorance and when the latter is removed the former mani- fests itself What we are, that we behold, and what we behold, that we are Our thought, our life and our being are uplifted in simplicity and we are made one with truth Though we cannot understand or describe, we taste and we possess. We become new 1 When the beatific vision of Absolute Being has
1 Eckhart says 'God in the fullness of His Godhead dwells eternally in His image (the soul itself) * Rudolf Otto Mysticism East and. West (1932). P "
* Cp Plotinus 'And one that shall know this vision— with what passion of love shall he not be seized, with what pang of desire, what longing to be molten into one witii this, what wondering delight 1 If he that has never seen this Being must hunger for It as for all his welfare, he that has known must love and reverence It as the very Beauty, he will be flooded with awe and gladness stricken by a salutary terror, he loves with a veritable love, with sharp desire, all other loves than this he must despise, and disdain all that once seemed fair ' Enneads E T MacKenna Vol I (1917), p 86
Introduction 97
once dawned on the dazzled beholder, the savour of the phe- nomenal is gone for it is seen to be steeped in the noumenal
The report which the mind and the senses give, so long as they are unenlightened by the spirit in us, is a misleading report. Yet that report is the basis from which we have to proceed What the world and the individual seem to be are a distortion of what they really are, and yet through that distortion we arrive at the reality. Even as the conclusions of common sense are corrected by those of scientific understanding, the conclusions of the latter require to be corrected by the light of the spirit m us The abstractions of the intellect require to be converted into the actuality of spiritual experience and the concrete vision of the soul.
If the real is misconceived as an object of knowledge, it cannot be known. Empirical objects may be known by outer observation or inner introspection But the self cannot divide itself into the knower and the known. Logical reasoning is incapable of comprehending tbe living unity of God and man, the absolute and the relative. Logical incapacity is not evidence of actual hnpossibihty. Reality unites what discursive reason is incapable of holding together. Every atom of life is a witness to the oneness and duality of God and the world. Being can never be objectified or externalised. It is co-inherent and co-existent in man. It is unknowable because we identify existence with objectivity This is true, to a limited extent, of purely external things like tables and chairs. They are net to be reduced to sensations or concepts arising in the knowing mind But spiritual reality is not revealed in the way in which objects of the natural world or principles of logic are appre- hended Yajfiavalkya tells us that the self is its own light when the sun has set, when the moon has set, when the fire is put out, atnmvasya jyohr bhaoati 1 It is our deepest being behind the vestures of body, life, mind and intellect. Objectivity is not the criterion of reality, but the criterion is reabty itself revealed in our very being. We ask for a criterion of knowledge on the assumption of a duality between the knowing subject and the known object. If the object appears alien and impenetrable,
» IV. 3. 3-6.
The Pnticipal Upamsads
then the question of knowing it becomes a problem. But no object can be set in opposition to the spirit and so the question of criterion does not arise True knowledge is an integral creative activity of the spirit which does not know anything external at all For it everything is its own life Here there is identity, possession, absorption of the object at the deepest level Truth m spiritual life is neither the reflection nor the expression of any other reality It is reality itself Those who know the truth become the truth brahma-vid brahmaiva bhavatt It is not a question of having an idea or a perception of the real It is just tie revelation of the real It is the illumination of being and of life itself It is satyam, jfiatum Knowledge and bemg are the same thing, inseparable aspects of a single reality, bemg no longer even distinguishable in that sphere where all is without duality
Where there is duality, there one sees another, hears another We have objective knowledge 1 While vtjMna deals with the world of duality, dnanda implies the fundamental identity of subject and object, non-duality Objectrfication is estrange- ment The objective world is the 'fallen' world, disintegrated and enslaved, in which the subject is alienated from the object of knowledge It is the world of disruption, disunion, alienation In the 'fallen' condition, man's mind is never free from the compulsion exercised by objective realities We struggle to overcome disunion, estrangement, to become superior to the objective world with its laws and determinations
We cannot, however, become aware of the true life m its unity and multiplicity, in its absoluteness and relativity, if we do not free ourselves from the world of divided and isolated objects In the objective world where estrangement and limitations prevail, there are unpenetrable entities, but in the knowledge where we have fullness and boundlessness of life nothing is external, but all is known from withm Intellect moves from object to object Unable to comprehend them all it retains their multiplicity Intellectualknowledge is a scattered, broken movement of the one undivided infinite life which is all-possessing and ever satisfied Intuitive knowing is un-
» B U. II. 4. 14
Introduction 99
imprisoned by the divisions of space, successions of time or sequences of cause and effect. Our intellectual picture is a shadow cast by the integral knowledge which possesses the object truly and securely
Reality is a fact, and facts are apprehended by intuition, whether perceptual or non-perceptual The divine primordial reality is not a fact of the empirical world, and yet as the central spiritual fact we must have a direct apprehension of it Our logical knowledge can give us indirect approximation to it but not a direct grasp of it. 1 The seers of the Upamsads not only have deep vision but are able to translate their visions into intelligible and persuasive speech. They can do so only through hints and images, suggestions and symbols, for they are not susceptible of adequate expression.
The Upanisads distinguish between a-pard vidya, lower knowledge and para vidya or higher wisdom While the former gives us knowledge of the Vedas and the sciences, the latter helps us to gain the knowledge of the Imperishable * The first principle disguises itself.3 In the Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad, the self is seen as the reality of reality 4 The reality of the world is the empirical; the true reality is the atman, the self which the empirical reality conceals A distinction is made between the taiower of texts and the knower of the self in the Chandogya Ufmtais Svetaketu cannot understand the question of
unwl+fc 0 ^ Smitl1 ' the Platomst. 'Jejune and barren speculations may lovetyfact ' atUrCS ° f Truth ' s ga™ 1611 * fc ut t^ey cannot discover her WiLham La W wites 'To find or know God in reality by any outward evident" ^ ^ytkmg but by God Himself made manifest and self- neith«:^/ OU ' ^ never 06 y° ur case either here or hereafter If For anv oth«° ' T heaven ' nor heU ' nor ti» devd - nor the flesh, can be and m? n ,w e J ai0wable m you or by yo«. t™t by their own existence thas w7° n ™ vou - ^ aU pretended knowledge of any of these witkn °, nd ^ nd wrttout this self-evident sensibility of their birth liEhtthVt sudl fcKwledge of them as the blind man hath of the ' Mtt t never entered "ito b™ ' Mere book knowledge is of no
use.
^wrfafte hkkm vidya yena sundan japyate nadhir na jayate tasya kalpa-koft-iatair apt
3 R V X «r . » Saf-karma-dipika ^ v. x 81 1 4 I 6 3, II. 1 20 , II 4 7-9. 5 VII. 1. 2-3.
ioo The Principal Upanisads
rebirth, despite much Vedic learning The Taiihriya Upam$ad reduces the knowledge of the Vedas to an inferior position by assigning it to tnano-maya (mind-made) self which has to be surmounted before final truth is attained 1 The self is perceived, according to the Katha Upanisad, not by logical reason but by spiritual contemplation, adhy&ima-yoga * The real is not attained by force of intellect or by much learning but is revealed to the aspirant whose will is at rest in Him 3 We realise God by the clarity of lUumination. jndna-prasadena 4
The Brhad-aranyaka Upam§ad teaches that, while those who put their trust in the intellect cannot attam to a knowledge of Brahman, yet there is an apprehension of His being by those who are childlike.5 BdVya includes humility, receptivity or teachableness and an earnest search The writer asks us to give up the pnde of learning, pdnditya. A self-denial which includes our intellectual pnde and power is demanded Purity of intellect is different from congestion of it To attain purity of vision, we require a childlike nature which we can get by tranquillising the senses, simplifying the heart and cleaning the mind
It is through quietening the strivings of the will and the empirical intellect that the conditions are realised for the revelation of the Supreme m the individual soul 'Therefore having become calm, subdued, quiet, patiently enduring and collected, one sees the Self just in the self ' 6
Even as we have an intellectual discipline for the theoretical understanding of the world, we have a moral and spiritual discipline for the direct apprehension of truth Even as we cannot understand the art of swimming by talking about it and can learn it only by getting into the water and practising swimming, so also no amount of theoretical knowledge can serve as a substitute for the practice of the life of spirit We can know God only by becoming godlike To become godlike is to become aware of the light in us, by returning consciously to the divine centre within us, where we have always been without our knowing it. Detachment (vairagya) is the essential
1 II 3 * II 12 3 Ka}ha II 20 and 23
5 III 5 See also Subala V 13, ' BU IV 4 23
Introduction
means for the attainment of wisdom (ffiana).* Only the pure in heart can see God.
We must cultivate a religious disposition. God is revealed only to those who believe that He is s When in doubt, later tradition asks us to give the benefit of the doubt to the theist. For if there is no God, there is no harm in believing in Him; if there is, the atheist would suffer.3 Faith, as trust in the universe, in its rehabihty, in its essential soundness and decency, is the starting-point of spiritual development.
Spiritual inclination is essential for the pursuit of spiritual life. In the Brhai-aranyaka. Upamsad, Yajnavalkya offers to divide all his earthly possessions between his two wives, Katyayani and Maitreyi. The latter asks whether the whole world filled with wealth can give her life eternal. Yapavalkya says: 'No, your life will be just like that of people who have plenty of things, but there is no hope of life eternal through wealth.' Maitreyi spurns the riches of the world remarking, r What shall I do with that which will not make me immortal?' Yajfiavalkya recognises the spiritual fitness of his wife and teaches her the highest wisdom
Ethical preparation is insisted on. If we do not abstain from wrong-doing, if we are not composed in our rninds, we cannot attain to spiritual wisdom.4 Our moral being must be purged <h all evil The Svetasvatara Upamsad tells tis that we should c kanse our natures to reach the goal, since even a mirror can reflect an image properly only if it is cleansed of its impurities.s we must renounce selfish desire, surrender material possessions, oecome bereft of egotism. The path is 'sharp as the edge of a and hard to cross, difficult to tread.'«
wri» T Chet Wh ° haS attained fl« goal may help the aspiring °;~ T ™ a b has not only to be demonstrated but also com- JMMcated. It is relatively easy to demonstrate a truth, but it t com mumcated only by one who has thought, willed and
Iedee to ^^ addmam 3? 6 ' which compares detachment and know- ^CeJw^* 11 ^ ^dispensable for the soul, if it should
' J&ftTS^ 4 t0 lte eternal iome of freedom and peace.*
, "I™ 11 6 12 and 13 v
«ffi 2 ,f unil '5 ^ n 14-15
1 3 *4 » CU.IY 9 3 Katkal. 2 &4
The Principal Upam$ads
. felt the truth Only a teacher can give it with its concrete
quality He that has a teacher knows, acaryavan puruso veda »
Only he must be a proper teacher who embodies truth and
tradition Only those who have the flame in them can stir
the fire in others
The individual should develop the habit of introversion, of
abstracting from the outside world and looking within himself
By a process of abstraction we get behind knowing, feeling and
willing to the essential Self, the God within We must silence our
speech, mind and will We cannot hear the voice of the still
spirit in us, so long as we are lost in vain talk, mental rambling
and empty desires The mind must strip away its outer sheaths
in complete detachment, return to its inward quiet and fix
its attention on the essential Self which is the ground and
reality of the whole universe The Mundaka Upani?ad brings
out the need for concentrated attention and undistracted effort 2
An ordered, disciplined training of all our powers, a change of
mind, heart and will is demanded
Several forms of meditation are advised Symbols {pratlka)
are used as supports for meditation We are free to use the
symbols which are most in conformity with our personal
tendencies Meditation on the pranava is suggested in the
Mandukya Upamsad
It is said that the Self cannot be realised except by those
whom the Self chooses 3 Self-realisation is possible through the
grace of the Divine God-vision is the fruit of strenuous effort
and Divine grace 4 Only the Spirit m us can raise us to the
spiritual status The Real, which is the basis of this manifold
world of things and mmds, can be apprehended directly and
immediately only by those who fulfil certain conditions and
submit to the leadings of the spirit We do not so much hold the
idea of the Real as the idea holds us We are possessed by it
Vidya and avidya are two ways of apprehending Reality
■ CU VI 14 a 1 III i 8 3 Katha I 2 23 MU III 2 3 4 Cp St Bernard 'Grace is necessary to salvation, free will equally so, but grace in order to give salvation, free will in order to receive it Therefore we should not attribute part of the good work to grace and part to free will, it is performed in its entirety by the common and inseparable action of both, entirely by grace, entirely by free will, but springing from the first m the second '
Introduction
Both are forms of relative knowledge and belong to the mani- fested universe Knowledge formulated logically is not equiva- lent to a direct and immediate apprehension of the Real. Whatever words we use, whatever concepts we employ, fall short of reality 1 The amibliava is "beyond all manifestation and is complete in itself Vtdya. stresses the harmony and mterconnections of elements which make up the world; avidya the separateness, mutual independence and strife. Vtdya helps us to appreciate intellectually the intelligible ideas about the nature of the Divine ground and the nature of the direct experience of it in relation to other experiences. It indicates the means by which we can attain Brahman. Such a system of theological doctrine points out that there is nothing mtrmsically self-contradictory about the postulate of religion, viz the divine reality, and that it is also empirically verifiable if only we are willing to submit to a discipline. The theological knowledge or vidya is different from the experience or amibhava of it The experience is recorded as a pure and direct intellectual intuition in sruh. When we reflect on the experiences or their records and reduce them to a rational order we have smrti. While the first is the domain of metaphysical principles, the second applies these principles to individual and social conduct Vtdya is nearer the truth than avtdyd
But vtdya is also understood asjnana which is of the essential nature of the Divine Reality. It is then eternal wisdom which B not the knowledge possessed by any individual. It is the wisdom hidden beneath the sheaths of ignorance It is one with the Supreme Self, which is self-evident and needs no proof, wakkrstddha, self-vaM certainty
Though intuitive wisdom is different from knowledge of the «nses or anything we can achieve by logical reflection, it is not emofa C0Dfused ^ occu ttism, obscurantism, or extravagant r °, °° It; B n °t magical insight or heavenly vision, or special nation obtained through supernatural powers. What we
to pr^rt^S 5 ^ 2511 or - ^ centimes later, Thomas Aquinas refused attauied 1 * consideration of truths about God, when once they inaaeona^r apprehension of the Divine Reality, they refer to this u «inacy 0 f verbal or logical expressions.
The Principal Upam$ads
attain by vision, empirical or trans-empincal, belongs to the objective world It is a distinction within the objective world, between the physical and the super-physical, between what we reach by the five senses and a sixth sense Wisdom is pure reason, capacity for fundamental truth It is the possession of the soul or it is the soul that penetrates into its own ground and depth and becomes essential being It springs from it of necessity when it meditates on itself This wisdom is eternal, universal and necessary for Sarhkara It cannot be destroyed though it may be obscured
All the same, the tradition of thought has been strong in the Upamsads We lead up to experience through intellectual knowledge For those who are incapable of integral insight, perception and inference are the only available means 1 Even men of experience do not contradict rational thought, though they go beyond it.
The Upamsads insist on the importance of ethical life 4 They repudiate the doctrine of the self-sufficiency of the ego and emphasise the practice of moral virtues Man is responsible for his acts Evil is the free act of the individual who uses his freedom for his own exaltation It is fundamentally the choice which affirms the finite, independent self, its lordship and acquisitiveness against the universal will Evil is the result of our alienation from the Real If we do not break with evil, we cannot attain freedom 3
' Op t i-pudiys Tor those who cannot see, the reason -which is not m contradiction with the Vedas and the scriptures is the eye ' i rdtt'UistrSvtrodH yas tarhas-ca) <vr a-paiyatum I 137 • MU III 2 < BU IV , 23
J 0>mrr<-ntinF on Kaiha I 2 2-3, R.lmrmuja writes 'This \crse t*-ar 5i»* that meditition which should become more perfect day bj day, earn*: \v rcco-iph'hrd without the dc\otcc having broken with all ' U II I\ 1 13 "Hi- Vc'!™ do not purifj tl.e ethically unworthj ' f-ir x Hr& . ri fs'.iranti \ rduh Vawtha-Dharma-$8slra VI 3
Introduction 105
Man is of the divine race, but he has in him the element 'of non-being, which exposes him to evil As a spiritual being he can burst the revolving circle of nature and become a citizen of another world in unity with Absolute Being who is his creative source. Man is the mediator between God and nature and has to complete the work of creation by the in- carnation of wisdom. He must illumine what is dark and strengthen what is weak in him His entire being should labour to become one with the Divine Our fallen nature, sunk in sin, is felt as contrary to the Real and yet as existent The self feels itself to be in contradiction to all that is supremely real There is the pain of discord between the existent and the Real. In moral life the self feels itself divided against itself. And yet the struggle itself is impossible unless we look upon the desire for the divine and the consciousness of rebellion as belonging to the same self The felt contradiction is possible only through the reality which is above the discord The antithesis between what we wish to be and what we are is implicitly their unity. The divine consciousness and will must become our conscious- ness and will This means that our actual self must cease to be a private self; we must give up our particular will, die to our e S°» by surrendering its whole nature, its consciousness and character to the Divine.*
^ e freedom of the human individual is assumed, though the limitations of karma are mentioned 'He fetters himself by ™nself, as a bird by its nest.'* The freedom of the individual increases to the extent to which he identifies himself with the Absolute in hun, the antar-yamin. If we leave the world after having known the true self, then our life m all worlds is the life °f freedom
Some theistic Upanisads say that the inner power, the «vme, caused the man whom He will lead on high from these worlds to do good works and He causes the man whom He will ead downwards to do evil works 3 In theism the stress is on jjwne providence In the Sveta&afara Upumsad, the Self is QUaI°^ erSeer of all actions, who apportions to each person his 1 aubes, who executes justice, who restrains the evil, allots
vtragah, a Matiri III. z 3 K TJ. III. 8
io6 The Principal Upamsads
good fortune and brings to maturity the actions of the indi- vidual souls 1
The general impression that the Upani§ads require world- demal is not quite correct They insist on a spirit of detachment, vairagya, which is not indifference to the world It is not abandonment of objects but non-attachment to them We do not raise ourselves above the world by contempt for the world It is the spirit of equanimity which is insisted on To be tranqui is to envy no man, to have no possessions that another can take from us, to fear none When the Hindu thinkers ask us to adopt samnydsa or relinquishment of home and possessions, tc accept the three great renunciations, consecrated in the three vows, evangelical counsels of poverty, obedience and chastity, they point to self-denial as the root of spiritual life
Spirit of renunciation does not mean neglect of social duties Samnydsa does not mean that we owe no duties to the world, we free ourselves only from ritualistic duties Rare fruits c spirit npen on the soil of detachment s There is a popular verse which makes out that one should give up attachment, but r one is not capable of it, let him cultivate attachment, only it should be attachment to all 3
We should release ourselves from selfish likes and dislikes The Divine cannot use our mind and body so long as we wish to use them for our own ends 4
Detachment is opposed to attachment, not to enjoyment
» VI ii, i2, 4, V 5ff
a When Ernest Renan described St Francis as 'the one perfect Christian* it was felt to be an exaggeration Hardly anyone else in the Christian world comes so close to the ideal set forth in the Gospels 'He that renounceth not everything that he hath, he cannot be my disciple ' We feel that these demands are excessive and even fantastic We excuse ourselves by saying that Jesus did not mean all that he is reported to have said or that his words were not of general application We make compromises, while St Francis did not allow any compromises 3 tyakiavyo mmna-k&rah, iyaktum yadt iakyate nasatt kartavyo mama-karah kimiu sarvafra hartavyah < Cp St John of the Cross The soul that is attached to anything, however much good there may be in it, will not arrive at the liberty of /divine union For whether it be a strong wire rope or a slender and delicate thread that holds the bird, it matters not, if it really holds it fast, for until the cord be broken the bird cannot fly So the soul, held by the bonds of human affections, however slight they may be, cannot, •while they last, make its way Jo God '
Introduction 107
Enjoy through renunciation is the advice of the ISa. Upanisad. 1 Good and evil do not depend on the acts one does or does not, but on the frame of mind one has. The good man is he who concurs with the divine purpose, and the bad man is he who resists it. If one's mind is good, one's acts will be good. Our attempt should be not «0' iirach external conformity as inward cleansing From goodness of being good will and good works flow 1 When the soul is at peace, the greatest sorrows are borne lightly. Life becomes more natural and confident Changes in outer conditions do not disturb We let our Me flow of itself as the sea heaves or the flower blooms
Work by itself does not give us liberation. It cleanses the mind, purifies the heart and produces the illumination which is the immediate condition of salvation. Samkara argues that the knowledge of Brahman, as it relates to an existent being, cannot be contingent on what a person does or does not 3
Contemplation is the way to cleanse one's mind and heart. It means Test, suspension of mental activity, withdrawal into the intenor solitude m which the soul is absorbed in the fruitful silence of God We cannot stop there; we must overflow with a love that communicates what it knows to others Saints with abundant power and tireless energy work for the transfiguring of men and the changing of the course of secular history. Different methods are suited for different temperaments, and they are all permitted.4
h ' ^l&art tells us 'It is permissible to take life's blessings -with both anas, provided thou dost know thyself prepared in the opposite event to leave them just as gladly'
in = F 0 ^ 41 * 'Men should not think so much of what they ought to holm ^ 0U ^ Lt to be Tmnk not t0 Iav ti" 3 foundation of thy
as bnf Up ° n domg ' but tather u P on bem S For works do not SMlctl fy essenbalT sllould sancbr y the works Whoever is not great in his Rnrtni* ri^ mg TnU ac nieve nothing by works, whatever he may do ' " a!*, Mystiam East and West, p 126
<SeeBG V 5. Vasistha says
n-sSdhyah kasyacid yogah hasyacil jnana-micayah To som tlt ^ am wcarya morgan dvaujagada parameivarah Viewing y< J§ a K "^possible, to others the ascertainment of truth.
Cptt? 004 h3s revealed *"° P aths We w two ^, IMS Monws 'A thing may belong to the contemplative » ways essentially or as a predisposition The moral virtues
io8
The Principal Upanisads
The ethical virtues we are called upon to adopt are mentioned in several passages Life is compared to a sacrifice where the fee shall be asceticism, liberality, integrity, non-injury to We and truthfulness 1 The Tailliriya Vpamsad gives a list of students' duties He should not be negligent of truth, virtue, welfare, prosperity, study and teaching He should perform only those acts which are irreproachable. In case of doubt concerning any act of conduct, the student should follow the practice of those Brahmanas who are competent to judge, apt, devoted, not harsh lovers of virtue In one passage all the virtues are brought together under the three da's which are heard m the voice of the thunder, namely, dama, or self- restraint, dana or self-sacnfice, and daya or compassion Prajd-pati conveys it to the three classes of his creation, gods (dcva), men {jnamtsya) and demons (asura). 1 Samkara makes out that gods have desires (kama), men suffer from greed belong to the contemplative life as a predisposition For the act of contemplation, in which the contemplative life essentially consists, is hindered both by the impetuosity of the passions and by the outward disturbances Now the moral virtues curb the impetuosity of the passions and quel! the disturbance of outward occupations Hence moral virtues belong to the contemplative life as a predisposition ' St Thomas taught there were three vocations, that to the active hie, that to the con- templative and a third to the combination of both and the last is superior to the other two There are statements to the effect that the contemplative life m itself by its very nature is superior to the active lift Vita cortemplania, he remarks, sttrplicttcr est meltor quam acttia for the contemplative life directly and immediately occupies itself with the love of God than which there is no act more perfect or more men- tonoun The contemplative life establishes man in the very heart of all «-p ntual fecunditv When St Thomas admits that the active life can be rtw'c perfect m certain circumstances, he qualifies it a great deal (0 Action will only be more perfect than the joy and rest of contem- p'.ttioi, if it i"! undcrtaVch as the result of an ov erflovv of lov e for God in o**>r to fu'fil His will {u) It is not to be continuous but only an answer to a tenpo-arj emergency (m) It is purely for God's glory, it docs not di-pr*" i<», from contemplation It is an added obligation and we but tc'vt a* icon as we can to the fruitful silence of recollection that oar rouh to the Divine Union
< C V III 17
• Ti h V 2
I" t' " bh"'ti ~'i th'> Lord says that anyone who does not care for \\ - j -op'- vf-n a-e in n?*J of care and simpl\ takes to the worship of G~>' 1 "i eCon r v "U ted
j- t"^r» i3n**u WI*r,'H sar'am Sin-uram iharam h\\ZttZm Ihijixi' fsndhySd, b+au-ary eiajuhott sah
Introduction 109
and demons from anger (krodha). By the practice of the three injunctions we free ourselves from the sway of craving, greed and anger. When the Buddha asks us to put out in our hearts the monstrous fires of infatuation, greed and resent- ment, he is emphasising the three virtues enjoined by the Upanisads.
Duma is self-control. We should reduce our wants and be pre- pared to suffer m the interests of truth. 1 Austerity, chastity, solitude and silence are the ways to attain self-control
Tapas is severe self-discipline undertaken for spiritual ends It is exercised with reference to the natural desires of the body and the distractions of the outer world. It consists of exercises of an inward kind, prayers offered in the heart, self-analysis and outer acts like fasting, self-mortification, sexual abstinence or voluntary poverty Strength is developed by a resisting force. The power gained by resisting one temptation helps us in over- coming the next To evade discipline is to empty life of its significance. Nothing is more tranquil than to be unshaken by the troublous motions of the flesh. Renunciation, nyasa, is superior to tapas or austerity or asceticism. The latter is a means to the former It is not to be made into an end m itself » Ethical
1 The vnse man overcomes anger through mind-control, lust through ™e renunciation of desire. He can attain mastery ovei sleep by develop- ing the quahty of sativa Through steadfastness he should protect the organ _ot generation and the stomach ''With (the help of) the eyes he swu w protect the hands and the feet Through (the power of) mind he ( Protect the eyes and the ears and through conduct he should K£ nUmi mi speech Through constant vigilance he should shed fear ™Q wroughthe service of the wise, he should overcome pride ' krodham iamem jayatt, kSmam samkalpa-varjanat saitva-samsevanSd dhira m&r&m ucchettum arhatt dhflya H&mdaram fakset, pam-padam ca cahsusa esksuh iroiram ca manasa, memo vScam ca harmana, "•pramadad bhayam }ahyad, dambham prajHopasesanUt On Cn f , ,i Brahm^uraitai^ 40-42.
ssimv j Wltil onlv coarse rice as meaTand only plain water «mdSoiBwi y my arm 38 P 5110 ™ 1 I s*Jl tod joy in the midst of these tomstulv aa< * honour acquired contrary to righteousness are ChnuiuJu F? 88 ^ cloud 'Lunyu Pt VIII Ch XV SeeF T. Cheng
the Wh.™ SSF' and others ^o live from their birth to death m Kers °* tte Ganges, do they become yogis >'
Q-ja'tma-maranSniam ca gangadt-iafim-sthuah m Wiiha-maisya-pramukhahyaginas U bhavand fctm?
no The Principal Upamsads
life includes moral uprightness though many minds feel only the need for mechanical ritual
Brahmacarya is not sex-destruction There is no gulf between flesh and spirit, but only between the fallen and the trans- figured flesh Ancient Indian thinkers were of the opinion that the seed within man and woman is intended for the purpose of creating a body by which another soul may come into physical embodiment When thus controlled, brahmacarya helps creative work of every description When the seed is wasted in sex excesses, the body becomes weak and crippled, the face lined, the eyes dull, hearing impaired and the brain inactive If brahmacarya is practised, the physical body remains j'outhful and beautiful, the brain keen and alert, the whole physical expression becomes the image and likeness of the Divme
Maum or silence is advised as leading the soul forward to contemplation 1 By the discipline of silence we curb the ex- cesses which flow from the tongue, heresy, backbiting, flattery We cannot listen to the voice of God when our minds are dissipated, given to restless activity and are filled externally and internally with noise Progress m silence is progress to the realisation of spirit When silence descends on the soul, its activities are joined to the silent creative power of God s
Dana enjoins gifts. It is negatively freedom from greed and positively assistance to those in need 'There is no hope of immortality by wealth '3 Possessiveness is condemned The
' Cp Isaiah 'The tillage of righteousness is silence ' 'In silence and in
hope shall be jour strength.'
> 'While all things were in quiet silence and the night was in the
midst of her course the Word leapt down from heaven * 3 13 U II 4 a Cp Jaldl-UddinRurar
Once the noble Ibrahim, as he sat on his throne,
Heard a clamour and noise of encs on the roof.
Also heavy footsteps on the roof of his palace
He said to himself, 'Whose heavy feet are these?'
He shouted from the window, 'Who goes there?'
The guards, filled with .confusion, bowed their heads, saying,
'It is wc going the rounds in search ' ~~~~
He said. 'What seek ye' 'They said 'Our camels *
He said, '\Vhoc\cr searched for camels on a housetop?'
They said, *\\c follow thj example,
\\ ho scclrest union with God, while sitting on a throne '
Introduction
in
Taittinya U-panisad regulates the art of giving. 1 One should give with faith, one should not give without faith, one should give liberally, with modesty, with fear, with sympathy.
Dayd is karund, compassion. We should try to be at peace with all, abhor all cruelty and ill-will.* Enmity means misunder- standing. A forgiving attitude frees the individuaL We should grudge none, forgive all. So long as we remember an injustice, we have not forgiven either the person or the action. If only we know that there is more suffering than wickedness in the world, we would be kindly. It is by compassion, which shrinks from no sacrifice, that we can overcome the ravages of selfishness. We must be patient God himself is unimaginably patient.3 Tolerance, long suffering, patience are the fruits of spirit.
The ethical individual is required to become like a child.* The perfect man is a divine child, accepting the divine play, without fear or reserve, care or grief, in utter purity. A child is not entangled with things that seem important to grown-ups, Pilose occupations are mainly paltry and whose professions petrified. A child's wise incomprehension is linked with living and is more than defensiveness or disdain. We cannot return to childhood. We have to gain the state which is un- constncted by temporal purpose, but purposeful, a state in which tune and eternity coincide.
When it is said that the Upanisads adopt a spiritual view °j hfe, it does not mean that they despise body, life and mind. The latter are the conditions or instruments for the life of spurt in man They are not ends in themselves, but are means
' I II 2
IBeviBhSgavata says:
«e is no virtue lite compassion and no -vice lite the use of violence. 5 ,j, fayii-samam rtasti punyam, papain kithsa-samam fta hi. . _ . e "^ti God, merciful and gracious, long suffering and abundant
^r^* salvation." 2 Peter m. 15 verted anT? CIitus - ,Tne Kingdom is of the child.' 'Except ye be con- of^S^r ame 3)5 btGe chadrel1 , ye shall not enter into the Kingdom chM» s j. !» J^-ForjVrencras- 'A great man is one who has not lost the BE * beanT^ ^"tache says- 'The] child is innocence and oblivion, a yea-sawr^f; a plav ' a self-rolling wheel, a primal motion, an holy -ajmg Thus Spake Zarathusira X. 2.
H2 The Principal Upam§ads
or opportunities for the expression of the Universal Spirit in us Spirit and life are not to be separated
The ritualistic practices are reinterpreted They are to prepare the mind for spiritual realisation, to spur it on to pierce the veil of the finite and to seek deliverance in identifica- tion with the Supreme Reality If rites are performed without the knowledge of their meaning, they are not only useless but dangerous 1 The presumptuous performer may have his head cut off a He who knows a particular nte and he who knows it not both perform a rite, but when performed with knowledge the act becomes more effective 3 Meditation on the meaning of the sacrifice sometimes took the place of the actual sacrifice 'Suppose,' Janaka asks Yajnavalkya, 'you had no milk or nee or barley to perform the fire-saenfice, agmkotra, with what would you sacrifice ? ' 'With the fruits of trees and whatever herbs there were ' 'If there were none?' 'Then with water ' 'If there were no water?' 'Then, indeed, there would be nothing here, yet, this would be offered, the truth in faith '4 When the heart is fully persuaded, there is little sense of sacrifice Sacrificial life becomes a natural manifestation of the new spirit Self-conscious sacrifice, with its burden of self-nghteousness and expectation of reward, is not of much use 5
The caste divisions are mentioned in some of the Upamsads 6 They did not, however, harden into a rigid social system In the Chandogya Upantsad five learned Brahmanas who approach Uddalaka Arum for instruction in regard to Vaisvanara Atman are taken by him to King Asvapati Kaikeya, who .gives them instruction after first demonstrating the imperfections of their views Ajatasatru of Kasi teaches Gargya Balaki the nature of Brahman, after pointing out the defects of the twelve views
' CU V 24 i 1 CU I 8,1 io-ii 3 CU I i-ro
4 Salapatha Brahmana XI 3 1
5 Yahueh says (Amos V ai) 'I hate, I despise your feast days, and I will not dwell m your solemn assemblies Though ye offer me burnt offerings and your meat offerings, I will not accept them, neither will I regard the peace offerings of your fat beasts Take thou away from me the noise of thy songs, for I will not hear the melody of thy viols '
Again Yahweh speaks (Hosea VI 6) 'For I desired mercy, and not sacrifice, and the knowledge of God more than burnt offerings ' * B U I 4 15
Introduction 113
which Gaigya Balaki sets forth. AjataSatru observes that it is not usual for a Brahmana to approach a Ksatriya for instruc- tion The doctrine of rebirth is taught by Pravahana Jaivali to Arum with the remark that the Brahmanas had never before had this knowledge. 1 Among the students of the Upani§ads is Satyaklma, of unknown origin, whose mother Jabala could not tell who his father was.*
The four &£ramas or stages of life are recognised. While the usual rule is that one has to pass through successive stages of life, exceptions are permitted. Jabah Upani^ad asks us to renounce whenever we feel a call to it. Besides, even in a house- holder's stage one can attain spiritual freedom.?
Until we negate the ego and get fixed in the Divine Ground w are bound to the endless procession of events called samsara.4 The principle which governs this world of becoming is called karma. There are moral and spiritual laws as well as physical
' ?? t a ??° K U I, -where the teacher is the King Citra Gangyayani.
V'U IV 4
vrhJh ^ B1 * s 8 avata Pwana it is said that a house is no prison for one m controlled his senses, delights in spirit and is eager for knowledge ptendnyas atmarater budhasya » v. grhSiramah htm tu karoly avadyam
wninavagupta says that Smiu and smrtts hold that he who has right a J^ ns salvatl0a «i all stages of life and quotes. 'He that devotMi, TTv establish ed himself in the knowledge of truth, attends a house Zm performs ntes > offers he K liberated though
toflts^SamHSjrt sarvesv Siramesu muknr ih smSrtesu irutau ca yathohtam aevSrcana-ratas tattvayffiwismsfho'tithv-priyah 1 Cn fi ,J rSidham kftob dadad dravyam grhastho' pi ht mucyate to emulate ™ S l i." w ' flftww °fPMosopky The temporal world seems itself towLf ^ * wlucil rt cannot fully obtain or express, tying ^ a Presence ! wfcif F 18861156 tb** 8 is in this exiguous and fleeting moment, Sives to Ju ! ' Slnce lt cames a certain image of that abiding presence, BuTho 1 ? ay P artake °* it the quality of seeming to have W- and «n could not A undertook an infinite journey of
Pfemtude >?^, < ^ ne ^ P 888 ^t- ^ S^S, it continued that life, whose 11 «"»ld not comprehend by staying '
H4 The Principal Upamsads
laws If we neglect the laws of health, we injure our health, if we neglect the laws of morality, we wreck our higher life Any rational conception of the universe, any spiritual con- ception of God requires us to recognise the utter and unques- tionable supremacy of law in shaping our conduct and character
The law of Karma is not external to the individual The judge is not without but within The law by which virtue brings its triumph and ill-doing its retribution is the unfolding of the law of our being 1 The world order is a reflection of the Divine Mind The Vedic gods were regarded as the maintainers of the order, rta of the world They were the guardians of rta God, for the Svetasvatara Upam&ad, is the ordainer of karma, karmadhyak$ah, God is law as well as love 2 His love is through law The working of karma is wholly dispassionate, just, neither cruel nor merciful Though we cannot escape from the workings of this principle, there is hope, for if man is whaf\he has made himself, he may make himself what he will Even the soul m the lowest condition need not abandon all hope If we miss the right path, we are not doomed to an eternity of suffering There are other existences by which we can grow into the knowledge of the Infinite Spirit with the complete assurance that we will ultimately arnve there If there is a fundamental difference between Christianity .and Hinduism, it is said that it consists in this, that while the Hindu to whatever school he belongs believes m a succession of lives, the Christian believes that 'it is appointed to men once to die, but after this the judgment '3
1 Cp the words of a fine fragment of the lost Melamppe of Euripides Dream you that men's misdeeds fly up to Heaven And then some hand inscribes the record of them Upon God's tablets, and God, reading them. Deals the world justice ' Nay, the vault of Heaven Could not find room to write the crimes of earth, Nor God himself avail to punish them Justice is here on earth, had ye but eyes
» Cp St Paul 'Behold therefore the goodness and seventy of God Romans XI 22
3 John McKenzie Two Religions (1950), p 112 Some Western philosophers and early Christian theologians accept the principle of rebirth
Introduction 115
Belief in rebirth has persisted, at any rate, from the time of the Upamsads It is a natural development from the views of the Vedas and the Brahmanas and receives articulate expression in the Upamsads 1 After mentioning the dispersal of the mem- bers of the human body at death— the eye of man goes to the stin, the breath to the wind, speech to fire, the mind to the moon, the ear to the quarters of heaven, the body to the earth, the soul to the ether, the hair to the plants and trees, the blood and seed to the waters — Yajriavalkya is asked as to what remains of the individual He takes the questioner apart, discusses with him in secret about the nature of work. In truth, ^ a man becomes good by good works and evil by evil works * Oar lives incarnate our characters
The future of the soul is not finally determined by what it has felt, thought and done m this one earthly life. The soul has chances of acquiring merit and advancing to life eternal Until the union with the timeless Reality is attained, there will be some form of life or other, which will give scope to the mdividual soul to acquire enlightenment and attain life eternal Even as non-being is only an abstract lower limit of the existential order, absolute evil is also such a lower limit. Non-being, if it existed in itself diametrically opposed to being, would be completely destroyed Such non-being is non-existent. Therefore as every existent thing has the form of the Divine, it has also the promise of good.
The Upanisads give us detailed descriptions of the manner in which a man dies and is bom again.3 The transition is illus- trated by certain examples. As a grass-hopper, when it has come to the end of a blade of grass, finds another place of support, and then draws itself towards it, similarly this self, after reaching «e end of this body, finds another place of support and then tows himself towards it. As a goldsmith, after taking a piece « gold, gives it another, newer and more beautiful shape, sHnuarly does this self, after having thrown off this body, and ^Peued ignorance, take another, newer and more beautiful rm ' Wnet he* it be of the manes, or demigods or gods or of ' BinKj 16 3 iaia P<*ll>tiBrahmanaI.5 3 4 ,X 3 3 8 'SeeBTJ.IV.3 37-38, IV 4 1-5 and 9 7. See Kaiha I 1 5-6.
n6 The Principal Upantsads
Praja-pati or Brahma, or of any other beings. 1 These passages bring out several aspects of the theory of rebirth The soul finds out its future body before it leaves the present one The soul is creative in the sense that it creates a body. At every change of body, the soul takes a newer form The state of each existence of the soul is conditioned and determined by its knowledge (mdyaj, its conduct (karma)* in the previous existence From the Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad it appears that all the organs accompany the departing soul, which enters into the samjndna and becomes possessed of knowledge and consciousness3, vijiidna The results of learning and conduct cling to the soul 4
The ignorant, the unenlightened go after death to sunless demomac regions s The good are said to go up to regions which are sorrowless, through the air, sun, and moon 6 The Chandogya Upanisad speaks of two ways open to mortals, the bright and the dark, the way of the gods? and the way of the fathers 8 Those who practise penance and faith enter the path of light, and they never return to the cycle of human existence Those who are only ethical, performing works of public utility, travel by the path of smoke, dwell in the world of the fathers till the time comes for them to fall down, then they are bom agam according to their deserts 9 The descriptions may be fictitious, but the principle of the ascent and the descent of the soul is what the Upanisads insist on Beautiful characters attain covetable births and ugly ones miserable births 10 Heaven and hell belong to the world of time
1 B TJ IV. 4 3-5 'As a man puts on new clothes in this world, throwing away those which he formerly wore, even so the soul of man puts on new bodies which are in accordance with its acts in a former life ' Vistm Smrtt XX 50 See B G II 13, 22
' BU IV 4 2 3 IV 4 3
4 Cp with this the Buddhist view that the migrating soul consists of vtpiana and the other four skandhas of vedana, feeling, samjna, per- ception, samskara or dispositions and -rupa or corporeal form
s Iia3 Kathal 1 3 B U IV 4 11
« BU V. 10 1 1 SeeRV X 19 1 B G VIII 24-26
* C U IV 15 5-6 There are minor variations m the accounts of CU andBTJ.andK.U.1 9 CU V 10 1-6 » CTJV107KUI 2.
Introduction
Rebirth is the lot of man until he obtains true knowledge. By virtuous acts he furthers his evolution The reward of goodness is to grow in goodness. The reward of growing in punty of heart is to gain a clearer vision of reality. Knowledge of Reality leads to salvation
It is sometimes suggested that the soul before undergoing rebirth experiences reward or punishment for its deeds in appropriate places The original Vedic belief of reward in heaven or punishment gets mixed up with the doctrine of rebirth. 1
The soul is said to be a very minute entity residing in the cavity of the heart and resembling in every respect, except size, the visible man.
The fact that the individual consciousness has for its essential reality the Universal Self implies the possibility that every human being can rend the veil of separateness and gam recog- nition of his true nature and oneness with all beings. The Upanisads develop this character of life eternal.
hi the Rg Veda, what is aimed at is length of days on earth and life in the world of heaven in the company of gods In the Brahmanas, the performers of various rites are promised the reward of community of bemg, companionship and fellowship with the gods * When the Absolute Brahman was recognised, we gods became intermediaries through whose influence the end of unity with the Absolute is obtained. When Brahman and
Sa** ldentlfied ' the hi & hest S oal » declared to be unity vita the Self Deliverance is different from existence in svarga ^ paradise The latter is a part of the manifested world. The T 1 , ^ live there for ages and yet return to earth, a heir to «aee<is Deliverance, on the other hand, is astate of permanent 0n TOth tfa e Highest Self Life in paradise is a prolongation 'By VI, 2 c.TJ V.3-JO Mapatha BrShmam II. 6 4 8; XI. 4. 4. 1, ax , VI 1 2 . 3
n8 The Principal Upar.isads
of self-centred life, while life eternal is liberation from it While the former is time extended, the latter is time transcended
Enlightenment does not mean a departure in space to a new abode Arrival and departure have no meaning in the context of liberation The passages where the soul is said to go by the veins to the ra\:s of the sun and to the sun» or from the moon through the worlds of fire, wind, Varuna, Indra and Praja-pati, to Brai.man- speak of the soul on the pathway to perfection The Cldndogya Upan isad states that the soul of the emancipated, at death, goes out by the hundred and first vein through the crown of the head, fire, wind and sun to Brahman 3
He who knows Brahuan becomes Brahman 4 Perfection is a state of mind, not contingent on change of time or place. It is an experience of the present, not a prophecy of the future Temporal distinctions do not apply to it, but ti any temporal terms are to be used, they will be words like 'now,' 'presently,' 'When all desires that dwell in the human heart are cast away, then a mortal becomes immortal and (even) here he attaineth to Brohman.'s Freedom is not a future state on whose coming we wait in expectation It is life in the spirit, in God who is the foundation and power of life. 6
» Kath a HI II. S - K.U. I. 2.
3 CU YTII 6 6 KU YT 16 .l/aiWMsr.
* B.U. IV. 4 9 II U III 2 9 5 KaihaVI. 14.
* The Christian scriptures say that 'the Kingdom of God is among yon ' It lives and moves secretly here and no« as the hidden ground oi ercoming Satan and the -world
Cp mohsasya ra hi vBso'sti 1 a gratrartarav. eva ta ajf.aua-hrdaya-grantk'-raso tiujPsa Mi siuriah
Sna-gns xrn 32.
Freedom is not in a particular place nor has one to go to some other village in order to obtain it; the destruction of the knot of ignorance round onr hearts is known as freedom
M.B also tells us that the fcnotver of Srahxan has neither movement nor departure
sarra-bhStSima-bhJfasya samyng-bhiifam pasyalah de^api tnargs m'lfyaM} a-padasya padaistrah
"He -who has attained the state of the self of all beings, -who has attained the perfect vision of all beings — about the path of such a person the gods themselves are perplexed, seeking to discover the place of one who has no place at all.'
Hatha YT. 14. Cp Kabir: O Friend, hope for Hun whilst you live, understand whilst yon live,
for in life deliverance abides
Introduction 119
Is moksa or liberation life with the Supreme Person whom we love and worship m this life? 1 Is it personal immortality with absolute likeness to God m the world of Brahma.? 1 Is it an impersonal absorption m the Divine Transcendent? 3 All these views are to be found in the Upanisads There are four aspects of release distinguished as sdmipya or intimacy with the divine, sdrupya or sadharmya, similarity of nature with the divme, reflecting his glory, sdlokya or conscious co- existence with the divine in the same world and sayujya or communion with the divine bordering on identity
There are certain general characteristics of the state of moksa or freedom It is conceived as freedom from subjection to time 4 As birth and death are the symbols of time, life eternal or moksa is liberation from births and deaths. It is the fourth state of consciousness beyond the three worlds, what the BJiagavad-gM calls paramam brahma or brahma-mrvana 5 It is freedom from subjection to the law of karma The deeds, good or bad, of the released cease to have any effect on him 6 Even as a horse shakes its mane, the liberated soul shakes off his sin, even as the moon comes out entire after having suffered
K d%th?° ndS be n0t broken, " wJulst uvm g. what hope of deliverance 111
H is but an empty dream that the soul shall have union with Hun
11 „ us f xt has P^ed from the body,
„ fl e is found now, He is found then,
" not, we do but go to dwell in the city of Death
•VJh m • E T by Rabindranath Tagore
Rrfh. Ti *\ w our course . what the manner of our flight (to the ^iBeriana whence we have come'') asks Plotmus and answers. 'This
need ™ °T ey io l the feet • the feet brm & us onl y fronl land to ^d, nor fcJl™ of coach or ship to carry you away, all this order of
call mihL set 5151(16 and refuse to see - you must cl °se the eyes and vision^ mTLUS 011 anothe r vision which is to be waked within you, a T?-™tobnght of all, which few turn to use ' Emuads 16 8 3 StetaTvT 0 . 2 ' M U III 1 3, III 2 6-S
5 tTb^I 1 j? . * Atharva Veda X 8 44
&e Atha^Tj tS* rt 1S dhStu beyond the three worlds In
ti*teado?L\ - IV < 4 3> thC f ° Urtl1 Bfium K SVar ' the hght beyond only f' anla ^sa and dyaus The Brahmanas are concerned
^nt ZhJe^F re ot ^ & ods 0n the ma «« r of ^"rth transcen-
«>S r^/° n ? taM » an a e nostlc attltude
B «*«aiw T, y ttnSn MSn ail oaturtham ash va na va Satapatha
The Principal Upanisads
an eclipse from Rahu, so does the liberated individual free himself from mortal bondage. 1 His works consume themselves like a reed stalk in the fire 2 As water does not stop on the lotus leaf, works do not cling to him 3 Works have a meaning only for a self-centred individual Liberation is the destruction of bondage, which is the product of ignorance.4 Ignorance is destroyed by knowledge and not by works 5 Freedom is not a created entity; it is the result of recognition
Knowledge takes us to the place where desire is at rest, a-kama, where all desires are fulfilled, apta-kama, where the self is the only desire, atma-kama 6 lie who knows himself to be all can have no desire When the Supreme is seen, the knots of the heart are cut asunder, the doubts of the intellect are dispelled and the effects of our actions are destroyed 7 There can be no sorrow or pain or fear when there is no other. The freed soul is like a blind man who has gained his sight, a sick man made whole He cannot have any doubt for he is full and abiding knowledge He attains the highest bliss for which a feeble analogy is married happiness He can attain any world he may seek. 8
The law of Karma prevails in the world of samsara, where our deeds lead us to higher or lower stations in the world of time. If we obtain knowledge of the eternal reality, Brahman or Atman, deeds have no power over us. The state of life eternal is said to be beyond good and evil The knower of the self ceases to be stained by action 9 He goes beyond the ethical, though rooted in it, 10 anyaira dliarmat, anyatradhannat The
' c u. vnr » c u v 24 3 3 c u rv* 14 3
« bandhana-nasa cva hi moksah na karyabhulah § onBTJ III 3 I
5 mokso na Panna-sadhyah avtdyasiamayalvSt A on B U III 3 I
6 Satapalka Brahmana'X. 54 15 B U III 4 2, IV 4 12
; M U II 2 8 '* M U III 1 10
1 Tailtiriya Brahmana III. 12 9 8.
«> Katha.II 14; see also CU. VIII 4 i.MU III 1 3;KU I 4
Cp The Buddha Majjhtna Nikdya I 135 'If you understand the parable of the raft, 3 on must discard dharma, and adharma '
John III g 'Whoever is born of God, cannot sin '
Galatians V. 18 'If you are led by the Spirit, jou are not under the law'
EcUsart 'There neither vice nor virtue ever entered in ' Dr W R Inge, writing on Christian Mystics, pointed out that the illumination of
Introdttction
path of virtue and vice is a means, not an end. The end is beyond the law of injunction and prohibition of good and evil. 1 Our activities, being inspired by the divine cannot be wrong'; 'Nous is never wrong,' says Aristotle. 4 The life of a free spirit is not bound by any formulas. It breaks its bonds and finds its own way to a development of its own which could never have been charted in advance. The liberated spirit conforms spon- taneously to the ethical rules. 'To one who has knowledge of the self, non-hatred and other virtues come off naturally without any effort' .3 Every religion sets before us the goal of liberation, which has a sense of exaltation, a sense of freedom and victory over the world, over evil and death.
When we are delivered m life, our condition is that of the jivan-mukta, who is freed from the bonds of conditioned exist- ence 4 His appearance continues without much outer change. His embodied state does not affect the being whom it clothes, as he has complete control over the bodily frame and knows its externality. Though tossed in the welter he retains his vision. While pvan-mukfo is deliverance during life, videha-mukti is
mystic, has 'strictly speaking no moral side, for morality, in the ordinary sense, is left behind. As the anonymous French mystic who wore The Minor of Simple Souls puts it "Virtues, I take leave of you Henceforth I shall be more free and more at peace Once I was your set ?&&. now I am delivered from your thraldom'" . . . What he means b that in the higher stage morality has become autonomous and spon- ««>«mjs. God's service has become perfect freedom.' Church Famtly Newspaper July 6, 1023
vol M W hvmaJ Nik5ya (II. 22 ff ) it is said that arrival (patipanna) m- mves a destruction without residue of good and bad conduct (kusala and tt» Vi f) Jt 1S 811 eradication of all ethical values In the parable of neht i Ma M hlma 1 35. 260 and Suiia Nipaia 21) the distinction of no nmS WTDn S. the exercise of the discriminatory consciousness are of be ten US \ to 0116 wto has crossed to ft" 5 ether shore than a boat would for dt? 8 has "^ed store These values are for crossing over, not mfa^°\ nUth " ranatt1tS, y a ' na SahanaiihSya St Augustine points has a J? °? e , $ ould ' n ° longer use the law as means of arrival when one fias arrived • De Sp lr etLit.rf. Be Ammo. Ill i 0 433 a
3 utpannattna-prabo&hasya tv advestrtvadayo gunah.
Sn«i,„ a y a(nat0 bhavanty asya via iu sadhana-rHpittah
vKSf^* 3 ?'* X'Htermyt-stddhi. IV 69. * "wi id™ °h asnake ^S&t te on an ant-hill dead and cast away, says the Upaiusad ^ ^ Bemg venI y bodiless, he becomes immortal.
The Principal Upamsads
deliverance after death, when out of bodily form In either case the soul is freed from conditioned existence
There is the suggestion about krama-mukh or gradual release When the release is only partial and temporary, the individual soul descends again into the egoistic life and the higher con- sciousness is withdrawn from him The memory of that experi- ence, however, will work its way, until the impurities are removed
The different emphases we find m the Upamsads, in regard to the state of freedom, can be understood if we bear in mind the integral or fourfold character of Brahman In some passages oneness with Brahman is stressed, in others communion with the Supreme Person and in still others devotion to the Cosmic Spirit and participation m the work of the world Union with God may take many forms When the outer self is hushed, the deeper layers of consciousness are released into activity, the self may enter into the silence of the Absolute Brahman or into communion with the Eternal Person or be transported into the beatific embrace of the Cosmic Spirit The soul may pass through various realms of spirit, bathing in their light and feeding on their bliss
Yajiiavalkya centres his attention on oneness with the Absolute Brahman, a state where there is no desire, there is no passion, not even any consciousness, pretya samjna nash 1 When honey is prepared by the collection of various juices, the latter cannot discriminate from which trees they were drawn, even so when the souls are merged m the Real, they cannot discriminate from which bodies they come 2 The self rises above the distinction of subject and object which characterises all empirical consciousness It is altogether time-transcending This is impersonal immortality where the soul achieves abso- luteness, unconditioned being 3 It is illumined consciousness
1 B U II 4 12, IV 5 13 * C U VI 6 10 B U IV 3 21
3 Cp Viveka-cudamam, ascnbed to § It also occurs in Gaudapada's KSrtka, on Ma U
na mrodho na cotpathr na baddho na ca sadhakab na mwnttksur na vai mukta ity esa paramarthata There is no destruction, nor is there origination There is no one bound nor is there one practising discipline There is no seeker of freedom nor is there the freed Such is the highest state
Introduction 123
and not obhvxon of consciousness It is not a void of immobile peace where all is lost and everything is extinct. This is only one aspect of deliverance
There is also the account where the self becomes one with the Supreme Person. He who knows 'I am Brahman,' becomes the universe Even the gods cannot prevent him from becoming the universe for he is its soul 1 Man has potential universality which he actualises in the state of liberation We are one with the indeterminate pure srience in essence and with the personal Lord m the liberty of cosmic manifestation. Out of the peace and poise of Brahman arises the free activity of the liberated individual Essential unity with God is unity with one another through God In the sense of heightened awareness we do not forget the world, which seems strangely of one piece. We are lifted out of provincialism into perspective, as we become aware of something vaster, profounder, more ultimate than the world 1
'When the mind returns to its natural abode there is neither the path nor anyone who traverses it '
ciUe tu vai paravme na yanam no ca ySyinah
LanhS,vatara Suira Sylvam Levi's ed , p 322 Ntrvana is defined as the absence of the distinction of knower and knowable, grahya-grahaka-rahttata Negative descriptions of nirvana abound in Madkyamaka-Vrtti
aprahinam asampraptam anucchnmam aiaivatam amruddham anutpannam etat nirvanam ucyate
Cp Buddhalvam,
na bhavo n&pi cabhavo buddhalvam Una kathyate tasmad buddha-tatha-praine avyakrtamayo matah
Mahayana Sutralamkara. See also 22 and 26
na hiddha nahtddha buddhaia naikata na bahutS
See also
yasmm sarvam idam protam jagat sth&vara jangamam tasmmn eva layam ySXi budbudah sagare yatha. 11 TiT ® as umverse i movable and immovable is interwoven m him ,?y al ' mer gem him like bubbles in the sea CuhkaU 17 To be refunded into Brahman as an earthen vessel is refunded into its own causal substance, 1 e clay, means nothing else but complete "Huhuabon " RB I 3 21 « B U I 4 10
vJ p Plotu »us 'We see all things, not in process of becoming, but in «ng and see themselves m the other Each being contains m itself the ^ fteUigible -world Therefore All is everywhere Each is there All, teas f each Man < 38 he nc >w is, has ceased to be the All But when he Mote world m<imdlla1, he 141863 himself again and penetrates the
The Principal Upamsads
Rule over oneself, svdrdjya, becomes rule over the world, sdmrdjya Salvation is sarvdtma-bhdva 1
When the mind assumes the form of the Supreme through the power of meditation we have samprapiata-samadhi, when the individual is aware that his consciousness has assumed the nature of Brahman * But when all consciousness of external objects in the waking state due to the functioning of the senses, of internal objects in the dream state due to the functioning of mind, or of the unmamfested in the state of dreamless sleep is absent, we have a-samprajnata-samadhi 3 While m the former our awareness is of God, m the latter it is of the Absolute
There are passages'! which suggest that the released self retains its own form freed from the imperfections of the empirical ego and untouched by worldly pleasure and pam 5 Yet other pas- sages affirm the presence of such qualities They cannot there- fore be incompatible with pure intelligence Such is the view of Badarayana 6 The liberated self's desires are fulfilled by its mere will 7 The self is spoken of as sinless and one with the highest Person Non-separation or avibhaga from Brahman is
Referring to the desire of Eckhart to be the one, undivided, eternal, imperishable Godhead which is wholly being, wholly spirit, wholly joy, Rudolf Otto observes, 'this differs fundamentally and essentially from the simpler Christian conception of salvation to which it must always seem an extravagance, a Titanic pnde and a transgression of the impos- sible limitations of the creature, a Faustian urge as we call it to-day ' Mysticism East and West, p 181
1 'This (universe) is myself who am all this, identity with all is his highest state, the self's own natural, supreme state '
aham evedam sarvo'smiti manyate so yah sarvalma-bhavah, so'syStmanah paramo lokah, parama dlma-bhavah svabhavtkah SB on B U IV 3 20 sarvaikatvam evasya rupam IV 3 21 yat svariipam pUrnatvam para- matma-bhavam V 1 1,
• brakmakSra-mano-vrlli-pravako'hamkriim vma samprajnata-samadhis sySd dhyanSbhyasa-prakarsatah
MukHkS U II 53
3 prabha-iunyam manah-iiinyam bttddht-iiinyam cid-aimakam atad-vyavftli-ntpo'sau samSdhir mum-bh&vitah
ibid II 54
4 CU III 14 i.seealsoVII 1 5 ,VII 2 2, VII 3 1
5 Though endowed with divine qualities Audulomi contends that the nature of the liberated self is pure intelligence and it cannot have the qualities which arc dependent on limiting adjuncts B S IV 4 6, upadhi-sambandhadhliialvat lesam na caitanyavat svariipatva-sambhavah SB IV 4-6 6BSIV47 7 BS TV 4 8 CU.VIII 2 1
Introduction
suggested m many passages. 1 Non-separation is not absolute identity. The liberated self has no other overlord, anyddhipatih 2 There are passages where the self is said to possess adjuncts, which make for individuality and others where these are denied Badarayana reconciles the two views by affirming that the assumption or non-assumption of individual form is entirely a matter of option for the released soul.3 It can, if it so chooses, enter into many bodies created by its own will even as the flame of a lamp can convert itself into several flames 4 In the Attar ey a At any oka it is said that Vamadeva ascended from this world and attained immortality in yonder world of heaven 5 The Kausitdkz Upcmisad gives us an account of the world of Brahma with the Aparajita palace, the tree Ilya, the Salajya city and the sea Ara The passages of the Upanisads which make out that the reward of enlightenment is heaven in one form or another have in mind co-residence with Brahma or Hiranya-garbha 6 The Brahma Sutra discusses the question whether those who go by the path of the gods reach the world of Hiranya-garbha Brahma or become one with livara. Badari holds that they reach the world of Hiranya-garbha, for only to his world is going possible. Sarhkara says, 'The created Brahma aas a specific locality and so can be the goal of a journey but not the Supreme Brahman who is present everywhere and is the inner self of the travelling individual selves '7 When we reach brahma-loka, we continue to function there until the end of the process, when along with Brahma, we enter the Supreme Brahman* Saihkara thinks that all this refers to gradual
IbIw 4 4 8 ^^^ 'BSIV4-9. v „i. t A »»4-I2 yarn saSanratam samkalpayali tada saiariro bhavah.
^% a 'i^ imiSmiadSe ^«rirahtUbkSva}i S B IV 4. 12
. 4 J5 yathS pradipah ekdh aneka-pradipa-bhavam apadyate bhs„nL a .! l 'y°S St i evam ekah apt san muktaima aiivarya-yogat aneka- "™ n «padyasarvanisamkalpa-srstantiarirSmGviiati SB IV 4 15 ,t* 5 , « SeeBU IV.3.15 CU VIII 12 3
Parana hi manah eVa S^^yatvam upapadyate prade&avatvat, na tu SB IV 3 £ <zftw " lwi (<wya sarva-gatatvat gantrnam pratyagatmaivSc ca
'SeePra&a V 5 Cp also.
brahmana saha te sarve sampr&pte praltsancare, When «i X ar " SySnie krtatmanah praviianh param padam natures f,,T«ii j lutlon of wolId takes place the selves with their lnUmed ^ter the highest plane along with Brahma.
The Principal Upani$ads
release, krama-mukti 1 Jaimmi holds that the liberated souls enter the highest Brahman 1 Badarayana is of the view that those who meditate on symbols go to the world of the symbols and not to the world of Brahma
Even as we have the fourfold nature of the Supreme, the liberated individual has different aspects of utter peace, pure energy, devotion to the Cosmic Spirit and participation in the world He looks at the world and is lost m it, as it is a perpetual striving to raise itself above itself 3
When we refer to Absolute Brahman, we emphasise the illumined quiescence, the non-objective consciousness in which there is a total extinction of sorrow and evil, the pure bliss infinitely surpassing all human joys, far exceeding the power of man to conceive This very insight makes the self one with the Supreme and all existences Only we are no more bound to them in a false relation In our transfigured consciousness where our egoistic individuality is absent, we are not divided from others hut feel one with them Our real self is no more the individual, mental being, but is one with the Self behind the mental forms of all other selves Our body, life, mind are no more binding, but become the transparent vehicle of our divine consciousness When that end is reached we are a true becoming of the Divine, a free movement of the Universal Spint. Our body, life and mind, we feel, are one with the cosmic body, life and mind * Our spirit fills the whole world By knowing the eternal we understand the true nature of God, the world and the individual.
Spiritual wisdom (vtdya) does not abolish the world, but
removes our ignorance (avidya) of it When we rise to our true
bemg, the selfish ego falls away from us and the true integral
1 S B IV 3 ii > BS IV 3 12-14
3 Communing m this sort through earth and heaven With every form of creature, as it looked Towards the Uncreated with a countenance Of adoration, with an eye of love
Wordsworth
4 Cp Traherne 'You never enjoy the world anght till the sea itself floweth m your veins, till you are clothed with the heavens and crowned with the stars, and perceive yourself to be the sole heir of the whole world, and more than so, because men are m it who are everyone sole heirs as well as you .'
Inhodudum 127
self takes possession of us We continue to live and act in the world, though with, a different outlook The world also continues, though it is no more alien to us. To live permanently in this new consciousness is to live in eternity.
Possessing the immortality of non-birth, the redeemed self still assumes, by free volition an individual form in the mani- fested world. Birth is a becoming of the Supreme m the cosmic being. This becoming is not inconsistent with Being. It becomes a means and not an obstacle to the en)oyment of Me eternal. To be released from the cham of birth and death is not to flee from the world of becoming Bondage does not consist in the assumption of birth or individuality, but m the persistence of the ignorant sense of the separate, selfish ego. It is not the embodiment that creates the bondage but the frame of mind To the free spirit life has no terrors He wishes to conquer life for God He uses the world as the mould and condition for the manifestation of his spiritual freedom He may assume birth for the purpose of helping the world 1 There will be mdividuabsa- tion without an ego-sense The play of the individual conscious- ness can take many forms, assume many aspects and poises AH through, however, he lives in the truth of the cosmic play with bo delusion, released from ego, m full control of the manifested
The individual soul is eternal It endures throughout the cosmic process It commences at birth as the inheritor of the previous person and survives physical death in an altered form. ° r the self that has realised perfection the body ceases to be a tardea He lives in the flesh but not after the flesh
he individual is an aspect of the Transcendent in the diverse and when liberated from all limitations, he acts with centre in the Supreme The inner peace is manifested in the EST f eedom of outer activity. He will be at work in the M though he cannot wish to do any evil * He can do any thmv,+ 6 d06S rt ^terestedly 3 The desires of those whose gMs a* 5 ^ed on the Supreme do not brad 4 The freed soul
X n"c$k raha , evatko he(uste janma-karmanoh KSltdSsa. Raghu^iamia 1 BU tv l0ved ^ that he gave ' John- III 16
M *<W Smita-dhiySm kSmah kamaya halpate.
The Principal Upam§ads
does not aim at the improvement of humanity, but his life itself is a service His renunciation has become the natural consequence of his wisdom The CMndogya Vpanisai dis- tinguishes desires that bind from the desires that liberate, and speaks of the Supreme Self as desiring and purposing truth*
Samkara argues that the co-existence of karma or work, in- volving, as it does, the distinction of doer and the thing done, with the knowledge of the identity of the individual self with the Supreme, which negatives all such distinctions, is incon- ceivable 3 It is only self-centred action that becomes impossible. The liberated individual becomes active m God God is born m us, 1 e becomes active in us, when all powers of the soul, which hitherto have been bound and imprisoned, become liberated and set free 'For we are his offspring. '3 God becomes the centre of the free man's life so that love is radiated and good works spring forth spontaneously He is as unconscious of the power of his life as life itself, which springs, blossoms and puts forth its life's work in a free outpouring with no reflection on the why or the wherefore He lives out of his own depths, and life wells up out of itself In a sense, he is not the doer He has become one with the Universal Self, possessed by the Trans- cendent, he is udasvna or unattached The Universal Self has taken sovereign possession of the individual soul When the individual soul ascends mto the silence it becomes' vast, tran- quil, actionless It observes the actions of prakrti without taking part m them There is no personal factor, and therefore there is no bondage
Those who have attained life eternal live and wander about
1 satyah-amah, satya-amkalpah VIII 156 'This is life eternal, that they might knew thee, the only true God ' Richard of St Victor says 'The soul utterly puts off itself (1 e its self-centred desires) and puts on divine love, and being conformed to that beauty which it has beheld, it utterly passes mto that other glory '
1 Introduction to Kena
3 'I do nothing of myself' (John VIII 18). 'Not what I will but what thou wilt' (Mark XIV 36) Bcehme said 'Thou shalt do nothing but forsake thy own will, viz that which thou callest "I" or "thyself " By which means all thy evil properties will grow weak, faint and ready to die, and then thou wilt sink down again mto that one thing, from which thou art originally sprung ' Discourse between Two Souls
Introduction 129
in the world, to all appearance, like ordinary mortals They wear no special signs. Only their activities are centred in the highest being and are completely under their control, which is not so for those who live in the world of samsara. They are tolerant, sympathetic and respectful to the urihberated who are struggling with, unsatisfied minds to dimmish the evil and imperfection 111 the world. These are helped by the seers who accept the conventions with the idea of refining them. They live and suffer and rejoice and die as other mortals do, but they have no doubt m their minds, no fear in their hearts. For the liberated soul, samsara and moksa or nirvana as the Buddhists call it, time and eternity, the phenomenal and the real, are one. Though the liberated soul lives in the world of becoming, he lives with his consciousness centred in the Divine ground of all being As a matter of fact, his consciousness, because it is centred in God, is intensified, and so his life in the world is more vital Holy calm, supreme self-mastery and righteous action charac- terise the lives of saints They become a light, a power of the Truth to which they have struggled and attained, and help the development of others » They will be engaged in the work of the world,* sustained by their rare vision, until the struggle with evil and imperfection is altogether overcome and the world is restored to spirit.
Whether after liberation one takes an active interest in the world or renounces it is a matter of temperament. Ya.pavalk.ya gooses to retire to the forest, while Janaka rules a state. Whatever they do, they help those like us who are lost in the world of sorrow and suffering Though embodiment or dis- embodiment makes no difference to the liberated souls, as they »e filed with compassion, they take up the burden of the «Md _ According to Viveka-cudamani, "Themselves having ™>®£a over, they remain out of compassion for men and in
who h2f lieva ' m ^ Cttto-viiuddhi-prakaram says that the great souls aave won the fierce battle of life attempt to save others- mahSrsattvo maho-p&yak sthira-buddhir atantntah , -p l ltvS dusfora-samgramarh iarayed apar&n apt *oos°b, k w J? e ^ samt 18 one ' wno reqwreth thee not to close the ftee in fe» fte brea <k. aad to renounce the world . -who teacheth 0 " stllJ a »u<lst all thme activities '
TJie Principal Upanisads
order to help them also to make the crossing ' r Until all people are redeemed, the liberated work m the world assuming indi- vidual forms which are the vestures of spiritual life Spirit and material existence, mania and anna, are the highest and lowest rungs of a continuous series There is a link between the two Even as the eternal Divine is able to hold the whole universe within itself while remaining pure spirit, the soul that is one with the Eternal possesses the same poise, with reference to the indi- vidual setting It is no more ignorantly immersed m the mutable creation It exists consciously m rts true being while using the psycho-physical apparatus, which it does not any more mistake for its true being While the liberated retain the con- sciousness of the transcending, self-existent, timeless, they identify their bemg with the Infinite God in whom all existences dwell
Again and again, the Upanisads stress that we should see all existences in the Self and the Self in all existences Even as the Supreme is all these existences, we also should acquire the right relation to the world Perfect fulfilment of our indi- viduality means the perfect fulfilment of our relations with the world and the other individuals We are called upon to over- come not only our separate egoistic existence but also our life in a paradise of self-absorbed bliss The perfected soul cannot look with indifference on the sufferings of the imperfect, for they are also his own self He would work to lift them into freedom It is not now a function of altruism but is the life divine, the integral way He will work until all beings in the manifested world are fulfilled The liberated individuals are released from their individuality at the close of creation
Brakma-loka is the widest possible integration of cosmic experience, the farthest limit of manifested being Brahma is the soul that ensouls this great dwelling He is the true life of every being He endures during the whole period of the cosmos Beyond it there is nothing in the manifested world It is not
» According to VySsa's Yoga Bhasya (i 24), God is permanently associated with iuddhanlah-karana. If God who is the eternally free can have an inner organ, the freed men can also have it
Cp Chuang Tzu 'The sages of old first got Tao for themselves, then got it for others '
Infroduclion
the eternal beyond the empirical It is the farthest limit of manifestation When the world receives its consummation, when it is delivered from time to eternity, then there is the flight of the alone to the Alone The plan of God for the world, which was before creation is earned out, for He is the beginning and the end of the world 1 The Cosmic Lord has his exteriorised existence and his interior life When he turns outward the cosmos is evolved, when he turns his attention inward, the cosmos retreats into latency and the manifested world ter- minates When the world is redeemed, the Supreme Lord becomes the Absolute One, alone, and knows nothing else
In the brahma-loka the liberated individuals present to each other as one They are manifold in the cosmic process Their consciousness of the Supreme which is lodged m the buddhi is one and not divided among the bodily forms. This identical consciousness is associated with different bodies This mani- foldness does not take away from the unity of the divine being Until the final return of the whole universe into the Abso- lute, until the purpose of God before the creation is earned out, the individuals, freed from bondage to matter, will retain their distinctiveness without being sundered by boundaries When the two poles of being are reconciled, when all individuals nse above the plane of quality, with its ego sense, struggling aspiration and imperfect love, the world lapses into the Absolute 2
The Upanisads use the inhented forms of religious worship as means for the realisation of the Supreme The Vedic mantras are addressed to vanous powers, symbolic of important aspects, we Supreme Reality They teach the religion of iraddhd, &e Om Th6 l £ osnuc Christ speaking through Jesus, 'I am the Alpha and last is thffe ' fiKt ^ ^ laSt ' for what was ^ st °° mes at last aBd ^
In
Possibility a mulLe possiDiuty xnis world 01 ours is not tne oniy w °rked Ztf m r P 0851 ^ 168 ^11 unfold themselves when this is 1 An Idealist View of Life, Fourth Impression, 1951, p. 343.
The Principal Upanisads
faith and updsana, worship The Brahmanas deal with rites, and by their performance we are said to gain our ends Both these methods are taken up by the Upanisads and reinterpreted
While the Upanisads recognise that deliverance is the supreme end of life, they are aware that many are not ready for the supreme sacrifice, the dying to their ego They need some preparation for it They ask for emotional satisfactions, and for their sake devotional and ritualistic practices are tolerated They are not useless, for they lead us on by the upward path by directing our minds and hearts to the reality of the Eternal Being and gradually take us out of ourselves into the true religion of the spirit 1 Till the goal is reached, the law of Karma works, and we get the rewards for our worship and piety according to the intensity of our faith and devotion
The different forms of sraddha or faith, updsana or worship, and practices of yoga are treated as means to the supreme end of self-knowledge or atma-dariana, which is at once a union with the one transcendent Being beyond all the worlds and a union with all bemgs m the world
Again and again the Upanisads speak of the God who is hidden, mhitam guhdydm God is not easily comprehended There is a certain element of reserve in God as distinct from His revelation The reserve is there because man has to put forth effort to know the Divine God does not wish to relieve us of our responsibility As His purpose is the development of free human personalities, He does not disclose himself to us easily and openly He remains shrouded m mystery, and yields only when our total self yearns for God 1
1 A second century Christian apologist said 'Among us you will find uneducated persons and artisans and old women, who, if they are unable in words to prove the benefit of our doctrine, yet by their deeds exhibit the benefit arising from their persuasion of its truth , they do not rehearse ^ speeches but exhibit good works, when struck they do not strike again, t when robbed they do not go to law, they give to those that ask of them, and love then- neighbours as themselves ' Quoted in Cambridge Review February 14, 1948, p 348
1 'O Rama, the Supreme is pleased with him who is ever endowed with non-violence, truthfulness, compassion and kindness to all . creatures '
ahmsa satya-vacanam daya bkiitesv amtgrahah, yasyailani sada rama, iasya lusyah keiavah '
Vtsnu-dharmottara I 58
Intro/faction
Three stages are mentioned as preparatory to God-vision {brahma-saksatkara), iravana or hearing, manana or reflection, and mdidhydsana or contemplation The first step is to learn what has been thought and said about the subject from teachers We should listen to them with Sraddha or faith 1 Faith is an act of will, a yearning of the heart rather than an intellectual disposi- tion It is faith in the existence of the beyond, astikya-buii-hi as Samkara calls it » We should have faith in the integrity of the seers whose selflessness has enabled them to know the nature of Ultimate Reality by direct acquaintance. The propositions they have formulated from out of their personal experience give us knowledge by description, as we do not yet have direct vision of the truth. Yet the knowledge we acquire by hearsay or Teport is not unvenfiable The truth of the Vedic propositions can be verified by us, if we are prepared to fulfil the necessary conditions
In the second stage of manana or reflection we attempt to form clear ideas by the logical processes of inf erence, analogy, etc So long as faith is firm, the need for philosophy is not felt. With the decline of faith, the spirit of inquiry increases. Un- questioning belief in the inherent power of knowledge underlies the whole intellectual fabric of the Upam§ads. The truth of the Vedic propositions can, however, be inferred by us by logical processes Hearing of the scriptures is not devoid of intellectual content He who hears understands up to a point. f« when he reflects on what he hears, he adds to faith a Knowledge which increases faith There is great insistence on the need for logical inquiry 3 Without it faith will degenerate into Without the material supplied by faith, logical
man may b ecome mere S p ecu ] atl0n while the scriptures
a ^untent 6 trUth by enunciation > P M osophy establishes it by Samkara says, 'When the two, scripture and reasoning,
i%^iom Sm " VSkyemmhSsah * § onKathal 1 2
"ottmiJj can ? ot be attained by any means other than inquiry Vaastha ™ V* Snam vicaren5.nyas5dhanaih. S *«*Pted Aiti I word even of a cblld < * A 1S reasonable, should be « \ ld be re > ecte <* even if it be said by the Creator ' yitRti-yuktam apsdeyam vacamm balakad api unyai imam %va tyajyam apy uktam padma-janmana
The Principal Upanisads
demonstrate the unity of the self it is seen clearly as a bael fruit in the palm of one's hand ' r There are many for whom the Supreme is not an immediately experienced fact, nor are they willing to accept its validity on the authority of the scriptures For them logical arguments are necessary
The distinction between &uh, what is heard, and smrtt, what is remembered, between direct experience and traditional interpretation, is based on the distinction between sravana and manana The deposit of experience is not the same as the conclusions of theology The primary data are the &ut\ they are experiential, the formulated conclusions are secondary interpretations The one represents the evidence, the other records a doctrine When there is a dispute between the two we get back to the evidence It is always open to review the evi- dence afresh The doctrinal statements are conditioned by the historical situations in which they are produced We must be able to get behind the propositions to the events they describe, stand in the tension between the data and the interpretations, if we are to understand the significance of the doctrines The defect of all scholasticism, Indian or European, is that it tends to regard itself as a cold, bloodless logic which moves from one position to another with a remorseless rigour Life is the master of thought and not thought of life.
Logical knowledge acquired by a study of the scriptures and reflection on their teaching is only indirect knowledge It is not a direct grasp of reality Thought must pass into realisa- tion The ideas of the Upanisads should be imaginatively and inwardly apprehended They should be allowed to smk deep and simmer before they are re-created m life Ntdtdhyasana is the process by which intellectual consciousness is transformed into a vital one We give up the pnde of learning and concentrate on the truth * Faith becomes
1 agamopapattl hyalmaikatva-praka&anaya pravrtle iaknutah haratala- gata-bilvam iva dariayitum S on B U III I I.
= vihaya sarva-sasiram yat satyam tad updsyatam Uttara Gtta , Even if we study the Vedic texts and all the scriptures we cannot know \ the truth of reality if we are the victims of intellectual pnde * adhitya caluro vedan sarva-saslrany anekaiah brahma-taitvam na jananii darpopahata-cetasah.
Mukltka V II 65
Introduction
reality m us by the steady concentration of mind on the real 1
NtMhyasana or contemplation is different from upasana or worship Worship is an aid to contemplation, though it is not itself contemplation. In worship there is the distinction between the worshipping self and the worshipped object, but m con- templation this distinction is held in suspense There is a still- ness, a calm, in which the soul lays itself open to the Divine Intellect, becomes like a calm sea without a ripple on its surface
Meditation is not argument It is just holding oneself steadily m front of the truth * The whole energy of the mrnd is centred on the object to the exclusion of all else. We let the full flavour of the idea meditated on expand in the mind Even upasana is defined as the continued flow of an identical current of thought 3 It is also of the nature of meditation 4 We can practise meditation in any direction, place or time in which we can concentrate our mind 5 Here the process of abstraction, isolating the self from the objective, is employed Concentration b the condition of prayer More than condition it is itself prayer In prayer we must dismiss all distracting ideas, disturbing influ- ences and retire within oneself. We are asked to retire to a field or a forest where the world and its noise are out of sight and far away, where the sun and the sky, the earth and the water all speak the same language, reminding the seeker that he is here to develop like the things that grow all around him
in all the three stages, a teacher may be found useful Only
? **** pSktwasam yatha 4> also Bunyan
Seest thou a man wise m his own eyes,
» - ere 1S more tope of a fool than of him
, ^"yasanam sad-ekartha-wtti-pravSlmm temulahn 01 Greek thou g ht . theory meant not hypothesis but con- wsidt of act not of a s P ecv »k*°r but of a spectator It is not the kboldinst^ 6 ^ 1011 that of * he process of investigating, the ^absation T*T r^"? provides the necessary basis for effective attenrotpri ek tlsa8e out that »° realisation can be
3 m«TL * ? ut an ade quate theoretical preparation
5 X ^2 SB IV r 8 SB IV "j ij ksle vS sadhahasya ekSgrata bhavaH tatra eva upasita
136 The Principal Upamsads
those who act in the right way axe the acaryas 1 3amkarananda distinguishes three kinds of disciples He who understands what is taught along with the proof, Avhen he hears only once, is the good pupil, he who understands it only after hearing many times and after giving himself and his teacher much trouble is the bad pupil He who understands what the teacher says but cannot control his own mind, he is the middling The last are to be led to firm conviction by various means a
The truth can be taught only up to a point. It has to be assimilated by personal effort, by self-discipline Yoga is a term that signifies the method of concentrations by which we attain to unity with the Eternal 4 The practice of yoga is mentioned in the Upamsads In the Katha we are asked to suppress speech and mind, merge the latter in the knowledge self, that in the great self, that in the tranquil self, the Absolute The highest stage is attained when the five senses, mind and intellect are at rest 5 The Svetahatara Upamsad gives detailed directions on
1 svayam acarate yas iu ScSryas so'bhidhiyaie Cp Chaucer's poor parson of a town
This noble ensample to his sheep he yaf That first he wroghte, and afterwards he taughte The Bhagavata says* 'The seeker of the highest truth and supreme good should seek guidance from a teacher who has mastered the Vedic texts and realised the self.
iasmad gtirum prapadyeta jijiiasuh ireya vttamam iabde pare ca msnatam brahmany upaiamairayam
* yah sakrd-ttktam sopapatlikam grhnati sa utlamah, yas iu anekaia ucyamanam BtmSnam gurvm ca samkleiya grhnaii sa mandah, yas iu guruktam grhnan sva-ciltam mroddhum a-iaktah sa madhyamah, sa tu gumnoktasya vanyasya va 11-padese.na citta-dhairyam vividhair vaidikair upayatr netavyah On K U II 1
3 jiianam yogatmakam viddht Know that knowledge has yoga for its essence
< aihyam jtvatmanor ahur yogam yoga-vtiaradah Devi Bhagavata
s Cp with this the Confucian fasting of the heart 'May I ask,' said Yen Hm, 'in what consists the fasting of the heart''
'Cultivate unity,' replied Confucius 'You do .your hearing, not with your ears, but with your mind , not with your mind, but with your very soul But let the hearing stop with the ears Let the working of the mind stop with itself Then the soul will be a negative existence, passively response e to e-cternals In such a negative existence, only Tao can abide And that negab% e state is the fasting of the heart '
'Then,' said Yen Hui, 'the reason I could not get the use of this method is my own individuality If I could get the use of it, my individuality
Introduction 137
the practice of yoga 1 When the awakening takes place scripture ceases to be authoritative/ 2 srttter apy abhavali prabodfie.s
In the Vedas we have vivid belief in powerful gods who are not mere abstractions Adoration of personal gods, along with a sense of dependence on and trust in them, which is a marked tendency in the religion of the Veda, becomes prominent in the Katha and the Svetaivatara Upanisads The Katha Upamsad makes out that saving knowledge is not a matter of learning but is revealed to the fortunate man by the highest Reality itself. Even the doctrine of predestination is suggested.
Unfortunately different aspects have been exclusively emphasised so as to give rise to the impression that the Upani- sads do not give us any single coherent view. It is suggested that in the Upanisads the true doctrine is that the Real, the thing-in- ltself, is empty of content and all positive views are deviations from it caused by the inability of man to remain at the high level of abstract thought, postulated by the distinction between the thing-in-itself and the appearance and the natural tendency to apply empirical categories to the thing-in-itself. The absolu- tists and theistic views of the Upamsads are not exclusive of each other Sarhkara and Ramanuja emphasise different aspects of the teaching of the Upanisads.
Updsam or worship is the basis of the doctrine of bhakti or devotion As Brahman is not described in the early Upanisads in sufficiently personal terms, the later ones like the Katha and. the Svetdhiatara look upon the Supreme as personal God who bestows grace Devotion to the personal God is recommended as a means for attaining spiritual enlightenment 4
•F«ii have , gone Is ^ wtat you mean by the negative state?' ™yso,' replied the Master
asks nc^f 3380 UsAA VI 18-27. Appaya Diksita in his Yoga Barf ana ••ska to ^ co . ncen * rate on ^ self-shining self between the two brows, m,.^. "ie text 'That art thou,' conceive oneself as absorbed in it and Jocose meditation
pratyag atmanam alokya bhruvor tnadhye svayam-prabham snttvS tat-tvam-asity atkyam matvasmlh tad abkyasel
<S U ^ 1 3 3 § on BU. VI. 1.
^nestodevotK} 311 ^ 2 ^ ^ ma S es ' pilgrimages, ceremonies are all acces- ^ Bhs e m <*a asks us to love the Supreme with all our being, 'Lord
ijS Hit I'nuofittl Ufninrmh
'Ihc V\nm<w\^ give tis different modes of devotional ivr- ciMs, h\ which u» ,nc trained to ft\ our rntnrl' on .1 'ingle object Gradualh we gel pn pared for the ront< mplntiun of absolute truth 1
The prevalent tlieistu creed*, wen as' imihted to tin ti lrhing of the I'panisads The lat*r Miiiiun rpmi'.ids id'ntifv th* Supreme with Vi^rm, Siva or £»lti, uhirh are nrard'd as different phasrs of the One Ke.dttv. lit'* Supn in* ts cone> ivid as a person in relation to ptpoijs, and symbol*; t.ihn from social life, loid, father, judee .ire emplovi d Sonv times dvnamtc sjmboN like the pmur of lif< , th< spirit of truth, th' clowmi: fire that penetrates and p-'n.idts an us<d
Sunbols belong to an ord»r of nalm difitrent from that of the Reality which they symbolize The) are tis'd to male ill" truth intelligible, to mal'e the unh'.irabh .uidibh 'll>v are meant to be used as tangtbh supports for contemplation Th r y help us to reach awareness of the symbols' d reihty Some of these s\ mbols cmploj ed by n hgums are common Tire and light arc usually adopted to signify the ntinnte Ktahty h nvans that the minds of people are formed similarly and evjwiences of people do not difier much from one pirt of the world to another Even conceptions about the origin and nature of the world often agree, though they arise quite mdepcnd<nth The. images are all framed to mediate l>et\veui the Supri me Absolute and the finite intelligence 1 he individual is free to select for worship any form of the Supreme Tins freedom of choice i^ta-dcvaldradhana means that the different forms are all
ma\ our speech be engaged in recounting \our qualities, otir e-irs in hearing j our stones, our hands m doing <!i n ice for \ oh, otir mind in the remembrance of >o«r feet, our head m bowing to thr world which is jour dwelling-place and our eves in gazing at the 'aints who are jour living images on earth
vBnt gunumiKathane iraianau hatiSyllm hastau ca harmasu tnanas tax a piidayor nak smytyam iiras lava nn<u<a-)agat-pranfin't rfrj/1/1 saltim dariane' stu bha\ at-lamlniim
' Rfibi'a, a woman mvstic of the 8th ccnturv. sajs 'Oh mj Lord, if I worship Thee from fear of Hell, burn mc in hell, and if I worship Thcc from hope of paradise, cselude mc thence, but if I worship Thee for Thine own sake, then withhold not from mc Thine eternal beauty '
Introduction 139
included m the Supreme The acceptance of one form does not mean the rejection of others
The Supreme is to be comprehended only by a supreme effort of consciousness This knowledge cannot be expressed at the level of thought except through symbols The symbols ate not entirely subjective The relativity of the symbols does not destroy either our capacity to discover the truth or our faith in the existence of objective reality. It is true that different objects appear differently from different points of view, but the validity of the different points of view need not be denied. Statements about reality are definitions of the relationship between those making them and the reality which they are describing. Symbols have a meaning, and this meaning is objective and shared The bearers of the meaning may be psychological states, separate existences, not even identical in then: qualita- tive content, but meanings can be studied and understood.
The Upanisads do not speak to us of limited dogmas. The life of spirit is wider than any particular religious formulation Religion deals with man's seeking for the eternal, the sources of truth and joy, and particular formulations are but approxima- tions to the Unutterable. Our mmds are not detached from the circumstances of tune and place. Full truth can be known only by a nund of transcendent rationality. The conception and expression by men of the reality which is universal, can only be partial according to the diversities of race and character As the Upanisads lay stress on spiritual experience and psychological discipline, they do not insist on any one set of dogmas, rites or codes They are also aware that we may touch different aspects of the spiritual experience when we attempt to define it We ™ a y use any symbols and methods which help to bring about a Mange of consciousness, a new birth * 'Th 6 ° ne ^P 16 ™ wno dwells in us is conceived externally. e VD % a f look for their gods in water, men of wider know-
^'^pubhc^ay^ fr ° m Guru Govmd Singh's writings the following
tivara alia tere nama
mawhra masdtja tere dhatna 0 God Uva j sabko san-mali de bhagavan P'Mes'of =k3 an 5 are Thy names, temples and mosques are Thy a°°ae Grant to all right understanding (of this).
140 The Principal Upamsads
ledge in celestial bodies, the ignorant m (images made of) wood
or stone but the wise see the Supreme m their own self '» 'The
yogins see the Supreme in the self, not m the images The
images are conceived for the sake of contemplation by the
ignorant '» The soul of man is the home of God God is in every
one of us ready to help us though we generally ignore Hun 3
Whatever be the form we start with, we grow to the worship of
the one Universal Spirit immanent m all * The worship of the
determinate form is recommended as a preparation for the
apprehension of non-determined Reality 5 Narada Bhakti Siiira
1 apsu devS manusyanam, divi devB mamsinam
balanam hSsfka-losthesu buddkesv almam devaia * iivam atmam pa&yanii pratimdsu fta yoginah ajnanSm bhavanarthaya praiimah panhalpiiah
Darianopamsad, see also Siva-dharmottara TbsBhagavatasays that'fire is the god of the twicebom.the (innermost) heart is the god of the -wise, the image of the ignorant, for the wise God is everywhere
agnirdevo dwjatinam, hrdt deva manisinam pratimasv alpa-buddhin&tn, jnamnam sarvaio hanh
3 'Though really companion and co-dweller, man does not understand the friendship of Him who dwells within the same body '
na yasya sakhyam purufo'vaiti sakhyuh sakka vasan samvasatah pure'smm.
Bhagavata
Pingala, the public woman, got disgusted with her life and said, 'Casting aside this eternal lover who is near (in my own heart), is my beloved, gives me joy, gives me wealth, I foolishly seek another (from outside), who does not fulfil my desires, who gives me only sorrow, fear and blind infatuation and is petty '
sanlam samipe ramanam rati-pradam vitta-pradam nUyam imam vihaya
a-kamadam duhkha-bhayadhi-ioka-moha-pradam luccham aham bhaje'jria
BhagavaiaXI 8 31
She resolved
'He is the friend, most beloved Lord and one's own self to all embodied beings I shall earn Hun by off enng myself to Him and play with Him as Goddess Laksnri does
suhrl preslhalamo natha, alm& cayam tartrtnSm tarn vtkriyatmanaivaham rame'nena-yatha ram&
Bhagavata XI 8 35
4 yasmm sarvam, yaiah sarvam, yah sarvam, sarvaiai ca yah
In \vhom is everything, from whom is everything, who is everything, who is everywhere
5 Cp Kalpalaru I 1 20
mr-viiesam param brahma saksat karlttm aniivarSh ye manias te'mtkampyante sa-viiesa-mrupanath
Introduction 141
tells us that the true devotee becomes a fulfilled being, im- mortal and content 1 Even the released perform image worship by way of sport. 1 There is a danger that the emotions of awe and reverence are likely to be treated as ends in themselves. They prepare for spirituality 3 Devotion ultimately leads to the knowledge of one's essential nature 4 For Ramanuja bhakti is a type of knowledge 5
Spiritual training begins with the external, with word and gesture in order to produce the answering spiritual content, but we should not stop at any stage short of life m God 6 There are those who regard the forms they worship as final, though the Upamsads make out that the Real has aspects of both
Commenting on Brahma Sutra III 3 59, 3 argues that each one is at liberty to choose the form of worship according to his liking and perform it The direct union with the object of meditation is the result of each of these meditations
* yal labdhva pitman stddho bhavaP., amrto bhavati, trpto bhavatt
1 mukta apt fflaya vigrahadikam krlva bhajante $
s Gopikas become one with the Supreme by fixing their minds on Him, by singing His songs, by doing His deeds tawnanaskah tad-Slapsh lad-vtcestah tad.-n.lm.ihah. At - ^ B utter a bandonment to God or prapatli paii-snlanvaya bh, ab-bandhavdn att mlamghya te'nly acyutagatah.
lie glory of meditation on the name of God is mentioned after the wnole Bhagavala is related to Pariksit
patitah skhahtah artah ksutvavavivaso bruvan haraye nama ity uccair mucyate sarva-patakat. hsl m ~ j !? a ~ rii P Smtsa 'nMZnam bhakttr ity dbhidhiyate Sltna-tattvanusand- bhaklir My aparejaguh In Bhahh-martanda, bhakti is defined as ofl bem l0VC m wluch when tte lovers are together they are afraid toaging^fOTra' 8 * 6 ^ w ^ en are not together they have a painful
a-drste darianotkanlha, drste viilesa-bhmitd nadrslena na drstena bhavata labhyate sukham 5 Mrtmamtsmrti.
6 vttamo brahma-sad-bhavo, dhyana-bhavas tu madhyamah stuhrjapo'dhamo bhSvo, bahih-puja adhamadhamah The hipli c+ t Mahanirvana, Tanira XTV 122.
ft e medifeh 0Tm 0i worslu P 15 the realisation of the Supreme in all. Praises ofh 0f , ^ Su P r eme is the middling state, prayers to and external -,!\. v ™ 1 *b e silent repetition of his name is the lowest and * won *iP is the lowest of all Again.
bUa-kridanaval sarvam rupa-namadt-halpanam
Alltheim^ a tbtd XIV - "7-
"nagined names and forms are as playthings for the children.
The Principal Upanisads
tranquil transcendence and cosmic universality The advocates of bhakti look upon the worship of the personal God as the highest bliss, 1 though those who regard the Absolute as super- personal declare that it is somewhat lower than the highest, that those who do not get beyond the stage of the worship of the Personal God, enter, on death, into a heavenly state of existence This survival in the worlds of the blessed belongs to the process of tune or samsara It is not emancipation from time or timeless union with reality
Any form of worship which falls short of complete self- naughtmg will not take us to the umtive life Faith, devotion, surrender are the means to it Each individual has to achieve insight by his own effort after long and persistent practice 1 When the veil of intellectual knowledge, of avidya, is swept aside, a flood of light breaks upon the awakened soul and a vision of the Universal Self is achieved This self is present, real and concrete even as a physical object is present to the physical eye The Supreme is not so much an immanent God as an experi- enced God, felt as an inward principle of power and new being m life When we rise in contemplation, when there is the vision of the Supreme which is entirely beyond the power of the soul to prepare for or bring about, we feel that it is wholly the opera-
1 Cp Vedattta Dehka
O Lord, if Thou art gracious, if I am (always) by Thy side, if there is in me pure devotion to Thee, if I am in the company of those who are Thy servants, then this samsara is itself salvation tvam cet prasidasi tavasmi samipatas cet tvayy ash bhaktir anagha kan-iaila-natha samsrjyate yadi ca dasajanas tuadiyah samsara esa bhagavan apavarga eva 1 Cp St Paul 'Work out your own salvation with fear and trembling, for it is God which worketh in you both to will and to do of His good pleasure ' Epistle to the Phihppians II 12-13
The seventeeth-century Platonist, Norns, writes 'The solitary and contemplative man sits as safe in his retirement as one of Homer's heroes in a cloud, and has this only trouble from the follies and extrava- gances of men, that he pities them I think it advisable for every man that has sense and thoughts enough to be his own companion (for certainly there is more required to qualify a man for his own company than for other men's), to be as frequent in his retirements as he can, and to communicate as little with the world as is consistent with the duty , of domg good, and the discharge of the common offices of humanity '
Introduction 143
tion of God working on the soul by extraordinary grace In a sense all life is from God, all prayer is made by the help of God's grace, but the heights of contemplation which are scaled by few are attributed in a special degree to divine grace. After the vision the light may fade, darkness may afflict the soul, but the soul can never lose altogether what it has once seen Our effort thereafter shall be to renew the experience, make it the constant centre of all our activities until the completely real is completely known
There are references to visions and auditions which sometimes accompany the soul's ascent to God They are really an em- barrassment to the aspiring soul They distract its attention and sometimes tempt it to remain on the wayside without pressing forward to the goal These visions and auditions are not an essential part of the religious intuition These are symbols on the natural and historical plane of the mysteries of spintual life All objects in the natural world are reflections of the happenings in the spintual world The events of the life of spirit are reflected symbolically in the world of space, time and matter
The paradoxes of mystical language are resolved when they are taken over into vital consciousness The mystery-filled figures of the Upamsads are abstractions to those who look upon them from outside The Upamsads speak to us of different forms of genuine religious experience Whether it is contempla- tion of the Absolute, or meditation on the Supreme Person or worship of the Cosmic Spirit, or absorption in the world of na ture, they are all genuine forms, as they aim at the same ultimate conclusion of self-transcendence Man must be sur- Hr J*** 6 are dlfferent regions in the realm of spirit m
men the consciousness of man freed from the fimtude of self ^enlarged finds fulfilment.
e " otIier rell gions, too, we have these varieties of mystic ^penence There are some who wish to establish contact with Plet/ 6 j d stnctlv a person, and live a life in ever com- rnost *♦ mth the dlvme Wl11 ^ at lon S iast reach the
go bev A ^ 11111011 mth 00,1 111616 are others who Wlsh t0 above vT Xmi ° n to Wlt y> a state of consciousness which is subject-object relationship. Naturally the Upamsads do
144 The Principal Upanisads
not adopt an attitude of dogmatism 1 This attitude of accept- ance of all forms of worship has been a persistent character of India's religious life 1 The word of God is not bound by lan- guages m which it is spoken 3 It is the one voice that is heard in all religions
We are heirs of a richer heritage than most of us are aware of The life of the people of spirit, from the beginning until now, has a great deal to offer us If we cut ourselves away from the rich treasury of wisdom about man's aspirations on this earth which is available to us from our own past, or if we are satisfied
1 St Paul's remarkable words that all nations 'seek the Lord if haply they might feel after him and find him, though he be not far from everyone of us' (Acts of the Apostles XVII 27) indicate the right attitude
Eckhart 'He who seeks God under settled forms lays hold of the form, while missing the good concealed in it '
1 'The Supreme is pleased with him who listens to all discourses on dharmas, who worships all gods, who is free from jealousy and has subdued anger '
Srnute sarva-dkarmami ca sarvan devan namasyah anasuyur pta-krodkai tasya Ittsyati keiavah
Visnu-dharmollara I 58
Cp the popular verse
At heart a Sakta, outwardly a Saiva
and in gatherings a Vaisnava anlah iakto bahih iawo, sabha-madhye ca vatsnavah As we use these symbols, we find that some are more adequate than others
Uddhava said [PBndava Gila 17)
vasttdevam -pantyajya yo'nyam devam upasale trstto jahnavl-tire kupam vanchatt durbhagah
That unfortunate one, who, rejecting Vasudeva, worships another god is like a thirsty person searching for a well on the bank of the Ganges.
Bardosa writes of Knsnnadeva Raya of Vijayanagar empire 'The King allows such freedom that any man may come and go and live according to his own creed without suffering any annoyance and without enquiring whether he is a Christian, Jew, Moor or Hindu ' An Advanced History of India by R C Majumdar, H C Ray^Chaudhunand K Datta (1946), P 379
3 Cp Virgil's passionate outburst 'Blessed is he who has won to the heart of the universe, he is beyond good and evil But that is too much for ordinary humanity to attain, it is a very good second best to know the gods of the country, to live the life of the country ' Georgics II 49° ^
'If any bom in barbarous nations, do what heth in him, God will reveal to him that which is necessary to salvation either by inspiration or by sending him a teacher ' St. Thomas Aqumas 2 Sent Dist 28 q, 1, a4, ad 4
Introduction
with our own inadequate tradition and fail to seek for ourselves the gifts of other traditions, we will gravely misconceive tbe spint of religion Loyalty to our particular tradition means not only concord with the past but also freedom from the past. The living past should serve as a great inspiration and support for the future. Tradition is not a rigid, hidebound framework which cripples the life of spirit and requires us to revert to a period that is now past and beyond recall It is not a memory of the past but a constant abiding of the living Spirit. It is a living stream of spiritual life
BRHAD-ARANYAKA UPANISAD
The Brhad-ara\iyaka-Upanisad which is generally recognised to be the most important of the Upamsads forms part of the Satapatha Brdhmana It consists of three Kandas or sections, the Madhu Kanda which expounds the teaching of the basic identity of the individual and the Universal Self, the Yapiavalkya or the Muni Kanda which provides a philosophical justification of the teaching and the KMla Kanda, which deals with certain modes of worship and meditation, upasana, answering roughly to the three stages of religious life, sravana, hearing the upade&a or the teaching, manana, logical reflection, upapattt and ntdidhyasana or contemplative meditation Of the two rescensions of the Satapatha Brahmaqa, the Kanva and the Mddhyandina, Samkara follows the former, and the text adopted here is the same
Brhad-dranyaka Upam§ad
Ftrsl Brahmana
i mm «sa va asvasya medhyasya snah, suryas caksuh, vatah praqah, vydttam agmr vatsvdnarah, samvatsara dtmdsvasya medhyasya, dyauh pr$lham, antariksam tidaram, prthvol fajasyam, disah pdrsve, avdntaradisah pdriavah, rtav&ngdm, masds cardltamasds ca parvdm, ahordtrdm pratisthah, naksa- •trany asthmi, nabho mdtiisdm; uvadhymn sikaidh, stndhavo gudah.yakrc ca Uomcwas ca farvaiah, osadhaytd ca vanaspatayas ca lomam udyan piirvdrdhah, mmlocaii jaghandrdhah, yad mjrmbhaU tad mdyotate, yad vtdhunute tat stanayah, yan mehati tad varsatt, vag evdsya vdk
i Aum, the dawn, venly, is the head of the sacrificial horse, tie sun the eye, the wind the breath, the open mouth the Vmbianara fire; the year is the body of the sacrificial horse, the sky is the back, the atmosphere is the belly, the earth the hoof, the quarters the sides, the intermediate quarters the ribs, the seasons the limbs, the months and the half-months the joints, %s and nights the feet, the stars the bones, the clouds the nesn; the food in the stomach is the sand, the rivers are the blood-vessels, the liver and the lungs are the mountains, the nerbs and the trees are the hair. The rising (sun) is the forepart, 2f st * tm g ( su &) the hind part, when he yawns then it lightens, wen he shakes himself, it thunders, when he urinates then it rams; voice, indeed, is his voice.
Aranyaiir ° f ^ U P amsad is the third cha P ter of ^
wamedha In this sacrifice a horse is let loose and a guard of dZ^^ foUows ^ t 1 * 1 * If any °™ hinders the horses' tie guard will have to fight When the horse completes a
« a S* Cmt A the earth mi returns t0 the ^P 1 ^' he 155 ofiered title nf~T Ce the who performs the sacrifice assumes the
The h ^ ^P™ 01 (XIII r°T sacnfice described at length m Satapatlia Brahmana VcWp J IJ 5 smn here a cosmic interpretation It is used as a
The d hfilonstrut h to the'pw* sa JF? ce 35 a means to account for creation goes back Sukta of the RV (X. 90 129), where from each
150 The Principal Upam?ads 1. 1. 2
of the members of the primeval person, Purusa, some part of the world is made
asvasya mcdhyasya of the sacrificial horse, medhdrhasya S vydttam open mouth, vivrtam mukham S alma body, sariram catma S
pdjasyam hoof , pddasyam, padasana-slhanam § See MU II 1 4 The earth is his footing The supra-physical can be reached only when we have a firm hold of the physical The thinkers of the Upanisads reach their conclusions by a study of the sensible fact, of the concrete realities of the physical world parvdnt joints, sandhayah S nabhah clouds, nabhasthd mcghah
Hvadhyatn half-digested food m the stomach, udarastham ardha-
firnam aianam S
gttddh blood-vessels, nadyah S
vijrmbkatc yawns gdlram vinamayah, vikstpa li § vijrmbhanam mukha-viddranam
vtdhunute shakes, gdlrdm kampayati & mehah urinates, miiiram karoh §
2 ahar va aivam pmastan malmna nvajdyala tasya pttrvc samudre yomh, ratnr cnampaicdn mahimd nvajdyata, tasyaparc samudre yomh, etau vd asvam mahimdndv abhtah sambabhilvatith hayo bhutvd devdn avahat, vdjl gandharvan, arvdsurdn, aivo manusydn, samudra evasya bandhuh, samudro yomh
2 The day, venly, arose for the horse as the vessel called maJnman appeared in front (of the horse) Its source is in the eastern sea The night, venly, arose for the horse as the vessel called mahiman appeared behind (the horse) Its source is in the western sea These two vessels, venly, arose on the two sides of the horse as the two sacrificial vessels Becoming a steed he earned the gods, as a stallion the Gandharvas, as a runner the demons, as a horse men The sea, indeed, is- his relative, the sea is his source
At the horse saenfice, asva-medha, two vessels are placed one in iront of and the other behind the horse, made of gold and silver, to hold the sacrificial hbations They are here interpreted cosmically as the eastern (Bay of Bengal) and the western (the Arabian sea) mahimd greatness, mahattvam S
The two vessels are made of gold and sdver The gold vessel is the day because both are bright, dlph-sdmdnydt, the silver vessel is the night, both the words rdjata and rain begin with the same syllable rd Silver and night may have a common nature if the night is a moonlit one, candnkd-dhavalatva-sdmydt
I 2. 2 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 151
The sea is taken by S as the Supreme Self paramatmd, samutpadya bhStani dravanty asmmn iti vyutpattya parama-gambhlrasy eivarasya sanudra-iabdatdm aha See A
Second Brahmana
1 naiveha kimcanagra asit mrtyunatvedam avrtam asit, aianayayd, asandya hi mrtyuh, tan mano'kuruta, dtmanvi sydm ttt so'rcann acarat, tasydrcata dpo'jdyanta arcate vat me kam abhud tit, tad evarkasya arkatvam; kam ha vd asmai bhavali, ya evam elai arkasya arkatvam veda.
1 There was nothing whatsoever here in the beginning By death indeed was this covered, or by hunger, for hunger is death He created the mind, thinking 'let me have a self (mind) Then he moved about, worshipping From him, thus worshipping, water was produced 'Verily,' he thought, 'while I was worshipping water appeared, therefore water is called arka (fire) Water surely comes to one who thus knows the reason why water is called arka (fire).'
M this was non-being covered by death who is Hiranya-garbha
By his thought the universe is produced Death is Hiranya-garbha It is the matter with which he interacts
" istamas or darkness which is represented as his body cp Sulfite U yasyiivyakiam iarlram yasydksaram sariram, yasya mrtyuh sariram ^sana^lhutantaralmdapahata-pdpmddtvyo devah eko ndrayanah atrmya-garbha is tamai Sariraka-paramatma, the Supreme Self
wtti the body of darkness He thought, 'let me have a self/ i e let me develop a world of
conscious and unconscious objects-
,^^ m i^apanca-Sarirakas-sydmtti samkalpa manahkrtavdn R. m ^ter or happiness kam udakam sukham vd S"
brth a ^°lt ar ^ a ^ ^ yd apdm iara dsit, tat samahanyata, sd P fl«y abkavat, tasyam asrdmyat tasya srdntasya taptasya teio nsoniravartatagmh.
wa^P^*' venl y' 1S arka That whlch was ^ fr 0 * 11 of the Fmm J eCam ^ solidlfied ; that became the earth On it he rested. tenhA if 11 s rested 311(1 ne ated (from the practice of aus- i y) ins essence of brightness came forth (as) fire.
152 The Principal Upamsads I 2 5
After the production of the earth Prajd-pah rested sarvo At lokah kdryam krtva Sramyah, prajapatei ca tan mahat kdryam yat prthtvi- sargah §
tejo-rasah essence of brightness, iejas-sdm-bhulah R.
3 sa trcdhatmdnam vyakuntta, ddityam tytiyam, vdyum trtiyam, sa esa prams trcdhd vihitah. tasya prdci dtk itrah, asaucdsau cairmau, atha asya pralici dik puccham, asaucdsau ca sakthyau, dakstnd codtci ca par&vc, dyauh prsUiam, antanksam udaram, tyam urah, sa eso'psu praiisfhitah, yatra kva cath tad eva pralitisfiiaty evam vidvan
3 He divided himself threefold (fire is one-third), the sun one-third and the air one-third He also is life divided threefold, the eastern direction is his head and his arms are that and that (the left and the right sides) Likewise the western direction is his tail and his two hip-bones are that and that The southern and the northern directions are his sides The sky is the back, the atmosphere the belly This (earth) is the chest. Thus he stands firm in the waters He who knows this stands firm wherever he goes
pratittsfhali stands firm, or obtains a resting-place, stlnttm labkatc £
4 so'kamayata, dvitiyo ma alma jayctett, sa manasa vacam mithunam samabhavad aianaya mrlyuh, tad yad rela asit, sa samvatsaro 'bliavat, na ha para tatah samvatsam asa tarn etavantam kalam abhibhah yavan samvatsarah, tarn etavatah, kalasya parastad asrjata, tarn jatam abhivyadadat sa bhdn akarot saiva vdg dbJiavat
4 He desired, let a second self (body or form) be born of me He, hunger or death, brought about the union of speech by mind What was the seed there became the year Previous to that there was no year He reared him for as long as a year and after that time he sent him forth When he was born he (Death) opened his mouth (to devour him) He (the babe) cried, bhdn That, indeed, became speech
Life is the result of previous knowledge and conduct reto bijam jnana-karma-rupam janmantara-krtam £
5 sa atksata yad% va imam abhimamsye, kaniyo'nnam karisya ih sa toy a vied tendtmanedam sarvam asrjata yad tdam ktm ca, rco yajumsi samdm chanddmst yajndn prajdh pasun sa yad yad evdsrjala, tat tad attum adhnyata, sarvam vd attih tad
I_ 2 7 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 153
flitter tufotffoam, sarvasyattasydttd bhavatt, sarvam asydnnam bhavait,ya evam etad aditer adihtvam veda
5 He thought, 'If I kill him I shall make very little food ' With that speech, with that self he brought forth all this whatsoever exists here, (the hymns of) the Jig Veda, (the formulas of) the Yajur Veda and (the chants of) the Soma Veda, the metres, the sacrifices, men and cattle. Whatever he brought forth that he resolved to eat. Verily, because he eats every- thing, therefore the «<to-nature of Adth (1 e Adth is so called) He who knows thus the <ftfofo-nature of Adth becomes an eater of everything here, and everything becomes food for him.
atksatd. thought, acmt-ayai R
In the previous passage, it is said that Death brought forth, by the union of speech and mmd, year &c, here it is said that he again brought forth Vedas &c § explains that while the previous union was of an unmanifested character, avyakta, the present one is manifested, bahya
§ quotes RV (I 59 10) 'Adtti is the sky, A dih is the atmosphere, Adth is the mother, she is the father.'
6 so'hamayaia, bkiiyasa yapiena bhiiyo yajeyeh; so'irdmyat, sa tapo'tapyata tasya srdntasya taptasya yaio viryam ud- nkramat prdnd vat yaso viryam, tat prdnesutkrdntesu sanram svayiium adhnyata, tasya sarira eva mana dsit
6 He desired 'let me sacrifice again with a greater sacrifice ' He rested himself, he practised austerity. While he was thus rested and heated, fame and vigour went forth The vital breaths, verily, are fame and vigour So when the vital breaths departed, his body began to swell, but the mmd was set on the
Wah' again, punar api S" explains that Prajd-palt had performed imnd ^ 6 m hlS P revl0US Ilfe and those thoughts were in his
st iapo'tapyaia- He practised austerity tapas is literally 'burning ' Thm,,^ ! caused bv the concentration of mental energy, and TIT V s K 311 creatl °n effected The ardour of mmd, restrained itise^P !l j d ' has P° wer over thlXi SS (See R.V X 190 ) Slowly wire™*! ? cover the Practice of austerities To make ourselves Miew uril %VG * t0 ^ugh fierce fires We cannot be made wen n «lr!^ e ^ De «>me ashes God strips us of everything that we Possess that we may draw near to him
so kaviayata, medhyam ma idam sydl, dimanvy anena sydm
15— 1 he Principal Upanisads I. 3. 1.
izi; iaio'svah samabha-at, yad asvai, ian medhyam dbkud iti iai cviisra-w-edhasyasva-ij.edJiKTai};; esa ha va asva-tnedkam vcia, ya exam exam veda. iarr, anavaradJnaivdinanyaia; tarn sathca- isarasya parastad t&mana dhbhaia- pasiin deuaiabhyah pratyau- haf. iasmai sarza-dizalyam prohsitam prajapatyam dlabhanie; esa ha va asva-ihcdho ya esa iapati: iasya samvatsara e&ma, ay am agr.ir arhah, iasysmc loka aimanah; tav elav arkasvamedhau. so p:war ekaiva dsvaid bharaii, mriystr eva; apa puxar-mriyum jayaxi, nainam v:riy:trm dptiGii, tnriy.tr asyStma bhavati, efasam devaidndffi eko bhavaii.
7. He desired, lei this (body) of mine be fit for sacrifice and let me have a self (body) through this. Thereupon it became a horse, because it swelled, it has become fit for sacrifice (he thought). Therefore the horse-sacrifice came to be known as asva-medha. He vi ho knows it thus, verily, knows the asva-midha. Letting it remain free, he reflected; and at the end of a year he offered it to himself (sacrificed him for himself). He gave up the (other) ppiipals to the divinities. Therefore (men, priests) offer to Praja-pais the sanctified (horse) dedicated to all the gods. Verily, that (sun) which, gives forth, heat is the horse- sacrifice. EEs body is the year. This (earthly) Sre is the arka and these worlds are his bodies. So these are two, the sacrificial fire {arka) and the horse-sacrifice. Yet again they are one divinity, even death. He (who knows this) overcomes repeated death, death cannot get hold of him, death becomes his body, and he becomes one with these divinities.
<zfjM?:r;.- becomes embodied, c&mazon, safsrazan. S. aldbhaia: offered, sacrificed it to himself, alarnbkam priavan. proksliam: sanctified, rnarATa-samshiair.. A.
He overcomes death, assumes the body of death. He becomes superior to rime.
Third Brahnana
THE SUPERIORITY OF BREATH -A3IOXG THE BODILY FUNCTIONS
1. dray a la prajapaiyah, devas cdsurds ca. ttdah kanTyasa eva devah, jy ay asa as'trah, ia estt Jokesv aspardhai.ia, te ha deva ucuh, har.iasitrdr. yajna udgTihendlyayameti.
the gods and the demons Of these, the gods weie the younger and the demons the elder ones They were struggling with each other for (the mastery of) these worlds The gods said, come, let us overcome the demons at the sacrifice through the itdgiiha
dvayah two classes, dvt-pmkarah.
The gods and the demons refer to the organs, speech and the rest They are inclined to sacred or worldly objects, to good or evil, then become divine or demoniac, sdstra-jamta-jndna-karma-bhamtah dyotanat deva bhavantt, ta eva svdbhavika-pralyaksdnumdna-jamta- drsta-prayojana-karma-jiidna-bhdvitd asurah § They become gods when they shine under the influence of thoughts and actions as taught by the scnptures These very organs become demons when they are influenced by then - natural thoughts and actions based (only) on perception and inference and directed to visible (secular) ends It is a distinction of life, not of beings S also says that the gods were less numerous and less strong than the demons aspardfumta struggled with each other, vied with each other faraspara-mpgisam krtavanlah
Cp Plato's Sophist, where a stranger from southern Italy who has studied the Eleatic logic of Parmemdes likens the philosophy of his own and earlier times to the mythical battle of the gods and the giants 'What we shall see is something like a battle of gods and giants going on between them over their quarrel about reality One Party is trying to drag everything down to earth, out of heaven and the unseen, literally grasping rocks and trees in their hands, wr they lay hold upon every stock and stone and strenuously affirm tnat real existence belongs only to that which can be handled and °™* resistance to the touch They define reality as the same thing
am*!! y ' ^ 33 soon 93 one of the opposite party asserts that ™ytning without a body is real, they are utterly contemptuous and vero en to anotner wor d Accordingly their adversaries are ery wary m defending their position somewhere m the heights of we unseen, maintaining with all their force that true reality consists thev Vw* lglble 311(1 bo( iiless forms In the clash of argument an/ww ?t. and P^ense those bodies which then: opponents wield,
heme h f 0therS aUege t0 be true reaM y the y cal1 ' not real tttermmaM 1? rt i° f movm g process of becoming On this issue an Elwsirr 1S alwa ys going on between the two camps' The df«f ♦ , Cornf °rd See his Plato's Theory of Knowledge (1935).
SaCtfviII 7-IJ 31 ideahsts ^ matenallsts is stul us
rtazava? tvam na «^g«y« taihetl iebh y° vd S
s y«t yo van bJiogas tarn devebhya agdyat, yat kalydnam
156 The Principal Upanisads I 3 5
vadati tad dtmane, te vidur, anena vat na udgdtrdtyesya ntitt tam abhidmtya pdpmandvidhyan, sa yah sa papmd yad evedam aprattrupam vadati sa eva sa papmd
2 They said to speech, chant (the udgitlia) for us, 'So be it,' said speech and chanted for them Whatever enjoyment there is m speech, it secured for the gods by chanting that it spoke well was for itself The demons knew, verily, by this chanter, they will overcome us They rushed upon it and pierced it with evil That evil which consists m speaking what is improper, that is that evil
3 atha ha pranam ucuh, tvam na udgdya ttt, tathett tebhyah prdna udagdyat yah prane bhogas tam devebhya dgdyat, yat kalydnam jighrah tad dtmane, te vidur anena vat naudgdtr dtye- syantttt tam abhidmtya pdpmandvidhyan, sa yah sa papmd yad evedam aprattrupam pghrati sa eva sa papmd.
3 Then they said to the life-breath, chant (the udgttha) for us 'So be it,' said the life-breath and chanted for them What- ever enjoyment there is in the life-breath, it secured for the gods by chanting, that it smelt well was for itself The demons knew, 'verily, by this chanter, they will overcome us ' They rushed upon it and pierced it with evil That evil which consists in smelling what is improper, that is that evil
pranam life-breath, here used for ghrdnam, the organ of smelling, the nose
4 atha ha caksur ucuh, tvam na udgdya tti, tathett tebhyai caksur udagdyat yaS caksust bhogas tam devebhya dgdyat, yat kalydnam paiyatt tad dtmane, te vidur anena vai na udgatratye- syantitt tam abhidmtya pdpmandvidhyan, sa yah sa papmd yad evedam aprattrupam paiyatt, sa eva sa papmd
4 Then they said to the eye Chant (the udgttha) for us 'So be it,' said the eye and chanted for them Whatever enjoy- ment there is m the eye it secured for the gods by chanting, that it saw well was for itself The demons knew, 'verily, by this chanter they will overcome us ' They rushed upon it and pierced it with evil. That evil which consists in seeing what is improper, that is that evil
5 atha ha irotram ucuh, tvam na udgdya tit, tathett tebhyah &rotram udagdyat yah irotre bhogas tam devebhya dgdyat, yat kalydnam sWnott tad dtmane, te vidur anena vat na udgdtrdtye-
syantiti tarn abhidruiya pdpmandvidhyan; sa yah sa papma yai evedam apratiriipam srnoti, sa eva sa papma.
5 Then they said to the ear' Chant (tie tidgitha) for us. 'So he it,' said the ear and chanted for them Whatever enjoy- ment there is in the ear, it secured for the gods by chanting; that it heard well was for itself The demons knew, 'verily, by this chanter, they will overcome us ' They rushed upon it and pierced it with evil. That evil which consists in hearing what is im- proper, that is that evil.
6 atha ha mana iicuh, tvam na udgdya iti, tatheti: tebhyo mana udagdyat ya manasi bhogas tarn devebhya agdyat, yat halydnam samkalpayatt tad' dtmane; te vidur anena vai na udgatrdtye- syaniiti. torn abhidnitya pdpmandvidhyan; sa yah sa papma yai evedam apratiriipam samkalpayatt, sa eva sa papma; evam u khalv eta devatah pdpmabhir updsrjan, evam enak pdpmand- vidhyan
6. Then they said to the mind- Chant (the tidgitha) for us. 'So he it/ said the mind and chanted for them. Whatever enjoyment there is in the mind, it secured for the gods by chant- ing, that it thought well was for itself. The demons knew, 'verily, by this chanter, they will overcome us ' They rushed upon it and pierced it with evil. That evil which consists in thinking what is improper, that is that evil. Likewise they also affected these (other) divinities with evil, they pierced them with evil.
All these organs were found to be incapable of chanting the udgiiha as they had contracted evil on account of their attachment to douig well (seeing well, hearing well or thinking well), for them- selves Myatui-visaya^es&ma-sambandha-sanga-Jietoh. S.
7 a tha hemam dsanyam pranam iicuh, tvam na udgaya iti, tatheti- tebhya esa prdna tidagayat; te vidur anena vai na xidgd- tralyesyantitt tarn abhidnitya papmandvitsan; sa yathd ahndnam rtya losto mdhvamseta, evam haiva vidhvamsamdnd visvafico vrnetuh tato deva abhavan, pardsurdh; bhavaty atmand pardsva avisan bhrairvyo bhavatt ya evam veda.
W, I?" 5 ,5? ' <So be iV said breatJl Wanted for tfiem They (the demons) knew, 'verily, by this chanter, they
hun with > e*L But as a clod of earth would be scattered S stnfang against a rock, even so they were scattered in aU
158 The Principal Upanisads 1. 3 13
directions and perished Therefore the gods became (increased) and the demons were crushed He who knows this becomes his true self and the enemy who hates him is crushed
avttsan- desired to pierce him, ve&hanam karlum tstavantdh £ pardh: crushed, parabMdS.li, vinatah.
8 U hocuh, kva mi so'bhfid yo na tttham asakteti, ayam dsye'ntar tti, so'ydsya dngtrasah, angdndm hi rasah
8 Then they said, what, pray, has become of him wha struck to us then? Here he is within the mouth He (the vital breath) is called Aydsya Angirasa (rasa) for he is the essence, of the limbs (anga, members of the body)
9 sa vd esa devoid dm nama, diiram hy asyd mrtyuh, duram ha vd asmdn mrtyvr bhavati ya evam veda
9 That divinity, venly, is dm by name, because death is far {diira) from it From him who knows this, death is far off
10. sa vd esa devataiidsdm devatanam papmdnam mriyxvm apa- hatya, yairasdm disam aniah, tad gamaydmcakara, tad dsdm pdpmano vmyadadhdt, iasmdn na janam tydt, ndntam lyat, net papmdnam mrtyttm anvavdyamti
10 That divinity, venly, after having struck off the evil of these divinities, even death, made this go to where the end of the quarters is There he set down their evils Therefore one should not go to people (of that region), one should not go to the end (of the quarters), lest he meet there with evil, with death
aiha: next, tad-anantaram
12 sa vat vdcam eva pratliamam atyavahat, sa yada mrtyum atyamucyata, so'gmr abhavat, so'yam agmh pare?ja mrtyum atihrdnto dipyate
12 Venly, it earned speech across first When that (speech) vas freed from death it became fire This fire, when it crosses beyond death, shines forth
13 atha prdnam atyavahat, sa yada mrtyum atyamucyata, sa vdyur abhavat so'yam vayuh parena mrtyum attkrdntah pavate
I 3 18 Brhad-dranyaka Upantsad 159
13 Then it earned across (the organ of) smell "When that was freed from death, it became air. This air, when it crosses beyond death, blows
-pratfo ghrayah. §
14. atha cak?ur atyavahat, tad yada mrtyum atyamucyata, sa adityo'bhavat, so'sdv ddiiyah parena mrtyum ahkrantas tapati.
14 Then it carried across the eye. "When that was freed from death, it became the sun. This sun, when it crosses beyond death, glows
15 Then it carried across the ear. "When that was freed from death, it became the quarters These quarters have crossed beyond death.
16 atha mano'tyavahat, tad yada mrtyum atyamucyata, sa candramd abhavat, so'sau candrah Parana mrtyum ahkrdnto bhdti, evam ha va enam esd devoid mrtyum ativahah, ya evam veda,
16. Then it carried across the mind When that was freed from death, it became the moon That moon, when it crosses beyond death, shines Thus, verily, that divinity carries beyond death him who knows this
Cp SatapathaBrahmana X 5 2 20. One becomeswhat one meditates on tamyathdyathopasale, tad eva bhavah
17 athdimane'nnddyam dgdyai, yadd hi him cdrwutm adyate, anmavoa tad adyate, tha pratthsthah.
X l J*** 1 at ^ e breath ) chanted food for itself (obtained food by chanting). For whatever food is eaten is eaten by him alone. In it (breath) is established.
adyam- eatable, adanarham, bhaksandrliam. R.
mourn* by him alone, by the vital breath alone. S refers to the
S233s W ° rd ^ Vltal breath ' ana tU frWtsytehya
18 te dead, abmvan, etavad va tdam sarvath yad annam tad atmana Sgdsih, ami no'snwm anna abhajasveti, te. vai' ma' mmmtsateti; iatheti. tarn sammtam pannyaviianta, tasmad yad adanenamiam aUi, temitds trpyanU; evam ha vd enam svd abhsamviianU, blmrtd svdmm ireslhah, pura eta bhavZy
160 The Principal Upamsads I 3 21
annddo' dhvpatih, ya evam veda, ya u haivamvidam svesu prah- pratir bubhftsah, na haivalam bhdryebhyo bhavati, atha ya evaitam antibhavati, yo vattam anu bhdrydn bubhursati, sa haivalam bhdryebhyo bhavati
18 These divinities said, 'Venly, just this much is whatever food there is and that you have obtained for yourself by chanting Now let us have a share m this food ' He said, 'then sit around, facing me (or enter into me) 'So be it ' They sat around (entered into) him on all sides Therefore, whatever food one eats by this breath, they are satisfied by it So do his relations come to him who knows this, he becomes the supporter of his people, their chief, their foremost leader, an eater of food and their lord Whoever among his people desires to be the equal of him who has this knowledge, he is not able to support his own dependents But whoever follows him and whoever, following him, desires to support his dependents, he, indeed, will be able to support his dependents
desires to be the equal or rival pratikuh bubhusati, prattspardhi bhavitum iccltatt &
desires to support bubhursati, bhartum icchati £
19 so'ydsya angirasah, anganam hi rasah, piano va anganam rasah, prano hi va anganam rasah, tasmad yasmdt kasmac cdngat prana utkrdmati, tad cva tat susyati, esa hi vd anganam rasah
19 He is (called) Ayasya Angirasa for he is the essence of the limbs Venly, life-breath is the essence of the limbs, yes, life-breath is the essence of the limbs Therefore, from whatever limb life-breath departs, that, indeed, dries up, for, it is, venly, the essence of the limbs
20 esa u eva brhaspatih, vdg vai brhatl tasyd esa patih, tasmad u brhaspatih
zo And this is also Brliaspati The brhati is speech and this is its lord Therefore this is Brhaspati
brhall The metre with 36 syllables used in the R V Here it is used for the RV itself
21 esa « eva brahmanas-pahh, vdg vai brahma, tasyd esapatxh, tasmad 11 brahmanas-pahh
21 And this is also Brahmanas-pali Speech is Brahman, and this is its lord Therefore, this is Brahmanas-pati
Brahman refers to the Yajur Veda
j 3 25 Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad 16*
A EULOGY OF THE CHANT ON BREATH 22 esa u eva sama, vag vat soma, esa sa camaiceh tat samnab sdmatvam; yad veva samah piusmd, samo ma4akena samo naeena, sama ebhis tnbhir lokath, samo'nena sarvena tasmad veva sama, ainute samnahsayujyam salokaidm.ya evam etat sama
^22 And this is also the Sama Veda; speech, verily, is the chant It is sd (she) and am. (he). That is why saman is called saman or because he is equal to a white ant, equal to a mosquito equal to an elephant, equal to these three worlds, nay, equal to this universe, therefore indeed is it the Sama Veda He who knows this Sama Veda to be such, attains union with it or lives in the same world with it
See C U V 2 6 sa is speech, and ama is vital breath.
23 And this is also the udgitha The vital breath, verily, is td, for by vital breath is this whole (world) upheld. Song, verily, is speech This is udgitha, for it is ut and gttha.
24. taddhapx brahmadattas caikitdneyo rajdnarh bhaksayann uvdca, ayam tyasya raja murdhanam vipdtayatdt, yad ito'ydsya dngtraso'nyenodagdyad ttt, vdca ca hy eva sa prayena codagayad th
24 As to this also, Brahmadatta Caikitaneya, while drinking King {Soma) said Let this King strike off this man's (my) head (if I say) that Ayasya Angirasa chanted the udgttha with any other means than this (vital breath and speech) , for, said he, only with speech and with vital breath did he chant the udgitha.
Caikitaneya the great grandson of Cikitana rajanam yajne somam S
25 tasya hattasya samno yah svatii veda, bhavatt hasya svam; tasya vat svara eva svam, tasmad artvtjyam kansyan vdct svaram icchela, iaya vdca svara-sampannaydrtvtjyam kuryat; tasmad yajfie svaravantam dtdrksanta eva, atho yasya svam bhavatt; bhavatt hasya svam, ya evam etat samnah, svam veda.
25 He who knows the wealth of that Saman has that
l62
The Principal Upamsads
wealth Its wealth, indeed, is tone Therefore, one who is about to perform the duties of a Rivtj priest desires to have a rich tone m his voice Being possessed of such a voice, he performs the duties of a Rtvij pnest Therefore, people desire to see at a sacrifice a priest with a good voice, as one who has wealth He who knows the wealth of Soman to be such attains wealth 26 tasya hailasya samno yah suvamam veda, bhavah hasya suvamam, tasya vat svara eva suvamam, bhavah hasya suvamam, ya evam etat samnah suvamam veda
26 He who knows what is the gold (correct sound) of this Soman obtains gold The tone, venly, is its gold He who thus knows the gold of that Soman obtains gold
suvarna- correct sound or gold su, varna
27. tasya hattasya samno yah pratisthdm veda, prati ha tisthati, tasya vai vdg eva pratisthd, vdci hi khalv esa etat pranah pra- tisthito gTyate anna ity u haika ahuh
27 He who knows the support of this Sdman is, indeed, supported Speech, venly, is its support, for, when supported on such, the vital breath chants But some say it is (supported) on food (body)
28 athdtah pavamananam evdbhydrohah, sa vai khaln prastotd sdma prastatth, sa yatra prastuydt, tad etdm japet 'asato ma sad gamaya, tamaso ma jyotir gamaya, mrtyor mdmrtam gamaya' tti, sayad aha, asato ma sad gamaya iti, mrtyur va asat, sad amrtam, mrtyor mdmrtam gamaya, amrtam ma kttrv ity evaitad aha, tamaso ma jyottr gamaya iti, mrtyur vai tamdh, jyotir amrtam, mrtyor via amrtam gamaya, amrtam kurv ity evaitad aha, mrtyor mdmrtam gamaya tti, ndtra ttrohttam wdsti. atha yanitardnt stolrdm, tesv dtmane' middy am dgdyel; tasmdd u tesu varam vrntta, yam kdmam kdmayeta, tarn, sa esa evam-vtd udgdtdtmane va yajamdnaya vd yam kdmam kdmayate, tarn agayaii; taddhaxtal loka-pd eva, 11a haivd lokyatdyd didsti, ya evam etat sdma veda
28 Now next the repetition only of the purificatory hymns, venly, the Prastotr pnest recites the chant and while he recites it, let the saenficer recite these (three yajus verses) 'from the unreal lead me to the real, from darkness lead me to light, from death lead me to immortality ' When he says 'from the unreal lead me to the real,' the unreal, venly, is death, the real is immortality 'From death lead me to immortality', 'make me immortal,' that is what he says 'From darkness lead
me to light' , darkness, verily, is death, the light is immortality. From death lead me to immortality, make me immortal, that is what he says 'From death lead me to immortality,' there is nothing here that is hidden (or obscure and so requires explana- tion) Now whatever other verses (there are) in the hymns of praise, in them one should secure food by chantmg And therefore in them he should choose a boon whatever desire he may desire That udgdtr pnest who knows this, whatever desire he desires, either for himself or for the sacnficer, that he obtains by chanting This, mdeed is (called) world-conquenng He who thus knows this chant, for him there is no fear of his being without a world.
abhyarolia ascension It is so called because the performer reaches the divinity he worships
Fourth Brdhmana THE CREATION OF THE WORLD FROM THE SELF
1 dtmavoedam agra asit purusavtdhah, so'nuvTksya ndnyad dimano'pasyat, so'ham asmity agre vydharat, tato'ham ndmd- bltavat, tasmad apy etarhy dmantntah; aham ayam ity evdgra uhtva, athdnyan ndmaprabruteyad asyabhavati sayat purvo' smdt scuvasmat sarvdn pdpmana ausat, tasmat pumsah, osah ha vat sa tam, yo'smdt purvo bubhusatt, ya evam veda.
1 In the beginning this (world) was only the self, in the shape of a person Looking around he saw nothmg else than the self He first said, 'I am ' Therefore arose the name of I There- fore, even to this day when one is addressed he says first 'This is I' and then speaks whatever other name he may have Because before all this, he burnt all evils, therefore he is a person He who knows this, verily, burns up him who wishes to be before him
o/ww derived from the root as 'to be' means the existence of I anuvlksya the person who sees and creates himself [srstva), in the very act of seeing enters into the creation (anuprawsat), mto all things, beings and selves
2 so'bibhct, tasmad ekdki bibheti, sa hay am iksam cakre, yan mad anyan nosh, kasman mi bibhmmti, lata evdsya bhayam viydya fiasmad hy abhesyat, dviiiydd vai bhayam bhavati.
r*
164 The Principal Upamsads I 4 4
2 He was afraid Therefore one who is alone is afraid This one then thought to himself, 'since there is nothing else than myself, of what am I afraid?' Thereupon his fear, verily, passed away, for, of what should he have been afraid? Assuredly it is from a second that fear arises
3 sa vai naiva reme, tasmad ekdhi na ramate, sa dvttiyam aicchat, sa haitdvati dsa yathd strv-pumdmsau sampansvaklati, sa imam evaimanam dvedMpdtayat, tatahpahs ca patni cabhavatam, tasmat idam ardlia-brgalam tva svah, ih ha smdlta ydjnavalkyah, tasmad ayam akasah stnyd piiryaia eva tarn samabhavat, tato manusya ajayanta
3 He, venly, had no delight Therefore he who is alone has no delight He desired a second He became as large as a woman and a man m close embrace He caused that self to fall into two parts From that arose husband and wife There- fore, as Yapavalkya used to say, this (body) is one half of oneself, like one of the two halves of a split pea Therefore this space is filled by a wife He became united with her From that human beings were produced
samabhavat became united, maithunam upagatavdn S
Htranya-garbha or Prajd-pati divided himself into two Both are his elements The two are not separate and the theory is not one of final dualism Cp Vtsnu Purdna
sata-rtipam ca tarn ndrim tapo-ntrdkuta-kalmasam svdyambhuvo manur devah palnilve jagrhe prabhuh
Because the woman was born of Vira], she is said to be his daughter also prajdpattr manvakhyai iata-rupdkhydm dtmano duhitaram pat- nitvena kalpitdm &
The original being, atman or self looks around and sees nothing else but himself When he realises his loneliness, he has two feelings, one of fear and the other of a desire for companionship His fear is dispelled when he realises that there is nothing else of which he has to be afraid His desire for companionship is satisfied by his dividing himself into two parts which are then called husband and wife
Compare this with Plato's myth of the androgynous man m Symposium 189c
From the union of the two, the race of human beings is produced A series of transformations of the original human pair into animal forms is mentioned in the next passage
4 sa heyam iksdm cakre, katham nu mdtmdna eva janaytivd sambhavati, hanta tiro'sdmh, sa gaitr abhavat, rsabha tiaras tarn sam evabhavat, tato gdvo' jayanta, vadavetardbhavat, aiva-vrsa
I 4 6 Brhad-aranyaka Vpanisad 165
tiarah, gardhabhUard gardabha ttarah, tarn sam evabhavat, iota eha-iapMm ajayata, ajetarabhavat, vasta itarah, avir tiara, mesa ifarah, tarn sam evabhavat, tato'javayo' jayanta; evam eva yad idam kirn ca tnithurtam, a-ptpikkabhyah iat sarvam asrjata
4 She thought, 'How can he unite with me after having produced me from himself Well, let me hide myself She became a cow, the other became a bull and was united with her and from that cows were born. The one became a mare, the other a stallion The one became a she-ass, the other a he-ass and was united with her; and from that one-hoofed animals were born, The one became a she-goat, the other a he-goat, the one became a ewe, the other became a ram and was united with her and from that goats and sheep were born Thus, indeed, he produced everything whatever exists in pairs, down to the ants
5 so'vet, altam vdva srshr asmi, aham hidam sarvam asrksiti; tatah srsfvr abhavat, srstyam hdsyaitasydm bJuivatiya evam veda.
5 He knew, I indeed am this creation for I produced all this. Therefore he became the creation. He who knows this as such comes to be in that creation of his
He who knows this becomes himself a creator like Praja-pati' ewnnnjagatt sa prajapaltvat srasia bhavaii
In the next verse we have the creation of the gods, Agni, Fire, «na Soma, Moon.
6. atliely abhyamanlhat, sa mukhdc ca yoner hastSbhydm asrjata, tasmad etad ubhayam alomakam antaratah, awnaka hi ym i r antaratah, tad yad tdam ahur ammn yaja, mtim yajjly ekatkam devam, etasyaiva sa visrstih, esa u hy eva torve aevaJ}. athayat hm cedam drdram, tad retaso asrjata, tad u rtwad va tdam sarvam annam cavaannddai ca, soma wmiam, agmr annadah saisa brahmano'tisrshh, yac chreyaso ah an ffi aia atha ym maft y ah sann amrtan asrjata, tasmad fi tt! ahmi y &m h&syaitasyam bhavahya evam veda 0 inen he rubbed back and forth and produced fire from
thf> i irr, luwue J.ui me suurce is namess on
S Wh en ^ ( the P e °P le ) sa y 'sacrifice to him,' £p t0 ^i othe r ™e/ all this is his creation mdeed and he dii<wi * the gods ^ now whatever is moist, that he pro-
food Semen ' 804 aat * $° m * "H" 9 whole faorld) is just ° Q the ea ter of food Soma is food and fire is the eater of
166 Tlie Principal Upanisads I 4 7
food This is the highest creation of Brahma, namely, that he created the gods who are superior to him He, although mortal himself, created the immortals Therefore it is the highest creation Verily, he who knows this becomes (a creator) m this highest creation
soma moon, the lord of medicinal plants osadhipah Cp Deuteronomy XXXIII 14 'The precious fruits brought forth by the sun and the precious things put forth by the moon '
S refers to two views of Hiranya-garbha, that he is the trans- cendent Brahman and that he is the transmigrating 'self,' para eva hiranya-garbha tty eke, samsdrtty apare § accounts for it by the difference of the presence and absence of limitations, upadhi-vasat samsarilvam, paramartltatas svato'samsary eva
7 taddhedam tarhy avyakrtam asit, tan nama-rupabhyam eva vyakriyata, asau nama, ayam tdam rupa tit, tad idam apy etarhi nama-rupabhyam eva vyakriyate, asau nama, ayam idam rupa th sa esa tha pravvsta anakhdgrebhyah yathd, ksurah ksuradhane' vahitah syat, visvam-bharo vd visvam-bhara-kuldye, tarn na paiyanti a-krtsno hi sah, prdnann eva prdno nama bhavah, vadan vak, pasyams caksuh, srnvan srotram, manvdno manah, tany asyaitam karma-namany eva sayo'ta ekaikam updste, na sa veda, akrtsno hy eso'ta ekatkena bhavati, atmety evopdsita, atra hi ete sarva ekam bhavanti tad etat padaniyam asya sarvasya yad ayam atmd, anena hy etat sarvam veda yathd ha vat padendnu- vindet evam kirtim slokam vmdateya evam veda
7 At that time this (universe) was undifferentiated It became differentiated by name and form (so that it is said) he has such a name, such a shape Therefore even today this (universe) is differentiated by name and shape (so that it is said) he has such a name, such a shape He (the self) entered in here even to the tips of the nails, as a razor is (hidden) in the razor-case, or as fire in the fire-source Him they see not for (as seen) he is incomplete, when breathing he is called the vital force, when speaking voice, when seeing the eye, when hearing the ear, when thinking the mind These are merely the names of his acts He who meditates on one or another of them (aspects) he does not know for he is incomplete, with one or another of these (characteristics) The self is to be meditated upon for m it all these become one This self is the foot-trace of all this,
I 4 8 Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad 167
for by it one knows all this, just as one can find again by foot- prints (what was lost) He who knows this finds fame and praise
nama-r&pa name and shape which together make the individual. The mtna is not the name but the idea, the archetype, the essential character, and the rupa is the existential context, the visible em- bodiment of the idea In every object there are these two elements, the principle which is grasped by the intellect and the envelope which is apprehended by the senses While noma is the inner power, ritpa is its sensible manifestation If we take the world as a whole, we have the one nama or all-consciousness informing the one rupa, the concrete universe The different nama-r&pas are the differentiated conditions of the one nama, the world consciousness While the world form is mitrta, its soul is a-mfirta The former is shaped corporeal, sa-iartram, the latter is incorporeal a-iariram BU II 3, CU VIII 12 1 InBU III 2 12, the part that does not leave the individual soul at death is noma, which is not accessible to the senses Akasajs nama, and m the human individual the space m the heart hrdy-akasa, is the domain of nama, the principle of consciousness as a razor m a razorcase He is hidden m all things as a razor m its case or as fire m wood The ignorant do not know him who is hidden behind all names and forms See R V 1. 164. 5 mham-bhara He who sustains the world Vathanara visvamhbharti wtsvaitaragm-rupendi viham-bharah. R
mrma-namam names of his acts These are functional names which conceal his undivided nature We must realise the self not in its ***** aspects but as these are unified in the self
incomplete, a-purna-svariipak R Sense or intellectual Knowledge which does not involve the functioning of the whole self is ^complete knowledge Wholeness is integral insight
we trace out lost cattle by following their footsteps, so will we tod everything if we know the Self
8 tad etat preyah putrat, preyo vtitat, preyo' nyasmat sarvasmdt, ttarataram, yad ayam alma sa yo'nyam aimanah pnyam mvanam brftydt, pnyam rotsyaUU, Uvaro ha tatliaiva syat jmanam eva pnyam upasita, saya atmanam eva pnyam upaste \ 8 T^f ^ nyam P r(mS -y u ^ bhavati
Mm Self IS dearer than a son, is dearer than wealth, is carer than everything else and is mnermostWf one were to J™, 1 P^ s ? n who speaks of anythinreTse^han the Self as so A will lose what he holds dear, he would very likely do vne should meditate on the Self alone as dear. He who
168 The Principal Upamsads L 4 10.
meditates on the self alone as dear, what he holds dear, venly, will not perish
isvarah able, capable, samarihah S pramdyukam perishable, pramaranasitam S
9 tad ahuh, yad brahma-vidyaya sarvam bhavisyanto manusyd manyanie, kim u tad brahmavet, yasmat tat sarvam abhavad %h
9 They say, since men think that, by the knowledge of Brahman, they become all, what, pray, was it that Brahman knew by which he became all'
10 brahma va idam agra as.it, tad aimanam evavct, aham brahmasmiti tasmal tat sarvam abhavat, tad yo yo devanam pratyabudhyata, sa eva tad abhavat, tathd rsinam, tathd mamt- sydndm taddhaitatpasyan rsirvdma-devahpratipede,ahammanur abhavam suryas ceh, tad idam apt etarhi ya evam veda, aham brahmasmiti sa idam sarvam bhavah, tasya ha na devds ca nabhittyd Hate, atma hy esam sa bhavah atha yo anydm devatdm upaste, anyo'sau anyo' ham asmiti, na sa veda, yatha paiur, evam sa devanam, yatha ha vat bahavah paiavo manusyam bhunjyuh, evam ekaikah puruso devdn bhunakh, ekasmmn eva paiav adiyamane'pnyam bhavah, kim u bahusu? tasmad esam tan na priyam yad etan manusya vidyuh
10 Brahman, indeed, was this m the beginning It knew itself only as 'I am Brahman ' Therefore it became all Whoever among the gods became awakened to this, he, indeed, became that It is the same in the case of seers, same in the case of men Seemg this, mdeed, the seer Vama-deva knew, 'I was Manu and the Sun too ' This is so even now Whoever knows thus, 'I am Brahman,' becomes this all Even the gods cannot prevent his becommg thus, for he becomes their self So whoever worships another divinity (than his self) thinking that he is one and (Brahman) another, he knows not He is like an animal to the gods As many animals serve a man so does each man serve the gods Even if one animal is taken away, it causes displeasure, what should one say of many (animals)? Therefore it is not pleasing to those (gods) that men should know this
See R V IV 26 1 Vama-deva is the seer of the fourth book of the R V Being is self-knowledge
pratyabudhyata became awakened Cp Buddhist bodhi sambodht, Kena 12
The gods are not pleased that men should know the ultimate
truth, for then they would know the subordinate place the gods hold and give up making them off enngs
11 brahma va idam agra aslt, ekam eva; tad eham san na vyabhavat tac chreyo rufiam atyasrjaia ksatram, yany etdm devatrd ksatram, xnS.ro varunah somo rudrah parjanyo yamo mrlyur liana th tasmdt ksatrdt param nasti, tasmdt brdhmanah k$atriyam adhastdd updste rajasuye, ksatra eva tad yaio dadhdti, $ai$d ksatrasya yonir yad brahma tasmdd yady apt, raja paramatdm gacchati, brahmaivdntata upanisrayah svam yonim ya. u etuim htnastt, svam sa yonim rccJtatt, sa pdpTyan bhavah, yatha heyamsam himsttvd
11 Verily, in the beginning this (world) was Brahman, one only -That, being one, did not flourish. He created further an excellent form, the Ksatra power, even those who are Ksatras (rulers) among the gods, Indra, Varuna, Soma (Moon), Rudra, Parjanya, Yama, Mrtyu (Death), Isana Therefore there is nothing higher than Ksatra Therefore at the Rajasuya sacrifice the Brahmana sits below the Ksatnya On Ksatrahood alone does he confer this honour But the Brahmana is nevertheless the source of the Ksatra Therefore, even if the king attains supremacy at the end of it, he resorts to the Brahmana as his source Therefore he who injures the Brahmana strikes at his own source He becomes more evil as he injures one who is supenor
ekam eva one only
At the begmning there was only one caste or class, the Brahmana . owerentiations were not, naslt-ksatradt-bhedah. 5. m^taryd Wer ° r doimnion ' used to ^S 11 ^ 6 ^ princely or the raja-stlya- the ceremonial anointing of a King.
12. sa nawa vyabhavat sa viiam asrjata, yany etdm, deva- jfr flWt & ana * a fthhydyante, vasavo rudra ddityd visvedevd maruta
man 'uf u e dld not flourlsn - He created the vis (the com- thp v e classes 01 g°ds who are designated in groups.
Vasus . Rudras, Adityas, Visvedevas and Maruts
Power $l 5hmana represents knowledge, the Ksatnya temporal duct,™. 5 m not en ough We require a class for increasing pro- auction and acquiring wealth
170 The Principal IJpanisads I 4 15
13 sa navoa vyabhavat, sa saudram varnam asrjata pusanam, tyam vai pilsd, tyam Mdam sarvam pusyatiyad idam kim ca
13 He did not still flourish He created the Sudra order, as Pusan Venly, this (earth) is Pusan (the nounsher), for she nourishes everything that is
Society requires, in addition to wisdom, power, and wealth, service and work Wisdom conceives the order, power sanctions and enforces it, wealth and production provide the means for carrying out the order, and work carries out These are the different functions essential for a normal well-ordered society These distinctions are found among both gods and men
14 sa naiva vyabhavat tac chreyo-rupam atyasrjata dharmam tad etat ksatrasya ksatram yad dJiarmah, taspiad dharmad param nasti atho abaliydn baliyamsam dsamsate dhannena, yathd rapid evam yo vai sa dharmah satyam vai tat tasmat satyam vadantam ahuh, dharmam vadatiti, dharmam va vadantam, satyam vadatiti elad hy evaitad ubhayam bhavati
14 Yet he did not flourish He created further an excellent form, justice This is the power of the Ksatnya class, viz justice Therefore there is nothing higher than justice So a weak man hopes (to defeat) a strong man by means of justice as one does through a king Venly, that which is justice is truth Therefore they say of a man who speaks the truth, he speaks justice or of a man who speaks justice that he speaks the truth Venly, both these are the same
dharma law or justice is that which constrains the unruly wills and affections of people
Even kings are subordinate to dharma, to the rule of law Law or justice is not arbitrary It is the embodiment of truth 'That which is known and that which is practised are justice ' jndyamanam anusthiyamdnam ca tad dharma eva bhavati £ hopes to defeat jetum dsamsate R
From early times kings are said to act out the truth, satyam kpivdnah RV X log 6, or take hold of the truth satyam grhndnali Atharva Veda V 17 10, satya and dharma, truth and justice are organically related
15 tad etad brahma ksatram vit siidrah tad agmnaiva devesu brahvidbhavat, bidhmano manusyesu, ksatriyena ksatnyah, vaiiyena vaisyah, siidrena siidrah, tasmdd agndv eva devesu lokam icchanle, brdhmaiie manusyesu, etdbhydm hi riipdbhydm brahmdbhavat atha yo ha vd asmdl lokdt svam lokam adrslvd
I 4. 16 Brhad-dranyaka Upamsad 171
praih, sa enam avidito na bhunakii, yathd vedo vditanfiktah anyad va karmakrtam yad tha va apy anevamvid mahat-punyam karma karoh, taddhdsydntatah ksiyata eva, atmanam eva lokam updsita, saya atmanam eva lokam upaste, 11a hasya karma ksiyate, asmddd hy eva atmano yad yat kdmayate tat tat srjate.
15 So these (four orders were created) the Brahmana, the Ksatnya, the Vaisya and the Siidra Among the gods that Brahma existed as Fire, among men as Brahmana, as a Ksatnya by means of the (divine) Ksatnya, as a Vaisya by means of the (divine) Vaisya, as a Sudra by means of the (divine) Sudra Therefore people desire a place among the gods through fire only, and among men as the Brahmana, for by these two forms (pre-eminently) Brahma existed If anyone, however, departs from this world without seeing (knowing) his own world, it being unknown, does not protect mm, as the Vedas unrecited or as a deed not done do not (protect him) Even if one performs a great and holy work, but without knowing this, that work of his is exhausted m the end One should meditate only on the Self as his (true) world. The work of him who meditates on the Self alone as his world is not exhausted for, out of that very Self he creates whatsoever he desires.
SeeCU VIII 2
S quotes Manu II 87 that a Brahmana is one who is friendly to all, to justify the aspiration of human beings to attain to the order of An^ all0od sarvesuht ^esuabhaya-pradah A A Brahmana grants freedom from fear to all beings of ti K a comm011 saying in mediaeval wnters that society consists ™ ™° se w bo work, those who guard, and those who pray It is th« v 6 to note m P 355111 ^ tfl at these wnters mean by the workers fflf 1 v WOrk 011 the land ' ^ that ^ classification omits m^m Y . merch ant and the dweller in the towns " Legacy of tlie Ages, 1926, p ii, c. G. Crump.
¥ at ^° a yamva dtma sarvesdm bhutanam lokah sayajjuhoti ath ^f^t^dmdnam lokah; atJiayad anubrute, tena rsindm; van y $ ltrih y° m pmati yat prajdm icchate, tena pitrndm; atha sydn- (lmS l S ' n v&sa y. ate > y ad ebhyo'sanam daddti, tena manu- yad asv j? ^ i >a ^ u ^y as trnodakam vindati, tena pasunam, tyatn foh 1 SSU * v '*P a d'i v&ydmsy apip^hkdbhya upafivanti, tena wie ( y ai ^ h* 1 vai - svdya lokdydristim icchet, evam haivam tn&fJu - ) sarvdnt bhutdny anshm icchanti. tad va etad
Now this self, verily, is the world of all beings. In so far
The Principal Upantsads
as he makes offerings and sacrifices, he becomes the world of the gods In so far as he learns (the Vedas), he becomes the world of the seers In so far as he offers libations to the fathers and desires offspring, he becomes the world of the fathers In so far as he gives shelter and food to men, he becomes the world of men In so far as he gives grass and water to the animals, he becomes the world of animals In so far as beasts and birds, even to the ants find a living in his houses he becomes their world Venly, as one wishes non-injury for his own world, so all beings wish non-injury for him who has this knowledge This, indeed, is known and well investigated
lokah world, object or enjoyment, loko hi noma prdm-bhoga- sthana-visesah R
anubriite learns the Vedas, svadhyayam adhite §
The interdependence of man and the world including deities, seers, fathers, animals, is brought out The same idea is elaborated m the theory of the five great sacrifices, paiica-mahdyapiah, bhuta-yajiia, manusya-yapia, pitf-yajna, deva-yajiia and brahma- yajna for animals, men, manes, gods and seers investigated vtcdntam §
arisfam non-injury risfam ndiah, anstam, anasam R
17 dtmawedam agra dstt, eka eva, so'kdmayata, jdya me sydt atha prajdyeya, atha vittam me syad, atha karma kurvlyeh etavdn vai kdmah necchami ca na ato bhuyo vtndet tasmdd apy etarhy ekdki kdmayate, jdya me sydt, atha prajdyeya, atha vittam me syad atha karma kuroiyeti sa ydvad apy etesdm ekaikavi na prdpnott, a-krtsna eva tdvan manyate tasyo krtsnatd mana evdsya dtmd, vdg jdya, prdnah prajd, caksur mdnusam vittam, caksusa hi tad vindate, irotram daivam, irotrena hi tac chrnot dtmavodsya karma, dtmand hi karma karoti sa esapanktoyajnah, pdnktahpaiuh, pdnktahpurusah, panktam tdam sarvamyad idam kim ca tad tdam sarvam apnoti, ya evam veda
17 In the beginning this (world) was just the self, one only He desired, 'would that I had a wife, then I may have offspring Would that I had wealth, then I would perform rites ' This much indeed is the (range of) desire Even if one wishes, one cannot get more than this Therefore, to this day, a man who is single desires, 'would that I had a wife, then I may have offspring. Would that I had wealth, then I would perform rites ' So long as he does not obtain each one of these, he thinks himself to be incomplete Now his completeness (is as follows),
Brkad-dranyaka Upanisad
mind truly is his self, speech his wife, breath is his offspring, the eye is his human wealth, for he finds it with the eye, the ear his divine wealth, for he hears it with his ear The body, indeed, is his work, for with his body he performs work So this sacrifice is fivefold, fivefold is the animal, fivefold is the person, fivefold is all this world, whatever there is He who knows this as such obtains all this
The ignorant man thinks that he is incomplete without wife, children and possessions a-krtsnah incomplete, a-sampHrnah. £.
Fifth Brahmana
PRAJA-PATI'S PRODUCTION OF THE WORLD AS FOOD FOR HIMSELF
i yat saptanmni medhayd tapasd janayat pita, ekam asya sadhdranant, dve devan abhdjayat; triny atmane' kuruta, pasubhya ekam prdyacchat. tasmtn sarvam prattsthitam, yac ca prdmh yac ca 11a kastnat tarn na ksiyante adyamdndni saroaddl yo vaitam aksitim veda, so'nnam atti pratikena; sa devan apigacchati, sa uriam upafivati.
1 When the Father (of creation) produced by knowledge «w austerity seven kinds of food, one of his (foods) was
aa?T 1° 331 bemgs * two he assi e ned t0 tne g ods ' th"^ he aae for himself, one he gave to the animals In it everything
tW w ! ia J tsoever breathes and what does not Why then do
who£ ^ when ^ are hem S eaten 311 the time? He He .rT ^ "aperahableness, he eats food with his mouth, goes to the gods, he lives on strength Thus the verses.
J^by knowledge, prajnayd
fortune Z a V s * en ty or the performance of rules, karmana, plana- M »"*t hi medha-tapai-Lbda-vacye S
iapasim^ mn - a ! ll ! n ^^y d ^P asd 3 ana y" t P itd ' * tl medhaya hi to sadkd ^ ' e kani asya sddhdranam' ih, idam evdsya s « i>ai»K^ anam annam ' y ad idam adyate, sa ya etad ttpdste na ^ 0 vyavartate, misrath hy etat. 'dve devan abhajayat' tit,
7 he Principal Upanisads
hutam caprahutam ca, tasmdd devebhyo juhvah capra ca juhvah, atho dhuh, darsapumamdsdv tti, tasmdn nesti-ydjukah sydt. 'pasubhya ekam prdyacchat' ih tat fiayah, payo hy evdgre manusyds" ca pasavas copajwanh tasmdt kumdram jdtam ghrtam vai vdgre pratilehayantt, stanam vdnudhdpayanti atha vatsamjdtam dhuh, 'airndda' ih, 'tasmm sarvam prahsthttam yac ca prdnitt yac ca na' tti, payast hidam sarvam pratisthitam, yac ca prdniti yac ca na tad yad tdam dhuh samvatsaram payasd juhvad apa punarmrtyum jayatUi, na tatha vidydt yad akar eva juhoh, tad ahah punarmrtyum apajayaty evam vidvdn, 'sarvam hi devebhyo 'nnddyam prayacchati 'kasmdt tarn na ksiyante adyamdndm sarvadd 'ih, purttso vd aksttih, sa hidam annam punah punar janayate 'yo vai tarn aksitim veda 'iti, puruso vd aksitih, sa hidam annam dhiya dhiyd janayate karmabhih, yaddhaitan na kuryat ksiyeta ha 'so'nnam atti pratikena' tti, mukham pratikam, muhhenety etat sa devdn apigacchatt, sa urjam upajivati 'ihprasamsa
2 'When the Father produced by knowledge and austerity seven kinds of food' means that the Father produced them by knowledge and austerity 'One of his foods was common to all beings' means that the food of his which is eaten is that which is common to all He who worships (eats) that (common food) is not freed from evil for, verily, that (food) is mixed 'Two he assigned to the gods' means they are the fire sacrifice (huta) and the offering Therefore one sacrifices and offers to the gods But they also say that they are the new-moon and the full- moon sacrifices Therefore one should not offer sacrifice for material ends 'One who gave to the animals' 'that is milk' for, at first, men and animals live on milk alone Therefore they make a newborn babe first lick clarified butter or put it to the breast, likewise they speak of a newborn calf as one that does not eat grass 'In it everything rests whatsoever breathes and what does not' means that on milk everything rests what- soever breathes and what does not This is said that by making offerings with milk for a year one conquers further death. One should not think so For he who knows this conquers further death the very day he makes the offering, for he offers all his food to the gods 'Why then do they not decline when they are being eaten all the time,' means verily, the person is imperishable, for he produces this food again and again 'He who knows this impenshableness' means that the Person is imperishable, for he produces this food as his work by his con-
I £ 3 Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 175
{jnuous meditation. Should he not do this, his food would be exhausted. 'He eats food with his mouth.' The praffka is the mouth, he eats it with his mouth.' He goes to the gods; he lives on strength; this is praise.
§ makes out that desire is possible only when we are ignorant of the truth of things. When vre realise the truth, there can be no desire- brahma-vidyd-visaye ca sarcaikatvdt kdmdmipapattek.
The eater is the subject which is constant, imperishable: the food eaten is the object, it is changing.
mtikham mouth, pre-eminence, mukkyatvam, pradhanyam S
E makes out that the Supreme Person produces food for the needs of creatures paramafma praty ahamannani ptir.ak piinak prar,i~kar- manusar&na janayati.
3. 'tnny dltnane' humta' Hi, mono vacant prdnavi, tony a(mar.e 'kuruta': anyaira mana abhiivam nddariam, ar.yaira mana abhuvam ndsrausam' iti, manasa hy eva pasyaii, manasa irnoU, kdmah samkalpo vicikitsd, sraddhd 'sraddhd, dhrtir adhrtir krzr dhTr bktr ity etat sarvant mana eva. tasmdd apiprsthata upasprslo manasa vijdndti; yah ka£ ca sabdo, vag eva sd; esa hi anfam dyatta, esa hi na prdno 'pdno vydna uddnah samdno'na ity dot sarvam prdna eva danmayo vd ayam dimd, van-mayah, mano-mayah, ■prdna-mayah.
3 'Three 'he made for himself/ Mind, speech, breath, these he made for himself '(They say) my mind was elsewhere, I did not see it, my mind was elsewhere, I did not hear.' It is with the mind, truly, that one sees. It is with the mind that one hears. Desire, determination, doubt, faith, lack of faith, steadfastness, lack of steadfastness, shame, intellection, fear, all this is truly mind Therefore even if one is touched on his back, he discerns it with the mind. Whatever sound there is, it is just speech. Verily, it serves to determine an end (object), but is not itself (determined or revealed). The in-breath, the out-breath, the diffused breath, the up-breath, the middle-breath, all that breathes is breath only. Verily, the self consists of speech, mind and breath
See Matlrt VI. 30.
Mere presentation is not enough for perception. Mind must be attentive. We often say that we did not'see it or hear it because we were absent-minded It is through the mind that we see and hear. smftalpa ■ determination, detenniningthe nature of a thing presented to ns, whether it is white or blue, etc. fratylipasihita-visaya-
176 The Principal Upam?ads 1-5 9
vikalpanam iukla-nllddibhedena £ According to Amara, it is a mental act, vianasam karma
Prdna is the general term for breath, m or out
Apdna is the downward breath, Vyana is the bond of union of the two It is the breath which sustains life when there is neither expiration nor inspiration. Samana is common to both expiration and inspiration Udana leads the soul in deep sleep to the central Reality or conducts the soul from the body on death
Speech reveals things but is not revealed by others of the same class
4 trayo lokd da eva, vag evayam lokah, mano'ntariksa lokah, prano' sau lokah
4 These same are the three worlds Speech is this world (the earth), Mind is the atmospheric world (the sky), Breath is that world (heaven)
5 trayo vedd eta eva, vag eva rg vedah, mano yaptr vedah, pranah sdma vedah
5 These same are the three Vedas Speech, venly, is the Rg Veda Mind is the Yajur Veda Breath is the Sdma Veda
6 devdh pitaro manu$yd eta eva, vag eva devdh, manah pitarah, prano manusydh
6 These same are the gods, manes and men Speech, venly, is the gods Mmd is the manes Breath is the men
7 pita mdtd prajd eta eva, mana eva pita, van mala, pranah prajd
7 These same are father, mother and offspring, Mmd, venly, is the father Speech is the mother Breath is the offspring
8 vijndtam vipjMsyam avipiatam eta eva, yat kim ca vijiiaiam, vacas tad riipam, vdgg hi vijndta, vag enam tad bhiitvavatt
8 These same are what is known, what is to be known and what is unknown Whatever is known is a form of speech, for speech is the knower For speech by becoming that (which is known) protects him (the knower)
9 yat him ca vijijndsyam, manasas tad riipam, mano hi vtjUdsyam, mana enam tad bhuivavatt
9 Whatever is to be known is a form of mmd for mmd is to be known For mmd by becoming that protects him
The mind protects him by becoming that which is to be known
I 5 14 Brhad-aranyaka Ypanisad 177
10 yat kim cdvijndtam, prdnasya tad rupam, prdno hy aw- pidtah, prana evam tad bhutvavaU
11 tasyai vdcah prthvoT ianram, jyott-riipam ayam agmh tad ydvaty eva vdk, tdvati prthvut, tdvan ayam agnih
11. Of this speech, the earth is the body Its light-form is this (terrestrial) fire As far as speech extends, so far extends the earth, so far (extends) this fire
12. athaitasya manaso dyauhiariram, jyoti-rupam asdv ddttyah, tad ydvad eva manas, tdvati dyauh, tdvan asdv ddttyah tau mithunam samaitdm iatah prdno ajdyata sa indrah, sa eso'sapa- inah dvitiyo vat sapatnah nasya sapatno bhavah, ya evam veda.
12 Now of this mind, heaven is the body and its light-form is that sun As far as the mind extends, so far extends the heaven, so far (extends) that sun These two (the fire and the sun) entered into union and from that was born breath He is Indra (the supreme lord) He is without a rival Verily, a second person is a rival He who knows this has no rival
Indra the supreme lord, paratneivarah §
13 athaitasyaprdnasydpah sanram, jyoti-rupam asau candrah, tad ydvan eva prdnah, tavatya dpah, tdvan asau candrah, ta ete sarva eva samdh, sarve'nantdh sa yo haitdn antavata updste antavantam sa lokam jayati atha yo hattdn anantdn updste, anantam sa lokam jayatt
. 13 Next, of this breath, water is the body. Its light-form is that moon As far as the breath extends so far extends water aaa so far (extends) that moon These are all alike, all endless. Verily, he who meditates on them as finite, wins a finite world. *>at he who meditates on them as infinite wins an infinite world.
SELF IDENTIFIED WITH THE SIXTEENFOLD PRAJA-PATI
14 sa esa samvatsarahprajd-patih, sodaia-kalah; tasya rdtraya c * P? ma d<iS'a-kalah, dhruvavodsya sodaii kald sa ratribhir eva
pwyafe, apa ca ksiyate, so'mdvdsydm rdtrtm etaya sodasyd tam-a Sa 7- m% ldam P r W ao}i rd anupravisya, tatah prdtar ydyate. hrknf- m r&inm prana-bhrtah prdnam na vicchindyad api m sas y a - etasyd eva devatdya apacitya%
178 1 lie Principal Upamsads I 5 16
14 That Prajd-pak is the year and has sixteen parts His nights, indeed, have fifteen parts, the fixed point his sixteenth part He is increased and diminished by his nights alone Having on the new-moon night entered with that sixteenth part into everything here that has breath, he is bom thence m the (following) morning Therefore on that night let no one cut off the breath of any breathing things, not even of a lizard, in honour of that divinity
apaatyai m honour of, pujarlliam S
15 yo vai sa samvatsaiah prajdpatih sodasa-kalah, ayam eva sa yo'yam evam-vit purusah tasya vittam em pancadasa-kalah, atmaivdsya soda&i kola, sa vittenaiva ca puryate apa cakslyate. tad etan nabhyam yad ayam alma, pradhir vittam tasmad yady apt sarvajyanim jiyate, atmana cej jivah, ptadhmdgdd ily evahuh
15 Verily, the person here who knows this is himself that Prajd-pah with the sixteen parts who is the year His wealth is the fifteen parts, the sixteenth part is his self In wealth alone is one increased and diminished That which ib the self is a hub, Wealth a felly Therefore even if one loses everything but he himself lives, people say that he has lost only his felly (which can be restored again)
Wealth is compared to the spokes of a wheel It is something external If one loses wealth he loses only his outer trappings He can regain wealth It is the distinction between being and having, to use Gabriel Marcel's words
The superscription at Delphi, 'Know thyself is, according to Plutarch, an injunction addressed by God to all who approach him Morcdia 384 D f In Alctbiades I 130 E f Socrates says that he who orders 'Know thyself bids us 'Know the soul,' and he who knows only what is of the body 'knows the things that are his but not himself '
16 atlia Uayo vdva lokah, manusya-lokah, pttr-lokah deva-loka iti so'yam manusya-lokah putrenatva jayyah, nanyena kannana karmand pitr~lokah, vidyaya deva-lokah, deva-loko vat lokanatn sresthah tasmad vidyam prasamsantt
16 Now, there are, verily, three worlds, the world of men, the world of the fathers, and the world of the gods This world
I g Brhad-aranyaka Vpamsad 179
of men is to be obtained through, the son alone, not by any other work, the world of the fathers by works (rites), the world of the gods by knowledge The world of gods is, verily, the best of worlds Therefore they praise knowledge
m&ya knowledge, mdyMabdasya brahma-vidya-paralvam R.
FATHER'S BENEDICTION AND TRANSMISSION OF CHARGE
17 atlidtah samfraUik yada ■praisyan manyate, atha putram aha, tvam brahna tvam yapiah, tvam loka iU. sa pidrah praty alia, aham brahma, aham yayfiah, aham loka iti yad vai km caniifefam, tasya saroasya brahmety ehata ye vai ke ca ytynafy, tesam sarvesdmyajfia tty ekata;ye vai ke ca lokah, tesam sanesam loka ity ehata, etdvad va idam sarvam, etamna sarvam sami ayam ito'bhunajad iti, tasmat puiram anuhsiam lokyam ahuh tasmad enam anusasah, sa yadaivam md asmal lokat praiti. aihatbhr eva pranaih saha puiram aviiati sa yady anena kim ad aksnaya kriam bhavati, tasmad etiam sarvasmat putro muncati. iamdt putro noma sa putrenatvasmiml lake pratiiisihah, aOmnam ete daivah prana amrta mis'anti.
17 Now therefore the transmission When a man thinks that he is about to depart, he says to his son, 'you are Brahman, you are the sacrifice and you are the world ' The son answers, T am Brahman, I am the sacrifice, I am the world ' Verily, whatever has been learnt, all that taken as one is knowledge (Brahman) Venly, whatever sacrifices have been made, all those, taken as one are the world All this is indeed, this much. Being thus the all, let him (the son) preserve me from (the ties of) this world, thus, (the father thinks). Therefore they call a son who is instructed ' world-procuring' and therefore they ^struct htm When one who knows this departs from this world, be enters into his son together with his breaths Whatever ™mg has been done by him, his son frees him from it all, werefore he is called a son By his son a father stands firm in
B worI d Then into him enter those divine immortal breaths.
SeeKTJ.II 15
wt^JL tmsmis su>n. It is so called because the father in this S flT? ei jtonsmrts his own duties to his son . ptttre hi svatma-vyapara-
npwamm karoty anena prakarena pita S r ™ trom fur, 'to 61/ and fro 'to deliver/ a deliverer who fills the
180 The Principal Upanisads I 5 20.
holes left by the father yah pitus chidram purayilva trayati £ Others derive it from put 'a hell,' and tra, 'to save ' See Manu IX 138
In the R V a son is called rnacyula, one who removes debts See Taitttriya Samhita VI 3 10 5
18 prthivyai cavnam agues ca daivi vag avisati, sa vat datvi vag, yayayadyad eva vadati, tad tad bhavati.
18 From the earth and from the fire the divine speech enters him Verily, that is the divine speech by which whatever one says comes to be (is fulfilled)
His speech becomes infallible and irresistible amogha prahbaddhd asya vag bhavah £.
19 divas cainam dditydc ca davoam mana aviiah, tad vat daivam mano yendnandy eva bhavati, atho na socati
19 From the heaven and the sun the divine mind enters him Verily, that is the divine mind by which one becomes only joyful and sorrows not
He sorrows not because he is not connected with the sources of grief iokadi-nimitt&samyogdt &
20 adbhyas cavnam candramasas ca dawah prima avisati sa vai daivah prdiio, yah samcarams cdsamcarami ca na vyathate, atho na risyah sa evam-vit sarvesdm bhutdnam dtma bhavati yathaisa devoid, evam sah yathattdm devatam sarvani bMtdny avatth, evam haivam-vidam sarvdm bhiltany avanh yad ti ktm cemah prajah Socanii, amavoasam tad bhavati, punyam evdmum gacchah na ha vai devdn papam gacchati
20 From water and the moon the divine breath enters him. Verily, that is the divine breath, whether moving or not moving, is not perturbed nor injured He who knows this becomes the self of all beings As is this divinity [Hiranya-garbha), so is he. As all beings regard that divinity, so do all beings regard him who knows this Whatever sufferings creatures may undergo, these remain with them But only merit goes to him No evil ever goes to the gods
Individuals suffer because one causes suffering to another, but in the Universal Spirit where all individuals are one, the sufferings of the individuals do not affect the whole
21, athdio vrata-mitndmsd. prajd-pahr ha karmdni sasrje, lam srstdnt anyo'nyendspardhanta. vadisydmy evdham tit vdg dadhre, draksydmy dliam %h caksuh; srosydmy akam ih irotram; eoam anydm kartndni yathd karma, tarn mriyuh sramo bhutvd ftpayeme, tdny dpnot; tdny dptvd mrtyur avdnindha; tasmdt kdmyaty eva vdk, srdmyah caksufi, srdmyah srotram. atkemam eva ndpnot yo'yam madhyamaJi prdnah. tarn jndtum dadhnre. ayam vat nah srestho yah samcarams cdsamcarams ca na vyathate, atho na nsyaU, hantdsyawa sarve rupam asdmefi: ta etasyaiva sans rupam abhavan, tasmdd eta etaindkhydyante prdnd tti. tena ha vdva tat hdam dcaksate, yasmm kule hhavah ya evath veda ya « haivam vidd spardhate, anusiisyati, amtsusya hcavantaio mnyate, ih adhydtmam.
21 Now next a consideration of the observances Praja-pati produced the active senses. They, when they were produced, quarrelled with one another. Speech resolved 'I will go on speaking' The eye 'I will go on seeing.' The ear *I will go on Jearuig' And thus the other organs, each according to its mnction Death, having become weariness, laid hold of them. a 7 0k Possession of them; having taken possession of them, aeatn held them back from their work Therefore speech Becomes weary (gets tired), the eye becomes weary, the ear Becomes weary But death did not take possession of him who
2 /"SS 6 breath ^ ( the senses ) st) ugkt to know him *™ said, This is, verily, the greatest among us, since (it) mer movmg or not moving, is not perturbed, is not injured, '«usaUassume his form'- of him indeed they became a form.
ey 3X6 caBed after **** breath.' In whatever «uy tnere is a man who knows this they call that family shZaU d whoeve r strives with one who knows this SSeT tne^elf after SlmvelluiS m ^ end " T^/with
**■ ^SSST ents of actlvity -
l82
The Principal Upamsads I 5 23
22 athddhidawatam jvalisydmy evaham ity agntr dadhre, tapsydmy aham tiy ddityah, bhdsydmy aham ih candramdh, evam anya devata yatha-devatam, sa yathmsam prandndm madhyamah prdnah, evam etdsdm devatdndm vayuh nimlocanti hy anya devatdh, 11a vayuh saisdnastamttd devata yad vayuh
22 Now with reference to the gods Fire resolved 'I will go on burning ' The sun 'I will go on warming ' The moon 'I will go on shining' So said the other gods each according to his divine function As breath holds the central position among the vital breaths, so does air among these divinities, for other divinities have their decline but not air Air is the divinity that never sets (never goes to rest)
23 athaisa sloko bhavati
yatas codeh suryah astamyatra ca gacchah ill prdndd vd esa udeh, prdne'stam eh, tarn devds cakrire dharmam sa evadya sa u svah
ih yad vd eie'murhy adhrtyanta tad evdpy adya kurvanh tasmdd ekam eva vratam caret, prdnydc caiva, apdnydc ca, nen ma paptnd mrtyur apnuvad ttt, yady tt caret samdpxpayvset teno etasyai dcvatdyai sdyujyam salokatdm jayatt
23 On this there is this verse 'From whom the sun rises and m whom it sets, in truth from breath it rises and in breath it sets Him the divinities made the law, he only is today and he tomorrow also (Whatever the divinities observed then they observe till today.)' Venly, what those (functions) undertook of old, even that they accomplish today Therefore let a man perform one observance only He should breathe in and breathe out wishing, 'Let not the evil of death get me ' And when he performs it, let him try to complete it Thereby he wins com- plete union with that divinity and residence m the same world with him.
j 6 3 Brhad-dranyaka Upamsad 183
Sixth Brdhmana
THREE-FOLD CHARACTER OF THE WORLD
1 trayam va tdam, ndma riipam karma, tesdm ndmndm vag ily dad esdm uktham, ato hi sarvdm ndmdny uttisthanti, dad esdm sdma, etadd hi sarvair ndmabhih samam, etad esam brahma, etadd hi sarvdm ndmani bibharti.
1 Venly, this (world) is a triad of name, shape and work Of these as regards names, speech is the source, for from it all names arise It is their common feature for it is common to all names It is their Brahman, for it sustains all names
§ distinguishes the world of name, shape, work as non-self from Brahman the self ndtmdyat sdksdd aparoksdd brahma. vak speech, sound in general, sabda-sdmdnyam §. sama common samatvat sdma sdmdnyam §
2 atha rupdndm caksur ity etad esam uktham, ato hi sarvdm rupdny uttisthanh, etad esdm sdma, etadd hi sarvai rupaih samam, etad esdm brahma, etadd hi sarvdm rupdni bibharti
2 Now, of shapes eye is the source, for from it all shapes anse It is their common feature for it is common to all shapes It is their Braliman, for it sustains all shapes.
3 atha karmandm dtmety etad esdm uktham, ato hi sarvdm karmany uttisthanh, etad esdm sdma, etadd hi sarvaih karmabhih samam, etad esam brahma, etadd hi sarvdm kartndm bibharti tad etad trayam sad ekam ayam dtmd, alma ekah sawn etat trayam. "M etadamrtam satyena channam, prdno vd amrtam, ndma-rilpe wyam, tdbhydm ayam pranai channah
3. Now of works, the body is the source for from it all vorks arise It is their common feature for it is common to all works It is then: Brahman, for it sustams all works. These three T°h i. are one ' thls self • the self > though, one, is this triad im Vr lmmortal veiled by the real Breath, venly, is the
vend namC aDd Shape are the real By them **** breath K
The Principal Upanisads
First Brdhmana
I. drpia-bdl&kir haniica.no gargya asa, sa hovaca ajdlasatrum kasyam, brahma te bravdnih, sa hovaca ajalasatruh, sahasram etasyam vaci dadmah janakah, janaka iti vat jand dhdvantitx.
1. There lived formerly Drpta-balaki of the Gargya clan, who was an expositor He said to Ajatasatru of Kasi, 'I will tell you about Bralvman ' Ajatasatru said, 'I give you a thousand (cows) for this proposal ' People, indeed, rush, saying Janaka, janaka,
SeeKU.IV
In this dialogue Drpta-balaki, though aBrahmana, represents the imperfect knowledge of Brahman, while Ajatasatru, though a Ksatnya, represents advanced knowledge of Brahman While Drpta-balaki worships Brahman as the sun, the moon, etc, as limited, Ajatasatru knows Brahman as the self. dfptah' proud, garvitah S
Kasi Kasi is one of the seven sacred places reputed to confer final emancipation
ayodhyd mathtira mdyd kasi kdiici avanttkd piiri avaravali catva saplaita mohsa-ddyikah. anOcanah expositor, anuvacana-samaiiliah, vakta S Being ex- ceedingly vain, Gargya accosted Ajatasatru with boastful speech In accepting his land proposal Ajatasatru offers a reward of a thousand cows
Janaka was a well-known learned king Ajatasatru feels that he has also some of his qualities.
2. sa hovaca gdrgyah, ya cvasav adttyc purusah, clam cvdham brahmopdsa tit sa hovaca ajdtasatruh, ma maifasmm samva- dtsthah ahslhal} sarvcsdih bhiildndm miirdhd rdjch vd aham dam tipdsa Hi, saya clam upaslc, ahsfhdh sarvcsdm bhiildndm murdha raja bhavatt.
2 Gargya said. 'The person who is yonder in the sun, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Aj'atasatru said, 'Please do not talk to me about him. I meditate on him as all-surpassing, as the head and king of all beings He who meditates on him as such becomes all-surpassing, the head and king of all beings *
II i 5 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 185
ahs(kah- all-surpassing, atUya sarvfini bhutdni tisihati. S. raja hag, resplendent; diph-gunopetatvat S
The results of meditation correspond to the forms meditated upon according to the view, tarn yathd yathopdsate tad eva bhavati. Satapatha Brdhmana X. V. 2. 20.
3. sa hovaca gdrgyah; ya evdsau candre purusah, etam evdham brahmopasa iti. sa hovaca ajdtahtruh, ma maitasmin samva- disthdh. brhan pandara-vasah somo rdjeti vd aham etam updsa iti. sa ya etam evam upaste, dhar ahar ha sutah prasuto bhavati, nasydnnam ksiyate.
3. Gargya said - 'The person who is yonder in the moon, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman.' Ajatasatru said: 'Please do not talk to me about him. I meditate on him as the great white-robed king Soma. He who meditates on him as such, for him soma is poured out (in the principal) and poured forth (in the subsidiary sacrifices) every day. His food does not get short.'
Soma is the name for the moon and the juice from the creeper which is used in the sacrifices, yajna-sadhana-bhiita-somaraja-s'abdita- lata-mksa R
pandara-vasah white-robed The white rays of the moon flood the earth R quotes Vyasarya, pdndarair amiubhir jagac-chadakatvat pandara-vasastvam
4 sa hovaca gdrgyah; ya evasau vidyuti purusah, etam evdham brahmopasa iti. sa hovaca ajataiatruh, ma maitasmm samva- dtsthah, tejasvih vd aham etam updsa tit. saya etam evam upaste, tqasvi ha bhavati, tejasvmi hdsya praja bhavati.
4 Gargya said. "The person who is yonder in lightning, on jum. indeed, do I meditate as Brahman.' Ajatasatru said: rlease do not talk to me about him I meditate on him, verily, as the radiant He who meditates on him as such becomes radiant, and his offspring, too, become radiant.'
5. sa hovaca gdrgyah, ya evdyam dkdie purusah, etam evdham Afir$ liS - sa h°vdca ajdtaiatruh, ma maitasmin samva- aisthah, purnam apravartiti vd aham etam updsa iti, sa ya etam dva"rtate &Ste ' ^ ryate f* a 3 a y & P^ubhih nasyasmal lokat prajo-
5_l ( f x P A satd> 'The person who is here in the ether, on him doTt meditate as Brahman.' Ajatasatru said: 'Please not s P eak to me about him. I meditate on him, venly, as the
i86
The Principal Upamsads
It I 9
full and the unmovmg He who meditates on him as such is filled with offspring and cattle, and his offspring does not depart from this world '
The continuity of his line is preserved in this world
6 sa hovaca gargyah, ya evayam vdyau purusah, etam evaham brahmopasa til sa hovaca ajdtasatruh, ma maiiasmin samva- disthdh, tndro vaikuntkoparapta seneii va aham etam upasa iti, sa ya etam evam upaste, jisnur haparajisnur bhavaty anyata- stya-jayl.
6 Gargya said 'The person who is here in an-, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Ajatasatru said 'Please do not talk to me about him, I meditate on him, verily, as the lord, as the irresistible and as the unvanquished army He who meditates on him as such becomes, indeed, victorious, uncon- querable, and a conqueror of enemies '
7. sa hovaca gargyah, ya evayam agnau purusah, etam evaham brahmopasa ih sa hovaca ajdtasatruh, ma maitasmm samva- disthah, visasahir iti va aham etam upasa iti, sa ya etam evam upaste visasahir ha bhavati, visasahir hdsya praja bhavati
7 Gargya said 'The person who is here in fire, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Ajatasatru said 'Please do not talk to me about him I meditate on him, venly, as the forbearing He who meditates on him as such becomes, indeed, forbearing and his offspring, too, becomes forbearing '
vtsdsahih forbearing, marsaytta paresam S
8 sa hovaca gargyah, ya evayam apsu purusah, etam evakam brahmopasa tti sa hovaca ajataiatruh, ma maitasmm samva- disthdh, pratirupa th va aham etam upasa tti, sa ya etam evam upaste, prattrupam kaivatnam upagacchatt, napratiriipam, atlio prahrupo'smdj jdyaie
8 Gargya said 'The person, who is here m water, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' AjataSatru said 'Please do not talk to me about him I meditate on him, venly, as the likeness He who meditates on him as such, to him comes what is like (him), not what is unlike (him), also from him is born what is like (him) '
prahriipah likeness, reflection, praltbtmbah
disthah rocisnur iti vd aham etam upasa iti. sa ya etam evam upaste rocisnur ha bhavah, rocisnur hdsya praja bhavati, atho yaih sammgacchati, sarvams tan attrocate
9 Gargya said. The person who is here in a mirror, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman.' Ajatasatru said 'Please do not talk to me about him. I meditate on htm, venly, as the shining one He who meditates on him as such becomes shining indeed His offspring, too, becomes shining. He also outshines all those with whom he comes in contact.'
roasnuh shining, diph-svabhdvah §
10. sa hovaca gargyah, ya evayam yantam pascat idbdo'niideh; etam evaham brahmopdsa lit. sa hovaca ajdtasatruh; ma maitasmm samvadisthah, asur iti vd aham etam upasa iti, sa ya etam evam upaste, sarvam haivdsmiml loka dyur ett, namarn purd kalat prdno jahdti.
10 Gargya said. 'The sound here which follows one as he walks, on that, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Ajatasatru said 'Please do not talk to me about that I meditate on him, venly, as life. He who meditates on him as such attains a full term of life m this world Breath does not depart from him before (the completion of) his time."
11 sa hovaca gargyah, ya evayam dtksu purusah, etam evaham brahmopdsa iti sa hovaca ajataiatruh, ma maitasmm samva- disthah, dvitiyo'napaga iti vd aham etam upasa tit, sa ya etam evam upaste, dvitiyavdn ha bhavati, nasmdd ganai chidyate
11 Gargya said. "The person who is here in the quarters {of heaven) on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Ajatasatru said 'Please do not talk to me about him I meditate on him, venly, as the second who never leaves us He who meditates on him as such becomes possessed of a second His company is not cut off from him.'
His fnends do not desert him He is never lonely
I?, sa lwvaca gargyah, ya evayam chdydmayah purusah, etam evaltam brahmopdsa iti. sa hovaca ajataiatruh, via maltasmin samvadisthah, mrtyur Hi vd aham etam updsa iti, sa ya etam evam
mrfyur ^ fe ** &yUY eU ' mwam t urd Ml&n
JfhJ?^? 3 ^' person here who insists of shadow on htm, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Ajatasatru said!
The Principal Upanisads
'Please do not talk to me about him. I meditate on him, verily, as death He who meditates on him as such attains a full term of life m this world Death does not come to him before (the completion of) his time '
13 sa hovaca gargyah, ya evdyam atmam purusah, etam evaham brahmopdsa ik sa hovaca ajatasatruh, ma mattasmm samvadisthdh, dimanvUi va aham etam upasa ttt, sa ya etam evam updste, atmanvi ha bhavati atmanvmi hasya praj'a bhavati sa ha tusnim asa gargyah
13 Gargya said 'The person here who is in the self, on him, indeed, do I meditate as Brahman ' Ajatasatru said 'Please do not talk to me about him I meditate on him, verily, as self-possessed He who meditates on him as such he becomes self-possessed His offspring becomes self-possessed ' Gargya became silent
Self-possession is the quality of those who are cultivated atma- vattvam vasyatmakatvam A
14 sa hovaca ajatasatruh, etavan wo iti, etdvad-dhiti, naitavata vtditam bhavatUi, sa hovaca gargyah upa tvayaniti
14 Ajatasatru said 'Is that all?' 'That is all' (said Gargya). (Ajatasatru said) 'With that much only it is not known ' Gargya said, 'Let me come to you as a pupil '
15 sa hovaca ajatasatruh, pratilomam cat tad yad brdhmanah ksatnyam upeyat, brahma me vaksyatiti, vy eva tvajfiapayisya- miti; tarn panav ddayottasthau tau ha purusam suptam ajagma- tuh, tarn etair namabhir dmantraydm cakre, brhati pandara-vasah soma rajann iti sa nottasthau, tarn pdmna pesam bodhayam cakara, sa hottasthau
15 Ajatasatru said 'Verily, it is contrary to usual practice that a Brahmana should approach a Ksatnya, thinking that he will teach me Brahman However, I shall make you know him clearly ' Taking him by the hand he rose The two together came to a person who was asleep They addressed him with these names Great, White-robed, Radiant, Soma The man did not get up He woke him by rubbing him with his hand He then got up
prattlomam contrary to usual practice, mparitam S
16 sa hovaca ajatasatruh, yatraisa etat supto'bhut, ya esa vtjnanamayah purusah, kvaisa tadabhut, kuta etad agdd iti tad uhana mene gargyah.
16. Ajataiatru said 'When this person who consists of in- telligence fell asleep thus, where was it and whence did it come back ' And this also Gaxgya did not know.
The fact that a man recovers his consciousness after deep sleep means that it was present even in sleep, though we are not conscious of it. In deep sleep the delf perceives nothing whatever and is of the nature of inactive consciousness.
17 sa hovdca ajdtaiatruh, yatratsa etat supto'bhut esa vtptdna- mayah purusaJi, tad esam prdnanam mpianma vijndnam adaya ya eso'ntar-hrdaya akdsah tasmifi. chete, tarn yada grhndU atha haitat purusah svapitt noma tad grhita eva prano bhavati, grhita vdk, grhitam caksuh, grMtam srotram, grhitam manah
17 Ajatasatru said 'When this being fell asleep thus, then the person who consists of intelligence, having by his intelli- gence taken to himself the intelligence of these breaths (sense organs) rests m the space within the heart When the person takes in these (senses), he is said to be asleep. When the breath is restrained, speech is restrained, the eye is restrained, the ear is restrained, the mind is restrained
akaia- space § identifies it with the Supreme Self dkaia-iabdena para eva sva atmocyate
prana breath S means by it nose, prana itt ghranendnyam.
When the organs are restrained, the self rests m its own self: tasntad ttpasamhrtesu vdgadisu knyd-karaka-phalatmatabhavat svat- mastha evatma bhavatity avagamyate S" karanavastha svaiariraka paramatmany aptta tti svapiti iabdartho'bhipretah R
18. sa yatraitaya svapndydcarati, te hasya hkah: tad uta iva maharajo bhavati, uta voa mahd-brdhmanah, uta voa uccdvacam ntgaccJiah; sa yada maharajo, jdnapaddn grhitvd sve janapade yatha-kamam panvarteta, evam evaisa etat pranan grhitvd sve same yatha-kamam panvartate
18 'When he moves about in dream these are his worlds Znen he becomes as it were a great king, a great Br&hmana as it were He enters, as it were, states, high and low. Even as a great Jong, taking his people, moves about in his country as he pleases, so also here, this one, taking his breaths (senses), moves about in his own body as he pleases. ;
190 The Principal Upamsads II 2 1
kttmdro vd mahdrajo vd mahfi-brfihmano vattghnftn dnandasya gatva iayita, cvam cvatsa ctac chctc,
19 'Again, when one falls sound asleep, when he knows nothing whatsoever, having come through the seventy-two thousand channels called htia which extend from the heart to the pericardium, he rests in the pericardium Venly, as a youth or a great king or a great Brahmana might rest when he has reached the summit of bliss, so does he then rest.'
Round the heart are the veins 72,000 in number These are of five colours uniting with the rays of the sun similarly coloured The sun and the heart are said to be connected with each other In deep sleep the soul glides into the veins and through them it becomes one with the heart At death the soul is said to pass out by the veins and the rays of the sun which the wise find open to them while they are closed to the ignorant See also IV 2 3, IV 3 20 CU VIII 6 i.MU I 2 11 There is another suggestion that only one vein leads to the sun out of 101, the vein in question leading to the head This refers to the suture, the brahma-randhra (A U I 3 12) through which in the process of creation Brahman is said to enter the body as spirit The two versions of 72,000 and 101 are mixed up in later accounts
malia-brahtnanah great Brahmana, amvarata-brahmananda-paro- brahma-vit R
20 sa yathornanabhti tantwtoccarct, yathdgneh ksudrd vispht- Itngd vynccaranh, cvam cvdsmdd dtmanah sarve prandh, sarve lokdh, sarve devdh sarvdm bhuldm vyuccaranh iasyopamsal, saiyasya satyam tti prdnd vat satyam, tesam csa satyam
20 'As a spider moves along the thread, as small sparks come forth from the fire, even so from this Self come forth all breaths, all worlds, all divinities, all beings Its secret meaning is the truth of truth Vital breaths are the truth and their truth is It (Self) '
See Mattrl Up VI 32 saiyasya satyam the truth of truth The w orld is not to be repudiated as false It is true, but it is true only derivatively It is sustained by the Ultimate Truth
Second Brahmana BREATH EMBODIED IN A PERSON
1 yo ha vat itium sa-ddhdnam sa-praiy-ddhdnam sasthiinam sa-ddmam veda, sapta ha dvtsato bhrdtrvydn avarunaddht ayam
II 2 3 Brhad-araityaka Upanisad 191
vdva hsur yo'yam madhyamah pranah, iasyatdam evddhdnam, tiam pratyddhanam, pranah sthund, annam ddma.
1 Venly, he who knows the new-bom babe with his abode, his covering, his post and his rope keeps off his seven hostile kinsmen Venly, this babe is breath in the middle. His abode is this (body). His covering is this (head). His post is breath, His rope is food
The babe is the subtle body [hngdtman) which has entered the body in five ways.
madhyamah in the middle, safira-madhy-avartl ay am, panca-vrttiryah pranah R
Seven hostile kinsmen are said to be the seven organs, the eyes, ears, nostrils and mouth They are said to be hostile, because they hinder the perception of the inner self. See Kai ha. IV. t. By these man becomes attached to the world iama tops, pasa
Even as a calf is bound by the rope, the subtle body is supported by food, yatha vatsah pdiena baddha'vaiistkatt, evam annena pdiena baddho hi prano'vatislhate. Food binds the subtle to the gross body, sthitla-iarira
2 tarn etak saptdksitaya upatistkante. tad yd vma ak§an hhmyo rdjayah, tabhr enam rudro'nvdyattah; atha yd aksann dpas tabhh parjanyah, yd kamnakd, iayd adityah; yal hr§nam, Una agmk, yat iuhlam, tena indrah, adharayainam varianyd prtktvy anmyaitd, dyaur uttarayd; ndsydnnath ksiyate ya evam
2. The seven imperishable ones stand near him (to serve). Thus, there axe these red streaks m the eye and by them Rudra b united with him. Then there is the water in the eye, by it Pananya (is united with him). There is the pupil of the eye, by it Aditya (the sun is united with him) By the black (of the eye), fire (is united with him), by the white (of the eye), Indra Us united with him), by the lower eyelash earth is united with him. by the upper eyelash the heaven (is united with him) We who knows this, his food does not diminish i,f« imperishable ones are so called because they produce mipenshableness by supplying food for the subtle body.
3 tad esa tloko bhavati-
arvdg-bilas camasa urdhva-budhnah, tasmin yaio mhtam vitva-rupam: tasydsaia r$aydh sapta-tire, vdg astami brahtna^d zamvidana Hi.
192 The Principal Upanisads II 3 1
'arvdg-bilai camasa iirdhva-budhnah' ttidam tac chtrah, esa hy arvdgbilas camasa urdhva-budhnah tasmtn yaio nthitam viiva- rupam' tti,prdnd vaiyaio mhitam viiva-rupam, prdndn etad aha 'tasydsata rsayah sapta-tire' tit, prand vd rsayah prdndn etad aha 'vdg astami brahmand samviddnd' tit, vdg asiami brahmand samvitte
3 On this there is the following verse 'There is a bowl with its mouth below and bottom up In it is placed the glory of manifold forms On its nm sit seven seers, and speech as the eighth communicates with Brahman' What is called 'the bowl with its mouth below and bottom up" is the head, for it is the bowl with its mouth below and bottom up 'In it is placed the glory of manifold forms', breaths, verily, are where the glory of manifold forms is placed thus he says breaths 'On its rim sit seven seers/ venly, the breaths are the seers, thus he says breaths 'Speech as the eighth communicates with Brahman,' for speech as an eighth communicates with Brahman
visva-rupam' manifold forms, ndnd-rapam. £
4 imdv eva gotama-bharadvdjau, ayam eva gotamah, ayam bharadvdjah, vmdv eva visvamitra-jamadagni, ayam eva visvdmi- trah, ayam jamadagmh, tmav eva vasistha-kasyapan, ayam eva vasistliah, ayam kaiyapah, vdg evdtnh, vdcd hy annam adyate, attir ha vat ndmaitad yad atnr iti, sarvasydttd bhavati, sarvam asy annam bhavati, ya evam veda
4 These two (ears) here are Gotama and Bharadva]a This is Gotama, and this is Bharadvaja These two (eyes) here are Visvamitra and Jamadagm This is Visvamitra, this is Jama- dagm These two (nostrils) here are Vasistha and Kasyapa This is Vasistha, this is Kasyapa The tongue is Atn, for by the tongue food is eaten Venly, eating is the same as the name Atn He who knows this becomes the eater of everything everything becomes his food.
Third Brdhmana THE TWO FORMS OF REALITY
1 dve vdva brdhmano rupe, miirtam cawamurtam ca, martyam cdmrtam ca, sthttam ca, yac ca, sac ca; tyac ca. 1 Venly, there are two forms of Brahman, the formed and
II 3 6. Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 193
the formless, the mortal and the immortal, the unmoving and the moving, the actual (existent) and the true (being).
See Matin VI 3
2. tad etan murtam yad anyad vdyoi cantanksac ca, etan martyam, etat sthttam, etat sat, tasyaitasya murtasya, etasya martyasya etasya sthttasya, etasya sata esa raso ya esa tapah, safe hy esa rasah
2. This is the formed Brahman, whatever is different from the air and the atmosphere This is mortal This is unmoving, this is actual The essence of this formed, this mortal, this unmoving, this actual is the yonder sun which gives forth warmth, for that is the essence of the actual
3. athamurtam vayus cantanksam ca, etad amrtam etad yat, etat tyat, tasyattasyamurtasya, etasydmrtasya, etasya yatah etasya tasyatsa raso ya esa etasmin mandate purusah, tasya hy esa rasa!}, ity-adhxdavoatam
3 Now the formless is the air and the atmosphere This is immortal, this is the moving and this is the true. The essence of this unformed, this immortal, this moving, this true is this person who is in the region of the sun for he is the essence (of true) This, with reference to the divinities.
4 athaihyatmam idam eva murtam yad anyat prdnac ca yai cayam antaratmann akasah, etan martyam, etat sthitam, etat sat, tasyattasya murtasya, etasya martyasya, etasya sthitasya, etasya sata esa rasoyac caksuh, sato hy esa rasah.
4 Now with reference to the self; ]ust this is the formed, what is different from the breath and from the space which is within the self This is mortal, this is unmovmg, this is actual (existent) The essence of this formed, this mortal, this un- moving, this actual is the eye, for it is the essence of the actual.
5 athamurtam pranas ca yas cayam antar-atmanli akdSah; etad amrtam, etad yat, etat tyam, tasyattasyamurtasya, etasya- mrtasya etasya yatah, etasya tyasyaisa raso yo' yam dateline' ksan purusah, iyasya hy esa rasah ' '
,JL- N( T ^ fomiless B breath and the space which is jntom the self This is immortal, this is moving, this is the true ine essence of this unformed, immortal, moving, true is ttos person who is in the nght eye, for he is the essence of the
194 The Principal Upamsads II 3 6
yatha pdndv-dvikam, yathendragopah, yathdgnyarcth, yatha pundarikam, yatha sakrd-vidyutlam, sakrd-vidyutteva ha va asya irlr bhavati, ya evam veda athdta ddesah na ih na %t%, na hy etasmdd ttt, na ity anyat param ash, atha ndma-dheyam satyasya satyam iti prdnd vat satyam, tesdm esa satyam
6 The form of this person is like a saffron-coloured robe, like white wool, like the Jndragopa insect, like a flame of fire, like a white lotus, like a sudden flash of lightning He who knows it thus attains splendour like a sudden flash of lightning Now therefore there is the teaching, not this, not this for there is nothing higher than this, that he is not this Now the designa- tion for him is the truth of truth Verily, the vital breath is truth, and He is the truth of that
See also III 9 26, IV 2 4, IV 4 22, IV 5 15
like a sudden flash of lightning enlightenment is said to be instantaneous Truth flashes suddenly like lightning not this, not this
Matrceta speaks of the Buddha thus 'Only you yourself can know yourself who are beyond measure, beyond number, beyond thought, beyond comparison '
aprameyam asamkhyeyam acmtyam amiar&anam svayam evatmanatmdnam tvam evapidlum arhasi 151 D R Shackleton Bailey's ed (1951), pp 148, 180
In the Republic, there is the impersonal form of the good and m the Ttmaeus there is' the self-moving spirit fit to receive the name of God This section of the Upamsad suggests that the two cannot be left unreconciled but are to be treated as two forms of one Reality
The Fourth Gospel insists that God 'works' in the world, but he works through the Logos who is himself God though not the God- head Plotmus though he believes m heaven as the rich intelligible or spiritual world in which our individuality is preserved, affirms that on certain rare occasions the human soul may transcend even the realm of spirit, and enter mto communion with the one, 'beyond existence,' of whom nothing positive can be affirmed While there is a realm which consists m the duality of subject and object, which is perceived by the intelligence to be coextensive and reciprocally necessary, there is an absolute unity from which all dualities proceed, which is itself above duality The pseudo-Dionysius called God 'The absolute No-thing which is above all existence' and declares that 'no monad or triad can express the all-transcending hiddenness of the all-transcending superessentially superexistmg superdeity ' Scotus Engena says 'God because of his excellence may rightly be called Nothing ' Hooker says wisely 'Dangerous it were for the feeble brain of man to wade far mto the domgs of the Most
II 4 3 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 195
High, -whom although to know be life and ]oy to make mention of his name, yet our soundest knowledge is to know that we know him not as indeed he is our safest eloquence concerning him is our silence' Many systems of thought distinguish between the absolutely transcendent Godhead 'who dwelleth m the light which no man can approach unto' and the Creator God. In this famous passage, the Upanisad speaks to us of the Absolute transcendent non-empmcal Godhead. This is S's view.
Ramanuja, however, thinks that since there can be no object without qualities, this passage negates only some attributes and not all of them For Ramanuja, knowledge is possible only of a determined or qualified object He argues that the passage does not mean that Brahman has no qualities at all,but only that there are no evil qualities in Brahman
Fourth Brdhma^a
THE CONVERSATION OF YAJNAVALKYA AND MAITKEYl ON THE ABSOLUTE SELF
1 maitreyi, iti hovdca ydjnavalkyah, ud ydsyan vd are 'Iiam asmdt sthandd asmi; hanta, te 'nayd kdtydyanydntam karavdmh.
1 'Maitreyi,' said Yajfiavalkya, 'verily, I am about to go forth from this state (of householder) Look, let me make a final settlement between you and that Ka.tya.yam '
See IV 5
sthandd from the state le the stage in his life Yajfiavalkya wishes to renounce the stage of the householder, grhastfia and enter that of the anchorite, vanaprastha
2. sa hovdca maitreyi, yan nu ma tyam, bhagoh, sarvd prthvol vittena puma sydt, katham tendmrtd sydm ih na, th hovdca ydjnavalkyah yathaivopakaranavatdm jivitam, tathaiva te jivitam sydd amrtatvasya tu ndidsh mUeneti.
2. Then said Maitreyi 'If, indeed, Venerable Sir, this whole earth filled with wealth were mine, would I be immortal through that>' 'No,' said Yajnavalkya- 'Like the life of the rich even so \ would your life be Of immortality, however, there is no hope through wealth 1
3 sa Jiovdca maitreyi, yendham ndmrtd sydm, kim dham iena kurydm, yad eva bltagavdn veda tad eva me bruhtti. 3 Then Maitreyi said "What should I do with that by which o*
196 The Principal Upamsads II 4 5
I do not become immortal? Tell me that, indeed, Venerable Sir, of what you know (of the way to immortality) '
Venerable Sir Bharata says that gods, sages, monks and saints
are to be called bhagavan
devds ca munayai caiva hngmah sadhavas cayc bhagavann iti tc vdcydh sarvaih sln-pum-napiimsakaih
the way to immortality kcvalam amytatva-sadhanam §
4 sa hovaca yajiiavalkyah, pnyd bata are nah sail priyam bhdsasc, eht, dssva, vydkhyasyami te, vydcaksdnasya tti me mdidhydsasva tti
4 Then Yajnavalkya said 'Ah, dear, you have been dear (even before), and you (now) speak dear words Come, sit down, I will explam to you Even as I am ^explaining reflect (on what I say) ' ^
pnyd dear You are dear because you wish to learn of that truth
which is nearest my heart
bata baiely anukampydJia It shows tenderness
reflect vdkydny arihalo mscayena dhydtum tccheh S
Those who recite the Vedas without understanding their meaning are compared by Sayana to lifeless pillars which bear the weight of the roof
sthdnur ayatn bhara-harahkildbhud,adhitya vedamnavtjdnahyo'rtham Cp what Krsna says to Arjuna m the Uttara-gitd ya ha kharas ccaidana-bhara-vahl bhdrasya velta 11a lu saurabhasya talha hi viprah sndi-sdstra-purnaJi, jiidnena hinahpasubhihsamdnah Just as a donkey bearing the weight of sandal-wood knows its weight but not its fragrance, so also is a Brahmana who knows the texts of the Vedas and scriptures but not their significance
There is another version of this verse. yathd kharas candana-bhdra-vahi bhdrasya vettd na tu candatiasya, tathaiva sastram baliuny adhUya, sir am najdnan kkaravad valtet sah It is said that some people are clever only at expounding, while others have the ability to practise what they learn The hand carries the food to the mouth but only the tongue knows the flavours vyakhydtum eva kecit kusatdh, sastram prayoktum alam anye upandmayah karo'nnam rasdms tu jilwavoa jandh
5 sa hovaca na vd are patyuh kdmaya pahh pnyo bliavati, dtmanas tu kdmaya pahh pnyo bliavati, na vd arejdydyai kdmdya jdyd priyd bhavatt, dtmanas tu kdmaya jdyd pnyd bhavati, na vd are putrdndm kdmdya putrah pnyd bkavanh, dtmanas tu kdmaya putrah pnyd bhavanti, na vd are vittasya kdmaya vittam priyam bhavati, dtmanas tu kdmdya vittam pnyam bhavati, na vd are brahmanah kdmdya brahma priyam bhavati, dtmanas tu
II 4 5 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 197
kamaya brahma pnyam bhuvaU, na va are ksatrasya kamaya ksatram pnyam bhavati aimanas tu kamaya ksatram pnyam bhavatt, na va are lokdndm kamaya lokah pnya bhavanti, atmanastu kamaya. lokah pnya bhavanh; na va are devanam kamaya devdh pnya bhavanh, aimanas tu kamaya devdh priyd bhavanti, na va are bhutdndm kamaya bhutdni priydni bhavanti, aimanas in kamaya bhutdni priydni bhavanti; na va are sarvasya kamaya sarvam pnyam bhavatt, aimanas tu kamaya sarvam pnyam bhavatt; dtmd va are drastavyah srotavyo mantavyo mdidhydsitavyak' maitreyi dtmano vd are darsanena iravanena matyd vijiidnenedam sarvam vxditam.
5 Then he said. 'Venly, not for the sake of the husband is the husband dear but a husband is dear for the sake of the* Self Venly, not for the sake of the wife is the wife dear but a wife is dear for the sake of the Self Venly, not for the sake of the sons are the sons dear but the sons are dear for the sake of the Self Venly, not for the sake of wealth is wealth dear but wealth is dear for the sake of the Self. Venly, not for the sake of Brahminhood is brahminhood dear but brahminhood is dear for the sake of the Self Venly, not for the sake of ksatnya- hood is ksatriyahood dear but ksatriyahood is dear for the sake of the Self Venly, not for the sake of the worlds are the worlds dear but the worlds are dear for the sake of the Self Verily, not for the sake of the gods are the gods dear but the gods are dear for the sake of the Self. Venly, not for the sake of the beings are the beings dear but the beings are dear for the sake of the Self Venly, not for the sake of all is all dear but all is dear for the sake of the Self Venly, O Maitreyi, it is the Self that should be seen, heard of, reflected on and medi- tated upon Venly, by the seeing of, by the hearing of, by the thinking of, by the understanding of the Self, all this is known.
AH objects of the world, earthly possessions, romantic delights* provide opportunities for the realisation of the Self m SelfsJiould be seen, heard of, reflected on and meditated upon- sWotavyah snitt-vakyebhyah, mantavyas copapattiblnh malvd ca satatam dhyeya, tie darsana-hetavah Vivarana- prameya-samgraha The Sruti, the text, is the basis for intellectual development, jj? a ltls * means subordinate and necessary to true knowledge; forbt^ra" 8 ° PP ° Slte ° f ti 1011 ^ 633 &ite*on It prepares
Contemplation is not mere philosophic thought It is a higher
The Principal Upamsads
stage of spiritual consciousness It secures the direct conviction of the reality While a teacher can help, personal effort alone can take us to the goal of realisation
The Jama and the Buddhist systems also recognise the three stages of religious development The three jewels of the Jamas, raina-lraya, arc right belief, right knowledge and right conduct Matrceta says in Salapaficaiatka (90)
agamasyarlha-ctntaya bhdvanopasanasya ca
kdla-traya-vtbhdgo'sh ndnyatra lava idsannl Nowhere except in your teaching is there the threefold division of time into hearing the Scriptures, reflection on their meaning and the practise of meditation
■ 6 brahma tarn paradad yo' nyatratmano brahma veda ksatram tarn paradad yo 'nyatratmanah ksatram veda lokas tarn paradur yo 'nyatratmano lokan veda devas tarn paradur yo' nyatratmano devdn veda bhuidm tarn paradur yo' nyatratmano bhutdm veda sarvam tarn paradad yo' nyatratmano sarvam veda xdam brahma, tdam ksatram, imc lokah, tine devah, imam bhiitam, xdam sarvam, yad ayam alma
6. 'The Brahmana ignores one who knows him as different from the Self The Ksatnya ignores one who knows him as different from the Self The worlds ignore one who knows them as different from the Self The gods ignore one who knows them as different from the Self The beings ignore one who knows them as different from the Self All ignores one who knows it as different from the Self This Brahmana, this Ksatriya, these worlds, these gods, these beings and this all are this Self
The various particular notes are not heard apart from the whole, but they are heard in the total sound
7 sa yatka dundubher hanyamdnasya na bdhydn iabdan iaknuyad grahanaya, dundnbhes tu grahanena dundubhy-dgM- tasya vd sabdo grhtiah
7 'As when a drum is beaten, one is not able to grasp the external sounds, but by grasping the drum or the beater of the drum the sound is grasped
aghatasya vd or the beater of the drum tadahanlr-fnmtsasya nirodhena vd R
II 4 ii- Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 199
iaknuyad grdhandya, iankhasya tu grahaenan iankha-dhmasya va iabdo grhitah
8 'As -when a conch is blown, one is not able to .grasp its external sounds, but by grasping the conch or the blower of the conch the sound is grasped.
9 sa yathd vindyai vddyamdndyai na bdhyan sabddn saknuydd grahandya, vindyai tu grahanena mnd-vddasya vd iabdo grhitah.
9 'As when a vina (lute) is played, one is not able to grasp its external sounds, but by grasping the vina or the player of the vina the sound is grasped.
10 sa yathdrdra-edhdgner abhydhidt prthag dhumd vinii- caranh, evam vd are'sya mahato bhiitasya nihsvasitam, dad yad rgvedo yajurvedah sdmavedo'tharJdngirasa itihdsah purdnam wdya upamsadah slokdh sutrdny anuvydkhydndm vydkhydndni: asyaivaiiam sarvam nihsvasitam.
10 'As from a lighted fire laid with damp fuel, various (clouds of) smoke issue forth, even so, my dear, the Rg Veda, the Yapir Veda, the Sdma Veda, Atharvdngirasa, history, ancient lore, sciences, Upanisads, verses, aphorisms, explanations and commentaries From this, indeed, are all these breathed forth.
SesMaitriVl 32
AH knowledge and all wisdom are the breath of the eternal Brahman. mahad bh&tam the great reality. It is great because it is greater than everything else and is the source of all else. breathing: As a man breathes without effort, so all these come out o£ the Supreme without effort: yathd aprayatnenawa pimisa-wiSvdso bhavati S
anuvyakhyanant explanations, bhdsya-vydhhydndni vyakhyandnr commentaries, bhdsya-v&pdni.
H sa yathd sarvdsdm apdm samudra ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm spaHdndm tvag ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm gandhdndm n&sike ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm rasdndm jihvd ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm rupdndm caksur ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm sabddndm boiram ekdyanam, evam saroesdm samkalpdndm mana ekdyanam, Mam sarvdsdm vidydndm hrdayam ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm mrmandtn hastdv ekdyanam, evam saroesdm dnanddndm upastha ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm visargdndm pdyur ekdyanam, ewm sanesdth adhvandm pddav ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm vedandm vdg ekdyanam
J v ocean is the one goal (uniting place) of all waters,
^ the skin is the one goal of all kinds of touch, as the nostrils
200 The Principal Upamsads II 4 13.
are the one goal of all smells, as the tongue is the one goal of all tastes, as the eye is the one goal of all forms, as the ear is the one goal of all sounds, as the mind is the one goal of all determinations, as the heart is the one goal of all forms of knowledge, as the hands are the one goal of all acts, as the organ of generation is the one goal of all kinds of enjoyment, as the excretory organ is the one goal of all evacuations, as the feet are the one goal of all movements, as speech is the one goal of all Vedas
12. sa yaihd samdhava-khlya udake prdsta udakam evdnuvi- Ivyeta, na Msya ndgiahandyeva sydt, yato yatas tv ddadita lavanam eva, evam vd ara idam maliad bhiitam <anantam apdram vijndna-ghana eva; etebhyo bhittebhyah samutthaya, tony evanu- vmasyati, na pretya samjnasti, ih are bravtmi, ih hovdca ydjnavalkyah
12 'As a lump of salt thrown in water becomes dissolved in water and there would not be any of it to seize forth as it were, but wherever one may take it is salty indeed, so, verily, this great being, infinite, limitless, consists of nothing but knowledge Arising from out of these elements one vanishes away into them When he has departed there is no more know- ledge This is what I say, my dear' • so said Yajnavalkya
saindltava salt, auditor vtkarah samdliavah, smdhu sdbdenodakam abhtdhtyate, syandandt stnilmr udakam §. samjiia' detailed knowledge, viiesa-samjiid §
13 sa hovdca maiireyi, atraiva ma bhagavdn amumuhat, 11a pretya sampidslih sa hovdca, na va are'ham moham bravtmi, alam vd ara idam vijiidndya.
13 Then said Maitreyi - 'In this, indeed, you have bewil- dered me, Venerable Sir, by saying that, "when he has departed there is no more knowledge "' Then Yajnavalkya said 'Cer- tainly I am not saying anything bewildering This is enough for knowledge (or understanding) '
The confusion is due to the seeming contradiction that the Self is pure intelligence, and, again, when one has departed there is no more knowledge The same fire cannot be both hot and cold S points out that Brahman, the pure intelligence, remains unchanged, that it does not pass out with the destruction of the elements, but the individual existence due to avtdya is overcome, katham vijnana-ghana eva, hattiam vd na pretya samjnastth, na 'hy usnas sttas cdgnir evaiko bhavali . . sa alma- sarvasya jagalah paramartliato bltuta-ndsdn na vindsi, vtndsi tv avidyd-kfta-khtlyabhavah S
The goal seems to be like the state of dreamless sleep a state of utter annihilation Maitreyl protests against such a bewildering prospect.
14, yaira hi dvaitam vaa bhavati, tad itara itaram pghratt, tad itara itaram paiyah, tad itara itaram irnott, tad itara itaram abhvadah, tad ttara ttaram manute, tad ttara itaram mjanah yaira tv asya sarvam atmaivabhut, tat kena ham pgkret, tat kena kam pasyet, tat kena ham irnuyat, tat kena kam abhtvadet, tat kena kam manvita, tat kena kam vijaniyaP yenedam sarvam vijanah, tam kena mjamydt, vijnataram are kena vijamyad tit.
14 'For where there is duality as it were, there one smells another, there one sees another, there one hears another, there one speaks to another, there one thinks of another, there one understands another. Where, verily, everything has become the Self, then by what and whom should one smell, then by what and whom should one see, then by what and whom should one hear, then by what and to whom should one speak, then by what and on whom should one think, then by what and whom should one understand? By what should one know that by which all this is known? By what, my dear, should one know the knower?'
SeeCU VII 24 1 The reference here is to the Absolute Brahman. Whatever is known is an object As the Self is the subject, it cannot he known.
This section indicates that the later subjection of women and their exclusion from Vedic studies do not have the support of the Upanisads
Fifth Brahmana THE COSMIC AND THE INDIVIDUAL
1 tyam prthm sarvesam bhiitanam madhu, asyaz prthivyai sarvam bhutant madhu; yai cayam asydm prthivydm tejomayo' Wavuiyah purusah, yas cayam adhyatmam ianras tejomayo' imamayaJi. purusah, ayam eva sa yo'yam atmd, tdam amrtam. ifem brahma, tdam sarvam.
J"' P 11 ^ earth is (like) honey for all creatures, and all creatures re t|ike) honey for this earth. This shining, immortal person ™° *?\ tb -is earth and Vnth reference to oneself, this shining, ^mortal person who is m the body, he, indeed, is just this self. m M "^mortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
The Principal Upanisads II. 5 5
The earth and all living beings are mutually dependent, even as bees and honey are The bees make the honey and the honey supports the bees parasparam upakaryopakaraka-bkave phalitam aha A
Brahman is the self m each, in the earth and m the individual
2 una apah sarvesam bhutanam madhu, asdm apam sarvam bhutam madhu, yas cayam asv apsu tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, yas cayam adhyatmam raitasas tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sayo' yam atma, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam
2 This water is (like) honey for all beings, and all beings are (like) honey for this water This shining, immortal person who is in this water and with reference to oneself, this shining, immortal person existing as the seed (m the body), he is, indeed, just this self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all
In the body it exists, specially in the seed adhyatmam retasy apam viSesato 'vasihdnam S retaso jala-mkaratvat R
3 ayam agmh, sarvesam bhutanam madhu, asydgneh sarvam bhutam madhu, yas cayam asmmn agnau tejomayo 'mrtamayah purusah, yas cayam adhyatmam vdn-mayas tejomayo 'mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sayo' yam atma, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam.
3 This fire is (like) honey to all beings, and all beings are (like) honey for this fire This shining, immortal person who is in this fire and with reference to oneself, this shining, im- mortal person who is made of speech, he is just this self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all
4 ayam vdyuh sarvesam bhutanam madhu, asya vayoh sarvam bhutam madhu, yas cayam asmvn vayau tejomayo 'mrtamayah purusah, yas cayam adhyatmam pranas tejomayo 'mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo'yam atma, idam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam.
4 This air is (like) honey to all beings, and all beings are (like) honey for this air. This shining, immortal person who is in this air and with reference to oneself this shining, immortal person who is breath (m the body), he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all
Seel 5 11
5 ayam ddttyah sarvesam bhutanam madhu, asyadttyasya sarvam bhutam madhu, yas cayam asmmn aditye tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, yas cayam adhyatmam caksusas tejomayo'
mriamayah purttsah, ayam eva sa yo' yam dtmd, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam.
5. This sun is (like) honey for all beings and all beings, are (like) honey for this sun This shining, immortal person who is in this sun and with reference to oneself, this shining, immortal person who is m the eye, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
6. vmd disah sarvesam bhutdndm madhit; dsdm dtsdm sarvdnt bkutam madhu; yai cdyam dsu diksu tejomayo 'mriamayah ptmtsah, yas cdyam adhydtmam irotrah prdttirutkas tejomayo' mttamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo' yam dtmd, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, idam sarvam.
6. These quarters are (like) honey to all beings, and all beings are (like) honey for these quarters This shining, immortal person who is in these quarters and with reference to oneself, this shining, immortal person who is in the ear and the time of hearing, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
tme 0/ hearing. sabda-pratt-iravana-veldydm sanwhtto bhavatili pratiirutkah S. '
7 ayam candrah sarvesam bhutdndm madhu, asya candrasya sarvam bhutdnt madhu; yai cdyam asmims candre tejomayo' mriamayah purusah, yai cdyam adhydtmam manasas tejomayo' mriamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo' yam dtmd, tdam amrtam, mm brahma, tdam sarvam
fl Ivt^ m00n 1S llke ( hone y) to ali beings, and all beings are « «,° ne ^ f ° r ^ moon - skiing, immortal person who is in this moon and with reference to one self, this shining, immortal person who is in the mind, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
saro~ tya w - l .y ut sar ^dm bhuidndm madhu, asyai vidyutah mrta™ wzdhu, yai cdyam asydth vtdyutt tejomayo'
nirk"* 1 £ uru?afl > cdyam adhydtmam tatjasas tejomayo' tLJ^T ^ MrM ? a ^, ayam eva sa yb'yam dtmd, tdam amrtam, ihnhahma, tdam sarvam
are' fl l ?\ ^ttang is (like) honey to all beings, and all beings txW„ i ney for thl s lightning. This shining, immortal this sS, 1S m this lightning and with reference to this self, Self lmmort al person who is m the light, he is just this "•••i tnis is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
The Principal Upantsads
II 5 ii
9 ayam stanayitnuh sarvesam bhutanam madhu, asya stanayttnoh sarvam bhutam madhu, yai cayam asmm stanayilnau tejomayo 'mrtamayah purusah, yai cayam adhyatmam §abdah sauvaras tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sayo'yam atma, tdam amrtam, idam brahma, idam sarvam
9 This cloud is (like) honey to all beings, and all beings are (like) honey for this cloud This shining, immortal person who is m this cloud and with reference to one self, this shining, immortal person who is in the sound and m tone, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all
stanayttnu cloud, parjanya or thunder megha-garjanam R
sound iabd'e bhavah iabdah £
tone svare visesato bhavatiti sauvarah S\
10 ayam dkasah sarvesam bhutanam madhu; asyaha§asya sarvant bhutam madhu, yas cayam asmmn ahaie tejomayo' mrtamayah, purusah, yai cayam adhyatmam hrdyakaiah tejo- mayo' mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo'yam atma, tdam amrtam, idam brahma, tdam sarvam
10 This space is (like) honey for all beings and all beings are (like) honey for this space This shining, immortal person who is m this space and with reference to one self, this shining, immortal person who is in the space in the heart, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
XI. ayam dharmah sarvesam bhutanam madhu, asya dhar- masya sarvam bhutam madhu, yai cayam asmm dharme tejo- mayo 'mrtamayah purusah, yas" cayam adhyatmam dharmas tejomayo 'mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo'yam atma, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam
11 This law is (like) honey for all beings and all bemgs are (like) honey for this law This shining, immortal person who is in this law and with reference to one self, this shining, immortal person who exists as lawabidingness, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all
this law though law is not directly perceived, it is described by the word 'this,' as though it were directly perceived, because the ! effects produced by it are directly perceived ayam tty apratydkso'pi dharmah karyena tat-prayuktena pratyaksena, vyapadiSyate, ayam . dharma tti pratyaksavat S The self and dJtarma or righteousness ; are regarded as equivalent Cp 'Live you (wharafha) having self as . ( light and refuge and none other, having dharma as light and refuge > and none other * Dlgha Ntkaya II ioo The end of the way is to
become what we are, to become Brahman or the Buddha The arhats are said to become one with Brahman, brahma-bhiUa
12 tdam satyam sarvesam bhutdndm madhu; asya satyasya sarvdni bhutam madhu; yas cayam asmin satye tejomayo^ mrtamayah purusah, yas cayam adhyatmam sdtyas tejomayo mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo'yam atma, tdam amrtam, idam brahma, tdam sarvam
12. This truth, is (like) honey for all beings, and all beings are (like) honey for this truth. This shining, irnmortal person who is in this truth and with reference to oneself, this shining, immortal person who exists as truthfulness, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
13 tdam mdnusam sarvesam bhutdndm madhu; asya manu- sasya sarvam bhutam madhu, yas cayam asmtn mdnuse tejomayo'^ mrtamayah purusah, yas" cayam adhyatmam mdnusas tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo'yam atma, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam.
13 This mankind i* (like) honey for all beings, and all beings are like honey for this mankind This shining, immortal person who is in this mankind and with reference to oneself, this shining, immortal person who exists as a human bemg, he is just this self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all
14 ayam atma sarvesam bhutdndm madhu; asydtmanah sarvdni bhutam madhu, yas cayam asmmn dtmani tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, yas cayam atma tejomayo' mrtamayah purusah, ayam eva sa yo' yam atma, tdam amrtam, tdam brahma, tdam sarvam.
14 This self is (like) honey for all beings and all beings are (like) honey for this self This shining, immortal person who is in this self and the sinning, immortal person who is in this (individual) self, he is just this Self, this is immortal, this is Brahman, this is all.
The cosmic self and the individual self are referred to.
15 sa vd ayam atma sarvesam bhutdndm adhtpatih; sarvesam bhutdndm raja; tad yatha ratha-ndbhau ca ratJta-nemau cdrdh same samaipitdh, evam evdsmmn dtmam sarvdni bhutam sarve dcvdh sarve lokdh sarve prdndh sarva eta dtmanah samarpttdh.
15. This self, verily, is the lord of all beings, the king of all beings As all the spokes are held together in the hub and felly of a wheel, just so, in this self, all bemgs, all gods, all worlds, all breathing creatures, all these selves are held together.
The Principal Upamsads II 5 17.
MADHU-VIDYA THE HONEY DOCTRINE
16 i^am vat ton madhu dadhyann atharvano 'svibhydm uvaca tad etad rsth pasyann avocat'
tad vam nard sanaye damsa ugram avis krnomi, fanyatur na vrstvm dadhyan ha yan madhv atharvano vam asvasya s"irsnd pra yad im uvaca tit
16 This, verily, is the honey which Dadhyan, versed m the Atharva Veda, declared unto the two AsVins Seeing this the seer said 'O Asvins in human form, I make known that terrible deed of yours which you did out of greed, even as thunder (makes known) the coming ram, even the honey which Dadhyan, versed m the Atharva Veda, declared to you through the head of a horse '
See RV I 116 12 Satapatha Brahmana XIV I 1 and 4 The two Asvins desired instruction from Dadhyan, but he was unwilling to impart it as Indra had threatened Dadhyan that he would cut off his head, if he taught this madhu-vtdyd, honey doctrine to any one else So the Asvins took off Dadhyan's head and sub- stituted for it a horse's head Dadhyan declared the honey doctrine Indra earned out his threat, and the Aivins restored to Dadhyan his own head This story illustrates the extreme difficulty which even the gods had to secure the knowledge originally possessed by Indra ASvins in human form, narakarau asmnau & sanaye out of greed, labhaya labha-lubdho hi loke'pi kruram karma- carah S
17 idam vat tan madhu dadhyann atharvano 'svibhyam
uvaca
tad etad rsih pasyann avocat
atharvanayasvina dadhtce
asvyam sirah praty airayatam
sa vam madhu pra vocad rtdyan,
tvastram yad dasrdv apt kaksyam vam iti 17 This, venly, is the honey which Dadhyan, versed in the Atharva Veda, declared unto the two Asvins Seeing this, the seer said, '0 Aivms, you set a horse's head on Dadhyan, versed in the Atharva Veda, ye terrible ones to keep his promise he declared to you the honey of Tvastn which is your secret '
SeeRV I 117 22
Keeping one's solemn promise is more important than the life itself, jivitad apt hi satya-dhartna-paripdlanagurutarett S
II 5. 19- Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 207
kaksyam secret, gopyam, rahasyam paramatma-sambandki yad viplanam £
tvastram of Tvasty, the sun - tvasta adiiyah tasya sambandki S
The head oiyajna or sacrifice became the sun; to restore the head the nte called pravargya was started, yajnai siras chmnam tvasfa- bhavat, tat pratisandhdnartham pravargyam karma &
18 idam vai tan madhu dadhyann atharoano 'svibhyam uvaca, tad etad rsih paiyann avocat'
purai cakre dvipadah, purai cakre catuspadah purah sa paksi bhuiva purah purusa amiat iti.
sa va ayam purusah sarvdsu pursu puniayah, natnena him ca nanavrtam, natnena kim ca nasarhvrtam.
18 This, venly, is the honey which Dadhyan, versed in the Atharva Veda, declared unto the two Asvins. Seeing this the seer said 'He made bodies with two feet and bodies with four feet Having first become a bird, he the person entered the bodies ' This, venly, is the person dwelling in all bodies There is nothing that is not covered by him, nothing that is not per- vaded by him
purah bodies, puram, iarirdni S" Safest- bird, subtle body, Ivhga-sarlram
Cp pura-samjfie Sariresmm iayanat puruso karih, quoted by R. There is nothing which is not filled by the Supreme, inside or outside
sa eva nama-rilpatmanSntar-bahir-bhdvena karya-karana-rubena vyavasthitah § j ■ r
Cp 'This city {pur) is these worlds, the person [purusa) is the spirit {yoyam pavate, vSyu), who because he inhabits (sefe) this citv is called the citizen <jmru sa) ' Salapatha Brahmana XIII. 6. 2. 1.
See also Atharva Veda X 2 30, where 'he who knoweth Brahma's S wwff a X SOn h 80 caa * i » ^ neitber S1 ght nor
&^4^S?cC S 188 ' pbll ° says <As for lotdship -
/ JL^^VT , ten viadhu fodhyann dtharvano' hibhydm ttvaca, taa etad rsih paiyann avocat'
rupam rupam prahrupo babhuva, tad asya rupam praticaksanaya; indro m&yabhihpuru-ritpa tyate yum hy asya harayah said data tti
7*1*7 JZT h i ay -T- vai ca sahasrdni - ******
The Principal Upanisads II 6. 2
19 This, venly, is the honey which Dadhyan, versed m the Aiharva Veda, declared unto the two Asvms Seeing this the seer said 'He transformed himself m accordance with each form This form of him was meant for making him known Indra(the Lord) goes about m many forms by his mdyas (magical powers), for to him are yoked steeds, hundreds and ten He, venly, is the steeds He, venly, is tens and thousands, many and countless This Brahman is without an earlier and without a later, without an inside, without an outside This Brahman is the self, the all-perceiving This is the teaching '
SeeRV. VI 47 18 pralicaksanaya for making him known Creation is for the mani- festation of the glory of god tndrah' lord, paramcsvarah
mSySbhh prajiiabhth £ By his wisdom he manifests himself san.kalpa-riipa-jnanath R The Lord reveals himself through many forms by his maya, to reveal his thoughts Indra assumes one form after another, makes round himself wonderful appearances. Sayana says, yad rfipam kamayate tad rupatmako bhavatt nana-mdhdm Sarirant ntrmwnlc
Larayak steeds, sense-organs, mdriyam
Sixth Brahmana
1 atha vamiah paultma$yo gaupavanah, pautimasyiil, patttt- vu'ifyo gaupavanat, gaupavanah kauSikat, kauhkah kaundmyai, kauv.dmyah idndilydt, idvdilyah kauStkdc ca gautamac ca, gatilwals —
1 Now the line of tradition (of teachers). Pautimasya (received the teaching) from Gaupavana, Gaupavana from (another; Pautimasja (This) Pautim.lsya from (another) Craujnv.ma (This) Gaupaiana from Kauiika, KauSika from Katindtrija, Katinrlmja from S\"indiha, S\"mdilya from KaiKika and GanUma Gautama —
2 tir,}'if'\'tl, t urmvefyak iundilyuc ca anabhmWdc ca, aribhwU'i'a i~rabl:vsl«ial, dr.abhmtldla t'tnahhimlali'it, tir.abLw:- lii'* ?it''!ii>\'it, fauiav ah sitiaW'pracinayagyubhyam, saitavi- f'X'.tv, '\.tu f:'.r3$(tryiil, pwiiaryo bhiiradvdjat, bhuradvajo
bhdradvdjdc ca gautamdc ca, gautamo bhdradvdjdt, bJidradvdjah Pardsarydt, pdrdiaryo baijavdpdyandt, baijavdpdyandh, kauit- kdyaneh, hmiikdyanify.
2. From Agmvesya. AgniveSya from 3andilya and Anabhi- mlata, Anabhimlata from (another) Anabhimlata. Anabhimlata from (still another) Anabhimlata (This) Anabhimlata from Gautama Gautama from Saitava and Pradnayogya, Saitava and Pracinayogya from Parasarya, Parasarya from Bharadvaja. Bharadvaja from Bharadvaja and Gautama, Gautama from (another) Bharadvaja, Bharadvaja from Parasarya, Parasarya from Baijavapayana, Barjava.pa.yana from Kausikayarn, Kausi-
3. ghrtakaustkdt, ghrtakauiikah pdrdiarydyandt, pdrdsaryd- yanah pardsarydt, pdrdiaryo jdtukamydt, jdtuhamya dsurd- ya^ac caydskdc ca, dsurdyanas tratvapefy, tmvoayw aupajandha- «4; jwpajandhanir dsureh, dsunr bhdradvdjdt, bharadvaja atreyat, dtreyo mdnteh, mdntir gautamdt, gautamo gautamdt, gautamo vdtsydt, vdtsyah sdndilydi, idndilyah kaiiorydt kdpydt, mxioryah kdpyah kumdrahdntdt, kumdrahdnto gdlavdt, gdlavo mdarbhi-kamidmydt, vidarbhv-kaundtnyo vatsanapdto bdbhravdt, msanapdd bdbhravahpathah saubhardt, panthdh saubharo 'ydsydd anprasdt, aydsya dngirasa dbhiites ivdsirdt, dbhutis ivdstro vwanipattvastrdt, viharupas tvdstro 'toibhydm, asvwau dadHca aiharvandt, dadhyann dtharvayo 'tharvano davodt, atharvd davoo myoh prddhvamsanat, mrtyuh prddhvamsanah pradhvam- Wiat pradhvamsana ekarseh, ekarstr vipracitteh, vipracittir Weft, vyastth sandroh, sandruh sandtandt, sandtanah sanagdt, wnflgaA paramesfhinah, paramesthi brahmanah, brahma svaya- monu, brahmane namah
•js.., .f-v-"- «uui jTcuciscirya, jrarasarya irom jaiuitaniya.
Traiv y T fr ° m - Asur5 ' yana and Yaska - Asurayana from an l Traivani from Aupajandham Aupajandhani from Aw * n from Bharadvaja. Bharadvaja from Atreya. Vat!,™ v? m Mantl mntL from Gautama Gautama from from Sandilya. Sandilya from Kaisorya Kapya Galarar-i pya from Kumar aharita Kumarahanta from from V t a bom Vl <iarbhikaundmya. Vidarbhikaundmya Pathah c a ^ pat Babh rava Vatsanapat Babhrava from Av^ra | aubhara t. Pathi Saubhara from Ayasya Angirasa, i* Angirasa from Abhuti Tvastra, Abhuti Tvastra, from
The Principal Upantsads
Visvarupa Tvastra VisVarupa Tvastra from the two Asvms The two Asvms from Dadhyanc Atharvana Dadhyanc Athar- v ana from Atharvan Daiva Atharvan Daiva from Mrtyu Pra- dhvamsana Mrtyu Pradhvamsana from Pradhvamsana Pradhvamsana from Ekarsi Ekarsi from Vipracitti Vipracitti from Vyasti Vyasti from Sanaru Sanaru from Sanatana, Sanatana from Sanaga Sanaga from Paramesthin Para- mesthin from Brahma. Brahma is self-born Salutation to Brahma.
Paramesthin is Viraj Brahma is Htranya-garbha
The tradition of the Veda is traced to the Supreme It is expressed or formulated by individuals but they are not its authors The tradition belongs to the supra-individual order and is said to be apauruseya or non-personal It is timeless though its apprehension is possible at any time
Ill i 2. Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad
First Brahmana
1, janako ha vaideho bahu-daksinena yapieneje. tatra ha kuru- pdncalanam brahmana abhisametd babhumh tasya ha janakasya vmdehasya vipjmsa babhuva kah svtd esam brdhmandndm aniicanatama iti. sa ha gavdm sahasram avarurodha: daia daia padd ekaikasydh irngayor abaddhd babhumh.
i Janaka (King) of Videha performed a sacrifice at which many presents (were offered to the priests) Brahmanas of the Kurus and the Pancalas were gathered together there. In this Janaka of Videha arose a desire to know which of these Brahmanas was the most learned in scripture. He enclosed (in a pen) a thousand cows. To the horns (of each cow) were fastened ten corns (of gold).
Though this states the same doctrine as the previous madhuvidya, a makes out that while the previous section depended on scripture, agamajradhanam, the present one is based on reasoning, upapaUt- pradhdnam When the two, scripture and reasoning, demonstrate the TOrtyof theSelf, it is seen clearly as a bael fruit m the palm of one's hand agamopapatti hy atmaikatva-prakasanaya pravrtte Saknutah wm-lala-gata-folvam vua darSayttum. 5
2. tan hovdca. brahmana bhagavantah, yo vo brahmisthah, sa tiaga udajatam ttt te ha brahmana na dadhrsuh atha hayajna- wukyak svam eva brahmacannam uvdca: etah, saumya, udaja, samdrava th td hodacakdra, te ha brahmana* cukrudhuh: mmmm no brahmtstho bruviteh atha ha janakasya vaidehasya nm&alo babhuva: sa hatnam papraccha, tvam tm khalu nah, ypmvalkya, brahmistho 'sih sa hovdca namo vayam brahmtst-
tya kurmah, gokdmd eva vayam sma ttt. tarn ha tola evaprastum «*e hotasvalah
J' said to them 'Venerable Brahmanas, let him of you "° is the wisest Brahmana among you, take away these cows ' nose Brahmayas did not dare (to take the cows). Then Yajfia- awav^w aid to his pupil 'Samasravas, my dear, dnve them saidf 'H dr ° Ve them away ^ Br ahmanas were enraged (and am™ Howcan he declare himself to be the wisest Brahmana on g as? Now, there was ASvala, the hotr pnest of Janaka
The Principal Upanisads
HI. i. 5.
of Videha He asked him, 'Yajnavalkya, are 3*011, indeed, the wisest Brahmana among us?' He rephed, *We bow to the wisest Brahmana but we just wish to have these cows ' Therefore, Asvala, the Iiotr priest, decided to question him.
Yajnavalkya is a teacher of the Tajur Veda but his pupil chants the Soman which is the Rg Veda set to music, and the Aiharva Veda- is subsidiary to the other three. So Yajnavalkya is learned in all the four vedas
3. Yajnavalkya, iti hovaca. yad idam sarvam vijiyanaptam, sarvam mrtyundbhipannam, kena yajamano viriyor aptim atimu- cyata iti: hotrd rtvija, agmna, vdea: vag vai yajnasya hoia, tad yeyam vak so' yam agnih, sa hota, sd luuktiL, safimuktih
3 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'since everything here is pervaded by death, since everything is overcome b}^ death, by what means does the saenficer free himself from the reach of death?' (Yajnavalkya said) Hy the hotr priest, by fire, by speech. Verny, speech is the hotr of sacrifice. That which is this speech is this fire. This (fire) is hotr This is freedom, this is complete freedom '
aptam' pervaded, vy apiam S\
abhipannam' overcome, swayed, vasikrlam S
By the knowledge of the identity of the sacrificer, the fire and the ritual speech one gets beyond death.
4. yajnavalkya, ih hovaca, yad idam sarvam ahorairabhyani apiam, sarvam ahoratrdbhyam abhipannam, kena yajamano 'hoidirayor dptmi aitmncyaia iti adhvaryund rtvija, caksnsa, ddityena, caksur vat yajnasya adhvaryuh, tad yad idam caksuh, so' sdv ddityah; so 'dhvaryuh, sd mukfih saiimuktih.
4. 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'since everything here is pervaded by day and night, since everything is overcome by da}' and night, by what means does the saenficer free himself from the reach of day and night?' 'By the adhvaryu priest, by the eye, by the sun Verily, the eye is the adhvaryu of the sacrifice. That which is his eye is the yonder sun. This is the adhvaryu This is freedom. This is complete freedom.'
Day and night are symbolic of time, which is the source of all change: viparinama-letuh kalah. S
5 yajnavalkya, iti hovaca, yad idam saroani purva-pakss- apara-paksdbhyam apiam, sarvam purvapaksa-aparapaksabTydm abhipannam. kena yajamdnah purvapaksa-aparapaksayor aptim
Ill i 8 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 213
atimucyata iii. udgdird rtvijd, vdyund, prdnena, prdiyi vai yajiiasya udgatti, tad yo yam prdyah sa vdyuh, sa ttdgdtd, sd muktth satvmuktih.
5 'Yajnavalkya/ said he, 'since everything here is overtaken by the bright and dark fortnights, since everything is overcome by the bright and dark fortnights, by what means does the sacnficer free himself from the reach of the bright and the dark fortnights?" 'By the udgdtr pnest, by the air, by the breath. Verily, the breath is the udgdtr priest of the sacrifice. That which is this breath is the air. This is the udgdtr priest. This is freedom. This is complete freedom/
6. Yajnavalkya, ih Jiovdca, yad idam antanksam anaramba- mm wa kendkramena yajamdnah svargam lokam dkramata ih brahmand rtvijd, manasd, candreija, mano vai yajiiasya brahmd, tad yad idam manah, so' sau candrah, sa brahmd, sa muktth, sdtnmikiih ity atimoksdh, atha sampadah.
6. 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'since the sky is, as it were, without a support, by what means of ascent does a sacnficer reach the heavenly world?' By the Brahma priest, by the mind, by the moon Venly, mind is the Brahma of the sacrifice. That which k this mind is the yonder moon This is the Brahman. This is freedom. This is complete freedom This is concerning freedom; and now the achievements.
sampadah- achievements of results acquired, phala-prdptih
7_ yajnavalkya, iti hovdca, katibhir ayam adya rgbhir hotdsmm y*}ne kan$yaffii hsrbhtr iti katamds ids tisra iti. puro'nuvdkyd cayajyd ca sasyawa trtiyd' Mm tdbhir jayaffiv yat kirn cedam pranabhrdth.
I 'Yajnavalkya/ said he, 'how many (kinds of) Rg. verses J™ the Mr priest use today in this sacrifice?' 'Three/ which are these three?' 'The introductory verse, the verse r^Pj^ying the sacrifice and the benedictory as the third/ breath ' 008 * m by these? ' <wliatever that k here that has
\<a^r^~[ iaVa ^ a ' lit hovdca, kaiy ayam adyddhvaryur asmin mm I "t hos y aiU%: iiSr <* **»•* katamds ids Usra iti: yd huta matt - y i hm atl1leAante , yd huta adhiseraie: kim tdbhir wa h r ya , > u M valanit dsua»lokam eva tdbhir jayati, dvpyata aeva -hkah;yd huta atinedante, pitr-lokam eva tdbhvr jayati,
2I 4 The Principal Upamsads UI i 10
attva hi pitr-lokah, yd hida adhiierale, manu$ya-lokam eva tabhtr jayah, adha tva hi vtanusya-lokah
8 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'how many (kinds of) oblations will the Adhvaryu pnest offer today in this sacrifice?' 'Three ' 'Which are these three ' 'Those which, when offered, blaze upward, those which, when offered, make a great noise and those which, when offered, sink downward ' 'What does one win by these?' 'By those which, when offered, blaze upward, one wins the world of the gods for the world of the gods burns bright, as it were By those which, when offered, make a great noise one wins the world of the fathers for the world of the fathers is excessively (noisy) By those which, when offered, sink downwards, one wins the world of men for the world of men is down below, as it were '
The three kinds of oblations are said to be wood and clarified butter, flesh, milk and soma juice § The first flares up, the second makes a hissing noise, the third sinks down into the earth
Those who are in the world of the fathers cry to be delivered out of it
atmedante make a great noise, ativa sabdam kurvanh £
9 yajnavalkya, iti hovaca, kattbhir ay am adya brahmd yajnam daksmato devatdbkir gopdyatttt ekayeh katama saiketi mana eveti, anantam vat manah ananta visve-devdh, anantam eva sa tena lokatn jayati.
9 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'with how many divinities does the Brahm5 pnest on the nght protect the sacrifice today?' 'With one ' 'Which is that one?' 'The mind alone ' Venly, the mind is infinite, the Visve-devds are infinite An nifinite world he wins thereby
Through mind we meditate and it is said to be infinite on account of its modifications
10 yajnavalkya, iti hovaca, katy ayam adyodgdidsmtn yajHe itotriydh stosyatih tisra iti katamds ids tisra iti puro' nuvakyd ca ydjyd ca iasyaiva trtiyd katamds id yd adhyatmam itt pram eva puro' nuvakyd, apdnoyajyd, vydnah sasyd kim tabhir jayatitt ' prthtvi-Iokam eva puro 'nuvdkyayd jayati, antariksa-lokam ydjyayd, dyu-lokam iasyayd tato ha hot&svala uparardma
io 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'how many hymns of praise will the udgdtn pnest chant today in the sacrifice?' 'Three ' 'Which are these three?' 'The introductory hymn, the hymn accom- panying the sacrifice and the benedictory as the third " 'Which
HI i 4 Brhad-arayyaka Upanisad 215
are these three with reference to the self?' 'The introductory- hymn is the inbreath, the hymn accompanying the sacrifice is the outbreath The benedictory hymn is the diffused breath.' 'What does one win by these?' 'By the. introductory hymn one wins the world of the earth, by the accompanying hymn the world of the atmosphere, by the benedictory hymn one wins the world of heaven.' Thereupon the Hoir priest Asvala kept silent
upararama kept silent, tusmm babhUva. R.
Second Brahmana
1. atha hatmmjdratkdrava drtabhdgahpapraccha' ydplavalkya tit hovdca, kati grahah katy atigrahd tti. astau grahah astdv atigrahd iti ye te' stau grahah, astdv atigrahah, katame to Hi.
1 Then Jaratkarava Artabhaga questioned him, 'YfLjfia- valkya,' said he, 'how many perceivers are there, how many over-perceivers?' 'Eight perceivers Eight over-perceivers.' 'Those eight perceivers and eight over-perceivers, which are they?'
The grahas are the organs of perception, graspers or apprehenders and the attgrahas are the ob]ects of perception
2 'The nose is the organ of perception. It is seized (controlled) by the outbreath as an over-perceiver, for by the outbreath one smells an odour.
prana th ghrdnam ucyate fi.
3 vdg vai grahah, sa ndmndtigrdheria grhitah, vdcd hi ndmdny abhtvadah
3 'Speech, venly, is the organ of perception It is seized by name as an over-perceiver, for by speech one utters names.
4 phvd vat grahah, sa rasendtigrdhena grhitah, jihvayd hi rasdn vijandti.
4 'The tongue, venly, is the organ of perception It is seized oy taste as an over-perceiver, for by tongue one knows tastes.
2l6
The Principal Upamsads
5 caksur vat giahah, sa lupenattgraliefia grhitah, caksusa hi rupdm pasyatt
5 'The eye, venly, is the organ of perception It is seized by form as an over-perceiver, for by the eye one sees forms
6 stotram vat graJuth, sa sabdendttgrdhena grhitah, siottcna hi sabddii srnoH
6 'The ear, venly, is the organ of perception It is seized by sound as an over-perceiver, for by the ear one hears sounds
7 mano vat grahah, sa kdmenatigrdhena grhitah, manasd hi kdmdn kdmayaie
7 'The mmd, venly, is the organ of perception, it is seized by desire as an over-perceiver, for through the mmd one desires desires
8 haslau vat grahah, sa karmamhg) dhena grhitah, Jiastdbhyam hi karma karoti
8 'The hands, venly, are the organ of perception They are seized by action as an over-perceiver, for by the hands one performs actions
9 ivag vai giahah, sparsendtigrdhena grhitah, tvacd hi sparsdn vcdayatc ity ete'slau grahah, asfdv attgrahah
9 'The skin, venly, is the organ of perception, it is seized by touch as an over-perceiver, for by the skin one feels touch These are the eight organs of perception, and the eight over-perceivers '
10 ydpiavalkya th hovdca, yad idam sarvam mrtyor amiam, kd svit sd dcvatd, yasyd mrtyur annam tit agntr vat mrtytih, so'pdm annam, apapunar mrtyum jay ah
10 'Yajiiavalkya,' said he, 'since everything here is food for death, what, pray, is that divinity for whom death is food'' 'Fire, venly, is death It is the food of water He (who knows this) overcomes further death '
Everything is the food of death as everything is born and is imperilled by and is subject to death sarvam jayate vtpadyate mrlyuna grastam §
II. ydpiavalkya, th hovdca, yatrdyam puruso mrtyatc, «d asindt prdndh krdnianty alio nctx na tit hovdca ydjfiavalkyah, airaiva samavaniyantc, sa ttcchvayah, ddhmdyatt, ddhvidto mrtah tele
Ill 2, 13 Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 2x7
sage) dies, do the vital breaths move up from him or do they not?' 'No,' replied Yajfiavalkya. 'They aTe gathered together in him. He (the body) swells up, he is inflated and thus inflated the dead man (body) lies '
The liberated man, when his bondage is destroyed, does not go anywhere- bandhava-ndse mukiasya na kvacid gamanam S
12. yajfiavalkya, Hi hovaca, yatrayam puruso mnyate, ktm emm najahatttt noma ttt, anantam vai noma, anantfi. vtive-devdh, anantam em sa tena lokath jayaU
12 'Yajfiavalkya,' said he, 'when such a person dies, what is it that does not leave him?' 'The name The name is in- finite and infinite are the Vihie-devds. Thereby he (who knows this) wins an infinite world '
What remains is name, noma It is the name which does not perish at death Cp with this the Buddhist doctrine that the element which is reborn is nama-rupa, natna and shape Cp RumI 'Every shape you see has its archetype m the placeless world and if the shape perished, no matter, since its original is everlasting' Shams*- Tabriz: XII, Nicholson's E.T
13. yajfiavalkya, ttt hovaca, yatrasya purusasya mrtasyagnim vag apyeh, vatam pranah, caksur Mttyam, manas candram, diiah srotram, prthvim ianram, akaiwm atma, osadhir lomarn, vanaspatm keiah, apsu lohitam ca retai ca mdhtyate, kvayaih tada puruso bJiavaffli ahara, somya, kastam, artabhdga; avam evaitasya vedisyavah, na nav etat sajana %h. tau hotkramya, mMraytoh cakrate tauJutyad ucatuh, Jumna .ham tad wcaiuh atha yat praiasatiisatuh karma, havoa tat praiaiamsatulv punyo vaiptmyena karmana bhavah, papahpapeneti Mo ha jaratkarava artablmga upararama
13 'Yajfiavalkya,' said he, 'when the speech (voice) of this dead person enters into fire, the breath into air, the eye into the sun, the mind into the moon, hearing into the quarters the self into the ether, the hairs of the body into the herbs the tors on the head into the trees and the blood and the semen 3u* d *P. oslted 111 water, what then becomes of this person?" Artabhaga, m y dear, take my hand We two alone shall know of this this is not for us two (to speak of) in public ' The two
218 The Principal Upanisads III. 3 2
atman self, ether in the heart, hrdaydkaiam S lohtam blood, lohto rohto raktah, Amara-hosa I 5 15
WJiai then becomes of flits person? What is the support by which he again takes birth' The results of action, Karma, producerebirth
This view finds a parallel in the Buddhist doctrine, that -while, at death, the different parts of the individual are scattered to then- different sources, karma remains to cause a new existence See also RV X 16 3
Third Brfihmana
THE RESORT OF THE PERFORMERS OF THE HORSE- SACRIFICE
1 atha hainam bhujyur Jdhydyamh papraccha' yajnavalkya, iti hovdca, madrcsit carakdh, paiyavrajdma, tc patancalasya kdpyasya grMn aima; tasydsid diihitd gandhamagrhitd; tarn aprcchdma ko 'sttt, so'bravTt, sitdhamdngirasa iti, tarn yadd lokdndvt aafdn aprcchdma, athainam abruma, kva pdriksitd abhavann iti, kva pdriksitd abhavan, sa tvd prcchdmi, ydj- iiavalkya, kva pdriksitd abhavann iti
1 Then Bhujyu Lahyayaiii asked him - 'Yajnavalkya,' said he, 'we were travelling around as wanderers among the Madra tribe and came to the house of Patancala Kap^ra. He had a daughter who was possessed b}* a gandharva We asked him "Who are }'ou?" He said, "I am Sudhanvan, a descendant of Angiras " When we were asking him about the ends of the earth, we said to him, "What has become of the Panksitas? What has become of the Panksitas?" And I ask 3'ou, Yajnavalkya, what has become of the Panksitas?'
The questioner who obtained the knowledge of the limits of the earth from a gandharva asks Yajnavalkya about the descendants of Pariksit The writer believes in the fact of possession Pataficala's daughter was possessed by a gandharva, an aenal spirit, and so served as a medium She was asked about the actual extent of the world and the place where the sons of Pariksit were
Modern para-ps3 chology is 1m estigating phenomena of possession and medmmship, as these cannot be explained on principles of psj chology which are generally recognised
2 sa hovdca, ttvdca vai salt agacchan vai te tad yairdsva-mc- dha-yajmo gacchanttti kva iiv asva-medha-yajino gacchaniiti.
Ill 4 I
Brhad-dranyaka Upamsad
dvdtnmiatam vat deva-ratha-ahnydny ayam lokah, iam samantant prtkivi dvts tavat paryeh, torn samantam prthivim dvis tavat samudrah paryeh, tad yavatt ksitrasya dhdra, ydvad va maksv- kdydh pattram, tdvdn antarenakasah, tan rndrah suparno bhittvd vdyave prdyacchat, tan vayur atmam dhitvd tatragamayad, yatrasva-medha-yajmo 'bhavann ih, evam tva vat sa vdyum eva praia&amsa, tasmdd vayur eva vyastth, vdyuh samashh - apa punar mrtyum jayah, ya evam veda tato ha bhujyur Idhydyamr uparardma
2 Yajnavalkya said, 'He (the gandharva) evidently told (you) that they went where those who perform horse-sacrifices go ' 'And where do the performers of the horse sacrifices go?' 'Thirty-two times the space covered by the sun's chanot m a day makes this world Around it covering twice the area is the earth Around it covering twice the area is the ocean Now there is ]ust that much interspace as large as the edge of a razor or the wing of a mosquito Indra, having become a bird, delivered them to the air Air, placing them m itself led them to the place where the performers of the horse sacrifice were. Thus did he (the gandharva) praise the air Therefore, air is the separate individuals and air is the totality of all individuals. He who knows it as such, conquers further death ' After that Bhujya Lahyayam kept silent.
Fourth Brahmana
I atha hamam usastas cdkrdyanah papraccha yainavalkva ill Iwvaca, yat sdksdd aparoksdd brahma, ya dtma sarvdntarah tarn me vydcaksveh esa ta dtma sarvdntarah kata?naJi, ydina- valkya, smvdntarah yah prdncna pramU, sa ta dtma sarvd^ tarah yopanenapamh, sa ta dtma sarvdntarah, yo vydnena vyamU sa ta atmd sarvdntarah, ya uddnena uddmh, sa ta dtma sarvantarah, csa ta dtma sarvdntarah.
I Then Usasta Cakrayana asked him 'Yainavalkva ' said he explain to me the Brahman that is immediat^preSt and directly perceived, who is the self m all things?' your self That is within all things.' 'Which is Sail 22£
220 The Principal Upamsads III, 5 1
Yajnavalkya 7 ' 'He who breathes m with your breathing in is the self of yours which is m all things He who breathes out with your breathing out is the self of yours which is m all things He who breathes about with your breathing about is the self of yours which is in all things He who breathes up with your breathing up is the self of yours which is m all things He is your self which is m all things '
2. sa hovaca usastas cakrayanah yatlia vibruydd, asau gauh, asav asva tli, evam evmtad vyapadistam bhavah, yad eva sdksad aparoksad brahma ya alma saivantarah tarn me vydcaksva ttt esa ta dtmd sarvdntarah katamah yajnavalkya, sai~uaiitarah na drstei diastaiampasych, na sruter stotdtam srmtydh, 11a mater mania.} am manvTlhdh, na vijiidtcr vijndtaram vijdnlydh, esa ta atma saivantatah, ato'nyad attain tato ha usastas cakrdyana uparardma
2. Usasta Cakrayana said 'This has been explained by j'ou as one might say "This is a cow," "this is a horse." Explain to me the Brahman that is immediately present and directly perceived, that is the self m all things " 'This is your self that is within all things ' 'Which is within all things, Yajnavalkya?' 'You cannot see the seer of seeing, you cannot hear the hearer of hearing, you cannot think the thinker of thinking, you cannot understand the understander of understanding He is your self which is in all things Everything else is of evil' Thereupon Usasta Cakrayana kept silent
artam everything else perishes
FiftJi Btahmana
I atha hainam kaholah kausttakeyah papraccha yajnavalkya, ih hovaca, yad eva sdksad aparoksad brahma ya dtmd sarodn- tarah, tarn me vydcaksva lii esa ta dtmd sarvdntarah-katainah, yajnavalkya, sarvdntarah yo' sandy d-pipdse iokam mohamjardm mrtyum atyeti etam vai tarn dtmdnam mditvd, brdhmandh putraisandyds ca vittmsandydi ca hkaisandyds ca vyuffhdya, atha bhtksdcaryam caranti yd hy eva ptttiatsand sd inttaisand yd vtttatsand sd lokaisand, ubhe hy ete esane eva bhavatah;
Ill 5 i. Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 221
tasmdd brdhtnanaJi.pdndityam mrvidya bdlyena Usthaset, balyam ca pandityam ca mrvidya, aiha mtmili; amaunam ca maunam ca mrvidya, aiha brahnanah sa brdhmanah kena sydt. yena sydt Una idrsa eva ato'nyad drlam taio ha kalwlah kausTtakeya uparardma
1 Now Kahola KausTtakeya asked him, 'Yajfiavalkya/ said he, 'explain to me the Brahman that is immediately present and directly perceived, that is the self in all things ' 'This is your self which is in all things.' 'Which is within all things, Yajfiavalkya.' 'It is that which transcends hunger and thirst, sorrow and delusion, old age and death The Brahmanas, having known that self, having overcome the desire for sons, the desire for wealth, the desire for worlds, live the life of mendi- cants That which is the desire for sons is the desire for wealth; that which is the desire for wealth is the desire for the worlds for both these are but desires Therefore let a Brahmana, after he has done with learning, desire to live as a child When he has done (both) with the state of childhood and with learning, then he becomes silent meditator Having done with (both) the non-meditative and the meditative states, then he becomes a Brahmana (a knower of Brahman).' 'How does the Brahmana behave'' 'Howsoever he may behave, he is such indeed Everything else is of evil.' Thereupon Kahola KausTtakeya kept silent
hunger asitmn iccha a&andyd 5. thmt patum iccha pipasa §
sorrow desire, sofeufc kamatt S Desire or hankering after desirable objects is the cause of sorrow
delusion mistake or confusion arising from wrong perception vipwntarpratyaya-prabliavo'mveko Ihramah § esana desire kdnwh All desires are of one type, since they are directed towards results and all means are adopted towards that end sarvah pialarttia-prayukta eva hi sarvam sadlumam upadatte § The knowers embrace the hf e of a monk and wander as mendicants
JShST U ? T n SlgnS of a monk ' s Me Prescribed by the scriptures, which are sometimes merely the means of hvehhood for
!&w « h f- tak6n t0 llfe P^^isa^artvrdjyZ
carmih tyaklva. smartam hngam kevalam asrama-matra-sarand^m
nS?S ha ™ S d ° ne Wth ' havmg laam ^ ab0 *- "Mefam balya: state of the chad Deussen and Gough adopt this inter-
The Principal Upamsads
III 6 i
pretation Immediacy and lack of reflection as in a child give us the experience of the real See Subala U 13
It is not a question of remaining as children, but becoming as children It involves the sacrifice of intellectual conceit, a 'sacnfiamn tnlclleclus ' We must be able to acquire naivete It is what Lao Tzu calls 'returning to the root ' St Paul says 'Thou art beside thyself, much learning doth make thee mad' Acts xxvi 24 Cp 'St Francis once said that a great scholar when he joined the Order, ought in some sort to resign even his learning, in order that, having stripped himself of such a possession he might offer himself to the arms of the Crucified' A G Little, Franciscan Papers Lists and Documents (1943), P 55
Certain things are hidden from the learned and revealed to the babes 'In this hour Jesus rejoiced, saying, I thank Thee, Heavenly Father because Thou hast hidden these things from the wise and prudent and revealed them unto babes ' 'Except ye become like little children, ye shall not see the Kingdom of God ' To become like little children is not easy It takes much effort to acquire the grace and meekness of the child-like, to measure our littleness against the greatness of the Supreme
biilya strength which is the total elimination of the perception of objects of self-knowledge jnana-bala-bhava, £ This view is different from what is stated above
Manna is abstinence from speech It is regarded as helpful for meditation We must turn away from the world of noise into the inward stillness, the interior silence to become aware of the reality which transcends time and space Cp Kierkegaard 'The present condition of the world is diseased If I were a doctor and was asked for my advice, I should answer. Create silence, bring men to silence — the word of God cannot be heard in the world today And if it is blazoned forth with all the panoply of noise so that it can be heard even in the midst of all other noise, then it is no longer the word of God Therefore, create silence '
The true knowcr of Brahman devotes himself exclusively to the contemplation of the self and shuns all other thoughts as distractions.
Sixth Brahmana
1 atha hnvatn gargi vacafnavT fapraccha, yiiji'iavalkya, fit /•aim a, yad tdtw sairam apsv otam ca protam ca, kasmtn nu fl lis if a «'<"({ ca pttittH celt vayau, gargi, ill kasnnn nu kftalu j hur, f'uts ca protai celt antanh<a~lokcm, gargi, ill. kasmtn
HI 6 i. Brhad-dranyaka Upantsad 223
mi khalv antartksa-bkd otai ca protai cett gandharva-hkesu, gargi, ttt kasmin nu kltalu gandharva-hkd otai ca protas ceti adttya-lokesu, gSrgi, ttt kasmin nu klialv ddttya-lokd otai ca protas cett candra-kkesu, gargi, ttt kasmin nu khalu candra-lokd otai ca protai cell naksatra-lokesu, gdrgt, ih kasmin nu khalu naksatra-lokd otai ca protas ceti deva-lokesu, gargi. iti kasmin nu khalu deva-lokd otai ca protai ceti. mdra-lokesu gargi, itt. kasmin m khalv tndra-hkd otai ca protai ceti prajd-pali-lokesu, gargi, ih kasmin nu khalu prajd-pati-lokd otai ca protas ceti. brahma- lokesu, gargi, itt kasmin nu khalu brahma-loka. otai ca protai cell sa hovaca, gargi mdtipraksih, ma te murdha vyapaptat, anatiprainyam vat devatam aliprechasi, gargi, mahpraksir ih. tato ha gargi vdcaknavy uparardma
1 Then Gargi Vacaknavi asked him 'Yajfiavalkya,' said she, 'since all this here is woven, like warp and. woof, in water, on what, pray, is water woven, like warp and woof?' 'On air, 0 Gargi' 'On what, then is air woven, like warp and woof?' 'On the worlds of the sky, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of the sky woven, like warp and woof?' 'On the worlds of the gandharvas, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of the gandharvas woven, like warp and woof?' 'On the worlds of the sun, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of the sun woven, like warp and woof?' 'On the worlds of the moon, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of the moon woven, like warp and woof 'On the worlds of the stars, 0 Gargi' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of the stars woven, like warp and woof?' 'On the worlds of the gods, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of the gods woven, like warp and woof?' 'On the worlds of Indra, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of Indra woven, like warp and woof ?' 'On the worlds of Pra}d-pah, 0 Gargi ' 'On what, then, pray, are the worlds of Prajd-pati woven, like warp and woof 'On the worlds of Brahma, 0 Gargi ' 'On what then, pray, are the worlds of Brahma woven, like warp and woof?' He (Yajnavalkya) said, 'Gargi, do not question too much lest your head fall off Verily, you are questioning too much about a divinity about which we are not to ask too much Do not, 0 Gargi, question too much ' Thereupon Gargi Vacaknavi kept silent *
The basis of this whole universe is said to be brahma-hka maahpraksih S argues that the nature of the deityis to be gathered from scnptures and not inferred by logic- svam praimm nyayZ
224 7 he Principal Upamsads III 7 1
piakSram atilya agamcna ptasfavydnt devatam anum&nena ma priiktJh
Seventh Btfihmana
1 alha hamam nddalaka dmnih papraccha' yajhavalkya, iti hovaca viadtcsv avasdma, patancalasya hdpyaiya grhcsu, yajnam adhtydnah tasyasid bhdiyd, gandhanta-g>hitd, lam aprcchdma, ko'siti so'havTt, kabandha athaivam lit so'bravTl, palancalam kapyam ydjfnkams ca, veltha mt tvam, kapya, tal sui ram yasmtnn (v yena) ayam ca lokah, pat at ca lokah, sanidm ca bhutani samdrbdhdni , bhavantUt so'bravit palancalah kapyah, naham tad, bhagavan, vedett so'bravTl palancalam kapyam yajmkams ca velt- ha mi tvam, kapya, tarn anlaiydmtnam, ya imam ca lokam param ca lokam sarvaut ca bhutani yo'ntaro yamayatitt so'bravit patafi- calah kapyah, naham tarn, bhagavan, vedett so'bravTl palancalam kapyam ydjmkami ca, yo vai tat, kapya, sutra7>i vtdydt, tarn cdntatydminam ill, sa brahma-vii, sa loka-vit, sa deva-vit, sa veda-vtt, sa bhiila-vii, sa atma-vit, sa saiva-vi{, ttt tcbhyo'bravU tad aham veda, lac ecl tvam, yajnavalkya, sutram avtdvdms lam catitar- yammam btahmagavTr ndajasc, murdha, tc vtpattsyalTlt veda va aham, gantama, tat sub am tarn canldryamtnam iti yo vd idam kas ctd h Fiydl, veda vedett yalhd vcttha, talltd brfthUi
1 Then Uddalaka Arum asked him, 'Yapavalkya/ said he, 'we lived in the house of Pataficala Kapya among the Madras, studying the scriptures on the sacrifices He had a wife who was possessed by a gavdharva We asked him, "Who are you?" He said, "I am Kabandha Atharvana " He said to Pataficala Kapya and those who studied the scriptures on the sacrifices, "Do you know, O Kapya, that thread, by which this world, the other world and all beings are held together?" Pataficala Kapya said "I do not know it, Venerable Sir " He said to Pataficala Kapya and those who studied the scriptures on the sacrifices "Do you know, Kapya, that inner controller from withm who controls this world and the next and all things " Pataficala Kap}'a said, "I do not know it, Venerable Sir" He said to Pataficala Kapya and those who studied the scrip- tures on the sacrifices "He who knows that thread, 0 Kapya,
Ill 7. 3 BrJiad-dranyaka Upanisad 225
and that inner controller, indeed knows Brahman, he knows the worlds, he knows the gods, he knows the Vedas, he knows beings, he knows the self, he knows everything." Thus he explained it to them I know it If you, Yajnavalkya, do not know that thread, that inner controller and still take away the cows that belong only to the knowers of Brahman, your head will fall off ' 'I know, 0 Gautama, that thread and that inner controller ' 'Anyone might say, "I know, I know " Tell us what you know '
Here is a description of the world spirit, brahma-lokanam antara- tarnam sutram § It is that which binds together all bemgs from the highest to the lowest, braJimadi-stamba-paryantdm samdrbdhdm samgralhitdm, § All things are strung like a garland with a thread. Reference here is to the siitratman Cp Maitrl I 4 Sataiilokl 12, 55 Man is a bead strung on the thread of the conscious self, and just as wooden puppets are worked by strings, so the world is operated by the siiirdtman, the thread spirit
2 sa hovaca vdyur vat, Gautama, tat sutram; v&yuna vai, Gautama, siltrendyam ca lokah paras ca lokah sarvdni ca bhutani samdrbdhdm bhavanti, tasmdd vai, Gautama, purusam pretam dhuh vyasramsisatdsydngdnih; vdytmd hi, Gautama, siitrena samdrbdhdm bhavantlh evam etat, yajnavalkya, antarydmmam bruhih
2 He said, 'Air, verily, 0 Gautama, is that thread By air, venly, 0 Gautama, as by a thread this world, the other world and all beings are held together Therefore, verily, 0 Gautama, they say of a person who dies that his limbs have been loosened, for they are held together, 0 Gautama, by air as by a thread ' 'Quite so, Yajnavalkya, describe the inner controller '
3 yah prthivydm tisthan prthivyd antarah, yam prthivi na veda, yasya prthivi sariram, yah prthivim antaro yamayah, esa ta atmdntarydmy amrtah
3 (Yajnavalkya said,) 'He who dwells in the earth, yet is within the earth, whom the earth does not know, whose body the earth is, who controls the earth from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
'He was m the world and the world was made by him and thp world knew him not —St John I 10 y antarah within; sometimes 'different from "
226 The Principal Upanisads III 7 9
4 yo'psu tisthann, adbhyo'ntarah, yam apo na viduh.yasyapah sariram, yo'po'ntaro yamayati, esa ia atmantaryamy amrtah
4 'He who dwells m the water, yet is within the water, whom the water does not know, whose body the water is, who controls the water from within, he is your self, the inner con- troller, the immortal '
5 yo'gnau tisthann, agner antarah, yam agnir 11a veda, yasyagmh sariram, yo'gmm antaro yamayati, esa ta atmantar- yamy amrtah
5 'He who dwells m the fire, yet is within the fire, whom the fire does not know, whose body the fire is, who controls the fire from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
6. yo'ntankse tisthann antariksad antarah yam antariksam na veda, yasydntanksam sariram, yo'ntariksam antaro yamayati, esa ta atmantaryamy amrtah
6 'He who dwells in the sky, yet is within the sky, whom the sky does not know, whose body the sky is, who controls the sky from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
7. yo vayau tisthann vayor antarah, yam vayur na veda, yasya vdyujt sariram, yo vdyum antaro yamayati, esa ta atmantaryamy amrtah
7 'He who dwells m the air, yet is withm the air, whom the air does not know, whose body the air is, who controls the air from withm, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
8 yo dwi tislhan dwo'ntarah, yam dyaur na veda, yasya dyauh sariram, yo divam antaro yamayati, esa ta atmantaryamy amrtah
8 'He who dwells in the heaven, yet is within the heaven, whom the heaven does not know, whose body the heaven is, who controls the heaven from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
9 ya aditye tisthann aditydd antarah, yam adityo na veda, yasyadityah sariram, ya ddityam antaro yamayati, esa ta atman- taryamy amrtah
9 'He who dwells in the sun, yet is within the sun, whom the sun does not know, whose body the sun is, who controls the sun from within, he is your self, the mner controller, the immortal '
Ill 7 14 Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad 227
It is not the 'sun whom all men see' but that 'whom we know with the mind ' Atharva Veda X 8 14, It is the 'light of lights ' R V I, 113 1, B G XII 17. 'Whose body is seen by all, whose soul by none ' Plato Laws 898 D 'That was the true light of the world ' John I. 4, 1 9, IX 5 See C U I 6 6, which speaks of an effulgent person m the solar regions who is free from evil
10 yo dtksu tisthan, digbhyo'ntarah, yam diso na viduh, yasya di&ah sariram, yo dtso antaro yamayati, esa ta atmantar- yamy amrtah.
10. 'He who dwells in the quarters (of space), yet is within the quarters, whom the quarters do not know, whose body the quarters are, who controls the quarters from within, he is your self , the inner controller, the immortal '
11 yai candra-tarake hsthaihi candra-tdrakdd anlarah, yam candra-tarakam na veda, yasya candra-tarakam sariram, yai candra-tarakam antaro yamayah, esa ta atmantarydmy amrtah
11 'He who dwells in the moon and the stars, yet is within the moon and the stars, whom the moon and the stars do not know, whose body the moon and the stars are, who controls the moon and the stars from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
I2 1 &k ,^ e akaiad antarah, yam akaso na veda,
yasyakaiah sariram, ya akasam antaro yamayati, esa ta atmdn- iaryamy amrtah
12 'He who dwells in the ether, yet is within the ether, ^ whom the ether does not know, whose body the ether is, who controls the ether from within, he is your self, the inner con- troller, the immortal '
13 yas tamasi tisthams tamaso'ntarah, yam tamo na veda yasya tamah sariram, yas tamo'ntaro yamayah, esa ta atman- taryamy amrtah
'5 e dwells in the darkness, yet is within the darkness, wftom the darkness does not know, whose body the darkness wh0 controls the darkness from within, he is your self the inner controller, the immortal ' y ' me
fJt yas .^ asi tethams tejaso'ntarah, yam tejo na veda yasya.
anLtTVf 3 U3 °' niaro <*« * «^2«K
amrtah Uy adhidaivatam, aihadhibMtam. y y
thl\ Cr7 h0 dwells m the yet is within the light whom the hght does not know, whose body the light is, Xcoltv^
The Principal Upamsads
the light from within, he is 3'our self, the inner controller, the immortal. Thus far with reference to the divinities Now with reference to beings.'
adhibhfitanr pertaining to the different grades of beings from Brahma down to a clump of grass, brdhmddt-stamba-paryantesu antarydmi-darsanam §
15 yah saroesu bhittesu tisthan, sarvebhyo bhutebhyo'ntarah, yam saroani bhiitdm na viduh, yasya sarvdni bhiltdni sariram, yah sarvdni bhutdni antaro yamayati, esa ta dtmantaryamy amrtah liy adhtbhiitam; aihddhydtmam.
15. 'He who dwells in all beings, yet is within all beings, whom no beings know, whose body is all bemgs, who controls all beings from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal Thus far with reference to the beings Now with reference to the self '
16 yah prune tisthan prdnad aniarah, yam prdno na veda, yasya prdnah sariram, yah prdnam anfaio yamayati, esa ta dtmantaryamy amrtah.
16. 'He who dwells in the breath, 3-et is within the breath, whom the breath does not know, whose body the breath is, who controls the breath from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
prana. breath S means by it the nose prdna-vdyu-sahite ghrane
17 yo vaci tisthan vaco'ntaiah, yam van na veda, yasya vak sariram, yo vdcam antaro yamayati, esa ta dtmantaryamy amrtah
17. 'He who dwells in (the organ of) speech, yet is within speech, whom speech does not know, whose body speech is, who controls speech from within, he is your self, lie inner controller, the immortal '
18 yas caksiisi tisthams caksuso'ntarah, yam caksur na veda, yasya caksuh sariram, yas caksur antaro yamayati, esa ta Stmdntarydmy amrtah.
18 'He who dwells in the eye, yet is within the eye, whom the eye does not know, whose body the eye is, who controls the eye from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
19 yah srotre tisthan srotrdd aniarah, yam drotram 11a veda, yasya srotram sariram, yah srolram antaro yamayati, esa ta dtmantaryamy amrtah.
Ill 7. 23 Bfhad-dranydka Upamsad 229
19 'He who dwells in the ear, yet is within the ear, whom the ear does not know, whose body the ear is, who controls the ear from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
20. yo manasi tisthan manaso'ntarah, yam mano na veda, yasya manah sariram, yo mano'ntaro yamayati, esa ta dtmdn- tarydmy amrtah.
20. 'He who dwells in the mmd, yet is within the mind, whom the mmd does not know, whose body the mmd is, who controls the mind from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal.'
21 .yas tvaci hsthams tvaco'ntarah, yam tvaii na veda, yasya took sariram, yas tvacam antaro yamayati, esa ta dtmdntarydmy amrtah
21 'He who dwells in the skm, yet is within the skin, whom the skm does not know, whose body the skm is, who controls the skm from within, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal '
22. yo vijnane tisthan, vijndndd antardh, yam vijndnam na veda, yasya vijMnam sariram, yo vtjndnam antaro yamayah, esa ta dtmdntarydmy amrtah.
22 'He who dwells in the understanding, yet is within the understanding, whom the understanding does not know, whose body the understanding is, who controls the understanding from withm, he is your self, the inner controller, the immortal.'
w4? SCU f 68 the - text in SB 1 2 l8 ~ 20 Both the Kanva and the Madhyandina recensions speak of the universal and the individual selves as different from each other, the former being the ruler and the latter the ruled The Kanva speaks of the embodied self as the undemanding and the Madhyandina speaks of it as the self: yo vipiane hstiian ih kdnvah, atra-viptdna-tabdena iarwah novate ya atiwm tisthan ih madhyandmah, atra dtma-ialdah hrirasyavacakah
doSneS3,i PaSSage K M a f ° r ta
dt J£ va " s f this text in support of his theory of the absolute distinction between Brahman and the individual soul
y x° - aasi hsthan reia $°'ntarah, yam reto na veda, yasya amLt n T\' ret ° ,niaro yamayah, esa ta dtmdntarydmy «Si ad : st ° drtstd, airutah Srotd, amato mania, avlmto vtpiata nanyo'to'sh drasid, ndnyo'to'sh irotd, nanyoWto
230 The 'Principal Upantsads III 8 2
mantd, ndnyo'to'sh vijndta esa ta dtmdntarydmy amrtah ato'nyad artam tato hodddlaka aruntr uparardma
23 He who dwells in the semen, is other than the semen, whom the semen does not know, whose body the semen is, who controls the semen from within, that is your self, the inner controller, the immortal He is never seen but is the seer, he is never heard but is the hearer He is never perceived, but is the perceiver He is never thought but is the thinker There is no other seer but he, there is no other hearer but he, there is no other perceiver but he, there is no other thinker but he He is your self, the inner controller, the immortal Everything else is of evil After that Uddalaka Arum kept silent
Everything that is not the self perishes
Though he is free from all the empirical qualities, he still controls them all
Cp S sarva-samsdra-dharma-varptah sarva-samsdrmam karma- phala-vibhdga-karld
Eighth Brdhmana
I atha ha vdcaknavy uvdca, brdhmand bhagavantah, hanta, aliam imam dvau prasnau praksydmi, tau cen me vaksyah, na vai jdtu yusmdkam imam has cid brahmodyam jeteti prccha, gdrgiti
1 Then Vacaknavi said 'Venerable Brahmanas, I shall ask him two questions If he answers me these, none of you can defeat him in arguments about Brahman ' 'Ask, Gargi '
Vacaknavi is also Gargi but she is not the Gargi, who is the wife of Yajiiavalkya
brahmodya discussion about Brahman which often accompanied the sacrifices
2 sd hovdca aham vai tod, yajnavalkya, yatha kdiyo vd vaideho vd ttgra-putrah, ujjyam dhanur adhijyam krlvd, dvau bdnavantau sapatna-ahvyddhmau haste krtvd upottisthet, evam evaham ivd dvdbhydm pra&ndbhyam upodastham, tau me briihtti prccha, gargi, lit
2 She said, 'As a warrior son of the Kasis or the Videhas might rise up against you, having strung his unstrung bow
Ill 8. 7. Brhad-arattyaka TJpanhai 231
and having taken in his hand two pointed foe-piercing arrows, even so, 0 Yajfiavalkya, do I face you with two questions. Answer me these.' 'Ask, Gargi' (said he)
3 sa hovaca yad iirdhvam, yajiiavalkya, divah, yad avak prthivydh, yad antara dyavdprthivt ime, yad bhutam ca bhavac ca bhavisyac ceti acaksate, kasmnhs fad oiaih ca protam ceti.
3 She said 'That, 0 Yajfiavalkya, of which they say, it is above the heaven, it is beneath the earth, that which is between these two, the heaven and the earth, that which the people call the past, the present and the future, across what is that woven, like warp and woof?'
avak below, arvak.
4 sa hovaca, yad iirdhvam, gargi, divah, yad avak prthivyah, yad antara dyavdprthivt tme, yad bhutam ca bhavac ca bhavisyac cety dcaksate, dkdse tad otam ca protam ceti.
4 He said 'That which is above the heaven, that which is beneath the earth, that which is between these two, heaven and earth, that which the people call the past, the present and the future, across space is that woven, like warp and woof.'
5 sa kovaca, mamas te'stu, yajiiavalkya, yo ma etam vyavocah: aparasmai dhdrayasveti prccka, gargi, Hi
5 She said, 'Adoration to you, Yajfiavalkya, who have answered this question for me. Prepare yourself for the other ' Ask, Gargi '
6 sa hovaca, yad iirdhvam, yajiiavalkya, divah, yad avak prthivyah, yad antara dyava-pphivx ime, yad bhiitam ca bhavac ca bhavisyac cety acaksate: kasmims tad otam ca protam ceti.
0 She said. 'That, O Yajfiavalkya, of which they say, it is above the heaven, it is beneath the earth, that which is between these two, the heaven and the earth, that which the people call tfte past, the present and the future, across what is that woven like warp and woof?'
vZ ^ hov&ca ' >' ad iirMvam, gargi, divah, yad avak prthivyah, yaa antara dyavdprthivt ime, yad bhutam ca bhavac ca bhavisyac ay acaksate dkasa eva tad otam ca protam ceti, kasmm mi khalv akasa otas ca protai ceti
hl*Sh + l aid " '^ at whlch 155 above sty' to** whi ch is Snf i t arth ' that which » between these two. sky and earth, that which the people call the past, the present and the
232 The Principal Upanisads III 8 9
future, across space is that woven like warp and woof Across what is space woven like warp and woof?'
It is a difficult question If Yajnavalkya does not explain it because he thinks it inexplicable, he lays himself open to the charge of non- comprehension, a-prattpath, if, on the other hand, he attempts to explain what is inexplicable he would be guilty of contradiction, vi-prattpatti
8 sa hovaca, etad vat tad aksaram, gargi, brahmand abhtva- dantt, asthulam, ananu, ahrasvam, adirgham, alohttam, asncham, acchdyam, atamah, avdyv andkaiam, asangam, arasam, agan- dham, acaksuskam, asrotram, avdk, amanah, atejaskam, apranam, amukliam, amatram, anantaram, dbdhyam, na tad asnah him cana, na tad asnah has" cana
8 He said 'That, O Gargi, the knowers of Brahman, call the Imperishable It is neither gross nor fine, neither short nor long, neither glowing red (like fire) nor adhesive (like water) (It is) neither shadow nor darkness, neithef~air nor space, un- attached, without taste, without smell, without eyes, without ears, without voice, without mind, without radiance, without breath, without a mouth, without measure, having no within and no without It eats nothing and no one eats it '
This passage brings out that the Imperishable is neither a sub- stance nor a possessor of attibutes
aksara It is not the letter but the Supreme Self, aksaram paramatma eva, na varnah S B I 3 10 It is the changeless reality
9 etasya vd aksarasya praidsane, gargi, siirydcandramasait vidhrtau tisthatah, etasya vd aksarasya prasdsane, gargi, dydvd- prthivyau vidhrte tistJtatah, etasya vd aksarasya prasdsane, gargi, nimesd, muhurta, ahoratrany ardhamdsd, mdsd, rtavah, samvat- sara th vidhrtds tisthanti, etasya vd aksarasya prasdsane, gargi, prdcyo' 11yd nadyah syandante svetebhyah parvatebhyah, praticyo' nydh, yam yam cd diiam anu, etasya vd aksarasya prasdsane, gargi, dadato manusyah praiamsanti, yajamdnam devdh, darvim pitaro 'nvdyattdh
9 'Venly, at the command of that Imperishable, 0 Gargi, the sun and the moon stand in their respective positions At the command of that Imperishable, 0 Gargi, heaven and earth stand in their respective positions At the command of that Imperishable, 0 Gargi, what are called moments, hours, days and nights, half-months, months, seasons, years stand in their respective positions At the command of that Imperishable, 0
Ill 8 12 Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad 233
Gargi, some rivers flow to the east from the white (snowy) mountains, others to the west in whatever direction each flows By the command of that Imperishable, 0 Gargi, men praise those who give, the gods (are desirous of) the sacrificer and the fathers axe desirous of the dam offering.'
Inferential evidence from the orderliness of the world is here given anum&nam pramanam upanyasyah §
The maintenance of the respective positions of heaven and earth is not possible without the guidance of an intelligent transcendent ruler cetanavantam prasdsttdram asamsannam antaretfa itaitad ynUam. §.
10 yo va etad aksaram, gargi, aviditvasmiml loke pihoh, yajate, tapas tapyate, bahunt varsa-saliasrdny antavad evasya tad bhavah; yo va etad aksaram, gargi, avidiiraasmal hkat praiti, sa krpanah, athaya etad aksaram, gargi, vidttvdsmdl hkat praiti, sa brahmanah
10 'Whosoever, 0 Gargi, in this world, without knowing this Imperishable performs sacrifices, worships, performs austerities for a thousand years, his work will have an end; whosoever, 0 Gargi, without knowing this Imperishable departs from this world, is pitiable But, 0 Gargi, he who knowing the Im- perishable departs from this world is a Brahmana (aknower of Brahman) '
yad apianal satitsara-praptth, yad pmndc cdmrtatva-prapttli R
11 tad va etad aksaram, gargi, adrstam drastr, aitntam, srotr, amatam mantr, avyjiidtam vijndtr, nanyad aio'sti drastr, nanyad ato' sh Srotr, nanyad ato' sh mantr, nanyad ato' sti mplafr; etasmm nu khalv aksare, gargi, akaia otai ca protas ca.
11 'Verily, that Imperishable, O Gargi, is unseen but is the seer, is unheard but is the hearer, unthought but is the thinker, unknown but is the knower. There is no other seer but this, there is no other hearer but this, there is no other thinker but this, there is no other knower but this. By this Imperishable, 0 «argi, is space woven like warp and woof '
12. sa Jiovaca; brahmana bJiagavantah, tad eva bahu manye- nvamyad asmdn namaskdrena mucyedhvam; na vai jdtuyusma- ■ „r^" aW kaidd brahmo ^y a} f i jstett. tata ha vacahtavy upa-
12 She said 'Venerable Brahmanas, you may think it a great ™mg if you get off from him though bowing to him. Not one
234 The "Principal Upanisads III 9 1
of you will defeat him in arguments about Brahman ' Thereupon (Gargi) Vacaknavi kept silent
£ says that the same Brahman on account of the differences in limiting adjuncts, upddhtbhedena is called differentiy tasman mnipadhtkasyalnw.no mnipakhyalvan mrvisesatvad ekatvdc ca ne.h netlti vyapadeso bhavati, avidyd-kdma-kartna-visisfa-karya-karano- padhir atma samsdrljiva ucyate, mlya-nirahsaya-jiidna-sakty-upadhir dtmdnlarydmisvara ucyate, sa eva mrupddhth kevalah suddhah svena- svabhavendksaram param ucyate
Therefore the unconditioned Self, being beyond speech and mind, undifferentiated and one, is defined as 'not this,' 'not this', when it has the limiting adjuncts of the body and the organs, the products of ignorance, desire and work, it is called the individual ego , when the self has the limiting adjunct of eternal knowledge and power, it is called the inner controller, the Supreme Lord The same self, absolute, alone, pure is called the Imperishable Supreme Self The self is everywhere assuming different forms For S the differences are all traceable to limiting adjuncts and to nothing else, upddht- bhedenawaisdm bJiedah, nanyatha
Ninth Brahmana
1 atJia hatnam vidagdliah iakalyah papraccha kati devah, yajiiavalkya, iti sa haitayaiva mvida pratipede, ydvanto vaisva- devasya nwtdy ucyante, trayas ca trl ca said, trayas ca in ca sahasreti aum iti hovaca, kaly eva devah, ydjnavalkya tit kayos' tnms'ad itt Aum ih hovaca, katy eva devah, yajiiavalkya, iti sad ill aum tit liovdca, katy eva devah, ydjnavalkya, iti traya tti aum ttt hovaca, katy eva devah, yajiiavalkya, ttt dvav tti aum iti hovaca, katy eva devah, yajiiavalkya, iti adhyardha ih aum ttt hovaca, katy eva devah, yajiiavalkya, tti eka tti aum tti hovaca katame te trayas ca trl ca sdliasreti
1 Then Vidagdha Sakalya asked him 'How many gods are there, Yajiiavalkya ?' He answered, in accord with the following nivid (invocation of the gods) 'As many as are mentioned m the nivid of the hymn of praise to the Visve-devas, namely, three hundred and three, and three thousand and three ' 'Yes,' he said, 'but how many gods are there, Yajnavalkya ? ' 'Thirty three ' 'Yes,' he said, 'but how many gods are there, Yajna-
Ill 9 4 Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad 235
valkya?' 'Six ' 'Yes,' said he, 'but how many gods are there, Yapavalkya?' 'Three ' 'Yes,' said he, 'but how many gods are there, Yajfiavalkya?' 'Two ' 'Yes,' said he, 'but how many gods are there, Yajfiavalkya?' 'One and a half ' 'Yes/ said he, 'but how many gods are there, Yapiavalkya?' 'One' 'Yes,' said he, 'but which are those three hundred and three and three thousand and three?'
wvid group of verses giving the number of the gods which are recited in the hymns of praise to the Visve-devas devatd-samkhyd-va- cakam manira-padam kdnictd vaisva-deve sastre sasyamte. §
2 sa hovaca, mahvmdna evatsdm ete, trayas trvmsat to eva deva itt katame te irayas tnthiad itt astau vasavah ekddas'a rudrah, dvadasddttydh, te ekatrimiat inirai caiva prajdpahi ca irayastnmiav th
2 He (Yajfiavalkya) said, 'They are but the manifestations of them, but there are only thirty-three gods ' 'Which are these thirty-three'' 'The eight Vasus, the eleven Rudras, and the twelve Adityas, these are thirty-one, Indra and Prayd-patt (make up) thirty-three '
ntahmdnah manifestations. vibhiUayah §.
3 katame vasava itt agms" ca prthwi ca vdyus cdntanksam cadityai ca dyaui ca candramM ca naksatrdm ca, ete vasavah, eiesu htdam sarvam httam itt, tasmad vasava lit.
3 'Which are the Vasus?' 'Fire, the earth, the air, the sky, the sun, the heaven, the moon, the stars, these are the Vasus for in them all this is placed therefore they are called Vasus.'
The Vasus transform themselves into bodies and organs of all beings which serve as the support for their work and its fruition as ajso into their dwelling-places They help other beings to live and wey themselves live, pranindm karma-phalairayatoena karya- "arana-samgkdta-riipena tan mvasatvena vtparinam anto jagad tdatn sarvam vasayattti vasantt ca S
Because they help others to live they are called Vasus teyasmdd wsayatfa, tasmad vasava id S
4 katame rudrd lit daieme puruse prandh atmaikddaiah; te yMasindt Sariran martyad utkramantt, atha rodayanti, tad yad rodayanti, tasmad ruara itt.
4 T^ 0 * 1 are the Rudras?' 'These ten breaths in a person wtn the mind as the eleventh When they depart from this
236 The Principal Upanisads III 9 8
mortal body, they make us (his relatives) weep So because they make us weep, therefore they are called Rudras '
icn breaths the ten sensory and motor organs jiiana-karmendnyam dasa purttsasikant R
5 kalama adttya ifi dvddas'a vai masfih samvatsarasya, eta adilyah, etc hidam sarvam adadand yanii, ic yad idam sanam tldadana yanti, iasmad adilya itt
5 "Which arcthe Adityas?' 'Venly, the twelve months of the j ear, these are Adityas, for they move carrying along all this Since they move carrying along all this, therefore they are called Adityas '
6 hatama w.drah, katamah prajapaitr tit, stanayitnur eve- ndrah, yajnah prajapahr itt katamah stanayitnur tti asantr tit katamo yajna it% paiava tft
6 'Which is Indra' Which is Praja-patO 'Indra is the thunder, Prajd-pah is the sacrifice ' 'Which is the thunder 3 ' 'The thunderbolt.' 'Which is the sacrifice'' 'The (sacrificial) animals '
aiamf. thunderbolt vajram S
Animals arc called sacrifices as the latter depend on animals 3 ajilazya hi sSdhaniim pafavah S.
7 'Which are the m\>' 'Fire, the earth, the air, the sk\', the sun and the hea\en, these arc the si\, for the si\ are all this '
S fatanic te trayo dci'ii :/i una tva trayo lokt'ih, etu hhne san'c dt 1 i tti /ataman tan dvau devav tit, annam catva prdmii ceti Liiav'.n'dh%ardha tit yo yam pavala ill
b 'Which arc the three qods?' 'They are, venly, the three worlds for m them all thfe gods e\ist ' 'Which are the two I ./I-'' To k! and tmath ' 'Which it. tlu one and a half 'Tins on> h< rt' who blow*, (the air) '
1h> c -rlli iw\ tlu* fire rn->l " ow Rrvl, th< 4.y and tlx 1 air another. tl» "in rid tie !>''.t\< i) ft third pfthx'wi ttyui, caiiUfty.vJo dm)., {.r'.r'.i-.n %~i\un fj-fUrht ditltyul. dtum iidtlyw cailVrlya
it'.", ll.Jjf! 1 i',t\ d<" ,T t'i "s
»>.:t «i f imU<-r .it.d l.f> tli* r<-.t tU\< !oj>. at rw. can 1 prSmicaitau e'f. in, t " v, "J ish * Jr", <.<! 'Zf im art nbl h ih S
Ill 9 ii Bfhad-aranyaka Upanisad 237
9 tad dhuh, yad ayam eka vaavoa pavate, atha katliam adhy- ardha itt yad asmtnn idam sarvam adhyardhnot, tenadhyardha th, katama eko deva til. prana ill, sa brahma, tyad ity dcaksate.
9 'Regarding this, some say, since he who blows is like one, how then is he one and a half? (The answer is) because in "him (when he blows) all this grew up ' 'Which is the one God?' 'The Breath. He is Brahman They call him lyat (that) '
aihyarihiwt. grew up, attains great growth, adhiruddhim prdpnoh. S.
The one God has different names, forms, activities, attributes and powers owing to differences of function* devasyaikasya nmna-mpa-karma-guna-sakti-bliedo' dhikara-bhedat §
10 prthvoy eva yasydyatanam, agmr lokah, mano yyotxh, yo vai tarn purusam vidydt sarvasyatmanah pardyanam, sa vat vediia sydt, yajnavalkya veda va aham tarn purusam sarvasyd- tmanah pardyanam, yam dttha; ya evdyam sarirah purusah, sa esah vadaiva sdkalya, tasya ka devatd iti amrtam tti hovdca
10 'Verily, he who knows that person whose abode is the earth, whose world is the fire, whose light is the mind, who is the ultimate support of every soul, he, verily, would be a knower, 0 Yajnavalkya Verily, I know that person, who is the ultimate support of every soul, of whom you speak ' This very person who is in the body is he. Tell me, Sakalya, who is lus god?"The immortal/ said he.
Syatawm abode dirayah § ddharah R
pardyanam ultimate support param ayanam para asrayah 5. Ptranui-prdpya-bhMahpurusa-S-abditab paramdtma R.
11 kama eva yasydyatanam, hrdayam lokah, mano jyotih, yo a% tarn purusam vidydt sarvasyatmanah pardyanam, sa vai ectita sydt, yajnavalkya veda va aham tarn purusam sarvasya
^aiuify pardyanam, yam dttha, y a evdyam kamamayah purusah a esali vadaiva, sdkalya, tasya kd devoid ill stnyah, iti hovdca. dps v y ' he who J* 110 ™ 5 tnat person whose abode is
\vhn?c X , WOrld K the heart ' whose h & ht 1S the mind - a 1 ^amate support of every soul, he, verily, would be
the »-T er ' ? Yii 3 navalk ya ' 'Verily, I know that person who is
verv ™ ^PP 011 of ever Y soul, of whom you speak. This
is W 18 made of desure 1S he - TeU me « Sdkalya, who
° Women/ said he.
238 The Principal Upamsads III 9 14
kama desire desire for sex pleasures strl-vyattkardbhildsah kamah hrdayam lokah We see through the intellect hrdayena buddhya pasyati §
women for men's desire is inflamed through them strito hi kamasya diptir jayate §
12 rupdny eva yasyayatanam, caksur lokah, mano jyohh, yo vat tarn purusam vidyat sarvasyatmanah parayanam, sa vai vedttd syat, ydpiavalkya veda vd aham tarn purusam sarvasyat- manah parayanam, yam attha ya evdsav dditye purusah, sa esah vadavoa, sakalya, tasya ka devoid iti satyam ttt hovaca
12 'Verily, he who knows that person whose abode is forms, whose world is the eye, whose light is the mind, who is the ultimate support of every soul, he, verily, would be a knower, O Yajfiavalkya ' 'Venly, I know that person who is the ultimate support of every soul, of whom you speak This very person who is m the sun is he Tell me, Sakalya, who is his god ? ' 'Truth/ said he
forms colours like white and black sukla-krsnddim 5
13 dkdsa eva yasyayatanam, srotram lokah, mano jyohh, yo vat tarn purusam vidyat sarvasyatmanah parayanam, sa vat vedttd syat, ydjilavalkya veda vd aham tarn purusam sarvasyat- manah parayanam, yam attha, ya evdyam srautrah prdttsrutkah purusah sa esah vadavoa, sakalya, tasya ka devata th dxsah iti hovaca
13 'Venly, he who knows that person, whose abode is space, whose world is the ear, whose light is mind, who is the ultimate support of every soul, he, venly, would be a knower, 0 Yajfiavalkya ' 'Venly, I know that person who is the ultimate support of every soul, of whom you speak This very person who is m heanng and who is in the echo is he Tell me, Sakalya, who is his god ? ' 'The quarters of space,' said he
pratisrutkah prattdhvam-msistah R
14 lama eva yasyayatanam, hrdayam lokah, mano jyolth, yo vat tarn purusam vidyat sarvasyatmanah parayanam, sa vat veditd syat, ydpiavalkya veda vd aham tarn purusam sarvasyat- manah, parayanam, yam attha, ya evdyam chdydmayah purusah sa esah vadavoa, idkalya, tasya kd devata iti mrtyur iti hovaca
14 'Venly, he who knows that person, whose abode is darkness, whose world is the heart, whose light is the mind, who is the ultimate support of every soul, he, venly, would be a
Ill 9 17 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 239
knower, 0 Yajnavalkya.' 'Verily, I know that person who is the ultimate support of every soul, of whom you speak This very person who is made of shadow is he Tell me, Sakalya, who is his god ?> 'Death,' said he.
15 rupany eva yasyayatanam, caksur lokdh, mano jyotih, yo vat tarn purusam vidyat sarvasyatmanah parayanam, sa vat vedita syat, yajnavalkya veda va aham tarn purusam sarvasyat- manah parayanam, yam attha. ya evayam adarie purusah, sa esah vadatva, sakalya, tasya ka devata ttt, asur ttt hovaca.
15 'Verily, he who knows that person, whose abode is forms, whose world is the eye, whose light is the mind, who is the ultimate support of every soul, he, verily, would be a knower, 0 Yajnavalkya ' 'Venly, I know that person who is the ultimate support of every soul, of whom you speak This very person who is in the looking-glass is he Tell me, Sakalya, who is his god?' 'Life,' said he.
16. apa eva yasyayatanam, hrdayam lokah, mano jyotih, yo vox tarn purusam vidyat sarvasyatmanah parayanam, sa vat vedUa syat, yajnavalkya. veda va aham tarn purusam sarvasyat- manah parayanam, yam attha ya evayam apsu purusah sa esah vadaiva, iakalya, tasya ka devata ttt varuna tit hovaca.
16 'Venly, he who knows that person, whose abode is water, whose world is the heart, whose light is the mmd, who is the ultimate support of every soul, he, venly, would be a knower, 0 Yajnavalkya ' 'Venly, I know that person who is the ultimate support of every soul, of whom you speak This very person who is m water is he. Tell me, Sakalya, who is his god?' varuna,' said he
vmina' rain.
17 reta eva yasyayatanam, hrdayam lokah, mano jyotih yo »<w tarn purusam vidyat sarvasyatmanah parayanam sa vat vmta syat, yajnavalkya. veda va aham tarn purusam sarvasyat- manah parayanam, yam attha. ya evayam putramaya}} purusah, hvafa Vadatm ' & ka h> a > tes .y« ka devata ttt prajdpatth ttt
*7 Venly, he who knows that person, whose abode is semen, whose world is the heart, whose light is the mmd, who knn support of every soul, he, venly, would be a
the ult' Y& ] fiavalk ya ' 'Venly, I know that person who is intimate support of every soul, of whom you speak This
240 The Principal Upamsads III 9 21
very person who is made of a son is he Tell me, Sakalya, who is his god?' 'Prajd-pah,' said he
18 Sakalya, th hovaca yajnavalkyah, tvam svid ime brahmana angdrdvaksayanam akrata u th
18 'Sakalya,' said Yajfiavalkya, 'have these Brahmanas made you their remover of burning coals?'
'Have these Vedic scholars thrown you to me to be burnt or consumed by me?'
19 yajfiavalkya, tti hovaca sakalyah, yad idam kuru-panca- landm brdhtnanan atyavddih, kim brahma vtdvan tti, diio veda sadevdh sapratisthd iti yad diio vettha sa devah sapratistMh
19 'Yajfiavalkya/ said Sakalya, 'What is the Brahman you know, that you have talked down the Brahmanas of the Kuru-paficalas?' 'I know the quarters with then: deities and supports ' 'If you know the quarters with then- deities and supports,
20 hm-devato'syam prdcydm diSy asih dditya-devata tti sa ddityah kasmm prahsthtta iti caksusih kasmm nu caksuh pratisthttam iti rupesv tit caksusa hi rupam paiyati kasmm nu rupdm pratisthitdnUi hrdaye iti hovaca, hrdayena hi rupdm jandti, hrdaye hy eva rupdm prahsthitdm bhavantiti evam evatiat, yajfiavalkya
20. 'What deity have you in this eastern quarter?' (Yajfia- valkya said) 'the deity sun ' 'That sun, on what is it supported ?' 'On the eye ' 'On what is the eye supported?' 'On forms, for one sees forms with the eye ' 'On what are forms supported?' 'On the heart,' said he (Yajfiavalkya), 'for one knows the forms through the heart, on the heart only are the forms supported ' 'Even so, Yajfiavalkya '
Whatever forms we meditate upon, we become identified with them yam yam devatam upasle thaiva, tad bhttias tarn tarn pralipad- yate S
hrdaya heart It refers to the intellect and the mind taken together htdayam ih buidln-manasl eklkrtya mrdesah S
21 hm-devalo'sydm daksmdydm dtsy asttt yama-devata tti sa yaviah kasmm prattsthita tti yajna tti kasmm nu yajnah
pratisthita Hi. daksmdydm tti kasmin nu daksind pratisthita tti. sraddhdydm tti yadd hy eva iraddhatte atha daksmdm daddti; sraddhdydm hy eva daksmd prattsthtd tti. kasmin mt sraddha praltsihtd tit hrdaye th. hovdca hrdayena hi iraddhdm jdndti, hrdaye hy eva sraddha pratisthita bhavatiti. eoam evailat, yajfiavalkya.
21. 'What deity have you in this southern quarter?' (Yajfiavalkya said) 'The deity Yama/ 'That Yarna, on what is he supported 7 ' 'On the sacrifice.' 'On what is the sacrifice supported'' 'On the offerings to the priests ' 'And on what are the offerings to the priests supported?' 'On faith, for when one has faith, he gives offerings to the priests Therefore it is on faith that the offerings to the priests are supported ' 'On what is faith supported?' 'On the heart/ he (Yajfiavalkya) said, 'for through the heart one knows faith; verily, on the heart alone is faith supported.' 'Even so, Yajfiavalkya.'
faith- faith in the Vedas accompanied by devotion, dstikya-buddhir bhakti-sahttd §.
22 kim-devato'sydm praticyam dtsy asiti. varuna-devata ili, sa varunah kasmin pratisthita Hi apsv tti. kasmin nv dpafr pratisthta tti retasitt, kasmin mi retah pratisthitam tii. hrdaye tit, hovaca; tasmdd apt pratirupam jdlam dhxd}, hrdaydd iva srptah, hrdaydd ma mrmtta tti, hrdayz hy eva retah pratisthitam bhavattti evam evaitat, ydpiavalkya.
22 'What deity have you in this western quarter?' "The oeity Varuna' 'That Varuna, on what is he supported?' 'On water' *0n what is water supported'' 'On semen ' 'On what is semen supported?' 'On the heart,' he said 'Therefore they say of a new-born child who resembles (the father) that he seems as if he slipped out of his heart, he is built out of his
Y^jSav^ 011 '^ 6 heart al ° ne 13 semen su PP orted ' * Even so -
mf?fi e V S said t0 be 3X1 ^ ect oi me heart > for sex desire 1S a is imrt tif 1 ° f ^ heart ^ semen issues when the heart of man hrj* "^fluence of sex desire: hrdayasya kdryam retah, kamo wayasya vrthh, kdmrno hi hrdaydd relo' dhtshandah. S
so}M 3 /*t' I "^ fiI,fl/o ' s - y5w ,fifii iy*» t&h- soma-devata tti. sa irat ii, tm P raUs({nta iti- diksdyam tti. kasmin mt diksd vail 1 %U ' Salya tli - tasni ^ a P l diksttam dhuh, satyam " l sat y<> hy eva diksd pratisthita tti kasmin mi satyam
242 The Principal Upamsads III g 26
pratisthitam ih hrdaye lit hovaca, hrdayena hi satyam jdndh hrdaye hy eva satyam pratisthitam bhavatiti cvam evaitat, yajriavalkya
23 'What deity have you m this northern quarter'' 'The deity Soma ' 'That Soma, on what is he supported?' 'On the initiatory rite* 'On what is initiation supported?' 'On truth, therefore, they say to one who is initiated, "speak the truth" for on truth alone is the initiation supported ' 'On what is truth supported?' 'On the heart,' he (Yajriavalkya) said, 'for through the heart one knows truth, therefore it is on the heart that the truth is supported ' 'Even so, Yajriavalkya '
24 kim-devato'sydm dhuvdydm disy asiti agm-devata ih so'gnth kasmm pratisthita iti vdci iti kasmm nu vak pratisthita iti hrdaya iti kasmm nu hrdayam pratisthitam iti
24 'What deity have you in this fixed quarter (zenith)?' 'The deity, fire' 'On what is fire supported?' 'On speech' 'On what is speech supported? 1 'On the heart ' 'On what is the heart supported?'
25 ahalhka iti hovaca ydjiiavalkyah, yatraitad anyatrdsman manydsai, yaddhy etad anyatrdsmat syat, svdno vatnad adyuh vaydmsi vamad vimathnirami iti
25 'You ghost,' said Yajriavalkya, 'that you think that it (the heart) would be elsewhere than in ourselves, for if it were anywhere else than in ourselves, the dogs might eat it (the body) or the birds tear it to pieces '
Cp Sumsumara Jaiaka ahaUika ghost, that which disappears by day, aham Uyate A
Madhva means a fool, one who has his knowledge, aliar, in a potential, hka, condition His knowledge is not developed
When the heart leaves the body, the body becomes dead
26. kasmm nu tvam cdtmd ca pratisthitau stha iti prdna xti kasmm nu prdnah pratisthita ih apdna iti kasmm nv apanah pratisthita iti. vydna iti kasmm nu vydnah pratisthita iti uddna iti kasmmn adanah pratisthita iti samdna tit sa esa, na til na tly dtmd, agrhyak, 11a hi grhyate, asiryah 11a hi siryate, asangak na hi sajyatc, asito na vyathate, na risyah etdny astdv dyatandnt, astan lokdh, astau devah, astau purusdh sa yas tan pttrttsdn mruhya pratyuhydtyakrdmat, tarn tvd aupamsadam
HI 9 28 Brltad-dranyaka Upanisad
purusam prcchami, tarn cen me 11a mvaksyasi miirdhd te vipatis- yatlU tarn ha na mem iakalyah, tasya ha miirdhd vvpapdta, api hasya panmosmo'stMny apajahruh, anyaii manyamdnah
26 Sakalya said 'On what are you (your body) and yourself (the heart) supported?' (Yajfiavalkya said) 'On the prana (hfe-breath— inbreath).' 'On what is prana supported?' 'On the apam (the outbreath) ' 'And on what is the outbreath sup- ported?' 'On the vyana (the diffused breath) 'And on what is the diffused breath supported?' 'On the samdna (the equalising or middle breath) That self is not this, not this It is incom- prehensible for it is not comprehended It is indestructible for it is never destroyed It is unattached for it does not attach itself It is unfettered It does not suffer It is not injured These are the eight abodes, the eight worlds, the eight gods, the eight persons He who takes apart and puts together these persons and passes beyond them, that is the person taught in the Upanisads about whom I ask you If you do not explain him to me your head will fall off ' Sakalya did not know him, and his head fell off Indeed robbers took away his bones, thinking they were something else
Brahman is incomprehensible because it goes beyond the attri- butes of effects sarva-karya-dharmatitah § asilah unfettered, abaddhah S" •namyati not destroyed na mnaiyatt S
■panmostnah robbers, taskardh, g See Satapatha Brdhmana XI. 0 3 11
27 atha hovaca, brdhmana bhagavanto, yo vah kdmayate sa ma pcchatu, sane va ma prcchata, yo vah kdmayate, tarn vah prcchami, sarvdn va vah prcchamih te ha brdhmana na dadhrsuh.
2 7 Then he (Yajfiavalkya) said. 'Venerable Brahmanas vnosoever among you wishes to do so, may question me or \ ma 7 a11 question me or I will question him of you who "saes (to be questioned) or I will question all of you ' Those
ratimanas, however, did not dare (to say anything)
28 tan haitath slokath papraccha
ywia vrkso vanaspahh, tathavoa puruso'mrsd tosya lomdm parnani, tvag asyotpdtikd bahih ivaca evdsya rudhiram prasyandi, tvaca utpaiah, tasmdt, tad dtrnndt praiti, raso vrksdd vodhatat
The Principal Upanhads
III g 28
3 mdmsdny aya Sakartlm, ktnafant snava, tat sthitam, asthhiy aniatato datum, majja majjopama krla
4 yad vrkso vtkno rohah mulan navatarah punah, mariyah svtn mrtyima vrknah hasmdn mfilat prarohalt
5 rclasa lit ma vocata, jivatas tat prajdyalc dltdndrulia tva vai viksah anjasa pretyasambhavah
6 yat samulam dvrhcyuh vrhtatn, napunar dbhavct, martyah svm mrtyund vrknah kasmdn muldt prarohalt
7 jdta cva najayatc, konvcnaM janaycl punah, vijMnam anandam brahma, rdlir ddtith parayanam, U$lhamdnasya tadvidah
28 He questioned them with the following verses
1 'As is a mighty tree so, indeed, is a man , his hairs are leaves and his skin is its outer bark
2 'From his skin blood flows forth and sap from the skin (of the tree) Therefore when a man is wounded blood flows as sap from a tree that is struck
3 'His flesh is its inner bark, his nerves are tough like inner fibres His bones are the wood within and the marrow is made resembling the pith
4. 'A tree when it is felled springs up from its root in a newer form, from what root does man spring forth when he is cut off by death?
5 'Do not say "from the semen" for that is produced from what is alive (men) A tree springs also from the seed After it is dead it certainly spnngs again
6 'If a tree is pulled up with the root, it will not spring again From what root does a mortal spring forth when he is cut off by death?
7 'When born, he is not born (again) for who should create him again? Brahman who is knowledge, bliss is the final goal of him who offers gifts as well as of him who stands firm and knows {Brahman) '
SeeTU I 10, II 1 aviysa indeed, salyam §
From what root does man spring forth when he ts cut off by deatfi^ See also Job XIV 7-10 A man struck down by death does not come to life from seed, because human seed comes from the living only while trees springing from gram are seen to come to life after the tree is dead
fivatas what is alive Philo Judaeus says 'Are not the parents, as it were, concomitant causes only, while Nature is the highest,
elder and true cause of the begetting of children?' Quis remm dmnarum hem 115 Cp St Thomas Aquinas, 'The power of the soul which is in the semen through the spint enclosed therein fashions the body ' Smnma Theologica III 32 11 dhdnah seed, bijam, Ujaruho'pi vrkso bhavati, 11a kevalam kanda-ru- haeva §
aiqasa certainly, saksat R listhamanasya brahma-samslhasya.
tadvidah, brahtnavtdak. R Brahman is the principle or the root of a new life both for those who practise works and for those who, having relinquished works, stand firm in knowledge.
The Principal Upamsads IV 1. 2
First Btdhmana
1 janako ha vaideha dsdm cakre aiha ha ydjnavalkya dvav- rdja tarn hovdca ydjnavalkya, kvm, artham acdrih, pasiin icchan, anvanidn-iii ubhayam eva, samrad iti hovdca
1 Janaka (King) of Videha was seated (to give audience). Then Yajfiavalkya came up He (Janaka) said to him 'Yajfiavalkya, for what purpose have you come, wishing for cattle or for subtle questions?' He (Yajfiavalkya) said (in reply) 'for both, Your Majesty '
dsdm cakre was seated, Ssanam krtavdn, dsthayikam dattavan ily arthali, darsana-kdmebhyo raja S acdrih dgatosi S
anvantdn subtle questions, s&ksmantan, sUksma-vastu-nirmydntdn prasnan attah srotum icchan £ anoh suksmasya vastunah pratya- galmader antdn mscayan kartum iti arlhah R samrdt emperor of India, bharatasya varsasya raja S himaval-setu-paryantasyett ydvat A
2 yal ie kas cid abravit tat imavdmeti abravln me jitva sailmih, vdg vai brahmeli yaihd mdtrmdn pitrmdn dcdryavdn briiydt, tathd tat Saihmr abravit vdg vai brahmeti, avadato hi kvm sydd iti abravit tu te tasydyatanam prattsthdm na me 'bravid iti eka-pdd vd etat, samrdt, iti sa vai no bruhi, yajfiavalkya vdg evdyatanam, dkdiah pratisthd, prajnety enact updsita ka prajnatd, yajfiavalkya vdg eva, samrdt, ttt hovdca vdcd vai, samrdt, bandhuh prajndyate, rg-vedo yajur-vedah, sdma-vedo' tharvdngirasa, itihdsah, purdnam, vidyd upamsadah, ilokdh, sutrdny anuvydkhydndni, vydkhydndmstam hutam diitam pdyi- tam, ayam ca lokah, paras' ca lokak, sarvdm ca bhutdm vdcaiva, samrdt, prajMyante, vdg vai, samrdt, paramam brahma, namam vdg jahdti, sarvany enam bhittdny abhiksaranti, devo bhuiva devdn dpyeti, ya evam vidvdn elad updste hasty-rsabham sahasram daddmi, iti hovdca janako vaidehah sa hovdca yajfiavalkya}), pita me'manyata, nananuiisya haretett
2 'Let me hear what any (of your teachers) may have told you ' 'Jitvan Sailim told me that "speech, verily, is Brahman " As one who has a mother, father and teacher should say, so
did Sailim say that speech is Brahman, for what can one have who cannot speak'' 'But did he tell you the abode and the support (of the Brahman) ?' 'He did not tell me ' 'This Brahman is only one-footed, Your Majesty ' 'Verily, Yajfiavalkya, do tell us ' 'Its abode is ]ust speech, its support space One should worship it as intelligence ' 'What is the nature of that intelli- gence, Yajnavalkya?' 'Just speech, Your Majesty/ said he (Yajnavalaya). 'Verily, by speech, Your Majesty, a friend is recognised By speech alone, Your Majesty) are the Rg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Soma Veda, the Atharvdngirasa, history, ancient lore, arts, the upamsads, verses, aphorisms, explana- tions, commentaries, (the effects of) sacrifices, oblations, food and drink, this world and the other and all beings are known The higher Brahman, Your Majesty, is, in truth, speech Speech does not desert him who, knowing thus, worships it as such All beings approach him Having become a god he goes even to the gods ' Janaka (King) of Videha said, 'I shall give you a thousand cows with a bull as large as an elephant ' Yajfia- valkya said, 'My father thought that one should not accept gifts without havmg instructed.'
prapla intelligence Vak is Logos, wisdom
I ifidna is discrimination, thought, excogitation It is logical know- ledge which is a preparation for prapid or intuitive wisdom Prapla is the wisdom that sets free, that shatters the bondage of suffering and desire It is related to the Greek prognosis, knowledge a priori as distinct from samjfta or knowledge by observation Cp the Buddhist PrajnapSramita
samma means for §, consciousness of one's personality, vdesapidna-
SeeS on BU IV. 5 13
alofa dyatamm noma sariram. S
riTO trm apl kdlesu y* ™™y<& S
w-pad one-footed, the instruction is partial only, not complete w one . who has a mother, father, teacher As one who has been taught nfe , # l y hs mother » the n hy his father and then by a teacher «Ti , . m & 1™*™^ sisyam krtdrtham akrtva hsydd dhanam na ^telimamapita'manyata.
JUL*! ie ^ c,i * a ^ rav!ii tot bnavamett. abravin ma Mrlr ^teyanah, prano vat brahmeti yathd matrman wi bml UC f ryavdn bruyat, taihd tat saulbdyano'bravit, prano prattstl" a ^ rdnat0 hi him sydd iti abravit tu te tasydyatanam "o bm' M - a ! >ie ' hravU ltt eka-pdd vd etat, samrdd, ttt. sa vai ni > ydjnavalkya, prdna evdyatanam, akdsah pratistkd,
248 The Principal Upamsads IV. 7 4
pnyam tty enad upastta, ka prtyatd, yajnavalkya, prdna eva, samrdd, ttt hovaca prdnasya vat, samrat, kdmdydydjyamyajayati, aprahgrhyasya prattgrhndtt, apt tatra vadhdsankam bhavatt, yam dtiam ett, prdnasyatva, samrat, kdmdya, prano vat, samrat, paramam brahma, navnam prano jahdtt, sarvdny enam bhutdny dbhtksaranti, devo bhutva devdn apyeti, ya evam vidvdn etad upaste. hasty-rsabham sahasram daddmt, ttt hovaca, janako vatdehah sa hovaca ydjnavalkyah, pttd me'manyata ndnanuitsya karetett
3 'Let me hear whatever any one (of your teachers) may have told you 1 ' Udanka 5aulbayana told me that the vital breath, verily, is Brahman As one who has a mother, father, teacher should say, so did that Saulbayana say that the vital breath is Brahman, for what can one have who has not the vital breath'' 'But did he tell you the abode and the support?' 'He did not tell me ' 'This Brahman is only one-footed, Your Majesty ' 'Verily, Yajnavalkya, do tell us ' 'Life, venly, is its abode and space its support Venly, one should worship it as the dear ' 'What is the nature of that dearness, Yajna- valkya?' 'The vital breath itself, Your Majesty/ said he 'Venly, out of love for life, Your Majesty, one offers sacrifices for him for whom one should not offer sacrifices, one accepts gifts from one from whom they should not be accepted Out of just love for life, Your Majesty, there anses fear of bemg in whatever direction one goes Life is, in truth, Your Majesty, the highest Brahman Life does not desert him, who, knowing thus, worships it as such All beings approach him Having become a god, he goes even to the gods ' Janaka (King) of Videha said, 'I shall give you a thousand cows with a bull as large as an elephant ' Yajnavalkya said, 'My father thought that one should not accept (gifts) without having instructed '
prahgraha that which is received, a gift
life does not desert him he will live long, dirghdyur bhavait R
4 yad eva te kai ctd abravtt tat srnavamett abravin me barkur vdrsnah caksur vat brahmett yathd mdtrmdn pttrmdn dcdryavdn bruydt, taihd tad vdrsno'bravit caksur vai brahmett, apaiyato hi him sydd ttt abravit tu te tasydyatanam prattsthdm na me' bravid ttt eka-pdd vd etat, samrdd, ttt sa vat no bruht, yajna- valkya caksur evdyatanam, akdsah praltsihd, satyam ttt etad upastta kd satyatd, yajnavalkya caksur eva, samrdd, ttt hovaca, caksusd vai, samrat, pasyantam Shuh, adrdksir ttt, sa aha.
aimksam tit iat saiyam bhavah caksur vai, samrdt, paramam brahma. nainam caksur yahdii, sarvany enam bhutdny abhik- saranh, devo bhutvd devan apyeh, ya evam vidvdn etad updste. kasty-rsabham sdhasram daddmi, iti hovdca janako vaidehah. sa hovdca ydjnavalkyah. pitd me'manyaia, nananuitsya hareteti
4 'Let me hear what any one (of your teachers) may have told you.' 'Barku Varsna told me that the eye, verily, is Brahman. As one who has a mother, father, teacher should say, so did that Varsna say that the eye, verily, is Brahman for what can one have who cannot see?' 'But did he tell you the abode and the support?' 'He did not tell me.' 'This Brahman is only one-footed, Your Majesty.' 'Venly, Yajfiavalkya, do tell us ' 'The eye, verily, is its abode and space its support, venly one should worship it as truth.' 'What is the nature of truth, Yajfiavalkya?' 'The eye itself, Your Majesty,' said he (Yajfiavalkya) 'Venly, Your Majesty, when they say to a man who sees with his eyes, "have you seen?" and he answers, "I have seen"- that is the truth; verily, Your Majesty, the eye is the highest Brahman. The eye does not desert hun, who loiowmg thus, worships it as such. All beings approach him Having become a god, he goes even to the gods.' Janaka (King) of Videha said, 'I shall give you a thousand cows with a bull as large as an elephant.' Yajfiavalkya said, 'My father thought that one should not accept (gifts) without having instructed.'
What is seen with the eye is regarded as more authoritative than tt B ,P erceived b y the ot her senses, so it is said to be true: ym tu caksusa drsfam tad avyabhcarat saiyam eva bhavati. §; caksusd a rstamnavismarati R " *
5 ^ eva te has ad abramt, iat srnavdmeh. abravin me gardhabhmpito bhdradvdjah sroiram vat brahmeti yathd mdtr- mn fitrmdn acdryavdn bruydt, iathd tad bhdradvdjo'bravlt. sroiram vat brahmeti, airnvato hi him sydd iti. abramt tu te nsyayatanam pratisthdm na me'bramd tti. eka-pad vd etat, ahiii ltU Sa w * no ^ r ^ 1 ' yajfiavalkya. irotram evdyatanam, MZfc % a * tsih *> tiy enad updsita ka. anantatd, ydjna- vanh- e ™' samrad > th hovAca ias7»ad vai, samrdd, api hdi'f'^T diiaril 8 acchatt > antam gacchati, anantd brah Mi ' sam ™t> ^°iram. sroiram vat, samrat, paramam iara»T irotram jahdh, sarvany enam bhutdny abhtk-
m, devo blmtva devan apyeti, ya evam vidvdn etad updste.
The Principal Upanisads IV. i 6.
hasty-rsabham sahasram dadami iti hovaca janako vaidehah, sa hovacayajnavalkya.il, pita me'manyata, nananuiisya hareteii.
5 'Let me hear what any one (of your teachers) may have told you ' 'Gardhabhivipita Bharadvaja told me that the ear, venly, is Brahman. As one who has a mother, father, teacher should say, so did that Bharadvaja say that the ear, venly, is Brahman; for what can one have who cannot hear?' 'But did he tell you the abode and the support?' 'He did not tell me ' 'This Brahman is only one-footed, Your Majesty ' 'Venly, Yajfiavalkya, do tell us' 'The ear venly, is its abode and space its support; venly, one should worship it as the endless ' 'What is the nature of endlessness, Yajfiavalkya ' 'The quarters themselves, Your Majesty,' said he (Yajfiavalkya). 'Therefore, Your Majesty, to whatever quarter one goes, he does not come to the end of it for the quarters are endless Venly, Your Majesty, the quarters are the ear and the ear, Your Majesty, is the highest Brahman The ear does not desert him, who, knowing this, worships it as such All beings approach him Having become a god he goes even to the gods ' Janaka (King) of Videha said, 'I shall give you a thousand cows with a bull as large as an elephant ' Yajfiavalkya said, 'My father thought that one should not accept (gifts) without having instructed '
6.yad eva kai cid abravit tat irnavdmeti abravin me satyakdmo jabalah, mano vai brahmetv yaihd mdtrman pitrmdn deary avan briiydt, tatha taj jabalo'bravtt, mano vai brahmeti, amanaso hi kim sydd iti abravit tu te tasydyatanam prahsthdm na me'bravid th eka-pdd va etat samrdd tti sa vai no bruhi, yajfiavalkya mana evdyatanam, akdsah pratisthd, ananda tty enad updsita, kd anandatd, ydjnavalkya mana eva, samrdd, iti hovdea, manasd vai, samrdt striyam abhiharyate, tasydm pratiriipah pulro jdyate, sa dnandah, mano vai, samrdt, paramam brahma namam mano jahdti, sarvdny enam bhutdny abhiksaranh, devo bhiitvd deva.il apyeti, ya evam vidvdn etad updste hasty-rsabham sahasram dadami, tti hovaca janako vaidehah sa hovaca ydjna- valkyah, pita me'manyata nananuiisya hareteti.
6. 'Let me hear what any one (of your teachers) may have told you ' 'Satyakama Jabala told me that the mind, venly, is Brahman. As one who has a mother, father and teacher should say, so did that Jabala say that the mind, venly, is Brahman, for what can one have who is without a mind?' 'But did he tell you the abode and the support?' 'He did not
IV i. 7. Brhai-dranyaka Vpanisad 251
tell me.' 'This Brahman is only one-footed, Your Majesty.' 'Verily, Yajfiavalkya, do tell us ' 'The mind, venly, is its abode and the space its support Venly one should worship it as the blissful' 'What is the nature of blissfulness, Yajfiavalkya?' 'Just the mind, Your Majesty/ said he 'Venly, Your Majesty, by the mind one takes to a woman. A son resembling him is bom of her He is (the source of) bliss Verily, mind, Your Majesty, is the highest Brahman. The mind never deserts him who knowing thus worships it as such All beings approach him Having become a god he goes even to the gods ' Janaka (King) of Videha said, 'I shall give you a thousand cows with a bull as large as an elephant.' Yajfiavalkya said. 'My father thought that one should not accept (gifts) without having instructed. 1
J. yad eva kascidabravit, tat srnavdmeti. abravln me vidagdhak sakalyah, hrdayam vat brahmeh, yathd mdtrmdn pitpnan acaryavdn brttydt, tathd tat sdkalyo'bravtt, hrdayam vai brahmeti, akrdayasya hi him sydd iti. abravit tu ie tasyayatanam pratis- mm na me'bravid ih eka-pdd vd, etat, samrdd, ih sa vat no bruhi, yajfiavalkya. hrdayam evdyatanam, akdiah pratisthd, tfmftr ity enad updsita ka slhttitd, yapiavalkya. hrdayam eva samrad, iti hovaca, hrdayam vat, samrat, sarvesam bhutdndm ayatamm, hrdayam vai, samrd$, sarvesam bhutanam pratisthd, Ijrdaye hy eva, samrat, sarvdm btutam prattsihitdm bhavanh. hrdayam vat, samrat, paramam brahma. nainam hrdayam jahah, sarvany enam bhutdny abhtksaranh, devo bhuivk devan a p e K ya evam vidvan etad upaste. Jiasty rsabham sahasram *~?*»». th hovaca janako vatdehah. sa Jiovdca ydjnavalkyah, pna me'manyata ndnanuiisya hareteU.
. 1 m e hear what any one (of your teachers) may have tow you ' 'Vidagdha Sakalya told me that the heart, verily, w««wan As one who has a mother, father, teacher should ay, so did that Sakalya say that the heart, venly, is Brahman foil 05X1 one have who is without a heart?' 'But did he 'U y °n abode and the su PP0rt?' 'He did not tell me.' v- - Br * h man is only one-footed, Your Majesty' 'Verily, » ajnavalkya, do tell us ' 'The heart, venly, is its abode and
ua 4. lie ueari, vcruy, is its aDoae ana •Wu ? ace , lts su PP°rt. One should worship it as the stable.' Ynnr m nature of stabilit y. Yajfiavalkya?' 'Just the heart, Jw? a3 ^ y ' he (Yajfiavalkya) said; 'the heart, Your ia Jesty, a the abode of all things and the heart, Your Majesty,
252 The Principal Upamsads IV. 2 2.
is the support of all beings On the heart, Your Majesty, all beings are supported The heart, verily, Your Majesty, is the Supreme Brahman The heart never deserts him who knowing thus, worships it as such All bemgs approach him Having become a god, he goes even to the gods ' Janaka (King) of Videha said, 'I shall give you a thousand cows with a bull as large as an elephant.' Yajfiavalkya said, 'My father thought that one should not accept (gifts) without having instructed.'
See III 9 24
1 janako ha vatdehah kurcdd updvasarpann uvdcw nomas ie'stu yajfiavalkya, anu ma iadhitt sa hovdca- yathd vat, samrdf, mahantam adhvdnam esyan ratham va navam va samddadita, evant evaitdbhir upamsadbhih samahitatmasi, evam brnddraka ddhyah sann adhita~veda ukta-upamsafkdh, ito vimucyamanah kva gamisyastti naham tad, bhagavan, veda, yatra gamisyamiti, atha vai Wham tad vaksyami, yatra gamisyastti, bravitu, bhagavan, %tx.
1 Janaka (King) of Videha, descending from his lounge and approaching said 'Salutations to you, Yajfiavalkya, please instruct me ' He (Yajfiavalkya) said 'As one who wishes to go a long distance, Your Majesty, would secure a chariot or a ship, even so you have a mind well equipped with the teachings of the Upamsads You are likewise honoured and wealthy, you have studied the Vedas and heard the Upamsads Where will you go when you are released (from this body) ?I (Janaka said) 'Venerable Sir, I do not know where I shall go ' (Yajfiavalkya said) 'Then truly I shall tell you that, where you will go ' (Janaka said) 'Tell me, Venerable Sir '
bpiddrakah honoured, pUjyah Sdhyah wealthy, i&uarah, na dandrah §
The theoretical knowledge of the Vedas and the Upamsads is not enough, for it does not remove fear We require knowledge of Self or Brahman for salvation evam sarva-vibhfili-sampanno'pt son bhaya-madhya-stha eva paramatmajnamna vmd akrldrtha eva tavat. S.
Second Brahmana
kiircat from the louni
va etam tndham santam indra tty dcaksate paroksenaiva, parok- sa-pnyd iva hi devdh, pratyaksa-dvisah
2. 'Indha by name is this person who is in the right eye Him, venly, who is that Indha people call Indra, indirectly, for the gods are fond of the indirect, as it were, they dislike the direct (or the evident).
Indha is the self, identified with the physical self.
3. athaitad vame'ksani purusa-rupam, esdsya patnivirdt, toy or esa sathstdvoya eso'ntar-hrdaya akdiah, athainayor etad annamya eso'ntar-hrdaye lohta-pmdah, athainayor etat prdvaranam yad etad antar-hrdaye jdlakam iva; athainayor esa srtth samcaranT yaisa hrdayad urdhva nddy uccarati. yatha keiah sghasradhd bhnnah evam asyaita hita noma nddyo'ntar-hrdaye prattsthttd bhavanh, etdbhtr va etad asravad dsravati; tasmad esa praviviktd- haratara ivawa bhavaty asmac cdrTrdd atmanah
3 .Now that which is in the form of a person in the left eye is his wife Vira.3 Their place of union is the space within the heart. Their food is the red (of blood) lump in the heart Their covering is the net-like structure m the heart Their path for moving is that channel which goes upward from the heart; like a hair divided a thousandfold, so are the channels called htta which are established within the heart Through these flows that which flows on. Therefore that (self composed of fodha and Viraj) is, as it were, an eater of finer food than the bodily self
Indra is Vaiivanara and Vtraj or matter is said to be his wife>
ior it is the object of enjoyment, bkogyatvdd eva. £
samstava place of union, literally the place where they sine praises
together, the meeting-place.
sr/tft path, margah S
.^subtle body is nourished by finer food than the gross- tasmac atanrad atmanah vaisoanarat taijasah suksmdnnopaato lhavati. "1 the dream state the self is identified with the subtle body.
4 fasjw pracl dtk prdncah prdnah, daksmd dig daksine -jT- ^ ratTcI diJi pr«tyafcah prdnah, udici dig udaficah prdnah, jafiva, dig iirdhvdh prdnah, avdci dig avdncah prdnah, sarvd waft, sane prdnah, sa esa neti nety atmd agrhyah ma higrhyate;
"W. na hi iiryate; asaiigah na hi sayyate, asito na vyathate; ™ r £y™*bhayamvai,jamfoi,prdpW
* novaca janako vaidehah, abhayam tvd gacchatdt, ydpuivalkya,
The Principal Upanisads IV. 3 1.
yo nah, bhagavan, abhayam vedayase, namas ie'stu, me videhah ayam aham asmitt
4 'Of him the eastern direction is the eastern breaths, the southern direction is the southern breaths, the western direction is the western breaths, the northern direction is the northern breaths, the upper direction is the upper breaths, the lower direction is the lower breaths, all the quarters are all the breaths But the self is not this, not this He is incompre- hensible for he is never comprehended He is undestructible for he cannot be destroyed He is unattached for he does not attach himself He is unfettered, he does not suffer, he is not injured Verily, Janaka, you have reached (the state of) fearlessness,' thus said Yajfiavalkya Janaka (King) of Videha said 'May fearlessness come unto you, Yajfiavalkya, to you, Venerable Sir, who make us to know (the state of) fearlessness Salutations to you Here are the people of Videha, here am I (at your service) '
See III 9 26 abhayatn janma-maranadi-mtmtia-bliaya-iiinyam £
Third Brahmana
1 janakam ha vatdcham yajnavalkyo jagdma sa mene: na vadtsya xii atha ha yaj janakaS ca vatdeho ydjiiavalkyai cdgm- hotre samudatc, tasmai ha yajnavalkyo varam dadau sa ha kdma-prasnam eva vavre, tarn hasmai dadau tarn ha samrdd cva ptmah papraccka
1 Yajiiavalkya came to Janaka (King) of Videha He thought (to himself) 'I will not talk ' But when (once) Janaka (King) of Videha and Yajfiavalkya discussed together at an agmhoira ceremony, Yajiiavalkya granted the former a boon He chose to ask any question he wished He granted it to him. So (now) His Majesty first asked him.
Though Yajfiavalkya did not wish to say anything, Janaka asked lnm a question, for on a former occasion Yajfiavalkya per- mitted Janaka to ask him any questions he liked See Satapatha Brahmana XI 6. 2 10
Sometimes sa mene na vadisya Ut is read as sam cnena vadtsya
IV 3 6. Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 255
tit Yajnavalkya came to Janaka intending to speak with him. This is only an ingenious conjecture
2. yajnavalkya, ktm-jyotir ayam purusa iti ddttya-jyotth, samrkt, tit hovaca, ddttyenaivdyam jyottsdste, palyayate, karma kurute, vtpalyetitt. evam evaitat, yajnavalkya.
2 'What light does a person here have? (What serves as thehght for man?)' 'He has the light of the sun, Your Majesty,' he said, 'for with the sun indeed as the light, one sits, moves about, does one's work and returns.' 'Just so, Yajnavalkya.'
3. asiam tta ddttye, yajnavalkya, ktm-jyotir evdyam purusa iti candramd evasya jyottr bhavah, candramasawayam jyottsdste, palyayate, karma kurute, vipalyetUi evam evaitat, yajnavalkya
3. When the sun has set, Yajnavalkya, what light does a person here have?' 'The moon, indeed, is his light, for with the moon indeed as the light, one sits, moves about, does one's work and returns.' 'Just so, Yajnavalkya '
4. asiam ita ddttye, yajnavalkya, candramasy asiam tte, kim- jyohr evdyam purusa iti. agnir evasya jyotvr bhavah, agnt- nawayam jyottsdste, palyayate, karma kurute, vipalyetUi. evam evattat, yajnavalkya
4 When the 'sun has set, Yajnavalkya, and the moon has set, what light does a person here have?' The fire, indeed, is his light, for with the fire, indeed as the light, one sits, moves about, does one's work and returns.' 'Just so, Yajnavalkya '
5 astam tta ddttye, yajnavalkya, candramasi astam tte, iante agnail, ktm-jyottr evdyam purusa tit vag evasya jyotvr bhavah, vacavodyam jyottsdste, palyayate, karma kurute, vtpalyett, tasmdd "<«, samrad, apt yatra pdntr na vinirjR&yate, atha yatra vag uccaratt, upatva tatra nyetitt evam evaitat, yajnavalkya.
5 'When the sun has set, Yajnavalkya, and the moon has set and the fire has gone out, what light does a person here aave 'Speech, indeed, is his light for with speech, indeed, as tte light, one sits, moves about, does one's work and returns.
inerefore, Your Majesty, even where one's own hand is not discerned there when speech is uttered one goes towards it.'
Just so, Yajnavalkya.'
speech sound, vag ih sabdah pangrhyate. §.
6. astam ita ddttye, ydjftavalkya, candramasy astam tte, sdnte g»w«, sdnidydm vdct, ktm-jyotir evdyam purusa ttt. dtmatvdsya
256 The Principal Upanisads IV. 3. 8.
jyoltr bhavah, almanaivayam jyotisaste, palyayate, karma kurute, vipalyeti itt
6. 'When the sun has set, Yajfiavalkya, and the moon has set, and the fire has gone out and speech has stopped, what light does a person here have?' 'The self, indeed, is his light,' said he, 'for with the self, indeed, as the light, one sits, moves about, does one's work and returns '
This self is present in all the states of waking, dream and sleep. It is the light different from one's body and organs and illumines them though it is itself not illumined by anything else kdrya-kara- na-svdvayava-samghdta-vyatmktam, karya-karandvabhdsdkam, Sdtt- yddi bdhya-jyotirvat svayam anyendnavabMsyamdnam abhidhiyate jyohh S
7 katama atmeti yo'yam vipianamayah prdnesu, hrdy antarjyohh purusah, sa samdnah sann ubhau lokdv awusancarah, dhyayativa lettyativa, sa hi svapno bhutva, imam lokam atik- r&matt, mrtyo rupant
7 'Which is the self?' 'The person here who consists of knowledge among the senses, the light within the heart He remaining the same, wanders along the two worlds seeming to think, seeming to move about He on becoming asleep (getting into dream condition), transcends this world and the forms of death
seeming to think he does not really think but only witnesses the acts of thought
seeming to move about Thought and action do not belong to the real nature of the self The universal self appears limited on account of the conjunction of the self, with buddht or understanding, with its modifications of desire and aversion, pleasure and pain In the state of liberation the connection with understanding terminates ydvad ayam dlmd samsari bhavah, tdvad eva asya buddht-samyogah, na tu paramdrthatah, atmanah satnsdntvam buddht-samyogad iva S B. II 3 30 .
who consists of knowledge S argues that the self is so called because we fail to discriminate its association with the limiting adjunct. buddht-vijiidnopadhi-samparkavtvekad vipldnamaya tty ucyate svapno bhitlva svapndvastho bhutva R
8 sa va ayam puruso jdyamanah, iariram, abhisampadyatnd- nah pdpmabhih samsrjyate, sa utkraman, mriyamdnah pdpmano vijahati
8. 'Venly, this person, when lie is horn and obtains a body, becomes connected with evils. When he departs, on dying he leaves all evils behind.
evils sources of good and evil, body and the organs - papmasama- vayibhr dharmadharmdirayath karya-karanaih. S. sathsijyate becomes connected, mnrnqyate. vijaMh; leaves behind, pantyajati. S.
9 tasya va etasya purusasya dve evct sthane bhavatah: idath ca para-loka-sthdnam ca; sandhyam trtvyam svapna-slhanam; tasmin san&hye sthane tisfhann, ubhe sthane paiyati, idam ca paraloka- sthdnath ca atha yathdkramo'yam para-loka-sthdne bltavah, tarn akramam dkramya, ubhaydn pdpimna dnanddmi ca pasyati. sa yalra prasvapih, asya lokasya sarvdvato mdtrdm apdddya, svayam mhatya, svayam mrmaya, svena bhdsd, svena jyottsd prasvapih; atrayam purusah svayath-jyottr bhavati.
9 'Venly, there are just two states of this person (the state of being in) this world and the state of being in the other world. There is an intermediate third state, that of being m sleep (dream). By standing in this intermediate state one sees both those states, of being in this world and of being in the other world. Now whatever the way is to the state of being in the other world, having obtained that way one sees both the evils (of this world) and the joys (of the other world) When he goes to sleep he takes along the material of this all-embracing world, himself tears it apart, himself builds it up; he sleeps (dreams) by his own brightness, by his own light. In that state the person becomes self-illummated.
mdhyam: intermediate state: literally, the junction, sandht, of the
akrama- the way, that by which one proceeds, support or outfit mamiy anenety akramah asrayah, avasiambhah S. He provides jumseflf with whatever knowledge, work and previous experience he nay have for the attainment of the next world para-loka-prattpatti- satthanena mdyd-karma pOrva-prajna-laksanena yukto bhavait. S. prasvaptii- sleeps, dreams, svapnam ambhavah. R.
f?: m ^ira raihaf}, na ratha-yogdh, na panthdno bhavanti; atha x! • rai ^a-yogdn, pathali srjate; na tatrdnandah, mudah mmudc 1 bhaoanti, athdnanddn, mudah, pramudah srjate; na
ra veSantdh puskarinyah sravantyo bhavanh; atha veidntdn,
IT sramnm s Wte sa ht hartd. °' There are no chariots there, nor animals to be yoked to
258 The Prinapal Upamsads IV 3 12
them, no roads but he creates (projects from himself) chariots, animals to be yoked to them and roads There are no joys there, no pleasures, no delights, but he creates joys, pleasures and delights There are no tanks there, no lotus pools, no rivers, but he creates tanks, lotus-pools and rivers He, indeed, is the agent (maker or creator)
According to S the agency attributed to the self is only figurative The light of the self, which is pure intelligence, illumines the body and organs through the internal organ and they perform their functions being illumined by it yac caitanyatmajyohs-antahkarana- dvarenavabhdsayah karya-karanam tatra kartrtvam upacaryata atmanah
According to R, the agent is the Supreme Lord, sakala-prapan- ca-nalaka-siitradharah sarvesvarak khalu tatra kartd
11 tad ete iloka bhavanh:
svapnena idriram abhiprahatyasuptah suptdn abhicakasih; Sukram dddya punar ath sihdnam, hiranmayah purusa eka-hamsah
11 'On this there are the following verses Having struck down m sleep what belongs to the body, he himself sleepless looks down, on the sleeping (senses) Having taken to himself light he goes again to his place, the golden person, the lonely swan (the one spirit)
While one is in the state of dream, the self makes the body to sleep but the self remains awake and notices the impressions of the deeds, that have been left upon the mind By associating himself with the consciousness of the sense-organs, the self causes the body to awake the golden person the light that is pure intelligence, htranya-tnaya tva cattanya-jyohs svabhavah S
Sleep is the indispensable condition of physical health and mental sanity In sound sleep there is a respite from craving and aversions, fears and anxieties In that state the individual is obscurely at one with the divine ground of all being
the lonely swan he moves alone in the waking and dream states, in this world and the next eko jagrat svapnehaloka-para-lokadin gacchatity eka-hamsah S sah aham so'ham 'That I am', hamsa, a swan, the symbol of the spirit of the universe
12 pranena raksann avaram kuldyam bah%s kuldyad amrtai
carttvd,
sa iyate amrto yatra kdmam, hiran-mayah purusa eka- hamsah
12. Guarding his low nest with the vital breath, the immortal moves out of the nest That immortal one goes wherever he likes, the golden person, the lonely bird.
avaram low, nikrstam. anekdsttci-samghatatvdd atyanta-bibhatsam § kulayam nest, nidam, iarlram S
iyate goes, gacchati S The eternal self goes wherever he desires
pasyan.
13 Tn the state of dream going up and down, the god makes many forms for himself, now as it were enjoying himself in the company of women or laughing or even beholding fearful sights.
svapndnte in the state of dream, svapnasthdne S. in the middle of a dream, svapna-madhye, anla-sabdo madhya-vaamah R.
14 aramam asya paiyanh, na tarn pasyati kas cam
tti torn ndyatam bodhayed ity ahufy, durbhisajyam hdsmai bhavah, yam esa na pratipadyate. atho khalv dhuh, jaganta-deia evdsyaisah, yam hi eva jdgrat pasyati, tdm supta th atrdyam ■purusah svayam-jyotir bhavati so'ham bhagavate sahasram daddmi, aia urdhvam vimoksaya bruhitt.
14 'Everyone sees his sport but himself no one ever sees There- fore they say that one should not wake him (the sleeping person) suddenly, for it is difficult to cure if he does not get back (rightly to his body) Others, however, say that (the state of sleep) is just his waking state for whatever objects he sees
11 j aWake ' those t00 ' he sees ' when as * e ?P> ( not so ) for in the dream state the person is self-illuminated ' Janaka said, 'I
give you a thousand (cows), Venerable Sir, please instruct me
further, for the sake of my liberation.'
himself no one ever sees everyone is aware of the experiences but no one sees the expenencer, regret is expressed that the self so near to us is yet unperceived by us* yac-chakya-darianam apy umanatji tam na paiyah, lokam praty anukrosam darsayah sruttk. §. one should not wake the sleeping person suddenly: this has reference to the popular belief that the self leaves the body m the dream state. ayaiam sleeping, gadha-suptam R
T$ vm * the theory of self-illumination it is said that the «ate ot dream is the same as that of waking as we see m dreams wnat we see m the waking state This is wrong because in dreams we senses cease to function, so only the light inherent in the self
^twe m the dream state.
1*
260 The Principal Upantsads T^IVNII/t3S
15 sa va esa etasmm samprasdde ratva carttva dr^9di r punyam ca pdpam ca, punah prattnyayam prattyony da svapnayatva, sa yat tatra kim cit paiyatt ananvagatat J{ § I bhavati, asango hy ayam purusa tit evam evattat, ydjiiavt so' ham bhagavate sahasram dadamt, ata urdhvam vimoksa bruhiti
15 'After having tasted enjoyment in this state of sleep, after having roamed about and seen good and evil . returns again as he came to the place from which he started (the place of sleep) to dream Whatever he sees in that state, he is not followed (affected) by it for this person is not attached (to anything) ' (Janaka said) 'Just so, Yajnavalkya, I give you a thousand (cows) Venerable Sir, please instruct me further, for the sake of my liberation
samprasdda deep sleep, the state of highest serenity, samyak prasldaty asmtnn ttt samprasadah £ The true nature of the self remains unaffected
pratinyayam—yathanyayam, yathagatam, m ayah, nyayah, ayanam ayah, mgamanam, pwnah piirva-gaman a-vaiparityena yad agamanam, sa prahnyayah, yathagatam punar agacchatity arthah §.
16 sa va esa etasmm svapne ratva carttva drsivatva punyam ca pdpam ca, punah, prattnyayam prattyony adravatt buddhdn- tdyaiva sa yat tatra kim at paiyatt, ananvagatas tena bhavati asango hy ayam, purusa iti evam evaitat, ydjmvalkya so'ham bhagavate sahasram dadamt, ata urdhvam vimoksdyavoa bruhtti
16 'After having tasted enjoyment in this state of dream, after having roamed about and seen good and evil, he returns again as he came to the place from which he started to the state of waking Whatever he sees in that state he is not followed (affected) by it for this person is not attached (to anything) ' (Janaka said) 'Just so, Yajnavalkya, I give you a thousand (cows) Venerable Sir, please instruct me further for the sake of my liberation '
buddhdntayatva the state of waking, jagartta-sthanaya 5
17, sa va e?« etasmm buddhante ratva carttva drsfvaiva punyam ca pdpam ca, punah prattnyayam prattyony adravatt svapndn- tdyatva
17 'After having had enjoyment m this state of waking, after having roamed about and seen good and evil, he returns again as he came to the place from which he started, the state of dream (or that of deep sleep)
§ says that svapnanta may also be interpreted as deep sleep susuplt. The self is unaffected in all the three states of waking, dream and sleep avastha4raye'pi, asangatvam ananvagatatvam calmanah stddham cet A
18 tad, yatha mahdmatsya ubhe kiile armsamcarati, purvam caparam ca, evam evayam purusa etav ubhav antav anusamcarati, svapnantam ca buddhantam ca
18 'Even as a large fish moves along both banks of a river, the hither and the further, so also this person moves along both these states, the state of dream (or sleep) and the state of waking.
The self is different from the body and the organs In the waking state it appeals, through ignorance, as connected with attachments and death, in the dream state as connected with desire but free from the forms of death, in the state of deep sleep it is perfectly serene and unattached The sense of this passage is that the Self is by nature, eternal, free, enlightened and pure § Even as a large fish moves from one bank of a river to another, so does the self move between dreaming and waking
19 tad yathdsmmn akaie iyeno va suparno va vipanpatya iranta.h samhatya paksau samlayayaiva dhnyaU, evam evayam purn$a etasma antaya dhavatt yatra na kam cana kamam kamayate, na kam cana svapnam pasyatt
19 'As a falcon or any other (swift) bird having flown around m the sky becomes weary, folds its wmgs and is borne down to its nest, even so this person hastens to that state (of self) where he desires no desires and sees ho dream
sumfoyaft nest nUah § The fatigue theory of sleep is suggested here.
20 ta va asyaita hita noma nadydh, yatha kesah sahasradha ohtnnah, tavatdntvind tisthanh, iuklasya, riilasya, pvngalasya, liantasya, hhtasya pumah, atha yatrainam ghnatwa, jvnantiva, AasitM vtcchayayati, gartam wa patatt, yad eva jagrad bhayam pasyah, tad atravidyayd manyate, atha yatra deva wa rdjeva; ahavi evedam, sarvo 'smiti manyate, so'sya paramo lokah
20 'In him, verily, are those channels called hita, which are as fine as a hair divided a thousandfold and filled with white, wue, yellow, green and Ted (fluids) Now when (he feels) as if
e were De "ig killed, as if he were being overpowered, as if he
The Principal Upamsads
were pursued by an elephant, as if he were falling into a well, he thinks (imagines) through ignorance whatever fear he has seen (experienced) in the waking state But when he thinks that he is a god, as it were, that he is a king, as it were, that I am all this, that is his highest world
hitd See II 1 19, IV. 2 3 The subtle body is said to be m these channels
The place where the two selves unite is the heart. They have a path in common The vein susumna leads upwards from the heart to the top of the skull See C U VIII 6 6 When their union takes place, self-consciousness disappears as well as the distinction between the outer and the inner world The highest reality, the all-conscious- ness, free from fear and grief is reached
Dream states are traced to impressions of waking experiences Ignorance avidyd is not natural to the self, if so it cannot be removed even as heat and light cannot be removed from the sun m dtma-dharmo'vidyd na hi svdbhdvikasyocchittth kadacid apy upapadyate savitur ivausnya-prakdfayoh S
21 tad vd asyaitad aticchando'pdhatapapmdbhayam riipam tad yatM priyayd stnyd samparisvakto na bdhyam him cam veda ndntaram, evam'evdyam purusah prdpiendtmand samparis- vakto na bdhyam kirn cana veda ndntaram tad vd asyaitad a dpta-kdmam, dtma-kdmam, a-hdmam riipam iokdntaram /f '
21 This, venly, is his form which is free from c ravin g, free from evils, free from fear. As a man when m the embrace of his beloved wife knows nothing without or within, so the person when m the embrace of the intelligent self knows nothing without or within That, venly, is his form in which his desire is f ulfilled, m which the self is his desire, m which he is without .desire, free from any sorrow ^ /' ,<v
beyond desires chandah kamdh attgalah chando yasmdt riipal tad ahcchandam riipam S
Sokdniaram free from any sorrow. £oka-varjitam S
The analogy of man and wife is given to show that it is not a state of unconsciousness
We get on earth to the Kingdom of heaven In sex intercourse when it is rightly conceived, we have an act of pure delight which is not mere physical satisfaction but a psycho-spmtual communion The rich deep fulfilment of love between a man and a woman is a condition of earthly beatitude so simple, so natural and so real, that it is the happiest of all earthly conditions and many mystics employ this as the symbol of divine communion The mystic union of the finite and the divine is compared in this passage to the self-
oblivion of earthly lovers where each is the other. It is a fuller identity than the mere sympathetic understanding of two individuals
In Vaisnava literature the soul pining for union with God is said to be the bride and the divine love which sanctifies, purifies and elevates the soul to itself is said to be the bridegroom.
St Bernard speaks of the highest contemplation as spiritual marriage which impels the soul to go forth to bear spiritual offspring to the Lord Richard of St Victor, St Bernard's contemporary, dwells upon four phases of spiritual marriage— espousals, marriage, wedlocks, child-bearing John Ruysbroeck's chief work is called The Adornment of the Spiritual Marriage St John of the Cross says The end I have m view is the divme embracing, the union of the soul with the divme substance In this loving obscure knowledge God unites Himsdf with the soul eminently and divmely ' Ascent of Carmel II 24
God, for some Sufis, is the Eternal Fermnine The Muslim poet Wall of Delhi composed love poems in which the lover is God and the loved one sought is the human soul invited to unite with God
22 atra pitii'pitd bhavatt, mata'mata, lokah alokah, deva adevah, veda avedah, atra steno'steno bhavatt bhruijahabhrunahd, candab'candalah, paulkaso'paulkasah, iramano'sramandh, tapaso'tdpasah, ananvdgatam punyena, ananvdgatam pdpena, firno hi tadd sarvan sokdn hrdayasya bhavatt.
22 'There (in that state) a father is not a father, a mother is not a mother, the worlds are not the worlds, the gods are not the gods, the Vedas are not the Vedas There a thief is not a thief, the murderer is not a murderer, a candala is not a canddla, a paulkasa is not a paulkasa, a mendicant is not a mendicant, an ascetic is not an ascetic He is not followed (affected) by good, he is not followed by evil for then he has passed beyond all the sorrows of the heart
The state is beyond empirical distinctions, avidya-kama-karma- vimrmuktah S
It exceeds the limitations of caste and stages of life WirRnaha murderer of a noble Brahmana, vartsfha-brahma-haiiid A.
It also refers to one who kills an embryo, one who produces an abortion
The Self is untouched either by good or by evil ajid the sorrows of the heart cease to be sorrows and are turned into joy
23 yad vai tan na paiyah, paiyan vai tan na jpaiyati; 11a hi draslur~dr^thTv^Trihpd vidyate, avmdiitmiTna hrtad dvitiyam osti, tato'nyad vibhaktam yat paiyet
23 Verily, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does
264 The Principal Upamsads IV 3. 27.
not see, he is, venly, seeing, though he does not see for there is no cessation of the seeing of a seer, because of the imperish- ability (of the seer). There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him that he could see
Even m the state of deep sleep when the eye and the other senses are at rest, the self is the seer, though he does not see with the eyes The seer can never lose the character of seeing, even as fire cannot lose the character of burning so long as it is fire The self sees, by its own light, like the sun, even when there is no second, no object but the self that could be seen, the seer is svayam-jyotth self-light viparilopah destruction, vinaiah, alma avmasl £
R adopting the views of Ramanuja says, 'jnaiur dharmabhiUa- jnanasya mtyatvat vmaso nash
24 yad vat tan na jighratt, jighran vat tan na jtghratt. na hi ghratur ghrdter vipanlopo vtdyate, avindsttvat, na tu tad dvittyam ash, tato'nyad vibhaktam yaj jighret
24 'Verily, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not smell, he is, venly, smelling, though he does not smell for there is no cessation of the smelling of a smeller, because of the im- perishability (of the smeller) There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him that he could smell
25 yad vai tan na rasayatt, rasayan vat tan na rasayatt na hi rasayitu rasayater vipanlopo vidyate, avinahtvat, na tu tad dvittyam astt, tato' nyad vibhaktam yad rasayet
25 'Venly, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not taste, he is, venly, tasting though he does not taste, for there is no cessation of the tasting of a taster, because of the im- perishability (of the taster) There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him that he could taste
26 yad vai tan na vadatt, vadan vat tan na vadatt, na hi vaktur vakier vipanlopo vidyate, avmaiitvat, na tu tad dvittyam ash, tato'nyad vibhaktam yad vadet
26 'Venly, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not speak, he is, venly, speaking though he does not speak, for there is no cessation of the speaking of a speaker, because of the impenshability (of the speaker) There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him to which he could speak
IV 3 3 1 * Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 265
frotuh fritter viparilopo vidyate, avindditvdt; na tu tad dvitiyam asti, tato'nyad vibhaktam yat ipiuyat
27 'Venly, -when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not hear, he is, verily, hearing, though he does not hear, for there is no cessation of the hearing of a hearer, because of the imperishability (of the hearer). There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him which he could hear
28 yad vat tan na manute, manvdna vat tan na mamtie, na h nmntw water viparilopo vidyate, avinaiitoat; na tu tad dvitiyam asti, tato'nyad vibhaktam yan manvita.
28 'Venly, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not think, he is, verily, thinking, though he does not think, for there is no cessation of the thinking of a thinker, because of the imperishability (of the thinker). There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him of which he could think
29. yad vai tan na spriati, spriait vat tan na spriati, na hi sprastuhsprster viparilopo vidyate, avindsitvdt, na tu tad dvitiyam ash, tato'nyad vibhaktam yat sprset.
29 'Venly, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not touch, he is, verily, touching, though he does not touch, for there is no cessation of the touching of a toucher, because of the imperishability (of the toucher) There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him which he could touch.
30. yad vai tan na mjdnah, vtjdnan vai tan na vijanati, m h wjnatur vijndter viparilopo vidyate, avtnaittvdt; na tu tad dvitiyam asti, tato'nyad vibhaktam yad vijamyat.
30 'Venly, when there (in the state of deep sleep) he does not know, he is, venly, knowing though he does not know for there is no cessation of the knowing of a knower, because of the imperishability (of the knower). There is not, however, a second, nothing else separate from him which he could know.
31 yatra vdnyad voa sydt, tatranyo'nyat paiyet, anyo' nyaj Pgitret, anyo'nyad rasayet, anyo'nyad vadet, anyo'nyat irnuyat, anyo nyan manviia, anyo'nyat spriet, anyo'nyad vijdniyat.
3X 'Venly, when there is, as it were, another there one ™8W see the other, one might smell the other, one might taste wje other, one might speak to the other, one might hear the otner, one might think of the other, one might touch the otter, one might know the other
The Principal Upanisads IV. 3 33.
He does not see or smell or taste or speak or hear or think or touch or know, for there is nothing separate from him, there is no second to him, yet he sees, smells, tastes, speaks, hears, thinks, touches, knows for he is one with seeing, smelling, tasting, speaking, hearing, thinking, touching and knowing
32 salila eko drastddvatto bliavah, esa brahma-lokah, samrad ih hainam anuiaidsa ydjnavalkyah, esdsya parama gatih, esdsya parama sampat, eso'sya paramo lokah, eso'sya parama anandah, elasyavoanandasyanydm bhutam mdtrdm upapvantt
32 'He becomes (transparent) like water, one, the seer without duality This is the world of Brahma, Your Majesty ' Thus did Yajfiavalkya instruct (Janaka) 'This is his highest goal, this is his highest treasure, this is his highest world, this is his greatest bliss. On a particle of this very bliss other creatures live '
like water sahla iva salilah §
transparent svacchibhutah £
one because there is no second, dvitiyasyabhavdt S
the seer the vision which is identical with the light of the self is
never lost dfster avipariluptcdvdt, dtma-jyoti-svabhdvdyd S
33 sa yo manusydndm rdddhah samrddho bhavah, anyesdm adhipatih, sarvair mdnusyakatr bhogath sampannatamah, sa manusyanam parama anandah; atha ye iatam manusyanam anandah, sa ekah pitfnam jitalokdndm anandah; atha ye iatam pxtfnam pta-lokandm anandah, sa eko gandharva-loka anandah, atha ye iatam gandharva-loka anandah, sa eka karma-devanam anandah, ye karmana devatvam abhisampadyante; atha ye iatam karma-devanam anandah, sa eka djdna-devandm anandah, yai ca itrotrtyo'vrjmo 'kdma-hatah, atha ye iatam djdna-devan&m anandah, sa ekah praja-pah-loka anandah, yai ca irotnyo' vrjmo' kdma-hatah, atha ye iatam praja-pah-loka anandah, sa eko brakma-loka anandah, yai ca irotriyo'vrjmo 'kdma-hatah, atkatsa eva parama anandah, yai ca irotnyo 'vtjtno' kdma-hatah, atkatsa eva parama anandah esa brahma-lokah, samrad, iti hovdca ydjnavalkyah so 'ham bhagavate sahasram dadamt, ata urdhvam vimoksdyaiva bruhiti atra ha ydpiavalkyo bibhayam cakdra, medhdvl rdjd, sarvebhyo mdntebkya udarautstd ttt
33 'If one is healthy m body, wealthy, lord over others, lavishly provided with all human enjoyments, that is the highest bliss of men This human bliss multiplied a hundred times makes one unit of the bliss for the fathers who have won
their world. The bliss of these fathers who have won their world multiplied a hundred times makes oneumt of the bliss of the gand- harva world. The bliss of the gandharva world multiplied a hundred times makes one unit of the bliss of the gods by action, those who attain their divine status by (meritorious) action. The bliss of the gods by action multiplied a hundred times makes one unit of the bliss of the gods by birth as well as of one who is versed in the Vedas, who is without sin and not overcome by desire. The bliss of the gods by birth multiplied, a hundred times makes one unit of the bliss in the world of Prajd-paU, as well as of one who is versed m the Vedas, who is without sin and not overcome by desire The bliss m the world of Prajd-patt multiplied a hundred times makes one unit of the bliss in the world of Hiranya- garbha as well as of one who is versed in the Vedas, who is without sin and not overcome by desire. This is the highest bliss. This is the world of Brahma, Your Majesty,' said Yajnavalkya. {Janaka said) 'I will give you, Venerable Sir, a thousand (cows) please instruct me further for the sake of my liberation ' At this Yajnavalkya was afraid that this intelligent king should drive him to (the exposition of) the ends of his convictions
See TU. II. 8. Those who live within the bonds of ignorance experience but a small portion of the infinite bliss raddhah healthy, perfect of body, samsiddhah, avikalah, sama- gravayavah S
tooinya one versed in the iruti, the Veda Samkara, the com- mentator of Kahdasa's Sakuntala quotes 'Birth gives the title of firahmana, the sacramental rites the title of the twice-born, knowledge the title of mpra and the three together make a irotriya ' jawmana. orahtnam jneyah, samskarair duija wyate, miyaya yah vipratvam. tnbhthsrotriyaucyaU-
Vedtc learning, sinlessness and freedom from selfish desire are essential for the enjoyment of the higher forms of bliss Cp 'The sense-pleasures of the world and the great joys of heaven are not of desire ?" Slxteenth P 31 * ol the bllss that oaxas& f rom ^ cessation
yac ca kama-sukham lokeyac ca divyam mahat sukham tma-hsaya-sukhasyaite narhatah sodaitm kalam
%Z, a f r Z td * ihiiavSn $ not because he was lacking in ab^hty 4 or Knowledge but because he felt that under the pretext of the boon he all m° V m f 'J 16 raises new problems every tune and wishes to gain padtisJr°J 6 SatVcm madi y am vijiianam kama-fra&na-vyajeno-
The Principal Upanisads IV 3. 36.
34 sa vd esa, etasmm svapndnte ratva carttvd drstvatva punyam ca papain ca, punah prahnyayam pratiyony adravatt buddhdntdyaiva
34. 'After having had enjoyment in this state of dream (or sleep), after having roamed about and seen good and evil, he returns again as he came to the place from which he started to the state of waking
See IV 3 16
35. tad yathd 'nah su-samdhitam utsarjad yayat, evam evayath iarira atma prdjtiendtmandnvarudha utsarjam yqh, yatraitad wrdhva ttcchvasi bhavati
35 'Just as a heavily loaded cart moves creaking, even so the self in the body mounted by the self of intelligence moves creaking, when one is breathing with difficulty (i.e. when one is about to expire).
the self tn the body the subtle body which moves between this and the next world as between the waking and the dream states, through birth and death consisting respectively m the association with and dissociation from the body and its organs' yas svapna-buddhantav tva janma-marandbhydm thatoka-paralokdv anusancarah £. breathing with difficulty gasping for breath. The body groans as a heavily laden cart groans under its burden
36 sa yatrdyam ammdnam nyeti, jarayd vopatapata vdni- m&nam mgacchati, tad yathdmram vd udumbaram vd pippalant vd bandhandt pramucyate, evam evdyam puru$a ebhyo' ngebhyah sampramttcya punah pratmydyam pratiyony ddr avail prdndyavoa
36 'When this (body) gets to thinness, whether he gets to thinness through old age or disease, just as a mango or a fig or a fruit of the peepul tree releases itself from its bond (gets detached from its stalk), even so this person frees himself from these limbs and returns again as he came to the place from which he started back to (new) life
The dying man separates himself from his gross body even as a fruit separates itself from its stalk He goes back to his new abode the same way he came and there assumes another body in which to begin a new life
The subjection of the body to old age and disease is mentioned to induce the spirit of renunciation, vatrdgydrtham S
Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad
37. tad yatha rajdnam dydntam ugrdh, pratyenasdh, siita- grdmanyo'nnaih pdnair dvasatliaih pratikalpante: ayam dydti, ayam agacchaffii, evam haivam-vidant sarvdnt bhutdni pratikal- pante, tdam brakmdydti, idam dgacchatiti.
37. 'Just as for a king who is coming, policemen, magistrates, chariot drivers, leaders of the village wait for him with food, dnnk and lodgings, saying, "here he comes, heije he comes," even so for him who knows this, all beings wait for him saying, "here comes Brahman, here he approaches." '
ugrah- policemen, jatt-vtSesah, krura-karmano va. £ pratpenasah- magistrates, taskaradi dandanadau myuktah. S\ leaders of the village, grdma-netdro gramanyah, S
38. tad yatha rajdnam prayiydsantam, ugrdh pratyenasah, stita-grdmanyo'bMsamdyanti, evam evaimam dimdnam, antukdle sarve prdnd abhtsamdyanti, yatraitad urdhvocchvasi bhavaU.
38. Just as policemen, magistrates, chanot-dnvers, leaders of the village gather round a king who is departing, even so do all the breaths (or senses) gather round the self at the end, when one is breathing with difficulty (when he is about to die).
Fourth Brahmana THE SOUL OF THE UNRELEASED AFTER DEATH
1. sa yatrdyam atmd-abalyam nyetya sammoham tva nyeti, athainam etc prdna abhisamdyanti; sa etas tejomdtrdh sama- ohyadadano hrdayam evdmavakrdmatt, sa yatraisa caksusah ptmqah pard4 parydvartate, athdrupajno bhavatt.
1. When this self gets to weakness, gets to confusedness, as it were, then the breaths gather round him. He takes to himself those particles of light and descends into the heart. When the forms 1 m ^ tUrnS awa ^' tilen he Decomes non-knowing of
When his body grows weak and he becomes apparently un- S° ous > the dying man gathers his senses about him, completely wtncliaws their powers and descends into the heart S«s to weakness it is the body that becomes weak. Weakness-is weak 5 apphed t0 the self > which ' being formless, cannot become «* ' dehasya daurbalyam, tad atmana eva daurbalyam tty
pacaryaU: na hy asau svato' mUrtatvad abala-bhavam gacchah. g.
The Principal Upant$ads
So also the self does not get confused for it is the eternal self- luminous intelligence, mtya-cattanya-jyotts-svabkdvatvdt 5
At the moment of death the person in the eye, 1 e pram, departs So one ceases to perceive forms The dying man becomes single The principle of intelligence (vtjnana) after having absorbed all the functions of consciousness proceeds to continue in a new life
2 eki-bhavatt, na pasyatt, tty ahuh, eki-bhavatt, na pghrati tty ahuh, ekl-bhavati na rasayah, tty ahuh, eki-bhavatt, na vadah, tty ahuh, eki-bhavatt na srnott, tty ahuh, eki-bhavatt, na mamtte, tty ahuh, ekt-bliavatt, na sprsati, tty ahuh, eki-bhavatt, na vijandtt, tty ahuh tasya haitasya hrdayasyagram pradyotate, tena pradyotenatsa atma mikramati, cak?u?o vd murdhno vd anyebhyo vd sarira-deiebhyah, tarn utkrdmantam prdno'nutkrd- mati, prdnam anutkrdmantam sarve prdnd aniitkrdmanti, sa vtjiidno bhavati, sw vtjndnam evdnvavakrdmaU, tarn vidya- karmani samanvdrdbhete purva-prajiid ca
2 'He is becoming one, he does not see, they say, he is becoming one, he does not smell, they say, he is becoming one, he does not taste, they say, he is becoming one, he does not speak, they say, he is becoming one, he does not hear, they say, he is becoming one, he does not think, they say, he is becoming one, he does not touch, they say, he is becoming one, he does not know, they say The point of his heart becomes lighted up and by that light the self departs either through the eye or through the head or through other apertures of the body. And when he thus departs, life departs after him And when life thus departs, all the vital breaths depart after it He becomes one with intelligence What has intelligence departs with him His knowledge and his work take hold of him as also his past experience.
Every organ becomes united with the subtle body, Itngatman S pftrva-prajM past experience, former intelligence, the results of his past life, iurvdnubhiila-vtsaya-prajnd, atita karma-plialdnubhava- vasana S S refers to those who are clever in painting though they had no practice in this life and traces their skill to past experience These impressions of the past, under the control of knowledge and work, stretch out like a leech from the body and build another body in accordance with past work vidya-karma-pitrva-vdsana-laksanam elal tntayam iakatika sambhdra-stJidniyam para-loka-palhcyam R
The individual ls born according to the measure of his under- standing Aitareya Aranyahall 3 2 See also Praina I V 11
Kahdasa in his SakuntalS, Act IV, says that when a being who is
(in all other respects) happy becomes conscious of an ardent longing, when he sees beautiful objects or hears sweet sounds, then m all probability, without being aware of it, be remembers with his mind the friendships of former fives, firmly rooted in his heart
ramyam vlksya madhurami ca ni&amya iabdan paryutsuki bliavah
yat stikhvno'pt jantuh tac cetasd smarah ntinam abodhapUrvam bhavasthirani jananantam
sauhrdam.
3 ttidyatha trnajalayuka, trnasyantam galvd, anyam akramam akramya, atmanam upasathharatt, mam evayam atma, tdam iariram mhatya, avxdam gamayitva, anyam akramam akramya, atmanam upasamharah.
3. Just as a leech (or caterpillar) when it has come to the end of a blade of grass, after having made another approach (to another blade) draws itself together towards it, so does this self, after having thrown away this body, and dispelled ignorance, after having another approach (to another body) draw itself together (for making the transition to another body).
4. tad yathd peiaskari peiaso matram updddya, anyan navataram kalydnataram riipam tanute, evam evayam atma, warn ianraih nihatya, avidydm gamayiiva, anyan navataram kalyanataram rupam kurute, pitryam va, gandharvam va, aatvatk va, prajapatyam va, brahmam va anyesam va bhutanam,
4. And as a goldsmith, taking a piece of gold turns it into another, newer and more beautiful shape, even so does this self, after having thrown away this body and dispelled its ignorance, fl !j, Unt0 mmself mother, newer and more beautiful shape ute that of the fathers or of the gandharvas, or of the gods or KPraja-pati or of Brahma or of other beings
goldmtth' pdah suvarpam, tat karoMi peiaskari 1 mmerfom samsthana-viiesam, dehantaram S nf £T«f aw more beautiful Beauty of form indicates beauty Zf JT e cannot have beaut y of form with an evil nature TWytaye na rupam- Kalidasa's Kumdra-sambhava V 36 Malh- X , other passages Beauty of form and good qualities go to- bdttw y f ^ taira 8 unS h}iavanti Those of good form do not hmSr n , Ways ' na SKra P* h P«P<i-samacara. hhavanti In Dasa- is «» *" A 11 u said ' se y am sk r tih «* vyabhicarah Slam, such
Bp * ' tte charact er cannot be different of th» tfTJi? ^ n *° l of the Ananda, the beloved disciple
Js hZSSP*' !v d t0 the Master ' Half of the hol y We. 0 Lord, mendship w th the beautiful, association with the beautiful
27 2 The Principal Upanisads TV. 4. 6.
communion with the beautiful ' 'It is not so, Ananda, it is not so,' said the Master. 'It is not half of the holy life; it is the whole of the holy life.' Samyutta Nikdya V. 2
5 sa va ayam alma brahma, vijMnamayo manomayah pr&na- mayai caksurmayah, frotramayah, prlhivimaya dpomayo vdyu~ maya akaiamayas tejomayo'tejomayah kdmamayo'kdmamayah, krodhamayo 'krodhamayo dkarmamayo'dharmamayah sarva~ mayahtadyad ctat; idam-mayah adomaya ill yathdkdnyalhdcdri talhd bhavatt, sddhukdn sadhur bhavah, pdpakdri papo bhavati; punyah punyena kannana bhavati, pdpah papena; athau khalv dhuh, kdmamaya cvdyam ptirtt$a ttt, sa yathdkanw bhavati, tat kratur bhavati, yal kralur bhavati, tat karma hirute, yat karma kurutc, tat abhisampadyatc
5 'That self is, indeed, Brahman, consisting of (or identified with) the understanding, mind, life, sight, hearing, earth, water, air, ether, light and no light, desire and absence of desire, anger and absence of anger, righteousness and absence of righteousness and all things This is what is meant by saying, (it) consists of this (what is perceived), consists of that (what is interred) According as one acts, according as one behaves, so does he become The doer of good becomes good, the doer of evil becomes evil One becomes virtuous by virtuous action, bad by bad action Others, however, say that a person consists of desires As is his desire so is his will; as is his will, so is the deed he does, whatever deed he does, that he attains.
See Mann II 4 Cp Plato 'Such as are the trend of our desires and the nature of our souls, just such each of us becomes ' Lam. 904 C
kratuh will, resolve, adhyavasayah, m&cayah S
attains gains the fruit thereof, tadiyam phalam abhsampadyate £.
tasya phalam ca prapnoh R
6 tad esa iloko bhavatt
tad eva saktah saha karmanaiti hngam mano yatra nisakiam asya,
prdpydntam karmanas tasya yat kim ceha karoiy ayam tasmdl lokat punar aih asmat lokdya karmane ttt mi kdmayamanah, athakdmayamdnah, yo'kdmo mskdma dpta-kama dtma-kdmah, na tasya prdnd utkrdmantt, brahmaiva san brahmapyea
6 'On this there is the following verse "The object to which the mind is attached, the subtle self goes together with the
IV 4 7- Brhad-aranyaka Upamsad 273
deed, being attached to it alone. Exhausting the results of whatever works he did in this world he comes again from that ■world, to this world for (fresh) work " This (is for) the man who desires /But the man who does not desire, he who is without desire, who is freed from desire, whose desire is satisfied, whose desire is the self, his breaths do not depart Being Brahman he goes to Brahman.
Desire is the root of empirical existence- samsara-mfila
The subtle body is called mind because mind is the chief factor
of the subtle body tnanah pradhanatudt hngasya mono hngam tty
veyate S
He who has desires continues subject to rebirth
The man free from desires realises Brahman even here: sa ca mdvdn dpta-kamah atma-kamataya ihavoa brahmabhiitali S What the blind need is to receive sight Sight is not change of place or trans- porting into another world. One need not wait for the death of the body, na sarira-pStottara-kalam. Freedom is the cessation of ignorance, awdya-mvrtti He in whom desire is stilled suffers no rebirth
7 tad esa iloko bhavati yadd sarve pramucyante kamaye'sya hrdx intah, atha martyo'mrto bhavati, atra brahma samasnute lit tad yathdhinirvlayanl valmike mrta pratyastd sayita, evam eoedam iariram iete athayam asariro'mrtah pra.no brahmaiva, tya eva, so'liam bhagavate sahasram dadami, iti hovaca janako vaidehah
7 'On this there is the following verse : "When all the desires that dwell m the heart are cast away, then does the mortal unmorta1 ' t*" 31 he attains Brahman here (in this very body) " Just as the slough of a snake lies on an anthill, dead, jast off, even so lies this body. But this disembodied, immortal we is Brahman only, is light indeed, Your Majesty ' 'I give you, venerable Sir, a thousand cows,' said Janaka (King) of Videha.
Se&KafltaYl. 14.
Y&f^- cast w*-y, prattksipta.
vyiien we identify ourselves with the body under the influence of W«f j "wo*, we are embodied and mortal When we
ZmHj odiei we become immortal, as we are no longer fa as ^ embodmen t kama-karma-prayukta-sarirattna-bhavena cah^rk arlr0 mar ^ as ca, tad vtyogad athedamm asarlrah, ata eva
hsht tndeed > a 3nana-laksanandhakara-prattbhafa eva R.
274 The Principal Upani$ads IV 4 9.
8 tad etc sloka bhavanh: anuh pantha vitatah purdnah, mam sprsto'nuvitto mayaiva, Una dhira, apt yantt brahmavidah svargam lokam tta urdhvam mmuktah 8 'On this there are the following verses "The narrow ancient path which stretches far away, has been touched (found) by me, has been realised by me By it, the wise, the knowers of Brahman go up to the heavenly world after the fall of this body, being freed (even while living)
anuh narrow, being difficult to comprehend, silksmah dumpiey- atvat §
vitatah stretching far away, vistirnah vispasta-tarana-heiulvad va V is vitarah leading across
The teachers are the path-finders The Buddha speaks of the ancient way, the wayfarer bound for home 'from which there is no coming back again ' Rum! attributes to Jesus, the Logos, 'For the true believers I become a bridge across the river * Mathnawi IV 10 70 The Bodhisattva makes of himself a bridge, atlanam samkatnam katua, by which we cross Having first crossed over himself, he serves as a bridge for others 'I am the way ' John XIV 6 touched by me found by me, maya-labdhah § ttah asmac charira-patad 5
They are freed even while in the body fivanta eva vimuMSs santah S
Cp Taithnya Brahmana *He who makes the self (atman) his waynnder is no longer stained by evil action ' III 12 9 8
Sometimes the verse is interpreted differently They go beyond the heavenly world There is a reading to this effect iena dhira apt yantt brahma-mda utkramya svargam lokam tto vtmuktah
g tasmtn suklam uta mlam dhuh, ptngalam, hantam, lohitam ca
esa pantha brahmana hdmtvtttah tenatti brahmavit punyakrt iatjasas ca
g ' "On that path they say there is white, blue, yellow, green and red That path was found by a Brahmana and by it goes the knower of Brahman, the doer of right and the shining one "
These colours do not affect the path of realisation dariana-margasya ca sukladi-vamasambhavat These paths belong to the world of empirical existence, na te moksa-margah, samsara-vtsaya eva hi te S brahmana by a Brahmana pardtnia-svarQpenaiva bralimanena tyak- ta-sarvatsanena S
the doer of right £ finds it difficult to uphold his view that spintual
wisdom and practical activity are incompatible He cites a number
of passages from M.B., which support his view.
apnnya-punyo parameyam punar-bhava-nirbhayah Santas samnydstno ydnh tasmai moksatmane namah XII 46.56. 'Salutation to that embodiment of liberation whom serene monks,
fearless about rebirth, attain after the cessation of the effects of
their good and bad deeds '
mrahsam, andrambham, mmamaskaram, astuhm akiinam, kslna-karmdnam, tarn devd brahmanam viduh XII. 269 34
"The gods consider him to be a knower of Brahman who has no desires, who undertakes no work, who does not bow (to others) or praise (any one), who remains unchanged, whose work is exhausted ' naitaariam brahmanasyastt vittam yathaikata, samata, satyata ca Ularn, sthihm, danda-nidhdnam, Srjavam, tatas tataS coparamah hiyabjtyah XII 174. 37. 'For a knower of Brahman, there is no wealth comparable to the sense of oneness, the sense of equality, truthfulness, virtue, stead- fastness, non-injury, integrity and withdrawal from all activities '
That the knowers of Brahman are doers of good is said by way of eulogy. This view of S is not the obvious meaning of the text which seems to suggest jndna-karmasamuccaya.
10 andham tamah prawianti ye vidydm updsaie tato bhuya %va te tamah ya u vidydydm ratah.
10 'Into blind darkness enter they who worship ignorance; into greater darkness than that, as it were, they that delight m knowledge (enter) '
See Ua 9. § means by avidya works, and by knowledge the ritual partoftheVedas
vidyfiyam- avidyd-vastu-prattpadtkayam karmarthayam trayydm S\
11. Those worlds covered with blind darkness are called joyless To them after death go those people who have not Knowledge, who are not awakened
S&Kathal 3 Jifl 3> «d awakened devoid of the knowledge of the self, atmdvagama- wrptah. S pratyag-atma-vidya-tenyah R.
atmdnam ced wjamyad ayam asmiti purusah *tm tcchan, kasya kdmdya iariram anusamjvaret.
276 The Principal Upanisads IV. 4 14
12 If a person knows the self as 'I am this,' then wishing what, and for desire of what should he suffer in the body?
should suffer, santapyet, sarlra-tapam anutapyeta £
What craving can be left in him that he should take to himself another body, full of suffering, to satisfy iV
13 yasyanuvittah pratibuddha dtmasmm samdehye gahane
pravtstdh,
sa visva-krt, sa hi sarvasya karta, tasya lokak sa u loha eva
13 "Whoever has found and has awakened to the self that has entered into this perilous inaccessible place (the body), he is the maker of the universe, for he is the maker of all His is the world, indeed he is the world itself
anuvittah found, anulabdhah &
prattbuddah- awakened, directly realised, saksatkrtah §
samdehye perilous, subject to many dangers anekanariJm-samkafo-
pacaye S
gahane inaccessible, with hundreds and thousands of obstacles to obtaining enlightenment through (incrimination, aneka-sata-saha- sra-mveka-vijiiana-pralipaksa-visame § loka world According to S the Self, the Universal Self
14 ihaiva santo'tJui vidmas tad vayam, na cei avedtr maliatT
vinastih
ye tad viduh, amrtas te bhavanti, atketare duhkham evapi- yanh
14 Venly, while we are here we may know this if (we know it) not we would be ignorant, great is the destruction Those who know this become immortal while others go only to sorrow.
avediJr ignorant apianam bhavah R
The Eternal may be realised even while we live m the ephemeral body To fail to realise him is to live m ignorance, to be subject to birth and death The knowers of Brahman are immortal, others continue m the region of sorrow
Cp the words in the Homeric hymn to Demeter written about the beginning of the sixth century b c in Attica 'Blessed among men who dwell on earth is he who has seen these things, but he who is uninitiated and has no part m the rites has never an equal lot when he has died and passed beneath the dank darkness ' Lines 480 ff Plutarch quotes from Sophocles 'Thnce blessed are those mortals who have seen these mysteries before they come to Hades, for to them alone is granted true life All that is evil besets the rest ' W K C Guthne The Greeks and their Gods (1950), p xui
15. If one clearly beholds him as the self, as God, as the lord of what has been and what will be, he does not shrink away from him.
he does not shrink he is not afraid, he does not wish to hide himself from the Supreme
16 yasmdd arvak samvatsarah ahobhih panvartate, tad deva jyotisam jyotih ayur hopdsate'mrtam
16 That in front of which the year revolves with its days, that the gods worship as the light of lights, as life immortal
ayuk- kfe-pnnciple, sawatydnt-prdnam-hetUr-bMtam R.
17 yasmm paiica panca-jandh dkdias ca praitsthitah, tarn eoa. manya atmanam, vidvdn brahmd'mrto'mtiam.
17 That in which the five groups of five and space are established, that alone I regard as the self Knowing that immortal Brahman I am immortal
The five groups are the Gandkarvas or celestial singers, the fathers, the gods, the demons and the Rdksasas or Titans space the unmaiufested principle, avyakrtdkhyah S
mamso ye mano viiuh, te mctkyur brahma purdnam agryam.
18. They who know the life of life, the eye of the eye, the ear of the ear and the mind of the mind, they have realised the ancient primordial Brahman
Kena I. 2
hJh? dlSerent organs do not function if they are not inspired £ tfte ener gy of Brahman 'Divested of the light of the self which terf*/ ^ tem g eilce *ey are like wood or clods of earth ' svatap
h 1 T' sam5nt ht tSm caitanyatma-jyotis-sunydm. § mctRyuh bwe Te3 j 1S z&,niicayenajnatavantah S\
x 9 manasaivdnudraslavyam, natha ndnasti him cana: wrtyoh sa mrtyum dpnahya iha ndneva paiyati
divL? rr by the mmd B 11 10 be perceived In it there is no ersity. He goes from death to death, who sees in it, as it ^re, diversity.
zy8 The Principal Upantsads IV 4 22
The mind purified by the knowledge of the Supreme Truth and the instructions of the teacher directly realises Brahman paramartha^Mna-saimkrtendcdryopade&a-purvakam ca. S Again, 'the mind refined by the subjugation of the body, the mind and the senses and equipped with the teaching of the scriptures and the teacher forms the instrument by which the self may be seen sastrdcdryopadesa-jamta-sama-damddi-samskrlam mana dtma-darsane kdranam S B G II 21
See Hatha IV 10-11 from death to death from birth to birth, samsarat samsaram R
20 ekadhaivdnudrastavyam etad aprameyam dhruvam, mrajah para akdsad aja dtmd mahan dhruvah
20 This indemonstrable and constant being can be realised as one only The self is taintless, beyond space, unborn, great and constant
as one only as homogeneous pure intelligence without any break in it, like space vijndfia-ghanaikarasa-prakdrendkdiavanmranlarena S Duality is essential for knowledge, as the self is one and there is nothing beside it, it is not an object of demonstration anyena hanyal pramiyate, idatn to ekam eva, ato 'prameyam § dhruvam constant, mtyam, kiltastham avicah § mrajah taintless, vtgata-rajah £ rdgddt-do§a-rahitah. R
21 Let a wise Brahmana after knowing him alone, practise (the means to) wisdom Let him not reflect on many words, for that is mere weariness of speech
vijiihya knowing by means of the study of the scriptures and logical reflection sravana-manandbhyamjnatva R prajndm mdtdhydsanam
mgldpanam weariness, visesena gldm-karam srama-karam hi § The Real cannot be known by vain and idle arguments
22 sa vd esa -mahan aja alma yo'yam vijiidnamayah prdne?u; ya eso'ntar-hrdaya dkdsah tasnttn seta, sarvasya vast, sarva- 'syesdnah, sarvasyadhipahh, sa na sddhund karmatid bhtiydn no evdsddhutid kaniydn esa sarvesvarak, esa bhutddhipatth, esa bhutapdlah esa setur vidharana esdm lokdndm asambhedaya. tarn etam veddnuvacanena brahmana vmdisanti, yaptena, ddnena, tapasdndsakena, etam eva vtdttvd mttmr bhavatt, etam eva pravrdjmo lokam tcchantah pravrajantt. etadd ha stna vai tat piirve vidvamsah prajdm na kdmayante him prajaya
karisydinah, yesam no'yam aimdyam loka iti. U ha sma i>utrai$andyas ca vitiaisattdyds ca lokaisandyas ca vyutthdya, atha bhiksd-caryam caranti; yd hy eva putraisand sd mttaisana, yd vittaisand sd lokaisana; ubke hy ete esane eva bhavaiah sa esa nett nety atmd; agrhyah, na hi grhyaU, astryah, na hi Siryate; asangah, na h% sajyate; asito na vyathate, na risyati; dam « haivatte na tarata tt%, atdh pdpam akaravam iti, atah kalydnam dkaravam iti; ubhe u haivaisa ete taraii, nainam krtdkrte tapatah.
22 Venly, he is the great unborn Self who is this (person) consisting of knowledge among the senses In the space within the heart lies the controller of all, the lord of all, the ruler of alL He does not become greater by good works nor smaller by evJ works. He is the bridge that serves as the boundary to keep the different worlds apart. Him the Brahmanas seek to know by the study of the Veda, by sacrifices, by gifts, by penance, by fasting. On knowing Him^m truth, one becomes an ascetic. Desiring Hun only as their worlds, monks wander forth Verily, because they know this, the ancient (sages) did not wish for offspring What shall we do with offspring (they said), we who have attained this Self, this world. TheyJiavj^^enjibDye the d esire for sons, the_desrre for wealth, the desire for_worids, led thelSe of a^mendic^trFor^the desire for sons is tiiejiesire for*weaIth"andLthe desire for wealth is the desire for worlds; both these are, mdeed,.desires only. TMsSelfJsJttetjwhich has, beenJLescnbedLas) not- this; not this. He is mamiprehensible for He is never comprehended. He is ^destr uctible for He can not be de stroyed He is unattachedrfor He does not atfaca" himseit Mels unfettered, He does not suffer, He is not injured. Hun (who knows this) these two (thoughts) do not overcome, 'for some reason he has done evil or for some reason he has done good. He overcomes both What he has done or what he has not done does not burn (affect) him.
SeeIII.5 i;m 9 26;IV.2.4. selu- bridge Agm (Fire) is spoken of as bridge: loan nas tantur uta selur agne- Taittirlya Brahmana. II. 4. 2. 6. Agni becomes the path of deva-yana
Ceremonial observances are treated as means for purification. See BG XVIII. 5.
Fasting is restraint, not abstinence, not starvation which will mean death: kamanaianam andsakam, na tu bhojana-nivjitih bhoja- na-nivrtlau mriyala eva S\
The monastic orders which developed in Buddhism and Jainism are forecast here.
z8o The Principal Upamsads IV 4 24
' 23 tad esa rcdbhyuktam
esa nityo mahima brdhmanasya na vardhate karmana no kaniydn
tasyaiva syat pada-vit, tarn viditva na hpyate karmana papakena,
ttt tasmad [evam-mt, idnto ddnta uparatas tihksuh samahito bhutvd, atmany evdtmdnam pasyah, sarvam dtmdnam paiyatx, namam pdpma tarati, sarvam pdpmanam tarati, nainam pdpma tapatt, sarvam pdpmanam tapatt, vipdpo wrap 'victktiso brdh- mano bhavati, esa brahma-lokah, samrdt, enam prdptto'st th hovdca ydjMvalkyah, so'ham bhagavate videhdn daddmi, mam cdpt saha ddsydyeti
23 This very (doctrine) has been expressed in the hymn This eternal greatness of the knower of Brahman is not in- creased by work nor diminished One should know the nature of that alone Having found that, one is not tainted by evil action Therefore he who knows it as such, having become calm, self-controlled, withdrawn, patient and collected sees the Self in his own self f sees all m the Self Evil does not overcome him, he overcomes all evil Evil does not burn (affect) him, he burns (consumes) all evil Free from evil, free from Jaint, free from doubt he becomes a knower of Brahma This' is the world of Brahma, Your Majesty, you have attained it, said Yajfiavalkya. Janaka (Kmg) of Videha said, 'Venerable Sir, I give you the (empire of) Videhas and myself also to serve you '
fada-mt he who knows the nature padasya vettd, padyate gamyale jndyaia th mahimnas-svarupam eva padam S having become calm the Bhdgavata defines the state of tranquillity as one m which there is not grief nor happiness, nor worry, nor hatred, nor longing, not even any desire
nay air a duhkham na sukham na cinta, nai dvesa-ragau na ca kactd iccha
rasah sa sdntdh kathito munindraih sarvesu bhdvesu samah pramdnah
24 sa vd esa makdn aja atmd, annddo Vasu-ddnah, vindate vasu ya cvam veda
24 This is that great unborn Self, who is the eater of food and the giver of wealth He who knows this obtains wealth
the eater of food sarva-bhutasthas sarvannandm attd. £ He dwells in all beings and eats all food which they eat (he giver of wealth the giver of the fruits of actions He enables all beings to obtain the results of their actions dhanam sarvaprdnt-
jy, fj, 3, Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 281
karma-phalam, tasya data, praninam yatha-karma-phalena yojayitety arthak S\
25 sa va e?a mahan ajatmd, ajaro, amnio' mrto'bhayo brahma; abhayam van brahma, abhayam hi vat brahma bhavati ya evath vtda.
25. This is that great tinhorn Self who is undecaying, undying, immortal, fearless, Brahman. Verily, Brahman is fearless. He who knows this becomes the fearless Brahman,
Fifth Brahmana
1 atha ha yfignavalkyasya dve bharye babhuvatuh, maitreyi ca katyayani ca. tayor ha maitreyi brahma-vadini babhuva, strt-prajmvoa tarhi katyayani. atha yajfiavalkyo'nyad-vrttam upakansyan.
1. Now then, Yajfiavalkya had two wives, Maitreyi and Katyayani Of these (two) Maitreyi was a discourser on Brahma- knowledge, while Katyayani possessed only such knowledge as women have. Now then, Yajfiavalkya when lie wished to get ready for another mode of life —
See II. 4
S holds that in this dialogue between Yajfiavalkya and Maitreyi, logical argument is advanced in support of scnptural statements- iarka-pradhanam hi yajnavalkylyam kandam. discourser on Bralana-knowkige brahma-vadana-Md. S.
2. maitreyi, iti hovaca yajfiavalkyah, prawaji?yan vd are'ham astnSt sthanad asmi; hanta te'naya katyayanydntam karavaniti.
z 'Maitreyi,' said Yajfiavalkya, 'lo, verily, I am getting away from this state (into the forest). Forsooth, let me make a settlement for you and that Katyayani,
3- sa hovaca maitreyi- yan nu ma iyam, bhagoh, sarva prthivi viltena puma syat, syam nv aham tendmrtd' oho na iti, na tti, novaca yajMvalkyah; yathawopakaranavatam jivitam, tathatva «;»wtofft syst; amriatvasya tu naidsti viUeneti. an a • n taud M^toyi: 'My Lord, if, indeed, this whole earth niied with wealth were mine, do I become immortal by it or
282 The Principal Vpamsads IV. 5 6
not?' 'No,' replied Yajnavalkya 'As the life of people who have plenty of things will your life be, but there is no hope of immortality through wealth '
4 sa hovaca maitreyi' yenaham ndmrtd sydm, ktm aham Una kurydm yad cva bhagavdn veda, tad cva me briihth
4 Then Maitreyi said 'What shall I do with that by which I do not become immortal? What you know (of the way to immortality), Venerable Sir, that, indeed explain to me '
5 sa hovaca yajnavalkyah prtyd vat kliatu no bhavati sail pnyam avrdhat. hanta tarht, bhavalt, etad vydkhyasydmi te, vydcaksdnasya tu me mdidhyasasvch
5 Then Yajnavalkya said 'You have been truly dear to me (even before), now you have increased yourdearness Therefore, if you wish, my dear, I will explain it to you As I am expounding to you, seek to meditate on it '
pnyatva fftrvam khalu nah, asmabhyam bhavati, bhavanti salt fnyam evavrdkat, vardhttavati, nirdharttavaly ast. S
6 sa hovaca tia vd are paiyuh kdmdya patth prtyo bhavaii, atmanas tu kdmdya patth prtyo bhavatt; tut vd are jdyayai kdmdya jdyd prtya bhavatt, atmanas tu kdmdya jdyd prtyd bhavatt; 11a vd are putrdndm kdmdya putrdh prtya bhavantt, atmanas tu kdmdya putrdh priyd bhavantt; »a vd are vtitasya kdmdya viltatn prtyam bhavatt, atmanas ttt kdmdya vittam pnyam bhavatt; na vd are pasundm kdmdya paiavah prtya bhavanii, atmanas tu kdmdya paiavah prtyd bhavantt, 11a vd are brahmanah kdmdya brahma prtyam bhavalt, atmanas tu kdmdya brahma pnyam bhavalt; na va are ksatrasya kdmdya ksatram prtyam bhavati, atmanas tu Kdmdya ksatram prtyam bhavatt, r.a vd are lokdndm kdmdya lokdh prtydh bhavantt, atmanas tit hin.dya lokdh prtyd bhavantt; 11a vd are devdndm kdmdya devdh priyd lhannti, atmanas ttt kdmdya devdh prtyd bhavanti, r.a id arc veddndm kdmdya veddh prtyd bhavantt, dtvtanas tu kdmdya itdak prtyd bhavantt na va are bhiildndm kdmdya bf.utdr.t pnydt.t bhavmti, atmanas tu kdmdya bhiitdnt prtyam Ikavarii; r.a id are sarvasya kdmdya sarratn pnyam bhaiati, iU>r'it"t% tu kdmdya sanam pnyam bhavati dtmd vd art dra;'vs\ th Irohxvyo mantavyo nidtdhydsttavyah, maitreyi, dtmani tktli are dr;'e, £rtite t irate, vtjRdtt, tdam sanam vtdttatn
6 TV:i. he (Y3jfiavalk>a) said- 'Vcnly, not for the sale of th* hinband is the husband de-u but for the sake of the J* If
is the husband dear. Verily, not for the sake of the -wife is the wife dear but for the sake of the Self is the wife dear. Verily, not for the sake of the sons are the sons dear but for the sake of the Self are the sons dear Verily, not for the sake of wealth is wealth dear but for the sake of the Self is wealth dear. Verily, not for the sake of the cattle are the cattle dear but for the sake of the Self are the cattle dear. Venly, not for the sake of the Brahmana is the Brahmana dear but for the sake of the Self is the Brahmana dear. Venly, not for the sake of the K§atriya is the Ksatriya dear but for the sake of the Self is the Ksatriya dear Venly, not for the sake of the worlds are the worlds dear but for the sake of the Self are the worlds dear. Venly, not for the sake of the gods are the gods dear but for the sake of the Self are the gods dear. Venly, not for the sake of the Vedas are the Vedas dear but for the sake of the Self are the Vedas dear. Verily not for the sake of the beings are the beings dear but for the sake of the Self are the beings dear Venly, not for the sake of all is all dear but for the sake of the Self is all dear. Venly, the Self, Maitreyi, is to be seen, to be heard, to be reflected on, to be meditated upon; when, venly, the Self is seen, heard, reflected on and known, then all this is known.
tote heard from the teacher and the scriptures, acaryagamahhyam £. to be reflected on through argument and reasoning, tarkenopapattya §.
7 brahma tarn paraddt, yo'nyatratmano brahma veda; ksatram tarn paraddt, yo'nyatratmanab ksatram veda, lokas tarn paraduh, yo'nyatratmano lokan veda; devas tarn paraduh, yo'nyatratmano devan veda; vedas tarn paraduh, yo'nyatrdtntano vedan veda; mutant tam paraduh, yo'nyatratmano bhutani veda; sarvam tarn paradat, yo'nyatratmanah sarvam veda, idam brahma, idam ksatram, tme lokah, tme devdh, tme veddh, tmdm bhutdni, idam sarvam, yad ayam dtmd
7 Brahmanahood deserts him who knows Brahmanahood in anything else than the Self. Ksatnyahood deserts him who mows Ksatriyahood in anything else than the Self. The worlds Sif t T^ Un w1m> knows tlle worlds in anything else than the v>elt. The gods desert him who knows the gods m anything else
aJv Sdf * The Vedas desert ^ wno k 510 ™ 5 the Vedas in ^yttung else than the Self. The beings desert him who knows tne beings in anything else than the Self. All deserts him who «wws all in anything else than the Self. This Brahmanahood,
The Principal Upanisads IV. 5 12.
this Ksatnyahood, and these worlds, these gods, these Vedas, all these beings, this all are the Self
8 sa yatha dundubher hanyamdnasya na bahyan Sabddn iaknuyad gralianaya, dundublies tu grahanena dundubhy-dghdta- sya va sabdo grhitah
8 Just as when a drum is beaten, one cannot grasp the external sounds but by grasping the drum or the beater of the drum, the sound is grasped,
9 sa yatha iankltasya dkmdyamdnasya na bahyan hbdan iaknuyad gralianaya, iankhasya tu grahanena iankha-dhmasya va iabdo grhitah
9 Just as when a conch is blown one 'cannot grasp the external sound but by grasping the conch or the blower of the conch, the sound is grasped,
10 sa yatha vinayai vadyamanayai na bahyan sabddn iaknuyad grahandya, vinayai tu grahanena vind-vddasya va sabdo grhitah
10 Just as when a Vina (or lute) is played one cannot grasp the external sounds but by grasping the vino, or the player of the vina, the sound is grasped,
iz sa yathardraidhagner abhydhitasya prtliag dhuma vtnts- caranh, evam va are'sya mahato bhutasya mMvasitam etad yad rg vedo, yajur vedah, soma vedo 'tharvdngirasa tUhdsah jniranam vtdya upamsadah slokah sutrdnt, anu-vyakhyandm vydkh- ydndnistam hutam diitam pdyitam ayam ca lokah paras ca lokah sarvam ca bhutdm, asyaivattam sarvant mlisvasitam
11 As from a fire kindled with damp fuel vanous kinds of smoke issue forth, so, verily, from this great bemg has been breathed forth that which is the Rg Veda, the Yajur Veda the Sdma Veda, the hymns of the Atharvans and the Angirasas, legend, ancient lore, sciences, sacred teachings, verses, aphor- isms, explanations, commentaries, sacrifice, oblation, food, drink, this world and the other and all beings From it, indeed, have all these been breathed forth
12. sa yatha sarvdsdm apdm samudra ekdyanam, evam sarvesam sparsdnam tvag ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm gandhdndm ndsike ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm rasandm phvaikdyanam, evam sarvesdm rupdtidm caksur ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm iabddnam irotram ekdyanam, evam sarvesam samkalpdndm mana ekdyanam, evam sarvdsdm vtdyandm hrdayam ekdyanam, evam sarvesdm
karmdndm hastav ekayanam, evam sarvesam dmnddndm wpastha ekayanam, evam sarvesam visargdndm pdyur ekayanam, evam sarvesam adhvandm pdddv ekayanam, evam sarvesam veddndm vdg ekayanam.
12. As the ocean is the one goal (meeting-place) of all waters, as the skin is the one goal of all kinds of touch, as the nose is the one goal of all smells, as the tongue is the one goal of all tastes, as the eye is the one goal of all forms, as the ear is the one goal of all sounds, as the mind is the one goal of all inten- tions, as the heart (intellect) is the one goal of all knowledge, as the hands are the one goal of all kinds of work, as the genera- tive organ is the one goal of all forms of delight, as the anus is the one goal of all evacuations, as the feet are the one goal of all movements, as the (organ of) speech is the one goal of all the Vedas
13. sa yathd saindhava-ghanah anantaro'bdhyah, krtsno rasa- ghana em, evam vd are'yam dtma, anantaro'bdhyah, kftsnah prajndna-ghana eva, etebhyo bhiitebhyah samutthdya, tdny evd- ^ nuvtnasyati na pretya samjMsh, %U are bravwn, vti hovdca ' yajfiavalkyah.
13 'As a mass of salt is without inside, without outside, is altogether a mass of taste, even so, verily, is this Self without inside, without outside, altogether a mass of intelligence only. Having arisen out of these elements (the Self) vanishes again m them When he has departed there is no more (separate or particular) consciousness Thus, verily, say I', said Yajnavalkya.
Particular consciousness is due to association with elements* when this association is dissolved through knowledge, knowledge of oneness is obtained and particular consciousness disappears.
-I-i-I 5, 1m&Ca mo-tiny* atravoa ma bhagavdn mohantam aptpipat; na vd almm imam vijdnamUu sa hovdca; na vd are' dliannd 1 hravlmi> amn&il v& are'yam dtma, an-ucchitti-
14 Then Maitreyi said 'Here, indeed, Venerable Sir, you have caused me to reach utter bewilderment Indeed, I do not at all understand this (the Self) • He replied, 'I do not say
£3£JwSSSf ^ Self • venly * 18 lffiperi5habIe and *
fSf 'fi 1 6 natwe * 15 not sub J ect t0 destruction either in the
286 The Principal Upanisads IV. 5 15
15 yatra hi dvaitam tva bhavati, tad ttara ttaram paiyatt, tad xlara itarath pghratt, tad tiara ttaram rasayate, tad ttara ttaram abhtvadatt, tad ttara ttaram irnott, tad ttara ttaram vtjdndtt, yatra tv asya sarvam atmawabhttt, tat kena kam paiyet, tat kena kampghfet, tat kena kam rasayet, tat kena kam abhwadet, tat kena kam irnuyat, tat kena kam marnnta, tat kena kam sprset, tat kena kam vijdniydt; yenedam sarvam vtjanatt, tarn kena vijdniydt sa esa nett neiy dtmd; agrhyah, na hi grhyaie, aitryah na ht siryate, asangah, na hi sajyate, asito, na vyathaie, 1 na rtsyatt vijnqtgKtm. are kena vijdniydt, tty uktdnusdsandst, maitreyi, etdvad are khalv amrtatvam, ttt hoktvd, ydjnavalkyo vijahara
15 'For where there is duality as it were, there one sees the other, one smells the other, one tastes the other, one speaks to the other, one hears the other, one thinks of the other, one touches the other, one knows the other But where every- thing has become just one's own self, by what and whom should one see, by what and whom should one smell, by what and whom should one taste, by what and to whom should one speak, by what and whom should one hear, by what and of whom should one think, by what and whom should one touch, by what and whom should one know' By what should one know him by whom all this is known' That self is (to be described as) not this, not this He is incomprehensible for he cannot be comprehended. He is indestructible for He cannot be destroyed He is unattached for He does not attach himself He is unfettered, He does not suffer, He is not injured Indeed, by what would one know the knower? Thus you have the in- struction given to you, 0 Maitreyi Such, verily, is life eternal ' Having said this, Yajnavalkya went away (into the forest)
See III 9 26; IV 2 4, IV. 4 22 vijahara went into the forest, pravraptavan S by what would one know the knower> The suggestion is that the knower cannot be known m the usual way He can only be experienced.
§ makes out that all the four chapters had the one end in view, knowledge of Brahman culminating in renunciation brahma-vidyd samnyasa-paryavasana, etavan upadesa, etad vedanusasanam, esa parama-ntslha, esa purusartha-kartavyatanta tit £
This is the instruction, this is the teaching of the Vedas, this is the ultimate goal, this is the end of man's effort to achieve his highest good
Different views are expressed according to the E S , about the relation of the individual and the universal Self Asmarathya holds
IV 6 3 Brhad-dranyaka Upani?ad 287
that the unity of the two is emphasised to indicate that when the Universal Self is seen all else is seen I 4 20. Audulomi thinks that the identity taught here refers to the state which the individual finally attains when he is released from all limitations I. 4 21. Kasakrtsna holds that the identity is taught because the individual is the form in which the Universal exists. I 4. 22
Sixth Brdhmana THE SUCCESSION OF TEACHERS AND PUPILS
1 atha vam&ah pautvmdsyo gaupavanat, gaupavanah pauh- mdsydt, pautvmasyo gaupavanat, gaupavanah kaidikdt, kausikah kaundmydt, kaundinyah idnixlyat, idndilyah kausikdc ca gautamdc ca, gautamah —
1. Now the line of tradition Pautimasya (received the teaching) from Gaupavana, Gaupavana from Pautimasya, Pautimasya from Gaupavana, Gaupavana from Kau£ika, Kauiikafrom Kaundrnya, Kaundinya from Sandilya, Sandilya from Kausika and Gautama, Gautama —
2 dgmvesydt, agmveiyo gdrgydt, gdrgyo gdrgydt, gdrgyo gautamat, gautamah saitavdt, sattavah pardiarydyandt, pdra- sarydyano gdrgydyandt, gdrgydyana udddlakdyandt, uddalakd- yano jdbdldyandt, jdhdldyano mddhyandtndyandt, mddhyan- dxndyanah saukardyandt, saukardyanah kdsayanat, kdsayanah sdyakdyandt, sdyakdyamh kausikayaneh, kausikdyamh —
2 From Agmvesya, Agmvesya from Gargya, Gargya from Gargya, Gargya from Gautama, Gautama from Saitava, Saitava from Parasaryayana, Parasaryayana from Gargyayana,Gargya- yana from Uddalakayana, Uddalakayana from Tabalayana, Jabalayana from Madhyandmayana, Madhyandinkyana "from Saukarayana, Saukarayana from Kasayana, Kasayana from Sayakayana, Sa.yaka.yana from Kausikayam, Kausikayani—
3- ghrtakauiikdt, ghrtakautikah paraiarydyandt, pdra- saryayanah pdrdsarydt, pdraiaryo jdtukarnydt, ' jdtHkamya asurayandc ca ydskdc ca, dsurdyanas traivanek, travoamr aupajandhanch, aupajandliamr dsureh, dsurir bhdradvdjdl fharadvaja dtreydt, atreyo vianfeh, matfir gautamat, gautamo" gautemat gautamo vdtsyat, vdtsyah Sdndilyat, sindtlvah kaxSoryat kdpydt, katioryah kdpyah kumdra-hdntat, kumdra-
The Principal Upantsads IV 3
harito galavat, galavo vidarbhi-kaundinyat, vidarbhi-katmdmyo vatsanapdto bdbhravdt, vatsanapdd babhravah pathah saubhardt, panthdh saubharo'ydsydd dngtrasdt, aydsya angtrasa abilities tvdstrdt, dbhuhs tvdslro msva-rilpdt tvdsirdt, visva-rupas tvdslro 'ivibhyam, asvinau dadhica atliarvandt, dadhyann dtharuano 'tharvano daivdt, atkarvd daivo mrtyoh prddhvamsamt, mrtytth prddhvamsanah pradhvamsandt, pradhvamsana ekarseh, ekarsir vipracitteh, vipracittir vyasteh, vyastih sandroh, sanaruh sand- iandt, sandtanah sanagdt, sanagah paramesthmah, paramestM brahmana)}, brahma svayambhu, brahmane namah
3 from Ghrtakausika, Ghrtakausika from Parasaryayana, Parasaryayana from Paraiarya, Paraiarya from Jatukarnya, Jatukarnya from Asurayana and Yaska, Asurayana from Traivani, Traivam from Aupajandhani, Aupajandhani from Asun, Asun from Bharadvaja, Bharadvaja from Atreya, Atreya from Manti, Manti from Gautama, Gautama from Gautama, Gautama from Vatsya, Vatsya from Sindilya, Sandilya from Kaiiorya Kapya, Kaisorya Kapya from Kumara- hanta, Kumara-hanta from Galava, Galava from Vidarbhl- kaundinya, Vidarbhi-kaundmya from Vatsanapat Babhrava, Vatsanapat Babhrava from Pathm Saubhara, Pathin Saubhara from Ayasya Angirasa, Ayasya Angirasa from Abhtiti Tvastra, AbhQti Tvastra from Visva-riipa Tvastra, Visva-rupa Tvastra from the two AS vins, the two Aivms from Dadhyann Atharvana, Dadhyann Atharvana from Atharvan Daiva, Atharvan Daiva from Mrtyu Pradhvamsana, Pradhvamsana from Ekarsi, Ekarsi from Vipracitti, Vipracitti from Vyasti, Vyasti from Sana.ru, Sanaru from Sanatana, Sanatana from Sanaga, Sanaga from Paramesthin, Paramesthm from Brahma, Brahma is the self-existent Salutation to Brahma
the line of tradition' Udyotakara defines sampradaya as uninterrupted succession of pupils and teachers by which scriptural knowledge is conserved and transmitted sampradtiyo narna sisyopadhyaya- sambandhasya avtcchedena sdstra-prdphh A Jiving culture preserves the treasures of the past and creates those of the future
First Brahmana
I. piirnam aiah, piirnam idam, purnat purnam udacyate purnasya piirnam adaya piirnam eodvaiisyate. Aim kham brahma, kham puranam, vayuram kham, iti ha smdha kauravyayawl-putrah, vedo'yam brahmana viduh;vedamena yad vediiavyam.
i That is full, this is full. From fullness fullness proceeds If we take away the fullness of fullness, even fullness then remains. (The syllable) Aum is Brahman (who) is the ether, the primeval ether, the etherthat blows. Thus, verily, the son of KauravyayanI used to say This is the Veda which the knowers of Brahman know, through it one knows what is to be known.
that is full the reference is to the Absolute
this %s full the reference is to the manifested world presided over
by the Personal Lord
While this world in infinite, it has its roots m the Absolute The manifestation of this world does not take away from the fullness or integrity of the Absolute.
vedai the knowledge by which whatever is to be known is known vijanaty anena yad vedttavyam tasmad vedah. %
Second BrShmana THE THREE PRINCIPAL VIRTUES
x._ irayak prajapatyah prajdpatau pitari brahma-caryam usuh aevamanusya amrdh, u?itoa brahmaoaryam deva Hcuh; bravtiu, no bhavan itt; mhyo.haitad aksaram uvaca; da %t%, vyajnastsla tu; vyajnastsma iti Jiocuh, damyata, iti na atthett, aum Mi ftovaca, vyapiasistett.
r The threefold offspring of Prajd-pati, gods, men and
W t m ^ their ^ ather as students of sacred
knowledge Having completed their studentship the gods said
J3?S? l f mS i raCt) w ' SHr/ To ^ ottered the te L** (a f f ke , d) * Have ^rstood?- They (said)
yo^eS''HS%r ™i t0 ^nyatar ILSl yourselves . He said, Yes, you have understood.'
The Principal Upamsads V. 2 3.
The gods are said to be naturally unruly and so are asked to practise self-control adaniayHyam svabhdvatah ato ddnta bhavateli £ iisuh usitavanlah. R
aunt- yes, samyak S, anujndm eva vibhajate A, saiyam R
2. atha hainam manusya iicuk' bravitu no bhavan tti; tebhyo haitad evaksaram uvaca; da iti; vyajnasisfa iti, vyajndsisma iti hocuh, datta tti na dttheti; aum Hi hovdca vyajndstslett
2 Then the men said to him, 'Please tell (instruct) us, sir.' To them he uttered the same syllable da (and asked) 'Have you understood 7 ' They said, 'We have understood You said to us "give".' He said, 'Yes, you have understood '
Men are naturally avaricious and so they should distribute their wealth to the best of their ability svabhdvato lubdhd yuyam, ato yathdiaktyd sathvtbhajaia £
3 atha hainam asurd ucuh, bravitu no bhavan tit, tebhyo haitad evaksaram uvaca; da tit, vyajMststa tti, vyajndsisma tti hocuh, dayadhvam tti na attheti, aum iti hovaca vyajnaststeh tad etad evaisa dawi vag anuvadah stanayitnuh — da, da, da tti, damyata, datta, dayadhvam tti tad etat trayam stkset, damam, danam, dayam iti.
3 Then the demons said to him, 'Please tell (instruct) us, sir.' To them he uttered the same syllable da and asked, 'Have you understood?' They said, 'We have understood, you said to us, "dayadhvam," "be compassionate " He said, 'Yes, you have understood ' This very thing the heavenly voice of thunder repeats da, da, da, that is, control yourselves, give, be com- passionate One should practise this same triad, self-control, giving and compassion
The demons are cruel, given to inflicting injury on others, they should have compassion and be land to all- hriird yuyam htmsddt- parah, ato dayadhvam prdntsu dayam kuruleli &
It is suggested that there are no gods or demons other than men If they are lacking in self-control while endowed with other good qualities, they are gods, if they are particularly greedy they are men; if they are cruel and given to inflicting injury on others, they are demons, Men themselves are distinguished into these three classes according to their lack of self-control and the possession of other defects or according to the tendencies of the three gunas na deva asurd va' nye kecana vidyante manusyebhyah manusydnam evddantd ye 'nyatr ullamatr gunats sampannah, te devdh, lobha- pradhdna manusydh, tathdhimsdpardh kritrdh asurdk la eva manusyd addtUalvddi-dosa4rayam apeksya devddi-Sabda-bhdjo bhavanli, ilardmi
ca gman sattva-rajas-tamamsy apeksya ato tnanusyair eoa hi stksitav- yam etai trayam itt. § SeeBG XVI 21. Cp Yaplavalkya Smrtu 1 4 122
ahimsa satyam asteyam saucatn tndriya-mgrahah danam dama daya iantih sarvesam Gautama the Buddha is described as the embodiment of com- passion, karuna, and non-injury, ahimsa. Matrceta in his Saia- pancaiatka says
kam m prathamato vande tvam maha-kamnam uta yayaivam apt dosajnas tvam samsare dhftas ciram Which shall I first extol, you or the great compassion by which you are held so long in samsira, though knowing its faults so well? 59 vinddhesu api vatsalyam pravrttth patttesvapi raudresv apt krPalutvam ka nameyam tavaryata You have affection even for the hostile, benevolence even to the fallen, tenderness even to the cruel, wonderful is your greatness 105. akrosiS.ro jitah ksantya drugdhah svastyayanena ca, satyena capavaktaras traya maitrya jighamsavah You overcame the revilers by forbearance, the malicious by blessing, the slanderers by truth, the wicked by kindness. 122
The three injunctions require us to go about doing good even though we find ourselves in a world of evil Self-control is necessary for we must not be elated by success or deterred by failure. Daya or compassion is more than sympathy or intellectual and emotional feeling It is love m action, fellowship in suffering It is feeling as one s own the circumstances and aspirations to self-perfection which we find in others The practice of these virtues will preserve, promote and enhance the values of life.
Third Brahmana BRAHMAN AS THE HEART
I esa praja-patir yad hrdayam, etai brahma, etai sarvam, tad etat try-aksaram; hr-da-yam iti hr ity ekam aksaram; abhiharanty amai svai canye ca, ya evam veda, da ity ekam aksaram, dada- tyasniai sva£ canye caya evam veda; yam, ity ekam aksaram; eti svargam hkam ya evam veda.
It'is l^T^X^ ^ heart. It is Brahman,
it * all It has three syllables, hr, da, yam. Hr is one syllable His own people and others bring (presents) to whfw S this. Da is one syllable His owrl% 0 pl e ^andThers pve 7o
29 2 The Pnnctpal Upanisads V. 5 1.
him who knows this Yam is one syllable He who knows this goes to the heavenly world
hrdayam- heart, that is the seat of intelligence, hrdayastha buddhr ucyate §
Fourth Brahmana
I tad vat tat, etad eva tad dsa, satyam eva sayo hattan mahad yaksam prathamajam veda, satyam brahmeh, jayatimaml lokdn. jita in wo asav asat, ya evam etan mahad yaksam prathamajam veda; satyam brahmett satyam hy eva brahma
1 This, verily, is that This indeed was that, the true. He who knows that wonderful being, the first bom as the Brahman, conquers these worlds, and conquered likewise may that (enemy) be and become non-existent he (for him) who knows that wonderful being, the first born as the true Brahman
salya the true, the real, sat and tyat, the formed and the formless elements
jtiah conquered, vaslkrtah S and R asau. of the enemy, iatrur upasakasya R
Fifth Brahmana THE REAL EXPLAINED
1 apa evedam agra asuh, td dpah satyam asrjanta, satyam brahma, brahma prajdpattm, prajapatir devan te devah satyam evopdsate, tadetat try-aksaram sa-ti-yam iti sa ity ekam aksaram, ti ity ekam aksaram, yam iti ekam aksaram. prathama ttttame aksare satyam, madhyato'nrtam, tad etad anrtam ubhayatah satyena pangrhUam satyabhiiyam eva bhavait naivam mdvdmsam amrtam hxnasti
I In the beginning this universe was ]ust water. That water produced the true (or the real), Brahman is the true Brahman (produced) Prajd-patt and Praja-pati (produced) the gods Those gods meditated on the real That consists of three syllables, sa, ti, yam' sa is one syllable, tt is one syllable, and
yam is one syllable. The first and the last syllables are the truth; in the middle is untruth This untruth is enclosed on both sides by truth, it partakes of the nature of truth itself. Him "who knows this, untruth does not injure.
Water is the seed of the universe and in the beginning it is in an undifferentiated form: dpo bija-bhiUd jagato vyakrtatmana 'vas- thtah £
In commenting on Thales' choice of water as the first principle, Anstotle suggests that 'he got the notion perhaps from seeing that the nutriment of all things is moist, and that heat itself is generated by the moist and kept alive by it . and that the seed of all creatures has a moist nature, and water is the origin of the nature of moist things.' See W K C. Guthrie The Greeks and their Gods (1950), P 134
There is a play on the letter, so and ya have nothing in common with mrfyu and anrta whereas t occurs in the syllable ti. Untruth leads to death
2. tadyat tat satyam asau sa adttyah. ya esa etasmin mandate puruso yas" cayam dakstne'ksan purusah tav etav anyo'nyasmin pratisthtiau; raimibhir eso'smin praUsthitah prdnatr ayam amusmm, sayadotkramisyan bhavah iuddham evaitan mandalam paSyati nainam ete rasmayah pratydyanh.
2. Now what is the true that is the yonder sun. The person who is there in that orb and the person who is here in the right eye, these two rest on each other. Through his rays that one ***** m tfos one; through the vital breaths this one on that. When one is about to depart, he sees that orb as clear. Those rays no more come to him.
iuddham clear, raimv-prahghdta-ralvitam. R.
3- ya'esa etasmin mandate purusah, tasya bhur iti sirah; ekamiirah, ekam etad aksaram, bhuva Hi bahu; dvau bahu, dve ete aksare; svar th pratisthi; dve prathtsthe dve ete aksare lasyopamsad aliar th; hanti papmdnam jahatt ca,ya evam veda
f 3 «. x. the person m fl** orb > the syllable bhM is the head- iot the head is one and this syllable is one. Bhuvak is the arms
w r ^ are two anns md are syllables Svah is the ™L 1 are r^° feet and these m t* 0 syllables. His secret Sd knows ^ destr °y s evil ««d leaves it
Pnttsiha feet, psda R
itpamsai. secret name, rahasya-nama. R.
294 The Principal Upanisads V 7 i.
4 yo'yam daksme'ksan purusah, tasya bhiir tti itrah, ekam itrah, ekam elad aksaram; bhuva ih balm, dvatt bahii, dve eie aksare, svar tit pratistha, dve pratisthe, dve ete aksare tasyo- pamsad aham tti; hanti papmanam jakdh ca ya evam veda
4 Of this person who is in the right eye, the syllable bhiih is the head The head is one and the syllable is one Bhuvah is the arms There are two arms and these are two syllables Svah is the feet There are two feet and these are two syllables His secret name is 'I * He who knows this destroys evil and leaves it behind
In some cosmogomc hymns Satyam or Skambha is represented as turned upside down, his head being bhiih, his arms bhuvas and his feet svah
Sixth Brahmana THE PERSON
1 manomayo'yam purusah, bhah satyah tasmmn antar-hrdaye yatha vrihtr vd ydvo vd sa esa sarvasyesanah, sarvasyddhtpatih, sarvam tdam pros' ash yad tddm kim ca
1 This person who consists of mind is of the nature of light, is within the heart like a gram of nee or of barley He is the ruler of all, the lord of all and governs all this whatever there is
of the nature of light bha eva satyam, sad.-bha.vah, svarupam yasya so'yam bhah salyah, bhdsvarah 5
By meditating on Brahman m the form of mind, we attain identity with Him as such, for one becomes what one meditates on tarn yatha y at hopasate tad eva bhavatt Satapatha Brahmana X V 2 20
Seventh Brahmana
I. vtdyud brahma ity dhuh, viddndd vtdyut, vidyaty enam p&pmanah.ya evam veda, vtdyud brahmett, vtdyud hy eva brahma. 1. Lightning is Brahman, they say It is called lightning
V 9 i.
Brliad-aranyaka Upanisad
because it scatters (darkness). He who knows it as such that lightning is Brahman, scatters evils (that are ranged against him), for lightning is, indeed, Brahman
scatters destroys, avakhandayatt, vinaiayah Lightning cuts through the darkness of clouds as the knowledge of Brahman cuts through the darkness of ignorance and evil
Eighth Brahmana
1 vacam dhenum upasita tasydi catvdrah stanah; svaha-ka.ro vasat-kdro hanta-kdrah svadlid-kdrahj tasyai dvau stanau dead upapvanh, svaha-karam ca, vasat-karam ca; hanta-karam manu- syah, svadhd-kdrampitarah tasydhprana rsabhah, mano vatsak
1 One should meditate on speech as a milch cow. She has four udders which are the sounds, svaha, vasat, hanta and svadha . The gods live on two of her udders, the sounds svaha and vasat, men on the sound hanta, and the fathers on the sound svadha. The vital breath is her bull, and rmnd the calf.
Ninth Brahmana
I. ayam agnir vaiivanaro yo'yam antah puruse, yenedam annam facyate yad tdam adyate; tasyaisa gltoso bhavah yam stat karnav apidhaya irnoti, sa yadotkramisyan bhavati, nainam gnosam irnoh.
Tlus fire w Wch is here within a person is the Vaisvanara
rn ITTf saI fire ) bv means of wluch the food tha * « eaten is cooked (digested) It is the sound thereof that one hears by covering the ears thus When one is about to depart (from this me) one does not hear this sound.
thus by closing with the fingers, angulibhyam aptdhanam krtva S.
296 The Principal Upantsads V. 11 i.
Tenth Brahmana THE COURSE AFTER DEATH
1 yada vat puruso'smal hkat praih, sa vdyum agacchah, tasmai sa tatra vtphite yatha ratha-cakrasya kham, tena sa urdhva akramate, sa adityam agacchah, tasmai sa tatra viphite yatha lambarasya kham, tena sa urdhva akramate, sa candramasam agacchah, tasmai sa tatra viphite yatha dundubheh kham, tena sa urdhva akramate sa hkam dgacchaiy asokam ahimam, tasmm vasati sasvatih samdh.
1 Verily, when a person departs from this world, he goes to the air It opens out there for him like the hole of a chariot wheel Through that he goes upwards He goes to the sun It opens out there for him like the hole of a lambara. Through that he goes upwards He reaches the moon It opens out there for him like the hole of a drum Through that he goes upwards He goes to the world free from gnef, free from snow. There he dwells eternal years.
lambara a kind of musical instrument, vdditra-msesa £
aiokam free from gnef, free from mental troubles manasa duhkhena
mvarptam S.
ahimam free from snow, free from physical suSenngs, Sarira-duh- hha-varptam &
eternal years He lives there during the lifetime of Htranya-garbha' anantan samvatsaran R
Eleventh Brahmana THE SUPREME AUSTERITIES
1 etad vai ■paramam tapo yad vyahitas tapyate, paramam haiva hkam jayah, ya evam veda, etad vai paramam tapo yam fretam aranyam harantt, paramam haiva hkam jayati, ya evam veda etad vai paramam tapo yam pretam agnav abhyadadhatt. paramam Miva hkamjayah.ya evam veda.
I. Venly, this is the supreme austerity which a man laid up with illness suffers. He who knows this wins the supreme world Venly, this is the supreme austenty when they carry a dead person into the forest He who knows this wins the supreme world Venly, this is the supreme austenty when they lay a dead person on the fire He who knows this wins the supreme world.
laid ab with illness vydthitah, paradi-pangrhitas san. S.
Iffenng is to be' endured We do not condemn it, amndato 'mldcdah saesa.caUmwjmna-tapasad^dlu^kiltnsalt.'b.
Retirement to the forest from the village is ako an austerity, gwHiai aranya-gamanam paramam iapa ih hi prastddham. b.
Twelfth Brahmana
1. annam brahma ity eka ahuh, tan m tatha, puyah vd annam rie prdndt, prdno brahma tiy eka ahuh, tan na tatha, iusyatt vai pram rte'nnai, ete ha tv eva devote, ekadhdbMyam bhutva, paratnatdnl gacchatah tadd ha smaha pratrdah piiaram, htm swd evatvam viduse sadhu kttrydm, htm evdsma asadhu kuryat'l ih. so. ha smaha pdntna. ma pratrda, has tv enayor ekadha
bhuyam bhiitva paramatam gacchatfti tasrnd « haitad uvaca;
vi, iti; annam va% vi, anne himdni saroani bhiddni viftani; ram
ttt, prdno vat ram, prane himdni saroani bhutani ramanie;
sarvdm ha vd asmtn bhutani msanti, saroani bhutani ratnante,
ya evam veda
1 'Brahman is food' say some This is not so, for, venly, food becomes putrid without life 'Life is Brahman' say some. This is not so, for life dries up without food. But these two deities when they become united attain their highest state. So Pratrda said to his father: 'What good, indeed, can I do to one who knows this, or what evil, indeed, can I do to him?' The father said to him with (a gesture of) his hand, 'Oh, no, Pratrda, who attains the highest state (merely) by entering into unity with these two ?' Then he said to him this. 'This is vi. Food is vi, for all these beings rest m food This is ram. The vital breath is ram, for all these beings delight in life. Verily, indeed, all beings enter into him, all beings delight in him who knows this.'
The mutual dependence of life and matter, prana and anna, is brought out
Thirteenth Brahmana MEDITATION ON LIFE-BREATH
I tiktham. prano va tiktham, prdno hidam sarvam utthapayati. uidhdsmdd uktha-vtd vlras Usfkah, ukthasya sayuyyam salokatdm jayati.ya evam veda.
The Principal Upamsads V 13 4
1 The uktlta The life breath, venly, is the uktha for it is the life breath that raises up all this From him there rises up a son who knows the uktlta He who knows this wins union with and abode in the same world as the uktha.
uktha a hymn of praise, saslram S One should meditate on the hfe-breath as the uktha
For uktha as the principal part of the mahd-vrata sacrifice, see Attareya Aranyaka II 1 2 and K U III 3
No man without life ever rises na hy aprdnah kaSad utttsthati 5s
2 yajuh prdno vat yajuh, prune himam sarvdm bhutam yujyante, yujyante hdsmat sarvdnt bhutam sraisthydya. yajusah sayujyam salokatam jayah, ya evam veda
2 The Yajus The life-breath, venly, is the yajus for in life-breath are all beings here united United, indeed, are all beings for (securing) his eminence He who knows this wins union with and abode m the same world as the Yajus
One should meditate on the life-breath as the yajus It is the name of one of the Vedas, but here is used for the principle of union No one without life has the strength to unite with another na hy asati prime kenactt kasyaad yoga-sdmarthyam £
3 sama prano vat sama, prdne himam sarvdm bhutam samyanct, samyanct hdsmai sarvdm bhutam sraisthydya kalpante samnah sayujyam salokatam jay ah, y a evam veda
3 The Sdman The life-breath, venly, is the sdman for in life do all these beings meet All beings here me et for securing his eminence He who knows this wins union with and abode in the same world as the Sdman
kalpante samarthyante 5
4 ksatram prdno vat ksatram prdno hi vat ksatram, trayaie hainam prdnah ksamtoh pra ksatram atram dpnott ksatrasya sayujyam salokatam jayatt, ya evam veda
4 The Ksatra The life-breath, venly, is the rule, for venly, life-breath is rule The life-breath protects one from being hurt He attains a rule that needs no protection He who knows this wins union with and abode in the same world as the Ksatra
ksamtoh Life protects the body from wounds It has the property of self-repair sastrddi-himsilat punar mdtnsendpiirayali yasmdt S ksatram atram V ksatramdtram, obtains identity with the ksatra or becomes the life-breath, prdno bhavati S
V 14. 3 Brhad-dranyaka Vpanisad 299
Fourteenth Brahmana THE SACRED GAYATRl PRAYER
1 bhumir antariksam dyauh ity astav aksardni; astaksaram ha va ekam gdyatrym padam, etad u haivdsya etat, sa yavad esu tnsu lokesu, tdvaddha jayati, yo'sya etad evam padam veda.
1. The earth, the sky and heaven (make) eight syllables. Of eight syllables, verily, is one foot (line) of the Gdyatri. This (one foot) of it is that He who knows the foot of the Gdyatri to be such wins as far as the three worlds extend.
The Gayairi (or Samtri) is a sacred verse of the R. V. It reads: — tat savitur varenyam, bhargo devasya dhimahi, dhiyo yo nah praco- dayat 'We meditate on the adorable glory of the radiant sun; may he inspire our intelligence,' III 57. 10. There is a metre called Gayairi which has three feet of eight syllables each. The Gayairi verse is in this metre
2 rco yajiimsi sdmdni, ity astav aksardni; astaksaram ha va ekam gayatrai padam. etad u haivdsya etat. sa ydvatiyam trayivtdya, tdvad ha jayati yo'sya etad evam padam veda.
2 Rcah (verses) Yapahsi (sacrificial formulas) Sdmdni (chants) (make) eight syllables. Of eight syllables, verily, is one foot of the Gay air \ This (one foot of it) is that (series). He who knows the foot of the Gdyatrl to be such wins as far as this threefold knowledge extends
The three Vedas constitute the second foot of the Gdyatri
3 prdno'pano vydnah, %ty astav aksardni; astaksaram ha va ekam gayatrai padam etad « haivdsya etat. sa yavad idam prdni, tdvad ha jayati, yo'sya etad evam padam veda athdsya etad eva Uiriyam darSatam padam parorajd ya esa tapati; yad vai catur- tham tat iuriyam; darsatam padam Hi, dadria iva hy esah; parorajd iti, sarvam u hy evaisa raja ttpari ilpari tapati. evam hatva inya, yas"asd tapati, yo'sya etad evam padam veda.
3 Prdna (ui-breath), apdna (out-breath), vyana (diffused breath) (make) eight syllables. Of eight syllables, verily, is one foot of the Gdyatri This (one foot of it) is that series ne who knows the foot of the Gdyatri to be such wins as far as his breathing extends. Of this (the GdyatrT) this, indeed, K the fourth, the visible foot, above the dark skies (the sun) ^ho glows yonder This fourth is the same as the iuriya. It is called the visible foot because it has come into sight as it were.
300 The Principal Upantsads V 14 5
He is called above the dark skies, because he glows yonder far higher and higher than everything dark. He who knows that foot of it to be such, he glows with prosperity and fame
dariatam visible dadfsa iva, dfsyata iva
4. saisd gdyatry etasmims turiye darSate pade parorajasi pratisthttd, tad vat tat satye pratisthitam, caksur vai saiyam, caksur hi vat satyam, tasmad yad tddnim dvau vivadamdndv eyatam aham adariam, aham airausam iti ya evath brilyat; aham adarSam tit, tasmd eva iraddadhydma tad vat tat satyam bale pratisthitam, prdno vat balam, tat pr&ne pratisthitam, tasmad ahull balam satydd ogiya ttt, evam vesd gdyatry adhyatmam pratisthttd sd hatsd gaydms tatre, prand vat gaydh; tat prdndms tatre, tad yad gaydms tatre, tasmad gdyatri ndma saydm evdmum sdmtrim anvaha, esawa sd. sayasmd anvdha, tasya prdndms trdyate
4 That Gdyatri rests on that fourth, the visible foot, above the dark skies That again rests on truth Venly, truth is sight; for, venly, truth is sight Therefore, if now, the two persons come disputing, one saying, T saw,' and the other 'I heard,' we should trust the one who says, T saw' Venly, that truth rests on strength Life-breath, venly, is strength Truth rests on life- breath Therefore they say that strength is more powerful than truth Thus is that Gdyatri based with regard to the self The Gdyatri protects the gayas, the gay&s are the hfe-breaths and it protects the life-breaths Now because it protects the life- breath, therefore it is called the Gdyatri That Savitri verse which (the teacher) teaches, it is just this And whomsoever he teaches, it protects his life-breaths
The three-footed Gdyatri consisting of the gross and the subtle worlds, rests with its three feet on the sun yatha miirtamurtatmdkam jagat tn pada gdyatri aditye prahsthita ogiyah ojiyah, more powerful, ojastaram
gaydh life-breaths prandh or the organs such as that of speech which produce sound gdyantUt gaydh vag upalaksttdi caksur-adayab A gaya-tranat gayatri
5 tarn haitam eke sdmtrim anustubham anvahuh vag anustup; etad vacam amibruma ttt na tathd kurydt gdyatrim eva samlrim anttbruydt yadt ha vd apy evam-vid bahv iva pratigrhndti, na havaa- tad gdyatrya ekam cana padam prati
5 Some teach (to the pupil) this Savitri verse as an anustubh
V, 14 7- Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 301
metre (saying) that speech is anustubh and that we impart (teach) that speech to him One should not do like that One should teach the Sdvitri which is the Gayatri Verily, if one who knows thus receive very much (as gifts) that is not at all equal to a single foot of the Ga.ya.tn
There is no such thing as too much for him for he is identified with the universe na hi tasya sarvatmamo bahu-mmasti kim at. S.
6. sa ya imams trin lokdn pumdn praUgrhnvydt, so'sya dot frathamam padam apnuyat; atha yavatiyam trayi vidyd, yas tdvat prattgrhmydi, so'sya dad dvitiyam padam apnuyat; atha ydvai idam pram, yas tdvat pratigrhniyat, -so'sya etat trtiyam fadam apnuyat, athasya etad eva turiyam darsatam padam, •parorajd ya esa tapaU, naiva kenacandpyam; kuta u etdvat prahgrhmydt
6. If one receives these three worlds full (of wealth) he would accept the first foot of it (the Gayatri) If he receives as much as in this threefold knowledge (of the Vedas) he would receive the second foot of it If he receives as much as there is breathing here, he would receive the third foot of it But that fourth, the visible foot, above the dark skies, who glows yonder is not attainable by anyone whatsoever How could anyone receive such (a gift)?
The purport is that the Gayatri should be meditated upon in its entire form tasmdd gayairy evam-prakdropdsyely arthah £
7. tasyd upasthdnam- gdyatn, asy eka-padi dm-padl tn-padi oatus-pady a-pad ast, na ht padyase namas te tunyaya darsatdya ■padaya parorajase, asav ado ma prdpad iti, yam dvisydt, asdv "aw" ^ m Samr ^^ tt m hamdsmai sa kdmafr sam- radhyaU yasmd evam upatisthate, aham adahprdpam %h va
{ \ a sa ^ uta ^ 10n of it: 0 Gayatri, you are one-footed, two- looted, three-footed, four-footed You are footless for you do not go about Salutation to you, the fourth, the visible foot, aoove the dark skies May he not attain this (may the enemy never attain his object) (Should the knower of the Gayatri) 'm if tied towards anyone (he should) either (use this verse) fwfc Wsh not P ros P er -' Indeed that wish is not prospered fw m re S ard t0 whom one salutes thus or 'may I attain wat (cherished wish) of his '
"paslhSna salutation, upetya sthanam, natnas-karanam. S\ going near
302 The Principal Upamsads V. 15 1.
and staying or saluting The act of approaching the gods with a request The request may be imprecatory against another or auspicious for oneself dvi-mdham upasthdnam, abhicdnkam, dbhyu- dayikam ca A
footless m his own unconditioned form, ataJi param-parena mru- padhikena svenatmana'padast S
8 etadd ha vat taj janako vaideho budilam dsvatardsvm uvdca' yan nu ho tad gdyatri-md abruthah, atha katham hasti bhuio vahasiti mukham hy asyah, samrat, na vtddm cakdra, ih hovaca, tasya agmr eva mukham yadi ha va apt bahu ivagnau abhyadadhah, sarvam eva tat samdahaii, evam havoatvam-vii yady apt bahv tva papain kurute, sarvam eva tat sampsdya iuddhah p&to'jaro'mrtah sambhavah.
8 On this point, venly, Janaka (King) of Videha said to Budila AsvatarasVi. 'Ho, how is it that you who spoke of yourself as the knower of Gayatri, have come to be an elephant and are carrying?' 'Because, Your Majesty, I did not know its mouth,' said he Fire is, indeed, its mouth Venly, indeed, even if they lay a large quantity of fuel on the fire it burns it all Even so, (though) one who knows this commits very much evil, bums it all and becomes clean and pure, ageless and immortal
'Why then being a fool like an elephant dost thou carry (the burden of sin of accepting gifts) ? ' Madhva
Fifteenth Brdhmana
1 hiranmayena patrena saiyasydpihitam mukham
tat tvam, pusan, apavrnu, satya-dharmaya drstaye 1 The face of truth is covered with a golden disc Unveil it, 0 Pusan, so that I who love the truth may see it
See Mattrl VI 35 apthttam hidden, for no one whose mind is not concentrated can see it, a-samdhita-cetasam adrsyatvdt S 'Venly, thou art a god that hidest thyself ' Isaiah XLV. 15
mukham face, essential nature, mukha-sadr&am mana ily arthah Kuranarayana
pusan' the sun, the god of light, who is the protector of the world
V 15 3 Brhad-ara^yaka Upanisad 303
jagatahposanatpusaramh. 6. airita-posana-svabhava, whose nature is the protection of those who seek refuge in him. Vedanta Deiika apavrnu remove the -cause of obstruction to the vision, dariana- praiibandha-kdranam apanayet 5 Reality, Heraclitus observed, likes to hide Fragment 123 Being remains essentially concealed and hidden It is the primary mystery. We are said to behold the truth when the real stands naked before us. When we break down the surface of appearances, reality is uncovered satyanlharmaya. . to me who have been worshipping truth or who have been practising virtue as enjoined S to me whose principle is truth The connection of truth with liberation is traditional m Indian thought
The many, if it is divorced from the one, becomes the obscuring veil of the one We must get nd of the opposition of the one and the many, look upon the one as the manifold one which is itself the expression of the Absolute One
2 pusam, ekarse, yama, siirya, fraja-patya, vyuha rasmin samfika-tejah
yat te rupam kalyanatamam, tat te pasyami yo sav asau purusas, so'ham asmt
2 0 Ptisan, the sole seer, 0 Controller, 0 Sun, offspring of Praja-pah, spread forth your rays and gather up your radiant light that I may behold you of loveliest form Whosoever is that person (yonder) , that also am I *
fftamh One who travels alone, eka eva rsati gacchati iiy ekarsih S
4 iif m ° VeS al ° ne ' Siirya ek&ki carail Tmttiri y a Samhtts V* 1 -
yma the controller, sarvasya samyamanad yamah. §. npam Myamtamam. of loveliest form St John of the Cross, ine soul prays to see the Face of God, which is the essential com- munication of His Divinity to the soul, without any intervening mecuum , by a certain knowledge thereof in divinity/ Dom Cuthbert Butler- Western Mysticism (1922), p. 72.
wflaw ami- refers to a form of worship in which the worshipper contemplates the immanent God as one with himself He who "weus m the Sun is one with the light in one's deepest nature. In "nse vet ses, the seeker wishes to have God-realization, a direct inception of the Reality. 'Like as a hart desireth the water-brooks, » longest my soul after thee, 0 God ' Psalm XLI.
3 vayuramfam atnrtam athedam bhasmantam sariranv
M W if 1 ' 0 smara ' totem smara, krato smara, krtam smara.
this b T life enter into the immortal Dreath ; thea ma y ot »y end in ashes O Intelligence, remember, remember
304 The Principal Upamsads V 15 4
what has been done. Remember, 0 Intelligence, what has been done Remember.
amriam anilam immortal breath
Now that I am dying, may my life (vayu) abandoning its bodily adjunct enter the immortal breath B U III 2 13 R V X 16 3 Satapatha. Brahmana X 3 3 8. Aitareya Brahmana II 6 According to his physician Eustochius, the last words of Plotmus which he heard were 'I was waiting for you, before the divine principle m me departs to unite itself with the divine in the universe ' krato O Intelligence — the Intelligence has purposes and plans: samkalpatmaka Cp ' Now venly, a person consists of purpose ' kratu-maya C U III 14 1 At the hour of death, we have to remem- ber our past and also meditate on the Supreme kftam what has been done, may mean the perfected 'Remember perfection '
kratu is also sacrifice The Supreme is the lord of sacrifice
By meditating on the Supreme who is the lord of sacrifice, by surrendering to Him, we pray for the revelation of His Supreme presence kraturiipinam bhagavantamjfiana-yajna-gocaram abhimukhi kurvann tad-anugralmm y Scale Vedanta Dehka
yuyodhy astnaj juharanam eno bkuyislham te nama-uMim vidhema
4 0 Agni (Fire), lead us, along the auspicious path to prosperity, O God, who knowest all our deeds Take away from us deceitful sin We shall offer many prayers unto thee.
See R V I 189 1 who knowest all our deeds It is an expression of humility born of the sense that we are always in God's presence, that all our thoughts and actions are open to His sight He is at all times present with us take away from us deceitful sm It is an imploring or supplication concerning sms God is a searcher not of words but of hearts.
3°5
First Brahmaya
THE SIX BODILY FUNCTIONS AND THE IMPORTANCE OF LIFE-BREATH
1. yo ha vaijyestham ca irestham ca veda, jyesfhai ca iresthas" ca svanam bhavati, prano vai jye4hai ca, sresfhai ca, jyesthas' ca SretfhaS ca svanam bhavati; apt cayesam bwbhusati, ya evam veda.
1. Venly, lie who knows the oldest and the greatest becomes the oldest and the greatest of his own people. Life-breath is, indeed, the oldest and the greatest. He who knows this becomes the oldest and the greatest of his own people as well as of those of whom he wishes so to become.
See CU V. 1, K U III 3, Prasna II. 3.
Oldest and greatest are the attributes of priority in age and excellence The oldest is not necessarily the greatest. The vital force is, however, the first m time as well as in importance.
2. yo ha vm vasistham veda, vasisthah svanam bhavati vdg ww. vasi&ha vasisfhah svanam bhavah. apt cayesam bubhusah ya evam veda.
z. Venly, he who knows the most excellent becomes the most excellent of his own people. Speech is, indeed, the most excellent. He who knows this becomes the most excellent of his own people as well as of those of whom he wishes so to become.
!T^i ktp^' that helpi one to dwell or covers one
splendidly. S ahsayena vasumattvath vasistkatvam R
3- yo ha vai prattsiham veda, pratitisthatt same, prahttsihati «wp caksur vat prahsiha, caksusd hi same ca iurge ca prati- mnah prahtitfkatt same, pratitisthatt durge, ya evam veda
eve ' 5x6 who ^ nows ^ ft™ 1 Dasis k as a fi™ 1 basis on J tt | r ? und » has a firm basis on uneven ground. The eye,
"weea, is the firm basis for with the eye one has a firm basis R even and on uneven ground. He who knows this has a firm on even ground, has a firm basis on uneven ground.
kkna 0 ^ Sttm P a ^^ v zda, sam Msmai padyate, yam kamam Mnii&h ram vai sompat; irotre hime sarve veda abhtsam- veda Sam ^ mai ptdyate, yam kamam kdmayate, ya evam
The Principal Upam$ads
VI i 8.
4 Venly, he who knows prosperity, for him, indeed is attained whatever desire he desires The ear, indeed, is pros- perity for in the ear are all these Vedas attained For him who knows this, whatever desire he desires is attained.
Only he who has the organ of hearing can study the Vedas
5 yo ha vd dyatanam veda, dyatanam svdndm bhavah, Syatanam jananam mam vd dyatanam, dyatanam svdndm bhavah, dyatanam jananam, ya cvam veda
5 Venly, he who knows the abode becomes the abode of his own people as well as of (other) people The mind, indeed, is the abode He who knows this becomes the abode of his own people as well as of (other) people
6 yo ha vat prajdtim veda, prajdyate ha prajayd pasubhth. reto vat prajdtih, prajdyate ha prajayd paiubhih, ya evam veda
6 Venly, he who knows procreation procreates himself with offspring and cattle Semen, venly, is procreation He who knows this, procreates himself with progeny and cattle
By semen is meant the organ of generation, relasa prajananen- dnyam upalaksyate §
7. ie heme prdndh, aham sreyase vivadamdndh brahma jagmuh, tadd hocuh, ko no vasi§tha th tadd hovdea, yasmm va utkrdnia tdam sarlram pdpiyo manyate, sa vo vasistjta th
7. These vital breaths, disputing among themselves about their self-supenonty went to Brahma and said, 'Which of us is the most excellent?' He then said, that one of you is the most excellent after whose departure this body is thought to be worse off.
vasisfha V, fresfha
8 vdg ghoccakrdma. sd samvatsaram pro$ya, dgatya, uvdea katham asakata mad rtejivttum itt, te hocuh, yatlid kaldh avadanto vded, prdnantah prdnena, pasyantas caksusd, irnvantah irotrem, vidvdmso manasd, prajdyamdndretasd, evam ajivipneit pravivesa ha vdk
8 (The organ of) speech departed and having remained absent for a year came back and said, 'How have you been able to live without me?' They said, 'As the dumb, not speaking with speech but breathing with the breath, seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear, knowing with the mmd, procreating with the semen Thus have we lived ' Then speech entered in
VI i 12. Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 307
9 caksur hoccakrdma. tat samvaisaram prosya, dgatya, uvaca katham asakata mad rte pvitum 1U te hocuh yathdndhdh, apaiyan- tii caksusa, pranantah prdnena, vadanto vdcd, irnvantah srotrena, vi&vamso manasd, prajdyamdnd relasd, evam ajivtsmeti pravi- veia ha cahul}
9 The eye departed and having remained absent for a year came back and said, 'How have you been able to live -without me'' They said 'As the blind not seeing with the eye, but breathing with the breath, speaking with the speecb, hearing with the ear, knowing with the mind, procreating with the semen Thus have we lived ' Then the eye entered in.
10 irotram hoccakrdma tat samvaisaram prosya, dgatya, uvaca, kaiham asakata mad rtejivttum iti. tehocuh;yathd badhrdh asrnvantah hotrena, pranantah prdnena, vadanto vdcd, paiyantai caksusa, vidvamso manasd, prajdyamdnd retasd, eoam afivtsmeh. prawveh ha irotram
10 The ear departed and having remained absent for a year came back and said, 'How have you been able to live without me?' They said, 'As the deaf not hearing with the ear, but breathing with the breath, speaking with the speech, seeing with the eye, knowing with the mind, procreating with semen Thus have we lived ' Then the ear entered in
11. mano hoccakrdma tat samvaisaram prosya, dgatya, uvaca, katham aSakata mad rte fivitum tU. te hocuh yathd mugdhdJt avidumso manasd, pranantah prdnena, vadanto vdcd, pasyantalii caksusa, irnvantah srotrena, prajdyamdnd retasd, evam afivtsmeti fiavivda ha manah.
H The mind departed and having remained absent for a year came back and said 'How have you been able to live without me?' They said, 'As the stupid not knowing with the mind but breathing with the breath, speaking with the speech, seeing with, the eye, hearing with the ear, procreating with the semen Thus have we lived Then the mind entered in.
12. reto hoccakrdma tat samvaisaram prosya, dgatya, uvaca: «wum aiakata mad rte jiviHm %h te hocuh, yathd hlMb, itkP^ retas d, pranantah prdnena, vadanto vdcd, pasya-
Cfl ™««, irnvantah irotrena, vidvdrhso manasd, evam tyvismeh pravtveSa ha retah
ham ^ len 56111611 organ, of generation) departed and «"ng remained absent for a year came back and said- 'How
308 The Principal Upantsads VI 1. 14
have you been able to live without me?' They said, 'As the impotent not procreating with semen, but breathing with the breath, speaking with the speech, seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear, knowing with the mind Thus have we lived.' Then the semen entered in
13 afha ha prima utkramisyan, yathd maha-su-hayah satndha- vah pagwsa-s'ankhun samvrhet, evam hatvemdn pranan samva- varha te hoctth ma bhagavah utkramih, na vat saksyamas ivad rie fivitwm ttt, tasyo me bahm kuruteh, tatheh
13 Then as the life breath was about to depart, even as a large fine horse of the Sindhu land might pull up the pegs to which his feet are tied, even so did it pull up those vital breaths together They said. 'Venerable Sir, do not go out, venly, we shall not be able to live without you.' 'If I am such make me an offering ' 'So be it '
samdhavah sindhu-desa-prabhavah. R
to which his feet are tied pada-bandhana-sankhun R
14 sd ha vdg uvaca yad vd aham vasisthdsmt, tvam tad vasistho'sih yad vd aham pratisthasmi, tvam tat pratistho 'si h caksuh yad vd aham sampad asmi, tvam tat sampad asi, ih srotram yad vd aham dyatanam asmi, tvam tad dyatanam asi, th manah, yad va aham prajdttr asmt, tvam tat prajattr asi, ttt retah. tasyo me kith annam, kim vasa ttt. yad idam him ca, a ivabhyah, a krimtbhyah, a kita-patangebhyah, tat te annam, dpo vasa ttt na ha va asydn annam jagdham bhavah, nanannam pratigrhitam, ya evam etad anasydnnam veda tad vidvdmsah irotnyd aiisyanta dcdmantt, ahtvdcdmantt, etam eva tad anam anagnam kurvanto manyante
14 Speech said, 'Verily, that m which I am most excellent in that are you the most excellent ' 'Venly that m which I am a firm basis va that are you a firm basis,' said the eye 'Venly, that m which I am prospenty, in that are you prospenty,' said the ear. 'Venly, that in which I am an abode, m that are you an abode,' said the mind 'Venly, that in which I am pro- creation, m that are you procreation,' said the semen 'If such I am, what is my food, what my dwelling?' 'Whatever there is here, even unto dogs, worms, insects and birds, that is your food, water is your dwelling He who knows that as the food of breath, by him nothing is eaten that is not food, nothing is received that is not food ' Therefore wise men who are versed
Brhai-dranyaka Upanisad
in the Vedas when they are about to eat, take a sip (of water) ; after they have eaten they take a sip. So indeed, they think they make that breath not naked (they remove its nakedness).
my excellence is yours mama vasisthatvam tvad-adhinam
even unto dogs whatever is food for the dogs, etc , is food for you.
yat km cttprambhir adyamdnam annum, tat sarvam tavannam §.
Second Brahmana
1. ivetaketur ha vd druneyah pancdldndm parisadam ajagama. sa ajagdma javodhm pravdhanam paricdrayamdnam. tarn uiiksya, abhyuvada, kumdra iti. sa, bhoh, %ti pratituirdva amsisto no ast pitreti, aunt ih hovaca.
1 Venly, SVetaketu Aruneya went up to an assembly of the PaScalas He went up to Pravahana Jaivali who was having his servants wait on him. Seeing him, he addressed him, Young man' He answered, 'Sir.' Then (the King said) 'Have you been taught by your father?' 'Yes,' he said.
SeeCU V 3 10
2 vettJia yathemdh prajdh prayatyo viprahpadyante, iti na m hovaca vettho yathemam lokam punar dpadyanU, tit. na %ti f mv ^a vettho yathdsau loka evam bahubhih punah pundl} prayadbhir na sampuryate ttt na iti Jiaivovdca. vettho yatxthydm ttmyam hutdydm dpah purusa-vaco bhutvd samutthdya vadanti, «» «a ih havoovaca vettho deva-ydnasya vd pathah pratip'adam dv^^ V& ' yat ^ rtvS ' deva-ydnam vd panthdnam prattpa- tyante pitr-ydnam vd. api hi na rser vacah irutam.
ave srti airttavam pitrndm aham devdnam via martydndm; tabhyam tdam msvam emt sameh yad antard pitaram mdta- ramca
& nahatn ata ekam cana veda, iti hovaca. hfp\ y ° U know how P eo Pl e here on departing (from this how riP 81318 m Cerent-directions?' 'No,' said he 'Do you know vJ vT y Come back mt0 thls world?' 'No,' said he 'Do ?vhoT° W y ^ y° nder world 1S not me6 - U P mtil the man y
whirt w and agam ' s° there? ' ' N °/ said he - ' Do y° u ™
0Wat ">n that is offered the water becomes the voice
3io The Principal Upantsads VI 2 4
of a person, rises up and speaks ?' 'No,' said he 'Do you know the means of access to the path leading to the gods or of the one leading to the fathers? 1 e by doing what the people go to the path of the gods or the path of the fathers? For we have heard even the saying of the seer I have heard of two paths for men, the one that leads to fathers and the one that leads to the gods By these two all that lives moves on, whatever there is between father (heaven) and mother (earth) ' 'Not a single one of them do I know,' said he
srli gati
vtsvam all, samastam £
This (earth) is the mother and that (heaven) is the father tyam vat mata asau pita" Satapatha Brahmana XIII 297, Tattttriya Brdhmana III 8 9 1 Heaven and earth are the two halves of the shell of the universe, dyavd-prttnvydv anda-kapale £
3 athatnam vasatyopamantraydm cahe anddriya vasalim kumdrah pradudrdva sa djagdma pitaram, tarn hovdca itt vdva hla no bhavan pttrdnusistdn avocad th, katham sumedha, ttt paiica via prasndn rdjanya-bandhur aptdksit, tato natkam cana vedelt katame ta th wui tit ha praiikdny uddjahdra
3 Then he (the King) gave him an invitation to stay Disregarding the invitation to stay the young man ran off He went to his father To him he said, 'Verily, you have, before, spoken of me as well instructed ' 'What then, wise one?' (said the father) 'Five questions, that fellow of the princely class asked me Not a single one of them do I know ' 'What are these (questions) ?' 'These,' and he repeated the topics
4 sa hovdca tathd nas tvam, tdta, janithd, yathd yad aham kim ca veda sarvam aham tat tubhyam avocam preht Ut tatra pratitya, brahmacaryam vatsydva itt bliavan eva gacchatu ttt sa djagdma gautamo yatra pravdlumasya jawaUr dsa tasmd dsanam dhrtya udakam dhdraydm cakdra, atlta hdsmd arghyam cakdra, tarn hovdca, varam bhagavate gautamdya dadma ttt
4 He (the father) said 'My child, you should know me as such, that whatsoever I myself know, all that I have told you But come, let us go there and live as students of sacred know- ledge ' 'You may go, sir,' said the son Then Gautama went forth to where (the place) Pravahana Jaivah was (The King) brought him a seat and had water brought for him He gave him a respectful welcome Then he said to him. 'A boon we offer to the revered Gautama '
VI 2 8 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 311
5 Then he said 'You have promised me this boon Please tell me the speech you uttered in the presence of the young man '
6 He (the King) said, 'Verily, Gautama, that is among divine boons Please state some human boon.'
7 sa hovaca vtjndyate ha ash htranyasydpattam, go-asvandm dasinam pravdrdndm partdhdnasya; ma no bhavdn bahor anan- tasydparyantasydbhyavaddnyo bhM ttt sa vat, gautama, iirthenec- c/wsa ttt upatmy aham bhavantam. tit vdcd ha smaiva purva upayanh sa hopdyana-ktrtyovdsa.
7 Then he said 'It is well known that I have abundance of gold, of cows and horses, maid servants, retinue and apparel Be not ungenerous towards me, sir, m regard to that which is the abundant, the infinite, the unlimited ' 'Then, verily, 0 Gautama, you should seek it m the usual form.' 'I come to you, sir, as a pupil ' With this declaration, verily, indeed, the ancients approached as pupils So with the announcement of coming as a pupil he remained
frawrmam retinue, panvardndm S
Mhena m the usual prescribed form, nydyena sdstra-vthttena S" 1 irtlta is a place of pilgrimage generally on the bank of a sacred
ow^tk 1 near a holy spnng lt 1S denved from the root ' ' t0 cross over inose who cross over the stream wash their sms and become punned
According to the tradition, seekers belonging to higher castes have Decome pupus to teachers of a lower caste, by living with them tl*~A necessar y for them to touch the feet of the teacher or serve mem A simple declaration will do
. ?. M j ^wSca* tatha nas tvam, gautama, maparddhas tava ca
brih yaai& ' %yam Vld y etah purvam na kasmtmi cam aiwsna ttt,a Sttj tdm tv aham tubhyam vaksyamt ko ht toavoam trmnbm arhatt pratydkhydtum ttt
nsV he ( the Km §) said " 'Please do not be offended with This S ^ your P aternal grandfathers did not (with ours). »C; ^ has never hitherto dwelt with any Brahmana vo 7«,?. eVer - But 1 staU teach it to you, for who can refuse }0Uwhen you speak like this.'
312 The Principal Upantsads VI. 2. 12
9. asau vat loko agmh, gautama tasyadttya eva samit, rasmayo dhtlmah, ahar arcih, dtso'ngdrah, avdntaradtio visphulingdh, tasmmn etasmmn agnau devah sraddham juhvati, tasyd ahutyai soma raja sambhavatt
9 'Yonder world, Gautama, is (sacrificial) fire The sun itself is its fuel, the rays its smoke, the day the flame, the quarters the coals, the intermediate quarters the sparks In this fire the gods offer faith Out of that offering King Soma arises
yonder world heaven dyu-loka
the fuel because of kindling, samtndlianat S Heaven is illumined by the sun
king, of the manes and brahmanas pttfndtn brdhmandnam ca S
10 parjanyo vd agmh gautama tasya samvatsara eva samit, abhrani dhumah, vidyud arcih, asamr angardh, hrddumyo visphulingdh, tasmmn etasmmn agnau devah somam rdjdnam juhvati, tasyd ahutyai vrstih sambhavatt
10 'Parjanya (the god of ram), Gautama, is fire The year itself is its fuel, the clouds its smoke, the lightning the flame, the thunder-bolt the coals, the thundering the sparks In this fire the gods offer the king Soma Out of that offering ram arises
parjanya ram god vrstt-pravartako devah R the clouds its smoke A quotes Kahdasa's Meghad&ta ash khalv abhrdndm dhiima-prabhavalve gdthd, dhuma-jyohs-salila-marutam sanmpdtah kva megliah
11 ayam vat loko'gmh, gautama. tasya prthtvy eva samit, agmr dhumah, rdtrtr arcih, candramd angardh, naksatrant visphulingdh, tasmmn etasmmn agnau deva vrsttm juhvati, tasyd dkutyd annam sambhavatt
11 'This world, venly, Gautama, is fire The earth itself is its fuel, fire the smoke, night the flame, the moon the coals, the stars the sparks In this fire the gods offer ram Out of that offering food anses
this world the abode where all creatures are born, experience the results of their past work, which consists of action, its factors and its results prdm-janmopabliogasrayah kriyd-karaka-phala-vtiisfah. S
12 puruso vd agtith, gautama tasya vydttam eva samit, prdno dhumah, vdg arcih, caksur angardh, irotram visphulingdh, tasmmn etasmmn agnau deva annam juhvati, tasya ahutyai retah sambhavatt.
Brhad-aravydka Vpanisad
12 'The person (man) verily, Gautama, is fire. The open mouth itself is its fuel, vital breath the smokes, speech the flame, the eye the coals, the ear the sparks. In this fire the gods offer food. Out of that offering semen arises.
open mouth vivrtam mukham. S.
13 yosa va agmh, gautama. tasyd upastha eva samit, lomani dhumah, yomr amh, yad antah Jtaroh U'ngarah, abhinanda msphuhngah, tasminn eUtsminn agnau deva reto juhvati, tasyd ahdyai purusah sambhavaii. sa jivah yuvaj jivati. atJia yada mnyate.
13 'The woman, verily, Gautama, is fire. The sexual organ itself is its fuel; the hairs the smoke, the vulva the flame, when one inserts, the coals; the pleasurable feelings the sparks; In this fire the gods offer semen Out of this offering a person arises He lives as long as he lives Then when he dies,
Sexual intercourse is treated as a kind of soma sacrifice, where the household fire is identified with the wife. The sacrificial fire is the divine womb into which one pours (siiicaii) himself and from which a solar rebirth ensues
mserts. antah-karanam, nmthuna-vyaparah §.
The question about the number of offerings before water rises up possessed of a human voice and speaks is answered.
14 athainam agnaye harantt, tasyagnir evagnir bhavati, samit samit, dhumo dhumah, arcir arcih, angdrd angdrdh, visphulvftgd vtsphdtngdh tasmmn etasmmn agnau devdh purusaih y'uhvah; tasya ahitiyai puruso bhdsvara-varnah sambhavaii.
14 'They carry him to (be offered in) fire. His fire itself becomes the fire, fuel the fuel, smoke the smoke, flame the fiame, coals the coals, sparks the sparks In this fire the gods offer a person Out of this offering the person, having the colour of light, arises
bhasvam-varnah having the colour of light, radiant, exceedingly bright, having been purified by the rites performed from conception to cremation- aiiiaya-diptiman msekadibhtr antyahtty anivaih karmabhis samskrtalvat §
15 te ya evam etad vtduh, ye cam! aranye iraddlidm satvam ufasak, icmr ablnsambhavanU, arciso'hah, ahna aMrvamd- m-paksam .dpuryamdna-paksad yan san masan udann Sditva eti mascbhyo dcm-hkam, deva-lokdd ddityam, ddUyU vSat' ian vardyntan puruso mdnasa etya frahma-lokdn gamlyat%
The Principal Upamsads
tesu brahtna-lokcsu parol} paravato vasanh. tcsam na punar avrttih
15 'Those who know this as such and those too who meditate with faith in the forest on the truth, pass into the light, from the light into the day, from the day into the half-month of the waxing moon, from the half-month of the waxing moon into the six months during which the sun travels northward, from these months into the world of the gods, from the world of the gods into the sun, from the sun into the lightning (fire). Then a person consisting (born) of mind goes to those regions of lightning and leads them to the worlds of Brahma In those worlds of Brahma they live for long periods Of these there is no return
who with faith meditate on the truth Sraddlid-yitktds santak Js
manasah consisting (born) of mind A person living in the world
of Brahma sent forth, created by Brahma, by the mmd brakma-
loka-vasi puruso hrahmana manasd srs(ah
pardh exalted mrattsaydnandai£varya-§dhnah R
paravato V pardvanto R
16 atka ye yajnena ddnena tapasd lokdii jayantt te dhilmam abkisambfiavantt, dhiimdd ratrvm, rdtrer apaksiyamdna-pak$am, apaksiyamdna-paksddydn san indsan dakswddttya ett, mdsebhyah pitr-lokam, pitr-lokdc candram, te candram prapydnnam bliavaiitt, tarns Mr a devd yathd somam rdjdnam apyayasva, apakstyasveti, evam endms tatra bhaksayanti, tesdm yadd tat paryavaiti, athemam evdkdSam abhimspadyante, dkd&dd vdyum, vdyor vrshm, vrsfeh prthivim; te prthivim prapydnnam bhavanh, te punah punisagnau huyante, tato yosdgnau jdyante lokdn pratyu- tthdymas ta evam evdnupanvartante atha ya etau panthdnau na viduh, te kitdh, patangdh, yad tdam dandaiukam
16 'But those who by sacrificial offerings, charity and austerity conquer the worlds, they pass into the smoke (of the cremation fire), from the smoke into the night, from the night into the half-month of the waning moon, from the half- month of the waning moon into the six months during which the sun travels southward, from these months into the world of the fathers, from the world of the fathers into the moon Reaching the moon they become food There the gods, as they say to king Soma, increase, decrease, even so feed upon them there When that passes away from them, they pass forth into this space, from space into air, from air into ram, from ram
VI 3 i. Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad 315
into the earth Reaching the earth, they become food Again, they are offered in the fire of man Thence they are bom in the fire of -woman with a view to going to other worlds Thus do they rotate But those who do not know these two ways, become insects, moths and whatever there is here that bites."
This Brahmana, CU III ro, KU I give different versions of the two ways after death, but they all agree that there is repeated return to rebirth in forms determined by the deeds of the past This process will continue until saving knowledge is attained, which frees the soul from the necessity of rebirth
Third Brahmaiia
I sa yah kamayeta' mahat prapnuydm tit, ttdagayana apuryamdna-paksasya punyahe dvddasdham upasad-vrati bhutvd, audumbare kamse camasa va sarvausadham phalamh sambhrtya, pansamuhya, panlipya, agmm upasamadhaya, paristirya, aoria- jyatit samskrlya, puritsd naksatreqa, mantham sammya, julioh.
ydvanfo devas tvayt, jdta-vedah,
tiryanco ghnanti pimisasya kkmdn,
tebhyo'ham bhdga-dheyam jtihomt:
te ma irptdh sarvaih kdmais tarpayantu svdha
yd hrasci mpadyate
aham vidharamh
torn ivd ghrtasya dhdraya
yajc samrddhamm aham, svdhd
I Whoever may wish, "I would attain greatness in the northern course of the sun or on an auspicious day of the half- month of the waxing moon, having performed one upasad ceremony for twelve days, having collected in a dish made of the wood of the sacred fig tree or in a cup, all herbs and their fruits, having swept around, having smeared around, having built up a fire, having strewn it around, having purified the melted butter in the prescribed manner, having compounded the offering on a day presided over by a male star, makes an offering, saying 0 fire (aU-knower), to all those gods under
3i6
The Principal Upantsads VI 3 3
you who spitefully slay the desires of a person, I offer them a share Let them, being satisfied satisfy me with all desires Hail To that deity who turns out spiteful under your protec- tion, saying I support all, I offer this stream of melted butter. Hail
greatness mahatlvam §
all kerbs and their fruits sarvausadha-phala-vihstam S all-knowing jdtamjdlam vettt vdjatejate miyata iti
2 jyesthdya svahd, iresthdya svahd, ity agnau hutvd, manihe samsravam avanayatt
prdndya svahd, vaststhdyat svahd, ity agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt
vdce svahd, prattsfhdyat svahd, ity agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt
caksuse svahd, sampade svahd, tty agnau hutvd manthe sams- ravam avanayatt
irotraya svahd, dyatandya svahd, tty agnau hutvd manthe sams- ravam avanayatt
manase svahd, prajdtyat svahd, tty, agnau hutvd manthe sams- ravam avanayatt
retase svahd tty agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt
2 'To the oldest, hail, to the greatest, hail' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion To the vital breath, hail, to the richest, hail' saying this, he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion *To speech, hail, to the firm basis, hail (saying this) he offers an oblation m the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion 'To the eye, hail, to prosperity, hail' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion 'To the ear, hail; to the abode, hail' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder m the mixed potion 'To the mind, hail, to procreation, hail' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder m the mixed potion 'To the semen, hail' (saying this) he offers an oblation m the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion
3 agnaye svahd, tty agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt samaya svahd, tty agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt. bhuh svahd tty agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt. bhuvah svahd tty agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayatt svah svahd tty, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam
VI 3 4 Brhad-dranyaka Upanisad 317
avanayati bhur bhuvah svah svaha ity, agnau hutvd months samsravam avandyati brahmane svaha ity, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati ksatrdya svaha, ity, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati bhutdya svaha ity, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati bhavisyate svaha ity, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati. vihdya svaha ity agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati. sarvdya svaha, ity, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati prajapataye svaha, ity, agnau hutvd manthe samsravam avanayati.
3 'To fire, hail,' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder m the mixed potion. 'To the moon, hail,' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder m the mixed potion. 'To the e"arth, hail,' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion 'To the atmosphere, hail,' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion. 'To the sky (heaven) hail,' (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion. 'To the earth, atmosphere and sky, hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion. 'To the Brahmanahood, hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion 'To the ksatrahood, hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion 'To the past, hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation m the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion. 'To the future, hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion. 'To the universe, hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation m the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion. 'To all (things), hail/ (saying this) he offers an oblation m the fire and pours the re- mainder in the mixed potion. 'To Praja-pah, hail/ (saving this) he offers an oblation in the fire and pours the remainder in the mixed potion.
4- athatnam abhmrsah, bhramad asi, palad asi, pwrnam asi prasiabdham asi, eka-sabham asi, hmkrtam asi, hmkriyamdnam ast, udgttham ast, udgiyamdmm asi irdvitam asi, pratydirdvitam asi ardre samdiptam asi, vibhur ast, prabhur asi, annam ast, jyoiir ast, nidhanam ast, samvargo'sih.
4 Then he touches it (the mixed potion) saying- 'vou are the moving (as breath), you are the burning (JZ), you S
3*8 The Principal Upamsads VI 3. 6
the full (as the sky), you are the steadfast (as the sky), you are the one resort (as the earth), you are the sound hm that is made (at the beginning of the sacrifice by the prastotr) You are the making of the sound hm You are the loud chant (sung by the udgatr at the beginning of the sacrifice) You are the chanting You are recited (by the adhvaiyu) and are recited back (by the dgnidhra) You are the glowing m the moist (cloud) You are the pervading, you are the ruler You are food (as the moon) You are light (as fire) You are the end You are that m which all things merge.'
prastdbdham' steadfast, mskampam still A ardrc m the cloud, meghodare A nidhanam- end, layah A
5 Then he raises it (saying), 'You know all We too are aware of your greatness He is, indeed, the King, the Ruler, the Highest Lord May he make me the king, the ruler and the highest lord '
See C U V 2 6 amamsi You know all, tvam sarvam mjanasi A he the vital breath, pram rdjadi-gunah A
6 athainam dcamati tat savitur varenyam madhu void rtdyate, madhu ksaranh sindhavah, madhvir nah santv osadhth, bhuh svaha, bhargo devasya dhimahi, madhu naktam utosasah, madhumat pdrthwam rajah, madhu dyaur astu nah pita, bhuvah svaha, dhiyo yo nah pracodaydL madhumdn no vanaspatih, madhuman astu siiryah, madhvir gavo bhavantu nah, svah svaheti sarvam ca samtrlm anvaha, sarvds ca madhumalih aham evedam sarvam bhuydsam, bhur bhuvah svah svaheti, antata dcamya, panl praksalya, jaghanendgmm prdk-sirah samviiatt pratar adityam upatisthate dtsdm eka-pundankam asi, aham manusyandm eka-pundarikam bhuydsam iti yatheiam elya, jaghanendgmm asino vam&am japati
6 Then he sips it (saying) 'On that adorable light The winds blow sweetly for the righteous, the rivers pour forth honey May the herbs be sweet unto us To earth, hail Let us meditate on the divine glory May the night and the day be sweet May the dust of the earth be sweet May heaven, our father, be sweet to us. To the atmosphere, hail May he inspire
VI 3 10 Brliad-dranyaka Upamsad 319
(illumine) our understanding May the tree be sweet unto us May the sun be sweet, may the cows be filled with sweetness for us To the heaven, hail He repeats the whole Savitri hymn and all the verses about the honey (saying), May I indeed be all this, hail to the earth, atmosphere and heaven Having thus sipped all, having washed his hands, he lies down behind the fire with his head towards the east In the morning he worships the sun (saying) of the quarters (of heaven), 'you are the one lotus flower May I become the one lotus flower among men ' Then he goes back the same way (by which he came), sits behind the fire (on the altar) and recites the (genealogical) line (of teachers)
SeeRV III 62 10, 1 go. 6-8 varenyam adorable, varaniyam. A naktam rainh A idosasah divasah A
7 tarn hattam udddlaka drunir vdjasaneyaya ydjnavalkyd- yantevdsina uktvovaca, apx ya enam suske sthanau msvncet, jdyeran sdkhah, praroheyuh paldsdntti
7 Then Uddalaka Arum told this to his pupil, Vajasaneya Yapavalkya and said, 'If one should sprinkle this even on a dry stump, branches would grow and leaves spring forth '
leaves patrani R
8 clam u Jtavoa vdjasaneyo ydjiiavalkyo maihukdya pamgyd- ydnievdsma uktvovaca, apt ya enam suske sthanau msvncet jdyeran Sdkltdh praroheyuh paldidnitt.
jAJ* 1611 V& jasaneya Yapavalkya told this to his pupil Madhuka, the son of Paingi and said 'If one should sprinkle this even on a dry stump, branches would grow and leaves spring forth '
t 9 clam u haiva madhukah pamgyas ciildya bhdgavtttaye ntcvasma uktvovaca, apt ya enam suske sthanau msifoti jaycian SdkMh, ptaroheyuh paldsdntti
9 Then Madhuka Paingya told this to his pupil Cula Bhaea- vitti and said 'If one should sprinkle this even on a dry stump branches would grow and leaves spring forth '
Jlf- mi u J mva ciil ° ^dgavUhr jdnakdya dyasthund- yantcvaswa uktvovaca, apt ya enam Suske sthdmu nisifcet nycransakhdh praroheyuh paldidmti mstneet
320 The Principal Upamsads VI 3 13.
10 Then Ciila Bhagantti told this to his pupil Janaki Ayasthiina and said 'If one should sprinkle this even on a dry stump, branches would grow and leaves spring forth '
11 etam u Imva janakir dyasthmiah saiyakdmdya jabala yantevdsina uklvovdca, apt ya mam suske sthanau msiiicet, jdyeran Sakhah, pratoheynh palasaniti
11 Then Janaki Ayasthiina told this to his pupil Satyakama Jabala and said 'If one should sprinkle this even on a dry stump, branches would grow and leaves spring forth '
12 etam u haiva satyakamo jdbdlo'ntevastbhya nktvovdca, apt ya enam iuske sthanau msincet, jdycran sdklidh praroheyuh palasaniti tarn etam ndputraya vdnante'vdsme vd bruyat
12 Then Satyakama Jabala told this to his pupils and said 'If one should sprinkle this even on a dry stump, branches would grow and leaves spring forth One should not tell this to one who is not a son or to one who is not a pupil '
For a similar prohibition about teaching sacred knowledge, see SU VI 22, Mattri VI 29
S mentions that the two, the son and the pupil are declared to be eligible to receive sacred knowledge They are chosen out of the six_ qualified learners wdyddhtgame sat tirtham
A mentions the six, a pupil, a knower of the Vedas, an intelligent person, one who pays, a dear son and one who exchanges another branch of learning Stsyah irotnyo medhavi dhanadayi pnyah pxdro vidyaya vidya-dateti sat tirtham
13 catur auduvibaro bhavah, audumbarah sruvah, audum- barai camasah, audumbara idhmah,audttmbaryd upamanthanyau, dasa grdmydni dhdnyam bhavanti mht yavds ttla-mdsa anu- pnyamgavo godhiimdi ca masuras ca klialvdi ca khalakhtilds ca, tan pistdn dadhmi madhum ghrta upasiiicaU, ajyasya juhoti
13 Fourfold is the wood of the sacred fig tree (four things are made of it) , the spoon is of the wood of the sacred fig tree, the bowl is of the wood of the sacred fig tree, the fuel is of the wood of the'sacred fig tree and the two churning rods are of the wood of the sacred fig tree There are ten cultivated grams (used), viz nee and barley, sesasum and beans, millet, and panic seeds, wheat, lentils, pulse and vetches They should be ground and soaked in curds, honey and clarified butter And (he) offers melted butter as an oblation
Brhad-dranyaka Vpanisai
Fourth Brdhmana
I. esdm vai bhutdndm prthim rasah, prthivyd dpah, apdm osadhayah, osadhindm puspdm, puspdndm phaldm, phaldndm purusah, puru$asya retah.
1. The earth, verily, is the essence of all these beings; of earth (the essence is) water; of water (the essence is) plants; of plants (the essence is) flowers, of flowers (the essence is) fruits, of fruits (the essence is) the man, of man (the essence is) semen.
The ceremony for obtaining a son of right qualities is given here
% sa ha pra.jarpa.tir iksdm cakre: hanta, asmai pratisihdm kalpaydniti; sa sfriyam sasrp; tarn srstvddha ttpasta; tasmat striyam adha updsita, sa etam prdncam grdvdnam atmana eva samudaparayat, tenaindm abhyasrjat
2. And Prajd-pah thought (within himself) 'Come, let me make a firm basis (abode) for him ' So he created woman. Having created her, he revered her below. So one should revere woman below. He stretched out for himself that which projects With that he impregnated her
gravanam- a stone for pressing out soma pice sonidbhtsavopala-sthdnlyam kathnya-samdnyat prajamnendnyam 5s
3. iasyd vedtr upasthah, lomdm barhih, carmddhisavane, samxddho madhyatastau muskau; sa ydvdn ha vat vajapeyena yajamdnasya loko bhavatt [tdvdn asyaloko bhavatt), ya evam vidvdn adhopahdsam carati, asdm strindm sukrtam vrnkte atha ya tdam avtdvS.11 adhopahdsam carati, dsya sinyah sukrtam wfyate
3- Her lower part is the (sacrificial) altar- (her) hairs the (sacrificial) grass, her skin the so»f«-press The two labia of the vulva are the fire in the middle Venly, as great as is the world of him who performs the Vajapeya sacrifice (so great is the world of him) who, knowing this, practises sexual inter- course he turns the good deeds of the woman to himself but £e, who without knowing this, practises sexual intercourse ms good deeds women turn into themselves '
vcdt- vedtka vttrama-sthanam, place of rest.
™f?"W sanau y°M-pdrsvayoh kathtnau md^a-kltandau A attttopahasam sexual intercourse matthunam. R.
322 The Principal Upamsads VI. 4 5
These passages indicate the intimate connection between the Alharva Veda and the Upamsads Some practices in the latter are treated m the manner of the Atharva Veda They include even love charms to compel a woman to yield her love, charms to prevent conception or bring it about when desired Even here the knowledge motive is dominant
The sexual act is explained as a kind of ritual performance, the elements of which are identified with the parts of the woman's body We are told that if a man practises sex intercourse with the know- ledge of this, he gains a world as great as he who sacrifices with the Vajapeya rite and takes to himself the merit of the women, but if he practises it without this knowledge, women take to them- selves his merit
4 etadd ha sma vai tad vidvdn uddalaka drumr aha, etadd ha sma vat tad vidvdn nako maudgalya alia, etadd ha sma vai tad vidvdn kumdra-hdnta aha, baltavo maryd brdkmandyand mrm- dnyd vmtkrto'smdl lokdt prayanti, ya tdam avidvdmso'dhopa- hasam carantiti, bahu va idam suptasya va jagrato va retail skandatt
4 This, venly, is what Uddalaka Arum knew when he said this, venly, is what Naka Maudgalya knew when he said this, venly, is what Kumara-hanta knew when he said many mortal men, Brahmanas by descent, go forth from this world impotent and devoid of ment, namely, those who practise sexual intercourse without knowing this If even this much semen is spilled of one asleep or of one awake,
wary ah mortal men, marana-dharmino manusydh £ brahmandyandh brahmanah ayanam yesdm R mrtndnydh impotent, mrvlrydh jnana-karma-bala-hinah. R
5 tad abhimr&et, ami va mantrayeta
yan me'dya retah prthivim askdntsit, yad osadhir apy asarat, yad apah,
tdam aham tad reta adade, punar mam aitu vndnyam, punas tejah, punar bhagah
punar agmr dhisnyah yathasthdnam kalpantam tty anamikdngustabhydm dddya, antarena stanau va bhruvau va mmrjyat
5. Then he should touch it or (without touching) recite 'Whatever semen of mine has spilt on earth, whatever has flowed to the plants, whatever to water, I reclaim this very semen, let vigour come to me again, let lustre (come to me) again, let glow (come to me) again. Let the fire and the altars
yj ^ g Brhad-dranyaka Upamsad 3 2 3
be found again in their usual place, (having said this) he should take it witL his rmg finger and thumb and nib it between his breasts or his eyebrows
6 atU yady udaka dtmdnam paiyet, tad abhmantrayeta:_ mam teia tndnyam yaio dravmam sukrtam th-snr U va esa sMnam yan malodvdsdh tasrndn malodvdsasam yasasvimm abkikramyopamantrayeta
6 Now if one should see himself (his reflection) m water he should recite (the following) hymn In me (may the gods bestow) lustre, vigour, fame, wealth and merit This, verily, is loveliness among women, when she has removed her soiled clothes Therefore when she has removed her soiled clothes and is lovely, he should approach and speak to her
7 sa ced asmai na dadyat, kdmam endm avaknmydt; sa ced asmai nawa dadyat, kmnam endm yaslyd vd pamnd vopahat- ydhkrdmet, vndnyeyia. te yaiasd yaia Made, ity ayaid eva bhavah
7 If she does not grant him his desire, he should buy her (with presents) If she still does not grant him his desire he should beat her with a stick or his hand and overcome her (saying) with (manly) power and glory, 'I take away your glory * Thus she becomes devoid of glory
buy her abharanadma vaSi-kurydt. R.
8 If she grants (his desire), he says, 'With power and glory/ 'I give you glory ' Thus the two become glorious.
9 sa yarn icchet, kdmayeta met%, tasydm artham msthdya, mukhcna mukham samdMya, upastharn asyd abhtmrsya, japet:
angdd angat sambMvasi, hrdaydd adhijdyase sa tvam anga-kasdyo'si. digdha-viddhdm iva mddaya tmdm amfith mayt
th
9 If one desires a woman (with the thought) may she enjoy love with me, after inserting the member in her, joining mouth to mouth and stroking her lower part, he should recite, 'You that have come from every limb, who have sprung from the heart, you are the essence of the limbs Distract this woman here m me, as if pierced by a poisoned arrow ' artham member prajananendnyam S. kasayaJi essence, rasah. A.
324 The Principal Upamsads VI 4 12.
10 atha yam icchet na garbham dadhiteh, tasyam artham msthdya, mukJtena mukham samdhaya abhiprdnydpdnydt, mdrir yena te retasd reta ddada th, aretd eva bliavati
10. Now the woman whom one desires (with the thought) 'may she not conceive,' after inserting the member in her, joining mouth to mouth, he should first inhale and then exhale and say, 'with power, with semen I reclaim the semen from you ' Thus she comes to be without semen (seed)
Apparently, birth control is not a modern device
11 atha yarn tcchet, garbham dadhiteh, tasyam artham msthdya, mukhena mukham samdhaya apanydbhiprdnydt; mdrir yena te retasd reta ddadhdim, ity, garbhny eva bltavati
11 Now the woman whom one desires (with the thought) 'may she conceive', after inserting the member in her, joining mouth to mouth he should first exhale and then inhale and say 'with power, with semen I deposit semen in you.' Thus she becomes pregnant
12 atha yasya jdydyai jdrah sydt, tarn ced dvisydt, dmapdtre 'gmm upasamddhdya, pratilomam sarabarhis tirtvd, tasmmn etdh sarabhrstih pratilomdh sarpisdktd juhuydt, mama samiddhe 'hausih, prdndpdnau na ddadeasdv ih mama samiddhe' hausih, putra-pahlms ta ddadeasdv ih mania samiddhe'hausih tstd- sukrte ta ddade, asdv ih mama samiddhe'hausih dsd-pardkdiau ta adade asdv tti sa va esa mnndriyo visukrto'smdl lokdt praiti, yam cvam-vid brdhmamh sapati tasmdt evam-vit srotnyasya ddtena iiopahdsam icchet, uta hy evam-vitparo bhavatt
12 If a man's We has a lover and he hate him (wishes to injure him), let him put fire in an unbaked earthen vessel, spread out a layer of reed arrows in an inverse order, and let him offer (m sacrifice) in inverse order these reed arrows soaked m clarified butter, (saying) 'You have sacrificed m my fire, I take away your m-breath and out-breath, you so and so You have sacrificed in my fire, I take away your sons and cattle, you so and so You have sacrificed in my fire. I take away your sacrifices and meritorious deeds, you so and so You have sacrificed in my fire I take away your hope and expectation, you so and so Venly, he departs from this world impotent and devoid of merit, he whom a Brahmana who knows this curses Therefore one should not wish to play with the wife of one who is learned in the Vedas, who knows this,, for indeed he who knows this becomes preeminent
See&fel B-JaUpaiha Brahmml 6 I 18; Paraskara Grhya SUtral ii. 6
Spells and incantations were familiar practices in the age when the Upamsadwas composed.
jo alha yasya jay am artavam vindet, try aham kamse no, fibel ahata-vasah, natnam vrsalah na vnaly updlumyat, trtra- tranta aplutya vrihin avagMiayet.
i<5 Now, when the monthly sickness comes upon one s wife for three days she should not drink from a bronze cup nor put on fresh clothes Neither a low-caste man nor a low-caste woman should touch her. At the end of three nights after bathing she should be made to pound rice
Sometimes it is interpreted kamsena ptbet, she should drink from a bronze cup
aplutya after bathing, snatva S
The nee is intended for the sihali-paka. ceremony.
After three nights she should bathe, put on new clothes and prepare the nee for the ceremony
14 sa ya tcchet, putro me iukto jayeta, vedam anubruvvta, sarvam ayur tyad ttt, ksiraudamm pacayitva sarpismantam ainiyaiam, tivarau janaytta vai
14 If one wishes that his son should be born of a fair com- plexion, that he should study the Veda, that he should attain a full term of life, they should have nee cooked with milk and eat it with clarified butter, then they should be able to beget (mm)
iharaie should be able to, samatihau R
15. atha ya icchet, putro me kapilah pmgalo jayeta, dvau ved&v anubruvita, sarvam ayur vyad Hi, dadhy-odanam pacayitva sarpismantam ainiyaiam, iivarau jamayiia vat.
15 Now if one wishes that his son should be born of a tawny or brown complexion, that he should study the two Vedas, that he should attain a full term of life, they should have rice cooked in curds and eat it with clarified butter, then they should be able to beget (him).
16 atha ya icchet, putro me iyamo hhit&kso jayeta, inn vedan anubruvita, saivam ayur iyad th, udodanam pacayitva, sarpismantam ainiyaiam, Tsvaraujanayjia vat
16 Now if one wishes that his son should be bom of a dark complexion with red eyes, that he should study the three Vedas, that he should attain a full term of life, they should have nee
326 Tlie Principal Upantsads VI 4. 19
cooked m water and eat it with clarified butter, then they should be able to beget (him)
17 atha ya iccket, duhtld me panditd jdyeta, sarvam ayur tydd iti, tilodanam pacayitva sarpismantam aintyatdm, isvarau janaytta vat
17 Now if one wishes that his daughter should be born, who is learned, that she should attain a full term of life, they should have nee cooked with sesamum and eat it with clarified butter, then they should be able to beget (her)
While the Upanisad seems to grant the privilege of learning and scholarship to women, § points out that this learning is limited to domestic affairs duhttuh pandttyam grha-tantra-visayam eva, vede' nadhikarat. £
The other commentators follow S whose view conflicts with ancient beliefs and practices
18 atha ya icchet putro me pandtto mgltah, samthm-gamak, iuirusitdm vacant bhdsttd jdyeta, sarvdn veddii anubrumta, sarvam ayur tyad iti, mamsodanam pacayitva sarpismantam asniyatam, isvarau janaytta vai, aiiksnma vdrsabhena vd
18 Now if one wishes that a son, learned, famous, a fre- quenter of assemblies, a speaker of delightful words, that he should study all the Vedas, that he should attain a full term of life, they should have nee cooked with meat and eat it with clarified butter, then they should be able to beget (such a son) — either veal or beef
mgltah famous, vividham gitah, prakliyatah £
susrusitam delightful, srotum islam, ramaniyam &
veal or beef uksa, secana-samarthah pungavah, rsabhah tato py
adhikavayah £
Evidently meat was permitted on certain occasions A points out that this permission was due to local conditions desa-msesapeksayd kala-visesapeksaya vd mdmsa-tnyamah
Prenatal conditioning of the child's character is advised
ig athdbhiprdtar eva stMli-pdkdvrtdjyam cestttvd, sthdli- pakasyopaghatam juhoh agnaye svahd, amtmataye svdka, devaya savitre satya-prasavdya svdhd, iti, hutvd uddhrtya prdsndti, prdsyetarasydh prayacchali, praksdlya pant, udapdtram purayttvd tenamam tnr abhyuksatt,
uttisthdto vtsvdvaso,
anyam iccka prapurvydm,
sam jdydm patyd saha, ttt.
VI 4- 2i. Brhad-drattyaka Upanisad 327
19 Now, toward morning, after having prepared clarified butter according to the mode of the sthalt-pdka he takes of the sihdli-pdka and makes an offering (saying), to fire, hail, to Anumati, hail, to the radiant sun, tie creator of truth, hail After having made -the offering, he takes up (the remnants of the cooked food) and eats Having eaten he offers (the rest) to the other (his wife). After having washed his hands and filled the water vessel, he sprinkles her thrice with it (water) (saying), 'Get up from here, Visvavasu; seek another young woman, a wife with her husband.'
slhaH-paka- literally, a pot of cooked food aorta- according to the mode, vidhina
anumati- the feminine personification of divine favour See RV X 59 6, X 167 3
vtSvdvasu gandharoa A God of love See R V X 25. 22 prapurvydm young girl, taruriim A
20 athamam abhipadyate 1
amo'ham astm, sd ivam; sd Ivam asv, amo'ham; sdmdham astm, rk vam; dyaur akam, prihivi ivam, lav ehi samrabhdvahat, saka reto dadhdvahai puthse pittrdya vittaye if*.
20. Then he embraces her, (saying), 'I am the vital breath and you are speech, you are speech and I am the vital breath I am the Sdman and you are the Rg. I am the heaven and you are the earth Come, let us strive together, let us mix semen that we may have a male child '
abhtpadyate. embraces abhpaUth dhnganam A amah vital breath prana A
SSman resb ion Rg while it is chanted rg-ddharamhsamagiyate A. samrabhavatot let us strive together, udyamam karavavahai K
vtsmiryomm kalpayatu, tvastd rupdm pinisatu astiicatu prajd-pahh, dhdtd garbham dadhdtu te garbham dheht, smivdh; garbham dhehi, pHhustuke garbham te ahmurn devau ddhattdm puskdra-srajatt 21. Then he spreads apart her thighs, (saying) 'Spread your-
328 The Principal Upamsads VI. 4 22.
selves apart, Heaven and Earth After having inserted the member in her, after having joined mouth to mouth, he strokes her three times as the hair lies, (saying), 'Let Visnu make the womb prepared Let Tvastr shape the (various) forms Let Prajd-pati pour in Let Dhatr place the germ (the seed) for you. 0 Stntvah, give the seed; give the seed, 0 broad-tressed dame. Let the two Asvms crowned with lotus wreaths place the seed '
amdomaw as the hair lies, mfirdhanam drabhya pdddniam kalpayaitf make prepared, ptiiroipattt-samarihdm karotu_ A sit.ivdli the deity delightful to see. darsandrhd devoid A
'When the human father thus emits him as seed into the womb, it is really the sun that emits him as seed into the womb . . . thence is he bom, after that seed, that breath.' Jaimimya-Upamsad- BrdJimana III. 10 4 see also Pancavimsa Brdhmana XVI 14. 5 In Buddhist canonical literature three things are said to be necessary for conception, the union of father and mother, the mother's period and the presence of the gandharva. Majjhima Nikdya 1 265-266, see also Pahcavimsa Brdlimana IX 3 1 The gandharva corresponds to the divine nature which is the primary cause of generation, while the parents are only the concomitant causes See Philo: Seres 115 For Aristotle, 'Man and the Sun generate man ' Physics II 2 Rum! says 'When the time comes for the embryo to receive the vital spirit, at that time the sun becomes its helper This embryo is brought into movement b}- the sun, for the sun is quickly endowing it with spirit From the other stars this embryo received only an impression, until the sun shone upon it By which way did it become connected in the womb with the beauteous sun 7 By the hidden way that is remote from our sense-perception ' MathnarM I 3775- 3779 In a very real sense, the commandment is significant, 'Call no man your father on earth , for one is your Father, which is in heaven ' John VI 6 3
22 hiranmdyi ara>n yabhydm mrmantfiaiam asviiiau; lam tc garbham havdmahe dasaine mdsi sutaye' yatMgni-garbM prthivt.yathd dyaur tndrem garbhim vdyur dtsdmyathd garbliah, evam garbham dadhdmi U asdv iti
22 'The (two) Asvins twirl forth a flame with the (two) attrition sticks of gold It is such a germ that we beg of you to be brought forth in the tenth month As the earth contains the germ of fire and as the heaven is pregnant with the storm, as the air is the germ of quarters, even so I place a germ in you, so and so '
SeeRV X 184 also Afharoa Veda V Z5 3. Y" 2 5 5- .
5 %ay«r vB mrtoiah A patnlmma grhmyat. ante bhartdsdvaham iti svdtmano tOma grhnaii, bharyaya va. K.
23 sosyantim adbhir abhyuksati; _
j«tM s£yM& puskannim sannngayati sarvatafi eva te garbha ejatu sahdvaitu jarayund • mdrasyayam vrajah krtah sdrgalah sapansrayah, tarn, xrdra, nirjahi garbliena sdvardm sahett. 23. When she is about to bring forth he sprinkles her with water (saying) . 'Even as the wind agitates a lotus pond on every side, even so let your foetus stir and come out along with its chorion This Indra's fold has been made with a covering enclosed around 0 Indra, cause him to come forth the after- birth along with babe.
See R V V 78 7-8 Paraskara Grhya Sutra 1. 16 f£ This hymn is uttered for successful parturition, prasava-kale sukha-prasavanartham.
jarayuna' with its chorion, gartha-vestana-mdtnsa-klia^dena. A come out ntrgacchatu. A.
24 jdte'gnim upasamadMya., anka ddhdya kamse prsad-djyam sammya, prsad-djyasyopaghdtam jukoti;
asmin sahasram pusyasam edhamdnah sve grhe asyopasandyam md chaitsit prajayd ca pasubhii ca, svdhd' may 1 prdndms tvayi manasd juhomi, svdhd' yat karma^diyarmcam, yad va nyunam ihakaram, agnisiat sv'istakrd mdvdn, svistam suhutath karotu nah' svdhd. 24 When (the son is) born, after having prepared the fire, after having taken (the baby) in his lap and having put curds and clarified butter in a bronze cup, he makes an oblation again and again with those curds and clarified butter (saying), 'May I increase in this (son) and nourish a thousand in my home. May fortune never depart from his line with offspring and cattle. Hail I offer to you mentally the vital forces that are in me. Whatever m my work I have done too much or whatever I have done here too little, let Agm the all-knowing, the bene- ficent, make it fit and good for us Hail.
See ASvalayana Grhya Sfdra I 13 fi: Paraskara Grhya Sutra I II f£ , SankJiayana Grhya Sutra I 19 fi
prsad-ajyam curds and clarified butter mixed, ghrta-misram dadln
•prsad-ajyam ity ucyate A
fmsyasam aneka-manusya-posoko bhfiydsam A.
33° The Principal Upanisads VI 4 28
25 atkdsya daksmam karnam abhtmdhdya, vdg vdg ttt tnh atha dadht madhu ghrtam samniya anantarhitena jata-upena prdiayah, bhus te dadhami, bhuvas te dadhami, svas te dadhami bhilr bhuvah svah sarvam tvayt dadhdmitt
25 Then putting his mouth near the child's right ear, 'he says thrice, 'speech,' 'speech ' Then mixing curds, honey and clarified butter he feeds him out of a spoon of gold which is not placed within (the mouth) saying, 'I place in you the earth, I place in you the atmosphere, I place in you the heaven I place in you everything, earth, atmosphere and heaven '
jata-rfipena hiranyena S
26 atkdsya noma karott vedo' sitt, tad asya tad gukyam eva nama bkavatt
26 Then he gives him a name (saying), 'You are Veda ' So this becomes his secret name
For a description of the two ceremonies, ayusya-kannan and medhd-janana, see, Paraskara Grhya Sutra 1, 16 3,1 17 1-4, Asva- layana Grhya SiUra I 15 1-8, Sdnkhdyana Grhya Sutra, I 24, Gobhila Grhya Sutra II 8 14-17, Mamt II 30-33
27 athatnam matre praddya stanam prayacchati,
yas te stanah iaiayo yo mayobhuh, yo ratnadhd vasuvtd yah sudatrah,
yena vtivd pusyast vdrydnt, sarasvatt, tarn tha dhatave hah
27 Then he presents him to the mother and gives him her breast saying 'Your breast which is unfailing and refreshing, wealthy, abundant, generous with which you nourish all worthy beings, Sarasvatt, give it here (to my wife for my baby) to suck from.'
See R V I 164 49 sasayah unfailing, sayah phalam, Una saha vartamdnah A
28 athdsya mataram abhtmantrayate ildsi maitrdvaruni, vire viram apjanat,
sa tvam vlravati bhava, ydsmdn viravato' karat tti. tarn vd etam dhuh, atipttd batabhuh, attpttdmaho batabhuh. paramdm bata kdstham prdpat, irtyd yaiasa brahma-varcasena, ya evam vtdo brdhmanasya putrojdyata itt
28 Then he addresses the mother (of the baby) 'You are lid, descended from Mitra and Varuna Being a heroine, you have brought forth a hero You who have given us a hero for a
VI 5 I- Brhad-dranyaka Vpamsad 331
son, be you the mother of (many) heroes.' Of such a son they say, 'You have gone beyond your father, you have gone beyond your grandfather.' Venly, he has reached the highest point in prosperity, fame and radiance of spirit, who is born as the son of a Brahmana who knows this
US' A identifies lid with Arundhati, the wife of Vasistha, the son of Mitra and Varuna* mitrd-vamnabhyam sambhuto maitra-varunah, vaststhah, tasya bhdryd mmtravaruni, sd carunihatl ila adorable stutydbhogydsi_ A viravati bahu-putrd bhava A
wre may be taken either m vocative or locative, mayi mmttttr IMte. brahmavarcasa radiance of spirit shining in the face No contempt for the body is indicated Porphyry's statement of his master- 'Plotmus, the philosopher of our time was like one ashamed of being in a body,' will not get the support of the Upanisads
Fifth Brahmana THE SUCCESSION OF TEACHERS AND PUPILS
t atka vamiah. pauhmdst-ptitrah kdtydyam-putrat, katyayani- pilm gautami-putrat, gautamt-putro bhdradvap-putrdt, bhdra- dvafi-putrah pdrdiarT-putrdt, pdrdsan-putra aupasvastl-putrdt Mpasvasti-jmtrahpdrdtarT-putrdt, pdrdiari-putrah kdtydyani-ptt- irdt, katydyanl-putrah kauhki-putrai, kauiiki-putra alambt- futrac ca vaiyaghrapadi-putrdc ca, vaiydghrapadi-putrah kdnin- Pttirdc ca kdpl-putrdc ca, kdpT-putrah
1 Now the lme of teachers. The son of Pautimasi (received this teaching) from the son of Katyayani; the son of Katyayani jrom the son of GautamI, the son of Gautami from the son of flnaradvaji, the son of Bharadvaji from the son of PiraSari, uie son of Parasarl from the son of Aupasvasti, the son of Aupasvasti fr °m the son of Parasarl, the son of Parasarl from ™ son of Katyayani, the son of Katyayani from the son of Aausiki the son of KauSiki from the son of Alambi and the son of Vaiyaghrapadi, the son of Vaiyaghrapadi from the son 1 * anvi the son of Kapi, the son of Kapl- an m a ^. that the teacners are named after their mothers because siri 2 vl - r lds the "nportant place in the training of children. iesenn T ySi Sunaodn pulro bhavatUi ht praslutam; atah strim- wa Mra-vi&savad dcdrya-parampard kirtyaU.
The Principal Upanisads
2. dtreyi-pidrdi, StreyT-puiro gautemtpirtrdf, gautamt-pidro bharadtdfrpidrdt, bharadvajf-putrdh pdrdsari~pidrdt, pdrdsari- ptiiro vd^^utrdt,vdts^idrahpdrdiari^utrM,pdrdsarJ-pidro var- kdrurp-pvtrdt, vdrkdrtint-pidro varkarum-putrdt, vdrteriaii-putra artabhagT-pidrdt, drtabhdguputraJi sauiigT-puirdt, saungt-pntrak sdr.krii-pidrdt, sdnkrtT-pidra dlambdyam-putrdt, dhmbdyam- puira dlamtn-ptdrat, dlainbi-pidro jdyanU-pidrdt, jdyanti-pulro mdndvkayam-ptdrdt, mandukdyam-pidTO mdndiiki-putrdt, mail- duki-putrah sdndili^pvtrdt, sdijdili-pidro rdfhitan-pxdrdt, rdihT- fari-pidro bhalvM-puirdi, bhalvM-puirah kraunciki-pidrdbhydm, hrauficila-puirau vaidabhrB-pidrdt, vaidabhrti-putrak kdriakeyi- pidrdt, tersakeyi-ptiirah pracinayogT-pidrdt, prdanayogT-pidrali sdnjim-pidrdt, sdnjtvT-pidrah prasm-pi'trdd dsurivdsimh, prdsr.T-puira dsurdyandt, dsurdyatja dsureh, dsurih —
2. from the son of Atreji, the son of Atreyi from the son of Gautami, the son of Gantami from the son of Bharadvaji, the son of Bharadvaji from the son of Parasari, the son of Parasari from the son of Vatsi, the son of Vatsi from the son of Parasari, the son of Parasari from the son of Variaruni, the son of Varkanmi from the son of Varkaruni, the son of Varkaruni from the son of Artabhagi, the son of Artabhagi from the son of Saungi, the son of £aungi from the son of SankrH, the son of Sankrti from the son of Alambayani, the son of Alam- bayani from the son of Alambi, the son of Alambi from the son of JayanrI, the son of JayanrI from the son of Mandukayam, the son of Mandukayam from the son of Mandoki, the son of HanduJd from the son of Sandili, the son of Sandfll from the son of Rathltari, the son of Rathltari from the son of Bhaluki; the son of Bhaluki from the two sons of KratmcikI, the two sons of Kraufiriki from the son of Vaidabhrfi, the son of Vaidabhrfi from the son of Karsakeyi, the son of Karsakeyi from the son of Pradnayogi, the son of PracTnayogl from the son of Sanjlvi, the son of Sanjivi from the son of Prasni, the Asurivasin, the son of Prasnl from Asarayana, Asurayana from Asuri, Asuri —
3. ydjr.atalkydt,yaj}~iavalkya udddlakdt, t'dddlako'ruijdi, aruna upavesek, upavesih kusreh, kitsrir vdja-sraiasali, vdja-iravd jihvdtato badhyogdt, jihvdvdn badhyogo'siidd vdrsagandt, asiio vdrsagaro haritdt kasyapdt, haritah kasyapah silpdt kasyapdt, silpah kaiyapak kasyapdn naidhruveh, kasyapo naidhnmr vdcah, vdg ambhinydh, amhkiny ddiiydt, dditydmmdm sufd&ni yaj&msi vdjasatteyena ydjnaodlkyendkhydyanie.
3 from Yajnavalkya, Yajnavalkya from Uddalaka, Udda- laka, from Aruna, Aruna from UpaveSi, Upavesi from KuSn, Kusri from Vajasravas, Vajasravas from Jihvavant Badhyoga, Jihvavant Badhyoga from Asita Varsagana, Asita Varsagana from Hanta Kasyapa, Hanta Kasyapa from Silpa Kasyapa, Silpa Kasyapa from Kasyapa Naidhruvi, Kasyapa Naidhruvi from Vac (speech), Vac from Ambnini, Ambhrni from Aditya (the sun) These white sacrificial formulas received from the sun are explained by Yajnavalkya of the Vajasaneyi school
hklam: white, because they are not mixed up (with Brahmanas), orderly, fresh avydmisrdni brdhmanena, aihava aydtaydmdnimdni yajiimst, tarn hiklam, toiddhdni £
4. samanam a sdHjm-putrdt, sdnjwl-putro mdndukdyaneh mdndukdyamr mdndavyat, mdndavyah kautsdt, kautso mahttheh, mahitthir vdma-kaksayanat, vania-kaksayanah vacasah rdjastambdyandt, ycynavaca rdjastambdyanah turat Mva$eydt, turah kdvaseyafy prajdpateh, prajdpatir brahmanah, brahma svayambhw brahmane namah
4 It is the same up to the son of Safijro, the son of Sanjivi from Mandukayam, Mandukayam from Mandavya, Mandavya from Kautsa, Kautsa from Mahitthi, Mahitthi from Vamakak- sayana, Vamakaksayana from Sandilya, Sandilya from Vatsya, Vatsya from Rusn, Kusri from Yajfiavacas Raja- stambayana, Yajfiavacas Rajastambayana from Tura Kava- §eya, Tura Kavaseya from Prajd-pah, Prajd-pah from Brahma. Brahma is the self-existent. Adoration to Brahma
Set Salapatha BrdhmanaX 659.
The Chandogya Upani§ad belongs to the Sama Veda Chandoga is the singer of the Sanum. 1 The Upanisad that belongs to the followers of the Sama Veda is the Chandogya Upanisad. It is a part of the Chandogya Brahmana which has ten chapters. The first two chapters of the Brahmana deal with sacrifices and other forms of worship. The other eight constitute the Chandogya Upanisad.
The first and the second chapters discuss the problems of liturgy and doctrine such as the genesis and significance of Aum and the meaning and names of Saman
» chanda sama gayali ill chandogah
I i 2. Chdndogya Upamsad
THE SYLLABLE AUM AS THE UDGlTHA
i. aum xty etad aksaram u&githam updsita, aum iti hrd gdyati tasyopavydkhydnam.
i Aum One should meditate on this syllable, the udgitha, for one sings the loud chant beginning with aum. Of this (follows) the explanation.
The syllable aum, with which every recital of the Vedic chants begins, is here represented as the symbol of the Supreme and there- fore the means of the meditation of the Supreme: arcadivat para- sydtmanah pratlkam sampadyate, evam namatvena pratlkatvena ca paramaimopasana-sadhanam tresfham iti sarva-vedantesv avagatam S. Before we attain to the supreme vision of God, the contemplative realisation, we have to resort to prayer and meditation We may chant and sing with devout mind, with fervour of spirit, with an inmost longing for the things above, with a purity of soul We strive to keep the soul unembarrassed and at rest from all thoughts We direct our attention lovingly and continuously towards God
In meditation, the soul is furnished with a symbol on which we our gaze, on which we concentrate all our imagination and reasoning When meditation reaches its end, when there is no dis- traction or disquiet, when there is calm repose, sweet tranquillity, mere is the vision Any name may raise us to perfect contemplation, we start with prayer, we pass on to meditation When the discursive fn fL 06 ^ 6 ' we have contemplation The Upanisad opens with this instruction to concentrate on the syllable aum, to draw our thoughts w& i 251 other Ejects, to develop ekagrata or one-pointedness. jjymboi cannot be taken as final It has a number of aspects When and ttan jP°J® d 51110 the words of ordinary language it becomes dim HnL n F ^ e then tend t0 confine the meaning within narrow aogmatic frames Even though the syllable aum like all symbols wvers the reahty as by a veil, to those who know how to look, the yea becomes transparent.
osadJ CSim bhiitdndm Prtfavi rasah, prthvya dpo rasah, ap&m vac ° msaJ%> osa dhwfon puruso rasah, purusasya vdg rasah,
* Tgiasah, rcah sdma rasah, samna udgitho rasah. th P « %i essence of beings is the earth; the essence of of hhT 1S %Vater - Tb6 essence of water B P lants ; ^e essence esss™rV S a person The ess™ 0 * of a P^ 011 » speech The
338 The Principal Upanisads I I 9.
the Sdman (chant) The essence of the Soman (chant) is the udgitha
rasa essence, literally flavour Most of the hymns of the Sdma Veda are taken from the R V
3 sa csa rasanam rasatamah paramah parardhyo' stamo yad udgithah
3 That is the quintessence of the essences, the Supreme, the highest, the eighth, namely the udgitha.
pardrdhya highest, from -para highest and ardha place
4 katama katama rk, katamat katamat sdma, katamah kalama udgitha tti vimrstam bhavatt
4 Which one is the Rk? Which one is the Sdman 7 Which one is the udgitha? This is what is (now) considered
5 vdg eva rk, prdnah sdmomity etad aksaram udgithah, tad vd etan mtthunam yad vdk ca prdnai ca rk ca sdma ca
5 Speech, indeed, is Rk; breath is Sdman, the syllable aim is the udgitha Now, this is a pair, namely speech and breath, and also the Rk and the Sdman
6 tad etan mtthunam aum tty etasmtnn aksare samsrjyate, yadd vat mithunau samagacchata, dpayato vat tav anyo'nyasya kdmam
6 This pair is joined together in the syllable aum Verily, whenever a pair come together, they fulfil each other's desire
7 dpayita ha vat kdmdndm bhavatt ya etad evam vidvan aksaiam udgitham upaste
7 He, who knowing this thus, meditates on the syllable as the udgitha, becomes, venly, a fulfiller of desires
8 tad vd etad anujndksaram, yaddht kwi canttjandty aum tty eva tad aha, esa eva samrddhir yad anujnd, samardliayttd ha vai kdmdndm bhavatt ya etad evam vtdvdn aksaram udgithatn upaste
8 Venly, this syllable is of assent, for whenever one assents to anything he says simply 'aum ' What is assent is fulfilment. He, who knowing this thus, meditates on the syllable as the udgitha, becomes, venly, a fulfiller of desires
9 teneyam trayt vtdya vartata, aum tty dirdvayah, aum tti iamsati, aum tty udgdyatt, etasyawdksarasydpaciiyai mahimnd rasena
Chdndogya Upanisad
9 By this does the threefold knowledge proceed Saying aum, one recites - saying attm, one orders saying, aum, one sings aloud, in honour of that syllable, with its greatness and its essence
Threefold knowledge relates to the three orders of priests m the sacrificial ntes S thinks that the reference is to the Soma sacrifice
10 tenobhau kuruto yaicattad evam veda yai ca na veda: nana tu indyd cdvidya ca; yad eva vtdyaya karoti sraddhayo- pamsada, tad eva viryavattaram bhavatiti, klialv etasyaivaksara- syopavydkhydnam bhavah.
io He who knows this thus, and he who knows not, both perform with it. Knowledge and ignorance, however, are different What, indeed, one performs with knowledge, faith and meditation, that, indeed, becomes more powerful" This, verily, is the explanation of this syllable.
Vtiya is right knowledge, sraddhd is faith and upanisad is medi- tative insight upamsada yogena S.
We must perform the sacrifice with knowledge and not ignorantly We must understand what we are doing God is the inspector of our hearts as much as the judge of our acts Our acts must be accom- panied by the devotion of our minds
LIFE (BREATH) AS THE UDGlTHA
I When the gods and the demons, both descendants of uHF-vP***' contended Wltb - each other, the gods took hold of the "fgWia, thinking, with this, we shall overcome them
S_eeBU I 3 i.
™f 'J™' ? ods 311(1 demons Since the word deva is derived from a root denoting lUumination, the 'gods' stand for such functions of tndn^J* ^ ummated (regulated) by scriptures idstrodbhastta Sh^ r i ayah , And ' demon s.' opposed to the former, stand for obWf. ° ns of t he senses 325 deh e ht ™ activity towards all sensual darb,«^ P ? mmg t0 them md are naturally of the nature of ■^ess. tama atmtka vndnya-vrltayah Thus in the body of all
34° The Principal Upantsads I 2 7.
beings there is a perpetual fight between the two sarva-pramsu prati-deham devdsura-samgramo anddi-kdla-pravrtta tty abhiprayah
2 te ha ndsikyam pranam udgitham updsdmcaknre, tarn hdsurdh pdpmand mvidhuh, tasmdt tenobliayam pghrah surabht ca durgandhi ca, pdpmand hy esa viddhah
2 Then they meditated on the udgitha as the breath m the nose. The demons afflicted that with evil Therefore, with it one smells both the sweet smelling and the foul smelling, for it is afflicted with evil
3 atha ha vdcam udgitham updsdmcaknre, tarn hdsurdh, pdpmand vvmdhuh, tasmdt tayobhayam vadati satyamcdnrtamca, pdpmand hy esd viddhd
3 Then they meditated on the udgitha as speech The demons afflicted that with evil Therefore with it one speaks both the true and the false, for it is afflicted with evil
4 atha ha caksur udgttliam updsdmcaknre, taddhdstirdh pdpmand vimdhuh, tasmdt tenobhayam pasyati darianiyam cddarianiyam ca, pdpmand hy etad viddham
4 .When they meditated on the udgitha as the eye, the demons afflicted that with evil Therefore with it one sees both the sightly and the unsightly, for it is afflicted with evil
5 atha ha srotram udgitham up&sdmcakrire, taddhdstirdh pdpmand mvidhuh, tasmdt tenobhayam imoti sravamyam cdsravamyam ca, pdpmand hy etad viddham
5 Then they meditated on the udgTtJia as the ear The demons afflicted that with evil Therefore with it one hears both what should be listened to and what should not be listened to, for it is afflicted with evil
6 atha ha mana udgitliam updsdmcaknre, taddhdsurdh, pdpmand mvidhuh, tasmdt tenobhayam samkalpayate samkalr paniyam cdsamkalpamyam ca, pdpmand hy etad viddham
6 Then they meditated on the udgitha as the mind The demons afflicted that with evil Therefore with it one imagines both what should be imagined and what should not be imagined, for it is afflicted with evil
7 atha ha ya evdyam mukhyah prdnas tarn udgitham updsdm- caknre, tarn hdsurd rtva vidadhvamsur, yathdimdnam dkhanam rtvd vtdhvamseta
7 Then they meditated on the udgitha as the breath in the
I 2 13 Chdndogya Upamsad 341
mouth. When the demons hit against it they were destroyed, just as (a ball of earth) hitting against a solid stone is destroyed.
mukkya frana breath in the mouth or the principal breath a ball of earth, mrt-pinda
8 evam yathdimdnam dkhanam rtvd vidhvan'isate, evatn hatva sa vidhvamsate ya evamvidi pdpam kdmayate, yai catnam abhdasatt sa eso'smdkhaitah.
8 Just as (a ball of earth) striking against a solid rock is destroyed, so will one be destroyed who wishes evil to one who knows this, as also one who injures him, for he is a solid rock.
9 nawaitena surabhi 11a durgandhi vijdndty-apahata-pdpmd hy esa, tena yad asndti yat pibati teitetardn prdndn avail, dam u evantato'vit votkrdmati, vyddaddty evdntata ttt
9 With this (breath) one discerns neither the sweet-smelling nor the foul smelling for this is free from evil With this, whatever one eats or whatever one drinks, he protects the other vital breaths And, not finding this (breath in the mouth) one finally departs; one finally leaves his mouth open.
10 tarn hdngird udgltham updsdmcakra, eiam u evdngirasam manyante'ngdndm yad rasah
10 Angiras meditated on this as the udgitJia. People think that it is, indeed, Angiras, because it is the essence of the hmbs
11 Brhaspatt meditated on this as the udgitha People think that it is, indeed, Brhaspatt, because speech is great and it is the lord thereof
12 tena tarn hdydsya udgltlmm updsdmcakra, eiam u evdvdsvam "wyantadsyddyatayate
12 Aydsya meditated on this as the udgitha. People think mat it is, indeed, Aydsya, because it comes from the mouth
}\ fowiamha bako ddlbhyo viddmcakdra, sa ha naimislydndm m S M a babhuva, sa ha smaibhyah kdmdn dgdyati thi? t ® s ® h y a kaew it He became the udgdir priest of w people of Naimisa. He sang out for them their desires.
samfi^^ aibhya . ls men tioned in the MB as having performed a Patv^i pmushm S Dhrta-rastra for his rude behaviour Salya
34 s The Principal Upanisads I 3 3
14 dgdta ha vat kdmdndm bhavah, ya etad evam vidvdn aksaram udgitham updsta ity adhydtmam.
14 He obtains wishes by singing, who knowing this thus, meditates on the udgitha as the syllable This, with regard to the self
These verses relate to the body and not the self
1 athddhidaivatam ya evasau tapah tarn udgttliam updsito- dyaii vd esa prajdbkya udgdyati, udyams tamo-bhayam apahanh, apahantd ha vat bhayasya tamaso bJiavati ya evam vcda
1. Now, with reference to the divinities Hun who glows yonder (the Sun) one should meditate as the udgitha. Venly, on rising, he smgs aloud for creatures On rising, he dispels darkness and fear He, venly, who knows this, becomes the dispeller of fear and darkness
*As the sun arises, he removes the darkness of night and the fears of living beings consequent on it One who knows the sun with these qualities, becomes the destroyer of all fears of the self in the shape of birth, death, etc , and also of the cause of fear, darkness in the shape of ignorance ' S
2. samdna « evdyam cdsatt, cosno'yam, usno'satt, svara itTmam dcaksatc, svara ttt pralydsvara ity amum tasmdd vd etam wxam amuih codgTiham updsfta.
2 This (breath) in the mouth and that (sun) are alike This is warm That is warm This, they call sound and that, they call sound as the reflecting sound Venly, one should meditate on this and on that as the udgitha
3 aiha khalu vyatiam evodgitham updslta; yadvat prdnitt sa prano, yad apdmti so'pdr.ah, atha yah prdndpdnayoh sandhh sa vydno, yo vydnah sd vdk, tasmdd aprdnann anapdnaii vdcam abhivydharaii
3 But one should meditate on the diffused breath as the ttdgTlha That which one breathes in, that is the m-breath; that which one breathes out, that is the out-breath The
j 3 Chandogya Upamsad 343
amotion of the in-breath and the out-breath is the diffused ffi The diffused breath is the speech Therefore one utters speech, without in-breathmg and without out-breathing
When we speak, we neither breathe in nor breathe out
a yd vdk sd rk, tasmdd apranan anapananrcam abhivydharah;
ya rktat sama, tasmad apranan anapanan sama gayaU; yat sama
sa ttdsithas tasmad apranan anapanan udgayah
4 Speech is Rk Therefore one utters the Rk without in- breathing and without out-breathing The Rk is the Saman Therefore one sings the Saman, without m-breathing and without out-breathing The Saman is the udgitha Therefore one chants the udgitha, without m-breathing and without out- breathing.
5 ato yany anydrn viryavanti karmdm, yathdgner manthanam, cljeh saranam, drdhasyadhanusa dyamanam, apranan anapanams tarn karoli, etasya hetor vydnam ewdgitham updsita.
5. Therefore, whatever other actions there are that require strength, such as the kindling of fire by friction, the running of a race, the bending of a strong bow, one performs (them) without in-breathing and without out-breathing Therefore one should meditate on the diffused breath as the udgitha.
Whenever we do an action which involves effort and attention we hold our breath
6. atha khaliidgithdksardny updsitodgitha ih prana^ evot- pranena hy uttistliati, vdg gir vaco ha gvra ity dcaksate'nnam tham anne hidam sarvam sthitam
6 Now one should meditate on the syllables of the udgitlia, vt,gi,ilia ut is breath, for through breath one rises gi is speech, for speeches are called gvras, tha is food, for on food is all this established.
7 dyaur evot, aniariksam gih, prthivi tham, adttya evot, vdywr gir, ag7iis tham; samaveda evot, yajurvedo gir, rgvedas tham; dugdhe'smai vag doliam, yo vaco doho'nnavan annado bhavati, ya etany evam vidvan udgithaksarany updsta, udgitha tti.
7. Heaven is ut, atmosphere is gi and the earth, tha. The sun is ut, the air, gi and the fire, tlm The Samaveda is ut, the Yajurveda,gi and the Rg Veda, tha Speech yields milk and the milk is speech For him, he becomes nch in food, an eater of
344 The Principal Upamsads I 4 1
food, who knows and meditates on the syllables of the udgitha thus, tit, gi, tha
8 atha khalv ailh samrddhir upasarananity upasita yena samna stosyan syat tat sdmopadhdvet
8 Now then, the fulfilment of wishes One should meditate on the places of refuge One should reflect on the Samcm with which one is about to sing a praise
upasarandm places of refuge S means by it objects contemplated upasartavydm, upagantavydm, dhyeyam
9 yasyam rci tarn ream, yad drseyam tarn rstm, yam devatam abJnstosyan syat, tarn devatam upadhavet
9 One should reflect on the Rk in which the Saman occurs, on the seer by whom it was seen, on the divinity to whom he is about to sing a praise
10 yena chandasa stosyan syat tac chanda upadhavet yena stomena stosyamanah syat tarn stomam upadhavet
xo One should reflect on the metre m which he is about to smg a praise One should reflect on the hymn-form in which he is about to smg a praise
11 yam disam abhi?tosyan syat tarn diiam upadhavet
11 One should reflect on the quarter of space m the direction of which he is about to smg a praise
12 dtmdnam antata upasrtya stuvtta, kdmam dhydyann apra- matto'bhydio ha yad asmai sa kdmah samrdhyeta, yat-kdmah stuviteti, yat-kdmah stuvtteh
12 Finally, one should enter into oneself and smg a praise, meditating carefully on one's desire Quickly will be fulfilled for him the desire, desiring which he may smg the praise, yea, desiring which he may smg the praise
abhydia quickly Be sure, depend on it that it will be fulfilled.
I aum tty etad aksaram udgttham upasitom tit hy udgdyatt, tasyopavyakhydnam
1. Aum. One should meditate on the udgitha as this syllable, for one sings the loud chant, beginning with awn. (Now follows) its explanation.
2 deva vat mriyor bibhyalas trayim vidyam praviiams ie chandobhir acckddayan, yad ebhir acchddayams tac chandasam chaiidas tvam.
2. Verily, the gods, when they were afraid of death, took refuge in the threefold knowledge They covered themselves with metres Because they covered themselves with these, therefore the metres are called chandas.
trayim vidyam threefold-knowledge, the three Vedas
3 tan « tatra mrtyur yatha matsyam udake paripasyet, evam paryapaiyad ret samni yajusi, te nu vtdttvordhva rcah sdmno yajusah, svaram eva pravisan
3 Death saw them there in the Rg, in the Sdman and m the Yajus ]ust as one might see a fish in water When they found this out, they rose out of the Rg, out of the Sdman, out of the Yajus and took refuge m sound
svaram sound, the syllable aum
4. yadd va ream dpnoty aum ity evahsvaraty evam samaivam yaptresa u svaro yad etad aksaram etad amrtam abhayam tat pravisya deva amrta abhaya abhavan.
• \ 4 ,, Venly ' when one leams the Rk> one sounds out aum. (It is) the same with Sdman, (it is) the same with Yajus This sound is that syllable, the immortal, the fearless Having entered this, the gods become immortal, fearless.
5 sa ya etad evam vidvdn aksaram pranauty etad evdksaram svaram amrtam abhayam pravisah, tat pravisya yad amrta devas tad amrto bhavah
• 5 +'i, He ' Who kK^g xt thus . praises this syllable, takes refuge m that syllable, m the immortal, fearless sound, and having
Smortaf' beCOmes i™ 1 "* 4 * 1 . even ^ ^ gods become
goEXttS j£S£? I egree between the nmaort ** of the
The Principal Upamsads
I 5 5-
THE UDGlTHA IDENTIFIED WITH THE SUN AND THE
I atha kltalu ya udgtthah sa pranavo yah pranavah sa udgitha tiy asau va dditya udgitha, esa pranava, aum tit hy esa svarann eh
1 Now, venly, what is the udgitha is the Aum Whatis-4«?» is the udgitha And so venly, the udgitha is the yonder sun and the Aum, for (the sun) is continually sounding Aum
svarann sounding or going §
2 etam u evaham abhyagasisam, tasmdn mama tvam eko'siti ha kausitakih putram uvaca, rasmims tvam paryavartayad bahavo vai te bhavisyantity adhidaivatam.
2 'I sang praise to him alone, therefore you are my only (son) ' Thus said Kausitala to his son 'Reflect on the (various) rays, venly, you will have many sons ' This, with reference to the divinities
3 athadhyatmam ya evayam mukhyah pranas tarn udgitham updsitom lit hy esa svarann eii
3 Now with reference to the body One should meditate on the breath in the mouth as the udgitha, for it is continually sounding aum
4 etam u evaham abhyagasisam, tasmdn mama tvam eko'siti ha kausitakih putram uvaca, prandms tvam bhumdnam abhigdyatdd bahavo vat me bhavisyantitt
4 'I sang praise to him alone Therefore you are my only (son) ' Thus said Kausltaki to his son 'Sing praise unto the breaths as manifold, venly, you will have many (sons) '
5 atha khaluya udgtthah sa pranavah, yah pranavah sa udgitha iti hotr-sadanadd liatvapi durudgitam anusamaharatity anusamd- haratiti
5 Now, venly, what is the udgitha is the aum What is aum is the udgitha (If one knows this), venly, from the seat of the Hotr pnest, all wrong singing is corrected, yea is corrected.
ltotr-sadana the place from which the Hotr pnest gives instructions
16 6 Chdndogya Upanisad 347
1 tyam eva rg, agnih sama, tad etad etasyam rcy adhyudham sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama giyata, iyam eva sagnir amas tat sama.
1 This (earth) is the Rk and fire is the Samoa This Saman rests on that Rk Therefore the Saman is sung as resting on the Rk. This (earth) is sa, and fire is ama and that makes saman.
2 antanksam eva rg, vaytth sama, tad etad etasyamrcy adhyud- ham soma, tasmad rcy adhyftdJiam sama giyate antariksam eva sa, vdyur amas tat sama.
2 The atmosphere is the Rk and the air is Saman. This Soman rests on that Rk Therefore the Saman is sung as resting on the Rk The sky is sa and the air is ama, and that makes saman
3 dyaur eva rg adityas soma, tad etad etasyam rcy adhyudham sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama giyate, dyaur eva sadityo'mas tat sama
3 The heaven is Rk and the Sun is Soman This Saman rests on that Rk Therefore the Saman is sung as resting on the Rk Heaven is sa and the sun is ama and that makes saman.
4 naksatrdny eva rk, candramah sama, tad dad etasyam ny adhyudham sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama giyate, naksatrany eva sa, candramd amas tat sama.
\J b& StaiS are ^ ^ ^ mooQ 15 SSma SSma rests on that Rk. Therefore the Saman is sung as resting on the Rk.
ine stars are sa and the moon ama and that makes sama.
5 atha yad etad adttyasya suklam bhah saiva rg, atha van MJam $arah krsnam tat sama, tad etad etasyam rcy adhyiidhani sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama giyate,
5 Now, the white light of the sun is Rk; the blue exceeding darkness is Saman This Saman rests on that Rk, therefore uus baman is sung as resting on that Rk.
^ d , tmaaA Mityasya iuklmn bhah saiva sa'tha yan mum p a rah krsnam tad amas tat samatlia ya eso'ntar aditve
nSS/ Uri<? ° drfy 1 C > ^anya-smairur Lanya-kL ^l naRiiat sana eva smarnah. y
6^ Now, the white light of the Sun is sa and the blue,
34^ The Principal Upamsads 1. 7. 1.
exceeding darkness, is ama That makes Sdman Nowthat golden person who is seen within the sun, has a golden beard and golden hair All is golden to the tips of the nails suvaina gold, used to symbolise light, Me and immortality.
7 tasya yatha kapydsam pundankam evam aksmi, iasyodili noma, sa esa sarvebhyah pdpmabhya udtti;udeh ha vat sarvebhyal} papmabhyo ya evam veda
7. His eyes are even as a red lotus flower His name is high (uf) He has risen above all evil Venly, he who knows this, rises above all evil
The colour of the lotus is described by a comparison with the kapydsa or the seat of the monkey
8 tasya rk ca sama ca gesnau, tasmad udgithah, tasmdt tvevo- dgdtaitasya hi gata, sa esa ye camusmat paraiico lokas tesam cede deva kamanam ccty adhidawatam
8 His songs are the Rk and the Sdman Therefore (they are called) the udgitha Hence the udgatr pnest (is so called) for he is the singer of this He is the lord of the worlds which are beyond that (sun) and also of the desires of the gods This, with reference to the divinities
gesnau songs § means by it 'joints ' 'As the God is the self of all, in as much as He is the lord of the desires of all the worlds, high and low, it is only reasonable that He should haveRk and Sdman, in the shape of earth and fire, for his joints ' S
THE RG AND THE SAMA VEDAS (continued)
1 athadhyatmam vdg eva rk, prdnah sama, tad clad ctasyam rcy adhyudham sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama giyalc, vdg cva sa prano'mas tat sama
1 Now with reference to the body Speech is the Rk' breath is the Sdman This Sdman rests upon -that Rk. Therefore the Sdman is sung as resting on that Rk Speech is sa and breath, ama and that makes sdman
I 7 6. Chdndogya Upanisad 349.
2. caksur eva ig atma sama, tad etad etasyam rcy adhyudham sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama gtyate, caksur eva sd'tmd'mas tat soma
2. The eye is the Rk, the soul is the Soman. This Soman rests on that Rk, therefore the Soman is sung as resting on the Rk The eye is so and the soul ama and that makes soman
3 irotram eva rn manah sama, tad etad etasyam rcy adhyudham sama, tasmad rcy adhyudham sama giyate, irotram eva sa mano'mas tat sama.
3 The ear is the Rk and the mind is the Soman This Soman rests on that Rk Therefore the Soman is sung as resting on the Rk The ear is sa and the mind ama and that makes soman
4 atha yad etad aksnah suklam bMh saiva rk, athayan ntlam farali krsnam tat sama, tad etad etasyam rcy adhyudham soma, tasmat rcy adhyudham sama giyate, atha yad evaitad aksnah iuklam bhah savoa sa'tha yan ntlam pardh krsnam tad amas tat sama
4 Now, the white light of the eye is Rk and the blue exceeding darkness is Saman This Saman rests on that Rk. Therefore the Saman is sung as resting on the Rk The white light of the eye is so and the blue, exceeding darkness, ama and that makes saman.
5 atha ya eso'ntai-aksxm puruso driyate saiva ik, tat sama, tad uktham, tad yajuh, tad brahma, tasyaitasya tad eva rupam yad amusya rupam, ywo amusya gesnau tau sesnau, van noma tan noma.
1 1\ !1° W ' tms P erson who k seen within the eye is the hymn irk), the chant (the saman), is the recitation {uktJia), i S the sacrificial formula {yapts), is the prayer {brahman) The form oi this one is the same as the form of that (person seen in the sun} The songs of the former are the songs of this. The name oi the one is the name of the other.
6 sa esa ye cattasmdd arvanco lokds tesam ceste manusya- tclh^a-sataya^h^ lXni ^ Sm S«y««ty etamie gayantt, tasmat
nUn 5 6 1S * e l OT ? of the worlds wluch are und «- tlus one and him Therefore they are winners of wealth ' S
VtnS is a musical instrument which has had a long history in India
The Principal Upamsads
7 atha ya etad evani vidvdn sdma gdyaty ubhau sa gdyah, so'munaiva sa esa ye cdnwsmat pardnco lokds tarns cdpnoh deva-kamdmi ca
7 Now, he, who knowing this, sings the Sdman, sings of both Through the former (person in the sun) he obtains the worlds which are beyond that (the sun) as also the desires of the gods
8 athanenawa ye caitasmdd, arvdnco lokds tdmS cdpnoh manusya-kdmdmS ca tasmdd « hawam-vid udgdtd bruydt
8 And through this (person in the eye) he obtains the worlds which are under the latter and also the desires of men There- fore an ttdgdtr pnest, who knows this, should say (the following)
9 katn te kdmam agdydnity esa hy eva kdmdgdnasyesfe, ya evam vidvdn sdma gdyati, sdma gdyatt.
9 What desire may I win for you by singing? 'He, truly, becomes capable of obtaining desires by singing, he, who knowing this sings the Sdman, yea, sings the Sdman '
THE IDENTIFICATION OF UDGlTHA
I irayo hodgithe kuiald babhilvuh, iilakah idldvatyai catkitd- yano dalbhyah, pravdhano jaivalir ttt, tehocurudgithevat kufalah smo hantodgithe kathdm vaddma tti
1 There were three persons well-versed in the udgitha, Silaka the son of Salavat, the son of Cikitana of the Dalbha clan, and Pravahana, son of JTvala They said 'We are, indeed, well-versed in the udgitha Well, let us have a discussion on the udgitha '
2 tatheti ha samupavvoiiuh, sa ha pravdhano jaivalvr uvdca, bhagavantdv agre vadatdm, brdhmanayor vadator vdcam iros- ydmiti
2 'So be it' said they and sat down Then, Pravahana, son of Jivala, said 'You two, sirs, speak first. I will listen to the words of the two Brahmanas discussing '
From this it appears that Pravahana was a Ksatnya See CUV 3 5, where he is said to t>e rdjanya-bandhuh Even though he is not a
I87 Chandogya Upamsad 351
Brahmana, he happens to be the one who knows the true meaning of vdgltha
3 sa ha itlakah sdldvatyas" ' catkitayanam dalbhyam uvaca, hanta tod prcchdmti, prcchett Iiovdca
3 Then, Silaka, son of Salavat said to the son of Cikitana of the Dalbha clan, 'Well, may I question you?' He replied, 'Question,'
4 kd samno gahr tit, svara iti hovaca, svarasya kd gahr ttt, prdna ttt hovaca, prdnasya kd gahr ity, annam iti hovaca annasya ka gahr ity, dpa lit hovaca
4 He asked, 'What is the goal of the Sawian?' He replied, 'It is sound ' He asked, 'What is the goal of sound'' He replied, 'Breath ' He asked, 'What is the goal of breath?* He replied, 'Food' He asked, 'What is the goal of food?' He replied, 'Water.' y
gahh goal substratum or basis or final principle gatir asrayah parayanam Uy dot §
5 apam ka gatir iti, asau loka lit hovdcdmusya lokasya kd gatir itx, na svargam lokam atmayed iti hovaca, svargam vayam lokam sdmdbhisamsthdpaydvuih svarga-satnstavam hi sdmeti.
5. (He asked) 'What is the goal of water?' He replied, Yonder world ' (He asked) 'What is the goal of the yonder world?' He replied, 'One should not lead beyond the heavenly world ' We established the Saman in the world of heaven, for the Saman is praised m heaven.
wo* ah* Sdma Veia K the W ° rId ° f heaven svar S° vai sama
6 tarn ha silakah idldvatyas caikitdyanam dalbhyam uvaca apratistfniam vat ktla te, ddlbhya, sama, yas tv etarht bruv&n
a tt. v # atls y ami miirdhd U vipatcd iti.
6 Then Silaka, son of Salavat said to Cikitana of the Dalbha
1 M>& ^ d yf' y ° Ur SSman ' ° f y° u of the Da3bha ^n, « ^established If now, someone were to say, your head will fall off, surely your head would fall off.*
head uinSS °/ thC e 5° r K "SBMted by the statement that your "eaa \vui fall off if one utters a curse hke that
masya ka galtr ity ayam loka Mi hovdcdsya lokasya kd gahntt
352 The Principal Upamsads I 9 2
na pratisthdm lokam atmayed itt hovdca prahsfhdm vayam loham samdbhisamsthdpaydmah pratistha-samstdvam hi sdmeti
7 He said, 'Well, I would like to know this from you, sir, 'Know it,' said he (He asked) 'What is the goal of the yonder world?' He replied, 'One should not lead beyond this world- support We establish the Sdman on the world as support for the Sdman is praised as the support '
8 tarn ha pravdhano jaivahr uvdcantavaddhai kila te idldvatya sdma-yastvetarhi brwydn mitrdhd te vipatisyatiti murdhd te vtpated iti hantdham etad bhagavato veddniti viddhiU hovdca.
8 Then Pravahana, son of Jivala, said to him, 'Verily, indeed, your Sdman, O son of Salavat, has an end If someone now were to say, "Your head will fall off," surely your head would fall off ' He said, 'Well, I would like to know this from you, Sir ' He replied, 'Know it '
1 asya hkasya kd gattr ity dkdsa th hovdca sarvdm ha vd imam bhiitdny dkdsdd eva samutpadyante, akasam pratyastam yanty dkdio hy evaibhyo jydydn, dkdiah pardyanam
1 'What is the goal of tins world?' He replied, 'Space, for all these creatures are produced from space They return back into space For space is greater than these Space is the final goal'
See VII 12 1
Space is said to be the origin, support and end of all The theory that space is the ultimate ground of the world is regarded as more satisfactory than the view which traces it to sound, breath, food, water, yonder world or this world
2 sa esa paro-variydn udgithah, sa eso'nantah, paro~vanyo hdsya bhavati, paro-varlyaso ha lokdn jayatt ya etad evam vtdvdn parovariydm sam udgitham ttpdste
2 This is the udgitha, highest and best This is endless. He who, knowing this, meditates on udgitha, the highest and best, becomes the highest and best and obtains the highest and best worlds
Chdndogya Upanisad
3. tarn haiiam ahdhanva iatmaka udara-idndilydyoktvovdca. ydvatfaenamprajdydmtidgitkatnvedtsyante,paro-vanyo haibkyas tavad asmvmlloke jtvanam bJiamsyah.
3. When Atidhanvan Saunaka taught this Udgttha to Udara Sandilya, he also said: 'As long as they shall know this Udgitha among your descendants, so long their life in this world will be the highest and best
4. tatha'mitsmimlloke loka iti; sa ya etad evam vidvan ttpdste parovariya eva hdsydsmiThl loke fivanam bhavati, tatha'musmiml loke loka %ti, loke loka iti.
4 And so will their state in that other world be. One who thus knows and meditates — his Me in this world becomes the highest and best and so his state m that other world, yea, in that other world '
1 Among the Kurus, when they (crops) were destroyed by hailstorms.nhere lived in the village of the possessor of elephants a very poor man, Usasti Cakrayana, with his young wife, Atiki,
The story is intended to make the comprehension easier. tbhya-granie— in the village of the possessor of elephants or in the village belonging to Ibhya
2. He begged (food) of the possessor of elephants, while he was eating beans. He (the possessor) said to him: 'I have no otner than these which are set before me '
he^ S man f& th , at the beans were fa 46 Pkte from which ne was eating and therefore they were impure
^i dt H m f de1 * tl hov&ca - m <*™™pradadau, hantdnupdnam «v, vcchstham vai me pttam syad iti hovaca.
•wrtS°&^ K rf 5^ ttel i sug , gests 016 aIternat »ve explanation of
354 TJ' e Principal Vpamsads 1, 10. S.
3 He said 'Give me some of them ' He gave them to him and said, 'Here is water (to drink).' He replied, 'That would be for me to drink something left by another (and hence impure) '
4 na svid ete'py iicchisthah itt, na vd ajivisyam iman akhadann th hovaca, kamo ma itdaka^pdnam itt.
4 Are not these (beans) also left over (and so impure)? 'Verily,' said he, 'I could not live if I did not eat these The drinking of water is at my will '
'One who is endowed with knowledge and fame and capable of helping himself and others, if such a one, falling into a state of distress should do such a thing (eat unclean food), no dement touches him A wrong action is faulty only when it is performed while other courses that are not wrong are open and would as easily save one's life ' §
5 sa Ya kltdditvd'ttsesdn jdydyd djaharti, sagra eva siibhiksa babhilva, tan pratigrhya mdadhau
5 "When he had eaten, he gave what still remained to his wife She had eaten well even before. After taking them, she kept them safe
6. sa ha prdtah samphdna uvdca, yad batdnnasya Jabhemaht, labhemaln dhana-matram rdjdsau yaksyatc, sa via sarvair drtvij- yatr vrmtdt
6 Next morning, he arose and said, 'Oh, if I could get some- thing to eat, I might make a little money. The king over there is having a sacrifice performed for himself He might choose (select) me to perform all the priestly offices '
7 tarn jayovaca, hania eta vma eva kulmasa itt. fan hhaiit- vamum yajnam vitatam eydya t
7 His wife said to him 'Here, my lord, are the beans Having eaten them, he went over to the sacrifice that was being performed
In addition to personal religion, the Vedas advocated public worship by means of sacrifices In the period of the Veda, there were no temples Public worship was needed m view of the social nature of man In a crowd, emotions are more easily excited In every religion, social worship of God is recognised, in which music, smguig and ntual are employed to evoke religious feeling and actions Yajiias or sacrifices are solemn and stately soaal acts
8 Mroigatrn dstave sto?yamSndn fipopavivcsa, sa ha frasto- taram uvdca
Chandogya Upanisad
8 Then he sat down near the Udgdtr priests as they were about to sing the hymn in the place (assigned) for singing. Then he said to the Prastotr priest:
9 prastotar yd devatd prastdvam anvdyaUd, tam ced avidvan frasfosyast, murdhd U vipatisyatiti
9. '0 Prastotr priest, if you sing the introductory praise •without knowing the divinity that belongs to it, your head will fall oft?
10 evam evodgdtdram uvdcodgdtar yd devatodgitham anvdyaUd tam ced avidvan udgdyasi, murdhd te vipaUsyaMt.
10 In the same manner he said to the Udgdtr priest, 'Oh, Vdgdtr priest, if you chant the udgiiha without knowing the divinity that belongs to it, your head will fall off '
11. evam eva pratihartdram uvdca, pratihartar yd devata prati- haram anvdyaUd, tam ced avidvan pratiharisyasi, murdhd te vtpatisyalUi te ha samdratds tusnim dsdmcaknre.
11. In the same manner, he said to the Pratihartr pnest, 'Oh, Pratihartr pnest, if you take up the response without knowing the divinity that belongs to it, your head will fall off ' They stopped and sat down in silence
In performing sacrifices we should have a knowledge of their meaning
THE DIVINITIES CONNECTED WITH THE SACRIFICES (continued)
x. atha hainam yajamdna uvdca, bJiagavantam vd aham vwidimiUi, mastir ami cdkrdyana xti hovdca.
1 Then, to him, the institutor of the sacrifice said, 'Verily, y^^wish to know you, sir.' He replied, 'I am Usasti
2 sa hovaca, bhagavantam vd aham ebhify sarvair drtmjyaih paryavstsam, bhagavato vd aham amUyd-anydn avrsi.
offi v n ' he said ' 1 looked for y° u for these priestly unices Verily, not finding you, sir, I have chosen others.'
356 The Principal Upantsads I n. 7.
3 bltagavdms to eva me sarvatr drtvtjyatr ttt, tatheti, atha tarhy eta eva samattsrstah sluvatdm, ydvat tv ebhyo dhanath dadyds, tdvan mama dadya ttt tatheti ha yajamdna uvdca.
3 But now, sir, please take up all the priestly offices. 'Sc be it/ he said, 'let these with my permission, sing the praises But as much wealth as you give to them, so much give to me also ' The institutor of the sacrifice said, 'So be it '
4 atha hatnamprastotopasasdda • prastotaryd devoid prastdvam anvayatta, tarn ced avidvan prastosyasi, murdha te vtpatisyatttt. ma bhagavan avocat. katamd sd devatett
4 Then the Prastotr pnest approached him (and said), 'You, sir, said unto me, "Oh Prastotr pnest, if you sing the introductory praise without knowing the divinity that belong: to it, your head will fall off " Which is that divinity''
5 prana tti hovdca, sarodni ha vd tmdm bhiitdm prdnam evabhtsamviiantt, prdnam abhyujphate, satsa devatd prasldvam anvayatta tarn ced avtdvdn prdstosyo murdha te vyapattsyat tathoktasya mayeh
5 'Breath,' said he 'Verily, indeed, all beings here enter (into life) with breath, and depart (from life) with breath This is the divinity belonging to the Prastava If you had sung the Prastava without knowing it, after you had been told so by me, your head would have fallen off '
SeeTU III 3
6 atha hainam udgdtopasasddodgdlar yd devatodgitham anvd- yaiid, tarn ced avidvan udgdsyasi, murdha te mpahsyatlti ma bhagavan avocat katamd sd devateti
6 Then the Udgatr pnest approached him (and said), 'You, sir, said unto me "0 Udgatr pnest, if you sing the udgttha without knowing the divinity that belongs to it, your head m fall off " Which is that divinity?'
7 dditya ih hovdca, sarvdm ha vd tmdm bhutdny adityam uccaih santam gdyantt, saisd devatodgitham anvayatta, tarn ced avidvan udagdsyah, murdha te vyapatisyat tathoktasya mayeh
7 'The sun,' said he 'Venly, indeed, all bemgs here sing of the sun, when he is up This is the divinity connected with the udgitha If, without knowing this, you had chanted the udgttha, after you had been told so by me, your head woulc have fallen off '
Chdndogya Upanisad
8 atha hainam ■pratihartopasasada, praiihartar yd devatd pratt- haram anvayattd, tam ced avidvan pratihansyasi, miirdha te mpatisyahtt; ma bhagavdn avocat. katamd sa devateti.
8. Then the PraUhatir pnest approached him (and said), 'You sir, said unto me, "Oh Pratihartr pnest, if you take up the response without knowing the divinity that belongs to it, your head will fall off." Which is that divinity?'
9 annam iti hovaca, saroani ha va iniSni bhutdny annam eva pratiharamanani jlvanti, saisa devatd pratihdram anvayattd, tam ced avidvan pratyahansy ah, miirdha. te vyapatisyat taiJwkiasya mayeh, tathoktasya mayeti.
9 'Food/ said he 'Verily, indeed, all beings here live, when they partake of food This is the divinity that belongs to the Prahhara, and if, without knowing this, you had taken up the Prahhara, after you had been told so by me, your head would have fallen off '
' Cp TU III. 2 Meditation without knowledge is barren of results
1 atkatah Sauva udgithah tadd ha iako ddlbhyo gldvo va maxtreyah soadhyayam udvavrdja.
1 Now, next, the udgitJia of the dogs Baka Dalbhya or Wava Martreya went forth for the study of the Veda.
Here are two names for one person. svadhyaya- study of the Vedas
Cp Patafi]ali's definition of niyama- sa ^-santosa-tapah-svddhydye^ara^ranidhanani. Yoga Siitra, II. 32. 1 * 3 s *" e study of the scriptures and recitation of mantras which lead to punty of mind
vedania-iatamdriya-pranavadi japam budhah sattva-suddhi-haram puriisam svddhyayam paricaksate Mrthyaya is the study of the scriptures dealing with hberation or «e repetition of the pranava
"Mhyayo moksa&aslranam adhyayanam pranava-japo va.
The 'Principal Upamsads
2 tasmai ivd ivetah prddur-babhuva tarn anye ivdna Upa- sametyocur annam no bhagavan dgdyatv asandydma vd ih
2 Unto him there appeared a white dog Other dogs gathered round this (one) and said, 'Obtain food for us by singing Venly we are hungry '
3 tan hovdcehawa ma pratar upasamiydteh, tadd ha bako ddlbhyo gldvo vd maitreyah prahpdlaydm cakdra
3 Then he said to them 'Come to me here tomorrow morning ' So Baka Dalbhya or Glava Maitreya kept watch
4 te ha yathaivedam bahispavamdnena stosyamdndh samrdb- dhdh, sarpantity evarrt dsasrpus te ha samupawiya htm cakruh
4 Just as the pnests, when they are about to chant with the bahispavamdna hymn of praise, move along, joined to one another, so did the dogs move along Then they sat down together and made the noise 'him '
5 aim addma, aum pibdma, aum devo varunah prajdpaUl savitdnnam ihdharat anna-pate annam ihahara, dhara, aum ih
5 (They sang), 'Aum, let us eat, Aum, let us dnnk, Aum, may the god Varuna, Prajd-pati and Savitr bring food here 0 Lord of food, bring food here, yea, bring it here Aum '
This section is a satirical protest against the externahsm of the sacrificial creed, in the interests of an inward spiritual life
Madhva attributes the hymn to Vayu, who assumed the form of a dog
I ayam vdva loko hdu-kdrah, vdyur hdi-kdrai candramd atha- kdrah, dtmeha-kdro'gmr i-kdrak
1 This world is the syllable hau The air is the syllable hdi, the moon is the syllable atha The self is the syllable iha The fire is the syllable t
The syllables mentioned are the sounds used in the recitation of Saman hymns
2 dditya U-kdro mhava e-kdro viivedevd au-ho-yi-Mrah, prajd-palir him-kdrdh, prdnah svaro'nnam yd, vdg virdt
Chandogya Upanisad
2 The sun as the syllable « Invocation is the syllable e. The Visvedevas is the syllable au-ho-t Prajd-pah is the syllable hm Breath is sound Food is ya. Viraj is speech.
yavagvirdt Cp RV X 189 3 trimsad-dhatna vtrayak vak
Her character is prajna or prajnatman, only partially actual in the individual self-consciousness, distinguishing the I from the not-I, the inner world from the outer one In ordering life, the potential all-consciousness lies asleep m the depths of the human body It may be awakened by the discipline of yoga
3 ummktas irayodasah stobhah samcaro hwh-k£mh.
3 The undefined is the variable, thirteenth, rnterjectional sound hum
4 dugdhe'smai vdg doham, yo vaco doho'nnavan annado bhavati: ya etam evam samnmn upam§adam vedopamsadam veda
4 Speech yields to him the milk, which is the milk of speech itself He becomes rich m food, an eater of food — one who knows thus this mystic meaning of the Sanians, yea, who knows the mystic meaning
36o
The Principal Upanisads
2. tad utapy ahi'h samnaimm iipdgdd iti sddhunainam apdgda ity eva tad ahuh asdmnainam updgdd %ty asddhvnainam updgdd ity eva tad dhvh.
2. So also people say, 'He approached with Saman' '; that is they say, 'he approached him in a kindly way/ They say, 'He approached him with no Saman,' i e they say 'he approached him in no kindly way/
Saman is understood as the good, as the dliarma.
3 athotapy ahuh soma no bateti yat sddhu bhavati sddhu baiety eva tad, ahuh, asdma no bateti yad asadhu bhavaty asadhu batety eva tad ahuh
3 And they say 'this, verily, is Saman for us ' Where they say 'this is good for us' when an3'thing is good And they say 'this is a saman for us,' where fhey say, 'this is not good' when anjihing is not good.
4. He who, knowing this, meditates on the Saman as good, all good qualities would quickly approach him and accrue to him.
1. lokesu panca-vidliah sdmopdsTta. prthivt him-kdrah, agnth prastdvo'ntariksah udgfthah, adityah pratiharo dyaur mdhanam ity urdhver.c.
II 3. 2 Chandogya UpanisaA 361
1. In the worlds, one should meditate on the Soman as fivefold; the earth as the syllable him, fire as the prastava, the atmosphere as the udgitha, the sun as the pratihara and the sky as the mdhana (conclusion) This, among the higher (ascending).
The sky is said to be mdhana, inasmuch as those that depart from this world are deposited [nidhiyante) in the sky.
2 athavrttesu, dyaur hvm-kara, adityah prastdvo'ntanksam udgitho'gnih pratiharah, prthim mdhanam
2. Now in the reverse (descending order) the sky as the syllable htm, the sun as the prastava, the atmosphere as the udgitha, the fire as the pratihara and the earth as the nidhana
The earth is the mdhana as the people that come back to the earth are deposited here.
3 hdpante hasmai lokd urdhvds cavrltas ca ya etad evam vidvaml lokesu panca-vidham samopaste.
3 The worlds, in the ascending and reverse orders, belong to him, who, knowing this thus, meditates on the fivefold Soman in the worlds
In different ways the importance of the meditation is indicated
1. vr^iau panca-vidham samopasita, puro-vato hvnv-M.ro, megho jayate sa frastavdh, var?ati sa udgWiah, vidyotate stanayah sa prahterah
1 One should meditate on the fivefold Soman in the rain, ine preceding wind as the syllable him; the formation of the cloud is the prastava What rams is the udgitha; the lightning and the thunder as the pratihara
2 udgrhnah tan mdhanam, varsah hasmai varsayati ha ya cww vidvan vrstau panca-vidliam samopaste.
2 The cessation as the nidhana. It rams for him and he causes it to ram, he, who knowing this thus, meditates on the fivefold Saman in rain.
The Principal Upamsads
1 saruasv ajisu paiica-vidham samopdstta, meglw yat sampla- vate sa him-karo yad varsatt sa prastdvo, yah prdcyah syandante sa udgithah, yah piattyah sa pratiMrah, samudro mdhanam
1. One should meditate on the fivefold Saman in all the waters When a cloud forms, that is the syllable htm, when it rains, that is a prastava; when (the waters) flow to the east, they are udgitha When they flow to the west they axepratihara The ocean is the mdhana
2 na hdpsn praity apsuman bliavah ya etad evdm vidvan saroasv apsu panca-vidluan sdmopaste
2. He does not die rn water, he becomes nch in water, he, who knowing this thus, meditates on the fivefold Saman m all the waters
I rtustt panca-vidham samopaslta vasanto htm-karo, grismah prastavah, varsa ndgitJiah, sarat praUharah, hemanto mdhanam
1 One should meditate on the fivefold Saman, among the seasons, the spring as the syllable htm, the summer as the prastava, the rainy season as the udgttha, the autumn as the pratthdra and the winter as the mdhana
2 kalpante hasmd rtava riuman bhavatt ya etad evath vidvan rtusit panca-vidham sdmopaste.
2 The seasons belong to him and he becomes nch in seasons, he, who knowing this thus, meditates on the fivefold Saman in the seasons
1 One should meditate on the fivefold Soman among the animals, the goats as the syllable him, the sheep as the prasidva, the cows as the udgitha, the horses as the pratihdra and the human being as the mdhana
The human being is the culmination of animal development
2 Animals belong to him and he becomes rich in animals, he, who knowing this thus, meditates on the fivefold Soman among the animals.
1. pranesu panca-vidhamparo-variyah samopdsita, prdno him- karo, vak prastdvah, caksur udgtthah, irotram pratiharah, mono nidhanam paro-variyamsi va etam
1 One should meditate on the most excellent fivefold Sdman among the vital breaths, breath as the syllable htm, speech as the prastava, the eye as the udgltha, the ear as the frahhara and the mind as the ntdhana. These, venly, are the most excellent.
pram, breath It is used to include the senses also pram is also explained as ghram, smell
That which is higher than the high is called paro {para «) . He who is higher than this is paro-varam He who is higher than Hasparo-varam is called paro-variyah Madhva
2 paro-variyo hasya bhavah paro-vanyaso ha lokan jayatiya clad evam vidvdn pranesu panca-vidliam paro-variyah samopasta, mi tit panca-vidhasya
2 The most excellent belongs to him, he wins the most excellent worlds, he, who knowing this thus, meditates on the most excellent Sdman among the vital breaths.
The Pnnapal Upanisads II 9 2
1 atha sapta-vtdhasya, vdci sapta-vidham samopasita, yat kim ca vaco hum iti sa himkaro, yat preti sa prastavah, yad eh sa ddth
1 Now for the sevenfold One should meditate on the seven- fold Soman in speech Whatsoever of speech is hum, that is the syllable him, whatsoever is pra, that is prastava, and the syllable a as the first (or the beginning)
2 yad udih sa udgithah, yat pratih sa pratthardh, yad upeh sa upadravah, yan niti tan nidhanam
2 Whatsoever is ut, that is an udgtiha, whatsoever is pratt, that is a praiihdra, whatsoever is upa, that is an upadrava (or approach to the end), whatsoever is m, that is nidhana (or conclusion)
3 dugdhe'smat vag doham yo vaco doho'nnavdn annado bhavah, sa etad evam vidvan vaci sapta-vtdham samopaste
3 For him speech yields milk, which is the milk of speech and he becomes rich m food and eater of food, he, who knowing this thus, meditates on the sevenfold Saman m speech
1 atha khalv amum adityam sapta-vtdham samopasita, sarvada samastena sama, mam prati mam pratih saruena samastena sama.
1 One should meditate on the sevenfold Soman in the sun He is Sama because he is always the same He is the same with everyone smce people think 'He faces me ' 'He faces me '
2 tasmmn imam sarvani bhiitany anvdyattamh vtdyat tasya yat purodayat sa htm-kdras tadasyapaiavo'nvayattds tasmat te him kurvantt him-kdra-bhapno hy etasya sdmnah
2 One should know that all beings here depend on him What he is before rising is the syllable him On this depend the animals. Therefore they utter the syllable him Truly they are partakers in the syllable htm of the Soman.
II 9 8. Chdndogya Upanisad 365
3 atha yat prathamodite sa prastavas tad asya manusyd anvayattas, tasmat te prastuti-kdmdh praSamsa-kdmdh prastdva- Ihapno hy etasya samnah.
3. Now when xt is just after sunrise, that is a prastava. On this men depend Therefore they are desirous of praise, desirous of laudation Truly they are partakers in the prastava of that Soman
Men are generally lovers of name and fame.
4. atha yat sangava-veldydm sa ddih tad asya vaydmsy anvdya- Mm, tasmat tany antankse'ndrambandny dddyd'tmdnam pan- patanty ddi-bhdfini hy etasya samnah.
4. Now when it is the sangava (cowgathering) time, that is adi On this depend the birds. Therefore they hold themselves without support, in the atmosphere and fly about Truly, they are partakers in the adi of the Soman.
5. atha yat samprati madhyan-dine sa udgithah, tad asya devd anvayattaJf, tasmat te sattamdhprdjdpatydndmiidgitha-bhdpno hy etasya samnah.
5 Now, when it is just midday, that is an udgitha. On this the gods depend Therefore they are the best of Prajdpaii's offspring Truly they are partakers in the udgitha of that Saman
6. atha yad urdhvam madkyan-dindt prdg apardhndt sa pratv- naras, tad asya garbhd anvayattas, tasmat te pratthrtd ndvapady- anU, paiihdra-bhdpno hy etasya samnah
6 Now when it is past midday and before the afternoon— tnat is a prahhdra On this all foetuses depend. Therefore they are held up and do not drop down. Truly, they are partakers in the prahhdra of that Sdman
7 atJtayad urdhvam apardhndt prdg astamaydt, saupadravah, to*Waranya anvdyaltdh, tasmat te purusam drstva kaksam svabhram ily upadravanty iipadrava-bhdjino hy etasya samnah
7- rvow when it is past afternoon and before sunset, that is an upadrava. On this the wild animals depend Therefore when « e y see a man, they run to a hiding-place as their hole. Truly "ley are partakers in the upadrava of that Saman.
fa-fun yat $ ra{ha mastamite tan nidhanam, tad asya pitaro' tna 1? , iasmSt mn mdadhati mdliana-bhdjino hy etasya samnah eww khalv amum ddityam sapta-vidham sdmopdste.
366 Tlte Principal Upantsads II 10 5
8. Now when it is just after sunset, that is the nidltana On this the fathers depend Therefore the people lay aside the fathers Truly they are partakers of the ntdliana of that Saman. Thus does one meditate on the sevenfold Saman in the sun
X. atha khalv attna-sammitam ativirlyu sapta-vidham samo fasita, him-Mra Ui try-aksaram prastava ih try-aksaram tat samam
1. Now, then, one should meditate on the sevenfold Saman which is uniform in itself and leads beyond death The syllable him has three letters, prastava has three letters That is the same.
Though in English they are syllables, in Sanskrit each English s}'llable is represented by one letter
3 vdgitha iti try-aksaram upadrava-ih catur-aksaram tnbhs tribhih samam bhavati aksaram attsisyate, try-aksaram tat samam
3 Udgitha has three letters; upadrava has four letters Three and three, that is the same, one letter left over Having three letters, that is the same
'What is left over is supposed to have three letters
4 ntdhanam iti try-aksaram, tat samam eva bhavati tdm Jm va etam dva-vimsatir aksardni.
4 Nidhana has three letters That is the same too. These indeed, are the twenty-two letters.
5. eka-vnhsaiy ddtiyam dpnott, eka-vimio vd ito'sdv ddttyo, dvd-viiiisena param ddtiyaj jdyati; tan ndkam s tad vtiokam
5 With the twenty fust, one obtains the sun Venly, the sun is the twenty-first from here With the twenty-second he
II, i2. i. CMndogya Upanisad
conquers what is beyond the sun That is bliss. That is sorrow- less
£ quotes 'The twelve months, the five seasons (taking the whole of winter as one) and the three worlds (earth, atmosphere and sky) (make up twenty) and the sun is the twenty-first '
6 apnati hddityasya jayam, paro hdsydditya-jaydj jayo bhavah, ya etad evam vidvdn dtma-sammitam ati-mrtyu sapta-vidham samopaste, samopaste
6 He obtains the victory of the sun, indeed a victory higher than the victory of the sun is his, who, knowing this thus, meditates on the sevenfold Sdman, uniform m itself, which leads beyond death, yea, who meditates on the (sevenfold) Saman.
1. The mind is the syllable him, speech is the prastava, the eye is the udgttha, the ear is the pratihara, the breath is the mdhana This is the Gdyatra-chzat woven in the vital breaths
2. sa ya evam etad gayatram pranesu protam veda pram bha- vah, sarvam dyur eh, jyog jivati, mahdn prajaya pasubhir bhavah, mahdn Mrtya mahdmandh sydt, tad vratam
2 - He who knows thus this Gdyatra chant as woven in the 1 „ reaths > becomes the possessor of vital breaths, reaches the full length of life, lives well, becomes great m offspring and in cattle, great in fame One should be great-minded. That is the rule.
Sf great - mmded He w" 1 not be petty-minded ahsudra
1 J/ f hma l lthati sa htm kdrah, dhumo jayate sa prastdvah, j man sa udgttho'ngdrd bhavanh sa pratihdrah, upaidmyah tan
The Principal Upamsads
mdhanam, samidmyati tan mdhanam, etad rathantaram agnan protam
x One rubs the fire-sticks together— that is the syllable him Smoke is produced, that is the prastava It blazes. That is the udgfflui Coals are produced, that is thepratihdra. It becomes extinct, that is the rndhana This is the Raihantara as woven on fire
2 sa ya evam etad rathantaram agnail protam veda, brahma- varcasy annddo bhavati, sarvam ayur eh, jyog jivati, mahdn prajaya pa&ttbhtr bhavatt, mahdn klrtya; na pratyann agnvm aca- men na msthtvet, tad vratam
2. He who knows thus this Raihantara chant as woven on fire becomes radiant with sacred wisdoms, an eater of food, reaches the full length of life, lives well, becomes great in off- spring and in cattle, great in fame One should not take a sip of water or spit before the fire That is the rule
1 upamantrayate sa him-karah, piapayate sa prastavah, stnya saha iete sa udgtthah, prati strlm saha iete sa pratihdrah, kdlam gacchah tan mdhanam, param gacchah tan mdhanam' etad vama- devyam tmthune protam
1 One summons, that is the syllable Mm He makes request, that is a prastava Along with the woman, he lies down, that is the udgitha He lies on the woman, that is the prahhara He comes to the end, that is the rndhana He comes to the finish, that is the rndhana This is the Vamadevya chant woven on sex intercourse
2 sa ya evam etad vamadevyam mithune protam veda mtthum bhavatt, mtthunan mithunat prajdyate, sarvam ayur ett. Jyog jwatt, mahdn prajaya pasubhtr bhavati mahdn kirtyd, na hancana partharet, tad vratam
2. He who knows thus this Vamadevya chant as woven on sex intercourse, comes to intercourse, procreates himself from every act, reaches a full length of life, lives well, becomes great in offspring and in cattle, great in fame One should not despise any woman That is the rule
U l5 2 , Chdndogya Upanisad 3 6 9
1 udyan htm-kdrak, udttah prastdvah.madhyan-dimj^itho' parahnah praUMro'stam yan nidhanam etad brhad aditye
^fwhen the sun rises, it is the syllable him When the sun has risen, it is the prastdva; when it is midday, it is the udgitha. When it is afternoon, it is the prahhdra. When (the sun) is set, it is the mdhana This is the Brhat chant as woven on the sun.
2. sa ya evam etad brhad aditye protam veda, tejasvt annado bhavah, sarvam ayur eh, jyog jivah, mahdn prajaya pasubhtr bhavah mahdn kirtyd' tapantam na mndet, tad vratam.
2 He who knows thus this BM chant as woven on the sun becomes refulgent, an eater of food, reaches a full length of life, lives well, becomes great m offspring and m cattle, great in fame. One should not decry the burning sun That is the rule.
1 abhram samplavante sa himkarah, meghojdyate saprastdvah, varsah sa udgithah, vtdyotate stanayah sa pratihdraJt, udgrhnati tan mdkanam, etad vairupam parjanye protam
1 The mists come together, that is the syllable him. A cloud is formed, that is the prastdva. It rams, that is the udgttha It flashes and thunders, that is the pratihdra It holds up That is the mdhana. This is the Vairupya chant woven on ram.
2 say a evam etad vairupam parjanye protam veda, virupdms' ca suriipami ca paiunavarundhe, sarvam ayur eh,jyogjivah, mahdn prajaya paiublar bhavah, mahdn kirtyd, varsantam na mndet, tad watam
2 He who thus knows this Vairupya as woven on ram, acquires cattle, of various form and of beautiful form, reaches a full length of life, lives well, becomes great in offspring and in cattle, great in fame One should not decry when it rams That is the rule
The Principal Upanisads
1 vasanto him-kdrah, grismah prastavah, varsd udgitliah, iarat pratthdrah, hemanto mdhanam, etat vairdjam rtttsu protam
1 Spring is the syllable htm, summer is the prastava, rainy season is the udgitha, autumn is the pratihara, winter is the ntdhana This is the Vairaja chant as woven on the seasons
2 sa ya evam etad vairdjam rtusu protam veda, virdjatt prajaya paiubhtr brahma-vatcasena, sarvam ayur eh, jyog jivati, maMn prajaya patubhtr bhavah maMn kirlyd, rtiln na mndet, tad vratam
2 He who knows thus this Vairaja chant as woven on the seasons shines with children, cattle and the lustre of sacred wisdom, reaches a full length of life, lives well, becomes great m offspring and cattle, great m fame One should not decry the seasons That is the rule.
1 prthtm htm-karo'ntanksam prastavah, dyaur udgtthak, diiah pratthdrah, samudro mdhanam, etah sakvaryo lokesu protah
1 The earth is the syllable him The atmosphere is the prastava The sky is the udgitha, the quarters of space are pratihara. The ocean is the mdhana These are the verses of the Sakvarl chant woven on the worlds
2 sa ya evam etah iakvaryo lokesu protd veda, loki bhavati, sarvam ayur eti, jyog jivati, mahan prajaya pasubhtr bhavati mahdn kirtyd; lokdn na mndet, tad vratam
2 One who knows these verses of the Sakvan chant as woven on the worlds becomes possessed of the worlds, reaches a full length of life, lives well, becomes great m offspring and cattle, great in fame One should not decry the worlds That is the rule
II 19 z. Chandogya Upanisad 371
REVATl CHANT
I aja Hm-kdro'vayah prastawh, gava udgitho'ivah pratiharah, pwuso mdhanam, eta revatyah pasusu protdh.
1. The goats axe the syllable htm The sheep are tiieprastava. The cows aTe the udgUha. The horses are the praUhara. The human being is the nidhana. These are the verses of the Revatt chant woven on the animals
2. saya evam eta revatyah paiusuprotd veda,pasumdn bhavati, sarvam ayur dx, jyog jivati, mahan prajaya paiubhir bhavati mahan ktrtya; paiun na mndet, tad vratam
2. He who knows thus these verses of the Reuatl chant as woven on the animals becomes the possessor of animals, reaches the fall length of life, lives well, becomes great in offspring and cattle, great in fame One should not decry animals. That is the role
YAjftAYA JNlYA CHANT
1 Hair is the syllable him. Skin is the prastdva. Flesh is the v^l?" ^° ne * s ^ e pratihara. Marrow is nidhana. This is the xafiidyatfnya chant woven on the members of the body.
2 sa ya evam etad yajnayajiiiyam angesu protam vedangl vnavati^ vdngena vihwchatt, sarvam ayur eti, jyogfivati mahan prajaya pahbhr bhavati mahan kirtyd, samvatsaram majjiio nainlyat, tad vratam; matfno ndiniyat iti va.
2 He who thus knows this YajMyaymya chant as woven on ine members of the body becomes equipped with limbs; does not become defective in any limb, reaches the full length of V e< lives w ell, great in offspring and cattle, great in fame One snouid not eat of marrow for a year. That is the rule. Rather, one should not eat of marrow at all.
The plural number mayno is used to include fish also. S.
372 The Principal Vpamsads II 21
1. agmr htm-Ttarah, vdyuh prasiavah, aditya vdgithah, nak- satrdm prahhdrah, candramd mdhanam dad rdjanam devatdsu protam
x Fire is the syllable him', Air is the prastdva Sun is the ttdgitha Stars are the pratiMia and moon is the mdhana This is fiie Rdjana chant woven on the divinities
2. sa ya evam dad rdjanam devaidsii protam vcdaitdsdm evi devatdndm salokatam sarshtdm sdyujyam gacchati, sarvam dyur eh, jyog fivatt, median piajayd paiubhir bhavati mahdn kirtyd, brahmanan na mndet, tad vratam
2 He who knows thus this Rdjana chant as woven on the divinities goes to the same world, to equality and to complete union with these very divinities, reaches the full length of life, lives well, becomes great m offspring and cattle, great m fame. One should not decry the Brahmanas. That is the rule.
He is lifted to the region of the deity whom he has loved and worshipped during life Salvation does not consist in absorption with the Absolute or assimilation to God but in getting near His presence and participating m His glory
Serfion 21
1 trayl vidyd htm-karah, tray a tme lokdli sa prastavo'gmr vdytir ddityah sa udgithah, naksatrdm vaydmsi ma) Tcayah sa praithdrah, sarpd gandharvah pitaias tan mdhanam, etat sdma sarvasmm protam
1 The threefold knowledge is the syllable htm. The three worlds here are the piastdva Fire, air and sun are the udgttha; stars, birds and the light rays are the praUhdra, serpents, gandharvas and the fathers are the mdhana. This is the chant as woven in all
2 He who knows thus this chant as woven on all becomes all
Clidndogya Upanisad
3. On this, there is this verse There are triple things which are fivefold. Greater than these, there is nothing else besides.
4 He who knows that, knows all All the quarters of space bring him gifts. One should meditate (on the thought) 'I am the All' That is the rule, yea, that is the rule
1 vmardi samno vrye pasavyam tiy agner udgitho'ntruktah prajdpaieh, niruktafi somasya, mrdu slak$nam vayoh, ilaksnam balavad wdrasya, krauncam brhaspateh, apadhvantam varu^asya: tan sarvan evopaseveta, vdrunam tv eva varjayet.
1 Of the Sdman, I choose the high-sounding one as good for cattle, this is the song sacred to Fire The undefined one belongs to Praja-pati, the defined one to Soma; the soft and the smooth to Vayu, the smooth and strong to Indra; the heron-like to Brhaspati, the ill-sounding to Varuna. Let one practise all these but one should avoid that belonging to Varuna.
2 amrtatvam devebhya dgdyamty agayet svadham pitrbhya aitim manusycbhyas trpodakam patubhyah svargam lokam yajamanaydnnam dtmana dgdyamty etam manasd dhvdvann apramattah sttmta.
2. 'Let me secure immortality for the gods by singing' thus should one sing 'Let me secure offerings for the fathers oy singing hope for men, grass and water for the cattle, the world of heaven for the sacnficer and food for myself ' Thus
SreftSy m ^ ° n aU thCSe ' ° ne Sh ° uld Sing the praises
tZ ! arVe Spmi& mrt y°rM»*™h, ton y*U svare^dlabhe- tcndram iaranam prapamio'bhiivam sa tvi prati vahsyaiy enam
The Principal Upanisads
3 All vowels are the embodiments of Indra, all spirants are the embodiments of Prajd-pah, all consonants are the embodi- ments of Death If one should reproach a person for his vowels, he should tell that one, 'I have taken my refuge in Indra He will answer you '
4 atha yady cnam iismasupalabltcta, prajapatim iaianam prapanno' bhftvam, sa tvd pratt peksyatity cnam bhftydt atha yady enam sparsesupdlabhcia. mrtyum iaranam, piapanno'bhtlvam sa tvd ptati dhaksyatity enam btiiydi
4 So if one should reproach a person for his spirants he should tell that one 'I have taken refuge in Prajd-pah He will smash you ' And if one should reproach a person for his consonants he should tell that one, 'I have taken refuge in Death He will burn you up.'
5 sarve svard glwsavanto bahvanto vaktavyd indre balam daddnTh, sarva iismano'grastd anxrastd vtvrtd vaktavyah prajd- pater dtmanam partdaddniii, sarve spuria Icienambhimhttd vaktavyd mrlyor dtmanam panhardmh
5 All the vowels should be pronounced resonant and strong, (with the thought) 'May I impart strength to Indra ' All the spirants should be pronounced well open, without being slurred over, without being elided, (with the thought) 'May I give myself to Prajd-pah.' All the consonants should be pro- nounced slowly, without merging them together (with the thought) 'May I withdraw myself from Death '
I trayo dharma-skandhdh, yapw'dhyayanam danam ih, pra- tJtamas tapa eva, dvitiyo brahmacdrydcdrya-kttla-vdsi, MTyo'- tyantam dtmanam dcdiyakttlc'vasddayan sarva etc punya-lokd bhavanh, brahma-samstho'mrtatvam eh
1 There are three branches of duty, sacrifice, study and almsgiving — Austerity, indeed, is the first The second is the pursuit of sacred wisdom, dwelling m the house of the teacher Absolutely controlling his body in the house of the teacher, is the third All these attain to the worlds of the virtuous He who stands firm in Brahman attains life eternal.
Chandogya Vpanisad
tapah' austerity It is used sometimes to comprehend all forms of the pursuit of self-control
flam tapas, satyam tapas, irutam taped, santam iafio, danam tapo, yajnas tapo bhur bhwvas svar brakmaitad upasyaiiat tapah. N&rayantya 8.
brahmacarya the practice of continence
Brahman is also used for tapas or austerity Cp bhagavan ha&yapah iasvate brahmam vartate. Kahdasa: Sakuntala Act I. The commen- tators interpret Brahman as tapas brahma-samstha' He who stands firm in Brahman.
£ suggests that this refers to the parivrai or the monk who alone obtains eternal life, while others who practise active virtues obtain the worlds of the virtuous He, however, points out that there is another view held by the Vrttikara, that anyone who stands firm in the eternal obtains the life eternal He need not be a samnyasin. S argues that the true brahma-samstha is the samnyasin who gives up all actions - karma-mvrtti-laksanatnpanvrajyam brahma-samsthat- vam. S.
2. praja-patir lokan abkyatapat; tebhyo abhtiaptehhyas trayi vtdya samprasravat, torn abhyatapat, tasya dbhttaptaya etdny aksarayi samprdsravanta bhur bhuvah svar tit.
z. Praja-pah brooded on the worlds From them, thus brooded upon, issued forth the threefold knowledge He brooded on this. From it, thus brooded upon, issued forth these syllables, bhith, bhuvah, svah.
threefold knowledge three Vedas.
bhah, earth; bhuvah, atmosphere, svah, sky
3 ian abhyatapat, Ubhyo'bhrtaptebhya aunikarah samprasravat taetyaUiasanhma sarvant panjam saiht m dny evam aumkarena sarva vak samtrnnanmkara evedam sarvam, aumkara evedam
3- He brooded on them and on them, thus brooded unon ^ forth the syllable Anrn. As all leaVes are TeH t og 1Sr ^,M ta1 ?' so 15 a!1 s P eech heM tQ gether by Amn Venlv the syllable Mm is all this, yea , the syllable Aw™ ail thif'
37^ The Principal Upamsads II 24 7
1 brahmavadmo vadanti yad vasundm pratah savanam, rudranam mddhyan-dmam savanam, dditydnam ca visvesdm ca devandm trtiya-savanam
1 The expounders of sacred wisdom declare that the morning offering belongs to the Vasus, the midday offering to the Rudras and the third (evening) offering to the Adityas and the Visve-devas
2 kva iarln yajamanasya loka ih, sayas tarn na vidyat katham kttrydd, atha vtdvdn kurydt
2. Where then is the world of the sacnficer? If he knows not (this), how can he perform (sacrifices) ? So, let him, who knows, perform
3 pnra pratar annvdkasyopakaranaj jaghanena garhapa~ tyasyodanmukha upavisya sa vasavam samabhigayah
3 Before the commencement of the morning litany, he sits behind the garhapatya fire, facing the north and sings the chant sacred to the Vasus
In Srattla sacrifices, three fires are recognised, ahavaniya, daksma and garhapatya, corresponding to heaven, sky and earth. They are dedicated to the worlds of gods, ancestors and men respectively
4 loka-dvaram apavrmi, pa&yema tva vayam rajyaya ttt
4 Open the door of this world, that we may see thee for the obtaining of the sovereignty
5 atha piholi namo'gnaye prlhwi-hsite loka-ksiie lokam me yajamandya vmdaisa vat yajamanasya loka etasmi
5 Then he makes the offering (reciting) 'Adoration to Fire, who dwells on earth, who dwells in the world Obtain the world for me, the sacnficer To this world of the sacrificer, I will go '
6 atiayajamdnah parastdd dynsah svdhd'pajahi pangham ity ukvolhslhati, tasmai vasavah pratah savanam samprayacchantt
6. Thither will the sacnficer, after life, go Hail, take away the bolt Having said this, he rises For him the Vasus fulfil the morning offering
II 24 15 Chdndogya Upanisad Z77
7. Before the commencement of the mid-day offering, he sits behind the Agnidhriya fire, and facing the north, he smgs lie chant sacred to the Rudras.
8 loka.-dva.ram apdvrnu, paiyema tva vayam vairdjyaya %ti.
9. Then he makes the offering (reciting) 'Adoration to Air, who dwells in the sky and dwells m the world Obtain the world for me, the sacrificer To this world of the sacnficer I will go '
10. atra yajamdnah parastad ayusah svaha'pajahi parigham tiy uMvoihsthati, tasmai rudrd madhyan-dmam savanam sampra- yacchanti.
10. Thither, will the sacnficer, after life, go Hail, take away the bolt. Having said this, he rises For him, the Rudras fulfil the midday offering.
11. Before the commencement of the third offering, he sits behind the Altavaniya fire, facing the north, he smgs the chant sacred to the Adityas and Visve-devas
obtaining of sovereignty
13 adityam, atha vaiivadevam, loka-dvaram apavmu paiye- ma iva vayam samrajydya iti
f 3 ' , Thus ft" 5 cbant t0 the Adityas now the chant to the Visyed-evas Open the door to this world that we may see thee lor the obtaining of sovereignty
j^^JlVl 10 ! 1 ' , mma sdli y el >hyaS co vthebhyas ca devebhyo dwi-kydbhyo loka-kstdbhyah lokam mc yajamanaya vindata
A&J^^J5^ t ^ 0B ^ (1 ?^ 'Adoration to the Adityas andto the Visve-devas, who dwell in heaven and dwell m the world, obtain the world for me, the sacnficer.'
ayusah svaha pahata parigham My uklvottistliati. '
378 The Principal Upamsads II 24 16
15 'Venly, to this world of the sacnficer will I go Thither will the sacnficer afterlife go Hail, take away the bolt.' Having said this, he rises
16 tasma adityas ca vt£oe ca devas trliya-savanam samfira- yacchanh, esa ha vai yajiiasya matram veda, ya evath veda, ya evam veda
16 For him, the Adityas and the Visve-devas fulfil the third offering He, who knows this, knows the fulness of the sacrifice, yea, he who knows this
Ill 2. I.
Chandogya Upani$ad
i. aum. asau va adityo deva-madhu; tasya dyaur eva hrai- atia-vamio'ntanksam apupah, maricayah putrafy.
1. Venly, yonder sun is the honey of the gods. Of this the sky is the cross-beam, the atmosphere is the honeycomb; the particles of light are the brood.
The sun is treated as the object of meditation. The sky is the crossbeam from which the honeycomb hangs
2. tasya ye pranco rahnayah t& evasya pracyo madhunadyah fca eva madhukrtah rgveda eva pu$pam, ta amrta apah to, va. eta rcah
2. The eastern rays of that sun are its eastern honey cells. The Rks are the producers of honey The Rg Veda is the flower and those waters are the nectar and those very Rks indeed (are the bees)
'Just as the bees produce honey by extracting the juices of noweis, so do the rks make their honey by extracting the mices of actions prescribed in the Rg Veda ' S.
3 etam rg vedam abhyatapams, tasyabhitaptasya ya&as teia vndriyam viryam annadyam raso'jdyata.
3. These brooded on the Rg Veda; from it, thus brooded upon, issued forth as its essence, fame, splendour, (vigour of the) senses, virility, food and health.
4 tad vyaksarat, tad ddttyam abhto'Smyat, tad va etad yad elad adityasya rohttath mpam.
va^ht^Jt^^'^^^^^j^ raitnayas to. evasya dakswa tnadhu~nadyo y*jmy eva madhu-krto yajur veda eva puspam, ta amrta dplT
380 The Principal Upamsads III 3 3
1 Now its southern rays are its southern honey-cells The Yajus formulae are the producers of honey The flower is the Yajnr Veda and these waters are the nectar
2 tarn va etam yajiimsy ctamyajurvedam abhyatapams, tasya- bhtaptasya yasas, tcja, vndnyam, viryam, annadyam, iaso' jdyata
2 Venly, these yajus formulae brooded on the Yajur Veda; from it, thus brooded upon, issued forth as its essence, fame, splendour, (vigour of the) senses, virility, food and health
3 tad vyaksat at, tad ddityam abhito'sj ayat, tad va etadyad etad ddttyasya suklam tiipam
3 It flowed forth, it went towards the sun Venly, that is what the white appearance of the sun is
1 athaye'sya pratyanco ra&mayas ta evasya pi attcyo madlm-na- dyah samany em madhtt-krtah sama veda eva puspam, ta amrta apah
1 Now, its western rays are its western honey-cells The Soman chants are the producers of honey The flower is the Sama Veda and these waters are the nectar
2 torn va. etam samany etam sama vedam abhyatapams tasyabhtaptasya ya§as, teja, mdriyam, viryam, annadyam, raso'jayata
2 Venly, these Saman chants brooded on the Sama Veda] from it, thus brooded upon, issued forth, as its essence, fame, splendour, (vigour of the) senses, vinhty, food and health
3 tad vyaksarat, tad adttyam abhito'b ayat, tad va etadyad etad ddityasya krsnam rvpam
3 It flowed forth It went towards the sun Venly, that is what the dark appearance of the sun is
Ill 5 2 CMndogya Upamsad 381
1 atha ye'syodanco rabnayas ta evasyodicyo madhu-nadyo' tharvangirasa eva madhu-krtah, itilidsa-piirfinam puspam, ta amrta dpah
1 Now its northern rays are its northern honey-cells (The hymn of the) Aiharvans and the Angirasas are the honey producers The flower is legend and ancient lore These waters are the nectar
The stones from the Epics and the Puranas were repeated at some sacrifices They are mentioned in the Brahmanas, and later collected m the MahabMrata and the Puranas
2. te va ete'tftarvdngirasa etad ttihdsa-purdnam dbhyatapams, • iasySbhtaptasya yaias, teja, mdnyam, viryam, annddyam, raso' jayata
2 Verity, these (hymns) of the Athaivans and Angirasas brooded upon that legend and ancient lore. From them, thus brooded upon, issued forth, as their essence, fame, splendour (vigour of the) senses, virility, food and health.
3 t«d vyaksamt, tad ddityam dbhito'irayat, tad va etad yad etad adUyasya param krsnam rupam.
3 It flowed forth. It went towards the sun Verily, that is what the extremely dark appearance of the sun is
J, J ^yiynttot *«im*yas ta evasyordhvd madhu-nadyo guhyacuadeia madlm-Mo, hahmaiva puspam, ta amrta apj
teihm JVftT ard T T, are l1: l up P er hone y celk - T1 * hidden Jrahman, according to S, here sigmfies the pranava.i e thesyllable
382 The Principal Upamsads III 6 3
2 These hidden teachings brooded on Brahman, and from it thus brooded upon, issued forth, as its essence, fame, splendour, (vigour of the) senses, food and health
3 tad vyaksarat, tad adityam abhito'srayat, tad va etadyad etad ddityasya madhye ksobhata iva.
3 It flowed forth It went towards the sun. Verily, that is what seems to be the trembling m the middle of the sun
4 te va ete rasandm rasah veda hi rasah, tesdm ete rasdh, tarn va etany amrtandm amrtam, veda hy amrtah, tesdm etany amrtam
4 Venly, these are the essences of the essences, for the Vedas are the essences and these are their essences Venly, these are the nectars of the nectars for the Vedas are the nectars and these are their nectars
According to $ all these are meant to emphasise the importance of eulogised actions karma-stuhr esah
1 tad yat prathamam amrtam tad vasava upafivanty agnmd mukhena, na vat deva aSnanti na pibanty etad evamrtam drtfvd trpyanti
1 That which is the first nectar, on that live the Vasus, through fire as their mouth Verily the gods neither eat nor dnnk They are satisfied merely with seeing that nectar
2 ta etad eva rupam abhtsammSanty etasmad rupad udyanti.
2 They retire into this form (colour) and come forth from this form (colour)
3. sa ya etad evam amrtam veda, vasunam evatko bhutvagmn- aiva mukhenattad evamrtam drsivd trpyati, sa etad eva rupam abhisamvisati, etasmad rupad udett
3 He who knows thus this nectar becomes one of the Vasus and through the fire as his mouth is satisfied merely with seeing the nectar He retires into this form (colour) and comes forth from this form (colour)
Chdndogya Upanisad
4 As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, so long does he attain the worship and sovereignty of the Vasus.
1. atha yad dvtiiyam atnrtam, tad rudrd upajlvantindrena inukJiena, na mi deva ainanh, na pibanh, etad evdmrtam drstva trpyanti.
1. Now that which is the second nectar, on that live the Rudras, through Indra as their mouth, Venly, the gods neither eat nor dnnk They are satisfied merely with seeing that nectar.
2 ta etad eva rupam abhtsamvtiantt, etasmad rupad udyanti.
2 They retire into this form (colour) and come forth from this form (colour).
3 sa ya etad evam amrtam veda rudrandm evaiko bhutven- drenaiva mukhenaitad evdmrtam drstva trpyatx, sa etad eva rupam abhsamviiati, etasmad rupad udeti.
3 "Who knows thus this nectar becomes one of the Rudras and with Indra as his mouth is satisfied merely with seeing the nectar He retires into this form (colour) and comes forth from this form (colour).
4 sa yavad-adityaJ} purastad udeta, paicad astam eta, dvis tavad daksinata udetotiarato'stam eta, rudranam eva tavad adhi- patyam svarajyam paryeta.
4 As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west, twice as long does it rise in the south and set in the north and just that long does he attain the lordship and sovereignty of the Rudras
atha yat trtTyam amrtam, tad ddityd upajlvanh varunena
The Principal Upamsads III. 9 3
_ 1 Now, that which is the third nectar, on that live the Adityas through Varuna as their mouth Verity, the gods neither eat nor dnnk They are satisfied merely with seeing that nectar
z. ta clad eva rupam abhitamvisanty dasmad rupad udyanti. 2. They retire into this form (colour) and come forth from this form (colour)
3 sa ya dad evam amrtaih vcdadityanam cvaiko bhutvfi varun- enaiva mukhenattad cvamrtam drstva trpyah, sa dad eva rupam abhisanms'att, dasmad 1 iipdd uddi
3 He who knows thus this nectar, becomes one of the Adityas and with Varuna as his mouth, is satisfied merely with seeing the nectar He retires into this form (colour) and comes forth from this form (colour).
4 sa yavad adiiyo dakstnata udetottatato' stain da, dvts tavat paicad udda purasiad asiam da, adityanam eva tavad adhpatyam svarajyam parycta
4 As long as the sun rises in the east and sets in the west twice as long does it rise m the west and set in the east and just that long does he attain the lordship and sovereignty of the Adityas.
Scclwn 9
j alha yac caturtham amrtam, tan maiuta vpajivanU somcna viukhena, na vai deva asnantt, 11a pibanti, dad cvamrtam drstva trpyanix.
1 Now that which is the fourtli nectar, on that lnc the Maruts, through Soma as their mouth, Venly, the gods neither eat nor dnnk The} are satisfied merelj with seeing that nectar
2 ia dad ci'a rupam abhisamvisauti, dasmad rupad udyai.tt
2 They retire from tins form (colour) and come forth from this form (colour)
3 sa ^a dad a am amrtam veda, marutam eiatho bhulva sovet nta tnikLa.aiiad cvawriam dritxa trpyalt, sa dad eva rupaw. abhsamvshti dastrad rupad tidcti
Ill 10 4 Chandogya Upanisad
3 He who knows thus this nectar, becomes one of the Maruts and through Soma as his mouth, is satisfied merely with seeing the nectar He retires into this form (colour) and comes forth from this form (colour)
4. sa ydvad ddityah pascdd udetd, purastdd astam eta, dvis tavad uiiarata udetd, daksinato'stam eta, marutdm eva tavad adhipatyam svardjyam paryeta.
4 As long as the sun rises m the west and sets m the east, just that twice as long does the sun rise in the north and set in the south just that long does he attam the lordship and sovereignty of the Maruts.
1 atha yat paiicamam amrtam tat sddhyd upajivanh brahmanu mukhena, 11a vat devd ainanti, 11a pibanti, etad evdmrtam drslvd trpyanti.
_i Now, that which is the fifth nectar, on that live the Sadhyas, through Brahma as their mouth Venly, the gods neither eat nor drink They are satisfied merely with seeing that nectar
2 They retire into this form (colour) and come forth from this form (colour).
3 sa ya etad evam amrtam vcda, sadhyandm evaiko bh&ivd brahmanaiva mukltenaitad evdmrtam drstva trpyanti, sa etad eva rupam abhtsamvisatt, etasmad rupad udeh
3 He, who knows thus this nectar, becomes one of the Sadhyas and through Brahma as his mouth, is satisfied merely with seeing the nectar. He retires into this form (colour) and comes torth from this form (colour).
4 sa ydvad dditya uttarata udetd, daksinato'stam eta, dvis tavaa urdhva udetdtvdn astam eta, sadhyandm eva tavad adhiba lyam svardjyam paiyctd
4- As long as the sun nses m the north and sets in the south twee as long does it rise in the zenith and set in the nadir',
386 The Principal Upamsads III. n. 5
just that long does he attain the lordship and sovereignty of the Sadhyas
1 atha fata iirdhva udetya nawodetd nastam eta, ekala eva madhye sthdtd, tad esa Mokah
1 Henceforth, after having risen in the zenith, he will no more rise nor set. He will stand alone in the middle On this, there is this verse
The movements of the sun are intended to help the creatures to experience the results of their actions, and when these experiences have ended the sun takes the creatures unto himself prdmndm sva-karma-pkala-bhoga-mmittam amtgraham tat karma-phalopabho- ga-ksaye tarn prdni-jdtdny dtmant samhytya S.
The question is raised whether the sun in the regions of Brahma moves along nights and days The reply is given in the next verse
2 It is not so there The sun has not set, nor has he ever risen. 0 ye gods, by this truth, may I not fall from Brahma
He calls the gods to bear witness to the truth of his statement
3 na ha va asmd udeh, na mmlocatt, sakrd diva Jtawdsinai bhavati, ya etdm evam brahmopamsadam veda
3 Venly, for him, who knows thus, this mystic doctrine of Brahma, the sun neither rises nor sets For him it is day for ever
'The knower becomes the eternal inborn Braliman, unconditioned by time marked by the rising and setting of the sun ' vtdvan tida- ydsta-maya-kaldpanccliedyam mtyam ajam brahma bluzuati S
4 tadd haitad brahma prajapataya uvdca, prajdpatir wanave, manuh prajdbhyah, tadd haitad udddlakdyd'runaye jyesthdya putrdya pita brahma provaca
4 Brahma told this to Pra]d-pati; Praja-pati to Manu, Manu to his descendants To "Uddalaka Arum, the eldest son, his father declared this Brahma
5 tdam vdva taj jyesthdya putrdya pita brahma prabruydt prandyyaya vdntevdstne
II 12 4- Chdndogya Upanisad 387
5 Verily, a father may teach this Brahma to his eldest son or to a worthy pupil
6 ndnyasmai kasmax cam, yady apy asma imam adbhih . ^angrhttdm dhanasya pwrnam dadydd, dad eva taio bhuya ity dad eva taio bhuya \i\
6 And to no one else. Even if one should offer him the whole if this (earth) encompassed by water and rilled with treasure. He should say) "This, truly, is greater than that — yea, greater jmn that.'
THE GAYATRl
1 gayairi va idaih sarvam bhiiiam yad tdam kvm ca, vag vai gayairi, vag va tdam sarvam bhiiiam gayah ca irdyate ca.
1. Verity, the Gayairi is all this that has come to be, what- soever there is here Speech, verily, is Gayairi. Verily, the Gayairi sings of and protects everything here that has come to be.
As Brahman is incomprehensible by itself, these symbols are employed For Madhva Gayatri is not the metre of that name but Vtsnu
2. Verity, what this Gayairi is, that, verily, is what this earth is, for on it everything here that has come to be is established. It does not go beyond it
3_ yd vai sd prthviyam vdva sd yad tdam asmin puruse sanram, asmxn hime prdndh pratisthitdh, dad eva ■ndtiSiyante.
3- Verily, what this earth is, that, verily, is what the body in man here is for on it these vital breaths are established. Thev do not go beyond it.
4. yad vai tat puruse iariram idam vdva tad yad tdam asminn anWi pimise hrdayam, asmm hime prdnah pratisthitdh, dad eva natisiyante.
ihiZ^'-^ the bod y 111 man verily, is what
StaE-TS 11 "J 8 * here fa: fOT 011 a aese breatfa s are established. They do not go beyond it.
388 Tlie Principal Upanisads III. 13 r.
5 saisd catuspadd sadvidhd gayatri, tad dad rca'bhyanuklam.
5 This Gayatri has four feet and is sixfold This is also declared by a Rk verse
The Gayatri is a metre with four feet, each foot having four syllables It is sixfold in the shape of speech, creatures, earth, body> heart and vital breath §
6 etdvdn asya mahimd, tatojyayand ca purusah pddo'sya sarvd bhutdni, tnpdd asyamrtam dim
6 Its greatness is of such extent, yet Purusa is greater still All beings are one fourth of him The three fourths, immortal, is m the sky
The Purusa is so called because it fills everything and lies in the body sarva-fiuranat pun iayanac ca S
7 yad vai tad brahmetidam vdva tadyo'yam bahtrdhd purusdd dkdso yo vai sa bahtrdhd purusdd akasah
7 Venly, what is called Brahman, that is what the space outside of a person is Venly, what the space outside of a person is
8 ayam vdva sa yo'yam antah purusa dkaio yo vai so'ntah purusa akasah
8 That is what the space within a person is Venly, what the space within a person is
9 ayam vdva sa yo'yam antar-hrdaya akasah, tad etatpurnam apravarti, purnam apravartmim snyam labhate ya evam veda
9 That is the same as what the space here within the heart is. That is the full, the non-active He who knows thus, obtains full and non-active prospenty non-active unchanging
T tasya ha vd etasya hrdayasya panca deva-susayah, sayo'sya pran susih sa prdnah, tac caksuh, sa adttyah, tad etat tejo' nnddyam ity upasita, tejasvy annddo bhavati ya evam veda
1 Venly, indeed, this heart here has five openings for the gods. Its eastern opening is the prdna (up-breath). That is
HI 13 6. CMndogya Upanisad 389
the eye, that is the sun. One should meditate on this as glow and as health. He who knows this becomes glowing and healthy.
2 aiha yo'sya daksinah susth sa vyanah, tac chrotram, sa candramah, tad etac chrti ca yaiai cety upastta iriman yaiasvt bhavatt ya evam veda
2 Now its southern opening is vyana (the diffused breath.) That is the ear that is the moon One should meditate on this as prosperity and fame. He who knows this becomes prosperous and famous
3 atlia yo'sya pratyan susth so'panah, sa vak so'gnth tad etad brakma-varcasam annadyam ity upastta brakma-varcasy annado bhavahya evam veda.
3 Now, its western opening is apana (downward breath) That is speech, that is fire One should meditate on it as the lustre of sacred wisdom and health He who knows this becomes possessed of the lustre of sacred wisdom and health.
4 aiha yo'syodan susth sa samanah, tan manah, sa parjanyah, tad etat kvriti ca vyusfis cety upastta, kiritman vyusttman bhavatt ya evam veda
4 Now, this northern opening is samana (equalised breath). That is mind, that is rain; one should meditate on it as fame and beauty. He who knows this becomes famous and beauteous
kirtih' fame, celebrity, due to the knowledge of the mind: rnanaso planasya kirtt-hetutvat, alma-paroksam vtirtdatoam kirtih, yaiah sva-karana-samvedyam vUrutatvam.
vymtih beauty, self-recognised beauty of the body, vyustik katttir ae/ia-gatam lavanyam
5 athayo'syordhvah susih sa udanah, sa vayuh, sa akdtah, tad etad ojai ca mahai cety upastta, oiasvt mahasvan bhavatt ya evam veda J
5. Now, the upper opening is udana (out-breath). That is air, mat is space One should meditate on it as strength and great- ness He who knows this becomes strong and great
6 tevd etepaUca brahma-puntsah svargasya lokasya dvara-pah, ya dan evam paOca brahma-purusan svargasya lokasya
veda, asya kwle vtro jayate, pratipadyate svargam dtira^dn $st ^ arica " lbra]ma ^ u "^ Sn ^«rgasya lokasya
The Principal Upanisads III. 13 8
6. These, verily, are the five Brahma-persons, the door- keepers of the world of heaven He who knows these five Brahma-persons, the doorkeepers of the world of heaven, in his family a hero is bom He who knows these five Brahma- persons, title doorkeepers of the world of heaven, himself reaches the world of heaven
By controlling the eye, ear, speech, mind and breath through meditation, by checking their outward activities, we are enabled to reach the Brahma in the heart
7. atlta yad atah paro dtvo jyottr dipyate vtsvatah prsthe$u, sarvatah prsfhefv anuttaniesuttatnesu loke$u> tdam vava tad yad idam astmnn antah purttse jyatth
7. Now the light which shines above this heaven, above all, above everything, in the highest worlds beyond which there are no higher, venly, that is the same as this light which is here within the person
8 tasyai$a drshh, yatrattad asmtn iarire samsparietwsm- manam vijanah, tasyatsa irviil} yatrattat karnav apigrhya mnadam tva nadathur tvdgner iva palata upa&rnott, tad etad drsiam ca srutam cety upaslta. cak$usyah iruto bhavah ya evant veda, ya evam veda
8 There is this seeing of it, as when, in this body, one perceives the warmth by touch There is this hearing of it, as when, on closing the ears, one hears as it were a sound, as it were a noise, as of a fire blazing One should meditate on this that has been seen and heard One who knows this becomes one beautiful to see and heard of in renown, yea, one who knows this
The writer here refers to visions and voices of which some mystic seers speak
Ill 14 3 Chandogya Upamsad 391
1 sarvam kkalv idam brahma, tayaldn tti, iania updsita; atha Mrnlu kratumayah pwusah, yathd-kratur asminl lake puruso bhavait Mhetuh prdya bhavati, sa kratum kurvita.
1 Venly, this whole world is Brahman, from which he comes forth, without which he will be dissolved and in which he breathes Tranquil, one should meditate on it. Now verily, a person consists of purpose According to the purpose a person has m this world, so does he become on departing hence So let him frame for himself a purpose.
All this is Brahman Cp Maitrl IV 6 brahma hhah idam vava sarvam Brahman is prior to all this and produces all this
The word iayalfin is explained by § as 'beginning, ja, ending, la, and continuing, an,' in it. tasmat brahmano jdtam — atas tayam, tatha tenawa janana-kramena pratilomataya tasmmn eva brahmani liyate, iad-almataya. ilisyata ttt taUam; tatha tasmmn eva stfotikale'nih pranitt cesfata tit
As we will, so will our reward be. kratv-anurHpam phalam. S\
_ i.mano-maydh prana-iariro bha-rupdh satya-samkalpa akdi- dtma sarva-karma sarva-kdmah sarva-gandhah sarva-rasah sarvam idam abhydtto'vdky anddarah.
2 He who consists of mind, whose body is life, whose form is light, whose conception is truth, whose soul is space, con- taining all works, containing all desires, containing all odours, containing all tastes, encompassing this whole world, being without speech and without concern.
§ means by prana-iarira, the subtle body. faiTI lin 8 stmS wjfiana-knya-SaMi-dvaya-sammilrchi.
3 «a ma atmdntar hrdaye'niydn vriher vd, yavdd vd, sarsapdd »« L syamdkad va, fydmaka-tandidad vd; esa ma atmdntar hrdaye hkeb%ih rthtVy * h ' Jy * ydn mtanksd 3 Jfy* n diva} h jydydn 'ebkyo
H?* sdf within the heart, smaller than a grain of
Sit**? £ 6y , COm ' tb * a a mustard seed . than a gram of nmiet or than the kernel of a gram of a millet. This is myself
The Principal Upanisads
within the heart, greater than the earth, greater than the atmosphere, greater than the sky, greater than these worlds
4 sarva-karma sarva-kamah sarva-gandhah, saroa-rasah, sar- vam tdam dbhyatto'vaky anadaialt, esa ma atmdntar hrdaye dad brahma, dam ltahpretyabhisambJtavitasmtti, yasya syat addha na vtcikitsastiti ha smaha idndtlyah, iandtlyah
4 Containing all works, containing all desires, containing all odours, containing all tastes, encompassing this whole world, without speech, without concern, this is the self of mine within the heart, this is Brahman. Into him, I shall enter, on departing hence Venly, he who believes this, will have no more doubts. Thus used to say Sandilya, yea Sandilya
This is the famous Sandilya vidya which affirms the oneness of the individual soul and the Supreme Brahman For Sandilya (1) the Absolute is that from which things are born, to which they repair and by which they live, (2) our next life depends on what we do in this life, (3) Atman is both the transcendent and the immanent, and (4) the end of man is union with the Self
1 antartksodarah koso bhfimi budhno na jiryati, dtio hy asya sraktayo dyaur asyottaram Main, sa csa koio vasu-dhanas tasmm vtsvam tdam intam.
1 The chest, having the atmosphere for its inside, and the earth for its bottom does not decay. The quarters of space are its corners and its upper lid is the sky. This chest is one con- taining wealth and within it rests everything here
2 tasya praci dig juhiir ndma, sahamfina noma dafeina, rdjni iiama pratid, subhuta namodict, tasam vayiir vatsah, sa ya dam cvam vayttm diiatn vatsam vcda, na putra-rodam rodih, so' ham dam cvam vayum diiatn vatsam veda, ma putra-rodam rudatn.
2 The eastern quarter is named p<hu, its southern quarter is named sahamana, its western quarter is called rajm, its northern quarter is called subhuta The child of these is air He who knows this air thus as the child of the quarters of space weeps not for a son I here know this air thus as the child of the quarters of space, let me not weep for a son.
Ill 15 7. Chdndogya Upanisad 393
juhU is the sacrificial ladle
saltamana is 'the region of Yama in which people suffer the results of evil deeds ' S
rafiit is so called 'because it is lorded over by the king (rapan) Varuna or because it is red (raga) with the colours of evening.' S sitbhfda is 'the region presided over by Kubera, the god of wealth.' maputra-rodam rttdam May I not weep for the death of my son, may I have no occasion to weep for the death of my son- putra-inarana- nmittam pwtra-rodo mama mabhat §
If the promise made in III 13-16, in his family a hero is bom is to be fulfilled, this kosa-vipiana or knowledge of the treasure chest is needed
3 anstam koiam pmpadye 'mund'muna'muna, pranam prapadye, 'mun&'mvna'mma; bhuh prapadye'mund'mtaia'muna; bhuvah prapadye 'mund'muna'muna; svah prapadye'mund'muna 'vnma
3 I take refuge in the imperishable chest with this one, with this one, with this one I take refuge in the breath, with this one, with this one, with this one. I take refuge in bhiik, with this one, with this one, with this one. I take refuge in bhuvah, with this one, with this one, with this one I take refuge in svah, with this one, with this one, with this one
The son's name, 5 says, is to be uttered thnce, when praying to the different deities
4 sa yad avocam- pranam prapadya %ti prano va idam sarvam bhiitamyad idam kin ca, tarn eva tatprapatsi
4 When I said, 'I take refuge in breath,' breath, verily, is everything here that has come to be, whatsoever there is So it was in this I took refuge
5 aifia yad avocam' bhiih prapadya iti prthivim prapadye' utanksam prapadye, divam prapadya %iy eva tad avocam
5 So when I said, 'I take refuge in bhiih; what I said was 'I take refuge in earth, I take refuge in atmosphere, I take refuge msky' 5
6 atha yad avocam. bhuvah prapadya ity agmm prapadye, vayum prapadye, addyam prapadya tty eva tad avocam
0 So when I said, 'I take refuge in bhuvah; what I said was 1 take refuge in Fire, I take refuge in Air, I take refuge in Sun. J
7. aiha yad avocam svah prapadya ity rg vedam prapadye WJtrvcdamprapadyc,samavedam prapadya ity eva tad avocam w« avocam. '
The Principal Upamsads
7 So when I said, 'I take refuge m svah,' What I said was, 'I take refuge m the Rg Veda, I take refuge in the Yajur Veda,, I take refuge m the Soma Veda That was what I said '
This section points out how symbols are used for worship and the objects prayed for are this-worldly
1 puruso vava yajnah, tasya yam catur-vimsati varsdm, tat pratah-savanam, catur-vims'aty-aksard gayatri, gayatram prdtah- savavam, tad asya vasavo'nvayattdh, prand vava vasavah, ete hidam sarvam vdsayanh
1 Verily, a person is a sacrifice. His (first) twenty-four years are the morning libation, for the Gayatri (metre) has twenty- four syllables and the morning libation is offered with a gayatri hymn With this (part of the sacrifice) the Vasus are connected Venly, the vital breaths are the Vasus, for they cause every- thing here to endure
2. tarn ced etasmm vayasi ktm ctd upatapet, sa bruyat, prana vasavah, idam me pratah-savanam madhyan-dtnam-savanam ami samtanuteh, maham prdndnam vasunam madhye yajfto vilop- siyeh, ttdd haiva tata ety agado ha bhavah.
2 If m this period of life any sickness should overtake him, let him say, 'O ye vital breaths, ye Vasus, let this morning libation of mine continue over to the midday libation Let not me, the sacrifice, be broken off in the midst of the vital breaths, of the Vasus ' He arises from it, he becomes free from sickness.
While the previous section dealt with the long life of the son, this deals with one's own long life
3 atha yam catus'catvdrimSad varsdm, tan madhyan-dtnam- savanam catui<atvanmiad-aksard tnsfup, traistubJtam madhyan- dtnam-savanam, tad asya rttdra anvdyattdh, prand vava rudrah, ete hidam sarvam rodayanti.
3 Now the (next) forty-four years are the midday libation for the Tnstubh (metre) has forty-four syllables and the midday libation is offered with a Trislubh hymn With this (part of the sacrifice) the Rudras are connected Venly, the vital breaths are
HI 16 7. Chandogya Upanisad 395
the Rudras for (on departing) they cause everything here to weep.
4. tarn ced etasmin vayasi Mm cid upatapet sa bruydt, prdnd rudrah tdam me mddhyan-dinam-savanam trtiya-savanam anu samtanuteti, mdham prdndndm rudranam madhye yajfio vilop- siyett, udd haiva tata ety agado haiva bhavatt
4. If, in this period of life, any sickness should overtake him, let him say, '0 ye vital breaths, ye Rudras, let this midday libation of mine continue over to the third libation. Let not me, the sacrifice, be broken off in the midst of the vital breaths, of the Rudras.' He arises from it; he becomes free from sickness.
5 atha yfiny asta-catvarims'ad varsani, tat trtiya-savanam, asta-catvdnms'ad-aksara jagati, jdgatam trtiya-savanam, tad asya dityd anvayattdh, prdnd vdvadityah, ete Mdam sarvam ddadate.
5. Now the (next) forty-eight years are the third libation for the jagatH (metre) has forty-eight syllables and the third libation is offered with a jagati hymn. With this (part of the sacrifice) the Adityas are connected. Verily, the vital breaths are the Adityas for (on departing) they take eveiything to themselves
_ 6. tarn ced etasmm vayasi him cid upatapet sa bruydt prdna adtpa idath me trtiya-savanam ayur aim samtanuteti, mdham prananam aditydndm madhye yajno vtlopsvyety, udd haiva tata dy agado Ixavoa bhavati.
6. If, in this period of life, any sickness should overtake him, jet him say, '0 ye vital breaths, ye Adityas, let this third liba- tion of mine continue to a full length of life. Let not me, the sacrifice^ be broken off in the midst of the vital breaths, the Adityas.' He arises from it; he becomes free from sickness.
»»« etad upaiapast, yo'Jtam anena na presyamUi; sa ha soiaiam
wrta-tatam ajivat; pa ha sodaiam varsa-Satam jivati, ya evam veda.
7- Verily, it was knowing this that Mahidasa Aitareya used to say, 'Why do you afflict me with this sickness, me, who am «?t going to die by it?' He lived a hundred and sixteen years, "e, too, who knows this lives to a hundred and sixteen years.
S5«l ahi ^ a Altareva was a or a iudra by birth. According to yana s ^traduction to the Aitareya Bralmana, he was the son of
396 The Prtnapal Upamsads III vj 6
a Brahmana seer by Itara, a low-caste woman As he was not given the same treatment as other sons, his mother prayed to Mahi or the goddess Earth, who granted her prayers The son was enabled to compose the Brahman as and the Aranyakas This story implies a protest against the injustice of the caste system
MAN'S LIFE A SACRIFICE
1 sa yad asisisati yat pipasah, yan na ramate, ta asya diksah
1 When one hungers and thirsts and abstains from pleasures these constitute the initiatory rites
The writer gives an account of a sacrifice which can be performed without any ceremonial and m spirit even by hermits
Privation is equated with initiation, enjoyments with the sacrificial sessions and chantmgs, the virtues with the oifenngs, generation with regeneration and death with the last ntual the final bath
2 atha yad amah, yat pibatt, yad ramate, tad upasadair eh
2 And when one eats and dnnks and enjoys pleasures, then he joins in the Upasada ceremonies
upasada a particular class of sacnficers who are happy because they take only milk upasadam ca payo-vratatva-nmittam sukham asti S
3 atha yadd hasati yaj jaksah, yan maithunam carah, stuta- sastratr eva tad eh
3 And when one laughs and eats and indulges m sexual intercourse, then he joins m the chant and recitation.
4 atha yat tapo danam aryavam ahimsd satya-vacanam th, ta asya daksmah . i<,o«i~
4 And austerity, almsgiving, uprightness, non-violence, truthfulness, these are the gifts for the priests
5 tasmad dhuh sosyaty asosteh punar utpadanam evdsya, tan maranam evavabhrthah
5 Therefore they say 'He will procreate ' He has procreated — that is his new birth Death is the final bath (after the ceremony)
6 tadd haitad ghora angtrasah krsndya devaki-ptdrayoktvo- vdca, a-pipasa eva sa babhuva so'ntaveldydm etat trayam prati-
Ill 18 i. Chdndogya Upamsad
padyet' aksitamasi, acyntam asi, prdna-sams'itam asiti: tatraite dve rcau bhavatah
6 When Ghora Angirasa, after having communicated this to Krsna, the son of DevaK, he also said, as he had become free from desire, 'In the final hour, one should take refuge m these three (thoughts) Thou art the indestructible, thou art the un- shaken, thou art the very essence of life * On this point, there are these two Rg verses
S points out that the references are to the Yajus verses beginning with (1) aksitam asi, (u) acyutam asi, and (ui) prana-samsitam asi See Bhagavad-Gitd, p 28
7 ad itpratnasya retasak, ud vayam tamasas-pan jyohh pasyanta uttaram svah pasyanta uftaram,
devatn devatra suryam agamna jyohr uttamam iti, jyotir uttamam th.
7 Proceeding from the primeval seed, they see the morning light that shines higher than the sky Seeing beyond darkness, the higher light, seeing the higher light, we attain to the sun god among the gods, the highest light, yea, the highest light
In some texts, after retasah, we find jyohh pasyanli vasaram, paro yad idhyate diva.
'Those that know Brahman, with their eyes turned aside, with their hearts purged by the restrictions of the ascetic life like hralima- carya. see the light all round' mvrtta-caksiiso brahma-wdo brahma- caryadt-mvrth-sadhanaih itiddhdntahkarani a samantato wotih fasyanh S J '
* B ' aM0 brahmety updsitety adhydlmam, athddhidaivatam amo brahmety {updsita), uohayam Mtstam bhavaty adhydtmam cadhtdaivatam ca.
I lOne should meditate on the mind as Brahman— this with regard to the self) Now with reference to the divinities one snouid meditate on space as Brahman This is the twofold
Ef£ uc ? on * ^ whlch refers t0 bod y and that which refers «> the divinities
398 The Principal Vpamsads III. 18. 6.
akdia or space is used as it is 'all-pervading, subtle and free from limitations' sarva-gatatvat silksmaivat, upadhi-hinatvdt &
2 tad etac catuspad brahma, vak padah, pranah pddai caksuh padah irotram p&da liy adhyatmam; athddhidaivatam, agmh pado vdyuh padah, ddityah pado dtiah pada ity ubhayam evddistam bhavaty adhyatmam catvadhidawatam ca
2 That Brahman has four quarters Speech is one quarter, breath is one quarter, the eye is one quarter, the ear is one quarter This with reference to the self Now with reference to the divinities Fire is one quarter, air is one quarter, the sun is one quarter and the directions are one quarter This is the two- fold instruction with reference to the self and with reference to the divinities
3. vag eva brahmanai caturthah padah, so'gmna jyottsd bhati ca tapati ca, bhati ca tafiah ca kirtyd yaiasd brahma-varcasena, ya evam veda
3 Speech, verily, is a fourth part of Brahman It shines and warms with the light of fire He who knows this shmes and warms with fame, with renown, and with the radiance of Brahma-knowledge
4 prdna eva brahmanai caturthah padah, sa vayuna jyoh$d bhati ca tapati ca, bhati ca tapati ca kirtydyaiasd brahma-varca- sena, ya evam veda
4 Breath, verily, is a fourth part of Brahman It shmes and warms with the light of air He who knows this shmes and warms with fame, with renown, and with the radiance of Brahma- knowledge.
5 caksur eva brahmanai caturthah padah, sa ddityem jyotisd bhati ca tapati ca, bhati ca tapati ca kirtyd yaiasa brahma-varca- sena, ya evam veda
5 The eye, verily, is a fourth part of Brahman It shmes and warms with the light of the sun He who knows this shmes and warms with fame, with renown, and with the radiance of Brahma- knowledge
6 srotram eva brahmanai caturthah padah, sa digbhir jyottsd bhdtt ca tapati ca, bhati ca tapati ca kirtyd yaiasa brahma-varca- sena, ya evam veda, ya evam veda
6 The ear is a fourth part of Brahman It shmes and warms with the light of the directions He who knows this shmes and
warms with fame, ■with renown, and with the radiance of Brahma-knowledge.
1. adtiyo brahmety adeiah, tasyopavyakhyanam: asad evedam agra astt, tat sad dsit, tat samabhavat, tad andam niravartata, tat samvatsarasya matram aiayata, tan nirabhidyata, U andakapale rajaiam ca suvarnam cdbhavatdm.
1 The Sun is Br ahman— this is the teaching. An explanation thereof (is this). In the beginning this (world) was non-existent. It became existent. It grew. It turned into an egg. It lay for the period of a year. It burst open. Then came out of the egg- shell, two parts, one of silver, the other of gold.
SeeRV X i2g,M«»«I 12. asat' non-existent, it does not mean absolute non-being. It is a state in which name and form were not manifested: avyakia-nama-rUiam. S. See also TU. II. 7.
In C U. VI 2, the view that in the beginning there was only non- bemg is combated
2_ taiyad rajataih seyam prthtvl, yat suvarnam sa dyauh; yaj jarayu teparvat&h.yad ulbam sa megho niharah,ya dhamanayas ta na&yah, yad vasteyam udakath sa samudrah.
\a' n ^kkk was ^ inner rambrane « the mist with the clouds. What were the veins were the rivers What was the auia within is the ocean
Iii the Orphic Cosmogony, Chronos and Adrastea produce a ff^ntic egg which is divided into two, the upper half forming the sicy and the lower the earth
ulh te< * a 3 & y«to so'sa» ddvtyah; tath jdyamdnath ghosa
umtavo nudahsthan, sarvaiyi ca hhutani, sarve ca kamah; iasrndt "syotoyam prahpratyayaiiamprati ghosa ululavo'nMihisfhantt, sarvaiji ca bhutdm sarve ca kamah
wat w? w M was bom fr( >ni it is the yonder sun When he as Dorn, shouts and hurrays as also all beings and all desires
The Principal Upanisads
arose Therefore at his rise and his every return, shouts and hurrays as also all beings and all desires arise
4 saya etam evam vidvan adityam brahmely upaste'bhyaso ha yad enavi sadhavo gJiosd a ca gaccheyur upa ca mmrederan mmrederan
4 He, who knowing thus, meditates on the son as Brahman, pleasant shouts will come unto him and delight him, yea, delight him.
IV i 5
Chandogya Upamsad
1 aum janasndvr ha pautrdyanah sraddhddeyo bahuddyi bahu- pdkya asa, sa ha sarvqta dvasathdn mapaydm cakre, sarvata eva me'tsyantih
1 Aum There was the descendant of Janasruta, his great grandson, a pious giver, a liberal giver, a preparer of much food He had rest houses built everywhere, with the thought 'everywhere people will be eating of my food '
2. atha Ita liamsa miayam ahpetuh, tadd havoam kamso hmnsam abhyuvada ho ho'yi bhalldksa, bhalldksa, janasruteh pautrdya- nasya samatii diva jyotir dtatam, tan ma prasdnksTs tat tvd ma pradhaksid \t\
2 Then once at night, some swans flew past and one swan spoke to another thus, 'Hay, Ho, Shortsighted, Shortsighted. The light of Janairuti, the great grandson (of Janasruta) has spread like the sky Do not touch it, lest it bum you.'
» pradhaksir for pradhSMd
3 tarn 11 }ia parah praty uvaca kam vara enam etat santam sayugvanam voa raikoam dttheti Ko nu katham sayugva raikva til
3 To it, the other one replied, 'Who is that man of whom you speak, as if he were Raikva, the man with the cart?' 'Pray, now is it with Raikva, the man with the cart?'
S quotes Raikva m S B III 4 36 as one of the sages who attained orahma-jnana or divine wisdom though they did not observe the niles_ of castes and stages of life, atiairamttvem vartamano'ht vtayayam adhknyate, kutah tad, drsteh, raikva-vdcaknavl-prabhrtindm wm-bhutanam ap% brafonavitva&rutynpalabdheh
f J ^"y 0, wptdyddJiareyah samyanh, evatn enam sarvam MdabJtisameh.yat kill ca prajah sddhu kurvanti, yas tad veda yat s« veda, sa mayaitad ukta ih
ih* i?" T en 33 aU tltie * ower throws of dice g° to the winner with Hp 1 g v throw ' so whatever good men do, all goes to him. also who knows what he knows, is thus spoken by me
5- iad « ha janasruUh pautrdyana upaiuirdva, sa ha samji-
402 The Principal Upamsads IV 2. i.
hana eva ksattdram uvaca, angare ha sa-yugvanam iva raikvam dttheti, ko nu hatham sa-yugvd raikva iti
5 Now, Janasruti, the great grandson (of Janasruta) over- heard this Then when he rose, he said to the attendant, '0 fnend, you speak to me in the same way as to Raikva with the cart.' (He asked) 'How is it with Raikva, the man with the cart?'
He overheard the conversation of the swans and spent the night brooding over it When he woke up, listening to the eulogistic chants of the bards, he turned to his attendant and said, 'You speak of me as of Raikva with the cart ' S
6 yathd krtaya viptdyddhareydh samyanti, evam enam sarvam tad abhtsameti, yat kiH ca prajafy sddhu kurvantt, yas tad veda yat sa veda, sa mayaitad ukta tti
6 Even as all the throws of the dice go to the winner with the highest throw, so whatever good men do, all goes to him He also who knows what he knows is thus spoken of by me
7 sa ha ksattanvisya, navidam tit pratyeyaya, tarn hovaca yatrare brahmanasydnvesana tad enam arccheh
7 The attendant searched for him and returned saying 'I did not find him.' Then he said to him, 'O where a Brahmana is searched for, there look for him '
The Brahmanas are generally to be found in solitary places in the forests or on the banks of rivers ekante'ranye nadi-puhnadatt vivi- kte dese & The attendant was instructed to search m such places
8 so'dhastac chakatasya pdmanam kasamdnam upopaviveia, tarn habhyuvada, tvam nu bhagavah sa-yugvd raikva tti. aham hy are, Ut ha pratyajHe, sa ha ksatta, avidam itt pratyeyaya
8 He approached a man scratching the itch underneath a cart, and said to him, 'Pray, Sir, are you Raikva, the man with the cart?' He replied 'Yes, I am he ' The attendant returned saying, 'I have found him out '
1. Then Janasruti, the great grandson (of Janairuta) took with him six hundred cows, a gold necklace, and a chariot 'with mules and said to him:
2 raxkoemdm sai satani gavam, ayam ni?ko'yam aimtan- rathah, comma dam bhagavo devatdm iadhi, yam devatdm updssa tit
2. 'Raikva, here are six hundred cows, a gold necklace and a chariot with mules. Now Sir, please teach me the deity whom you worship.'
3. tarn « ha parah pratyuvdca, ahahdre tvd, 4Mra, tavaiva saha gabhir astv iti, tad « ha punar eva jdmsrutih patitrdyayah sahasram gavam mskam ahatari-ratham duhitaram tad dddya praticakrame
3 And to him, then, the other replied, 'Oh, necklace and carriage along with the cows be yours, O Sudra.' And then again, Janasruti, the great grandson (of Janasruta) taking a thousand cows, a gold necklace and a chariot with mules, and his daughter too, went np to him
£&dra The king is not a Sitdra S explains it thus: 'The old teachers have explained this point thus: by addressing him asS&dra, the sage Raikva shows that he already knows what is passing in the king's mind: The word $ itilra meaning "one who is melting with sorrows at hearing the greatness of Raikva, as spoken of by the swans " Or it may be that the king is addressed as Siidra because he comes for instruction with an offering of riches like a Sudra and not with proper obeisance and attendance as befits the higher castes, and it does not mean that the king is a $Gdra by caste. Others, however, explain that Raikva addressed him thus, because ne was enraged at his offering him so little, because it is also said Oiat riches are to be accepted when plenty of it is offered '
4- famMbhyuydda.ratkvedamsaliasramgavdmtayamnisko'yam asoatan-rathah.iyam jay ayam grdmo yastmnn dsse: am eva ma. bhagavah, iadhU%.
,4 He said to him- 'Raikva, here are a thousand cows, here 3S * 1 necklace, here is a chariot with mules, here is a wife and here is a village in which you dwell Pray, revered Sir, teach me.'
5- tasya ha mukkam upodgrhmnn uvdca- ahahdremah tudra anenatva muhhenalapaykyatha itt; te hatte raihia.-pa.rna ndma m <t«avKesuyaira$tnd uvdsa sa tasmat havdca.
5- Then, lifting up her (the daughter's) face toward himself
404 The Pnncipal Upamsads IV 3 2
he (1 e. Raikva) said, 'He has brought these (cows) along, Sudra, merely by this face you would make me speak ' These are the villages called Raikva-parna, among the people of the Mahavrsas, where he lived Then he said to him
£ quotes a verse to the effect that a life of studentship, gift of wealth, intelligence, knowledge of the Veda, love and knowledge are the six ways to the attainment of knowledge
brahma-corl dliana-ddyl tnedhavi sWotrtyah pnyah vidyayd va vidyam ptaha, tarn tirtham san mama
RAIKVA'S TEACHING
1 vayur vava samvargah, yada va agntr udvayati, vayum evapyeti, yada suryo'stam eh vayum evapyeti, yada candro'stam eti vayum evapyeti
1 Air, verily, is the absorbent, for when a fire goes out, it goes into the air When the sun sets, it goes into the air, and when the moon sets, it goes into the air
For Anaximenes air is theos, it is the primary substance His follower, Diogenes of Apolloma (fifth century b c ) makes out that air is not only the one original and permanent substance but is also in its purest form the substance of all psyche in the universe It has special affinities with the soul m animals and human beings Simphcius quotes from his book, On Nature, 'Mankind and the other animals live on air, by breathing, and it is to them both soul and mind The soul of all animals is the same, namely, air, which is wanner than the air outside, in which we live, though much colder than that near the sun In my opimon that which has intelligence is what men call air, and by it everything is directed and it has power over all things, for it is just this substance which I hold to be God ' See W K C Guthrie The Greeks and ffteir Gods (1950), PP 135-36
The connection of hfe with breath and so with air seems obvious The Latin word for soul, amtna, means both air and breath
2 yaddpa ucchusyanii, vayum evdpvyantt, vayur hy evattdn sarvdn samvmkte, ity adhtdavoatam
3. , athadkyatmam: pra.no vava samvargah, sa yada svapiti pranam eva vag apyett, pranam caksuh, pranam &otram, pranam mandh, pra.no hy evaitan sarvan samvrnkie iti. • 3. Now, -with reference to the self: Breath, indeed, is the absorbent. When one sleeps, speech just goes into breath; sight goes into breath; hearing goes into breath; the rnind goes into breath For breath, indeed, absorbs all this.
, 4. These two, verily, are the two absorbents, air among the gods, breath among the breaths.
5 atha ha iaunakam ca kapeyam abhipratdrtnam ca kaksa- senim parivi$yamanau brahmacari bibhikse, tasma u ha na dadatuh.
5. Once upon a time, when Saunaka Kapeya and Abhipra- tann Ktksasem were being served with food, a student of sacred knowledge begged of them. They did not give to him aaything.
mahatmanai caturo deva ekah
kah sajagdra bhuvanasya gopah.
tarn, kapeya, nabhxpasyantt martyah
abhipratdrin bahudha vasantam. yamai va etad annum, tasma etan na dattam tti.
do not see ' though he abides 111 manifold forms, O AWupratarm. Venly, this food has not been offered to him to whom it belongs.'
Bmltm^ y ° U haVe refused t0 me ' you have reaUv refas ed to The one god is said to be Prajd-pati.
7' tod u ha iaunakah kapeyah pratimanvdnah pratyeyaya • atma devanam jamta prajaitam, niraiiya-damsiro babhaso'nasurih: , mahaniam asya mahtmanam ahuh, ... ' MMdyamano yad anannam aUi ^atvayambrahmacarm, idam upasmaJie, dattasmat bhiksam iti flJ'Ji* « & ? Mka Kapeya. reflecting on this, replied. 'It is aBtt of gods, the creator of all beings, with golden teeth
406 The Principal Upanisads IV. 4 2.
the eater, the truly -wise one They speak of his magnificence as very great indeed, because he eats what is not food, without being eaten Thus, venly, O student of sacred knowledge, do we meditate on this ' (Then he said to his attendants) 'give him food.'
hiranya golden, undecaying, undamaged amjla, abhagna S anasurih' truly wise" siirir eva S
8. tasnia u ha daduh; te va etepancanye pailcdnye data santas tat krtam, tasmat sarvasu dtksv annam eva data krtam, saisa vtrad annadi, tayedam sarvam drstam, sarvam asyedam drstam Vhavati, annado bhavahya evam veda,ya evam veda
8. Then they gave (food) to him These five and the other five make ten and that is the highest throw in dice Therefore in all directions, these ten are the food and the highest throw. This is Vtraj, the eater of food Through it, this whole world becomes seen. One who knows this, sees all this and becomes an eater of food, yea, one who knows this.
The first five are air, fire, sun, moon and water The second five are breath, speech, eye, ear and mind
1. Once upon a time Satyakama Jabala addressed his mother Jabala, 'Mother, I desire to live the Lie of a student of sacred knowledge. Of what family am I?'
2. sa hainam uvaca, nakam dad veda, lata, yad gotras tvam est, bahv dham carantl paricarmi yauvane tvam alaihe, saham etan na veda yad-gotras tvam asi, jabala-tu namaham asmt, satyakamo nama tvam asi, sa satyakama evajabalo bruvitha tti.
2. Then she said to him- 'I do not know, my child, of what family you are. In my youth, when I went about a great deal, as a maid servant, I got you So I do not know of what family you are. However, I am Jabala by name and you are Satyakama
IV 4. 5» Chandagya Upanisad 407
by name. So you may speak of yourself as Satyakama Jabala (the son of Jabala).
S says that she had no time to ascertain about her gotta or family as she had to move about much in her husband's house, attending upon guests
3 sa ha haridriimatam gautamam etyovdca, brahmacaryam bhagavah vatsyami, upeyam bhagavantam iti.
3. Then he went to Gautama, the son of Haridrumat and said, 1 wish to become a student of sacred knowledge. May I become your pupil, Venerable Sir.'
4 tamlmdca, hm-gotro nu, saumya, asitt; sa hovaca, ndhametad vsda, bhoh, yad-gotro'kam asmi, aprccham mataram, sa ma fraiyabramt, boko aham carantl paricdrini yauvane tvam aldbhe, saham dan na vedayad-gotras tvam asi, jabala tti namaham asmi, satyakdmo noma tvam asiti, so' hath satyakdmo jabdlo'smi, bhoh, th.
4 He said to him 'Of what family are you, my dear?' He replied, 'I do not know this, sir, of what family I am I asked my mother. She answered me, "In my youth, when I went about a great deal as a maid-servant, I got you So I do not know of what family you are I am Jabala by name and you are Satyakama by name." So I am Satyakama Jabala, Sir.'
5- tarn hovaca, nattad abrdhmano vivaklum arhatt; samidham, smmya, ahara, wpa iva. nesye, na satyad aga Hi. tarn upamya krsanam abalandm catuh-iata ga mrakrtyovaca, itndh, saumya, anusamvraph, ta abhprasihdpayann uvaca, ntisahasrenavarte- yeti saha varsa-ganam provasa, tayadd sahasram sampeduh.
5 He then said to him, 'None but a Brahmana could thus explain Bnng the fuel, my dear, I will receive you, as a pupil. lHou hast not departed from the truth Having initiated him,
\f P v rated out four hundred lean, weak cows and said, 'Go with these, my dear ' While taking them away, he said, 'I may not return without a thousand.' He lived away a number of years When they came to be a thousand.
The Principal Vpanisads IV 6 i.
1 atha liainam rsabho'bhyuvdda, satyakama iti, bltagavah iti ha pratiiidrdva; prdptah, saumya, sahasram smah, prdpaya na dcdrya-kulam
i. Then the bull spoke to him, saying, 'Satyakama'' He replied, 'Revered Sir ' 'We have reached a thousand, my dear, take us to the teacher's house '
'him, thus equipped with faith and austerity, the deity of the air, connected with the directions, having become satisfied, entered into the bull' tarn etam iraddhd-tapobhyam siddham vayu-devata dtk-sa- mbandhmi tusfa saty rsabham anupravitya S
2 brahmanai ca te padam bravdnitt, bravitu me, bhagavdn, iti, tasmai hovdca prdci dik kola, pratici iih kala, daksim dik kalodici dik kalaisa vai, saumya, catus-kalah pado brahmanah prakaiavan ndtna.
2 'And let me declare to you a quarter of Brahman ' 'Tell me, Revered Sir ' To him, it then said, 'The east is one quarter, the west is one quarter, the south is one quarter, and the north is one quarter This, venly, my dear, is Brahman's four- quartered foot named the Shining
3 sa ya etam evam mdvami catus-kalam padam brahmanah prakaiavan ity upaste prakaiavan asmvml loke bhavati, prakdiavato ha lokdn jayati, ya etam evam vidvami catus-kalam padam brahmanah prakaiavan ity upaste
3 'He who, knowing it thus, meditates on this four quartered foot of Brahman named the Shining becomes shining in this world Then he wins shining worlds, who, knowing it thus, meditates on the fourquartered foot of Brahman, named the Shining '
THE FOUR QUARTERS OF BRAHMAN {continued)
I agnis fe padam vakteti, sa ha ivo bhiite ga abhiprasthdpa- yam cakdra, id yatrdbhi-sdyam babhilvuh, tatrdgmm upasamdd-
IV 7 i Chandogya Upaniiad 4°9
haya, gd uparudhya, samidham adhdya, paicdd agneh pran
'^fS^u tQ the Qther quarter of Brah ,
He then when it was the morrow, drove the cows on When they came, at evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid on fuel, and sat down to the west of the fire, facing the east
2 tarn agntr abhyuvada, satyakdma itt; bhagavah, ih ha ThSe said to him, 'Satyakama.' He replied, 'Revered
Sir'
3. brahma^ah, saumya, te pddam bravamti, bravttu me, bhaga- van ttt; tasmat Jiovdca; prihvul kald'ntanksam Ma, dyauh kaM, samudrah kola, esa vm, saumya, catm-kalah pddo brahmano nantavdn nama. ,
3 'Let me declare to you, my dear, a quarter of Brahman. 'Tell me, Revered Sir.' To him, it then said, 'The earth is one quarter, the atmosphere is one quarter, the sky is one quarter, the ocean is one quarter This, verily, my dear, is Braliman s fourquartered foot, named the Endless.
4 sa ya etam evam vxdvdms catus-kalam pddam brahmano anantavdnttyupdde.amntavdnasmmllokebhavah, anantavato ha lokdiijayatt, ya etam evam vidvami catu?-kalam pddam brahmano anantavdn liy updste
4 'He, who knowing it thus, meditates on this fourquartered foot of Brahman as the Endless becomes endless in this world. Then, he wins endless worlds, who knowing it thus, meditates on the fourquartered foot of Brahman as the Endless.'
THE FOUR QUARTERS OF BRAHMAN (continued)
1 hamsas te pddam vakteti, sa ha tvobhvte gd ab'nprastha- faydm cakdra, id yatrdbhisdyam babhuvuh, tatrdgmm upasa- mddhdya, gd uparudhya, samidliam ddltdya paiedd agneh prdn upopavivcia.
4io
The Principal Upanisads
1. 'A swan will tell you (another) quarter.' He, then, when it was the morrow, drove the cows on. When they came at evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid on the fuel, and sat down to the west of the fire, facing the east
2 A swan flew down to him and said, 'Satyakama,' He replied 'Revered Sir.'
3. brahmamh, saumya, tepddam bravdnih, bravitu vie bhagavan, Hi, tasmai hovaca agnth kola, sttryah kala, candrah kala, vtdyttl kala, csavai, saumya, catus-kalah, pddo brahmano jyottsmdn ndma.
3 'Let me declare to you, my dear, a quarter of Brahman ' 'Tell me, Revered Sir.' To him, it then said, 'Fire is one quarter, the sun is one quarter, the moon is one quarter and the lightning is one quarter'. This, venry, my dear, is Brahman's four- quartered foot named the Luminous.
4 sa ya clam evavt vidvami catus-kalam padam brahmano jyotipnan tty npastc.jyoiisman asimritllokc bhavati, yyottsmaio ha lokan jayati ya clam cvam vtdvamS catus-kalam padam brahmano yyoitsman tly upastc.
4 'He, wno, knowing it thus, meditates, on this fourquartered foot of Brahman as the Luminous becomes luminous in the world. Then he wins luminous worlds, who, knowing it thus, meditates on the fourquartered foot of Brahman as the Luminous '
THE FOUR QUARTERS OF BRAHMAN [continued)
1. madgus tc padam vakleti, sa ha dvobhiiic ga abhiprastha- payam cakdra, td yalrabht sayam babhuvuh, tairdgnttn upasa- mddhdya, gd uparudhya, samtdham adhaya, paiedd agnrh pran npopavivcs'a
1. 'A diver-bird will tell you (another) quarter He, then, when it was the morrow, drove the cows on When they came at evening, he lighted a fire, penned the cows, laid on the fuel and sat down to the west of the fire, facing the east.
IV p. 2, Chandogya Upanisad 411
2 tarn utadgur upanipaiydbhyuvdda, satyakama, iti bhagavalji, tti fia prahiuirdva.
2 A diver-bird flew down to him and said. 'Satyakama ' He replied: 'Yes, Sir'
3. brabnanah, saumya, te padam bravdntU, bravitu me bhagavdn tit, temat hovaea,prdnaJ} kala, caksuh kala sroiram kala, manalt, Ma esa mi, saumya, catus-hahl} pado brakmana ayatamvan noma.
3. 'Let me declare to you, my dear, a quarter of Brahman' 'Tell me, Revered Sir.' To him it then said, 'Breath is one quarter, the eye is one quarter, the ear is one quarter, and the mind is one quarter. This, verily, my dear, is the fourquartered foot of Brahman named Possessing a support.
4 sa ya etmn evam vidvams calus-kalam padam brakmana ayatanavdn tty upaste, ayaianavan asmiml Zofce bhavati, ayata- mvaio ha lokan jayah, ya etam evam vidvdmi catus-halam padam bralwiaqa ayatanavdn tty up&ste.
4 'He, who, knowing it thus, meditates on this fourquartered foot of Brahman as possessing a support, comes to possess a support in this world. Then he wins worlds possessing a support, who, knowing it thus, meditates on the fourquartered foot of Brahman as 'possessing a support.'
1 prapa. hdcarya-kulam, tarn acaryo'bhyuvada, satyakama tti; ohagavah, th haprahhiirdva.
1 Then he reached the teacher's house The teacher said, Satyakama.' He replied, 'Yes, Revered Sir.'
2. brahma-vid iva mi, saumya, bhdsi, ho «« tvamtSasaseti, anye imnusyebhya iti ha praiijajfie, bhagavdnts tv eva me kdme
wit ^ er ^y> m y dear, you shine like one knowing Brahman.
•t 0 taught y 011 ?' He replied, 'Others, than men. But I wish, Revered Sir, that you teach me.*
St. Bernard. 'What I know of the divine sciences and Holy
412 The Principal Upamsads IV 10 3
Scripture, I learnt in woods and fields I have had no other masters than the beeches and the oaks '
One who knows Brahman has his senses tranqudhsed, wears a smiling face, is free from anxiety and is of fulfilled purpose pra- samtendrtyah prahasita-vadanai ca miemtah kftartho brahma-vtd bhavah §
3 srutam hy eva me bhagavad-driebhyah, dcdryddd haiva vtdyd vtdttd sadhistham prdpatiti, tasmat hattad evovdca atra ha na kin cana viydyeti, vTydyeh
3 'For I have heard from persons like you, Revered sir, that the knowledge which has been learned from a teacher best helps one to attain his end ' To him, he then declared it In it nothing whatsoever was left out, yea, nothing was left out
1 upakosalo ha vat kdmaldyanah satyakame jdbdle brahma- caryam ttvdsa, tasya ha dvddasa varsdny agmn partcacdra, sa ha smdnydn antevdstnaJi samdvartayams tarn ha smatva 11a samd- vartayatt.
1. Now, venly, Upakosala, the son of Kamala dwelt with Satyakama Jabala, as a student of sacred wisdom He tended his fires for twelve years But the teacher, though he allowed other pupils (after they learnt the sacred wisdom) to return to then" homes, did not allow him (Upakosala) to depart
2. tarn jdyovdca, tapto brahmacdrl, kuialam agmn paricacdrtn, md ivdgnayah panpravocan, prabrfihy asmd tti, tasntat ha aprocyaiva pravdsdmcakre
2 His wife said to him, '(this) student of sacred wisdom has performed his penance and tended the fires well Let not the fires blame you Give him the teaching ' But he went away without teaching him
3 sa ha vyddhindnaittum dadhre, tarn deary a-jdyovdca,brahm<i- cdrm, aidna, kwi nu ndsndsi tit. sa hovdea, baliava imesimn puruse kdmd ndndtyaydh, vyddhtbhth prahpurno'smi, ndiisyann itt
3 Then, on account of sickness (gnef), he resolved not to eat
Chdndogya Upanisad
The teacher's wife said to him '0 student of sacred wisdom, please eat. Why, pray, do you not eat?' Then he said, 'Many are the desires m this person which proceed in different directions. I am filled with sicknesses (griefs). I will not eat.'
4 atha hdgnayah samudire, tapio brahmacan, kusalam nah paryacdrit, Iianidsmai prabravdmetv tasmai hocuh, prano brahma, ham brahma, kham brahmeti.
4, Then the fires said among themselves: 'This student of sacred wisdom has performed his penance and tended us well. Let us teach him then. ' They then said to him 'Life is Brahman, Joy is Brahman, Ether is Brahman.'
Skasa ether or space
5 sa hovdca vijdndmy aham yat prano brahma, ham ca tu kham ca na vijdndmiti te hocuh, yad vava ham tad eva kham, yad eva kham tad eva ham ih, pranam ca hdsmai tad akaiam cocuh.
5. Then he said, 'I understand that life is Brahman But'joy and ether I do not understand.' They said (to him), 'Joy, venly, that is the same as ether. Ether, verily, that is the same as joy.' Then they explained to him life and ether.
1* atha hainam gdrhapatyo'nuhidsa, prthivy agnir annam Mrtya. it%, ya e?a adttye puruso drsyate so'ham asmt, sa evaham asmiti
•R I ^ The i 1 c the Gdrha P ai y a fire instructed him, 'Earth, Fire, *ood and Sun (are forms of me), the person that is seen in the 3un, I am he, I am he, indeed.
i&rtutpatya: the fire in the household.
bhmUr ya Ctam evam vidvdn «paste, apahaU pspa-krtydm, Ml vbaT' SarVam d y ureh 'Jy°SP"^hnasyavara-pHrtts'dhksiyanie, rnL V 1 ? tam Wj "«?a«io's»w}j!5 ca loke'musmtmi ca, ya eiam Wividvanupastc. 2 'He who knowing this meditates (on the fire) destroys
414 The Principal Upanisads IV. 13. 1,
sinful actions, becomes possessor of (this) world, reaches full life, lives brightly His descendants do not perish Both m this world and m the yonder we serve him who knowing this meditates (on the fire) '
jyog brightly, conspicuously ujjvalam §
THE SAME PERSON IS IN THE MOON AND IN THE SACRIFICIAL FIRE (INTENDED FOR THE MANES)
1 atha hainam anvdhdryapacano'nuSaSasa: dpo diio nak- satrdm candramd itt, ya esa candramasi ptcruso driyate so' ham asmi sa evaham asmih.
1. Then, the anvdharyapacana instructed him 'Water, the quarters, the stars, the moon (are forms of me) , the person that is seen in the moon, I am he, I am he, indeed '
2 sa ya eiam evam viivan upaste'pahaie papakrtyam loki bhavah, sarvam dyur eh, jyog fivah, nasyavara purusah ksiyante, upa vayatn torn bhunjamo'smvmi ca loke'tmsmtmi ca, ya etam evam mdvan upaste
2 'He who knowing this meditates (on the fire) destroys sinful actions, becomes possessor of (this) world, reaches full life, lives brightly, His descendants do not perish Both m this world and m the yonder we serve him, who knowing this, meditates on (the fire) '
1. atha hainam ahavaniye'nuiaiasa, prdna dkdio dyaur vidyud ttt, ya esa vidyutt puruso drsyate, so'ham asmi, sa evaham asmitt. 1. Then the ahavanlya (fire) instructed him Breath, space,
Chdndogya Upanisad
sky and lightning (are forms of me) ; the person that is seen in the lightning. I am he, I am he, indeed.
While the anvakarya fire is that on the altar on the southern side, the ahavaniya fire is that on the altar on the eastern side.
2. sa ya etam evam vidvan upaste'pahate pdpakrtydm, lokl bhavafo, sarvam dyur eti, jyog fivatu, ndsydvarapurusdh ksiyante, upa vayam tarn bhunjdmo'smims ca lohe'musmtmi ca ya etam eoath vidvan updste.
2. *He who knowing this meditates (on the fire) destroys sinful actions, becomes possessor of (this) world, reaches full life, lives brightly. His descendants do not perish. Both in this world and in the yonder we serve him, who, knowing this, meditates (on the fire).'
_ I. tehocuh upakosala, e§a, saumya, te'smad-vidydtma-vtdyd ca. t^ as . * M ^ gntim vakteh. djagdma hasyacdryah, tarn dcdryo
1. Then they (the fires) said, 'Upakosala dear, you have this knowledge of our selves and knowledge of the self. But the teacher will tell you the way.' Then the teacher returned The teacher spoke to him 'Upakosala.'
2. lhagavah, ttt ha pratis"usrdva; brahma-vid iva, satimya, ie mhham bhdh, ho nu tvd'nuiasaseti, ko mt md'nusisyad blioh, ttt iha apeva mhmita, ime nunam tdrid, anyddrid ttihdgnin abhyu&e kim nu, saumya, Ma te'vocann th.
tw ^ vered Sir,' he answered. 'Dear, your face shines like <wl v° ne who lmows BraJi man. Who has instructed you?'
instruct me, sir/ said he. Here he conceals it as it were And he said (pointrng-to the fires), "They are of this form now, but they were of a different form ' The teacher said, wnat dear, did they indeed tell you?'
a/'L'f"' 1 ' ili prahjajiie, lokdn vdva kila, saumya te'vocan, •aw Ui t e tad vaksydmi yathd pttskara-paMa dpo na Slisyanfe,
416 The Principal Upamsads IV 15 5
evam evam-vidt papam karma na shsyata iti, bravitu me bhagavdn iti, tasmai hovaca
3 'This/ he replied 'They, dear, have indeed spoken to you about the worlds, but I will tell you this and as water does not cling to the lotus leaf, so evil deed does not cling to one who knows it ' 'Tell me, revered sir ' To him, he then said
1. ya eso'ksim puruso drsyate, esa alma tti hovaca, etad amriam abhayam, etad brahmeh, tad yady apy asmm sarpir vodakam va stficaii, vartmavi eva gacchah
1 He said, 'The person who is seen in the eye, he is the self This is the immortal, the fearless, this is Brahman So even if one drops melted butter or water into this (eye), it goes away by the sides
We can see the self in the eye, only if we are pure of heart nvartta-caksu-bhvr brahmacaryadi-sadhana-sampamiaih santath vivekt- bhvr drster drasta 5
2 etam samyad-vdma ity acaksate, etam hi sarvdni vamany abhtsamyantt, sarvdny enam vamany abhisamyanti, ya evam veda
2 This they call samyad-vdma for all desirable things go towards him All desirable things go to him who knows this
vamam desirable things vananiyam sambhajamyam Sobhandm S.
3 esa u eva vdmamh, esa hi sarvdni vamam nayati, sarvdni vamam nayati, ya evam veda
3 He is also Vamam for he brings all desirable things He Who knows this brings all desirable things
4 esa u eva bhdmanih, esa hi sarvesu lokesu bhdti, sarvesti lokesu bhati, ya evam veda
4 He is also bhdmani for he shines in all worlds He who knows this shines m all worlds
5 atha yad u caivasmin chavyam kurvantt yadi ca na arctsam evabhisambhavanh, arciso'har ahna dpfiryamdna-paksant, apur- yamana-paksdd ydn sad udann eh masams tan, masebhyah
IV i6 2 Chdndogya Upamsad 417
samvatsaram, samvatsarad adityain, adityac candramasam, amttramaso vidyutam, tat puruso'manavah, sa enaih braJana gmnayati, esa deva-pailw brahma-pathah, etena pratipadyamand imam mdnavam avartam navartanta iti, navartanta ih.
5 Now for such a one whether they perform the cremation obsequies or not, he goes to light, from light into the day, from the day into the half-month of the waxing moon; from the half- month of the waxing moon into the six months when the sun moves northwards, from the months into tie year, from the year into the sun, from the sun into the moon, from the moon into lightning. Then there is a person, not human. He leads them to Brahman This is the way to the gods, the way to Brahman. Those who proceed by it do not return to the human condition, yea they do not return.
The reference here is to Brahman who Tesides in the Tegions of satyr salya-loka-stkam. S"
The followers of the ceremonial code pass along the path called pilr-yana. and they return to this world Those who live in the forests practise austerities, go along the path called deva-yana and do not return to this world
I esa ha vai yafiio yo'yam pavate, esa ha yann idam sarvam punah.yad esa yann %dam sarvam punah, tasniad esa eva yajfias wsyamanaicavakca variant.
1 Verily, that which purifies here (1 e the wind) is the sacrmce for he, moving along, purifies all this. And because niovmgalonghe purifies all this, he is the sacrmce. Of that mind an u speech are the ways.
2 tayor anyataram manasa sariiskarott- brahvia, vacd Jioia'- wtyur udgata anyataram; sa yatropakrte pratar-amivake iitrd
pttrtdliamyayd brahmd vyamvadaii,
hvS ^ ^ Braima priest performs one with his mind: oL? S th i ffo ^ A* Adhvaryu and the Udgatr priests the cm^'J he mornia S litany has commenced and before the concluding recitation, the Brahma priest has to speak
4i"8
The Principal Upanisads
Generally the Brahma pnest follows the sacrifice with his mind,
1 e. in silence When he breaks the silence, then the mental exercise is interrupted, for he also resorts to speech. The performance of the Brahma pnest should be an act of meditation.
3 anyataram eva vartantm samskaroh, htyate' nyatard, sa yathatkapdd vrajan ratho vaikena cakrena varlamdno rtsyatt, evam asya yajno rtsyatt, vajHam risyantam yajamdno'nunsyati, sa tsfvd pdplydn bhavaU
3 He performs one way only (that by words) but the other is injured Even as a one-footed man walking or as a one-wheeled chariot moving is injured, even so is his sacrifice injured. When the sacrifice is injured, the sacrificer is injured By having sacrificed he becomes worse off.
samskarana remaking, reintegration See Attareya Brdhmana. VI. 27; Satapatha Brdhmana, VII. 1 z. 1, Attareya Aranyaka, III,
4 atha yatropdkrte prdtar-anuvdke na purd partdMniydyd brahmd vyavavadatt, ubJie eva variant samskurvanii, 11a hiyale' nyatara
4 But when after the morning litany has begun and before the concluding recitation the Brahma pnest does not speak, they perform both ways and neither is injured.
5. sa yatkobhayapdd vrajan ratho vobhdbhydm cakrdbhydm vartamdnah pratthsthah, evam asya yajnah prahhsfJiaU, yajnam prattUsthantam yajamdno' nupratthsthatt, sa tstvd sreydn bJiavah
5 As a two-footed man walking or as a two-wheeled chanot moving is well-supported, even so is his sacrifice well supported. When the sacnfice is well supported the sacnficer is well supported By having sacrificed he becomes better off.
The Brahma pnest knows the wisdom of silence, tnattna-vtpldnam
1 prajdpattr lokdn abhyatapat, tesdm tapyamdnanam rasdn prdvrhat, agmm prthtvydh vdyum antariksdt, ddttyam divah.
1 Prajd-pati brooded on the -worlds. As they were brooded an, he extracted their essences, fire from the earth, air from the atmosphere, the sun from the sky
2 sa etas tisro devata dbhyaiapat, tasath tapyamananam rasan pravrhat agner rcah, vayor yajumsi, samany adityat.
2 On these three deities he brooded. As they were brooded on, he extracted their essences, the Rg verses from the fire, the Yajus formulas from the air, the Saman chants from the sun
3 sa dam traylm vidydm abhyatapat, tasyas tapyamanaya rasan prdvrhat, bhur tty rgblvyah, bhuvar iti yajurbhyah, svar iti saviabhyah.
3 On this threefold knowledge he brooded As it was brooded upon he extracted its essences; bhur from the Rg verses; bhuvas from the Yajus formulas; sva}t from the Saman chants
4 tad yady rkto nsyed bhv.fi svaheti gdrhapatye pihuyat, ream em iad rasena ream mryena rcdmyajnasya viristam samdadhati.
i,. If (the sacrifice) is injured from the Rg verses, one should make an oblation in the householder's fire "with the words bhuh, hail. So by the essence of the Rg verses themselves, by the power of the Rg verses, he binds together (heals) the injury to the Rg sacrifice
5 alha yadi yajusto risyed bhuvah svaheti daksindgnau juhuyat yaptsam eva fad rasena yajusdni mryena yajusam yajnasva vmstam samdadhati ' "
5 Again, if (the sacrifice) is injured by the Yajus formulas n!i make an ODlatio11 ™ the southern fire with the words bhuvah hsil So by the essence of the Yajus formulas them- selves by the power of the Yajus formulas he binds together (heals) the uvjury to the Yajus sacrifice.
6 alha yadi sdmato risyet, svah svahety dhavanvye julutyat, sanmam eva iad rasena sdinndm viryena samndm yajnasva vmstam samdadhati. J J J
JLm gaU )' rf ^ e sacrifice ) ^ injured by the Sdma chants, one wVt£ oblation ™ dhavatnya fire with the ^ords w nau So by the essence of the Sdma chants themselves,
Z, ™ 2 f Sdma he bmds together (heals) the
injury to the Saman sacrifice
K the injury be with regard to Brahma, g says, one should make
The Pnnctpal Upamsads
an oblation m all the three fires, pronouncing all the three, bhilh, bhuvah, svah, as the injury relates to all the three Vedas
7 tad yatlia lavanena suvarnam samdadhyat, suvarnena raja- tam, rajatena trapu, trapuna stsam, sisena loham, lohena dam, daru carmand
7 Just as one would bind together gold with (borax) salt, silver with gold, tin with silver, lead with tin, iron with lead, wood with iron or wood with leather
loha iron or brass
8 evam esam lokanam dsdm devatdnam asyds trayyd vidyayd viryena yajnasya vm$tam samdadhdii, bhesaja-krto ha va esa yajnah yatraivam-vtd brahmd bhavah,
8 So does one bind together (heal) any injury to the sacrifice with the power of these worlds, of these gods, and of the three Vedas Verily, such a sacrifice is well healed when there is a Brahma pnest knowing this
healed bhesaja-kfto ha va esa yajnah, rogdrta tva pumdm cikttsakena stthksitenawa yajno bliavati
9 esa ha va udak-pravano yajnah, yatraivam-vtd brahma bhavah, evam-vidam ha va esa brakmanam anu gatha yato yata avartate, tat tad gacchah manavah
g Verily, that sacrifice is inclined to the north, m which there is a Brahma pnest who knows this And with regard to such a Brahma pnest there is this song Wherever it falls, thither the man goes
manava silent from mauna, silence, or thoughtful, from manana Whenever mistakes are committed, he breaks his silence and corrects them, for it is said, 'Whenever it fails, thither the man goes '
10. brahmaivaika rtvik hurun aSvabhiraksah, evam vidd ha vat brahma yajitam yajamanam sarvams ca rtvijo'bhiraksatt, tasmad evam-vidam eva brahmanam kurvita, ndnevam-vidam, nanevam- vidam
10 The Brahma pnest as a Rtvik pnest protects the sacn- ficers like a mare, 1 e the Brahma pnest knowing this protects the sacrifice, the sacnficer and all the Rtvik pnests Therefore one should make one who knows this as his Brahma pnest, not one who does not know it, yea, not one who does not know it
V i 6
Chandogya Upani§ad
ON BREATH, THE SOUL AND THE UNIVERSAL SELF. THE FIVE BODILY FUNCTIONS AND THE IMPORT- ANCE OF BREATH
I yo ha vaijyestham ca &re%tham ca veda, jyesfhat ca ha vat sretfJuis ca bhavaii, pra.no vava jyestha§ ca iresthai ca.
1. Venly, he who knows the oldest and the best becomes himself the oldest and the best. Breath indeed is the oldest and the best.
§ explains that breath is the oldest because it functions prior to the sense activities, even when the child is in the womb.
2. Verily, he who knows the most prosperous becomes the most prosperous of his own (people) Speech, indeed, is the most prosperous.
3 yo ha va% prahsthdm veda, prah ha tisthaty asmimi ca loke 'mttsmmS ca, cak$ur vava pratistha.
3- Venly, he who knows the firm basis becomes firm in this world and in the yonder. The eye, indeed, is the firm basis.
4- yo ha vat sampadam veda, sa hasmat kdmah padyante daivai cawdnuiaf ca, irotrath vava sampat
4- Verily, he who knows success, his desires succeed, both human and divine. The ear, indeed, is success.
5- yo ha va ayatanam vedayatanath ha svanam bhavati, mono ha va ayatanam.
5 Venly, he who knows the abode becomes the abode of his People The mind, indeed, is the abode
?t-™ d ' for 331 o^ate are perceived by the mind tndri- yopaiirtanam vtsaymam bhoUr-arthanam praiyaya-ru.p5.nam mana tyatanam a&ayah. £.
422 The Principal Upamsads V. i 10
who was superior saying (in turn) 'I am superior' 'I am superior '
Cp PrainaU 3, A U II 4, B U VI 1 1-14, KU III 3
7. te ha prdnah prajd-paUmpitaram etyocuh, bhagavan, ko nah Srestha iti, tan hovaca, yasmtn va titkrante iariram pdpisthataram iva drsyeta, sa vah srestha iti
7 Those senses went to Prajd-patt, (their) father and said, 'Venerable sir, who is the best of us ? ' He said to them, 'He on whose departing the body looks the worst, he is the best among you '
8 sa ha vdg uccakrama, sd samvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca, katham asakata rte maj jivitum itt, yatha kala avadantah prdnantah prdnena, paiyantai caksusd, imvantah irotrena, dhydyanto manasavoam iti, pravivesa ha vdk
8 Speech departed and having stayed away for a year returned and said, 'How have you been able to live without me ? ' (They replied) 'Like the dumb not speaking, but breathing with the breath, seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear, thinking with the mind Thus (we lived) ' Speech entered in
g caksur hoccakrdma, tat samvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca, katham asakata rte maj jivitum iti, yathdndha apaiyantdh, prdnantah prdnena, vadanto vacd, imvantah irotrena, dhydyanto manasavoam tti, praviveia ha caksuh.
9 The eye departed and having stayed away for a year returned and said, 'How have you been able to live without me'' (They replied) 'like the blind not seeing but breathing with the breath, speaking with speech (the tongue), hearing with the ear, thinking with the mind Thus (we lived) ' The eye entered in
10 Srotram hoccakrdma, tat samvatsaram prosya paryetyovaca, katham asakata rte maj jivitum iti, yaiha badhird aSrnvantah, prdnantah prdnena, vadanto vacd, paiyantas caksusd, dhydyanto manasavoam iti, pravivesa ha irotram
10 The ear departed and having stayed away for a yar returned and said, 'How have you been able to live without me?' (They replied) 'like the deaf not hearing, but breathing with the breath, speaking with speech (the tongue), seeing with the eye and thinking with the mind. Thus (we lived) ' The ear entered in
n. memo hoccahrmna, tat samvatsaram prosya paryetyovdea, katham aSakata rte maj pvitum iti, yatha baU amanasah, firdmii- iah prdnem, vaianio vacd, paiyantai caksu$a, smvafttah irotre- mwam tit, praviveia ha manah
11. The mind departed and having stayed away for a year returned and said, 'How have you been able to live •without me?' (They replied) 'Like the children mindless but breathing vrith the breath, speaking with speech (the tongue), seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear. Thus (we lived).' The mind entered in.
Mid amanasah: children mindless, rather undeveloped minds. aprarOdJia-manasah §
M atha ha prayta ucctkramisan, sa yatha suliayah padviia i&nhun samkhidet, eoam \taran pranan samakhdat, tarn habht- sametyocuh, bhagavann edhi, tvam nah frestho'st, motkramir iti.
12 Now when breath was about to depart, tearing up the other senses, even as a spirited horse, about to start might tear op the pegs to which he is tethered, they gathered round him and said, 'Revered Sir, remain, you are the best of us, do not depart.'
remam our lord ttahsvaml §.
13 atha hainam vdg uvaca, yad aham vasistho'smi, tvam tad vasisiho'stti, atha hamam caksur uvaca, yai aham pratisthd'smi, tvamiat$rati$hd'siti
13 Then speech said to hun, 'If I am the most prosperous, so are you the most prosperous.' Then the eye said to him, 'If 1 am the firm basis, so are you the firm basis '
14 atha hainam srotram uvaca, yad aham sampad ami, tvam lei sampad asiti, atha hainam mana uvaca, yad aham ayatamm asmt, tvam tad ayatamm asiti.
14 Then the ear said to hun, 'If I am success, so are you we success.' Then the mind said to him, 'If I am the abode, so are you the abode '
15 »w vai^ vaco na caksitmsi na Srotrdni na mandmsity o^avah ^™ n& lty ev&ca ^ ate ' P r W° evaitam sarvani
n *5 ftey do not call them speeches or eyes or ears or
"™os iaey call them breaths, for all these are breath. SeeKU III 3.
424 The Principal Upanisads V 2, 4.
1 sa hovdca, ktm me annam bMvisyatTii; yat kith ad tdam a svabhya a sakuntbhyah, ih Jtocuh tad va etad anasydnnam ano ha zai nama pratydksam, no. ha va evamvidi kimcana anannam bhavatftt.
1. He (Breath) said, 'What will be my food?' They said, "Whatever there is here, even unto dogs and birds ' So this, verily, is the food of breath. Verily, breath (ana) is his evident name For one who knows this, there is nothing whatever that is not food
prana consists of pra and ana ana is breath and pra indicates the direction of the motion
2. sa hovdca, kim me vaso bhamsyafth; apali, itiJiocuh, tasrnad va etad asisyantah purastac coparistac cadbhh paridadhah, laiubhuko ha vaso bhavah, anagno ha bhavah
2 He said, 'What will be my clothing?' They said, 'Water.' Therefore it is that, when people are about to eat, they cover it (the breath) with water, both before and after He thus obtains clothing and becomes clothed (is no longernaked).
This verse refers to the usual Indian practice of rinsing the mouth both before and after a meal
3. tadd haitat satyakamo jabalo gosrutaye vaiydghrapadyayokt- vovaca, yady apy etac chuskaya sfhdvave briiyat, jayerann evasimfi-sakhah, praroheyuh paldidnth
3 Satyakama Jabala, after telling this to Gofiruti, the son of V3'aghrapada, said to him, 'Even if one should tell this to a dried up stump, branches would be produced on it and leaves would spring forth.'
son of Vyaghrapada vyaghrapddo'patyam S
4 aiha yadi mahaj jigamiset, amavasyayam dtksifvd pattr- namasyam rairau sarvausadhasya mantham dadhi-madhunor upamathya, jyesthdya ircsihdya svdha, ity agnav ajyasya huiva, inai.tJ.e saihpaiam avanayet
4 Now if one wishes to reach greatness, let him perform the initiatory rite on the new moon night and then on the night of the full moon, let him stir with curds and honey a mash of all lands of herbs and pour melted butter on the fire saying,
' 2. 7 Chdndogya Upamsad 425
Hail to the oldest, hail to the best ' And then let him throw the esidue into the mash
SeeBU.VI 3-2
On the day of initiation, diksa, the agent should have passed through the ethical preparation, austerity, truthfulness and chastity. 'Mmi-fayanadMiiya.mam krtvd tapo-r&pam satya-vacamm brahma- •Aiyam tty adidharmavan bhiitvety arthah.
5 vasisthdyat svaha, tty agnav ajyasya hutva, manthe sam- patam avanayet, prahsfhdyat svdM ity agnav ajyasya hutva manthe sampatam avanayet, sampade svaha, ity agnav ajyasya hutva manthe sampatam avanayet, dyatandya svaha, tty agnav ajyasya hutva manthe sampatam avanayet.
5 'Hail to the most prosperous,' with these words, let him lour melted butter on the fire and then let him throw the residue into the mash 'Hail to the firm basis,' with these words
3t him pour melted butter on the fire and then let htm throw the residue into the mash. 'Hail to success,' with these words
it him pour melted butter on the fire and then let him throw the residue into the mash 'Hail to the abode,' with these words
et him pour melted butter on the fire and then let him throw the residue into the mash.
6. athaprahsrpyMjalau mantham ddhdya japah 4 amo ndmdsi, amu h te sarvam idam, sa hi jyesthah srestho rdjddhipahh, sa »»« jyatsthyam sraisthyam rajyam ddhipaiyam gamayaiv aham evedam sarvam asdnlh.
6 Then moving away and holding the mash m his hands, he recites, 'Thou art ami by name for all this rests in thee. He js the oldest and the best, the king and the overlord May he lead me to old age, to the best (position), to kingship, to over- lordship May I be all this '
7 ftha khalv etayd red paccha acamah, tat savttur vrmmaha ity dedntah, vayam devasya bhojanam ity acamah, irestham wrvadhaiamam ity acamah, turam bhagasya dhTmahi ih sarvam pibati, nirnyya kamsam camasam vd paiedd agneh samvisah cannsjM va sthandtle vd vdcam-yamo'prasdhah; sa yadi stnyam pasyet samrddham karmeti vidyat.
7- Then he takes a sip with this Rk verse at each foot, jsaymg) we desire the Savitr' he sips a little, (saying) 'the 100a of the gods,' he sips a little (saying) 'the best and all sus- taining, he sips a little (saying) 'we meditate on the strength
426 The Principal Upanisads V. 3 3
of the god/ lie drinks up the whole Having cleansed the vessel or the cup, he sits down behind the fire either on a skin or on the bare ground with speech restrained and with self-possession If he now sees a woman let him know that his effort has reached fruition.
§ says that he lies down behind the fire and if, in the dream, he sees a woman, that is a sign that his effort has succeeded
8 tad esa slokah" yadd karmasu kdmye$u siriyam svapnesu paiyati, samrddhvm taira jamyat tasmvn svapna-nidariane iti tasmm svapna-mdarsane. 8 As to this, there is this verse 'If during rites performed for (the fulfilment of certain) wishes, he (the performer) sees a woman in a dream, let him recognise fulfilment in such a vision in a dream, in such a vision in a dream '
The Vedic rite is enlarged in its significance
1. svetaketur hdrimeyah pancalanam samitvm eyaya, tarn ha pravdhano jaivahr uvdca kumara ami tvdsisat piteti, a mthi, bhagava tti
1 SVetaketu Aruneya went to an assembly of the Pancalas. Then Pravahana Jaivah said to him. 'Young man, has your father instructed you?' 'Yes, indeed, Venerable Sir' (said he in answer).
aruneya' the grandson of Arum
2. vettlia yad tto'dhi prajah prayantUi^ tm, bhagava, Hi; vettha yatha punar avartanta itO na, bhagava iti; vettha pathor deva-yanasya pitrydnasya ca vydvartanam iti> na, bhagava ttt
2 'Do you know to what place men go from here 7 ' 'No, Venerable Sir.' 'Do you know how they return again'' 'No, Venerable Sir ' 'Do you know where the paths leading to the gods and leading to the fathers separate ' 'No, Venerable Sir '
3 vettha yathdsau loko na sampuryata iti? na bhagava tti;
V, jr. CMndogya Upanisad 427
vettha yathd paHcamydm ahutav apah purusa-vacaso bhavanttti, nam, bhagava tti.
3. 'Do you know how that (yonder) world never becomes full?' 'No, Venerable Sir.' 'Do you know how in the fifth libation water comes to be called a person.' 'Indeed, Venerable Sir, no.'
4. athamkimanus'isto'vocathdk.yo htmdm na vidydt, kathath so' wuiisio bruvitett. sa hdyastah pitur ardham eydya; tarn hovdca: anmuhsya vdva. ktla ma, bhagavdn, abravit arm tvd&isam itt.
4. 'Then why did you say that you had been instructed? Indeed how could any one who did not know these things speak of himself as having been instructed?' Distressed, he went to his father's place and said to him, 'Venerable Sir, you said, indeed, that you had instructed me without having instructed me.'
5 panca ma rdjanya-bandhuh prahidn aprakstt, tesdm naikam canaiakam mvaktum ih; sa hovdca: yathd ma tvam tdta, dan avadah, tathdham esdm naikam ca na veda yady ahum tmdn avedisyam, kathath te ndvahsyam itt.
5 'That fellow of the princely class asked me five questions and I could not understand even one of them.' He (the father) said, 'As you stated to me these (questions) I do not know even one of them If I had known them, how should I not have told them to you?'
6. sa ha gautamo rdjno'rdham eydya, tasmat ha prdptdydrhdm cakara; sa ha prdtah sabhdga udeydya; tarn hovdca: mdnusasya, Wtagavan gautama, vtttasya varam vrntthd tti, sa hovdca tavaiva, rfyan, m&nusam vitiam, yam eva kumdrasydnte vdcam abhds- athali, tarn eva me bruhiti; sa ha krcchri babhuva
6 Then Gautama went over to the long's place To him, when he arrived, he (the king) had proper respect shown. In the morning he went up to the audience hall (where) the king said to him, 'Venerable Gautama, choose a boon out of the jvealth that belongs to the world of men ' Then he replied, imne be the wealth of the world of men, 0 King; tell me that speech which you spoke to the young man ' The king was Perplexed
428 The Principal Upam'sads V 4 2
brdhmnan gacchati, tasmai « sarvcsu lokesu ksatrasyaiva pras'dsar.am abhiid lit; tasmai hovaca
7. 'Stay for some time' he commanded him Then he said to him, 'As to what you have told me, Gautama, this knowledge has never reached the Brahmanas before you; therefore in all the worlds the rule (this teaching) belonged to the Ksatnya class only.' Then he said to him
THE COURSE OF THE SOUL {continued)
1. asau vava lokah, gautama, agmh, tasyaditya cva samit, rasmayo dkumah, ahar arcth, candramd angarah, vaksatrdijt visphuliiigdh
1 'That world, verily, 0 Gautama, is a (sacrificial) fire, the sun itself is its fuel, the rays the smoke, the day the flame, the moon the coals, the stars the sparks
The analog}' of the heavenly region to the sacrificial fire is worked out The sun is the fuel as the world shines only when it is lighted up by the sun. The rays are the smoke because they rise from it even as the smoke rises from the fuel The day is the flame because it is bnght and is the effect of the sun The moon is the coals or the embers, for even as the moon becomes visible when the day has ceased, the embers become visible when the flame is put out The stars are the sparks, they are like parts of the moon S
2 tasmii.n ctasminn agnau devah sraddhdm juhvah, tasya ahutck soino raja sambhavati.
Water is offered as the offering of faith
The king answers the last question why the water in the fifth libation is called man. V 3 3 The sacrificers rise through their offerings to heaven and attain there as their reward a nature hkc that of Son a
V i, i. - Chandogya Ufanisad 429
THE COURSE OF THE SOUL (continued)
1 parjanyo vava, gautama, agmh, tasya vayur eva samit, abhram dhumah, vidyud arcih, aianir angardh, hradanayo visphulingafy.
1. The god of rain, 0 Gautama, is the (sacrificial) fire, the air itself is its fuel, the cloud is the smoke, the lightning is the flame, the thunder the coals and the thunderings the sparks.
hradam, generally explained as 'had', but here it means 'rumblings.'
2 taminn etasminn agnau devah somam rajanam juhvaii, tasya ahuter varsam sambhavah.
2 In this fire the gods offer (the libation of) Soma the King. From this offering arises rain
1. prthivl vava, gautama, agmh; tasyah samvatsara eva satmt, akaso dhimiah, ratnr arcih, diio'ngarah, avantara diso visphu- hngak
1 P e earth, venly, 0 Gautama, is the (sacrificial) fire; of this the year is the fuel, space is the smoke, the night is the flame, the quarters the coals, the intermediate quarters the sparks.
2 tasmmn etasmmn agnau devd varsam pihvati. tasya ahuter annam sambJiavaii.
ihUT'^i v&va ' S auiam i, agmh; tasya vag eva samit, prano phva'mh, caksttr angaral}, trotram vtsphuhngdh.
43°
The Principal Upatnsads V 9 i.
1 Man, venly, 0 Gautama, is the (sacrificial) fire, of this speech is the fuel, breath the smoke, the tongue the flame, the eyes the coals and the ears the sparks
2 iasminn etasmwn agnau dcva annum juhvah, tasya dhute retah sambhavah
2 In this fire the gods offer (the libation of) food, from this offering arises semen
I yosd vdva, gautama, agmh, tasya upastha eva samtt, yad upamantrayate sa dhiimah, yomr arcih, yad aniah karoti te angarah, abhinanda visphuhngak
1 Woman, venly, 0 Gautama, is the (sacrificial) fire, of this the sexual organ is the fuel, what invites is the smoke, the vulva is the flame, what is done inside is the coals, the pleasures the sparks
2 tasminn ctastmnn agnau devd reto juhvah, tasya ahutcr garbhah sambhavah
2 In this fire the gods offer (the libation of) semen, from this offering arises the foetus
From water, through intermediate developments the foetus anses and in all these developments water is the predominating element. drava-Mhulyam S So it is that water comes to be called man in the fifth oblation
j 1/1 lit pancaviyam ahutav apah purusa-vacaso bhavantiii, sa albavrto garbhah, daia vd nava vd mdsdn antah Saytlvd yavad vd'tl-a jayatc
j For this (reason) indeed, m the fifth oblation water conies to be called man Tins foetus enclosed m the membrane, having
V I0 2 CMndogya Upanisad
43*
lam inside for ten or nine months or more or less, then comes to be born
Water, by which the self is enveloped on departing from hfe, means the subtle parts of the elements which constitute the seed_of the body afi-sahdem sarvesam eva deJia-btyaniim bhilta-siihmanam kathanam stddkam SB III I 2
2 sa jaio yavad ayusam jwah, tarn pretam distam ito'gnaya eva karanti, yata eveto yatah sambhuto bhavati
2 When born, he lives whatever the length of his life may be. When he has departed, they (his friends) cany him to the appointed place for the fire (of the funeral pile), from which indeed he came, from which he arose
iisfflW karmana mrAistam S.
1 taiya, ittham viduk,ye ceme'ranye iraddhd tapa ity upasate, ie'msamabhsambhavanh, amso'Iiah, akna apuryamana-paksam, apfiryamana-paksad yan sad udawn di masams tan
1. So those who know this, and those who m the forest meditate on faith as austerity (or with faith and austerity) go to light and from light to day, from day to the bright half of the month (of the waxing moon), from the bright half of the month to those six months during which the sun moves northward
The question as to the place to which men go from here is taken up See C.U IV 15 5
Ihwwho know this The doctrine of the five fires § makes out that i«b refers to the householders, as the next clause refers to the recluses in the forest
2 mfisebhyah samvatsaram, samvatsarad adityam, adityac wndramamn, candmmaso vidyutam, tat puntso'manavah, sa man brahma gamayah, esa deva-yanah pantM th
2. From these months to the year, from the year to the sun, worn the sun to the moon, from the moon to the lightning, i T> e 'i. e ls a P ersoa wao is non-human. He leads them on 0 ara hma This is the path leading to the gods
The Principal Upanisads
V.io 5
The earliest conception of the path of the gods is to be found in the R V , where Agni who serves as •the intermediary between gods and men, as bearing the offerings to the gods is addressed thus 'Knowing the ways by which the gods go, thou (Agni) hast become the unwearied messenger, the bearer of oblations ' I 72, 7, see also II 2 4 The path on which the sacrifices were taken to the heavenly world becomes the path by which the sacnficer himself ascended to the world of the gods SeeSatapathaBrdkmana,! 932 The stations on the path need not be taken literally They represent stages of progressive knowledge and light while those oipttf-ydna of progressive darkness and corruption See IV 15 5 B U VI 2 15
3 atha ya vme grama tstdpurte dattam ity updsate, te dhumam abhisambhavanh, dhumdd rdtnm, rdtrer apara-paksam, apara- paksdd ydn sad daksvnaih mdsdms tan, naite samvatsaram abhiprdpmivanti
3 But those, who in the village practise (a life of) sacrifices, (and perform) works of public utility and almsgiving they pass into the smoke, from smoke to night, from night to the latter (dark) half of the month, from the latter (dark) half of the month to the six months in which the sun moves south- wards, but they do not reach the year
4 mdsebhyah pitr-lokam, pttr-lokdd akdiam, dkdidc candra- tnasam, esa somo raja, tad devdndm annum, tarn devd bhaksayanti
4 From those months to the world of the fathers, from the world of the fathers to space, from space to the moon. That is the kmg Soma That is the food of the gods That the gods eat.
annam — food They become the servants of the gods: itpakara- na-mdlram devdndm bhavanh te strl-pasu-bhrtyddvuat S The gods love them and they love the gods They live with and rejoice in gods
Three kinds of future are indicated The performers of sacrifices reach the moon by passing along the path of the fathers, pttr-ydna, and after having experienced the fruits of their works these return agam with a residuum of their karma The non-performers of sacri- fices go to the kingdom of Yama Those who adopt the way of enlightenment go by the path of gods, deva-ydna There is no return for them from the latter. The distinction between thepitr-ydna and the deva-ydna is one of two different systems of culture, the way of works and the way of knowledge resulting in two different spiritual conditions
5 tasmm ydvat sampdtam usitvd'thaitam evddhvdnam punar
V io 8. Chandogya Upanisad 433
mvartante yathetam akasam, akasad vdyum, vayur bhutvd dhiimo bhavati, dhiimo bhutvd' bhram bhavati.
5. Having dwelt there as long as there is residue (of good works) they return again by that course by which they came to space, from space into air, and after having become the air they become the smoke; after having become smoke, they become mist.
It is not possible, § remarks, for all actions to have their effects in one life 1 m-eaikasmm janmani sarva-karmayam ksayaupapadyaie S
6 abhram bhutvd rnegho bhavati, megho bhutvd pravar?ati, ta iha vrihi-yava osadhi vanaspatayas tila-mdsd ttt jdyante, ato vai klmh durnispmpataram, yo yo hy annam atti yo retah sincati, tad bhuya eva bhavati.
6. After having become mist they become cloud, after having become cloud he rains down They are bom here as rice and barley, herbs and trees, as sesamum plants and beans. From thence the release becomes extremely difficult for whoever eats the food and sows the seed he becomes like unto him
Release is easy from human condition
7. tadya iha ramaniya-caranah, abhyaio hay at te rama^iyam ymwm apadyeran, brahmam-yonim vd ksatnya-yomm vd, vaiiya- yontm va, athaya iha kapuya-caranah abhyaio ha yat te kapuyam yonmi apadyeran ha-yonvmvd sukara-yonim vd canddla-yomth vd
7. Those whose conduct here has been good will quickly attain a good birth (literally womb), the birth of a Brahmin, the birth of a Ksatnya or the birth of a Vaisya But those whose conduct here has been evil, will quickly attain an evil birth, the birth of a dog, the birth of a hog or the birth of a Candala.
8 aihaitayoh pathor na katarena cam tdmmdm ksudrany amird-avartTni bhutdm bhavanti, jayasva, mnyasveti, etat trltyam iloM* 1 ' tm&sau m sampuryate, tasmaj jugupseta, tad esa
1 ^ ? Ut on ne ^ er °* {fast ways are those small creatures iwinch are) continually revolving (those of whom it is said),
X !°E? mi ^ Their ' s is a tbird state B y tms ( lt: about ) iT that world becomes full. Therefore let one seek to guard himself. To this end, there is this verse.
434 The 'Principal Upamsads V n 2
If we pursue wisdom, we travel by the path of the gods If we perform good works we travel by the path of the fathers If we do neither, we will continually revolve like little creatures
9 steno hiranyasya suram pibams ca guns talpam dvasan brahma ha ca-ete patanti catvdrah paficamas cdcarams taih
9 He who steals gold, he who dnnks wine, he who dishonours the teacher's bed, he who kills a Brahmana, these four do fall as. also the fifth who consorts with them
10 atha lia ya etan evam pancagnin veda, na saha tair apy dcaran pdpmand hpyate, duddhah piitah punya-loko bhavati ya evam veda, ya evam veda
10 But he who knows these five fires thus is not stained by evil, even though he consorts with these people. He becomes pure, clean, obtains a virtuous world, he who knows this, yea he who knows this '
The five questions raised in V 3, 2-3 are answered
1 pracTna-sala aupamanyavah, satya-yapiah paulusih, vndra- dyumno bhattaveyah, janalt sarkaraksyah, budtla dhaiaraSviS te hy ete mdhaiala mahaSrotnyah sametya mimamsam cakrtth, ho na atma, kvm brahmeti.
1 Pracinasala Aupamanjava, Satyayajna Paulusi, Indra- dyumna Bhallaveya, JanaSarkaraksyaandBudilaASvatara^vi, these great householders, greatly learned in sacred lore, having come together, undertook an investigation as to what is our self and what is Brahman
See Satapatha Brahmana, X 6 1 1
2 te ha sampddaydmcakruh, udddlako vat bhagavanto'yam arumh sampratimam dtmdnam vaisvanaram adhyett, tarn hantabhyagacchameti, tarn habhyajagmuh
2 They then reflected among themselves, 'Venerable Sirs, Uddalaka Arum studies at present this Universal Self, well let us go to him ' Then they went over to him
3. sa Ita samp&daydmcakdra, praksyanti mam ime mahds'dld mahdkolnyah, iebhyo na sarvam iva prahpatsye, hantdham any am abhyanuSdsdmtt.
3 He then reflected, 'These great householders and greatly learned in sacred lore will question me. I shall not be able to tell them all Therefore, I shall direct them to another (teacher).'
4. tan hovdca ahapatir vat, bhagavanto, yam kaikeyah, sampratimam dtmdnwm vaiivdnaram adhyeh, tarn hantabhya- gacchamett; iam habhydjagmuJi.
4 He said to them, 'Venerable sirs, Asvapati Kaikeya studies at present this Universal Self, well, let us go to hrm.' Then they went over to him.
5 tebhyo ha prdpiebhyah prthag arhdni kdraydmcakdra, sa ltd prdtah samjihana uvaca;
na me steno janapade na kadaryo na madyapah, nandhitagnir ndvidvan, na svatn svamm kutah: yaksyamdno vat bhagavantah, aham asmt.ydvad ekaika 'sma rtvtje dhanam ddsydmt, tdvad bhagavadbhyo ddsyami, vasantu bhaga- vanla itt.
5- Then, when they answered, he (the king) had proper attentions shown to them severally. After rising the next morning, he said. 'In my kingdom there is no thief, no miser, no drunkard, no man without a sacrificial fire, no ignorant person, no adulterer, much less an adulteress.' I am going to perform a sacrifice, Venerable Sirs, and as much wealth as I
Venerabl^S* 1 sha11 ® ve to you ' pIease stay '
Aiyapah K an expert in Brahma-knowledge and also a wise admims- rator. Wisdom and work go together in him
» says that as the visitors did not accept the presents, he invited ttem to a sacrifice
6._fe hocuh, yem liavodrthena purusai caret, iam haiva vadet; br&m" emmm w&tiiMivm sampraty adhyesi, tarn eva no
m£ ^ ey said ' ,TIie Purpose for which a man comes, that SSf£* £ e skodd speak. At present, you know the Universal «M M us indeed about that.'
■bL, 1 h ° vSca ' P rSiar vah praiivaktdsmiti, ie ha samit-pdnayah *w fl ahcahmmi ™, tdn hdnupaniyaivattad uvaca 7- we then said to them, 'Tomorrow I will give you an
The Principal Upamsads
answer ' Therefore on the next morning, they approached him with fuel m their hands Then, without having first received them as pupils, he said to them
He did not insist on the preparatory rites of initiation for he was impressed by their humility fuel in their hands This is a token of discipleship
I aupamanyava, kam tvam atmanam upassa ttt divam eva bhagavo rajan, ih hovaca esa vai sutejd alma vaisvanarah yam tvam atmanam updsse, tasmdt tava sutam prasutam asutam kule drsyate
1 Aupamanyava, on what do you meditate as the self? (He replied) 'Heaven only, Venerable King ' He said, 'The self you meditate on is the Universal Self (called) the good light Therefore in your family is seen the suta libation as also the prasuta and the asuta '
The Soma hbation is given these names of suta, prasuta and asuta in the different sacrifices
The good light sobhanam tep yasya so'yam sutejd §.
Those born in the family will be devoted to work ativa karmtnas tvat-kulina tti £
2 atsy amam, paiyast pnyam, atty annam, pasyatt pnyam, bhavaty asya brahma-varcasam kule, ya etam evam atmanam vaisvanaram upaste, murdhd iv esa almanah, itt hovaca, mitrdM te vyapattsyat, yan mam ndgamtsya ih
2 You eat food, you see what is pleasing He eats food, he sees what is pleasing In the family of him who meditates on the Universal Self thus, there arises eminence in brahma- knowledge 'That, however, is only the head of the self,' said he, 'Your head would have fallen off if you had not come to me '
The development of thought is effected gradually Asvapati elicits from these seekers their conceptions of the Universal Self Their conceptions of sky, sun, air, space, water and earth are accepted as partially true The Vaiivanara self is the whole, the all-comprehend-
V.i4 1 Chdndogya Upanisai 437
inff Infinite of which natural objects and individual selves are parts. It Is wrong to identify a particular deity, one conceived as presiding over a limited part of the world, with the Universal Self.
1 ailia Itovaca satya-yajnam paulusim: prdcvna-yogya, ham tvam atmanam upassa iti: ddityam eva, bhagavo rajan, iti haaaca: esavaivi&a-rupaatma vaisvanarah, yamivam atmanam upasse, tasmat tava bahu visvariipam kuk drsyaie.
1 Then he said to Satyayajna Paulusi. Tracinayogya, on what do you meditate as the self?' (He replied) 'The sun only, Venerable King' He said, 'The self you meditate on is the Universal Self called the Universal Form. Therefore is seen in your family much and manifold (wealth).'
2 pravrtto' svatari-raiho dasi niskah, atsy annam pasyasi prtyam, atty annam, pasyati prvyam, bhavaty asya brahma-var- casam hile, ya etam evam atmanam vaisvanaram upaste, cakstis iv etad atmanak, iti hovaca andho bhavisyah, yan mam itagamisya tit
2. '(for example) there is the chariot with mules, female servants and gold necklaces You eat food, you see what is pleasing He eats food, he sees what is pleasing. In thefamily of him who meditates on the Universal Self thus, there arises eminence in brahma-knowledge. That, however, is the eye of the self,' said he, 'and you would have become blind if you had not come to me '
prmrfitv literally, a course of action, tendenc}-.
AIR As THE BREATH OF THE UNIVERSAL SELF
pj\ hwfoendra-dynmnam bhdllaveyam: vaiydghrapadya, *' almanavi upassa iti: vaymn eva, bhagavo rajan, Hi
438 The Principal Upanisads V 15 2
hovdca esa vat prthag-varlmdimd vatsvdnarah yam ivam dtmanam updsse tasmdt ivam prthag halaya ayanh, prthag rathaSrenayo' nuyanti
1 Then he said to Indra-dyumna Bhallaveya, 'Vaiyaghra- padya, on what do you meditate as the self?' (He replied) 'Air only, Venerable King ' He said, 'The self you meditate on is the Universal Self of varied courses (prthag-vartman) Therefore offerings come to you in various ways and rows of chariots follow you in various ways '
2 atsy annam, paiyast priyam, atty annam, pasyatt pnyam, bhavaty asya brahma varcasam kule, ya etam evam dtmanam vativanaram updste prdnas tv esa atmanah, ttt hovdca, prdnas ta udakramtsyat, yan mam nd'gamtsya ttt.
2 'You eat food, you see what is pleasing He eats food, he sees what is pleasing In the family of him who meditates on the Universal Self thus, there arises eminence in brahma- knowledge That, however, is only the breath of the self,' said he, 'your breath would have departed, if you had not come to me '
1 atha hovdca janam Sarkaraksya kam ivam dtmanam upassa %ti' akaiam eva bhagavo rdjan, th hovdca e$a vat bahula dtond vativanardh, yam tvam dtmanam updsse, tasmat ivam bahulo'si prajayd ca dhanena ca.
1 Then he said to Janam Sa.rkara.ksya, on what do you meditate as the self?' (He replied) 'Space only, Venerable King.' He said, 'The self you meditate on is the Universal Self called Full (brahma) Therefore you are full of off spring and wealth '
2 atsy annam, pa&yast pnyam, atty annam, paiyatt pnyam, bhavaty asya brahma-varcasam kule ya etam evam dtmanam vat&odnaram upaste samdehas tv esa atmanah, ttt hovaca samdeJias te vyasiryat, yan mam ndgamisya ttt
2 'You eat food, you see what is pleasing He eats food, he sees what is pleasing In the family of him who meditates on the Universal Self thus, there arises eminence in brahma- knowledge That, however, is only the body of the self,' said he, 'your body would have fallen off, if you had not come to me '
Chdndogya Upanisad Section 16
1. atha hovaca, budilam asvatarasvim, vaiyaghrapadya, ham ivam atmanam upassa iti, apa eva bhagavo rdjan, iti hovaca. esa vat raytr atma vaisvanarah, yam ivam atmanam upasse, iasmM team rayiman ptidiman asi.
i Then he said to Budila Asvatarasvi, 'Vaiyaghrapadya, on what do you meditate as the self?' (He replied) 'Water only, Venerable King.' He said, 'The self you meditate on is the Universal Self called wealth (rayi). Therefore are you endowed with wealth and strength of body.'
2. atsy annani, paiyasi priyam, atty annam, paiyati priyam, bkavaty asya brahmavarcasam kule ya dam evam atmamm vaisvanaram updste, basks tv esa atmanah, iti hovaca bastis te vyabhetsyata, yan mam na'gamisya iti.
2. 'You eat food, you see what is pleasing. He eats food, he sees what is pleasing. In the family of him who meditates on the Universal Self thus, there arises eminence in brahma knowledge That, however, is only the bladder of the self and your bladder would have burst if you had not come to me.'
1. atha hovaca tcddalakam arunim: gautama, ham ivam atma- mm upsssa iti: prthmm eva, bhagavo rdjan, iti hovaca- esa vai prattfthdtmd vaisvanarah yam tvam atmanam upasse, tasmdt nam prahsthito'si prajaya ca pasubhis ca.
1. Then he said to Uddalaka Arum: 'Gautama, on what do you meditate as the self?' (He replied) 'Earth only, Venerable He said, 'The self you meditate on is the Universal Self cawed support [pratistha). Therefore you are supported, with offspring and cattle.'
2 atsy annam, paiyasi priyam, atty annam paiyati priyam, -avaty asya brahma-varcasam kule ya etam evam atmanam iwfljwraw up&ste, p&dau to etdv atmanah, iti hovaca, paaau "vyamlasyetam, yan mam na'gamisya iti. '
44° The Principal Upanisads V. 18 i.
2 'You see food, you see what is pleasing He eats food, he sees what is pleasing In the family of him who meditates on the Universal Self thus there arises eminence in brahma-know- ledge That, however, is but the feet of the self,' said he, 'your feet would have withered away, if you had not come to me '
i tan hovdca ete vai khalu yuyam prthag ivemam atmanam vaiivdnaram vidvdmso'nnam attha, yas tv etam evam prade&a- mdtram abhivimanam atmanam vaiivanaram updste, sa sarvesu lokesu sarvesu bhutesu sarvesv atmasv annum ath
i Then he said to them, 'Verily indeed you eat your food knowing this Universal Self as if it were many He, however, who meditates on the Universal Self as of the measure of the span or as identical with the self, eats food in all worlds, in all beings, in all selves '
prddeia-mdtra of the measure of the span £ gives five different renderings of which the chief are (1) that which is recognised bodily through heaven as the head and the earth as the feet, (u) that which is measured by a measure extending from the heaven to the earth
The self which has assumed the shape of the whole universe is the Universal Self It is to be known as the Self of all beings One has to realise the Self m oneself before one can comprehend Him as the Self of the whole creation The individual T and the universal 'I' are one
Asmarathya teaches the meditation of Vaisvanara as prddeta- matra since the Supreme Being is specially manifested in the heart which is conceived as of the measure of a span dbhvuyakter dhnarathyah B S I 2 29
pratyag-diniataydbhiinmiyate' ham ih jndyata %ty abkimmdnah S Badan is of the view that the Supreme Being is described as of
the measure of a span since he is meditated upon by the mind,
situated in the heart which is of the measure of a span
amtsmrter badanh B S I 2 30 Jaumni holds that prddesa-mdtra is intended to teach sampatti or
sampad-updsana, 1 e the realization of the non-separation of God
from the objects of sense £ explains dhydnena dfSya-vastum paratne-
ivarasya abheda-mspaitth
abhimmdna the inner self behind the parts
V 19 2 Chdndogya Upani?ad 441
pratyag-dtmaiayd abkimmiyate aham iti vi)?iayate' It is the Universal Self in each living being The seeker should realise the divine in himself and in all beings.
2 tasya ha va etasyatmano varivdnarasya murdhavoa sutejdh, caksur viiva-rupah, prdnah prthagvartmdtmd, samdeho bahuldh, bashr eva rayih, prthvy eva pdddv ura eva veiili, lomam barhih, krdayam gdrhapatyah, mano'nvdhdrya-pacanah, dsyam aha- vanlydh
2. Of this Universal Self, the head indeed is the good light, the eye is the universal form, breath is (the air) of varied courses, the body is the full, the bladder is wealth, the feet are the earth, the chest indeed is the sacrificial area, the hair is the sacred grass, the heart is the gdrhapaiya fire, the mind is the anvdhdrya-pacana fire and the mouth is the dhavamya fire
v prthag-vartmd
The teacher corrects the wrong notions of the pupils who mistake parts for the whole even as blind men mistake parts of the elephant for the elephant hash-darfane wa jatyandhah
This passage indicates the essential correspondence between the microcosm and the macrocosm
THE SACRIFICE TO THE UNIVERSAL SELF IN ONE'S OWN SELF PRANA
1. tad yad bhaktam pratliamam dgaccliet, tad Jiomiyam, sa yam pratliamam dhutim pihuyat tarn juhuydt, firdndya svdheh, pranas trpyaii
n fl« ^i* 016 th at food which may come first should be an 'S g J* 6 fiist offe ™g he offers he should offer saying, aau to the p r &na breath ' The prdna breath is satisfied.
Md^'i'T ir ^ ail caksu s trpyah, caksusi trpyaty adityas trpyaii, cadiil ■ -li dymtS ir Py ail > dm irpyantydm yat km ca dyaui haiuM cad,nhstha ^h tat trpyah tasydmdrptim trpyah praiayd
evehp,n!^f ! f breath bein g sained, the eye is satisfied The Y Dem g satisfied, the sun is satisfied The sun being satisfied,
44 z The Principal Upamsads V. 21. 2
the heaven is satisfied. The heaven being satisfied, whateveC is under the heaven and under the sun is satisfied Along witt" the satisfaction thereof, he himself is satisfied with offspring; with cattle, with food (health born of food), brightness and with eminence in sacred knowledge
1 atha yam dvitiyam juhuyat tarn juhuyat, vydndya svaheti, vyanas trpyati.
x. Then the second offering he should offer, saying, 'Hail to the vyana breath ' The vyana breath is satisfied
2. vydne trpyah srotram trpyati, srotre trpyati candramds trpyati, candramasi trpyati disas trpyanh, diksu trpyantisu yat him ca di&ai ca candramdi cddhitisthanti, tat trpyati, tasyanu-trptim trpyati prajaya paiubhir annddyena tejasa brakma-varcasena
2 Vyana being satisfied, the ear is satisfied The ear being satisfied, the moon is satisfied The moon being satisfied, the quarters are satisfied The quarters bemg satisfied, whatever is under the quarters and under the moon is satisfied Along with the satisfaction thereof he himself is satisfied with off- spring, with cattle, with food, with brightness and with eminence in sacred knowledge
1 atha yam trtiyam juhuyat tarn juhuyat, apanaya svaheti, apdnas trpyati
1 Then the third offering he should offer, saying, 'Hail to the apana breath ' The apana breath is satisfied
2. apane trpyati vak trpyati, vaci trpyantydm agnts trpyati, agttau trpyati prthtvT trpyati, prthivyam trpyantydm yat km ca prthtvt cdgms cddhiti?thatah tat trpyati, tasyanu-trptim trpyati prajaya paiubhir annddyena tejasa brahma-varcasena.
V 23 2 - Ckandogya Upamsad 443
2. Apdna being satisfied, speech is satisfied Speech being satisfied, the fire is satisfied The fire being satisfied, the earth is satisfied The earth being satisfied, whatever is under the earth and the fire is satisfied. Along with the satisfaction thereof, he himself is satisfied with offspring, with cattle, with food, with brightness and with eminence in sacred knowledge.
1 atha yam caturtliim pihuyat tarn juhuydt samanaya svdheti samanas Irpyah.
1 Then the fourth offering he should offer, saying, 'Hail to the samdna breath ' The samdna breath is satisfied
2. samdne trpyati manas trpyah, manasi trpyati parjanyas irpyah, parjanye trpyati miyitt trpyati, vidyutt trpyantyath yat kim ca vidyitc ca parjanyas cadhitisthatah, tat trpyati tasydnu- trptim trpyati prajayd paiubhir annddyena Ujasd brahma-var- casena
2. Samdna being satisfied, the mind is satisfied The mind being satisfied, the rain god is satisfied The rain god being satisfied, lightning is satisfied. Lightning bemg satisfied, what- ever is under the lightning and the rain god is satisfied Along with the satisfaction thereof, he himself is satisfied with offspring, with cattle, with food, with brightness and with eminence in sacred knowledge.
1 alliayam pancamim juhuydt tarn juhuydt uddndya svdheti uaanas trpyati. '
T? en * he Mth off ering he should offer, saying, 'Hail to the udava breath ' The uddna breath is satisfied
2 udanc trpyati tvak trpyati, tvaci trpyantyath vdyus trpyati,
444 The Principal Upantsads V 24 4.
vayau trpyaty akaias trpyati, dkdse trpyati yat kim ca vdyus cdkasas cddhitisthatah, tat trpyah, tasydnu-trptim trpyati prajayd paiubhir annddyena tejasd brahma-varcasena
2 Uddna being satisfied, the skin is satisfied The skin being satisfied, the air is satisfied The air being satisfied, space is satisfied Space being satisfied, whatever is under the air and space is satisfied Along with the satisfaction thereof, he himself is satisfied with offspring, with cattle, with food, with brightness and with eminence m sacred knowledge
1 say a idam avidvdn agni-hotramjuhoti, yathdngdrdn apohya bhasmam juhuyat, tadrk tat sydt
1 If, without knowing this, one offers the fire sacrifice, that would be just as if he were to remove the live coals and pour the offering on (dead) ashes
2 atJta ya etad evam vidvdn agm-kotram juhoti, tasya sarvesu lokesu sarvesu bhutesu sarvesv dtmasu htitam bhavah
2 But if, knowing it thus, one offers the fire sacrifice he offers it in all worlds, in all bemgs, m all selves, he will perform sacrifices with a full knowledge of their meaning and purpose
3 tad yaihesikd-tulam agnau protam praduyeta, evam hdsya sarve pdpmdnah praduyante, ya etad evam mdvdn agm-Jwtram jukoti
3 Even as the soft fibres of the isika reed are burned up when laid on a fire, so also are burned up the evils of one who knowing it thus offers the fire sacrifice
4 tasmdd u haivamvid yady apt canddldyocchistam prayacchet, dtmam haivdsya tad vaisvdnare hutam sydd tit, tad esa ilokah
4 Therefore if one who knows this should offer the remnant of his food to a Candala, it would be offered m his Universal Self On this there is the following verse
Candala is symbolic of those who do not deserve the offer anarka $5 One is released from the observance of restrictions when one has
Chandogya Upanisad
attained knowledge that the one Self dwells in all One offers it to the Universal Self dwelling in the body of the Candida: candala-de- hasthe vatsvamre §. The whole system of caste and untouchabihty is undermined by the perception of the Indwelling Self in all
5 yathailia ksudhita baldh mdtaram paryupdsate evam sar- vam Vhutany agm-hotram upasate ity agm-hotram upasata itt
5 As here hungry children sit (expectantly) around their mother, even so do all beings sit around the fire sacrifice, yea they sit around the fire sacrifice
The Principal Upamsads
UDDALAKA'S TEACHING CONCERNING THE ONENESS OF THE SELF
1. aum svetaketur hd'runeya dsa, tarn ha pitovdca ivetaketo, vasa brahmacaryam, no. vai, saumya, asmairkulino'nanucya brahma-bandhur iva bhavatih
1 Aum There was Svetaketu Aruneya His father said to him, 'Live the life of religious student, venly, my dear, there is no one in our family who is unlearned (m the Vedas), who is a Brahmana only by birth '
aruneya arunasya pautrak grandson of Aruna § bralima-bandhuh he who cans Brahmanas his relatives but does not himself behave like a Brahmana brahmaniin bandhUn vyapadiiait na svayam brdhmana-vrlta ih S
2 sa ha dvadaia-varsa upetya caturvimsah varsah sarvan veddn adhitya mahdmana anucdna-mdm siabdJia evdya, tarn ha pitovdca, svetaketo, yan mt saumya idam mahdmana anucdna- mdm stabdho'si uia tam ddefam aprdksyah
2 He then, having become a pupil at the age of twelve, returned when he was twenty-four years of age, having studied all the Vedas, greatly conceited, thinking himself well read,
<■ arrogant His father then said to him, 'Svetaketu, since you are" now so greatly conceited, think yourself well read and arrogant, did you ask for that instruction
3 yendsrutam iniiam bhavati, amatam maiam, aviptdtam vijMtam %ii katham mi, bhagavah, sa ddeio bhavattti
3 By which the unbearable becomes heard, the unper- ceivable becomes perceived, the unknowable becomes known?' 'How, Venerable Sir, can there be such teaching?'
All learning is useless unless one knows the truth with regard^ to the Self sarvan apt veddn adhltya sarvam cany ad vedyam adhigamyapy dkrtdrtha eva bhavati yavad atmatattvam na jdnah 5
4 yatM, saumya, ekena mrt-pindena sarvam mrnmayam vipidtam sydt, vdcdrambhanam vikdro ndma-dheyam, tnrttikety eva satyam ,
4 Just as, my dear, by one clod of clay all that is made 01
Chdndogya Upanisad
clay becomes known, the modification being only a name arising from speech while the truth is that it is just clay.
vikara modification, manifestation, development, change S" suggests that the change is only nominal, vag-alambana-malram tiamatva kevalam «a mkaro nama vastv ash, faramdrthato mrttikety eva mrth- kaxva Ui satyam vastv ash S. The Upanisad suggests that all modi- fications are based on the reality of clay and not that change rests simply on a word, that it is a mere name.
5 yatM, saumya, ekem lolm-manina sarvam lohamayath vipiatam syat, vacdrambhanam vika.ro nama-dheyam lohamtty eva satyam £ ^
5. Just as, my dear, by one nugget of gold, all that is made of gold becomes known, the modification being only a name arising from speech, while the truth is that it is just gold.
by one nugget of gold suvarna-pindena. S loha originally meant iron or copper but later is used for gold or any metal
6. yathd, saumya, ekena naklia-mkrntanena sarvam kdrsndya- sam vtjnatam syat, vacdrambhanam vikdro nama-dheyam krsnd- yasam tty eva satyam, evam, saumya, sa dde&o bhavatlh
6 Just as, my dear, by one pair of nail scissors all that is made of iron becomes known, the modification bemg only a name arising from speech while the truth is that it is just iron: thus, my dear, is that teaching.
7 11a vat nttnam b)iagavantas ta etad avedisuh, yadd hy etad avedtsyan, katham me navaksyan iii bhagavams tv eva me tad bravTiv xtx, tatha, saumya, ih hovdca
7. 'Verily, those venerable men did not know this; for if they had known it, why would they not have told it to me? Venerable Sir, please tell me that/ *So be it, my dear/ said he.
1 sad eva, saumya, idam agra dsH ekam evaditiyam, laid haika ««K«, asad evedam agra asU ekam evddvitiyam, tasmdd asatah saj jayata '
44^ The Principal Upamsads VI 2 2
only without a second Some people say 'm the beginning this was non-being alone, one only, without a second From that non-being, being was produced ' sad being
eva without any limitation or upddhi
tdam this, the universe of name and form, the world of manifesta- tion Prior to manifestation this world was pure being One only without a second There is no second to it There is no other object than being ndsya dvitlyam vaslv antaram vidyata tty adviliyam S"SeeTU II 7, CU III 19 1
The logical priority of Brahman to the world is brought out by the statement that Being alone was this in the beginning
See Maitrl, VI 17
Cp. Pancadaii, I 19
tdam sarvam purd sysfer ekam evadmtiyakam sad evasin ndma-riipe nastdm Hi aruner vacah
'Previous to creation all this was being, one only without a second Name and form were not this is the statement of the son of Aruna '
He does not have 'being' as other things have being He is his own being Being is, is God Being is above all conceptions and conceptual differentiations It is prior to all things All other things are from being, live in it and end in it What is other than being is nothing
According to Indian logic, there are four lands of non-existence or abhava There is absolute non-existence or alyantabhava anything self-contradictory like the barren woman's son, vandhyaptttra, is inconceivable and impossible Barrenness and motherhood contra- dict each other The real excludes self-contradictory non-existence When non-being or asat is said to be the root of existence, asat does not mean absolute non-existence but only prior or antecedent non-existence or prag-abhava or potential existence The world is non-existent before its production It was existent potentially or as a possibility though not as an actuality Creation is not out of absolute non-existence but out of prior non-existence or the world of possibility This type of non-existence has no beginning but has an end when the possibility is actuahsed pradhvamsabhava is posterior non-existence It is the opposite of pnor non-existence It has a beginning but no end When a jar is destroyed, its non-existence begins at the tune it is destroyed, but it has no end The mutual exclusiveness of a jar and a cloth, the fact of difference, is indicated by anyonyabliava A is not B A jar is not a cloth See Annambhatta's Tarka-samgralia 3
z kutas tit khalu, sattmya, evam syat, iti hovaca, katham, asatah sajjdyeteh, sat tv eva, saumya, idam agra dsld ekam evadvitiyam
VI z. 4. Chandogya Upanisad 449
2. But how, indeed, my dear, could it be thus? said he, how could being be produced from non-being? On the contrary, my dear, in the beginning this was being alone, one only, without a second
A suggests that thorn excludes sajaiiya and svagala blieda and advitiyam excludes vijdtiya bhcda Cp Pancadail
vrksasya svagata-bhedah patra-piispa-phaladibJiik vrksaittarat sa.ja.tlyo mjatiydk hladitah II, 20. Svagata-bheda is internal difference of a tree from its leaves, flowers and fruits Saptlya difference is that of one tree from other trees Vxjatlya is the difference of a tree from rock, etc Brahman is devoid of all these three kinds of difference
3 iad aiksata, baku syam prajayeyeti, tat iejo'srjata- iat teja atksata, balm syam prajdyeyeti, tad apo'srjata, tasmdd yatra kva ca hcatt svedaie va purusah, tejasa eva Ud adhy apo jayante.
3. It thought, May I be many, may I grow forth. It sent forth fire That fire thought, May I be many, may I grow forth. It sent forth water. Therefore, whenever a person grieves or perspires, water is produced from the fire (heat).
aiksata thought literally saw This word indicates that pure being is conscious The reference in all such passages is not to the elements as such, but to the presiding deities
abhxmamnyah utmSk devaiak SB II 1 5 g also says that the Highest Lord abiding as the selves of the various elements, produces by his power of thought, the different effects: proauces pBTamOvara em tern Una dtmattd avahsihamanah abhidhyayan tarn tarn vikaram srjate SB II 3 13 " «"»
product* Upani5ads ' space ' ^ ^ fire are mentioned as successive ? f^ests has no eye to the order of creation for it is Being d m maldng ° Ut ttat 331 eSects «* denved fror!
E, T'' !ad y aim ^ a c « mrsati, tad am bhiiyistkmn annam bliavat^ adbkya cva tad adhy anrtadyam jayaie.
nin?f Iw^^ 1 *' XIa >" 1 be man £ ™y I grow forth
45°
The Principal Upani$ads
I 1c$iim khalv csam bhutfindm irhiy cva bijam bhavanh, andajam, jivajam, iidbfnjjam ill
1 Now of these (living) beings there arc only three origins, those born from an egg, born from a living being, born from a sprout.
In A U a fourth svedaja 'born from heat' is mentioned in addition to the three mentioned here Cp Atharva Veda, I iz 1
2 scyam devatatksata, hantdham wtas ttsro devata ancna jivend 'Imand'mtpraviSya nama-rupc vydkaravantti
2 That divinity thought, 'Well, let me enter into these three divinities by means of this living self and let me then develop names and forms
devata — literally divinity It means being By the union of sat or Being with the three elements of fire, water and earth, all the vaned manifestations of the world are produced In relation to the three elements which are called devatds, sat is called para devata, highest being Sal is primary being Tcjas is its first product Out of tejas water is produced, and out of water food Sat pene- trates into these three as their inner soul, and by mixing them up makes each of them threefold The red colour of fire is the colour of tejas, the white of Upas and the black of anna the three are the truth and their differentiations are denved from vac, vacarambhanam So long as vac does not differentiate, the three colours form a unity M Senart thinks that the three rilpas are de- rived from the three cosmic spheres. £ argues that this development does not affect the Absolute Reality He points out that the modi- fications of the world are real in so far as they participate in the nature of absolute reality and unreal in themselves sarvam ca ««»:«- riipadi sadalmanaiva saiyam vikdra-jdtam svatastv anrtam eva S Again, sadatmana sarva-vyavahardndni sarva-vikdrdndm ca satyatvam sato'nyatve canftalvam S
3 tasam tnvrlam trivrtam ekaikdm karavdnitt , scyam devatemds ttsro devata anenatva fivend'tmand'nupravis'ya nama-rupc vyd- karot
3 'Let me make each one of the three threefold' The divinity entered into those three divinities by means of the living self and developed names and forms
4 tasam tnvrlam tnvrtam ekaikdm akarot, yatkd tit khalu
VI 4 4 Chdndogya TJpanisad 45 1
saumya, imds tisro devatds irivrt trivrd ekaikd bliavati, tan me
vijamhiti. , , „ .,
4 It made each of these threefold and how these three divinities become each of them threefold, that learn from me now, my dear.
THREEFOLD DEVELOPMENT— continued
1. yad eigne rohitam rupam iejasas tad rupam, yac chukiam lad apam, yat krsnam tad annasya apagad agner agnilvam, vdcdrambJianam vikdro nama-dheyam, trini rupdiuty eva satyam.
1 Whatever red form fire has it is the form of heat, whatever (is) white (is the form) of water. Whatever (is) dark (it is the form of) earth Thus vanishes the quality of fire from fire, the modification being only a name arising from speech while the truth is that it is only the three forms
2. yad ddityasya rohitam rupam tejasas tad rupam, yac chukiam tad apam, yat krsnam tad annasya. apagad adityad adiiyatvam, vdcarambhanam vikdro nama-dheyam, tniii mpatyity eva satyam
2 Whatever red form the sun has it is the form of heat, whatever (is) white (it is the form) of water Whatever (is) dark (it is the form) of earth. Thus vanishes the quality of the sun from the sun, the modification being only a name arising from speech while the truth is that it is only the three forms.
3 yac candramaso rohitam rupam tejasas tad rupam, yac chukiam tad apam, yat krsnam tad annasya apdgdc candrac candralvam, vdcdrambhanam vikdro nama-dheyam, trini rupdmty eva satyam
3 Whatever red form the moon has it is the form of heat, whatever (is) white (it is the form) of water. Whatever (is)dark (it is the form) of earth. Thus vanishes the quality of the moon from the moon, the modification being only a name arising from speech while the truth is that it is only the three forms
4 yad vidyuto rohitam rupam tejasas fad rupam, yac chukiam tad apam, yat krsnam tad annasya. apagad vidyuto vidyuivam, vdcdrambhanam vikdro xdma-dhcyam, trim rupdnity eva satyam.
The Principal Upamsads VI. 4. 7.
4. Whatever red form the lightning has it is the form of heat, whatever (is) white, (it is the form) of water Whatever (is) dark (it is the form) of earth Thus vanishes the quality of lightning from the lightning, the modification being only a name arising from speech, while the truth is that it is only the three forms
All things are ultimately modifications of pure being saruasya sad vikaratvat £ The primordial being becomes three deities, fire, water and earth The doctrine of trwrt-karana, by which each of the three original elements, fire, water and earth is to be regarded as being divided into two equal portions, of which one half is kept intact and the other half is divided into two equal parts, the two quarters of the two other elements in combination with the one half of the original element This view is the basis of the doctrine of panakarana of the later Vedanta Anaxagoras affirms that there is a portion of everything in everything
The three colours are taken over by the Sdmkhya system to corre- spond to the three gunas, sattva, rajas and tamos
5 etadd ha sma vat tad vidvdmsa ahuh purve mahdsdld maha- srotnydh na no'dya kascana a&rutam, amaiam, avijMtam, udaha- nsyatiti hy ebhyo vidamcakruh
5 Verily it was just this that the great householders and great students of sacred wisdom knew when they said of old 'no one now will mention to us what we have not heard, what we have not perceived, what we have not thought ' For from these (three forms) they knew everything
6 yad u rohxtam ivabhud iti tejasas tad riipam iti tad vxdam cakruh, yad u iuklam ivabhud ity apdm riipam tit tad vxdam cakruh, yad u krsnam ivabhud ity annasya riipam itt tad vxdam cakruh
6 They knew that whatever appeared red was of the form of heat, they knew that whatever appeared white was of the form of water, they knew that whatever appeared dark was of the form of earth
7 yad avipiatam ivabhud ity etdsdm eva devaianam samdsah, ih tad vidamcakruh, yatkd nu khalu, saumya, imas tisro devatdh purusam prapya tnvrt irivrd ekatkd bhavati, tan me vijdnihtti
7 They knew that whatever appeared unintelligible is a combination of just these three divinities Venly, my dear, learn from me how each of these three divinities when they reach the human, becomes threefold.
CMndogya Upantsad
I annam aiitam tredha. indhiyate, tasya yah sthavistho dhatus tat purlsam bhavah, yo madhyamas tan mamsam, yo'mstJtas tan manah
i Food when eaten becomes threefold, its coarsest portion becomes the faeces; its middle (portion) flesh and its subtlest (portion) mmd
§ argues that mmd being fed by food is material, elemental and not impartible and eternal
annopacttalvdn manaso bhautikalvam eva, na vaUesika-tantrok- Maksanam nityaih mravayavam cell gyhyate.
2. apahpTtas tredha mdhiyante, tasdmyah stJiavistho dhatus tan miiiram bltavati, yo madhyamas tal lohtam, yo'nisthah sa prdnah.
2. Water when drunk becomes threefold, its coarsest portion becomes the urine; its middle (portion) the blood, its subtlest (portion) the breath
3 Heat when eaten becomes threefold, its coarsest portion becomes bone, its middle (portion) marrow, its subtlest (portion} speech '
Matatan heat ' m the ShapC ° f < " 1 ' butter ' etc S: toila-ghrtMt-
4 annamayam hi, samnya, manah, dpomayah prdnah teio- mayi vag ih, bhiiya eva ma bhagavan mjMpayatv tit; taiha saumya, iti hovaca. r J
jL^^ my d l ar ' COnsists of food ' bre *th consists of water and speech consists of heat 'Please, Venerable Sir instruct me still more ' So be it, my dear, said ba '
Everything is threefold and so all the three elements exist in everything scrvasya invrLhrta-lvat sarvatra sarvopap™eh%
454 The Principal Upamsads VI. 7. 2.
ILLUSTRATIONS— continued
1 dadhnah, saumya, mathyamanasya yo'mma, sa urdhvah samudisati, tat sarpir bhavati
2 evam eva kJialu, saumya, annasydiyamanasya yo'mma, sa urdhvah samudisati, tan mano bhavati
2 In the same manner, my dear, of the food that is eaten, that which is subtle moves upwards, it becomes mind
3 apam, saumya, piyamandnam yo'mma, sa urdhvah samu- disati, sa prano bhavati
3 Of the water, my dear, that is drunk, that which is subtle moves upwards, it becomes breath
4 tejasah saumya aSyamdnasya yo'mma, sa urdhvah samu- disati, sa vag bhavati
4 Of the heat, my dear, that is eaten, that which is subtle moves upwards, it becomes speech
5 annamayam hi, saumya, manah, apomayah pranah, tejomayi vag iti bhuya eva ma, bhagavan, vijndpayatv itt, tatha, saumya, itt hovaca.
5 Thus, my dear, mind consists of food, breath consists of water, speech consists of heat 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still more ' So be it, my dear, said he
IMPORTANCE OF PHYSICAL NEEDS 1 sodas'a-kalah,saumya,punisah,pafKafas'ahamvia'£ih,kamam apah piba, apomayah prano na pibato vicchetsyata tit
1 A person, my dear, consists of sixteen parts For fifteen days do not eat (any food), drink water at (your) will Breath which consists of water will not be cut off from one who dnnks water
2 sa ha pancadaSaham nd'sa atha hamam upasasada, kirn
bravlmi bho iti, rcah, saumya, yajums% sdmdniti, sa hovaca, na vai ma pratibhdnh bho %ti.
2. Then for fifteen days he did not eat (any food) , and then he approached him saying, 'What, sir, shall I say? ! 'The Rg. verses, my dear, the Yajus formulas and the Saman chants ' He replied, 'They do not occur to me, Sir '
3. tarn hovaca, yatha, saumya, mahato'bhydhitasyaiko'ngdrah kliadyota-mdirahpaniistah syat, tena tato'pt na balm dahet, evam, saumya, te sodaidndm kalanam eku kald'hhstd syat, tayaitarht veian nanubhavasi, aidna, aiha me vy/ndsyasiti
3 He said to him, 'Just as, my dear, of a great lighted fire, a single coal of the size of a firefly may be left which would not thereafter burn much, even so, my dear, of your sixteen parts only one part is left and so with it you do not apprehend (remember) the Vedas Eat Then you will understand me '
4 sa hd'ia, atha hainam upasasada, tarn ha yat kim ca papraccJta sarvam ha prattpede
4 Then he ate and approached him (his father) Then what- soever he asked him, he answered it all
5_ tarn hovaca, yatha, saumya, mahato'bhydhitasyatkam angaram khadyota-mdtram panitstam tarn irnair upasamddhdya prapalayet, iena tato'pi bahu dahet.
5- To him he then said, 'Just as, my dear, of a great lighted fire if a single coal of the size of a firefly is left, and made to blaze up by covering it with straw and with it the fire would thereafter burn much
_6. evam, saumya, te sodaidndm kalanam ekd kald'hs'istd'bhut, sa nnenopasainahita prdjvdUt, tayd etarhi veddn anubltavasi anna mayam hi, saumya, manah, dpomayah prdnah, tejomayi vdg m tadi hdsya vijajndv iti
6 So, my dear, of your sixteen parts only one part was left and that, when covered with food, blazed up With it you now apprehend the Vedas For, my dear, the mind consists of food tne breath consists of water and speech consists of heat. Then he understood what he said; he understood it
In some texts the following verse is found.
panccndnyasya purusasyayad eva syad anavrtam
tad asya prajnd sravah dfUh psdad ivodakam When the (mind of the) person consisting of the five senses « not
456 The Principal Upantsads VI 8. z
supported by food, then his intelligence goes away, even as the •water flows away from the mouth of a leathern bag ' anavffanr unprotected, uncovered by food
i. uddalako hdrunih svetaketuth putram uvaca, svapnantam me, saumya, vijamhlh, yatraiiat purusah svapih ndma, sata, saumya, tada sampanno bhavati, svam apTto bhavah, tasmdd emm svapitity dcaksaie, svam hy apTto bhavati
1. Then Uddalaka Aruni said to his son, Svetaketu, Learn from me, my dear, the true nature of sleep When a person here sleeps, as it is called, then, nry dear, he has reached pure being He has gone to his own Therefore they say he sleeps for he has gone to his own
svapnanla true nature of sleep, literally the end of the dream S interprets it as the central portion of the dream vision : svapnantam svapna-madhyam susuptam S In the condition of deep sleep, personal consciousness subsides and the self is said to be absorbed in the Highest Self Speech, mind and the senses rest. Only the breath is active The jiva, the living soul returns for a while to the deeper self in order to recover from the fatigue
In dreamless sleep, buddht or understanding remains in a potential condition and becomes active in the dream and waking states SB II 3 3*-
2 sa yaiha sakumh siitrena prabaddho dtsam diiam pati- ivanyatrdyatanam alabdhvd bandhanam evopasrayaU, evam eva khalu, saumya, tan mano ditam disam patitvdnyatrayatanam alabdhvd pranam evopasrayate, prana-bandhanam hi, saumya, mana iti.
2. Just as a bird tied by a string, after flying in various directions without rinding a resting-place elsewhere settles down (at last) at the place where it is bound, so also the mind, my dear, after flying in various directions without finding a resting- place elsewhere settles down in breath, for the mind, my dear, is bound to breath
The organic nature of the relationship between mind and life is
brought out here. The mental, while it transcends the vital, arises out of the vital and is rooted m it
3 aSand-pipdse me, saumya, vijdmhih,yatra%tatpuruso ahsisati nama, apa eva tad aiitam myante tad yathd gondyo'ivandyah furusanaya tti, evam tad apa dcaksate's'andyett, tatrattacchungam utpahtam, saumya, vijamhi, nedam amulam bhamsyatth.
3. Learn from me, my dear, what hunger and thirst are. When a person here is hungry, as it is called, water only is leading (carrying away) what has been eaten (by him). So as they speak of a leader of cows, a leader of horses, a leader of men, so they speak of water as the leader (or carrier of food). On this, my dear, understand that this (body) is an offshoot which has sprung up, for it could not be without a root
The person is hungry because whatever he eats is quickly digested.
4. tasya kva mulam sydd attyatrdnndt, evam eva khalu, saumya, annena sungendpo mulam anvtccha, adbhih, saumya, sungena tejo mulam anvtccha, tejasd, saumya, sungena san mulam anvtccha, san mul&h, saumya, vmah sarvah prajdh sad-dyatandh, sat- prattsthdh
4. And what else could its root be than food? And in the same manner, my dear, with food as an offshoot, seek for water as the root, with water, my dear, as an offshoot, seek for heat as the root; with heat, my dear, as an offshoot, seek for Being as its root All these creatures, my dear, have their root in Being. They have Being as their abode, Being as their support
Being is the ultimate root of the whole universe.
5 ai)ia yatraitat purusah ptpdsati noma, teja eva tat pttam nayate, tad yathd gondyo'svandyah purusanaya tti, evam tat teja "casta udanyett, tatraitad eva iungam utpahtam, saumya, midnthi nedam amiilam bhavisyattti.
5 Now when a person here is thirsty, as it is called, heat only is leading (or carrying off) what has been drunk (by him), ao as they speak of a leader of cows, a leader of horses, a leader w men so one speaks of heat as the leader of water. On this «y dear, understand that this (body) is an offshoot which has s Pnmg up, for it could not be without a root.
6 tasya ha mulam sydd anyatra adbhyah, adbhh, saumya, - T J ° am mmccha > teJM". saumya, sungena san mulam
"nnccna; san muld/t, saumya, tmdh sarvdh prajdh saddyatandh
458 The Principal Upanisads VI 8 7
satprattsthah, yatha mi khalu, saumya, tmas tisro devatdh purusam prdpya tnvrt trivrdekaxka bliavah, tad uktam, purastad eva bhavaii, asya, saumya, pw usasya prayato van manasi sampadyate, vianah prdne, pranas tejast, tejah parasyam devatdydm
6 And what else could its root be than water? With water, my dear, as an offshoot, seek for heat as the root, with heat, my dear, as an offshoot, seek for Being as the root All these creatures, my dear, have their root in Being They have Being as their abode, Being as their support But how, venly, my dear, each of these three divinities, on reaching the human, becomes threefold has already been said 1 When, my dear, a person departs from hence, his speech merges in his mind, his mmd on his breath, his breath in heat and heat in the highest divinity
From Pure Being arises fire, from fire water and from water earth In speech the element of fire predominates, in life-breath the element of water, in mind the element of earth When a person deceases, his speech is merged in the mmd His voice fails though his mind continues to function When the mmd merges in life, the mental activity ceases When life merges m heat, when we are in doubt about a man's condition, whether he is alive or dead, we feel the body If it is warm, he is alive, if not he is dead Fire is then taken up in the highest Being If we depart from this life with our thoughts merged in the Supreme we reach Pure Being, otherwise, we enter the world of becoming
f 7. sa ya eso'mmd aitad aimyam tdam sarvam, tat satyam, sa 1 I aima tat tvam asi, svetaketo, iti, bhiiya eva ma, bhagavan, l vijnapayatv tit, tatha, saumya, iti liovaca
7. That which is the subtle essence (the root of all) this whole world has for its self That is the true That is the self That art thou, Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further.' 'So be it, my dear,' said he
tat tvam asi that art thou This famous text emphasises the divine nature of the human soul, the need to discriminate between the essential self and the accidents with which it is confused and the fetters by which it is bound He who knows only what is of the body or mmd knows the things that may be his but not himsell The text That art thou' applies to the inward person, antah ptirusa, and not to the empirical soul with its name and family descent V 'What I am, that is be, what he is, that am I '
See Aitareya Aranyaka, II 2 4 6
1 VI 5 1-4
yi, g 2 Chdndogya Upanisad 459
ja6<& Up has the following: tvath va aham asmi bhagavo deaate ate va ivam asi. 'I am thou, 0 great God, and thou art I.'
R interprets tat tvam asi as affirming that the principle of God is common to both the universe and the individual. That means God having the entire universe-as his body, thou means God having the individual soul as his body. The principle of God is common to both
In the Jaiminiya Upanisad Brdhmana (III. 14. 1-5) when the deceased reaches the Sun-door, the question is asked, "Who art thou' If he answers by a personal or a family name, he is subject to the law of karma If he responds 'Who I am (is) the light thou (art). As such have I come to thee, the heavenly light/ Prajd-pati replies: 'Who thou art, that same am I; who I am that same art thou. Enter in '
Rami speaks to us of the man who knocked at his friend's door and was asked, "Who art thou?' He answered 'I.' 'Begone/ said his fnend. After a year's suffering and separation he came and knocked again, and when asked the same question, replied, 'It is Thou art at the door,' and received the reply, 'Since thou art I, come in, 0 myself.' Mathnavi, 1. 3056-3065
1 yat.ha,saumya,madhu madhukrto nististhanti, ndndtyaydndm Wjflnam rasan samavaharam ekaiarii rasarh gamayanti. , 1 as » my dear, the bees prepare honey by collecting we essences (juices) of different trees and reducing them into one essence
The son's difficulty is anticipated. If creatures reach Pure Being every day when they fall into sleep, how is it that they do not know "at ttey attain that condition every day?
ras ' k ia * ra m "MMkath labkanie, amusyaham vrhsasya iv 7 mi ' a ™ tls y°ham wfoasya rasosmtti, evam eva hhalu, satmya, iU a 1 sm * fl prajah sati sampadya na viduh, sati sampadydmaha
tHm"^ ^ e ^ ces ) possess no discrimination (so that of that * S ^ * 3111 essence of this tree, I am the essence though ft'' even so ' ™ deed > m y dear, all these creatures th«B=in IeaCh Beins do not know ^ they iave reacIied
The Principal Upanisads
3 ta tha vyaghro va sithho va vrko va varaho va ktto va patango va damio va ma&ako vayadyad bhavanti, tad abhavantt
3 Whatever they are in this world, tiger or lion or wolf or boar or worm or fly or gnat or mosquito, that they become
In other words, as they reach Pure Being without being conscious of it they return to then - special forms
4 sa ya eso'nvma attaddtmyam idam saroam, tat saiyam, sa dtmd, tat tvam ast, ivetaketo, it\, bhuya eva ma, bhagavan, vijM- payatv ttt, tathd, saumya, iti hovaca
4 That which is the subtle essence, this whole world has for its self That is the true That is the self That art thou, Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further.' 'So be it, my dear/ said he
THE INDWELLING SPIRIT— continued
1 vmah, saumya, nadyah purastat pracyah syandante, paicdt prancyah tah samudral samudram ev&ptyantt, sa samudra eva bhavati, tdyathd tatra na viduh, %yatn aham astm, lyam aham asmiti
1 These rivers, my dear, flow the eastern toward the east, the western toward the west They go just from sea to sea. They become the sea itself Just as these rivers while there do not know 'I am this one,' 'I am that one '
from sea to sea the clouds lift up the water from the sea to the sky and send it back as rain to the sea
2 evani eva khalu, saumya, imah sarvah prajah sata agamy a na viduh, sata agacchamaha iti, ta tha vyaghro va simho va, vrko va, varaho va, klto va, patango va, ddmio va, masako va.yadyad bhavanti tad abhavanh
2 In the same manner, my dear, all these creatures even though they have come forth from Being do not know that 'we have come forth from Being ' Whatever they are in this world, tiger or lion or wolf or boar or worm or fly or gnat or mosquito that they become
3 sa eso'nvma aitad atmyam idam saroam, tat saiyam, sa atma,
tat tvam asi, svetaketo, iti; bhuya eva ma, bhagavan, vijndpayatv tti; tatM, saumya, itt hovaca.
3. That which is the subtle essence, this whole world has for its self. That is the true. That is the self. That art thou, Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further.' 'So be it, my dear,' said he.
Sect%on 11
THE INDWELLING SPIRIT— continued
1. asya, saumya, mahato vrksasya yo mule'bhydhanydt, jivan sravet; yo madhye'bhydhanydt, jivan sravet yo'gre'bhyahanydt, fivan sravet sa esa jivend'tmandnuprabhutah pepiyatndno modamdnas ttsthati.
1 Of this mighty tree, my dear, if someone should strike at the root it would bleed but still live if someone should strike at the middle, it would bleed but still live If someone should strike at the top, it would bleed but still live. Being pervaded by its living self, it stands firm, drinking in its moisture (which nourishes it) and rejoicing.
2. asyayad ekdm idkhdm jivo jahdtt, atha sa iusyatt, dvitiyam jahah, atha sd Susyatt, trtlydm jahatt, atha sa iusyah, sarvam jdhdti sarvah iusyah, evam eva khalu, saumya, viddhi tti hovaca.
2. If the life leaves one branch of it, then it dries up; if it leaves a second, then that dries up; if it leaves a third, then that dries up If it leaves the whole, the whole dries up Even so, indeed, my dear, understand,' said he
According to this view trees are not insentient cetanavatitah sthavarah S
3 fivdpetam vdva kiledam mrtyate, 11a poo mnyata tti, sa ya «?o nvma attad dimyam idam sarvam, tat satyam, sa dtmd, tat warn ast, hetdketo, iti, bhuya eva ma, bhagavan, vijndpayatv itt, tafha, saumya, itt hovaca
?• y^dy, indeed, this body dies, when deprived of the living self, the living self does not die That which is the subtle "ssence this whole world has for its self. That is the true. That I s ™ self. That art thou, Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further.' 'So be it, my dear,' said he
The Principal Upantsads VI 13 1
1 nyagt odha-phalam ata dharet, tdam, bhagavah, ttt, bhtnddhiti, bhinnam, bhagavah, iti, kim atra pasyasiti, anvya tvemd dhanah, bhagavah, iti, dsdm angatkdm bhtnddhiti; bhtnnd, bhagavah, iti; kim atra paiyasitt, na kim cana, bhagavah, iti
1 'Bring hither a fruit of that nyagrodha tree ' 'Here it is, Venerable Sir ' 'Break it ' 'It is broken, Venerable Sir ' 'What do you see there?' 'These extremely fine seeds, Venerable Sir ' 'Of these, please break one ' 'It is broken, Venerable Sir ' 'What do you see there ^ 'Nothing at all, Venerable Sir '
The teacher explains how the world which has name and form arises from Pure Being which is subtle and does not possess name and form
2 tarn hovaca yam vat, saumya, etam anvmanam na mbhalayase, etasya vai, saumya, eso'nwina evam mahan nyagrodhas tisthatt irddhatsva, saumya
2 Then he said to him, 'My dear, that subtle essence which you do not perceive, verily, my dear, from that very essence this great nyagrodha tree exists Believe me, my dear
The lesson of the illustration is that the cosmic process with its names and forms arises from the subtle essence of Pure Being sata evammnah sthulam ndma-iupddimat kdryamjagad utpannam §
3 sa ya eso'ntmd, aitad dimyam tdam sarvam, tat satyam, sa atmd, tat tvam asi, svetaketo, iti, bhuya eva ma, bhagavan, vijiid- payatv ttt, tatha, saumya, iti, hovaca
3 That which is the subtle essence, this whole world has for its self That is the true That is the self That art thou Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further' 'So be it, my dear,' said he
1 lavanam etad udake'vadhdya, atha ma pratar upasidatM ttt, sa ha tatha cakara, tarn hovaca' yad dosd lavanam udake'-
Chdndogya Upanisad
vadhah, anga tad ahareti, tadd hdvamrsya na viveda; yatha vtlinam, evam.
1. Place this salt in the water and come to me in the morning. Then he did so. Then he said to him, 'That salt you placed in the water last evening, please bring it hither.' Having looked for it he found it not, as it was completely dissolved.
This section attempts an answer to the difficulty that if Pure Being is the essence of all that exists, why it is not perceived.
2 angdsyantdd acameti: katltam Hi; lavanam iti, madhyad acameti, katham ih; lavanam iti; antad acameti, katham iti; lavanam %t%, abhipraiyaitad atha mopasidathd tti; tadd ha tatha cakara, iac-chaivat samvartate; tarn hovaca: atra vava kila sat, saumya, na nibhalayase, airaiva Mia.
2 'Please take a sip of it from this end.' He said, 'How is it?' 'Salt.' 'Take a sip from the middle. How is it?' 'Salt' 'Take a sip from the other end. How is it?' 'Salt'' 'Throw it away and come to me ' He did so. It is always the same Then he said to him, 'Venly, indeed, my dear, you do not perceive Pure Being here Verily, indeed, it is here '
As we are able to perceive salt in the water though not by means of touch and sight even so we will be able to perceive Pure Being by other means, upayantarc^a, though it is not obvious to our senses
3 sa ya eso'nvma attad dtmyam tdam sarvam, tat satyam, sa alma, tat tvam asi, ivetaketo, th; bhuya eva ma, Wiagavan, vijfiapayatv th, tatha, saumya, th hovaca.
3- That which is the subtle essence this whole world has for its self That is the true That is the self That art thou, Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further.' So be it, my dear,' said he
_ 1. yallia, saumya, purusam gandharebhyo'bhimddhaksam amya tarn taio'tyane visrjet, sa yatha tatrapran vodan vatharan vd ?«f)Wi vd pradhmdyitabhinaddhdksa dnito'bhinaddhakso
464 The Principal Upamsads VI. 14 2
1 Just as, my dear, one might lead a person away from the Gandharas with his eyes bandaged and abandon him m a place where there are no human beings, and just as that person would shout towards the east or the north or the south or the west, 'I have been led here with my eyes bandaged, I have been left here with my eyes bandaged '
2 tasya yathabhinahanam pramucya pidbriiyat, etam dtiam gandharah, etam disam vrajeh, sa gramad gramam prcchan pandtto medhavl gandhdran evopasampadyeta evam eveha- cdryavdn puruso veda, tasya tavad eva ctram ydvan na vimoksye, atha sampatsya til
2 And as, if one released his bandage and told him, 'In that direction are the Gandharas, go in that direction, thereupon, being informed and capable of judgment, he would by asking (his way) from village to village arrive at Gandhara, in exactly the same manner does one here who has a teacher know, "I shall remain here only so long as I shall not be released (from ignorance) Then I shall reach perfection.'"
acaryavan one who has a teacher See Katha II 8
Bhlsma says (to Yudhisthira) that the preceptor is superior even to the father or the mother
gurur gariyanpttrtomatrta&'cetomematih MB Santi Parva, 108 lj 1 A teacher is regarded as being as essential as the remover of a bandage of a blindfolded man who wishes to find his way home On several occasions Yajfiavalkya teaches persons such as his wife informally and without insisting on prior initiation AsVapati teaches the Brahman as who come to him freely
£ makes out that our real home is sat or Being Our eyes are bandaged with desires for worldly possessions which blind us When we suddenly meet a person who knows the Self, whose own bonds have been broken, when he points the way, we feel that we are not mere creatures of the world but we belong to the ultimate reality We are released, according to §, when the body reared by our past
« Alexander was one day asked, 'Why do you show greater respect and reverence to your instructor than you do to your father?' He answered, 'From my teacher I obtain life eternal, and from my father a perishable existence Moreover, my father brought me down from heaven to earth but Anstotle has raised me from earth to heaven Htslory of the Early Kings of Persia, by Mir Khwand, ET by David Shea (1832), p 423 According to Plutarch, "Anstotle was the man Alexander admired in his younger years and as he himself averred, he had no less affection for him that for his own father, from the one he derived the blessing of life , from the other the blessing of a good life."
Vt'15. 3-
CMndagya Upanisad
Seeds falls off. 'While the deeds performed after the attainment of saving knowledge do not bind us, those acts which have resulted in this embodiment have to exhaust their consequences.
3. sa ya eso'nima aitad atmyam idam sarvam, tat satyam, sa dimd, tat tvam asi, svetaketo, Ui; bhuya eva ma, bhagavan, vij'napayaiv Ui; tatha, saumya, tit hovdca.
3. That which is the subtle essence this whole world has for its self. That is* the true. That is the self. That art thou Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further.' 'So be it, my dear,' said he.
V- THE ORDER OF MERGENCE
llpurusam, saumya, Ktopatdpinam jMtayah paryupasate, JdnSst mam, janasi mam tit; iasya yavan na van manast sam- padyate, manah prune, pranah tejasi, tejah parasyam devaidyam,
1. Also, my dear, around a sick (dying) person his relatives gather and ask, 'Do you know me?' 'Do you know me?' So jong as his voice is not merged in mind, mind in breath, breath wheat and heat in the highest deity, so long he knows (them).
2. Then when his voice is merged in mind, his mind in heat, ' and heat in the highest deity, then he does not know (them).
See VI. 8. 6.
Soth those who know the truth and those who do not know the witiireadj the ultimate Reality at death. The former do not return » emTwdied life while the latter do.
offt 'v e l aat he who knows passes at death through the artery R«S v 0 8011 md th® 1 to &e ReaL At death he reaches the
3- saya eso'nima aitad atmyam tdam sarvam, tat saiyam, sa *ua'± lvam svetaketo, Hi; bhuya eva md, bhagavan, Wfepfe Hi; tatkd, saumya, Hi hovdca.
3- Jaat which is the subtle essence this whole world has for
466 The Principal Upanisads VI. 16. 3
its self That is the true. That is the self That art thou, Svetaketu 'Please, Venerable Sir, instruct me still further ' 'So be it,' said he.
1. pvrusam, saumya, uta hasta-grJutam anayanli, apdharsTt, steyam akarstt, paraium asmai tapata itt; sa yadi tasya karta bhavati, lata evanrtam atmanath kurute, so'nrtdbhisandho'nrie- nd'tmamm antardhaya paraium taptam praligrhnati, sa dahya- te'tha hanyaie
1. Also, my dear, they lead up a man seized by the hand, saying, 'He has stolen, he has committed a theft, heat the axe for him ' If he is the doer thereof (1 e if he has committed the theft) then he makes himself untrue (a liar). Being given to untruth, covering himself by untruth he takes hold of the heated axe and is burnt Then he is killed
At the time of this Upamsad belief in ordeals should have pre- vailed The guilty man is burnt and killed by grasping the heated axe while the innocent man is not affected by grasping it So also the knower is not repelled by the Real while the non-know er returns to embodied life
This passage gives an illustration to indicate how he who knows, when he reaches the Real, does not return to embodied life, while he who does not know, when he reaches the Real returns
2. atha yadi tasyakaria bhavati, tata eva satyam atmanam kurute, sa saiyabhisandhah satyenafmanam antardhaya paraium tapiam pratigrhnaii, sa na dahyate, atha mucyate
2 But if he is not the doer thereof, thereupon he makes himself true Being given to truth, covering himself by truth, he takes hold of the heated axe he is not burnt Then he is released
It is a universal principle that the truth will make us free_ John VIII 32 Truth is not merely theoretical but practical yalha vadi tatha hart. Devas and Asuras are distinguished by their respec- tive adherence to truth and untruth
3 sa yatha. tatra m ddhyeta attad atmyam idam sarvam, tat
saiyam, sa atma, tat tvam asi, ivetaketo, iti; tadd Msya vijajiiav \t% vijajndv itt.
3 And as in this case he would not be burnt, thus has all this that for its self. That is the true That is the self. That art thou, Svetaketu. Then he understood it from him, yea, he understood.
Madhva makes the text read, atat tvam asi— Thou art not that, and argues that these passages aim at establishing the difference between the individual and the Universal Self*
The Principal Upamsads VII i 2
SANATKUMARA'S INSTRUCTION TO NARADA PROGRESSIVE WORSHIP OF BRAHMAN NAME
1 adhihi, bhagavah, iti hopasasdda sanatkumdram ndradah, tarn hovaca yad vettha tena mopaslda, tolas ta urdhvam vaksyamiti, sa hovaca
1 Narada approached Sanatkumara and said, 'Teach me, Venerable Sir,' He said, 'Come to me with (tell me) what you know Then I will teach you what is beyond that '
SeeTU III 1
The story is introduced to show that the supreme good cannot be accomplished without a knowledge of the Self nirattsaya-prdptt- sddhanaivam dtma-vidydyd 5
Narada is he who gives the knowledge of the Supreme Self, accordmg to Sabda-kalpa-druma ndram daddli th ndradah, ndram param-atma-visayakam jiidnam
Sanatkumara is represented in Indian tradition as the eternal child Brahma-vaivaria Pur ana makes out that he is eternally a child of five years, who did not undergo the usual samskdr as, a pupil of the very God, Ndrdyana, vayasd panca-hdyanah, acudo anupavitas ca veda-sandhya-vihinakah yasya ndrdyano guruh
Hanvamia confirms this view 'Know me only to be a child just as I was born and so the name sanatkumara was given to me' yathotpannas tathawdham kumdra ttt mddhi mam, tasmdt sanatkumareti mam attan me pratisthitam The learned Narada goes to the unlearned Sanatkumara for in- struction For self-realisation, practice of virtue and love to all creation are necessary more than scriptural lore Vamana Parana makes out that Sanatkumara is the son of virtue by the wife of non- violence
dharmasya bkdryahimsakhyd, tasydm putra-catustayam jyesfhah sanat- kumdro' bkut
2 rgvedam, bhagavah, adhyemi, yajurvedam sdmavedam, athar- vanam catwtham, ttihdsa-purdnam pancamam, veddndm vedam, pttryam, rdsim, dawam, mdhvm, vakovdkyam, ekayanam, deva- vidydm, brahma-vidydm, bhiita-vidyam, ksatra-vidydm, naksatra- vidydm, sarpa-devajana-mdyam, etat, bhagavah, adhyemi
2 Venerable Sir, I know the Rg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Soma Veda, Atharvana as the fourth (Veda), the epic and the
YH. i. 5. Chandogya TJpanisad 4^9
snrient lore as ths fifth, ths Veda of the Veaas (i.e. grarnmar), propitiation of ths Fathers, the science 01 m=Eue-s (mathematics), the science of portents, the science or (chronology), logic, ethics and politics, the science oithe goss, the science of sacred knowledge, the science of elemental spirits, the science of -weapons, astronomy, the science of serpents and the fine arts. This, Venerable Sir, I know. £eva-rid}5: r.imtOa or exegedcs. 5; science of the worship of goes. R-
3. so'fa)?:,bhagaiaii r trMrira-z:d£TdsrtAr^ tre bhagaiai-driebhyah, tarazi so?xi,: aiv:a-vid ^ so'ham, ihagavah, socdiai, tam ma bhagsvzi,, sssasya pdrati faraysfv ifs; tam hovaca vad «i fcin caiim adkysgzsthdk, natnaxssiai.
3. But, Venerable Sir, I am only like one knevring the words and not a knower of Self. It has been heard by me from those like you that he who knows the Self crosses over sorrow. Such a sorrowing one am I. Venerable Sir. Do yon.. Venerable Sir, help me to cross over to the other side of sorrow. To him he then said, 'Verily, whatever you have here learned is only a name '
4. nan:a ta rg-vsdo yaju^-isdak S'itKn-vzdi att.arcarns ctznrtha itikdsa-p urn? ah pcJ.camo vedar.ati: 1 edah pitryo rasir dnivo, r.idh-r zikoidkyam, ekdyanam, deva-zidya, brakwa-Tidys. bl'lia-vidy a, teaira-v.dya, naksatra-vidya, sarps-deFsjana-iidya. rMrr.aivanai, mmopa&svdi.
4. Venly, a name is Rgieda (so also) Yajur Veda, Veda, Athansra as the fourth, the epic and the ancient lore as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas, propitiation of the fathers, the science of numbers, the science of portents, the science of time, logic, ethics and politics, the science of gods, the science of weapons, the science of serpents and the fine arts. AH this is mere name. Meditate on the name.
5- sa yo xanza braJ.u<£ij upas's ydiiK r.dn^c gctxar.. tairdsys yxki kd!::a-:dra b'^si iziys rAwzi brahircy upsste: ' 'sfz.bh^^Vuh, rii ''c bhiiyz Hi; r.&r.v.o vfii M-h/s::::; ian r>-e I'zigzvin crn-ii tis.
5 ^Ke who meditates on name as Brshv.ir. becomes inde- pendent so far as name goes, he who meditates on name as Brat-rraK^'is there. Venerable Sir, anything greater than the namer' 'There is (something) greater than the name.' 'Teil that to me, Venerable Sir.'
47° The Principal Upantsads VII 2 2
kama carm He can pass in and out at will See TU III 10 5, John X 9 It is possible for those who live in the spirit to assume any form they please
1 vag va va namno bhuyast, vag va rg-vedam vtjndpayatt, yapir-vedam sdma-vedam atharvanam caturtham ttthdsa-ptirdnam paiicamam veddndm vedam, pttryam rdivtn daivam mdhim vakovakyam, ekayanam, deva-vidydm, brahma-vidydm, bhuta- vidydm, ksatra-vidydm, naksatra-vtdyam, sarpa-devajana-vtdydm divam ca prthvolm ca vdyum cakdSam capas ca tejai ca devdms ca manusydms ca pasumi ca vaydmsi ca trna vanaspatin hdpaddny dkita-patanga-pipilakam dharmam cddharmam ca satyatn cdnrtam casddhu cdsdahu ca hrdayajnam cdhrdayapiam ca, yad vat vafina bhavisyat 11a dharmo nddharma vyajfidpayisyat, na satyatn ndnrtam na sadhti ndsadhu na hrdayajno nahrdayajfio vdg evaitat sarvam vipidpayaU, vacant updssveh
1 Speech assuredly is greater than name Speech, verily, makes known the Rg Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sdma Veda, the Atharva Veda as the fourth, legend and ancient lore as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas (1 e grammar), the rites of the Fathers, mathematics, the science of portents, the science of time (chronology), logic, ethics and politics, the science of the gods, the science of sacred knowledge {1 e the Vedas), the science of the elementals, the science of rulership, the science of the stars (astronomy), the science of snake charming, of the fine arts as well as heaven and earth, air and space, water and heat, gods and men, beasts and birds, grass and trees, animals together with worms, flies and ants, the right and the wrong, the true and the false, the good and the bad, the pleasing and the unpleasmg Venly, if there were no speech neither right nor wrong would be known, neither the true nor the false, neither the good nor the bad, neither the pleasing nor the unpleasmg Speech, indeed, makes all this known Meditate upon speech
2 sa yo vacant brahmety tipdsle, ydvad vdco gatam, tatrdsya yathd kdma-cdro bhavah.yo vacant brahmety upaste, ash, bhagavah, vdco bhuya tit, vdco vdva bhuyo'stlti, tan me, bhagavdn, bravitv tit.
VII 3 2 Chandogya Upanisad 47 1
2 He who meditates on speech as Brahman becomes inde- pendent so far as speech reaches, he who meditates on speech as Brahman 'Is there anything, Venerable Sir, greater than speech?' *Yes, there is something greater than speech ' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
i nw.no va va vaco bhuyah, yatM vai dv& vamaiake dve va koU Avail vaksau mustir anubhavah, evam vacam ca nama ca mano 'nubhavah, so- yada manasa manasyati, mantrdn adhiyiyett, athadhtte, karmani kurviyeti, atha kurutz, putrami ca. paiumi ceocheyeh, athecchaie, imam ca lokam, amum ceccheyeti, athecckate; mano hy atmd, mano hi fokah, mano hi brahma, manaupassveti.
I. Mind, assuredly, is greater than speech For as the closed fist holds two amalaka or two kola or two ak$a fruits so does mind hold speech and name. For when one through mind has m mind to learn the sacred hymns, then he learns them If he has mind to perform sacred works, then he performs them. When he has m mind to desire for sons and cattle, then he desires them When he has m mind to desire this world and yonder, then he desires them. Mind is, indeed, the self mind is, indeed, the world, mind is indeed Brahman. Meditate on the mind
JlJ a J° im ™ l Z ahmiy "PMe.yavan manaso gatam taMsva
472 The Principal Upantsads VII 4 2
Scctton 4 WILL
I samkalpo vd va manaso bhuydn, yadd vat samkalpayate aiha mamsyati, atha vacam vayah tarn 11 ndmmrayah, namnt mantra ekam bhavantt, mantrestt karmant
1 Will, assuredly, is greater than mind For when one wills, then one reflects, one utters speech and then one utters it in name The sacred hymns are included m name and sacred works in the sacred hymns
samkalpa will It is said to be an activity of mind It is, like thinking, an activity of the inner organ antah-harana-vyth § It has also re- flective aspects besides the volitional What is mechanical process m the inorganic world, stimulation in the organic is motivation 111 human beings mantresu karmani See MU I 2 1
2 tarn ha va dam samkalpaikayandm samkalpatmakam samkalpe piatisthttdm, samakalpetdm dyavd-prthm, samakal- petdm vdyus" cdkdsam ca, samakalpantapas ca iejai ca, tesam samklptyai vaisam samkalpate, varsasya savtklptyd annam samkalpate, annasya samklptyat prdiidh samkalpante, prdnandm samklptyatmantrdhsamkalpante, mantranam samklptyai karmant samkalpante, karmanam samklptyai lokah samkalpate, lakasya samklptyat sarvam samkalpate, sa esa samkalpah' samkalpam updssveti
2 All these, venly, centre m the will, have the will as their soul, abide m will Heaven and earth were formed through will, air and ether were formed through will, water and heat were formed through will Through their having been willed, rain becomes willed Through rain having been willed, food becomes willed Through food having been willed, living creatures are willed Through living creatures having been willed sacred hymns become willed Through sacred hymns having been willed, sacred works become willed Through sacred works having been willed, the world becomes willed Through the world having been willed, everything becomes willed Such is will Meditate on will
2 sa yah samkalpam hahmety vpaste klptdn vai sa lok&n dhi iivan dhnvoah prattsthxtdn praUsthito'vyatham&nan avyatfta mdno'bhmdhyait, ydvat samkalpasya gatam tatrdsyayathd kdma- cdro bhavatt, yah samkalpam brahmety updste, ash, bhagavah,
Chdtidogya Upant$ad
samkalpdd bhuya tit; samkalpdd vdya bhuyo'stih, tan me, bhagavdn, bravUv ill
2 He who meditates on will as Brahman, he verily obtains the worlds he has willed, himself being permanent the perma- nent worlds, himself unwavering the unwavering worlds As far as will goes, so far is he independent, he who meditates on will as Brahman 'Is there anything, Venerable Sir, greater than will'' 'Yes, there is something greater than will.' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
I ctltam va va samkalpdd bhuyah, yadd vat cetayate'tha samkalpayate atha manasyah, atha vacant irayatt, tarn u namm- rayali, ndmm mantra ckam bhavanti, maniresu karmdm
1 Thought, assuredly, is more than will Verily when one thinks, then he wills, then he reflects, then he utters speech and he utters it m name The sacred hymns become one (are included) m name and sacred works m the sacred hymns.
Thought is said to be higher than will SeeMaitriVI 30 See Dlgha Ntkaya I 21
2 tarn ha va dam cittaikayanam cittdtmam cxttc prattsthtdnt tasmdd yady apt bahu-vid acttto bhavati, ndyam astity cvatmm ahuh yad ayam vcda.yad va ayam vidvdn neitham acittah sydd ih atha yady alpa-vw cxttavdn bhavah, tasmd evota hdrmante attain hy evandm ckayanam, attorn dtma, cittam prattstM attain upassvch r
J* yft'i* 1 ^f 5 ^ m thou & ht ' have th ™ght for their goal and abide m thought Therefore, even if a man be possessed
k ™S! ea Tf V S unthlnkln S. P^ple say of huJi that he is nobody, whatever he may know Venly, if he did know he ould . not be so unthinking On the other hand hi is thoughtful even though he knows httle, to him people are
Jets. 01 *f cmi i g Truly indeed » & ™Slf 3
JTSoSS?* 18 sou1, thought 15 their support
3 sa yas cittam brahndy «psste, atidn vat sa lokan dhruvan
474 ^ Prtnctpal Upantsads VII. 6. i.
dhruvak prattsthttdn prati$thtto'vyathamandn avyathamano 'bhtstdhyati, ydvac ctttasya gatam, iatrdsya yatha kama-cdro bhavah, yai ctttam brahmety updste, ash, bhagavah, ctttad bhuya th, ctttad vd va bhUyo'stitt, tan me, bhagavan, bravtiv th
3 He who meditates on thought as Brahman, he venly obtains the worlds he has thought, himself being permanent the permanent worlds, himself established, the established worlds, himself unwavering the unwavering worlds As far as thought goes, so far is he independent, he who meditates on thought as Brahman 'Is there anything, Venerable Sir, greater than thought'' 'Yes, there is something greater than thought ' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that ' „
i dhyanam va va ctttad bhuyah, dhydyatvoa prthtvi, dhyaya- tivdntanksam, dhydyativa dyauh, dhydyanttvdpoh, dhyayanttva parvatah, dhyayanttva deva-manusydh, tasmdd ya tha manu- sydndm maliattvam prapnuvantt dhydnapaddmSa ivatva te bhavanh, atha ye'lpdh kalahtnah ptsund upavddtnas te atha ye prabhavah dhyandpdddmid ivatva te bhavanh, dhyanam upassvett
I Contemplation, assuredly, is greater than thought The earth contemplates as it were The atmosphere contemplates as it were The heaven contemplates as it were The waters contemplate as it were, the mountains contemplate as it were. Gods and men contemplate as it were Therefore he among men here attains greatness, he seems to have obtained a share of (the reward of) contemplation Now the small people are quarrelsome, abusive and slandering, the superior men seem to have obtained a share of (the reward of) contemplation, Meditate on contemplation
dhyam contemplation It is the concentration of all our thoughts on one subject, ekagrata §
Even as men who contemplate acquire repose, become firm ana established, the earth, etc , are said to be firm and established, as the result of their contemplation
deva-manusydh gods and men or godlike men for men endowed witn
VII 7 Chandogya Upanisad 475
inward peace are not devoid of divine qualities deva-samd devama- nusyak samddiguna-sampamia manusya deva-svarfipam na jahahty arlhah £
2 sa yo dhyanam brahmety itpdste, ydvad dhyamsya gatam, tatrasya yaiha kama-caro bfiavati yo dhyanam brakmety itpdste, ash, bhagavah, dhydnad bhtiya ttt; dhydnad vd va bhuya'stiU; tan me, bhagavdn, bravttv tit.
z. He who meditates on contemplation as Brahman, so far as contemplation goes so far is he independent, he who meditates on contemplation as Brahman 'Is there anything, Venerable Sir, greater than contemplation?' 'Yes, there is something greater than contemplation.' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
i. vijmnam va va dhydnad bhiiyah, vijnanena va rg-vedam vijandtt,yapir-veda»i satna-vedam athatvanam caturtham, ttikasa- purdnam pancamam, veddnam vedavt, pitryam, rdsim, daivam, mdhm, vdkovakyam, ekayamm, deva-vidyam, brahma-vtdydm, bhuta-vidyam, ksatra-vtdyam, naksatra-vidydm, sarpa~devajana, vidyam, dtvam ca prthvim ca vayum cakasam, capos ca tejai ca, devdihs ca mamtsydms ca paiiimi ca vaydmsi ca tnia-vanaspattR- svdpaddny dktta-patanga-pipilakam dhatmam cdiharmam ca satyam canriam ca s&dhu cdsddhu ca hrdayajiiam cahrdayapiam cannam ca rasath cemam ca lokam avium ca vipidnenatva vydnati, wjfmwm updssveh.
i Understanding, assuredly, is greater than contemplation Venly, by understanding one understands the Rg. Veda, the Yaptr Veda, the Sdma Veda, the Atharva Veda as the fourth, legend and ancient lore as the fifth.i the Veda of the Vedas (i e. grammar), the rites oi[ the fathers^ mathematics, the science of portents} the science of time (chr onolog y), logic, ethics and politics, the science of the gods, the science of sacred knowledge (i.e the Vedas), the science of the elemental^ the science of rulership, the science of the stars (astronomy), the science of snake charming, of the fine arts as well as heaven and earth, air and space, water and heat, gods and men,
47 6 27,5 Pnixipal Upat.isgds VII. S. i.
beasts and birds, grass and trees, animals together with, -worms, flies and ants, the right and the wrong, the'true and the false, the good and the bad, the pleasing and the unpleasing the food and the drink {or taste), this world and yonder, all this one ) understands just with understanding. Meditate on under- standing.
2 sayo vijmnam bahmdy ({paste, vijfiauavsio rjr sa loian- jriannvaio'bhisidhyah, ySvad vljf.ilnasya gai-aiu, iairds\a yaiha kavia-cfiro bbavaii, yo vijhSnan, brahmay upasic; asii, blagavah, vijfcahad bJiiiya Hi; vipanad vava bluyo'stTii; ia'iv.c, blagsvar,, bravTh it;
2 He who meditates on understanding as Brahman, he verily, attains the worlds of understanding, of knowledge. As far as understanding goes, so far he is independent, he wLd meditates on understanding as BraJ.m-ar.. 'Is there anything. Venerable Sir, greater than understanding?' 'Yes, there is something greater than understanding ' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that.'
Sccftoj; S STRENGTH
I. bal-am va va mjilinad blStyaly api ha salaik ri?SjKOTJj«fw cko balavar. akaiupayaie, sa yada baU blavaii, ailoHlaid bl,sv3is irftistlau pancarifd bhavati, paritaran upctsatrfi bizpjtf, upasTdan drasia bhavaii, iroiJ bkavati, ih-striS blsvrti, bsddJJ blavaii, haria bhavati, vijT.aia bharaii, balci.a vai prtlii'Stssflsii, balsimnlariksav:, balcna. dyasih, balcm parvaial, b3hi*z <?£tj- manusyah, bihua pasavas ca vayamsi c-a irna-vahsspuiaysh svapadauy aktia-paianga-pipilali-am, bslcr.a fokas iisfLzii; bshir, upassvcli.
i. Strength, assuredly, is greater than understanding. One strong man, indeed, causes a hundred men of understanding to tremble. "When one becomes strong, he becomes a rising man If he rises he serves (wise people). If he serves, he draws near (by becoming attached as a pupil) . By drawing near, he becomes a seer, becomes a hearer, becomes a thinker, becomes a per- ceiver, becomes a doer, becomes an understander. By strength, verily, the earth stands, by strength the atmosphere, by
Vn. 9 2 Chdndogya Upamsad 477
strength the heaven; by strength the mountains, by strength the gods and men (or god-men), by strength beasts and birds, grass and trees, animals together with worms, flies and ants By strength the world stands Meditate on strength strength spiritual power
2. sa yo balam brahmety updste, ydvad balasya gatam, Mrasya yatha kdma-caro bhavah.yo balam brahmety updste, asti, bhagavah, baldd bhuya tti, baldd vdva bhiiyostiU, tan me, bhagavdn, btavTtv iti
2 He who meditates on strength as Brahman— as far as strength goes, so far he is independent, he who meditates on strength as Brahman 'Is there anything, Venerable Sir, greater than strength'' 'Yes, there is something greater than strength ' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
I annam va va baldd bhuyah, tastnad yady api dasa rdtrir va'imydt, yady u ha jTvct, afha va adrastd'srotd'manta'boddhd 'kartd'vijndtd bhavati, aiha 'nnasydy'e drastd bhavaii, &i old bhavati, mania bhavati, boddhd bhavati, hartd bhavati, vtpidtd bhavati; annam updssveU
1 Food, verily, is greater than strength. Therefore, if any- one does not eat for ten days, even though he might live, yet, verily, he becomes a non-seer, a non-hearer, a non-thmker, a non-understander, a non-doer, a non-knower But on the entrance of food (when he gets food), he becomes a seer, he becomes a hearer, he becomes a thinker, he becomes an under- stander, he becomes a doer, he becomes a knower Meditate on food
2 sa yo'miam brahmety updste, annavato vai sa lokdn pdnavato- 'bhistdhyati. ydvad a7inasya gatam, tairdsya yatha kdma-caro bhavati yo'miam brahmety updste, ash, bhagavah, anndd bhuya i/i, annad vdva bhuyo'stTti, tan vie, bhagavdn, bravitv th.
2. He who meditates on food as Brahman, he, venly, attains the worlds of food and drink As far as food reaches, so far he ' who meditates on food as Brahman, has linhmited freedom.
The Principal Upamsads
VII ii i
'Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than food?' Yes, there is something greater than food ' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that.'
I dpo vd va amiad bhuyasyah, tasmddyadd suvrshr na bhavati, vyddhiyante prandh, annum kaniyo bhavisyatiti, atha yadd suvrstir bJiavati, anandmah prana bliavanti, annum bahu bhavisyatiii, dpa evema viilrtdh yeyam prthivi, yad antanksam, yad dyauh, yat parvatdh, yad deva-manusydh, yat pasavas ca vaydmsi ca trna-vanaspatayah, svapaddny dkita-patanga-pipila- kam, apa evema murtdh apa updssveti
1 Water, verily, is greater than food Therefore when there is not good (sufficient) rain, living creatures sicken with the thought that food will become scarce But when there is good rain, living creatures rejoice in the thought that food will become abundant It is just water that assumes (different) forms of this earth, this atmosphere, this sky, the mountains, gods and men, beasts and birds, grass and trees, animals together with worms, flies and ants Water indeed is all these forms Meditate on water
2 sa yo'po brahmety upaste, apnoti sarvan kamdn, trptiman bhavati ydvad apdm gatam, tairdsya yathd kama-cdro bhavati yo'po brahmety upaste, astt, bhagavah, adbhyo bhuya iti, adbhyo vd va bhuyo'stiti, tan me, bJiagavan, bravltv tti
2 He who meditates on water as Brahman, obtains all his desires and becomes satisfied As far as water reaches so he who meditates on water as Brahman has unlimited freedom 'Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than water?' 'Yes, there is something greater than water' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
I tejo va va adbhyo bhwyah, tasmdd va etad vayum dgrhyakdSam abhitapati, tad dJiuh, niiocati, nitapati, varsisyati va itt, teja
vn J2 x CMndogya Upamsad 479
toatatfSrvam dariayiivd'tha'pah srjate ^ £ hrakibhii ca vidyudbhih dhrddds caranti; tasviad ahuh ZSl, Imyatl vamsyaU va *. teja eva tat finvam darsayiivdthd'pah srjate teja upassveh.
i Heat venly, is greater than wter For it seizes hold of the wd and W 5ms the ether. Then people say it is hot it is burning hot, it will rain. Thus does heat show this sign first and creates water. So with lightnings, flashing upwards and across the sky, thunders roll. Therefore people say, there is lightning, there is thunder, therefore it will rain Heat, indeed, first indicates this and creates water Meditate on heat.
We see the cause of heat first and then the effect of ram pastddham In lake karanam abhyttdyatam drstavatah karyam bhavisyatUi vyiidnam $.
2 sa yas tejo brahviety ufdste, tejasvi vai sa iejasvato lokdn blidsvaio'pahata-tamaskdn abfasidhyah, ydvat tejaso gatam, ialrd'sya yailid kdma-cdro bhavah.yas tejo hahmety updsU, ash, bhagavah, fcjaso bhftya tft; Ujaso va va bhuyo^lUi; tan me, bhagavdn, bravitv tit
2. He who meditates on heat as Brahman, he, verily, radiant himself, attains radiant, shining worlds, freed from darkness As far as heat reaches, he who meditates on heat as Brahman, has unlimited freedom 'Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than heat?' 'Yes, there is something greater than heat.' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that.'
I. akaio va va tcjaso bhuyan dkdse vat siiryd-candramasdv ubhau vidyitn naksatrd\iy agmh, dkdiendhvayah, dkaiena imoh, dkdscna praltiinoti, dkdic ramalc, dkdse na ramate, dkdse jay ate, akasam abhtjdyalc dkds'am npassveh
i Ether (or space), verily, is greater than fire For in the ether cvist both sun and moon, lightning, stars and fire Through ether one calls, through ether one hears, through ether one answers In ether one enjoys himself and m ether one does not
480 The Principal Upanisads VII. 13 1
enjoy himself In space one is bom and unto space one is bom. Meditate on ether.
akasam abMjdyate When bom, the seed grows upward and not downward
Akasa onginaliy meant space through which one can pass or thrust one's finger. See A itareya Brahmana III 4 2 X.SatapathaBrahmana III. 3 2 19 The space between the sky and the earth when they separated became antanksa or atmosphere It was empty and so got filled with air Akasa is more than mere space K U speaks of man being bom from akasa as from a womb, I 6
2 sa ya akasam brahmety updste, dkdiavato vat sa lokan prakasavato' sambddhdn vrugdyavato'bhisidhyah, ydvad akasasya gatam, tatrasya yathd kdma-cdro bhavati, ya akasam brahmety updste, ash, bhagavah, akasad bhiiya ih, dkasdd va va bhiiyo' stTti, tan me, bhagavdn bra-Mo iti.
2. He who meditates on ether as Brahman, he venly attains the worlds of ether and of light, unconfined and wide extending As far as ether goes, so far he who meditates on ether as Brahman, has rmlimited freedom 'Venerable Sir, is there anything' greater than ether?' 'Yes, there is something greater than ether.' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
asambadhan- unconfined, also free from pressure and pain- sambadho'nyo'nyapidd tad-rahitan asambadhan $
1 smaro va va akasad bhuyah, tasmddyady apt bahava asTran asmarantah, naiva U kamcana srtiuyuh, na manvlran,^ na vyantran yada va va te smareytih, atha srnuyuh, atha manviran, atha vijdmran, smareiia vat putrdn vijdndti, smarena pasun- smaram vpdssvett
1. Memory, venly, is more than ether, therefore if many assemble and if they have no memory, indeed they would not hear any one at all, they would not think, they would not understand But surely, if they remember then they would hear, then they would think, then they would understand Through
memory one discerns one's sons; through memory, one's cattle Meditate on memory Memory is a quality of the inner organ, antah-karana-dharmah
2 sa yah maram brahmety upaste, yavat smarasya gatam, tairdsya yathd kama-caro bhavah, yah smaram brahmety upaste; asti, bhagavah, smarad bhuya iti, smarad vd va bhuyo'stiti; tan me, bhagavan, braviiv lit
t 2 He who meditates on memory as Brahman — as far as memory reaches, so far he has unlimited freedom, he who meditates on memory as Brahman 'Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than memory?' 'Yes, there is something greater than memory ' 'Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
1 did va va smarad bhiiyasl, aseddho va% smaro mantrdn adMte karmdm kuruie, putrdriis ca pasiimi cecchate, imam ca lokam amum cecchate aidin updssveti
1 Hope, assuredly, is greater than memory When kindled by hope, memory learns the sacred hymns, performs sacrifices, desires sons and cattle, desires this world and the other Meditate on hope.
aid, craving, desire, fysnd, kama £
aieddhah aia-iddha SSaySbhwardhttah, roused by hope S
2 sa ya didm brahmety upaste, diayasya sarve kdmah sa?nr- dhyanii, amoghd hdsydstso bhavanti, ydvad didyd gatam, tabdsya yathd kama-caro bhavati,ya didm brahmety upaste, asti, bhagavah, dSdyd bhitya ttt, d&dyd va va bhuyo'stTh, tan me, bhagavan, bravTiv ttt
2 He v.ho meditates on hope as Brahman, through hope all his desires are fulfilled, his prayers do not go m vain As far as hope reaches, so far he has unlimited freedom, he who meditates on hope as Brahman 'Venerable Sir, is there anything greater than hope'' 'Yes, there is something greater than hope ' "Do, Venerable Sir, tell me that '
a&soh prayers, prarthanah S
The Principal Upanisads VII 15 3
1 pi dno va va asaya bhilyan, yatha va ara nabliau samarpiWi, evam asmvn pi one sarvam samarpitam, pranah prdnena yah, pranah pranam dadah, prandya daddtx, prdno ha pita, prdno mdta, piano bhdta, pranah saasa, prdna dcaryah, prdno brdhmanah
1 Life-breath, verily, is greater than hope Even as the spokes are fastened in the hub, so on this hfe-breath all this is fastened Life moves by the hfe-breath Life-breath gives life, it gives (life) to a hving creature Life-breath is one's father, hfe-breath is one's mother, hfe-breath is one's brother, hfe-breath is one's sister, hfe-breath is one's teacher, hfe- breath is the Brahmana
According to & prdna is the conscious self, prajndtman, which enters the body to reveal the whole variety of names and forms
z sa yadi pitaram va mdtaram va bhrdtaram va svasdramva acdryam va brdhmanam va kimctd bhrsam iva pratyaha, dhik todsfoMy evatnam dhuh, pitrhd vat tvam asi, mdirhd vai tvam asi, bhrdlrJid vai tvam asi, svasrha vai tvam asi, dcaryaha vai tvam asi, brahmanahd vai tvam asiti
2. If one answers unworthily to a father or a mother, or a brother or a sister, or a teacher or a Brahmana, people say to him, shame on you, venly, you are a slayer of your father, venly, you are a slayer of your mother, venly, you are a slayer of your brother, venly, you are a slayer of your sister, venly, you are a slayer of your teacher, venly, you are a slayer of a Brahmana
bhrsam aiuimirupam 5
3 atha yady apy endn vtkrdnta-prdndn sulena samdsam vyatisandahet nawawam bruyuh, pitrhdsiti, na mdtrhdsUi, «« bhrdtrlidsTti, na svasrJtdstti, 11a acdryahdstti, na brdhmanahdsiti.
3 But if, when the life breath has departed from them one shoves them together with a poker and burns up every bit of them, people would not say, 'you are a slayer of your father,' nor 'you are a slayer of your mother/ nor 'you are a slayer of your brother,' nor 'you are a slayer of your sister,' nor 'you are a slayer of your teacher,' nor'you are a slayer of a Brahmana '
vtkranta-prdndn tyakta-dehan S
CMndogya Upanisad
The importance of p rana is brought out by positive and negative proofs, anvaya-vyattrekabhydm S\
4 prano hy evaitam sarvfim bhavati, sa va esa evam pasyan, evam manvanah, evam mjanann ativadi bJiavatt, tarn ced bruyuh ativady astti, ahvady asmiU bruyat, napahnuvita
4. Life-breath is all this Venly, he who sees this, thinks this, understands this, becomes an excellent speaker Even if people should say to him, you are an excellent speaker, he should say, 'I am an excellent speaker.' He should not deny it
atwadtn He goes beyond all declarations made previously beginning with name and ending with hope, and realises that prana or the conscious self is Brahman In M U III 1 4 an aUvadm is contrasted with one who really knows the highest truth
In all this discussion Sanatkumara leads Narada step by step, iato bhuyah, until he obtains the experience of the absolutely great, which is undefined and unmeasured. As Narada seems to be satisfied with prana and does not ask 'Is there anythjng greater than pran&>' the teacher leads him on to a higher view in sections 16-26 He is an altvadm who passes beyond the empirical variety and grasps the metaphysical reality, yastu bhUmakhyam sarvahkrantam tattvam paramartha-salyam veda soHtvadih 5.
1 c?a tu va attvadah yah satycnativadah, so'ham, bhagavah salycnahva&anih, saiyam iv eva njijMsitavyam tit, satvam bhagavah, inpjMsa tit. '
«f w? % Tf\ sP^^eUently, who speaks excellently f ? Ut r * Venerabl e Sir, would speak excellently of
truth But one must desire to understand the truth ' 'Venerable Sir, I desire to understand the truth.' vijijiiasc- vticscna jnfitum iccheyam (vatto'ham tit g
Section 17 TRUTH AND UNDERSTANDING ■Jj ad& - ai ™ 3Sn8lit atha sai y am vadati > ntmj&mn satvam siiaoyam 1(1; mjnamtn, bhagavah, vtjtjMsa ih 31 Q*
4^4 The Principal Upantsads VII. 19 1
1 Venly, when one understands, then he speaks the truth One who does not understand does not speak the truth Only he who understands speaks the truth But one must desire to understand understanding 'Venerable Sir, I desire to under- stand understanding '
In his commentary S distinguishes between the empirical truth (rupa-traya) and metaphysical truth (riipa-traya-vyattrekena para- tnarthatah), between factual truth and ultimate significance
1. yada vat manute, atha vijandtt, namatva vijandtt, matvmva vijandtt, mahs tv eva mjijMsiiavyeti, matim, bhagavah, vipjMsa ttt
1 Venly, when one thinks, then he understands, one who does not think does not understand Only he who thinks understands But one must desire to understand thinking 'Venerable Sir, I desire to understand thinking '
mahr mananam, tarko mantavya-vtsaya adarah §
I yada vai sraddhadhdti, aiha manute nasraddhaAhan manute, sraddhadhad eva manute, sraddha tv eva vijijndsttavyett, iraddham, bhagavah, mjijnasa iti
I Venly, when one has faith, then he thinks One who has not faith does not think Only he who has faith thinks But one must desire to understand faith 'Venerable Sir, I desire to understand faith '
astikya-buddhh sraddha S sense of religious reality
Chandogya Upanisad
I yada vai mshsthaii, atha sraddadhati, na'nististhan iradda- dhah msttslJiann eva Sraddadhati, mstha tv eva vippiasitavyeh; mstham, bhagavah, vyijnasa iti,
1 When one has steadfastness, then one has faith One who has not steadfastness does not have faith Only he who has steadfastness has faith But one must desire to understand steadfastness 'Venerable Sir, I desire to understand stead- fastness.'
ntsfhfr earnest attention to and service of the spiritual guide gurtc-susr&sadts taiparatvam brahma-vyina.na.ya- S SeeBG III 3
I yada vai karoty atlia ntsti$thah, n&krtva mstisthatt, krtvaiva mstitfhah, krhs tv eva vipjMsitavyeh, kriim bltagavo vijyttasa
1. When one is active, one has steadfastness. Without being active, one has not steadfastness Only by activity does one have steadfastness But one must desire to understand activity. Venerable Sir, I desire to understand activity.'
activity § refers to the duties of a student such as restraint of the
tf5»»c !Iltata ° f the mind min y a ~ sam y a > nai "ttaikagra-
Sechon 22 HAPPINESS
iW W if cn . obtams happiness, then one is active One who does not obtain happiness is not active Only he who obtam S
4^6 The Principal Vpamsais VII 24 1.
happiness is acfave But one must desire to understand happiness 'Venerable Sir, I desire to understand happiness '
1 yo vai bhumd tat sukham, ndlpe sukham ash, bhumatva sukham; bhmna tv eva vipjndsttavya iti, bhumdnam, bhagavah, vijijiiasa ill.
1 The infinite is happiness There is no happiness m any- thing small (finite). Only the infinite is happiness But one must desire to understand the infinite 'Venerable Sir, I desire to understand the infinite '
bhiimd grand, superlative, abundant, mahat mratisayam bahmh It is the highest that can be reached, the infinite In the small there is no happiness It produces craving, tfsna, which is the seed of sorrow, duhkha-bija
'Thou hopest perhaps to subdue desire by the power of enjoyment, but thou wilt find it impossible for the eye to be satisfied with seeing or the ear to be filled with hearing If all visible nature could pass in review before thee, what would it be but a vain vision'' Imitation of Christ
I. yatra nanyat patyati ndnyac chrnoti nanyad vxjanati sa bhiimd, atha yatranyat paiyah anyac chrnoti anyad vijdnah tad alpam; yo vai bhumd tad amrtam, atha yad alpam tan marlyam, sa, bhagavah, kasmvi prattstkita tU, sve mahimm, yadt vd na mahvmnih
1 Where one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, under- stands nothing else, that is the infinite But where one sees something else, hears something else, understands something else, that is the small (the finite) Verily, the infinite is the same as the immortal, the finite is the same as the mortal. 'Venerable
VII 25. i Chandogya Upamsad 487
Sir, on what is the infinite established'' 'On its own greatness or not even on greatness.'
The empirical dualities are absent in the experience of the infinite: samsara.-vyavali5.ro bhumni nosh S
martyam perishable, vmfi&i iS All empirical objects are subject to the law of change
sve mahmni on its own greatness, atmiye mahimm mdhatmye vibhiUau $ It is rooted in its own greatness while things which are in the region of the little, alpa, are rooted not m themselves but in others
ya&t va If the question is taken in an ultimate sense, we cannot even say this, for the infinite cannot be established in anything else, not even on its own greatness, for it is apratistha, anainta
The last line reminds us of the Nfisadiya hymn of the R V where the expression of the highest certainty is followed by a misgiving that after all it may not be so
2. go-as~vam iha malmnety acaksate, hasti-hiranyam dasa- bharyam, ksetrany dyatandnih, ndham evam bravimi, bravvmiti hovdcdnyo hy anyasmm prahsthita itt
2. Here on earth people call cows and horses, elephants and gold, slaves and wives, fields and houses 'greatness ' 'I. do not speak thus, I do not speak thus,' said he, 'for in that case one thing is established m another '
The infinite cannot be established in anything different from itself
Finite things are estabIishedmothers,«jjyo hi anyasmm prahsthttah this pas 1111168 °* ^ ara ' tanira ^ P rai %y a - s <wMfyada are suggested by
I. sa evadhastat, sa upanstdt, sa paicdt, sa purastdt, sa aaksmaiah, sa uUaraiah, sa cvedam sarvam iti, athdto'hamkdiadeia <mt, aliamcvadhasidt, ahamuparistdt, ahampaicdt, aham purastdt, cwndaksinatah, aham uttaratah, aham evedam sarvam til
1 that (infinite) indeed is below. It is above. It is behind all Ml f\}£ the south ' U is t0 the north xt is mdeed
Sf-Sn J"? % N r ne uS T mstructlon ™ regard to the sou-sense I, indeed, am below. I am above, I am behind, I
The Principal Upamsads VII 26 1
am in front I am to the south, I am to the north, I, indeed, am all this (world).
2. athata atmadesa eva dtmatvddhastdt, dtmoparistdt, atma pascat, atma put astdt, atma daksmatah, atmottatatah, dtmatvedam sarvam th sa va esa evampasyann evam manvana evam vijamnn atma-rahr atma-krida dtma-mithuna atmdnandah sa svardd bhavatt, tasya sarvesu lokesu kama-caro bhavah, atha ye'nyathdto vtduh, anya-rdjdnas te ksayya-loka bliavanti tesam sarvesu lokesv akama-caro bhavah
2 Now next the instruction in regard to the self. The self indeed is below The self is above The self is behind The self is m front The self is to the south The self is to the north The self, mdeed, is all this (world) Venly, he who sees this, who thinks this, who understands this, he has pleasure in the self, he has delight in the self, he has union in the self, he has py in the self, he is independent (self-ruler), he has unlimited freedom in all worlds But they who think differently from this are dependent on others (have others for then: rulers) They have (live in) perishable worlds In all worlds they cannot move at all (have no freedom).
pascat behind, or to the west purastat in front or to the east
The knowers are self-governing, autonomous [sva-raj), the non- knowers are heteronomous, subject to others {anya-rdj)
1 tasya ha va etasyavoam pasyatah, evam manvdnasya, evam vtjdiiata atmatah pranah, atmata asa, atmatah smarah, dtmata dkdiah, atmatas tejah, dtmata apah, dtmata dvtrbhava-itrobhdvau dtmato'nnam dtmato balam, dtmato vijndnam, atmato dhydnam, atmatas attain, atmatah samkalpah, atmato manah, dtmato vdk, dtmato ndma, atmato mantrah, atmatah karmdm, dtmata evedem sarvam iti
1 For him who sees this, who thinks this and who under- stands this, life-breath springs from the self, hope from the self, memory from the self, ether from the self, heat from the
VII 26. 2 Chdndogya Upanisad 489
self, water from the self, appearance and disappearance from the self, food from the self, strength from the self, understanding from the self, meditation from the self, thought from the self, determination from the self, mind from the self, speech from the self, name from the self, sacred Irymns from the self, (sacred) works from the self, indeed all this (world) from the self.
All these, life-breath, hope, memory, etc., which were traced to the real, sat, are now traced to the self, as the real and the self, sat and alman are one.
na pcdyo mrtyiim pasyati, ■> na rogam nofa duhkhaidm; saruath ha pasyah pasyati, sarvam dpnoti saraaiah
ih.
so. ekadhd bhavati, trtdha bhavati, pancadha. saptadhd navadha caiva punas caikadasah siiirtah, iatath ca dasa caikas ca sahasrdm ca vmsatih ahara-suddhausaiiva-$ttddhih,sativa-s'uddkaiidhrniasffiTtM lambhe sarva-grardMndm vipramoksah; tasmai mrdita-kasdydya tamasaii pdram darsayah bhagavdn saj.atkiar.arak' tan: skanda ity acaksate, tarn skanda ity acaksate. 2 On this there is the following verse. He who sees this does not see death nor illness nor any sorrow. He who sees this sees everything and obtains everything everywhere.
He is one, becomes threefold, fivefold, sevenfold and also ninefold. Then again he is called the elevenfold, also a hundred and elevenfold and also twenty-thousand fold.
^Tien nourishment is pure, nature is pure, ^"hen nature is pure, memory becomes firm. When memory remains firm, there is release from all knots of the heart. To such a one who has his stains wiped away, the venerable Sanatkumara shows the further shore of darkness. Him they call Skanda, vea him they call Skanda.
He who sees this, pasyo yathoMa-darsi vidvdn. S.
One— He is one before creation, prak srsti-prabhedad ekadlaiia. ifte various numbers, three, five, seven, nine, etc , are intended to -no^tfte endless variety of manifestations after creation: samsstdkaii-hhedair ar.arJa-bkeda-prakdro bhavati srsix-f>d!e £
See MaxtrX V 2
The Principal Upani$ads VII 26 2
sattva-iuddhi nature is pure The reference, according to S, is to the inner organ antahkaranasya sativasya iuddhir nairmalyam bhavah
Sanatkumara is said to be 'bhagavan,' as he conforms to the definition quoted by S
utpathm pralayam caiva bhiltanam agahm gatxm veth vidydtn avtdydm ca sa vacyo bhagavan iti
Sanatkumara points out that spiritual freedom is the basis of all action We reach it by stages The vision of the Divine, the Infinite, gives us happiness Other things which fall short of it are of little consequence The self, dtman, is the source of all things, whatsoever, hope, memory, space, light and water It is the source of all power, all knowledge, all happiness
vni 1 2.
Ckdndogya Upar.isad
CONCERNING THE NATURE OF THE SELF Section z
1 hank, aim. atha yad idat/i asmin brakma-pure dahararr. pu^dartkath vehna, daharo'str.ir.n antarakdsah, iasminyad arfah, tad anvestavyam, tad va va vipynasitavyatK.
1 Hank, aim. Now, here in this city of Brahman is an abode, a small lotus flower; within it is a small space. "What is within that should be sought, for that, assuredly, is what one should desire to understand.
dakaram: alpam, small. S\
pttriarlkam- pitrdariPa-sadrsam, like a lotus. £.
brakva-jmre- iarXrc, in the body. S\ The bodv is deva-sadam or the
temple of God.
vtpjr.asitavyam: saksat-fraranfyam, made an object of direct appre- hension S
In introducing this chapter £ points out that the speculative effort of Chapter VII, which establishes the identity of our self with the highest self is too much for ordinary people who are inclined to assume that the metaphysical realitv which is free from all deier- Bmations is as good as non-being:" dsg-deii-g:tr.a-gats-pkala-bkeda sur.yam hi paramarthasad adiayam brahtKa ir.arda-b'iddkir5n: asad iva pratibkalt Pure being; devoid of all determinations, is often in V, estern thought mistaken for non-being (asaf). Cp. Hegel's criticism of Spinoza's substance.
As ordinary people find it difficult to conceive of the Real as out <rt space and time, thev are taught to thirk of it as an object endowed wua qualities, living in the world and the human self. This know- ledge is to serve as a preparation for the higher knowledge.
2 tatk ced bhuyuh, yad idam asmir. brakir.a-pure daharam punaankam vesrra, daharo'smmr. arjarakasik, klm tad aira udyate yad anvestavyam, yad va va iijijr.5sitavya7K iti.
2. If they should say to him, with regard to this citv of ■Brahma and the abode and the small lotus flower and the small space within that, what is there that should be sousht for, or wat, assuredly, one should desire to understand?
The implication is that there is nothing there which one has to
^9 Z The Principal Upam'sads VIH. i. 5
search, ont or understand: kitn tad aira vidyaie na kin cana vidycda iiy aWiiprayah. S.
■f 3 sa brPyaf- yas an va aya m fibasah. tavan eso'nlarhrdava akaggh. aVhe asmin dyava-pHhivi anlar eva samahite, ubMv
• agnis'ca vayus ca svrya-candramasav ubhau, vidyun nahsalrani yao casyckasti yac ca. nasli sarvam tad asmin samahitam iti
3 He should say, as far, verily, as this (world) space extends, so far extends the space within the heart Within it, indeed, are contained both heaven and earth, both fire and air, both sun and moon, Kghtning and the stars. "Whatever there is of him in this world and whatever is not, all that is contained within it
The individnal is to be regarded as the world in miniature The world is the individual writ large.
in Buddhist thought Slaya-vijnana is the receptacle of all the latent possibilities of existence. hrd-Skaia answers to the alaya-vijnana "When the concrete manifestations are overcome by decay and death, their types are not destroyed along with them. The desires out of which they arise are preserved in the hrd-akasa. ■xhd is not: "What is no longer or not yet, the past and the future.
4. tarn ced bruyuk, asmiihs'cei idam brahma-pim sarvam samahiUah sarvagi ca bJiPtam sarve ca kamai} yadaitaj jara vapnmi fradhvaihsaie va, >.im fato'tiiisyata iti.
4. If they should say to him, if, within this city of Brahma, is contained all {that exists), all beings and all desires, then what is left of it when old age overtakes it or when it perishes?
5. sa iriiyai; nasya jarayaiiaj jiryati, na vadhenasya Mnyate. dot saiyam brahma-puram asmin kamaJt samahitah. esa atmd- pakaia-papma vijaro vimrlyvr visoko vijighatso'pipasah, sair- ya-kamah saija-samkalpah. yatha hy eieha praja anvavisanli yafJiaMisasana??;, yam yam antam abhik&ma bhavanh yam janapadam, yam kseira-bhagam, tarn torn evopajivaitii.
5. He should say, it (the self within) does not age with old age, it is not killed by the killing (of the body). That (and not the body) is the real city of Brahma. In it desires are contained. It is the self free from sin, free from old age, free from death, free from sorrow, free from hunger, free from thirst, whose desire is the real, whose thought is the reaL For, just as here on earth people follow in obedience to command (as they are commanded), of whatever object they are desirous, be it a country or a part of a field, on that the}- live dependent.
Our desires condition our future.
Chdndogya Upanisad
6 tad yatheha karma-jito lokah ksiyate, evam evamidra pun~ ya-jxto lokah ksiyaie tad ya iliatmanam ananuvidya vrajanty etams ca satyan kaman, tesdm sarvesu lokesv akama-caro bhavati atha ya ihdtmdnam anuvidya vrajanty etami ca satyan kaman, tesdm sarvesu lokesu kama-caro bhavati.
6. As here on earth the world which is earned by work perishes, even so there the world which is earned by merit (derived from the performance of sacrifices) perishes Those who depart hence -without having found here the self and those real desires, for them there is no freedom in all the worlds But those who depart hence, having found here the self and those real desires— for them in all worlds there is freedom.
akama-caro' svatantratd. S
kama-caro bhavati r&jna tva sarvabhaumasyehaloke He has like a King complete sovereignty in the world. !■> 'Seeing the self im- partially m all beings and all beings in the self, the aima-yaji obtains autonomy/ Mami XII 91, see also B G VI. 29
1 sa yadt pitr-loka-kamo bltavati samkalpad evdsya pxtarah samuttisthanti, tena pitr-lokena sampanno mahiyate
1 If he becomes desirous of the world of the fathers, by his mere thought, fathers arise Possessed of the world of fathers he is happy.
Out of these kamas or desires, out of samkalpas or formative tendencies, the desired spheres are fashioned mliiyale pajyate vardliate va mahtmanam amibhavatu S\
2 athayadi mdtr-hka-kamo bhavati, samkalpad evdsya maiarah samuttistlianh, tern matr-lokena sampanno mahiyate
2 And so if he becomes desirous of the world of mothers, oy tas mere thought, mothers arise Possessed of that world of mothers he is happy
hI *-. at,t f y aiv bhrair-loka-kamo bhavati, samkalpad evdsya onratarah samuttisthanti, tena bhrdtr-lokena sampanno mahiyate.
3 And if he becomes desirous of the world of brothers, out
494 The Principal Upantsads VIII 2. 10.
of his mere thought brothers arise Possessed of that world of brothers he is happy
4, aiha yadt svasr-loka-kamo bhavati, samkalpad evasya svasarah samuthslhantt, Una svasr-hkena sampanno mahiyate
4. And if he becomes desirous of the world of sisters, out of his mere thought, sisters arise Possessed of that world of sisters he is happy
5 atha yadt sakhi-hka-kdmo bhavah, samkalpad evasya sak- hayah samuttisthanU Una sakhi-lokena sampanno mahiyate
5 And if he becomes desirous of the world of friends, out of his mere thought, friends arise Possessed of that world of fnends he is happy
6 aiha yadt gandha-malya-loka-kdmo bhavah samkalpad evasya gandhamalye samuttisthatah, Una gandha-malya-lokena sampanno mahiyaU
6. And if he becomes desirous of the world of perfumes and garlands, out of his mere thought, perfumes and garlands arise Possessed of that world of perfumes and garlands he is happy.
7 atha yadt anna-pana-loka-kamo bhavah, samkalpad evasyan- iXa-pane samuttisthatah, Una anna-pana-lokena sampanno mahi- yate
7 And if he becomes desirous of the world of food and dnnk, out of his mere thought, food and dnnk arise Possessed of that world of food and drink he is happy
8. atha yadt gita-vadtta-loka-kamo bhavati, samkalpad evasya gita-vadtU samuttisthatah, Una gtta-vadtta-lokena sampanno mahiyaU
8 And if he becomes desirous of the world of song and music, out of his mere thought, song and music arise Possessed of that world of song and music he is happy
9 atha yadt stri-loka-kamo bhavah, samkalpad evasya stnyah samutttsthantt, Una stri-lokena sampanno mahiyaU
9 And if he becomes desirous of the world of women, out of his mere thought, women arise Possessed of that world of women he is happy
10 yam yam antam abhikdmo bhavah, yam kdmam kamayaie, so'sya samkalpad eva samuttisthah, Una sampanno mahiyate.
io. Of whatever object he becomes desirous, whatever desire he desires, out of his mere thought it arises. Possessed of it he is happy.
antam object, pradesatn S
1 to. ime saiydh kamah anrtaptdhanah, tesam satyanam satfim anrtam apidhanam. yoyo hy asyetahpraiti, m tarn iha daiianaya labliate
1. These same are true desires, with a covering of what is false Although the desires are true there is a covering that is false. For whosoever of one's (fellows) departs hence, one does not get him (back) to see here
2 atha ye casyeha jiva ye ca pretd yac canyad whan nq labhate, sarvam tad atra gatva vmdate, atra hi asyaite saiydh kdmdh anrtapidhandh, tad yatha.pt hiranya-nidhim mhitam aksetrajM upary upan saficaranto na vmdeyufy, evam evemdh sarvdhprajd ahar aJiar gacchantya etam brahma-lokam na vindanU, anrtena hi pratyudhah
2. But those of one's (fellows) whether they are alive or whether they have departed and whatever else one desires but does not get, all this one finds by going in there (into one's own self) , for here, indeed, are those true desires of his with a covering of what is false. Just as those who do not know the field walk again and again over the hidden treasure of gold and do not find it, even so all creatures here go day after day mto the Brahma-world and yet do not find it, for they are earned away by untruth
All desires find their fulfilment in the self The city of Brahma is
\v j 0ne s heart wnere we 0311 possess all our desires ,.):? daily get into the Brahma-world while we are asleep: hrdaya- Wakhyam brahma-lokam ahar ahali pratyaham gaccJiantyo'pi susnpta- kai ^avinianlinalalhantet.
~f ena ' *? v f ^sehood Ramanuja interprets jia to mean disinterested work 1 ' ^ ** 5 " m5 " ra '" te -* 8ma ^ *"rto as its opposite, selfish
496 The Principal Upanisads VIII 3 5
satya and anrta are not two coexistent factors but two alternative manifestations of a common factor of the hrd-akasa or vijnana, its two orientations upward and downward
3 Verify; that self is (abides) in the heart Of it the etymological explanation is this This one is in the heart, thereof it is the heart. He who knows this goes day by day into the heavenly world.
In deep sleep one gets into the Brahman of the heart. One has to realise the self in one's heart hrdaya-ndma mrvacana prastddhyapi sva-hrdaya aimsiy aiaganfavyam S.
4. aiha ya esa samprasddo'smdc-charTrat samuttliaya param jyotir upasampadya svena rupenabhinispadyate, esa atmett hovaca, dad amriam abhayam, etad brahmeti; tasya ha va etasya brahmano nama saiyam iti
4 Now that serene being, rising out of this body, and reaching the highest light appears in his own form He is the self, said he (when asked by the pupils). That is the immortal, the fearless That is Brahman Verify, the name of that Brahman is the True
sartrai samutthSya- rising out of the body giving up the notion of the identity of the self with the bod}', sanratma-bhavandm pani- yajyety arihah S
5 iani ha va etani irlny aksarani sat-ti-yam iti; tad yat sat tad amriam, aiha yat ti tan martyam, atha yad yam iendbhe yacchait yad anenobhe yacchaii tasmad yam, ahar altar va evam vit svargam lokam eti.
5 Verily, these are the three syllables sat, ti, yam The sat, that is the immortaL The ti, that is the mortal The yaw:, with it one holds the two together. Because with it one holds the two together therefore it is yam. He who knows this goes day by day into the heavenly world.
For another explanation of the word satyam, see B U. V 5 I vaccJiair holds together, yamayatt, myamayatt, vasikaroti S The eternal and the temporal are bound together. There is no suggestion that the mortal is illusory.
YHI. 4. 3. CkdrAogya UparJsad z<yj
1 atka ya atma, sa stiur vidkrtir esdrh iakanatn asmribkedaya r.aitam sdum akordtrs iaratah, r.a jam na v.riyttr na iota na sakrtam, r,a duskriam, sarac pdptr.dno 'fo rAvartarAe, apihaia- faptrd hy esa brakma-lokak.
1 Now the self is the bridge, the (separating) boundary for keeping these worlds apart. Over that bridge day and night do not cross, nor old age nor death, nor sorrow, nor well-doing nor Si-doing. All evils turn back from it for the Brahma-world is freed from evil.
See Katha III. 2, M.U. II. 2. 5.
Day and night are the factors of time, the determinants of the mortality of all things under the sun.
2. tasmdd va dark s&im ttrtvdr.dkak sann anarAko bkavafi, nddkak sann aviddko bkavaii, upazdpT sar.r. ar.npatdpi bkarsti. tasmad va dam setuth iirtvdpi naktam akar ecdbkinispadysie, sdhd itbkata hy evaisa brakma-hkak.
2. Therefore, verily, on crossing* that bridge, if one is blind r he becomes no longer blind, if wounded, he becomes no longer
tkat Brahma-world is ever-ifctmined.
See III. ir. 3.
, ^J™ crosses the bridge and gets to the other snore, the troubles of the world cease. Eckhart savs: 'There neither virtue nor «ce ever entered in.*
sshi vibkatak- ever-fflumined, soda vibkatak, sadaikarapak. $.
3- *W ya ecaitam brakma-Iokam brakmacaryerArwdndarti , &am evaisa brakma-lokak, fesdth sarvestc lakestc kdixa-cdrobkavtf:.
3 But only they find that Brahma-world who practise the ^apaned fife 0 f a student of sacred knowledge; onlv thev possess that Brahma-world. For them there is unlimited freedom in ail worlds.
498 The Principal Upamsads VIII 5 3
I alha yad yajna ity dcaksate brahmacaryam eva tat, brahma- caryena hy eva yo jndta tarn vindate atha yad islam ity dcaksate, brahmacaryam eva tat, brahmacaryena hy eveslvatmdnam anu- viiulatc
1 Now, what people call sacrifice as really the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge Only by the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge does he who knows obtain that (world) Now what people call 'What has been sacrificed' is really the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge, for only by sacrificing with the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge does one obtain the self
2 atha yat sattrdyanam ity Seagate brahmacaryam eva tat, brahmacaryena hy eva sata dtmanas trdnam vindate atha yan maunam ity dcaksate brahmacaryam eva tat, brahmacaryena hy evdtmdnam anuvidya manute
2 Now what people call the protracted sacrifice {sattr- dyanam) is really the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge Only by the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge does one obtain the protection of the real self. Now what people call the vow of silence is really the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge, for only by finding out the self through the disciplined life of a student of sacred know- ledge does one (really) meditate
protection of the self satah parasmdd dtmana dtmanas trdnam rak- sanam S
manute dhydyalt £
3 atha yad andiakdyanam ity dcaksate brahmacaryam eva tat, esa hy atmd na nasyatt yam brdhmacaryendnuvindate; atha yad aranydyanam ity dcaksate brahmacaryam eva tat tad aras' ca ha vai nyai cdrnavau brahma-loke trtiyasydm tto dm, tad airam madiyam sarah, tad a&vatthali sotna-savanah, tad apardjitd pur brahmanah, prabhuvimitam hiranmayam
3 Now what people call a course of fasting is really tiie disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge, for the self which one finds by the disciplined hfe of a student of sacred knowledge does not pensh Now what people call the hfe at a hermit is really the disciplined life of a student of sacred
VIII 6. 1. Chdndogya Upanisad 499
knowledge. Venly, ara and nya are the two seas in the Brahma- world in the third heaven from here. And there is the lake Airammadiya and there the tree showering Soma, there is the city of Brahman Apardpid and the golden hall built by the Lord.
anaiakayamm. a course of fasting It may also mean entrance into the unpenshing, a-nasaka-ayana
In the K.U I 3, the sea is called ara, according to S, apardpta is not a city but a resting-place, ayatana
This section advocates not only the need for brahmacarya but also the equivalence of certain sacrifices to brahmacarya This equivalence is established by ingenious etymological explanations Yajfia or 'sacrifice ' and y opioid ' he who knows ' have a certain simi- lanty. Similarly tsta, another land of sacrifice, has something in common with esana or 'search '
sattrayana with sat, the true and irdyana or protection, manna silence with mamna, meditation, andiakayana with the unpenshing from «a£ to pensh, aranydyana with ara and ijya, the two seas which are said to exist in the world of Brahma
4 tadyaevaitdv aram ca nyam camavau brahma-loke brahma- caryendmtvindanU, tesam evatsa brahma-lokah tesdth sarvesu lokesti kdma-cdro bhavatt.
4 Only they who find the two seas Ara and Nya in the Brahma-world through the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge, only they possess the Brahma-world. In all the worlds they possess unlimited freedom.
All these fulfilled desires mentioned in sections 2-5 are real at weir own level They are not to be dismissed as false or unreal Even aw™ im 5 unreal onI y m relation to what we see when we are awake. What we see m waking experience is not altogether unreal for it is based on the real.
/fsL»f ff /f; m fydayasya nddyas, tdh pmgalasyanimnas iuZt 1 * itMas y a nilasya pltasya lohitasyeti asau vd adityah r *sam, esa Suklah, esa nilah, esa pxtah, esa lohttah.
• ftow as for these arteries (channels) of the heart, they
5oo The Principal Upamsads VIII. 6 5
consist of a fine substance which is reddish-brown, white, blue, yellow and red Venly, the sun yonder is reddish-brow, he is white, he is blue, he is yellow, he is red
2 tad yathd mahdpatha dtata ubhau grdmau gacchatwiam camum ca, evam evaita ddityasya raiviaya ubhau lokau gac- chaiitimam camum ca, amusmad ddityat pratayante ta asu nddtsu srptdh, dbhyo nadibhyah piatdyante ie'mitsmmn ddityc srptdh
2 Even as a great extending highway runs between two villages, this one and that yonder, even so these rays of the sun go to both these worlds, this one and that yonder They start from the yonder sun and enter into these arteries They start from these arteries and enter into the yonder sun
3 tad yatrattat suptak samastah samprasannah saapnam 11a vijanah asu tada nddtsu srpto bhavah, tarn na kaicana pdpmd spriah, tejasa hi tada sampanno bhavah
3 And when one is thus sound asleep, composed, serene (so that) he knows no dream, then he has entered mto these channels, so no evil touches him for then he has obtained the light (of the sun)
samastah composed, ttpasamhrta-sarva-karana-vrttth 5
samprasannah serene, bdhya-visaya-samparka-jamta-kdlusyabMvSt
samyak prasannah samprasamiah §
svapnam dream, visayakarabhasam manasam S
tejas light saura-tejah The light of the sun §
No evil touches him because he gets mto his own nature* sva-rupa- vasthitalvat dehendriya-msistam hi sukha-duhkha-kdtya-praddnena papmd sprsatiti 11a Ut satsampannam sva-riipdvasUiam 5
4 atha yatrattad abahmdnav'i mto bhavah, tarn abhita dsina dhuh jdndst mam, jaiidsi mam, ih, sa ydvad asmdccharirdd amttkrdnto bhavah, tdvaj janati
4 And now, when one thus becomes weak (falls ill), those who sit around him say, Do you know me? Do you know me? As long as he has not departed from this body, he knows them
5 atha yatraitad asmdccliarTrdd utkrdmah, athaitair eaa ratmibhvr urdhvam dkramate, sa aum tfo vd ha ut vd mlyate sa ydvat ksipyen manah, tdvad ddityam gacchah etad vai khalw loka-dvdram vidusdm prapadanam, mrodho'mdusdm
5 But when he thus departs from this body, then he goes upwards by these very rays or he goes up with the thought of aum As his mind is failing, he goes to the sun That, venly,
Vm. 7. 2. Chdndogya Upanisad
is the gateway of the world, an entering in for the knowers a shutting out for the non-knowers.
ksipyen manah. As his mind is failing: sometimes rendered 'as quickly as one could direct his mind to if: y avoid telenet manasah ksepah syai tavaia kdlenadttyam gacchaii, ksipram gacchatUy ariho na tu tauataxva kaleneh vivaksitam S
Saturn caika ca hrdayasya nadyah
tasam murdhdnam abhimhsrtatkd
tayordhvam dyann amrtatvam eti
m^vann anya utkramane bhavanti, utkramane bhavanti. 6. On this there is this verse
A hundred and one are the arteries of the heart, one of them leads up to the crown of the head. Going upward through that, one becomes immortal: the others serve for going in various other directions, for going in various other directions.
See Katha II. 3. 6.
PRAJA-PATI'S INSTRUCTION TO INDRA CONCERNING THE REAL SELF
*'.y a & mS - apahata-papma vijaro vimrtyur viioko vtpghatso' ptpasah satya-kamah satya-samkalpah, so'nvestavyah, so vijijnasi- tavyah sa sarvSihi ca lakdn apnoti sarvaihS ca kaman. yas torn ■atmaitam anitvidya vijanati: iti ha praja-pattr uvdea
1. The self which is free from evil, free from old age, free «om death, free from grief, free from hunger and thirst, whose ofiare is the real, whose thought is the real, he should be
0ne should desire t0 ^"ferstand. He who has found ow and. who understands that self, he obtains all worlds and all desires Thus spoke Prajd-pati.
hobha y e dwasura anububttdhire. te hocuh; hanta tarn MVKehama, yam atmanam anvisya sarvami ca lakdn *5 r ™ W ^ ca kaman iti, tniro hatva deoanam abhipravawaja wroM« os « r a ? aw. iau M samvidandv eva samii-bani p r ai&4a- "-sakasam djagmatuh. ' e J e
5 02 The Principal Upanisads VIII 7. 4
let us seek that self, the self by seeking whom one obtains all worlds and all desires ' Then Indra from among the gods went forth unto him and Virocana from among the demons Then without communicating with each other, the two came mto the presence of Prajd-pati, fuel in hand
fuel in hand, it is the custom for pupils approaching the master
3 tau ha dvatrim&atam varsani brahmacaiyam iisatuJr tau ha piajd-patir uvdca, kim icchantav avdstam iti tau hocaiuh, ya dtmdpahatapdpmd vijaio vimrtyur visoko vipghatso'pipasah satya-kamah satya-samkalpah so'nvestavyah-sa vyijndsitavyali, sa sarvdms ca lokan apnoti saroams ca toman, yas tarn atmanam anuvidya vijanati ih bhagavato vaco vedayante. tarn tcchantdv avdstam iti
3 For thirty-two years the two lived there the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge. Then Prajd-patt asked them, 'Desiring what have you been living?' The two said, 'The self which is free from evil, free from old age, free from death, free from gnef, free from hunger and thirst, whose desire is the real, whose thought is the real He should be sought, him one should desire to understand He who has found out, he who understands that self he obtains all worlds and all desires ' These people declare to be your word, Venerable Sir, desiring him we have been living.
4 tau ha prajdpattr uvdca, ya cso'ksim puruso driyaia esa atmeti hovaca, etad amrtam dbhayam etad brahmeh; athayo'yam, bhagavah, apsu paiihhyayate yascayam ddaisc katama esa ih esa u cvaisti sarvesv antcsu panhhyayate iti hovaca
4 Prajd-paii said to the two, 'The person that is seen in the eye, that is the self/ said he "That is the immortal, the fearless That is Brahman ' 'But, Venerable Sir, he who is perceived in water and in a mirror, who is he ? ' He replied, 'The same one, indeed, is perceived in all these '
While Prajd-pali means by the self the subject of all seeing, Indra and Virocana mistake the self for the person that is seen, not the person that sees See Toga Sutra II 6 The person seen m the eje is the figure imaged in the eye, and they ask whether the image that is seen in the water and in the mirror is the self At this stage the pupils confuse the true self with the body
1 ttda-sarava atmanam aveksya yad aimano na vijdmthah, tan me prabrutam iti tati lioda-sarave 'veksamcakrdte tan ha prajd- paiir uvaca- hm pas'yatfta iti; tan hocatuh, sarvam evedam avam, bhagavah, atmanam pasydva, a lomabhya a nakhebhyahpratirupam iti
1. Look at your self in a pan of water and whatever you do not understand of the self, tell me. Then the two looked in a pan of water Then Praja-paU said to the two, 'What do you see?' Then the two said, 'We both see the self thus altogether, Venerable Sir, a picture even to the very hairs and nails.'
The body is subject to change and cannot therefore be the self which is said to be unchanging loma-nakhddivac charirasyapy aganiapayitvam stddham S
2 tau ha prajd-paiir uvaca, sadhv alankrtau suvasanau panskrtau bhutvoda-sardv&'veksethdm iti tau ha sadhv alankrtau suvasanau pariskrtdu bhutvoda-sdrave'veksdm cakrdte tau ha prafi-patir uvaca- kim pasyatha ih
2 Then Prajd-pati said to the two, after you have well adorned yourselves, put on your best clothes, make yourselves tidy, look into the pan of water. Then the two adorned them- selves well, put on their best clothes and made themselves tidy and looked into the pan of water Then Prajd-pah said to the two, 'What do you see?'
tw B 1 ^ ustratl0n Points out that bodily changes are as external to the true ^jf ^ c i ot hes and ornaments are They belong to the not- self, analman
3 tau hocatuh, yathavuedam avdm, bhagavah, sadhv alankrtau suvasanau panskrtau svah, evam eocmau, bhagavah, sadhv alankrtau suvasanau panskrtdv ih; esdtmeli hovdca, ctadamrtam, aofiayam ctad brahmch tau ha idnta-hrdayau pravavrajattth.
u a 1. two SJud * 'J ust 325 we are > Venerable Sir, well adorned, witii our best clothes and tidy, thus we see both these, Venerable irii , * dorned ' with our ^St dothes and tidy.' 'That is the TK« S u a * That 1S the immortal, the fearless, that isBrahman.' *nej both went away with a tranquil heart.
4 tau hdnviksya praja-pahr uvaca, anupalabhyStmamm
504 The Principal Vpanisads VIII g r
ananuvtdya vyajatah yatara clad upam$ado bhavisyanh dcva vd asura vd, te pardbhavisyantxti sa lia sdnia-hdaya cva viiocano' suraii jagama tebhyo hattarn upamsadam piovdca, atmaxvcha mahayyah atmdpariccuyah, dtmdnam evaiha mahayann atmanam paricarann ubhau lokdv dpnotimdm camum ccU
4 Then Praja-pah looked at them and said, they go away without having perceived, without having known the self Whosoever will follow such a doctrine, be they gods or demons they shall perish Then Virocana with a tranquil heart went to the demons and declared that doctrine, one's (bodily) self is to be made happy here, one's (bodily) self is to be served He who makes his own self happy here and he who serves his own self, he obtains both worlds, this world and the yonder
5. lasmad apy adyaihddaddnam asraddadhdnam ayajamdnam ahttk, dsuro batett, asurdmm hy esopamsat prctasya sariram bhik§aya vasanendlankdreneh samskurvanti, etcm hy amumlokam lesyanto manyantc
5 Therefore even here they say of one who is not a giver, who has no faith, who does not offer sacrifices, that he is a demon, for this is the doctrine of the demons They adorn the body of the deceased with what they have begged, with clothes and with ornaments, and think that thereby they will win the yonder world
bhtksaya with perfumes, flowers, etc , which they have begged gandha-malydnnddi-laksanayd
1. atha hcndro'prdpyatva devdn clad bhayam dadarsa, yathaiva khalv ayam asmtn sarire sddhvalankrle sddhv alankrlo bhavah, suvasanc suvasanah, pan$kric panskriah, cvam cvdyam asmvm andhc'ndho bhavatt, srdmc sTdmah.parivrknepanvrhnah, asyaiya sarirasya r.Ssam anv csa nasyalt, ndham alra bhogyam pafydmtlt
1 But Indra, even before reaching the gods saw this danger Even as this self (the bodily self) is well adorned when this body is well adorned, well "dressed when the body is well
VIII io i CMndogya Upanisad 5°5
dressed, tidy when the body is tidy, that self will also be blind when the body is blind, lame when the body is lame, crippled when the body is crippled. It perishes immediately when the body perishes. I see no good m this
srdmah one-eyed, eka-neira §
bhogyam. good, literally what is enjoyable
2. sa samti, pdmh punar eyaya, tarn to prajd-pahr itvdca, maghavan, yac chdnta-hrdayahprdvrdjih sdrdham mrocanena, Mm xcchan pimar dgama th sa hovdca yathavoa khalv ay am, bhagavah: asmtn ianre sadhv alankrte sadhv alankrto btovah, suvasane suvasanah, panskrte panskriah evam evdyam asminn andhe'iidho Wwroati, srame srdmah, panvrkno panvrhiah, asyavoa iarirasya iidsam am esa iiatyah, ndtom aim bhogyam pasyanviti '
2. He came back again with fuel in hand. To him Prajd-paii said, 'Desiring what, 0 Maghavan, have you come back, since you along with Virocana went away with a tranquil heart?' Then he said, 'Even as this self (the bodily self) is well adorned when this body is well adorned, well dressed when the body is well dressed, tidy when the body is tidy, that self will also be blind when the body is blind, lame when the body is lame, crippled when the body is crippled. It perishes immediately, when the body perishes. I see no good m this '
Indra evidently was not satisfied with the theory of the self as body
prdvrSjlh pragatavan asi 5
t 3 evam evaisa, maghavan, ttv hovdca, etam tv eva, te bhuyo nuvydkhydsydvn; vasapardm dvdtnmsatam varsaniti sa hdpa-
ram dvdtrimsatam vaisany uvdsa, tasmai hovdca
3 'So is he indeed, 0 Maghavan ' Said he (Prajd-pati). However, I will explain this further to you Live with me
another thirty-two years' Then he lived with him another
thirty-two years To him he then said:
I ya csa svapnc malnyamdnas carah esa alma, iti hovdca "ft amrtam abhayam, dad brahneh. sa to idnta-hrdayah pra-
5o6 The Principal Upantsads VIII 10 4
vavraja, sa haprapyaiva devan dad bhayam dadarsa, tad yady, apidam sariram andham bhavati, anandhah sa bhavah, yad'i sramam asramah, naivaiso 'sya dosena dusyati
1 He who moves about happy m a dream, he is the self, said he, he is the immortal, the fearless He is Brahman Then he went forth with a tranquil heart But even before reaching the gods he saw this danger Even though this self is not blind (when the body) is blind, is not lame (when the body) is lame, though he does not suffer defects from the defects (of the body)
mahiyamanah (moves) happy
aneka-vidhan svaflntz-bhogan anubhavah § He experiences different kinds of satisfaction in a dream
• The dreaming self does not suffer from the defects of the body nawaisa svapnatmasya dehasya dosena dusyati S
2 na vadhenasya hanyate, nasya sramyena sramah, ghnanti
iv evatnam, vicchddayanttvdpriyavetteva bhavati, api rodttiva, naham atra bhogyam pasydmiti
2 He is not slam (when the body) is slain He is not one-eyed (when the body) is one-eyed, yet it is as if they kill him, as if they unclothe him He comes to experience as it were what is unpleasant, he even weeps as it were I see no good in this
vtcchadayantt unclothe, from the root chad
v vicchayayanti tear to pieces See B U IV 3 20 Even the dreaming self is subject to pleasure and pain
3 sa samit-pamh punar eydya tarn ha prajd-pahr uvaca maghavan,yac chdnta-hrdayahprdvrdjih, kim icchan punar agama tti sa hovdca, tad yady apidam, bhagavah, Sanram andham bhavati, anandhah sa bhavati, yadi sramam asramah, naivaiso' sya dosena dusyati
3 He came back again with fuel m hand to him Prajd-patt said, 'Desinng what, 0 Maghavan, have you come back since you went away with a tranquil heart?' Then he said, 'Venerable Sir, even though this self is not blind (when the body) is blind, lame (when the body) is lame, even though he does not suffer defects from the defects of the body
4 na vadhenasya hanyate, nasya sramyena sramah, ghnanti iv evamam viccMdayantiva apnyavettaiva bhavati, api rodttiva, naham atra bhogyam pasyamiti, evam evatsa, maghavan, iti hovdca etam tv eva te bhuyo' nuvyakhydsydmi vasapardm
VIII II 2 Chdndogya Upamsad
ivatnmsatam varsanUi. sa haparayi dvatntniatam varsdny uvasa, tastmi hovaca.
4 'He is not slain (when the body) is slain He is not lame (when the body) is lame, yet it is as if they kill him, as if they unclothe him He comes to experience as it were what is unpleasant, he even weeps as it were I see no good in this ' 'So is he indeed, 0 Maghavan,' said he {Prajd-pah) 'However, I will explain this farther to you Live with me another thirty- two years.' Then he lived with him another thirty-two years. To Mm he then said
In these two stages the self experiences either external or internal objects, but m the next stage the self exists without the experience of objects, external or internal.
iad yatraitat suptah samastah samprasamah svapnam na < vyanati, esa dtmeti hovaca, etad amrtam abhayam dad brahmeh sa Jia iaiiia-hrdayak pravavrdja, sa Mprdpyaiva devdn dad bhayam dadaria, nalw, kJis.lv ayam evam sampraty atmanam jotottit, ayam aham asmiti, no evemdnt bhutdni, vindsam evdpito bhavah, vdham atra bhogyam pasyamitt.
1 When a man is asleep, composed, serene, and knows no dream, that is the self, said he, that is the immortal, the fearless That is Brahman. Then he went forth with tranquil heart Even before reaching the gods he saw this danger. In truth this one does not know himself that 'I am he,' nor indeed «ie things here. He has become one who has gone to annihilation I see no good m this
Indra feels that if there are no objects of which we are conscious, even the subject becomes destroyed
2. sa samit-panth punar eydya. tarn ha praja-pahr uvdca, ^Snavan.yacchdnta-hrdayahpravrdjih, kim icchan punar agama -! - sa hwfca- naha khalv ayam, bkagavah, evam sampraty a ™MM>tj$natt, ayam aham asmitt, 110 evemdm bhittdm vmasam evapito bhavah, naham atra bhogyam pasyamitt.
2 He came back again with fuel in hand To him Prajd-patt
5o8
The Principal Upantsads
said, 'Desiring what, O Maghavan, have you come back, since you went away with a tranquil heart?' Then he said, 'Venerable Sir, in truth this one does not know himself that I am he, nor indeed the things here He has become one who has gone to annihilation. I see no good in this '
The self is not the undifferenced consciousness of deep sleep It is the false infinite Quietistic trance is not final freedom
3 mam evai?a, maghavan, th hovaca, etam tv eva te bhuyo' nuvydkhydsydmi, no evdnyatraitasmdt, vasdpardm paika var- sdniti sa hdpardni panca varsdny uvdsa tdny eka.~ia.tam sam- peduh eiat tad yad, ahuh eka-iatam, ha vox varsdm maghavan pva.jdpa.iau brahrnacaryam uvdsa tasmai hovaca
3 So is he, indeed, 0 Maghavan, said he However, I will explain this further to you and there is nothing else besides this Live with me for another five years Then he lived with him for another five years That makes one hundred and one years and so people say that, verily, for one hundred and one years Maghavan hved with Prajd-pati the disciplined life of a student of sacred knowledge To him (Indra) (Prajd-pati) then said
there is nothing else besides this' it is the highest self
I maghavan, martyam vd idam sariram dttam mrtyund, tad asydmrtasydsarirasyatmano'dhisthdnam, aito vai sasanrah, pnydpnyabhydm, na vai sas'anrasya satah pnydpriyayor apahatir ash, aianram vd va santam na pnyapnye sprMak
^ i 0 Maghavan, mortal, venly, is this body It is held by death But it is the support of that deathless, bodiless self
j./'tVenly, the incarnate self is held by pleasure and pain Venly, tfiere is no freedom from pleasure and pain for one who is
A incarnate Venly, pleasure and pain do not touch one who is bodiless ^•SmYVmYX'^
2. aianro vayuh, abhram, vtdyut, stanayitnur aiarlrdny Mm tad yathaitdny amusmdd dkasat samittthdya param jyolir upa- sampadya svena soma rupendbhimspadyante
VIII 12. 6. Chdndogya Upamsad 509
2 Bodiless is air, clouds, lightning, thunder, these are bodi- less Now as these, when they arise from yonder space and reach the highest light appear each with its own form
3. evam evaisa samprasado'smdc chanrat samutthdya param jyoUr upasampadya svena rupenabhtmspadyate, sa uttamali piirusah, sa tatra paryeh, jaksat kridan ramamanah stnbhir va yanatr va jnahbhir vd nopajanam smarann idam Sanram: sa yatha prayogya acarane yuhtah, evam evdyam asmtn Sartre frano yitMah.
3 Even so that serene one when he rises up from this body and reaches the highest light appears m his own form Such a person is the Supreme Person There such a one moves about, laughing, playing, rejoicing with women, chariots or relations, not remembering the appendage of this body As an ammal is attached to a cart so is hie attached to this body.
The self enjoys these pleasures as an inward spectator only and does not identify itself with them The spirit is pined to the body as a horse to the cart The relation is external, dehddvoilahsanam almano rupam S. See S B IV 4 1.
4 aiha yairattad dkdiam anu-visaipjiam caksuk, sa caksusah purusah darfanaya caksuh; atlia yo veda idam jighrdmh, sa alma gandhaya gkrdnam, atha yo veda' xdam abhvydltaramh sa abna, abhivydharaya vak, atha yo veda, idam irnavdnUi, sa atma, iravanaya, frotram
4 Now when the eye is thus turned to space, that is the seeing person, the eye is for seeing Now he knows 'let me smell this, that is the self, the nose is for smelhng Now he who knows let me utter this,' that is the self, the voice is for uttering Ww he who knows 'let me hear this' that is the self, the ear is for hearing
The perceiver is the self, the sense organs are the instruments for perception
5 aiha yo veda; idam manvdmti sa atma, mano'sya daivaih catsuit, sa va esa etena datvena caksusd manasattan kamdii pttiyan ramate.
m ,L N ° w J? e who knows ' let me thmk this « he is the seI *. the SZJfi.. J * vme ^ He > venJ y> seein S ttese pleasures ranragh his divine eye, the mind rejoices
6- ya etc brahma-hke tarn va etam deva atmdnam upasate, tasmal
5io The Principal Upam§ads VIII 13. 1
te$am sarve ca fokd attah sarve ca kamah, sa sarvami ca lokan apnott sarvami ca kdmdn, yas tarn atmanam anuvidya vijdndh, th ha prajapattr uvaca, prajapattr uvaca
6. Venly, these gods who are in the Brahma-world meditate on that self Therefore all worlds and all desires are held by them He obtains all worlds and all desires who finds the self and understands it. Thus spoke Prajd-patt, yea, thus spoke Praja-pati
attah held, obtained, praptdh &
In this account we have a progressive spintuahsation of the idea of self. The highest knowledge is not to be snatched at one leap It is acquired as the result of methodical endeavour, steady deepen- ing of the mind The essence of the psychical self consists in a directedness to the object of consciousness, its intentionality We begin with the physical individual, the sensuous outlook, the demoniacal view Slowly there is the lnturning of the mind, a direction to the phenomena of dream and dreamless sleep Introspection is guided towards the idea of the self Atman is the highest self The journey ends in pure spirit, the subject of knowledge which is continuous despite the shutting off of consciousness, which is exalted above waking and sleeping
A P^AN OF THE PERFECTED SOUL
1 iyamac chabalam prapadye, iabaldc chydmam prapadye aha tva romdm vidhuya pdpam, candra iva rahor mukhat pramucya dhiitva forworn, akrtam krtatma brahmalokam abhi- sambhavamt, abhtsambhavamt
1 From the dark I pass to the van-coloured, from the van- coloured I pass to the dark Shaking off evil as a horse his hairs, shaking off the body as the moon frees itself from the mouth of Rahu, I a perfected soul obtain the uncreated Brahma- world, yea, I obtain it
The sun and the moon are treated as the dogs of Yama, Syama the moon dog and Sabala the sun dog We must run past these two heavenly bodies coursing across the sky to get to the blessed abode of light See also KU I 2 2 In the RV it is said that Yama sends forth two dogs, his messengers who search out among men those
who have to join the Fathers. X 14. 10-12, Plato's house has a janitor
In Indian mythology a lunar eclipse is caused by the demon Rahu's attempt to swallow the moon
1. akaio vat noma nama-rupayor nvroahita, teyad antard, tad brsh»ta,tadam^m,saat>}id,prajd-patehsabhdmveh>iaprapadye, yaso 'ham bhavdmi brahmanandm, yaio rajMm, yaso viiam yaso'ham anuprdpatsv sa haham yaiasdmyasah' syetam adatkam adatkam iyetam hndu mabhigdm, lindu mabhigdm
1 Verily, what is called space is the determined of name and form That within which they are is the Brahman, that is the immortal, that is the self I pass to Praja-pah's assembly- hall and abode I am the glory of the Brahmanas, the glory of the princes, the glory of the people. I have obtained glory. I am the glory of the glones. May I never go to the white, toothless, to the toothless, white, devouring, may I never go to it
ahasa space It is used as a name of the Supreme, because like space, Braliman has no body and is subtle, asanralvat suksmatvac ca 5
Brahman is untouched by concrete existences though they are all sustained by it.
The three castes of Brahmana, raj an and vii, are mentioned here. mabhigam mgbhgaccheyam S"
1 tadd Jmttad brahmS. prajdpataya itvaca, praja-patir manave, wnultprajabhyah acatya-kalad vedam a&hltya yathd-vidhanam, ft, s? m ( krtv ^ ahsesejia abhisamavrlya, kultimbe sthttvd,
au dcie w&dhyayam adhiydnah, dhdnmkan vidadhat, atmani
The Principal Upanisads VIII 15 1
sarvendnyam sampraiisthapya, aliimsan sarva-bhiifany anyaira ththebhyah, sa kJialv cvam vartayan yavad ayusam brahma-hkam abhisampadyatc, 11a ca punar avariatc, na ca pumr avartatc.
1 This Brahma told to Praja-patt , Praja-pati to Mann, Manu to mankind He who has learned the Veda from the f amily of a teacher according to rule, in the time left over from doing work for the teacher, he, who after having come back again, settles down in a home of his own, continues the study of what he has learnt and has virtuous sons, he who concentrates all his senses in the self, who practises non-hatred to all creatures except at holy places, he who behaves thus throughout his life reaches the Brahma-world, does not return hither again, yea, he does not return hither again.
dJiarmika' virtuous sons and pupils. putran sisyams ca dharma-yuklan S
anyatra ttrthebhyah except at holy places § makes out that even travelling as a mendicant causes pain, but a mendicant is allowed to beg for alms at sacred places bhksa-mimtiam atowdtnapi paraptda syat
The Attareya Upanisad belongs to the Rg Veda and the Upanisad proper consists of three chapters This is part of the Attareya Aranyaka, and the Upanisad begins with the Fourth Chapter of the second Aranyaka, and comprises Chapters TV, V and VI. The preceding parts deal with sacrificial ceremonies like the mahavrata and their interpretations It is the purpose of the Upanisad to lead the mind of the sacnficer away from the outer ceremonial to its inner meaning All true sacrifice is inward S points out that there are three classes of men who wish to acquire wisdom The highest consists of those who have turned away from the world, whose minds are freed and collected, who are eager for freedom For these the Upanisad [Aitareya Aranyaka II. 4-6) is intended There are others who wish to become free gradually by attaining to the world of Hiranya-garbJia For them the knowledge and worship of prana, life-breath is intended {Attareya Aranyaka II 1-3) There are still others who care only for worldly possessions For them the meditative worship of the Samhtta is intended (Aitareya Aranyaka III),*
1 See 5 on Attareya Aranyaka III 1 1
I van me manasi prahsthttd, mano vie vaci pratxsthitam, amr avir ma edht vedasya ma amsthah srutam me ma frahasih anenddhTtendhordtrdn samdadhdmy, rtam vadtsydmi salyam vadtsydmi tan mam avatu, tad vaktaram avatu, avatu mam, avatu vaktaram, avatu vaktaram Aum, Sanith, iantih, ianttk
i My speech is well established in my mind My mind is well established in my speech 0 Thou manifest one, be manifest for me Be a nail for my Veda Do not let go my learning By this that has been studied, I maintain days and nights I will speak of the right I will speak of the true May that protect me May that protect the speaker Let that protect me Let that protect the speaker Let that protect the speaker Aum, peace, peace, peace
be a nail let the spirit of the Scriptures be constantly present
Ailareya Upamsad
1 atma va xdam eka evagra asit, nanyat kin cana misat sa aiksata lokan nu srja iti
1. The self, verify, was (all) this, one only, in the beginning. Nothing else whatsoever winked He thought, 'let me now create the worlds '
See BU I 4 1 idam (all) this, the manifested universe
one only Everything is derived from atman to which there is no second
'Nothing else whatsoever winked ' This is by way of refutation of the Samkhya dualism The non-being of matter which is assumed for explaining creation is not external to the Supreme
2 sa vmfiml lokan asrjata, ambJio mancir maram apo'do'mbhah f arena dwam; dyauh pratistha, antanksam mancayah, prtlvm maro ya adhastdt ta apah
2 He created these worlds, water, light rays, death and the waters This water is above the heaven The heaven is its support The light rays are the atmosphere Death is the earth what are beneath, they are the waters
Earth is called mora or death, because all beings on earth die myante asmn bhutam
"Although the worlds are composed of the five elements, still trom the preponderance of water, they are called by names meaning water such as ambltas, etc ' §
3 a iksaia ivte nu hka, loka-pdlan mi srja di; so'dbhya eva ptmisam samuddhrtyamiircliayat
3- He thought, 'Here then are the worlds Let me now create we guardians of the worlds ' From the waters themselves, he orev forth the person and gave him a shape
.J,. ta l n tasyabhiaptasya mukham mrabhtdyata
bh r T- 1mk}ld<i v *i> vaco'gmr nasike mrabhidyetam, nasikd- "{ an \r' an " h > pranSd vayuh, aksmi mrabhtdyet&m, aksibhyam caksusa Mityah, karnau mrabhidyetam, karnabhyam osllT 1 ' otr$d d ^ ah > tvan mrabhtdyata, tvaco lomam, lomabhya wiu-vanaspalayah, hrdayatn mrabhidyata hrdaydn manah, s*
5*6 The Principal Upanisads I 2 3.
manasas candramdh, ndbhvf mrabhidvata. ndbhya apdmh, apdndn mriyuk, sisnam mrabhidyata, sisnad retail, retasa dpah
4 He brooded over him Of mm who has thus been brooded over, the mouth was separated out, like an egg From the mouth speech, from speech fire The nostrils were separated out from the nostrils breath, from breath air The eyes were separated out from the eyes sight, from sight the sun The ears were separated out from the ears hearing and from hearing the quarters of space The skin was separated out from the skin the hairs, from the hairs plants and trees The heart was separated out from the heart the mind and from the mind, the moon The navel was separated out from the navel, the outbreath, from the outbreath death The generative organ was separated out' from it semen, from semen water.
like an egg as is the case with an egg when it is hatched yatha pakstnah attdam mrbhtdyate evam §
1 td eta devatah srsta asmtn mahaty arnave prdpatan tain asandyd-pipdsdbhydm anvavdrjat, td enam abruvam, dyatanam nah prajaniht yasmm prahsihttd annam addm eh
1 These divinities thus created fell into this great ocean. (The self) subjected that (person) to hunger and thirst They said to him (the creator), 'Find out for us an abode, wherein established we may eat food '
arnave in the ocean samsdra is generally compared to an ocean samsdrdrnave, samsdra-samitdre £ prdpatan fell, pahtavatyah S
2 tdbhyo gam dnayat td abruvan, na vat no' yam alam tit. tdbhyo 'ham dnayat td abruvan, na vat 110'yam alam ih
2 For them, he brought a cow They said, 'Indeed this is not enough for us * For them he brought a horse They saia, 'Indeed this is not enough for us.'
gam gavdkyhvi&istam ptndam §
3 tdbhyah purusam dnayat td abruvan, sukrtam batch pmfo vdva sukrtam, id abrnvTd, yathdyatanam pravtiateli.
I 3 2 Attareya Upamsad 5*7
3 For them he brought a person They said, 'Well done indeed ' A person verily is (what is) well done. He said to them, 'enter into your respective abodes '
4 agmr vag bhuiva mukham prdviiad, vayuh prdno bhfitva vasike prdvtsad, fidityas caksur bhuivaksmi pramiad, diiah irotrmn bhuiva kaittau praviiann, osadhi-vanaspatayo lomam bhuiva tvacam pramiaiiis candrama mano bhfitva hrdayam prdvifan, mrtyur apano bhfdva nabhim ptawiad, apo reto bhtitvd iiinam praviian
4. Fire, becoming speech, entered the mouth Air becoming breath, entered the nostrils The sun, becoming sight, entered the eyes The quarters of space, becoming hearing, entered the ears Plants and trees, becoming hairs, entered the skin. The moon, becoming the mind, entered the heart Death, becoming the outbreath, entered the navel water becoming semen entered the generative organ
5 tarn aianaya-pipase abrittdm dvdbhydm abhiprajdmhth. te abravii, cldsv eva vdm devatasvabliajdmy, etdsti bhdgmyau karo- mftf lasmad yasyai kasyai ca devatdyat havir grhyate bhdgmya vcvdsyam asanayd-pipdse blmvatah.
5 To hun (the creator), hunger and thirst said, 'For us (also) find out an abode ' He said to them, 'I assign you a place in these divinities and make you sharers with them Therefore to whatever divinity an offering is made, hunger and thirst become partakers in it.
1 sa iksafaimc nu lokas ca loka-pdlai cannam ebhyah srjd ilt
1 He thought, 'Here are the worlds and the guardians of the worlds Let me create food for them '
2 so'po'bhyatapai' tabhyo'bhitaplabhyo mftrtn ajayaia, yd vat sd miirttr ajayatannam vax tat
2 He brooded over the waters and from the waters so brooded over issued a form That whichever was produced as that form is, verity, food.
5*8 The Principal XJpamsads I. 3 8
3 iad enad ahhisrstam pardntyajighdmsat tad vacdpghrksat tan nasaknod vaca grahttttm, sa yad hatnad vacagraliai$ya& abhivydhrtya haivannam atrapsyat
3 This, so created wished to flee away. (The person) sought to seize it with speech He was not able to take hold of it by speech If, indeed, he had taken hold of it by speech, even with speech, one would have had the satisfaction of food
By merely talking of food, one will not be satisfied apghrksat sought to seize, grahttum aicchat § atrapsyat would have had satisfaction trpto'bhavtsyat S
4 tat pranendpghrksat, tan naSaknot prdnena grahttum, sa yad hatnat pranendgrahaisyad abhtprdnya haivannam atrapsyat
4 (The person) sought to seize it with breath He was not able to take hold of it by breath If, indeed, he had taken hold of it by breath, even with breath one would have had the satisfaction of food
By merely breathing toward food, no satisfaction of the appetite is possible
5 tac caksusapghrksat, tan naiaknoc cak&usa grahttum, sayad hamac caksusdgrahaisyad drstva haivannam atrapsyat
5 (The person) sought to seize it with sight He was not able to take hold of it by sight If, indeed, he had taken hold of it by sight, even with the sight (of food) one would have had the satisfaction of food
6 tac chrotreadjtghrksat, tan ndiaknoc chrotrena grahttum, sa yad hamac chrotrendgrahatsyac chrutvd haivannam atrapsyat
6 (The person) sought to seize it with hearing He was not able to take hold of it by hearing If indeed, he had taken hold of it by hearing, even with the hearing (of food), one would have had the satisfaction of food
7. (The peTrson) sought to seize it by the skin He was not able to take hold of it by the skm If, indeed, he had taken hold of it by the skin, even with the skin (i e by touching food) one would have had the satisfaction of food
8 (The person) sought to seize it by the mind He was not
j 4 2. 12. Aitareya Upamsad 5*9
able to take hold of it by the mind If, indeed, he had taken hold of it by the mind, even with the mind (1 e. by thinking of food), one would have had the satisfaction of food.
9 too chisnenapghrk?at, tan tiMahioc chtinena graMtum; sa yad hamac ch&nmagrahatsyad visrjya haivdnnam atrapsyat.
9 (The person) sought to see it by the generative organ. He was not able to take hold of it by the generative organ. If, indeed, he had taken hold of it by the generative organ, even by emission one would have had the satisfaction of food.
10 tad apdnendpghrksat, tad dvayat, saiso'nnasya graho yad myur annayur va esa yad vdyuk.
io Then, the person, sought to seize it by the out-breath He got it. The grasper of food is what air is This one living on food, is, venly, what air is
anndyuh anna-bandhano anna-fiva.no vai prastdiltah S
ii. satksata' katfiamnvidammadrtesyadtti saiksata, katarena prapadyd th sa iksata, yadt vacabhivyahrtam; yad% prdnendbht- pramlam, yadi caksusd drsiam, yadt irotrena irutam, yad% tvaca sprstam, yadi manasd dhydtam, yady apdnenabhyapdmiam, yadi iUncna visrsiam, atha ko'ham ttt
ii. He thought, How can thu food exist without me? He thought, through what (way) shall I enter it? He thought (again), If speaking is through speech, if breathing is through breath, if seeing is through the eyes, hearing is through the ears, if touching is through the skin, if meditation is through the mmd, if breathing out is through the outbreath, if emission is through the generative organ, then who am I?
Speech, etc , are effects and serve a master. The body is like a city and there must be a lord of the city karya-karana-samghdta-lak- sanam pitram It is for the enjoyer, svamy-artham So the enjoyer must enter the body So the question is raised 'through what way shall I enter if 'The forepart of the foot and the crown of the head are the two ways of entrance into this body, the collection of several parts By which of these two ways shall I enter this city, this bundle of causes and effects'' £
. z . sa c ! am m SI "'' ,< " ,< "> 1 vidaryaitayd dvara prdpadyala, saisa vidrtir ndma dvdh, tad clan mndanam. tasya traya ava-
5 2 o The Principal Upamsads I 3 14,
sathas trayah svapnah, ayamavasatJio'yamdvasatho'yamavasatha
12 After opening that very end (of the head), by that way he entered This is the opening known as indrh This is the pleasing For that, there are three abodes, three kinds of dreams as. this is the abode, this is the abode, this is the abode.
shnan the very end (of the head), the saggital suture This is the highest centre of spiritual consciousness, called the saltasra, the thousand-petalled lotus It is said to be situated in the centre of the brain
sa srastesvara etam eva milrdhasimanavi kesa-vibhagavasanam
vtdarya cchidram kfiva etaya dvdra margem imam lakam karya-
kdrana-samgliatam prapadyata pravivesa. S
three kinds qfdrems Reference is to the three conditions of waking,
dream and deep sleep of the Mandukya U The ordinary condition
of waking is said to be a dream as distinguished from the state of
enlightenment
£ explains that the right eye is the abode during the waking state the inner mind {antar^manas) during dream and the space of the heart {Jirdayakdia) during profound sleep He offers an alternative interpretation The three abodes are the body of one's father, the womb of one's mother and one's own body
13 sa jdto bhiitany abhivyaikhyat km ihdnyam vdvadtsad ttt, sa dam eva purusam brahma tatamam apaiyat, idam adar&am iti
13 He, being born, perceived the created beings, what else here would one desire to speak? He peroeived this very person Brahman all-pervading, 'I have seen this,' he said
tatamam all-pervading, takarenaikena htptena tatalamam, vyaptala- mampanpiinjam aka&avat 5
14 tasmdd tdandro ndmedandro ha vai nama tarn idandram santam tndra tty dcaksate paroksena, paroksa-pnyd tva hi devah
14 Therefore his name is Idandra. Indeed, Iiandra is the name Of him who is Idandra, they speak indirectly (cryptically) as Indra Gods appear indeed to be fond of the cryptic.
idandra the perceiver of this
indra is a word denoting an object beyond the range of vision
H T 4 Aitareya TJpanisad 5"
■braihamam janma.
1 In a person, indeed, this one erst becomes an embno. That which is semen is the vigour come together from ail the limbs. In the self, indeed, one bears a self. When he sheds this in a woman, he then gives it birth. That is its first birth.
2. tat striya almalhuyam gacchati, yatha svam aiigam iatha, iasmdi math na hinasti, sasyaitam atmanam aim gatmh bhdvayah.
2 It becomes one with the woman, just as a limb ot ner own. Therefore it does not hurt her. She nourishes this self of his that has come into her.
bMvayalv nourishes, vardkayati, parifSiayati §.
3 sa bhavayairi bhavayifanyd bhavedi, lam sin garbham vibharti, so'gra eva kumaram jatmano'gre'dhi bhavayali, sa yat kwuaram janmano'gre'dhibhavayaiy Sbnaiutm cia lad bhavayaty csam lotanSm samiatya evath samtatd hitr.e lohdh, lad asya dvitiyam jamm.
3 She, being the nourisher, should be nourished. The woman bears him as an embryo. He nourishes the child before birth and after the birth While he nourishes the child before birth and after the birth, he thus nourishes his own self, for the continuation of these worlds, for thus are these worlds con- tinued This is one's second birth.
agre before (birth), prog janmanah § adj.i after (birth), urdhvam jar.mat.ah. S
SlmSnam: his own self. The father is said to be born as the soi. pstur altnatia hi putra-rupena jiiyaie. S
4 so'syayam alma funyebhyah harmahhyah pralidhtyate, athasyayam ilara alma krta-kriyo iayt>-gatah praiti, sa tiak prayaun aa pur.ar jayatc, tad asya triiyan. jawrna lad tthtam rswa
4- He {the son) who is one self of his (father) is made his substitute for (performing) pious deeds. Then the other self of
The Principal Upantsads
II i 6
his (father's) having accomplished his work, having reached his age, departs So departing hence, he is, indeed, born again That is his third birth That has been stated by the seer
ptayamieva departing, Sariram parity ajann eva §
5 garbhe nu sann anvc?dm avedam aliam devanam jammfint viiva,
iatam ma pura dyasir araksann aghah iyeno javasa mra- diyam
tti, garblia evaitac chayano vama-deva evam uvaca
5 'While I was in the womb, I knew all the births of the gods A hundred strongholds made of steel guarded me I burst out of it, with the swiftness of a hawk ' Vama-deva spoke this verse even when he was lying in the womb.
6. sa evam vtdvan asmac chanra-bliedad ilrdhva utkramy- amusmin svatge loke sarvan kdmdn aptvamrtah samabkavat, samabhavat
6 He, knowing thus and springing upward, when the body is dissolved, enjoyed all desires in that world of heaven and became immortal, yea, became (immortal)
II i 3. Aitareya Upanisad
i ko'yam aimeU vayam updsmahe, katarah sa atma, yena va baiyah, 'yena va srnoh, yena vdgandhan apghrati, yena va vacant ydkaroti, yena va svddu casvddu ca mjanaU
1 'Who is this one?' 'We worship him as the self ' 'Which one is the self?' 'He by whom one sees, or by whom one hears, or by whom one smells odours, or by whom one articulates ipeech or by whom.one discriminates the sweet and the unsweet.'
Another reading will give 'Who is he whom we worship as the self Which one is the self? He by whom
2 yad etad hrdayam manai caitat, samjMnam apianam njMnam prajiidnam medhd dr$tvr dhrttr mahr mamsd jutih mrtih samkalpah kratur asuh kamo vain th sarvdny evaitam !>rajmnasya ndma-dheydm bhavanU
2 That which is heart, this mind, that is consciousness, perception, discnmmation, intelligence, wisdom, insight, stead- iness, thought, thoughtfulness, impulse, memory, concep- tion, purpose, life, desire, control, all these, indeed, are names of intelligence.
Here we find a classification of various mental functions, the different kinds of perception, conception, intuition as well as feeling and will b
3 esa brahmaxsa indra, esa prajd-patir ete sarve devd imam ca panca mahdbhutdm, prthtvi vdyur dkdia dpo jyotimsity etanl- mam ca ksudra-misrdniva, bijanitaram cetardm cdndajam ca .wujani ca svedajam codbhijjdm cdhd gdvah pitrusd Jiastmo yat ton cedam prdm jangamam ca patatn ca yac ca sthavaram, mrvam tat prajM-neiram prajndne prattsthitam, prajnd-netro okahprajfid prahsthd, prajiidnam brahna
^ 3- He is Brahma, he is Indra, he is Prajd-pati, he is all these jods, Mid these five great elements, namely, earth, air, ether 'rater, hght, these things and these which are mingled of the
m' ^ lt Were ' the seeds of one sort ^ another, those bora rom an egg, and those bom from a womb, and those born rom sweat, and those born from a sprout, horses, cows, persons ana elephants, whatever breathing thing there is here, whether mov, n g or flying or what is stationary. All this is guided by nte igence, is established m intelligence The world is guided by ""euigence. The support is intelligence Brahma is intelligence
524 The Principal Upantsads III i 4
brahma hiranya-garbhah pranah prajnatma § praja-patih yah prathamajah Sarin
Intelligence is said to be the basis of all existence and the final reality We see here the anticipations of the Buddhist Vijnanavada
4 sa etena prajnenatmanasmal lokad utkramyamusmm svarge loke sarvan human aptvamrtah samabhavat, samabhavat
4 He, with this intelligent self, soared upward from this world and having enjoyed all desires in that world of heaven became immortal, yea became (immortal).
he the sage Vama-deva
TAITTIRlYA VPANISAD
The Taittinya. Upani$ad belongs to the Taittiriya school of the Yajvr Veda It is divided into three sections called Valhs The first is the Stksa Valh. Siksd is the first of the six Vedaiigas {limbs or auxiliaries of the Veda) ; it is the science of phonetics and pronunciation The second is the Brahmananda Valh and the third is the Bhrgu Valh These two deal with the knowledge of the Supreme Self, faramatma-yiiana.
TaiUinya Ufianisad
1 hank aum. iam 110 mitras iavi varumh, iam.no bhavaty aryama, sum na wdro brhaspatth, saih no visnur urvrkramah; namo brahmane, nantas te vayo, tvam eva pratyaksam brahmasi, Mm eva pratyaksam brahma vadtsyami, rtam vadtsyami, satyam vadtsyami;
tan mam avatu, tad vaktaram avatu, avatu mam, avatu vaktaram, awn i&ntth iantth idntih
1 Aum, May Mitra (the sun) be propitious to us; may Varuna (be) propitious (to us) May Aryaman (a form of the sun) be propitious to us, May Indra and Brhaspati be propitious to us, May Visnu, of wide strides, be propitious to us
Salutation to Brahma. Salutation to thee, 0 Vayu. Thou, indeed, art the visible (perceptible) Brahman Of thee, indeed, the perceptible Brahman, will I speak. I will speak of the right. I will speak of the true , may that protect me ; may that protect the speaker. Let that protect me; let that protect the speaker. Aum, peace, peace, peace
This is the first section It is an invocation to God to remove the - ti Cles m the of attauilI »g spiritual wisdom para-vidydm arabhamano vtghna-iantyat devatah irarlkayate. R.
See R.V I go. 9
iiru-kramah of wide strides vistirna-kramah §. It is a reference to 'jura's incarnation as Tnmkrama or Vamana wbosestndeswerewide -?l » or peace is repeated thnce, with reference to Sdhyahmka, adhtbhauhka and Sdfndaivika aspects §
,J,-^" m VyaMyfeyameJr varnas roarah, matra balam, sdma sanianak, iiy „fc as iiksadhyayah.
2- We will expound pronunciation, letters or sounds, pitch,
528 The Principal Upamsads 1, 3 2>
quantity, force or stress, articulation, combination. Thus has been declared the lesson on pronunciation
One must learn to recite the text of the Upaiusads carefully and so a lesson in pronunciation is given We must learn the text before we can ascertain its meaning vastupdsanam htva pratJmmatah sabdopasana-vidhdne A
1 saha nau yaiaJt, saha nau brahma-vat casam, atha tat samhitdya upamsadam vyakhyasydmah;
pancasv adhikaranesu, adhtlokam, adhijyohsam, adhividyam, adhiprajavi, adhyatmam eta mahasamhita ity acaksate,
athddhilokam, prthmpuroa-rupam, dyaur uttara-ritpam, dkaias sandhih, vayus samdhmmm tty adhilokam
J- May glory be with us both, may the splendour of Brahma- knowledge be with us both
Now next we will expound the sacred teaching of combina- tion under five heads, with regard to the world, with regard to the luminaries, with regard to knowledge, with regard to progeny, with regard to oneself. These are great combinations, they say.
Now with regard to the world the earth is the prior form, the heaven the latter form, the ether is their junction, the an* is the connection Thus with regard to the world.
brahma-varcasam the splendour of brahma-knowledge In Laltta- vistara we are told that when the Buddha was in samadhi, a ray called the ornament of the light of gnosis moved above his head, jnana- lokdlankaram nama raimth Cp B G XIV II samhita a conjunction of two words or letters of the text The mind of the pupil is directed to the symbolic significance
Master and disciple pray that the light of sacred knowledge may illumine them both, that they both may attain the glory of wisdom.
2 athddhijyatthsam agmhpiirva-rupam,ad%tyauttara-nipain, Spas sandhih, vaidyutas satndhdiiam ity adhijyauUsam
2 Now as to the luminaries; fire is the pnor form, sun the latter form Water is their junction, lightning is the connection. Thus with regard to the luminaries
TaiUinya Upanisad
3 cdhadhivtdyam acaryah purva-rTipam, antevdsy uttara- riipam, vi&ya sandhih, pravacanas samdhanam' ity adhvoidyam.
3 Now as to knowledge the teacher is the prior form; the pupil is the latter form, knowledge is their junction; instruction is the connection Thus with regard to knowledge
PataSjali in his Mahabhasya (Kielhorn's ed , p 6) says there are four steps or stages through which knowledge becomes fruitful The first is when we acquire it from the teacher, the second when we study it, the third when we teach it to others and the fourth when we apply it Real knowledge arises only when these four stages are fulfilled: caturblns ca prdkdrair indyopayuktd bhavaty agama-kalena svadhyaya-kdlena pravacana-kalena vyavahara-kaUneli.
4 athadhiprajam maid purva-ritpam, pitottara-mpafn prajd sandhth, prajananas samdhanam. ity adhiprajam
4 Now with regard to progeny: the mother is the prior form, the father is the latter form* progeny is their junction, pro- creation is the connection Thus with regard to progeny
5 athddhydimam: adhard-hanuh piirva-rupam, uttard-Jtanur utlara-rupam, vak sandhill, jihva samdhanam' ity adhydtmam.
5 Now with regard to the self the lower jaw is the prior form, the tipper jaw is the latter form, speech is the junction, the tongue is the connection. Thus with regard to the self
6 itimA mahdsamhitah, ya evam eta malidsamhitd vydkhydtd veda saiMhiyate prajaya paittbhih, brahma-varcasendnnddyena suvargena lokma
6 These are the great combinations He who knows these - great combinations thus expounded becomes endowed with offspring, cattle, with the splendour of Brahma— knowledge, with food to eat, and with the heavenly world.
He will prosper here and hereafter
A TEACHER'S PRAYER
I ,^'?f' c ^ an dasdm rsabho visva-rupah chandobhyo'dhvamrtdt Mn.babhuva
sa mciidro mtdJiaya sprtntolu amrtasya deva dharano ihuydsam.
53° The Principal Upamsads I 4 2
iariram me vicarsanam, phva me madhumattamd, kamabhydm bhun vismvam, brahmanah koso'si medhaydpihitah, srutam me gopdya
1 May that Indra who is the greatest in the Vedic hymns, who is of all forms, who has sprung into being from immortal hymns, may he cheer me with intelligence, 0 God, may I be the possessor of immortality
May my body be very vigorous, may my tongue be exceeding sweet; may I hear abundantly with my ears. Thou art the sheath of Brahman, veiled by intelligence Guard for me what I have heard
This is a prayer for acquiring retentiveness and for physical and moral health
The syllable aum is pre-eminent among the Vedic hymns It is 'of all forms' as the whole universe is its manifestation 'Of Brahman, of the Paramatman or the Highest Self, Thou art the sheath, as of a sword, bemg the seat of His manifestation ' § madhumattamd exceeding sweet madhumati, attsayem madhura- bhastni &
2 dvahatiti vitanvdnd, kurvdndciram almanah vdsdmst mama gavas ca annapdne ca sarvadd tato me snyam avaha Umaiam paiubhis saha svdhd a mdyantu brahmacdnnah svdhd, vi mdyatUu brahmacdnnas svdhd, pra mdyantu brahmacdrinas svdhd, da mdyantu brahmacdnnas svdhd, sa mdyantu brahmacdnnas svdhd
2 Bringing to me and increasing always clothes and cattle, food and drink, doing this long, do thou, then, bnng to me prosperity in wool along with cattle. May students of sacred knowledge come to me from every side Hail May students of sacred knowledge come to me variously Hail May students of sacred knowledge come to me well equipped Hail May students of sacred knowledge come to me self-controlled Hail May students of sacred knowledge come to me peaceful Hail
acirant soon, presently, aclram, ksipram em §
To the undisciplined, wealth is a source of evil amedhaso h srir anarthdyaweU § Not so to the disciplined "What matters is not the possession or non-possession of wealth but the attitude to it We may possess wealth and be indifferent to it, we may possess no wealth and yet be concerned with securing it by any means There is no worship of poverty Vasistha tells Rama —
dhanam Srjaya kdkutstha dkanamittam t&amjagat antaram nabhyanamt ntrdhanasya mrtasya ca
1, 4 3. Tatthriya Upantsad 531
Acquire wealth This world has for its root wealth I do not see the difference between a poor man and a dead one
3 yaso jane'sdni svahd, sreydn vasyaso'sani svahd, iam tva bhaga pravisam svahd, sa ma, bhaga, pravisa soaha, tasmm saha- sra-sdkhe m bhagaham tvayi mrje svahd, yathdpah pravata yanU, yatha masa aharjaravi, evam mam brahmacartnah, dhatarayantu sarvatas svahd, prattveso'si pro. ma bhdlu pra ma padyasva. 3. May I become famous among men Hail.
May I be more renowned than the very rich Hail Into thee thyself, 0 Gracious Lord, may I enter. Hail Do thou thyself, 0 Gracious Lord, enter into me Hail. In that self of thine, of a thousand branches, 0 Gracious
Lord, am I cleansed Hail As waters run downward, as months into the year, so
into me, may students of sacred knowledge come, 0 Disposer of all, come from every side Hail Thou art a refuge, to me do thou shine forth; unto me do thou come
of a thousand, branches: the different hymns and the gods meant by them are varied expressions of the Divine One. pramsamt I enter. The knowledge of God is said to be a penetration of God into the inmost substance of the soul When God is conceived as external to the individual, in heaven or in Olympus, when our feeling towards Him is one of love and respect, inspired by His majesty and power, our religion of fear, obedience and even love is external When, on the other hand, %ve are driven by an inner lack or insufficiency, when we cry for the highest reality or God which or who comes into us, enters us, removes our dross, when we unite ourselves to Hun, our religion becomes inward, mystical The mystic longs for mner completion by participation which is the real meaning 01 imitation This is not always accompanied by ecstatic rapture, it may be a quiet sense of union which may have a few high points 01 emotion Cp John Ruysbroeck: 'In this storm of love two spirits
tv, m u t ? Se<her ' the s P mt of God ^ our own s P int God ' through we Holy Ghost, inclines Himself towards us, and thereby we are touched in love. And our spirit, by God's working and by the power til P -£ eSses and inclmes itself into God, and thereby God is loucned These two spirits, that is, our own spirit and the spirit Mfe * 5 P aride ^ sh «ie one into the other, and each shows to the afb£ \ V ' detnand s of the other all that it is, and each mliL ?v ? other 311 that ft K ' "n 4 mvites »t to all that it is This w3 e ? overs melt 11140 each other - • • - Thereby the spirit is uurneo up m the fire of love, and enters so deeply rnto the touch
532 The Principal Upamsads I 5 4.
of God, that it is overcome in all its cravings, and turned to nought in all its works, and empties itself Adornment of the Spiritual Mamage, II 54
1 bhur bhuvas suvah th va etas tisro vydhrtayah, tdsam u ha smatidm caturthim, mahdcamasyah, pravedayate, maha th, tad brahma, sa alma, angdny anya. devatah, bhur iti va ayam lokak, bhuva ity antanksam, suvar ity asau lokah, maha ity adityah, ddityena va va sarve lokd mahlyante
1 Bhv.h, Bhuvah, suvah, venly these are the three utterances of them, venly, that one, the fourth, maliah, did the son of Mahacamasa make known That is Brahman, that is the self, its limbs (are) the other gods
Bhiih is this world, Bhuvah, the atmosphere Suvah is the yonder world mahah is the sun; by the sun indeed do all worlds become great
Vyahrtts are so called because they are uttered in various rituals Its limbs the other gods mahah is Brahman, the Absolute, it is the self, all other gods are subordinate to the Absolute
2 bhur th va agnih, bhuva iti vayuh, suvar ity adityah, maha iti candramah, candramasa va va sarvdm jyotwtst maMyante
2 Bhiih, verily, is fire, Bhuvah is the air, Suvah is the sun; mahah is the moon, by the moon, indeed, do all the luminaries become great
3 bhur Ut va rcah, bhuva th samdm, suvar thyajmhsi, maha th brahma, brahmand va va sarve vedd maMyante
3 Bhiih, venly, is the Rg verses, Bhuvah is the Sammi chants, Suvah is the Yajus formulas Maliah is Brahman By Brahman indeed, do all the Vedas become great
4 bhur th vai prdnah, bhuva ity apdnah, suvar iti vyamh, maha ity annam, annena vdva sarve prand maMyante
a Bhiih is the inbreath, Bhuvah is the outbreath, Sim* is the diffused breath, mahah is the food By food, indeed, do all the vital breaths become great.
I 6 i.
Taitiinya Upanisad
5 fa v5 ef«s calasrai caiurdha, catasras catasro vyahriayah, id yo veda, sa veda brahna, saroesmai deva bahhi avahanti.
5 Verily, these four are fourfold The utterances are four and four. He -who knows these knows Brahman. To Mm all the gods offer tribute.
I sa ya eso'nfarhrdaya akasah, tasmhtn ayau puntso niano- mayah, amrlo hranmayah, antarena ialukc, ya esa sfana ivava- lambate, sendrayomh, yatrasau keidnto vttanaie, -vyapokya sirsa- kapale, bhur ity agnau pratitistkaii, bhuva %U vayau.
i This space that is within the heart — therein is the Person consisting of mind, immortal and resplendent. That which hangs down between the palates like a nipple, that is the birth- place of Indra; where is the edge of the hair splitting up the skull of the head. In fire, as BkiVt, he rests, in air as Bhuvak,
See M U II. 2 6; Maitri VI. 30; VII 11 hranmayah- resplendent, jyolirmayah. §
Brahman who is said to be remote is here envisaged as close to us
Though the Supreme is present everywhere, here we are taught to
look upon Hun as residing in one's own heart S. says that the
Supreme is said to be in the heart as a help to meditation, even as
an image is used for deity, upalabdhyartkam upasanartham ca
^Irrr sth5nam uWte, salagrama tva msnoh. See C U. VIII.
'tl ** ere we 511(1 a to" 131 * 1011 fr° m the raw that the heart
fh S ? a «° f ^ soul t0 ^ other %_iew that ^ bram 15 the £eat of tae soul While the soul is an unextended entity which cannot have
„if L ocus ' psychologists discuss the nature of the part or parts
ot the body with which the soul is closelv associated
t0T Anstotle, the seat of the soul was in the heart *
ar^L?*.™ 1 ^' ' The dJssases °* the heart are the most rapidlv lov «,^ ,B y fatal: (2 > P«y<*ical affectaons such as fear, sorrow, and raV «2 \ m ¥ an,ed «te disturbance of the heart, {3) the heart is the K? B B t° ^ formed in the embryo ' AnstotleS Psychology
("-If ^^ff-^forstrucute Sun h of the Up*,, sadic PHlosophy
tf-- loeX, 3 «. tae seat of ^ mind 15 meant not roore ecrtant„ vO? ? h lt; stands m ^mediate dvr.amic relations, we are tt* b4m - w 1 ?! 5 "i^vmg that its seat is somewhere in the cortex of ™n William James Priraphs of Ps^cko'egy, Vol. I, p 213
534 The Principal Upamsads I 7,1
The reference here is to the susumna nadi of the Yoga system which is said to pass upward from the heart, through the mid Tegion of the throat up to the skull where the roots of the hair he apart When it reaches tins spot, the nadi passes up, breaking up the two regions of the head. That is the birthplace of Indra. indrayonih mdrasya brahmanah yomh margah f§ vndrasya paramatmano yomh sthanam R It is the path by which we attain our true nature SeeMaitri VI 21; BU IV 4 2
2 suvar tty aditye, maha tti brahmam, apnoti svdrajyam apnott manasas-patim, vak-patii caksu§-patih srotra-patih vijitdm- patih, etat Mo bhavatt, dkdia sariram brahvia, satydtma prana- ramam mana anandam sdnh samrddliam amrtam tti pracina- yogyopdsva
2. In the sun as Suvah, in Brahman as Mahah He attains self-rule He attains to the lord of manas, the lord of speech, the lord of sight, tie lord of hearing, the lord of intelligence— this and more he becomes, even Brahman whose body is space, whose self is the real, whose delight is life, whose mind is bliss, who abounds in tranquillity, who is immortal Thus do thou contemplate, 0 Pracinayogya
He who contemplates in this matter becomes the lord of all organs, the soul of all things and filled with peace and perfection. This passage brings out that the end is greater existence, not death, we should not sterilise our roots and dry up the wells of life We have to seize and transmute the gifts we possess
1 prthvoy antanksam dyaur diio vd avdntaradiiah, agmr vdyur adttyai catidramd <nak?atram, dpa osadhayo vanaspataya akaSa atmaity a&hibhutam . . ,
athadhyatmam, prdnovyanopdna udaiias samanati can?"* botram mano vak tvak, carina mamsam smvisthi majja etaa adhmdhdya rsir avocat pihiktam vd tdam saroam panktcnaiva
Earth? atmosphere, heaven, the (mam) quarters and the intermediate quarters.
j g j TatUirlya Upani?ad 535
Fire, air, sun, moon and stars
Water, plants, trees, ether and the body
Thus with regard to material existence
Now with regard to the self.
from, vydna, apana, udana and samana
sight, hearing, mind, speech, touch
skm, flesh, muscle, bone, marrow f Having ordained m this manner, the sage said: Fivefold venly, is this all. With the fivefold, indeed, does one win the fivefold. SeeB.U I 4 17
Sectton 8 CONTEMPLATION OF AUM
1 aum tit brahma, mm ittdam sarvam, aum ity etad cmukrhr ha sma va apyo iravayetydtravayanU, aum ttt samant gayantt, aum tomtit sastram Samsanh, aum tty adhvaryuh, prattgaram praitgmatt, ami tit brahma prasauti, aum tty agntfwtram anujdnati, aum tti brahmanah pravaksyann alia, brahmopdpna- vdnttt, bralimawopapnott.
1 Awn is Brahman Aum is this all Aum, this, verily, is compliance On uttering, 'recite,' they recite With aum, they sing the sdman chants With aum, som, they recite the prayers With am the Advaryu priest utters the response With aum does the Brahma (priest) utter the introductory eulogy With aum, one assents to the offering to fire With aum, a Brahmana begins to recite, may I obtain Brahman ; thus wishing. Brahman, venly, does he obtain.
'The pranava which is a mere sound, is, no doubt, insentient in itself and cannot therefore be conscious of the worship offered to it, still, as in the case of the worship offered to an image, it is the Supreme (Ihara) who, in all cases, takes note of the act and dispenses the fruits thereof ' A.
Aum is the symbol of both Brahman and Isvara. prahmcva msnoh £ prattmady arcana tva sarvatra isvara eva. phala-data A
The Principal Upamsads I g i
I rlam ca svadhyaya pravacane ca, satyam ca svadhyaya pravacanc ca, tapas ca svadhyaya pravacane ca, damai ca svadhyaya piavacanc ca, iamas ca svadhyaya pravacane ca, agmyai ca svadhyaya pravacanc ca, agmhotram ca svadhyaya piavacanc ca, aUthayai ca svadhyaya pravacane ca, manusam ca svadhyaya pravacanc ca, piaja ca svadhyaya pravacane ca
prajanal ca svadhyaya pravacane ca, prajatis ca svadhyaya piavacanc ca
satyam th saiyavaca rathitarah, tapa ih tapomiyah panruhshh, svadhyaya piavacanc cvcti nako maudgalyah, taddhi tapas taddh tapah . ()/H ,
r The right and also jstiidy and teaching, the true and also study^jand teaching, ausienty and also study and^.teaching, self-control and also study and teaching, tranquility and also study and teaching, the (sacrificial) nreSTand also study and teaching, the agm-hotra (sacrifice) and also study and teaching, ^fa&ts and also studv^and teaching, hifiiianity and ds^study and teaching, offspring and also study and teaching, begetting and also study and teaching, propagation of the race and also study and teaching
- „TJie true, says Satyavacas (the Truthful) the son of Rathitara * austerity says Taponitya (ever devoted to austerity), the son of Paurusisti, study and teaching alone, says Naka (painless), the son of Mudgala That, verily, is austerity, aye, that is austerity
svadhyaya adhyayanam, study pravacana adhydpanam, teaching dama bahyakaranopaiamah, self-control Soma antahkaianopaSamaJi, (inner) tranquillity
Knowledge is not sufficient by itself We must perform study and also practise the Vedic teaching
Taittirlya Upanisad
I dhaih vrksasya rerivd, fnrtth prsfltam girer voa, fadhva favitro vajmiva, svamriam asvn, Aravtnath savarcasam, sumedhd atnrtoksitah, \l% trisankor veddnuvacanam
i I am the mover of the tree; my fame is like a mountain's peak The exalted one making (me) pure, as the sun, I am the immortal one I am a shining treasure, wise, immortal, inde- structible SuchisTrisanku's recitation on the Veda-knowledge.
This statement is an expression of self-realization when the self, feelmg its identity with the Supreme, says that he is the mover, the impeller of this world-tree of samsara Tnsanku, who realised Brahman, said this, m the same spirit in which the sage Vamadeva said S
The world is said to be the eternal Brahma tree, brahmavrksas sanalamh. M B XIV 47. 14.
X vedam anucyacaryo'ntevasimm anusash, satyam vada, dJiar- mam cam, svadhyayan ma pramadah, acaryaya. pnyamdhanam alirlya prcjdlantum ma vyavacclietsih, saiydn na pramaditavyam, aharman na pramaditavyam, kiisaldn na pramaditavyam, bhulyai na pramaditavyam, svddhydya-pravacanabhydm na pramaditavyam, dcva-piir-karyabhyamna pramaditavyam
1 Having taught the Veda, the teacher instructs the pupil speak the truth Practise virtue Let there be no neglect of J our (daily) reading Having brought to the teacher the wealth «»i is pleasing (to him), do not cut off the thread of the off- spring Let there be no neglect of truth Let there be no neglect I J? rt , UC -, Let ***** be no ne S lect of welfare - Let there be no
SS. T P 5°A pent 7 Let ***** be 110 ne S kct of stud y and ^chmg Let there be no neglect of the duties to the gods and
538 The Principal Upanisads I n 4
antevfism the pupil, he who dwells near I 11 X Cp speak the truth
satyaputam vaded vacant manah piUam samacaret VI 46 Speak that which has been punned by truth and behave m the way in which your mind considers to be pure
dharmam cara — practise virtue dharma means essential nature or intrinsic law of being, it also means the law of righteousness The suggestion here is that one ought to live according to the law of one's being
2 matr devo bhava, pitr devo bhava, acdrya devo bhmia, atithi devo bhava, yany anavadydm karmaw tarn semtavyam, no ttarant, yany asmdkam sucaritam tam tvayopasyant, no itaram
2 Be one to whom the mother is a god Be one to whom the father is a god Be one to whom the teacher is a god Be one to whom the guest is a god
Whatever deeds are blameless, they are to be practised, not others Whatever good practices there are among us, they are to be adopted by you, not others
Even with regard to the Me of the teacher, we should be dis- criminating We must not do the things which are open to_ blame, even if they are done by the wise samdyani sista-krtany apt nokartavyam S
3 ye ke cdsmacchreydmso brdhmandh tesdm tvayasanena^ prasvasitavyam, sraddhaya deyam, asraddhaya'deyam snya deyam, hnya deyam, bhiyd deyam, samvtdd deyam
3 Whatever Brahmanas there are (who are) superior to us, they should be comforted by you with a seat (What is to be given) is to be given with faith, should not be given without faith, should be given in plenty, should be given with modesty, should be given with fear, should be given with sympathy.
prasvasitavyam The good Brahmanas are to be provided with seats and refreshed after their fatigue prasvasanam, praivasah Jrama- ■banayah. £ Or in the presence of such Brahmanas, not a word should be breathed We have merely to grasp the essence of what they say na ■prasvasitavyam prasvaso'pi na kariavyah kevalam tad iMa sara- grahtna bhavttavyam § We should not unnecessarily engage in discussions with them
4 atha yadi te kartna-mctkitsa vd vrtta-vicikitsd va syatye tatra brahmanas sammarhnah yukta ayuktdh aluksa dharma hantds syult yathd te tatra varteran tatha tatra varteihah
■ I2 ! Tatiimya Upamsad 539
4 Then if there is m you any doubt regarding any deeds, iny doubt regarding conduct, you should behave yourself m
",uch matters, as the Brahmanas there (who are) competent to :: iudge, devoted (to good deeds), not led by others, not harsh, r overs of virtue would behave m such cases : TheBrahmanas have a spontaneity of consciousness which expresses ttself in love for all beings Their tenderness of sentiment and en- lightened conscience should be our standards
5 athabhyakhyatesu ye tatra brahmanas sammarsimh yukta r ayuktah alftksa dharma-kamas syuh yatha te iesu vartcran iatha "tesu vartethah
' 5 Then, as to the persons who are spoken against, you should behave yourself m such a way, as the Brahmanas there,
'"-(who are) competent to judge, devoted (to good deeds) not led by others, not harsh, lovers of virtue, would behave m regard to such persons
^tc/io arc spoken aganist who are accused of sin
6 csa Mesah, esa tipadesah, esa vedopamsat, etad annsasanam, f . cvam upasitavyam, evam « caitad upasyam
6 This is the command This is the teaching This is the *; secret doctrine of the Veda This is the instruction. Thus should one worship Thus indeed should one worship
i Cp with this the Buddha's exhortation where the Pali word upamsa
for the Sanskrit vpamsad is used , etad attha katha, etad aithd mantana, etad attha
upamsa, etad attha sotavadhanam Vtnaya V , In the Banaras Hindu University this passage is read by the Vice- ^ Chancellor on the Convocation day as an exhortation to the students ^ who are leaving the University They are advised, not to give up • the world but to lead virtuous lives as householders and promote y the welfare of the community
I sam no niitras sam vantnah, sam no bhavaiv aryama, sam } <a wdro brhaspahh, sam no visnur wu-kramah, namo brahmane, rwas ic vayo foam cva praiyaksam brahmast, foam cm prat- yaham brahmdvadisatn, rtam avadisam, satyam avadisam, tan
The Principal Upamsads
mam avit, tad vaMSaam avit, awn mam, avid vaktaram, aum smttih, sanhh, santth
I Aum, may Mitra (the sun) be propitious to us, may Varuna (be) propitious (to us), may Aryaman (a form of the sun) be propitious to us May Indra and Brhaspati be propitious to us May Visnu of wide strides be propitious to us
Salutation to Brahman Salutation to Vayu; Thou indeed art the perceptible Brahman Of thee, indeed, perceptible Brahman have I spoken I have spoken of the right I have spoken of the true That hast protected me, That has protected lie speaker Aye, that has protected me That has protected the speaker Aum, peace, peace, peace
II i i Taithriya Upamsad
BRAHMANANDA (BLISS OF BRAHMAN) VALLI Section 1
saha nciv avatu, saha nau bhtmaktu, saha viryam karavavahai, tejasvmav adhttam astn, ma vtdvisdvahat, aum ianith, ianhh, saiitih.
May He protect us both May He be pleased with us both May we work together with vigour, may our study make us illumined May there be no dislike between us Aum, peace, peace, peace
may our study make us illumined
There is not a necessary connection between learning and wisdom To be unlettered is not necessarily to be uncultured Our modern world is maintaining the cleavage between learning and wisdom Cp. 'Perhaps at no other time have men been so knowing and yet so unaware, so burdened with purposes and yet so purposeless, so disillusioned and so completely the victims of illusion This strange contradiction pervades our entire modern culture, our science and our philosophy, our literature and our art ' W M Urban Tht Inielhgibh Woild (1929), p 172
1 aum, brahma-vid apnoh param, tad csabhyiikid; salyam jmnam amntam brahma, yo vcda mhitavi guhaydm parame vyoman so'inutc saivan kaman saha brahmana vipasald, ih
Jasmad va clasmad atmana akdsas sambhuiah, dkasd'd v&ynh vayor agmh, agncr dpah, adbhyah pilhivT, pHhivyd osadhayah ofadlubhyo annum, annat pvrttsah, "
sayacsa ptnuso anna-tasa-mayah, iasycdam cva sirah, ayam aansmalt paksalt, ayam idtaiah 'paksah, ayam atmd, idam pncc/iam piahstha;
iad apy csa iloko bhavati
1 Aum The knower of Brahman reaches the Supreme A* to his the folbwing has been said He who te™?Zlnan « the real, as knowledge and as the infinite, placed in the
The Principal Upamsads II i i
secret place of the heart and in the highest heaven realises all desires along with Brahman, the intelligent
From this Self, venly, ether arose, from ether air, from air fire, from fire water, from water the earth, from the earth herbs, from herbs food, from food the person
This, venly, is the person that consists of the essence of food This, indeed, is his head, this the right side, this the left side, this the body, this the lower part, the foundation
As to that, there is also this verse
the real, knowledge and mfintle the opposite of unreal, mithyatva, of the unconscious, jadaiva and of the limited, partcchmnatva akaia ether is the ether or the common substratum from which other forces proceed
sambhtttah arose, emanated, not created
The five different elements are clearly denned and described as having proceeded one after another from the Self
Sometimes from food, semen, and from semen the person Cp S annad reto-rilpena parmatat pttrusah
Creation starts from the principle of the universal consciousness From it first arises space and the primary matter or ether whose quality is sound From this ethenc state successively arise grosser elements of air, fire, water and earth See Introduction param the supreme that beyond which there is nothing else, 1 e Brahman
guha the secret place, the unmamfested principle m human nature It is normally a symbol for an inward retreat avydkrta akasant eva guha antar-hfdaya akaia §
There are five kosas or sheaths in which the Self is manifested as the ego or the fivatman The first of them consists of food Other sheaths consist of prana or life, manas or instinctive and perceptual consciousness, vijndna or intelligence and ananda or bliss These five principles of matter, life, consciousness, thought and bliss are found in the world of non-ego Anna or food is the radiant, the viraj, that which is perceptible by the senses, the physical According to SureSvara, life, consciousness and intelligence constitute the subtle self, the sutratman and bliss is the causal sheath, the karana
B U I i z mentions five sheaths under the names, anm or matter, prdna or hfe, manas or consciousness, vac or speech (corre- sponding to mjiiana or intelligence) and avyakrta, the undifferen- tiated The last is the karana or the ultimate cause of all
Atman becomes the knower or the subject when associated witii antahkarana vrttxm*d-aniahkarawpaMat»enatfnano pialjivam, na svatah A
The bodily sheath is concaved in the form of a bird. Suresvara says 'The sacrificial fire arranged in the form of a hawk or a heron or some other bird, has a head, two wings, a trunk and a tail. So also here every sheath is represented as having five parts '
It is an axiom of mystic religion that there is a correspondence between the microcosm and the macrocosm Man is an image of the created universe The individual soul as the microcosm has affinities with every rung of the ladder which reaches from earth to heaven.
1. annad vat prajak prajayante, yah Ms ca prthiwn snial}, atho'menaiva jivanti, athamadapi yaniy anfatah, annam hi bhutanam jyestham, tastnat saroausadham ucyate, saroam vai ie'nnam apnuvanti ye'nnath brahmopasate, annam hi bhutanam jyestham, tastnat sarvausadham ucyate, annad bhxdani jhyante, jatany annena vardhante, adyate'tti ca bhutani, tasmai annam tad ucyata ih;
iasmad va etasmad anna-rasa-maydt anyo'niara atma prdna- mayah icnaisa pfmtah, sa va esa purttsa-vidha eva, tasya purusa vidhatam, anvayam purusavidhah, tasya prana cva sirah, vyano daksmah paksah, apana uttaralj paksah, kkasa atma', prthivl Pwchampraiisthd,
tad apy c$a £loko bhavati.
I. From food, verily, are produced whatsoever creatures Qwell on the earth Moreover, by food alone they live And then also into it they pass at the end Food, verily, is the eldest Dorn of bongs Therefore is it called the healing herb of all > oily, those who worship Brahman as food obtain ail food SJhfc K^l <l ldest born of Therefore is it
\?C f h £ bt>s herb for 351 From f00d ^ beings bom. When born they grow up by food. It is eaten and eats things Therefore is it called food 8
Verily, different from and within that which consists of the gwceof food is the self that consists of life. By Sat this ^ filled This, venly, has the form of a person According tottS
SSTTf *S™ * this one form of a peSon- fte
mbreath is its head; the diffused breath the right side' Se
544 The Principal Upamsads 11 3 i
outbreath the left side; ether the body, the earth the lower part, the foundation As to that, there is also this verse
SeeMaitri VI 12
The physical body is sustained by life
1 pranam deva anu prananti, nianusydh pasavas ca ye, pram hi bhutanam aytth, tasmat sarvdyusam ucyate, sarvam eva ta ayur yanti, ye pranam brahmopasate, prdno hi bhutanam ayuh, tasmatsarvayu?amucyataih, tasyaisaeva&arira dlma,yahpurvasya; tasmad va etasmat pranamayat, anyo'ntara alma, manomayah, tenaisa purnah, sa va. esa purusa-vidlta eva, tasyapuritsa-vidhatam, anvayampuru%a-viihah,tasyayajureva sirah, rgdaksinahpak?ah, samottarah paksah, ddeia dtmd, atharvangirasah puccham PraUslM
tad apy esa sloko bhavatt
1 The gods breathe along with hie breath, as also men and beasts, the breath is the life of beings. Therefore, it is called the life of all They who worship Brahman as life attain to a Ml hfe, for the breath is the life of beings Therefore is it called the hfe of all This (life) is indeed the embodied soul of the former (physical sheath) Venly, different from and within that which consists of life is the self consisting of mind By that this is filled This, venly, has the form of a person, according to that one's personal form is this one with the form of a person The Yajur Veda is its head, the Rg Veda the right side, the Santa Veda the left side, teaching the body, the hymns of the Atharvans and the Angirasas, the lower part, the foundation ,
As to that, there is also this verse
Life is the spirit of the body
Prana onginally meant breath and as breath seemed to be tne life of man, prana became the hfe principle On analogy, it was said to be the hfe of the universe
manas- the inner organ samkatya-vikalpalmakam anlah-karanam tan-mayo mano-mayah 5
II 4 i Taithnya Upanisad 545
1 yah vaco nivartante, aprdpya manasa saha, anandcm brahmano mdvan, na bibJiett kaddcana tasyaisa eva sartra atma, yah purvasya, iasmdd va etasmdn niano-maydt, anyo'ntara atma vxjMna-mayah, tenaisa piirnah, sa va esa purusa-vidha eva, iasya purusa vidliatam, aivoayam purusa-vtdhah, tasya iraddhavva iirah, rtam dakstnah paksah, satyam uttarah paksah, yoga atma, mahah pucdiam pratistha,
tad apy esa iloko bhavatt
1 Whence words return along with the mind, not attaining it, he who knows that bliss of Brahman fears not at any time This is, indeed, the embodied soul of the former (life) Verily, different from and within that which consists of mind is the self consisting of understanding. By that this is filled. This, verily, has the form of a person. According to that one's personal form is this one with the form of a person Faith is its head, the right the right side, the true the left side, contemplation the body, the great one the lower part, the foundation.
As to that there is also this verse.
Manas is the faculty of perception. At the stage of mams we accept authority which is external, at the stage of vijndna internal growth is effected The Vedas are our guide at the former level, at the intellectual we must develop faith, order, truthfulness and union with the Supreme At the level of intellectuality or vijiidna, we ask for proofs When we nse higher, the truths are not inferred but become self-evident and cannot be invalidated by reason Cp. samkhyayogah paiicaratram veddh pasupatam lalhd fitma-pramfinany elam na hanlavyam helubhih Quoted by R on Katha II 19
mahah the ^ great one It is the principle of MaJiat, the first thing
ZTu ou J 0f , the manifested (avyakria) which is descnbed as lying beyond the maJmt
SS",* blKS See RV - IX "3 6 ' 11 ^es to apparently abstract being an inner content of feeling
54^ The Principal Upamsads II 5 1
vijiidnam brahma ced veda, iasmdc cen m pramddyah farm papmano httva, sarvan kaman samasnute
tasyaisa eva- sdrtra atmd, yaJi puroasya, tasmad vd etasmad vijildna-onaydt, anyo'ntara alma, dnanda-mayah, tenaisa purnah, sa va esa pimisa vidha eva, tasya purtisa-vidhatdm, anvayam puritsa-vidhah, tasya pnyam eva sirah, modo dakswah paksah, pramoda uttarah paksah, ananda atmd, brahma pucchamprahsthd,
tad apy esa iloko bharnh
1 Understanding directs the sacrifice and it directs the deeds also. All the gods worship as the eldest the Brahman which is understanding
If one knows Brahman as understanding and one does not swerve from it, he leaves his sins m the body and attains all desires This (hie) is, indeed, the embodied soul of the former (the mental)
Venly, different from and within that which consists of understanding is the self consisting of bhss By that this is filled This, venly, has the form of a person. According to that one's personal form is this one with the form of a person Pleasure is its head, delight the right side, great delight the left side, bliss the body, Brahman the lower part, the foundation
As to that, there is also this verse
These verses indicate the five bodies or sheaths (patica-koias) material, vital, mental, intellectual and spiritual Manas deals with the objects perceived and vijndna with concepts In later Vedanta, the distinction between the two diminishes Paiicadaii ascribes deliberation to maws and decision to tmit hi which is the mjfiana of this U. mono vtmaria-rttpam syad hiddhth svati mscayalmikd I 20
In every order of things the lower is strengthened by its union with the higher When our knowledge is submissive to things, we get the hierarchical levels of being, matter, life, animal mind, human intelligence and divine bliss They represent different degrees 01 abstraction and the sciences which deal with them, employ different pSes and methods In amnda, the attempt to connatural^ S with the supreme object succeeds Intelligence is successful £ controlling the tangible world As a rational mstrument « the
II 6 i
Tailtiriya Upanisad
sphere of positive sciences, its validity is justified. This attempt of the intellect to unify is not due to intellect alone. It is derived from its higher, from the breath of the divine In ananda, earth touches heaven and is sanctified.
§ thinks that our real self is beyond the beatific consciousness, though in his commentary on III. 6 he argues that Bhrgu identifies the ultimate reality •with the spirit of ananda. evatr. tapasa visuddhdttKa {anna) pranadtsu sakalysna brahtna- laksanam apasyan iamik sanatr arJar anupravisya antaratatr.am Snandam brahma mjnatavan tapasaiva sadkanena bhrgttk §.
The author of the Brahma Siitra in 1. 1. 12-19 identifies ananda- maya with the absolute Brahman and not a relative manifestation. The objection that the suffix may at is generally used for modification is set aside on the ground that it is also used for abundance. praatryat SB I 1 13-14
aratida-brahmanor abhedat brahtrSbhidhar.att. cva Snar.dabhidhanam ih Kanvanah Sam>arSnanda.
In this beatific consciousness man participates in the life of the gods Anstotle places the idea of a higher contemplation above metaphysical knowledge.
tasyaisa aia idnra dtmd, yah puwasya, athato anupraindh, via avzdvdn amwh lokam prdya kascar.a gacchaiT u, ako vtdvSn amum lokjirh pretya, kascit satnasr.ula u;
so'kdmayata, bahu sydm prajaycydi, sa tapo'iapyaia, so tapas taptva, tdarh sarvatn asrjaia, yad idam kith ca, tat srsiid iad aw-tprdvisat, tad av.upravisya sac ca fyac ca abhavat, r.mifdam caniTuktam ca, mlayanam camlayanam ca, vijfidizam cavijnanam ca saiyam canriam ca, satyar.i abhavat, \ai idam kim ca tat saham ify acaksatc
fad apy csa sloho bhavati.
1. Non-existent, venly does one become, if he knows Brahman as non-being. If one knows that Brahman is, such a one people Et^ e »stent. This is, indeed, the embodied soul of the
Now then the Mowing questions Does anvone who knows s*
548 The Principal Upantsads II 7 i
not, when departing from this life, go to the yonder world? Or is it that any one who knows, on departing from this life, attains that world?
He (the supreme soul) desired Let me become many, let me be born. He performed austerity Having performed austerity he created all this, whatever is here Having created it, into it, indeed, he entered Having entered it, he became both the actual and the beyond, the defined and the undefined, both the founded and the non-founded, the intelligent and the non-mtelbgent, the true and the untrue As the real, he became whatever there is here That is what they call the real
As to that, there is also this verse
tapas austerity S means by it knowledge tapa tit pidnam ucyate tapah paryalocanam. The Supreme reflected on the form of the world to be created sryyamdna-jagad-racanddt-visaydm alocanam akarod dtmety arthah 5 He willed, he thought and he created Tapas is the creative moulding power, concentrated thinking SeeBU I 4 10-11, Maitri VI 17 which assume that consciousness is at the source of manifestation As we bend nature to our will by thought or tapas, tapas becomes mixed with magical control
He desired See C U VI 2 1 It is karna or desire that brings forth objects from primal being
the actual and the beyond Brahman has two aspects, the actual and the transcendental, the sat and the tyat
Sectton 7
1 asad vd tdam agra astt, tato vat sad ajayata, tad atmdmm svayam akuruta, tasmat tat sukrtam ucyate
yad vat tat sukrtam, raso vat sah, rasam hy evdyam labdlt- vanandi bhavati, ko hy evdnydt kah prdnydt, yad esa akdsa anando na sydt, esa hy evdnandaydtt, yatha hy evatsa etasmm nadrsye'ndtmye'ntrukte'mlayane'bhayam prattsthdm vtndate, atha so'bhayam goto bhavatt, yadd hy evatsa etasmtm udaram antaram hurute, atha tasya bhayam bhavatt, tattveva bJiayam viduso'manvanasya
tad apy esa iloko bhavatt
1 Non-existent, verily, was this (world) in the beginning
H 7> r Taittinya Upanzsad 549
Therefrom, venly, vras existence produced. That made itself a soul. Therefore is it called the well-made. _
Verilv what that well-made is— that, verily, is the essence of existence For, truly, on "getting the essence, one becomes blissful. For who, indeed, could live, who breathe, if there were not this bliss in space? This, verily, is it that bestows bliss. For truly, when one finds fearlessness as support in Him who is invisible, bodiless, undefined, without support, then has he reached fearlessness When, however, this (soul) makes mans . One the smallest interval, then, for him, there is fear. That, venly, is the fear of the knower, who does not reflect.
As to that, there is also this verse.
asat non-existent. The manifested universe is called sal and its unmanifested condition is said to be asat. From the unmamfested (asat) the world of names and forms [sat) is said to arise. The possible is prior to the actual See SB II. 1. 17. Cp. R.V. X. 129 which tells us that, at the beginning of all thinp, there was neither being nor non-bang and what existed was an impenetrable darkness. For the Greek Epimenides, the beginning of things was a primary void or night. 'Existence is bom of non-existence.' Lao Tzu (Ch. 40}. Ths Way of Life.
BraLrr.an is invisible etc , because it is the source of all these distinctions avikSram tad brahtna sarva-viMra-hdutcat. S. stftriam: the well-made See A.U. I. 2, 3. S~ means by it the self- caused Brahman is the independent cause for He is the cause of all. siayam eia Sltnanam evakuruta krtavat. S.
raso lai sak. Bliss, verily, is the essence of existence. Brahman is bliss It is the source of things. See K.U. I.jj. '•iho indeed could live . . or breathe if there were : in which we dwell We have a feeble analogue of spiritual bliss in aesthetic satisfaction It is said to be akin to the bhss of the realisa- tion of BreJ.niar.. brakmanandasakodarah. It lifts out of the ordinary rcis of conventional life and cleanses our minds and hearts By the imaginative realisation of feelings, tanrrayatvatn rasesit [Kaiidasa) it melts one's heart, dravtbhu tam {Bhavdbhuii) bhayi fear We have fear when we have a feeling of otherness. See B U I d 2 where the primeval self became fearless when he found that there was no other person whom he should fear. ^.ayiar.asya: who does not reflect He is not a true sage but thinks Knuclf to be so.
55° The Principal Vpamsads II 8 i
i. bhjsdsmad vdtah pavaie, bhisodett suryah, bhisasmad agntS cendras ca, mrtytir dhavatt pancama tti satsdnandasya mimdihsd bhavak,
yttvd syat sadhu yuvddhydyakah aitstho drdhistho bahsthah, tasyeyam prlhvol sarva vtttasya puma syat, sa eko manusa . anandah te ye iatam manusa anandah, sa eko manusya-gan- dharvandm anandah, Srotnyasya cakamahatasya,
te ye Satam manusya-gandharvdndm anandah sa eko deva- gandharvanam anandah, srotnyasya cakamahatasya,
te ye Satam deva-gandharvdndm anandah, sa ekah pitrnam cira-loka-lokdmm anandah, Srotnyasya cakamahatasya,
teye satam pitrnam cira-loka-hkandm anandah, sa eka ajdna- jandm devdnam anandah, Srotnyasya cakamahatasya
te ye satam ajanajanam devdnam anandah, sa ekah karma- devandm devdnam anandah, ye karmana devdn apiyanti, Srotn- yasya cakamahatasya;
te ye iatam karma-devdnam devdnam anandah, sa eko devdnam anandah, srotnyasya cakamahatasya,
te ye Satam devandm anandah, sa eka indrasyanandah, Srotn- yasya cakamahatasya,
te ye iatam indrasyanandah sa eko brhaspater anandah, srotnyasya cakamahatasya,
te ye satam brJiaspater anandah, sa ekah, prajdpater anandah Srotnyasya cakamahatasya,
te ye Satam prajdpater anandah, sa eko brahmana anandah, srotnyasya cakamaftafasya,
sa yas cdyam parttse, yas cdsdvddttye sa ekah, sa ya evam-vtt asmdl lokat pretya, etam anna-mayam atmdnam upasamkrdmatt, etam prdna-mayam atmdnam upasamkrdmati, etam mano-mayam atmdnam upasamkrdmatt, etam vipidna-mayam atmdnam upasamkrdmatt, etam dnanda-mayam atmdnam upasamkrdmatt.
tad api esa Stoko bhavatt
i. From fear of Hun does the wind blow, from fear of Him ~does the Sun rise, from fear of Him do Agni and Indra (act) and death, the fifth doth run
This is tiie inquiry concerning bliss
Let there be a youth, a good youth, well read, prompt in action, steady in mind and strong in body Let this whole earth be full of wealth for him That is one human bliss
II 8 I Taittiriya Upanisad 551
What is a hundred tunes the human bliss, that is one bhss of human fames — also of a man who is well versed in the Vedas ^ and who is*1riiot smitten with desire.
What is a hundred "times* the bliss of the human fairies, that is one bhss of divine fairies — also of a man who is well versed in the Vedas and^who is not smitten with desire What is a hundred times the bhss of the divine fairies, that is one bhss of the Fathers in their long enduring world — also of a man who is well versed in the Vedas and who is not smitten with desire.
What is a hundred times the bliss of the fathers in their long enduring world, that is one bhss of the gods who are born - so by birth, also of a man who is well versed m the Vedas and who is not smitten with desire
What is a hundred times the bliss of the gods who are born ( so by birth, that is one bliss of the gods by work, who go to** the gods by work, also of a man who is well versed m the Vedas and who is not smitten with desire
What is a hundred times the bliss of the gods by work, that is one bliss of the gods, also of a man who is well versed in the Vedas and who is not smitten with desire
What is a hundred times the bhss of the gods, that is one bliss of Indra-— also of a man who is well versed in the Vedas and who is not smitten with desire
What is a hundred times the bliss of Indra, that is the one bliss of Brhaspati— also of a man who is well versed in the vedas and who is not smitten with desire.
What is a hundred times the bhss of Brhaspati, that is one Miss of Praja-patt, also of a man who is well versed m the
«n? and who 1S not soften with desire ,.™ B a hundred times the bhss of Praja-pati, that is one Wiss of Brahma—also of a man who is well versed in the Vedas and who is not smitten with desire
He who is here in the person and he who is yonder in the u m 1S t° ne He who knows Qus > on departing from this H i! reaches t0 the self which consists of food, reaches the self t h C0 " SISts o{ llfe . reaches the self which consists of mind, reacmes the self which consists of understanding, reaches the self which consists of bhss.
As to that, there is also this verse.
^A^1\,°^ Hm does the ' aJtnd bloie ' the %vnter sees the Proof of cm* JS e S of the averse. The regularity expresses an intelh- Sence and presupposes a guide S See Katha VI 3
55 2 The Principal Upannads II g r
Those who attain to the status of gods by their own work are called Karma-devas.
The bliss of delight which knowledge of Brahman occasions baffles all description It is something completely incomprehensible Brahman thus is blissful being and so is of the highest value In reaching the richness of being of Brahman we reach our highest fulfilment In describing the various degrees of happiness, the author of the Upamsnd gives us an idea of the classes of human and divine beings rccogmscd in that period, men, fathers, fames, gods by merit and gods by birth, Prajd-pah and Brahma or Hiranya-garbha,
i yaio vdco mvartante, aprdpya manasa saha dnandam brahmano vidvdn na hbhcit kutaicana
dam ha va va na tapah, kim aham sadhu ndharavam, him aham pdpam akaiavam Hi, sa ya cvam vidvdn ete dtmdmm spmute, nbhc hy evaisa etc atmdnam spmute ya evam veda, ity upamsat
i Whence words return along with the mind, not attaining It, he who knows that bliss of Brahman fears not from anything at all.
Such a one, venly, the thought does not torment, Why have I not done the right' Why have I done the sinful' He who knows this, saves himself from these (thoughts). For, truly, from both of these he saves himself — he who knows this. Such is the secret doctrine
The enlightened one is not afflicted by anxiety about nght and wrong The truth makes us free from ail restrictions The Apostle proclaims that we are delivered from the law, 'Virtues, I take leave of you for evermore, your service is too travaillous Once I was your servant, in all things to you obedient, but now I am delivered from your thraldom ' Mirror of Simple Soules, quoted in Evelyn Underhill Mysticism, p 263 upamsat the great mystery, parama-ra7iasyam S
Ill i i Taittiriya Vpanisad
BHRGU VALLI Sectton i
I bhrgur vai varunth, varunam pitaram upasasara, adhihi bhagavo brahmeh, tasma eiat provaca, annam pranam caksui irolram mano vacam iti
tarn hovaca, yato va imam bhutam jayante, yena yatdm jivantt, yat pmyanly abhisamvisanti, tad vijijndsasva, tad brahmeh
sa tapo' tapyata, sa tapas taptva
I Bhrgu, the son of Varuna, approached his father Varuna and said, 'Venerable Sir, teach me Brahman '
He explained to hun thus matter, life, sight, hearing, mind, speech.
To him, he said farther 'That, verily, from which these beings are born, that, by which, when bom they live, that into which, when departing, they enter That, seek to know That is Brahman '
austenty rf0rmed austenty ( of though*)- Having performed
The father Varuna teaches his son Bhrgu, the sacred wisdom
inis fundamental definition of Biahman as that from which the c ° ntlimailce and dissolution of the world comes is of Isvara God 15 world - cr eating, world-sustaining, and world-dissolving
xni 8 am the flrst wd the last and the lmng one ' Revelatl0n
rtf is the cause of the world 85 the substratum (adhisthana) mi'too l ma H nal cause ^*pad&na) of the world, as gold is the of the worid S Madhv d 0rnaments ' 85 the instrumental cause [mmilla)
smn^i"^ * i th f means t0 the Perception of Brahman tapas is hrahm ™W«na-sadliana S Cp Aeschylus, 'Know- 'Mge comes through sacnfice ' Agamemnon, 250
The Principal Upamsads
I annam brahmeti vyajdndl, annadhyeva khalv imam bhiitam ja.ya.nte, annena jatam pvanh, annam prayanty abhtsamviianti
tad vijnaya, punar eva varunam piiaram upasasdra, adfnfn bhagavo brahmeti,
tam hovaca, tapasa brahma vijipiasasva, tapo brahmeti,
sa tapo' tapyata, sa tapas taptvd ) <y^ r I He knew that matter is Brahman For truly, beings here are bom from matter," when born, they live by matter, and into matter, when departing they enter
Having known that, he again approached his father Varuna and said, 'Venerable Sir, teach me Brahman '
To him he said, 'Through austerity, seek to know Brahman Brahman is austerity '
He performed austerity, having performed austerity,
The first suggested explanation of the universe is that every thing can be explained from matter and motion On second thoughts, we realise that there are phenomena of life and reproduction which require another principle than matter and mechanism The investi- gator proceeds from the obvious and outer to the deeper and the inward The pupil approaches the teacher because he feels that the first finding of matter as the ultimate reality is not satisfactory
I. prdno brahmeti vyajandt, prdnddd hy eva khalv tmdnt bhtitdm jdyante, prdnena jatam pvantt, pianam prayanty abhisathvisanti
tad wptdya, punar eva varunam pitaram upasasdra, adhih bhagavo brahmeti
tam hovaca, tapasa brahma vijtjndsasva, tapo brahmeti,
sa tapo' tapyata, sa tapas taptvd »V i He knew that Me is Brahman For truly, beings here are born from life, whenT5orn they live by life, and into life, when departing they enter
Having known that, he again approached his father Varuna, and said 'Venerable Sir, teach me Brahman '
Taittiriya Upanisad
To him he said, 'Through austerity, seek to know Brahman Brahman is austerity.' He performed austerity, having performed austerity.
See C U.I n 5; VII. 15 i.KU.III 2-9, B.U IV 1 3.
While the material objects of the world are explicable in terms of matter, plants take us to a higher level and demand a different principle From materialism we pass to vitalism But the principle of life cannot account for conscious objects So the pupil, dissatisfied with the solution of life, approaches the father, who advises the son to reflect more deeply.
Matter is the context of the principle of life
1 mano brahmeti vyajanai, manaso hy eva kJmlv imam bhutam jdyante, manasdjdtdnijivanh, manah prayanty abhisam- viianli
fad vxjiiaya, punar eva varunam pttaram upasasara, adhihi bhagavo brahmeti,
tarn hovaca, tapasd brahma vipjiiasasva, tapo brahmeti,
sa tapo' tapyata, sa tapas taptvd. • 1 He knew that mind is Brahman. For truly, beings here are born from mind, "when bom, they live by mind and into mind, when departing, they enter.
Having known that, he again approached his father Varuna and said 'Venerable Sir, teach me Brahman.'
To him, he said, "Through austerity seek to know Brahman. Brahman is austerity '
He performed austerity; having performed austerity.
When we look at animals, with their perceptual and instinctive consciousness we notice the inadequacy of the principle of life As iif e outreaches matter, so does mind outreach life There are forms ot We without consciousness but there can be no consciousness without hfe Mind in the animals is of a rudimentary character, bee AUareya Aranyaka II. 3 2 1-5 Cp Mtlmdapaiiha where mstkara, rudimentary mind is distinguished from paniia or reason Animals possess the former and not the latter Even mind amnot account for all aspects of the universe In the world of man
7oirVtl P ay ° £ mte i l F nce J?**"*™** frames concepts and 'aaus. plans means for their realization So the pupil finds the
556 The Principal Upamsads HI 5 1
inadequacy of the pnnciple of mmd and again approaches his lather, who advises him toTeflect further
1 vijMnam brahmeti vyajanat, vijiidnadd hy eva khah imam bhiitani jayante, vijnanena jatani jivanh, vtjUanam prayanly abhisamvisanti
tad vipwya, punar cva wruttam pitaram upasasara, adkihi bhagavo brahmeti, tarn hovaca, tapasa brahma vipjnasasva, tapo brahmeti, sa tapo' tapyaia, sa tapas taptvd
1 He knew that intelligence is Brahman For truly, beings here are born from Intelligence, when bom, they live by intelligence and into intelligence, when departing, they enter
Having known that, he again approached his father Varuna, and said, 'Venerable Sir, teach me Brahman '
To him, he said, 'Through austerity, seek to know Brahman Brahman is austerity ' -1
He performed austerity, having performed austerity,
Intelligence again is not the ultimate principle The categories of matter, life, mmd and intelligence take us higher and higher and each is more comprehensive than the preceding Men with their conflicting desires, divided minds, oppressed by dualities are not the final products of evolution They have to be transcended In the intellectual life there is only a seeking Until we transcend it, there can be no ultimate finding Intellectual man, who uses mind, life and body is greater than mmd, life and body but he is not the end of the cosmic evolution as he has still a secret aspiration Even as matter contained life as its secret destiny and had to be delivered of it, life contained mmd and mmd contained intelligence and intelli- gence contains spirit as its secret destiny and presses to be delivered of it Intelligence does not exhaust the possibilities of consciousness and cannot be its highest expression Man's awareness is to be enlarged into a superconsciousness with illumination, joy and power The crown of evolution is this deified consciousness
Ill 6 i Tmttinya Upamsad 557
1 anando brahmett vyajanat, dnandddd hy eva khalv imam bhiitam jayante, dnandena jatam jivanti, dnandam prayanty abhtsamvisanti,
saisa bhdrgavi varum vidya, parame vyoman pratisthita, ya cvam veda pratitisthatt, annavan ann&do bltavati, mahan bhavah, prajayd pasubhir brahma-varcasena median kirtya
1 He knew that Brahman is bliss For truly, beings here are bom from bliss, when born, tTSey live by bliss and into bliss, when departing, they enter.
This wisdom of Bhrgu and Varuna, established in the highest heaven, he who knows this, becomes established He becomes possessor of food and eater of food He becomes great in off- spring and cattle and in the splendour of sacred wisdom, great in fame.
The higher includes the lower and goes beyond it Brahman is the deep delight of freedom
The Upamsad suggests an analogy between the macrocosm, nature and the microcosm, man, an equation between intelligibility and being The ascent of reality from matter to God as one of in- creasing likeness to God is brought out While man has all these five elements m his being, he may stress one or the other, the material or the vital or the mental or the intellectual or the spiritual He who harmonises all these is the complete man For Anstotle the human soul is, in a certain sense, everything.
This analysis is accepted by the Buddha who speaks of five kinds of food for the physical, vital, psychological, logical and spiritual elements The enjoyment of nirvana is the food for spirit mbbutvm oiiuSjamSnS Ratana Sutia Cp Augustine 'Step by step was I Jed upwards, from bodies {anna) to the soul which perceives by means of the bodily senses (prdna) , and thence to the soul's inward faculty which is the limit of the intelligence of animals (manas); and thence again to the reasoning faculty to whose judgment is referred the knowledge received by the bodily senses (vijiiana). And when this power also within me found itself changeable it lifted ltSelf U P to its own intelligence, and withdrew its thoughts from experience, abstracting itself from the contradictory throng of sense-images that it might find what that light was wherein it was patned when it cried out that beyond all doubt the unchangeable L v P r , eferred to the changeable, whence also it knew that unchangeable, and thus with the flash of one trembling glance-it armed at That which is' (Smnda). Confessions VII 23
558 The. Principal Upani?ads III 7 j
Augustine describes the highest state as one of joy 'The highest spiritual state of the soul in this life consists in the vision and con- templation of truth, wherein are joys, and the full enjoyment of the highest and truest good, and a breath of serenity and eternity '»
The grades of existence and of value correspond so that the class which has the lowest degree of reality in the existential sense has the lowest degree of value
Behind all our growth is the perfection of ourselves which animates it, we are constantly becoming until we possess our being The changing consciousness goes on until it is able to transcend change The Beyond is the absolute fulfilment of our self-existence It is ananda, the truth behind matter, hie, nund, intelligence, that controls them all by exceeding them
The Upanisad suggests an epic of the universe From out of utter nothingness, asat, arises, the stellar dance of teeming suns and planets whirling through vast ethenc fields. In this immensity of space emerges the mystery of life, vegetations, forests, soon living creatures, crawling, jumping animals, the predecessors of human beings Human intelligence with its striving for ideals has in it the secret of sciences and philosophies, cultures and civilisations We can make the world wonderful and beautiful or tragic and evil
Sectton 7
1. annam na ntttdyat, tad vratam, prano va annum, iariram annadam, prane sarlram pralisihitam, sartre pranah praltftiutah, tad etad annam anne prattsihiam, sa ya etad annam annc prattsthttam veda prahttsthatt, annavan annddo bhavatt, mahan bhavati, prajaya paiubhvr brahma-varcasena mahan ktrtya
1 Do not speak ill of food That shall be the rule Life, venly, is food The body is the eater of food In life is the body established, life is established in the body So is food established in food He who knows that food is established in food, becomes established He becomes an eater of food, possessing food He becomes great in offspring and cattle and in the splendour of sacred wisdom, great in fame
The world owes its being to the interaction of an enjoyer and an object enjoyed, i e subject and object This distinction is superseded in the Absolute Brahman
* Dom Cuthbert Butler Western Mysttcism (1922), p 59
Ill 10 I
Taittiriya Upattisad
i annum na paricaksita, tad vratam, dpo va annam, jyotir annadam, apsu jyotih pratisthiiam, jyotisy apah pratisthitah, tad dad annam anne praiisthitam, sa ya etad annam anne prahsthitam veda pratitisthati, annavan annado bhavah, mahdn bhavati prajayd paiubhir brahma-varcasena, mahdn kirtyd
I Do not despise food That shall be the rule Water, venly, is food Light is the eater of food Light is established in water, water is established m light Thus food is established in food
He who knows that food is established m food, becomes established He becomes an eater of food, possessing food He becomes great m offspring and cattle, and in the splendour of sacred wisdom, great in fame
i annam bahu kurvita, tad vratam, prthivi vd annam, dkdio' nnddah, prthivydm akdsah pratisthitah, dkase prthivi pratisthitd, tad etad annam anne pratisthitam, sa ya etad annam anne prahsthttam veda praiitisthaii, annavan annado bhavati, mahdn bhavati prajaya pa&ubhir hahma-varcasena, mahdn kirtyd.
x Make for oneself much food That shall be the rule The earth, venly, is food, ether the eater of food In the earth is ether established, in ether is the earth established Thus food is established in food He who knows that food is established in food, becomes established He becomes an eater of food, possessing food He becomes great m offspring and cattle, and in the splendour of sacred wisdom, great in fame.
I «<i kaiicana vasatatt pralyacaksTta, tad vratam, tasmdd yaya kayd ca vidhaya bahv anmm prdpnuyat, arddhyasmd annam
5 6 ° The Principal Upantsads III i 0 4
tty dcaksate, etad vat mukhato'nmm raddliam muhhato'sma annam radhyate, etad vat madhyato'miam raddham, madhy- ato'sma annum radhyate, etad vd antato'nnam raddham, antato'- smd annum radhyate
1. Do not deny residence to anybody That shall be the rule. Therefore, in any way whatsoever one should acquire much food Food is prepared for him, they say
If this food is given first, food is given to the giver first If this food is given in the middle, food is given to the giver in the middle If this food is given last, food is given to the giver last
2 ya evam veda ksema th vaci, yoga-ksema th prandpatwyoh, karmeh hastayoh, gatir th padayoh, vimukhr iti payau, th manusth samdjndh, atlta dawih, trpttr th vrstau, balam tit vidyutt.
2 For him who knows this, as preservation in speech, as acquisition and preservation in the inbreath and the outbreath, as work in the hands, as movement in the feet, as evacuation in the anus, these are the human recognitions
Next, with reference to the deities, as satisfaction m rain, as strength m the lightning
yoga-ksema see B G II 45, IX. 22
3 yaia th faiusu, jyohr th nak?atresu, prajdhr amrtam dnaiida tty upastlie, sarvata tty dkase, tat prattsthety upastla, prattsthdvan bhavatt, tan maha iiy upastta, mahan bhavati, tan mana tty upastta manavan bhavati
3 As fame in cattle, as light in the stars, as procreation, immortality and bliss in the generative organ, as the all in space
Let one contemplate That as the support, one becomes the possessor of support, let one contemplate That as great, one becomes great Let one contemplate That as rnmd, one becomes possessed of mindfulness
4. tan nama tty upasTta, namyam te'smai kamah, tad brahmety upastta, braJimavan bhavatt, tad hahmanali panmara ily upastta, paryenam mriyante dvisantas sapatnah pan yc'pnya- bhratroydh
sa yai cdyam puruse yas cd savdditye sa ekah
4. Let one contemplate That as adoration, desires pay adoration to him. Let one contemplate That as the Supreme, he becomes possessed of the Supreme Let one contemplate
HI I0 5. Tatttmya Vpamsai 561
That as Brahman's destructive agent, one's hateful rivals perish as also those rivals -whom he does not like.
He who is here in the person and he who is yonder in the Sun, he is one
See Aitareya Brdhmana. VIII 28; TU II 8. Brahma the Supreme Sdyana interprets Brahma as Veda and brdhmavan as one who has a perfect command over the Veda bhratrtryah rivals literally it means cousins (father's brother's sons), who are generally supposed to be unfriendly.
5 sa ya evam-mt asmal lokat preiya, eiam amia-^Aayat/t almanam wpasamkramya, dam prana-mayam almanam upasam- kramya, etam mano-mayam attnanam iipasatiikraviya, elan; vymna-mayam almanam upasamkramya, dam dnanda-mayam altndnam upa samkramya, imwn loka.11 kdmdnni kamarupy amtsancaran, eiat sdma gayannaste
ha vu ha vu ha vu.
5 He who knows this, on departing from this world, reaching on to that self which consists of food, reaching on to that self which consists of life, reaching on to that self which consists of mind, reaching on to that self which consists of under- standing, reaching on to that self which consists of bliss, goes up and down these worlds, eating the food he desires, assuming the form he desires. He sits singing this chant:
Oh Wonderful, Oh Wonderful, Oh Wonderful.
The enlightened one attains unity with the All He expresses wonder that the individual with all limitations has been able to shake them off and become one with the All. To get at the Real, we must get behind the forms of matter, the forms of life, the forms of mind, the forms of intellect. By removing the sheaths, by shaking off the bodies, we realise the Highest This is the meaning of vaslrd~ falarana. 'Across my threshold naked all must pass ' When we realise the truth we can assume any form we choose
aham annam, aliam aitnam, aham annam, aham annadah, aham annadah, aham annadah, aham slokakri, aham slokakri, aiMtii slokakri; aham asnii praihamaja riasya, piirvam dcvcbhyo amrtasya nabha t, yo ma daddti, sa id eva ma, vaL, aham annam annam adantam Mmi, aham visvam bhuvanam abhya- ohavam suvama jyohh
ya cvam vcda ily upamsat.
5^ The Principal Upanisads III i 0 5
I am food, I am food, I am food I am the food-eater I am the foodeater I am the foodeater. I am the combining agent I am the combining agent I am the combining agent I am the first bom of the world-order, earlier than the gods, m the centre of immortality Whoso gives me, he surely does save thus I, who am food, eat the eater of food I have overcome the whole world I am brilliant like the sun He who laiows this Such is the secret doctrine
prathamajd htranya-garbhopy ahatn A
tJie eater of food anna-sabditam a-cetanam, tad-bhoktdram celanam ca admt vyapnomt R
overcome the world dbJnbliavdntt parenesvarena svarupena S tipasam- haramt A
like the sun suvar adttyah [nakdra upamarthah) dditya voa § hamanlyo dedipyamana iarlro bliavah R
This is a song of joy The manifold diversity of life is attuned to a single harmony A lyrical and rapturous embrace of the universe is the result The liberated soul filled with delight recognises its oneness with the subject and the object, the foodeater and food and the principle which unites them He feels in different poises that he is one with Brahman, with livara and with Htranya-garbha
The chant proclaims that the enlightened one has become one with all ' The liberated soul passes beyond all limitations and attains to the dignity of God Himself He is one with God in all His fulness and unity It is not a mere fellowship with the chasm between the Creator and the created Here is the exalted experience of one who not merely believes in God, or who is merely convinced of His existence by logical arguments or one who regards Him as an object to be adored and worshipped in thought and feeling but of one for whom God is no more object but personal life He lives God or rather is lived by Him He is borne up and impelled by the spirit of God who has become his inward power and life
' Hailaj expressed in the most uncompromising terms this conviction of oneness with the Supreme Ana'l haqq, 'I am the real ' The Sufi theory is that man becomes one with God when he transcends his phenomenal self (fana) Ghazali believes that Hallaj's statement is nothing more than the conviction belonging to the highest stage of unitananism In order to attain to the immediate vision of the Divine, the human soul must be lifted altogether above the natural order and made to partake of the divine nature 2 Peter I 4 Cp 'Beloved, we are God's children now, it does not yet appear what we shall be, but we know that when he appears we shall be like him, for \ie shall see him as he is* (1 John III 2) 'God made all things through me when I had my existence w the unfathomable ground of God ' Eckhart, E T G Evans, Vol I,
in io 5
Tmittnya Upamsad
All distinctions of food and foodeater, object and subject are transcended He goes up and down the worlds as he chooses, eating what food he likes, putting on what form he likes
Suresvara says 'AH this is divided twofold, food and foodeater The enlightened one says, "I who am the Atman, the Real and the Infinite, am myself this twofold world " '
The Supreme is the subject and the object as well as the link between them
I have overcome the wJwle world- Op this with the Buddha's declaration, after attaining abhisam- boih
'Subdued have I all, all-knowing am I now Unattached to all things, and abandoning all, Finally freed on the destruction of all craving, Knowing it myself, whom else should I credit? There is no teacher of mine, nor is one like me, There is none to rival me in the world of men and gods; Truly entitled to honour am I, a teacher unexcelled Alone am I a Supreme Buddha, placid and tranquil, To found the kingdom of righteousness, I proceed to Kali's capital,
Beating the drum of immortality m the world enveloped by darkness '
Ariyaparyesana Sulla Majjhnna Ntkaya Cp Richard of St Victor "The third grade of love is when the mind of man is rapt into the abyss of the divine light, so that, u ^ er |y oblivious of all exterior things, it knows not itself and passes wholly into its God In this state, while the mmd is alienated from itself, while it is rapt unto the secret closet of the divine privacy, while it is on all sides encircled by the conflagration of divine love and is intimately penetrated and set on fire through and through, it strips off self and puts on a certain divine condition, and being configured to the beauty gazed upon, it passes into a new kind of glory Dom Cuthbert Butler Western Mysticism (1922), p 7
purnam adah, fumam idam, purnat purnam udacyate purnasya purnam Maya purnam evavasisyate That is full, this is full The full comes out of the full Taking
the full from the full the full itself remains Aum, peace, peace,
peace
Brahman is both transcendent and immanent
The birth or the creation of the universe does not in any manner affect the integrity of Brahman
j Iia Upamsad 5 6 7
i mvasyam tdath sarvamyat km ca jagatyam yagat Una tyaktena Ihunfitha, ma, grdJiah kasyasvid dhanam.
I (Know that) all this, whatever moves in this moving world, is enveloped by God Therefore find your enjoyment m renunciation, do not covet what belongs to others
All things which move and change derive their significance from their relation to the one eternal truth The invisible always continuing the same, but the visible never the same Plato-
fiMsyam enveloped by God The world does not stand apart from God, but is pervaded by Him. Cp the Psalmist 'The earth is the Lord's and the fulness thereof, the world and they that dwell therein ' The Supreme is viewed not as the Absolute Brahman but as the cosmic Lord
iia Uitii paramesvarah vasyam, mvasamyavl, vyapyam Kurana- rayana The world is steeped in God. It is the 'household of God God dwells in the heart of all thmgs_ Iharatmakam eva sarvam, bhraniya yad ani&iara-rwpena grhttam A
jagal. The universe is a becoming, not a thing It is a series of change- ful happenings
tyaktena bhunjUMh enjoy through tyaga, or renunciation of self-will. Enjoy all things by renouncing the idea of a personal proprietary relationship to them If we recognise that the world in which we live is not ours, we enjoy it When we know that the one Real indwells all, we will get nd of the craving for acquisition. Enjoy by pvmg up the sense of attachment When the individual is subject to ignorance, he is not conscious of the unity and identity behind the multiplicity and so cannot enter mto harmony and oneness with the universe and thus fails to enjoy the world When, however, he reabses his true existence which is centred m the Divine, he becomes free from selfish desire and possesses, enjoys the world, being in a state of non- attachment. Self-denial is at the root of spiritual life 'If any one wish to come after me, let him deny himself ' Matthew XVI 34
Sometimes tots passage is interpreted as meaning enjoy what is allotted to you by God (tend) Do not ask for more than what is given
>»« grdlmh' covet not Do not be greedy. When we realise that God inhabits each object, when we rise to that cosmic consciousness, co\etousness disappears Cp Wotton's Paraphrase of Horace which »s found m Palgrave's Golden Treasury
Tlus man is freed from servile bonds
Of hope to rise, or fear to fall,
Lord of himself, though not of lands
And having nothing, yet hath all
568 The Principal Upani$ads i
kasyasud dhanain This is taken independent!} Whose indeed n wealth? It belongs to the Lord 'What hast thou that thou hast not received ' I Cor IV. 7 If we have craving for wealth, we are not true believers
paraitiasuhrdi batidhave kalatre su(a-tanaya-pitr-n.alr-b!.r:y.n,:*£c iathamattr upayaii yortLatrmSm purusa-pasur r.a tSsudns* bhaktah.
ptirusapasu is the animal man who is governed bj hunger and thirst and not the true human being with foresight and understanding See Artareya Arav.ya.ha II 3 2
By contemplating the fact that the gi\cr of all is the Supreme Lord, we cultivate the quality of detachment, xaim^ya For, the meaning of this verse is to encourage all those w ho wish to underhand the self, to devote themselves to final release and give up all worldlv desires. The exterior sacrifice is representative of the interior w hereby the human soul offers itself to God
Gandhi's comment on this verse is interesting 'The »,arJra describes God as the Creator, the Ruler and the Lord The «eer to whom this martra or verse was revealed was not satisfied with the very frequent statement that God was to be found everywhere But he went further and said "Since God pervades cvervthm/;, nothing belongs to you, not even your own body. God is the undis- puted unchallengeable Master of everything jou possess If it i> universal brotherhood— not onlv brotherhood of all human being', but of all living things — I find it m tins mantra If it is unshnl able faith m the Lord and Master— and all the adjectives jou can tlunl. of— I find it in this warJra If it is the idea of complete surrender to God and of the faith that he will supplj all that 1 need, then atpm I say I find it in this v.antra Since lie pervades evcrj fibre of ro> being and of all of jou, I derive from it the doctrine of cquihtv of all creatures on earth and it should satisfy the craving of all ihilosophical communists This ma/.tra tells me that I cannot hoi I as mine anything that belongs to God and that, if mj life an f l th"*t 3f all who believe in this «/ tra has to be a life of por/Vct indication, it follow- that it v ill have to be a life of continual «ervi<-c of Ml'>» ;rt?tiiros ' Address, at Kottajam, Jlanjat., 1917
Jndifitrcncc to the puns of the world, to the nff>rinr of livir,.' :reanw- is due uthcr to callouwss or thoughts sn» - Hut v.l m ac reali c th?t we srr all the ttneern of th" '.tin* Cre »tor, th<- <>V 1 ■ of His cm*, w<_ f<el vithm oursUvi an unhiir/h mn:; a nlrv. > s/-nv. tint even on» Ins a n ; *ht to hi*. o«n p' iv in th> 4 "« ' »'n.v- 5 ' Whin wi tnvfiv all tint ruits :v hi\t»r if. \*iw, >n th- i''^ 1 f.M principle of 1!! Uiiig., v.l nr 5 i fufw.Til iu h*lp .dl th'" tout within our r> ich
lia Upanisad
2 kurvann eveha karmam jipviset satam sa7na.l1 evam tvayi nanyaiheto'sii na karma hpyate imre
2 Always performing works here one should wish to live a hundred years If you live thus as a man, there is no way other than this hy which karman (or deed) does not adhere to you
Hrvam eva- performing works and without desiring their fruits
The first verse tells us that we win our way to inward freedom, by renunciation, by the withdrawal from the fortunes and mis- fortunes that shape the outward side of our existence We are called upon to withdraw from the world's work not in body but in mind, in intention, in spirit "Thy will be done on earth as it is in heaven ' jifivisct should wish to hv&jivttum icchet.
na karma hpyate narf by which karma does not adhere to you When we act by merging the individual in the cosmic purpose and by dedicating all action to God v our action does not bind, since we are no more entangled in selfish desire
§ argues that this and the following verses refer to those who are not competent to know the self and who are called upon to perform works enjoined in the Vedas He makes out that the way of know- ledge is for samnyasins and the way of action for others
The purport of this verse, is, however, that salvation is attained by the purification of the heart resulting from the performance of works done with the notion that these are all for the sake of the Lord and dedicated to Him Works done in this spirit do not bind the soul
According to Sarhkarananda, this verse is addressed to those who desire salvation, but cannot renounce the world
The importance of work is stressed in this verse We must do works and not refrain from them Embodied man cannot refrain from action, he cannot escape the life imposed on him by his em- bodiment The way of true freedom is not abstention from action but conversion of spirit
Wisdom is beautiful but barren without works St James. 'Faith, apart from works, is dead ' II. 26.
The author points out that action is not incompatible with wisdom There is a general tendency to regard contemplation as superior to action This judgment is not peculiar to India In the ^ew Testament, Martha chose the good part and Mary the better What Martha chose, ministering to the hungry, the thirsty and the homeless will pass away, but Mary chose to contemplate, see the vision of God and it shall not be taken away from her The Upamsad says that it is not necessary to withdraw* from active life to give oneself up to the contemplative Besides, no one can come to con- templation without having exercised the works of the active life
57° The Principal Upamsads 4
St Gregory says, 'We ascend to the heights of contemplation by the steps of the active life ' Morals on Job, XXXI 102
3 Demoniac, venly, are those worlds enveloped m blinding darkness, and to them go after death, those people who are the slayers of the self
asurya appertaining to the asuras, those who delight only in physical life (osw), those who are devoted to the nourishing of their lives, and addicted to sensual pleasures v asurya sunless
Siddhanta-kaumudl gives two derivations for the word siirya saraty okas' e suryah kartan hyap mpatanad tt4vam yadva su praam titdadih sttvatt, karmant lokatn prerayah kyapo rut He is the lord who makes men work From him are derived all incentives to work
For 5 astiras are those who are not the knowers of the Self The term includes all persons, from men to the highest gods, who have not the knowledge of the Supreme Self
For Samkarananda those who desire riches are asuras as, by so doing they slay (forget) the all-pervading Self t andJtena tamasa ignorance which consists in the inability to see one s
self , atmahano janah Those who neglect the spirit prakrta aviavantso lana atmahana ucyante, tena hy alma-hanana-iosena samsaranti te Such souls are destined for the joyless, demoniac regions, enveloped in darkness. See B U IV 4 11 A says that the reference is to those who do not know the Self and thus attribute to it agency, etc
4 anejad ckam manaso javtyo nainad dcva apntivan piirva-
marsat . .
tad dhdvato'nyaihatyeti ttsihat tasmmn apo matarisva
dadhah . ,
a (The spirit) is unmoving, one, swifter than themma The senses do not reach It as It is ever ahead of ftem Though Itself standing still It outstrips those who run In It the au- pervading air supports the activities of beings
5 Isa Upamsad 57 1
devah senses dyotaitidd dsuak cak&xiradxnindnyctyi S apah activities — karmani £
matansvan air, because it moves, ivasih, m the sky, avtankse. malaniva vayuh, sarva-prana-bhrt kriyatmakah, yad-dirayam karya- karana-jatam yasmmn otam protam ca, yat sfdrasamjfiakam, sarvasya yagato mdharayitr sa mdtansva §
It is that whose activity sustains all life, on which all causes and cSects depend and m which all these inhere, which is called the thread which supports all the worlds {through which it runs)
For Samkarananda, matansvan is stilratman.
The whole world has the supreme Self as its basis sarva hi karya-kSranadt-vtknya nUyacaitanyatmasvarUpe sarvaspadabhMe saiy aiabhavanh £
The Supreme is one essence but has two natures, an eternal immutability and an unceasing change. It is stillness and movement Immovable in Itself, all things are moved from It The unity and mamfoldness are both aspects of the life divine Unity is the truth and multiplicity is its manifestation The former is the truth, vidya, the latter ignorance, avidya. The latter is not false except when it is viewed m itself, cut off from the eternal unity Unity constitutes the base of multiplicity and upholds it but multiplicity does not constitute and uphold the unity
tad antarasya sarvasya tad u sarvasydsya bahyatah. 5 It moves and It moves not; It is far and It is near; It is within all this and It is also outside all this
These apparently contradictory statements are not suggestive of the mental unbalance of the writer He is struggling to describe what he experiences through the limitations of human thought and language The Supreme is beyond the categories of thought 1 nought is symbolic and so cannot conceive of the Absolute except through negations, yet the Absolute is not a void It is all that is in time and yet is beyond tune It is far because it is not capable of attainment by the ignorant v- j- S Veiy near t0 the knowin S tor 11 »s therr very self. J cdatita Ddtka quotes two verses to show the distance and »ie uitunacy of the Supreme to the undevout and the devout respectively
parammtkhanam govinde, visaydsahtaccfasSm iesam tat paramam brahma farad diiraiare slhtatn. (an-mayalvcm govwdc ye mranyasta-celasah waya-iyfigitMs fcsavi vtficyam ca tad anhke
thi ^Z^T 5 mdtcate the Sldes 0{ *•» Divui e, the one and man}, the uumovmg and the moving They do not deny the
572 The Principal Upantsads 7
reality of either They see the one in the many. The one is the eternal truth of things; the many its mamfestatation The latter is not a figment of the mind It becomes so when it is divorced from the sense of its eternal background
All things and beings are the manifestation of the One Supreme, which is described through paradoxes It is swifter than the mind, the senses cannot grasp It, It eludes their hold Standing, It out- strips all Rooted in It, all the cosmic forces energise the whole universe It moves and yet is motionless It is near, yet distant It is inside of all and outside of all
6 yas tu sarvani thutam atmany evanupaiyatt sarvabhutesu catmanam tato na vijugupsate
6 And he who sees all beings in his own self and his own self in all beings, he does not feel any revulsion by reason of such a view.
SeeBG VI 30 vtiugupsate — v victhisate He has no doubts
He shrinks from nothing as he knows that the One Self is mani- fested in the multiple forms atma-vyatmktdm napasyati S
This verse speaks of the transformation of the soul, its absorption in God in whom is the whole universe It also points out how unity is the basis of multiplicity and upholds the multiplicity Therefore the essence of the Supreme is its simple Being. Multiplicity is its becoming Brahman is the one self of all and the many are the becomings of the one Being
7 When, to one who knows, all beings have, verily, become one with his own self, then what delusion and what sorrow can be to him who has seen the oneness?
moU delusion or the veiling of the self, avarana
ioka sorrow due to viksepa or distraction in the manifestations
When the unity is realised by the individual he becomes l$«lisj from sSow, which is the product of dualities When the self of the Reiver becomes all things, there can be no ™« or care The vision of all existences in the Self and of the Self in aU existences is the foundation of freedom and joy The Ba, the Lord TimSanent in all that moves in this world There is no opposition
^M^SK- conception of God — the worlds asks us to see the creation in God and does not overiooK Se IS of a fundamental oneness, ekatvam which alone is Being
9 Ida Upantsad 573
Eckhart. 'Does the soul know God in the creatures, that is merely evening light' Does she know creatures m God, that is morning light? But does the soul know God as He who alone is Being, that is tiie light of midday'' Rudolf Otto: Mysticism- East and West (1932), p 5» n.
8. sa paryagac chukram, akayam, avranam, asnavtram, iuddham, apdpaviddham kavir mamsti, panbhuh, svayambhuh, yatMtathyato'rthdn. vyadadhac cha&vatxbhyas samabhyaifi 8. He has filled all; He is radiant, bodiless, invulnerable, devoid of sinews, pure, untouched by evil He, the seer, thinker, all-pervading, self-existent has duly distributed through endless years the objects according to their natures.
kavth the seer He who knows the past, the present and the future kawh kranta-darii sarva-dfk S. He has intuitive wisdom, while manlslh the thinker, manlsi manasa Uita sarvajna tSvarah jwnbhGh' all-pervading As the cosmic soul He pervades the universe. S says that the omniscient Lord allotted different functions to the various and eternal praja-patts known popularly as years samvatsarakhyebhyah prajd-pattbhyah §. See also B.U I. 5 14, Prasnal 9
9 andham tamafy pramiantx yo'vtdyam upasate taio bhilya iva te tamo ya u vidydydm rata}}
9. Into blinding darkness enter those who worship ignorance and those who delight in knowledge enter into still greater darkness, as it were
See B.U IV 4-10
S interprets avidyd to mean ceremonial piety and vtdya as knowledge « the deities The former leads to the world of the manes and the R t t t? tte world of gods Cp vidyhyadeva-hkaJikarmandptir-lokah *» u - *I 5- 16. S feels that vtdya cannot refer to the knowledge of
«a I'm * u £ cannot lead t0 ^ reater darkn ess. If we are lost in the wona ot birth, becoming, we overlook our pure being. If we con-
«K ak f 1 ^ 6 latter ' we ^ be onesided We must look upon
wnvmJ 5 r* S 8 ? e one and the man y- 88 both the sta We and the moving It is both immanent and transcendent.
^° t0 ^ dtcbotoni y of work *«* wisdom and 5 iR, 2? ^ thoS ? w : h0 are lost in works wthout the ^sdorn to \h» £ mt0 . darkness - thos * who are exclusively devoted
iS^SS^SffT- i° th % ne ^ ct « ente/mto stdl
fcTeaier darkness Selfish seekers of spiritual wisdom miss their aim.
574 The Principal Upanisads n.
The Upaiusad repudiates both schools of thought— those who hold that salvation is attained only by means of works and those who hold that it is to be attained by knowledge alone It supports Rumania who advocates a combination of knowledge and works Kumanla says that even as a bird cannot fly in the heaven by one wing only but only by both the wings, even so man can gam salvation only by the combined pursuit of knowledge and works. Contemplative and active lives should go together 'Faith without works is dead '
It is also said that avidya applies to the selfish people who desire worldly possessions and vidya to those who say 'I am Brahman' without the actual realisation of this truth §
The state of those who are lost in ignorance and cling to external props is pitiable indeed, but the state of those who are intellectually learned but spiritually poor is worse The darkness of intellectual conceit is worse than that of ignorance The writer is here dis- tinguishing between knowledge by description and knowledge by acquaintance or experience
io. anyad evakur wdyaya anyad aJim avidyaya ih (u&rwma dhiranamye ms tad vtcacakstre
10 Distinct, indeed, they say, is the result of knowledge and distinct, they say, is the result of ignorance Thus have we heard from those wise who have explained to us these.
We cannot grasp the nature of ultimate Reality by either discursive knowledge or lack of it
If knowledge and ignorance are both real, it is because con- sciousness of oneness and consciousness of multiplicity are different sides of the supreme self-awareness The one Brahman is the basis of numberless manifestations
11 vidyam cavidyam ca yas tad vedobhayam saha avidyaya mrtyum tirtvd vidyayamrtam ainute
II Knowledge and ignorance, he who knows the two together crosses death through, ignorance and attains life eternal through knowledge +,At^
SeeMaitn*VII 9
Viiya is equated with knowledge of deities and avtdyamik karma, vidyam cavidyam ca devataplanam karma ceiy arthah S S makes out that by the performance of ntes we overcome death and by the meditation on deities we attain immortality, which is becoming one with the deity meditated upon amjiam devalmabhavam
Vedanta Desika quotes a verse where it is said that by austerity we destroy sins and by wisdom we attain life eternal tape- mdya ca mprasya nihireyasa karau ubhau tapasa kalmasam hanti vidyayamrtam ainute
Kuranarayana says, 'avidyaya vidyanga-riipstayd codiiena karrxara iKftytak vidyotpatti-pratibandhaka-bhutam punya-papa-ruparr. pr5k- tanath Pama tiriva niravasesam utlangkya vtdyaya parairMtr.opasar.a- riipayd arr.iiam asr.tcie moksam prapnoti.
ubhayam saka: the two together. Works though they do not by themselves lead to salvation, are helpful in preparing our hearts for it If v?e imagine that -we can attain the highest wisdom without such previous preparation, vre are mistaken. If vre give ourselves to what is not knowledge we are mistaken, if we dehght altogether ia knowledge despising work we are also mistaken. 1
Attdya is regarded as an essential prerequisite for spiritual life. Man cannot rise to spiritual enlightenment if he has not first through avidya become conscious of himself as a separate ego. In spiritual life we transcend this sense of separateness. To reach the higher self we must do battle with the lower. The endowment of intellectuality or avidya is justified on the ground that it creates the conditions for its own transformation. If we remain at the intellectual level, look upon it not only as a means but as the end in itself, if we deny the reality of life eternal to which we have to rise, then we suiter from intellectual pride and spiritual blindness. The knowledge of discur- sive reason is essential, but it has to be transcended into the life of spirit Avidya must be transcended in Vidya. Avidya has its place. Without it there is no individual, no bondage, no liberation. 3
THE MANIFEST AND THE UNMANTFE5T 12 andham taviah pravisardi ye'sambhuiim upasate
iato bhuya iva te tamo ya u sambhutyam raifik. 12 Into blinding darkness enter those who worship the unmanifest and into still greater darkness, as it were, -those who dehght in the manifest.
asambhstr the unmanifest, the undifferentiated prakrii. We get our rewards according to our beliefs
1 Augustine: Two virtues are set before the soul of man, the one Active, the other contemplative, the one whereby we journey, the other whereby we reach our journey's end; the one wherebv we toil that our ""1" be cleansed for the vision of God ; the other wherebv we repose ft 5° God; the oae fces m the precepts for carrvmg on this temporal +ta' k »? e otiler m ^octane of that life which is eternal Hence it is ^a* fee one to Js, and the other reposes ; for the former is in the purgation
JQicortahty of soul ' B XI. Barua. Ctylor. Ltciuns (1945}, p 201 n.
576 The Principal Upam?ads 14.
asambhuh non-becoming Those who do not believe mre-birth may be referred to.
sambhutf the manifest, the lord of the phenomenal world, karya- brahma Hiranya-garbha S It is sometimes said that asainbhuli means that the world has no creator, that it is produced, preserved and destroyed by its own nature Those who hold such a view are the naturalists See B G XVI 8, 9, 20
The Supreme is neither of these in the sense that he is not also the other. If we identify the Supreme with the manifest, it would be pantheism in the sense that the whole of the Divine nature finds expression in the manifested world, leaving nothing over, and it is a wrong view Again, if the world of becoming were not there, it would all disappear in what would seem a world of undifferenced abstraction Within the depths of the spint there is unfolded before us the drama of God's dealings with man and man's with God. Unity and multiplicity are both aspects of the Supreme and there- fore the nature of the Supreme is said to be inconceivable ekaive salt nanatvam nanatve suit caihata acmtyam brahmano rupam his tad vedttum arhah quoted by R onMU I 3
13 Distinct, indeed, they say, is what results from the manifest, and distinct, they say, is what results from the unmanifest Thus have we heard from those wise who have explained to us these
Those who worship the Creator Htranya-garbha obtain super- natural powers those who worship the Unmanifested principle of prakjit get absorbed into it sambMtek kdrya-brahmopasanat asam- bkfiieh avyakrtat S". quoting from the Puranas
14 sambhiiUm ca vinos' am ca yas tad vedobhayam saha vmaiata mrtyum tvrtva sambhutya amrtam ainute
14. He who understands the manifest and the unmanifest both together, crosses death through the unmanifest and attains life eternal through the manifest
S tells us that sambbuti here means asambhfiti vinasa is taken as effect and so sambhflti. sambhVAtm ca mnaiam ceiyatravarnalopena mrdeso drasfuvyah prakftt-laya-phala-sruiyanurodhat
Vedanta Deitka and KUranarayana dispute S' interpretation atra sambhiilt-wnas'aSabdabhyam sr§frj>rakyawaksayakSrya-htran- va-sarbltasya avyakrta-pradhanasya copasanam mdMyata »J», Samkara- vyMydnam anupapannam tatha salt mrtyn-taranamftalva-praptf rapa-phala-vacananattcUyat.
i8. lia Upamsad 577
To be absorbed in the world around without turning to the principle at the base of it is one extreme, to be absorbed in the contemplation of the transcendent infinite indifferent to the events of the manifested world because they are likely to disturb inward serenity and self-complacency is another extreme This verse asks us to lead a life m the manifested world with a spirit of non- attachment, with the mind centred m the unmanifest We must live in this world without being choked by it We must centre our thoughts in the eternal remembering that the eternal is the soul of the temporal
See BTJ V. 15 1-3
samuha tejah.
yat te rftpam kalydiiatamam tat te paSydmi yo sdv asau purusah, so'Jiam asmi. 16 0 Pusan, the sole seer, O Controller, 0 Sun, offspring of Prajd-pah, spread forth your rays and gather up your radiant light that I may behold you of loveliest form. Whosoever is that person (yonder) that also am I.
17. May this life enter into the immortal breath; then may this body end in ashes 0 Intelligence, remember, remember what has been done Remember, 0 Intelligence, what has been done, Remember
18 ague naya supathd raye asmdn wsvdni deva vayundni vtdvan
yuyodhyasmaj juhardnam eno bhuytsihdm te nama-uktim vtdhema.
r» - ^^ ni ' * ea( ^ us > along the auspicious path to prosperity, U God who knowest all our deeds Take away from us deceitful sins We shall offer many prayers unto thee
Verses 15-1S are uttered at the time of death Even to-day they are used by the Hindus in their funeral rites We are required to
578 The Principal Upanisads 18
remember our past deeds as their results accompany the departing soul and determine the nature of the future life
The Upanisad emphasises the unity of God and the world and the union of the two lives, the contemplative and the active We cannot have the contemplative life without the active We must cleanse our souls to ascend the heights of contemplation The seers of the Upamsads, the Buddha, Jesus have set an example not to neglect the work of the world through love of contemplation They are noted for their stability and poise Their calm was a vigilant one They act without selfishness and help without patronising.
The Upanisad derives its name from the first word Kena, by whom, and belongs to the Sama Veda. It is also known as the Talavakara, the name of the Brdhmana of the Soma Veda to which the Upanisad belongs. It has four sections, the first two in verse and the other two in prose The metrical portion deals with the Supreme Unqualified Brahman, the absolute principle underlying the world of phenomena and the prose part of the Upanisad deals with the Supreme as God, Itvara The know- ledge of the Absolute, para vidyd, which secures immediate liberation (sadyo-muktf} is possible only for those who are able to withdraw their thoughts from worldly objects and con- centrate on the ultimate fact of the universe. The knowledge of livara, apara vidya, puts one on the pathway that leads to deliverance eventually (krama-mtikti) The worshipping soul gradually acquires the higher wisdom which results in the consciousness of the identity with the Supreme
T*
1 May my limbs grow vigorous, my speech, breath, eye, ear as also my strength and all my senses
2 sarvam brdhmopamqadam md'ham brahma mrdkuryam ma. ma brahma mrakaroi amrdkaranam astu atttrdkaranam me'stu
2 All is the Brahman of the Upanisads May I never discard Brahman May the Brahman never discard me May there be no discarding May there be no discarding of me
3 Let those truths which are (set forth) in the Upanisads live in me dedicated to the self Aum, peace, peace, peace.
Kena Upamsad
58i
WHO IS THE REAL AGENT IN THE INDIVIDUAL?
1 kenesitam patah presitam manah kena prariah prathamah paihyuktah
kenesitam vacam imam vadawti. caksuk irotram ha « dew yumUi.
1. By whom willed and directed does the mind light on its objects' By whom commanded does hie the first, move? At whose will do (people) utter this speech' And what god is it that prompts the eye and the ear?
The questions put in this verse by the pupil imply that the passing things of experience are not all and they depend on a permanent reality The necessity of a ground for the existence of finite beings is assumed here The questions assume that there is a relation between reality and these phenomena, that the real governs the phenomenal.
THE ALL-CONDITIONING YET INSCRUTABLE BRAHMAN IS THE AGENT
2. botrasya irotram manaso mano yad vaco ha vacam sa « pranasya prdnah caksusai caksur atimucya dhvrah, prety asmal tekat amrta bhavantt,
2 Because it is that which is the ear of the ear, the mind
ft k the s P eech ' ""fe^ 1 of t** speech, the breath of fie breath, the eye of the eye, the wise, giving up (wrong notions of their self-sufficiency) and departing from this world, become immortal.
fe^rse 136 contains the answers to the questions raised in the
tar of the ear it means that the self directs the ear.
mere is the Eternal Reality behind the mind, life and the senses, «nW?; tbe nund> the llfe of the m *- Brahman is not an object iif?„t t0 , imn , d ' ^ech and the senses He who knows it will gain a \tU u not the satisfactions of the earthly life Here tthid, -l space 311(1 tm6 we are alwavs seeing *e Beyond thaK-k f s P ace 315(1 T nere, we possess the consciousness wat is beyond space and time.
5^2 The Principal Upam$ads x 5.
3 There the eye goes not, speech goes not, nor the mind- we know not, we understand not how one can teach this
Katha VI. 12, M.U. Ill (r)-8, T.U II 4.
The Supreme is not dependent on mind, life and senses for its being
'Knowledge of a thing arises through the senses or the mind and since Brahman is not reached by either of these, we do not know of what nature it is We are therefore unable to understand how anyone can explain that Brahman to a disciple Whatever is perceivable by the senses, that it is possible to indicate to others, by genus, quality, function or relationship, jati-guna-knya-visesanaih Brahman does not possess any of these differentiating characters Hence the difficulty in explaining its nature to disciples S
4 anyad em tad vidttdd atho avtdttdd adht
itt iu&ruma purve$amye nas tad vyacacak$m.
See l£a 10, 13
4 Other, indeed, is it than the known, and also it is above the unknown. Thus have we heard from the ancients who have explained it to us
It is above the known and the unknown, bat it is not unknowable. Verse 6 says, tad eva brahtna tvam vtddhi, 'that, venly, is Brahman, know thou,' implies that the Brahman is not beyond our appre- hension The writer suggests that this teaching has been trans- mitted by tradition We cannot know it by logic brahtna caitanyam ticdryopadesa-paramparayaivadhigantavyatn, natarkatah &
'Those who know do not speak , Those who speak do not know ' Tao Te'Ching 56 A Waley's English translation The Way and the Power
5 yai vaca nabhyuiitam yena vdg abhyudyate
tad eva brahtna tvam vtddhi nedamyai tdam upasate. 5 That which is not expressed through speech but that by which speech is expressed, that, verily, know thou, is Brahman, not what (people) here adore
§ argues that the author lays stress on the distinction between the Absolute Brahman who is one with the deepest self in us and Hvara who is the object of worship
Ihara as the indwelling spirit and not as an object who is external to us is what the Real is God must cease to be a conceived and apprehended God but become the inward power by which we live But this inward experience of God is felt only by the advanced
j g Kena Upamsad 5^3
soints The simple, unreflective child-mind seeks God who is above and not within The prayer of Solomon, 'Hear thou m Heaven thy
mtlS'tSe here adore —The pure Godhead which is beyond all conceptual determinations and differentiations, when viewed con- ceptually and concretely becomes, as Eckhart says, an idol. Had I a God whom I could understand, I would no longer hold him for God * a
Sptnt cannot be objectified The revelation of Spmt is m the depths of one's life and not m the objective world. However high our conception may be, so long as it is an objective attitude, it is a form of idolatry. When we are in bondage to the objective world, we look upon God as a great external force, a supernatural power who demands to be appeased God is life and can be revealed only m spiritual life The relation to the Supreme is an inward one revealing itself in the depths of spiritual life Spmt is freedom, hfe, the opposite of necessity, passivity, death This and the following verses affirm that Spmt must free itself from the yoke of necessity. The more completely we live m the divine the less do we reflect on him.
Cp Eckhart When the soul beholds God purely, it takes all its being and its life and whatever it is from the depth of God, yet it knows no knowing, no loving, or anything else whatsoever. It rests utterly and completely within the being of God, and knows nothing but only to be with God So soon as it becomes conscious that it sees and loves and knows God, that is m itself a departure.'3
6. That which is not thought by the mind but by which, they say, the mmd is thought (thinks) ; that, venly, know thou, is Brahman and not what (people) here adore
Brahman is the pure subject and should not be confused with any object, however exalted
7- yac caksusa na pasyati yena caksumsi pasyah tad ova brahma ivaih viddht nedamyad tdam upasate
7 That which is not seen by the eye but by which the eyes arc seen (see) , that, venly, know thou, is Brahman and not what (people) here adore.
8 yac cchrotmm na sWtmohyem iroiram idam Srtttam tad cva brahma tvam viddht nedamyad idam upasate.
1 I Kings, VIII 30.
* Rudolf Otto Mysticism. East and West (1932). P> 2 5- 3 Ibid , p i 34
5^4 The Principal Upanisads II 2 ,
8 That which is not heard by the ear but by which the ears are heard (hear), that, verily, know thou, is Brahman and not what (people) here adore
9 yat prdnena prdniti yena pranah pramyate
tad eva brahma tvath viddhi nedamyad idam ufiasate 9 That which is not breathed by life, but by which life breathes, that, venly, know thou, is Brahman and not what (people) here adore
1. yadi manyase suvedett dabhram evdpi nunam tvam vetiha brahmano rupam yadasya tvam yadasya devesu atha nu mtmdmsyam eva te, manye vidttam.
1. If you think that you have understood Brahman well, you know it but slightly, whether it refers to you (the uidividual self) or to the gods. So then is it to be investigated by you (the pupil) (even though) I think it is known
dabhram, another reading is daharam Both mean alpam or small. Whatever is human or divine is limited by adjuncts and is thus not different from smallness or fimtude The Brahman which is free from adjuncts is not an object of knowledge The disciple is asked to ponder over this truth and he, through reasoning and intuitive experience, comes to a decision and approaches the teacher and says, 'I think that Brahman is now understood by me ' evam acaryoktah sisya ekante upavistah sctmaJntassait, yathoktam acaryena agamam arlltato vicdrya tarkatai ca mrdhdrya, svdnubltayam krtva, acarya-sakaiam wpagamya, uvaca manye'ham athedamm vidttam brahmeh §
2 ndham manye suvedett no na vedeh veda ca yo nas tad veda tad veda no na vedett veda ca
2. I do not think that I know it well; nor do I think that I ^ do not know it He who among us knows it, knows it and he,
too, does' not know that he does not know.
'It is neither that I know him not, nor is it that I know him' is also an admissible rendering . . ...
There is the knowledge that we obtain through phJosppnicai processes but there is also another kind of knowledge The founder
n. 3. Kena Vpaniscd 5S5
and model of Egyptian monachism, St- Antony, aixordihg to Cassian (Coll IX. 31) , delivered this judgment about prayer, ' last prayer is not perfect in -which the monk understands herself or Ms own prayer.' (See Encyclopaedic of Religions and Ethics, article on Reran CatMic.)
Cp Dionysius: 'There is that most divine knowledge of God which takes place through ignorance, in. the union, which is above intelligence, when the intellect quitting all things that are, and then leaving itself also, is united to the superlucent rays, being- iSurrduated thence and therein by the unsearchable depth of wisdom Divine Nantes VTL 3 Lords of Blois observes: "The souL having- entered the vastsolitude of the Godhead, happily loses itself; and enlightened by the brightness of most lucid darkness, becomes through know- ledge as if without knowledge, and dwells in a sort of wise ignorance/ Stviiitd Mirror, Co. XI.
3. To whomsoever it is not known, to him it is known: to whomsoever it is known, he does not know. It is not understood by those who understand it; it is understood by those who do not understand it.
This verse brings out how we struggle with the difScnlties of human expression, how we confess to ourselves the insufeciency of mental utterance.
^^ni: of ne in words, their wav of thinkhs: is false, ther "do not ;;" at . The Beneficent Ones are to be seen in the Law. theirs
i^wscdy, the Buddha is rishtlv to be understood as beins cf U vZr* ° f &e km cannot be understood by any msars.'
j other words, thev have seen God and ihev do n;r
asl^. CQ: !t ,:s ^ "^-y see God srCl and alwavs "and that
—5 as tney see, they cannot t€L themselves they hive had the
5^6 The Principal Upamsads U 4.
vision, such reminiscence is for souls that have lost it ' Enneads IV 4 6 Nicolas of Cusa, De Vis. Dei, Ch XVI 'What satisfies the intellect is not what it understands '
Cp Dionysius, the Areopagite 'God is invisible from excess of light He who perceives God is himself in darkness God's all- pervading darkness is hidden from every light and veils all recogni- tion And if anyone who sees God recognises and understands what he sees, then he himself hath not seen Him '
4 prattbodha-viditam matam amrtatvam hi vindate atmana vindate vlryam vidyayd vindate amrtam
4 When it is known through every state of cognition, it is rightly known, for (by such knowledge) one attains life eternal Through, one's own self one gains power and through wisdom one gams immortality
prahbodha-viditam through every state of cognition. bodJuim bo&ham pratt mditam S The self is the witness of all states sarva-pratyaya- darh-cicchakti-svarUpa-matrah To know it as such is right knowledge It is the absolute a prion, the certain foundation of all knowledge If pratibodha-viditam is interpreted as leading to an inferential apprehension of the self, then self becomes a substance possessing the faculty of knowing and not knowledge itself bodfia-knya-iak- tvman atma dravyam, m bodhasvarupa eva S Knowledge appears and disappears When knowledge appears, the self is inferred, when knowledge disappears, the self becomes a mere unintelligent sub- stance talha nasfabodho dravyamdlram mrwiesafy S, The self is subject to changes _ _ ,
If pratibodha-mdttam means knowledge of self by self, the object known is the conditioned BraJiman and not the unconditioned Reality 'Pure spirituality is bound only to interior recollection and mental converse with God So although (one) may make use of (these interventions) this will be only for a tune, his spirit will at once come to rest in God and he will forget all things of sense '»
'Of all forms and manners of knowledge the soul must stop ana void itself so that there may be left m it no kind of impression of knowledge, nor trace of aught soever, but rather the soul must remain barren and bare, as if these forms had never passed through it, and in total oblivion and suspension '»
x St John of the Cross Ascent of Mount Carmel, Bk III. Ch XXXI a Ibid , Bk III, Ch II
Ill 2
Kena Upanisad
bhfttesu bhiitesn vwintya dhirah prdyasmal lokad amrta bhavanti.
5. If here (a person) knows it, then there is truth, and if here he knows it not, there is great loss Hence, seeing or (seeking) (the Real) in all beings, wise men become immortal on departing from this world.
vmntya mjnaya, saksatkriya § v vtctiya.
The wise man sees the same Brahman in every creature here- If here on earth, in this physical body, we arrive at our true existence, and are no longer bound down to the process, to the becoming, we are saved If we do not find the truth, our loss is great, for we, then, are lost in the Me of mind and body and do not rise above it to our supramental existence
THE ALLEGORY OF THE VEDIC GODS' IGNORANCE OF BRAHMAN
1. brahma ha devebkyo vtjtgye, tasya ha brahmano vtjaye devd atmhiyanta, ta arksantasmakam evayam vyayo'smdkam evayam mahma iti,
1 Brahman, it is said, conquered (once) for the gods, and the gods gloned in that conquest of Brahman They thought, ot 3 ^eed, is this victory and ours, indeed, is this greatness
The incomprehensible Supreme is higher than all gods, and is the source of victory for the gods and defeat, for the demons Brahman as the Supreme Ihara vanquishes the enemies of the world and restores stability to it.
We see in this allegory the supplanting of the Vedic gods by the one Supreme Brahman. B.U.I 3.1-7.
2 tadd Jmsam mjajnau, iebhyo ha pradur babhuva, tan na Wpnaia hm tdamyaksam ttt.
^afeam- spirit piijyam maJtad bhiitam iti. S. uie ^npreme by His power appeared before the devas .yp^nSJiatmya-mrtnitenatyadbJmtena vismapantyena rtipena "cvanam wdnya-gocare pradurbabhiiva. S\
588 The Principal Upantsads in. xo
3 te'gmm abruvan, jata-veda etad mjdmkt km dad yaksam ttt, tatheti.
3 They said to Agm, '0 Jata-vedas, find this out, what this spint is ' 'Yes' (saxd he}
jata~vedasi$sai&to be omniscient sarvajna-kalpam 5 jdtam sarvam vettt ttt jdta-veddh It is the name given to Agm in the R V.
4 fad abhyadravat, tarn abhyavadat ko'sittj-agmr vd aham asmi tiy abravit, jata-veda aham asmi ttt
4 He hastened towards it and it said to him, 'Who art thou?' (Agm) replied, 'I am Agm indeed, I am Jata-vedas '
5 tasmtms tvayt kim wry am ih, apidam sarvam daheyamyad idam prthivydm iti
5 He again asked, 'What power is there in thee?' Agm replied, 'I can burn everything whatever there is on earth '
6 tasmai trnam ntdadhau etad daha itt, tad upapreydya sarva-javena, tan na iaidka dagdhum, sa tata eva mvavrte, naitad aiakam vijndtumyad etad yaksam ttt
6 (He) placed (a blade of) grass before him saying, 'Burn this ' He went towards it with all speed but could not burn it He returned thence and said 'I have not been able to find out what this spirit is '
sarva-javena with all speed sarvolsaha-krtena vegena £
7 atha vdyum abruvan, vdyav etad vtjdmhi kim etadyak?am tti, tatheti
7 Then they said to Vayu (Air), '0 Vayu, find this out— What this spirit is ' 'Yes' (said he)
8 tad abhyadravat, tarn abhyavadat ko'sitt, vayttr vd aliam asmity abravtn mdtartivd aham asmitt
8 He hastened towards it, and it said to him, 'Who art thou?' Vayu replied, 'I am Vayu indeed, I am Matansvan.' tnatan aniarikse hayatilt tndtartsvd S.
g tasmtms tvayi km viryam ttt apidam sarvam ddadiyamyad tdam prthvoydm ttt
q (He asked Vayu) 'What power is there in thee? (Vayu) replied, 'I can blow off everything whatever there is on earth
io. tasmat trnam ntdadhau etad ddatsvett, tad upapreydya
sarva-javena, tan na iaSakadatum, sa lata eva mvavrte, naiiad aiakam vijnaiumyad etadyahsam ttt.
10 He placed before Mm (a blade of) grass saying, 'Blow off ' Vayu went towards it with all speed but could not blow it off He returned thence and said, T have not been able to find out what this spirit is.'
11. Then they said to Indra, '0 Maghavan, find this out what this spirit is ' 'Yes' (said he). He hastened towards it (but) it disappeared from before him.
12 sa tasmitm evakaie striyam ajagama hahu-idbhamanam main Itaimavatim tarn hovaca kirn eladyaksam iti.
12. When m the same region of the sky, he (Indra) came across a lady, most beautiful, Uma, the daughter of Himavat, and said to her, 'What is this spirit?'
bahu-iobhamdnam umatn' most beautiful, Uma. Uma is wisdom personified
Uma the name is said to be derived from « ma, do not practise austerities which is the exclamation addressed to ParvatI by her mother.
This legend that Uma, the daughter of the Himalayas revealed tne mystic idealism of the Upanisads to the gods is an imaginative expression of the truth that the thought of the Upanisads was aeveloped by the forest dwellers in the mountain fastnesses of the ■Himalayas
hmnmvaiim- the daughter of Himavat Holy men hve there and S*T?£ S g ? there 33 for many centuries the striving of the human
\v 7 s directed towards these mountain ranges sJ, - ^ 18 1116 most Deautlful of all beautiful things. Zl, fu £oiha,nSnSn am iobhanatama wdya. £ vtrilpo'pi vtdyavan ««» mhale Beauty is the expression of inward punty. Sins leave a faL? 1 xa ^ OT otherwise disfigure it Uma is the Wisdom that ™oras ignorance Mere knowledge untouched by divine
an«rf * t . n l t °" In the kves of we ^ ^ the si S ht of 311 i"™ hearing of its voice floods the seer with a new power and m Parts inanimation
kiU d« 6 D S* Sa f {ai(tti ^ is said that the Mother of the universe arp *? earth: or assume incarnations whenever disturbances
e caBsed b y hongs of a demoniacal nature.
tttham yadayada badha danavotihd bhavisyah, tada tadavaiirySham kansyamy ari-samksayam
Markandeya Pttrana, Devi Saptaiali II. 55
592 The Principal Vpamsads iy. Qi
.th^ fotofvanam nana, tad-vanam tty tydsitavyam, saya etad evamvedabhi hamam sarvdm bhutdm samvdnchanti
6 Brahman, the object of all desire, that, venly, is what is called the dearest of all It is to be meditated upon Tsuch (tadvanam). Whoever knows it thus, him, all beings seek. tad-vanam- dearest of all tasyaprdm-jatasyapratyag.atma-bhmd.vM Zamml ** haJanlyam tadvanain nama prakhydtam brahma vaOchanh seek, yearn, prdrthayanh. S.
7 (The pupil) 'Sir, teach (me) the secret (Upamsad).' (The teacher) • 'The secret has been taught to thee; we have taught thee the secret relating to Brahman.'
8 Austerities, self-control and work are its support, the Vedas are all its units, truth is its abode
tapah' austerity It is derived from the root tap to burn It signifies warmth. The saints are represented as undergoing austerities for years to attain supernatural powers The Supreme is said to have endured austerities m order to create
Tapas is training in spiritual life Negatively, it is cleansing our soul of all that is sinful and imperfect, positively, it is building up of all that is good and holy In the history of religion, the practice of bodily austerities has been looked upon as the chief means for attaining spiritual ends The privations of food and dnnk, of sleep and clothing, of exposure to heat and cold are labours undertaken to wear down the body In the story of asceticism, Hindu or Christian, excesses of bodily suffering play a large part such as the use of chainlets, spikes and pncks and scourgmgs
9 yo vd etdm evam veddpahatya pdpmdnam ante svarge loke jyeye prahhstJtati, praittisfhati
9 Whoever knows this, he, indeed, overcoming sin, m the end, is fkmly established in the Supreme world of heaven, yes, he is firmly established
ante, in the end v anante, mfinite, which is taken to qualify svarga or heaven In that case svarga is not paradise but infinite bhss from which there is no return to earthly embodiments na punas samsaram apadyata ity abhtprdyah. j>.
Kalha Upamsad, also called Kathakopamsad which belongs to the Taittiriya school of the Yajur Veda, uses the setting of a story found m ancient Sanskrit literature 1 A poor and pious Brdhmam, Vajasravasa, performs a sacrifice and gives as pre- sents to the priests a few old and feeble cows His son, Naciketas, feeling disturbed by the unreality of his father's observance of the sacrifice, proposes that he himself may be offered as offering [daksma) to a pnest When he persisted in his request, his father m rage said, 'Unto Yama, I give thee ' Naciketas goes to the abode of Yama and finding him absent, waits there for three days and nights unfed Yama, on his return, offers three gifts in recompense for the delay and discomfort caused to Naciketas For the first, Naciketas asked, 'Let me return alive to my father.' For the second, 'Tell me how my good works {isia-purta) may not be exhausted' ; and for the third, 'Tell me the way to conquer re-death {pwmr mriyu) '
In the Upamsad, the third request is one for enlightenment on the 'great transition' which is called death
The Upamsad consists of two chapters, each of which has three Vallis or sections
There are some passages common to the Gitd and the Katha U
' Taitttnya Brahmana III. i 8, see also M B Anuiasana Parva 106. ine fast mention of the stray ism the RV (X 135) where we read how we tray Naciketas was sent by his father to Yama (Death), but was auowea to get back on account of his great faith, iraddha
sa ha nav avatu, saha nau blmnaktu, saha mryam karavdvahai iejasvt nav adhttam astu. ma vidmsavahai; aum smith, iantth, sanhh
May He protect us both, may He be pleased with us both, may we work together with vigour; may our study make us illumined, may there be no dislike between us Awn, peace, peace, peace
See also T U. II and III. The teacher and the pupil pray for harmonious co-operation in keen and vigorous study
Katha Upanisad
x. uSan ha vai vdjasravasah sarva-vedasam dadaif tasya ha naciketa noma fiutra dsa
1. Desirous (of the fruit of the Visvajit sacrifice) Vajasravasa, they say, gave away all that he possessed He had a son by name Naciketas
ttfan desirous Evidently, at the time of the Upanisad, the sacrificial religion of the Bralimanas was popular Desire for earthly and heavenly gain was the prominent motive The Upanisad leads us to a higher goal. 'He who is free from desire beholds him ' II 20.
iK'an, is sometimes said to be the offspring of Vajasravasa » gave away all that he possessed. He is represented as making a volun- tary surrender of all that he possessed, samnydsa, in order to secure his spiritual interests
Naakctas one who does not know* and therefore seeks to know.
The author attempts to distinguish between Vajasravasa, the protagonist of an external ceremonialism, and Naciketas, the seeker of spiritual wisdom VajaSravasa represents orthodox religion and is devoted to its outer forms He performs the sacrifice and makes gifts which are unworthy The formalism and the hypocrisy of the father hurt the son
2 As the gifts were being taken to the priests, faith entered nim, although but a (mere) boy, he thought
Prompted by the desire to do real good to his father, the boy
i Ji?™, about the nature of the presents smttha-fattk It is not blind belief but the faith which asks whether ne outer performance without the living spirit is enough
3 pitodakd jagdha-imd dugdha-dohd mrindnyah ananda ndma ie lokds tan sa gacchata ta dadat
thp * >vater drunk ' their grass eaten, their milk milked, neir strength spent, joyless, verily, are those worlds, to which '"e, who presents such (cows) goes
' Cd V v nt !L v y airavaso 'P<>tyt'>» Bhattabhaskara MiSra. narlyai akcta • r£^° wle<i Seo£ the god have I, a mortal ' nSham devasya
596 The Principal Upantfads I 1 5,
nirmdriydh: without the strength to breed, a-prajamna-samarthah. anandd/r ananandah, asukliah, joyless. Isa 3, BU IV. 4 11. The cows which are presented are no longer able to drink, eat, give milk or calve.
Naciketas reveals here, with the enthusiasm of youth, the utter inadequacy of a formal soulless ritualism. The idea of complete surrender {sarva-vedasam dadau) in the first verse should be properly interpreted as utter dedication or complete self-giving
True prayer and sacrifice are intended to bring the mind and will of the human being into harmony with the great universal purpose of God
4 sa hovaca pitaram, tola kasmat mam ddsyasih; dvtttyam irivyaxtv, tarn hovaca: mrtyave tva daddmih
4 He said to his father, '0 Sire, to whom wilt thou give me?' For a second and a third time (he repeated) (when the father) said to him, 'Unto Death shall I give thee '
Dr Rawson suggests that a mere boy should be so impertinent as to interfere with his doings, the father m anger said, 'Go to hell.'
The boy earnestly wishes to make himself an offering and thus punfy his father's sacrifice He does not discard the old tradition but attempts to quicken it There can be no quickening of the spirit until the body die
Cp St Paul 'Thou fool, that which thou sowest is not quickened except it die '
mrtyave: unto Death Mrtyu or Yama is the lord of death When Vajasravasa gives away all his goods, Naciketas feels that this involves the giving away of the son also and so wishes to know about himself When the father replies that he will give him to Yama, it may mean that, as a true samnyastn, personal relations and claims have henceforward no meaning for him Naciketas takes his fathers words literally He in the course of his teaching points out that the psychophysical vehicles animated by the spirit are determined by the law of karma and subject to death He who knows himself as the spirit, and not as the psychophysical vehicle is free and immortal
5 bahundm enn pratha»taJi, bahunam emt madhyamah, fam swd yamasya kartavyam yan mayadya kansyatt
5 Naciketas, 'Of many (sons or disciples) I go as the first, of many, I go as the middling What duty towards Yama that (my father has to accomplish) today, does he accomphsn through me ? '
IZdtya^mi^S, nrtZnam madhye Among many who are
I 1. 7 Katha Upantfad 597
dead I am in the middle I am not the last Many others will still
Mow me and there is no need for lamentation
Naciketas in sadness reflects as to what help he has to render to
Yama
Anticipating the teacher's or the parents' wishes and carrying them out is the way of the best pupils or sons, promptly attending to what is ordered is the next best, neglecting the orders is the worst form of conduct of pupils or sons Naciketas belonged to the first type, at worst to the second, he was never negligent of his duty to his father.
yalhavasaram jnatva SuhHsane pravjiti-riipa; apiadwaiena Susrusane iravrUt-riipd, guroadibhth kopitassan iu&iisdkartme pravrtti-rivpa Samkarananda and A
6. 'Consider how it was with the forefathers, behold how it is with the later (men) , a mortal npens like corn, and like corn is born again '
I makes out that Naciketas, startled by his father's words, reflected and told his father who was now in a repentant mood that he was much better than many sons, and there was nothing to be gained by going back on one's word Naciketas reminds his father that neither his ancestors nor his contemporaries who are decent
tT m 6 theu " word< After aU - human hfe K a* best transitory. iJfce a blade of grass man dies and is born again Death is not all, rebirth is a law of nature The life of vegetation on which all other me depends passes through the seasonal round of birth, growth, matunty. decay, death and rebirth The unity of all Me suggests ~? a PP"Catran of this course to human beings also This perpetual remrtti is not an escape from the wheel of becoming into a deathless eiermty. Even if we do not gam life eternal, survival is inescapable m the son persuades his father to keep his word and send him to Yama's abode.
a J? 0S i lb I y N . aciketas wished to know what happened to his ancestors n . ^ ^PPen to his contemporaries after death *fce doctrine of rebirth is assumed here.
7 wSvanarahpraviiaty atttfor brahmano grhdn ^ tasyaiiam ianinn htrvanh, ham vawasvatodakatn. fthp « a , v , eiy ^ a Br5hr nana guest enters into houses and 0 f th e sj? hlm this P eace - of knng; bnng water, 0 Son
598 The Principal Upantsads I 1 9
In the Brahmana account, Naciketas goes to Yama's house, at the command of a divine voice He waits for three nights before Death returns and shows him hospitality due to a guest
S says "Thus addressed, the father sent his son to Yama, in order to keep his word And going to Yama's abode, he waited for three nights as Yama had gone out When he returned his attendants, or perhaps his wife said to him as follows informing him (of what had taken place in his absence) '
As fire is appeased by water, so is a guest to be entertained with hospitality The word for fire used here is Vatsvdnara, the universal fire, which affirms the umty of all life The guest comes as the embodiment of the fundamental oneness of all beings
8 did-pratikse samgatam sunrtdm cestapilrte putra-paiumi ca sarvan
etad vrnkie purusasyalpamedhaso yasydnasnan vasah brdh- mano grhe
8 Hope and expectation, friendship and joy, sacrifices and good works, sons, cattle and all are taken away from a person of little understanding mwhose house aBrahmana remains unfed
s&nrta joy in Vedtc Sanskrit, 'kindly speech' in Jama and later
BrShmamcal works
tstdpurte sacrifices and good works
tsfam fruit produced by sacrifice, purtam fruit resulting from such works as planting gardens, etc tsfam yagajam phalam purtam, drdmddt-knyajampJtalam S Cp RV X 14 sam gacchasva pitrbhih, sam yamena tsfdpwiena parame vyoman 'Unite thou with the fathers and with Yama with the reward of thy sacrifices and good works in highest heaven '
vdpi-kapa-tafdkddt-devatayatandnt ca annapraddnam dramah purtam tty abhidhlyate
YAMA'S ADDRESS TO NACIKETAS 9 Usro ratnr ydd avatsir grhe me'nainan brahman atttthtr namasyah _ .
namaste'stu, brahman, svashme'stu, tasmdt prati tnn varan
q 'Since thou, a venerable guest, hast stayed in my house without food for three nights, I make obeisance to thee, 0 B^ahmSa May it be well with me Therefore, in return, choose thou three gifts
I, i. ii. Katha Upanisad 599
"When the disciple is ready, the Master appears ' lusmal' in order to remove the evil effects of that, tasya.pratiMra.ya.
NACIKETAS'S FIRST WISH
10 ianta-samkalpah sumandyathd sydd vita-manyur gauiamo tnabh mriyo,
tvat-prasrstam mdbhivadetpratita, etat traydndmprathamam varum vrye.
10 That Gautama (my father) with allayed anxiety, with anger gone, may be gracious to me, 0 Death, and recognising me, greet me, when set free by you and this, I choose as the first gift of the three
stimanafy. gracious prasamia-mandh §.
pralita recognising It means 'recollected, recognising that this is my own son come back again ' praltto labdka~smrtih, sa eva ayam pulro samagaiah ity evam pratyabhijanan liy arthaJi. S.
11 yathd purastdd bhavitd pratita audddlakir drumr mat-
prasrstah
sukJiam rdtni iayita vitamanyus tvdm dadrhvdn mriyit- mukhdi pramuktam. 11 (Yama said) • 'As of old will he, recognising thee (thy father) Auddalaki, the son of Aruna, through my favour will he sleep peacefully through nights, his anger gone, seeing thee released from the ]aws of death '
mtiiaUthr amnir. Uddalaka, the son of Aruna The father of Svetaketu is also called Arum CU VI 1 1
ntal-prasrstalr through my favour, maya anujnatah S amynalah, Mugraha-sampanmh Gopalayatindra It may apply to the first or the second part
In the previous verse Imirprasrstam is taken to mean 'set free by you , so in this verse mat-prasrstah should mean 'set free by me ' it is in the nominative case in apposition to Auddalaki Arum, the subject which is incorrect So S gives a different meaning, which is, now ever, not the obvious meaning of the phrase If we alter it to ^asjsfm, the rendering will be, 'As of old will he (thy father) AMdalaki Arun i, recognising thee, set free by me.'
¥ e ^f n stains the original reading but gives a different rendering.
Auddalaki Arum will be just as before Happy will he be, released *>J me (from his words).
JLharpentter identifies Naciketas with Auddalaki Arum He renders the verse thus As of old he will be full of joy, since the son of Uddalaka Arum
600 Tht Principal Upantsads I i 14
Jrflfe?? b T l6t l0 ?? e ^ me ' So fo °. HiUebrandt «Arum son
NACIKETAS'S SECOND WISH
^S^? 6 M8 bhayam km ca n&sU na mm imm W
ubhe tirivd aiandyd ptpdse sokatigo modate svarga-loke
12 (Naciketas said) In the world of heaven there 1S no fear whatever; thou art not there, nor does one fear old age Crossing over both hunger and thirst, leaving sorrow behind, one rejoices m the world of heaven.
JSiSL^A 3 - R says that 15 mksa
leaving sorrow behmd iokam atitya gaccftati
13 sa tvam agmm svargyam adhyest mrtyo, prabruh tarn
sraddad&ndya tnahyam svarga-loka amrtatvam hhajanta, etad dvitiyena vrne varena
13 Thou knowest, 0 Death, that fire (sacrifice which is) the aid to heaven. Describe it to me, full of faith, how the dwellers in heaven gain immortality. This I choose, as my second boon
svarga-lokah svargo loko yesam te paran%-pada-praptah ampalvam immortality In svarga which is a part of the manifested universe, the immortality may be endlessness but not eternity Whatever is manifest will sooner or later enter into that from which it emerged Yet as the duration in svarga-loka is incalculable, the dwellers in it are said to be immortal They may continue as long as the manifested world does
14 pra te bravmi tad u me nibodha svargyam agnim nactketah
prajanan
anantalokapttm allw pratislham viddhi, tvam etam mhiam guhayam
14 (Yama said) Knowing well as I do, that fire (which is) the aid to heaven, I shall descnbe it to thee— learn it of me, 0 Naciketas Know that fire to be the means of attaining the boundless world, as the support (of the universe) and as abiding m the secret place (of the heart)
nthttam guhayam abiding in the secret place {of the heart) It means literally, hidden m the cave. The cave or the hiding-place is
said to be in the centre of the body guha yam sartrasya madhye: TatUuiya Brahmana I 2 I 3 viditsdm buddhau mvtsfam S
The central purpose of the passage is to indicate that the ultimate power of the universe is also the deepest part of our being See also I 2. 12 It is one of the assumptions of the Upanisad writers that deep below the plane of our empirical life of imagination, will and feeling is the ultimate being of man, his true centre which remains unmoved and unchanged, even when on the surface we have the fleeting play of thoughts and emotions, hopes and desires When we withdraw from the play of outward faculties, pass the divisions of discursive thought, we retreat into the soul, the witness spirit within
15 lokadim agnim tarn uvaca tasmai, yd istaka,ydvatir vd.yathd
va.
sa capi tat pratyavadat yatkoktam, athasya mrtyuh pirnar evaha tusiah
15. (Yama) described to him that fire (sacrifice which is) the beginning of the world (as also) what kind of bricks (are to be used m building the sacrificial altar), how many and in what manner And he (Naciketas) repeated all that just as it had been told, then, pleased with him, Death spoke again. lohddt the beginning of the world In the R V , Agm is identified with Praja-pah, the Creator, and so may be regarded as the source or origin of the world. In II 2. 9 we are told that the one Fire, having entered the universe, assumed all forms B U. I 2 7 makes out that 'this fire is the arka, the worlds are its embodiment '
S, however, interprets lokadi as first of the worlds, as the first embodied existence pratJuima-iarintvad Cp. C U where it is said that all other things evolved from fire [tejas) which was itself the first product of essential being (sa<). VI 8 4
16 tarn abravit priyamano mahatma varam tavehddya daddmi
bhuyah.
tavaiva namna bhavitayam agnih, sriikdiii cemdm ane- ka-rupdm grhana. io The great soul (Yama) extremely delighted, said to him (ftaciketas) I give thee here today another boon. By thine own name will this fire become (known) Take also this many- shaped chain.
'an? a * ain ^ e wor( * occurs again in I. 2. 3 , where it means a road srnka mtla-mayl, the road that leads to wealth § gives two
-jCT" ilF 5 ' ratm-maylm malam, a necklace of precious stones, (u) wstiamgatm karnm^maylm, the straight way of works which is
*«°auctive of many fruits karma-vijmnam aneka-phala-hduival.
602 The Principal Upanisads I i 18
aneka-rilpam many-shaped While the ignorant are limited to one form, the wise, who have attained unity with the higher self, can assume many forms
17 tnnaaketas tribhtr etya sandhim tnkartna-krt tarali janma-mrtyii
Irahmajajnam devam idyam viditoa nicdyye'mam £a>\Um atyantam eti
17 He who has ht the Naciketa fire thrice, associating with the three, performs the three acts, crosses over birth and death Knowing the son of Brahma, the omniscient, resplendent and adorable and realising him, one obtains this everlasting peace. ;
tn-ndctketah one who has lit the Naciketa fire thnce £ suggests an " alternative One who knows about him, studies about him and practises what he has learnt tad-vijMnas tad-adhyayams tad-amts- fhanavan
tnbhir etya sandhim associating with the three S mentions father, mother and teacher,' or alternatively 'Veda, smrti and good men ' tn-karma three acts S suggests 'sacrifice, study and alms-giving,' ' adhyayana dana
brahma^apta, the knower of the universe born of Brahma, Agm, - who is known as jata-vedas or all-knower S, however, takes itas , referring to Hiranya-garbJta For Ramanuja, the individual ]iva is Brahma-born He who knows him and rules his behaviour is ' Ihara Madhva says brahmano htranya-garbhaj jatah brafimajah, brahmajai ca asau jnaS ca brahmajajfiah, sarvajnah mcayya, realising in one's own personal experience tarn mattm s iastratah, mcayya drsfva cahnabhavena S i <
imam iantim this peace It is the peace which is felt in one s own ( , experience sva-buddJii-pratyaksam tentm S
Two tendencies which characterise the thought of the Upanisaas ; appear here, loyalty to tradition and the spirit of reform We must y repeat the rites and formulas in the way in which they were onginaUy ; uistituted These rules which derive their authority from tneir < antiquity dominated men's minds Innovations in the spirit are , gradually introduced ^
18 tnnaaketas trayam etad vidttvd ya evam vidvamt cmute , ndciketam, . ,
mrtvu-pasan puratah pranodya Sokattgo modate svarga-me . , 18 The wise man who has sacrificed thnce to Naciketas and u vrho knows this three, and so knowing, performs meditation In fire throwing off first the bonds of death and overcoming ^ sorrow, rejoices in the world of heaven V
Katha Upamsad
nacikelam meditation on fire agm-Sabdena tad-visayaka-jnanam ucyate Gopalayatindra
19 esa te'gmr naciketas svargyo yam avrmthah dvitiyena varena
etam agntm tavaiva pravaksyanh janasas, trtiyam varum naciketo vrmsva. 1 19 This is thy fire (sacrifice) 0 Naciketas, which leading to heaven, which thou hast chosen for thy second boon. This fire (sacrifice) people will call by thy name only. Choose now, 0 Naciketas, the third boon
Whoever sacrifices to Naciketas fire, knowing its nature as the fire born of Brahma, becomes venly of that nature and is not born again
NACIKETAS'S THIRD WISH
20 yeyam prete victfatsd mamisye 'silly eke nayam astiti caike; etat viAyam anurias tvayaham, varanam esa varus irliyah
20. There is this doubt m regard to a man who has departed, some (holding) that he is and some that he is not I would be instructed by thee in this knowledge Of the boons, this is the third boon
prete departed Naciketas has no doubt about survival He has already said 'A mortal ripens like corn and like corn is born again' I 6 His problem is about the condition of the liberated soul, niukliilma-svariipa., Madhva says that prete means mukte. nosh, he is not Doubts about the future of the liberated being are not peculiar to our age In the B.U. Yajnavalkya says, the liberated soul, having passed beyond ipretya) has no more separate consciousness (sampla) He is dissolved in the Absolute consciousness as a lump of salt is dissolved in water He justifies the absence of separate consciousness to his bewildered wife Maitreyi 'Where everything has become the one self, when and by what should we
' There is a verse on which S has not commented but Ranearamanuia mentions it '
yo vapycISm brahma-^nulnia-bhuiantcUim vtdtlvaumaenSnketam. sa cva bhiitva brahma-jajfiatma-hhi'itah katoit lad-vena -bunar m jSyatc r \Vhoe\cr concedes the sacrificial structure of bricks as the body of the Fire bora of Brahma and kindles on it the sacrificial fire called Aociketa he becomes one with the Fire born of Brahma and performs the sacrifice by which he >s not born again. V
604 The Principal Upanisads I i. 23
see, hear or think •" He who is liberated from the limitations of name and form, who has become one with the all, cannot be said to exist in the ordinary sense He is not limited to a particular consciousness, nor can he be said to be non-existent, for he has attained to real being (II 4 12-14) The question repeatedly put to the Buddha is, 'Does the Tatli&gata survive after death or does he not survive?' The Buddha refused to answer this question, holding that to say that he contmues to exist would give rise to one kind of misunder- standing while to deny it would lead to others
21 devoir atrapi mcikitsttam pura, na hi stmjneyam, mint esa dharmah,
anyam varum naciketo vrnisva, ma moparotstr ati ma srjainam
21 (Yama said) Even the gods of old had doubt on this point It is not, indeed, easy to understand; (so) subtle is this truth Choose another boon, 0 Naciketas Do not press me Release me from this
22. devair atrapi mcikitsitam kila, tvam ca mrtyo yan na sumjneyam dttha, vakta easy a tvadrg-anyona labhydh, nanyo varus ttdya etasya kasctt.
22. (Naciketas said ) Even the gods had doubt, indeed, as to this, and thou, 0 Death, sayest that it is not easy to under- stand (Instruct me) for another teacher of it, like thee, is not to be got No other boon is comparable to this at all
Gods cannot have any doubts about survival; it is about the exact nature of the state of liberation which transcends the empirical state that there is uncertainty
23 iatayusah pulra-paulran vrnisva, bahun paiun hasti-htran- yam asvan , bhumer mahad-ayatanam vrnisva svayam ca jiva saraao yavadtcchasi „
23. (Yama said ) Choose sons and grandsons that shall live a hundred years, cattle in plenty, elephants, gold and horses Choose vast expanses of land and life for thyself as many years as thou wilt
mahai-dvatamm vast expanses 6 suggests sovereignty oyer vast domamf of eSth uS* Prlfnvya rmM mslirnam ayatanam airayam tnanialam rajyam.
I i. 26. Katha Upanisad 605
maha-bhumau naciketas tvam edhi, kamanam tva kama- bli&jam karomi
24. If thou deemest (any) boon like unto this, choose (that)" as also wealth and long life. 0 Naciketas, prosper then on this vast earth I will make thee the enjoyer of thy desires.
edhi prosper. Be thou king raja bluxva. £.
prarthayasva.
tmd ramah, sarattiah saturyah, na Mdria lambhamyd manusyaih.
fibhir mat-prattabhi}} paricdrayasva, naciketo, tnaranam mamipraksih.
25. Whatever desires are hard to attain in this world of mortals, ask for all those desires at thy will Here are noble maidens with chariots and musical instruments* the like of them cannot be won by men Be served by these whom I give to thee. 0 Naciketas, (pray) ask not about death.
The story of the temptation by Mrtyu occurs for the first time in the Upanisad and not in the account m the Taitlirlya Brahmana. The temptation of Naciketas has points of similarity with that related of Gautama the Buddha
Cp also the temptation of Jesus
Naaketas is unmoved by the promises of transient pleasures and obtains from the god of death the secret of the knowledge of Brahman which carries with it the blessing of life eternal Gautama the Buddha also rejects the offers of Mara in order to obtain true wisdom There is this difference, however, that while Yama, when once his reluctance is overcome, himself reveals the liberating truth to Naciketas, Mara is the evil one, the tempter.
26 svo-bhavd mariyasya yad anfakailat sanendriy&nam jara- yanti iejah
api samam jtvitam alpam cva favaiva vahas tava nrtya-elte
«„f n ( v adket f sa?d " } Tnfflsiet * (are these) and they \f ear out u \ ama, the vigour of all the senses of men All life (a full We), moreover, is brief Thine be the chariots, thine the dance 311 q song.
transient, existing till tomorrow, so thinj-s of a dav
606 T fc Principal Upantsads I x s&
.^as^^^ that ^ * *** -
jwisydmo yavad titsyasi tvarn varastu vie varamyah sa eva 27 ; Man is not to be contented with wealth Shall we enjoy wealth when we have seen thee? ShaU we live as long as thou art in power? That alone is (still) the boon chosen by me
Man is not to be contented with wealth The material guarantees of human security are fragile It is an earth-bound philosophy that makes man the end and aim of Me, that recognises no value of a transcendental character What is the value of wealth or life, as they are impermanent 5 So long as death is in power we cannot enjoy wealth or life for the fear of death destroys the zest for living So Naciketas asks for self-knowledge, alma-minanam, which is beyond the power of death
Naciketas says that 'We shall live, so long as Yama endures ' In other words, he is certain of our continuance in this cosmic cycle presided over by Yama
permanence till the dissolution of the primal elements is called immortality abhittasamplavam sthanam amjiatvam hi bhasyate, quoted in Vacaspati's -B/jawiaS I 1 1
What Naciketas is doubtful about, what Yama says, even the gods have doubts about, is m regard to the state of liberation
28 ajiryaiam amttanam upetya jiryan martyaJi hvadhasthah prajdiwn
abhidhyayan varnaratipramodan, atidirghe jwite ko rameta 28 Having approached the undecaying immortality, what decaying mortal on this earth below who (now) knows (and meditates on) the pleasures of beauty and love, will delight in an over-long life?
Anyone who knows here below the joys of immortal life cannot be attracted by an earthly life of passion' and speed No one who has a foretaste of that which perishes not or changes would find pleasure in earthly delights
29 yasmmn idam vtctkitsanti mrtyo yat samparaye mdhati bruin 11 as iat,
yo'yam varo gudham anupravisto nanyam tasman naciketa vrmte
29 Tell us that about which they doubt, 0 Death, what there is in the great passing-on. This boon which penetrates the mystery, no other than that does Naciketas choose.
satnpamya. passing-on What is the great beyond' What is there after liberation' These questions lead naturally to others What is the nature of eternal reality' What is man's relation to it' How can he reach it' ,
Naciketas has already attained svarga-loka and is not raising the question of the post-mortal state He is asking about the great departure, mahan samparSya, from which there is no return, which is itirupadhiSesa nirvana according to Ittmtttaka 44 Mqjjkima Nikaya II opposes samparayika attha to the diitha-dhammtka altha
Knowledge of life after death is regarded as of the utmost impor- tance See C U. V 3, 1-4 where Svetaketu is told that he is not well instructed as he does not know about where the creatures go to from this world
iayoh ireya adadanasya. sadhu bhavati, hiyate 'rihad ya « preyo vrntie.
• L ^ ama said * : Different is the good, and different, indeed, is the pleasant. These two, with different purposes, bind a man. Uf these two, it is well for him who takes hold of the good - but he who chooses the pleasant, fails of his aim.
After testing Naciketas and knowing his fitness for receiving rahma-knowledge, Yama explains the great secret to him
i>0W., asanio ntrayamyanli sanio saegabarayand
rhll ^ d °, the pa ! h f, ? f the S 00 * and the of this world Sc„ C g0 t0 hcU but the *»* destination of the good fe
608 The Principal Upamsads I 2 3
In Samyutia NikayaV. 4 5 2 instead of sagga-parayana, we read
In N. P Chakravarti's edition of L'Udana (Sansknt), Pans, ig3o, p 63, we read asantaS caiva santai ca nana yanh tv itas cyutah, asanto narakam yanh, santah svarga-parayandh
Cp Plato 'In every one of us there are two ruling and directing principles, whose guidance we follow wherever they may lead, the one being an innate device of pleasure, the other an acquired judg- ment which aspires after excellence Now these two principles at one tune maintain harmony, while at another they are at feud within us, and now one and now the other obtains mastery'— Phaedrus.
sreyo hi dhiro'bhtpreyaso vrnite, preyo mando yoga-k$emad vrnite £ _
2 Both the good and the pleasant approach a man The wise man^^denfif^over them, discnnM&es. The wise chooses the good in preference to the pleasant The simple- minded, for the sake of worldly well-being, prefers the pleasant
numdah the simple-minded Cf Heraclitus 'Oxen are happy when they have peas to eat ' Fr 4 'For the best men choose one thing above all else, immortal glory above transient things ' Fr 29 yoga-ksema worldly well-being > He adopts a materialist view 01 Me The indispensable condition of spiritual wisdom is a pure heart S distinguishes between the elimination of faults and the acquisi- tion of virtues which are the results of Karma and the contemplation of the divine which is Jnana. Cassian divides spiritual knowledge into practical and theoretic and argues that we cannot strive lor the vision of God if we do not shun the stains of sm Illumination and union follow purgation or the process of self-discipline
3 sa tvam pnyan pnyarupatrd ca hamdn
naciketo, tyasraksih, naitam srnkath mttamayim avapto yasyam majjanti oatiavo manusyah
. Sarirady-upacaya-raksanMtmmm for the sake of ^y *^ Cf BG IX 22 Dr. A Coomaraswamy makes out that the sitnpie- £aded prefeis ksema or well-being to yoga or coatanmtotoJfljJ^ * &t«n«c ca taking his stand on Sutla Ntpata 2 20 'Unbke ana vioeiy
Antiquary, Vol 1, pp 85-86
3. (But) thou, 0 Naciketas,Taast rejeked (after) examining, the desires that are pleasant and seem to be pleasing. Thou hast not taken to the way of wealth, where many mortals sink (to ruin). Y\i~^s^\ ✓•>-», * .5 *
srftkd see I. 16 If sfnkd means chain, then mayanti should read sajjanli The meaning then is 'Thou hast not taken to the chain of wealth in which many mortals axe entangled.' The Buddha refused the wheel-jewel, cakka-raianam, the recognised symbol of temporal power Naciketas, by refusing all these temptations, makes out that his kingdom is not of this world. He hungers and thirsts for the eternal, in which alone he can find real satisfaction.
4 duram ete viparite visucl, avtdydya ca vidyetijMid. vtdyabhipstnam naciketasam manye, na tod Mmd bahavo lolupantah.
4 Widely apart and leading to divergent ends are these, ignorance and what is known as wisdom. I know (thee) Nacike- tas, to be eager for wisdom for (even) many desires did not distract thee.
S suggests that avtdya or ignorance is concerned with the pleasant and vtdya or wisdom with the good avtdya preyo-msaya, vidya sreyo- vtsaya.
avtdya kdma-karmStmtkd vtdya vatragya-tattva-jiiana-mayl R
5 avidydydm antare. vartaman&h, soayam dhtrdh panditam
manyamanah
dandramyamdnah pariyanU miidhafy, andhenaiva myamana yathandhah
5. Abiding in the midst of ignorance, wise in their own esteem, thinking themselves to be learned, fools treading a tortuous path go about like blind men led by one who is himself blind
See also M.U. 1. 2-S; Maitri VII 9
drtch^XvV" blmd ^ blUld ' b ° th $haU ^ ' mt ° thC fondramyamanah- v dandravyamanah, visaya-kamagnina dfla-ciU&h k msr in thctr men esteem Their ignorance is serenely ignorant of itself and so assumes the appearance of wisdom
mohcr.a mvdham: J ayatti hko vasti para Ut mam, punahpunarvaiamapadyede
610 The Principal Upantsads 1. 2. 8
6 What lies beyond shines not to the simple-minded, careless, (who is) deluded by the glamour of wealth Thinking 'this world exists, there is no other,' he falls again and again into my power
mam thinking, manana-Mo mani £
He who is filled with selfish desires and attracted by worldly possessions becomes subject to the law of Karma which leads him from birth to birth and so he is under the control of Yama
7 sravanayapi bahubhir yo na labhyah, sWnvanto'pi bahavo
yam na vtdyuh ascaryo vakta kusalo'sya labdha, aicaryo jMta kutalanu- iistah
7 He who cannot even be heard of by many, whom many, even hearing, do not know, wondrous is he who can teach (Hun) and skilful is he who finds (Him) and wondrous is he who knows, even when instructed by the wise
SeeBG VII 3 instructed by the wise nvpunena acaryena anuhstak sah
Naoketas is complimented by Yama as the seeker of final buss is rare among men The task is very difficult for subtle is the nature of the Self The hidden depths of being are conceived as a great mystery Not many have the earnest purpose not many are able to find a proper teacher
8 na narendvarena prokia esa suvijneyo bahudhd antyamanah. ananya-prohtegahr air a nasty anlydn hy atarkyam anupra-
mandt , A
8 Taught by an inferior man He cannot be truly understood, as He is thought of in many ways Unless taught by one who knows Him as himself, there is no going thither for it is incon- ceivable, being subtler than the subtle
bahudM cintyamanah thought of in many ways, or it may m ean 'much meditated upon' or 'conceived of as a plurality' wmle tne dtman is an absolute oneness
ananya-prokte taught by one who knows Him as himself 1 is I^ Srmg. He must be taught by one who is ncm-Merent, W,iTwho has realised his oneness with Brahman r He atone cm teach with the serene confidence of conviction As a man with ^enence, he is lifted above sectarian disputes It may also mean 1 Cp Eckhart 'Some there are so simple as to trunk ol .God i as id He dweltthere, and of themselves as being here It is not so God and I are one ' Pfeiffer's edition, p 206
I 2, io Katha Upanisad 611
'taught by one other than an inferior person/ 1 e. a superior person ■who knows the truth or 'taught by another than oneself/ i e. some teacher.
For Ramanuja, the understanding, avagattk, which a person gets about the self when taught by one who has realised Brahman is impossible of attainment when taught by a person of inferior capacity Madhva means by it that it is inferior teaching when taught by a learned but unintelligent person for it has been variously understood and so is not easy of understanding. But when taught by one who sees no difference at all, there is no knowledge, not even of an inferior kind. It is subtler than an atom and so cannot be perceived It is not to be understood by reasoning galtr alra nastr without access to a teacher there is no way to it 'There is no going thither' may mean either there is nothing beyond the knowledge of BraJman or there is no way back from samsara or worldly becoming, samsara-galth
atarhyaw inconceivable, unreachable by argument The Supreme Self is unknowable by argument, as It is subtle, beyond the reach of the senses and the understanding based on sense data. It can be immediately apprehended by intuition
yam Ivam apas satyadhnhr batasi; tvddrii no bhitydn naciketah prasld 9 Not by reasoning is this apprehension attainable, but dearest, taught by another, is it well understood. Thou hast obtained it, holding fast to truth. May we find, Naciketas, an inquirer like thee
Mere reason unassisted by faith cannot lead to illumination. May vc find an inquirer like thee It is not only the pupil who is in search of the teacher, but the teacher is also in search of the pupil.
10 jdtidmy aham scvadhir tly amiyam, na hy adhruvath prdpyatc hi dhruvam tat tato mayd nauketaS cito'gnir anilyair dravyaih prdptavan asmt mtyam.
10 I know that wealth is impermanent Not through the transient things is that abiding (one) reached; yet bv me is laid the Naciketa fire and by impermanent means have I reached the everlasting
612 The Principal Upam$ads 1. 2 u
atSmd™* m ^ ^ ****** ^ is the eternal
Some ^translators (eg Max Muller and Hume) attribute this
sacrifice called by his name § attributes these words to Yarna who makes out that through the sacnficial fire, he KitawdK endunng sovereignty of heaven But this WvwSSToS relatively permanent Through the ephemeral mean? of KarrS deluding sacrifices, nothing truly permanent can be achieved The performer of the Naciketa fire mil endure as long as the cosmos lasts but such endurance is not eternity, since the cosmos wrth all that ^contains will be absorbed into the eternal at the end of the cosmic
By 'impermanent means have I reached the everlasting' What Yarna has attained is thus stated by Gopala-yatindra adhtkardpanno, aharmadharmaphalayoh, praddnena jantunam myantrtvam dpannah If by the symbolic worship of so unstable a thing as fire we can attain an enduring state, then the view reminds us of a verse m Blake s Auguries of Innocence 1
We have to use the means of the empirical world to cross it and attain to the trans-empirical . . . brahma-prdph-sddhana^iidnoddeiena amtyatr tstak&di-dravyatr ndctketo'gniS atah, tasmadd hetor miya- phala-sadhanam ynanam prdplavan asmt. R
II kamasydptim jagatah pratisthdm krator ananlyam abha- yasya pdram
stoma-mahad urugdyam prattsiham drstvd dhrtyd dhiro naciketo'lyasrdk?ilt ii. (Having seen) the fulfilment of (all) desire, the support of the world, the endless fruit of rites, the other shore where there is no fear, the greatness of fame, the far-stretching, the foundation, 0 wise Naciketas, thou hast steadfastly let (them) go
Before his eyes were spread out all the allurements of the world, mcludmg the position of Htranya-garbha the highest state in the phenomenal world, obtained by those who worship the Supreme by sacrifice and meditation, according to £, and he has rejected them all Here perhaps is suggested the contrast between the Vedic ideal of heaven and the Upanisad ideal of hi e eternal The world to which the righteous go is the Brahma world In svarga-loka or heaven there
1 To see a world in a grain of sand, And a heaven in a wild Sower, Hold infinity in the palm of your hand, And eternity in an hour
Katha Upanisad
6l3
is no fear See Katha I. 12 When we pass beyond fear we pass beyond duality. BUI 4-2
The fulfilment of all desire can apply to the immortal Brahman. It is the support of the world, the ultimate. M U. III. 2 1. If this is the way we take these words, then the reference cannot be to the Vedic heaven but to eternal life or moksa.
atyasraksth- this refers not to the rejection of eternal life but to the rejection of a false view of the objects described in this verse kralu rite or worship upasandyah phalam ananlyam §
APPREHENSION OF THE SUPREME THROUGH ADHYATMA-YOGA
12. tam dttrdarsam gudham anupravisiam guhahitam gahva- restham puranam adhyatma-yogddhigamena devam matva dfaro harsa-sokau jahatt
12 Realising through self-contemplation that primal God, difficult to be seen, deeply hidden, set in the cave (of the heart), dwelling m the deep, the wise man leaves behind both joy and sorrow
giidham- deeply hidden It is hidden because we have to get behind the senses, mind and understanding. It is the very ground of the soul_ The Buddhists look upon every creature as an embryo of the tathagala, tathagala-garblia Every creature has the possibility of becoming a Buddha When we get into the inner being of the spirit, we are in immediate relationship with the Eternal This basic prin- ciple which we recognise by immediate experience or continued contemplation is the basis of human freedom It is the principle of indeterminacy, the possibilities of determinations which are not yet If we identify ourselves with what is determinate, we are subject to the law of determinism Tf ye are led by the spirit ve are not under the law ' * ' *
adhyahna-yoga self-contemplation vlsayebhyah prattsamhrlya ceta- salmant samadfianam S. adhyctlma means pertaining to the self as distinct from adlnbhtita, pertaining to the material elements and a&hidaxva, pertaining to the deities Adhyalma-yoga is yokine with one s essential self. It is the practice of meditation, a quiet, solitary sustained effort to apprehend truth which is different from the ordinarj- process of cerebration
Yama answers Naciketas's question raised in I 29, about the EST f im ? ^'"Sj^^n behind the phenomenal world, S the depths of one's owt, being, which is difficult of access by orfmary
614 The Principal Upamsads 1. 2 14,
means and yet is open to spiritual contemplation Yama, in different ways and phrases, brings out the impenetrable mystery of the inmost reality which is the object of search If the Brahma world is the fulfilment of all desires, this eternal bliss is obtained by the renunciation of all desires, while bralnna-loka is the highest place of the manifested cosmos, its farthest limit, there is the eternal beyond it
devam God See § U. I 3, Maitri VI 23
13 etac chrutvd sampartgrhya martyah pravrhya dliarniyam anum etam apya sa- module modantyam hi labdhva vivrtam sadmxo, nactke- tasam manye
13 Hearing this and comprehending (it), a mortal, extracting the essence and reaching the subtle, rejoices, having attained the source of joy. I know that such an abode is wide open unto Naciketas
dharmyam the essence We must extract its essential nature, discern
its real character
anum subtle silkmam £
modantyam the source of joy The deepest bang is the highest value To attain Hun is to gam supreme, abiding bliss It is not merging in a characterless absolute, where all feeling fades out vivrtam sadmtr the abode is wide open
Naciketas can get released from his house of life, body ana mino. Cp the words of the Buddha 'Never again shalt thou, 0 builder 01 houses, make a house for me, broken are all thy beams, thy ridge- pole shattered ' .,-,<< Yama says that Naciketas is fit for salvation, moksarliam b It is suggested that the three steps of sravam {$rittva),manawi (sampartgrhya) and nididhyasana {pravrhya) axe mentioned _m tins verse and these lead to Stma-dariam or alma-saksat-kara (apya)
14 anyatra dharmdd anyatrddharmad anyatrfematkrMkrlat anyatra hhutdc ca bhavyac ca yat tat paiyasi tad vada,
14 (Naciketas asks ) Tell me that which thou seest beyona. nght and wrong, beyond what is done or not done, beyona s/past and future
wliat ts done ornol done
£ says effect and cause hjiam Mryam, akrlam karanam.
Cp TU where it is said that the knower is not vexed with toe thought 'why have I not done the good ? why have I done the evil
%oHd past and future the eternal is a 'now' without duration
z i5 Katha Upamsad
6i5
Naciketas asks for an account of that deepest reality nd of all :\traneous externalities, the real which is deeper than all the happenings of time yad Idr&am vastu sarva-vyavahara-gocaraiilam "raiyast janasi lad vada tnahyam S
15 sarvc vcda yat padam amananU, lapamsi sarvam ca yad vadanti,
yad tcchanto brakmacaryam caranti, tat ie padam samgra- hena bravwiu aum ity efal 15 (Yama says ) That word which all the Vedas declare, which all the austerities proclaim, desiring which (people) live the life of a religious student, that word, to thee, I shall tell in bnef That is Aum
SeeSU.IV o;BG.VIII 11 paia word § means by it goal padaniyam.gamaniyatn The Supreme is the goal of all revelation, of all religious practices and austenties. amav.anti avibhagena prattpHdayantt
brahmacarya' the life of a religious student It is referred to in R V X 109 and described in Atharva Vcda XI 5 It lasts for twelve jears but may be longer Svetaketu was a brahmacann from 12 to 24 The student is expected to live in the house of his teacher, wit on him, tend his house and cattle, beg for his own and his master's food, look after the sacrificial fires and study the Veda Detailed rules for brahmacarya arc given m the Gfhya Siitra
As\ald\ana says that a brahmacann is required to be chaste, obedient, to drink only water and not sleep m the daytime I 22, 1 2. Bralmacarya has come to mean continence and self-restraint Aum is the prarava, which, by the time of the Upanisads, is charged with the significance of the entire unncrsc Deussen is certainly incorrect when he observes: 'Essentially it was the unknowableness of the first principle of the universe, the Brahman, and the impos- iibuity of expressing it by word or illustration, which compelled tfi" choice of something so entirely meaningless as the symbol Aum as a symbol of Brahman ' The word first occurs in the Tatthriya of the Black Yajur Vcda, III 2 0 6, where it is called the ' 7 a " d , lndl c at cs, accordingto Keith, the prolongation of the last *> l^Wr of the offering verse uttered bv the Loir. In the Brfihmanas h o-nirs more frequently as a response bv the adhiaryu to each t«.i " f :, vcrc<%u «^by the/.ffr, meaning, "'yes/ so be it. answering * n tl.c hrv-tnn 'Amen ' ° In tV" ,li»wyi BrSlmiita V. 32. «im it treated as a mvstic V^e reprcsentint; the essence of the Vedas and the universe
616 The Principal Upantsads I 2 19
It is the symbol of the manifested Brahman (waking, dream and dreamless sleep) as well as the unmanifested beyond See MaU. IV 32
16 This syllable is, venly, the everlasting spirit This syllable, indeed, is the highest end, knowing this very syllable, whatever anyone desires will, indeed, be his
S makes out that Brahma is the lower Brahman and param, the higher. Whatever one may desire, the lower or the higher Brahman, his desire will be fulfilled
17 etad alambanam irestham etad dlambanam param dad dlambanam jMtva brahma-loke mahiyaie
17 This support is the best (of all). This support is the highest; knowing this support, one becomes great m the world of Brahma
He attains Brahman, the higher, brahma em lokah, or the world of Brahman, the lower, brdhmanah hkah
18 na jdyafe mrtyate va vtpaicin nayam kutaSan na babhuva
kaicit
ajo mtyah iasvato'yam purano na hanyate hanyamane
18 The knowing self is never born; nor does he die at any tune He sprang from nothing and nothing sprang from him He is unborn, eternal, abiding and primeval He is not slam when the body is slam
^^Kafh^vipaiat becomes in the Gita, kadant medhavtn Sayana
R The self constitutes the inner reality of each jndmdwJ It is without a cause and is changeless When it knows itself as the mm and ceases to know of itself as bound up with any name or form (ndtna-ruia) it realises its true nature
primeval, new even in old times, p»ra apt navah, or devoid of growth, vrddht-mvarjttah iq hanta cen manyate hantum hatai cen manyate hatam, ubhau tau na vijamto nayam hantt na hanyate
I i 20 Katha XJpamsad 617
19 If the slayer thinks that he slays or if the slain think that he is slain, both of them do not understand He neither slays nor is he slain
SeeBG II 19
Here is the answer to the question of Naaketas about the mystery of death The self is eternal and death does not refer to it
20 anor aniyan mahaio mahiyan, atmdsya jantor mhtto
guhayam'
tarn akratuh pa&yati vita-ioko dhatu-prasaddn vtahimanam atmanah
20 Smaller than the small, greater than the great, the self is set in the heart of every creature The unstriving man beholds Him, freed from sorrow Through tranquillity of the mind and the senses (he sees) the greatness of the self
anor anXyan, .smaller than the small, smaller than the minute atom When the self is thought of as a psychical principle, its smaUness is emphasised See also II 2 3 where it is said to be 'the dwarf' and
II 1. 12 where it is described as 'thumb-sized ' In these cases, the old animistic language is used When it is thought of as cosmic, its ■vastness is emphasised «
a-kratuh unstriving man He who is free from desire for external objects, earthly or heavenly, which distract the soul and distort its vision S adopts this view. He will, however, have the desire for sanation, mumukstttva. The Upanisad insists on the absence of stnfc or anxiety and refers to the man whose will is at peace 1 ithalu-prasSdat through the tranquillity of the mind and the senses.
rrl ? P " 9 U * m 3 ) wbere l4: 18 Kud t0 be greater than the earth, greater than the sky, greater than all these worlds CpDionysius, De "I" ? m r £- 2 3 *Now God is called great in his peculiar Greatness *mcn e»eth of itself to all things that are great and is poured upon all magnitude from outside and stretches far beyond it This Greatness is wtinrtc, without quantity and without number' )?.. c * -j Sl ? aUness °r Rarity 5s attributed to God's nature because let Z * i soh dity and distance and penetrates all things without t",~l " ma, ?J Ke This smallness is W!thout quantity or quality, it is ' mfin,te ' unlimited, and -while comprehending all things,
/-!.,;" i n «>niprchensible ' Quoted by Ananda Coomaraswamy m 7vVk> • r %"?'< ar >: Vol 1, P 97 .
T P n f t WS0 \ 'Christian ataraxia, the untroubled peace of true V.; ,» .r 151 wh,ch ,cads t0 %-lslon 1S taught -very emphatically by l4-b'S ,n Johtl XTV bcsmnmB "Let not your hearts be
j n V n m ^ se "uon on the Mount with its repeated warning ♦.v.V.; r T ut,0U , s ,f tn ^> , g « a hindrance in the to of entrance into
>» ?£.oti of Heivea.' Kcfka Upatnfttd (1934), p 107.
6i8 The Principal Upanisads I 2. 22.
V dhatuh prasaddt, through the grace of the Creator The vision comes through the tranquillity of the senses and the mind according to the reading adopted by S According to the other reading, the vision is reached by the grace or self-revelation of the Creator God. If the second reading is adopted it will be a clear statement of the doctrine of Divine grace, which was developed in the § U III 20 There the reading is
'tarn akratim pasyah vilasoko dhatuh prasaddn mahimanam Ham
{dhatuh prasaddt. jagato vidMtd paramesvarah iasya prasado 'mtgrahah Vidyaranya)
It does not, however, seem to be the intention of the writer here
inta-iokah He who is freed from sorrow vigata-iokah . . anyatha
durvtjneyo'yam alma kamibhih prdkrtaih purusaih £
akratum samkalpa-ralntam.
See also Malidmrdyana U VIII 3
kastam madamadam devam mad anyo jndtum arhatt.
31. Sitting, he moves far, lying he goes everywhere Who, save myself, is fit to know that god who rejoices and rejoices not?
See Isa 4 and 5
By these contradictory predicates, the impossibility of con- ceiving Brahman through empirical determinations is brought out. mruddJta-dharmavdn. S Brahman has both the sides of peaceful stability and active energising In the former aspect He is Brahman; in the latter Isvara The latter is an active manifestation of the absolute Brahman, and not an illusory one as some later Advaita Vedantins suggest
22 Knowing the self who is the bodiless among bodies, the stable among the unstable, the great, the all-pervading, the wise man does not grieve
The wise man who knows that his self, though now embodied and " subject to change, is one with the imperishable omnipresent Self, nas no cause for gnef He goes beyond all fear and sorrow.
620 The Principal Vpanisads I 2 24
Cp St Paul: "Work out your own salvation with fear and trembling; for it is God which worketh in you both to will and to do of His good pleasure ' Epistle to the PMippians 2 12-13 Cp 'If thou askest how may these things be, interrogate grace and not doctrine, desire and not knowledge, the groaning of prayer rather than study, the spouse rather than the teacher, God and not man, mist rather than clarity, not light but fire all aflame and bearing on to God by devotion and glowing affection ' St Bonaventura. Ittttenay of the Mind, quoted from H 0 Taylor's Mediaeval Mind, 3rd ed, Vol II, pp 448
5, however, gives a different interpretation by an ingenious exegesis 'Hun alone whom be chooses by that same self is his own self obtainable ' The self reveals its true character to one that seeks it exclusively.
yam eva svalmamm eva saihako vrnute prarthayale temivatmana varitra svayam alma labhyah ynayata mm ttyeUUmskamaicalnianam eva prarthayaU, almanaiva atma labyate tty arihdh
nasanta-manaso vapt prajMnenainam Spnuyat
24 Not he who has not desisted from evil ways, not he who is not tranquil, not he who has not a concentrated mind, not even he whose mind is not composed can reach this (self) through right knowledge.
Saving wisdom cannot be obtained without the moral qualifica- tions here mentioned No one can realise the truth without illumina- tion, and no one can have illumination without a thorough deansmg of one's moral being See also M U. IIL 1 5, HI 1 8; Cp B U TV. 4 23 So long as we are indulgent to our vices, so long as we pine away with hatred and ill-will to others, we cannot get at true knowledge The classical division of spiritual Me into purgation, mumination and union gives the first place to ethical preparation, which is essential for the higher degrees of spiritual We Morw disorder prevents us from fixing our gaze on the Supreme umu our mind and heart are effectively purged, we can have no clear vision of God It follows that man's effort is essential to grasp grace profit by it Grace is not irresistible It is open to us to accept orreject it llection by God referred to m the previous verse is not to be interpreted as fostering fatalism or predestination, though the Soul seer feels that even in the first movement oi thejul towids wisdom, the effort at purgation, the prune «ma^cA
This verse gives the he dn-ect to the suggestion «™**»*^ that the spiritual and the ethical are not organically ^connected If we Wl«h to attain the spiritual, we cannot bypass the ethicaJ
I 3 i. Kaiha Upanisad 621
25. yasya brahma ca ksatram ca ubhe bhavata odanah mrtyur yasyopasecanam ka itiM veda yatra sah 25 He for whom priesthood and nobility both are as food and death is as a sauce, who really knows where he is?
Cp RV. XI 129 Who knows for certain? Who shall here declare it? Whence it was born and whence come this creation?
Anyone lacking the qualifications mentioned in the previous verse cannot understand the nature of the Supreme which contains the whole world Death leads to the reabsoiption into the Supreme of the entire world in which the Brahmanas and the Ksatriyas hold the highest place
odanah food for the body.
Even Death is absorbed in the Eternal. B U. 1 2 1 upasecamm sauce.
We cannot know where the Omnipresent Spirit is any more than we can know where the liberated mdividual is, for they are not in any one place.
ckaya-tapau brahma-vido vadantt,paficagnayoye ca tri-naci- ketah
t There are two selves that drink the fruit of Karma in the world of good deeds. Both are lodged m the secret place (of the heart), the chief seat of the Supreme. The knowers of Brahman speak of them as shade and light as also (the householders) who maintain the five sacrificial fires and those too who perform the triple Naciketas fire.
It has been said already that the Eternal Reality which is greater wan anything this world or the celestial offers can be reached by meditation on one's own inner self and not by ordinary empirical Knowledge This section continues the account of the way m which we Supreme Self may be known This verse makes out that med&a- non on the inner self leads to the knowledge of the Supreme because we latter dwells in close fellowship with the individual self in the
622 The Principal Upanisads I 3 2
Ttam: Karma. Sta signifies the divinely established order of the universe, both natural and moral It here refers to the divme order connecting deeds with their results § means by it 'the truth because it is the inescapable fruit of action ' rtam satyam avasyam bftevttval barma plialam S.
suhriasya, of good deeds: of their own deeds, sva-kjiasya
The two referred to here are the individual soul and the Supreme sell Cp. M.U. III. 1. 10, S.U. IV. 6 and 7, which go back to R V. 1. 164. 20. Sayana, commenting on this verse, says that the reference is to the two forms of the atman, the individual soul fjivaiman) and tiie universal fyaramatman). But how can the self which is represented as looking on without eating, be treated as experiencing the rewards of deeds? 5 R, and Srlhivasa in his commentary on Nimbarka argue that it is loose usage of cJtattri-nyaya. When two men walk under an umbrella, we say there go the umbrella-bearers Madhva is more to the point when he quotes Brhat Samhitd and says, 'The Lord Hari dwells in the heart of beings and accepts the pure pleasure arising from their good works ' The Supreme in its cosmic aspect is subject to the chances and changes of tunes Isvara as distinct from Brahtnan participates in the processes of the world
Madhva finds support in this verse for his doctrine of the entire disparateness of the individual and the universal souls paranie parardhe' the chief seat of the Supreme The Kingdom of Heaven is within us It is in the deepest reaches of the soul that the human soul holds fellowship with God. chdya-lapau: shade and light, shadow and glowing or light faiicagnayah ' those who maintain the five sacrificial fires
All this indicates that while meditation is the way to saving knowledge, due performance of the ordained sacrifices gives us a measure of spiritual understanding
2. That bridge for those who sacrifice, and which is the highest imperishable Brahman for those who wish to cross over to the farther fearless shore, that Naciketa fire, may we master
setu- bridge Cp C U. VIII. 4 4. B.U. IV. 4 22. aja alma esaseluh M.U II. 2.5 It is that by which we pass from time to eternity. In the beginning, it is said that the sky and earth were one They became separated by an intervening river or sea of time and space, samara- sagara. Each one of us, here on earth, wishes to find his way to the farther shore by a ladder or a bridge If we think of a ladder, the way {pantM) is upward [urdhvam), if we think of a bridge, the way is across That which takes us across to the other shore is the immanent spiritual self which is at once the way and the goal The bridge holds
Katha Upanisad
the worlds apart and also unites them SeeB.U IV. 4 22, VIII. 4 1.
In Buddhist texts, the way from the vortex of existence, sarhsara to the extinction of life's fires, nirvana is the eightfold path 'I am the -way,' John XIV 6. He who calls himself the -way appeared to St Catherine of Siena 'in the form of a bridge extending from Heaven to Earth over which all mankind had to pass ' See Dona Lmsa Coomaraswanry The Perilous Bridge Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies, August 1944
Two ways of crossing the river of sarhsara are indicated, the performance of the Vedic sacrifices, which leads to the heaven of the gods and the knowledge of Brahman The first prepares the way for the second, on the path of gradual liberation of krama-mukti. B.U IV 4 22
3 atmanam rathinam viddhi, sanram ratham eva tor bvddhim in saradhim viddhi, manah pragraham eva ca
3 Know the Self as the lord of the chariot and the body as, venly, the chariot, know the intellect as the charioteer and the mind as, venly, the reins
The idea of the self riding in the chariot which is the psycho- physical vehicle is a familiar one See also Jataka VI. 242. The caanot with its sensitive steeds represents the psycho-physical vehicle in which the self ndes In Maitri IV. 4, the embodied self is spoken of as rathita or 'carted' and thus subjected to the conditions ofmortality Mind holds the reins It may either control or be dragged oy the team of the senses Rum! in his Matknawi says: 'The heart »as pnUed the reins of the five senses' (I. 3275) The conception of ioga derived from the root yuj to yoke, to harness, to join is connected with the symbolism of the chariot and the team. Yoga « tne complete control of the different elements of our nature, SI ~ Physical and harnessing them to the highest end. iSL r 1 P rl !asdo 2 4 -28 > Partis ztft In spite of difference in uetaus, the Katha Up. and Plato agree m lookmguponmtelligence as the ruling power of the soul (called buddfn or vijmna by the upamsaa and notes by Plato) and airning at the integration of the dements of human nature. Cp. Republic (IV. 433): 'The at 1? order own mner Me > and is his own master and Drrnr n? v h™ 5 * 1 *. and when he has bound together the three and « « 1 m 111111 ( Le Teason > emotion and the sensual appetites) iferwi, 0 ? nger man y but has become one entirely temperate and art S? J ^ ted nature - he ™& proceed to act, if he has to ' nemer ™ state affairs or in private business of his own *
624 TJte Principal Upanisads I 3 9
4 indnyam hayan ahur vtsayams tesu gocaran, dtmendriya-mano-ytiktam bhoktety ahur manismah
4 The senses, they say, are the horses, the objects of sense the paths (they range over), (the self) associated with the body, the senses and the mind — wise men declare— is the enjoyer.
The atman (self) is compared to the owner of a chanot {rathin), the body being the chanot (raiha), buddht or intellect is the driver (sarathi), the horses are said to be the senses [minyani), manas is the rem (pragraha) by which the intellect controls the senses
5 yas tv avtjMnavan bhavaty ayuktena manasS soda, tasyendnyany avasyam dusiasva voa saratheh
5 He who has no understanding, whose mind is always ■unrestrained, his senses are out of control, as wicked horses are for a charioteer
6 yas tu vtjMnavdn bhavah, yuktena manasd soda, tasyendnyam vasyant sadaha voa saratheh
6. He, however, who has understanding, whose mind is always restrained, his senses are under control, as good horses are for a charioteer
sad good, well-trained
7. He, however, who has no understanding, who has no control over his mind (and is) ever impure, reaches, not that goal but comes back into mundane life samsaram mundane life, the world of becoming characterised by life and death jattma-marana-laksanam S
8 yas tu vijmnavdn lhavati samanaskas soda iucih sa tu tat padam apnoti yasmat bhilyo na jayate
8 He, however, who has understanding, who has control over his mind and (is) ever pure, reaches that goal from wnicn he is not born again
0 vipmnasdrathir yastu manah pragrahavdn narah so'dhvanah param dpnoti tad viyxh paramam P**™
o He who has the understanding for the driver of the chanot and controls the rem of his mmd, he reaches the end of the journey, that supreme abode of the all-pervading.
I 3 ii Kalha Upatusad 625
visntr all-pervading, tad msnoh vyapana-silasya brahmanah paramat- mano vasudevakkyasya S The name is used for the Supreme Self. The development of this idea is taken up in the B.G. and the later Bhagavata religion. See RV I 154, 5; I 22 20, where Visnu, a deity of the solar group, is conceived as tie giver of light and life
10 indriyebhyah para hy artha, arthebhyas ca param manah, manasas ca para bitddhir bitddher atma tnaMn parah.
10. Beyond the senses are the objects (of the senses) and beyond the objects is the mind; beyond the mind is the under- standing and beyond the understanding is the great self.
almamahan the great self
S means by it the great" soul of the universe said to be the first- bom of aoyakta, the unmanifest. According to the R V (X 121) in the beginning was the chaos of waters, floating on which appeared Huanya-garlha, the golden germ, the first born of creation and the creator of all other human beings Hiranya-garbha is the soul of the universe RV.X. 129 2.
When the golden light of pttrusa is cast on all the rich content of prakftt, we have the manifestations from crude matter to the divinities in paradise. 1
For R, mahan atma is the individual self kartr, which is indwelt by the highest self. R B. I. 4. 1.
11 mahatah param avyaktam, avyaktat purasah parah puritan na param kincit: sa kastha, so. para gatih.
11 Beyond the great self is the unmanifest; beyond the ?amanifest is the spirit Beyond the spirit there is nothing. That is the end (of the journey) , that is the final goal.
avyakla- unmanifest It is beyond mahat, it is prakrli, the universal mother from out of which by the influence of the light of pttrusa, all form and all content emerge into manifestation.
S calls avyakta, maya, avidya. While purusa, subject, and prakrli, object, are co-ordinate principles at the stage of cosmic creation,
ml Cp D , eussen 'We knowthat the entire objective universe is possible ™ny insofar as it is sustained by a knowing subject This subject as ««s sustainer of the objective universe is manifested m all individual s!!k^S but 15 by no means identical with them. For the individual vntv. * ^ away * but the objective universe continues to exist 'tnout them; there exists therefore the eternal knowing subject
Upa ri ga * also by whom A M susta5ned ' rhe Philosophy of the
626 The Principal Upanisads 1. 3 n,
while then: inter-action is essential for all manifestation, purusa is considered to be higher as he is the source of light and his unity appears nearer to the ultimate one than the multiplicity of prakfit, strictly speaking, however, the Pure Self is beyond the descriptions of unity, duality and multiplicity
For Ramanuja, avyakta is the body or the chariot It is called avyakta because the subtle body and not the gross body is referred to While there is agreement between § and Ramanuja, on the point, S proceeds to say that the subtle body has avtdya or ignorance for its cause and therefore belongs to the world of vidya 'Maya is properly called undeveloped or non-manifested since it cannot be defined as that which is or that which is not.' SB I 4 3 By avyakta, § means not the prakrtt of the SamkJiya but the mayd-iakli which is responsible for the whole world including the personal God For Ramanuja, avyakta denotes Brahman in its causal phase, when names and forms are not yet distinguished It is a real mode, prakara or development, partnama of Brahman through which the universe is evolved RB I 4 23-27
Madhva observes that 'the word avyakta which primarily denotes the Supreme Lord alone also denotes the other (matter), for it is dependent on Him and like unto a body of the Lord ' Suira Bhasya I 4 1
partisan no- param kiiiat beyond the Spirit there is nothing
The term purusa goes back to the Purusa Sukta (R V X go) and is distinctly personal in significance
Purusa is the subject side of that within which are both subject and object, the light of unity and the darkness of multiplicity We do not reach it, until the end of the cosmic day So we can say that there is nothing beyond the purusa
In these two verses we find a hierarchy of principles or beings which have later acquired highly technical significations We are asked to pass from outward nature to the one world-ground, avyakia, and from it to the spirit behind Between ^two.purusasn&prakrit.f- certain priority is given to purusa, for it is the light of purusa s consciousness that is reflected on all objects of the nianifestea universe high or low, gross or subtle From the sense world where the senses reveal their objects, we pass to the dream world where manas or mind operates independent of the senses From this latter we pass to the world of dreamless sleep where the unmamlcst ■drakrti becomes the divine mother Those who ar\ absorbed in Iraktfi, those who have attained to the state of prakfitAaya have the bhk and freedom of dreamless sleep, but it is not the frtedom that we seek For that we must get to the purusa, who is
^Cp 0 rSudo Dionysius To thou, in the intent practice of mysUc contemplation, leave behind the senses and the operations of tnc
Kaiha Upamsad
intellect, and all things that the senses or the intellect can perceive, and all things which are not and things which are, and strain upwards in unknowing as far as may be towards the union with Him who is above all being and knowledge. For by unceasing and absolute withdrawal from thyself and all things in purity, abandoning all and set free from all, thou wilt be borne up to the ray of the Divine Darkness that surpasseth all being.' Mystical Theology, I.
Mahal, avyakta and pitrusa are terms used by the Samkhya philosophy AvyaMa is the prakrtt atpradhana. When its equihbrium is disturbed by the influence oipttrusa, the evolution or srsti or the manifest world starts, and this evolution consists of twenty-three principles Mahat, tie great principle, btiddhi or intelligence, ahamkdra self-sense, principle of individuation from which issue tnanas, the central, co-ordinatory sense-organ, 5-9, five hiddhtndriyas or sense organs, 10-14, nve kannendnyas or organs of achon, 15-19, five tanmatras, or subtle elements, 20-24, ^ ve sthiila-bhuias or gross elements Pumsa, the twenty-fifth, is totally distinct in nature from all others, neither producing nor produced, though by its influence on prakrtt, it causes the evolution of the manifest world.
The account in the Kaiha Up. is different from the classical Samkhya m many respects; there is no mention of ahatfi-kara or self-sense, though it is true that the distinction between buddht and aham-kara, intellect and individuation is not a material one.
While the Samkhya identifies buddhi and mahat, the Upanisad distinguishes them
The purusa of the dualistic Samkhya is not beyond the avyakta orprakjii but is a coordinate principle
It is doubtful whether avyakta refers to the prakrtt of the Samkhya. 5>ee S.B I 4. 1 The Upanisad account gives certain Samkhya ideas Jn a theistic setting.
12 esa sarvesu bhutesu gftdho'lma na prakasafe,
<fr(yafe ivngryaya buddhyd suksmaya suksma-darstbhih. . " J™ Self, though hidden in all beings, does not shine iortn but can be seen by those subtle seers, through their sharp and subtle intelligence.
\Ve must dn-ect a serene and straight look at the Divine object. ^^WBa which is quite different from occult visions or pnyacal ecstasies
13 yacched van manasT prajfias tad yacchej jnana-atmani jnanam atmant mahah niyacchet, tadyacchecchdnta-dtmani.
3 ine wise man should restrain speech in mind; the latter
630 The Principal Upanisads II 1. 1.
I paraim kkdm vyatrnat svayambhiis tasmdt pardn pasyati nantaraUmn
kas ctd dhTrahpratyag-dtmdnam aiksad dvrtta-cak?i<r amrlat- vam tcchan
1 The Self is not to be sought through the senses The Self- caused pierced the openings (of the senses) outward, therefore one looks outward and not within oneself Some wise man, however, seeking life eternal, with his eyes turned inward, saw the self
vyatrnat pierced The Self-caused has so set the openings of the soul that they open outwards and men look outward into the appear- ances of things but the rare soul ripe for spiritual wisdom withdraws his attention from the world, turns his eye inward, sees the Self and attains immortality § makes out that he cursed or injured them by turning them outward, htmsttavdn hantmam krtavdn Such obser- vations which are disparaging to the legitimate use of the senses give the impression of the unworldly character of much of our best effort &'s opinion is opposed to the view set forth m the previous section that senses are like horses, which will take us to our goal, if properly guided The Upanisad calls for the control and not the suppression of the senses Spiritual search has an inward movement leading to the revelation of the Divine in the inmost soul It is this aspect which is stressed in this verse ' We generally lead outward lives, to have a vision of truth we must turn our gaze inward bcc S U III 18, we must bring about an inversion of the natural orientation of our consciousness
svavambhuh self-caused Cp causa sta of Neoplatonisnr max which causes itself or produces itself is different from the unproduced, the uncaused It is the Creator God and not the uncaused Brahman See Salapatha Brdhmana I 9 3 10, Tatiltriya Brahtnana III 12 3 1 B U II 6. 3, IV 6 3. VI 5 4 , „ w
dvrlla-caksuh eyes turned inward We close our eyes to the pne- nomenal variety and turn them inward to the noumenal reamy * It were a vain endeavour Though I should gaze for ever On that green bght which lingers in the west. I may not hope from outward forms to win The passion and the life whose fountains are withm
II i 2 Kaiha Upanisad 631
The soul is like an eye When the eye rests on the perishing things of the world, it does not know the truth of things When it turns inward and rests on truth and being, it perceives truth
Plato speaks of the object of education as a 'turning around of the soul ' In the famous simile of the cave Plato compares those who are destitute of philosophic wisdom to prisoners in a cave who are able only to look in one direction. They are bound and have a fire behind them and a wall in front. They see shadows of them- selves and of objects behind them cast on the wall by the light of the fire They regard these shadows as real and have no notion of the objects to which they are due At last some wise man succeeds in escaping from the cave to the light of the sun He sees real things and becomes aware that he had hitherto been deceived by shadows
Cp. Phaedo 'The soul, when using the body as an instrument of perception, that is to say, when using the sense of sight or hearing or some other sense ... is then dragged by the body into the region of the changeable and wanders and is confused. But when returning into herself she reflects, then she passes into the other world, the region of purity and eternity and immortality, and unchangeableness which are her kindred and with them she ever lives, when she is by herself and is not let or hindered, then she ceases from her erring ways and being in communion with the unchanging is unchanging And this state of the soul is called wisdom.'
Descartes points to the necessity of turning away from external appearances and rising to the spiritual realities which self-knowledge reveals. Only while the author of the Upanisad requires us to rise above intellection into insight when we will be imbued with the truth already present in the soul, Descartes asks us to strive to know the truth through reason. .
The Upanisad points out that God is more manifest in the soul 01 man than in the world outside It, therefore, demands a con- version of the spirit on itself.
2 paracah kdmdn anuyanti balds te mrtyor yantt mtatasya pasam,
ttha dJiira amrtatoam viditva dhruvam adhruvesv iha na prartiiayante.
mi' rt? e small - initlde< i go after outward pleasures They walk man 1 * Snare of widespread death. The wise, however, recog- "^ng life eternal do not seek the stable among things which we unstable here.*
' Cp the Christian hymn.
Swift to its close ebbs out life's little day- Earth's joys grow dim, its glories pass away, Change and decay in all around I see, O Thou Who changest not, abide with me.
632 The Principal Upanisads II 1. 6
3 yena rupam rasam gandham iabdan spariams ca matlhundn, etenaiva vijanah, kim atra paristsyate etai vat tat
3 That by which (one perceives) form, taste, smell, sounds and touches of love, by that alone one perceives. What is there that remains (unknown to it) ? This, venly, is that
Everything is known by the Self and there is nothing which is unknowable to it sarvant evatvdlmana vtjneyam, yasyatmano' mjneyam na kincit panhsyate, sa alma sarvajnah S Though the Self is not manifest as an object, it is ever present in all experience as the subject It is the ground of every possibility of thought, of every act of knowledge As S says, it is self-proven, svasiddha, for even he who denies it presupposes it
4 svapnantam jagarttdniam cobhau yemnupasyati, mahantam wbhum atmanam matva dhiro na iocait
4. That by which one perceives both dream states and waking states, having known (that as) the great, omnipresent Self, the wise man does not gneve
svapnantam dream states Literally dream-end It is sometimes suggested that at the end of a dream, before it is waking or sleeping we catch the self which is the pure subject It is the state when we dream that we dream
5 ya imam madhvadam veda atmanam pvam anhkat, isanam bMta-bhavyasya, na tato mjugupsate etad vat tal
5. He who knows this Self, the expenencer as the living spirit close at hand as the lord of the past and the future— one does not shrink away from Him This, venly, is that madhv-ada expenencer Literally, honey-eater, 'the enjoyer of the fruit of action ' karma-phala-bhujam S
vai tat , , i j
6 He who was born of old from austenty, was born of 01a from the waters, who stands, having entered the secret ^place (of the heart) and looked forth through beings This, vemy, is that
The text refers to Htranya-garbha, who is mentioned in several
Upanisads There is no suggestion here of the unreality of the cosmic evolution
adbhyah: the waters which refer to the mitla-prakrtt, the aspect of the Supreme Spirit which remains when the light of purusa is withdrawn into itself Cp CU VII 10. 1, B.U V. 5,AU 1. 1-3; KU I 7
7 She who arises with Me, Aditi, the soul of the gods, who stands, having entered the secret place (of the heart), who was bom with the "beings. This, verily, is that.
Adttt {a-diti, not bound, boundless) is said to be the mother of the gods , sarva-devatd-mayi sarva-devatmtkd S\ The term is used here in the sense of mother-nature, 1 prakftt, the source of all objectivity. S derives it from root ad 'to eat' and makes adth the eater or expen- encer of all objects 'Born from the highest Brahman as praria, 1 e in the form of Htranya-garbha ' hirayya-garbJiasya eva vtiesan*- dniaram aha. A
8 aranyor nihito jdta-wedd garbha iva subhrto garbhiytbhih: dive dtva Kdyo jdgrvadbhir havi$madbhir manusyebhir agnih:
etad vat tat.
8 Agni, the all-knower, hidden in the fire-sticks, like the embryo well borne by pregnant women, should be daily adored by the watchful men with oblations. This, verily, is that.
This verse is quoted from Santa Veda I 1. 8. 7, see also R.V III 29. 2.
Both purusa and frakrh, the subject and the object are identified with the Supreme Reahty as they are two movements of His being aranyoh- between the upper and the lower fire-sticks: utiaradhar- aranyoh, Madhva. nihiah. hidden, mtarath slhitali.
9 yatai codeii suryo astamyatra ca gacchalt,
iam devas sarve'rpttas tadu ndtydi kaS cam: etad vai tat 9 Whence the sun rises and where it goes to rest; in it are is that f0Utlded 311(1 n0 one ever goes bevond that This verily,
See Atharva Veda X 18 x6,BU I 5.23
The ancient Vedic gods are recognised by the Upanisads but
' R V. (r. 89. 10) 'Aditi is the sky, Aditi the air Adth i* tr,„M,»..
6 34 The Principal Upanisads 1 12
Z^JZL 3 * 1 SE S ihek frora 0^ Supreme Reality
In vases 5-7, the living soul, the soul of the universe S£S
sudto have their reality in 5r« hman ■ M *,£ ^ Jig
FAILURE TO COMPREHEND THE ESSENTIAL UNITY OF BEING IS THE CAUSE OF RE-BIRTH 10. yad eveha tad amulra, yad amuira tad anmha, mrtyos sa mrtyum tynoti ya tha naneva pasyatt
10. Whatever is here, that (is) there. Whatever is there, that, too, is here Whoever perceives anything like manyness here goes from death to death.
ti. manasaivedam apia.vya.rk neha nanasli fan cam: mrtyos sa mrtyum gacchaltya tha naneva paiyah
11. By mind alone is this to be obtained There is nothing of variety here Whoever perceives anything like variety here, goes from death to death.
In these two verses, the Supreme is declared to be devoid of any difference The multiplicity of the world does not touch the unity of the Supreme
THE ETERNAL LORD ABIDES IN ONE'S SELF
Uano bhiita-bhavyasya, na tato vipgupsate etai vai tat.
iz. The person of the size of a thumb resides m the middle of the body. After knowing him who is the lord of the past and the future, one does not shrink (from Him) This, venly, is that.
angustha-matra-purusa • the person of the size of a thumb Taiftmyn Aranyaka X. 38. 1, § U III. 13, V. 8, Maitri VI 38
Li the story of Savitri, it is said that Yama, with his gnm force extracted out of the body of Satyavan a person of the size of a thumb, bound m his snare and brought in his control 1 See B.U I.5 23, Revelation I 8.
« tatah satyavalah kSyai faiabaddham vaiam gatam angustha-matram purusam micakarsa yamo balat
— M B. Vara, Pant
Katha Upanisad
13, angiistha-matrah piinifo jyotir tvadlmmakah'
isdno Wuta-bhaoyasya sa eoadya sa u svah: etad vat tat.
13. The peison of the size of a thumb resides in the middle of the body, like a flame without smoke. He is the lord of the past and the future He is the same today and the same tomorrow. This, verily is that.
The lord of the past and the future is not a timeless Absolute but the ruler of the time order.
& discusses this passage m his SMra Bhasya (I. 3 24 and 25) and argues that the soul which is said to be of the size of a thumb is in reality Brahman Ramamrja and Nimbarka agree and hold that the highest self is called 'thumb-sized' since it dwells in the heart of the ■worshipper In B U the self is said to be 'as small as a grain of nee or barley and yet it is the ruler of all and lord of all,' V51InCU.it is said to be of the measure of a span, pradda-mSlra, V 18 1 Maitri states all the views of the size of the soul It tells us that a man 'reaches the supreme state by meditating on the soul, which is smaller than an atom or else of the size of the thumb, or of a span, or of the whole body "VI 38.
14 yathodakam iurge vrstam parvatesu vtdhavah, evaih dharm&n prthak paiyarhs tan evannvidhavaU.
14. As water rained upon a height flows down m various nays among the hills, so he who views things as varied runs after them (distractedly).
He who perceives differentiation of dharttias is condemned to the restless flowing he perceives
15 yathodakam suddhe suddham asiktam tadrg eoa bhavah, euam mmter vijanaia atma bhavah gautama.
15. As pure water poured forth into pure becomes the very same, so the self, 0 Gautama, of the seer who has undeTstanding ^mes (one with the Supreme).
the very same Literally ]ust such 5 affirms metaphysical wentrty between the individual soul and the Supreme Self. «amanuja and Nimbarka hold that the individual soul is non- ^rent, Ie not separate from the Supreme Self, It attains ^™ f y Wth the Supreme See MU III. 2 8 manana-Masya
samuna bliavait R. C P the observations of the Christian mystics. Bernard of Clair-
636 The Principal Upanisads II 2 2
vaux says 'As a drop of water poured into wine loses itself and takes the colour and savour of wine, so in the saints all human affections melt away, by some unspeakable transmutation into the will of God For how could God be all in all if anything merely human remained in man? The substance will endure, but in another beauty, a higher power, a greater glory 'St Theresa says 'Spiritual marriage is like ram falling from the sky into a river, becoming one and the same liquid, so that the nver water and the ram cannot be divided; or it resembles a streamlet flowing mto the ocean which cannot afterward be dissevered from it '
anusihdya na iocati vimuktasca vimucyate' clad vat tat.
1. (There is) a city of eleven gates (belonging to) the unborn, uncrooked intelligence By ruling it one does not gneve and being freed is freed indeed. This, verily is that.
ekadaSa-dvaram eleven-gated B.G (V. 13) mentions nine gates 1 which are the two eyes, two ears, two nostrils, mouth, anus and generating organ 1 Here two others are mentioned to make up eleven and they are the navel and the saggital suture, the opening at the top of the skull (A U. Ill iz), through which the liberated soul is said to escape at death
a-vakra-cetasah whose thoughts are not crooked avakram akuftlam. anusthaya ruling (the city) 5 takes it to mean 'contemplating,' dhyalva When the soul controls the gates and lives in peace it is free from sorrow. It is freedom which begins here (jivatHnuktij and leads after death to complete release (videha-mukli).
2 hamsas £t(ct?at, vasur aittarik$asat hota vedisat, atithir duronasal,
nr$at, varasat, rtasat, vyomasat, abjd, gojd, rtaja, adrtjd, Ham brhat.
2 He is the swan (son) in the sky, the pervader in the space (between earth and heaven), the pnest at the altar, the guest in the sacrificial jar (house). He dwells in men, in gods, in the right and in the sky. He is (all that is) born of water, sprung
* Banyan in his Holy War describes the human soul as living in a city with five gates which are the five senses.
from the earth, born of right, born of mountain. He is the true and the great.
This hamsavati mantra whose seer is Vama-deva is a prayer to the sun who illumines the world and dispels the darkness of men
SeeRV IV 40. 5; Vajasaneyi SamhitaX 24, XII 14, Tattltrlya SamhttSlJl 2 10 1, Satapatha BrahmanaVl 7 3 XI wait* the pervading vasayati sarvan §
Ma priest 'Fire' according to S Jtotagmh, agnir vai Jiota ily sruteh
In the Satapatha Brakmma, the triune Agni is identified with the sun in heaven, the air in the space between earth and heaven and with the priest or the guest on earth Here, Agni, the Supreme energy is identified with Brahman or the Atman The verse affirms that the whole universe is non-different from the Supreme Brahman, eiat sarvam aparicchtnna-satya-riipa-brahmaimakam R
3. He leads the out-breath upward, he casts inwards the in-breath, the dwarf who is seated m the middle, all the gods adore.
Originally prana meant breath and was used for the Supreme Being In the early Upanisads, all the vital powers (i e, speech, breath, eye, ear and manas) are called pranalu B U. I. 5. 3, T U. I 7. These are looked upon as varieties of breath or as powers presiding over different parts of the body. Prana and apana stand for breaths in expiration and inspiration respectively. vamanam- the dwarf (another name for the thumb-sized person, a»i«s}ha-matra purusa)
'Worthy to be served,' vananlyam sambha janiyam § vttoe devah: all the gods S" interprets as 'the senses and the vital powers which are subject to the person within, who is their Lord wnom they worship by their uninterrupted activity
dehad vmucyamanasya kirn aim paniisyate: elad vat tat 4- When the embodied self that dwells within the body slips off and is released from the body, what is there that remains? ims, venly, is that.
What remains is the Universal Soul
The Principal Upani$ads
ever live But by another do they live on which these (life- breaths) both depend
This verse repudiates the materialist doctrine that the soul is just an assemblage of parts It makes out that as the house and the dweller are separate, the destruction of the house does not mean the destruction of the dweller The loss of the body does not mean the dissolution of the soul, while desertion of the body by the soul would mean the disintegration of the body
6 hanta ta tdam pravaksyami guhyam brahma sanatanam yatha ca maranam prdpya atma bhavatt gautama
6 Look (here) I shall explain to you the mystery oiBrahman, the eternal, and also how the soul fares, after reaching death, O Gautama
j. yomm anye prapadyante iartratvaya dehtnah,
sthanum anye'msamyantt, yatha karma, yatha Srutam.
j. Some souls enter into a womb for embodiment; others enter stationary objects according to their deeds and according to their thoughts
While the Upanisads insist on the independent reality of the Supreme Self they also affirm the reality of the individual soul
Here the law of Karma that we are born according to our deeds is assumed, yatha imtam yadrsam ca mjnanam tiparplam tad amtrupam eva sariram prattpadyanta iti S
8 ya esa suptesu jagartt kamam kamam puruso mrmimanah tad eva sukram tad brahma tad evamrtam ucyale tasmm lokdh intah sarve, tad u natyett kaS cana etad vat tat. 8 That person, who is awake m those that sleep, shaping desire after desire, that, indeed, is the pure That is Brahman, that, indeed, is called the immortal In it all the worlds rest and no one ever goes beyond it This, venly, is that.
kamam Mmam desire after desire, really objects of desire Even dream objects like objects of waking consciousness are due to the Supreme Person Even dream consciousness is a proof of the existence
T^ev^goesVylJ U cp Eckhart 'On reaching God all progress ends '»
i Quoted in New Ittdtan Antiquary, Vol I, p 2°5
Katha Upantsad
9 agnir yathatko bhuvanam pravisto riipath rupam prati-rupo babhuva,
ekas tathd sarva-bhutdntar-dtmd rupam rupam prati-rupo bains' ca
9 As fire which is one, entering this world becomes varied m shape according to the object (it burns), so also the one Self within all beings becomes varied according to whatever (it enters) and also exists outside (them all).
Cp. RV. where India, in his conflict with the demons, is said to have assumed many forms through his magic powers, becoming the counterform of every form
rupam rupam prati-r&po babhiiva tndro tnayabhth pururilpa lyate VI 47 18 bahts" outside While the Self assumes many forms, it is yet outside the manifested world in its own unmodified nature svena avikriena r&pena akasavat. § This verse teaches the immanence as well as the transcendence of the Supreme Self Cp R V X 90, where all beings are said to be a quarter of the purusa while three-quarters are immortal in heaven, trtpad asyamrlam divi RV X 90. 3, SU III 9 and 10
ekas tathd sarva-bhutdntar-dtmd rupam rupam prati-rupo bahii ca
10. As air which is one, entering this world becomes varied m shape according to the object (it enters), so also the one Self within all beings becomes varied according to whatever (it enters) and also exists outside (them all)
11 suryo yalha saroa-lokasya cahstir na lipyale caksusair bahya-dosaih
ekas tathd sarva-bhutantar-atma na hpyate loka-duhkena bahyah.
11 Just as the sun, the eye of the whole world, is not denied dv the external faults seen by the eye, even so, the One within au bangs is not tainted by the sorrow of the world, as He is outside (the world). '
The verse admits the reality of the pain of the world but denies that ,t touches the Supreme Self which is our inner being. The fornS
6 4° The Principal Upanisads II. 2 I4 .
Whk $ ^Supreme assumes are not its modifications but are the
by the pam of the ^dividual selves because the pain of the ^dividual self is due to its identifying itself with its psycho-physical ThSe The mdiwdual^o makes a confusion between the si and ^Zt l not the self. The Supreme, on the other hand, does not suffer because it is not subject to ignorance (avidya) and it does not identify itself with any of the accidents to which its various psycho-physical vehicles are subject. ^ '
tarn abmaslham ye'nttpaiyanU dhvras tesam sukham itisva- tam netaresatn.
12. The one, controller (of all), the inner self of all things, who makes his one form manifold, to the wise who perceive Mm as abiding in the soul, to them is eternal bliss— to no others
vast: controller See B U. IV. 4 22, S" U. VI. 12
atmastiiam- abiding in the soul The Supreme dwells in the inmost
sva-sanra-ltrdayakase buddhau caiianyakarenabhivyahlam § Cp I John IV. 13 'Hereby know we that we abide in Him and He in us, because He hath given us of His spirit '
who makes hts one form manifold It is one in the unmamfested condition It becomes manifold in the manifested condition ekt-bhd- fMbh^avasifm^tam-laksa^mhjatnmahadddtbahu-mdha-prapanca- r&penayah karoti tarn R
13 mtyo'nityanam cetanas cetananam eko bahummyo vidad- hati kaman,
tarn atmastham yentipaiyanti dhtrdh; tesam idnhs sasvafi, netaresam.
13. The one eternal amid the transient, the conscious amid the conscious, the one amid many, who grants their desires, to the wise who perceive Hun as abiding in the soul, to them is eternal peace and to no others
SeeSU. VI 13
nityo'mtyanam, sometimes miyo miyanam the one eternal among the eternal.
The Supreme grants the desires of many. We may see here the doctrine of Divine providence
Kaiha Upanisad
14. This is that and thus they recognise, the ineffable Supreme bliss How then may I come to know this? Does it shine (of itself) or does it shine (in reflection) ?
Does the Supreme shine in Himself (see III. 1. 3. 12) or does He shine in His expression?
bhanti.-kuto'yam agnih: tarn eva bkantam anubhatt sarvam tasya bhasa sarvam idath vibhati.
15. The sun shines not there, nor the moon and the stars, these hghtnings shine not, where then could this fire be? Everything shines only after that shining light. His shining illumines all this world.
The Supreme who is the source of all light, 'the master light of all our seeing' 1 cannot be known by any earthly light Our knowledge cannot find him out
SeeMU II. 2 io;SU.VI 14; BG. XV. 12 The symbol of light is the most natural and universal Plato in his Seventh letter com- pares the sudden inspiration of the mystic to a 'leaping spark.' In the myth of the cave, the real world is a realm of light outside the cave The Old Testament and the Zoroastrian religion speak of the antagonism between darkness and light In the First Epistle of John, we read, 'God is light and in him is no darkness at all.'
THE WORLD-TREE ROOTED IN BRAHMAN
I. iirdhva-miilo'vak-dakha e?o'$vatthas sanatanah, tad eva Sukram tad brahma, tad evamrtam ucyate. tasmm lokah fritah sarve tad u naiyeti ka£ cam: dad vai tat. 1. With the root above and the branches below (stands) this ancient fig tree. That (indeed) is the pure; that is Brahman. * hat, indeed, is called immortal In it all the worlds rest and no one ever goes beyond it This, venly, is that.
lad eva- that indeed, 1 e the root of this tree The description here mytholo^ 0gUC m thC descnption o{ tree I gdrasil in Scandinavian » Revelation XX 1 23.
642 The Principal Upani§ads II 3 4
The tree of life has its unseen roots in Brahman The tree, roots and branches represent Brahman m its manifested form While the tree of life is said to be imperishable Bralmian, B G , which uses this illustration, asks us to cut off the tree of existence by the potent weapon of non-attachment XV 1 3 The tree grows upside down It has its roots above and branches below See S U III g, Maitri VI 4 The branches below are for Madhva the lower gods avamcah adhamah devah sakhah yasya asatt
mahad bhayam vajram udyatam, ya etad vidur amrtas te bhavantt
2. The whole world, whatever here exists, springs from and moves m life (It is) the great fear (like) the upraised thunder- bolt. They that know that become immortal
The whole world trembles in Brahman parasmtn brahmani saty ejatt kampate §
3 Through fear of him, fire burns, through fear (of him) the sun gives heat; through fear both Indra (the lord of the gods) and wind and Death, the fifth, speed on their way.
SeeT.U II 8 1
The source and sustaining power of the universe is Brahman Evolution is not a mechanical process It is controlled by Brahman, who is here represented as prana, theMe-givmg power jagatomftlam prana-pad-a-laksynm prana-pravrltir apt hetnlvat A
4 tha ced aiakad boddhum prak ianrasya msrasah, tatah sargesu lokesu sariratvdya kaJpaie
4 If one is able to perceive (Him) before the body falls away (one would be freed from misery), (if not) he becomes fit for embodiment in the created worlds
aiakat able It is sometimes split up into na ^ f J le ' " rf one fails to know it The simplest meaning would be If one is not able to know (the Supreme) before the body faUs away, °™ becomes fit foV embodiment m the created worlds ' S interprets the verse
thus *If here in this life, a man. is able to know the awe-inspiring Brahman before the falling of the body, he is freed from the bond of samsara; if he is not able to know, then for lack of knowledge, he takes embodiment in earth and other created worlds.' sargesit lokesu created worlds V sarvesu kalesu, at all times
The verse teaches that it is possible for us to attain the saving wisdom here and now.
yathdpsupariva dadrse, iathd gandharoa-loke ckaya-tapayor iva brahma-loke. 5 As in a mirror, so (is it seen) in the soul, as in a dream, so in the world of the manes, as (an object) is seen in water, so in the world of the gandharvas; as shade and light in the world of Brahma.
He can be seen in this life as in a glass, if his mind is pure and clear In the region of the departed, he can be seen only as a reminis- cence, a remembrance of dreams In the world of the gandharvas, he can be seen as a reflection in trembling waters In tie world of Brahma he can be seen clearly as shade and light. gandharvas' angels who live m the fathomless spaces of air. R.V. VIII. 65 5; see also B.U. IV 3 33
6. Knowing the separate nature of the senses, which spring separately (from the various subtle elements) and (knowing also) that their rising and setting (are separate), the wise man does not grieve.
The discrimination of the Self from the sense organism is here insisted on. When the wise man knows, that the material senses do not come from the Self, that their rise and fall belong to their own nature, he gneves no more
7 tndrtyebhyah param mano manasas saltvam uttamam, saltvad adhi mahan atma, mahato'vyaktam uttamam
7. Beyond the senses is the mind; above the mind is its essence (intelligence) ; beyond the intelligence is the great self ; beyond the great (self) is the unmamfest
saliva essence Intelligence constitutes the essence of the mind. See notes on I. 3 10 and 11
x*
644 The Principal Upantsads II 3 9c
8. Beyond the unmanifest is the person, all-pervading and without any mark whatever. By knowing whom, a man is liberated and goes to life eternal
dinga without any mark See M U, III 2 4, Maitri V 31, 35; VII 2. 'Without any empirical attributes.' sarva-samsara-dharma- varjilah 6 Ltnga is a distinctive mark or sign. In logic, it is an invariable sign which constitutes the basis of inference Lvnga refers to hnga-sama sfiksma-farira, the entity consisting of hiddht, aham- kara, manas, vndnyam, ianmalrani S U VI 9, Maitri VI 10 19 If hnga is taken in this sense, it means that the Supreme needs no subtle body as it is not subject to death and re-birth
kaicaminam'
Itrda mani§a manasfibhiMpto ya etai viiur amrt&s U bhavanti.
9. Not within the field of vision stands this form No one soever sees Him with the eye By heart, by thought, by mind apprehended, they who know Him become immortal.
The first half points out that we cannot form a visual image of the Supreme Person and the second half urges that we can still apprehend Him by heart, by thought and by mind The Supreme Reality is to be apprehended through the concentrated direction of all mental powers
tnanisa (reflective) thought vikalfia-wnyita buddht tnanas mind, true insight m the form of meditation mmuma-rUpena samyag-darScma S\ When the mind becomes clear and the heart pure, God-vision arises Cp RV I 61 2 hrda marnsa marnsa We must seek God in our hearts and our souls The process is called introversion, the solitary communing of the soul with God, the thought of the alone to the Alone, as Plotinus described it Cp Cassian- 'The mind will come to that incorruptible prayer which is not engaged in looking on any image, and is not articulate by tne utterance of any voice or words, but with the intentness of the mind aglow, it is produced by an ineffable transport of the h«t» some insatiable keenness of spirit , and the mind being placed beyond all senses and visible matter, pours it forth to God with groamngs and sighs that cannot be uttered' 1 . , . „ 1T
abfolWa- apprehended As the concept of God is formed by our SStof it cannot be identical for all This attitude develops Sitvopen-rnindedness, disinclination to force one's views on .other plSoplS Xntion If the Hindu does not feel that he belongs to the . Collation X « quoted in Dom Cuthbert Butter. Btnedtchni Manaehtsm, 2nd Ed (1924), p 79
chosen race, if he is relativdy free from
it is to no small extent due to the recognition that the concepts of God are relative to our traditions and training
io yada paFicavaiisthanle jnanani manasa saha,
buddhis ca na vicestaii, tarn ahiih paramam gatim. ^
io When the five (senses) knowledges together with the rmnd cease (from their normal activities) and the intellect itself does not stir, that, they say, is the highest state.
Cp Boehme- 'When thou standest still from the thinking of self and the willing of self; when both thy intellect and will axe quiet and passive to the expressions of the eternal world and spirit, and when thy soul is winged up and above that which is temporal, the outward senses and the imagination being locked up by holy abstraction, then the Eternal Hearing, Seeing and Speaking win be revealed in thee, and so God heareth and seeth through thee, being the organ of this spirit and so God appeareth in thee and whispereth to thy spirit Blessed art thou, therefore, if thou canst stand still from thy self-thinking and self-willing and canst stop the wheel of thy imagination and senses *
ii. This, they consider to be Yoga, the steady control of the senses. Then one becomes undistracted for Yoga conies and goes
apramattah undistracted pramada-^arjttahsamMhanamprati-mtyam prayatnav'an S See also CU 1-3 12 and II. 33 2, M U. II 2. 4 In Buddhism all virtues are said to be centred in apramada (Pali appamado). Keenness is the way of eternal life and slackness the way of death appamado amatapadam, pamado maccuno padam Dliamma- pada 21.
prabhavapyayau' comes and goes
Vigilant keenness is necessary in Yoga, as it comes and goes. jananapaya-dharmakaJt S\ prattksampayaialttaya avadhanam apeksttam R If we are careful we will acquire it; if we are careless we will lose it Mind is liable to fluctuation and therefore we should be extremely careful
, It is sometimes interpreted as 'beginning and end ' "The world sinks down in Yoga and again is created afresh,' says Deussen. This is later Patafijala Yoga.
The Prtnetpal Upanifads
12. Not by speech, not by mind, not by sight can he be apprehended How can he be comprehended except by him who says, 'He is' ?
He can be comprehended only by those who affirm that 'He is '
The self as the knowing subject can never become an object. It can be realised through Yoga While He transcends the ordinary means of apprehension, He can be immediately experienced through Yoga, and for such apprehension faith in His existence is an indis- pensable condition The conviction of the reality of that which is sought is the prerequisite
Commenting on this verse, S argues that the Supreme Brahman who is conceived as the source of the universe must be regarded as existent We cannot conceive of the world as produced from nothing The world effect must have an existent cause
We can at least reasonably say of God that He is Cp Epistle to the Hebrews 'He that cometh to God must believe that He is Cp St Bernard 'Who ts God' I can think of no better answer than, He who is Nothing is more appropriate to the eternity which God is If you call God good, or great or blessed, or wise or anything else of this sort, it is included in these words, namely, He is '
r3 astity evopdabdhavyas iattva-bkdvena cobhayoh, asiity evopalabdhasya tattva~bhavah prasidatt
13 He should be apprehended only as existent and then m his real nature— in both ways When He is apprehended as existent, his real nature becomes clear (later on)
The primary assertion that can be made of the Self is the declaration of existence, pure and simple , ItiSyk in both ways In the conditioned and the unconditioned ways 'sopadhka-ntrupadhthayoh S. ^ )r1 . „,
Rational faith in the existence of Braliman leads on to spiritual expWce m which H,s nature is revealed to and understood by the
b ^ftL section the author speaks to us of the discipline of Yoga by w^rmS whole being ^unified and concentrate I on the relation of the highest Bemg who is also the inner and real self
14. vada sarve pramucyante Mma ye'sya hrdi M, atha martvo'mrto bhavaty atra brahma samainute 14. ^SrSZn that dwell within the human heart are
cast away, then a mortal becomes immortal and (even) here he attameth to Brahman.
When self-seeking desire, ignorance and doubt disappear, the vision of God is attained. The Upanisad treats fellowship with God as the consummation of spiritual experience
15 yada sarve prabhidyante hrdayasyeha granthayah, aiha martyo' mjio bhavaty etavad anusasanam.
15. When all the knots that fetter here the heart are cut asunder, then a mortal becomes immortal. Thus far is the teaching.
elavad anttidsananf thus far is the teaching. The original Upanisad, it was felt, ended with 1. 3 17 These words seem to mark the end of the enlarged Upanisad. The remaining verses seem to be a still later addition.
16 salam caika ca hrdayasya nadyas tasam murdhdnam
abhmhsriaikd.
tayordhvam ayann amrtatvam eti, vtsvann anyd utkramane bhavanh.
16 A hundred and one are the artenes of the heart; one of them leads up to the crown of the head. Going upward through that, one becomes immortal, the others serve for going m various other directions
See C.U. VIII 6 6, where it is said, that if a man has lived the disciplined life of a student and so 'found the self,' then at the time of death, his soul, dwelling in the heart, will pass upward by an artery known as susttmna (Maitri VI 21), to an aperture m the ° f the skull known as the brdfvma-ranihra or vtdrtt, by which at the beginning of life it first entered For there the soul rises by the rt!" S ra ? S t0 the sun wIudl ls a door-way to the Brahma world to "lose who know and a stopping-place for those who do not know me other ways lead the unliberated to re-embodiment
17 migmthamatrah ptmtso'ntaratma sate jananam hrdaye
sannwistah
tatn svac charirat pravrhm munjdd ivesikam dhairyena- tam vidyac chukram amrtam tam vidyac chukram amriam lit.
17 The person of the size of a thumb, the inner self, abides aiv,ays m the hearts of men. Him one should draw out with nnnness, from the body, as (one may do) the wind from the
The Principal Upamsads
reed Him one should know as the pure, the immortal, yea, Him one should know as the pure, the immortal
dhairyena with firmness, apramadena & with courage, with intel- lectual strength. jfiam-kaufalena. R
18 mrtyu-proktam nactketo'tha labdhva vidyam elam yoga- vtdhim ca krtsnam, brahmaprapto virago 'bhud vimrtyur anyopy evam yo vtd adhyaimam eva 18 Then Naciketas, having gained this knowledge declared by Death and the whole rule of Yoga, attained Brahman and became freed from passion and from death. And so may any other who knows this in regard to the self.
PRASNA upanisad
The Prasna Upanisad. belongs to the Atharva Veda and has sue sections dealing with six questions put to a sage by his disciples who were intent on knowing the nature of the ultimate cause, the power of aum, the relation of the Supreme to the constituents of the world The Upanisad is so called as it deals with praina or question.
sabhir yajatrah, sthirair unguis tusluvdmsas tanubhih, vyasema deva-httam yad ayith
1 Aum. May we, O gods, hear what is auspicious with our ears Oh ye, who are worthy of worship, may we see with our eyes what is auspicious May we enjoy the life allotted to us by the gods, offering praise, with our bodies strong of limb
2 svasti na tndro vrddlta-sravah, svash ncdi pusa visva-vedah, svasit nas tdrksyo ansia-nemih, svasti no brhaspatir dadhatu, Aum santih, sanlih, iantth
2. May Indra, of increasing glory, bestow prosperity on us, may Pusan, the knower of all, bestow prosperity on us, may Tarksya, of unobstructed path, bestow prosperity on us May Brhaspati bestow prosperity on us Aum, peace, peace, peace
Question 1
SIX QUESTIONERS SEEK BRAHMA-KNOWLEDGE FROM A TEACHER
1 sttkesd ca bhdradvdjah, faibyas ca satya-kamdh, sauryayam ca gdrgyah, hausalyas cdsvaldyano bhdrgavo vaidarbhih, kabandhi kdtydyanah, te haite brdhma-pardh, brahma-nisthdh, param brah- mdnvesamdnd, esa ha vat tat sarvam vaksyatih, te ha samit-pdnayo bhagavantam pippalddam upasannah.
1. Sukesa son of Bharadvaja, Satya-kama son of Sibi, Gargya grandson of Surya, Kausalya son of Asvala, Bhargava of the Vidarbha country, Kabandhi son of Katya, these, indeed, devoted to Brahman, intent on Brahman, seeking the highest Brahman, approached the revered Pippalada with sacrificial fuel in their hands, thinking that he would explain all to them
2. tan ha sa rsir uvaca, bhuya eva tapasa brdhmacaryena iraddhayd samvalsaram samvatsyatha, yatha-kamam prasndn prcehaiha, yadt vijndsydmafi sarvam Ita vo vaksyama tti
2. To them that seer said; live with me another year with austerity, chastity and faith. Then ask us questions according to your desire and if we know, we shall, indeed, tell you all that.
tapasa with austerity sense restraint tndnya-samyamena S\ orabttacaryena with chastity yosttsmarana-kiriana-kehpreksana §''i>yabh$sana-samkalpadhyavasayaknya^itrvrtlt-Iate^ ""»a-varpnarapa-brahmacaryena. R.
3 otha kabandhi hdtydyana upetya papraccha, bhagavan, hito Ita vd tmdh prajah prajdyante iti.
3 Then Kabandhi, son of Katya, approached him and asked, venerable Sir, whence, venly, are all these creatures born? (Aha then, ie after a year
4> '«»wi sa hovdcaprajd-kamo vaiprajd-patih, sa tapo'tapyata, tapas taptva sa mtthunam utpadayate, rayitn ca pranam ca, «3' aau me bahudhd prajah karisyata tti.
6 5 2 The Principal Vpanisads \ 7-
4- To him he said, PngSjaH (the lord of creation), venly, vras desirous of offspring He performed jmstenty. Having performed austerity, he produced the pair, matter and life ttonking that they would produce creatures for him vanously rayy matter, feniinine
prang- life, masculine These two are interpreted also as food and its eater Here we have a duality of primary existences answering to matter and form of Anstotle The application of this duality in the following verses is somewhat strange
5 ddityo ha vat prdnah, rayir eva candramdh, rayir va dot sarvam yan murtam cdmurtam ca, tasmat murttr eva rayih
5 The sun, indeed, is life Matter itself is the moon Matter is, venly, all this, whatever is formed and formless Therefore, whatever is formed xs itself matter.
Matter and life interact and produce the whole creation Every- thing, gross and subtle, is matter In the cosmic process or becoming, there is always the element of matter Rayi is the material medium in which all forms are expressed rayir evdnnam S. sarvam apt bhutajalam rayih. R.
6. atha&ttya udayan yat praam dt&am praviiatt, Una pracyan pranan rahnisu sanmdhatte yad dakstnam yat prattctm yad udictm yad adho yad ttrdhvam yad antard dzio yat sarvam prdkdiayatt, Una sarvdn prandn raimisu sannidhatte
6. Now the sun, after rising, enters the eastern side By that, he bathes in his rays all life that is in the east. When he illumines all the other sides of the south, the west, the north, below, above and in between, by that he bathes in his rays all living beings
y. sa esa vatsvdnaro visva-rilpah prdno'gntr udayate, -tad dad rcdbhyuktam
This is he, the Vaisvanara fire, assuming every form, life and fire who rises (every day) This very doctrine is declared in a verse of the Rg Veda
The sun which is life in its infinite variety rises as fire VaiSvanara is said to be the essence of all living beings, while Vtsva-rilpa is said to be the essence of the whole cosmos, according to A
narah pvah visve ca te nardi ca visvanardlj,, sa eva vmhdnarah sarva- fivalmakah, visva-rupah sarva-prapancdtmakah ttt bhedah.
8 m&va-rupam hariyam jdta-vedasam pardyaijam jyoiir ekam lapantam,
sahasra-rabnih saiadhd vartamdnaJ} pranah prajandm udayaiy esa suryah 8. Who has all forms, the golden one, the aU-knowing, the goal (of all), the sole light, the giver of heat, possessing a thousand rays, existing in a hundred forms — thus rises the sun, the hfe of all creation.
SeeMaitriVI 8.
The Sun, in many systems of ancient tunes, is regarded as the infinite life of all beings.
9 saihvatsaro vat prajd-patih, tasydyane daksinam cottaram ca, tad y e ha vat tad istd-purte krtam ity updsate, te cdndramasam eva lokam abhijayante, ta eva punar dvartanle, tasmdd etersayah praja-kdmd daksiyam prattpadyante, esa ha vat raytr yah pitryanah.
9 The year, verily, is the lord of creation; of it (there are) two paths, the southern and the" northern Now those, venly, who worship, thinking 'sacrifice and pious acts are our work,' they wm only the human world They certainly return again
* ^ sages ' desirous °f offspring, take the southern route This, which is called the path of ancestors, is venly matter (rayt) J
s ° u £ hern rou *e is the material path where we perform acts win selfish desires These acts are of two kinds ista and purta. if relates to acts of ceremonial piety, observances of Vedtc
nuiai, the latter to acts of social service and public good
agntliotrani iapas satyam vedanam upalambhanam, attlhyarii vaisvadevam ca tsfam ity abhidhiyale; vSpi-kapa-tatakadi devalayalanani ca anna-prad&mm dramahpiirlam ity abhtdhiyate
10 alhottarcna tapasd brahmacarycna sraddhayd vtdyaydt- «nam anvisySdilyavi abhijayante, ctad vaiprdndndm dyatanam,
654 The Principal Upant$ads I 12
etad amrtam abhayam, etat pardyanam, etasmdn na punar dvartaute, ity esa mroihah, tad esa slokah:
10. But those who seek for the Self by austerity, chastity, faith and knowledge, they, by the northern route, gain the sun That, verily, is the support of life breaths That is eternal, the fearless That is the final goal From that they do not return That is the stopping (of rebirth) About that, there is this verse.
Conventional piety and altruism are distinguished from ethical and spiritual development. The former do not save us from sub- jection to time, the latter do
tapas is bodily control, bordering on mortification Brahmacarya is sexual continence Sraddhd is faith in the Divine Attna-vidyd is self-knowledge kdya-kkiddi-laksanem tapasd, sln-sanga-rdhttya-lak- sanena braJimacaryena, Sshhya-buddhi-lahanayd sraddhayd pralyag- dima-vtayaya . . R
Through the Sun they attain to Brahman brahma-prdpti-dvdra- bhutam adttyam. Ibid
11 panca-padam pitaram dvddaidkrtim diva dhuk pare ardhe
purisinam
atheme anya w pare vtcahsanam sapfa-cakre ?adara dkur arpitam
11. They speak of him as the father, having five feet, and twelve forms, seated in the higher half of the heavens, full of water. And others, again, speak of him as the omniscient set on (a chariot of) seven wheels and six spokes
panca-padam- having five feet, i e five seasons Cp R.V. 1. 164 12 . .
S" says that Itemanta and sisira seasons are combined into one
pttaram- father. Time is the father of all things sarvasya jam-
yitrtvdtpitrlvam §
dvddaidkiim- twelve forms, twelve months
Time is ever on the move in the form of seven horses and six seasons
12 mdso vai prajd-paiih, iasya krsna-paksa eva rayth, iuMah prdnah, tasmdd eta rsayah hiUa tstim kurvanft itaraitarnmm
12 The month, verily, is the lord of creation Of this the dJkhaS is matter, the W Wf » M» ^mta* the seers perform sacrifices in the bright half, others in the other half
The distinction between matter and form is stressed
13. aho-rdiro vat praja-patih, tasydhar eva prano rdtrir eva rayih; prdnaih vd etc praskandanti ye diva ratyd samyujyam te brahmacaryam eva tody ad rdtrau ratyd samyujyante.
13 Day and night are, verily, the lord of creation Of this, day indeed is life and the night verily is matter They who join in sexual intercourse by day spill their life, that they join m sexual intercourse by night is chastity indeed.
It is clear from this verse that brahmacarya or chastity is not sexual abstinence but sex control. With all their exaltation of celibacy the Upamsads recognise the value of married life.
14 annam vai prajapatil}, tato ha vaitad retah, tasmdd tmdh jirajal} prajdyante
14 Food, indeed, is the lord of creation; from this, venly, is semen. From this creatures here are born
tesdm evaisa brahma loko yesdm tapo brahmacaryam yesn satyam praUsthitam, 15. Thus, those who practise this rule of the lord of creation, produce couples To them alone is this brahma world, m whom austerity, chastity and truth are established
The seers of the Upamsads were not blind to the natural innocence and beauty of sex life and parental love
16 tesdm asau mrajo brahma-loko na yesujihtiiam, anrtam, na mdya cefo.
, 16 To them is that stainless brahma world, in whom there is no crookedness, falsehood or trickery
mayo- trickery, the art of saying one thing and doing another. maya mma bahtr anyathatmanam prakdiya'nyathatva kdryam karoti ^mayamithydcara-rupd S
This use of the word mdya has led to the view that the world is deceptive m character.
Question 2
kai a{ha J hamam Mdrgavo vaidarblnh papraccha, bhagavan, h2f° a cv5h P ra tf™ vtdhdrayante, katara etat prakasayante, K ah punaresamvari$taih.
656 The Principal Upanisads II 5
1. Then Bhargava of the Vidarbha country asked him (Fippalada) Venerable sir, how many powers support the created world? How many illumine this? And who, again among them is the greatest? '
2. tasmai sa hovaca, dkaio ha va esa devo vayur agnir apali prthivi van manas" caksuh srotram ca, te prakadyabhivadanh, vayam etad banam avaslabhya vtdhdraymnah
2 To him, he said 'ether venly is such a power— wind, fire, water, earth, speech, mind, eye and ear too They, having illumined it, declare, "we sustain and support this body " '
bana body iarlra, karya-kSrana-samghata S
3 tan vansihah pram uvaca, ma moham dpadyatha, aham evatiat pa^cadhMmdnam pravibhajyaitad banam avastdbhya vidharaydmt th
3 Life, the greatest of them, said to them* 'Do not cherish this delusion, I, alone, dividing myself fivefold, sustain and support this body '
■panca&ha fivefold, the five forms of breath
4 te'iraddadhdnd bdbhuvuh, so'bhimandd urdhvam ttlkra- tnata tva, tasmtnn utkrdmaty yathetare sarva evotkramante, tasmimi ca prattsthamane sarva eva prdttsthante, tad yatha maksika madhu-kara-rajdnam ufkramanlam sarva evotkramante tasmtihS ca prattsthamane sarva eva prahsthante, evam van manas caksuh Srotram ca, te prttdh prdnath stunvanti
4 They believed him not Through pnde, he seemed to go upward (from the body) When he went up, all the others also went up When he settled down, all others too settled down This, as all the bees go up when the long bee goes up and as they settle down when the long bee settles down, even so, speech, mind, sight and hearing They, being satisfied, praise hie
5 eso'gms tapaty esa siirya esaparjanyo maghavan esa vaytth esa prthvdt rayir devah sad-asac camrtam ca yat
5. As fire, he burns, he is the sun He is the bountiful rain- god; He is the wind. He is the earth, matter, god He is being and non-being and what is immortal
sad-asat the formed and the unformed, sat mitrtam, asat amUrtam £
II ii Praina Upanisad 657
6 ara voa ratha-ndbJiau prdne saroam pratisthitam, rco yajumsi samara yajnah ksatram brahma ca
6 As spokes in the centre of a wheel, everything is estab- lished in life; the Rg (verses), the Yajus (formulas) and the samans (chants) as also sacrifice, valour and wisdom.
7 fraja-patis carast garblie tvam eva pratijdyase,
tubhyam prana prajdstv imd bahm haranti yaJi prdnaih pratitisthasi.
7 As the lord of creatures, thou movest in the womb, it is then thyself that art born again. O life, creatures — here bring offering to thee who dwellest with the vital breaths.
Pmja-pah moves in the form of the seed in the father and the son m the mother pimr garbhe relo-rupena matur garbhe pulra-riipena. A. This verse reveals the state of scientific knowledge in those days
8 devdndm asi vdhnitamah pitrndm prathama svadha, rsindm cantam satyam atharvdngirasam asi.
8 Thou art the chief bearer (of offerings) to the gods; thou art the first offering to the fathers, thou art the true practice of the seers, descendants of Atharvan and Angiras.
9 vndras tvam prana, tejasd, rudro'si pariraksttd, tvam antankse carast sftryas tvam jyotisdm patxh.
9- Indra art thou, 0 Life, by thy valour; Rudra art thou as a protector. Thou movest in the atmosphere as the sun, the lord of the lights
10 yadd tvam abhivarsasy athemdh pranate prajdh, dnandarupds tisthanh kdmdydnnam bhavisyatUt
10 When thou pourest down rain, then these creatures breathe (and) live in a state of bliss (thinking) that there will be food according to their desire
tJm a** ^ ever pure ' 0 Life ' lhe one seer ' ti" 5 eater > the real lord of all. We are the givers of what is to be eaten 0,
aU-pervadmg Air, thou art our father.
rralya ever pure 'Being the first born and so having no one else to nature y ° U ' uninitiated The meaning is that you are by
asamrL PUr ? S P^amajalvad anyasya samskartuh abhavad ZlxZ Vratyas ivam > swMSvata eoa suddha ity abhiprayah Later ore^w 16 t0 mean one who lost caste non-observance of f «=*noea ceremonies or otherwise samskara-hinah. See A and R.
6 5 8 The Principal Upamsads jjj 2
aZ^SS&T* &vea t0 Agm by the foUowers of *■
12 pat form of thine which is well-established m the speech or in the ear and in the eye, which exists continuously in the mind, make that auspicious, do not get away
Swam auspicious or restful sdntam S" sobhanam R
13 pranasyedam vote sarvam tn-dwe yat prattsthitam mdtevaptitrdnraksasva, snscaprapldm ca tndhehi nah ih
13 All this is under the control of life, which is well estab- lished in the three worlds Protect us as a mother her sons Grant to us prosperity and wisdom
For a controversy between prima or life principle and the organs of sense, see CU V 1 6-15
as a mother to her sons In the Devi BMgavata, the devotee prays '0 noble Goddess, may this relationship of mother and son prevail unbroken between thee and me, now and for ever more 1
esa vayor avirata ktla devi bhUydt
vydptth sadaiva janani sutayor tvarye.
Question 3
1 atha hatnam kausalyas" cdivaldyanah papraccha, bhagavan, kuta esa prdno jdyate, katham dydty asmim cliarfre, atmanam va pravibhajya katham pratisthate, kenotkrdmate, katham bdliyam abhidhaite, katham adhydtmam itt
1 Then Kausalya, the son of AsVala, asked him (Pippalada) . Venerable Sir, whence is this life born ? How does it come into this body? And how does it distribute itself and establish itself' In what way does it depart? How does it support what is external? How (does it support) what relates to the self?
2 tasmai sa hovdca, atipra&nanprcchast, brahmistho'sitt tasniat te'ham bravimt
2 To him, he then said You are asking questions which are (highly) transcendental Because (I think) you are most devoted to Brahman, I will tell you
ahpraman questions of a transcendental character such as the ongin of the world, janmadttvam S Subtle questions, sUksma-pra&nam A.
3 atmaiidesaprdnojdyate,yathaisdpimise cMyattastmnn etad dtatam, manokrtemydty asmtn satire.
3 Tins life is born of the self As iu the case of a person there is this shadow, so is this (life) connected (with the self). It comes into this body by the activity of the rrund
A person's life in this body is the appropriate result of his activities in the previous existence As the shadow of former lives a new life arises
4 yatha samrddevddhikrtdn vimyunkte, etdn grdmdn elan grdtndn aihtisthasveti, evam evaisa prdtiali liardn prandn prthak prihag eva sannidhatte
4 As a sovereign commands his officers, saying, 'you super- intend such and such villages,' even so does this life allot the other vital breaths to their respective places
5. payupasthe'pdnam, caksuh srotre mukha-ndsikdbhydm pranah svayam prahsthate, madhye iu samdnah esa hy etadd hntam annath samam nayati, tasmad etdh saptdrciso bhavanti
5 The out-breath is in the organs of excretion and generation, the life breath as such is in the eye and ear as also m the mouth and nose In the middle is the equalising breath It is this that equalises whatever is offered as food From this arise the seven names
6 krdy hy esa atmd, atraitad ekasatam nadinam, tdsdm satam satam ekatkasydm dvasapiatir dvdsaptahh pratiidkhd nddi-sahas- rani bhavanh, dsu vydnas corah
6 In the heart is this self. Here are these hundred and one arteries To each one of these belong a hundred smaller arteries to each of these belong seventy-two thousand branching arteries Within them moves the diffused breath
SeeCU VIII 6-6, BU II x-19 and A ^ W ' Ucil 1S m the heart * s the fi vStman or the hngdtman 6
V ^ V> mm S upward through one of these the up-breath «aas, m consequence of good (work) to the good world, in consequence of evil to the evil world, m consequence of both to the world of men.
66o
The Principal Upankads
pranrnn atwgrhnanah, prthivyamya devata saisapurusasydpanam avasfabJiydntard yad ak&Sas sa samano, vayur vydnah
8 The sun, verily, nses as the external life for it is that which helps the life breath m the eye. The divinity which is m the earth supports a person's outbreath What is between (the sun and the earth) is the equalising breath Air is the diffused breath.
9. Fire, venly, is the upbreath Therefore, he whose fire (of life) has ceased, goes to rebirth, with his senses sunk in mind
30 yat atlas tenaisa pranam dydti, prdnas lejasa yuktah sahdtmana yathd smnkalpitam lokam nayatt
10. Whatever is one's thinking, therewith one enters into life. His life combined with fire along with the self leads to whatever world has been fashioned (in thought)
11. The wise one who knows life thus, to him there shall be no lack of offspring He becomes immortal As to this, there is this verse
12. iitpathm ayatim sthanam vibhutvam catva pancadha, adhyalmam caiva prSnasya viplayamrtam a&nute, vtjfta- ydmrtam ainuta ttt
12. The birth, the entrance, the abode, the fivefold over- lordship and the relation to self of the life, knowing these one obtains immortality, knowing these one obtains immortality
Anyone who knows the birth of life, its entrance into the body, how it abides there in its fivefold division and knows its relation to the inner spirit enjoys eternal life
Question 4
1 atha hainath sawyayani gdrgyah papraccha, W«g™ a "> etasmm purw kdm svapanh, kany asmm jagratt, Mora e$a
IV 4. Prasna Upamsad 661
devah svapndn paiyati, kasymtat sukham bliavah, kastmn nu same sampratisthitd bhavanh iti
1. Then Gargya, the grandson of Surya, asked him (Pippa- lada) Venerable Sir, what are they that sleep in this person? What are they that keep awake m him' What is the god that sees the dreams? Whose is this happiness? In whom, pray, are all these established?
2 tasmat sa hovaca yatkd, gargya, mancayor arkasyastam gacchatah sarvd etasmtms tejo-mtmdala eki-bkavanh, tdhpunah punar udayatah pracaranii, evam ha vai tat sarvam pare deve manasy eki-bhavah, tena tarhy esa puruso na imoh, na paiyati, najtgkratt, na rasayaie, na sprsate, ndblnvadate, nadatte, ndnan- dayaie, na visrjate, neydyaie, svapiffiy acaksate
2. To him, then, he said- 0 Gargya, as all the rays of the setting sun become one m this circle of light and as they spread forth when he nses again and again, even so does all this become one m the supreme god, the mind Therefore, m that state, the person hears not, sees not, smells not, tastes not, touches not, speaks not, takes not, rejoices not, emits not, moves not. (Then) they say, he sleeps
3 prandgnaya evaitasmin pure jdgrah, gdrhapatyo ita vd Wpdnah, vydno'nvdlidrya-pacanah, yad gdrhapatydt prantyate franayanad dhavaniyak prdnah
3 The fires of Me alone remain awake m this city The householder's fire is the out-breath The (southern) sacrificial tire is the diffused breath The m-breath is the oblation fire, from being taken, since it is taken from the householder's fire
c, L ^r S 5: onceive<i ^ a sacrifice and these three life breaths are symbolically identified with the fires used m the Vedic sacrifice.
at home householder ' s &e 11 fe the sacred nome *re kept burning
1^Af rya f acam: so^em sacrificial fire It is the fire of the south used for offerings to the ancestors
4 yad iicchvasa-nihsvasdv etdv dhuli samam nayattti samdnah mono ha va vayajamdnah, tsta-phalam evoddnah, sa evam yaiamd- »«« ahar ahar brahma gamayah
ful' ^\ e< l ualisi ng breath ls so called because it equalises the mL • a™}' the m ' bre athmg and the out-breathuig The SS^w?', lS ^l sacnficer The frurt of sacrifice is the U P orcatn. It leads the sacnficer every day to Brahman
Tie Principal Upawsads
See C U. VI. 8 i. In deep sleep the soul is said to be at one with Brahn,an, only we do not know it See also C U. VIII. 3 2
5. atraisa desalt svapne mahim&nam awibkavaii, yad drsian. drstam ariUpasyati, srutam srufam evartham auasrnoti, dcsa-digar- iarais ca prafy anubhiifam pur.ah punal praiy ar.ubfaviii, drs'atr. cddrstam ca srutam casrt'iam cdnubhtdati. caTtanubhiitatn ca sac casac ca sanani pasyali sarvah pasyati.
5 There, in sleep, that god (mind), experiences greatness He sees again whatever object has been seen, he hears again whatever has been heard, he experiences again and again whatever has been experienced in different places and direc- tions What has been seen and not been seen, what has been heard and what has not been heard, what has been experienced and what has not been experienced, what is existent and what is non-existent, he sees all, being all he sees (all).
Usually in dreams, ne have reproductions of waking experiences but sometimes we have also new constructions See BU. IV. 3 9-18, where the creative side of dream consciousness is mentioned
6 sa yada fejasdbhibhfdo bhaiaii, atraisa dcvah svapr.an r.a pasyati, atha tad ctasmin sanre etat stikham bkavaii
6. When he is overcome with light, then in this state, the god (mind) sees no dreams Then here in this body arises this happiness
The state of dreamless sleep is described here
7 Even as birds, 0 dear, resort to a tree for a resting-place so does everything here resort to the Supreme Self They all find their rest in the Supreme Self
8 prthvi ca prthvt-matra ca, dpas eSpthmafS ca, isjas ca Uio-maira ca, vavus ca vayu-mdtrd ca, aMsas eSHsa-nsa^ra ca caksus ca drastavyam ca, sro'ram ca srolatyam ca gLriiiaiyam ca, rasas ca rasayitaxyam caivak ca sP«rsayiipan. £ [J. ca vaHavyav; ca, hastau cadalatyam ca, upas has %wday t tavya* la. PQrs ca ^^^g^ garAavyan: ca, mar.ai ca mar.tavyam ca, buddh-.s ca boi.ha^rr.
j V IIt Prasna Upanisad 663
ca aham-Mras caham-harlavyam ca, cittam ca cetayitavyam ca, u]as ca vidyotayitavyam ca, payed ca vidharayitaoyam ca
8 Earth and the elements of earth, water and the elements of water fire and the elements of fire, air and the elements of air ether and the elements of ether, sight and what can be seen hearing and what can be heard, smell and what can be smeM, taste and what can be tasted, the skin and what can be touched, speech and what can be spoken, hands and what can be handled, the organ of generation and what can be enjoyed, the organ of excretion and what can be excreted, the feet and what can be walked, the mind and what can be perceived, the intellect and what can be conceived, the self- sense and what can be connected with the self, thought and what can be thought, radiance and what can be illumined, hfe-breath and what can be supported by it.
We have here an enumeration of the Samkhya principles of the five cosmic elements, the ten organs of perception and action, mind, intellect, self-sense and thought together with light and life.
9. esa hi drasta, sprasta, srota, ghratd, rasayita, mania, boddhd, karta, vyfmndtmti, purusak, sapare'ksara atmam sampratislhafe.
9 He, verily, is the seer, the toucher, the hearer, the smeller, the taster, the perceiver, the knower, the doer, the thinking self, the person He becomes established in the Supreme Uundecaying Self
The subject self is established in the Spirit which transcends all duality, even the distinction of subject and object
10 param evahsaram pratipadyate sa yo ha vai tad acchayam, asartram, alohitam, iublvram, aksaram vedayate;yas In, saumya, sa sanajnah sar-io bhavah tad esa slokalr
10 He who knows the shadowless, bodiless, colourless, pure, undecaying self attains venly, the Supreme, Undecaying (self). He who, 0 dear, knows thus becomes omniscient, (becomes) all. As to this, there is this verse
n mjmnfiima saha devais ca saroaih praqa bhutani sam- pratisthanlt yatra, (ad ak$aram vedayate yas in, saumya, sa sarvajfiah sarvam evavivesa Hi
664 The Pnnctpd Upani$ads V 4
breaths and the elements along with all the gods (powere) becomes, 0 dear, omniscient and enters all.
Question 5
1. atha hamam iaibyas satya-kamah papraccha, sa yo ha vat tad, bh-agavan, tnanusyesu prayanantam aumkaram abhdhyayUa, katamam va va sa tern lokam jayatiti.
1 Then Satya-kama, son of Sibi, asked him (Pippalada) Venerable Sir, what world does he, who among men, meditates on (the syllable) Aim until the end of his life, win by that'
S explains abhidhy&na to be intense contemplative activity free from all distractions bahya-visayebhyaiipasamh?ta-karattahsamahtta- citio bhakiyavesita-brahmabhav& atmkare dtma-pratyaya-santdna-vic- ch^ihimajMyapratyayantaraklnlil^mrv&asiha^ipa-hkha-sanio' bhdhyana-iabdarthah
2 tasmai sa hovaca, etad vai, satya-kama, param caparam ca brahtna yad aitmkarah, tasmai vidvan efetiaivayatatienatkataram anveti.
2. To him, he said- That which is the sound Aum, 0 Satya-kama, is verdy the higher and the lower BraJiman Therefore, with this support alone does the wise man reach the one or the other
The verse distinguishes between the Unqualified Absolute Brahman and the qualified Personal Isvara
3 sa yady eka-wMram abhidhyayita, sa tenatva samveditas tiirnam eva jagatyam abhisampadyate, tarn no manusya-hkam upanayante, sa tatra tapasa brahmacaryena sraddhaya sampanno malamanam anubhavati
3 If he meditates on one element (a), he, enlightened even by that, comes quickly to the earth (after death). The Rcas (verses) lead him into the world of men There, endowed with austerity, chastity and faith, he experiences greatness
4 atha yadt dvi-matrena manasi sampadyate, so'ntanksam yajurbhir unntyaU soma-lokam, sa soma-loke vtbhuttm anubhttya
^^Then^S' he meditates on this) as of two elements {») he attains'the mind. He is led by the yajus (formulas) to the intermediate space, the world of the moon, having experienced greatness there, he returns hither again
5 yah punar dam tri-matrena aunt ity etenaivaksarena param pvrusam abhdhyayUa, sa iejasi surye sampannah; yatha pado- daras tvaca vintrmucyata evam ha vai sa papmana vinirmuktah sa sdtnabhir unnlyate brahna-lokam, sa etasmaj jivaghanfit paral-param puniayampurusam iksate: tad etauMokau bhavatah.
5 But if he meditates on the highest person with the three elements of the syllable Aunt («, «, m), he becomes one with the light, the sun. Even as a snake is freed from its skin, even so is he freed from sins He is led by soma (chants) to the world of Brahma He sees the person that dwells in the body, who is higher than the highest life. As to this there are these (two verses)
£ says The world of Brahma is the world of Hiranya-garbha who is the lord of the satya-bka Hiranya-garbha is the self of all the jlvas travelling in samsara, for he is the internal self of all living beings m the subtle form and in him, the subtle self are all the jivas strung together So he is 'pw-ghana ' sa hiranya-garbhah sarvesam sam- sarindm, pvanam atma-bhutah; sa hy antar-atma Iwga-rUpena sarva- Ihmnam, tasmm hi hngatmam samhatah sane flvah, tasmat sa Jiva-ghanah
The knower of the three elements a, «, m, sees the Supreme beyond the Hiranya-garbha. He obtains liberation and is not forced to return to mundane life He sees the Supreme l&vara who is beyond the world-soul and that vision qualifies him for liberation, pva-ghanat param purusam pasyati, tato mukio bhavatt. A.
knyasu b&hyabhyantara-madhyamasu samyak-prayuktasttna kampate jfiah.
6. The three elements (each) leading to death (by itself), if "iey are united to each other without being separated and employed in actions well performed, external, internal or intermediate, the knower does not waver.
Pmw a m ^ medltates on the three elements, separately, it is an rj™?' of mortality, if he meditates on them as interconnected, he gets peyond mortality. jagrat-svapna-susupta-pHrusah saha sthanair nmm-traya-rupena aumkaratma-riipena drslaJi sa hy evam vtdvan s«reatma-mta amnhara-mayali kuto va calet kasmm va S\ inf « I?; 6 j C0nnectl0n ot ti" 5 elements, a, «, m, indicates the See MU ^ ^ three Worlds of wakm S> to** 1 * rad sle ep- He becomes one with the personal Supreme I&vara, obtains
666 The Principal Upanisads VI. 2
sarvatmalva, becomes one with the whole universe and is not disturbed as there is nothing independent of him, sva-vyalmklabhavai A
tarn aumkarenaivayatanenanveti vidvan yat tac -chantam, ajaram, amrtam, abhayam, param ca 71 With the rg (verses) (one attains) this world, with the yajus (formulas) (one attains) the interspace and with the soman (chants) (one attains) to that which the seers recognise That, the wise one attains, even by the mere sound Aim as support, that which is tranquil, unaging, immortal, fearless and supreme
kavayah sitrayah sages _
The Supreme status is beyond the three worlds The tunya state, though it underlies the other three states also transcends them.
Question 6
1 atha hatnam suheia bUradmjah papraccha, bhagavan, hrawa-nabhah kausaiyo raja-pwtro mam upetyaitaih praSnam abrcohata; soiaia kalam, bhdradvaja, purusam vettha, tarn aham kumdram abruvam, naham imam veda, yady aham imam avedisam katham te navaksyam iti, sa-mulo vcie?a panfujyto vo'nrtam abhtvadati, tasman ndrUmy anrtam vaktum. sa tupnm ratham druhya pravavr&ja, tarn tva prccMmi tew^w^j
r Then, Sukesa, son of Bharadvaja, asked him Venerable Sir Hiranya-nabha, a pnnce of the Kosala kingdom approached me and alked this question, 'Bharadvaja do you know the person with sixteen parts?' I replied to that pnnce, I know
it Venlv to his roots, he withers, who speaks untruth There- orZSnot proper for me to speak untruth mooted las chariot and departed, I ask you about him, where is that person 7 He who speaks an untruth withers to his roots
2 tasmaisa hovaca, thaivantah-Sanre, saumya, sapurufoyas-
mmn etah soMa kalah prabhavanh Ui
2 To him he said. Even here, within the body, O dear, is that person in whom these sixteen parts arise.
The self of the sixteen parts becomes in the SSthkhya system the hrga-sarira or the subtle body (see below verse 4), with some modifications.
3 sa iksdmcakre, kasminn ahaiK tdkrdnia tifkrdK'o bhai csydmi, kasmin vd prafisfhite pralisikdsydms Hi.
3. He (the person) thought (in himself) : In whose departure shall I be departing? And in whose settling down shall I be settling down?
4. sa prdnam asrjala, prdr.dc chraddkatk kharh vdyur jyo'Ar apah prthmndriyatrc, mano'nnam, ar.ndd iTryam. tapo vzarArah forma iokdh, lokesu ca nama ca.
4 He created life; from life, faith, ether, air, light, water, earth, sense organ, mind and food; from food, vital vigonr, austerity, hymns, works, worlds and in the worlds name."
~ mesas by prana, Eirar.ya-ga.Tbha or the worid-soaL hsrar.ya- gsrbhlkhyam san<a-prdni~karanaa%dram, ar.tar-5itrar.atr.. SraddM or faith, comes next and then the material elements. A irra suggests individuation. The souls exist in the world-son!,, ra their subtle condition, and then they acquire embodiment or gross condition
5 sayathema nadyak syar.damar.dh samudrdyandh samicdram pdpydstatk gacckardi bhUydt idsdtt: r.anuz-rupc samuxra iiy can. procyate, aam euasya paridragur in.dk sodaia Peddh puns- sZywdhpttrzcsampTdpyastaykgacckantibkidyte
fmcsa iiy nam procyate, sa e$o'kalo'mrfo hhavaii, tadesz sin^ah: 5 As these flowing rivers tending towards the ocean, on reaching the ocean, disappear, their name-shape broken up, sn<t are called simply the ocean, even so of this seer, these sixteen parts tending towards the person, on reaching the person, disappear, their name-shape broken up, and are called amply the person. That one is without parts, immortal. As to ""•at there is this verse:
S« M U. H\ 2 . S; CU.Vm.ro s-rft, n ? nes of ^ T * ye:s Iost k ^ Ka ' so are orr names *~a siapes lost when we reach the Divine. 'To Tao all misr heaven Tea Tri ^ torrents Sow into a great river or sea.'
^a' (oh ^' ^^9V*J- R'Snfi, 'that yonr drop may become the izj, and 'None has knowledge of each who enters that
The Principal Upanisads VI 8
he is so and so' {Ode 15 Nicholson SJuuns-t-Tabnz) Eckhart says 'When I go back into the ground, into the depths, into the well-spring of the Godhead, no one will ask me whence I came or whither I went.' Cp Christina Rosettr
'Lord, we are rivers running to Thy sea, Our waves and ripples all derived from Thee, A nothing we should have, a nothing be Except for Thee '
tam vedyam puru§am vedayatha ma vo mrtyuh panvyathah
6. In whom the parts are well established as spokes in the centre of the wheel, know him as the person to be known, so that death may not afflict you
7 To them, then, he (Pippalada) said, 'only thus far do I know of that Supreme Brahman There is naught higher than that'
8 te tam arcayantali, tvam hi nah pita yo'stnakam avidyayah param param tarayasi, iti; namah parama-rplhyo namah paratm-rsibhyah
Salutation to the supreme seers. Salutation to the supreme seers.
nah ftta our father The teacher who helps us to know the truth is the spiritual father as distinct from the physical father, Sanra-mtram janayati S
The Mundaka Upanisad belongs to the Atkaroa Veda and has three chapters, each of which has two sections The name is denved from the root mund, 'to shave," as he that comprehends the teaching of the Upanisad is shaved or liberated from error and ignorance The Upanisad states clearly the distinction between the higher knowledge of the Supreme Brahman and the lower knowledge of the empirical world. It is by this higher wisdom and not by sacrifices or worship that one can reach Brahman. Only the samnyasin who has given up everything can obtain the highest knowledge.
I I 3 Mundaka Upanisad 671
MUNDAKA 1 Section 1
THE TRADITION OF BRAHMA-KNOWLEDGE
1 brahma devdndm pratkamah sambabhtlva vthasya karta bhuvanasya gopta sabrdhma-mdydm sarva-vidyd-prahslhdm atharsayajyestha- ptitraya prdha.
1 Brahma arose as the first among the gods, the maker of the universe, the protector of the world He taught the know- ledge of Brahman, the foundation of all knowledges, to Atharvan, his eldest son.
Brahma, the creator of the world and its governor arose, by the exercise of his own choice His rise is unhke the birth of individuals which is determined by their past deeds S\ svalantryeqa no, dharma- dharma-vasat Brahma here is Htranya-garbha, the world-soul brahma-knowledge A life without philosophy is not livable for man, }" ft e view of Socrates See Plato's Apology Aristotle observes: All the other sciences which are not philosophy are more necessary, but none is more important than philosophy '
sa bhdradvdjdya satyavdkdya prdha bharadvdjo'ngirase pardvardm
a+! That knowled S e °f Brahman, which Brahma taught to Atharvan, and Atharvan m olden tunes told Angiras He (m his turn) taught it to Satyavaha, son of Bharadvaja and the son J^gdvaja to Angiras— both the higher and the lower
MSvarSm both the higher and the lower (knowledge) or 'know- S , « e , d fmm the g*^ 61 " t0 the fesser What permeates the a-™ °1 ^ knowled ee. great and small.' S~ parasmdt parasmdd ISmparavarSm $ ar5va ™' P ardvar(l sarva-vtdyd-visaya-vyapter vd
B l i,«- s fPj"?-™*y* concerned with things perishable and vtdya k W T d ^ hng with Imperishable Bemg Higher knowledge eoS Wlth the understanding of the nature of the supreme ifa^r cyasa ' 3X1(1 tte lower knowledge deals with the disciplines raating to instrumental values
3 sattnako ha vai mahasdlo'ngirasam vtdhivad upasannah
$7% The Principal Upamsads I 1 6
papraccka, kasmtn nu bhagavo vtjndte sarvam tdam vimaiam bhavah ttt
3 Saunaka, the great householder, duly approached Angiras and asked, through what being known, Venerable Sir, does all this become known?
'Is there one cause of all the varieties in the world, which cause bein gknown, all will be well known?' hm nv ash sarvasya jagad- bhedasyatka-karanamyad ekasmm vipiate sarvamvipiatam bhavaU? S
4 tasmat sa hovacw dve vidye vediiavye ih ha sma yad brahmavtdo vadanti, para catvapard ca.
4 To him he said, two kinds of knowledge are to be known, as, indeed, the knowers of Brahman declare— the higher as well as the lower
apara lower knowledge It is also a kind of knowledge, not bhrama or mithya plana, error or falsehood It also aims at knowledge of the highest reality even though in a partial or imperfect manner.
5 tatrdpard rg-vedo yajur-vedah sdma-vedo'tharva-vedah stksd kalpo vyakaranam ntruktam chando jyohsam — ttt athaparayaya tad aksaram adhgamyate
5 Of these, the lower is the Rg Veda, the Yajttr Veda, the Sama Veda, the Atharva Veda Phonetics, Ritual, Grammar, Etymology, Metrics and Astrology And the higher is that by which the Undecaying is apprehended
Cp Stvasvarodaya The Veda is not to be called Veda for there is no veda in Veda That is truly the Veda by which the Supreme is known
na vcdam veda tty filiur vede vedo na vidyate ■pardtma vedyateyena sa vedo veda ucyate
6 yat tad adreiyam, agrdhyam, agotram, avartiam, acakstth-
sroiram tad apdm-pddam, nttyam vibkum sarva-gatam susuksmam tad avyayam yad bhiita-yomm panpaiyanit dhtrdh 6. That which is ungraspable, without family, without caste, without sight or hearing, without hands or feet, eternal, all-
I i 8 Mundaka Upanisad 673
pervading, omnipresent, exceedingly subtle, that is the Un- decaymg which the wise perceive as the source of beings
adresyam unperceivable adresyam adjiyam sarvesam bttddlnn- dnyanam agamyam £
vwhum all-pervading vwtdham brahniadi-sthavaranta-prani-bhedair bhavalttt wbhwn S
The indescribable Absolute Brahman is also the source of beings, blifila-yont For Samkara, bhfita-yom is ISvara, for Madhva it is Visnu
The use of the word yoni suggests that Brahman is the material cause of the world, according to R yom-sabdasyopadana-vacanatvam R mentions another verse here which is not found in some editions yasmat param naparam ash kinctd yasman namyo na yyayo'sli kascit,
vrksa tva stabdho divi ttsthaiy ekas tenedam purnam ptmtsena sarvam
7 yatkorna-nabhh srjate grhnate ca, yatha prthivyam osadhayas sambhavanh,
yatha satah purusat kesalomani tathdksarat sambhavatiha visvam
7 As a spider sends forth and draws in (its thread), as herbs grow on the earth, as the hair (grows) on the head and the body of a living person, so from the Imperishable arises here the universe
f '» ie ? k no ^Sgestion here that the world is an illusory appearance <* Brahman The illustrations are intended to convey that Brahman
f ai^v mi there 15 no second to Brahman which can be used by Brahman karanantaram anapeksya svayam eva sryate. 5.
8 tapasd ctyate brahma, iato'nnam abhijayate,
annat prano vianah salyam lokdh kartnasu camrtam f ~i ?y con templative power Brahman expands From that rood is produced From food, hie (thence) mind, (thence) the reals the five elements); (thence) the worlds, (thence the ntuals) m the rituals, immortality
Brotto c ? nt jf?P latlve P ow er is the energy by which the world is tr„hi i, sySm %i% samkalpa-rapena jnanena brahma srstym- «™w» 8 ft R Tapas is derived from two roots which make out 1 « is austerity or meditation tapa samlapa tti, tapa alocana ttt. hL,? prane xvorks Py means ^ ends and by gradual steps:
The Principal Upanisads
Brahman in relation to the cosmos is the Personal God who is self-conscious and contemplative The first product anna is for the unmanifested principle of objectivity, avyakrtam The two repre- sent the subject and the object and next arises pram, which § equates with the world-soul hranya-garbho brahmano jndna-kn- ya-sakty-adJiis(hna-]agat sadhafa7io'vidyd-kama-karma~bJiula-samu- daya-btjankuto jagad-alnta All these products are working towards immortality which is the goal of creation,
9 yah sarvajiiah sana-vid yasya pmnamayam fapah, tasmM eiad brahma ndma-rupam annum ca jdyatt
9 He who is all-knowing and all-wise, whose austerity consists of knowledge, from him are born this Brahma (Hiranya-garbha), name-shape and food
The all-knowing, all-wise is ISvara or the Absolute in relation to the world He is wisdom, His tapas is plana From him issues the world-soul, Hiranya-garbha or Brahma
anadi-nidhanam brahma sabda-riipamyad aksaram, vivartate 'rtha-bhavena prakriyd agate yatah
Vahyapadiyal I
The Brahman who is without beginning and end, who is of the form of the indestructible word is apparently transformed into objects, and this is the process through which creation takes place Sphota is the indivisible idea with its dual form of Sabda, word and artha, meaning
I tad etat satyam
manitesn karmdm kavayo ydny apasyams taw tretayam
bahudhd santatdni, ,._,„„,,, tany acaraiha myatam, satyakamd, esa vahpanthah sukrtasyn
i Thlfis that truth The works which the sages saw in the hymns are variously spread forth m the three vedas Perform rSTconstantly, ye lovers of truth This is your path to the world of good deeds
tretayam in the three Vedas or generally performed in the ireta age yuge prayasah pravritdm S.
I 2. 4 Muydaka Upantsad 675
2 yathd Iddyate hy arcts samtddhe havya-valwne,
tad djya-bMgdv antamidhuhh prahpddayec chraddhayd- hutatn
2 When the flame (which) moves after the fire has been kindled, then one should throw with faith his oblations between the two portions of melted butter
havya-valuma. fire; the bearer of the sacrifice.
3 yasydgmJiotram adarsam apaumamdsant acaturmasyam andgrayaqam attthtvarptam ca
ahtttam avaisvadevam amdhma hutam d-saptamdtfis tasya lokdn hinastt.
3 He whose agnihotra sacrifice is not followed by the sacrifice of the new moon and of the full moon, by the four months' sacrifice, by the ritual (performed m the harvest season) is without guests, without oblations, without the cere- mony to all the gods or gives offerings contrary to rule, (such conduct) destroys his worlds till the seventh
The opposition of the Upamsads to the observance of rites is greatly exaggerated The performance of rites is unnecessary for those who are already liberated while it is necessary for attaining liberation When performing rites we must be fully aware of what we are doing There is a vital difference between the routine performance of rites and an understanding performance of them
In Saiapalha Brdhmana (II 2 z 8-20) it is said that the gods and the demons were both the children of Prajd-pati both devoid of spiritual wisdom and so were subject to the law of change and death Only Agni was immortal Both set up their sacrificial fires hT 6 demons performed their rites externally and the gods then set up that fire m their inward self, evam antardtman adadhata and having done so became immortal and invincible and overcame their mortal and vincible foes Again, 'by knowledge [vidyaya) they ascend to where desires have migrated {paragatdh) it is not by oitenngs [daksinabhih) nor by ignorant ardour (avtdvamsah Pf^ m , ah ) but only to knowers that that world belongs ' zatapatha Brahmmta X 5 4 16 We must set up the sacrificial nre within our self. We must feed the flame by truthful utterance, ™t we quench it by speaking falsehood The distinction between evternal conformity and inward purity is ultimately resolved when < I 1 1 oi llfe K interpreted and lived sacnficially See also Mapalha Brahmana X 4 2 31 and XIII 1 3.22
4 kdti karalt ca mano-java ca sulohitd yd ca sudhfanravantd,
sphuhngini vtiva-rupica dcvllclayamand ih sapia-jthvdh.
676 The Pnnctpal Upanisads I 2 7
4 The seven moving tongues of fire are the black, the terrific, the swift as mind, the very red, the very smoky-coloured, the spark blazing, the all-shaped goddess
all-shaped another reading viSvaruce, all-tasting
5 etesu yai curate bhrajam&nesu yatha-kalam ca hutayo hy
adaddyan
tarn nayanty etas suryasya raimayo yatra devanam patir eko'dhivasah.
5. Whosoever performs works, makes offerings when these (tongues) are shining and at the proper time, these (offerings) in the form of the rays of the sun lead him to that (world) where the one lord of the gods abides
devanam faith the one lord of the gods Indra according to § and Htranya-garbha according to R
6 ehy ehih tarn dhutayas suvarcasah suryasya raimtbhir
yajamdnam valianii prtydm vacam dbhivadaittyo'rcayantya, esa vah punyas sukrto brahma-lokah
6 The radiant offerings invite him with the words, 'come, come,' and carry the sacnficer by the rays of the sun, honouring him and saluting him with pleasing words j 'This is your holy world of Brahma won through good deeds.'
7 ptavd hy ete adrdhd yapia-rupd asiddaioMam avaram yesu
karma , etac chreyo ye'bUnandanU mudhdh jara-mrtyum te punar
evdpiyantt* , . ,
7 Unsteady, verily, are these boats of the eighteen sacnficial forms, which are said to be inferior karma The deluded who dehght in this as leading to good, fall again into old age and death.
asiadasoMam eighteen in number consisting of the sixteen fftnb, the sacnficer and his wife
avaram. inferior because it is devoid of knowledge kevafom pcma- vamtam karma 5 D . .
Ritual is by itself not enough Vasistha tells Rama — MlamyaiiUi-iapo-dana-mha-devdrcana-bhramatfi aramadhtjatopeidhksapayanltmrgatva. Deluded by sacrifice, austerity, almsgiving PUfW ■»* worship of gods men pass many years in misery, like unto beasts Again, Garuda, Purdna —
I 2 io Mundaka Upanisad 677
sva-sva-varnd£ramdcdra-niratdh sarva-manavah najdnanh param dharmam vrfhd nasyanh dambkikah All those who are intent on the performance of the duties of their own caste and stage of life do not know the supreme virtue and go to rum with their pnde
Again m Garuda Purdna, it is said Deluded by my maya, the ignorant desire (to see me) who am hidden, by adopting the vows of single meal, fasting and the like which tend to weaken the body ekabhuktopavdsddyair myamath kdya-sosanaih miidhah paroksam icchanti mama mdyd-vmiohitdh See B G. XVII 5 and 6
8 avidyaydm antare vartamandh svayam dhvrah panditam manyamanah
janghanyamdndh panyanti mudhdh, andhenaiva myamand yalhdndkdh
8 Abiding in the midst of ignorance, wise in their own esteem, thinking themselves to be learned, fools, afflicted with troubles, go about like blind men led by one who is himself blind.
SeeKathal 2 5 .MaitriVII 9
9 avidyaydm bahudhd vartamdnd vayam kridrtkd . %iy abhi-
manyanti bdldk- yat karmmo na pravedayanh ragdt tendiurdh ksmalokas cyavante.
9 The immature, living manifoldly in ignorance, think 'we have accomplished our aim ' Since those who perform rituals do not understand (the truth) because of attachment, therefore they smk down, wretched, when their worlds (1 e the fruits of their merits) are exhausted
to immature, ignorant ajnanmah &
10 tsidpurtam manyamdnd vanstham ndnyac chreyo vedayante
pramudhdh
t nakasya prsihe it sukrte'nubhuivemam lokam hinataram vd visanh.
10 These deluded men, regarding sacrifices and works of w. en ilf most lm P ortant . do not know any other good Having enjoyed m the high place of heaven won by good deeds, they enter again this world or a still lower one
nla-piirlam seePrasnal gn
"58? nu™?, ° r ^* place where sorrow 15 ™known. kam tM'ioA A bIm «My akam duhkham tan nnvidyate yasminn asau
678 The Principal Upamsads I 2 12
11. tapah sraddhe ye hy upavasanty aranye satita vtdvdmso bhaiksacaryam caranlah, siirya-dvarena te virajah praydnh yalramrtah sa puruso hy avyayatma
11 But those who practise austerity and faith in the forest, the tranquil knowers who live the life of a mendicant, depart freed from sin, through the door of the sun to where dwells the immortal, imperishable person
aranye in the forest, spiritual life in India has solitary meditation as one of its essential stages It has been the cherished ambition and pursuit of the lonely ascetic It is assumed that those who are dis- tracted by the cares and encumbered by the possessions of the world find it hard to secure their spiritual ends Those emamcipated from these are free to devote themselves to the highest aim When once the end is reached, the Indian samnyasm travels at pleasure and has no fixed residence or occupation The first Christians were homeless wanderers The mendicant rather than the resident community of monks has been the Indian ideal Monasteries are more temporary rest-houses or centres of learning than permanent
habitations , , (
The Hindu system of asramas according to which every one oi the twice-born towards the close of his life must renounce the wortd and adopt the homeless life and the ascetic's garb has had great uXenceon the Indian mind Though m internum, certain . cto were not eligible to become monks, in practice monks were recruited
BRAHMA-KNOWIEP^TOK SOUGHT PROM A
iroinyam brahma-mslham.
Munddka Upanisad
12 Having scrutinised the worlds won by works, let a Brahmana arrive at non-attachment. The (world) that is not made is not (won) by what is done For the sake of this know- ledge, let him only approach, with sacrificial fuel in hand, a teacher who is learned m the scriptures and established in Brahman.
Karma is a means to what is transitory and not eternal karma amtyasyaiva sadhanam S
botnyam- a teacher who is learned in the scriptures fruta vedantam He should also be a man of realisation
brahma-nisthatn established m Brahman brahma-saksatkaravantam R.
13 tasmai sa vtdvdn upasanndya samyak prasanta-attaya
samdnvitdya
yenaksaram purusam veda satyam provaca tam iattvato brahma-vzdydm
13 Unto him who has approached in due form, whose mind is tranquil and who has attained peace, let the knowing (teacher) teach in its very truth that knowledge about Brahman by which one knows the Imperishable person, the true.
Cp the Buddha. 'The Brahmana whose self has been cleansed of sins, who is free from conceit, whose nature is not stained by passions, who is self-controlled, who has studied the Vedanta and lived a chaste life is indeed the man who can expound the doctrine of Brahman.'
yo brdhmano bahita-papa-dltammo mhtchunko nikkasava ya-tatio vedantagii vusita-brahmacanyo dhammena so brahmano brahma-
vddam vadeyya yass'ussada n'atthi kuhinci loke'ti Vdana I 4 Pali Text Society edition (1885) p 3.
MUNDAKA 2 Section 1
THE DOCTRINE OF BRAHMAN— ATMAN
yatha sudlptat pavakad visphuhngah sahasrasah prdbhavantc sarupah
tathaksaradvividhah, saumya, bhdvdhprajayanietatra catvdpi yantx.
680 The Principal Upanisads II i, 4
1. This is the truth As from a blazing fire, sparks of like form issue forth by the thousands, even so, 0 beloved, many kinds of beings issue forth from the immutable and they return thither too
See B U. II 1 20
apra.no hy amanah iiibhro ahsarat paratah parah z Divine and formless is the person He is without and within, unborn, without breath and without mind, pure and h%her than the highest immutable.,
aksara, the immutable: the unmamfested, prakrli the self is beyond this
3 From him are born life, mind, all the sense-organs (also) ether, air, light, water and earth, the supporter of all
jayate are born It is not creation but emanation that is suggested S points out that the world which issues out of hun is not real avidva-visaya-vtkara-bhiiiah, namadheyah anrldlmakah. It is as real as the person from whom it issues So even the author is said to be unreal/being the manifestation of the Supreme Brahman through
mtalyam mmpadhikam Suddham avikaipam brahtna ^"g&*J fildJm kavJyam tad eva vmya^rahhrnbtta-mpena haranam
Swnoltcreation * traced to the V^^^^SA with the principle of objectivity is a manifestation of the Absolute
Brahman
4 agmr m urdM,cak?u ? icandra.suryau,d t ^h irolre, VagnvM vdylhfL hriayam msvam, asyapadbhydmprthri hy «■
; indeed He is the self of all beings We have here a descnpt.on £^ •ft^&fte M
Mundaka Upamsad
sphere all collected together Rudolf Otto Mysticism: East and West (1932), p 60.
The sutrdtman, world-soul, is pictured as the world form or virat. panca-mahd-bhutdndm antar-atmd sthiUa-panca-bhitta-sariro hi virad ttt A.
5 tasmad agnis samidho yasya suryah somat parjanya
osadhayah prthivydm, pumdn retas sincatt yositdydm bahvih prajdh purusdt samprasutdh
5. From him (proceeds) fire whose fuel is the sun; from the moon, the ram; herbs on the earth (nourished by them) the male fire pours seed in the female, thus are creatures produced from the person.
6 tasmad rcah soma yajumst diksd yajHas" ca sarve kratavo
daksinds ca,
samvatsarai ca yajamdnas ca lokdh soma yatra pavafe yatra suryah.
6. From him are born the rc (verses) the soman (chants), the yajus (formulas), the rites of initiation, all the sacrifices, ceremonies and sacrificial gifts, the year too, and the sacnficer, and the worlds where the moon purifies and where the sun (shines).
Here is a reference to the world of the fathers and the world of the gods. See C U. V. 10.
paSavo vaydtnsi prdndpdnau vrihi-yavau tapai ca iraddhd satyatw brahma- caryam vtdhii ca.
7 From him also the gods are born in manifold ways, the celestials, men, cattle, birds, the in-breath and the out-breath, rice and barley, austerity, faith, truth, chastity and the law.
sapta-homdh
sapta ime lokd yesu caranti prated guhdsayd mkitds sapta sapta
8 From him come forth the seven life-breaths, the seven flames, their fuel, the seven oblations, these seven worlds in which move the hfe-breaths, seven and seven which dwell in the secret place (of the heart).
§ explains the seven pranas as the seven organs of sense in the
682 The Principal Upanisads II. 2 r
head, i e. two eyes, two ears, two nostnls and the mouth These are compared to the seven different sacrificial oblations The per- ceptions produced by their activities axe the flames of the sacrifice The activities of the different senses are co-ordinated by the mind which is located in the heart
9 alas samndra girayas ca sarve asmat syaniante smdhavas sarva-rupah,
aias ca sarva osadhayo rasas ca yemisa bhutais hslhatt hy antar-atma.
9 From him, all the seas and the mountains, from him flow rivers of every land, from him are all herbs and their juice too; by which, together with, the elements, the inner soul is upheld
While the inward way of contemplation takes us to the self, there is the other side of union with the world The knower penetrates the whole world and becomes the All
saumya .
10 The person himself is all this, work, austerity and Brahma beyond death He who knows that which is set in the secret place (of the heart), he, here on earth, 0 beloved, cuts asunder the knot of ignorance
He gets nd of ignorance 'The universe has no separate ejastence apart from the person' m msvam nam* fimtsai anyai hmi astt 3
MUNDAKA 2 Section 2 THE SUPREME BRAHMAN 1 amh sammhttam guhdcaram ndma mahat padmx alraM
param _ .
II 2. 5-
Mundaka Upanisad
non-being, as the supreme object to be desired, as the highest beyond the reach of man's understanding.
sammhtam. well-fixed samyak-sthttam hrck, £, sarva-prantnam hrdaye sthilam A
tad etad aksaram brahma sa pranas tad u van manah, tad etat satyam, tad amrtam, tad veddhavyam, saumya, viddhi. 2. What is luminous, what is subtler than the subtle, m which are centred all the worlds and those that dwell in them, that is the imperishable Brahman That is life, that is speech and mmd That is true, that is immortal, 0 beloved, that is to be known, know (that).
veddhavyam that is to be known or penetrated, from the root vyadh, to penetrate.
3 dhannr grhitva aupantsadam mahastram saram hy upasa- wiiiiam samdadhUa ayamya tad-bhavagatena ceiasa lahsyam tad evaksaram, saumya, viddhi.
3 Taking as the bow the great weapon of the Upamsads, one should place in it the arrow sharpened by meditation Drawing it with a mmd engaged m the contemplation of that [Brahtnan), 0 beloved, know that Imperishable Brahman as the target
samdadkita, v. satndhiyata samdhanam kuryffl S
4 pranavo dhanuh, iaro hy atma, brahma tal laksyam ttcyate, apramattena veddhavyam, iaravat tanmayo bhavet
4 The syllable aum is the bow. one's self, indeed, is the arrow Brahman is spoken of as the target of that It is to be hit without making a mistake Thus one becomes united with it as the arrow (becomes one with the target)
apratnattetia without making a mistake, or becoming indifferent to other objects and developing a one-pointed mmd, vtsayantara- vimukltem ekagra-attena R.
tanmaya united with it, becomes one with it, ekalmaiva. S
5 yasmin dyatih prthivi cantanktam otam manah saha
prdiiait ca saruaih, tarn evatkam janatha Mmanam, anya vaco vimuncatha, amrtasyaisa setuh.
684 The Principal Vpam$ads II. 2 9
5 He in whom the sky, the earth and the interspace arc woven as also the mind along with all the vital breaths, know him alone as the one self Dismiss other utterances This is the bridge to immortality 1 "° ' 1
any a vacah other utterances, relating to lower knowledge or not- self apara-mdya-rUpah § anatma-visaya-vacah R
In the beginning, the two worlds of heaven and earth were one They came into separate being by the act of creation and what separates them is the nver or sea of time and space From earth we have to find our way to heaven by crossing the nver of time See Epmomis 984 E
6 am voa ratha-nabhau samhata yalra nadyah sa e$o'ntai carak
bahidha jdyamdnah, aum tiy evam dhyayathatmanam, svastt vahparaya tantasah parastat
6 Where the arteries of the body are brought together like the spokes m the centre of a wheel, within it (this self, mojes about) becoming manifold Meditate on aum as the self May you be successful in crossing over to the farther shore of darkness
■baraya V pa.ra.ya .a tamasah darkness, the darkness of ignorance amdya-tamasali s
7 He who is all-knowing, all-wise, whose is this greatness on the earth, in the divine city of Brahma, in the ether (ot the heart) is that self-established
tatnjSa panpaiyanh dlnrdh unanda-rtpam amrlam
8 HelnSof mind and is the leader of I* «^ »£ Ji S H iaTdmfo 0 od(ie t*^«^££3X wise perceive clearly by the knowledge (of Brahman) blissful immortal which shines forth
anne m food, anna-panname Sarin R n hhidvaie hrdaya-granthtt chxdyanle sarva-samiayah,
II 2 12 Mundaka Upanisad 685
SeeKathaVI 15
When he sees the Real which comprehends himself, he asserts the non-reahty of all that is opposed to it The evil in him through his past bad acts falls away With the change in his nature all that is not his ceases to bind him
THE SELF-LUMINOUS LIGHT OF THE WORLD
10 hiranmaye pare kose virajam brahma mskcdam
iac chubhram jyohsdm jyotih tad yad dtma-vido viduh
10 In the highest golden sheath is Brahman without stain, without parts, Pure is it, the light of lights That is what the knowers of self know.
11 11a tatra suryo bhah, na candra-iarakam, nana vidyuto
bhdnti, kato'yam agmh, tarn eva bhdntam anubhSh sanam, tasya bhasa sarvam, tdam vibhati
11 The sun shines not there, nor the moon and stars, these lightnings shine not, where then could this fire be ? Every thing shines only after that shining light His shining lUumines all this world
See Katha V 15, S U. VI 14, B G. IX 15, 6. his shining illumines all this world The whole objective universe is illumined by Hun for it cannot illumine itself tasyatva bhasa sarvam anyad anatma-jatam prakasayati, na f« tasya svatahprakasana- samarthyam S
In the Udana I. 10, the Buddha describes nirvana in similar terms.
yattha apo ca pathavl tejo vayo na gadhali na taltJia sukka jotanti, adicco nappakasaii, na tatlha candi7>id bhatx, tamo tattha na vijjali.
Pali Text Society edition (1885), p. 9.
12. brahmavoedam amrtam pitrastad brahma, paicad brahma, daksinatai cotlarena adhascordhvam ca prasrlam brahmavoedam visvam idaih vanslham
12. Brahman, venly, is this immortal In front is Brahman, behind is Brahman, to the right and to the left It spreads forth below and above. Brahman, indeed, is this universe It is the greatest.
686 The Principal Upanisads III i 3.
MUNPAKA 3 Section 1
1 dva suparrn sayujd sakhaya samanam vrksam pansasvajale tayor anyahpippalam svadv atty anainann anyo'bhtcdkaSitt
1 Two birds, companions (who are) always united, cling to the self-same tree Of these two, the one eats the sweet fruit and the other looks on without eatmg
SeeRV I 164 20, SU IV 6,KathaI 3 1 sayujd always united sarvaddyuktau 5
ptppalam the sweet fruit It eats or experiences the pleasant or painful fruits of its past deeds karma-inspannam sukha-dahkha- laksanam phalam S
svadv attt eats bhaksayait upabhunkte amvekatah 5 Cp Aganiia Sutlanta where eating is said to be the cause of degradation to cruder forms of existence
anasnan without eating Isvara permits the processes of the world as the witness and thus impels their activities paSyaty eva kevalam, dariana-vtatrena hi tasya prerayitrtvam rdjavat S
2 samane vrkse puruso mmagno'nUaya iocah muhyamdnah, justam yadd pasyaiy anyam Ham asya mahmdnam th, vita-iokah
2 On the self-same tree, a person immersed (in the sorrows of the world) is deluded and grieves on account of his help- lessness When he sees the other, the Lord who is worshipped and his greatness, he becomes freed from sorrow.
See S U IV 7.
3 yadd pasyah paSyate rukma-vamam kartdram isampunisam
brahma-yomm
tadd vidvan punya-pdpe vtdhiiya mranjanah parmnam sdmyam upaiti m or* r'^ih 3 When a seer sees the creator of golden hue, the Lord, tne n ,«p Person, the source of Brahma, then Being a Knower, shatangi jp off good and evil and free from stain, he attains supreme equality with the lord ^
WE^S? ft-l^i 4*- Brahn*, the world-soul has Isvara for his home and birth-place
Ill i 5
Mundaka Upamsad
Eternal Me is said to consist m attaining an absolute likeness to God and enjoying a life of personal immortality
4. prdno hy esa yah sarva-bhutair vibhati vijanan vidvan bhavate natvoaM atma-krida atma-rahh knyavan esa brahma-vidam vansthah e -
4 Truly lt^is life that shines forth in all beings Knowing " him, the wise man does not talk of anything else Sporting
in the self, delighting in the self, performing works, such a one is the greatest of the knowers of Brahman
knyavan. performing works §, feeling the incompatibility of performing works after attaining knowledge of Brahman, suggests that it may mean only the previous performance of meditation and other acts conducive to a knowledge of Brahman The verse, however, tells us that he who knows the atman is also a performer of works The soul frees itself from all attachments, enters into the stillness of the self, becomes composed and yet breaks forth into temporal works without compulsion, without seeking for reward, without selfish purpose Its hie is a free outpouring of a liberated consciousness and it is incapable of resting even as the living God Himself does not rest Deep unmoved repose at the centre and per- petual creativity are his features
In the Tripura-rahasya the prince who has become liberated even m the present life (fivan-muhta) performs his royal duties like an actor on the stage, watewwf ranga-man&ale, without beingmotivated by any selfish passions He is not infected by what he does on the stage He remains himself untroubled by the thought 'Thus I did right' or 'thus I did wrong ' See B U IV 4 22 He will do his duty impartially, regardless of gam and loss BG tells us that our concern is with action only, not with the result 'Battles are lost in the same spirit in which they are won ' The duty of a soldier is to fight and not to hate The well-known story of Ah points out how we should not act m passion All, engaged in single combat, was on the point of victory, but when his opponent spat in his face, he withdrew because he would not fight in anger
5 salyena labhyas tapasd hy esa aima samyag-jmnena
brahmacaryena mtyam antah-s'anre jyottr-mayo hi iubhro yam pasyanti yatayah ksinadosah
5 This self within the body, of the nature of light and pure, is attainable by truth, by austerity, by right knowledge, by the constant (practice) of chastity. Him, the ascetics with their imperfections done away, behold
688 The Principal Upanisads III i i 0
tapasd: S quotes a line to the effect that tapas refers to the focusing of the mind and the senses on one object, 1 e the eternal Self manasakcndnyanam ca aikagryam paramam tapah
6 satyam eva jayate nanrtam, satyena pantM vitato deva-ydnah yemkramanty rsayo hy apta-Mma yatra tat satyasya
paramam mdhanam. 6. Truth alone conquers, not untruth By truth is laid out the path leading to the gods by which the sages who have their desires fulfilled travel to where is that supreme abode of truth
satyam eva jayate. truth alone conquers This is the motto inscribed on the seal of the Indian nation
jayale v.jayah
j. brhac ca tad divyam acmtya-riipam suksmdc ca tat siiks- ma-taram vibhati dwal sttdfire tad thanhke ca paiyatsv thaiva mhtmh guJiayam.
7 Vast, divine, of unthinkable form, subtler than the subtle It shines forth, farther than the far, yet here near at hand, set down in the secret place (of the heart) (as such) even here it is seen by the intelligent
8 tia cdksusa grhyate ndpi vdcd ndnyair devaih tapasa
karmand vd , , .
fiana-prasadena visuddha-sattvas tatas tu tarn patyW niskalam dhyayamanah
8 He is not grasped by the eye nor even by speech nor by other sense-organs, nor by austenty nor by work . but when one's (intellectual) nature is purified by the light of knowkdge then alone he, by meditation, sees Him who is wthout parts ^
9 m'nw atma cetasd veditavyo yasmm pr&nah paRcadha
prdZTtttaih sarvam otam praj&nam, yasmm vduidhe
senses in five different forms have centred The whole o 1 mens SoughUs Tpervaded by the senses When it (thought) is purified,
^fyTyamlotmmanas asamvibMUrniudiha-samalMmy-
ca Umdms tasmdd
hy arcayed bhuti-kamaft.
Ill 2. 3.
Mundaka Upanisad
10. Whatever world a man of punned nature thinks of in his mind and whatever desires he desires, all these worlds and all these desires he attains Therefore, let him who desires prospenty worship the knower of the self.
SeeB.U I 4 15
The knower of the self has all his desires fulfilled and can obtain any world he may seek
MUNDAKA 3 Section 2
DESIRE THE CAUSE OF RE-BIRTH
1 sa vedaitat paramam brahma dhama yatra viivath ntlntam bhati iubhram
updsate fturusam ye hy ahamds te iukram efad ativartanti dhirah
1 He knows that supreme abode of Brahman, wherein founded, the world shines brightly The wise men, who, free from desires, worship the Person, pass beyond the seed (of rebirth).
iukram the seed, the material cause of embodied existence, nrbljam iarlropadana-karanam. S.
parydpta-kamasya krtdtmanas tu iluriva sarve praviliyanti kamah.
2. He who entertains desires, thinking of them, is bom (again) here and there on account of his desires But of him who has his desire fully satisfied, who is a perfected soul, all his desires vanish even here (on earth).
&rutena m
yam evatsa vrnute Una labhyas tasyaisa atma vivrnute tanum svam
3. This self cannot be attained by instruction nor by intel- lectual power nor even through much hearing He is to be attained by the one whom (the self) chooses. To such a one the self reveals his own nature
SeeKathal 2 23
The Principal Upant$ads
4 nayatn dima bala-hmena labhyo na ca prmmdat tapaw vapy ahngat
etavr up&yavr yalaie yas in vidvams tasyaisa alma vdaic brahma-dhama
4. This self cannot be attained by one without strength nor through heedlessness nor through austerity without an aim. But he who strives by these means, if he is a knower, this self of his enters the abode of Brahman.
bala-hinena by one without strength, which is said to be derived from concentration on the self alma-mstha-pmta-virya-tonena S. Strength or energy is at the root of all great achievements ahngat without an aim £ equates hnga mthjanmyasa hvgam samnyasak, etair upayath balapramada-samnyasafimwih S. knga' outward badges of an ascetic, his robes, shaven head, etc
Outward signs are not enough for salvation We require inward realisation ahnga samnyasa Cp MB XII. 11898-9
kasaya-dharanam maundyam trmstabdham kamandaluh hngdny ntpalhabhutmi na otoMyeh me mattk yadt saty apt hnge'smm fiianam evatra karanam mrmoksayeha duhkkasya hngawatram mrarlhaham Cp What harm has your hair done' perform the tonsure on your srnsf What earthly good is a monk's robe to a mind besmirched'' kesah km aparadhyanh kteanam mundmam mm sakasdyasya ctUasya kasayaih km prayojanam
THE NATURE OF LIBERATION 5. samprapatmm nayo pmm-trptah Matmmo mia-rSgah
Jlat^t sarvatah prdpya dhM yukldtmdms wm They have found the self in all and therefore enter into evavthing
.ass-**-* ussafssss
Ill 2 9
Mw$daka Upanisad
through the path of renunciation, they (dwelling) in the worlds of Brahma, at the end of time, being one with the immortal, are all liberated
vedaida-mjUana- the knowledge of the Vedanta Cp TatthrTya AranyakaX 12 3, SlI VI 22
parantakale attheendof time samsaravasSnedeha-parttyaga-Mlah S paramrtah' being one with the highest immortal far am amrtam amarana-dliarmakam brahmaima-bhQtam esam te paramrtah Js
Companionship with the highest God Brahma is the end and the soul will be liberated at the tune of the great end along with Brahma Until then they can assume any form at their will (sveccha-part- kalpita).
In his commentary on this verse, 3 quotes — sakuninam ivakase jale vancarasya ca padam yatha na drsyeta tatha jnanavatatn gatth.
7 gatah kalah pancadasapraiistha devds ca sameprah-devatasu harmani vipidnamayas ca atma pare'vyaye sarva eki-bha- vantt
7 Gone are the fifteen parts to their (respective) supports (the elements) and all the gods (the sense organs) into their correspondmg deities One's deeds and the self, consisting of understanding, all become one m the Supreme Immutable Being.
ekl-bhavanh. become one Their separateness is dissolved awsesaiam gacchanti § See Prasna VI 4
8 yatha nadyas syandamanas samudre astam gacchanti
nama-rupe vihaya, tatha vidvan nama-riipfid vimuktah parai-param purusam upaiti divyam
8 Just as the flowing rivers disappear in the ocean casting off name and shape, even so the knower, freed from name and shape, attains to the divine person, higher than the high
See Prasna VI 5
parat-param higher than the high, the unmamfested The souls attain universality of spirit a-viiesatma-bhavam S Eckhart says, 'And here one cannot speak about the soul any more, for she has lost her name yonder in the oneness of divine essence There she is no more called soul, she is called immeasurable being ' R argues that they attain to equality of nature and not identity of being parama-samya-matram, sadrysam evoktam na tu tad-bhavah.
9 sa yo ha vat tat paramam brahma veda brahmaiva bhavati,
nasyabrahma-vit kule bhavati,
692 The Principal Upani$ads III z. n.
tarati iokath taraii papmanam gnha-grantfobhyo vitmtklo'- mrio bhavah
9 He, venly, who knows the Supreme BraJfinan becomes Brahman himself. In his family, no one who does not know Brahman, will be bom He crosses over sorrow. He crosses over sins Liberated from the knots of the secret place (of the heart), he becomes immortal.
kriyavantas krotnyd brahnam§thds svayatitpthvala efarsim
draddhayantaJi iesam evatiam brahma-vidydm vadela iirovralaih vidhtvad yais tu cvrnam
10. This very (doctrine) is declared in the verse. Those who perform the ntes, who are learned in scriptures, who arc well- established in Brahman, who offer of themselves oblations to the sole seer (a form of fire) with faith, to them alone one may declare this knowledge of Brahman (to them alone), by whom the rite (of carrying fire) on the head has been performed, according to rule.
namah'parama-rpbhyo namah parama-rjibhyah 11. This is the truth The seer Angiras declared it Wore Let none who has not performed the nte read thus Salutat.cn to the great seers Salutation to the great seers.
The Mandukya Upamsad belongs to the Atharva Veda and contains twelve verses It is an exposition of the principle of aum as consisting of three elements, a, u, m, which refer to the three states of waking, dream and dreamless sleep The Supreme Self is manifested m the universe in its gross, subtle and causal aspects Answering to the four states of consciousness, wake- fulness, dream, dreamless sleep, transcendental consciousness 1 there are aspects of the Godhead, the last alone being all- inclusive and ultimately real The Absolute of mystic con- sciousness is the reality of the God of religion. The Upamsad by itself, it is said, is enough to lead one to liberation. 1
Gaudapada, Sarhkara's teacher's teacher wrote his famous Kanka on the Upamsad, which is the first systematic exposition of Advaita Vedanta which has come down to us Samkara has commented on both the Upamsad and the Kanka
1 See Nfsimha-piirva-tapamya U IV r
i maiidwkyam ekam evalam mumiiksiinfim vtmuklaye MukfakS U I 27
Mdndukya Upanisad
I aum ity dad aksaram tdam sarvam, tasyopavydkhyanam, bhutam bhavad bhavisyad iti sarvam aumkara eva, yac cdnyat tnkalatitam tad apy aumkara eva
1 Aum, this syllable is all this An explanation of that (is the following) All that is the past, the present and the future, all this is only the syllable aum And whatever else there is beyond the threefold time, that too is only the syllable aum
The syllable aum, which is the symbol of Brahman, stands for the manifested world, the past, the present and the future, as well as the unmamfested Absolute
2 sarvam hy etad brahma, ayam atma brahma, so'yam atma catus-pat
2 All this is, verily, Brahman, This self is Brahman This same self has four quarters
four quarters, which are vtsva, the waking state, taijasa, the dream state, prayna, the state of dreamless sleep and turiya which is the state of spiritual consciousness 'The knowledge of the fourth is attamed by merging the (previous) three such as visva, etc , in the order of the previous one m the succeeding one ' trayanam visva- dindm ■purva-purva-prainldpanena turiyasya pratipatttk §
3 jagarita sthano bahis-prapiah saptanga ekonavimsati-mukhah sthitla-bhug vaisvdnarah prathamah pddah
3 The first quarter is Vaisvanara, whose sphere (of activity) is the waking state, who cognises external objects, who has seven limbs and nineteen mouths and who enjoys (experiences) gross (material) objects
who has seven limbs refers to the list mentioned in C U V 18 2 mnetceti mouths are the five organs of sense (hearing, touch, sight, taste and smell), the five organs of action (speech, handling, loco- motion, generation and excretion), the five vital breaths, the mind (manas), and the intellect [buddhi), the self-sense (aham-kara) and thought (citta)
Vaisvanara He is called Vaisvanara because he leads all creatures of the universe m diverse ways to the enjoyment of various objects, or because he comprises all beings § vtsvesam naranam anckadha nayandd vat§vanarah,*yad va visvas casau tiaras cell vtsvanarah, visvanara eva vatsvanarah
The waking state is the normal condition of the natural man, who without reflection accepts the universe as he finds it The same
696 The Principal Upamsads 5
physical universe bound by uniform laws presents itself to all such men
4 The second quarter is Uajasa, whose sphere (of activity) is the dream state, who cognises internal objects, who has seven limbs and nineteen mouths, and who enjoys (experiences) the subtle objects.
The tmjasa is conscious of the internal, 1 e mental states While the vrsva, which is the subject of the waking state, cognises material objects in the waking experience, the tayasa experiences mental states dependent on the predispositions left by the waking experi- ences In this state the soul fashions its own world in the imagining of the dreams 'The spirit serves as light for itself ' B TJ IV 3 0 Here also the basis of duality operates, the one that knows and the object that is known Though from the standpoint of the dream, the dream objects are experienced as external, they are said to be subtle because they are different from the objects of the waking state which
are external , , , _ „,
The Upanisad makes a clear distinction between wakmg and
dream expenences
k vatra supto na ham cam Mmam Mmayatemkam cam sm*namPa4yatt tatsusuptam, stmpta-sthdna ekUMahprajm-
whatsoever and does not see any dream whatsoever that 1 deen sleet) The third quarter is prdpia, whose sphere [oi
ipys (ipenOTes) Has, whose ta is a™?"
sciousness enjoys pew^ffl 1 " G od gl ves truth to mterxial objects Cp the |Psalm charac ter of sleep lus beloved in sleep" (CXXVII 2) 11 M L5?^ > to thlS stat e b shows that it is not the ultimate state ™e namegi^
Mdndukya Upanisad
even 'as at night, owing to the ^discrimination produced by darkness, all percepts become a mass of darkness, as it were, so also jn the state of deep sleep, all (objects) of consciousness, verily become a mass (of consciousness) ' § In deep sleep no desire, no thought is left, all impressions have become one, only knowledge and bliss remain
The apparent absence of duality has led to the view that it is the final state of union with Brahman See BU. IV 3; CU. VIII. 11 1
ceio-mukhah. because it is the doorway to the cognition of the two other states of consciousness known as dream and waking prajiiah It is called prdjna consciousness or knower as it is not aware of any variety as in the two other states ananda-mayah. full of bliss.
dnanda-bhuk- who enjoys bliss It is not bliss but the enjoyer of bhss ananda-prayah nananda eva S\
In the waking state we are bound by the fetters of sense-perception and desire, in the dream state we have a greater freedom as the self makes a world of its own, out of the materials of the waking world Though, in the dream state, we take the dream images of dehght and oppression as real, we produce them out of ourselves In dream- less sleep the self is liberated from the empirical world, indeed from the person as a self-contained unit
6 esa sarveharah, esa saroaynah, eso'niaryami, esa yonih sarvasya firabhavapyayau In bhvtanam
6 This is the lord of all, this is the knower of all, this is the inner controller; this is the source of all; this is the beginning and the end of beings.
Gaudapada says that 'it is the one alone who is known in the three states,' eka eva tndha suirtah
§ urges that 'that which is designated as prajfia (when it is viewed as the cause of the world) will be described as tttrtya separately when it is not viewed as the cause, and when it is free from all phenomenal relationship, 1 e in its absolute real aspect ' tarn abijavaslham t-asyawa prajiia-sabda-vacyasya turlyatvena dehadi-sam- bandha-jagradadt-rahitam paramarthikwi pjihag vaksyati S on Gaudapada's Karikii I 2
It is the first time in the history of thought that the distinction between Absolute and God, Brahman and Isvara, turiya and prajfia is elaborated Cp with this the Christian view of the Son as 'the image of the invisible God, the first born of all creation; for in him all things were created, in heaven and on earth, visible and invisible
. all things were created through him and for him He is before all things and in him all things hold together ' Colossians I 15 The son is the Demiurge, the heavenly architect, not the God but the
698 The Principal Vpamsads 7
image of the God For Philo 'the Sun is itself unaffected and un- diminished by its radiance, yet all the earth is dependent on it, so God, although in His being He is completely self-contained and self-sufficient, shoots forth a great stream of radiation, immaterial, yet on that account all the more real This stream is God in extension, God in relation, the Son of God, not God ' By Light, Light, p 243, Goudenough's E.T.
7. mntalt-prajnam, na bahi? prajiiam, iwbhayataji-prapwm, tia prajmm-glmnam, m prajiiam, uaprajfwm, a&rstam, avya- vaharyam, agrahyam, alaksanam, acinlyam, avyapadesyam, ehfitma-pratyaya-saram, prapaitcopasamam, santam, mam, ai- vattam, calurtham manyante, sa alma, sa vijneyah
7. (Tnrtya re) not that which cognises tie internal (objects), not that which cognises the external (objects), not what cog- nises both of them, not a mass of cognition, not cognitive, not non-cognitive (It is) unseen, incapable of being spoken of, ungraspable, without any distinctive marks, unthinkable, unnameable, the essence of the knowledge of the one self, that into which the world is resolved, the peaceful, the benign, the non-dual, such, they think, is the fourth quarter He is the self, He is to be known
Here we get to a reality which is beyond the distinction of subject and object and 5'et it is above and not below this distinction It is super-theism and not atheism or anti-theism We cannot use here terms like all-knowing, all-powerful Brahman cannot be treated as havine objects of knowledge or powers It is pure being In many passages, the Upanisads make out that Brahman is pure bang beyond all word and thought He becomes lhara or personal God with the quality of frafia or pure wisdom He is f* a ™g>™ lord of the principle of mCih-prakfti or the unmamfested, the inner gSe of aU souk From him proceeds B%»**^J»£ Demiurge, fashions the world. From the last develops Vutia «* totality of all existents The last two are sometimes rnrxed up
r T audauada savs that this Brahman is Mirthless, free from sleep «?3SSfiS5rt rSame and form, ever effulgent, all thought, no form is necessary for it'
aiam, amdram, asvapnam, anamakam ampakam
consciousness is present m " S^tSe » the non-
8 Mdndukya Upamsad 699
and alternations It is present, even when we are immersed in the activities of the waking world or lost m the unconsciousness of sleep Man's highest good consists in entering into this, the self, making it the centre of one's life, instead of dwelling on the surface
Deep sleep terminates and the self returns to the dream and the waking states In turlya there is a permanent union with Brahman The metaphysical reality is cognised m turlya, if such an expression can be used for the transcendent state
Plotinus portrays a gradual ascent from the world-soul to the spirit {nous) and finally from spirit to the One The goal of spiritual ascent is a mystical ecstatic union with the Absolute He writes 'Let us suppose the same rest m the body that surrounds the soul, that its movement is stilled, and that the entire surroundings are also at rest, the earth, the sea, the heaven itself above the other elements ' In words that are echoes of Plotinus, Augustine in his Confessions describes the ascent from the changeable apprehensions and objects of sense through the intelligible world of conceptual truth to the Absolute Truth 'If the tumult of the flesh were hushed, hushed the images of earth, and the waters and air, hushed also the poles of heaven' man turns his spiritual vision godward to receive the light, then he attains the absolute object of mystical union 'the light unchangeable above the mind' with the flash of one tremb- ling glance
8 so'yam dlmadkyaksaram aumkaro'dhimatram pada. matra matras ca pada akara ukara makara iti
8 This is the self, which is of the nature of the syllable attm, in regard to its elements The quarters are the elements, the elements are the quarters, namely the letter, a, the letter u and the letter m
This is tJie self it is the deepest essence of the soul, the image of Godhead
The world and the world-soul are both producers and produced The Supreme God is only the producer, Brahman is above the distinction of producer and produced Cp Gaudapada karya-karana-baddhau tav-isyete vtsva-iaijasatt prdputh Mrana-baddhas lit dvau tau iuryc na sidhyalah
Viiva and iaijasa are conditioned by cause and effect But prajna is conditioned by cause alone These two (cause and effect) do not exist in turlya Pnmal being unfolds itself as a subject-object relation The unmeasured and undefined becomes the measured and the denned, a universe of logical discourse Prajiia or wisdom and the element 'm' both indicate that the function of measuring is that of logical mmd All distinctions are within the Supreme z
7°° The Principal Upamsads n
Brahman. God is the logical being, the defined reality It is not we that define Brahman but Biahmm defines itself The supreme logical idea is God who is the true, the good and the beautiful Defined reality is not divided reality The real in itself is Brahman, the real as logically defined is Ikara who rests in Brahmm who does not cease to be Brahman in becoming Isvara
9 jdganta-sihano vaiSvanaro'kdrah pratiiama malra'pter adt- mattvad va'pnoti ha vat sarvan kaman adis ca bhavah ya mm veda
9 Vaisvanara, whose sphere (of activity) is the waking state, is the letter a, the first element, either from the root op to obtain or from being the first He who knows this, obtains, venly, all desires, also, he becomes first
Vaisvanara is he who has the universe for his body
10 svapna-stlidnas taijasa uka.ro dmtlya matrotkarsai ubha- yatvadvofkarsaii ha vai pldna-samtattm samanas ca bhavah, nasyahrahma-mt-kule bhavati ya evam veda
io. Taijasa, whose sphere (of activity) is the dream state, is the letter «, the second element, from exaltation or mter- medmteness He who knows this *xalts, venly, the continuity of knowledge and he becomes equal, m his family is born no one who does not know Brahman
11 sustMa-sMnah prafto makaras trttya matra mtterapner va nmioh ha va idam sarvam apmS ca bhavaitya
ii Prama, whose sphere (of activity) is the state of deep sleep is the letter m, the thud element, either from n**. to measure or because of merging He who knows this measures (knows) all this and merges also (all this m himsell)
°cwlomt Being is « pnon to non-bong T e
negauu" 1f h~ conceived witnoui. <«> ^vr —
Mandukya Upamsad
cannot grasp and determine this spirit beyond the opposition There is no concept or substance that could be thought of as being the unity without any opposition whatsoever We cannot even call it unity for it suggests the opposite category of diversity. But we are in the sphere of oppositions, dualities and yet the positive side of the opposition brings out the content of the sprnt We have to seek the ultimate truth, goodness and beauty in its direction
Plotinus says, 'Before the two there is the one and the unit must precede the Dyad coming later than the one, the Dyad has the One as the standard of its differentiation, that without which it could not be the separate differentiated thing it is ' Enneads V 1 5
'As long as we have duality, we must go still higher until we reach what transcends the Dyad ' Ibid III 8. 8
12 amatras caUtHJw'vyavahdiyahprapancopaiainalistvo'dvaita evam aumkara atmatva, samviiaty atmana'tmanam ya evam veda.
12 The fourth is that which has no elements, which cannot be spoken of, into which the world is resolved, benign, non-dual Thus the syllable aum is the very self He who knows it thus enters the self with his self
In txtriya, the nund is not simply withdrawn from the objects but becomes one with Brahman who is free from fear, who is all- round illumination, according to Gaudapada
liyate hi susupte tan mgfhUam na liyate
tad eva mrbhayam brahma jnanalokam samanlatah III 35 In both deep sleep and transcendental consciousness there is no consciousness of objects but this objective consciousness is present m an unmamfested 'seed' form m deep sleep while it is completely transcended in the tmtya consciousness Gaudapada says The non-cognition of duality is common to both prdjfia and turiya but prajiia is associated with the seed (consciousness) m sleep while this does not exist in (w lya
dvmtasyagrahanam iulyam ubhayoh p> apla-turyayok
bija-mdra-yuiah prajnah sa ca ttnye na vidyate S opens his commentary on the B G , with the verse that 'Narayana is beyond the unmamfested principle and from this unmamfested arises the mundane egg or Htranya-garbha ' narayanah paro'vyaktad andam avyakta-sambhavam There is first the pure Brahman beyond subject and object and then Narayana or God confronted by the object but superior to it and then the world-soul Lao Tze looks upon the Tao as the ultimate Reality which can be defined only m negative terms as 'colourless,' 'soundless,' 'non- matenal ' His conception of creation was that out of Tao, the eternal ultimate principle came the one, the great monad or the material cause of the universe The one produced the two primary essences,
7° 2 The Principal Upaniwds I2
s&-* ana tfaSasaift
gre^cSe 5 r6gaded T ' jea or ^ « *» «*
Pkrtmitf says- 'Standing: transcendent above all things that follow It, eartu* m Itself, not mixing or to be mixed S 2SS from Ifeelf veritably the one, not merely poseSSSSS attribute of Its essence~for that would be a AifSSsSS Principle overpassing all reasoning, all knowing-a ™SK sto^g over all Essence and Exjstence . only whl lt is^E and First, apart from all, can it be perfectly self-sufficing ' Enntads,
This soundless, partes, supreme Reality is the very self In the state of deep sleep, it becomes the subject confronting the object which is yet unmanifested. We infer the presence of the object, as its developments take place on getting out of sleep In the dream state, the object is manifested in the form of mental states, in the waking state, the object is manifested in material states The subject- object duality is present in different forms in the states of waking, dream and dreamless sleep It is transcended altogether in the state of httiya, while we have a pure consciousness of Self or Absolute
No object can be set in opposition to the Spirit and so the question of validity or otherwise does not arise It is self-validating, self- authenticating experience The question of validity arises when the object appears as alien and impenetrable but in spiritual experience there is no alien object There is knowledge of identity, by possession, by the absorption of the object at the deepest levels In the ex- perience of turlya, there is neither subject nor object, neither the perception nor the idea of God It does not reflect or explain any other reality than itself It is reahty, sprat m its inner life Those who know the truth become the truth It is not a state in which objects are extnnsically opposed to one another It is the jmmereion of the self in reality, its participation m primary being It is illumined life It is pure consciousness without any trace of duality, it is unfailing light luriyah sarva-Urk saia Kanka I 12 When the real is known there is no world of duality, pUle tomtom m vidyate Kanka I 18 Cp Astavakra GM
piata pUnam tathajneyam iftiyam nash vasUtvam aimnad bhah yairedam so'ham asmi mranjanah When analogically we transfer this idea from the microcosm to the macrocosm, from the individual to the world, since there is a co-relation between intelligibility and being, we have answering to the waking state, Vtrit, to the dream state, Htranya-garb/is, to
the dreamless sleep state, Isvara. All these three are on the plane of duality, Isvara has facing him mula-prakrli, though in anunmani- fested (avyakria) condition, as the self has the object in an tramani- fested condition in the state of dreamless sleep
Piotinus who adopts a similar view puts the case thus: 'If, then, the Divine thought-forms (The Ideas) are many, there must of necessity be something common to all and something peculiar to each to differentiate them this particularity or specific difference is the mdividual shape , but if there is shape there must be something that has taken the shape . that is to say there is a foundation, substratum, a matter. Further, if there is an InteEectual kosmos of which our kosmos is an image, and if ours is compound and includes matter, there must be a matter in the Intellectual kosmos as welL' Emieads II 4. 4.
The interaction of the universal subject and object develops the rest of the universe. Htranya-garbha is the siiirdlfr.au and plays with ideas, mental states as taijasa does in the dream world. In Rg Veda, it is said that Hiranya-garbka arose in the beginning, the lord of all created beings X. 121. 1. hirar.ya-garbhas sam-avariata ogre bhiltasya jaiak pahr eka dstt This whole world is in hun in an embryo form htranye brahmanda-rups garbka-ruper.aiasihtak praja- pattr Jnranya garbhak. Vidyaranya When these are projected into space and tune, we have Vtrat This answers to the waking state, which is Vatsvanara's sphere of activity
Thewakmgandthedreamstates answer to the exteriorised existence and mteriorised life of the world-spirit. When the world-spirit externalises its attention, we have the manifestation of the cosmos When it turns its attention inward, the cosmos retreats into latency. When the world-spirit withdraws altogether into undisturbed still- ness, the object, though present, becomes a mere abstraction When even that ceases, Isvara is Brahniar.
Aum thus represents both the unmamfested Absolute and the personal Isvara. Gaudapada writes. 'The sacred syllable aum is verily the lower Brakman and it is also said to be the higher Brahmau. Aum is without beginning, unique, without anything external to it, unrelated to any effect and imperishable '
praiiavo hy aparam brahma, prar.ai is ca parah $p:rlah apurco'nantaro bahyo i.aparak prar.ata'vyayak (26). If we worship Aum as Isvara, we pass beyond grief 'Know Aum to be Isvara, ever present in the hearts of all The wise man, realising aum as all-pervading, does not grieve.'
pranavatfi hisiaram ndydt sanasya I rdt samsii Ham sarva-iyapir.am aumkdran, tuaizd d) iro r a sozaii, (2S). While Isiara, the personal God, is the lord of the world of manifes- tation, of becoming, the Supreme Bral wan is be\ ond all becoming in pure being 'One who has known Aim which is (at the same time)
704 The Principal Ufianisads 12
?Svod° f tft n CntS ^ °^ nfi ^ e , elements ' in which all duality » resolved, the benign, he is the (real) sage and none other ' Y
amatro nanta-matrai ca dvattasyopasamah iivah aimharo indito ycr.a sa munir nctara janah teq) In this Upanisad we find the fundamental approach to the attain- ment of reality by the road of introversion Zd ascenTfrom to sensible and changing, through the mind which dreams, throng the soul which thinks, to the divine within but above the soul The truth of our intellectual knowledge presupposes a light, the Light of the Real above logical truth, the Light which is not itself but that by which it has been created and by whose illumination it shines
In the Apocryphal Wisdom of Solomon, the immanent reason is described thus
'For she is a breath of the power of God, And a clear effluence of the glory of the Almighty * VII 25 Wisdom becomes a personality {XVIII 14-16) afcm to the word in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel Though Wisdom is a potency outstde God it is yet wholly it: God Philo makes a sharp distinction between God in Himself and God revealed, between God who is pure being, unknowable, outside the material universe and God who is immanent in man and the universe, who is all-penetrating, all- filling The gap between the Infinite God and the finite roan was bridged m the Old Testament by God's angels who were regarded as emanations of the divine, offshoots of deity, parts of his very being Philo held that the universe was filled with divine potencies While m one sense these are attributes and self-revelations of God, in another sense they are personal beings, incorporeal souls who mediate between God and men, who 'report the injunctions of the father to his children and the necessities of the children to the father." De Sommis I 22 The unity of all these potencies is con- stituted by the Logos Heaven and earth subsisted in the Logos before their material creation The potencies which are the creators of matter emanate from the Logos God who is the ultimate creator never works directly but through the Logos who again works through the potencies called logoi Prajna, wisdom, Logos, Intellectual Principle, have a family likeness
Plotinus has the transcendent triad of the Absolute Une, tne Intellectual Principle or God and the World-soul The one is not a Beine but the source of Being which is its first offspring rne une is perfect, that is it has nothing, seeks nothing, needs nothing, but as we may say, it overflows and this overflowing is <**ri™>Jg engendered entity looks towards the One and becomes ; the ^Intel- lectual Principle, testing within itself, this offspring of the One is Bem?SL V 2 1 This Intellectual Principle Noh,*Q* S of the One It is engendered because the One mtssJ-^J This seeing is Nous The third is the soul, the author of
Mdndukya Ufiamsad
all living things It made the sun the moon the stars and the whole visible world It is the offspring of the Divine intellect It is, in Plotinus, of a twofold nature There is an inner soul intent on Nous and another which faces outward The latter is associated with a downward movement in which the soul generates its image which is nature and the world of sense For Plotinus it is the lowest sphere, something emanating from the soul when it forgets to look upward towards the Notts We have the One, Nous, Soul and the world answering to the fourfold nature of reality in the Mandiikya U The last two the world-soul and the world are the subtle and the gross conditions of the same being viral Iratlokya-sarirah brahmd samastt-vyasti-rftpah samsdra^inandala-vyapi £ on T U II S
SVETASVATARA UPANI$AD
The Svetaivatara Upamsad belongs to the Taittiriya school of the Yaptr Veda. Its name is derived from the sage who taught it. 1 It is theistic m character and identifies the Supreme Brahman with Rudra who is conceived as the material and the efficient cause of the world, not only the author of the world but its protector and guide The elements associated with theism, Personal God and devotion to Him, which are to be met with undoubtedly m the other Upamsads, become prominent m the Svetaivatara Upawi$ad The emphasis is not on Brahman the Absolute, whose complete perfection does not admit of any change or evolution but on the personal Isvara, omniscient and omnipotent who is the manifested Brahman Terms which were used by the later Samkhya philosophy occur in the Upamsad, but the dualism of the Samkhya, fiurusa and prakrh, is pvercome Nature or pradhana is not an independent entity but" belongs to the self of the Divine, devalma-iahh. God is the maym, the maker of the world which is niaya or made by him * The Upamsad teaches the unity of the souls and the world in the one Supreme Reality The Upamsad is an attempt to reconcile the different philosophical and religious views which prevailed at the time of its composition
» iveia, pure, aiva, tndnyas, senses Samkarananda See VI 21 literally, he who has a white mule Cp jmad-gavah, he who has an old cow
s mayi srjate sarvain etat
7*
Svetasvatara Upani$ad
kim karanam brahma, kutah sma jata, jivama kena, kva ca samprahsthdh,
adhisthtah kena sukhetaresu vartamake brahma-vido vyava- stham
1 Those who discourse on Brahman say What is the cause? (Is it) Brahman ? Whence are we born? By what do we live? And on what are we established? 0 ye who know Brahman, (tell us) presided over by whom do we live our different conditions in pleasures and other than pleasures (pains).
2 kalah svabhavo myahr yadrccha bhutani yomh purusa iti
cmtya
samyoga esam na tvatma-bhavad. atmapy amsah suklia-duli- kha-hetoh
2 Time, inherent nature, necessity, chance, the elements, the womb or the person (should they) be considered as the cause? It cannot be a combination of these because of the existence of the soul Even the soul is powerless m respect of the cause of pleasure and pain
cvntya v cintyam
In Atharva Veda XIX 53 r, we are told that Time is a horse with seven reins hini the knowing poets mount ' kalo aho vahah sapta-rastmh tarn aroJumtt kavayo vipascitfih In the same verse it is said that 'all the worlds are his wheels ' lasya cakra bhuvanam viha.
The creative and destructive functions of Kola or time are brought out in the M B
kalah pacatt bhiitani, kalah samharate prajah
kalalt suptesu jagartt, kalo hi Auralikramah It also asserts that there is a time-transcending element which overcomes even time —
kalah pacatt bhiitant sarvany evalmanalmam
yasmm ttt pacyatc kalas tarn vedcha na kas cana alma the soul, the living self, flva which is not an independent cause, but is subject to the law of karma
yotuh the womb prakjli which is the mother of all possibilities in the world.
The different views are mentioned as they were suggested m the previous history of Indian thought The non-conscious cannot be
7™ TtoPnnafidUtammb r „
the cause of the con«f™»c tk„ ^
3 Those who followed after (were devnM m ™j.
fZ^T- °y ? iySm 1 r 4- again, I Ic ~ir S STl/k^ 8 to , f0re ? hadw the of the
dhyla VI L 3 b ° r deVOt3 ° n a a nat " al *"*«■»* 3 fS'c^S the self-power of the Dzvme It is not like the ^
SdepeSt 14 * ° f thC " atUre ° f the Supreme "*» no *
-f ^, a .?y°J anMi -y«Masya maymah parameSvarasya paramalmar.ah
almablvtdatam asvaiamrdm, m samkhya-pankalptta-iradhSiiddival
prthag-bhutam svatanlram Mhm. §.
See IV io.seeBG IX io
Cp Brahma Pilrana
esa catur-vimsalt-bheda-bhtma mdya pard-praltrtts lat-samuttha
Inere is no reason, as Plotinus says, why the spirit should remain stationary in itself It is not impotent as it is the source and poten- tiality of all things Enneads V 6 i Nothing is lost by its creative activity In Plotinus, the power of Spznt penetrates the whole spiritual world and the world of souls
sva-gunair mg&iham hidden in its own qualities I The self-power of the Divine is hidden by the qualities of the Lord, devatmana, tsvara-rupena avasthtam S The power of manifestation {maya-iahi) is m the form of livara, the Supreme Lord See also III 2, IV r, g and VI I.
2 The self-power of the Divine is hidden by the three qualities of saitva, rajas and tamas It is the cause of the creation, maintenance and dissolution of the world devasya paramesvarasya dtma-bJtStam, jagad-udaya-sthtMaya-hetu-bhiUani, brafima-vtsnu-hvalnnkdtn £
Cp sargasthtiy-anta-kannim brakma-wnu-hvdmtktim sa samjnamyati bhagavdn eka eva jamrianah
3 The qualities may refer to the modifications of prak/it, pitrnsa and Isvara brahmaparaiantrath firakfiyadt-wiesanath upSdhibhh mgfidhdm 5
devds ca alma ca sakhS cayasyapara-brahmanah avastha-bhedali tarn
Svetasvatara Upamsad
'akfh-jmrusesvarSnam sva-rSpa-bhiitSm brakma-rfipetta avasthtdm rat-parataram sahtim karanam apasyan § jei 9 and 12
The power of the Lord to create, preserve and dissolve the world s looked upon as the cause—
^svMnmiahdyotana^nmtahpraka^a-warupasyaprapmia-ghana-svarii )asya param-aimanah yagad-udaya-sthtt-laya-niyamana-visayam Sakttm samarthyam apaiyan §
Brahman, the unconditioned Absolute, cannot be regarded as the cause of the world It can only be described negatively. S says, «« karanam napy akaranam ixa cobhayam napy anubkayam na ca mmtfam na copddanam na cobhayam S
So it is that the causation of the world is traced to maya or prakrti which is the power of Brahman conceived as Isvara
4 tam eka-nemim trvrtam sodasaniam satardharam vttniaU pratyambhh
aslakaih sadbhh vtha-riipaika-pasam tn-marga-bhedam dvi- m-mittaihMiioham 4 (We understand) Him (as a wheel) with one felly, with three tires, sixteen ends, fifty spokes, twenty counter-spokes and six sets of eights, whose one rope is manifold, which has three different paths, whose one delusion (arises) from two causes
In this and the following verses, the world is compared to a rotating wheel or a flowing stream Its chief characteristic is movement and these images bring it out
eka-nemim with one felly Ihiara is the one source of the manifestec world The root cause of the whole world described in different way has its locus in Isvara
ya ekah karanam mkhildny adhhsthah tam eka-nemim, yom karanam avyakria?n akdsam parama-vyomamayS-prakrith saklis tam 'vidyd chayajnanam anrtam avyaklam %ty mam adi-sabdair abhila yamanatka karanivastha, nemir tva ncmth sarvadharo yasyadh (halur advitlyasya param-atmanas tam cka-neimm § / ftw a uses prakrti for creation
It is usual to describe the world as a wheel, ekam padam noksipi SanatsiijatiyaVl 11
lp>rtam with three tires, threefold Reference is to the three gur sattva, rajas and tamas.
sodasaniam sixteen ends Reference is to the five elements, organs of perception {jnSmtdnya), five organs of action (karmad
7* 2 The Principal U jamais j.
eight is called MMoS^L^ K^ SKteen ^ S™P of
5Vw%<i JiTfln^ divides the 24 into three won™, t j,^
PrSa $ P j eSSWn refer t0 the s *ken to mentioned m
SJSfn ***** Sp °lf ^ represeDt the forces whl <* m "ve
femora Mid «RAatoMisrs (they may also refer to ignorance, self-love, lore hatred and fear Toga Sen I 8, II 2 S5«%a Sttnt III 37), twenty-eight asaklts or disabilities SdmkhyaSfilm III 28, the nine inversions of the tofts, satisfactions, Ibid III 39, the eight inversions of the siMns or perfections (III 40) The various subdivisions of vtpatyaya, aiakh, tush and siddhi given in Samkhya KSrtka 46 ff form a set of fifty See E H Johnston Some Samkhya and Yoga Conceptions of (lie Svetasvatam Upamsad Journal of the Royal Astatic Society, October 1940, pp 855 ff pratyarabhh' counter-spokes These are the ten organs of perception and action and their objects Prasna IV 8 It may also refer to the five elements with the five objects of the senses and the ten organs See MB XII 112 38-41
astakaih sadbhth six sets of eights The six are 1 prakrlt with its eight causes of the five elements, maid (manas), intellect [buddhi], and self-sense {aham-kara), see B G VII 4, 2 dhatu with the eight constituents of the body, 3 atSvarya lordship with its eight forms, 4 bhava eight conditions, 5 deva gods with their eight classes, and 6 Stma-gtma virtues which are also eight
amma maluma caiva gemma laghima tatha praptihpidkamyam ttitvam vasitvam ca'slabMttayah vtsva-rupaika-fiasam whose one rope is manifold It is desire or Karma viwa~ntpa,iMna-ritpaekahkamakJiyahpSiaIi § Vt&a-rupa is of ten used for the soul which is subject to rebirth I 9, V 7, Maitri II 5 VtMkkya, V 2, Visva and VII 7, Vi&iarftpa Cp also M B XIII 112 33, tathtnva bahu-rUpaivad vtsva-rfipa itt srutah tn-marga-bhedam which has three different paths to salvation explained as dharma, religiousness, adheama, lrrehgiousness, ana «7««« or wisdom
moha delusion or ignorance of self which is produced by two causes good or bad works Both of them commit us to the wheel of rebuts,
I 6 Sveiaimtara Upanisad 713
5 paficar$rota'mbumpa%ca-y(my ttgra-vakrdinpanca-praiwnnim paffca-buddliyadi-irwldm pancavartam paMca^duhkhaugha-vegam panca-sad-bheddm paiica-parvam adhimah.
5 We meditate on him as a river of five streams, from five sources, fierce and crooked, whose waves are the five vital breaths, whose original source is the fivefold perception, with five whirlpools, an impetuous flood of five pains, divided into fifty kinds (of suffering) with five branches
The reality of the world and its relation to the Supreme Jsvara are brought out here
■panca-sroto'vibitm having for its water that which has five streams sroias is also used for sense organ
mdnya the stream of perceptions which each sense organ receives from the outer world These streams flow from the senses to the mind which is said to have five streams Cp panca-siotasm MB XII 7890-1, where Nflakantha identifies it with mind or manas
Yoga Sittra II 2 mentions the five kleias as avidya, asmtta, asaktt, raga, abhmvesa
Vacaspati Misra on Samkhya Kanka (47) explains panca-viparyaya- bheddh by a quotation from Varsaganya Paiica-parva-vtdyS See also Taitva-samasa 14 Buddha-canto, XII 33.
6 saroapve sarva-samstJie brhante asmin hamso bhramyatt
brahma-cakre
prthag atmanam preritdram ca maiva justas tatas tena- mjtatvam ett
6 In this vast brahma-wheel, which enlivens all things, in which all rest, the soul flutters about thinking that the self m him and the Mover (the Lord) are different Then, when blessed by him, he gams life eternal
asmmv tasmm Cp B U I 4 10.
KathalV 10, TU II 7 i,BG XVIII 61 Vtsnu Dharma has the following verses
paiyaly atmanam anyam tuyavad vai paiam-filmanah tavad sambhrfimyate janiur mofnto nyakarmana samkslnasesakarma tu param brahma prapasyah abhedettatmanai ktddham suddhatvad aksayo bhnvct. Both livara and the individual soul belong to the manifested world. brahma-cahram see also VI 1 Gaudapada gives Biahman as a synonym for prakrit See Gaudapada on Samkhya Kanka 22 The soul of man is a traveller wandering m this cycle of Brahma which is huge, a totality of lives, a totality of states, thinking itself to be
7 J 4 The Principal Upanisads I g
different from the Impeller of the journey The soul reaches its eoal of immortahty when it is accepted by the Supreme
7 udgitam etat paramam tu brahma tasmtms hayam supra- hsihaksaram ca. atrfintaram brahma-vido'viditva Una hrahnam tat-para yom-nmktalt
7 This has been sung as the supreme Brahman and in it is the triad It is the firm support, the imperishable The kiuwers of Brahman by knowing what is therein become merged m Brahman, intent thereon and freed from birth
suprattstha v sapratisi!ia,svaprattstha braJuna-vtdo. v. veda-vtdo, knowers of the Vedas paramam Supreme prapanca-dharma-rahtam S. trayam the triad, the individual soul, the world and the cosmic lord bliohta,blwgyam,prentdram S" 5 samyuMam etat ksaram aksaram ca vyaWvyakiam bfarale visvam ttah
rniias caitrn badhyate bhoMr-bhdvat tfialva dmm mucyatc saroa-pasaili ,
8 The Lord supports all this which is a combination of the mutable and the immutable, the manifest and the »ifest And the soul, not being the Lord, is bound because of his be n g an enjoyer By inowing God (the soul) is freed from all fetter,
See B G XV. 16-17. The later doctrine of Sawfdd Wl* distocfaons of U, #*, t* creature, the lord and the bond, is here suggested
q P Upla«dvava } dv?h»mvajahyeMbho^
9 £2tf cat J visoa-rupo liy aUM trayam yada wdatt
the 9 one all-powerful, the other P^^SJ*^ (another) one who is unborn < ftSfU. of
I io Svetasvatara Upantsad 715
doctrine of the triune unity elaborated later by Ramanuja is sug- gested here For Ramanuja, God is the soul of nature as well as the soul of souls Seel 12
The distractions of enjoyer, enjoyment and enj03'ed are contained xa Brahman bhokit-bhoga-bhogya-rupam S ahirtr non-active kartrtvadi-samsdra-dharma-rahitah S
In commenting on this verse, § makes out that the manifested world is due to the power of maya which is not independent of Brahman and so does not constitute a second to it As it is responsible for the manifested world it is not a nonentity Its nature is inde- scribable
mayaya aniroacyatvena vastutvayogat tathaha, esa ht bliagavan-mayd sad-asad-vyakti-varptd £
tasydbhidhyandd yojanat tattva-bhavad bhiiyai cante visva- maya-mvrthk
10 What is penshable is the pmdhana (primary matter) What is immortal and imperishable is Hara (the Lord) Over both the penshable and the soul the one God rules By medi- tating on Him, by uniting with Him, by reflecting on His being more and more, there is complete cessation from the illusion of the world
hat a one of the names of $wa, § explains hara as one who removes ignorance avidyader harandt Cp Siva-mahvmna Stotra
balmla-rajase visvotpattau bhavdya namo namah prabala-iantase tat-samhare hardya namo namah yana-suklia-kiie sattvodnktan mrdaya namo namah pramahasi pade mstratgunye sivaya namo namah Salutations to^Bnava or Brahma m whom rajas preponderates for the creation of the universe, salutation to Hara or Siva m whom tamas preponderates for the destruction (of the universe) Salutation to Mrda or Visnu m whom sativa preponderates for giving happiness to people Salutation to Stva who is effulgent and beyond the three attributes
by meditating on htm The way by which the soul is awakened to^ the divine core of his being is abhidhyana, an intense contemplation* of the Saviour God It leads to contemplative union with the object and identification with his essential reality This contemplation is mtrospection, an intimate worship, intuition of one's own inner being IV 5 devam svactttastham upasya The embodied Jxva becomes one with God II 14 tad aima-tatlvam prasamtksya dchi cko bhavaic
7 l6 The Principal Vpam$ads I 12
mSva-mayd illusion of the world sukha-duhkha-mohalrndkaiesa- prapmlca-rHpa-mayd S Cp Vasubandhu's AbhdltarmaMa. abodhtm dhya.na.ntye VI 24 When we reach kawalya, there is a total cessation of the world The contemplator rises above the cosmic structure and attains brahnasmroana.
ll.jMtvMmiamsanapdMpaMnthh^athkkhtrjmma~mtyii- prahdmh
tasyabhdhyanat irtiyam deha-bhede msvmivaryam kevak apta-kamah
II. By knowing God there is a falling off of all fetters, when the sufferings are destroyed, there is cessation of birth and death By meditating on Him, there is the third state, on the dissolution of the body, universal lordship, being alone, his desire is fulfilled
This verse describes the different sides and stages of liberation Negatively it is freedom from birth and death, positively it is oneness with Ihara, so long as there is the manifested world and oneness with Brahman when the manifested world ceases to east iasya -baramdvarasya, abhdhydmd deha-bhede knrapatollara-kalmn arcirddind deva-yam-paM gaM paramehara-sayujyam gawya WyamvfrM*apdpeksayavy5k r tai>arama-vyo™^ whakarya-lateamm pimlam bhavah, sa tad anubMya tdmva mmimm dtmdnam matva kevak "^"X'SSS
na-rapo ZoaffMe- S He also quotes from Siva-dlm ™ttara
dhydnSd mwaryam atidam, atkaryad suMwi uttamam, pmtew tatpantyam mMo mtthttm M A distinction is made here between ^ YLf^f to hbJton leads to lordship and jMm or wisdom which l leads to bbwtao The former, which is the c^templaton .d 0 f devotion, is a stage to the latt ^f^*^ESc process intelligence, the blaze of ^^^^^SJ^bul contoues, the P^onal^rd ^^^^^mrf*
a. etad jneyam miyam evatmasamstham ndtah param *»-
bum bhogyam prmtaram ca *Mft» V
tnoidham m the se if should be known
M That Eternal which rests in the sen sno
I 15 Svetasvatara Upanisad 717
Truly there is nothing beyond this to be known. By knowing the enjoyer, the object of enjoyment and the mover (of all), everything has been said This is the threefold Brah,ian
The individual soul, the object of enjoyment, prakrti and the Supreme Lord livara are all forms of Brahman atma-samsthanv which rests in the self Cp. Katha V. 12.
$wa-dharmottara says* stvam ahnam pasyanh prahmasu tiayogthah The Yogins see the Lord in the self and not in images
13 vahner yatha yom-gatasya murtth na drsyaie naiva ca
hnga-nasah
sa bhuya eve'ndhana-yom-gshyah tad vo'bhayam vat prana- vena dehe
13. As the form of fire when latent in its source is not seen and yet its seed is not destroyed, but may be seized again and again in its source by means of the drill, so it is in both cases The self has to be seized in the body by means of the syllable aum
Fire though not seen at first is there all the time , it becomes visible by friction; even so the Self is there all the tune though unperceived by those m a state of ignorance It is perceived when by meditation on the syllable aum, we subdue the lower self The visum of the Self is achieved by means of Va&pranava, aum. mdhana the stick used for drilling yoiii the underwood in which the stick is drilled
14 sva-deham aranim krtvd pranavam co'ttararanim dhyana-mrmathanabhyasat devar,i pasyen ntgudkavat
14 By making one's body the lower friction stick and the syllable aum the upper friction stick, by practising the drill (or friction) of meditation one may see the God, hidden as it were
In overcoming the obstacles which prevent the realisation of Brahman on the part of the mdividual, suffering is invoh ed
We are asked to meditate on Godhead and bring Him out of the recesses of our heart Cp Kaivalya U I ir
15- Mesn iailam dadhinwa sarpir apas srotassu arauisv cagmL.
evam atmolmani grhyate'sau satyenainaih tapasa yo' nupasyaii.
7*8 The Principal Upimisads I 26
15 As oil in sesamum seeds, as butter in cream, as water in riverbeds, as fire m friction sticks, so is the Self « n ized in one's own soul if one looks for Him with truthfulness and austerity.
srolas nver-bed Usually a stream, here the dn bed of a stream which, if dug into, will yield water
tapasa by austerity The divine m us becomes manifest onh wnci we subject ourselves to certain disciplines The Dinnc operates ir 11s but it requires effort to make it shine forth A later Upan^ad savs that the Divine dw ells in us as ghee in milk but c\ en as ghee i< obtained after the process of chnrning, the churning of the mmd 1- necessary to reveal the inner splendour.
ghnam wa payast mgiidhan. bhiiis bltVe ca tasah lyratiM, satatam mahtheiavyam manasa mar.thani-hhuUna
16 sarvavyapuiam dtmdmm hire sarpir tvdrpitam dtma-vidyd-tapo-mulamtad brahmopanisatparan., lad hral-
mopamsatparam 16 The Self which pervades all things as butter is contained in milk which is the root of self-knowledge and austerity, that is the Brahman, the highest mystic doctrine That is the highest mystic doctrine
brahmopamsat the mystic doctnne of Brahman
Like butter hidden m milk does the eternal wisdom d»cll m < h andevery object, let there be constant churning bv the churn.,, stick of the mind Brahma-btniuV.
me as present m all be.ngs, as latent * » wood, from that moment they discard confusion yadatu sana-bhiitcsu iSmse aghtm tvithilam prattcaksUa wan. tokoplyat larlyana hasmalam ^ ^ ^
Svetd&atara Upanisad
1 yunjdnah prathamam manas tattvaya saviia dlnyah agner jyotvr nicdyya prthivyd adhydbharat
1 Savitr (the inspirer) first controlling mind and thought for truth discerned the light of Agm (Fire) and brought it out of the earth
The five introductory verses are taken from Taithrlya Samhitd
The Upanisads claim to continue the tradition of the Vedas It is an established convention in Indian thought to make out that the greatest innovations are only the developments of the old Even the Buddha said that his teaching was only a restatement of the four ancient truths, catvdn drya-salydm See Dhammapada, Intro- duction
2 yuktena manasd vayam devasya savituh save suvargeydya saktyd
2 With mind controlled we are under the command of the divine Savitr that we may have strength for (obtaining) heaven
suvargeydya for (obtaining) heaven, svarga-prdpti-hetu-bhfttdya
3 yuktvdya manasd devdn suvaryato dhiyd divam brhaj jyolih karisyatas savitd prasuvdh tan
3 May Savitr, having controlled through thought the gods that nse up to the bright heaven, inspire them to make a great light to shine
4 yuw/ate mana uta yuiljate dhiyo vifrd viprasya brhaio
vipaicitah
vi hotra dadhe vayunavid eka tn matt devasya savituh panstithh
4 The sages of the great all-knowing control their mind and control their thoughts The one who knows the law has ordered the ceremonial functions Great is the praise of the divine Savitr
5 yuje vdm brahma puroyani tiamobhir visloka tin pathy eva
siireh
imvantu visve amrtasya putrd d ye dhamdm divydni tasthuh
5 I join your ancient prayer with adoration. Let my verse
7*° The Principal Vpamsads n 8
affi^owa sons of the immortal
Mio devafoyah proktah flvah stvo h kevalah
6 agmr yairiibhmathyate vayur yakiMimtdhyate smno yatraimcyate tatra samjayak mamh
o Where the fire is kindled, where the wind is directed where the . soma flows over, there the mind is bom bee EG X n
Mind is bom where the routine or automatism is broken
7. With Savitr as the inspirer, one should delight in the ancient prayer Make your source (dwelling) there Your work will not affect you
SeeCU V 24 3.BG IV 37
brahmodupma pratareta mdvan srotdmsi sarvam bhayava- Iiam.
8 Holding the body steady with the three (upper parts, chest, neck and head) erect, causing the senses and the mind to enter into the heart, the wise man should cross by the boat of Brahman all the streams which cause fear
See B G VI. 13 sammvesya v samnintdhya
trtnv three, urognvasirmnsi, chest, neck and head S At the time of meditation we must hold the trunk, the head and the neck m a straight line The theory of asanas or postures is a development of this view The control of the senses by means of mind answers to the later pralyahm a
Body, mind and spirit form one whole and here what is known as bodily prayer is mentioned * Brahma the syllable awn braJtma'Sabdampranavamvarnayantt s
Svetasvatara Upamsad
9 prdndn prapTdyeha samyukta-cestah ksine prdne ndsikayo' cckvastta
dustdsva-yuktam iva vaham enam udvan taano dharayeia prmnattah.
9 Repressing his breathings here (in the body), let him who has controlled all movements, breathe through his nostrils, with diminished breath, let the wise man restrain his mind vigilantly as (he would) a chariot yoked with vicious horses
See B G. V. 27. The verse refers to prandydma or breath-control
mano'nukule natu caksu-pldaneguhd-nvudtdsrayaneprayo- jayet.
10. In a level clean place, free from pebbles, fire and gravel, favourable to thought by the sound of water and other features, not offensive to the eye, in a hidden retreat protected from the wind, let him perform his exercises (let him practise Yoga).
See B G VI. 11, Maitri VI 30.
The importance of physical surroundings is brought out here Kurma Purana mentions jantuvydpta and sasabda as unfitting a place for meditation II. 11, MB says wrjsss vane XIV. 567; also nadipidinasayi, nadffirarahs ca XIII 6473 The place for meditation should be noiseless and not noisy, labia is said to he a mistake for soda, a place green with young grass
11 nihara- dhumdrkdnildnaldndm khadyoia-vidyiit-sphatika- sasindm
etdm rupdm purassardm Irahmany abhvyakhkardm yoge. 11 Fog, smoke, sun, wind, fire, fireflies, lightning, crystal moon, these are the preliminary forms which produce the manifestation of Brahman in Yoga
We read in the Lankdvatara Sfdra 'In his exercise, the Yogin sees (imaginatively) the form of the sun or the moon or something looking like a lotus, or the underworld or various forms such as skyfire and the like When all these are put aside and there is a state of imagelessness, then a condition in conformity with suchness {bhuta-tatkald) presents itself and the Buddhas will come together from all their countries and with their shining hands will touch the head of the benefactor ' See also Mandala Brahmana U II 1.
aaau tarakavad driyate, tato vajradarpanam, tatah panpftrnacandra- ntandalam, (alo mvaralnaprablMiuandalain, taio n>adhyaknarka-
7 22 The Principal Upantsads II 12
mandalam tato vaJimhkhamandakm sphaltka, dhitmra, btndu, nada, kala, naksatra, hltadyoia, dipa, nelra, suvama mva-ratnadt-prabha driyante
At first appears a sign like that of a star, then gradually appear a diamond mirror, thereafter a full lunar circle, thereafter a circle of the lustre of the nine germs, thereafter the midday sun, thereafter a circle of flame, then a crystal, a black circle, a dot, sound, digit, star, sun, lamp, eye, the lustre of gold and nine gems are seen
Mystics speak of visions and auditions Truth is seen through the mirror of human reflection The mind of man is limited by the nature of its possessor, by the kind of man he is What thinks is the man, not the mind Our senses make definite what is in its nature in- definite We reduce the invisible to our level As we cannot for long dwell on the heights without suffering from vertigo, we descend to the sense world and use images belonging to it Though God trans- cends all forms He may still use them and convey His presence through them These images are sent to comfort and instruct us
This verse makes out that the images are not the subjective activities of the human self Besides, many of these visions have a symbolic character. The words and phrases we use to describe impressions which external things make upon us are employed to describe the events of our spiritual life It is a process of spirited materialization Truths of the spiritual life s cannot adequately represented except through symbols Saint HiMegrand (^™>\ had visions and she repeatedly assures us These vaions which I saw I beheld nerther m sleep nor in dream, nor in madness nor \vrtli my camal eyes, nor with the ears of the flesh, nor in hidden places, S wakeful, alert, with the eyes of the spirit and ^ the fflrt
and many others had these visions 12 prlhvyapyatqo'mlakfw samritkOe paHcatmake yoga-guns JZ^rogo m jam mmriyuhprapiasyayogagni-myam ^ I2 mSZ fivefold quality of Yoga is produced * earth,
of the fire of Yoga T„i verse and the next engage , the
II i6.
Svetdhatara Upani§ad
Four stages of yoga, arambha, gliata, pancaya and mspatd are described in verses 13, 14, 15, and 16 respectively. In securing bodily health we have the commencement of the yoga, yoga-pravfth. In attaining freedom from sorrow he reaches the second stage In the third stage the traces of duality disappear, malia-silnyam ialo biiaii sarua-stddhi-samasrayam In the fourth stage there is the identity of the individual with the Supreme Self The Yogin does not become disembodied The elements composing his body are elevated to the level of their subtleness, suksmalva He leaves his gross body and attains an indefectible one It is a consciousness-body akin to that of the Supreme with whom the contemplator has identified himself through meditation
13 laghtilvam arogyam alolupatvam varna-prasadam svara-sau- sthavam ca
■»* gandhcd subho miitra-punsam alpawyoga-pravrtttmpratka- mam vadanti ^> "V ' 11 \ ~ - ^ ■ c \
13 Lightness, healthiness, steadiness, clearness' of com- plexion, pleasantness of voice, sweetness of odour, and slight , excretions, these, they say, are the first "results "of the progress of yoga
' 14 yalhavoa bimbam mrdayo'pahptam tejotnayam bhrajait iat sudhantam
tad vatmatattvam prasaimksya deM ekah kriartho bhavaie mta-iokah
14 Even as a mirror stained by dust shines brightly when it has been cleaned, so the embodied one when he has seen the (real) nature of the Self becomes integrated, of fulfilled purpose and freed from sorrow.
15 yaddtma-tattvena tu brahma-tattvam dipopamene'ha yuktah
prapaiyet
ajam dhruvam saroa-tattvair visuddhath jnaiva. deoam mucyate. sarva-pasaih. 15 When by means of the (real) nature of his self he sees as by a lamp here the (real) nature of Brahman, by knowing God who is unborn, steadfast, free from all natures, he is released from all fetters "^""7
724 The Principal Upamsads II 17
sa evajatah sajamsyamdnahpratyanjandms Usthah sarvato- mukhah
16 He, indeed, is the God "who pervades all regions, He is the first-born and he is within the womb He has been born and he will be born He stands opposite all persons, having his face in all directions
See Vajasaneyi Samhita, 32 4
purvo hi jatah is the first born as Hiranya-garbha
17. The God who is in fire, who is in water, who has entered into the whole world (the God), who is in plants, who is in trees, to that God be adoration, yea, be adoration
Svetahatara Upanisad
7*5
bhavantt.
I The one who spreads the net, who rules with his ruling powers, who rules all the worlds with his ruling powers, who remains one (identical), while (things or works) arise and continue to exist, they who know that become immortal
yalavan- who spreads the net 5 identifies jala or net with maya.
Uambhih.
pratyan jandn Hsthati saficukocdnta-kdle samsrjya vi^va bhuvandm gopdh.
2. Truly Rudra is one, there is no place for a second, who rules all these worlds with his ruling powers He stands opposite creatures He, the protector, after creating all worlds, withdraws them at the end of time
The Highest Reality is identified with Rudra who is assigned the three functions of creation, protection or maintenance and dissolution
- In R V. Rudra is the personification of the destructive powers of nature, exemplified hi storms and lightning In the later portions of the Veda he is described as Siva, the auspicious, as Mahadeva, the great god Even in the R.V. it is said that he dwells in mountains, that he has braided hair, that he wears a hide pratyan: opposite. He lives as pratyag-atman sarvdtni ca jananpraty-cmtarah praii-pttrnsam avasthxtah S who also quotes 'rUpam rUpam prattrttpo babh&va '
pat.
sam bahubhydm dhamati sampatatrair dyava-bhumi janayan deva ekah.
'3 That one God, who has an eye on every side, a face on every side, an arm on every side, a foot on every side, creating heaven and earth forges them together by his arms and his wings.
See R V X 81 3, Ailiarva Veda XIII 2. 26, Vdjasaneyi Samhita
726 The Pnnctpal Upanisads HI 6
XVII iq.TaMinyaSamhtalV.b 2 4, TaithriyaAranyakaX 1 3 dkamati forges S means by it sa/nyojayatt, he joins men with arms and birds with wings
bdhubhydm with arms As it is in the dual number, Samkarananda takes it for dhanna and adharma
fatatrath. with wings Samkarananda means by it the in e clue/ elements patana-fflaih pafiakrfa-mahd'bhiitaih bahubhyam, vidya-karmabhyam, patatrath vasana-nlpmh samihamaU dipayatt Narayana-dipiM
4 yo devanam prabhavas codbhavai ca vtsvddhipo rudro maharsih
htranya-garbham pmyamdsa purvam sa no buddhyii subhaya samyunaktu. 4. He who is the source and origin of the gods, the ruler oi all, Rudra, the great seer, who of old gave birth to the golden germ (Htranya-garbJm), may He endow us with clear under- standing
Hirmya-garbha is the person endowed with clear ideas htam ab-raimtmm aty-ujpalam planum garbhah milas-sarakyasynlam b In verse 3, the stress is on the cosmic form virdt svarupa, here on the cosmic spirit, the world-soul, Btranya-garbha
PRAYERS TO RUDRA k yaieriidmbvatanuragliorapapakdiini
taya ttas tamivd iantamayd gmsanldbhcaMihi. «; Rudra your body which is auspicious, untemfymg, showmg no evLmth that most benign body, 0 dueuer m the mountains, look upon (manifest yourself to) us.
TTnr thjs and the Mowing verse, see Vdjasancyt Samhtd XVI 2-3 JgSfi* » identical with his absolute rcahty It u ^alogous to the Buddhist dharmakaya.
than human
Ill 10
Svetdivatara Upanisad
7 tatah param brahma param brJtantam yatha.-nika.yam sar- va-bhutesu gudham visvasy atkam panveshtdram isam tam jndtvamrta bhavanh
7 Higher than this is Brahman, the supreme, the great hidden in all creatures according to their bodies, the one who envelopes the universe, knowing Hun, the Lord, (men) become immortal
iaiah param higher than this This may refer to the Vedic God Rudra or the manifested world The reference here is to Ihara who is higher than Hiranya-garbha and Vtrdt-riipa, to the indwelling Lord, antarydmm, to the Supreme Personal God, paramesvara
8 veddham etam puruiam mahdntam ddtiya-varnam tamasah
parastdt
tam eva viditvd ahmrtyum eh ndnyah pantha vtdyate' yandya
8 I know the Supreme Person of sunlike colour (lustre) beyond the darkness Only by knowing Him does one pass over death There is no other path for going there
See VI 15, BG VIII 9 ndnyah pantha. no other path pantha the way, the path, pathikrt, the road-maker, ayandya for going (to salvation) apavarga-gamandya samsdrdbdheh pdra-gamandya vd
The sage Svetaivatara says that he has seen the Supreme who dwells beyond all darkness, that he has crossed the world of samsara
9 yasmdt param ndparam ash kincit yasmdn namyo na
jydyo'stt kincit vrksa tva stabdho divi hsthaty ekas tene'dam purnam purusena sarvam
9 Than whom there is naught else higher, than whom there is naught smaller, naught greater, (the) one stands like a tree established m heaven, by Hun, the Person, is this whole universe filled.
SeeKathaVI 1
dim ui heaven dyotandtmani sve mahvrnm, £, established in his own greatness
10 tato yad uttarataram tad arupatn andmayam ^
ya etad vidur amrtds U bhavanh, athciare duhkham evdpiyanh
7 28 The Principal Upamsads in I4
2? ^ at „ which ls b eyond this world is without form and without suffering Those who know that become immortal but others go only to sorrow
11 He who is in the faces, heads and necks of all, who dwells in the cave (of the heart) of all beings, who is all-pervading, He is the Lord and therefore the omnipresent Siva
SeeRV X 81 3, X 90 1
S explains Bhagavat by citing the verse
cnbuxryasya samagrasya, &han)iasya,ya&asah friyah jnana-vairagyayos catva sanndm bhaga itirana He who has the six qualities of complete lordship, righteousness, fame, prosperity, wisdom and renunciation is Bhagavan
12 mahan prabhur vai purusah sattvasyatsa pravartakah sumrmalam imam praptim Uano jyotir avyayaJt.
12 That person indeed is the great lord, the impeller of the highest being (He has the power of) reaching the purest attainment, the ruler, the imperishable light
saitva highest being For S the internal organ, antah-karana
13 anguslha-matrah puruso'ntaratma soda janamm hrdaye
sanmvisiah
krda mamiTso manasabhiklpto ya efad vtdur amrtas te bJiavanti
13 A person of the measure of a thumb is the inner sen, ever dwelling in the heart of men He is the lord of the know- ledge framed by the heart and the mind They who know that become immortal
manviso the lord of knowledge ptanesaJi f v ^^Jf^l This reading , hrdamamsa manasablnUpto' is adopted by saniKa rananda, Narayana and Vijnana-bhiksu
14 sahasra-strsa purusah saliasraksah sahasra-pSt sa bhimim visvato vHva aty ahslhad dasangulain
u The person has a thousand heads, a , thousand .ey e. a thousand feet He surrounds the earth on all S1 des and stands ten fingers' breadth beyond.
Ill 19 Svetd&atara Upanisad 729
SeeRV X 90 1.
da&angiilam ten fingers' breadth anantam, aparatn S endless, shoreless Though the Supreme manifests Himself in the cosmos, He also transcends it
15 pumsa evedam saroamyad bhntamyac ca bhavyam ut&mrtatvasyesano yad annenattrohah.
15. The person is truly this whole world, whatever has been and whatever will be. He is also the lord of irnmortahty, and whatever grows up by food
SeeRV X 90 2
Sayana explains that he is the lord of all the immortals, i e the gods, because they grew to their high estate by means of food
16 sarvatah paiii-padam tat sartiaio'ksz-iiro-imckkam sarvaiah inthmal loke saroani avrtya Usthah
16 On every side it has a hand and a foot, on every side an eye, a head and a face It has an ear everywhere It stands encompassing all in the worid
See B G. XIII. 13
17 sarvendrtya-gunabhasam sarvendriya-mvarjitam sarvasya prablmm Tianatn sarvasya iaranam brhat
17 Reflecting the qualities of all the senses and yet devoid of all the senses, it is the lord and ruler, it is the great refuge of all
See B G XIII 14.
18 nava-dvare pure deht hamso Itlayate bahth vast sansasya lokasya sthavarasya carasya ca.
18 The embodied soul in the city of nine gates sports (moving to and fro) in the outside (world), the controller of the whole world, of the stationary and the moving
SeeKatha.V i,BG.V 13
Itamsa. soul It is the Universal Spirit.
hatnsah paramalma Jianty avidyalmakam haryam S\
19. a-paiii-padojavanogrhitdpasyaiyacaksiihsairnotyakarnah, so vdti vedyam na ca tasyasti veita, tam ahur agryam ptmtsam mahantam 19. Without foot or hand, (yet) swift and grasping, he sees without eye, he hears without ear. He knows whatever is to
730 The Principal Upamsads jjj g
Imd^ jrfpA vlta-sokodhah-hprasmn mMmnam c^ S ?- tier ^ 1116 s*™*' ^ tie ereat is tie
£ ien the of Creator he sees the Lord and
His majesty.
See Taifiiriya Aranydka X io-i akraium- being actionless visaya-blwga-samhdpa-rahiam % afutiuh prasadat: through the grace of the Creator ihatw-prasMm- through the clarity born of sense-control Sense organs are said to be dhdlu
janma-nimdham pravadanty yasya Irahmavadino'bhiva- datiti nilyam
21 I know this undecaying, ancient (primeval) Self of all, present in everything on account of infinity Of whom they declare, there is stoppage of birth lie expounders of Brahman proclaim Him to be eternal
jaKma-nirodham: stoppage of birth
For whom the foolish think there are birth and death yasya janma-nirodham m&jhah pravadanti. Samkarewtja.
Narayana Dipika suggests a xe&&ai% t janma-mroiham rta laimUi yasya. For whom birth and death are not spoken
Sometimes it is used for the creation and destruction of the world yasya paramesvarasya karma jagaiah janma-samharau VijUSua- bhksu
This chapter makes out that the Impersonal and the Personal, Brahman and Isvara are not two different entities but the same in two aspects.
Svetdsvatara Upantsad
1 ya eko'varno bahudhd sakti-yogdd varndn anekan mhitdrtho dadhdh
mcaiti cd'nte visvam ddau sa devah sa no buddhya iubhayd samyunaktu
1 He who is one, without any colour, by the manifold exercise of his power distributes many colours in his hidden purpose and into whom m the beginning and at the end the universe is gathered, may He endow us with a clear under- standing
avarnah devoid of determinations nirvtsesah S
mkitdrtkah m his hidden purpose Without any motive or personal
interest agrhita-prayojanah, svartha-miapeksah
ante, in the end V saute The world was inactive, unmanifest
before creation
2 tad evd'gms tad adityas tad vayus tad u candramah tad eva Sukram tad brahma tad dpas tat prajdpahh
2. That indeed is Agni (fire), that is Aditya (the sun), that is Vayu (the wind) and that is the moon That, indeed, is the pure That is Brahma That is the waters That is Praya-pah (the lord of creation)
See Vajasaneyi Samhttd, XXXII 1 This verse occurs in MaMnarayana U in the following way yad ekam avyaktam ananta-iupam visvam puranam tamasah parastat
lad eva ftam tad u satyam alms tad etad brahma paramam kavinam tslapftrtam balmdhajatamjayamanam visvam btbharlt bhuvanasya nablnk
tad evagms tad vayus tat siiryas tad « candramah
lad eva sukram amrtam tad brahma tad dpas sa praja-patth
This verse indicates that the different Vedic gods are not inde- pendent but are forms of the One Supreme tad that, self-nature dtma-tallvam § Sukram pure, alternatively the starry firmament suddham anyad apt dlphman naksatrddi
S makes Brahma, Hiranya-garbhdimd and Praja-pati vtrdd-dtma Vijfianabhiksu makes" out that the Supreme through the power of maya created the manifestations and entered into them and is called by their names svamayayd adhidawikopddhin samasli-riipdn
732 The Principal upanisads iy. 5
srstvatesv anupravifya agnySditySd^ahkyam kbdhvS $!b!o ttetyaha. ' "
3 tvam stri ivam puman asi, tvam htmSra via vs kmsn, tvath jmjo dandena vaucasi, tarn idto thaw, v.svz!^ miRhah.
3 You are woman You are man You are the jouth and the maiden too You, as an old man, totter along with a star? Being born you become facing in even' direction
See Atharva Veda, X 8 27
4. nilahpatango hanto lohidksas fadid-garbla riaiasstmuirii. anadtmat tvam vibhutvcna variase yalo jaiaui bhaanin: viiva
4. You are the dark-blue bird, you are the green (parrot) with red eyes You are (the cloud) with the lightning m its •womb You are the seasons and the seas. Having no beginning you abide through omnipresence (Yon) from whom all worlds are born
pataf>gah: bird hhramarah, bee. S
5 ajam ekdm JohHa-iuMa-hsfmm bahvlh prajak STjanSri*, sarftpah
ajo Jiy eko jitsamano'n'iscie jalaty tnam bh't>!a-i>l.^s"' ajo'nyak
5 The One unborn, red, white and black, who produces manifold ofispnng similar in form (to herself), there lies th: one unborn (male) delighting Another unborn gives her up, having had his enjoyment
ft£te-&W«Jwii«w red, white and black Reference is cithr to f w [tajas), water {ap), and earth [anna), or the three gsnas, « - salti'i. and famas of prahii, ,
The one she-goat, red, white and black m time jwmo«* ry voS Ske herllf For the red, wlute &
of food or ol eartfl u is we °ju« produced heat, then water, then earth in (he dupe 01 food- \\Tokitaiorlohsta.
Svetasvatara Upantsad
The first unborn is he who is ignorant and therefore subject to the influence oiprakfti
The second unborn is he who has overcome his ignorance and is therefore free from bondage to prakjit.
6 dva suparnd saynjd sakhdya, samdnam vrksam parisasvajdle tayor anyah pippalam svadv atty anainami anyo'bhicakasiti
6 Two birds, companions (who are) always united, cling to the self-same tree Of these two the one eats the sweet fruit, and the other looks on without eating
SeeMU III i,RV I 164 20, Kathal.3 1
Our being in tune is an encounter of empirical existence and transcendent reality. The eternal in itself and the eternal in the empirical flux are companions The world is the meeting-point of that which is eternal and that which is manifested in tune Man as an object of necessity, a content of scientific knowledge, is different from man as freedom
7. samdne vrkse puruso nimagno'msayd socati mxthyamanah justain yada pa&yaty anyam ttam asya mahimanam iti viia-sokah.
7 On the self-same tree, a person immersed (in the sorrows of the world) is deluded and grieves on account of his helpless- ness When he sees the Other, the Lord who is worshipped and His greatness, he becomes freed from sorrow.
M U. Ill I 2. In verse 6, the cause of sorrow is traced to the sense of helplessness induced in us when we are lost m the objective universe m verse 7 freedom from sorrow is traced to our getting beyond object-thinking into contact with real being
8 rco'ksare parame vyoman yasmin devd adhi visve mseduh yas tarn 11a veda hm rca karisyati ya if tad vidus ta ime
samdsate
8 For him who does not know that indestructible being of the Rg Veda, whereon m the highest heaven all the gods reside, of what avail is the Rg Veda to him? They, indeed, who know that rest fulfilled
R V. 1. 164. 39; TaMiriya Aranyaka II ir 6. samasale rest fulfilled krtarthas tisthanti S
The Vedas are intended to lead to the realisation of the Supreme For those who study them without undergoing the inward discipline, they are not of much use
734 The Principal Upmpuk iy xo
9 ck SZZ m **" »*■» -
forth out of te, ,„ tta tlS ^f"
the other the individual soul
The whole world proceeds from the imperishable Brahnan The actual creator is Ijvara, the Personal God, who is acting tLX his power of maya, devatma-iakh 6 fi
10 mayam tu prahtim viddh, maymam. tu maheharam, tasyavayava-bkutats tu vydptam sarvam idam jagat '
io Know then that prakrU is maya and the wielder of maya is the Great Lord This whole world is pervaded by beings that are parts of Him
The Samkhya prakyii is identified with the maya of the Vedanla The Upaiusad attempts to reconcile the views of the Samkhya and the Vedanta
ISvara and SaUt are regarded as the parents of the universe Cp the following verses —
'Only when united with Saktt has Stva power to manifest; but without her, the God cannot even stir '
itvah saktya yuftio yadt bhavah saktah prabhavttum na ced evam dew na khedit kttialah spanditum apt Again, '0 Father-Mother, this world of ours was created by the compassion of your joint protectorship to the end that, by your mutual help, your joint design may fulfil itself '
ubhdbhyam etabhyam ubhaya-wdhtm vdditya dayayS sanathabhyam jajfie janaka-janani ma)-jagad_ tdam
Anandalaharil i 'I think of the mother of all the worlds, who creates this universe of real-unreal nature, protects the same by her own energy of the three gunas, and withdraws it at the close of every aeon and remains disporting herself in her oneness '
srstvakhhm jagad idam sad-asad svariipam iaUya svaya tngunayd (or tngunya) panpdh vttoam- samhftya kalpa-samaye ramate tdhatka law sarva-visva-yatumim mamsa stmramt Devi Bhagavatal z 5 , ry ^,„ or
As the Supreme brings forth the whole universe by His own power of maya, He is not m any way affected by it as others are
II yo yonim yonim adhitislhaty eko yasmm tdam san'i ca vicatti sarvam
tarn lianam varadam devam idyam mcayyemam santtm atyantam eh
11 The One who rules every single source, in whom all this dissolves (at the end) and comes together (at the beginning of creation), who is the lord, the bestower of blessing, the adorable God, by discerning Him one goes for ever to this peace
12 yo devanam prabhavas co'dbhavas ca, visvddhipo rudro
makarsih
htranya-garbham pasyata jayamanam, sa no hiddhyd iubhayd samynnakiu. 12. He who is the source and origin of the gods, the ruler of all, Rudra, the great seer, who beheld the golden germ (Hiranya-garbha) when he was born, may He endow us with clear understanding.
See III. 4.
13 yo devanam adhipo yasmm loka adhtsntah
ya Ise'sya dvi-padas catus-padah, kasmai devaya havisa vidhema
13 He who is the overlord of the gods, m whom the worlds rest, he who is the lord of two-footed and four-footed beings, to what God shall we offer our oblations?
kasmat, to what v iasmai to that God we shall offer our oblations SeeRV X 121 3.
visvasyaikam partveslttaram jfiatvd Hvam sdnttm atyantam eti
14 More minute than the minute, in the midst of confusion, the creator of all, of manifold forms, the one embracer of everything, by knowing Him as the auspicious, one attains peace for ever
See III. 7, V 13
15 sa cva kale bhuvanasya gopid, visvddhipah saroa-bhtiiesu
gudhah
yasmm yuktd brahmarsayo devatds ca, tarn tvam jMivd mrtyii-pdsdms chinattt.
73<5 The Principal Upam$ads IV ict
/ 5 n ? e , m<iee<i 1S the protector of the world m time, the lord of aU,hidden in all things, in whom the seers of Brahman and the deities are united, by knowing Him thus one cuts the cords of death
The fcnowers of Brahman as well as the deities know that their reality is in Brahman
16 ghrtat param mandam ivaiisuksmam jnalva stvam sana- bhtdesu gudham, vi&uasyaikam pariveshtaram jMiva Aevam mncyaU sam- paiaxh
16 By knowing Him, the auspicious, hidden in all beings hke the film exceedingly fine that rises out of clarified butter, the one embracer of the universe, by knowing God one is released from all fetters
Vj esa devo vtiva-karma makatma, soda jattanam hrdaye sannmstdli
hrdd mantfd manasabhhlplo, ya dad vidur antrtas it bhavanti
vj That god, the maker of all things, the great self, ever seated in the heart of creatures is framed by the heart, by the thought, by the mind, they who know that become immortal
See III 13
18 yada'tamas tan na diva 11a rdinr na san na cam chu evakevalah, .. tad aksaram tat savitur varcnyam, prapia ca tastnat frasria
purani
18 When there is no darkness, then there is neither day nor night, neither being nor non-being, only the au sp raou s > one alone That is the imperishable, the adorable hght of SauSr and the ancient wisdom proceeded from that.
savitur varcnyam the adorable light of Saviif. Literally the cho.a<i (splendour) of Savttr
SM T heL"ct?nsa"on of the ^^"^fi £f3
of subject and object can only be negative and cannot w
clear definition and demonstration ^
19 mmamurdhvafiHiaUryancamnamdhyc^
^ m tasya prahma ashyasya nama "or Ins a nv
19 Not above, not across, not in the middle, nor
one grasped Him There is no likeness of Him whose name is great glory.
20 na samdrse tisthati rupam asya, na caksusd pasyah kas canatnam
hrda hrdistham manasa ya enam, evam vidnr amrtas te bfwvantt
20 His form is not to be seen, no one sees Him with the eye Those who through heart and mind know Him as abiding in the heart become immortal.
God does not stand in finite form before the eyes or the mind Finite thinp serve as symbols enabling tis to realise the presence of the divine These verses demand the recognition of the absolute transcendence of God in relation to the world The deus abscondttus recedes into the distance when we seek to describe him by empirical forms, yet this Upamsad emphasises the personal aspect of the transcendent God He is Siva to whom we turn in prayer and praise
21 ajata ity evam kaicid bhrruh prapadyate
rudra yat te daksmam mukham tena mam pahx mtyam
21 'You are unborn' with this thought someone m fear approaches you 0 Rudra, may your face which is gracious protect me for ever
The attitude of bhakti is brought out here
22 ma nas take ianaye ma ?ia ayu$t, ma nogosu ma no asvesu
rinsah
viran ma no rudra bhamtto'vadhxr havtsmavtah sadam it tva havamahe. "j-V^t-'^' 22 Rudra, hurt us not m my child or grandchild, hurt us not in my life, hurt us not m my cattle, hurt us not m my horses Slay not our heroes m your wrath for we call on you always with oblations iVi- 1 '
See R.V. I 114. 8. 3 "
The Principal Vpamsads
ptah, tad-artliam ayam pancamo'dhydya arabhyaie brahimpare hranyagarbhal pare or paramtn brahmm § g&zSs hidden hkatr jmtum asakye Sarnkarananda As<ww/s perishable It is the cause of bondage, samsrit-karemm while »i<Zj« is the cause of moksa, »wksa-hetuh S" anyah, another, tat sakstlvdt, being- only the witness <§
The one and the many are both contained in the Supreme The knowledge of the One is vtdya, the knowledge of the many detached from the One is avidyd
2 yo yonim yanim adhihsthaty eko vtsvam ftip&m yofiis ca
mm prasfttam hapilam yas tarn ogre jnancur bibharli jdyamanam ca pasyei 2 He, who being one, rules over every single source, over all forms and over all sources, He who bears in His thoughts and beholds when born the fiery (red) seer who was engendered in the beginning
Wisdom is prior to the world-soul
kapilam hranya-garbham See IV 12 VI 1-2 The reference is not to the sage Kapila, the founder of the Samkhya philosophy The Supreme is described as looking upon Htranya-garbJia while he was being born He was the first to be created by God and endowed by Him with aU powers III 4 Hmnya-garbha or Brahma the creator is the intermediary between the Supreme God and the created world. He is the world-soul See IV 12, VI 18 fianath by thoughts See note IV 18
sarvdh
Svetahatara Upamsad
3 ekaikam j&lam bahudha mkurvan, asmm ksetre samlwraiy esa devah
blmyah srstva patayas tatJwsas sarvadhpatyam htrttte mahdtmd
3 That God, who, after spreading out one net after another m various ways draws it together in that field, the Lord, having again created the lords, the great self, exercises his lordship over all
ekaikam pralyekam, for every creature, such as gods, men, beasts, etc
jdlam net, samsara
asmtn ksetre in that field, m the world
yasmtn, another reading for asmm yatayah, another reading for palayal}
4 sarva disah firdltvam adhas ca hryak, prakdsayan bhrdjate
yadv amdvan
evam sa devo bhagavan varenyo yom-svabhavdn adhitislhaty ekah
4 As the sun, illumining all regions, above, below anc across, shines, so that one God, glorious, adorable, rules ove whatever creatures are bom from a womb
See IV n, V 2
yom-svabhavan whatever creatures are bom from a womb § mea by it the sources of world-existence like the elements of earth, e yomh karanam krtsnasyajagatah svabhavSnsvatmabhiitam prthvyai bhavan or kdrana-svabhavm karana-bhfttan prihivyadin £
The so-called causes of the world are not in themselves cau They operate only because God works through them.
5 yac ca suabh&vam pacati visvayonth, pacydms ca s<r
parmdmayed yah sarvam dad visvam adhttisthaty eko gitndn ca $ vtmyojayed yah
5 The source of all, who develops his own nature, who ' to maturity whatever can be ripened, who distnbu' qualities, He the one, rules over this whole world
6 tad vcda-guhyopamsatsu giidham, tad brahmd
brahma-yomm ye purvam dcvd rsayas ca tad viduh, te tanmayd a- babhuvuh
6 That which is hidden in the Upamsads which ar m the Vedas, Brahma knows that as the source of t'
?40 TtePriwpdVpanisais y
J~ Ge S 05 ^ asd seexs of old who Wrr *w «, ' its nature and bar*, t^J^^*** C " BB * 5)3 of
the *Lfc?S%-
famraj a, of its nature, fad aima-bhftld; §. 6
sa vtsve-rsipas iri-gunas tri-vartma pmMUpas samcardi sva-fama&Ml:, 7^But he Trio has qualities and is the doer of deeds that are to bear fruit {Le. bring recompense), he is the enjoyer, surely, of the consequence of -whatever he has done Assuming all forms, characterised br the three qualities, treading the three paths he, the ruler of the vital breaths (the individual soul), wanders about according to his deeds.
iri~gxr,£$: sstiza, rajas and temas.
iri-zartns: see I. 4 ihe paths of alumna, a5karn& and jn&m or dsca-ySna, piir-$ana. and iKanuga-yana. S.
■While the first sis verses speak of Thai (fef) or the Supreme the account of Thos {tram), the individual soul begins here.
buddficr gumnvlma-gunsna ca.hu aragra-mafro I.yaparo'pi drsfafi.
S. He is of the measure of a thumb, of appearance like the sun, endowed "with thought and self-sense, but -with onlr tie qualities of understanding and the self he seems to be of tie size of the point of a goad.
apam, another reading azzra. ^ Sims-gitttsna: of the qualities of the body like old age, etc S
o. valagra-Ma-Magasya saiailha talpitasya ca ihaso mas sa vijfxyas sa cSimr.tyaya kalptdc.
9. This living self is to be known as a part of the hundredth, part of the point of a hair divided a hundredfold, yet it is capable of infinity.
The individual soul is potentially infinite.
10 naiva sin na pumdn esa na caivdyam napwhsakak yadyac chanram ddaite tena Una sa raksyate.
raksyate' samraksyate, tattaddharmdn atmany adhyasySbhimaf.yaie. Another reading is yujyaie or joined sambadyaie. The living self, jiva is vtjfianatman. S
vivrddhi-janma karmdnugdny amtkramena dehi sthanesu rupany dbhi samprapadyaie.
11. By means of thought, touch, sight and passions and by the abundance of food and drink there are the birth and development of the (embodied) self. According to his deeds, the embodied self assumes successively various forms in various conditions.
mohaih' v homath, by the sacrifices.
12 sthulatii sukshidm bakfim caiva, rupdni dekT sva-gunair vrnoh
kriyd-gunair dima-gunais ca tesam saniyoga-hdur aparo'pi drsiah.
12 The embodied self, according to his own qualities, chooses (assumes) many shapes, gross and subtle. Having himself caused his union with them, through the qualities of his acts and through the qualities of his body, he is seen as another.
13 anady ananlam kahlasya n.adk\e tisiasya srastdram
aneka-rupam
visvasyaikam parivestitaram pah a devam ir.ucyaie sarva-pdsaih
13 Him who is without beginning and without end, in the midst of chaos, the creator of all, of manifold form, who alone
742 The Principal Upanisads v. 14
embraces the universe, he who knows God is freed from all fetters
See IV 14
kahlasya gaJiam-gabkira-samsdrasya S The wonder and mystery of the cosmic process are emphasised
devam jyotl-rUpam paramdtmdnam S of the nature of light, the Supreme Self
sarva-pasaih avidya-kama-karmabhih S The bonds of ignorance and its resultants of desire and deed
14 bhdva-grdhyam aniddkhyam, bhdvdbhdva-karam itvam kald-sarga-karam devam, ye vtdus te jahus taman
14 Him who is to be grasped by the mind, who is called incorporeal, who makes existence and non-existence, the kindly (the auspicious), the maker of creation and its parts, the Divine, they who know Him have left the body behind.
aniddkhyam Samkarananda reads amldkhyam, who is called air as being the breath of the breath, prdnasya prdnam nida body, anida bodiless
kald 5 explains it to mean the sixteen holds beginning with frana or life and ending with ndma, name Prasna VI 4
Vijnana-bhiksu means by it 'inherent power,' he who creates by his inherent power
The Vedas and the other sciences are called Mas
Svetdsvatara XJpanisad
I svabhavam eke kavayo va&anii, kalam taihdnye pantmihya- manah,
devasyana mahttna tu loke yenedam bhramyate brahma-ca- kram.
1 Some wise men speak of inherent nature, others likewise, of time (as the first cause), being deluded But it is the greatness of God m the world, by which this Brahma-wheel is made to turn
See 1. 2
The cosmic process is generally represented by a rotating wheel. It is ever moving, thanks to the greatness of God It is the 'moving image of eternity ' In the national flag of India, the wheel is placed against the background of white The wheel is represented m blue gagana-sadrsam, megha-varnam, and is placed against the background of white which is above all colours, the pure radiance of eternity.
2 yendvrtam mtyam idam hi sarvam, piah kalakaro guni
saroavid yah
teneiitam karma vivartate ha, prthvyapya-tejo'mla-kham cmiyam.
2 He by whom this whole world is always enveloped, the knower, the author of time, the possessor of qualities and all knowledge Controlled by Him (this) work (of creation) unfolds itself, that which is regarded as earth, water, fire, air and ether
kalakaro author of time, kalasyapi karta v is kala-kalo, the des- troyer of time kalasya myanta, upaharia kalah sarvavntasakari, tasyHpi vinasakarak See also VI 16
(knower of) all knowledge saroavid yah or sania-vidyah
3 tat karma krtvd vimvartya bhuyah, taltvasya tattvena sametya
yogam
ekcna dvabhyam iribhir astabhir va, kalena caivatma-gunaxs ca suk?maih
3 Having created this work and rested again, having entered into union with the essence of the self, by one, two, three or eight, or by tune too and the subtle qualities of the self
744 The Principal Upamsads VI 5
one punisa of the Samkhya two punisa and ptakrti three the three gunas, sattva, rajas and tamos eight the five cosmic elements and manas (mind), buddht (under- standing), and aliam-kara or self-sense See B G VII 4 atma-gunaih the affections of the mind, love, anger, etc antah- karana-gunaih kamadtbhih §
4 drabhya karmani gunanvtfam, bfidvan ca sarvdn vimyojayed yah
tesam abhave krta-karma-ndiah karma-ksayeydti sa tattvato' nyah
4 Who, having begun with works associated with the (three) qualities, distributes all existents In the absence of these (qualities), there is the destruction of the work that has been done and in the destruction of the work he continues, m truth, other (different from what he has produced)
According to S, this verse tells us that if we dedicate all our works to Isvara, we will not be subject to the law of karma, That person, his works being destroyed and his nature punned, moves on outerent from all things, from all the results of ignorance, knowing himself to be Brahman ' , ,, . , -,„,_
vimyojayed isvare samarpayet tesam isvare samarfiM alma sambandhmavastad-ab)wvepurva-km^^
to that Brahman which , different from all things, iatlvebhyoyad anyad brahma tad yah S
Th* verse u clpable of different uiterpretafaons (1) The Lord passes through different states, yet knows Himself to be above C all (2) If we do works not out of selfish interest but to plea* Se Lord our work ceases to bind us and we becomefree Samkara- nanda and Vipana-bhiksu adopt the latter view
< ddis sa samyoga-mmitta-hetuh paras tnkdldd akalo'p drstah
5 tat mia%am bhava-bhutam idyam devam ******** , Hett^^^thesourceofthecauses^umte
(tie s^th theTdyf • %
Uds of time past, presen t ^/f^f^i has many
source of the causes which mite cp. smyog*
VI 9 Svetaivatara Upanisad 745
upasya purvam. worshipped first Worship is the preliminary to knowledge
visoa-rtLpam who has many forms God assumes the form which the worshippers attribute to Him
ttpasakaih yad yat rupatn ttpasyate tat*-tad-rftpa-dhannam
6 sa vrksa-kdlakrhbhih paro'nyo yasmdt prapaiicah pari- vartate'yam
dharmavaham pdpanudam bhagesam pidtvdtmastham arnrtam visva-dtema.
6 Higher and other than the forms of the world-tree and time is he from whom this world revolves who brings good and removes evil, the lord of prosperity, having known Him as m one's own self, the immortal, the support of all (he attains Brahman)
vrhsa tree See Katha VI 1
dharmavaham diianna is the enlightening power of the Saviour God manifested in the human soul See R V I 164 Siva is the bnnger of dharma, dharmdvalia
7 tarn isvaranam paramam mahe&varam, tarn devatdndm
paramecin ca daivatam pahmpatTnamparamamparastat, vidama devam bhnvaneiam tdyam
7. He in whom is the Supreme Lord of lords, who is the highest deity of deities, the supreme master of masters, trans- cendent, him let us know as God, the lord of the world, the adorable.
adhtkai ca drfyate parasya sakttr vividhatva &uyatesvdbhdvikTjfidna-ba!a-kriya ca
8 There is no action and no organ of his to be found There is not seen his equal or his better. His high power is revealed to be various, indeed. The working of his intelligence and strength is inherent (m him).
9 na tasya kascitpattr ash loke, na cesiid navoa ca tasya Imgam, na karanam karanadhpadhipo na casya kaicij jamta na
cadhipah
9 Of Him theie is_no master in the world, no ruler, nor is there any mark of Him He is the cause, the lord of the lords of the sense organs, of Him there is neither progenitor nor lord
74& The Principal JJpamsads YL 13
Itngam mark, any sign from which we could infer the existence of God, as fire from smoke dhUma-sthaiityam ymanumiyeta § jamta progenitor, janayita £
10 yas tantunabha wa tantubhih pradhanajaih
svabhdvaiak deva ekah svam amiot, sa no dadhdi brahmapyayam to The one God who, according to his own nature, covers himself like a spider with threads produced from pradhdna (unmanifested matter) , may He grant us entrance into Brahman
brahmapyayam entrance mto Brahman, eki-bhavam § yathornanabhr alma-prabhavats tanlublar atmanam eva samavrttolt, talha pradlidnajair avyoMa-prabliavair nama-ritpa-kartnabhts tanks- tjtantyaih svam atmanam avrnot §
As the spider covers itself with threads produced from itself, so does the one God cover Himself with the products oiprahrU
tar-atma r karmddhyaksas sarva-bhiitddhvdsas saksi ceta kevalo
mrgmaica.
11. The one God hidden in all beings, all-pervadmg, the inner self of all beings, the ordainer of all deeds, who dweBs in all beings, the witness, the knower, the only one, devoid of qualities
12 eko vait mskriyanam bahunam ekam btjam bahuAMyah
tarn dtmasiham ycnupaiyanti dhirds iesdm sukham
12 The one controller of the many, inactive, who makes the one seed manifold The im who perceive , B* . « atog » their self, to them belongs eternal happiness, not to otners
due to their organs and the H^ ^S Sim <« sarva ht krtya natmam samavetah him tu aenmanyv ,
ms-knyo ntrgunah §
See BG III. 20 X3 mtyo miydndm cetanas cetandnam eko bahunam yo
mucyate sarva-pdsath
VI i6
Svetdh/alara Ufamsad
13 He is the eternal among the eternals, the intelligent among the intelligences, the one among many, who grants desires That cause which is to be apprehended by discrimination (of sdmkhya) and discipline {yoga) — by knowing God, one is freed from all fetters
See Katha II 2 13
mtyo mtyanam the eternal among the eternals The living souls are eternal and He is the eternal among them or the eternal may be meant for the elements of earth, water, etc jivdnSm madhye adhava pythivyddmdni madhye &
14 na tatra. suryo bhati na candra-iarakam, nema vidyuto
bhantt kuto'yam agnih tarn eva bhdntam anubhdU saroam, tasya bhasd sarvam idam vibhdh
14 The sun does not shine there nor the moon and the stars, nor these lightnings, much less this fire After Him, when He shines, everything shines, by His light all this is lllurmned.
See Katha II 2 15, MU II 2 io,BG XV 6
15 eko hamso bhuvanasyasya madhye, sa evdgms sahh san-
mvistah
tarn eva vtdttvatimrtyum eti, nanyah panthd vidyafe' yandya
15. The one bird in the midst of this world This indeed is the fire that has entered into the ocean Only by knowing Him does one pass over death There is no other path for going there.
liathsa. bird, the highest self which destroys the source of bondage, ignorance, etc hanh avidycidt-bandha-Mranam ih hamsah
16 sa viha-krd vtsva-vid atnia-yomr jfiah kdla-kdro gum
sarvavidyah
pradhdna-ksetrapia-patth gunesah samsdra-moksa-sthitt- bandha-hetufi
16 He is the maker of all, the knower of all, the self-caused, the knower, the author of time, the possessor of qualities, the knower of everything, the ruler of nature and of the spirit, the lord of qualities, the cause of worldly existence, and of libera- tion, of continuance and of bondage
Slina-yonih' self-caused Sima casau ymii cd Sbna-yomh S\ ditnanam yomh, alma-yonih the source of all selves hala-karo the author of time See VI. 2, 21.
748 - The Principal Upanisads XI 20
fradhaw avyakiam, nature. ksefrapw vijiuirMma, spirit. The Supreme binds, sustains and dissolves worldly easteace.
ya Ue asyajagato nityam eva-ndnyo hdsir vidyaic'Janr.2
17. Becoming that, immortal, existing as the lord, the knower, the omnipresent, the guardian of this -world is He vbo rules this world for ever, for no other cause is found for the ruling.
isa-samsthah. existing as the lord. iissvamiMSBnydks&ifshysF/Sssu tsasamsthaJi. , No other is able to rule the world. r.fayo Muh samsriho vis\sk S
tasmai
iam ha devam aitna-hiddM-praMsam «j«».»Jjht w» saranam aJiam prapadye. 18. To Him who, of old, creates Brahma and who, verty, delivers to him the Vedas, to that God who is lighted .toy Bis own intelligence, do I, eager for liberation, resort for refuge.
Slma-iuddhi-praMsam' gamkarananda explains as srs-to&~ saksinam, whoistheljghtorwitnessof ^-^°wledf: ^
It can be derived in two ways: (i) SHmm tadikv » wwj ■£< saivaprakaso'sydy aima-bnddhi-&aMsam (z) aima-b.iasr.xir. pros*- sayatity Mtna^uddhi-praMsans S *„„:t a \,~,m
10 nisMam niskrtyam ianiam nirasadyam ir.rarjaw, amrtasy&faram selum dagdher.dhamm tuntato «.
10 To 'him who is without parts, without acbjity, tranqU irreproaSe, without blemish, the highest bridge to am* tality like a fire with its fuel burnt. niraf.ja«om; nirhpcan, without blemish.
20 vadd eanrnad ahasam vtdayisyar.nmar.avah
ida deem mnjUya duhkhasydrdo cf
20 . When men shall roll Vfi^t^^gSt* leather, then will there be an end of sorrow, apart irom
God * _
Svetdsvatam Upanisad
that impossible becomes possible, only then will sorrow cease, without knowing God. There is no other way for ending sorrow than the knowledge of God. devam • v. swam
21 tapah-prabhdvad deva-prasdddc ca, brahma ha svetasvalaro 'tha vidvdn
atyasramibhyah paramam pavitram, provaca samyag- rsi-samgha-juslam.
21. By the power of austerity and the grace of God, the wise Svetasvatara in proper manner spoke about Brahman, the Supreme, the pure, to the advanced ascetics, what is pleasing to the company of seers
by the power of austerity and the grace of God' the grace of God does not suspend the powers of the soul but raises them to their highest activity The super-natural intensifies the natural There is nothing magical which interferes with the life of man We are persons, not things Our freedom cannot be obliterated by divine grace. By his own free action man makes his own the ideal which he seeks. Baron Von Hugel quotes from St Bernard's Traclafus de Gratia el Libera Arfoino, cap XIV 47 'That which was begun by Grace gets accomplished alike by both Grace and Freewill so that they operate mixedly not separately, simultaneously not successively, in each and all of their processes The acts are not in part Grace, in part free will, but the whole of each act is effected by both in an undivided operation.' The Mystical Element of Rehgicn, Vol I, pp 69 ff
advanced ascetics paramahaihsa-samnydsitiasta aatydiran inak S, the highest of the four orders of ascetics
Cp caturcidhd bhtksavas ca bafiudakau kitttcakau
hamsah paramahamsas ca yo yak pascal sa uttamak
22. This highest mystery in the Vedanta which has been declared in a former age should not be given to one whose passions are not subdued nor again to one who is not a son or a pupil
See 13 U. VI 3 12; Maitri VI. 29
prasdntaya, prakarsena sdntam sakala-ragad i-tnala-ral.itam c'tlamyasya tasmai putrdya tddrsa sisydya vd ddtarcyam, lad vipirlldya ptttrdya stsydya va siiehddind brahmavidyd na vaktavya £
It should not be taught to a son or a pupil, if his passions are not subdued.
The Principal Upantsads IV 23.
tasymte kathita hy arthdh, prakasanie mahdtmanah, pra- haiante mahatmanah 23 These subjects which have been declared shine forth to the high-souled one who has the highest devotion for God and for his spiritual teacher as for God Yea they shine forth to the high-souled one.
KAVSlTAKI-BRAHMAtfA UPANISAD
Katmtaki-Brahmana Upamsad, also called KausTfakT Upani- sad 1 does not form a part of the Kansitdki Brahmana of thirty chapters which has come down to us and the name can be accounted for by treating the Aranyaka of which it forms a part as itself included in the Brahmana literature of the Bg Veda 1 Samkara refers to it in several places m his com- mentary on the Brahma Sutra and Sarhkarananda has com- mented on it There are various rescensions of the text and the version adopted in Samkarananda's Diptkd is followed in this work. The Upanisad has four chapters.
Dr S K. Belvalkar has edited the text and given an English translation of the first chapter of this Upanisad 3
« Samkantnanda explains the name thus kn kutsitam mr.dyam heyan. ity arthah, iiiam Silalam samsanham sukkam yasya sa htsilak eia ktmtahah tasyapalyam kausttakth II i
1 Brdhmanas also deal with Vedanta and so sometimes include the Upamsads: brahmanam apt tnmdkam, vidki-rupmn, art) avada-rupatn, tad-iibhaya-vilaksanam ca, v\dhy-artha,vadobhaya-vilal>saua,m hi tedanta- vakyam Madhusudana. Prasihana-bheda
3 Four Unpublished Upantsadtc Texts and The Pa.rya.iiPa Vtdya {1925}
Kausitaki-Brahmana Upanisad
i atro ha vai gangydyanir yaksyamdna arumm vavre, sa ha putram hetaketum prapghdya yajayett; tarn hdbhydgatam papraccha, gautamasya pulrdsti samvrtam loke yasmin ma dMsyasi, anyatamo vadhvd tasya, ma loke dliasyasih; sa hovdca, ndham etad veda, hatUdcdryam prcchanih sa ha pitaram dsddya papraccha iVili maprakstt katham pratibravamh, sa hovdca, aham apy etan na veda, sadasy eva vayam svadhydyam adhitya hardmahe yan nah pare dadati, ehy ubhau gamtsyava tti, sa ha samtt-pams cttram gangydyanim prattcakrama updydmU: tarn hovdca, brahmdrho'si, gautama, yo na manam updgah, ehi vyeva tvd jnapayisyamtti
I Citra Gangyayani, verily, wishing to perform a sacrifice chose Arum He, then, sent his son SVetaketu saying, 'you perform the sacrifice.' When he had arrived, he asked of him, 0 son of Gautama, is there a hidden place m the world in which you will place me' Or is there another way and will you place me in its world' Then he said, 'I know not this However, let me ask the teacher ' Having approached his father, he asked, 'thus has he asked me, how shall I answer? Then he said, T, too, know not this Let us learn the study of the Veda at his residence and obtain what others give to us Come, let us both go, 'Then with fuel m hand, he returned to Citra Gang- yayani and said, 'May I come near to j'ou (as a pupil) To him, then, he said, 'you are worthy of the knowledge ol Brahman, 0 Gautama, for you have not gone into conceit Come, I will make you understand' (clearly).
SeeBU. VI i.CU V a gdngydyant v gargyayam vavre chose, varanam cakre
abhyagalam has arrived, v aslnam, when he was seated putrdsh, v pulro'st, you are the son of Gautama. samvrtam hidden place, samyag avrtam guptam slhdnam anyatamo v anyamako
Scaryam- teacher, sarva-jiiam, sarva-idstrarthasya piataram anusflia- tdram
Worthy of the knowledge of Brahman V brahmdrgho'si brahma- grdhyasi.
« See Belvalkar. The Paryanka Vidya, p 32
754 The Principal Vpanisads 1 2
Sw^ t0 , be hon0 , Ured llke Bmhma ». Mimavat mananiyah you liave not gone info conceit you do not affect pride em come, dgacclta
pidpayisyami, will make you understand clearly vtpldpaytsydmi, spasfam bodhayisyami, na tu saniehadikam iam- yisyann J
The reference is to the two ways deva-yana and pity-yam Those who travel by the former do not return to a new Me on earth but attain liberation by gaming a true knowledge of Brahman, those who travel by the latter to the world of the fathers return to earth to be born again and again
In the notes on this Upamsad references are to Samkarananda's Dlptka
2 sa Iwvaca, ye vat he casmal lokdt prayantt candramasam eva te sane gacchantt, tenant pranaih purva-pdksa dpyayak tan apara-paksena prajanayaU, etad vat svargasya lohasya dvaram, yac candramds tarn yah praty aha tarn atwjate atka yo na praty aha tarn tlia vrshr hhUtva varsah sa tha Mo v&, patango va, matsyo va, iahmir va, sttnJw vd, varaho va, parasvdn va, MrdiHo vd, puruso vd, anyo va tern tesu sthdnesu pratydjdyaie, yaiM- karma yathd-vidyam, tarn dgatamprcchait ko'sih, tamprattMiyat- mcaksanad rtavo reta abhrtam paikadasdt prasutdt pttrya- vatah
tarn ma pumst kartaryerayadhvam puma kartrd matan ma msinca
sa jdya upajayamano dvaddia-trayodaiopamdso dvddaia-trayo- dasena pttrdsam tad-vide'ham pratttad-wde'kam, tan ma rtavo'martya va abharadhvam Una salyena tern tapasa rlur asmy drtavo'smt, ho' si, tvam asmih, tarn attsryate
2 Then he said, those who, venly, depart from this world, they all, in truth, go to the moon In the earlier (bright) half, it (the moon) thrives on their breathing spirits, in the latter (dark) half, it causes them to be born (again). The moon, venly, is the door of the world of heaven Whoever answers it (properly), him it sets free (to go to the higher worlds) m whoever answers it not, him having become ram, it rains down here Either as a^worm, or as an insect or as a fish or as a Dim. or as a hon, or as a boar, or as a snake, or as a tiger, , or ■» a person or as some other rn this or that condition he is born again according to his deeds, according to his S comes thither, he asks him who are you> He JddgJJ From the far-shining, 0 ye Seasons, the seed was f gj» produced from the fifteenfold from the home of the fathers
Kausitaki-Brahmana Upamsad
(the ancestors) sent me in a man as an agent and with, a man as an agent, placed me in a mother 1 So was I born, being born m the twelfth or thirteenth month united to a father of twelve or thirteen months, for the knowledge of this was I, for the knowledge of the opposite of this Therefore, 0 ye seasons, brmg me on to immortality by this truth, by this austerity I am (like) a season I am connected with the seasons Who are you? (the sage asks again) 'I am you,' he replies Then he sets him free
apara-paksena with the latter half, v aparapaksena in the latter half causes them to be bom again the moon sends those who do not proceed by deva-ydna (the path of the gods) to brahma-loka, back to life on earth
We are bom in accordance with our conduct and knowledge karma-vidydmisdrena subham asublmm vydmiiram ca sariram bhavatx
The question 'Who are you?' is asked by the teacher, according to Samkarananda hamnd-rasa-purna-hrdayo veddntdrlha-ydthdtmya- vtt gimi-laksana-sampan.no guruh prasnam karoh upajayamanah born or perhaps reborn twelve or thirteen months a year
There are two kinds of knowledge, unto birth, and unto ignorance The former takes us to the path of the gods, the latter to the path of the fathers Heaven and hell are stages on the journey and belong to the world of tune, to a succession of births Knowledge of Brahman takes us beyond both
THE COURSE TO THE BRAHMA-WORLD
3 sa etam deva-yanam panthdnam dpadyagm-lokam dgacchati, sa vayu-lokam, sa vartma4okam, sa mdra-lokam, sa prajd-pah-lok- am, sa brahma-lokam tasya ha va etasya lokasydro hrado muhurta yestiha vijard nadifyo vrksah sdlajyam savisthanam, apardjttam dyatanam, mdra-prajdpati dvdra-gopau, vibhu-pramitam, vicak- sanasandy amttaujah paryanhah, pnyd ca mdnasT, prahrupd ca cdksusT, puspdny dddydvayato vat ca jagdny ambds' cdm- bayavis cdpsaraso' mbayd nadyah, tarn tttham-vtd dgacchati, tarn brahma habhtdhdvatah, mama yas'asd vijardm va ayam nadhn prapan na vd ayam jarayisyatiti
3 Having entered on this path of the gods, he comes to the
1 Dr Belvalkar's rendering of an amended text is this "From the illustrious one (the moon), the fifteenfold, the (new) bom lord of the ■world of the manes, O ye seasons, the seed was gathered
'Do ye then, send me on into a male progenitor, and with the half of the male agent deposit me into the mother '
756 The Principal Upamsads I. 4
world of Agm, then to the world of Vayu, then to the world of Varuna, then to the world of India, then to the world of Praja-pati, then to the world of Brahma This brahma world, venly, has the lake Ara, the moments yesttlta, the nver Vijara, the tree Ilya, the city Salajya, the abode Aparajita, the two door-keepers Indra and Prajd-pah, the hall Vibhu, the throne Vicaksana, the couch Amitaujas, the beloved Manas! and her counterpart Caksusi, both of whom taking flowers, venly, weave the worlds, tie mothers, the nurses, the nymphs, and the nvers To it (to such a world) he who knows this conies To him Brahma runs (advances towards), and says, *It is on account of my glory, venly, he has reached the nver, Ageless, He, venly, will not grow old '
After Vayu-loka, some texts have adttya-loka
BraJima-loka is hirmya-garblsa-loka of which an account is given
The lake ara is the first impediment to entrance into ifahmaAoka. It
is said to be composed of the enemies
an desire, wrath, etc
muhilrtah moments which produce desire, wrath, etc , and destroy
yiu^tama-krodhadt-pravrtyutpadanena ghnantih yeshhah the moments spent in subduing desires the nver Vtprd ageless, mgatajard the tree Ilya tla prthivt tad-riipatvena tlya-iti-mtnatamh Z cdvSSlana the city is so called because on the bank are btm- 2 1 fie as a sal tree, a place abounding with water in ^roany £Z*mv£**i tSb. * . and gardens inhabited by
ity adt iabdabhtdlieya
>«--!5.•rs-sSr' ,- "
of existence
1 Dr i5ei Xie^7« and emergences
I 5. Kausttafa-Brahmana Upamsad 757
mdlankdrendlankrto brahma-vidvdn brahmabhipraiU, sa tigacchaly dram hradam, tam manasdiyeh, tam Uvd samprahvido maj}anh, sa dgacckah muhurtdn yeshkdn te'smdd apadravanti, sa dgacckah, vvjaram nadvm, tam manasazvdtyeh, tat-sukrta-duskile dkunute vd, tasya pnyd jndtayah sukrtam upayanty apnyd duskrtam, tad yathd rathena dhdvayan ratha-cakrc paryavek- setavoam aho-rdtre paryaveksetaivam sukrta-duskrte sarvdm ca dvandvdnt, sa ess visukrto vidnskrto brahma-vidvdn brahmavoa- bhpraih.
4 Five hundred apsarasas (nymphs) go towards him, one hundred with fruits m their hands, one hundred with ointments in their hands, one hundred with garlands in their hands, one hundred with garments m their hands, one hundred with powdered perfumes m their hands They adorn him with the adornment (worthy) of Brahma He, having been adorned with the adornment of Brahma, goes into (advances towards) Brahma He comes to the lake Ara and he crosses it with his mind On coming to it those who know only the immediate present 1 sink He comes to the moments yeshha and they flee from him He comes to the. river Vrjara (Ageless), this, he crosses with his mind alonef There he shakes off his good deeds and his evil deeds His dear relatives succeed to his good deeds and those not dear, to the evil deeds Then just as one dnvm a chanot looks at the two wheels (without being touched b' them), even so he will look at day and night, at good deec and evil deeds and on all the pairs of opposites Thus on freed from good and freed from evil, the knower of Brahma goes on to BraJiman
j>Ma fruits, another reading phana ornaments ablia>a7ia fairs of opposite like light and darkness, heat and cold, pleas and pain, clidyatapa-iltosna-suklia-duhkhadim He transcends limitations of the empirical world
5 sa dgaccliatttyam vrksam, tam brahma-gandhahpravtsati dgacckah sdlajyam samsihdnam, tam brahma-rasah pravisat dgacchaty apardptam dyatanam, tam brahma-tcjah pravtsat agacchah tndra-piaja-pato dvdra-gopau tdv asmdd apadravi sa agacchah mbhu-pravulam, tam btahma-yahh pravtsa, agacchah vtcaksandm dsandhn bihad-ralhantare siimani p fddau, iyaitanaudhasc cdparau pddau, vairupa-vairdje a:
1 satnmiah, tratmiah, accordant and discordant thought Belvalkar
758 The Principal Vpanisais I 6.
sakvara-raivate tiraict, sa prajM prajfiaya ht vipasyaii, sa dgacchaty amitaujasam paryankam, sa panvs iasya bhiitan ca bhavisyac capiirvaupadau, irii-cera caparau, bhadrayajmyajnlye sirsanye brhad-rathantare amicye, rcas ca saindm ca prMnM- nant.yapnhsi hraictnam somams'ava upaslaraijam ndgitho'paras ca yah srir upabarhanam, tasmin brahmaste, tarn ittham-tnt paienaivagra drohali, tarn brahnd prcchati ko'siti, tarn prait- briiyat
5 He comes to the tree Ilya and the fragrance of Brahma enters into him He comes to the city Salajya, the favour of Brahma enters into him He comes to the abode Aparajita, the radiance of Brahma enters into him He comes to the trro door-keepers, Indra and Prajd-pati and they run away from him. He comes to the hall Vibhu and the glory of Brahma enters into him He comes to the throne of Vicaksana; the S&man verses, Brhad and Rathantara, are its two fore feet, the Syaita and the Naudhasa the two hind feet, the Vairupa and the Vairdja, the two lengthwise sides (pieces) the Sakvm and the Raivata are the two cross ones It is wisdom for by wisdom one sees clearly. He comes to the couch Amitaujas That is the breathing spirit, the past and the future ar e its two fore feet, prosperity and the earth are the two hind feet, the Bhadra and the YajMyajffiya the two head pieces, the Brhai ana the Rathantara the two lengthwise pieces; the Rg verses | and the Saman chants, the cords stretched lengthwise, the yaps formulas the cross ones; the moonbeams the cushion, tte vdgUha the coverlet, prosperity the P^-^J^ J*£j Brahma sits. He who knows this ascends it ^.^JJ only. Brahma asks him, 'Who are you?' and he should answer
sa' He, the devotee, upasakah
Zabhasantjayajayetaammvccaraym^ tlwthroneofVtcahsam seeAthanaVedaW.3 ^^*£^twn of Vratya's seat and Attareya Brahman VIII. 12 for a aescnp
IDENTITY WITH THE SUPREME SELF _
KausTtakt-Brdhmana Upamsad
bhwtasya tvam utmost, yas tvam ast so'ham asmi, tarn alia ko'ham asmiti, satyam tit, bruyat, kim tad yat satyam ttt, yad anyad devebhyai ca pranebhyas ca tat sad, afha yad devds" ca pranas ca tat tyam, tad etayd vdcdbhivyahnyate satyam tti, etavad idam sarvam idam sarvam asity evamam tad alia, tad etac chloke- ndbhyuktam
6 I am season, I am connected with the seasons From space as the source I am produced as the seed for a wife, as the light of the year, as the self of every single being You are the self of every single being What you are that am I He says to him, 'Who am I?' He should say, 'The Real ' What is that called the Real? Whatever is different from the gods (sense organs) and the vital breaths that is sat, but the gods and the vital breaths are the tyam Therefore this is expressed by the word satyam, all this, whatever there is All this you are. Thus he speaks to him then This is declared by a Rg verse
yom source upaddna-kdtana
bharyayat for a wife, v bhdya produced from light
devebhyah from the gods, tndriyebhyah
7 yapldarah sdmastrd asdvmmurttr avyayah sa brahmeh vtpieya rsir brahma-mayo mahdn
iti, tarn aha kena me paumsydm ndmdny apnottti, prdneneh bruyat, kena napumsakamU, manaseti, kena strl-ndmdmU.ydcett, kena gandhamti, prdneneti, kena rupamh, caksuseh, kena sabdan th, srotreneh, kendnnarasan itt, phvayeh, kena karmdmti, liastabhyam iti, kena sukha-duhkhe th, sanreneti, kenanandam ratim prajattm th, upastlieneti, kenetya ttt, pdddbhydm iti kena dhyo vvjmtavyam kamdn ih, prajnayatvett, bruyat, tarn aha apo vat khalu me loko'yam te'sdv tti, sayd brahmano ptor yd vyaslts tamphmjayati , tarn vyashm vyasmde, ya evam veda, ya evam veda 7 The great seer consisting of the sacred word, whose belly is Yapis, whose head is the Sdman, whose form is the Rg, the imperishable is to be known as Brahma He says to him, 'By what do you acquire my masculine names'' He should answer, 'by the vital breath ' 'By what, my neuter ones?' 'By mind ' 'By what, my feminine names ? "By speech ' 'By what, smells ? ' 'By the breath' 'By what, forms?' 'By the eye.' 'By what, sounds?' 'By the ear' 'By what, the flavours of food?' 'By the tongue ' 'By what, actions?' By the two hands ' 'By what, pleasure and pam?' 'By the body ' By what, joy, delight and procreation?' 'By the generative organ ' 'By what, movement?'
760 The Principal Upanisads I 7.
'By the two feet ' 'By what, thoughts, what is lo be known, and desires?' 'By intelligence,' he should say To'him he says, 'The waters, verily, are my world It is (they are) yours' Whatever victory is Brahma's, whatever belongs to him, that victory he wins, that belonging he gets who know this, yea who knows this
ttya movements, galih
prajiiaya by intelligence, svayam-prakaienatma-iodhena.
In Brahma-loha, whatever belongs to the presiding deity Brahma
belongs also to the aspirant who reaches it
yavat madiyam tavat tvadiyam
Cp with this account Saiapatha Brahmana XI VI. i.Jaimmiya Upamsad Brahmana I, 17-18, 42-44, 49-50
Kausifaki-Brdhtnana Upanisad
THE DOCTRINE OF PRAljfA (LIFE-BREATH) IDENTITY WITH BRAHMA
1. prdijo brahmeti ha smdha kausztakih: iasya ha td'efasya prdnasya brahmano mano didatn, cakstcr goptr, srotrair. sam- Srdvayitr, vak parivestn; sci yo ha va dasya prdr.asya brahmano mano diitam veda diitavfin bhavati, yas caksur goptr gop'nndn bhavaii, yah srolram sarhsrdvayitr satnsrdvayitrmdn bhavati, yo vacam parivestfim parive$irimdn bhavati, iasmai va etastrai prdndya brahmana dak sarvd devoid dydcamdndya bilirt: haranli, exam haivdsmai servant bhiHdr.y aydcamandyaiva balim haranti, ya eoam veda fasyopamsan na ydccd iti, tad yalhd grdtnar,: bhiksitvd'ldbdhvopavisen ndham ato dattaw asniydm Hi, ia euamam upamantrayante ye pttrastdt praiydcaksTran, esa dharmo'ydcata bhavati, annadds tv eiainam xtpamaKtrayante, dadama ta iti.
1. The breathing (living) spirit is Brahma, thus, indeed, Kausitaki used to say. Of this same breathin g spirit which is Brahma, the mind, verily, is the messenger; the eye the protector, the ear the announcer, speech the housekeeper. He who, verily, knows the mind as the messenger of this breathing spirit of Brahma becomes possessed of a messenger. He who knows the eye as the protector becomes possessed of a pro- tector. He who knows the ear as the announcer becomes possessed of an announcer, he who knows speech„as the house- keeper becomes possessed of a housekeeper. (To this same breathing spirit as Brahma, these divinities (mind, eye, ear, speech) bring offering though he does not beg for it; even so, to this same breathing spirit all beings bring offering even though he does not beg for it. For him who knows this, the doctrinal instruction is 'Do not beg.' As a man who has begged through a village and received nothing sits down sayingr 'I shall not eat anything given from here,' and then those Vho formerly refused him invite him (to accept their offerings), which is the nature of him who does not beg Charitable people, _ however, invite him and say, 'let us give to you/
In Chapter I the devotee, ttpTs^a, approaches the coach Amitaujas which is prana, breath, spirit, life The nature oiprar.i as the source of everything, as Brahma is explained in ttus chapter. Brahiru with which prana is identified is the creator, jagat-Mransn
7 6z The Principal Upamsads jr 3
m ***** 25 *» & ™ * **** bring nibnte Food is the aliment which flourishes body or mini
pranobrakmdi ha simha pains %as is.™ -5 ± - fata*, jdkjarasfdc ca£r l^ZT^Sl
***** Pja Mat,, W n ^-jwSSwKj
tasyopam&n m yaced Hi, fad yaihd gramarh bhiisiivalaMhvo. famsea naham ato datiam asmyam Hi, ia eiwnam upmar.. trayanteyeprastMprrtyacaksiran, esa dham-Jyacob blataii annadas to evatnam Kpamantrayanie, diddn.a ia Hi
2. The breathing spirit is Brahma, thus indeed Paingya vs&d to say. Of this same breathing spirir as Brahma behind the speech the eye is enclosed, behind the eye the ear is enclosed, behind the ear the mind is enclosed, behind the mind the breathing spirit is enclosed. To this same breathing spirit as Brahma, all these di\inities bring offering though he doss not beg for it; even so to this same breathing spirit all beings bring offering even though lie does not beg for it For him who knows this, the doctrinal instruction is 'Do not beg.' As a man who has_ begged through a village and received nothing sits down saying, 'I shall not eat anything given from here/ and then those who formerly refused him invite him fto accept their offerings), such is the nature of him who does not beg Charitable people, however, invite him and sa}', 'let us give to you.'
drundhcde is enclosed, surrounded, enveloped. V. Snmdkt, Sntdhyrfc samanlat Svriya Itstkali
3. aihata ePa-dhamvarodhananr yad eka-dhanam abhidyiySi, pai'rnamdsyam vamdiasydyant ia st'ddha-pahse v&pw ytr.ahstri etisam ehisniin parvatty agnm '.'pasamSdhnya parisamSky a pari- siirya paryuksya daksixam jamacya sruienajyfikuitr phtii «R ndma devatavarodharii sa mtfmvsmad idam avanmdhat iasyst svfihd- prdno itama desaWxarodharX sa ■n.e'nwsmdd idam avarj- ndhyatiosyai svahd- cdksur nama daafavaroikar.t sa vs'mvsrM^ idam avarundhyat 1as\ ai svaha • sroiram vama da aiai arodkarS sa ms'mi'smad idam avarut.dhyal iasyai svof.a- mma r,dn.a d<za- tavarodham sa we'musmad idam avarandhyai tasyai svahi. prajiia mma devaiavarodhart sa me 'musvtSd idam aiamrJhyal tasyai svahd iff- aiha dhiana-gandkam prajigM} Sjyaleptr.5ngaxy
II 4 KausTtaki-Brahmana Upamsad 763
anummrjya vdcamyamo'bhipravrajydrtham bruydd diitam vd, prahnuydl labhate haiva
3 Now next the attainment of the highest treasure If a man covets the highest treasure, either on the night of a full moon or on the night of a new moon or on the bright half of the moon under an auspicious constellation, at one of these periods, having built up a fire, having swept the ground and having strewn the sacred grass, having sprinkled (water) around, having bent the right knee, with a spoon he offers oblations of melted butter 'The divinity named speech is the attamer May it obtain this for me from him Hail to it ' 'The divinity named breath is the attamer May it attain this for me from him Hail to it ' 'The divinity named eye is the attainer May it attain this for me from him Hail to it ' 'The divinity named ear is the attainer May it attain this for me from him Hail to it ' 'The divinity named mind is the attainer May it attain this for me from him Hail to it ' 'The divinity named wisdom is the attamer May it attain this for me fiom him Hail to it ' Then having inhaled the smell of the smoke, having smeared his limbs with the ointment of melted butter, in silence he should go forth, declare his wish or send a messenger He will, indeed, obtain his wish
eka-dhalia highest treasure, single treasure, pidnasya ndmadhcyam, jagaly asmtnn eka cva dhana-rUpa eka dhanah paristuya having strewn sacred grass, samanlad daiblidn avaklrya sruvena with a spoon, v camasena vd kamsena vd with a wooden bowl or with a metal cup
4 athdto daivah smaro yasya pnyo bubhused yasyai vd ycsdm vaitcsdm cvaikasmtn parvany etayaivdvilaitd djydhulfr juhoti, vacam tc mayi juhomy asau svahd, pranaih ic mayi juhomy asau svahd, cakstts ic mayi juhomy asau svahd, itotram ic mayi juhomy asau svahd, mams tc mayi juhomy asau svahd, prajiidm tc mayi juhomy asau svahd ih, atha dhiima-gandham prajigh aydjyalcpcndiigany anuvimrjya vdcdmyamo'bhiprav- rajya samspat sam jigamtscd api vdtddvd iivthct sambhdsamdnah pnyo haiva bhavati smaianii haivdtya
4 Now, next, the longing to be realised by the divine powers If one desires to become dear to any man or woman or to any men or women, then at one of these same periods (of time mentioned before) he offers, m exactly the same manner, oblations of melted butter, saying, 'your speech I sacrifice in me, hail to you ' 'Your breath I sacrifice in me, hail to \ou '
The Principal Upani?ads ft 6
'Your eye I saenfice m me, hail to you ' "Your ear I sacrifice in me, had to you ' 'Your mind I sacrifice in me, hail to you ' i our wisdom I sacrifice m me, hail to you' Then having niiialed the smell of the smoke, haying smeared his limbs with the ointment of melted butter, m silence he should go forth, and seek to come to contact or stand speaking from windward (so that the wind may carry his woids to the person) He becomes dear indeed and they think of him indeed
mora longing, abhlasah 'I am the fire m which the fuel of your dislike or indifference is burnt '
5 athatah samyamanam pralardamm dntaram agm-fwtram tiy Seagate, yavad vat finru?o bhdsate na taval prdmtnm iahioti, franam tada vdci juhoh, yavad vai ptmtsah prdmtt na tavad bha$itum iakttoh, vacam tada j>rfine pthoh, ete ananti amrU ahulT jagrac ca svapan ca sanialam juJwh aiha yd any& dhutayo'ntavalyas tan karmamayyo hi bhavantt iaddhasmattat purve vtdvdviso'gnthotram na juJiavdfwakmh
5 Now next self-restraint according to Pratardana or the inner fire saenfice as they call it As long, venly, as a man is speaking, so long he is not able to breathe Then he is sacrificing breath m speech As long, verily, as a person is breathing, so long be is not able to speak Then he is sacrificing speech m breath These two unending immortal oblations, one is offering continuously, whether waking or sleeping Now whatever other oblations there are, they have an end for they consist of works Knowing this very thing, venly, the ancients did not offer the agm-hotra sacrifice.
antaram inner because it is independent of outer aids' bdhya-sddhana-mrapeksam
6 uktfiam brahmeh H smaha smka-bhrngarah, tad rg 4y uMsita, sarvdm hdsmai bhutdm sraisthydydbhyarcyank • M fajuTuy sarvdm lidsmm bhutdm ^Vf»J a ^
II 7 KausUaki-Brahmana Upamsad 765
ya&asmtamas tejasottamo bhavahya evam veda, fad etad aislikam karma-mayam aimanam adhvaryith samskaioti, tasimn yapir- mayath pravayatt yapir-mayam nv-mayam hold rn-maye sama- mayam udgata, sa esa trayyai vtdyayah atmaisa 11 evaitad indrasydtma bhavah, ya evam veda
6 The uklha (recitation) is Brahman, so Suska-bhrngdra used to say, let him meditate on it as the Rg (hymn of praise) unto such a one, indeed, all beings offer praise for his greatness Let him meditate on it as the Yapis (sacrificial formula), unto such a one indeed, all beings get united for his greatness Let him meditate on it as the Saman Unto such a one indeed all beings bow down for his greatness Let him meditate on it as beauty Let him meditate on it as glory Let him meditate on it as splendour. As this (the uktha) is the most beautiful, the most glonous, the most splendid among the invocations of praise, even so is he who knows this, the most beautiful, the most glorious, the most splendid among all beings So the adkvaryu priest prepares this self which is related to the sacrifice, and which consists of works In it he weaves what consists of the Yapts In what consists of the Yapts, the Jiolr priest weaves what consists of the Rg In what consists of the Rg the Udgatr pnest weaves what consists of the Saman This is the self of all the threefold knowledge And thus he who knows this becomes the self of Indra
7 athatah, sarva-ptah kausftakes inny updsandm bhavanli, sarva-pddha sma kausitakir udyantam ddiiyam upaiisfhatc yajiiopavTtam krtvadakam dntya tnh prastcyodapdiram vargo'st papmanam me vrndhih, ciayaivdvifd madhyc sanfam udvargo'si papmanam ma vdvrndhid, elayawdvi (aslant yantam samvargo'si papmanam me samvrndhTd, tadyad choralrdbhyam papam akaroi saw tad vrnkte, tatho cvaivam vidvan clayaivavrfddityam upa- folhaic yad ahordtrdbhydm papam karoh, sam fad vrnkte,
7 Now next are the three meditations of the all-conquenng Kausltaki The all-conquering Kau «Itaki .indeed, used to worship the rising sun, having performed the investiture with the sacred thread, having fetched water, having thrice sprinkled the water vessel saying, 'You are a deliverer, deliver me from my "sin " ' In the same manner he (used to worship the sun) when it was in
766 The Principal Upamsads II 8
the middle of the sky saying, 'you are the high deliverer, deliver me highly from sin ' In the same manner he (used to worship the sun) when it was setting saying, 'you are the full deliverer, deliver me fully from sin ' Thus whatever sin he committed by day or by night that he removes fully And likewise he who know this worships the sun in the same manner and whatever sin one commits by day or by night, that he removes fully
yajnopavilam the sacred thread worn over the left shoulder, for performing sacrifices
Sntya having fetched, v acamya having sipped
vargah deliverer sarvam idam jagal atma-bodhena irnavad vrnMt
panlyajali
vrtidht deliver, varpya, vm&Sayet
8 atha mast mdsy amdvasydydm vrtt&yam pascac candra- masam driyamdnam ttpahsthetaitayaw&vHd hanta-tme va pratyasyah, yan me sustmam hrdayam dim candramm sntam manye'Jiam mam tad vidvamsam maham puiryam ogham ntdam tti na hy asmdt purvdh prajdh praittti mi jata-ptdrasya- thkdta-ptitrasyapyayasva samdu te sam Upaydmsi sam uyantu void yam ddttya amsumdpyayayanmt, etds hsra rco japtiu mdsmdlmn prd V ena prajayd paSuVhr dpydyayiMh yo man dvesh yam ca vayam dvismas tasya pranena prajaya pas«blij.r dpydyaya sva amdrhn dvrtam dvaria adityasyavrlam atwavarta ik dakstnam bdhum anvdvartate
8 Then, month by month at the time of the new tm when it comes around one should m the same ^^wrstop the moon as it appears m the west or he throws two Wades S gSen grass toward it saying, '^at ^r proportioned^ of mine which rests in the moon m the sky I deem myseK the knower thereof May I not weep for evrf concermng my SdSn Indeed his progeny do not djhtato This > it with one to whom a son is already born Now £ ?Jj=L rf otc to whom no son is born as yet, 'Increase May ^
II g Kausitaki-Bidhmana Upamsad 767
with the turn of the sun ' Thereupon he turns himself toward the right arm
hanta-iine va pratyasyali he throws two blades of grasb toward it; j; hanta-tptabhyam vak pt atyasyatt with two blades of grass speech goes toward it
The three Rg verses are Rg Veda I 91 16, IX 31, 4, I 91 iS, Aiharva Veda VII 81 6
There is throughout an allusion to an implied comparison between the husband as sun or fire and the wife as the moon
aham somalmika sin agnydtmakah pitman
9. atha paurnamdsydm purastdc candramasam driyamanam upatistheta etaya vavrtd, somo rdjdsi vicaksanali, panca-mukho'sv prajd-patir brdhmanas ta ekam mtikham, iena mukhena rajno'tsi, tena mukhena mam annadam kuru, raja ta ekam mtikham, iena mukhena visno'tsi, iena mukhena mam annadam kuru, syenas ta ekam tnwkkam, tena mukhena paksmo'tsi, tena mukhena mam annadam kuru agmsla ekam mukham, tenemam lokamalsi, tena mukhena mam annadam kuru, ivayi pancamam mukham, tena mukhena sarvam bhuidny atst, iena mukhena mam annadam kuru, masmakam prdnena prajayd pasubhtr avakseslha, yo'sman dvesh yac ca vayam dvismas iasya prdnena prajaya paiubhir avakslyasvch , daivim dvrtam avarla adttyasyawtam anvavarla th daksinam bdhum anvavartate
9 Then, on the night of the full moon one should m the same manner worship the moon as it appears m the east, 'You are King Soma, the wise, the five-mouthed, the lord of creation The Brahmana is one moutli of you With that mouth you eat the Kings With that mouth make me an eater of food. The King is one mouth of you With that mouth you eat the people With that mouth make me an eater of food The hawk is one mouth of you With that mouth you eat the birds With that mouth make me an eater of food Fire is one mouth of you With that mouth you eat this world With that mouth make me an eater of food In you is a fifth mouth With that mouth you eat all beings With that mouth make me an eater of food Do not waste away with our vital breath, with our offspring, with our cattle He who hates us and him whom we hate, you waste away with his vital breath, his offspring, his cattle Thus I turn myself with the turn of the gods I turn myself along with the turn of the sun. After (these words) he turns himself toward the right arm
7<58 The 'Principal Upanisads U xi
soma- moon- umaja visva-prakrlya saha wriamanah pnya-darsanah vicaksanah the wise, sama-lavkika-vaidtka-Mrya-kitstdah
Here the reference is only to the three classes, the Brahmaaa, the Ksatriya and the common people
10. atha samvesyan jdyayai Jirdayam abhmrsel, yat ie sustim hrdaye srtiam antah prajdpatau tenamrtatsasyesans ma tvam pvtryam ogham nigi ifi, na hyasydh pun/ah prajah prcatitt.
10. Now v, hen about to lie down with his wife he should stroke her heart and say, 0 fair one who has attained immortal joy by that which is placed in your heart by Praja-pali, may you never fall into sorrow about your children Her children then do not die before her.
See Asvalayana Grhya Sulra 1. 13 7. susTme 0 fair one: sobhana-gatre
11. atha prosyayan pt'trasya miirdhdnam abhijtghrd, angad ahgat sambhavasi hrdaydd adhijdyase, alma vat pulra narnasi sajivaiaradahiatammdviiindmfcyadxdha
Niasa, hiranyam astrtam lhava, tejo vai pdra nanmsi sa pa saradahsaianicisaviliijamdsyagrbmyafhaimm^ prajdpatili prajah paryagihndt tad arlstyai Una tvd parigrhwmy asSviii, athasya daksme harmjapaty asmai prayandh maghavan rjxsin ittnira iresfhdni dravinani dheliih savye, ma chettha. m 'vyathisfhah, satam sarada ayuso pvasva, ptiba ie vdmna mvri- hanam aihipghrdmiti, trirasya miirdhanam abhijighrel gavam mhinharenabliihinkarwnti trir asya miirdhanam abhhinkurym 11 Now, when one has been away, on returning back ne should smell (kiss) his head, saying, 'yon are born from every limb of mine, you are bom from the heart, you, my son, are my self indeed, may you live a hundred autumns (years) ±ie gives him his name saving, 'Be you a stone, be 5« £J be you everywhere desired gold, you, my son
i- „ _ -u.^.™^ o n h>T»Tis f\-ears\ ' He takes Jus name
SS^XtaSe mutters in his right ear ^ft.^J W 0 Maghavan, 0 onrusber/ and whispers m ^ left ear 5w£ Sstow 'the most excellent off (the Kne of our race). *^^^££&>Tta* of life. I smell (loss) ?™***>°?£l ™TJ2 ^you with he should smell (kiss Jus head). I make a lowing ° j
II 12 KausTfaki-Brdhmana Ufanisad 769
the lowing (sound) of cows ' He should make a lowing over his head thnce
See Asvalayana Grhya Sutra 1. 15 3 9, Paraskara I 16. 18, Khadira
abhtpghret smell, » abhimrief touch, harena san'isprset
putra nama v putra mavitha You have saved me, son /ie putra tvam
ptmnamno nirayat ua mam auitha mama raksanam krtavan. See
MamilX 38
aima lhava be a stone, pasano bhava Be healthy and strong - rogai'r anupadrutah vajra-sara-sariro bhava
hiranyam astrtam everywhere desired gold astrtam astrtam sarvatah
panslrtam kanaka-oat sarva-prajapnyo bhava
lejas light samsara-vrksa-bijam.
confer on him seeRV III 36 10, II 21 6
ma vyathisthalr be not afraid, sarirendnya-manoblnr vyatham ma
gah SeeBG XI. 34
12 athato daivah parvmara, dad vai brahma dxpyate yadagnir jvalaii, athaitan mnyate yan na jvalatt, tasyddttyam eva tejo gacckati vayum prdna; dad vai brahma dipyateyad ddityo drsyate 'thaitan mriyate yan na drsyate, tasya candramasam eva tejo gacckati vayum prdna, dad vai brahma dTpyafe yac candramd drsyate' thaitan mnyate yan na drsyate, tasya vidyutam eva tejo gacchati vayum prdna; dad vai brahma dxpyaU yad vidyud vidyotate' thai tan mriyate yan na vidyotate, tasya <fis'n eva tejo gacchati vayum prdnas id va etdh sanra devatd vayum eva praviiya vdyau mrtvd na mrcchanic tasmad eva punar udTraia ity adhidat- vatam, athadhyatmam
12 Now next the dying around of the gods. This Brahman shines forth, indeed, when the fire burns, likewise this dies when it burns not Its light goes to the sun alone and its vital breath to the wind, this Brahman shines forth, indeed, when the sun is seen, likewise this dies when (the sun) is not seen Its light goes to the moon; its vital breath to the wind; this Brahman shines forth, indeed, when the moon is seen; likewise this dies when it is not seen, its light goes to the lightning and its vital breath to the wind, this Brahman shines forth, indeed, when the lightning lightens, likewise this dies when it lightens not, its light goes to the regions of space and its \ital breath to the wind All these divinities, venly, having entered into wind, though they die in the wind do not perish (altogether). There-
770 The Principal Upamsads n I4
Cp -ditoreyfl- Brahnana VIII 28
™ j-^T ° akmr eva ie J° SMhah pranam prdmeZ
vat brahma dipyate yac caksvsa p a £yah, atLtan inrZc Z
vat brahvia dipyate yacchrotrena imoh, athadan muyaieyan na imoh, tayu mana eva tejo gacchah pranam pram, dad vax brahma dipyate yan manasa dhyayah, athattan nmyate yan m dhyayati, tasya pranam eva tejo gacchah pranam prams ta va etafi sarva devaiah pranam eva pravtsya pranc mrtvd na mrcchante, tasmad eva punar ndtrate, tad yadt ha va evam vtd- vamsam ubliau parvatdv abhpravarteydtam dakstms cotlarai ca tustursamanau na hainam stmvTyatam atha ya enam dvisanii yan ca svayam dvesh ta evamam parimrtyante
13 This Brahman shines forth, indeed, when one speaks with speech, likewise it dies when one speaks not, its light goes to the eye, its vital breath to the vital breath This Brahman shines forth indeed when one sees with the eye, likewise this dies when one sees not, its light goes to the ear, its vital breath to the vital breath This Btahman shines forth, indeed, when one hears with the ear, likewise this dies when one hears not, its light goes to the mind, its vital breath to the vital breath This Brahman shines forth, indeed, when one thinks with the mind, likewise this dies when one thinks not, its light goes to the vital breath, its vital breath to the vital breath All these deities, venly, having entered into the vital breath, though they die m the vital breath, do not pensh (altogether) There- from, indeed, tluy come forth again So indeed on one who knows this, both the mountains, the southern and the northern, should roll themselves forth wishing to crush him, they would not crush him But those who hate him and those whom he himself hates, these all die around him
The Southern and the Northern mountains are the \indh}.is and the Himalayas respectively
14 athdto nihsreyasaddnam, eta ha vai devntd aham-ireyasi vwadamana asttidc charlrdd uccakramuh tadd hdprdnat it<?Li»s darubh'dam sisye'thainad vak pramveia tad vded vadac chi^'f eva, athainac caksuh pravivcsa tad vded vadac cak^ttd pasync chisya eva, alhamac chrolram pmvivda tad vued vadac, cakw
II 14 KausTtaki-Brdhmana Upanisad 771
pasyae chrotrena srnvac chisya eva, athaman manah pravivesa tad vaca vadac caksusa pasyae chrotrena srnvan manasd dhydyac chisya eva, athainat prdnah pravivesa tat tata eva samuttastkau td vd etdh sarod devatdh prdne mhsreyasam viditvd pranam eva prapidividnam abhisambhuya sahaiv attatk sarcair asmdc charlrad uccakramuh te vdyii-pravistd dkdsatmdnah svariyuh, Mho evaivam vidvdn prdne mhireyasam vidttvd pranam eva prajndtmdnam abhisambhuya sahaw aifaih sarvair asmdc chanrdd utkrdmati, sa vdyii-pravista akdidtma svarett, sa tad gacchati yatraite devds tat prdpya yad amrtd devds tad amrto bhavah ya evam vadam
14 Now next the attainment of the highest excellence All these divinities, verily, disputing among themselves m regard to self excellence went forth from this body It (the body) la}', not breathing, withered, like a log of wood Then speech entered into it It just lay speaking with speech Then the eye entered into it. It just lay speaking with speech and seeing with the eye Then the ear entered into it It just lay, speaking with speech, seeing with the eye and hearing with the ear. Then the mind entered into it It just lay, speaking with the speech, seeing with the eye, hearing with the ear, thinking with the mind Then the vital breath entered into it and then, indeed, it arose at once All these divinities, venly, having recognised the superior excellence of the vital breath, having compre- hended the vital breath alone as the self of intelligence, went forth from this body, all these together They, having entered into the air, having the nature of space went to the heavenly world Likewise also, he who knows this, having recognised the superior excellence of the vital breath, having compre- hended the vital breath alone as the self of intelligence goes out of this body with all these He, having entered into the air, having the nature of space, goes to the hea\enly world. He goes to the place where these gods are Having reached that, he who knows this becomes immortal as the gods are immortal
Sec B U VI 1 1-14, C U Y. 1
mhsreyasam highest excellence, sanasmdd ulkarsa-rupo guro timksa-i'isesah
aham-sreyase in regard to self-excellence, m regard to one who was
the most important among them
uccakramuh went forth, utkrawanam cakrtth
sisyr \ay, saya?.atn krtavat
tata eva at once, prana-pravesad eta
BB*
The Principal Upanisads tt l5
15 athatah pitd-putriyam sampraddnam Hi cacaksate Ma putram Pmyannahvayati navais trnatr agdram samstirya agmm upasamadhayodakumbham sapdtram upamdkayahatoia visas* sampracchamiah pita Seta etya putra upanstdd abhmfadyata tndnyair mdnydm samsprsydpi vdsmd dsindyabhmukhdyatva sampradadhydd, aMsmai samprayacchati vacant me ivayi dadhdniti pita, vdcam te mayi dadlia iti putrah, prdnam me ivayt dadMnih pita, prdnam te mayt dadha th putrali, cdksur me ivayi dadMnih pita, caksus te mayi dadha iti putrah, frotram m tvayt dadhdniti pita, irotram te mayi dadha ih putrah, anna-rasdn me tvayi dadhdniti pita, anna-rasdn te mayi dadha iti putrah, karmdm me tvayi dadMnih pita, karmdni te mayi dadlia lit putrah, suklia-duhkhe me tvayi dadhdniti pita, sukha-duhkhe te mayi dadha ih putrah, dnandam ratim jnajatim me tvayi dadhdniti pita, dnandam ratim prajdhm te mayi dadlia iti pidrah, ttydm me tvayi dadMnih pita, ttyam te mayi dadlia iti pidrah, mano me tvayi dadhdniti pita, manas te mayi dadha iti pidrah, prajMm me tvayi dadhdniti pita, prajfidm te mayi dadha i/t putrah, yady u vd apdbhigadah sydt samasenavoa brnydt, prdmn me tvayi dadhdniti pita, prdndn te mayi dadha ih putrah, atha daksmdvrd upamskrdmati, tam pitdnumantrayate, yaso braJima- varcasam kirtii tvd jusatdm th, athetatah savyam amsam nvaveksate pdnmdntardMya vasandntena vd pracchadya, svargdn lohan kdmdn dpnuhiti, sa yady agadah syat puiras- yaiivarye pita vaset pari vd vrajetyady u vai preydt yadevamam samdpayeyuh, yathd samdpayitavyo bhavah, yatiid samdpayitavyo bhavah
15 Now next the father and son ceremony or the trans- mission (of tradition) as they call it The father, when about to depart, calls his son Having strewn the house with new (fresh) grass, having built up the fire, having placed near it a vessel of water with a jug (MI of nee), himself covered with a fresh garment the father remains lying The son, having coine, approaches him from above, touching his organs with his organs or the father may transmit the tradition to him while be sits before him Then he delivers over to him (thus) The father 'Let me place my speech m you ' The son 'I take your speech in me ' The father 'Let me place my vital breath in you The son 'I take your vital breath in me The father Let me place my eye in you ' The son 'I Tto father 'Let me place my ear m you/ The son I take your ear m me ' The f ather 'Let me place my tastes of food in you
II 15. KausTtaki-Brahmana Upanisad 773
The son 'I take your tastes of food in me ' The father 'Let me place my deeds in you ' The son 'I take your deeds in me ' The father 'Let me place my pleasure and pain m you ' The son. T take your pleasure and pain in me ' The father 'Let me place my bliss, enjojnnent and procreation m you' The son* 'I take your bliss, enjoyment and procreation m me ' The father 'Let me place my movement m you ' The son 'I take your movement m me ' The father 'Let me place my mind m you ' The son 'I take your mind m me ' The father 'Let me place my wisdom m you ' The son I take your wisdom in me ' If, however, he should be unable to speak much, let the father say comprehensively, 'I place my vital breaths in you,' and the son, 'I take your vital breaths in me ' Then turning to the right he goes forth towards the east The father calls out after him 'May fame, spiritual lustre and honour delight in you ' Then the other looks over his left shoulder Having hidden his face with his hand or having covered it with the hem of "his garment, he says, 'Maj' you obtain heavenly worlds and all desires ' If he (father) becomes well (recovers) he should dwell under the authority of his son or wander about (as an ascetic) If, however, he departs, let them furnish him (with obsequies) as he ought to be furnished, as he ought to be furnished
a vessel of water nirena piirnam kalasam vnhi-purna-pdlra-sahtlam
covered with a fresh gat ment navincna vastiena samvrtah
pita Scle father remains lying, v svayam syclah, himself in white,
ivetah, sita-malydmbara-dkai ah
dadham dhdrayam
After 'deeds,' in some versions we read, 'sarlram me ivayt dadhamti pita, iartram tc mayi dadha ih putrah ' The Father 'Let me place my body in you ' The son, 'I take your body in me ' prajiia wisdom, another reading, 'dhxyo vyiialavyam kahidn vie tvayi. May I place my thoughts, my understanding and my desires in you, etc
upabhigadah unable to speak much, pralyckam vaklum asamarthah honour some versions have also amiadyam food to eat
y/4 1 he Principal Upantsads III i
I pratardano ha vat datvoddsih tndrasya pnyam dhamo- pajagama yuddhena ca paurusena ca, tarn hendra uvaca, pratar- dana, varam vmtsveti, sa hovaca pratardanah, tvam eva m vrmsvayam tvam manusyaya fatatamam manyasa ttt, iam hendra uvaca, na vat varo' varasmat vrnite, tvam eva vrnisveti, avaro vat kila melt, hovaca pratardanah, atho khalv tndrah satyad eva neyaya satyam hindrah, torn hendra uvaca, mam eva vijdnihy etad evaham manusyaya hitatamam manye yan mam vijamyan tnsirsanam tvdstram ahanam, arunmukhan yatin salavrkebhyah prayaccham, iahvth sandha atikramya dm prahladiyan alrnam aham antankse pauloman, prthivyam kalakafijan, tasya me tain na loma canamiyate, sa yo mam veda na ha vat tasya hena cana karmana loko mlyate, na steyena, na brilna-hatyayd, na mdtr-md- hena, na pttr-vadhetta ndsya papain cakrso muhhan ntlam,
i. Pratardana, the son of Divodasa, venly, by means of fighting and effort, arrived at the beloved abode of Indra lo him then Indra said, 'Pratardana, choose a boon Then Pratardana said, Do you yourself choose that boon for me which you deem the most beneficial for mankind Indra saiQ to him 'A superior venly, chooses not for an inferior Do you yourself choose ' 'No boon, venly, is that to me, said Pratar- dana Then, however, Indra did not swerve from h : truth fa Indra venly, is truth To mm then Indra said Unde "™ a mf onlj That is *hat I deem most beneficm r^tnelv that one should understand me I slew the three
to the wolves Transgressing many agreements i kiuea u Sople of Prahlada m the sky, the Paulomas m the g4SaWj» on earth Of me ^ as I j£ ■£}
SS" does not depart from his face Indra, « this passage, speaks m the name of the Supreme M
Kausxtakt-Brahrana Upanisad
Vamadeva does it according to the R.V. IY. 26. 1. The individual self is really one with the Universal Self though unenlightened people are not aware of this unit}-. Those who know and feel it sometimes speak in the name of the Universal Spirit. the son of Divodasa- dnoddsasya frast-rdjasya psciro daiiclastk. 'A superior chooses not for an inferior' or 'no one who chooses, chooses for another/ r.a tai varak parastrat vrntte arydrikarn r.a vrrle'r.yo na prdrihayate yata euarn atak svarthatn zarark ham ect vrrJszei:.
As he is bound by the vow of truth, Indra grants Pratardana his desire, satya-pdsdbhibaddkak.
For Indra's exploits referred to here, see R.V. X. S So; X. go 6; Satapatha Brdkmana I. 2 3. 2, XII. 7. 1 1; Taf'tsriya Samki'a 2 5 1. 1 ff. ; Attareya Brahtr.ar.a YIL 2S. wolves wild dogs arar.ya-svabhyah. alrnam killed, kimsitavdn miyate- injured, kttnsyaie.
ntlam- dark colour; bloom" rr.ul'ka-f'drii-staTiips.m. He does not become pale.
When we attain supreme wisdom and are delivered from the delusion of egotism, our good and evil deeds do not touch us. We have died to the possibility of doing anyt hin g evil.
INDRA'S IDENTITY WITH LIFE AND IMMORTALITY
2 sa kovdca, prdno'smi, prajndihid taw ir.dtr. ayitr atr.jian: ity updsva, Synth pranah, prdro vd dyitk, yavadd hy asjr.zn iarsre prano vasaii tdvad dyuk, prdnena ht evdsv.in ickc'trriairatn dpnoti, prajiiaya satyarh satrkalpahi, sa yo rr.dm dyur arr.rian: tty updste saruam dyur asmir. loka ety dpno'.i amriaii am aksiiim svarge loke, iadd haika dl.ur epabhuyatr: zat prdrd gacchar.'iti ,r.a hi kaicana sakr.uydt sakrd idea rdtr.a prapdpayiturr., caksusa rupain, srotrena iabdat,:, wanasa dLydnam, ekabkiiyatf: rat prdna bhutvaifraikam e'dr.t sarvai.i praji'dpayarATt:, racam vadanthh sane prdna anuvadar.ii, caksuh pasyai sane prdr.d ar.tipasyauii , sroirav: inn at sane prdra ar.usp.iari:, mar a dhydyat sane prdna at.udhyayarti, prdran: prd) m ariam sane prdna anuprarahU, evatr: u kailad it: lerdra ttiicdsi: it eva prdndrdri. t.il.ireyasam tit
2 Indra then said 'I am the breathing splnt, meditate on me as the intelligent self, as Lfe, as immortality. Ltfe is breath and breath is life For as long as breath remains in the body so long is there life. For indeed with the breathing spirit one obtains immortality m this world, by intelligence tree con- ception. So he who meditates on me as life, as immortality he
77° Tks Principal VparAsais IE 3
reaches Hs fdH {iera» of) life in this ttotM and obtains insmor- talitr and isdastrucabilnx in the heareslr -world. X<w on this psiat sorre sav the rital breaths, venir, go into a taezess, (othernise) ro ore r-on3d be able, at orce, to snake isom a asffie or spsscb, a form br die eye, a stncd by lbs ear, a though: br the nurd. The vital breaths, afrer having becona ore, make kEGra all these one br one. "While speech speais, all tbs Thai breaths speak after it "While the ej-e sees all, the rixal breaths see afrer it "While die ear hssis, all the -vital breaths bear after it "When the breath breathes, all thejrital breaths breathe afrer it Thus is it indeed, 1 sard India, 'mere is, icTrever (he coats-red), a superior exceEeace amongst tbs vita! breaths/
prcixSnS: tie isteIHger.ee self, hdffi<^^aipMr.s-prs;r.S- xsshs-sralksvah.
ikcra is life cr tie source of life of all create-as, ssna-prammn
upas
iK3K:
sawais ^'^i* -"^vv— t=A,^; m w
Ill 3. Kausttaki-Braltmana Upanisad 777
lives deprived of eye for we see the blind; one lives deprived of ear for we see tie deaf; one lives deprived of mmd for we see the childish, one lives deprived of arms, one lives deprived of legs for thus we see But now it is the breathing spirit alone, the intelligence self that seizes hold of this body and makes it jrise up This, therefore, one should meditate on as the uktha, it is said This is the all-obtaining m the breathing spirit What is the breathing spirit, that is the intelligence-self. What is the intelligence-self, that is the breathing spirit This is the view thereof, this is the understanding thereof When a person is so asleep that he sees no dream whatever, he becomes one with that breathing spirit alone Then speech together with all the names goes to him; the eye together with all forms goes to it, the ear together with all sounds goes to it, the mind together with all thoughts goes to it When he awakes, even as sparks proceed in all directions from a blazing fire, even so from this self the vital breaths proceed to their respective stations, from the vital powers the gods (the sense powers) and from the gods the worlds This same breathing spirit, the intelligence self seizes hold of the body and makes it rise up This, therefore, one should meditate on as the uktha, it is said This is the all-obtaining in the breathing spirit What is the breathing spirit, that is the intelligence self, what is the intelligence self, that is the breathing spirit. This is the proof thereof, this is the understanding When a sick person about to die gets to such weakness as to fall into a stupor they say of him, his thought has departed, he does not hear, he does not see, he does not speak with speech, he does not think He becomes one m that breathing spirit alone. Then speech together with all thoughts goes to it And when he departs from this body, he departs together with all these
'What is the breathing spirit that is the intelligence self; what is the intelligence self that is the breathing spirit ' In some texts we find also, 'for together they live m this body and together they go out of it ' saha hy etav asmm sarirc vasatah sahotkraimlah
The intelligence self grasps the breath and erects the flesh Cp St Thomas Aquinas 'The power of the soul which is in the semen through the spirit enclosed therein fashions the body.' Summa Theo III 32. 1
upralislhantc proceed in different directions, vtvidham litrgacchantt, marisyai, about to die, marauam karisyait, asaima-maraha tit abalyam weakness, abalasya durbalasya bhava abalyam, hasta-padady avaiatvam
udakramU- has departed, utkramanam akarot
778 Tlte Principal Vpantsads m
LIFE-BREATH THE ALL-OBTAINING
Zl - "Mwsrjyante, srotrena sarvdn iabddn dim
zramalah atha yathasyai pratfidyat sarvam bkutam ekam bhavanii.tadvyakhyasydmah <"»w*wy m
all names by speech he obtains all names Breath gives up to tarn all odours, by breath he obtains all odours The eye gives up to him all forms , by the eye he obtains all forms The eargives up to him all sounds, by the ear he obtains all sounds The mind gives up to htm all thoughts , by the mind he obtains all thoughts Verily, these two together dwell m the body and together they depart Now we will explain how all beings become one with this intelligence
ttbhvtsrjyanle v abhtvtsrjate gives up, sarvatah partly ajah pram life, v ghrdna nose
After the account about mind there is the following passage in some texts satsd prone sarvdpltr yo vat pranah sa prapm yd va prapia sa pranah This is the all-obtaining in the breathing spirit And what is the breathing spirit, that is intelligence and what is intelligence, that is the breathing spirit
The two, the vital and the intellectual, live together and depart together
5 vag evasya ekam angam udvltiam, tasyai ndma paraxial prativthtta bhuta-maira, prdna evasya ekam angam ndtdham, tasya gandhah, parastdt prahvihita bhuta-maira, caksur evasya ekam angam udulham, tasya rupam parastdt prattmhtd bhiita- matra, s'rofram evasya ekam angam ndtdham, iasya iabdah parastdtpratmhitdbh^-nMrd.phvatvdsydekamangamtidtdhain
tasya anna-rasah para-Mi prakmhtd bhuta-maira, hastav evasya ekam angam udulham, tayoh karma parasldt prativthtta bhfita- mdtrd, iartram evasya ekam angam udulham, tasya sukha-duhihe parastdt prativthttd bhitta-mdtra, upasiha evasya ekam angam
Ill 6 KausTtaki-Brahmana Upamsad 779
uduUiam, tasydnando rahh prajdtih parastat prativthitd bhiita- matrd, pdddv evasya ekam angam udulham, tayor ttyah parastat pratvoihitd bhuta-matra, mana evasya ekam angam udiilham, tasya dhih k&mah parastat prativthitd bhuta-matra
5 Speech is one portion taken out of it Name is its exter- nally correlated object element Breath is one portion taken out of it Order is its externally correlated object element The eye is one portion taken out of it Form is its externally correlated object element The ear is one portion taken out of it Sound is its externally correlated object element The tongue is one portion taken out of it Taste of food is its externally correlated object element The two hands are one portion taken out of it Work is their externally correlated object element The body is one portion taken out of it Pleasure and pain are its externally correlated object element The generative organ is one portion taken out of it Bliss, delight and procreation are its externally correlated object element The two feet are one portion taken out of it Move- ments are their externally correlated object element The mind is one portion taken out of it Thoughts and desires are its externally correlated object element
Speech, etc , are parts of intelligence, prajiidyd vibhagam, with objects corresponding to them in the outside world The objects are descnbed as the external existential elements udiilham taken out, lifted up Commentator reads adiidham adii- duhat milked
6 prajnayd vacant samaruhya vacd sarvam namdny apnott prajiiayd pranam samaruhya pidnena sarvdn gandhdn apnott prajnayd caksuh samaruhya eaksusd sarvam rupdny apnott, prajnayd sroiram samaruhya s"rotrena sarodn sabddn apnott, prajiiayd jihvdm samaruhya phvayd sarvdn anna-rasdn apnott, prajnayd hastau samaruhya hastdbhydm sarvam karmdny apnott, prajnayd sarlram samaruhya iarirena sukha-duhkhe apnott, prajnayopasthan samdriihyopasthcnanandam rattm prajdtim dpnoh, prajnayd pddau samaruhya pdddbhydm sawd ttyd dpnott, prajnayd manah samaruhya vianasd sandm dhydndny apnott
6 Having obtained control of speech by intelligence, by speech one obtains all names Having obtained control of
780 The Principal Upani^ais III 7
breath by intelligence, by breath one obtains all odouis Having obtained control of the eye by intelligence, by the eye one obtains all forms Having obtained control of the ear by intelhgence, by the ear one obtains all sounds Having obtained control of the tongue by intelhgence, by the tongue one obtains all tastes of food Having obtained control of the hands by intelhgence, by the hands are obtained all actions Having obtained control of the body by intelligence, by the body one attains pleasure and pam Having attained control over the generative organ by intelhgence, by the generative organ one obtains bhss, delight and procreation Having attained control of the two feet by intelhgence, by the two feet one obtains all movements Having obtained control of the mind by intelli- gence, by the mind one obtains all thoughts
samaruhya having attained control Literally, having mounted on, samydk arohanam krtva
7 na hi prajndpdd van nama hncana prajMpayd, anyatra me mano'bhiid tiy aha naham dan nama prajMstsam th, na hi
pramapdam cak?iiriipam hncana. prapiapayd, anyatra m mano'bhui tty aha naham dad riipam prafxastsam tti, na »
traviMetd phvdnna-rasam kaiicana prajn&payd anyatra m mano'bhud tty aha naham dam anna-rasam PWW*"J* ™ hi faaiMidau hastau karma hncana prajnapayeiM Zyairn CWfiWK ity aha naham dot **ZfflEZ 2 na ht prainapdam iariram sukham na dukkham hncana LZpayd alyaira »ie mano'bhiid Uy aha ^ TSkhampra^am tit, na hprajMpaa f
Tfo? SUhout intelhgence, speech does not make
Ill . 8. Kau^ttdki-Brahmana Upanisad 781
whatsoever 'My mind was elsewhere/ he says 'I did not cognise that odour ' For venly, without intelligence the eye does not make known any form whatsoever. 'My mmd was elsewhere,' he says, 'I did not cognise that form ' For, venly, without intelligence the ear does not make known any sound whatsoever 'My mmd was elsewhere,' he sa}^, 'I did not cognise that sound ' For venly, without intelligence the tongue does not make known any taste of food whatsoever 'My mind was elsewhere,' he says, 'I did not cognise that taste of food ' For, venly, without intelligence, the two hands do not make known any action whatsoever 'Our mmd was elsewhere/ they say, 'we did not cognise any act ' For, venly, without intelligence, the body does not make known pleasure or pain whatsoever, 'my mmd was elsewhere/ he says, 'I did not cognise that pleasure or pain.' For, venly, without intelligence, the generative organ does not make known bliss, delight and procreation whatsoever 'My mind was elsewhere/ he says, 'I did not cognise bliss, delight or procreation ' For, venly, without intelligence the two feet do not make known any movement whatsoever 'Our mind was elsewhere/ the}' say, 'we did not cognise that movement ' Without intelligence no thought whatsoever would be effective Nothing that can be cognised would be cognised
8 na vacant vip'pldstta vaktaram vidyal, na gandham vipj- ndsita ghrataram vidyat, na rupam vippiasTta drastaram vidyal, na sabdam vipplasfta srotaram vidyat, nanna-rasam vipjfwsi- tannara-sasya vip'iataram vidyat, na karma vipjndstta kartaram vidyat, na sukha-duhkhe vipp'iasita sxikha-duhkhayor vijMtaram vidyat, nanandam na ralim na prajattm vipp'iasttanandasya rateh prajater vipiataram vidyat, nelydm vippiasitattaram vidyat, na mono vippiasTta maniaram vidyat, tava eta dasaiva bhuta-matra adhtprapiam, dasa p) ajM-mdtrd adhtbhutam yaddhi Milta-maird na syur na prajna-mairah syur, yad va prapia-matra na syur na bhuta-mdtrah syith, na hy anyataraio riipam kiiicana sidkycn no dan nana tad yathd rathasyarcsu nemir arpiio nabhav ara arptta cvam evatla bhula-vtatrah prajud-mdtrasv arpitdh, prapla-mdtrah pranc'ipttah, sa csa prana cva prap'iatmanando'pxro'mrlah, na sadhuna karmana bhuydn bhavali no cvasadhuna kamyan, c$a hy
7^ 2 The Pnnctpal Upantsads III 8
eva sddhu karma kdrayati tarn yam ebhyo lokebhya uwumsata esa « evdsadhu karma karayah tarn yam adho mnisaie, esa lokapala esa lokadhtpahh, esa lokesah, sa ma atmeti vidyat, sa ma dtmeh vidyat
8. Speech is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the speaker Odour is not what one should desire to understand, one should know him who smells (the odour) Form is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the seer (of form) Sound is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the hearer Taste of food is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the discemer of the taste of food The deed is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the doer Pleasure and pam are not what one should desire to understand, one should know the discerner of pleasure and pam Bhss, delight and procreation are not what one should desire to understand, one should know the discerner of bliss, delight and procreation Movement is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the mover Mind is not what one should desire to understand, one should know the minder (the tiunker) These ten existential elements are with reference to intelligence The ten intelligence elements are with reference to existence For truly, xf there were no elements of existence, there wouiq be no elements of intelligence Verily, there were no elements of intelligence, there would be no elements of existence f or from either alone no form whatsoever would be possible Ana this (the self of intelligence) is not many For as m a . ctanrt the felly is fixed on the spokes and the spokes are fixed on tw hub, even so these elements of existence are fixed on . ita > ments of uitelhgence and the elements of intelligence a* W m the breathing spirit
intelligent self, bliss, ageless immortal He does noT becom great oy good action nor small by evil action This one, trmy, Seed causes him whom he wishes to lead up from these worlds SSSSpwd actions This one, indeed, also causes him whom te WeTto lead downward, to perform bad action He * «J
protector of the world, he is ^J^^^S^ 15 u the lord of all He is my self, this one should Know ,
Ill 8 Kausitaki-Brahmana Upamsad 783
action between the two gives us the knowledge of the external world Cp Digfta Ntkdya 'There must be the organ of sense, the appropriate object and the sense cognition In the coming together of the three m a single mental operation lies the possibility of sensation ' I, p 43
The true subject is the Universal Self The activity of the indi- vidual self is derived from the Supreme It is not independent of l&oara pvasya kartftvam parad eva bhavati, na tit tat isvara-mra- peksam. S B II 3 41
^ The Prtmpal Upamsads iy 2
A PROGRESSIVE DEFINITION OF BRAHMAN 1 atha ha vat gdrgyo baldhr aniicanah samsiasla Ssa so' vasad mwaresu savasan matsyesu kumpancalesu kaiwtdehess ttt, sa Mjataiatntm Miyam abrqyovaca brahma ie bravamtt tarn hovaca ajataiatnlh sahasram dadma ttt, etasyam vaajanah janaka ttt va u jana dhavantltt
I Now then, venly, there was Gargya Balaki, famous as learned m the scriptures, for it was said of him that he dwelt among the Usmaras, among the Matsyas, among the Kuni- pancalas, among the KSsmdehas He, having come to Ajata- satru of Kasi, said, Let me declare Bvaliman to you Tohm Ajatasatru, then, said 'A thousand (cows) we give to you ' At such a speech as this, verily, indeed, people would run about saying, Janaka, Janaka
SeeBU II 1
The breathing spint associated with prajfia or intelligence was explained m the preceding chapter Even this, it is now said, is not the highest self
samspaslah famous, sarvaira prailnia-Mrtih savasan matsyesu v satvanmatsyesu among the salvatmatsyas janaka father, the name of the king of Mithila, who was famous for his knowledge of Brahman brahna-wdyayah sopayayah dM vakia ca -piteiy evam . mttfttlesvaram eva gacchanh
2 Sditye brhac, candramasy annum, vtdynh satyam, stanay- itnatt iabdo, vayav miro vcakuntha, SkUe piirnam, agnau visasahr ttt, apsu Uja tiy adhidaivatam, athadhyatmam ddark pratirupaichayayam ivttlyali, pratisrutkay&m asur ift iabde mrtyah, svapne yamah, iarire pmjapaUh, daksine aksm vacah, savye'ksim saiyasya
2 In the sun the great, m the moon food, in lightning truth, in thunder sound, m wind Indra Vaikuntha, in space fullness, in fire the vanquisher, in water light, thus with reference to the divinities Now with reference to the self in the mirror the reflection, in the shadow the double, m the echo Me, >n sound death, in sleep Yama (the lord of death), in the body Traja-pati, in the right eye speech, in the left eye truth
This passageprovides akind of table of contents for the discussions
3. sa Jiovdca bdldkiJi, ya evaisa Mitye purusas tarn evaham upasa tit, tarn Jiovdca ajdtaiatruJi, ma maitosmin samvddayistJul brJiat-pdndura-vdsd atistJidh sarvesam bhutanam murdheh vd aham etam upasa tit, sa yo Jiaitam evam updste'tisthdJi sarvesam bhutanam murdJtd bhavati
3 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is in the sun, on him indeed do I meditate ' To him, then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him who is the great, clad m white raiment, the supreme, the head of all beings He who meditates on him thus becomes indeed supreme, the head of all beings '
4 sa hovdca balakih, ya eoaisa candramasi purusas tarn evaham upasa ih, tarn Jiovdca ajataiatruh, ma maitosmin samva- dayistlia annasydtmett vd aham etam upasa iti sa yo Jiaitam evam updste 'nnasydtmd bhavatt
4 Then Balaki said 'The person who is m the moon, on him indeed do I meditate ' To him, then, Ajataiatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the self of food He who meditates on him thus becomes, indeed, the self of food '
Under whatever qualities we meditate on the Supreme we ourselves become possessed of those qualities
5 sa hovdca balakih, ya evatsa vidyuh purusas tarn evaham upasa th, tarn hovdca ajataiatruh, ma maitosmin samvddaytsthdh satyasydfmett vd aham etam upasa tit, sayo haitam evam updste, satyasydlmd bhavati
5 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is m the lightning on him, indeed, do I meditate ' To him then Ajataiatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the self of truth He who meditates on him thus becomes indeed, the self of truth '
The self of truth, v. tejasyatmd the self of light
6 sa Jiovdca balakih, ya evaisa stanayttnau purusas tarn cvdJiam upasa tti, tarn Jiovdca ajataiatruh, md maitosmin sathvd- dayistJidh, iabdasyatmeh vd aham etam upasa iti, sa yo Jiaitam evam updste iabdasydtmd bJiavati
6 Then Balaki said, "The person who is in the thunder, on him, indeed, do I meditate.' To him then Ajatasatru satd, 'Do
786 The Principal Upantsads t V 0
not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the
7 hovaca bSldhh, ya eoaisa vdyau purusas tarn, evdltam upasa tttjam hovaca ajdtaiatruh, ma mattasmm samvadaytsthah tndro vaikmithoparajita senett va aliam etam upasa th, sayo bhavah ** ^ an W MMr anyatastyajayl
7. Then Balaki said, 'The person who is m the air, on him, indeed, do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as Indra Vaikuntha, the unconquered army He who meditates on him thus becomes indeed the triumphant, the unconquerable, a conqueror of others '
psmth. triumphant, jayana-silaft
aparajaytsnuh unconquerable, parairphtm cdakya-silah
8 sa hovaca bdldkih, ya evaisa akaie purusas tarn evahmn vpdsa lii, torn hovaca ajdtaiatruh, ma mattasmm samvadaytsthah, purnam apravrih brahmett va akam etam upasa th sayo hailam evam ttpaste pwyate pmjayd paiubhir yasasa brakmawr- casena svargena lokena sarvam ayur eh
8 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is m space on him, indeed, do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the fall nonactive Brahman He who meditates on mm thus becomes filled with offspring, cattle, fame, the radiance of Brahma- knowledge and the heavenly world He reaches the full term of life'
a-pravrtti nonactive, kriya-s&nyam
9 sa hovaca balahh, ya evatso'gnau purusas tarn evaham upasa tit tarn hovaca ajalasatruh, ma mattasmm smnvadayisthan, visasahr tit va a/mm etam upasa tit sa /to haifam mm ttpaste vtsasalnr ha va anyesu bhavatt
9 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is m fire on him, indeed, do I meditate * To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on hint as the irre- sistible He then who meditates on him thus, verily, becomes irresistible among others.'
msasahth irresistible, vtvtdlm-saluum-Mah or dufcahah
IV 13 Kausttaki-Brahmaua Upanisad 787
10 sa hovaca balakih, ya evaiso'psu purusas tarn evaham upasa tit, iam hovaca ajdtasatruh, ma maitasmin samvada- yisthdh, tejasa almeli va aham dam upasa lii, sayo haitam evam upaste tejasa atma bhavah, tti adhidatvatam, aihddhyatmam
10 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is m water on him indeed do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the self of light He then who meditates on him thus verily becomes the self of light ' Thus with reference to the divinities Now with reference to the self
the self of light v. namnasya atma, the self of name, its source, kdranam
11 sa hovaca balakih, ya evaisa adarse purusas tarn evaham upasa iti, tarn hovaca ajatasatruh, ma maitasmin samvada- yisthah, pratirupa iti va aham etam upasa iti, sa yo haiiam evam upaste prahriipo hawasya prajayam ajdyate napratmtpah
11 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is in the mirror on him indeed do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the (reflected) likeness He then who meditates on him thus a very likeness of him is born in his offspring, not an unlikeness '
prattrftpdh likeness, sadrsah
12 sa hovaca bdlakth, ya evaisa chayayam purusas tarn evaham upasa Ut, tarn hovaca ajdtaiatrvh, ma 7>iaitasmm samvd- dayisthdh, dvitiyo'napaga tti va aham etam upasa ill sayo haiiam evam updste vmdate dvitiydt, dvitiyavdn hi bhavah
12 Then Balaki said, "The person i\ho is m the shadow on him indeed do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the in- separable second He then who meditates on him thus obtains from his second and becomes possessed of his second '
anapagah- inseparable, apagamana-siinyah from his second his wife
possessed of his second possessed of offspring putra-pautrddiblu bhavaii
13 sa hovaca balakih, ya evaisa praiisruikdydm purusas tarn evaham upasa lit, lam hovaca ajdlasatri'h, ma maitasmin samvddayisthdh, asur iti va aham etam upasa lit, sa yo haitam evam upaste na purd kdldl sammoham eh
7^8 The Principal Upamsads IV 16
13 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is in the echo on him indeed do I meditate ' To him then A]ata£atru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as life He then who meditates on him thus, he does not pass into un- consciousness before his time '
echo, v chaya shadow.
He does not pass into unconsciousness, does not die before his time* sammoham maranam
14 sa hovaca balahh, ya evatsa sabde purusas iam evaham upasa ih, iam hovaca ajaiaiatruh, ma maitasmm samvadayisthah mrtyur iti va aham etam upasa Hi, sayo hattam evam upaste na pura k&W praitih.
14. Then Balaki said, 'The person who is m sound on him indeed do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to com'erse on him I meditate on him as death He then who meditates on him thus, does not die before his time '
15 sa hovaca balaki)}, ya evatiat purusah supiah svapmya caraii (em evaham upasa tti, tarn hovaca ajatasatmh, ma maitasmm samvadayisthah, yamorajett va aham etam upasa tit, sa yo haitam evam upaste samam hasmd idam sratsthyaya
^iS^Then Balaki said, 'The person, who, while asleep, moves about in a dream on him indeed do I meditate ' To him then AjataSatra said, 'Do not make me to converse on Jam I meditate on him as King Yama He then who meditates on him thus, all here is subdued for his excellence (welfare)
sraisthyaya- for his excellence, adhkalvdya
16 sa hovaca balahh, ya evaisa iarire purusas iam evaham upasa iti, iam hovaca ajatasatruh, ma maitasmtnsa mvad ayiM lamiaixr ih va aham etam upasa «b, sayo hattam %%Zat* prajaya pasuhhir yasasa brahna-varcasem svargw lokena sarvam ayttr eti . . on
16 Then BallH said, 'The person who is in the body on
IV ig KausTlakt-Brdhmana Upanisad 789
17 sa hovaca balakih, ya cvaisa dafcvie'kstm pi/rutas tam evaham upasa tit, tam hovaca ajdlas'alruh, ma maitasmin samva- dayisthdh, vdca atmagner alma jyohsa aimeti va aham etam upasa tit, sa yo haitam evam updsta etesam sarvesam alma bhavati
17 Then Balaki said, 'The person who is in the right eye on him, indeed, do I meditate ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the self of speech, the self of fire, the self of light He then who meditates on him thus becomes the self of all these *
18. sa hovaca balakih, ya evaisa savye'ksim pnrusas tam evaham upasa tti, tam hovaca ajdtasali uh, ma mattasmm samvadayisphdh, satyasydlmd, vidyuta alma, tejasa atmeh va altam etam upasa itt, sa yo haitam evam upasta etesam sarvesam aima bhavati
18 Then Balaki said, "The person who is m the left eye on him, indeed, do I meditate ' To him then Ajataiatru said, 'Do not make me to converse on him I meditate on him as the self of truth, the self of lightning, the self of light He then who meditates on him thus becomes the self of all these
19 iata u ha bdldkis titsnhn dsa, tam hovaca ajdtasatrnh, eidvann u baldka itt, etdvad ih hovaca balakih, tam hovaca ajatasalruh, mtsa vai khalu ma samvddayisthd brahma te bravdnitt, yo vai baldka etesam pmvsdvdm kaitd, yasya vai iat kaima, sa vai veditavya itt' tata it ha balakih sanut pamh prali- cahama updydniti, tam hovaca ajataiatruh.pratilmnarupam eva tan manye yat ksalnyo brdhmanam upanayetaihi vyeva, too" piapayisydmltt, tam ha pdnav abhipadya piavavrdja tan ha suptam purusam djagmattih, tam hdjdtasairnh dmantraydm- cakre, brhat pdndara-vdsah soma-rdjann tti, sa it ha stsya eva, tata u haxnam yastydviaksepa sa fata eva samuitasthau lam hovaca ajatasatrnh, kvai<>a etad baldkc puriao'sayista, kvaitad abhut, kuta etad dgdd ih, tata it ha bdldkir va vijajfic, tam hovaca ajdtasaliuh, yalraisa etad baldkc purttto'sayista, yahaitad pabhut, yata etad dgdd ill, hifd nama pwuvasya nddyo hrdaydt tmtatam abhipratanvanli , tad yathd sahasradhd heso vipdtttas tavad anvyah pmgalasydmmnd tt^thantt, suklasya krsnasya pTtasya lohtfasya ca, tdsu iadd bhavati yadd sttptah svapnam na kancana paiyatt
79° The Principal Upanisads IV 20
19 After this Balaki became silent Then Ajatasatru said to him, 'Thus far only (do you know), 0 Balaki?' 'Thus far only,' replied Balaki To him then Ajatasatru said, 'In vain indeed did you make me to converse saying, "Let me declare Brahman to you," He, venly, 0 Balaki, who is the maker of these persons (whom you have mentioned in succession), he of whom all this is the work, he alone is to be known ' Thereupon Balaki, with fuel in his hand, approached, saying, 'Receive me as a pupil ' To him then Ajatasatru said, 'This I deem a form (of conduct) contrary to nature that a Ksatnya should receive a Brahmana as a pupil Come, I shall make you understand ' Then taking him by the hand he went forth The two then came upon a person asleep Then Ajatasatru called him (saying), 'You great one, clad in white raiment, King Soma ' But he 3ust lay silent Thereupon he pushed him with a stick He got up at once To him, then, Ajatasatru said 'Where, m this case, 0 Balaki, has this person lam, what has become of him here, from where has he returned here?' Thereupon (of this) Balaki did not know To him, then, Ajatasatru said Where, m this case, 0 Balaki, this person has lam, what has become of ton here, from where has he returned here, as I asked, is the channels of a person called hid extending from heart to the surrounding body (pericardium) As minute as a hair divided a thousandfold, they consist of a thin essence (fluid) white black, yellow and red. In these, one remains, while asleep ne sees no dreain whatsoever
SeeBU II 1 16
When the Brahmana became humbled m his pnde. tne King accept £> «ta PHP* «P*i«t*-g*™>» **— dmaU,mm avastham praptam , &fye lay silent, saytmam cakre, v itsya pupu avtaksepa pushed, a samatOattadttavan.
20 atltasmm pram ^haalia bhavaU Ud mm . vak w£
viprahsthanie, prdnebhyo devd devebhyo lokdh, sa esa prdna eva prapidtmedam sanram atmdnam amipravista dlomabhyd dnahhe- bhyah, tad yathd ksnrah ksttra dhdne'vopahito vtsvambharo vd visvambharakitldya evatn evaisa prapidtmedam iartram atmdnam amipravista dlomabhya dnakhebhyah, tarn etam atmdnam eta dtmano'nvavasyante yathd sresthinam svds tad yathd srestho svair bhunkte yathd vd svdh sresthinam bhunjanty evatn evaisa prapidtmaitair dimabhir bhunktam evam evaita dtmdna etam atmdnam bhunjanii sa ydvaddha vd mdra etam dimanam na vijapie, tdvad enam asurd abhibabhuvuh, sa yada vyaple'iha haivdsurdn viptya, sarvesam ca devdndm, saroesdm ca bhiiidndm iraisihyam svdrajyam, adhipatyam paryatt tatho evaivatn vidvdn sarodn pdpmano'pahatya sarvesam ca bhutdndm sraisthyam, svdrajyam, adhipatyam paryett ya evam veda, ya evam veda.
20 Then m this hfe-breath alone he becomes one Then speech together with all names goes to it. The eye together with all forms goes to it. The ear together with all sounds goes to it The mmd together with all thoughts goes to it And when he awakes, then, as from a blazing fire sparks proceed in all directions, even so from this self the vital breaths proceed to their respective stations, from vital breaths, the sense powers, from the sense powers the worlds This very hfe-spint, even the self of intelligence has entered this bodily self to the very hairs and nails Just as a razor might be hidden in a razor-case or as fire in the fireplace, even so this self of intelligence has entered this bodily self up to the very hairs and nails On that self these other selves depend as upon a chief his own (men) Just as a chief enjoj'S his own (men) or as his own (men) are of service to a chief, even so this sense of intelligence enjoys these (other) selves, even so the (other) selves are of service to that self (of intelligence). Venly, as long as Indra did not understand this self, so long did the demons overcome him When he understood, then (the self) having struck down and overcome the demons, he attained pre-eminence among all gods and all beings, sovereignty and overlordship. So also he who knows this, striking off all evils, attains pre-eminence, so\ereignty and overlordship over all beings — he who knows this, yea, he who knows this
visvambharak fire, agnth
bhunkte enjoys or feeds, annam atii
abhibabhuvuh overcame, humiliated, abhtbhaiam parabhavam eakruh.
The Maitri or Maitrdyaniya Upanisad, belongs to the Maitrayanlya sakha. or branch of the Black Yajttr Veda * Maitri is the principal teacher and Maitrayana is the name of the sakha. to which the Upamsad belongs It contains seven chapters of which the last two are comparatively modern The whole Upanisad is later m date than the classical Upamsads which it quotes frequently 2 We have a reference to the tnmurti conception Brahma, Visnu and Siva m IV 5, which also indicates the late date of the Upanisad The three forms are traced to the three gunas, rajas, sattva and tamas in V. 2. Suggestions of the illusory character of the world, momen- tanness of phenomena show the influence of Buddhist thought. Ramatirtha's commentary on the Upanisad is of much interest.
1 In some texts it is assigned to the Sama Veda
* From the grammatical peculiarities found in this Upanisad Max Muller ascnbes the Upanisad 'to an early rather than to a late period, possibly to an anti-Pamnean period ' Sacred Books of the East, Vol XV (1900), p 6
Lz
Maitrl Upanisad
I. brahtna-yajiio vd esa yaf purvesdtk cayanam, tasmdd yaja- manas cifvaitan agnin atmanam abhidhyayd; sa punzak fckalu va addhd'vikalah sampadyate yajnak, kah so'bkidkyeyo'yan: yak pranakhyah; tasyopahhyanam
i. A sacrifice to Brahman, indeed, is the laying (of the sacrificial fires) of the ancients. Therefore let the sacrificer, having laid these fires, meditate on the self. Thus, venly, does the sacrifice become complete and flawless Who is he that is to be meditated upon? He who is called life. Of him there is this story.
piirvesdm: of the ancients or formerly described. The performance of the sacrifices described previously in the Maitrayana Brakrrara is to lead up in the end to the knowledge of Brahman.
According to Ramatirtha, 1 the purpose of the Upanisad is to show that ceremonial works insofar as they contribute to produce the knowledge of the Supreme Self are themselves indirect causes of the highest end of man: sareesarii harmanam pararralTKa-jrana- janmopakarakatvcna parama-punisdrika-hdntvath darsayil'tth srutth pravavfie.
Mialu verily, micitatn vai prasiddham.
2 brhadratho vai nama raja vzrajye puirari: nidkapayiftzedam asasvaiam manyamanah sariram vairdgyam updo'rar.yasn r.trfa- gama sa tatra paramam tapa dsihdyddityatn udiksamaKa urdhva~ bdhus tisthaii, ante sahasrasya tr.unir anhkam djagamdgrir i<ra dhiimakas iefasd nirdahanr. ivdimarJd bkagavdK sdkdyar.yak, utthisthothistha varatk vrmsvdi rdjdnatr. abravit, sa iasmai natKaskrtvQvdca, bhagavan, r.dham atir.avii iiam taihavii su&rttmo vayam, sa tvam no brfihtii; dad vrtiam purastad duks'ak- yam dat-prainam aiksvakdnyan kanzan irztsxdi sdkdyar.yak, iirasasya caranav abhimrsamano rdjetrdm gdthdn: jagdda.
2 Venly, a king, Brhadratha by name, after having estab- lished his son in the kingdom, reflecting that this body is non-eternal, reaching the state of non-attachment (to the things of the world) went into the forest There, performing extreme austerity, he stands, with uplifted arms, gazing at the sun. At the end of a thousand (days) there came into the
1 TJnSess otherwise stated, all references are from Rs— attrtha cc
79^ The Pnncipal Upam?ads I 4.
presence of the ascetic, like a fire without smoke, burning as it were with glow, the revered SSkayanya, the knower of the sell He said unto the king 'Arise, arise, choose a boon ' He did his obeisance and said, '0 Revered One, I know not the self We have heard that you know its nature So tell it unto us ' fekayanya replied, 'Such things used to ocqur formerly Very difficult (to answer) is this question 0 Aiksvaka, choose other desires ' The king, touching his (SSkayanya's) feet with his head recited this utterance.
sahasrasya' a thousand, at the end of a thousand years, sahasrasam-
wtsarante. V. sahasrahasya, a thousand days.
vairagya non-attachment raga-ntvrttt,
tattvavtt- attnataUvasya vetta the knower of the nature of the self
didsakyam' dussakam vaktum irotum ca durlabham etat
atksvaka tksvaku~kidodbhava
3 bhagavann asth-carnia-sndyt^tajja-iMma-sukra-hmta sle?ind-sru'di^tkd-vtmnutra-vdta^ttta-Upha-sam durgan- dhemltsare'smin iarire fam Mmopabhogaih? kdma-krodJia-lobfia- tmha-bhaya-v^ddersyestavtyogdntsta-samprayoga-hwt-pipm- jard mrtyurroga-iokadyatr ahhihate asmtn ianre kim kamo-
Pabhogath> , , ,. , . , „
3 0 Revered One, in this foul-smelhng, unsubstantal body, a conglomerate of bone, skin, muscle, marrow, flesh, semen, blood, mucus, tears, rheum, faeces, urine, wind, bile ana phlegm, what is the good of the enjoyment of desires' In this body which is afflicted with desire, anger, covetousness delusion, fear, despondency envy, separation rom wha I* desired, union with the undesired, hunger, thirst, old age, death, disease, sorrow and the like, what is the good of the enjoyment of desires?
mhsare unsubstantial, kaddistanMamn nthsdre
EE &ES desire for what one has „ 0 t got, *****
aE e and their bodies racked with disease
Maitri Upanisad
etaxr va pare'nye mahd-dhamir-dharas cakra-vartinah kecit, sttd- yumna-bkfmdyumnendradytiinita-kiivalaydha-yativandSva-vadkry aivahapaUh iaiabmdur hanfcandi o'lnbarisa-nanaktu-saryati- yayatyanaranyok^ascnddayah, atha marutta-bharata-prabhrfayo rajanah, imsato bandhu-vargasya mahatlm sriyam tyaklva'smal lokdd amum lokam prayata ih, atha ktm etair va pare'nye gand- harvasura -yaksa - raksasa - bhuta -gana - pisacoraga - grahadinam mrodham paiyamah, atha ktm etair va'nyanam sosanam maharna- vanam sikhannam prapaianam dhrtwasyapracalanam vrascanam vatarajpmam nimajjanam piihvoyah sthanad apasaranam sura- nam tty etad-vtdlto'smin samsare ktm kamopabhogaih , yatr evaiitasyasakrd ihavartanam drsyata tty uddhartum arhast, andhodapanastlio bheka ivaham asmm samsare bhagavan tvam no gatts tvam no gahh
4 And we see that all this is perishing, as these gnats, mosquitoes and the like, the grass and the trees that grow and decay But, indeed, what of these' There are others, superior, great warriors, some world-rulers, Sudyumna, Bhuri- dyumna, Indradyumna, Kuvalayasva, Yauvanasva, Vadhr- yaiva, Asvapati, Sasabindu, Hanscandra, Ambarisa, Ananakta, Saryati, Yayati, Anaranya, Uksasena, and the rest, Kings, too, such as Marutta, Bharata and others, with their whole families looking on, ihey renounced great wealth and went forth from this world into that But, indeed, what of these' There are others, superior. We see the destruction of Gandharvas (fames), Asuras (demons), Yaksas (sprites), Raksasas (ogres), Bhutas (ghosts), Ganas, Pisacas (goblins), snakes, vampires, and the like. But, indeed, what of these? Among other things, there is the drying up of great oceans, the falling away of mountain peaks, the deviation of the fixed pole-star, the cutting of the wind-ropes (that hold the stars m their places), the submergence of the earth, the departure of the gods from their station. In such a world as this, what is the good of enjoyment of desires 7 For he who has fed on them is seen to return (to this world) repeatedly. Be pleased, therefore, to deliver me. In this world (c}'cle of existence) I am like a frog m a waterless well Revered Sir, you are our way (of deliverance), you are our way
Everything in the world is transient It rises and grows, decays and dies, ttdbhitta-pradhvamsmah Cp Henry Vaughan- 'Suddenly do the high things of this world come to an end, and their delectable things pass away, for when they seem to be m their flower and full
The Principal Upanisads
strength, they perish to astonishment And sure the mine of the most goodly places seems to tell, that the dissolution of the whole is not far off ' Mount of Oltves (1652)
After Ambarisa, name of Nahusa is given in some texts Ananata is the name of a Rsi in R V IX 3 mrodham destruction, another reading, mrodhanam
Mattri Upamsad
SAKAYANYA'S TEACHING CONCERNING THE SELF
1. atha bhagavan sakayanyah suprito'bravid rajanam, maha- rdja brhadralheksvahi-vamsa-dhvaja sighram atmajiiah kria-krtyas tvam marumiamneh visruto'siti, ayam va va khalv atma te, yah hatamo bhagavd iti, tarn hovaceti.
1 Then, the revered Stkayanya, well pleased, said to the king 'Great King Brhadratha, banner of the race of Iksvaku, speedily will you who are renowned as Marat {the wind) attain your purpose and become a knower of the self This, indeed, is thy self '
'Which, 0 Revered One,' said the King Then he said to him
dehendnya inano buddhi prananam madhye ktm anyatamah kim va tad vdaksanc anya lit prahiarihah, latra samghatavtlaksana coatmeh gurur uttarawi pratijapie
The question is raised whether the self is different from the body, the senses, rand, understanding and life and the answer is given that the self is different from the composite cf all these
The teaching concerning the self continues till VI 2&
2. atha ya esa ucchvasavistambhancnordhvam utkranio vyaya- mano'vyayamanas tamah pranudaty esa atma, tly aha bhagavan maiirih, tty evam hy aha, atha ya esa samprasado'smac charirat samutthaya param jyottr upasampadya svena rnpenabhims- padyaia xly esa atmcti hovacattad amrtam, abhayam, etad brahmch
2 Now he who, without stopping the respiration, goes upwards, moving about yet unmovmg, dispels darkness, he is the self Thus said the revered Maitn For thus has it been said, 'Now that serene one, who, rising up out of this body, reaches the highest light and appears with his own form, he is the self,' said he, 'that is the immortal, the fearless That is Brahman '
SeeCU VIII 3 4
moving about, yd unmovmg while he experiences the changes of the mind caused by impressions, he is in reality unaffected by them all
maxim miiraya apatyam fs%r mailnr matircyak
He is the proclaimer of this iakhS, ctat-iakha-praiakta.
800 The Principal Upantsais II 4
smhal from this body, both the gross (sth&la) and the subtle (sfikstna).
samprasadah' satnyak prastdaiy atrett samprasadah susuptth id- avaslhah Btmcha satnprasada ttcyate It is the self in deep sleep
3 atha khalv tyam brahma-vidya sarvopanisad-vtdya va rdjam asmakam bhagavata maitmui khyata'ham te kathaytsyamiti, athdpaltata-pdpmanas ttgma-tejasa iirdhva-retaso vSltkhdya th sriiyante, atha kratum prajdpattm abrwvan, bkagavan fakalam ivacctanam tdam iariram kasyaisa khalv Urko makmSUn* dnya-bhiitasya enatlad-vidham etac cdanavat prattstkdpttam pracodayitd vd asya, yad bhagavan vetsi tad asmakam brtihtti, ta.11 hovaceh
3. Now, indeed, 0 King, this is the brahma knowledge, even the knowledge contained in all the Upanisads as' declared to us by the revered Maitn I will narrate it to you Now we hear that Valikhilyas were free from evil, of resplendent glory and vigorous chastity. Now they said to Krahi Pfa}a-pat%, *0 Revered One, this body is like a cart without intelligence To what supersensuous being belongs such power by wtocii such a sort of thing has been made intelligent, or in other words, who is its mover? What you know, 0 Revered One, tell us that ' Then he said to them
The conversation between Valikhilyas and Praja-pdt continues free from evil. Those who freed themselves from
baddlia-reta vttmtcyeta mukta-retas tu baihyate
h° v&ca , « sfandme aloof amidst qualities,
II 5. Maitri Upanisad Sol
tranquil, breathless, mindless, endless, undecaying, steadfast, eternal, unborn, independent. He abides in his own greatness. By him this body is set up as possessing intelligence or in other words, this one, verily, is its driver Then they said, 'How, Revered sir, by this kind of desireless being is this sort of thing set up as possessing intelligence, or m other words, how is this one its mover?' Then he said to them
ttpartsthdh' standing aloof, sarvasya prapaiicasyopan msprapaiica svardpe'vasthttah
tirdhva-retasah may be taken as vocative also 'He who, 0 men of vigorous chastity, is described m the Sruti as dwelling amidst worldly objects and yet placed above them all ' This is more satisfactory Siinyah void, ntsprapancah Santah tranquil, mrvikdrah k&fasthah
niralma mindless, aimett mana ttcyate, mano-rahttal}, samkalpadhy-
avasdyadt -iharma-rcintah
AnubhiUt-prakafa reads anUatma (60)
He abides in his own greatness ' See C U VII 24
amsthetur free from any local habitation or attachment
v amstena tsiam, tccha, iccha, rahttak, desireless
or amsihena sftksmatarena, smallest
5 sa va esa siiksmo'grdhyo'drsyah pimisa-sampio'buddhi- puroam ihaivavartate'msenett suptasyevdbuddh-purvam vtbodha evam tit, atha yo ha khahi vavaitasyamso'yam yas caiidmdirah pralipiirusah kseiraplah samkalpddhyaroasdydbhmdnahngah, prajd-paitr vi&dkhyas cetanenedam iariram ceianavat pratisthd- pttam pracodayttd vai$o'pyasyeti, te hoctsr bhagavan, yady anenedr&iidmsihmaitad-mdJiam tdam cetanavat prahsthdpttam pracodayitd vaiso'sya katham iti: tan hcrodceh
5 Verily, that subtile, ungraspable, invisible one, called the person, dwells here (m the body) with a part (of himself), with previous awareness (volition) even as the man who is fast asleep awakes of his own awareness (volition) Now, assuredly that part of him, which is entirely intelligent in every person is the spirit (knower of the body) which has the marks of conception, determination and self-love, Prajd-pah called Visva By him as intelligence is his body set up as possessed of intelligence, or in other words this very one is its mover Then they said, 'Revered sir, if by this kmd of desireless being this sort of thing is set up as possessed of intelligence, still, how is this one its mover?' Then he said to them.
buddht-purvam is the reading adopted by Anubhutiprakasa 67, 68.
8o2 The Principal Upamsads n. 6
A man if he hkes can wake himself from sleep Another reading is a-buddhupiirvam, without previous awareness or volition kwtrap'iaJr knower of the body, kseiram fariram lad aJiam asmift janafiti hselrajnah
PROGRESSIVE DIFFERENTIATION OF PRAJA-PATI INTO DIFFERENT TYPES OF BEINGS
6 prajd-pattr vd eko'gre'tisthat, sa ndram ataikah, sotmanam abhdhydtvd bahvth prajd asrjaia, id aimevdprabuddka apranah sthanur iva tisthamdnd apaiyat, sa ndramata, so 'manyatcatasam prattbodhandydbhyantaram vivitetm, sa vdyur tvatmdnam krtva- bhyantaram prdvtial sa eko ndiakat' sa paficadhatmanam vtbhajyocyate, yah prdno'pdnah saimna udano vydna iti aihayam ya Urdhvam utkrdmaiy esa vd va sa prdno'tha yo'yam avan sa'Mrdmaty esa vd va so'pdno'lha yena vd eta anugrlM ity esa vd va sa vydno'iha yo'yam sthavtstlw ihdlur annasyapam prdpayaty antstho vdnge'nge samdnayaty esa va va sa smmna- samjM uttaram vydnasya rupam cattesdm antard prasttttr maddnasydtha yo'yam pitdtitam udgirah mgiratiti vatsa va va sa ttddnah, athopdmiur antarydmam abhtbhavaty antarydma upam- iuncaxtayor antard devaitsnyam prdsuvat yad ausnyam sa puruso'tlia yah ptirusah so'gmr vaisvdnarak anyatrapy uktam, ayam agmr vaisvanaro yo'yam anlali-puzuse yenedam annum iacyate yad tdam adyate, tasyaisa ghoso bhavati yam tint hamav aptdhdya irnoh sa yado utkramtsyan bhavati nainam ehosam srnoh, sa vd esa pancadhatmanam vibhajya nmto emhdydm, mano-mayah prdna-ianro bhd-nipah satya-samMpa ak&mmett sa vd eso'smdd hrdaMardd akrtartho'manyatartimn aindniti atah khdnnndm bhiUvoditahpa^bhiratmtbhrmsayaii ath, iti buddhindnyam ydmmdny etany asya rabnayah karmn- dnvdnv asya hayd, rathah Sarlram, mano myania, pom- Z%a ptatodt-nena khalMh pmbhramatUam iantm Sam tw mrtyavenedam ianram cetanavat prattstltapitam
n^T&U P^-pa, (the lord of stood alone He had no hapless, being ^J**£% tata* on himself, he created numerous offspring He saw hem to be hke a stone, without understanding - ^«
Maitn Upanisad
is called prana, apana, samana, uddna, vyana (five kinds of breath) That breath which rises upwards that, assuredly, is the prana (breath) Now that which moves downwards, that, assuredly, is the apana (breath) Now that, verily, by which these two are supported, that, assuredly, is the vyana (breath). Now that which carries unto the apana breath gross elements of food and distributes the subtle (elements) m each limb, that, assuredly, is called samana (breath) It is a higher form of the vyana (breath) and between them is the production of the uddna (breath) That which brings up or carries down what has been drunk and eaten is the udana (breath). Now the upamsu vessel is over against the antaryama vessel and the antaryama vessel is over against the upamsu vessel and between these two the god generated heat That heat is the person and the person is the universal fire And thus it is said elsewhere, "This is the universal fire namely that which is here withm a person by means of which the food that is eaten is cooked (digested) Its noise is that which one hears on covering the eyes thus When a man is about to depart this life he does not hear this noise ' He, venly, having divided himself fivefold is hidden m a secret place, he who consists of mind, whose bcdy is life, whose form is light, whose conception is truth, whose soul is space Venly, not having attained his purpose, he thought to himself from within the heart here, 'Let me enjoy objects ' Thence having pierced these openings (the five apertures of the senses), he enjoys the objects by means of the five reins These reins of his are the organs of perception His horses are the organs of action His chariot is the body. The charioteer is the mind The whip is made of one's character By him thus driven, this body goes round and round like the wheel (driven) by the potter So this body is set up as possessing intelligence or in other words, this very one is its mover.
chah. with no one to help, asahdyah agre before creation, caracarasrstek piirvam aimcva pasdnavad acctanah aprabudahah • buddht -rahitah
upamsu and antaryama are the two (grahas) \essels for holding the soma juice They are placed on either side of the stone used for crashing the soma plant See Tatttiriya Samhita I. 4 2 3,
y,H 5 6
Thus il is said clscu here B U V 9, C U III 13 8
gtihSyam in a secret place giihatt samvrnott jiianatsandadyaliiayam
if 1 guha buddkth It conceals the excess of knowledge, joy, etc
cc*
8o4 The Principal Upanisads II y,
bha-rHpah- whose form is light, bhd ai-prakdio rtlpam svariipam asyeti bha-mfiah.
satya-sathkalpah' whose conception is truth satyah samkalpd avasyam- bhdvtnah piirva-kiia-jndna-karitta-samskdra-bhdviidh samkalpa asyett salya-samkalfiah
akasatma whose soul is space, dkasavad asango'grahya Mma svariipam asyely dkaSdtma.
cakram tva mjiyavenedam, v cakram tva ttytpacenedam.
7 sa va esa atmehoianh kavayah, sitdsttath karttmphalair anabhibhuta tva prah sanresu caraty avyaktatvat saufymyad adriyatvdd agrahyatvan ntrtnamatvac cdnavastho'sali kartd'har- tatrvdvasthah, sa va esa iuddhah sthtro'calas calepyo'vyagro ntsprhah preksahavad avasihttah svasthai ca, rtabhuggunantayena paiendtmdnam antardhaydvasthitd ity avasthita th
y. Venly, this self, the seers declare, wanders here on earth in every body (from body to body) unaffected, as it seems, by the light or the dark fruits of action. On account of this unmanifestness, subtility, imperceptibihty, ungraspabihty, freedom from self-sense, (the self) is unabiding and a doer only in seeming, truly is not a doer, he is abiding. Venly, he is pure, steadfast, unswerving, stainless, unagitated, free from desire, remains fixed like a spectator and abiding in his own self As an enioyer of righteous work he covers himself with a veil made of qualities, but he remains fixed, yea, he remains nxeo.
kavayah seers, medhdviitah
ambhibhiUah unaffected, asamsprstah i^raiato' He is a seer, a witness, not an object seen, avastha-iraya-rahuo vastha-sdksitvat na hi dfkyadharmo drasfan u P ara P a ^.. s& . Mv nisprUh. free from desire, fianparna-paramananda-rRpaiwl s#ft<«»
fits, spectator, M The ^™££f to to
of which all the world, ourselves included, is the stage.
vartate
Ill 2
Maitn Upanisad
I te hocuh, bhagavan, yady evam asy dimano mahimdnam silcayastty anyo vd parah; ko'yam atmakhyo yo'yam sitasiiaih ^ karma-phalair abhibhiiyamanah sad-asad-yonim apadyatd ity avdncyordhvd va gatir dvandvair abhibhuyamanah partbhramaU.
1 They (the Vahkhilyas) said (to Prajd-pah Kratu) , 'Revered One, if you thus indicate the greatness of this self then there is that other, different one also called self, who, affected by the bright or dark fruits of action, enters a good or an evil womb, so that his course is downward or upward and he wanders about, affected by the pairs (of opposites like pleasure and pain)
2 ash khalvanyo'paro bhvtdtmakkyo yo'yam sitdsitaih karma- phalatr abhibhuyamanah sad-asad-yomm apadyatd ity avan- cyordhva va gatir dvandvair abhibhuyamanah panbhramatily asyopavydkhydnam, paiica-tanmdtrd blnita-sabdenocyante, atha paiica-mdha-bhiitdni bhiita-iabdenocyanle'tha tesam yat samuda- yam, tat sariram ity uhtam, alhayo ha khalu vd va sarira ity uhtam sa bhiitdtmety uktam, athdmrlo'sydtmd bmdur iva puskard ih sa va eso'bhibhiilah prdkrtair gunatr iti. alho'bhibhutatvdt sammu- dhatvam praydlah, safnmitdhatvdd dt?nastham prabhum bhaga vantam kdrayttdram ndpasyad gunaughair uhyamdnah kalusi- krtas cdsthiras caiicalo lupyamdnaJi sasprho vyagras cdbhimdni- tvam prayatd iti, aham so mamedam ih, evam manyamdno mbadhndty dtmandtmdnam jaleneva kha-carah kriasydmi phalair abhibhiiyamanah sad-asad-yomm apadyatd ity avdncyordhvd vd galtr dvandvair abhibhuyamanah panbhramaii katama esa iti tan hovdceit
2 There is, indeed, another, different, called the elemental self, he who, affected by the bright or the dark fruits of action, ^ enters a good or an evil womb so that his course is downward or upward and he wanders about affected by the pairs (of opposites). And this is its explanation The five subtle elements are called by the name element Likewise the five gross elements are called by the name element Now the combination of these is called the body Now he, indeed, who is said to be m the body is called the elemental self. Now_its immortal self is ltke a drop of water on the lotus leaf This (elemental self) verily, is affected -i? by nature's* qualities Now because of being affected.Tie gets 7^ to bewilderment (becomes confused); because of bewilderment
806 The Principal Upanisads III 3
he sees not the blessed Lord who dwells m hunself, the causer of action Borne along and defiled by th^sjtream of qualities, - unstable, wavering, bewildered, full of desire, distracted, he gets to the state of self-love Thinking, 'I am he,' 'This is mine,' he binds himself with his self like a bird m a snare So being affected by the fruits of his action, he enters a good or an evil womb so that his course is downward or upward and he wanders about, affected by the pairs of opposites Which one ^s this? Then he said to them
karlram body* praneitdnyantah karana-sahta-sSksmaMutasamu- dayo hnga-sariram, pancikrta^anca^ttaha-bhiila-sainttdSyah slhulam
iariram .... ,
IThe gross body consists of the gross elements, the subtle body of 'flife, senses, mind and the subtle-elements apasyad 'does not see See B G VII 13. , gttnaughair uhyamam. this refers to the torrent of gtmas by which one is swept along Cp Plato's nver of sensations, Ttmaeus 43B and Philo 'nver of the objects of sense that swamps and drowns our soul under the flood of the passions until he crosses The sell is overcome by the gunas and falls into an illusion in which t SecS weak,disordlred, sensual and believes m its own separate existence, fettering itself by its own action like a bird m the net
kwJatk karwMntah-puruseh aiha yathagmmyaspmio
khalv asau bMmmdntah-ptmwnabhibhutogHmn^ ndmivam utaiU catur-jalam catur-daSavidham cat 'J'*™
dam ZMiam ptmisenentam cakram tva miiyaveneti ma
bhuyaty asau puruso'bhbhnyaty ayam bh«iatmopasamih?Mv««
U \ And thus it has been said elsewhere Verily, he who is the
coveras, is fourteenfold, is transformed m ^gniy io
Ill 5 MaitrT Upamsad 807
not overcome, even so the person is not overcome. The elemental self is overcome because of its attachment (to qualities) __j
karifbhh' workmen, smiths, lohakdradibhh
cahir-jalam fourfold covering, the four sheaths, matter, life, con- sciousness and intelligence Commentators mention the four forms of animal life
fourteen/old- fourteen classes of beings Reference is to Sdmkhya KSrika 53 or to the fourteen worlds, Vedanta-sara 129 eighty-four This may have reference to an earty speculation in natural history or may mean any number of forms
4 athanyairapy uhtam, sarTram tdam matthuttad evodbhufam, samvrddhvyupetam mrayc'tha mutradvdrena mskrdntam, asthibhis cttam, mamsenanuhptam carmandvanaddham vin-mfi- ira-p:lia-kapha-majjd-niedo-vasabhir anyais cdmayatr bahubhth paripurnam, kosa iva vasund _
4 And thus it has been said elsewhere This body anses'i from sexual intercourse It is endowed with growth in darkness Then it comes forth through the unnary passage It is built up with bones, smeared over with flesh, covered with skin, filled with faeces, unne, bile, phlegm, marrow, fat, grease and also with many diseases, like a treasure house full of wealth _j
mraye m darkness (of the womb), mraya lulye mdtur ttdare In due time comes out of the unnary passage, viiitra-dvdrcnayom-ravdhrena dmayath v malath
Wise people should not identify their true self with the body. mraya-rilpe'smm Sartre mvekinabhtmano 11a kdrya ily abhiprdyah
5 athanyairapy uktam, sammoho bhayam, visddo mdrd, landrT, pramddo jara, sokah, ksut, pipdsd, kdrpanyam, krodho ndsiikyam, apldnam, mdtsaryam, naiskdrunyam, mudhatvam, ntr- vrldalvam, nirdkrtitvam, vddhaiatvam, asamilvam iti tdmasdm, antastrsnd sneho rdgo lobho htmsd, raixr dvisltr vydvrtatvam Irsya, kamam, asthiratvam, calatvam vyagralvam, jigTsdrikopdrja?iam mitrdnugraltanam parigrahdvalambo mslesvwdnydrthesu dvisfi- rtslesvabhisvangah iuklasvaro'nnatamastv th rdjasdny elath paripurna etaxr abhtbhuld tty ayam bhuiatmd tasmdn ndnd-rupany apnottti, dpnoilh
5 And then it has been said elsewhere bewilderment, fear, depression, sleepiness, sloth, heedlessness, old age, grief, hunger, thirst (mental), weakness, anger, unorthodoxy, ignorance, jealousy, cruelty, stupidity, shamelessness, meanness, rashness, unequablencss, these are the characteristics of the quality of
808 The Principal Upamsads III 5
darkness. Inner thirst, affection, passion, covetousness, hurting others, lust, hatred, deceit, envy, insatiability, unsteadfastncss fickleness, distractedness, ambitiousness, acquisitiveness, patronage of friends, family pnde, aversion to unpleasant objects and over-attachment to pleasant objects, sourness of utterance and gluttonousness, these are the characteristics of the quality of passion By these he is filled, by these he 3. affected, therefore the elemental self attains manifold forms, ^y_ea, attains (manifold forms)
sammoha bewilderment, viparyaya
tandrl sloth, alasyam
karpanyam weakness (mental), krpanatvam
nasttkyam- unorthodoxy non-belief in the unseen lvorid and
^difference to sacred scriptures, aimmike ireyast ntrayc va nashh
buddhir vedady-anadaraS ca.
miskarunyanr cruelty, naisthuryam
mrakrtfivam v mkrtalvam iatliatvam
ttddhataivam rashness, sdhasestt mteankalvam.
himsa- hurting others, para-pida
dvistth hatred dvesah
vvaeiatvam distractedness, vyasnmln.
Tb& Upanisad is greatly influenced by Samhhya ideas
Maiirl Upanisad
1 te ha khalu vavardhva-rdaso'tivismita abhisamelyoath, bhagavan, namaste'stv ami&adhi, tvam asmakarh gahr anya na vidyata ill, asya ko vidhir bhiitatmano yenedam hitvatmann eva sayujyam upaiii tan hovacdi.
1. They (the Valikhilyas), indeed, of vigorous chastity, exceedingly amazed, approached him and said, 'Revered Sir, salutations to you, instruct us further You are our way (of deliverance) and there is no other What is the method (rule) by ■which this elemental self, after leaving this (elemental body) obtains union with the (true) self?' Then he (Prajd-pali Kratu) said to them
vtsmita amazed that the true self, pure and undefiled, should appear to be impure and defiled, mtya-iuddhas-ctdaimd'smaipralyaySttna satin apt paroksa iva Suddko'py asuddha iva aknyo'pt sakriya iveli msmiia eva santah httva leaving, vikaya
atman' atmam, the self, cid-ananda~sat-sv«riipa eva piirrtdtmani sayujyam union, sayug-bhavam
2. athanyatrdpy uhtam, mahdnadisfmnaya ivanivarlakam asya yat purdkrtam, samudraveleva durnivdryam asya mrlyor dgamanam, sad-asad-phalamayaih pasaih paiigur tva baddham, bandhanasthasya ivasvatantryam, yam amsayasthasya iva bahu- bhaydvastham, madironmatta iva moha-madironmattam, papmand grhita iva bhramyamanam, mahoraga-dasla iva visaya-dastam, mahdndhakaram iva rdgdndham, indrajalam iva mdyamayam, svapna iva mithya-darianam, kadali-garbha ivasdram, nala iva kiana-vcsatn, cttra-bhtttir iva miihya-manoramam tty athoktam.
iabda-sparsddayo hy artha martye'nartha ivdsfhldh ycsam saklas in bhutdtma na smareta param padam.
2 And this it has been said elsewhere. Like the waves in large rivers there is no turning back of that which has been done previously; like the tide of the ocean, the approach of one's death is hard to keep back Like a lame man, bound by the fetters made of the fruits of good and evil, like the con- dition of a man m prison, lacking independence, like the condition of one in the realm of death, beset by many fears, like one intoxicated with liquor, intoxicated with the liquor of
810 The Principal Upamsads IV 3,
delusion, rushing about like one possessed by an evil spirit, like one bitten by a great serpent, bitten by the objects of sense, like gross darkness, the darkness of passion, like juggler}', consisting of illusion, like a dream, false appearances, like the inside of the banana tree, unsubstantial, like an actor changing dress every moment, like a painted scene, falsely delighting the mind and therefore it has been said, 'Objects of sound, touch and the like are worthless objects for a man,' the elemental self, through attachment to them, does not remember the highest state
papmana by an evil spirit, papa-grahena
mariye man, a mortal, marana-dhamtm bkStSttnam
3 ayam va va khalv asya prattvtdhtr bhiitalmano yad vcda- vidyadhtgamah svadharmasyanucaranam, svdstamesv cvanuhra- mamm, svadkarmasya va etad vratam, stambasakhe vaparam, anenorddhvabhag bhavaty anyathavdn tty e$a svadharmo'bhhlo yo vedesu na $vadharmatikra?nena$ramT bhavati, asramesv evana- vasthas tapasvT vetyucyaia ttyetad ayuktam, natapaskasyatma- liiane'dhigamah karma-siddhir vtii, evam hy aha
tapasa prdpyate sattvam, sattvat samprapyate manah manasah prdpyate hy atma, yam aptva m nnartata 1/1
* This is indeed, the antidote for the elemental sell, acquirement 'of the knowledge of the Veda and the due per- formance of one's own duty Pursuit of the duties of the stage of life to which each one belongs, this is the rule for one s <mn duty, others are like the branches of a stem. Through 1 : one goes upwards, otherwise downwards That is ones regular duty which is set forth in the Vedas Not by transgressing one
a San does not belong to any of the stages of life fin £ 1 1 M who practises austerity, it is not proper (However) ^ f«J does not practise austerity there is no success nf the self or in the perfection of works For thus has it wen *Ia B7a?stenty goodness is obtained and from goodness Ste£iSS75A»d and from the understand..* is the StSiS he who obtains the self does not return
^We belong to a particular stage of We or airama by perform^
IV 4 Maitri Upanisad 8ll
the duties belonging to it and not by assuming its external marks: kevalam tat-tad'osrama-hnga-dharana-matrad airami na bhavatt. sativam goodness, sattva-guna-pradhdnam attain mamh understanding, viveka-viptanam
atma the self, pumam tattvam param brahma We can say prasanna- aiiasyeva moksak Upanisad Brahmayogm When one attains self-knowledge, he is freed from samsara . . prapya saksatkrlya na ntvartate punah samsdra-mandale bhutatma- bhavaya navartate mucyata tit
4 asti brahmeh brahma-vidyd-vid abravid.brahma-dvdranitdam ityevaitad aha.yas tapasapahata-papmd, aum brahmano malnmety evatiad aha, yah suyukto'jasram cmtayati, tasmad vidyaya tapasa cmtaya copalabhyate brahma, sa brahmanah para eta bhavaty adhidaivatvam devebhyai cett, aksayyam, apanmitam, anamayam, sukham ainuteya evam vidvan anena tnkena brahmo- paste, atha yaih panptmiabhtbhfdo'yam rathttas ca tair vaiva mukias tv atmann eva saynjyam upaiti
4 'Brahman is,' said one who knew the knowledge of Brahman 'This is the door to Brahman,' said one who had freed himself from evil by (the practice of) austerity 'Aum is the (manifest) greatness of Brahman,' said one who, completely absorbed, always meditates (on it) Therefore, by knowledge, by austenty, by meditation is Brahman apprehended He becomes one who goes beyond the Brahma (the lower, Htranya-garbha) and to the state of the supreme divinity above the gods He obtains happiness, undecaying, unmeasured, free from sickness, he who knows this and worships Brahman with this triad (knowledge, austenty and meditation) Then freed from those things by which he was filled and affected, this rider of the chanot attains (complete) union with the self
brahma-vtdya. knowledge of Brahman which anses from logical nueshgation, pramana-yukh-janyam brahma-jnaimm
By austenty, knowledge and meditation, we obtain Brahman praihamam lapas tato brahma-vtdya iravanadt-laksana talah prana- vaika-msthatch kramena sadhana-trayavan brahmopalabhetcty arthah hrahmanah lower Brahma, aparasya hnanya-garbhakhyasya sabda brahmanah
rathitah the rider of the chanot, ralhatn prapiio rathiivam ca prapita th yavat
8l2
The Princtpal Upanisads IV 6.
5. te hocut bhagavann abhvadyasUy abhivadyasUy, mhiimn asmabhir etad yaihavad uktam manastiy, athottaram prasnam anubrtihUt, agnir vayur ddtiyah kah yah prano'nnam brahma rudro vipiiur tty eke'nyam abhtdhydyattty eke'nyam, ireyah katamo yah so'smakam bruhth, tan hovaceti
5 They said 'Revered One, you are the teacher, you are the teacher What lias been said has been duly fixed in mind by us Now answer a further question Fire, air, sun, time, whatever it is, breath, food, Brahma, Rudra, Visnu, some meditate upon one, some upon another Tell us which one is the best for us ' Then he said to them
6. brahmano va vattd agryds tanavah parasydmrtasya Sanrasya tasyawa loke prahmodatiha yo yasydmi?akta ityevam hy aha; brahma khalv tdam va va sarvam yd va'sya agryd stanavas ta abhdhyiyei arcayea mhmydc ca, atas iabhh sahatroopary upan loke?ucaraii, athakrtsna-ksayaekatvam et%purusasya,pumsasya
6 These are but the chief forms of the Supreme, the immortal, the bodiless Brahman To whichever one each man is devoted here, m his world he rejoices For it has been said, 'Verily, this whole world is Brahman ' Venly, these, which are its chief forms one meditates upon, worships and discards For with these one moves higher and higher in the worlds And when all things pensh (m universal dissolution), he attains unity of (with) the person, yea, of the person
SL^mStayah 'Venly, this whole world is Brahman,'
Si-fo^t when all things pensh hfisnasya ^^Jm- sSa-lokakasya hiranya-gaMasya hsayeavasanesa » i***"*™ ™ rlpah san furusasya piirnasya parabrahmm ekatvam sayntfam eh
ttif lord of this world Htranya-garbha lapses into the AMomw BrJmn TySLmdividuahties^retamedbythesoulsindudu-g
%v&e d w^hip of these denies one nses to mgher states of beu>g
the Vahkhilyas and Praja-pali as denved by tradition from Maitri and narrated by Slkayanya to King Brhadratha Sakayanya's teaching is said to be continued till VI 29, though it evidently is a later addition as undoubtedly chapters VI and VII are, even according to the commentator.
8l 4 The Principal Upamsdds y z
THE CONCEPTION OF TRIMORTI r atha yatheyam kautsydyam stuhh
tvam brahmd tvan ca vai vtsnus tvam rudras tvam prajdpalth tvam agmr varum vdyus tvam indras tvam ntsakarah tvam annas tvam yamas tvam prthwi tvam vtsvam ivam athdcyittah,
svdrthe svabhdwhe'rihe ca bahudhd samsthtis tvayt visvesvara, nomas iubhyam, visvdtmd vtsva-karma-kri insva-bhug vihamayus tvam visva-kridd-rati-prabhuh namah sdntdtmane iubhyam, namo guhyatamaya ca, acmtydydprameydya amdimdhandya ca I. Now then this is Kutsayana's hymn of praise Thou art Brahma and verily thou art Vismi, thou art Rudra and thou Prajd-pati, thou art Agm, Varuna, Vayu, thou art Indra and thou art the moon Thou art food, thou art Yama, thou art the earth, thou art all, thou art the Imperishable All things exist m thee in many forms for their own or for their natural ends Lord of the universe, salutations to thee, the self of all, the maker of all, the enjoyer of all, thou art all life and the lord of all pleasure and delight. Salutations to thee, the tranquil self, salutations to thee, the deeply hidden, the incomprehensible, the immeasurable and without beginning and without end
svdrthah for their own ends purusarlho dfiarmddi-catusfaya-rupah
svabhawkah for their natural ends, prakrlikdh
visvdtmd because be is the material cause of the world, vtmpSdi-
natvat
the tranquil self. Cp sdntaupasita.sdiitdhsapremabhakltkah Srtdhara on Bhagavata BraJimavawarta Purdna dkyayante vaisnavah santah idntam tarn tat parayanam Brahma Khanda XIX 23 2
2. tamo va idam agra dsid ekam, tat pare sydt tat tal part- nmtam visamalvam praydh, etad-nipam vat rajas, tad rajah khalv mlath msamalvam praydh, etad vat sattvasya rupam, tat sattvam evmtam rasah samprdsravat so'mso'yam yas celdmdtrah pratt- purusah ksetrajnah samkalpddhyavasdydbhimdna-hngah praja- patir visvett, asya prag-uktd etas tanavah, alha yo ha^ hkaltt va. vdsya tdmaso'mio'sau sa brahmacdrino yo'yam rudrolha yo ha khalu va vasya rdjaso'mso'sau sa brahmacarino yoyam brahmdtha yo ha hhalu va vasya sdUviko'mfo'safi sa braluna- cdrmo yo'yam vtpiuh, sa vd esa ekas irtdka bhdo siadhatka-
V 2. Maitri Upanisai 815
dasadhd dvadaiadha'panmitadhd vodbhuta, udbhiitatvad bhiltam bk&tesu carah pravisiah, sa bhutaniim adhipatir babhnva tty asa fibnattiar-bahti cantar-baJns ca
2 Verily, m the beginning this (world) was darkness alone That was in the Highest When impelled by the Highest it moves on to differentiation That form, verily, is passion That passion, when impelled, moves on to differentiation That, venly, is the form of goodness That goodness, when impelled, the essence flowed forth. That part is what the intelligence principle in every person is, the knower of the body, which has the marks of conception, determination and self-love, Traja-pah (the lord of creation) called Visva. His forms have been pre- viously mentioned Now then, indeed the part of him which is characterised by darkness that, 0 students of sacred knowledge, is this Rudra Now then, indeed, that part of him which is characterised by passion, that, 0 students of sacred knowledge, is this Brahma Now then, indeed, that part of him which is characterised by goodness, that, 0 students of sacred know- ledge, is this Visnu Venly, that one becomes threefold He developed forth eightfold, elevenfold, twelvefold, in unlimited parts. Because he thus developed, he is a (created) being, he moves about, having entered all beings He became the lord of (created) beings. That is the self withm and without, yea, within and without
The relation of the three forms (murii-traya), to the Supreme is here indicated The three Brahma, Visnu and &va are not to be conceived as independent persons, they are the threefold mani- festations of the one Supreme
rasa/i essence, saras ctd-ananda-praka&h See T U II 7 cctamfitrah intelligence-principle, which is entirely intelligent, ceta cetanS sdht-cailanyam layantiyale'vabhasyala rii cetamnlwhsvaprakii- M'SSkst-niatrettanubhavya ih
Mrajiia knower of the body bsetram iariram dharmadharma- om-praroha-bhwmtval tad a-pada-lala-maslakam aham th jdndtili ksctrafio fiva iti
vthv every one, 1 e every individual He is not only the sum-total
;!/jj IStences but K also the P nncv P le °* the individual being ngmfold, etc The eight forms are the five vital airs, the sun, moon ana stars or the last three and the five elements The eleven are
j j" or 6 ans of sense and action and mind If we make mind and understanding (buddhi), different, we get twelve It becomes unlimited if we take the endless activities in the various individuals.
8i6
The Principal Upamsads VI z
1. dvidhd vd esa atmanam btbharty ayam yah prano yas easa ddttyo'tha dva.11 vd eld asya panthdnd aniar bahis cdhoratrenattau vyavartete, asau vd ddttyo balnr dtmdntardtmu prano'to bahir atmakyd gatydntardtmano'numiyate gatir ity evam hy ahatha yah kaicidvtdvdnapahata^dpina'hsadhyaltso'vadata-manastan-imlha dvrtta-caksttk so antaratmahya gatyd bahtr diniano'nwmyalc gatir tty evam ha aha, athaya eso'ntaraditye hramnayah puru$o yah pasyafimdm hiranyavasthdt sa e?o'ntare hri-puskara cvdi- nto'nnam atlt
I He (the self) bears hrmself m two ways, as he who is breath and he who is the Sun Therefore, two, verily, are these paths, inward and outward They both turn back in a day and night Yonder sun, verily, is the outer self, the inner self is breath. Hence the course of the inner self is measured (inferred from) by the course of the outer self For thus has it been said, 'Now, whoever is a knower, who has freed (himself) from evil, the overseer of the senses, pure-minded, firmly established in that, locking away (from outward objects) is even he ( he self) Likewise, the course of the outer self is measured by the course of the inner self For thus has it been sari Now that golden person who is within the Sun who ooks on tbs earth from his golden place is even he who has entered into the lotus of the heart and eats food '
The sucth and seventh chapters are treated « "pfc 6 ^ The main purpose of the Upamsad is to affirm that there is one c,V«rAm7srif to be known and the various forms of Brahma, \ isnu only SpS or manifestations of that Supreme jS * In ^ chapters ^ find references to vanous modes of ^lup aid nSnTby which spiritual Wedge can be gamed. See R\
overseer of the senses and not subject to them
VI 4 Mattri Upanisad 817
arvag vicarata etau prdndditya eta updsttom iiy elad-aksarena vyahrttbhth sdmtryd cell
2 Now, he who has entered the lotus of the heart and eats food is the same as that fire of the Sun which enters the sky, called Time the Invisible, who eats all beings as his food What is the lotus and of what is it made? That lotus, assuredly, is the same as space. The four quarters and the four intermediate quarters are its leaves These two, breath and the Sun, move near each other Let him reverence them with the syllable aum, with the mystic utterances (bhith, bhuvah, svah) and with the Savttri prayer.
saurah of the sun, surya-tep-rilpah
Akasa is described as the lotus flower whose petals are the four quarters and the four intermediate quarters or the cardinal points. Tune who eats all beings as his food, prdmnam kalanat kaldkkyah sarva-bhiitant samharatt anag near, adiire sanmhitatt.
3 dvc vava brahmatto rftpe murtan cdmurlah ca, atha yan murlam tad asatyam, yad amurtam tat satyam tad brahma, taj jyotih, yaj jyotih sa ddttyah, sa va esa aum ily etad dtmdbhavat, sa trcdhatmdnam vydkurutd, aum ih, tisro vidtrd, etabhih sarvam idam olam protam caivasmiti, evam hy dhaitad vd ddttya aum tty cvam dhydyata dtmdnam yunjiteti
3 There are, assuredly, two forms of Brahman, the formed and the formless Now that which is formed is unreal, that which is the formless is the real, that is the Biahman, that is the light That which is the light is the Sun Verily, that came to have aum as its self He divided himself threefold (for mm consists of three letters (a, «,.»») By means of these all this (world) is woven, warp and woof, across him For thus has it been said, 'One should meditate on the Sun as aum and get united to it '
The formed is the effect and the formless is the cause satyam the real, -paramarlha-satyam, sawMhtsthanam matrah- parts, avayavah
4 athdnyatrapy uktam, atha khalu ya udgiihah sa pranava yahpranavah sa udgTtha asait vd ddttya udgTlha esa pranava w. evam hy dhodgtlham pranavdkhyam pranctdram bhd-riipam
818 The Principal Upantsads VI 5
^wirvwwm jiwj/vbitu ivitvvvwiv gwn*jriwl* C-vu-llt ItJ UHWUHHUU-ltlWUm
tnpddbralimasdkhadkdsa-vdyv-agny^idaka-bhumyd tha-namaitad brahmmtasyaitat tejo yad asd ddttyaJi aum tty clad aksarasya cattat, tasmdd aum tty anenaiiad updsita^asram ify eko'sya sambodhayiteiy evam hy aha
etad evdksaram punyam, etad evdksaram param etad evdksaram piatoa yo yad icchah tasya tat 4 And then it has been said elsewhere, 'Now then the udgitha is the pranava and the pranava is the udgitha And so verily the udgitha is the yonder Sun and he is pranava For thus it is said, the udgitha called pranava, the leader (m the per- formance of sacrificial ntes), whose form is radiance, sleepless, ageless, deathless, three-footed, three-lettered, also to be known as fivefold, hidden in the secret place (of the heart) ' And it is also said, 'The three-footed Brahman has its root above Its branches are space, wind, fire, water, earth and the like This Brahman has the name of the "lone fig tree" and of it that is the radiance which is called the Sun and the radiance too of the syllable aum Therefore, one should contouously worship it with the syllable aum For thus it is said, This syllable, indeed, is holy, this syllable, indeed, is supreme By knowing that syllable, indeed, whatever one desires (becomes) his'"
See CU 1 5 r, EVX 90 3-4, Katha VI 1 , II 16 _ pranetaram leader (of ntes), prakarsena tat-tal-hamamm praxar- tayttdram
<5 athdnyairdpy uktam, svanavaty esasyah ianuh yd am ity strUun-mtotmsakett hngavaii, esd'ihdgmr vayur dd W*™? vJ, esd atha brahma rudro vimur tty ad^ahvaix m to gdrhapatyo daksindgnir dhavaniya , U mukhavath esa lha WW* sdmeii vijMnavaii, esd bhiir blmvah ^^J°^h ,Ta blutam bhavyam bhavnyad * Hi pratapavk esd'thdmam dpas candrama esaHha buddhir mano'hamkdrd tti cetanavah, m^P™ ?**™* Znaiuf dnavaii, esely ata aum ity uktenaMh ^ 22w bhlvantUi evam hy dhattad vai satyakama paran caparan
^^TSt^-l*™, This g - ; the
MaitrT Upanisad
Brahma, Rudra and Visnu, this is bis lordship form. The Garhapalya, the Daksinagm and the Ahavamya sacrificial fires — this is his mouth.-form Rg, Yajus and Sdman (Vedas) this is his knowledge-form. Earth, atmosphere and sky, this is his world-form. Past, present and future, this is his time-form. Breath, fire and Sun, this is his heat-form. Food, water and moon, this is his growth form. Understanding, mind and self- sense, this is his thought-form. The prdna breath, the apana breath and the vydna breath, this is his breath form. Therefore, by the utterance of the syllable aunt all these (forms) are praised, worshipped and ascribed. For thus it is said, 'This syllable aim, verily, is the higher and the lower Brahman.'
seanavatl sound-form sabdavati.
6 athdvydhriam va idam dstl, sa saiyam prajdpalis tapas tapiv&'nuvyaharai bhur bhuvah svar ih, esaivasya prajdpateh sihamsihd ianur-ya lokavalltt, svar ity asyah iiro r.abhir bkuvo bkuh pddd ddityas caksuh, caksur-ayattd hi purusasya mahaiT indlra, caksusd hy ayam maims carati, satyam vai caksuh, aksmy avasthio hi purusah sarvdrihesu caraii, etasmdd bhur bhuvah svar tty updsttatiena hi prajdpatir visvatmd visva-caHur ivo- pdstio bhavatUt, evam hy ahaisa vai prajdpater vissa-bhrt-ianur eiasydm idam sanam antarhtam, asmtn ca saroasmint: esd antarhileh, iasmdd esopdsTta.
6 Now (in the beginning) this (world) was, venly, unuttered When he, the Real, the lord of creation, performed austerity, he uttered (the words) bhuh, bhuvah, svak This, indeed, is Praja-pah's very gross form, this world-form. Its head is the skv, the navel is the atmosphere, the feet are the earth, the eye is the sun, for a person's great material world depends on the eye, for with the eye he measures all things V»nly, the eye is the real for stationed m the eve a person moves about among all objects Therefore one should reverence bkuh, bl.tnak, svah, for this Prajd-pati, the self of all, the eve of all, becomes rever- enced, as it were For thus has it been said, 'Venlv this is the all-supporting form of Prajd-pati, for m it all this (world) is hidden, and it is hidden in this whole (world). Therefore, this is what one should reverence.'
undtcred see T U I 5, Pafcatiirja Brahmana XX. 1.1. 2 atawsffto very gross, stkiila-lama
Maitri UpanisaA
taking up into itself Pava.no. is so named because of its puri- fying Apas is so named because of its causing to grow. For thus has it been said, Assuredly the self of one's self is called the leader, immortal, perceiver, thinker, the goer, the evacuator, the dehghter, the doer, the speaker, the taster, the smeller, the seer and the hearer and he touches He,, the all-pervader has entered the body For thus has it been said, Now where knowledge is of a dual nature (implying a subject which knows and an object which is known), there, indeed, one hears, sees, smells, tastes and also touches, the self knows everything Where knowledge, being devoid of effort, cause or action, unspeakable, incomparable, indescribable, what is that? It is impossible to say.
pravaraniya v. pracaranlya
alma-kamah desirous of self, almaiva kamak yasya sah brahma-vadmah expounders of Brahma-knowledge brahma- vadana-iila vedarlhavidah
bharjayah causes to dry up. Rudra is the destroyer of the world, jagat samharah
Creatures go into him and come out of hiw They go into him in sound sleep and in intervals between successive creations and come out of him in waking and m creation
For the distinction between dual and non-dual knowledge see B U II 4 14 The self is present in all knowledge but it is not itself an object of knowledge
The gdyalri prayer has come down from the period of the R V. and expresses man's aspiration to know more and more Cp Nicolas ol Cusa 'To be able to know ever more and more without end, this is our likeness to the eternal wisdom Man always desires to know better what he knows, and to love more what he loves, and the *nole world is not sufficient for him, because it does not satisfy his craving for knowledge *
8 csa ht khalv atmesanah samblmr bhavo rudrah prajd-pahr visva-srk hiranya-garbhah satyam pram hamsah sasta vts7mrndrd- yanorkah saviia dhdtd vidhdid samrdd indra indur tti, ya csa tapaty agmr ivdgmnd pihitab sahasrdkscna htranmaycndndcna, va ppwsiiavyo'nvestavyah, saroa-bMiebhyo'bhayam da(vd- ranyatn gaivdiha balnhkrivcndnydrthdn svdc chartrdd upalabheta cnam lit
visoatupam haruiam jdtavcdasam pardyanam jyotir ekatn tapanlam,
sakasra-raimih satadhd vartamdnah prdnah prajanSm uday- oly csa suryah.
822 The Principal Upanisads VI 9
8 This self, venly, is the lord, the beneficent, the real, the terrible, the lord of creation, the creator of all, the golden germ, truth, life, spirit, the ordainer, the pervader, Narayana, the shining, vivifier, the upholder, the maker, sovereign, Indra, the moon He it is who gives forth heat, concealed by the thousand-eyed golden egg as one fire by another Him, venly, one should desire to know He should be sought after Having given fearlessness to all creatures, having gone to the forest, then having put aside objects of sense, let a man comprehend the self from out of his own body He who has all forms, the golden one, who is all-knowing, the final goal, the only light, who gives heat, the thousand-rayed, abiding m a hundred places, the life of creatures, the yonder sun rises
Ramatlrtha makes out that the Supreme associated with the three gunas is described here rudrdntali lamah-pradhSna-mSyo- pddhtkah, hamsanto rajah-pradhdtia-mayopddhtkah sasld wsnur narayana tit suMha-sattva-pradhdna-tnayopadlnkah The one appears as threefold on account of the three functions samhara-srslt-sthttt
pifatah concealed, acchanno bhavati dcchadttdh
hiranmayena golden, brilliant, Upmayetia
aranyam forest, a solitary place which soothes the nund vijanam
desam manah-prasada-karam , ,, , ,
hannam golden, also interpreted as the seizer of all haralt sarvmm
pramndmayamibfuiumdnvdrasanthhannah
mta-vedasah all-knowing jatam jdlam velli See also VII 7, rrasna
EATING OF FOOD A SACRIFICIAL ACT q famSi vd esa ubHydimatvam-vid atmany ndbhfydyty atlany eva yajatth dhydrnm prayogastham mam
Pathai, ucchistocchslopakatam yac tvayd dharyate jayamanam, viSan iu warn ««« 3
VI io. Matin Upam$aA 823
prajds taira yatra visvamrto'sih, evam na vidlmia khalv anenat- iamtatvam pumr upath
9 Therefore, verily, he who knows that this has both these (breath and the sun) as his self, meditates only on his self, sacrifices only to his self, such meditation, the mind absorbed in such practice, is praised by the wise One should punfy the impurity of his mind with the verse 'What has been defiled by the leavings ' He reads the verse Leavings or what has been defiled by leavings and what has been given by a sinner or {what is rendered impure) by a still birth, may the punfying power of Vasu, Agm and of Savitn's rays purify my food and any other that may be. evil First (before taking his food), he swathes (his breath) with water Hail to the prdna breath, hail to the apdna breath, hail to the vydna breath, hail to the samana breath, hail to the udana breath With these five invocations, he offers the oblation Then he eats the remainder, with restrained voice (m silence) Then, afterwards he again swathes with water So, having sipped (the water), having made the sacrifice to the self, he should meditate on the self with the two (formulas) 'As breath and fire,' 'Thou art all ' 'As breath and fire, the highest self has entered in with the five airs May he when pleased himself, please all, the en] oyer of all ' Thou art all, thou art the Vaisvanara (fire) All that is born is supported by thee. Let all oblations enter into thee There creatures live where thou, the all-immortal art. So he who eats according to this rule comes not again into the condition of food.
In this passage the taking of food is represented as a sacrifice offered by the self to the self dtma-yajfia-riipani bhojanam.
The formal rinsing of the mouth at the beginning and the end of meals is described here SeeCU V 2 papena by a sinner, papdlmand, patttena yata-vak with restrained voice, viatml visva-bkuk the enjoyer of all, vtivam bhunakh, pdlayali visvamftah all-immortal, vtsvam amrtayasi fivayasih vtSvamfiah comes not again mto the condition of food He does not become food lor others, he is not reborn
J. 0 . a M'fy ara >n vcditavyam, ntiaro vtkdro'sydlma-yajiiasya yothannam annddai ceti, asyopavydhhydnam, puru$as celd pradhdndntahslhah, sa cva bhokta prdkriam annum bhunkla tit,
8s 4 TJie Principal Upamsads vi 10
iy&yam bkutdtmd hy annam asya kartd pradHnah, lasmdt tn-gunam bhojyam bhoktd puruso'ntaMhah, atra drstam nama pralyayam, yasmdt bija-sambhavd hi paiavas tasmdd Uiam bhojyam ancnatva pradkdnasya bhojyatvam vydkhydtam, tasmdd bhokla puruso bhojyd Prakrits latstho bhunkta itt.prdkrtam annam trxguna-bhcda-pannamalvdn mahadddyam viiesdntam Imgam, ancnatva calurdaia-vidhasya mdrgasya vyakhyd km bhavah, sukha-duhkha-moha-samjiiam hy anna-bkiitam tdam jagat, nahi btjasya svdd upangraho' stilt ydvann aprasfitth, tasydpy evam ttsrsv avasthdsv annatvam bhavah kaumdram yauwnam jard partnamalvdt tad annatvam, evam pradhdnasya vyaktatdm galasyopalabdhtr bhavatt, tatra hddhyddtnt svdduni bhavaniy adhyavasaya-samkalpdbhimdnd itt,athendnydrtJidn pancasvddum bhavanlt, evam sarvdnindriyakarmdnt prdna-kamdm, evam vyaktam annam avyaktam annam, asya nirguno bhoktd, bkok- trtvdc cattanyam prasiddham lasya, yathdgmr vat devdtidm annddah somo'nnam agntnaivdnnam %iy evam-mt, smna-sam- jnoyambhutalind'gni-sa»ijh^'pyavyakta-muMdihvacaMtpuruso hy avyakta-mukhena tn-gumm bhunkta tit, yo hatvam veda samttydsi yogi cdtmayap cett, atka yadvan na kasmcchunyagdre kdminyah pravtsidh sprialmdnydrthdn tadvad yo na sprsah praviftdn samnydsiyogi cdtmaydji celt
io. Now, there is something else to be known There is a further development of this self-sacnfice, namely, what concerns the food and the eater thereof The further explanation of this (follows) The conscious person abides within nature He is the enjoyer for he enjoys (feeds on) the food (supplied by) of nature This elemental self, verily, is food for him, its maker is nature Therefore, that which is to be enjoyed consists of the three qualities and the enjoyer is the person who stands within Here the evidence is what is observed (by the senses) Since animals spring from seed and as seed is the food, by this is explained that nature is what is to be enjoyed Therefore the person is the enjoyer, nature is what is to be enjoyed Abiding in it, he enjoys All that begins with the intellect and ends with the elements, being a transformation of the distinction or nature with its three qualities is the sign (that there must be a self) And by this, the fourteenfold course is explained Ibis world is indeed the food, called pleasure, pain and delusion There is no apprehension of the taste of the seed (cause) so lX afthlre* no production (of effect) And in its three conditions also it hi the character of food, as childhood,
VI ii MaiM TJpani$ai 825
youth and old age. There is in them the character of food, on account of transformation Thus as nature moves to the state of becoming manifest, there arises the perception of it. For the tasting (of the effects of nature) arise intellect and the like, determination, conception and self-love. Then there are the five objects of sense, for the tasting of them Thus arise all actions of organs and actions of senses Thus the manifest is food and the unmanifest is food. The enjoyer of it is without qualities (but) from the fact of his being an enjoyer it is evident that he possesses consciousness As fire, verily, is the eater of food among the gods and Soma is the food, so he who knows this eats food by fire. The elemental self is called Soma He who has the unmanifest as his mouth is called Agni because of the saying, 'The person truly with the unmanifest as his mouth enjoys the three qualities ' He who knows this is a renouncer, a contemplator, a performer of the self-sacrifice. Even as there is no one to touch sensual women who have entered into an empty house, so he who does not touch objects of sense that enter into him is a renouncer, a contemplator, a performer of the self-sacrifice.
drstam what is observed, darsanam pratyaksam. pralyayam evidence, pramdnam
hngam sign Hume interprets it as the subtle body which includes
from the intellect up to the separate elements
the fourteen/old course' The four forms of atUah-karana, the five
organs of sense-perception and the five organs of action
alma-yafi the performer of the self-sacrifice: atma-savtskarartham yo
yajate sa 5lma-yS.fi
kmnmyah sensual women, kaminih kamattirah strih
II param va eiad aimano rupam yad annum, annamayo hy fl)'«w pravo'tka na yady a&ndty amantd"£rotd'spra$td'dra?td' vakla'ghratdrasaytla bhavah, prdndriticolsrjatth, evam hy ahatha yadt khalv aindti prdna-samrddho bhitivd mania bhavah irota bhavah, spra$ta bhavati, vakta bhavati, rasaytta bhavah, ghratd ohavah, drastd bhavdtih, evam hy aha annadvaiprajahprajdyante yah kdsa'l prihvi-iridh ato'nncnaiva livanit, athailad apt yanty antaiah J r j j
11. This, verily, is the highest form of self, namely, food, tor truly this life consists of food If one does not eat.he becomes a non -thinker, a non-hearer, a non-toucher, a non-seer, a
826 The Principal Upantsads VI 13,
non-speaker, a non-smeller, a non-taster, and he lets go his vital breaths For thus it has been said, 'If, indeed, one eats, he becomes full of life, he becomes a thinker, he becomes a hearer, he becomes a toucher, he becomes a speaker, he becomes a taster, he becomes a smeller, he becomes a seer ' For thus has it been said 'From food, verily, are creatures, whatsoever dwell on earth, are produced, moreover, by food, verily, they live and again into it they finally pass '
SeeCU VII 9 i.TU II 2
12 aOtdnyairdpy uktam, sarvani ha va imam bhutany ahar ahaji prapataniy annum abhtpghrksamanam, siiryo raSmibhtr adad&ty annum tenfisau tapaty annenabhistktah pacanUme prdna, agmr va anttmoj jvalaiy amakamenedamprakalpitatn brahnana, ato'nnam atmety upasitetyevam hy aha annad bhutam jayante, jatdny annena vardhante adyate'ttt ca bhutam, tasmad annam tadttcyate
12 And thus it has been said elsewhere Venly all creatures here run about day after day, desiring to get food The sun takes food to himself by his rays and thereby he gives forth heat. When supplied with food living beings here digest *ire, venly blazes up by food This world was fashioned by Brahma with a desire for food Therefore, let a man reverence food as the self For thus has it been said. From food creatures are bom, by food they grow when born, because it is eaten by and eats creatures, it is called food
SeeTU II 2.BS IV I 4 5
abhtsikiah supplied, samhlmnah santarpttan
13 athanyatrapy uhtam mtoa-bhrd vat namatsa fan* ttjjg* Jo mmr yad fdam annam, prano va ™!«^J£* pranai* mplanam manasa, dnandam
Iranian, manasvan, viftanavan, dnandavan ca ^avaityo hZZveda, ydvantiha vax bhutany annam adanti tmkmn tZ^ai yo hatvam veda annam '^ffS^SZ samvananam smriam annam pasunam prano 11mm jyw annam bhtsak smrtam iw horn of the blessed
knows this becomes possessed of food, life, mind, understanding and bliss Whatever creatures here (on earth) eat food, abiding m them does he, who knows this, eat food Food, indeed, prevents decay, food is worshipful, it is said Food is the life of animals, food is the eldest-born, food is the physician, it is said
samvanaitam worshipful, sambhajaniyam. jyestham prathamajam, eldest born, first bom
14 aihanyalrdpy nktam annum vd asya sarvasya yomh, MM cannasya, siiryo yonih kalasya, tasyaitad rupam yan mmesadikalat sambhrtam dvadasfitmakam vatsaram, etasyag- ncyam ardham ardham varunam, magliddyam sravitihdtdham dgneyam kramenotkramena sarpadyam sravislhdrdhantam saumyam, tatraikmkam atmano navdmiakam sacarakavxdham, wuksmyaivad etat pramanam anenmva pramlyate hi kdlah, na vina pramdnena prameyasyopalabdhih, prameyo'pi pramanalam prthaktvad upariy dtma-sambodhanditham ity evam hy aha ydvatyo vat kalasya kolas tavatlsu caraiy asati, yah kdlam brahmety updsTta kalas tasydiidiiram apasaratili, evam hy dha m kaldt sravanii bhfitani, kaldd vrddhim prayanit ca kale casiam myaccliaixh kdlo murtir amurttmdn 14 And thus it has been said elsewhere Food, verily is the source of this whole (world), and time of food, and the Sun is the source of time The form of it (time) is the year, which is composed of moments (twinklings) and other measures of time, and which consists of twelve months Of it one half (when the Sun moves northward, belongs to Agm, the (other) half (when the sun moves southward) belongs to Varuna The course from the asterism Magha (the sickle) to half of SVavistha (the drum) belongs to Agm In its northward course from Sarpa (the serpent) to half of Sravistha belongs to the moon Among these each month of the self (named as the year) includes nine quarters according to the corresponding course (of the Sun through the astensm) Because of its subtilty (imperceptibihty 01 senses) this (course of the Sun) is the proof for only in this way is time proved (to exist) Without proof there is no appre- hension of the thing to be proved However the thing to be proved may become proved from the fact of its containing parts and for the sake of making itself known For this it has been
828 The Prifsdpal Upa?:hads VI 15
said, As many parts of time as there are, through this the
time all beings flow, from time they advance to growth; in time the}- obtain rest (the}- disappear} Tune is formed and formless too.'
Half the j-ear 5s viiarayam, belongs to Agnt, a'tsnya-pradhSfi^S. and the other half daksinayana belongs to Yaruha, jala-prtulhairfCblS The two periods are predominant^ warm and moist respectively sarpam the asterism otAstea, sacred to the serpents, suTps-insfy an aslesa-nahsatram. subitlty; iidriyagocaratvat.
samboihanariluim' for making itself known, sainyc^-ioihanSrQuirr. avadMranSriham
15. dve vava brahmano rupe kolas cakalas caift* $ah prag adityat so'kalo'kah'iha ya adiiyad yap sa Mai, sakalah, sdkalasya va etai rupam yaf samvatsarah, samvaisarai fJ.s!? evemah prajah prajayaiAs, samvafsarepeJia vaijata vtrardhaxie, samvatsare praiyastam yanti, tasmat samvaisaro vai prajS-paiih kala'nvam brahma-nTdam aima cdy eiam hy aha katoh pacati bJiufani saroany eca jiialiafiKam, ^ yastitin in pacyaie toto yas tarn vcda sa vcdavst.
is There are, verily, two forms of Brahman, time and the timeless. That which is prior to the sun is the tfotej*™ parts But that which begins with (has a beginning from) the Sun is time, which has parts. Verily, the form of that which has parts is the year. From the year, verily, are the*e creature, produced By the year, verily, after having been produced they S In the year they disappear. Therefore, tie year, verdv £3*£**i time. » food, is the abode of »*f self For thus has it been said 'Time cooks (npens) all Jw& Seed in the great self He who knows in what time is cooked, he is the knower of the Veda.' ^
The Sun is the self of time as he isits ordainer, m^nrta^M
tSljI^M^o #m ****** M****JZ>*< pratikair..
i>acdi: cooks, jarayaii
VI 17. Matin Upamsad 829
There is a distinction between time which has parts, which is later than the Sun and the stars and the non-time which is without parts and is earlier, between time which cooks or matures all beings and that in which time is cooked or matured
16 vigrahavdn esa kalah sindhurdjah prajdndm, esa tat- sihahsavifakhyoyasinSdevemecandra-rksa-gralta-sathvatsarddayah siiyanie, athaibhyah sarvam idam atra va yat kvnctt itibha&tbham drsyanteha lake tad etcbhyas, tasmdd ddttydtmd brahmatha kalasamjiiam adityam upasitadityo brahmetyeke'tha evam hy aha. hota bhokta havir mantro yajfio visnuh praja-patih, sarvah kasctt prabhuh saksi yo'musmm bhdti mandate.
16 This embodied (incarnate) time is the great ocean of creatures In it abides he who is called Savitr (the Sun as begetter) from whom, indeed, are begotten the moon, stars, planets, the year and the rest And from them comes this whole (world) here and whatever of good or evil is seen m this (world) comes from them Therefore, Brahman is the self of the Sun. Therefore one should reverence the Sun under the name of time. Some say the Sun is Brahman and thus is it said* 'The offerer (of the sacrifice), the en]oyer (of the sacrifice), the obla- tion, the hymn, the sacrifice, Visnu, Praja-pah all this is the lord, the witness who shines m yonder orb '
See CU. Ill 19 1.
vtgrahavan embodied, mUritman
ocean samudravat dustarah
17. brahma ha va idam agra astt, eko'nantah, prag ananto dahsviato'nantah, praitcy ananta udicy ananta iirdhvaii ca'vaii ca sarvaio'nantah, na hy asya pracyadt-diiah kalpantc'tha Urya- gvdn cordhvam va, aniihya esa paramatma'panmiio'jo'tarkyo' cinfya esa akdsaima; evaisa krtsna-ksaya eko jdgaritfi, efasmdd akasad esa kkalv tdaih cetdmatram bodhayati, ancnaiva cedam dhyayale asimn ca pratyastam ydti, asyaitad bhasvaram ritpam yad amusmtr.n aditye tapah, agnau cddhumake yaj jyoUs" cttra- taram, iidarastho'iha va yah pacaty annam, tty evam hy aha, yas'caiso'gttau yas cayam hrdaye yai cdsav aditye sa esa cka ity chasya haikalvam eh ya evam veda.
17. ^eril}•, in the beginning this world was Brahman, the infinite one, infinite in the east, infinite in the south, infinite m the west, infinite in the north and above and below, infinite m even- direction For him, indeed, east and the other directions exist not nor across, nor below, nor above Incomprehensible
The Principal Upanisads VI 18
is that Supreme Self, unlimited, unborn, not to be reasoned about, not to be thought of (unthinkable), he whose self is space At the dissolution of all he alone remains awake Thus from that space, he awakes this (world) which consists of thought only. By him alone is all this meditated on and in him it is dissolved He is that luminous form which gives heat in the yonder sun, the wonderful light on the smokeless fire, as also the fire in the stomach which cooks (digests) food For thus has it been said, He who is m the fire, and he who is here m the heart and he who is yonder m the sun— he is one. He who knows this goes to the oneness of the one
na kalpanle. exists not, m vastutah sank, amlhya' The self cannot be imagined because it is not determinate Whatever is imagined is determined yad vastilhyate tat pantmtam akaiatmatr whose self is space SeeCU. Ill 14 2, KU II 14 cttra-taram. wonderful, alt-vtcitram
THE YOGA METHOD 18 tathatat-prayoga-kdpahprandyanmhpratyaharodhyanam Vdharaita tarkah samadhth sadanga tiy ucyate yogah, anenayada ■baiyan paiyah ruhna-varnam kartdram tiampumsam bra)mia- yonim, laid vidvan punya-pdpe vihdya pare'vyaye sarvmnehka-
roty, evam hy aha
yaiha parvaiam adlptam ndsrayanh mrga-dvtja/i, tadvad brahmavido do?a naSrayanti kadacam
18 Tins is the rule for achieving this (oneness), control ot the breath, withdrawal of the senses, meditation, concentration contemplative inquiry and absorption, this is) said to be the S ^d C WL, ^y this (yogafhe beholds I******* maker the lord, the person, the Brahma source, then the sage S£g off good and evil, makes everything into oneness in thf ulreme 5 indestructible For thus has it been sai* te belts and birds do not resort to a iwimgnoniitam, so sua do not find shelter m those who know Brahman
Yoga is the means by which we control the mind ****** ubayah See Yoga Sfdra II 29 _ W( , r i.* 1S WuaMra
J Contemplative inquiry or ™ » *JJ e transformed or
VI 20 Matin Upamsad 831
drances of concentration caused by the inferior powers acquired by meditation
paiyah beholds By means of yoga we achieve direct perception of the Supreme, saksad anubhavati See M U III. 1 3
19 atkdnyatrdpy uktwnv yadd vm bahr vidvdii mano myam- ymAnyartha.11 ca prdno mvesayitvd mksamkalpas tatas hsthet, aprdndd iJia yasmdt sambhiitah prdnasamjiiako pvas tasmat prdno vai iurydkhye dMrayet prdnam, liy evam hy alia' actttam ciitamadKyastham acmtyam guhyam uttamam tatra attain mdteyeta tac ca hngam mrdsrayam
19 And thus it has been said elsewhere 'Venly, when a knower has restrained his mind from the external, when his breath has put to rest objects of sense, let him then remain void of conceptions Since the living individual who is named the breathing spirit has arisen here from what is not the breath- ing spirit, therefore let the breathing spirit merge his breathing spirit in what is called the fourth (condition).' For thus has it been said "That which is non-thought, which stands in the midst of thought, the unthinkable, the hidden, the highest, let a man merge his thought there Then will this living being be without support (attachment) '
apranat from what is not the breathing spirit. Its source is the thinking self, prdnddt-visesa-rahitdc ciddtmanah turya- the fourth, the other three being waking, dream and sleep. SeeMU.7. 5 b. y
Itnga the subtle body It will not appear in its separate mdividuality on account of the absence of any conscious object or the subtle body will become void of all objects.
20 athdnyatrdpy uktam, aiah pardsya dhdrand, tdlu-rasand- grauipidandd vdn-manalirprdna-mrodhandd, brahma tarkena pasyatt, yad dtmand dlmdnam anor amydthsam dyolamdnam manah-ktaydt pasyati tad dtmandlmdnam drstvd mrdtmd bhavah, f'tratmakaivad asamkhyo'yonit cmtyo inoksa-laksanam ily etat param rahasyam, ity evam hy aha
cttiasya hi prasddcna hantt karma subhdsubham, prasannatmdtmam sthitvd sukham avyayam asnuta iti.
20 And thus it has been said elsewhere 'There is yet a of tu T concentratl °n than this for him By pressing the tip ot the tongue down the palate, by restraining voice, mind and
8 33 The Principal Vpanisads y r ar
selfless he is to be thought of as immeasurable, mZTonm ps « the mark of liberation, the highest myster? AndE has rf beenmd Tor by the serenity of ftSKWdSS deeds, good and evJ, wrth the serene self a&Wm £ 5 he enjoys eternal happiness ' g Sdf
The process described here is called lambka-yoga and the state produced by it is called mmanMSva
Urhena through contemplative thought, dhiranmianlammmna msctta-rUpenajnanena.
mralma: selfless, mrmanasko bhavah fivMMn nivartaie esavastU yogiohir immunity ucyaie.
21. atJidnya(rapy-ukiam. urdhoagd nddt su^umndkhya prdm- samanni idlvantarvtcchmnd, iayd prdnomkdra-mano-yuMa- yordhvam tttkramet, tdlwdhyagram panvariya tndnyany asam- yojya mahmd mahmdnam mrtkseta, taio mrdlmakatvam Ai, mrdlmakatvdn na sukha-duJtkha-bhdg bhavah, kevalatvamlabhata tty evam hy aha:
parah puruam prahtfhapya nigrlntdmlam taiah tirivdpdram apdrena pakcad yitnjUa milrihvam 21 And thus it has been said elsewhere 'The channel called su?umnd leading upward, serving as the passage for the breath, is divided within the palate Through it, when it is joined by the breath, the syllable ama and by the mind, let him pro- ceed upwards By causing the tip of the tongue to turn back on the palate, by binding together the senses, let greatness perceive greatness Thence he goes to selflessness ' On account of selflessness, he is not (ceases to be) an expenencer of pleasure and pain He obtains aloneness For thus has it been said 'Havmg first fixed the breath that has been restrained, having crossed the limit, let him join the limitless in (the crown of) the head.'
SeeCU.Vin 66,KathaVI 16, T U. 1-6, Prasna III 7 (7) 6 Freed from limitations he becomes conscious of the unlimited perfection of Brahman
Maitri Upamsad
22. athanyatrdpy uktam. dve va va brahmam abhidhyeye iabdai casabdasca, atha sabdenaivdiabdam avisknyate, aiha talra aum iti iabdo'nenordhvam utkranto'iabde mdhanam eii, athahaisa gatir etad amrtani, etat sayujyatvam, mrvrtatvam tathd ceh, aihayathomandbhts tantunordhvam utkranto'vakasam labha- t\iy evam va va khalv asdv abhidhydta aum ity anenordhvam utkrantah svatantryam labhate, anyatha -pare sabdavadtnaJr iravandngusthayogenantarhrdayakdia-sabdamakarnayanU, sapta- vtdheyam tasyopama, yatha nadyah hnkim kdtnsya-cdkraka-bheka vihkrndhika vrstir, mvate vadatTH, tarn prthag laksanam atttya pare'sabde'vyakte brahmany astam gatdh, tatra ie'prthag-dhar- mino'prthag-vwekya yatha sampamui madhutvam nandrasd tty evam hy aha'
dve brahmam veditavye, iabda-brahma paran ca yat, sabda-bralimani msndtah param brahmadhigacchati. 22 And thus it has been said elsewhere: 'There are, verily, two Brahmans to be meditated upon, sound and non-sound By sound alone is the non-sound revealed Now here the sound is aum Moving upward by it one comes to ascend in the non- sound So (one says) this is the way, this is immortality, this is complete union and also tranquillity And now as the spider moves upward by the thread, obtains free space, thus assuredly, indeed the meditator moving upward by the syllable aum obtains independence.' Other expounders of the sound (as Brahman) think otherwise By closing the ears with the thumbs they hear the sound of the space within the heart. There is the sevenfold comparison of it, like nvers, a bell, a brass vessel, a wheel, the croaking of frogs, rain, as when one speaks in a still place Having passed beyond this variously characterised (sound), they disappear (become merged) in the supreme, the non-sound, the unmanifest Brahman There they are unchar- actensed and indistinguishable like the various juices that have reached the condition of honey. For thus has it been said, 'There are two Brahmans to be known, the sound Brahman and what is higher. Those who know the sound Brahman get to the higher Brahman '
See M B XII 8540, also Panini-dadana in Sarva-dariana-samgraha- i-tvrialvam- tranquillity, ■paramanandavirbhavah krta-krtyalvam. JJ U space nirankttsa-vtharasthanam m>.fcm»- bell, ghantd-ghosah
834 The Principal Upam§ads VI. 24
kamsyam a brass vessel, tat-patra-gliosah the croaking of frogs, manditka-ravah aslam disappearance, adarscmam
For the comparison of juices and honey, see C U VI 9 r-2. The Absolute is not totally unconnected with God Those who worship God get to the Absolute
23 athanyalrapy uktam. yah Sabdas tad aunt tty dad akfaram, yad asyagram tac chdntam, a$abdam, abhayam, aiokam, anandam, irptam, sihiram, acalam, amrtam, acyutam, dhruvam, visnu-sam- jiiitam, sarvdparatvaya fad eta upasitety evam hy aha yo'sau paraparo deva aumkdro noma namatah, niMabdah iunya-bMtas tu miirdhm sthane tato'bhyaset
23 And thus it has been said elsewhere 'What is (called) the sound is the syllable aim That which is its end is tranquil, soundless, fearless, sorrowless, blissful, satisfied, steadfast, unmovrng, immortal, unshakmg, enduring, called Vt?m, for obtaining what is higher than everything (final release), let him reverence these two ' For thus is it said, 'He who is both higher and lower, that God known by the name of aum is soundless and void of being too Therefore let one concentrate on (the crown) of the head '
iunva-bhiUah- void of being, mrakaratuB mmsesah Distinctions do not apply to it, but it is not, on that account, to be regarded as non-being.
24 athanyatrdpy uktam. dhanuh iariram, aum tty etac chamh, iihMsya manah, tamo-laksanam, bfotva tamo'lamwstm deacchah, athdvt^tam bfaM'Wacakram tva sphurantam adttya- varnam uriasoantam brahma tamasah paryam apdyaA yad amusmwn dditye'tha sowe'gnau vidyuit vibhdti, atha hhalv enam drsiva'mrtatvam gacchaMy evam hy aha
dky'anam antah pare tattoe laksyesu ca mdhiyate ato'vi&sa-wiMnam mSe?am upagacchcdi mdnase ca inline tuyat sukham cdtma-sakstkam tad brahma cdmrtam tukram sa gattr loka «» «* ^ <m And thus it has been said elsewhere The body is tne bow'T^f anow is mm. THe mind is * point, dark ness ; is th Zir Wavmff raerced through the darkness, one goes to what SttSpE dlkni Then havmg pierced through
3s53SSSS5SSS!
VI 25 Matin Upanisad 835
in the fire, in the lightning And having seen Him assuredly, one goes to immortality ' For thus has it been said 'Meditation is directed to the highest being within and to the (outer) objects Hence the unqualified understanding becomes qualified But when the mind is dissolved and there is the bliss of which the witness is the self, that is Brahman, the immortal, the radiant, that is the way That indeed is the (true) world '
SeeBG XV la.MU II. a 3-4 sikha point, agram, Salya-stJidnlyam darkness, ignorance, mwajiianam
aiamimstam what is not enveloped in darkness, atama-dvistam. tama-dvetona-rahttam
iukram radiant, diphmat pjana-svabkdvam.
25 atkdnyatrdpy uktam mdrevdntarhitendnyah siiddhita- maya dlnyd svapna voa yah paiyatlndnya-bile'viva&ah prana- vakhyam pranetaram, bhd-riipam, vigata-mdram, vijaram, vimr- iyum, wiokatn ca so'pi pranavdkhyah, pranetd, bhd-rupah, vigata mirah, vijarah, vvmrtyur viioko bhavati, ity evam hy alia'
evam pranam athotnkaram yasmat saruam anekadhd,
yundkti yunjate vapt tasmad yoga th smrtah
ekatvam prana-manasor indnydndm tathaiva ca
sarva-bhdva-pantyago yoga ity abhidhiyale 25 And thus it has been said elsewhere 'He who has his senses indrawn as m sleep, who has his thoughts perfectly pure asm dream, who, while in the cavern of the senses, is not under their control, perceives him who is called Pranava, the leader of the form of light, the sleepless, free from old age, the death- less, the sorrowless, he himself becomes called Pranava and becomes a leader, of the form of light, sleepless, free from old age, deathless and sorrowless ' And thus it is said 'Because m his manner he joins the breath, the syllable aum and all this world in its mamfoldness or perhaps they are joined, therefore this (process of meditation) is called Yoga (joining) The oneness of the breath, the mind and likewise of the senses and the abandonment of all conditions of existence, this is designated as Yoga '
mdreva as if in sleep, svapna iva as if in dream
dcfte* ^ C m ^ C cavem °* senses, mdriyanam mvdsa-slhanc
f'jjf" 1 ' not u ider control, sthula-dehabhimana-Sunyah SMdhttamaya perfectly pure, atisaycna ivddhxmatyd
DD*
836 The Principal Upamsads vi 27
pranclaram lender VI 4
bhS-mam of the form of hght, jmrn^rakdia-svayUam
The first verse describes the goal of Yoga and the second the means
2b. athanyatrSpy tiktam yalhavapsncanmhtikumkahsMra- yanlrctwddhrtyodarc'gnau juhoty cvam vd va khalv tmdn iranan aum ilyanaioddhrlydndmayc'gnau juhoh, atas taptomva- solha yaiha iaplorvi sarpis trna-kdUha-samsparknojjvalatity cvam va va khalv asav aprdnakhyah prdna-samspar&noflvalah, athayad uyvalaly dad brahmano nlpam catlad vtsnoh paramam padam, caUad rudrasya rudralvam, ctat tad apanmdadM cdlmdnam vibhajya purayatTmdn lokdn, ily evam hy aha
values' ca yadvat khaltt visphdmgah, sftrydn mayukliai ca
talhaiva tasya
prdnddayo vai punar cva tasmdd, abhyuccarantJlia yalha- kramcna
26 And thus it has been said elsewhere 'Venly even as the huntsman draws in the dwellers in the waters with his net and offers them (as a sacrifice) in the fire of his stomach, thus, assuredly does one draw in these breaths by means of the syllable aum and sacrifice them m the fire that is free from ill Hence it is like a heated vessel Now as ghee m a heated vessel lights up by contact with (lighted) grass or wood, thus assuredly does he who is called non-breath light up by contact with the breaths Now that which lights up is a form of Brahman, and that is the highest place of Visnu and that is the Rudra nature of Rudra That having divided itself m limitless ways fills these worlds ' For thus has it been said, 'And as indeed the sparks (issue) from the fire, as rays from the sun, so do the breaths and the rest come forth again and again into the world in proper order '
SeeBU II 1.20
dwellers m the waters tnatsyadin
anantaya free from ill SeeSU III 10.
2% aihanyalrapy uktam brahmano vd vaitadtejahparasydmr- tasyas'anrasya yacchanrasyausnyam asyaitad ghrtam, athamh sail nabhasi mhiiam vaitad ekdgrenaivam aniarhrdayakaSam vtmidantt yai tasya jyottr tva sampadyattti, atas tad bMvam, acirenaiii bhumdv ayaspindam mhitamyatlia'ctrenattt bhftmttvam, mrdvat samstham ayaspindam yathagnyayaskdrddayo ndbht-
VI 28 Maitri Upanisad 837
lhavanti pranafyati cittath tathdsrayena sahaivam, ity evath hy aha-
hrdydkdsamayam kofam amndam paramalayam, seam yogas ca tato'smakam tejas caivdgni-suryayoh 27 And thus it has been said elsewhere. Verily, this is the heart of Brahman, the supreme, the immortal, the bodiless, even the warmth of the body. For that (heat) this (body) is the ghee (melted butter) Although it is manifest, venly, it is hidden rn the space of the heart Then by intense concentration they disperse the space within the heart that the light, as it were of that (heat) appears Then one passes speedily into the same condition (of light) even as a ball of iron that is hidden in the earth passes speedily into the condition of earthiness. As fire and brass smiths and the like do not trouble about the ball of iron that is in the condition of earth, so does thought disappear together with its support And thus it is said, 'The store house which consists of the space in the heart, the blissful, the supreme abode, is our self, our Yoga (goal) too and this the heat of fire and sun '
for tliat this body is the ghee the splendour of Brahman which is otherwise unmamfested is manifested, even as fire blazes up by contact with ghee
Smh manifest, prdkatam. See MU II 2 1. koiam storehouse, bhanddgdram
M/P 6 T rds wd &la y a are used ui their technical meanings When disembodied in the yogic process the hrd-dkdsa is the mrasraya-lmga consubstantial with cztta, its own asraya When this process culminates m the dnanda state, it is the higher dlaya tamkavatara Sfdra distinguishes two aspects of dlaya, the lower £2« 1S V ' P ' M ^ h ^ &e k&ber Pvtrn alayamjndnam which is
THE FREE SPIRIT 28. athdnyatrap uktam- hhutendriydrthan atikramya tafah cZT^T m ^ h ' ia T dam dhmur irhTlvd'nabhi^idnamayena
SShTZff tefrtraghavetryabhtmdmdhyaksah krodUjyath
kninTl T brahma-ialam viset, tatai caturidlam brahma' W panudet, gurcdgameneti' atah suddhah, prZ, Snyah,
838 The Principal Vpamsads VI. 29
Santo'prdno, mratmd'nanto'ksayyah, sihirali, sMvato'jah, svaian- trah, sve mahimm tisthati, atah sve maJnmm tislhamanam drslvd'vrttacakram tva sancara-cakram alohayaii, tly evam hy aha sadbhir masats tu yukiasya mtyamuktasya dehmah, ananiah paramo guhyah samyag yogah pravartate. rajastamobhyam viddhasya susamtddhasya dehmah putra~ddra-kuitmbesit saktasya na kadacana 28 And thus it has been said elsewhere Having passed beyond the elements, the senses and the objects bf sense and then having seized the bow, whose string is the life of a mendi- cant, and whose stick is steadfastness and having struck down, with the arrow which consists of freedom from self-conceit, the first guardian of the door to Brahma, (who has) bewilder- ment as his crown, greed and envy as his ear-rings, sloth, sleep and impurity as his staff, the cord of self-love, who seizes the bow whose string is anger, whose stick is lust, who slays beings here with the arrow that consists of desires, having slain him, having crossed over with the raft of the syllable aum to the other side of the space in the heart, in the inner space which gradually becomes manifest one should enter the hall of Brahma as a miner seeking minerals enters into the mine Then let him disperse the fourfold sheath of Brahma by the teaching of his spiritual perceptor. Henceforth being pure, clean, void (of being), tranquil, breathless, selfless, endless, undecaying, steadfast, eternal, unborn, independent he abides m i his own greatness Thereafter, having seen (the self) ^habid^ m his own greatness, he looks down on the wheel of births and deaths as on a revolving wheel (of a chariot) For thus has it . been said 'If a man practises yoga for six months and is constantly feed toSe world) then the infimte supreme, mysterious Yoga ? Somphshed. But if a man, though ^-enhghtened, iSStS with passion and darkness, if he is attached to son, wife and family, for such a one, no, never at all. tanirl sloth, satkannasu alasyam tra sleep, mdra.
S35S2S. consisting of matter, bfe, mind and understanding
VI 30 Matin Upamsad 839
piUrdh prajd-pater iti santosam dvandva-titiksdm sdntaivam yogabhyasad avdpnoti iti, etad guhyatamam ndputrdya nditsydya ndsdntaya kirtayed iti, ananya-bhaktdya sarva-guna-sampanndya dadyat
29. Having thus spoken (to Brhadratha) Sakayanya with his heart (fixed) on the inner self bowed before him and said, by this brahma knowledge, did the sons of Prajd-pati ascend the path of Brahman By the practice of Yoga one gams con- tentment, endurance of the dualities (of pleasure and pain) and tranquillity Let no one declare this most secret doctrine to any one who is not a son, who is not a pupil, who is not of a tranquil (mind) To one who is devoted to none other (than his teacher) to one endowed with all qualities, one may give it
The conversation begun at I 2 and the course of instruction begun at II 1 conclude here SeeBU VI 3 12, Su VI. 22
The sons of Prwjd-pah The Vahkhilyas who approached Praid-patt for this knowledge See II 3
30 aum iucau dese iucih sattvasthah sad-adhiydnah sad-vddi sad-dhyayi sad-ydp sydd Ui; atah sad brahmam satyabhildsmi mnrtto'nyas tatphalacchmnapdso nvrdiah paresv dtmavad vigatabhayo niskdmo'ksayyam apammtam sukkam dkramya hstlmtt paramam vai ievadher iva parasyoddharanam yat nwdniatvam, sa hi sarva-kama-mayah puruso'dhyavasdyasam- kalpabhindna-hngo baddhah, atas tad-viparilo muktah atratka afwgunah prakrti-bheda-vaidd adhyavasdydtma-bandham updga- to dhyavasdyasya dosa-ksayddd hi moksah, manasd hy eva paiyati manasa smoh, kdmah samkalpo vtcihtsd iraddhd' iraddhd dhrhr aaiiHir hnr dhlr bhir ity etat sarvam mana eva, gunaughair unyamanafi kalusikrtas cdsthirai calo lupyamdnak sasprho vyagras cabhimamtvam prayata iti, aham so mamedam ity evam Ty™T° mbadhl&t y atmandtmdnam jdleneva khecarah; atah
baddhah, atas tad- ZZ >' ta$mt ™™Myavasdyo mhsamkaipo mrabht- Zl?!, ■ d - n moksa -^sanam, esdtra brahma-padavT eso'tra
mman samahUa, tty atroddharanh
yadd paricdvatisthantejiidndni manasd saha, etad vi^-rTj* V f mcestate Mm ahuh paramdm gahm
P«can kHa-krtyo maruduttardyanamgato, na hy atrodmrtmana
840 The Principal Upanisads VI 30.
gatih, eso'tra brahma-pathah, sauram dvdram bhtttvorddhvena
vmirgatd, ity airodaharati
anantd ra&mayas tasya dipavadyah sthito hrdi sitasitali kadru-nildh kapila mrdu-lohttah urdhvam ekah sthitas tesdmyo bhitva surya-mandalam brahma-lokam atikramya tern ydnh param gatim yad asydnyad rasmi-iatum urdhvam eva vyavasthitam tena deva-mkdydndm sva-dhamam prapadyate ye naikarupdi cddhastdd rasmayo'sya mrdu-prabhdh tha karmopabhogdya taih samsaratt so'vasah tasmat sarga-svargdpavarga-hetur bhagavdn asav adttya iti
30 Aim One should be in a pure place, himself pure, abiding m goodness, studying the real, speaking of the real, meditating on the real, sacrificing to the real Henceforth absorbed m the real Brahman is he who yearns for the real, becomes another He has the reward of having his bonds (fetters) cut, becomes void of expectation, is freed from fear m regard to others as in regard to himself, void of desire, he remains, having attained imperishable and immeasurable happiness Venly, freedom from desire is, as it were, the highest prize from the choicest treasure For a person who is made up of all desires, who has the marks of determination, conception and self-love is bound He who is the opposite of that is liberated On this point some (the Sdmkhyos) say, it is the quality which though the force of the differentiation of nature binds the self with ^ter- mination (and the like) and from the destruction of he fault of determination (and the like) liberation l (results) It « wrf* the mind venly, that one sees It is with the mind that one £^D^S«pt«m. doubt, faith and lack ol farfh jtaj fastness and lack of steadfastness, shame, meditation fear, aU tSfJ trSv mind Borne along and defiled by the stream of q^LrSsteady, fickle, bewildered M of one gets into the state of self-love In thinking I am he ttus TJS he binds himself with himself as a bird in a snare HeSS a perTn who has the marks of determination con-
VI 31. Maitri TJpanisad 841
(fulfilled) On this point they quote, 'When the five forms (of sense) of knowledge along with the mind stand still and the intellect stirs not, that, they say, is the highest state ' Having spoken thus, Sakayanya had his heart (fixed) on the inner self Then Marut having bowed before him and properly honoured him, having obtained his end, departed by the northern course of the sun for there is no way thither by a side-path This is the path to Brahma here in the world. Bursting open the door of the sun, he rose on high and departed On this point they quote, 'Endless are the rays of him, who, like a lamp, dwells m the heart, white and black, brown and blue, tawny and pale red One of them leads upwards piercing the solar orb, by it, crossing the world of Brahma they go to the highest path The other hundred rays lead upwards also and through them (the worshipper) reaches the abiding-places of the gods But the rays of dun colour which manifestly lead downwards by them one wanders here helplessly for experiencing (the fruits of) his deeds Therefore, the yonder blessed sun is the cause of creation, of heaven and of final emancipation '
Katha VI 10 16, Prasha I 10, C.U. VIII. 6 1, B U 1. 5. 3. tab v. caiicalo
sat the real, sadakhyam brahma.
hrahna-padam* path to Brahman, saksat-brahma-prdpti-margah
avattsthante stand still, mscalam bhavanti.
mmi marud nama brhadrathah
kria-krlyah having attained his end, avaptakdmah
By the upward course we reach the highest state or the abodes 01 the gods by the downward course we are reborn in the world of births and deaths
THE SELF'S RELATION TO THE SENSES AND THE
31 hm-Stmahant va etamndriydni pracaranty udgantd caife- am ilia ko myantd vety aha; pratydhdtmdtmakdmtydtmd hy ZTJl $ £ myant " ™ps*roso bhdnamyds ca martcayo ndma ^ Pfoahhh rasmibhr vtsayan aUt, katama dlmett, yo 'yam ZaJT i Pl f miyah tenttei-laksanoktah svahair lingair <£M, ?li hfl i am alingasydgner yad ausnyam dvistaii
Wana ity ek e , a tha buddhir dhrUJi smrtih prajM tad tty eke, ath'a
PhuhST 1 y ai } ail3 * ha bijasydnkurdvdtka dhumdrcirms- ymainga wagnei ceh, atroddharanti:
842 The Principal Upanisads VI, 32
vahnei ca yadvat khalu visphdingah, suryan mayuhhas' ca ta'haiva tasya
prdnddayo vai pmiar eva tasmad, abhyuccarantflia yathakm- mena
31. (One asks) Of what nature, venly, are these senses that go forth (towards their objects) ? Who is the one that sends them out here and who restrains them? Another answers they are of the nature of self for the self is he who sends forth and restrains them There are enticing objects of sense and there are what are called the luminous rays Now the self feeds on objects by the five rays Who is the self? He who has been defined as pure, clean, void, tranquil and of other marks He is to be apprehended by his own marks Some say that the mark of him who is without any mark is as heat and anything pervaded by it are to fire, or what the most agreeable taste is to water, others say that it is speech, hearing, sight, mind, breath, others say that it is understanding, steadfastness, memory, wisdom Now, venly, these are the marks of him even as the sprouts here are the mark of a seed, as smoke, light and sparks are the marks of a fire On this point they quote As indeed the sparks from fire, and likewise as the rays from the sun, living creatures and the rest in proper order again and again proceed from him here on earth
See II A VI 28, $U VI 13, A U III 2,BU IV 4 l8,Kcna2 The sprout reminds us of the invisible seed, blmmya^ala- tayd'drsyasya sad-bltava-jndpakd anhtra Even so from the mani- festations* of self we infer the reality of self
32 tasmad va etas»tad atmam sarvepramh, sarve loMh sarvc vedah, sarvc devah, sarvdm ca bhiitfny ™% a >* «2nSat satyasya satyam xti, athayathardratdhagnerabkyahtasya^ dhLLnscawtiy evam va etasya
dad yad rg-vedo yai«r-vedah sdma-vedo' thanangtrasa^Msal, Trait ^tdyd.Jpamsadah, slohah, sntrany amvyakhyanam
crSuS ^lworlds, all the vedas, all the gods and all beings
VI, 33 Maitri Upanisad 843
and the Angirasas, legendary stones, ancient lore, sciences, mystic doctrines, verses, aphorisms, explanations and com- mentanes From it, indeed, all these beings (come forth).
SeeBU II. 1 20, II 4 10
upamsad mystic doctrines, upanigamayttrtvat saksat rahasyam nama the tnitii of the truth empirical existence is the truth, the underlying truth of it is the self
33 paficestako va eso'gmh samvatsarah tasyema tstakd yo vasanto grlsmo varsah iaradd hemantah, sa hrahrpaksasi-prstha- pttcchavan, eso'gmh purusavidah seyam prajd-pateh prathamd cthh, karair yajamanatn antanksam uthsiptvd vdyave prayacchat, prano vat vayuh, prano'gms, tasyema isfakd yah prayo vya.no 'panah samana uddnah, sa sirah-paksasi-prstha-pucchavdn eso'gmh purusavidas tad idam antanksam prajdpater dvitiyd cihh, karair yajamanam dvuam utksiptvendrdya prayacchat, asau va aditya indrah, saiso'gmh, tasyema tstakd yad rg-yajuh samatharvdngirasd ihhdsah purdnam sa sirah-paksasi-puccha- prsthavan eso'gmh purusavidah, satsd dyauh prajdpates trttyd cihh, karair yajamdnasyatmavide'vaddnam karott, yathatmavid ulksipya brahmane prayacchat, tatrdnandi modi bhavati
33 Venly, this (gdrhapatya sacnficial) fire with its five bncks is the year For that the bncks are these, spring, summer, the rainy season, autumn, winter So it has a head, two wings, a back and a tail. In the case of one who knows the person, this earth is Praja-pah's first sacrificial pile With its hands it raises the sacnficer to the atmosphere and offers him to Vayu (the wnd) Wind, venly, is breath Breath is the fire {daksmdgm) £ or that the bncks are these, the prana breath, the vydna breath, the apana breath, the samana breath and the uddna oreath So it has a head, two wings, a back and a tail In the caseof onewhoknows the person, this atmosphere is Prajd-pati's
«1 C ! ^ Sac ^ ficial P de Wlth lts hands l1: raises the sacnficer «P to the sky and offers him to Indra Venly, Indra is yonder
ft* *t 1S r> ( tmrd dhavan ^ya) fire For that the bncks are
3fK \ Veda ' the YajUr Veda ' the SSma Veda ( the hy™ 155 loJ * ™ rnws and Angirasas, legendary stones, ancient
of™!° \ , a head ' two ^gS' a back and a ^ In the case sacSfr,? 0 ,^ 5 ^ 6 P erson ' thls sk y 18 Prajd^ati's third V? ^ h J ts hands rt P resents the sacnficer to the
Sd3fr?* f \ ^ en the knower of the self raises him up «Q oilers him to Brahma There he becomes blissful and joyful
&I4 The Principal Upamsads VI. 34,
The three fires which are used m religious sacrifices are treated as three sacrificial piles erected by Praja-pah the lord of creation on earth, the atmosphere and the sky. The year, the wind and the sun rule in these three regions They raise the saenficer to the next higher stage until, finally, he reaches Brahma
34 prthivigarhapalyo'nlariksaindaksinagmrdyaiirahavantyah, lata cva pavamana-pavakaSucaya dvtskrtam etendsya yajfiam, yatah pavamdna-pavaka-iuci-samghdlo hi jatharah, tasmad agmr yastavyah eclavyah stolavyo'bhidhyatavyah;yajamano havirgrhitva devatdbhtdhydnam uchati'
hiranya-vamah tekuno hrdyadttyc prahtfhttah madgur hamsas icjo-vrsah so'smim agnau yajamahe Hi capi mantrartham vtctnolt, tat savitnr varmyam bhargo 'syabhidhycyam yo buddhyantastho dhyayiha mamh-ianh-padam anusaraty dtmany cva dhaite'iremc iloka bhavanli
y$ cittam cva hi samsdram, tat prayalnena hdhayel ^ yac atlas tan-mayo bhavah guhyam etat samtanam
4 ctttasya hi prasddena hantt karma iubMtubham prasanndlmatmant sihitva sukham avyayam ahmtte
5 samasaktamyatha cittam jantor visaya-gocare
yady evam brahnam sydt tat ho na mttcyelabanihanat / 6 mano hi dvividham proHam iuddham caiaddham esa ca & aiuddham kdmasamparkdt Suddham kama-vivarptam n laya-vikscpa-rahtam manah hriva sumicalam vadd yaty amanibhdvam tadd tat paramam padam
8 tavanmano mroddhavyam hrdiydvat ksayamgatam etaj indnam ca moksam ca ^anye grantharWtarah
9 samddln-ntrdhauta-malasya cetaso mveiitasyatmam yat
sukham bhavel, , ^.ii—.
na iakyate varnayttum gird tada, svayam tad antafikar
to aZTap?gmr%iau vu vyomni vyoma na lateayet, JamZaLtamyasya vianah sa pamnucyale
ato
VI 34 Maitri Upanisad 845
vyomdnusmaranam viruddham, tasmad agmr yastavydh cetavydh stotavyo 'bhidhyatavyah.
34 The earth is the garhapatya fire, the atmosphere is the dak^im fire and the sky the ahavaniya fire Hence they are (called) the pure, the purifying, the bright By this the sacrifice is made manifest Since the digestive fire is the combination of the pure, the purifying and the bright, therefore this fire should be worshipped with oblations, is to be built (with bncks), is to be praised, is to be meditated upon The sacrificer, when he takes the oblation seeks (to perform) his meditation of the divinity thus. "The bird of golden hue abides in the heart and in the sun, a diver-bird, a swan, of surpassing radiance. Let us worship him in the fire ' Having recited, one discerns the meaning of this verse, the adorable splendour of Savitri should be meditated upon by him, who, abiding in his understanding, meditates thereon Here he reaches the place of tranquillity for the mind He places it in the self, indeed, on this point there are these verses . Even as fire without fuel becomes extinct jn its own place, even so thought, by the cessation of activity becomes extinct in its own source. Even in a mind which seeks the truth and has quieted down m its own place, there arise false ideas due to past acts when deluded by the objects of sense One's own thought, indeed, is samsara; let a man cleanse n by effort "What a man thinks, that he becomes, this is the eternal mystery For by the serenity of one's thought, one destroys all actions, good or bad Dwelling within the self, with a serene self, he enjoys imperishable happiness. If the thought 01 man is so fixed on Brahman as it is on the things of this world who will not then be free from bondage? The mind, it
r TZ' 15 of two kmds ' P 016 333(1 ^P^e, impure from contact with desire and pure when freed from desire By f reeing mma from sloth and distraction and making it motionless, he tw?!. lvered 6:0111 ^ mind (reaches mmdlessness), then in f V S t su P reme state So long should the mind be restrained 1 P xt v^zs its end, that is knowledge, that is to S w ™ ke is but tensions of the knots that bind us awaw k happiness of a mind whose stains are washed
camL I c ° ncentr ation and who has entered the self, it the inr, described by words It can be grasped by
fire in fi ° rg£U1 (only ) 0ne cannot distinguish water m water, m he , °i r er in ether > even 550 he whose «™d has entered ' B leased completely Mind, m truth, is the cause of
846 The Principal Upamsads VI 35
bondage and liberation for mankind; for bondage if it is bound to objects, freedom from objects, that is called liberation Therefore, for those who do not perform the agmhotra sacrifice, who do not build up the fire, who are ignorant, who do not meditate, the remembering of the ethereal (heavenly) place of Brahman is obstructed Therefore that fire should be worshipped with oblations, should be built (with bricks), is to be praised, is to be meditated upon
pavatnatta-pdvaka-iua These attributes are applied to the different fires" gaihapatyah—pavamanah, daksinagmh^pavakah, almvaniyah- Sucir ttt bhedah
hranya-varnah of golden hue, hiranyavat prakSiamamh.
dhatte places, anusandliatk.
sva-yonmi m its own place, svadhisthane
kdma-vivarjttatn free from desire See Brafona-hn&u UVi
laya' sloth, sleepiness, layo ntdrd
mkscpah distraction, bahtr-vtsaya-smftyddth
amambhavam mindlessness atmatio mana upadhi-pravesa-kia-wsesa-
parilydgah amanibhdvah
Cp. Yoga-vdsts(ha
attain karanam arthdnam tastmn sah jagat-trayam, tasmm ksine jagat kslmm tat ahisyam pmyatmlah 'Thought is the cause for all things When it is active there are
the three worlds, when it subsides the world subsides Therefore the
mind should be treated with diligence '
Brahma-bindu U 2, see also 3-5
Astavakra Gltd II says
sariram svarganarakau bandha-moksobnayam tatha kalpana-matram evailal km me Uryam cidatmmh The body, heaven and hell and so both bondage and hberation
are but Sal What then have I (who am) essentially mtettgence
t0 mstL%T^uates diraya with Sabda Broken whose £»£ ff St Sferentiahon leads to the universe Its purification or unification leads to aSOda or utter voidness, smyaiva « namo'snave Mhwfkate loka-smrte lokam asmat yyamdfr
yymZdnaya dhd* t nam brahmane sarva-kstte sarva-mHe sat
vam l£2g£^ "** m
VI 35 Maitn Upamsad 847
adityasya ddityatvam tac chuklam, purusam, ahngam, nabhaso' ntargaiasya tejaso'ms'amdtrain etad yad adityasya madhya ivety aksmy agnau caitad brahmaitad amrtam etad bhargah etat satya- dharmo nabhaso' ntargaiasya tejaso'msamdtram etad yad adityasya madhye amrtam yasya hi somah prdna vd apyayankura etad brahmaitad amrtam etad bhargah etad satya-dharmo nabhaso' ntar- gaiasya tyaso'msa-mdtram, etad yad adityasya madhye yajur dipyaiy aum dpo jyoitraso'mrtam brahma bhur bhuvah svar aum. astapadam sucim hamsam trt-siitram anum avyayam dvi-dliarmo'ndham tejasendham sarvam pasyan paiyati nabhaso'ntargatasya tejaso'mia-mdtram etad yad adityasya madhye ttdtiva maynkhe bhavata etat savit satya-dharma etad yajur etat tapa etad agnir etad vdyur etat prdna etad apa etac candramd etac ckukram, etad amrtam, etad brahma-visayam, etad bhdnur amavas tasmmn eva yajamandh samdhava iva vliyanta esd vai brahmatkat&tra hi sarve hamah samdhitd ity atrodaharantv amsit-dkaraya ivanuvMentahsamsphuraty asdv antargah surdndm, yo haivamvtt sa savii, sa dvaitamt, saikadhdm etah sydt tad atmakas' ca. ye vmdava ivabhyuccaranty ajasram, vidyud ivd- bhramsah parame vyoman, te'rciso vai yaiasa dSraya-vasdj jata- bhirupa iva krsna-varimanah
35 Adoration to Agm (Fire), who dwells m the earth, who remembers the world Bestow the world on this worshipper Adoration to Vayu (wind) who dwells in the atmosphere, who remembers the world Bestow the world on this worshipper • Adoration to the Aditya (the sun), who dwells m heaven, who remembers the world Bestow the world on this worshipper.* Aaoration to Brahma, who dwells m all, who remembers all. bestow all on this worshipper. With a golden vessel is the face ot the real covered That do thou, 0 Pusan, uncover, that we ^ay reach the Eternal real, the pervader* He who is the
S L P l re0I i l ? ? he sun ' 1 myseIf he Veril y- ttat which th* L , , of the sun 18 the etemal reaI - ^at b fte bnght, thefw 0 ? ' t! f se3dess 0f the bn S ht P° wer t*at pervades of ih» c, "!i y ' a P ortlon . w toch is, as it were, in the midst inrnwrtTlw eye , and in fire Tfc* 13 Brahman, that is the theS V \ S s P lendour 0f the bright power that pervades of theL„ 1S *° n l y a portio11 which is the nectar m midst
°% oSw7^V he T°? the hvin & matures too are y ^snoots. That is Brahman, that is immortal, that is
1 ^TmtmyaSamhitS VII 5 24 1, * ii« I5 , 16, BTJ V. i 5 r
848 The Principal Upamsads VI 36
splendour that is the eternal real Of the bnght power that pervades the sky is only a portion which shines as the Yajur Veda m the nudst of the Sun that is aum, water, hght, essence immortal, Brahman bhur, bhuvas, svar, aum The eight-footed the pure the swan, three-stringed, minute, the -imperishable' blind to the two attributes (of good and evil), kindled in the light, he who sees him sees all Of the bnght power that pervades the sky it is only a portion, which, rising in the midst of the Sun becomes the two hght rays That is the knower, the eternal, real, that is the Yojus, that is heat, that is fire,' that is wind, that is breath, that is water, that is the moon] that is the bright, that is the immortal, that is the place of Brahman That is the ocean of hght In it, indeed, the wor- shippers become dissolved like (a lump of) salt 1 It is the one- ness with Brahman for in it are all desires contained * On this point they quote Even as a lamp moved by a gentle breeze, he who dwells within the gods shines forth He who knows this, is the knower, he knows the difference, having grasped the oneness, he becomes identified with it They who rise forth perpetually like spray drops (from the sea) like lightnings from the light within the clouds in the highest sky, they, by virtue of their entrance into the hght of glory appear like crests of flame in the track of fire.
prfkm-ksite' who dwells in the earth, prthtvt-hka'tuvdsaya.
satya-dkarmdya msnave- that we may reach the eternal real, the
pervader; satya-dltarma-vtsmtsvarupa-prdptaya tit
alingam sexless, httga-varjttatnstri-pan-iiapKmsakadi-bheda-rahttam
dvi-dkarmo'ndham- blind to the two attributes (of good and evil).
dvabhyam punya-pdpabhyam aitdham anavabMsamamm punyapa-
pa-rahttam
brahma-mayam- the place of Brahman, brahma-prapii-dvaram savit- the knower, inda jnanena saJta variola ilt savtt, vtdvdn
36 due va va khalv eU brahma-jyoliso rupake sdttfam ekam samrddham caikam, atha yac cMntam tasyddhdram kham, alha yat samrddham idam tasyannam, iasmdn manlrau?adhdjya- misa-purodasa-sthSli-pdkddibhir yastavyam anlarvedyam asny avasistair anna-pdnaii cdsyam dhavanfyam ih matva tejasah samrddhyai pmya-loka-vijityarlhdydmrtatvdya catrodaharanlt agm-loirampihuydtwarga-kdmoyama-^
3 CU.VIII i5,MaitriVI 30 and 38
yj yj Matin Upanisad 849
yah soma-r&iyam nkthena, surya-rdjyam sodahna svarajyam alircdreiia prdjapatyam dsahasra-samvatsardnta-krakmett: variyddhdra-sneha-yogdd yatlid dipasya samsthiUh, antaryandopayogdd tmau sthiiav dtma&uci taiha. 36 Verily, indeed, of the Brahma light there are these two forms, one, the tranquil and the other the abounding Now of that which is tranquil, space is the support, of the other which is the abounding, food here is the support Therefore one should offer sacrifice in the sacrificial altar with sacred hymns, herbs, ghee, flesh (sacrificial), cakes, boiled rice and the hke, and also with food and drink cast into the mouth, knowing the mouth to be the dhavaniya fire for the sake of abundance of vigour, for winning the world of sanctity and for immortality On this point they quote. He who is desirous of heaven should offer the agmhotra sacrifice One wins the kingdom of Yama by the ogni-stoma sacrifice, the kingdom of the moon by the uhtha, the kingdom of the Sun by the sixteen-day sacrifice, the kingdom of independence by the atiratra sacrifice, the Kingdom of Praja-pah by the sacrifice which continues to the end of a thousand years As the continued existence of a lamp is because of the union of wick, support and oil, so also the self and the bright (sun) continue to exist because of the union of the Inner One and the world egg.
The two selves are the witness and the experiencing self. The former is tranquil and the latter is full of activity
iejasah vigour, jnana-baladt-mmittam prdgalhhyam.
svarajyam the kingdom of independence or the kingdom of Indra:
wdradhtsthto loka-vtiesah
Even as the lamp burns so long as there is oil to be consumed so the light of Brahman remains divided as the individual soul and the Sun so long as the latent brightness of previous actions in the incorporated being and in the world are not exhausted If the Sun is taken as the symbol of the cosmic process it means that the process will continue until all men are liberated
37 tasmad aum tty anenaitad upasitapanmitam tejas, tat treahabhihttam agndv ddiiye prans'thaisa nddy anna-bahum ity esagnau hutam adityam gamayati, ato yo raso'sravat set ttdgitham Vm ]ft tenet>le P r * n &h> prdnebhyah praja xty atroddharanli: yodd havir agnau hiiyate tad adityam gatnayah, tat suryo raimibhir Mrftth, Unannam bhavati, annddbhutdndmutpattmtyeoamhyaha: agnau prdstdhtttih samyag adityam upalisthate, adiiyd) jayate vrstir vrster annam tatah prajah
850 Tl ' e Principal Upamsads yi 38
the sun The sap which flows therefrom rams do™ Scathe ttdgitha chant By this living creatures here exist from W
Sh U hl C r P e °« Spn , ng ^ ^Pomttheyquote TheoblaS Si S. bee" offered m the fire goes to the sun The sun rains that down with his rays Thereby arises food From food the production of beings For thus has it been said, the offering properly cast m the fire goes toward the sun, from out of the sun comes ram, from the ram food, from food hving beings nadu channe], dvam-riipa See Mann III. 76.
38 _ agm-hotramjuhvano lobha-jalam bhmath, aiah sammoham chtvd 11a krodhan stunvdnah kamam dbhidhydyamdnas tatas mtur- 3dlatnbrahjm-koSambJnndad,atahpara»t-dkd^a?nalrahisaurasau- myagneya-sMvtMm mandaldm bhittva iatahsuddhah sattvantaras- tham, acalam, amriam, acyutam, dhruvam, vi$ntt-$amjiiitam, sarvdparam dhdma satyakdma-sarva^natvarsamyuhtam, svatan- iram, catlanyam, svemahimm titfhamdnampatyalt atroddharanti' ravi-madhye sthiiah somah sotna-madhye hutascmah, tejwnadhye sthttam sattvam sattva-madhye sthio'cyiitah 4arira-prddesdngus(ha~tndtram anor apy anvyam dhyatvdtahpara- malam gaccjiati, atra hi sarve hamah samdhitd tit, atrodaharantt, aitgu^iha^rddda-ianra-mdlram pradipa-pratdpavat dvis tndhd hi, tad brahmdbhi$luyaimnam maho devo bhuvandny dvwesa mm namo brahmane namah
38 He who performs the agmhotra sacrifice rends the net of selfish desire Then having cut through bewilderment he does not approve of anger Meditating on desire, he cuts through the fourfold sheath of Brahma Thence he goes to the highest space There having broken through the spheres of the sun, of the moon, of the fire and of the pure being, he, then, being purified himself, he sees the intelligence which abides in the pure being, immovable, immortal, indestructible, enduring, bearing the name of Visnu, the ultimate abode, endowed with love of truth (or the desires) and omniscience, independent, which stands m its own greatness On this point they quote In the midst of the sun stands the moon, in the midst of the moon the fire, m the midst of fire stands pure being, in the midst of pure being stands the indestructible one Having
VI 38 Matlri Upanisad 851
meditated on him who is of the measure of a thumb within the span (of the heart) xa the body, who is smaller than the small, then one goes to the supreme condition. For in that all desires are contained On this point they quote: Having the measure of a thumb within the span in the body like the flames of a light burning twofold or threefold, the Brahma who is praised, the great god, has entered (all) the worlds Aim, adoration to Brahma, yea, adoration.
He who makes the fee sacrifice tears up the snare of greed, cuts down delusion and breaks with anger.
of the measure of a thumb withm Gie span in the hody Satire prade- sa-matra-pammtam krdayam tatrangiistha-matram kamalam. pradipa-pratapaaat like the flame of a light, pradipa-sikhavat
832 The Principal Upam$ads vil >3
THE SELF AS THE WORLD-SUN AND ITS RAYS
?atm t ii vasavah purastdd udyanti, lapanti, varsanhZvZh punar nianti antar vivareneksanti, LrAyo'muL gabSo Tl tomvadyoghano gahano nirgunah Suddho bhasvafogZSt bltayomrvrilvr yogiivarah, sarvajno magho'pramyo'nfdyaSah imnan, ap.dhiman amrdesyah, sarvasrk.sarvasydimd.sarvabhuk sarvasyeSanah, sarvasydntardntarak
7, *' Fire ' the giym raetre ' the trivrt fry™. *e rathantam chant, the spring season, the upward breath, the stars, the vasu gods (these), rise in the east, they warm, they rain, they praise they enter again within and look out through an opening He is unthinkable, formless, deep (unfathomable), hidden, blame- less, compact (solid), impenetrable, free from qualities, pure, brilliant, enjoying (the play of the three) qualities, fearful, unproduced,themasteryogin ( omniscient,mighty,inimeasurable, without beginning or end, possessing all excellence, unborn, wise, indescribable, the creator of all, the self of all, the enjoyer of all, the lord of all, the inmost being of everything
vasu gods deva-gana-viiesah. deep, unfathomable duravagdhah. compact solid, abliedyah
bbayah- fearful, because he is the all-devounng tune, kalariipak maghdh mighty or worshipful, magkavdn tttdrak pfyyah
2 tndras tnsiup pancadaio brhad-grismo vydnah somo rudrd dakstnata udyanti, tapanh, varsanti, stuvanti, punar viianti, antar-vivarena iksantt. anddyanto'panmito'paricchtnno'parapra- yojyah, svatantro'hngo'mitrto'nantas'akhr dhdta bkdskwah
2 Indra, the tristubh metre, the pancadaia hymn, the brhat chant, the summer season, the vydna breath, the moon, the Rudra gods rise in the south , they warm, they ram, they praise, they enter again within and look out through an opening He is without beginning or end, unmeasured, unlimited, not to be moved by another, independent, without any marks (signs), formless, of endless power, the creator, the maker of light (the enlightener)
3 maruto jagati saptadaio vairupam, varsd apdnah iukra dditydh paicddudyantt, tapanti, varsantt, stuvanti.punar-viiantt, antar vivareneksanti, tac chdntam, aiabdam, abhayam, aiokam,
VII 6. MaUri Upamsad 853
anandam, trptam, sthiram, acalam, amrtam, acyutam, dhruvam, w$mt-samjmtam, sarvdparam dhdma
3 The Mamts, the jagati metre, the saptadasa hymn, the Vairupa chant, the rainy season, the apana breath, the planet Venus, the Aditya gods, these nse m the west. They warm, they ram, they praise, they enter again within and look out through an opening That is tranquil, soundless, fearless, sorrowless, blissful, satisfied, steadfast, immovable, immortal, un- shaking, enduring, bearing the name of Visnu, the highest abode.
4 vtsve devd anustub ekavtmio vairdjak sural samdno varunah sadhya uttarata udyantt, tapantt, varsanU, stuvanti, punar vtsantt, antar vivareneksanh, antah-iuddhah, piitaf}, sUnyah, idnto'prdno mralmanantah
4 The Vtsve devas, the anustubh metre, the ekavimsd hymn, the Vairaja chant, the samdna breath, Varuna, the sadhya gods, nse in the north They warm, they ram, they praise, they enter again within, and look out through an opening He is pure within, clean, void, tranquil, breathless, selfless, endless
5 fmtrdvarmau pankhs tnnava-trayastrtmso sdkvara-raivate nemanta-stitrduddno'ngirasas candramd urddhvd udyantt, tapantt, varsanh, stuvanti, punar vtsantt antar vtvareneksanh, prana- vakhyam pranetdram, bhd-rupam, vtgata-ntdram, vtiaram, vimr- tywn.visokam '
5 Mitra and Varuna, the pankti metre, the tnnava and the irayaslnniia hymns, the Sdkvara and Raivata chants, the winter ana the dewy seasons, the ttddna breath, the Angtrasas, the moon nse from above They warm, they ram, they praise, they enter again withm, and look out through an opening Him who
LjZ / r ?2f* *' the im P eIle r. whose form is light, sleepless, ageless, deathless, sorrowless
anZ,, ui y^> tapantt, varsanh, stuvanti, punar vtsantt,
SklhTl 6 ^ 1 - yah t™!™ m ^aranali sarvdntaro'ksaraJt, suddhah putah, bhdntah, ksdntah, santak
sements t^S* (the ^ 0Ii ' s head )' Keiu < the port's tail), the lS™ f aksa f as ' Yaks as, men, birds, deer, elephants and thev el fr ° m below - ^ wa ™> they rain, they praise, XjSelE 1 ^ tlun L 00k «* through an' opeL P g. He *^*2ttal52 ^ * m P erishable ' P™> clean, wiharanah the ordainer, vidhdrako varnasrama marydddyah
854 The Principal Upantsads VII 8
THE WORLD-SELF 7 esa hi khalv dtmantarhrdaye'niydn iddko'gmr tva vtsvaru- ■po'syatvannam idam sarvam asmmn ota tmah prajdh, esa dtmdpahatapdpmd mjaro vimrtyur vtioko'vmkitso'vtpdsah sat- ya-samkalpah, satya-kdmah, esaparatnesvarah, esa bhiitddhpatih, esa bhuta-palah, esa setuh, mdharanah, esa ht khalv atmesamh iambhur bhavo rudrahprajdpattr visva-srkhiranya-garbhahsatyam prdno hamsah sdstdcyuto visnur nardyanah, yascaiso'gnau yai cay am hrdayev yaicdsdv ddttye sa esa ekah, tasmai te vtsva-rupdya satye nabhasi httdya namah
7 And he, verily, is the self within the heart, very subtile, kindled like fire, endowed with all forms Of him all this is food In him are woven creatures here He is the self which is free from evil, ageless, deathless, sorrowless, free from uncertainty, free from fetters, whose conception is the real, whose desire is the real He is the supreme lord, he is the ruler of beings, he is the protector of beings He is the determining bridge This self, venly, is the lord, the beneficent, the existent, the terrible, the lord of creation, creator of all, the golden germ, truth, life, spirit, the ruler, the unshaken, the pervader, Ndrayana He who is m the fire, he who is here in the heart, he who is yonder in the sun, he is one To thee who art this, endowed with all forms hidden in the real space, be adoration
viha-rupah endowed with all forms, sarva-ritpo vativamrah otdh woven, dsntdh, paid tva tanlujdtam dsrttya slhilah bee J5.u III 6, III 8 TT ___„ t
sdu bridge SeeBU IV 4 22. CU VIII 4 I hMya hidden, mhriaya
8 atheddmm jndnopasargfi r^an mh^a^^imyoi^ yad asvargyaih saha svargyasyatsa valye purastad uhte py aihah y s%»bendisyantt, aiha ye cdnye ha mtya-pramudUa mlyapra- vastid, mtya-yacanakd miyam iiipopajiwno tha ye canye ha ITa-vdcJdlydjya-ydjakak Siidra-hsydh, Vidros ca Sastra-vtd-
tZo'Tha ye cdSe V**1*»«**^^
rinjrdjakarmampafytddayo-thayecdnyehay ^12Ta7o7asaJrahMmdm artham puraskrlya iamayama ^y
pfrtsmZZcchanU, tarh saha na samvaset, prakasya-bhuta v»
Zrdmyln loko najdndh veda-vidyanlarantn yat
yil. g t MaUri Uptmi?ad 855
8. Now then, the hindrances to knowledge, 0 King. This is indeed the source of the net of delusion, the association of one who is worthy of heaven with those who are not worthy of heaven, that is it Though it is said that there is a grove before them, they cling to a low shrub. Now there are some who are always hilarious, always abroad, always begging, always making a living by handicraft And others there are who are beggars in town, who perform sacrifices, for the unworthy, who are the disciples of Madras and who, though Sudras, are learned in the scriptures And others there are who are wicked, who wear their hair m a twisted knot, who are dancers, who are mer- cenaries, travelling mendicants, actors, those who have been degraded in the King's service And others there are who, for money, profess that they can allay (the evil influences) of Yakas (sprites), Raksasas (ogres), ghosts, goblins, devils, ser- pents, imps and the like And others there are who, under false pretexts, wear the red robe, earrings and skulls And others there are who love to distract the believers in the Veda by the jugglery of false arguments, comparisons and paralogisms, with these one should not associate These creatures, evidently, are thieves and unworthy of heaven. For thus has it been said The world bewildered by doctrines that deny the self, by false comparisons and proofs does not discern the difference between wisdom and knowledge
QofHisargafr. hindrances to knowledge, jnanotpatlt-vighatakd vrtha falsely, mtthya
veda-vtdyd wisdom and knowledge, veddmdyd- knowledge and ignorance
The caste prejudice comes out here with reference to the Sudras.
9 brhaspahr vat iukro bhutvendrasyabhaydydsttrebhyah ksaya- ymam avtdydm asrjat, tayd hvam astvam tty uddisanty aiivam sivatn th, vedddt-sdsira-himsaka-dharmdbhtdhydnam astv tti rat -) at ° min&m abhidhiyetany aihmsa bandhyevaisa hy &i!a ^ halam tts y & wttMyutasyeva ndrambhamyety evath
tT-ti*l v ^ arUe msiic *. a-vidydya ca vtdyetipmtd lol,pt„t am mctketasam man y e > na *°d kdmd bahavo
vdydm cavtdydm cayas tad vedobhayam saha, aouiyaya mriyiim tirtva vidyayd amriam asnute
856 The Principal Upanisads VII xo
avidydydm antare veflyatndndh, svayam dhirdh pandttam manyamanah,
datidramyamdndh panyanti mudha andhemiva niyamdm yalhdndhdh
9 Venly, Brhaspati (the teacher of the gods) became Sukra (the teacher of the demons) and for the security of Indra and for the destruction of the demons created this ignorance By this (they) declare the inauspicious to be auspicious and the auspicious to be inauspicious They say that there should be attention to the (new) law which is destructive of the (teaching of the) Vedas and the other scriptures Therefore one should not attend to this teaching It is false It is like a barren woman. Mere pleasure is the fruit thereof as also of one who has fallen from the proper course. It should not be attempted For thus has it been said Widely opposed and divergent are these two, the one known as ignorance, and the other as knowledge I (Yama) think that Naciketas is desirous of obtaining knowledge and many desires do not rend you He who knows at the same time knowledge and ignorance together, having crossed death by means of ignorance he wins the immortal by knowledge Those who are wrapped up m the midst of ignorance, fancying themselves alone wise and learned, they wander, hard smitten and deluded like blind men led by one who is himself blind
CpCU VIII 7
Stvam auspicious, sukliakaram
aitvam inauspicious, akalydnam, duhkham
vddihnti declare, kathayanti ^t MU
rati-mdiram mere pleasure, of a passing nature, Utthdtkam pMm\
hLwkdgc and ignorance See Katha II 4. I& Katha II 5.
Xig 1 iLi death by ignorance karmamsthayd ^yurn ^ patti^rahbandhakam pdpam iUvStthrmnya vidyaya aupamadaya 'mrtalvaminoksamahititeprdpnoh , ly^s^bSsa-
veSyamdndh wrapped up, pulmjasu-dhana-ksetrudi-trsnajasa
S£SSS^ bitten, MBm anekariQdn &m ^ $rlya J vender, sawdra-mandale panbhramarii
tasmai namasMvocuh, bhagavan, vayam atma-kamah satvm*
VII ii. Mattrl Upanisad 857
hruteii, alas ciram dhyato&'manyatanyatdtmano vai te'sura, aio'nyaiamam etesam uktam, tad ime mudha upajTvanty abhis- vtmgmas taryabhighdtino'nrtabhiiamsinah saiyam tvdnrtam pai- yantindrajdlavad iiy, ato yad vedesv dbhthitam tat satyam yad vedesuktamtad vidvamsa upajwanti.tasmad hrahmano navatdikam aihiytidyam arthah syad tti
10 Venly, the gods and the demons, being desirous of (knowing) the self went into the presence of Brahma Having bowed before him they said, Revered Sir, we are desirous of (knowing) the self, so do you tell us. Then, after having reflected a long while, he thought in himself. Verriy, these demons are desirous of a self different (from the true one) Therefore, a very different doctrine was told to them On that these deluded (demons) here live their life, with intense attachment, destroying the means of salvation and praising what is false. They see the false, as if it were true, as in jugglery. Therefore what is set forth m the Vedas, that is the truth On what is said in the Vedas, on that wise men live their life. Therefore a Brahmana should not study what is not of the Veda This should be the purpose
SeeCU VIII 8
anyalatmanah » ayatatmanah, not self-subdued. mtk intense attachment atyasaktah tat-parah They live according to anottendea of tte self than thereahty, deluded, attached, expressing fori S?° ' ^^y** 1 enchantment they see the false as the true.
me f ns ' raft h y which t0 cross * e ocean of samsara. t>51« * <an& smis&ra - s ^ ar&tikr ^ a m-sadhanam atma-tatt-
MEDITATION ON AUM AND ITS RESULTS Pmm1fj?<T!;?J V ? iipa ' h nabf "* a !> khe'ntarbhmasya yat fTi khe «t«rbhutasyayad aum iiy, etad aksaram
yam %S f, - atvattat sam ^aneprakdsa-praksepakausnya-smm- *hindh&Uhn!!al aSyeStt samlrane nabhast prasakhayawotkramya &rtasya ™f,T mu f*"p *psu praksepako lavanasyeva «»« - aiha ?Z ya Z wab}ndh y*t«r mstriir waitad ttyatrodaha- sorvam iarTn-/ iCyate yasmad uccaritamatra eva
tipanmitemt j y ° tayaii ' ****** aum ^^aiiad upSst-
858 The Principal Upamsads VII 11.
5 khajdgmyogad hrdt samprayuktam, anor hy anur dvtramih kantlia-deie phvagra-deie iryanukam ca viddlit vintrgatam malrkam evam dhuh.
bhdvo mahdtmana tit 11 Venly, the nature of the ether within the space (of the heart) is the same as the supreme bright power This is mani- fested in a threefold way, in fire, in the sun and m the breath of life Venly, the nature of the ether within the space (of the heart) is the same as the syllable mm With this syllable, indeed, that (light) rises up (from the depths) goes upwards and breathes forth Venly, it becomes for ever, the support of the meditation on Brahma In the breathing, that (bright power) has its place in the heart that casts forth hght In the breathing that is like the action of smoke, for when there s bSS the smoke nses to the sky m one column and follows SSwSdsone branch after another That :» like throwing ;satt Softer, like heat m melted butter, hke the range (of the thought of a meditator On this point they quote, now why is it Ed to be lightning' Because m the very moment of gpmg fertt it liffhts up the whole body Therefore one should meditate SSSISSk Taum that boundless light The person who Tin the eve who abides in the nght eye, he is India and to
g-ftBsassassisc—
Maitri Upani?ad
in two though but one The mmd stirs up the fire of the body; that stirs the wind The wind, then moving through the chest produces the low sound As brought forth in the heart, by contact with the fire of friction it is smaller than the smallest, it becomes double (the minimum size) m the throat, know that it is treble on the tip of the tongue and when it comes forth they call it the alphabet. The seer does not see death, nor sickness, nor any sorrow The seer sees the all and becomes all everywhere He who sees with the eye, who moves m dreams, who is sound asleep and he who is beyond the sound sleeper, these are a person's four distinct conditions Of these the fourth is greater than the rest. Brahman with one quarter moves in the three and with three-quarters in the last. For the sake of expenencing the true and the false the great self has a dual nature, yea, the great self has a dual nature.
SeeBU.IV 2 3, C.U. VII. 26. 2. ajasram. for ever, nairmtaryena
Veda is said to be the expression of the mmd of Ihara ttvara- ad-wstaro vedak maw hollow, chidre.
For the four conditions of the self, see Ma.U.
SUBALA vpanisad
This Upanisad belongs to the $uUa Yajur Veda and is in the form of a dialogue between the sage Subala and Brahma, the creator God. It discusses the nature of the universe and the character of the Absolute
Subdla Upanisad
I tad ahuh, kim tad dsit, tasmai sa hovaca, m son nasan na sad asctd th, tasmat tamah samjdyate, tamaso bhutadih, bhwtadeh dkdiam, dkdsddvdyuji, vayor agmh, agner dpah, adbhyah prthivi; tad andam samabhavat; tat samvatsara-matmm usttva dvidhdkarot, adhastad bhumtm, upanstdd akdsam, madhye puriiso divyak, sahasra-iirsa purusah, sahasrdk$ah, sahasra-pat, sahasra-bdhur th so'gre bhiitdndm mrlyum asrjat, tryaksaram, iniiraskam, tnp&dam khmdaparaium, tasya brahmabhidheii, sa brahmdnam eva inveia, sa mdnasdn sapta-putrdn asrjat, te ha virajah satya manasan asrjan, te ha pmjd-patayo brdhmano'sya mukham dsid, buhii rajanyah krtah, um tad asya yad vatsyah, padbhydm iudro ajdyata,
candramd manaso jdtai caksoh siiryo ajdyata, srotrdd vayus ca prdnai ca, hrdaydt sarvam tdam jdyate 1 (He) discoursed on that What was there then? To him (Subala) he (Brahma) said It was not existent, not non- existent, neither existent and non-existent From that emerged darkness, from darkness the subtle elements, from the subtle elements ether, from ether air, from air fire, from fire water, from water earth, then there came into being the egg; that (egg) after incubation for a year split m two, the lower one being the earth and the upper one being the sky; in the middle (between the two parts) there came into being the divine peW the person with a thousand heads, a thousand eyes, a thousand
?vl b6in f ' thre e-eyed, three-headed and three- « him Brahma became afraid. He got
SSZ,^ {<e S cr f ted mtheir turn, out of their mmds,
SflfS ft T trutb ^? se are ' venl y< the *w*»
sufS^™? fte moon - md from h 's eyes came the
i»tteb^ gwasttefom!essstatewiii . hcmiiotbedtsa . M
864 The Principal Upantsads II i
as either existent or non-existent or as both Cp R V Nasadiya S&ktaX 129
The first existent was darkness, the principle of objectivity, the void which has to be illumined
The egg is the world-form and the person is the world-spint Earth and heaven are generally represented as the two forces whose interaction produces the manifold universe
Subjection to death, the principle of unceasing change is the characteristic of the cosmic process
1 apdn&n ntsdda-yaksa-rdksasa-gandharvds casihtbhyah par- vata lomabhya osadht-vanaspatayo laldtdt krodhajo rttdro jayate, tasyaitasya mahato bhutasya nthsvasitam evaitad yad rgvedo yajurvedah sdmavedo'tharvavedah hk$a kalpo vyakaranam, nifuktam chando jyoUsdrn ayanam nyayo mtmamsd dhama- iastrdni vyakhyandny upavydkhydndm ca sarvam ca bhMam hircmya-jyohr yasmtnn ayam dtmddhtksiyanh bhmanani viiud atmdnam dvidhdkarot, ardhena sin ardkena purusah, devo bhutva devan asrjat, rstr bhutva rsin yak$a-rak?asa-gandjiarvan gramdny aranyami ca paiiin asrjai, itara gaur ttaro'nadvan ttaro vadave iaro'sva tiara gardabhitaro gardabha tiara viSvanibhafflaro jii- vambharali so'nte vaisvdnaro bhutva sandagdhva sarvam bhttani prthtvy apsu praliyata dpas tejasi praltyante, tep vdyau vtKyaie, vdyur akdie viliyata dkdsam tttdnyesv tndnydm tamatmu tanmdtram bhutddau vtliyante, bhutddtr mahati mhyate, mahan avyakte mliyate, avyaktam aksare viliyate, aksaram tamast mliyate, tamak pare deva ektbhavatt parasUn m san, ndsan, nasadasad tty etan mrvdmnusdsamm iti vedamdasanam tit
Qf ^ Pereon (sprang forth) the Nisad ? (forest tabes) as also the Yaksas, the Raksasas and the Gand- harvas from the bones the mountains, from the hairs herbs Se^sTthe forest, from the forehead RuJMhe embodi- m<=nt of aneer Of this great person's outbreatmng are tne Tveda.Z Yajlr 7 Jfthe Sana Veda, the A*m.7£ cffccV Annunciation} Kalpa Sutras, grammar, lexicography,
HI i Subala Upam§ad 865
That light of gold (the world-spirit) in whom are reflected the self and all the worlds, (he) split his own form into two, half female and half male. Becoming a celestial he created the celestials, becoming a seer he created seers and similarly the Yaksas, the Raksasas, the Gandharvas, village folk, and forest dwellers and animals he created, the one a cow, the other a bull, the one a mare, the other a stallion, the one a she-ass, the other a he-ass, the one the earth goddess, the other the lord of the world (Visnu) At the end he, (the same world spmt) becoming Vaisvanara, completely burns all existing things (dissolves the world), earth dissolves m water, water dissolves in fire, fire dissolves in air, air dissolves in ether, ether m the senses, the senses in the subtle elements, the subtle elements dissolve m their subtile sources, the subtile sources dissolve in the principle of mahat, the principle of mahat dissolves in the principle of the Unmanifested and the principle of the Unmanifested dissolves m the Imperishable The Imperishable dissolves m the darkness. The darkness becomes one with the transcendent {Brahman) Beyond the transcendent there is no (other) existence nor non-existence nor both existence and non-existence This is the doctrine relating to liberation This is the doctrine of the Veda; this is the doctrine of the Veda.
from the Jtatrs, tterbs and trees of the forest seeBU I 1 1
the one a cow and the other a bull see BU I 4 4.
iit&Hfl-mss investigation, it is taken as referring to both PHrva and
Uttara Mlmamsas, the first relates to the nature of duty, dharma
and the second to the nature of Brahman. The order of dissolution
faS^S^"*' * "* aCC0Unt * based 011
LIBERATION AND THE WAY TO IT Jt£^ lda % ap * m a]mam - ahmam > "■firatisthitam^abdam,
22 * ,Z« ^tgdham, alohtam, aZ-
3 * ahrasvam > ^rgkam, asthulam, ananv amlfiam aMmm
naxtad vat satyena danena tapasanUakem brahmacaryena
866 The Principal Upamsads IV. i
nirvedanendnaSakena %adangenavoa sa.dha.ytt, etat trayam vikseia damam dandm dayam tti, na tasya prana utkramanty atraiva samavaliyante, brahmaiva san brahmapyeh ya evam veda
i In the beginning this was non-existent He who knows (the Brahman) as unborn, uncaused, unestablished (in any- thing else), devoid of sound, devoid of touch, devoid of form, devoid of taste, devoid of smell, imperishable, not dense, not prodigious, originless, as one's own self (he), sorrows not That which is lifeless, mouthless, earless, speechless, mindless, splen- dourless, devoid of name and clan, headless, devoid of hands and feet, devoid of attachment, devoid of glowing redness (like fire), immeasurable, not short, not long, not gross, not minute (like a speck), not small, not great, not definable, not obscure, not demonstrable, not manifest, not shrouded, without an interior, without an exterior It does not feed on anything nor does anything feed on it One should attain this (Brahman) by recourse to the six means of truthfulness, chanty, austerity, fasting, chastity (of mind and body) and complete indifference to worldly objects (renunciation of all objects which do not help the attainment of the knowledge of the self) One should also attend to the following three, self-control, chanty and compassion The pranas (vital airs) of this (knower of Brahman) do not go out ; even where he is they get merged He who knows thus, becoming Brahman remains as Brahman alone
^fahma^JdLaibed. in negative terms and the means for its attemment are mentoned Whrfe this is the ultimate reality the wSSbe accounted for by the concepts of the Supreme Person and the world-spint
t hrdavasva madhye lohttam mamsaptndam, yasmms tad dalaramSdankam lumudam ivdnehadha
sTha samvujyate tada paiyanti nadyo nagaram bahuni vm***» o f yaZ7Lna saha s/myujyaie ^J^ffZ^Sa-
IV i Subala Upanisad 867
yujyate iada pasyatt deva-lokan dhanani ca, yadd vairambhyetia safta samyujyate tada paiyati drsiam ca srutam ca bhuktarit cabhuktam ca sac casac ca sarvam paiyah athema daia daia nadyo bhavanti tasam ekatkasya dvasapfatir dvasaptahh sakkd nadi sahasram bhavanti. yasminn ayam dtma svapiti iabdanam ca karoti. atha yad dvitiye samkos'e svapiti iademam ca lokath param ca lokam pasyatt, sarvan s"abddn vijandtt, sa samprasdda tty acaksate, prdnah fanrampanraksah, haniasya mlasyapttasya lohitasya svetasya nadyo rudhtrasya purnd athairaitad daharam pttndarTkam hmudani tvanekadha vikasitam yatlia kesah sahas- radha bhinnas tathd hita-nama nadyo bhavanti krdy dkdse pare koSe dtvyo'yam atmd svapiti. yatra supto na kam tana k&inam kamayate, na kam cam svapnam paiyati, na tatra devd na deva-loka yapia nayajna va, na mdta na pita na bandhur na bdndhavo na steno na brahmaJid tejaskayam amrtam salila evedam scddatn vanam bhuyas tenaiva margena jagrdya dhavati samrdd tii hovaca.
1 In the centre of the heart is a lump of flesh of red colour. In it the dahara of the white lotus blooms with its petals spread in different directions like the red lotus. There are ten hollows
wi, the heart 1x1 tiiem 31(5 established the (chief) vital airs When the individual soul is yoked with the prana breath, then he sees rivers and cities, many and varied. When yoked with the vyana breath, then he sees gods and seers. When yoked a ^P"™ breath ^n he sees the Yaksas, the Raksasas and the Gandharvas When yoked with the u'dana breath then 5? heavenl y wor W and the gods, Skanda, Jayanta and otners When yoked with the samana breath, then he sees the heavenly *orfd and wealth (of all kinds). When yoked with the vatrambha, then he sees what he has (formerly) seen, what ae has (formerly) heard, what he has (formerly) enjoyed or not ployed whatever is existent or nonWent Infacfhe see So Wa ? Dg x tate) (In tte subtle sheath ) these branch ° f ^ eacK 0ut of each of 0«se branch out *™»«* of nadis. In these (ramifications) the
SpreheST C ^ the - tat l° f dMttl causes s °™& to be e?menctl nen m Subtle second sb - eatb - the soul 2S SdSFSh"" S "* other ™rld and perception (In this state the vital air protects the feross^ bnrfv
«e. jeUow and white colours Then in that in which the
868 The Principal Upamsads V i.
daJtara is enclosed in the white lotus-like sheath which has bloomed like the red lotus, with its petals spread in different directions, are manifest iiadfs called the Hita, of the size of a thousandth section of the hair In the ether of the heart situated in the interior of the sheath, the divine soul attains the state of sleep When m the state of sleep (the soul) does not desire any desires, does not see any dreams In it there are no gods or worlds of gods, no sacrifices or absence of sacrifices, neither mother nor father, nor kinsmen nor relations, neither a thief nor a killer of a Brahmana His form is one of radiance, of immortality. He is only water and remains submerged Then' by resorting to the same course he leaps into the waking state He rules on all sides, said (Brahma to the sage Subala)
dahara. see C U VIII. i i pundarika white lotus kumuda red lotus.
part-raksali protects Life is devoted to its functions and keeps guard over the body
We have here a repetition of the description of lata which extends from the heart of the person towards the surrounding body Small as a hair divided a thousand tunes, these arteries are full of a thin fluid of various colours, white, black, yellow, red In these the person dwells When sleeping he sees no dreams He becomes then one with the life principle alone ,
When we wake up from the state of sleep we get back to the experience of dreams in the dream state and experiences of the world m the waking state See Ma U
THE INDIVIDUAL SELF'S FUNCTIONS AND THE
SUPREME SPIRIT I sthdnam sthdmbhyo yacchatt mdi lesavi mbaitdhanm, «,L TdZatmam drastavyam adhiblmtam, adityas Mradfo-
links establishing connecti « ^ISmS the sphere
V 4 Subfila Upamsad 869
influence m aid of the self) The connecting link (between the self and the organ of the eye) is the (concerned) nadi He who moves m the eye, m what is seen, m the sun, m the nddi, m the life principle, in the (resultant) knowledge, m the bliss (derived from such knowledge), in the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, Avhich is fearless, sorrowless, endless
2 srotram adhydtmam, frotavyam adhibhutam, diias talrdd- h&avoatam, nadi tesam nibandhanam, yak krotre yah srotavye yo dtksuyo nadyam yah prane yo vijMneya dnandeyo hrdy ak&ie ya efasmm, sarvasminn antare samcarah so'yam atma, torn almdnam updsitdjaram, amrtam, abhayam, aiokam, anantam
2 The ear is the sphere of the self, what is heard is the sphere of the objective, the (guardians of the) quarters are the divine principles The connecting link is the nadi He who moves in the ear, in what is heard, m the quarters, m the nadis, m the life-principle, in the knowledge, m the bhss, m the ether of the heart, in the interior of all those is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
3 ndsddhydtmam, ghratavyam adJnbMtam, prthivi tatra- dhtdatvatam, nadi tesam nibandhanam, yo nasayamyo ghrdtavye yah prthivydm yo nadyam yah prane yo mpiane yo dnande yo nrdyakdieya etasmm sarvasmmn antare samcarah so'yam atma iamatmanamupdsitajaram, amrtam, abhayam, aiokam, anantam
3 ihe nose is the sphere of the self what is smelt is the spnere of the objective Earth is the divine principle The connecting Imk is the nadi He who moves in the nose in what
tLfTS' ln - earth ' in the nddl - in the life-pnnciple, in the Wledge, m the bhss, m the ether of the heart, m the iSerior
SdTvSf 6 i ^ tblS Sel l °. ne should medltate on tlus s eW which
SSSfi^Sy 15 free from death> whlch 18 fearless '
dkdl 7 -t Mhym 'T 1 ' rasa y it ™y*™ adhibhutam, varunas talrd- M daroatam, nddi tesam nibandhanam, yo phvdydm vo VaZ
% «**y™. fr*«e yln/Z\a y °dZZ tona taTlt "T" sanasm »™ ^tare samcarah so'yam ZniaT m K «^. ^ayam, aiohZ,
870 The Principal Upanisads V 7
4 The tongue is the sphere of the self, what is tasted is the sphere of the objective Varuna is the divine principle The connecting link is the nadi He who moves in the tongue, in what is tasted, in Varuna, in the nddi, in the hfe-pnnciple, in the knowledge, in the bliss, in the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
5. tvag adhydtmam, sparsayitavyam adhtbhStam, vayus tatra- dhtiaivatam, nadi tesam nibandhanam, yas toact, yah sparkayi- tavye, yo vayau, yo nadyam, yah prane yo vijMne, ya anande, yo hrdy dkase ya etasmin sarvasminn antare samcarah, so'yam atmd, tarn atmanam upasttajaram, amrtam, abhayam, aiokam, anantam
5 The skin is the sphere of the self, what is touched is the sphere of the objective. Air is the divine principle The con- necting link is the naif. He who moves in the skin, in what is touched, in the air, in the nddi, in the bfe-principle,in fte knowledge, in the bliss, in the ether of the heart, in the mtenor of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which k devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
6 mano'dhydlmam, matttavyam adhbhutam, candras tatra- dhtdatvaiam, nddi tesam mhandhamm.yo manast.yo mantavyt, yas candre, yo nadyam, yah prane, yo vtpidm.ya «™Me,yo iTdy dkdse ya eiasmm sarvasndnn antare samcarft so yam ahm, ZmZLam updsitdjaram, amrtam, abhayam aSotem am^m
6 The mind [is the sphere of the self what is minded is fte
is fearless, sorrowless, endless "fokam. anantam
V io Subdla Upanisad 871
7. Understanding is the sphere of the self, what is understood is the sphere of the objective Brahma is the divine principle. The connecting link is the nddi He who moves in the under- standing, in what is understood, m Brahma, in the nddi, m the hfe-prmciple, in the knowledge, in the bliss, in the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self, which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
8 ahamkdro'dhydtmam, ahamkartavyam adhibhutam, rudras tatradlndaivatam, nadi tesam mbandhanam, yo'hamkare, yo 'hamkartavye, yo rudre, yo nadyam, yah prane, yo vijndne, ya. antmde,'yo hrdy dkdie, ya etasmin sarvasmtnn antare samcarati so'yam dimd, tarn atmdnam updsitdjaram, amrtam, abhayam aiokam, anantam
8 The self-sense is the sphere of the self The contents of self-sense are the sphere of the objective Rudra is the divine principle. The connecting link is the nadt He who moves in the self-sense and in the contents of self-sense, in Rudra, m the nddi, in the hfe-pnnciple, in the knowledge, in the bhss, in the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless.
9, ,ciitam adhydtmam, cetayitavyam adhibhvtam, ksetrajnas tatradhdaivatam, nddi tesam mbandhanam, yas" citte, yas ceta- yitavye, yah ksetrafie, yo nadyam, yah pram, yo vijnane, ya anande, yo hrdy dhaie, ya etasmin sarvasmtnn antare sanvcarati so yam dtmd, tarn atmdnam updsitdjaram, amrtam, abhayam aiokam, anantam. ' J '
« «, U \ thm king mind is the sphere of the self, what is thought 1m the ob J ectlv< *- Ksetrajna (the knower of the
is the divine principle The connecting hnk is the nddi Kt^r^f ^hiking ™a&. m what is thought, m the m ae hw m ^ ^-P™* the knowledge,
L£ ,< S' m et her of the heart, in the interior of aU
of of/f °f ?°1 d meditate on tius «« *h is yam ' yah t ra, t e y<> mjMne, ya dnande, yo hrdy dklse ya
8 7 2 The Prtnctpal Upamsads v. 13
etasmm sarvasminn antare samcaratt so'yam atma, tarn atmamm npasttajaram, amrtam, abhayam, aiokam, anantam
10 Voice is the sphere of the self What is spoken is the sphere of the objective Fire is the divine principle The con- necting link is the nadi He who moves m the voice, in what is spoken, m fire, m the nadi, m the life principle, in the know- ledge, in the bliss, in the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
11 hastav adhyatmam, adatavyam adhbh&tam, tndras tatrd- dhtdaivatam, nadi tesdm mbandhanam, yo haste, ya dddtavye,ya tndre, yo nddyam, yah prone, yo vijnane.ya dnande.yo hrdy akase, ya etasmin sarvasminn antare samcarati, so'yam atma, tarn atmdnam npasttajaram, amrtam, abhayam, asokam, anantam
11 The hands are the sphere of the self, what is handled is the sphere of the objective Indra is the divine principle The connecting link is the nadi He who moves m the hands, in what is handled, in Indra, m the nadi, in the life-pnnciple, m the knowledge, m the bliss, m the ether of the heart, m the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
12 padav adhyatmam, gantavyam adhbhiitam, vtsnus taira- dhtdawatam, nadi tesdm mbandhanam, yah pdde.yogantavye.yo visnau, yo nddyam, yahprdne, yo mjMne,yadnande,yo hrdy akase ya etasmm sarvasminn antare samcarati, so'yam atma, tarn atmdnam upasitajaram, amrtam, abhayam, asokam, anantam
12 The feet are the sphere of the self What is traversed by feet is the sphere of the objective Visnu is the divine principle. The connecting link is the nadi. He who moves on the feet, m what is traversed, in Visnu, m the nadi, m the bie- pnnciple, m the knowledge, m the bliss, m the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self. One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
13 payur adhyatmam, msarjayitavyam adhbhiitam, mrtyus iniradhtdcavaiam, n&di tesdm mbandhanam, yah payau. yo vtsarpyttavye, yo mrtyau, yo nadym, yak pane yo rnjm^- ya dnande, yo hrdy dkdieya etasmm sarvasminn antare samcarati,
so'yam atma, tarn atmanam upasitdjaram, amriam, abhayam, aiokam, anantam
13 The excretory organ is the sphere of the self What is excreted is the sphere of the objective Death is the divine principle The connecting lmk is the nadi He who moves m the excretory organ, m what is excreted, in Death, in the nadi, in the hfe-pnnciple, in the knowledge, in the bliss, m the ether of the heart, in the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless
14 upastho'dhyatmam, anandayitavyam adhbhfdam, praja- patis tatradhidavaatam, nadi tesam mbandhanam, ya upasthe, ya anandayitavye, yafy praja-patau, yo nddyam, yah prane, yo mpwte, ya anande, yo hrdy akase, ya etasmm sarvasminn antare samcarah, so'yam atmS., tarn atmanam upasttajaram, amriam, ablwyam, aiokam, anantam
14 The generative organ is the sphere of the self What is enjoyed (as sexual satisfaction) is the sphere of the objective Pmja-pati is the divine principle The connecting lmk is the nadi He who moves m the generative organ, in what is enjoyed, m Praja-pati, in the nadi, m the life-principle, m the knowledge, m the bliss, in the ether of the heart, m the interior of all these is this self One should meditate on this self which is devoid of old age, which is free from death, which is fearless, sorrowless, endless.
t 15 <»« sarvajna, esa sarveivara, esa sarvadhipakh, eso nlaryami, esa yomh sarvasya saroa-saukhyavr upasyamano na ca sarva-saukhyany upasyati, veda-idstratr upasyamano na ca veaa-sastmny upasyati, yasyannam idam sarve na ca yo'nnam onavati, atah param sarva-nayanah praiastdnna-mayo bhatalmd pram-maya mdnyatntd, mano-mayah samkalpdtmd, vimana- mayan kalatma, ananda-mayo layatmaikatvam ndsti dvaitam , ZlTX a ^ K&Sty amrtam kut0 ndntah P™}™ «* Mnh praino SHtJ pra]n0 Ha P ra l Mna -Shano na prajfio n&praiMpino
the'mSoVSVK-^ 0 ^ 11115 18 the l0ld of aU This is ofaHThts tL TiUS 15 * e ^ d T lhn S S P^ This is the source not stand m r^VVf ° rted t0 ^ y aU forms of happiness, does
tae Vedic texts ai "i scnptures does not stand in need
874 The Principal Uj>ani$ads VI 1
of Vedic texts and scriptures Whose food is all this but who (himself) does not become the food of any For that very reason (it is) the most excellent, the supreme director of all Consisting of food (it is) the self of (all) gross objects, consisting of life (it is) the self of (all) sense organs, consisting of mind (it is) the self of (all) mental determination, consisting of intelligence (it is) the self of time, consisting of bliss, (it is) the self of dis- solution. When there is not oneness whence (can arise) duality? When there is not mortality, whence (can arise) immortality? (It is) not (endowed) with internal knowledge nor with external knowledge, nor with both these kinds of knowledge, not a mass of knowledge, not knowledge, nor not-knowledge, not (pre- viously) known nor capable of being known This is the doctrine relating to liberation. This is the doctrine of the Veda This is the doctrine of the Veda.
See Ma. U 7
kalatmi the self of time. The witness self facing hala or the principle of temporal happenings The highest cannot be spoken of as non- dual or dual, mortal or immortal
1 naweha ktm canagra astd amftlam, anddhamm tmdh irmah -braiayante, dtvyo deva eko ndrdyanai caksut ca drasiavyam WiSSSZk Mm ca Srotavyam ca, nardyano ghranvn ca ehrdtavyam ca, ndrayano phva ca rasayiiavyam ca nar*- vamsZkca siariayitavyam ca, ndrayano mana£ ca ITSambuddhi caboddhavyam ca, ndrayano hamkarai
yi > x . Subdla Upamsad 875
candramah hold kalir dhdtd brahma. prajd-patir maghavd dvoasas cardha-dtvasds' ca kalah kalpai cordhvarii ca dtsas" ca sarvam narayanah
purttsa evedam sarvam yad bhutamyac ca bhavyam uidmrtatvasy da.no yad annenattrohatt tad visnoh paramam padam soda paiyantt surayafa divwa caksur atatam
tad wpraso vipanyavo jdgrvdmiah sammdhate
visnor yat paramam padam tad etan mrvanamdasanam itt, veddnusdsanam th, veddnusa- sanam
1 Whatever (we see in this world) did not, verily, exist at the beginning (of creation). So all these creatures became root- less, supportless, The one divine Narayana alone (is the mainstay of all creation), the eye and what is seen The ear and what is heard are Narayana, the nose and what is smelt are Narayana, the tongue and what is tasted are Narayana The skm and what is touched are Narayana. The mind and what is minded are Narayana The understanding and what is understood are Narayana The self-sense and its contents are Narayana The thinking mind and what is thought are. Narayana The voice and what is spoken are Narayana The two hands and what is handled are Narayana The two feet and what is traversed are Narayana The excretory organ and what is excreted are Narayana The generative organ and what is enjoyed (as sexual satisfaction) are Narayana The sustamer, ordamer, the doer, the non-doer, the celestial radiance are the one Narayana The Adityas, the Rudras, the Maruts, the Asvms, the Rk, the Yajur, the Soma Vedas, the hymns (employed in sacrifices), the sacrificial fires, the offerings and the acts of offering, what arises (out of the sacrificial rites) are the celestial radiance, the one Narayana Mother, father, brother, abode, shelter, fnend and the path (leading to life eternal) are Narayana, the Viraja, the Sudarsana, the Jita, the Saumya, the Araogha., the Amrta, the Satya, the Madhyama, the Nasira, the Sisura, the Asura, the SQrya, the Bhasvati are to be known as the names of the divme channels (The self that has to course tnrough the channels) roars (like thunder), sings (like a faery spmt), blows (like wind), rams He is Varuna, the Aryaman, we moon, (he is the) divisions of tune, the devourer of time, "ie creator Prajd-pati, Indra, the days and the half days, the owsions of time, aeons and great aeons He is up and in all
876 The Pnncipal Vpamsads yjj x
Visnu as the eye sees the sky These learned of
state of Visnu This is the doctrine leading to liberation This is the doctrine of the Veda This is the doctrine of the Veda sages see constantly seeMuktikaV I 83
1 ania!}, iarire nihtto guhdydm aja eko mtyo yasya prthtvi iariram yah prthvim antare samcaran yam prthtvi na veda, yasydpak iariram yo'po'ntare samcaran yam apo na mini, yasya tejah iariram yas iep'ntare samcaran yam tejo na veda, yasya vdyuh iariram yo vdyum antare samcaran yam vdyur na veda, yasyakdiah iariram ya akdiam antare samcaran yam akdio na veda, yasya manah iariram yo mano'ntare samcaran yam mono na veda, yasya htddhth iariram yo buddhim antare samcaran yam biiddhir na veda, yasyahamkdrah iariram yo'ham- kdram antare samcaran yam ahamkdro na veda, yasya atiam iariram yas attain antare samcaran yam attam na veda, yasya- vyaktam iariram yo'vyaktam antare samcaran yam avyaktam na veda, yasyaksaram iartram yo'ksaram antare samcaran yam aksaram na veda, yasya mrtynh iariram yo mrtyum antare samcaran yam mrtyur na veda, sa eva sarva-bhutdntardtmdpaha- tapdpmd dtvyo deva eko narayanah etdm vtdydm apdntaraia- maya dadav apdntaratamo brahmaw dadau, brahmd ghoran- gtrase dadau, ghorangird raxkvaya dadau, mkvo ramdya dadau, rdmah sarvebhyo bhiitebhyo dadav ity evam mrvandnuidsanam tti, vedamtidsanamiti, vedamisdsanam
1. There abides for ever the one unborn m the secret place withm the body The earth is his body, he moves through the earth but the earth knows him not The waters are his body, he moves through the waters but the waters know him not Light is his body, he moves through the light but the light knows him not Air is his body, he moves through the air but the air knows him not Ether is his body, he moves through
yjU j Subdla. Upanisad 877
the ether but the ether knows him not Mind is his body, he moves through the mind but the mind knows him not Under- standing is his body, he moves through the understanding but understanding knows him not Self-sense is his body, he moves through the self-sense but the self-sense knows him not. Thinking mind is his body, he moves through the thinking mmd but the thinking mind knows him not The Unmamfest is his body, he moves through the Unmamfest but the Unmam- fest knows him not The Imperishable is his body, he moves through the Imperishable but the Imperishable knows him not. Death is his body, he moves through death but death knows him not He alone is the indwelling spirit of all beings, free from all evil, the one divine, radiant Narayana This vidya (wisdom) was imparted to Apantaratamas Apantarataraas imparted it to Brahma Brahma imparted it to Ghora Angiras Ghora Angiras imparted it to Raikva Raikva imparted it to Rama and Rama imparted it to all beings This is the doctrine leading to liberation This is the doctrine of the Veda This is the doctrine of the Veda
SeeBU III 7.3
I atdah $"arire nihito gukaydm suddhah so' yam dtmd sarvasya medo-mamsa-kleddvakirne iariramadhye'tyantopahate cttra-bhiUt- prattkase gandharva-nagaropame kadali-garbhavan mhsdre jala- budbitdavac cancale mhsrtam atmanam, acmtyarHpam, dvoyam, devam, asangam, suddham, tejaskdyam, ariipam, sarvesvaram, acmiyam, asariram, hihitam guhdyam, amrtam, vibhrajamanam, anandam, tarn pasyanh mdvattisas tena laye na paiyanti.
1 This self abiding within the secret place m the body of all beings is pure. Though intimately connected with the interior of the body, which is full of stinking fluid oozing out of the fat and the flesh, resembling (for its durability) the wall painted in a picture (for its invulnerability) the city of the Gandharvas (a castle in the air), as substanceless as the pith of a plantain tree, as fickle as a bubble of water, the self is pure The learned perceive the self, of inconceivable form, radiant, divine, non-attached, pure, with a body of radiance, tormless, lord of all, inconceivable, incorporeal, abiding in
Tlie Principal Upantsads IX i
the secret place, immortal, shining (of the form of) bliss When it subsides they do not perceive.
The similes used here indicate the fragility of the human body The inner self remains unaffected by the changes of the body
I atha hamam raikvah papraccha, bhagavan, kastmn same 'stain gacchantttt tasmai sa hovaca, caksttr evapyett yac caksur evastam etidrasiavyam evapyett yo drastavyam evastam ett, adityam evapyeti ya adttyam evastam ett, mrdjam evapyett, yo vtrajam evastam ett, pranam evapyeti yah praitam evastam eh, mpianam evapyett yo mpianam evastam ett, anandam evapyett ya anandam evastam ett, tnriyam evapyett yas turiyam evastam ett, tad amrtam, abhayam, aiokam, ananta-ntrbijam evdpyetttt hovaca
I Then Raikva asked thus Venerable Sir, in what do all things reach their extinction? To him he replied He (the self) who absorbs the eye alone, m his own self does the eye reach its extinction (or disappearance) He who absorbs (forms) that are seen, m his own self do the (forms) that are seen reach extinction He who absorbs the sun, m his own self does the sun reach extinction He who absorbs the Viraia m him does Viraja reach extinction He who absorbs hie, in him does life reach extinction He who absorbs knowledge, in him does knowledge reach extinction He who absorbs bliss, in him does bliss reach extinction He who absorbs the tunya, in him does tunya reach extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman This he said
£;^h? P sun% t l 0 fferent deities exercise beneficent influence over StoSSSLdod self has the basis or seed of mdividuahty
S dSerent from the knowledge of smells and so on o intrant evaiyeti yah srotram evastam ett, srotavyam evapyett
jX. 4 Siibdla Upanisad 879
tad amrtam, abhayam, aSokam, ananta-nirbijam evdpyetUi
^Tlfe who absorbs the ear, m him does the ear reach extinc- tion He who absorbs (sounds) that are heard, in him do (the sounds) that are heard reach extinction He who absorbs the directions, in him do the directions reach extinction He who absorbs the Sudarsana, in him does the Sudartana reach ex- tinction He who absorbs the downward breath, in him does the downward breath reach extinction He who absorbs know- ledge, in him does knowledge reach extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman Thus he said
3 nasdm evapyeti yo nasdm evdstam eti, ghratavyam evapyeti yo ghratavyam evdstam eti, prihivim evapyeti yah prthimtn esSsiameti.ptdm evapyeti yo jitam evdstam eti, vyanam evapyeti yo vyanam evdstam eti, vijiidnam evapyeti yo vijndnam evdstam eti, tad amrtam, abhayam, asokam, ananta-nirbijam evapyeti hovaca
3 He who absorbs the nose, in him does the nose reach extinction He who absorbs (the smells) that are experienced by the nose, in him do the smells reach extinction He who absorbs the earth, in him does the earth reach extinction He who absorbs the jitd nadl in him does the ptd reach extinction. He who absorbs the vyana breath, in him does the vyana breath reach extinction. He who absorbs knowledge, in him does knowledge reach extinction (The individual self) merges m the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman. Thus he said.
4 phvam eoapyeti yo phvdm evdstam eti, rasayitavyam evap- yeti yo rasayitavyam evdstam eti, varunam evapyeti yo varunam evastam eti, saumyam evapyeti yah saumyam evdstam eti, ttddnam evapyeti ya udanam evdstam eti, vipldnam evapyeti yo vijndnam evastam eti, tad amrtam, abhayam, asokam, ananta-nirbijam evapyeti hovaca
4 He who absorbs the tongue, in him does the tongue reach extinction He who absorbs the tastes, in him do the tastes reach extinction He who absorbs Varuna, in hrm does Varuna ? ach extinction He who absorbs the Saumya {nddt), in him fhT fM S . aum y a reacltl extinction He who absorbs the uddna greattt), m hm a oes it fa na (breath) reach extinction. ™ ftho absorbs knowledge, in him does knowledge reach
880 The Principal Upantsads IX 7
extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman Thus he said
Varuna is the lord of the waters
5 ivacam evapyeti yas tvacam evastam eti, spariayiiavyam evapyeti yah sparsayitavyam evastam eh, vayum evapyeti yo vdyum evastam eli, mogham evapyeti yo mogham evastam eti, samanam evapyeti yah samanam evastam eti, vijnanam evapyeti yo vijMnam evastam eti, tad amrtam, ahhayam, aiokam, anan- ia-nirbljam evapyeti hovaca
5. He who absorbs the skin, in him does the skin reach extinction He who absorbs the touch, m him does the touch reach extinction. He who absorbs air, m him does air reach extinction He who absorbs the mogha {nadi), m him does mogha reach extinction He who absorbs the samana breath, in him does the samana breath reach extinction. He who absorbs knowledge, in him does knowledge reach extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman Thus he said
6. vacant evapyeti yo vacant evastam eti, vaktavyam evapyeti yo vaktavyam evastam eti, agmm evapyeti yo'gnim evastam eti, kumaram evapyeti yah kumaram evastam eti, vairambham evap- yeti yo vairambham evastam eti, vijMnam evapyeti yo vijnanam evastam eti, tad amrtam, ahhayam, aiokam, ananta-mrbijam
evapyeliti hovaca 1
6 He who absorbs the vocal organ, m him does the vocal organ reach extinction He who absorbs spoken expressions, in him do the spoken expressions reach extinction He who absorbs fire, in him does the fire reach extmction He who absorbs the kumara (nadi), in him does the kumara reach extmction
reach extinction He who absorbs knowledge, m him does that SwleT reach extinction (The individual f>"&*£ the Tmmortal, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman, Thus be
said
n Itastam evapyeti yo hastam evastam eti, adjtavyameoapyft hovaca.
IX 9 Subdla Upanisad 881
7 He who absorbs the two hands, in him do the two hands reach extinction He who absorbs what is handled, m him does what is handled reach extinction He who absorbs Indra, m him does Indra reach extinction He who absorbs the amrta (««<#), in him does the amrta {nadi) reach extinction He who absorbs the mukkya (mukhya prdna, chief vital air), in him does the mukhya reach extinction. He who absorbs the knowledge, in him does the knowledge reach extinction. (The individual self) merges in the immortal, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman Thus he said
8 pddam evapyeti yah pddam evdstam eti,gantavyam evdpyeh yo gantavyam evastam eti, visnum evdpyeh yo msnum evdstam eti, satyam evapyeti yah satyam evdstam eti, antarydmam evdpyeti yo'ntaryamam evdstam eti, vijnanam evdpyeh yo vijnanam evastam eh, tad atnrtam, abhayam, a&okam, ananta-ntrbijam evapyeiih, Jwvdca
8 He who absorbs the (two feet), in him do the feet reach extinction He who absorbs what is traversed, m him does what is traversed reach extinction He who absorbs Visnu, in him does Visnu reach extinction. He who absorbs the satya (nadi), m him does satya reach extinction He who absorbs the antarydmam, m him does the antarydmam reach extinction. He who absorbs the knowledge, in him does knowledge reach extinction (The mdividual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman. Thus he said
9 pdyttm evdpyeh yah pdyum evdstam eh, visarjayitavyam evapeh yo visarjayitavyam evastam eh, mrtyxvm evdpyeh yo mrlyiim evastam eh, madhyamam evdpyeti yo madhyamam evastam et%,prabMnjanam evdpyeh yah prabhanjanamevdstameti vijnanam evapyeti yo vijMnam evastam eti, tad amrtam, abhayam, asokam, ananta-nirbijam evapyeiih hovdca.
PvLfT Wh ° absorbs the excr etory organ, m him does the eSp£7 ° r f n r l ach extinct K>n He who absorbs what is who aXj? aS?* what is excreted reach extinction. He He wS? 5 ^' "i*™ does death readl lts extinction, reach r ™^ ew ^ ; ^
K the Sf? 11 He who absorbs ^Prabhaiijana, in him SowlS TT a I Cach J te extmctlon He absorbs XeTnSSu^ does ^ Pledge reachitsextincfaon
SSrSSSf? mergeS £L the ^rtal, Earless, sorrowless. 'mess, seedless Brahman Thus he said
882 The Principal Upanisads IX 12
10 npasiham evapyeh ya upastham evastam eh, dnandaytta- vyam evapyeh ya dnandayitavyam evastam eh, prajapahm evapyeh yah prajdpahm evastam eh, ndsirdm evapyeh yo ndsirdm evastam ch,htmdram cvdpycltyah kumdram evastam eh, vipianam evapyeh yo vtjMnam evastam eh, tad amrtam, abhayam, asokam, ananta-ntrbtjam evdpyelt hovaca.
10 He who absorbs the generating organ, in him does the generating organ reach extinction He who absorbs the (sexual) delight, in him does the delight reach extinction He who absorbs Prajd-pah, m him does Praja-pah reach extinction He who absorbs the nasTra (nddi), in him does the ndsvrd reach extinction He who absorbs kumdra, in him does kumdra reach extinction He who absorbs the knowledge, m him does the knowledge reach extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman Thus he said
11 mana cvdpyeti yo nana evastam cii, mantavyam evapyeh yo mantavyam evastam eh candram evdpyett yas" candram evastam ch, s'iSum cvdpyeti yah StSum evastam eh, iyenam evapyeh yah iyenam evastam eti, vipianam evdpyett yo vipianam evastam eh, tad amrtam, abhayam, aiokam, ana»ta-ntrbljam cvdpyctth hovdea
11. He who absorbs the mind, in him does the mmd reacn extinction. He who absorbs what is minded, in him does what is minded reach extinction He who absorbs the moon, in him does the moon reach extinction He who absorbs the fcswa (nddi), in him does the stsurd reach extinction He who absorbs the *vcn* («**!). » n does the iyena reach extinction we who absorbs the knowledge, m him does the knowledge reach extinction. (The individual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman Thus he said
12 . buddhtm evdpyett yo buddhm evastam ett, bodMavyam evapyeh yo boddhavyam evastam eh, brahmanam ^ J to&tom evastam eh, suryam evapyeh yah suryam * tsnam evdpyett yah krsnam evastam eh m&anam evapyeh yo ^Samldstam eh tad amrtam, abhayam, afokam, anan-
^ Sction He who ^^°££f££l SSS^ « S : t Sach extinction.
IX I4< Subala Upanisad 883
He who absorbs the surya [nadi), in him does the surya reach, its extinction. He who absorbs krsna, in him does krpia. reach its extinction He who absorbs the knowledge, in him does the knowledge Teach extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman, Thus he said
13 aham-kdramevdpyetiyo'ham-kdramevastam ett.aliam-karta- vyam eoapyeti yo'ham-kartavyam evastam eti, rudram evdpyeti yo ntdram evastam eti, asurdm evdpyeti yo'surdm evastam eti, svetam evdpyeti yak svetam evastam eti, vijnanam evapyeh yo vijnanam evastam eti, tad amrtam, abhayam, asokam, ananta-nirbtjam cudpyetitt liavaca
13 He who absorbs the self-sense, in him does the self-sense reach extinction. He who absorbs the contents of self-sense, in him do the contents of self-sense reach extinction. He -who absorbs Rudra, in him does Rudra reach extinction. He who absorbs the asura (nadi), in him does the asurd reach extinction. He who absorbs the sveta (vital air), in him does the Sveta reach extinction. He who absorbs the knowledge, in him does the knowledge reach extinction (The individual self) merges in the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman, Thus he said
14 attorn eoapyeti yai cittam evastam eti, cetayitavyam evapyeh yd cetayitavyam evastam eti, ksetrajnam evapyeh yah ksetrajnam evastam eh, bkasvaUm evapyeh yo bkasvattm evastam eti, nagam eoSpydx yo nagam evastam eti, vijnanam evdpyeti yo injMnam evistam eh, dnandam evdpyeti ya anandam evastam eti, turiyam mpyeti yas tunyam evastam eti, tad amrtam, abhayam, asokam, anantam, mrhjam evdpyeti, tad amrtam, abhayam aiokam, ananta-niffijam evdpyettti kovSca.
tvt; He ™ ho absorbs the thinking mind, in him does the Mmiang mind reach extinction. He who absorbs the thoughts L,- d0 J£ e , a °ughts reach extinction. He who absorbs the ww/wa (the knower of the field), m him does the ksetrajna
£?fS X ^ Bm * He wt0 absorbs ^ M&wff (**»). in him SSi f^' 1 ^ extinction He who absorbs the Naga abVnrhf T ii. M , hmi , <ioes the Naga reach extinction He who eSSo? n te °t Iedg 5 in dQes ^owledge reach
naAeShS wht L absorbs ae tur *y a > in ^ does the turlya racn extinction He who absorbs that immortal, fearless
ot>4 1 Fnnnpal Upanisads IX 15
sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman, m him does the immortal, fearless, sorrowless, endless, seedless Brahman reach extinction. Thus he said
15 ya evam nirbTjam veda ntrbSja eva sa bhavah, na jayate, na mnyate, na muhyate, na bhdyate, na dahyate, na chtdyate, na kampaie, na kupyate, sarva-dahano'yam atmety acaksate naivam alma pravacana-iaimapi laksyate, na bahu-irutena, na baddhi-jndnairti^na, na medliaya, na vedatr na tapobhr ugratr na samkhyatr na yogair nairamair -nanyair dtmanam upala- bkanie, pravacanena praiamsaya vyutthdnena iam dam brdhmana iuSruvamso'nucana upalabhante idnto ddnta uparatas iitikfuh samahtto bhutvdtmany evatmanam pasyah sarvasyatma bhavahya evam veda
15 He who knows this as seedless, he venly becomes seed- less He is not born (again) He does not die He is not bewil- dered. He is not broken He is not burnt He is not cut asunder He does not tremble He is not angry (Knowers of Brahman) declare him to be the all-consummg self The self is not attain- able even by a hundred expositions (of the Vedas), not by the study of countless scriptures, not through the means of intel- lectual knowledge, not through brain power, not through the (study of the) Vedas, not through severe austerities, not through the Samkhya (knowledge), not through Yoga (dis- cipline), nor through the (observance of the four) stages of life nor through any other means do people attain the self Only through a rigorous study and through discipline and devoted service to the knowers of Brahman, do they attain (the self) Having become tranquil, self-controlled, withdrawn from the world and indifferent to it and forbearing, he sees fhTself m the self He becomes the Self of all, he who knows this
He becomes the Universal Self What he does » express^, not ^S^Y^StZ 1 **- says Thou **
Stgnatfira Rerum.
X i Subdla XJfanisad 885
1 atha hatnam raikvah papraccha, bhagavan, kasmin saroe sampratisihitd bhavantiti, rasatala-lokesv iti hovaca, kasmin rasaiala-lokd otas ca protdi celt; bhur-lokesv ih hovaca. kasmin bhur-bka otas ca protas ceti; bkuvar-lokesv ih hovaca. kasmin bhuvar-lokd otas ca prolog ceti; suvar-lokesv ill hovaca kasmin suvar-kka otas ca protas ceti; ntahar lokesv iti hovaca. kasmin mahar-lokd otas ca protas ceti; jano-lokesv iti hovaca kasmin jano-loka olds' ca protai ceti; tapo-lokesv tti hovaca. kasmims tapo-hkd otas" ca protas ceti; satya-hkesv ih hovaca. kasmin satya-lokd otas" ca protas ceti; prajdpati-lokesv iti hovaca. kasmin prajd-pati-lokd otas ca protas" ceti; brahma-lokesv ih hovaca. kasmin brahma-lokd otas caprotas cett;sarva-lokddimanibrahmani manaya wauids ca protas ceti: sa hovdcawam eidn lokdn atmam prahsthitdn veda, dlmaiva sa bhavati iti, etan mrvdnanusdsanam iti veddnus'dsanam iti veddnusdsanam.
1 Then Raikva asked, 'Venerable Sir, in what are all (these worlds) "become firmly established?' In the rasdtala worlds, said he. In what are the rasdtala worlds (established) as warp and woof? In the terrestrial {bhilr) world, said he. In what are the terrestrial worlds (established) as warp and woof? In the worlds of atmosphere \bhuvar), said he. in what are the worlds of atmosphere (established) as warp and woof? In the heavenly {snvar) worlds, said he In what are me neavenly worlds (established) as warp and woof? In the tnahar worlds, said he In what are the maliar worlds (estab- iBtied) as warp and woof? In the janas worlds, said he In what are the janas worlds (established) as warp and woof? In the upas worlds, said he In what are the tapas worlds (established) « warp and woof? In the satya worlds, said he. In what are SIS? W ° 1 ?f S < establi sned) as warp and woof? In the 225? v \Y° rlds ' said ie In what are the Praja-pati worlds he Tn T7 33 ^ 311(1 woof ? In the Brahma worlds, said Hoof? ™ It?* th f Brahm * worIds (established) as warp and the *rtfiL » , ^ llke so beads are established in
fawvfi twT 33 wai P woof - thus said he He who become* fL u , heSe worlds 9X6 established m the self, he t»n tts ,! tf f 0n& : ms is doctrine leading to libera- te Veda ne of the Veda - ™ s 15 ^ doctrine of
The Principal Upanisads XI r
like so many leads see B G VII 7
evam sarvdnt bhtilam mamh sUtram tvatmam even as the beads are strung into a thread are all objects strung in the self Dhyana-bmdu
1 atha hatnam ratkvah papraccha, bhagavan, yo'yam vifid- na-ghana utkraman sa kena katarad va w sihdnam utsrjydpak- ramatttt, tasvm sa hovaca, hrdayasya madhye lohtam mam- sa-pvndam yasmims tad daharam pundartkam kumudam tvdne- kadha vikasttam, tasya madhye samudrah, samudrasya madhye koiah, tasmm nddyas catasro bhavanh, ramdramecchdpunar- bhaveti tatra rama punyena punyam lokam nayaii, arama papena pdpam, tcchayd yat smarati tad abhisampadyate, apunarbhamyd koiam bhtnattt, koiam bkttvd sirsakapdlam bhtnattt, sirsdkapdlam bhitvd pfthmm bhtnattt. prthtmm bhtuapo bhtnattt dpo bhttva tejo bhtnattt. tejo bhttva vdyum bhtnattt vdyum bhitvdk&iam bhtnattt, akctiam bhitvd mono bhtnattt mano bhttva bhutddtm bhtnattt, bhutddim bhttva mahdntam bhtnattt, mahdntam bht- vavyaktam bhtnattt, avyaktam bhttvaksaram bhtnattt aksaram bhttva mrtyum bhtnattt mrtyur vai pare deva eM-bhavaUti, parastan na san ndsan sad asad tty etan nirvananuSasanatn ttt veddnuidsanam ttt veddnuidsanam
1 Then Raikva asked thus Venerable Sir, How and by what means does this self which is a mass of intelligence after leaving its seat and moving upwards have its exit' To him he replied. In the centre of the heart is a red mass of flesh In it is the white lotus called the dahara which has bloomed like a red lotus with its petals spread in drSerent directions In the nuddle of it is an ocean In tiie middte of the ocean is a sheath In it are four -wa^s caUed Rama, Arama
SS ^o^to & world of the unngbteous Sgh Icchlone attains whatever ob]ecto ^J^Jf Through Apunarbhava one breaks through the sheath ^ Havmg £K through the sheath one J^jjgh^ shell 0 the
XII i
Subala Upamsad
element he breaks through water Having broken through water, he breaks through light Having broken through light, he breaks through air Having broken through air, he breaks through ether Having broken through ether, he breaks through mind Having broken through mind, he breaks through the subtle elements Having broken through the subtle elements, he breaks through the mahat tattva Having broken through the mahat tattva he breaks through the Unmamfested Having broken through the Unmamfested, he breaks through the Imperishable Having broken through the Imperishable, he freaks through Death Then Death becomes one with the Supreme In the Supreme there is neither existence nor non- existence nor existence and non-existence This is the doctrine leading to liberation This is 'the doctnne of the Veda This is the doctnne of the Veda
apumrbhava non-rebirth
mahat the great, the first product of prakjit, the principle of buddhi or intelligence in the individual For the Samkhya doctnne of evolution which is adopted here see I P Vol II, pp 266-277 mjiyn death The pnnciple of all-devouring tune is not different from the Eternal Supreme.
1 ndrayanad va aflnam agatam, pakvam brakmalokemahd-sam- sartaAe, punah pakvam aditye, punah pakvam kratryadi, punah f^em jalakUaUmtiam paryusiiam, piitam annam aydcilam asamklptam asniyan, na kam cam yaceta
Tt, V , N _ aravana came mto being food (in a raw state) «f £\ - T mmrtaka (t*e great dissolution) m the world woridT£ beC ° T mes npe < cooked ) lt 15 ag* 111 cook «l ™ the IS ter nlSf X V S agam C00ked in the sacnfices with Food S g ° Ut , 01 rendered stale ( should not b ^ eaten) is not In I u ea ° (dev0ld of the defects mentioned) which
^S£S£^- one eat He should not b <* for f °° d of
Punty 0f food makes for punty of disposition.
888 The Principal Upamsads XIII i
THE CHILD-LIKE INNOCENCE OF THE SAGE
1 bdlyena ttsthdset, bala-svdbMvo asango mravadyo maunena pdndttyenantravadhikdratayopalabhyeta, kaivalyam uktam mga- manam prajd-patir uvaca, mahat-padamjndtvd vrksamule vaseta, kucelo'sahdya ekakt samddhtstha dtma-kdma dpta-kdmo ms-kdmo firna-kamo hasttm simhe damie maiake nakule sarpardksasa- gandJiarve mrtyo rupant viditvd na bibJieh kutas caneii vrksam voa ttsthdset, chtdyamdno'pi, na kupyeia, na kampetotpalam iva ttsthdset, chtdyamdno'pi na kupyeia, na kampeta, akasam tva ttsthdset, chidyamdno'pt na kupyeia na kampeta, satyenattslhdset satyo'yam atma, saroesdm eva gandhdndm prthvol hrdayam, sarvesam eva rasdndm dpo hrdayam, saroesdm eva rUpindm tep hrdayam, sarvesam eva sparsdndm vdyur hrdayam, sarvesam eva iabddnam dkdiam hrdayam, sarvesam eva gatindm avyaktam hrdayam, sarvesam eva sattvdndm mrtyur hrdayam, mrtynr vai pare deva eki-bhavatiti, parastdn na san ndsan na sad asad tty elan mrvandnutdsanam ih veddnutesanam iti veddmiidsanam
13 One should cultivate the characteristics of a child The characteristics of a child are non-attachment and innocence (freedom from notions of right and wrong) By abstinence from speech, by learning, by non-observance of conventions relating to the classes and stages of hfe one acquires the state of alone- ness proclaimed by the Vedas Prajd-pah said thus After knowing the highest state (the sage) should reside at the foot of a tree With a rag as his loin cloth, with no one to help him, all alone, remaining m concentration, with his desire for the self, with all desires fulfilled, with no desires, with desires con- sumed, recognising in the elephant, in the lion, m the tiger, m the mosquito, in the mungoose, m the snake, the demon and the faery spirit so many forms of death, he is not afraid of them on any account He should be (unmoved) like a tree Even if cut asunder, he should not get angry, he should not quake He should be like a rock and even if cut asunder should not get angry, should not quake He should be like the sky and should not get angry, should not quake He should stand bv the truth, for verily, this truth is the self Of all smells, earth is the heart, of all tastes water is the heart, of all forms light is the heart, of all touches, air is the heart Of all j sounds ether is the heart, of all states of being the unmanifested is the nSrt of all bemgs, death is the heart Death, verily, becomes
XIV i
Suhala Upanisad
one with the Radiant Supreme In the Supreme there is neither existence nor non-existence nor existence and non-existence This is the doctrine leading to liberation This is the doctrine of the Veda This is the doctrine of the Veda
SeeBU III 5 1
Superiority to emotions and indifference to worldly objects and desires are stressed
I. prthivi vannam apo annada, apovannam jyottr annadam, jyohr vannam vdyur annado vdyur vannam akdso'nnada, akaso vannam mdnyany annadamndnydni vannam manonnadam, mano vannam buddhir annada, buddhir vannam avyaktam anna- dam, avyaktam Vanuatu aksaram annadam, aksaram vannam mrtyur annado mrtyur vat pare deva eki-bhavatitt parastan na wi nasan na sad asad tty eian mrvananusasanam ih vedanusa- sanam iti vedamtiasanam
1 Earth is the food, (m relation to it) water is the eater of the food Water is the food, (m relation to it) light is the eater of the food Light is the food, (in relation to it) air is the eater of the food Air is the food, (in relation to it) ether is the eater
01 the food Ether is the food, (m relation to it) the organs of perception and of action are the eater of the food, the organs of perception and of action are the food, m relation to them, mmdis the eater of the food Mmd is the food, (m relation to it) understanding is the eater of the food Understanding is the S X re rl atlon t0 xt ) the Unmanifested is the eater of the Imin<rw nm ^ lfested 15 the f00d ' < ln reIatlon to *) the
2 T V S the eater of the food The Imperishable is the Bh t J atl ° n t0 lt} Dcath 15 the eater °f the food Verily, 2 ™?T 0ne Wlththe Radlant Su P reme In ^e Supreme non e« s ?S er T f 1Ste " C ,f ™ T non - ex *tence, nor existence and
doctnne of the Veda This is the doctrine of the Veda "Hta? 6 ***** ° f the food ' the catlse m wIuch 14 is dissolved in
"^V^^^ ? elf t f aaas when 311 thin g s ^ negated. V Pnndple of negation, death is absorbed in the Supreme.
8go The Principal Upam$ads XV i
I etha hatnavi ratkuah papraccha, bhagavan, yo'yam mj- iiana-ghana iitkramam sa kena katarad va va sthdnam dahattii tasmai sa hovdca, yo'yam vipiana-ghana utkraman prdnam dahah, ap&nam, vyanam, uddnam, samanam, vairambham, mukhytm, antarydmam, prabhanjanam, kumaram, iyenam, helam, kr$nam, nagam dahali; prlhivy-dpas-tejO'Vdyv-dkdtdm dahah, jdgartiam, svapnam, sufuplam, turiyam ca mahatam ca lokam paratn ca lokam dahah; lokdlokam dahah; dharmddharmam dahah, abhas- karam, amaryadam, mralokam, atah param dahah, mahantam dahali, avyaktam dahah, aksaram dahah, mrlyum dahatt, mriyiir vat pare deve cki-bhavaliii parastan na san ndsan na sad asad ily dan mrvdnanuidsanam, ih veddnaidsanam th veddnuidsanam
I, Then (the sage) Raikva asked Venerable Sir, how and by what means does this (self) which is a mass of intelligence, after moving upwards (from this seat) burn away its seat? To him he replied thus: This self, after moving upwards, burns the prdna, the apana, the vydna, the tiddna, the samana, the vatrambha, the mtihhya, the antarydma, the prabhanjana, the kumSra, the toena, the iveta, the krsna and the mga (vital airs) It burns (the elements) earth, water, fire, air and ether It burns the waking, dreaming and sleeping states as also the Tunya, this mighty world and the other world it Ss the visible and the* invisible worlds It burns vutuous S^vicious conduct Thereafter it burns the wor U , toad ■£ lustre devoid of limit, devoid of appearance It burns the Sat taUva it bums the Unmamfested It burns ^the Imperah- able It burns Death Death becomes one with the radiant Seme In the Supreme there is neither existence nor non- tSEZ nor LteL and non-existence This * the , leading to liberation. This is the doctrine of the Veda Tins is the doctrine of the Veda
„^ fc—a tan $^£S5£S2SS£
journey after death
XVI i. Subala Upanisad 8gi
I saubdlabija brahmopamsan ndprasdntdya datavya n&- fitiraya nastsyaya ndsamvatsarardtrositdya napanjn&takulasi- laya datavya naiva ca pravaktavyd
yasya devepard bhaktir yathd deve taiha gurau, tasyaite kathita hy arthdh prakaianie mahatmmiah liy etan mrvananusasanam iti veddnusasanam th veddnusd- sanam
i This secret doctrine of the seedless Brahman owing its origin to Subala should not be imparted to anyone who has not attained composure of spirit, not to one who has no sons, not to one who has no disciples, nor to one who has not taken residence for one year at nights, nor to one whose family and character are not known This should not be imparted nor even mentioned to any such person. The subject-matter of this shines to advantage if imparted to the high-souled one whose devotion to the Supreme Being is profound and whose devotion to the teacher is as (profound as it is) to the Supreme This is the doctnne leading to liberation This is the doctrine of the Veda, fins is the doctrine of the Veda
JABALA vpanisad
The Jdbala Upamsad belongs to the Atharva Veda and discusses a few important questions regarding renunciation
2 Jabala Upamsad 895
1 brhaspatir uvaca yajnavalkyam yad anu kuruksetram devanam deva-yajanam sarvesam fihutdnam brahma-sadanam avimuktam vai kuruksetram devanam deva-yajanam sarvesam tilitttanam brahma-sadanam tasmadyatra kvacanagacchati tad eva manyeta tad. avimuktam eva, idam vat kuruksetram devanam ieoa-yajanam sarvesam bhutanam brahma-sadanam atra hijanioh pranesiitkramamanesu rudrah tarakam brahma vydcaste, yenasav amrtl bhutva.\ moksl bhavah, tasmdd avimuktam eva mseveta avimuktam na vmunced evam evaitad ydjnavalkya
1 Brhaspati said to Yajfiavalkya, Kuruksetra is for the gods, the resort of the gods and for all creatures it is the abode of Brahma Avmukta 1 is the kuruksetra which is for the gods the resort of the gods and for all creatures the abode of Brahma Therefore, wherever one may go, one should think of it as such. It is only avimukta It is kuruksetra which is for the gods, the resort of the gods, and for all creatures the abode of Brahma There when the lives of living creatures go upwards, Rudra teaches the taraka mantra By it they become immortal and are liberated Therefore meditate on avimukta Do not give up avimukta, Yajfiavalkya
2 atha hamam atnh papraccha ydjiiavalkyam, ya eso'nanto' v y<^ Shm taw, katham aham vyaniyam Ut. sa kovaca yajna- valkyah so'vimukta upasyo ya eso'nanto'vyakta atmd so'vimukte prausthiia iti so'vimuktah kasmin prahsthita iti varanayam *«syam camadhye pratislhita tti. ka vai varana ka ca nasiti, sanan ininya-krtan dosdn varayatih Una varana bJiavatitt,
«Z? IT 1 bhamm termor gkrdnasya ca yah sandhth sa w ayaurlokasyaparasya ca sandhr bhavatih, etad vai sandkim sSS brahma - mda upasaUi iti, so'vimukta updsya iti, ^muktampianamacasteyo vai tad evam vedeti Wfw uv Atn in 9 uired of Yajfiavalkya, 'How can I sard ft„ V ,1 s "^fc unmanifested?' Yajfiavalkya infafr medltate °n avimukta (for) the self which is
then Lmr^!T a ^ fested 18 «tabhshed in avimukta (Atri answer^ li ' \ w £, a V s established? (Yajfiavalkya
(Atninqu,r^ S m a ? hS 5- ed in m * middle of Varan& ^ Nm - answered? 2 } ♦ * 13 Varand ^ what is N ™ 7 {Yajfiavalkya organs it rtif^f comes ^ the famte don e by the sense called Varand, as it destroys all the evils done by » avimuktam sopsdktkam.
8g6 The Principal Vpamsads 4,
the sense organs it is called Nasi (Atn asked) What is their abode? (Yajnavalkya answered) It is the meeting-place of the eyebrows and the nose It is the meeting-place of the world of gods and (the world) beyond The same meeting-place, the knowers of Brahman worship as sandhyd So awmukta is to be meditated on. He who knows it gains the knowledge which makes for liberation
3 aiha hamam brahmacdrtna ucuh, him japyend'mrtatvam briihiti, sa hov&ca ydjiiavalkyah, satarudriyenety etdny eva ha va amrtasya namam, etair ha va amrio bliavalih, evam evaitad ydjiiavalkyah
3 Once students of sacred knowledge asked (Yajnavalkya) Can we gain life eternal by the repetition of formulas [manirasy Yajnavalkya said (in reply) By (meditation on) satarudriya which are the names of eternal life, one becomes immortal
4 atha hamam janako vaideho yajnavalkyam tipasametyo- vdca, bhagavan, samnyasam {ami) briihiti sa kovdca yajnavaJr kyah, brahmacaryam partsamdpya grhi bhavet, grhi bhutva vam bhavet, vani bhutvd pravrajet, yadt veiarathd brahmacaryad eva ■bravraiet, grhad va vandd va atha punar avrati va vrah va snaiako va asndiako voisanndgmko va yad ahar eva virajd M ahar eva pravrajet, taddhaike prajdpatydm eveshm kurvanK tad tt taihd na kurydd dgneyim eva kurydt agmr ha vai prartah Pranam eva MM karoti traidhataviydm eva htryat, etayaw trayo dhdtavo yad uta sattvam rajas lama ih ayam te yomr rivija yato jdtah prdnad arocathdh, tarn pranam 3«™W? arohathdno vardlvaya rayim, ity anena '"^^UitS esa ha va aener yonir yah prdnah pranam gaccha «™f& 1 ZldlhJgJidd inJdhrtya purvavad
vad agnm na virdei apsu jnhuydt, dpo vat ^ deoM sana ifyolZtdbhyo juhJi Jaheti f~^J^gEZ Jiavir andmayam moksamaitirah trayyaivam vadet,
YMavalka said After completes the iMe of » J™*^.
forest dweller Whether one has not completed the injunctions or completed the injunctions, whether he is a student or not, even if he has not completed the sacrificial ntes, on whatever day he has the spirit of renunciation, that very day let him renounce (and become a recluse) Some, indeed, perform the prajapatya sacrifice One need not do this but should only perform the fire sacrifice. Fire is life and one performs the life sacrifice thus (He makes the fire take the form of life, or merge into its original source, life) Then he should also perform the Iraidhatawya sacrifice. The three elements represent the three qualities saitva, rajas and tamos (which are to be burnt) He should inhale the fire (smoke) by uttering the following mantra (verse), '0 Fire, this life who is the source of your birth and from whom, having sprung forth you shone Knowing this you climb up to life and then make my wealth (spiritual wealth) increase ' He who is life is the source (material cause) of fire. 0 Fire, you assume the form of life, your source (As .for one who has not performed the fire sacrifice having taken the fire from the village (1 e any house m the vulage), he should inhale the fire as mentioned before If he is not able to get the nre, he should perform the sacrifice in the water For water represents all the gods So uttering this mantra 'I offer unto all the gods he should perform the sacrifice, he should take
Tfc ^ ^ S hee ' which cures all diseases
He should utter the pranava (which leads to release), which
S£? tail S2? d upon Even so 15 it - Revered
^ttZ&S^J* *— - - as
yAtZifi d *:? n smjan&n ******** ^
yon firavryeta httvattan sa maUpalaki bhavet VIII Cp also-
8g8 The Principal Upam?ads g
adhitya vtdhivad vedan pulrams cotpadya dhanitatah tstvd ca iakttto yajnair mam mokse ntvesayct 'Having studied the Vedas according to rule, having produced sons, m conformity with dharma, having performed sacrifices to the best of one's ability, let one set one's mmd on release ' anadhttya dwp vedan, anutpddya Mhatmafin, antstva caiva yajnais'ca moksam tcclian vrajaty adhah 'Any twice-born individual who desires release without having studied the Vedas, without having produced sons and without having offered sacrifices, goes down below ' These verses are quoted m Vacaspati's Bhdmatt, I i i
prana life Here it is not individual breath It is the siitratman, the soul or the material cause of the world
tndhdtavlya in this sacrifice three sacrificial cakes pttroddia, are used, representing the three gunas
5 atha hamam (drill papraccha yajnavalkyam prcchdtm M yaftiavalkya ayajnopavUi katham brahmana ift, sa hovdca yafiavalkyah, idam evdsya tad yajnopavitam ya atmapah prasyacamydyam vtdhih panvrajakdndm, virddhvdne va anaiakc va apdnt pravese va agm praveSe va maha-prasthane va, aiha vanvrad mvarnavasd mimdo'pangrahah Suctr adrohi bhatkjano brahna-bhuydya bhavatUi, yady aturah syan manasa vdcd sam- nyaset, esa pantM brahmana hdmmttas stenaiti samnyasi brahmavtd tiy evam evaisa bhagavan yafiavalkyah
<S Then Atn enquired of Yajnavalkya On being asked how one who does not wear the sacred thread can be (treated as) a Brahmana, Yajfiavalkya answered, this alone is the sacred thread of him that purifies himself by the offering and sipping water This is the procedure for becoming a recluse (For one who « weary of the world but not yet fit to become a rec use the followmg are prescribed), he »y^»glJJ (by following the path of the warnor m the battiefield), M rW fait unto death, throw himself into water or enter fire : (burn Smself to death) or perform the last journey (walk on unto £th Then the wandering ascetic who (puts on) orange Se? wno is shaven, who has non-possession SnSy Thves on alms, obtains the state of Brakimn If he is
toer oKL««, so said the venerable Yajnavalkya
6 Jabala Upamsad 899
It is first placed on the youth by the teacher at the ceremony of initiation It is the outward and visible symbol of the siUrdiman, the thread-spirit on which all the individual existences are strung like beads and by which all are inseparably linked to their source
Among the ancient Iranians as among the Parsees to this day, at the age of 15, a boy or a girl is admitted to the community of the Zoroastnans by being girt with the sacred thread
Stitrah diseased When one is about to die he may renounce by mind or speech It is unnecessary to go through the ceremonies This passage seems to justify suicide, in certain conditions.
6 tatra parama-hamsd nama samvartakdrum svetaketu durvasa rbhu mddgha jada-bharata datlatreya raivataka prabhrtayah, avyaUahngdh avyaktdcdrdh ammmatta unmattavad dcarantas tndandam kamandalum sikyam pdtram jalapavitram hkhdth ydjnopavitam ca tty etat sarvath bkusvdhety apsu panlyajy dtmdnam anvicchet yathdjatarupadharo mrgrantho nisparigrahas M-tad-brahma-mdYge samyak sampannah iuddlm-mdnasah prana- samdhdramrtham yathokta-kdle vimukh bhaiksam dcartm udara- patrena labkdldbhayoh sanw bhutvd iunydgdra-devagrha trna- kfda-vahnika-vrksamrda-kiildlasaldgmhotra-grha-nadTpuluia-giri kuhara-kandara-kotara-nirjhara-stMndtlesu tesv aniketa vasya- prayalno mrmamah sukladJiydnaparayano'dkydhna-nistho'stibha- kartna-nirmulanaparah samnydsena deha-tydgam karoti, sapara- ma-hamso-nama parama-hantso ndmeti.
6 Samvartaka, Aruni, Svetaketu, Durvasa, Rbhu, Nidagha, Jada-bharata, Dattatreya, Raivataka and others are para- mahamas They are of unmanifested natures, of unmamfested ways of life, seen (to others) to behave like mad men though they are m no way mad They renounce tridanda, kamandalu, tuft of hair and sacred thread and all that in water with the words bhu svahd and seek to know the Self Assuming the form they had at birth, without any bonds, without any possessions they must tread well the path of Brahman With a clean mind i% a ^ heart )' for the sake of maintaining life, theymust fill at axed times the vessel of their stomach with the aims obtained treating gam and loss as equal They must live in places like a deserted house or a temple or a shrub or an anthill, the root hdl c ^'K nl ?° tter ,' S ? 0USe ' fire P ,aoe ' a sa ^bank in a river, effort f 2\i ? W ?/ a tree ' Stream in a deserted P lace Without tL h^wfuf 1 " 5611561 mtent on medlta tion established m we Higher self, keen on removing the (effects of) evil deeds
FF*
The Principal Upanisads
they give up their bodies by the method of renunciation Such is a parama-hanisa. Such is a parama-hamsa
tn-danda monks carry three staves tied together It is the sip of tnple control of thoughts, words and deeds kamanddu a \vater-]ar used by ascetics
The knower of dharma who wears no signs should practise its principles MB XIV 46 51
Vastsiha Smrh says 'His signs are not manifest nor his behaviour, tasmad ahngo dhamajfw'vyaktahngo'vyahtacara ttt
This Upamsad belongs to the Snkla Yajur Veda and is in the form of a dialogue between Yajfiavalkya and his pupil Pamgala Some of the important questions such as meditation on the Supreme, the nature of release, are discussed m it
Paingala Upanisad
1. atha ha paitigalo ydjiiavalkyam upasametya dvadasavarsa- iuiriisapuroakam paratnardhasyam kaivalyam anubrithiti pap- raccka
1 Then Paingala approaching Yajnavalkya, after duly serving him for twelve years, asked, 'Do tell us about the great secret of aloneness.'
then after the required ethical preparation paingala- the son of Pingala.
2. sa hovaca yajnavalkyah sad eva saumyedam agra astt. tar. mtya-tnukiam, avikriyam, saiyajMnanandam,panpurnam, sana- tanam, ekam evadvitiyam brahma.
2 Yajnavalkya replied to him: 'At the begiiinrng, all this, my dear, was being alone. That is Brahman, the ever free, ^determinate, of the nature of truth, knowledge and bliss, ever full, ancient (or eternal) one without a second.
sad being, with the names and forms unmanifest.
3 tasmin maru-iuhtika-sthanu-sphatiMdaii jala-raupya-punt- sa-rekhddtval lohita-sukla-krsna-guna-mayi gima-samydnirvacya mulaprakrfir dsTi, tat fratibimbitam yat tat saksi-caitanyam astt.
3 Even as in the mirage, the pearl-oyster, a log of wood, a piece of crystal and the like there is (respectively) the mani- festation of water, silver, the figure of a human bemg, streaks ot light and the like, in that (pure being) is the root-principle 0 all objectivity, possessed of the qualities of red, white and wacK, with the qualities in equipoise and incapable of being adequately expressed. When this is reflected in Brahman, it oecomes the witness self
eternal becomes the witnessing consciousness, the
sSt dS 3eCt - f ^ Ce i b y the of ^ objectivity. The Pure
bpmt develops mto the subject-object relationship.
refliLrS/ 111 ? 1 ^ m l gest ^P^^ character of the t!0a - 1116 PO"* stressed is that this development does not
j j Paingala Upanisad 905
6 hranya-gariMdhisthita-vihsepa-saktitas tamo-driHakawka- rabhtdha sthfila-iaHir dstt, fat-pratibimbitam yat tad lirdt caitar.- yam astt. sa tad-abhtmdnT spasfa-vapuh sarva-sihtda-pdlako msnuh pradhdna-puruso bhavaii. tasmad Stmana aHsah sambku- tak, dkdsdd vdyuh, vayar agnih, agner apah, adbhyah p/ihivT, id'rA paTica-tanmdtrani trigundni bhavanti.
6. From the power of projection dwelling in Eiranya-garbha there comes into being the power of making gross bodies, known as the self-sense. What is reflected in it becomes the Virat consciousness That (Virat consciousness), conceiving the self-sense as its own, with its form manifested distinctly becomes the chief person Visnu, the sustainer of all gross creation From that (Virat) self ether originates; from ether air, from air fire, from fire water, from water earth; these five subtile elements become the three qualities {saliva, rajas and tamas).
SeeTU.II 1.3
In these passages the nature of the Supreme Reality is mentioned Brahman which transcends the distinction of subject and object. Others are conceived on the subject-object pattern. Witness self has confronting it mfda-prakrti, Isvara, avyafrta; HnaKya-garbka, makat; Virat, ahamkara. All these are necessary for one another. Witness Self and Isvara are sometimes combined. See Ma. U.
7. srastti-kdtno jagad-yonis iamo-gimam adhistkaya suksfna- ianmdlrdm bhutdm sthiiltkarttm so kdmayata. srstek parimitdrA bhutdhy ekam ekam dvidhd vidhdya punas caturdhd krivd svasidaradviliydthsaih pahcadhd samyojya pandkrta-bhutair WMtia-Mi-brahmdndani-M-tad-andoti^ i^-iad-bhtvanocita-golaka-stkida-sarirdny asrjat.
7 He (the creator of the world) desirous of creating, embracing the quality of tamas (inertia) desired to change the subtile elements into gross ones. Dividing each of the elements measured at the time of creation into two and again sub- dividing each (first equal part) into four equal parts each and Baxmg each of the four subdivided equal parts with each of the |our (second) equal parts of the other four elements and thus loimuig fii e heaps (of five sorts each); out of the elements uius qmntuphcated he created many crores of brahmandas
9° 6 The Principal Vpamsais r Ir
(macrocosms), fourteen worlds appropriate to ««* / * A '
essst globular 33 ^~^ii h ?of
The process of qumtuphcation, ^fcrWa, is mentioned here
8 Dividing the mobile property of the five elements with
I^Tt, ltS five ? W functlons 0ut of the fourth part he created the organs of action v
As uiertia is the character of tamos, mobility is the character of
9 sa tesdm saUvamiam caturdhd krtva bkdga-tmya-samastttah panca-knyd-vrttydtmakam antah-kartmam astyat sa tesam sattva- tunya-bMgma jMnendnyany asrjat
9 Dividing the rhythmic property (of the five elements) into four parts, out of the totality of the three parts thereof he created the inner sense with its fivefold functions Out of the fourth part of the rhythmic property he created the organs of perception
10 sattva-samashta indrtyapalakan asrjat tarn srsidny ande prdciksipat tai-ajnayd samastyandam vyapya tuny aii$ihm tad affiayahamkara-samanwto virad sthuldny araksat hranya- garbhas tadr&jnayd suksmany apdlayai
10 Out of the totality of the rhythm he created the organs of the sense organs He then cast them into the macrocosm Under his orders they stood pervading the entire macrocosm Under his orders the Virit possessed of self-sense protected the gross elements Under his orders Hiranya-garbka ruled over the subtile elements
11 atidasthdm (dm tern vmd spanditwm cestitum vd na sekuh tint cetamkarlttm so'Mmayata, brakmdnda brahmarw- dhram samasta-vyash-mastakiin viddrya tad evdnupramiat taddjaddny apt t&ni cetanavat svakarmani caknre
ii They (the gross and the subtile elements and the products of the macrocosm) were not capable of moving or functioning without him He desired to make them all conscious (sentient) Piercing through the macrocosm and the caverns of the cranium
I X2 Pavngala Upamsad 907
of the individual souls, situated m their crests, he entered them all. Then they, though nonconscious by nature, were engaged in their respective functions, as if they were endowed with consciousness
12 sarvapteio maya-le$a-samanwto vya$h-deliampravisya taya mohto pvatvam agamat ianra-traya-tadatmyat kartrtva-bhoktr- tvatam agamat, jagrat-svapna-susuph-murcha-tiiarana-dharma- yukto ghatt-yantravad udvignojato mrta iva kulala-cakra-nyayena panbhramatitt
iz The Omniscient lord possessed of a particle of maya, on entering the several bodies and getting deluded by it attained the state of the individual soul By identification with the three bodies (gross, subtle and causal) he attained the state of the doer and. the enjoyer, ever performing the functions of waking, dreaming, sleeping, fainting and dying, he twirls round and round, like a potter's wheel, as if dead though alive, m keeping with the adage relating to the potter's wheel
mfiya-kia. particle of maya Cp Bhagavata holding on his own person maya as a garland of flowers
svamayam vananuUakhyam nana-guna-mayim dadJiat The potter's wheel seems to be still while whirling aud whirling while still. Subjection to the world is only seeming, due to false identification of the spmt with the body and its adjuncts This is Advaita Vedanta
9° 8 The Principal Upamsads Uz
ty-anMri vtbhur m katkam pvatvam agamai th
TonT^ a1 ? amgal ! ^ Ya J fia ™%* thus 'Ho* does the Lord the aU-pemding, the cause of the creation, maintenance
2. s« hovacayqiiavalkyah, sthuk-sukma-kafana-dehodbhava- purvakam pvesvam-svarupam vivicya kathayamih savadhanen- aikagrataya iruyatam ttah pa&clkrta-inaka-bhuta-kfdn dddya vyash-samastyatmakfrsthiUar-sarirani yathakramam akarot kapa- Icwarmdntrastk-mamsa-mkham prtfavy-amsak, rakta-mutra-Ma- ivedaitikam ab-amsah, ksut-trsnosm-moha-maidhmiadya am$ak,pracdrano(tarana-masadikavayv-ai^ vyomamsah dot samgkatam, karmam saiiatam, tvagadt-yitktam, balyady <matfhabhimanfcpadam,bahw-dosairayam, sthula-satfratn bhavah
2 Yajfiavalkya replied to him thus I shall relate the character of the individual soul and the Divine m distinction from each other preceded by an account of the origin of the gross, subtle and causal bodies Let it be listened to by you with attention and one-pointed mind The Lord, after getting together the minute parts of the quintuplicated great elements, created in order, gross bodies in their individual and collective aspects The skull, the skin, the intestines, the bones, the flesh and the nails are parts (of the character) of the earth Blood, unne, saliva, sweat and the like are of the character of water Hunger, thirst, (bodily) heat, swooning, sex impulse and the like are of the character of fire Movement, lifting, breathing and the like are of the character of air Lust, anger and the like are of the character of ether The combination of these becomes the gross body, organised by (under the influence of) previous karma, provided with the skin and the like, affording the basis for the notion that the stages of infancy and the like belong to it and forming the haunt of various ailments
dosa' evil Evils of the gross body are ailments
II 4 Pamgala Upanisad 909
3 athdpmmkrta-imhd-bhuta-ra]o'msa-bhdga4raya-saniasittah pranam asrjat, prdnapdna-vydnoddna-samdndh prdnavrttayah naga-kurma-krkara-devadatta-dhanamjayd-upaprdndh, hrddsa- na-nabh-kantha-sarvdiigdm sthdnant, dkdiddv-rajo-guna-turiya- bhagem kannendnydm asrjat, vak-pdni-pada-pdyupasthds tad vritayah, vacandddna-gamana-visargdnandds tad-msaydh
3 Then out of the three parts (of four) of the great elements in their mobile character and nonquintuphcated state he created the life principle. Pram, apdna, vydna, uddna and samana are the (varied) functions of the life principle The minor functions of these are Ndga, Kiirma, Krkara, Devadatta and Dhanamjaya The heart, the anus, the navel, the throat and all the limbs form the seats (of the vital airs) Out of the (remaining) fourth part of the ether and other elements in their mobile character he created the organs of action Its variants are the vocal organ, the hands, the feet, the excretory and the generative organs Their functions are articulate expression, grasping, movement, excretion and (sex) enjoyment
4 evam bhuta-saUvdtnsa-bhdga-traya-samashto'ntah-karanafn asrjst, antah-kamiw-niano-buddhi-ciMhamkdrds tad-vrttayah, samkaipji-ntscaya'smarandbhimdnamtsamdhdnds tad-visaydk; ^fwaana-nmii-hrdaya-bhrn-madhyamsthdnam, bhuta-sattva- u ^-ohagmaplanendnyamasr]at,srotra-tvak-caksw
«as iad-vritayah, iabda-sparsa-rupa-iasa-gandhds tad-visaydh, H-^arka-praceto'svi-vahmndropendra-mrtyuMh f candro-vis- mwaiurvaktrah sambhus ca kdravadlnp&h
4 In the same manner out of the totality of the thiee parts fi 7 peat eIemen *s m their rhythmic character, he created m Jr T T S< T Its vanous forms (° r modifications) are the Sn^" 8 !' ™ mmd ' under standing, thought and self-sense ib tl0 V° n ^ ctl0n " mem °ry. love and dedication are the2w + I he th l r0at ' the face - ^ navel, the heart and of t£ S! + , the evebrows are the seats Out of the fourth part the orS T™ 611 * 8 m their rh yU"i»cal character, he created sVbXS« Its varied forms are the ears, the
touch sS \ =S t0ngU f, md the nose (Perceptions of) sound, Sim VS t f \ Ste ' A sme11 aie ^ functions Direction, Air, the fo°o» , L ms ' Flre ' Indra < Upendra, Death, the
Pna^iS 6 fourfaced Br ahma and Siva are the deities «"«g over the inner senses
91° The Pnncipal Upamsads II 7
5 athannamaya prdna-maya-mano-maya-vijmna-maydnanda- maydh pancakosdh, attmrasenaiva bhutvdnnarasendbhtvrddkm prapyanna-rasa-maya-prthivyamyad mliyate so'nna-maya-kodah, tad eva sthiila-iariram kamendnyaih saha praqa&i-paficakam prana-maya-koiah, jUanendnyaih saha mam mano-maya-kosah, jnanendnyath saha btddhirvqMna-maya-hoiah, etatkoia-trayam hnga-iarfram, svarupa-jMnam ananda-maya-kosas tat karana- sariram
5 Then the five sheaths made of food, vital air, mind, understanding and bliss What is brought into being only by the essence of food, what grows only by the essence of food, that which finds rest in earth full of the essence of food, that is the sheath made of food That alone is the gross body The five vital airs, along with the organ of action constitute the sheath made of the vital principle Mmd along with the organs of perception is the sheath made of mmd The understanding along with the organs of perception is the sheath made of intelligence These three sheaths (of life, mmd and intelligence) form the subtle body The knowledge of one's own form is of the sheath made of bliss That is also the causal body
See T U II and III
6 atha manendrtya-pancakam, karmendnya-pancakam.prana- dt-pancakam, viyadadvpancakam, antah-karana-catustayam kama-karma-tamamsy astapuram
6 Then the five organs of perception, the five organs 1 ot action, thefive vital airs, breath and others the ^element , ether and others, desire, action ^^i^Ltt they constitute astapura (the totality of the subtle body)
7 m**t& mraio vyasUdeham pravisya buddhm
adhisthava ■ tatjasatvam agamat tayasah prahbhasikak mp 1S$S \u Uasasyandma bhavalt ijjgjj ZyaMa^mannto vyU-Urana-iamam pramsya pra^vM Zamat Wtfo'vacchmnah pdramdrthtkah susupty
jl 8 Paifigala Upanisad 911
cmtanyam yat tad evdvasthatrayabhag bhavati sa jagrat-svapna- susupty-avasthah prapya ghati-yantravad udvtgno jdto mrta iva sthtto bhavati aihajagraUsvapna-msuptiwurcMwarandvasthah panca bkavantt
7 By the command of the Supreme Lord, after entering each individual gross body and abiding in the intellect, he (Virddatman) attained the Vtiva state. The intellectual self reflecting consciousness is the Vi&oa that has pragmatic relations with and conceives of the waking state and the gross body as its own The field of action is the name of the Vtsva state At the command of the Supreme Lord, the subtle self, after entering each individual subtle body and abiding in the mind attained the Tayasa state The Taijasa state is what manifests itself m the world of appearances The product of dreams is the name of the Taijasa state. By the command of the Supreme Lord, the self conditioned by maya. and along with the {principle of) unmamfested, after entenng each separate body attained the Pr&jna state The Prapia state is non-differentiated from and (in quest of) the highest truth That which conceives of the sleeping state as its own is the name of the PrajHa state The Vedic texts 'That thou art' and the like sing about the identity with the Supreme of the individual soul that is (m quest of) the highest end and shrouded by ignorance and traces of the (principle of) unmanifested, which is unrelated to the empirical and the apparent worlds It is only the consciousness reflected in the inner sense that is capable of attaining the three states (of waking, dream and sleep) After attaining these states of waking, dream and sleep, becoming distracted like a potter's wheel, he becomes, though alive, dead as it were Ihen there are the states of waking, dreaming, sleeping, tainting and dying, five in number
This passage assumes the Advaita Vedanta view of the three graaes of reality, paramarthika, vydvahanka and pratibhastka, metaphysical or ultimate, empirical and illusory respectively
fo a l?~ tad ~ devaMgrahAnmm h srotrddi-jMnendriyaih sabdd- bhrT % sa y a -S raka »«?fi«nam jagrad avasthd bhavati tatra akkXT -l l8aiojiva ^-pada-mastakam vydpya krsi-sravanady iaZ t & m bhavaU tat-tad~phalabhuk ca bhavati lokdn- % m kar >narjita-phalam sa ma bhunkte sa sdrvabhaumavad
9 12 The Principal Upam$ads n 9
vyavaharacchranta antar-bhavanam pravestum margam dfritya titfhali karanoparame jagrai-samkiroUha-prabodhavad grahya- grahaka-rupa-sphuranam svapndvastkd bhavati, tatra miva eva. jdgrad vyavaMra-lopan nadwnadhyarn caroms taijasatvam avapya vasana-riipakam jagad-vaicitryam svabhasa bhasayan yathepsttam svayam bhttnkte
8. The state of waking consists in the knowledge acquired through the perception of sound and other objects by means of the organs of perception like the ear and others accompanied by the blessings of the respective deities (presiding over the different forms of perception) Therein the individual soul who has established himself m the middle of the eyebrows, after pervading (the entire body) from head to foot, becomes the doer of all actions like husbandry, study of the sacred books He becomes the enjoyer of their respective fruits On reaching another world he alone enjoys the fruit He then stands like an emperor overcome with fatigue, on account of bis activities having taken the path leading to the entry into (another) body. When the sense organ has come to rest (ceased to function) the knowledge of the percepts and perceptions arising out of impressions (left by) of the waking state is the dream state Therein, owing to the cessation of active functioning such as we have m the waking state, Visva alone, after attaining the Taijasa state, moves through the middle of the naMs, mani- festing through his own power the variety of the world m the form of impressions, and himself enjoys as he desires
state of ignorance, enjoys his own bliss
of sleep though it is not manifest.
10. As if struck unawares by a hammer or a club, mani- festing itself as tremor due to fnght or loss of consciousness, caused by the fusing together of the several organs of percep- tion is the state of fainting which resembles the state of a dead man
11. jdgrat-svapna-susupit-mfirchavastha?ia)n anya brahnad- tstamba-paryantam sana-jiva-bhaya-pradd sthiila-deJiavisarjani maranavasthd bhavah. karmendrsydm jMnmdnyani tai-tad-vis- ayan pranan sairhtya kama-karmanvita avidya-bhulavestito jivo dcltantaram prapya loktintaram gacchaii. prak karma-phdLa- pakcnavartantara-ktlavad tisrantim naiva gacchati satkarma- paripdkato bahtlnam jamnanam ante nrnam moksccchd jdyate
11. What is different from the waking, dreaming, sleeping and fainting states, w hat instils fear into {the hearts of) all living creatures from Brahma (the creator) to a tuft of grass, what causes the giving up of the gross body, that is the state of dying After drawing together the organs of action and the organs of perception, their respective functions and the vital airs, the soul attended with desire and conduct (m the form of impressions left by conduct) and wrapped up m elements of ignorance goes to another world after attaining another body. Through the npentng of the fruits of his past actions he does not attain any rest, like a worm caught within a whirlpool The desire for liberation arises in human beings at the end of many births through the ripening of their past virtuous conduct Sec BG VII 19
12 tads sad-garum asnlya ctra-ldla-scvaya bandkam moksam hasctl prayaft axicarakrto bandho vtc&ran mokso bhavalt. lastr.at sada vuarayd adlySropSpavadatah svaniparn niscayttartwii
m"d-bhava-badhc pralyag abh-.nnam brahmnvdvaStsyata ,ti
12 Then after resorting to a good teacher and serving him for a long tunc he questions him as to the nature of bondage and release Bondage produced by the lack of inv cstigatm
914 The Pnnctj>al Upam$ads II 12.
becomes release by (proper) investigation Therefore one should always inquire It is possible to determine the nature of the self through the way of super-imposition (of qualities that do not belong to it) and denial Therefore one should always inquire into the nature of the world, the individual and the supreme self With the denial of the (ultimate) reality of the soul and the world, the innermost self non-differentiated from Brahman alone remains
The way of superposition and denial is developed by § in his Introduction to S B
Paingala Upanisad
MEDITATION AND HIGHEST ENLIGHTENMENT I. aihahainampaivgalahpapracchaydjn'avalkyam,ma}ta-vdkya~ vvuaranam amibruhiti
1 Then Paingala asked Yajftavalkya, please relate to me a detailed account of the great texts
2 sa hovaca yajnavalkyas tat tvam asi, tvam tad asi, tvam brahmdspadam brahmdsnnty anusandhdnam kttryat, tatra parok- sya-£abalahsarva}nalvddi-laksanomdyopddhhsac-ctd-dnanda-lak- sano jagad-yoms tad-pada-vdcyo bhaoah; sa evdntah-karana- sambhinnabodho'smdt praiyaydvalambanas tvam~pada-vdcyo bhavati, parajvvopddhwidydvidye vihdya tat-tvam-pada-laksyam pratyagabhinnam brahma; tattvamasity aham brahmdsmih vdk- ydrtha-vicirah iravanam bhavati, ekdntena iravandrthannsand- hanam mananam bhavati, sravana-manana-mrvicikitse'rthe vastuny ckaldnavattayd cetah sthapanam mdidhyasanam bhavati; dhydtrdhydne vihdya mvdtasthtta dtpavad dhyeyatkagocaram attain samddhir bhavah, taddnim dtma-gocardvHtayah samutthitd ajiidtd bhavantt, tah smarandd amimiyantc, ikdnddisamsdre samctidh karma-kofayo'nenaiva vtlayam ydnh, tato'bhydsapdtavdt sahasraiahsadd amrtadhdrd varsatt, tato yoga-viitamdh samadhim dharma-megham prdhuh, vdsand-jdle niMesam amund praviUtpxte karma-samcayc pwiya-pdpe samiilonmfdite prak paroksam apt kara-taldmalakavad vakyam aprati baddhdparoksa-saksdt-kdram prasuyate, tadd jivan-mukio bhavati.
2 Yajnavalkya replied to him One should engage in medi- tation of the kind "That thou art," 'Thou art the seat of Brahman ' 'I am Brahman ' Therein the imperceptible per- sonal Lord with the qualities of omniscience and others, endowed with the power of maya, of the character of being, consciousness and bliss, the source of the world is (what is connoted by) the word 'that' (of the te\t). That alone, being influenced by the inner sense, supported by the conception of self (I-conception) is (what is connoted by) the word *thou' (of the text) Giving up the power of maya and ignorance which envelop (the twof the supreme and the individual soul, what is meant by the terms 'that' and 'thou* becomes Brahman which is non- distmct from the self The investigation into the import of the
S£* * S° U art '' 1 Brahman 15 l"»nng Exclusive attention to the meaning of what is heard is reflection The
9*6 The Principal Upamsads HI 3
fixing of thought with one-pointed attention solely on the object attained through hearing and reflection is meditation The thought absorbed only m the object meditated upon, giving up the distinction of the meditator and the act of meditation resembling a lamp in a windless spot attains the highest enlightenment In that state, when the functionings directed towards the cognition of the self are roused {the intuitions of the self), are not cognised but only inferred from memory Through this the numberless previous karmas accumulated during this begmmngless cycle of births and deaths attain their dissolution Thence, through the power of practice, a stream of nectar showers always from a thousand directions Therefore the adepts in yoga call this highest enlightenment 'the cloud of virtue ' When the nets of dispositions (good and bad) are dissolved without any residue, when the accumulated deeds, virtuous and vicious, are completely destroyed, to the very roots, the past and the future alike, owing to the removal of all im- pediments bring about the direct and immediate perception (of Brahman) as of the amalaka fruit, on the palm of the hand Then (the knower of Brahman) becomes one liberated while m Me
iabalah mixed The Absolute is viewed as the personal lord with
mays or the power of manifestation Though sac-ad-ananda, he is
the source of the world, jagad-yom and
iravaw the four stages of hearing, reflection . meditation ^ and
dS mtuiton, alma-daHtma, here called W« are exrW
Ttetruths of the sacred texts are endorsed by pe^ e<iort mA
experience See Introduction XIX
a lam-b in a windless spot see B G VI 19
mSd from memory when the intuition is no more felt, when it
nature
* Xah Unci-krta-bhmnam apatid-karanam kartwn so'MM-
nahati, mahad avyaUe -ggJ^J p ara m-attnaM m* mmhranyaga^ara^
HI. 4 Paingda Upamsad 9 T 7
aikibhutva karana-rupatvam asadya tat-karanam kiltasthe pratyag- Mmant viltyate; visva-tayasa-prdpWi svasvopddhi-layal pratyag- aimam liyanle, andam pianagmna dagdham Mranaih saha param-atmam linam bhavah, taio brahmanah samahito bhiitva tai-ivam-padaikyam eva sadd kttryat, tato meghdpayai'msuman ivatmdvtrbkavatt, dhyaiva madhyasthamatmanam kalasantara-dl- pavad, angustha-malram almanam adhuma-jyoU-rupakam
3 Isvara developed the desire to disquintuplicate the qum- tuphcated elements After causing the macrocosms, the worlds comprised m them and other effects to recede into their (ante- cedent) causal form, after making into one the subtle body, the organs of actions, the life principles, the organs of per- ception and- the fourfold inner sense, and after merging all elements in the fivefold causal elements, he causes earth to dissolve in water, water in fire, fire m air, air m ether, ether in the self-sense, the self-sense in the great, the great in the unmamfested and the unraanifested m the self m due order. The Virat, the Hiranya-garbha and the Supreme Lord, owing to the dissolutions of their respective adjuncts, lapse into the Supreme Self The gross body composed of the qmntuphcated great elements, organised through the accumulated (past) karma, owing to the destruction of karma and the npenmg of the fruits of good karma, becoming oneAuththe subtle body, attaining the form of the causal body, causes the causal body to merge in the unchanging inner self The three states of Vi&a, Taijasa, Prapia, on account of the dissolution of their adjuncts merge in the inner self The microcosm being burnt (and purified) by the fire of knowledge becomes merged along with its causes in the Supreme Self Therefore let the Brahmana, after becoming possessed of self-control engage in meditation incessantly on the identity of That and Thou Thereafter, even as the sun shines with all his splendour on the dissipation of the clouds, the self manifests himself After meditating on the self seated in the middle (of the heart) like a lamp placed inside a vessel, of the si7e of a thumb and of the form of smokeless flame (the self manifests himself)
The order of imolution is the reverse of the order of evolution. The subordination of the world, world-soul and the Supreme Lord to the Ultimate Reahtj is suggested here The logical priority of hral.it an to these three is to be understood
4 prakasayantair. at tahsikam dhyaycl kutastham avyayam dhyayan r.iistc m'tr.ti catva casupter amrlcs iu yah
9*8 The Principal Upanifads m. &,
4. One should meditate on the unchanging, imperishable that is inside, manifesting (the diverse functions). The sage who is continuously engaged m meditation till he goes to sleep or is overtaken by death.
5. pvanmuktas sa vtjncyah sa dhanyah krta-krtyavan jivanmuktapadam tyaktva svadefie kdl'asdtkrte- viiafya deJia-mttktatvam pavano'span&atam tw.
5 He should be known as one liberated while alive (m this body}. He is blessed and is of fulfilled duties. After giving up the state of being liberated while alive, when the time arrives for his quitting the body, he enters on the state of disembodied liberation even as the air attains the state of non-movement
agandhavac ca yat an&dy anantam, mahatah param, ihruvam, tad eva ksydy amalam, nirantayam.
6 (He attains the state) that is devoid of sound, devoid of touch, devoid of forms, devoid of wasting, likewise devoid of taste, that is eternal, and devoid of smell, having neither beginning nor end, that transcends the Great, constant, that alone remains, which is flawless and free from ailing.
It is the supreme state which is negatively described, it is oneness with the transcendent Brcdman.
1 atha hainam paingalah papraccha yajnavalkyam, jMninah km karma ka ca sfltihr ttt sa hovdca yajnavalkyati; amamlvadi sampanno mumtekstir eka-vivtsati-hilam tarayatt; brahma-vin- maircna kulam ekottara-htam tarayatt.
almamm railimam vtddht sariram ratham eva ca buddhim tti s&rathim viddhi manah pragrakam eva ca. 1. Then the sage Paingala asked Yajfiavalkya. What is the (nature of) action of a knower? What is his condition? Yajfiavalkya replied unto him The seeker after liberation endowed with humility and other good qualities carries (safely) across (the ocean of worldly existence) twenty-one generations of his class The moment he becomes a knower of Brahman he carries across one hundred and one generations of his class. Know the self as the lord of the chariot and the body as verily, the chariot Know the intellect as the charioteer and the mind as, venly, the reins
See Katha 1. 111. 2 fi.
2 mdnyani hayan Shier visayams ie$u gocaran joftgamam mmSnam hrday&ni mamstnah
2 The senses, they say,' are the horses' and the objects {of the senses) the paths (they range over). The hearts of the knowers (of Brahman) are so many air chariots
Jj^t SCH) ? soaated J wl t»» *e body, the senses and the mind, the great sages declare, is the enjoyer. Therefore Narayam is actually established (as the self) & the hearts S all beings) The seeker after God, after becoming one SSid becomes the self of all beings 5 ° a '
4 prarabdha-karma-paryanfam ahnirmokavad vyavaharati cmdravac carafe del* sa muktai camketanah ^ avmamt
4 As long as his previously commenced karma remain* unspent he functus (very much) like the snake She s£S on He who has attained liberation, though possKsed nf t£ body, wanders about homeless hke tie moon [ol S sky)!
■SJ&S &**&Si kTO ^ed
920 The Principal Upani?ads ry g
5 tMhe Svapaca-grhe va tanum vihaya yah kaivalyam pranan avakttya yah kaivalyam
tarn pascad dtg-baltth huryad athava khananam caret pumsah pravrajawm proktaih netardya kaddcana
5, Casting off his body either m a place of pilgrimage or in the house of an eater of dog's flesh (the knower) attains alone- ness After scattering the vital airs he attains aloneness After (the knower has run the appointed course of life and dies) his body should be cast away as an offering to the cardinal points, or else it may be buried Only in the case of a male who is eligible for the order of monkhood is (burial) prescnbed, never for others.
dig-bali. food for appeasing the hunger of birds and the like.
6 No pollution (is to be observed by blood relations), no rituals connected with the funeral fire, no oblations (m the form of balls of cooked nee) nor offerings of water nor rituals on new moon and other days should be adopted for the (departed) mendicant who has become Brahman
7 dagdhasya dahanam ndsh pakvasya pacanam yaM
' mndgm-dagdha-dehasya na ca irdddham na ca hnya l Evenas there is no cooking of food that has already been cooked, there is no cremation of the body (of a knower) which Steady been burnt (m the fire of austerity For one whose Uil rSleSy been consumed by the foe of knowledge ^ there is no need for the performance of irdddha ceremonies or any other obsequies.
8 vdvaccopadht-paryantam tdvac chusrusayeigurwn, ' iuruvad mtru-bharydydm tat puiresu ca vartamm
R SoTonS
SU sons as he would with the teacher (himself).
IV II Paingala Upanisad 921
bhavali, jMndmrta-trpta-yogino na kirn at kartavyam ash, tad ash cen na,salaHva-vidbhavati.durastlto'pi na durastliahpindavarptah pmdavastho'pi pralyagaima saruavyapl bhavah, hrdayam mr- malam krtvd avtayitvapy anamayam aham eva sarvam ttt pasyet param sttkham
9 With a purified mind, with a purified consciousness, full of forbearance, andm the attitude 'I am he' full of forbearance, and when he gams the attitude 'I am he,' when the supreme self, the basis of all knowledge gets firmly fixed m the heart, when the body attains the state of quiescence then does the mind scin- tillating with the intellect become void of its functionmgs What is the use of milk to one satiated with nectar? Even so what is the use of the study of the Vedas for one who has perceived the Self? For the Yogm who is satisfied with the nectar of knowledge (of Biahman) there is nothing whatsoever that has yet to be achieved If there is anything (still to be achieved), he is not a knower of the truth Remaining aloof, yet not aloof, remaining m the body, yet not of the body, the innermost self, becomes the all-pervading {Brahman) After purifying the heart, thinking of Brahman the perfect (free from ailment), the Yogm should perceive that he is the all, the transcendent' the blissful '
10 yatha jalc jalam ksiptam, ksire kSram, ghrte ghrtam, avi{c$o bhavct tadvaj jlvatma paramalmanoh
10 As water poured into water, milk poured into milk, ghee into ghee becomes one without differentiation, even j>o the individual soul and the Supreme Self (become one).
AbSSlute Sdf* Uberatl0n is here ^e^ed *° 1» oneness with the
;/,!* ? el l c J* a ™} a tip** hnddhtr akhandakara-rupd yada iZf\, T brai »" a 1™>*S™« sarva-bandham mrdahct,
%£!z,S ake <oyam ™l
thZ ?' h ? *5 e b °, dy 15 ht (with the flamc of ) knowledge when
Star i?f Wth the fire of the knowledge of
brahman Then lie who has attained thp form of ih* c«u * 5 1
922 The Prtnapal Upam&ds ry, 17
non-dual form that resembles ether devoid of impurities like water that has flown into water Whines, nice
The state of bberation is described not as that of a fish in water but as that of a dewdrop in the sea Complete idenfaty ,sm JtSeT
12 dkaiavat suksmaimra dtmd na drsyate vayuvad antardtma sa bdhyam alhyantara micalaima jnanolkaya ■basvalt
cantaratma J
12. The self that has a subtle body like the ether, that self immanent in all beings is not seen like the air (That) self is motionless both outside and inside. The self immanent in all beings perceives with the torch of knowledge
13 yatra yatra mrto jnaniyena va kena mrtyuna yatha sarva-gatant vyorna tatra tatra layam gatah
13. Wheresoever the knower may die, whatever may be the manner of death, at that very place he becomes merged (in Brahman) even as the all-pervading ether
14 The knower who knows the self to be indissoluble, like the ether of the pot, reaches independence with the range of his knowledge (spreading) on all sides
As the ether in the pot gets dissolved m the all-pervading ether when the limitations are broken, even so the liberated individual is lost in the universal self
15 taped varsa-sahasrdni eka-pada-sthtto narah etasya dhydna-yogasya kalam narhati sodastm
15. A man may perform penance standing on one leg for a thousand years (yet his austerities) do not deserve a sixteenth part of the merit of concentrated meditation
The verse brings out the superiority of dhyana-yoga to iapas
16 One desires to know all about what constitutes know- ledge and what has to be known, but even if he should live fora thousand years he does not get to the end of the (study of the) scriptures
17 vimeyo'ksara tanmatro pmtam vdpi cancalam, vthaya iastra-jaUm yat satyam tad updsyatam.
17 What is to be known is the subtle imperishable existence while one's life is unsteady. (Therefore) giving up the network of scriptures (which are many and endless), let the truth be meditated on
18 ananta-karma saucam ca japo yajfias tathaiva ca tJrlha-yalrabhigamanam yavat tattvam na vmdah
18 (It is only) so long as the seeker does not attain know- ledge of the real that endless ceremonies, observances of purity, prayers, likewise performance of sacrifices, visits to places of pilgrimage (arc prescnbed by the scriptures)
AH these are not ends m themselves They are means to the realisation of the eternal
19 aham btahmeti myatam moksa helur mahatmanam dve padc bandha-moksaya na mameti mameh ca.
19. For the great souled, the surest way to liberation is the conviction that I am Brahman The two terms, what leads to bondage and what leads to liberation, are the sense of mmeness and the absence of the sense of mmeness
Selfishness or looking upon the body and the world as one's own as means to one's enjoyment causes bondage The realisation that the body and the world are external to the true self and the con- sequent universality of spirit lead to liberation
20 mameli badhyate jantur mmameh vimucyate
™ Sfr 1 ^ mm *™bhdve (bottom naivopalabhyale
absence of rt? mmeneSS the sovd 15 bound > wth the
nsS to 1 ? f*? "i mineness * 1S llberated the mind Eed! ^nation, the sense of duality is never
si. y^ yaly mwianxbhavas tada iai paramam padam
« the highest stSc Whereso ^er his mind goes there
22 Mra taira param brahma sanatra samavasthtfam
everywhere jLX?£S%? t *™>™ *eU
with his fisticuffs S Sher r™niT ,ented J 5y hun S er str *es
oO chaff (his hun J? s t h t ^ d 4 im « (any amount
924 The Principal Upamsais IV. 24
23. nakam brahmeti janaii tasya muktir na jdyate. ya etad ttpanisadam mtyam adhite so'gni-puto bhavati, sa vdyu-puto bhavati, sa adttya-piito bhavati, sa brahtna-puto bhavati, sa vis- nu-puto bhavati, sa rudra-piito bhavati, sa sarvesu tirthesu snato bhavati, sa sarvesu vedesv adhito bhavati, sa sarva-veda-vraia-car- yasucaritobhavati.tendiha^a-purditdndmrudrd^miaia-sahasrdm japtam phalani bhavanti, pranavdndm ayutam japtam bhavati, daia-purvandaioUardnpmdti,sapankh-pdmno bhavati,sa mahdn bhavati, brahmahatyd-surdpdna-svamasteya-gurutalpagamana-tal samyogypatakebhyah pitto bhavati.
tad visnoh paramam padam soda pasyanti surayah
diviva caksur dtatam.
23. For him who does not know 'I am Brahman,' liberation does not anse He who studies this Upanisad every day becomes hallowed as by fire; he becomes hallowed by air, he becomes hallowed by the sun; he becomes hallowed by Brahma; he becomes hallowed by Visnu; he becomes hallowed by Rudra He attains the merit of bathing in all the sacred waters He becomes accomplished in the study of all the Vedas. He becomes disciplined in the performance of all the vows prescribed m the Vedas. By him are attained the fruits resulting from a hundred thousand recitals of the lUhasas, the Puranas and the Rudras. By him has been repeated the syllable pranava {aum) myriads of times He sanctifies ten previous and ten future ^rations He sanctifies the rows of people with whom ta dines. He becomes a great-souled one He becomes feed torn the s ns of kilhng a Brahmana, drmking liquor, steahng gold, sharing Se bed with the teacher's wife and associating with those who have committed these sins. . ,
l5£» the highest state of Visnu (Ae all-pervader) which the s^es see constantly as the eye spreads towards the heaven
2<l tad vtprdso vipanyavo jagrvdmah samtndhaU * vLJyat paramam padam satyamUyupantsat
vSu This is the truth, (this is) the Upamsad
The Upanisad belongs to the Atharua Veda and is called Kaivalya Upanisad as its study and practice lead to the state of Kaivalya or aloneness.
adluhi bhagavan brahma-vidydm varisth&nt sadd sadbhih
seayamanam mgudkdm yayaaral sana-papam vyapohya pardtparam purusam
upailt vi&van.
1 Then Asvalayana approached the Venerable Lord Brahma and said Teach (me) , Venerable Sir, the knowledge of Brahman, supreme, sought constantly by the wise, bidden, that by which the knower is soon freed from impurities and attains the person greater than the great.
atha then, after having prepared himself for the acquisition of wisdom
yaya-yatha, as.
avehi,
na karmana na prajayd dhanena tyagenaike amrlatvam dnaitih
2 Brahma the grandsire said to him (Asvalayana) : Seek to know {Brahman) by faith, devotion, meditation and con- centration Not by work, not by offspring, or wealth; only by renunciation does one reach life eternal
vis ^ ar£na 1ldk * m n & ita ™ gtthdydm bibhrdjad dad yatayo
3 It is higher than heaven, shines in the cave of the heart, inosc who strive (for it) enter into it.
U brahma-ioktiju pardntakdh pardmrtdh parimucyanti sarvc ' ' J
f scct i cs . who ^ascertained well the meaning of the Z ™1 k ™ wled S e ' ^ve purified their natures Lough
a^rttSSST 1 * ^ (dweUing) in the «
See M.U. III 2 6.
928 The Principal Upamsads &
5. vwikta-deie ca sukhasanasthah iucth samagrivaiirah iarlrah. antyaSramasthali sakakndriyayi mrudhya bhaMya svagu- rum pranamya, 5. In a solitary place, seating oneself in an easy posture, with a pure heart, with the head, neck and body straight, in the last order of life, controlling all the senses, bowing with devotion to the teacher.
ttt the last order of life: atyaframasthah is another reading, 'having passed beyond all orders of life.*
6 hrt pundarikam vimjam vxitddham vidntya madhyt vtiaiam vifokam acmtyam, avyaktam, ananta-rupam, Smm, praiSntem, amrtam, brahma-yontm
6 Meditating on the lotus of the heart, devoid of passion and pure, in the centre of which is the pure, the sorrowless, fee inconceivable, the unmanifest, of infinite form, the blissful, the tranquil, the immortal, the source of Brahma.
Brahma is the creator, the world-spirit
xnraja devoid of passion or the quality of rajas.
7 tarn ddtmadhyMa-vthinam ekam vibhum ctd-anandam aru-
pant adbhutam .. umasahdyam paramesvaram prabhurh tnlocanam mta-
kardham praiantam -«...,,„„.„ dhyaiw mmtr gacchaU bhitta-yomm samasta-sakstm tarn-
7 Him^who^tdthout beginning, middle or end who is one, all-pervading, who is wisdom and bliss, who , is fcn*« wonderful, who has Uma as his companion the highest tag the ruler who is the three-eyed, who has a dark throat, wo
a* hrahmd sa iwah sendrah so'ksarah paramah svarai,
8 He is Brahma (the gj Kmself
i« flip moon.
14 Kaivdya Upanisad 929
9 sa eva sarvam yad bMtam yac ca bhaoyatn sanatanatn, jnatva tarn mrtyum atyett ndnyah panthd vimttktaye.
9 He is all, what has been and what shall be He is eternal.' By knowing him one conquers death There is no other way to liberation.
10. saroa-bhutastham atmanam sarva-bhiitdni catmam sampaiyan brahma paramam yah nanyena heitma 10. By seeing the self in all beings and all beings in the self one goes to Brahman, not by any other cause.
not by any other cause there is no other way to liberation.
11 atmanam aranim krtva pranavam cottararanim, jMna-ntrmathanabhyasat pasam dakah panditak.
11 Making one's body the lower firestick and the syllable aim the upper firestick, by the effort of kindling (the flame of) knowledge, the knower burns the bond (of ignorance).
SceSU I 14.
paiam- bond of ajiiana. V. pdpam He burns away the evil or the impurity.
12 sa eva mdyd-panmohitatmd ianram a&thaya karoti sarvam. stry-anna-pdnddt mcttra-bhogais sa eva jagrat parilrpiim eti.
re The same self veiled by maya attains a body and performs all work In the waking state he attains satisfaction by the varied en]oyments of women, food and drink
susuph-kdle sakale viline tamo'bhtbhfitas sukha-rupam eti 13- In the state of dream the self experiences happiness or sorrow m the worlds created by his own maya. In the state of
£S« S i, 6ep m Wbc ^ dl aan e s d ' sa PP«»r, overcome by darkness, he experiences happiness. y
See MS U
li&a-Iokc-v.jiva-loke
pK SSZ k ' idatt ya * ca 3lvas taias tu J* ta ' h sakalath
M t?ir^: a m y*»nin layam ydt
93° The Principal Vpanisads 20
14. Again, he (the individual jiva) on account of his con- nection with the deeds of his past hfe wakes up and sleeps He revels in the three states of consciousness (waking, dream and dreamless sleep) and from him all this varied world is bom. In him who is the support, who is the bliss, who is indi- visible wisdom are merged the three states of consciousness
The three bodies are the gross, the subtle and the causal ones
15 From him are bom life, mind and all the senses; skj, air, light, water and earth which is the support of all existence
16 He is the supreme Brahman, the self of all, the chief foundation of this world, subtler than the subtle, eternal That thou art; Thou art That
17 lagrat-soapna-SH^ipiy adi prapancam yat prakasale tad brahmaham itijiiatva sarva-banihath pramuoyate
17 The world which shines in the states of waking, dream and dreamless sleep, knowing that it is Brahman who I am, one is freed from all fetters.
Cp ayamatma brahma.
18 tnsu dhamasn yad bhogyam bhokia bhogai cayad bhavtt tebhyo wlaksa V ah sdk$t cinmairo'ham sadastvah
18 In the three states of consciousness whatever appears as the object of enjoyment, or the enjoyer or the enjoyment, " am different from them, the witness (thereof), pure conscious- ness, the eternal Stva
10 mayy eva sakalam jdiam, mayi sarvam P^ 1 ^'. 9 S sarvam layamyah.tad
xo From me all proceed, in me aU exist, and to me *u return That Brahman without a second am i.
SeeTU III.
20 anor anlydn aham eva tadvan maUn aham v*m *» asmt.
24 Kawalya Upanisad 93 1
20 I am subtler than the subtle, greater than the great. I am this manifold universe I am the ancient, the person I am the lord of golden hue I am Siva
21 apam-pado'ham acintya-iahtihpasyamy acaksuh sa srnomy
akarnah, . aham vy&namt viviUa-rupo m cash vetta, mama at
sadaham. .
21 I am without hands and feet, of inconceivable powers I see without eyes. I hear without ears I know (all) I am of one form None knows me I am always pure consciousness
22 vedatr anekatr aham eva vedyah, vedanta-krd veda-vid eva
cahaw
m ptmyapdpe mama nosh nasah, na janma dehetidnya- htddhir ash,
22 I am the One to be known through the many Vedas I am the maker of the Vedanta and the knower of the Vedas. Merit or dement I have none (do not affect me) There is no destruction for me, no birth or body, senses or intellect
23 na bhiimtr &po mama vahmr ash, na c&mlo me'sii na
cambaram ca,
evam viditva paramatma-rupam guhas'ayam mskalam adviliyam
samasla-saksim, sad-asad-vihtnam prayah suddham para- matma-rupam.
23. I have not earth, water, fire, air, ether Knowing the nature of the Supreme Self, dwelling in the cave of the heart, stainless without a second; the witness of all, free from (the duality of) existent and non-existent, he obtains the pure nature of the Supreme Self
24 yah htarttdriyam adhite'sogm-piito bhavati, sa vdyn-puto bhavalt, sa atma-puto bhavati, sa surapanat puto bhavati, sa brahtna-halydyah puto bhavati, sa suvarna-steyat puto bhavati, sa irtyahrtyat puto bhavati, tasviad avimuktam atnto bhavati, aiyasrami sarvada sakrd va japet
24 Whoever reads satarudriya (this Upanisad connected with it) becomes pure as fire, he becomes pure as air, he becomes purified from (the fault of) stealing gold; he becomes purified from (the fault of) drinking liquor, he becomes punned from (the fault of) murdenng a Brahrnana, he becomes punned from (the faults of) commission and omission. Therefore one should
932 The Principal Up unpads 25 .
strive to become freed (from these faults). He who has freed himself from the different orders of life should meditate (on this upamsad) constantly or occasionally.
25 anenapianam dpnott samdrdrnava-ndianam,
tasmdd evam vidtttuamam katvalyam padam asnuit kaivalyam padam aSnuie 25 He obtains this wisdom which destroys the ocean of births and deaths By knowing this he obtains the state of katvalya, he obtains the state of katvalya.
Anyone who by faith, devotion and meditation realises the Self and becomes one with the Supreme Brahman is released from the wheel of time -and change, from sorrow, birth and death
The Upanisad belonp to the Sama Veda and describes the true character of a Brahmana and incidentally offers comments on the nature of the Supreme Reality. The Upanisad is valuable in that it undermines caste distinctions based on birth.
i vajrasftcim pravaksydmi jndnam aptana-bliedanam ddsanam ptana-hmanam bhusanam jndna-cakstisdm.
1 I shall describe the Vajrasuci doctrine which blasts ignorance, condemns those who are devoid of the knowledge (of Brahman) and exalts those endowed with the eye of knowledge
jRanam doctrine V 'iastra' scripture
2 brahmana-ksatnya-vaiiya-iudra iti catvaro varndh; tesam varnanam brahmana eva pradkdna tit veda-vacanannrupam mrttbhir apy iiktam tatra codyam ash. ko va brdhmano nama? ktmjivaP km dehalP kvmjatili> kim jndnam? kim karma? kim dhdrmika iti
2. The Brahmana the Ksatriya, the Vaisya and the Sudra are the four classes (castes). That the Brahmana is the chief among these classes is m accord with the Vedic texts and is affirmed by the Smrits In this connection there is a point worthy of investigation Who is, venly, the Brahmana? Is he the individual soul' Is he the body' Is he the class based on birth' Is he the knowledge' Is he the deeds (previous, present or prospective)' Is he the performer of the ntes?
3 tatra prathamo jivo brahmana ttt eel tan na, atitanaga- taneka-dehdn&mfivasyaikarupatvdt ekasyapi karma-vasdd aneka- dcha-sambhavdt sarva-ianrandm pvasyatkarupatvdc ca, tasman napvo brahmana itt
% 3 Of these, if the first (position) that the Jiva or the individual soul is Brahmana (is to be assumed), it is not so; for the individual's form is one and the same in the large number 0f J prc Y 10us mi prospective bodies Even though the jiva (the individual soul) is one, there is scope for (the assumption of) many bodies due to the stress of (past) karma, and in all these bodies the form of the jiva is one and the same. Therefore the jiva is not the Brahmana
4 iarhdeho brahmana Ui cet tan na acandaladi paryantdnam ^ a ^yammpanca-bha»tikatveimdehasyatkarupatvd ^harmadharmddi-sdmyadarsandt, brdhmanas toeta-vamah, W'nyorakla-wrnah, vaiSyah pita-varnah, sudrah krsna-vama tit
- P UrSd *-M>Me putrddindm brahma-halyddt-dosa- smUmaecc i.lasmdn nadeho brahmana iti 4 inen if (it is said) that the body is the Brahmana, it is
936 The Principal Upani$ais j,
not so, because of the oneness of the nature of the body which is composed of the five elements, m all classes of human beings down to the candalas (ontcastes), etc , on account of the per- ception of the common features of old age and death, virtue and vice, on account of the absence of any regularity (in the complexion of the four classes) that the Brahmana is of the white complexion, that the Ksatnya is of the red complexion, that the Vaisya is of the tawny complexion, that the Siidra is of the dark complexion and because of the liability of the sons and others (kinsmen) to becoming tainted with the murder of a Brahmana and other (sins) on cremating the bodies of their fathers and other kinsmen Therefore the body is not the Brahmana
5 tarhijatir brahmana ttt cet tan na, tatra jatyaittarajaittiw aneka-j&U-sambhava maharsayo bahavas satih, rsyairngo mrgyah hmiihah kuidt, jambuko jambukat, valmiho valmikat, vyasah kaivarta-kanyayam, iaiaprsthat gautamah, vasistha urvatyam, agastyah Mak jata ttt butatvat, etesam jalya vrnapy ogre piana-firatipfdM rsayo bahavas santi, tasman najaltr brahmana tii
5 Then (if it is said) that birth (makes) the Brahmana, it is not so, for there are many species among creatures, other than human, many sages are of diverse origin We hear from the sacred books "that Rsyasrnga was bona of a deer, Kanaka of Kusa grass, Jambuka from a jackal Valmto from an Vvasa from a fisher girl, Gautama from the back of a hare, vSha torn Orvasi (the celestial nymph), Agastya from an IShen ia? Among these, despite their birth, there are many S£ wio'h^ "taken the highest rank having given proof ofSir wfedom Therefore birth does not (make) a Brahmana.
6 tarh iMnam brahmana ih cet tan na; hatnyaiayo'H ^mhZiano-bhijM bahavas «*, **m na pmam
g Vajrasvcika Upanisad 937
preriidh sanio jandh knyah kurvantTti. tasman na karma brahmana ill
7. Then (if it is said) that work (makes a) Brahmana, it is not so, for we see that the work commenced in the present embodiment or accumulated during the previous or to com- mence on a future embodiment is common to all living creatures and that good men perform works impelled by their past karma Therefore work does not (make) a Brahmana
8 tarhi dharmtko brahmana iti eel tan na, ksatriyadayo hranya-dataro bahavas santi; tasman na dharmtko brahmana ih
8 Then (if it is said) that the performer of religious duties is a Brahmana, it is not so, for there have been many Ksatnyas and others who have given away gold Therefore the performer of religious rites is not the Brahmana.
Giving away gold is an act of religious duty
9 tarht ko va brdhmano noma? yah kasctd atmanam, advilTyam, jati-guna-kriyd-hinam, sadurmt-sadbhdvetyadi-saroa-dosa-rahiiam, satya-jndndnanddnanta-svarripam, svayam, nirvikalpam, asesa- kalpddharam, aiesa-bhiiidntaryamitvena vartamdnam, aniar-ba- hUc-dkdsavad anttsyutam, akliandananda-svabMvam, aprameyam, anubhavaikavedyam, aparoksatayabhasamanam, karatalamala- kavat sdksdl aparoksikrtya krtarthataya kama-vagadi-dosa-rahttah samddt-guna sampanno bhava^ndtsarya-trsndsd-mohadi-rahitah dambhdhamkdrddibhir asamsprslaceta vartate, evam ukta-laksano yah sa eva brahmana th iruti-smrli-puranetihasanam abhtprayah; anyathabrdhmanatva-siddhir nasty eva sac-ctd-anandamdlmanam, admtiyam, brahma bhdvayet, atmanam, adviltyam, brahma bhdvayed ity upanisad
9 Then, who, venly is the Brahmana 5 He who, after directly perceiving, like the amalaka fruit m the palm of one's hand, the Self, without a second, devoid of distinctions of b'irth, attribute and action, devoid of all faults such as the six infirmities, and the six states, of the form of truth, wisdom, b * iss and eternity, that is by itself, devoid of determinations, the basis of endless determinations, who functions as the indwelling spirit of all beings, who pervades the interior and the exterior of all like ether, of the nature of bliss, ^divisible, immeasurable, realisable only through one's experience and who manifests himself directly (as one's self), and through the hilnlment of his nature, becomes rid of the faults of desire,
93 8 The Principal Upanisads g
^ a( ^?^ etC / f" d !l dmeA ^ uallties of tranquillity, etc., nd of the states of being, spite, greed, expectation, bewit derment etc with his mmd unaffected by ostentation, self- sense and the like, he lives He alone who is possessed of these qualities is the Brahmana This is the view of the Vedic texts and tradition, ancient lore and history. The accomplishment of the state of the Brahmana is otherwise impossible. Meditate on Brahman, the Self who is being, consciousness and bliss, without a second, meditate on Brahman, the Self who is being, consciousness and bliss without a second This is the Upanisad'.
stx infirmities old age, death, sorrow, delusion, hunger and thirst stx states birth, being, growth, change, waning and perishing
Many texts declare that the determining factor of caste is char- acter and conduct and not birth.
irnn yaksa kulam tola na svadhydyo na ca srutam haranam va dvtjatve ca vritam eva ma samsayah Listen about caste, Yaksa dear, not study, not learning is the cause of rebornness. Conduct is the basis, there is no doubt about it M.B. Aranya-parva 312 106
satyam, danam, ksatnd, Mam anriamsyam tapoghfna dfSyante yatra nagendra sa brahmana tti smrtih. 0 King of serpents, he in whom are manifest truthfulness, chanty, forbearance, good conduct, non-injury, austerity and compassion is a Brahmana according to the sacred tradition.
yatraital laksyaie sarpa vrttam sa brahmanas smrtah, yatrattan na bhavet saniam torn ifcdram ttt mrdiiet 0 serpent he in whom this conduct is manifest is a Brahmana, he in whom this is absent treat all such as Sudra M B Aranya-parva 180. 20, 27. The gods consider him a Brahmana (aknowerof Brahman who has no desires, who undertakes no work, who does not salute or praise anybody, whose work has been exhausted but who himself is unchanged
mraUsam anarambJtam mrnamaskaram astuhm aksinam ksinakarmanam tarn deva braJtmanam vtduh
See DUmmapada, Chapter XXVI
Sanatsujata defines a Brahmana as one who is devoted to trutn. sa eva satydnnapaitt sa pieyo brahmanas tvaya
It is valuable to recall the teaching of this Upanisad which repudiates the system that consecrates inequalities and hardens contingent differences into inviolable divisions
Appendix A 939
FOREWORD By Rabindranath Tagoke to The Philosophy of the JJpanisads
Not being a scholar or a student of philosophy, I do not feel justified m writing a critical appreciation of a book dealing with the philosophy of the Upanisads What I venture to do is to express my satisfaction at the fact that ray fnend, Professor Radhaknshnan, has undertaken to explain the spirit of the Upanisads to English readers
It is not enough that one should know the meaning of the words and the grammar of the Sanskrit texts in order to realize the deeper significance of the utterances that have come to us across centuries of vast changes, both of the inner as well as the external conditions of life Once the language in which these were written was living, and therefore the words con- tamed m them had their full context in the life of the people of that period, who spoke them Divested of that vital atmo- sphere, a large part of the language of these great texts offers to us merely its philological structure and not life's subtle gesture which can express through suggestion all that is ineffable.
Suggestion can neither have fixed rules of grammar nor the rigid definition of the lexicon so easily available to the scholar Suggestion has its unanalysable code which finds its depth of explanation m the living hearts of the people who use it Code words philologically treated appear childish, and one must know that all those experiences which are not realized through the path of reason, but immediately through an inner vision, must use some kind of code word for their expression. M poetry is full of such words, and therefore poems of one Janpage can never be properly translated into other languages, nay, not even re-spoken m the same language. •da* an 'l^totion let me refer to that stanza of Keats* uae to a Nightingale,' which ends with the following lines.—
The same that oft-times hath Charmed magic casements, opening on the foam Of perilous seas, in faery lands forlorn
JUL 'fef TS 8 ha J e their sy" 011 ^ ^ oar Bengali lan- P»ge But if through their help I try- to understand these
940 The Principal Upamsads
lines or express the idea contained in them, the result would be contemptible Should I suffer from a sense of race superiority in our own people, and have a low opinion of English literature, I could do nothing better to support my case than literally to translate or to paraphrase in our own tongue all the best poems written in English
Unfortunately, the TJpanisads have met with such treatment in some parts of the West, and the result is typified disastrously in a book like Gough's Philosophy of the Upatmais My experience of philosophical writings being extremely meagre, I may be wrong when I say that this is the only philosophical discussion about the Upamsads in English, but, at any rate, the lack of sympathy and respect displayed in it for some of the most sacred words that have ever issued from the human mind, is amazing
Though, many of the symbolical expressions used in the Upamsads can hardly be understood to-day, or are sure to be wrongly interpreted, yet the messages contained in these, like some eternal source of light, still illumine and vitalize the religious mind of India They are not associated with any particular religion, but they have the breadth of a universal soil that can supply with living sap all religions which have any spiritual ideal hidden at their core, or apparent in their fruit and fohage Religions, which have their different standpoints, each claim them for their own support
This has been possible because the Upamsads are based not upon theological reasoning, but on experience of spiritual Me And life is not dogmatic, m it opposing forces are f ideas of non-duahsm and dualism, the infinite and the tote do not exclude each other Moreover the Upamsads do not reoresent the spiritual experience of any one great mdividuai, IToU gteafage of enhghtenment which has a complex ^ collective Manifestation, like that of the starry worid Meren Seeds may find their sustenance from them, but can never set s ^t3S boundaries round them, generations of men m out
Appendix A 94 1
abstraction, but it is concretely real for those who have the direct vision to see it Therefore the consciousness of the reality of Brahma has boldly been described to be as real as the consciousness of an amlaka fruit held m one's palm And the Upanisad says —
yato vaco ntvartantc aprapya maiiasd saha anandam biahmano vidvan na bibheh kadacana.
From Htm come back baffled both words and mmd But he who realizes the joy of Brahma ts free from fear
Cannot the same thing be said about light itself to men who may by some mischance live all through their life in an under- ground world cut off from the sun's raj's 7 They must know that words can never describe to them what light is, and mind, through its reasoning faculty, can never even understand how one must have a direct vision to re.ah.ze it intimately and be glad and free from fear
We often hear the complaint that the Brahma of the Upanisads is described to us mostly as a bundle of negations Are we not driven to take the same course ourselves when a blind man asks for a description of light? Have we not to say in such a case that light has neither sound, nor taste, nor form, nor weight, nor resistance, nor can it be known through any process of analysis' Of course it can be seen, but what is the use of saying this to one who has no eyes? He may take that statement on trust without understanding in the least what it means, or may altogether disbelieve it, even suspecting in us some abnormality.
Does the truth of the fact that a blind man has missed the perfect development of what should be normal about his eyes'ght depend for its proof upon the fact that a larger number of men are not blind' The very first creature which suddenly groped into the possession of its eyesight had the right to assert that light was a reality In the human world there may be very few who have their spiritual eyes open, but, in spite of the numerical preponderance of those who cannot see, their want of vision must not be cited as an e\ idence of the negation of light
In the Upanisads we find the note of certamU about the spiritual meaning of existence In the ver\ paradoxical nature of the assertion that we can never know Brahma, but can reahre Him, there lies the strength of conviction that comes
94 2 The Principal Upanisads
from personal experience. They aver that through our joy we know the reality that is infinite, for the test by which reality is apprehended is joy Therefore in the Upanisads satyam and anandam are one. Does not this idea harmonize with our everyday experience?
The self of mine that limits my truth within myself confines me to a narrow idea of my own personality When through some great experience I transcend this boundary I find joy. The negative fact of the vanishing of the fences of self has nothing in itself that is delightful But my joy proves that the disappearance of self brings me into touch with a great positive truth whose nature is infinitude My love makes me understand that I gain a great truth when I realize myself m others, and therefore I am glad. This has been thus expressed m the Isopanisad" —
yas lit sarvani bh&tani atmany evdmipcdyah sarvabhutesu catmanam tato na vijugupsale.
He who sees all creatures in himself, and himself in all creatures, no longer remains concealed.
His Truth is revealed m him when it comprehends Truth in others And we know that m such a case we are ready for the utmost self-sacrifice through abundance of love
It has been said by some that the element of personality has altogether been ignored in the Brahma of the Upanisads, and thus our own personality, according to them, finds no response m the Infinite Truth But then, what is the meaning of the exclamation 'Vedahametam ^«
JhlZa Z Zyuh parivyatMh. Know him, the Person •£ \Tto be k'nowi.so thai death may not gnm thee The ml ng zs obS We are afraid of death, because *e .are
^mortality. I quote •» ° {
Appendix A
esa daio mivakarma maJtatnia s'ada jananam hrdaye samms(ah hrda manisa manasabhtklpto ya dad vidw amjtas ie bhavantt
Tins is the God who is the world-worker, the supreme soul, who always dwells m the heart of all men, those who know htm through iheir mind, and the heart that is full of the certainty of knowledge, become immortal
To realize with the heart and mind the divine being who dwells withm us is to be assured of everlasting life It is mhatma, the great reality of the inner being, which is msva- kama, the world-worker, whose manifestation is in the outer work occupying all time and space
Our own personality also consists of an inner truth which expresses itself in outer movements. "When we realize, not merely through our intellect, but through our heart strong with the strength of its wisdom, that MaMtma, the Infinite Person, dwells m the Person which is m me, we cross over the region of death. Death only concerns our limited self, when the Person m us is realized in the Supreme Person, then the limits of our self lose for us their fuiahty
Ife qotstion iiewnly anses, what is the significance of this self of ours? Is ,t nothing but an absolute bondage for us?
« in our language the sentences were merely for expressing grammatical rules, then the using of such a taw^SK a s W to fruitless pedantry But, because ffljk its ultimate object the expression of ideas, on 3 Juns Z
in *g* ** its revelaC
supreme end of our , • Mess form °* JQy The
944 The Principal Upamsads
are fetters for our soul, they do not express the wealth of the infinite m us, but merely our want or our weakness
Our sou] has its anandam, its consciousness of the infinite, which is blissful This seeks its expression in limits which, vhen they assume the harmony of forms and the balance of move- ments, constantly indicate the limitless Such expression is freedom, freedom from the barrier of obscurity Such a medium of limits we have in our self which is our medium of expression It is for us to develop this into ananda-rupam amrtam, an embodiment of deathless joy, and only then the infinite in us can no longer remain obscured
This self of ours can also be moulded to give expression to the personality of a business man, or a lighting man, or a working man, but m' these it does not reveal our supreme reality, and therefore we remain shut up m a prison of our own construction. Self finds its dnanda-rupam, which is its freedom in revelation, when it reveals a truth that transcends self, like a lamp revealing light which goes far beyond .its material limits, proclaiming its kinship with the sun When our self is illuminated with the light of love, then the negative aspect of its separateness with others loses its finality, and then our relationship with others is no longer that of competition and conflict, but of sympathy and co-operation
I feel strongly that this, for us, is the teaching of he Upamsads, and that this teaching is very much needed m the oSent age for those who boast of the freedom enjoyed by IT^Zs using that freedom for building «P » of spiritual blindness, where the passions ojjg^^gj are allowed to roam unchecked, having for ^J"*^ diplomacy and a widespread propaganda of falsdtood, wnere SSmams caged and the self battens upon the decaying flesh of its victims
Appendix B
AN INTRODUCTION By Edmoj?d Holmes to The Philosophy of the XJpatmads
Pkofessor Radhakeishnan's work on Irdian Philosophy, the first volume of which has recently appeared, meets a want which has long been felt The Western mind finds a difficulty m placing itself at what I may call the dominant standpoint of Indian thought, a difficulty which is the outcome of cen- turies of divergent tradition, and which therefore opposes a formidable obstacle to whatever attempt may be made by Western scholarship and criticism to interpret the speculative philosophy of India If we of the West are to enter with some measure of sympathy and understanding into the ideas which dominate, and have long dominated, the Indian mind, India herself must expound them to us Our interpreter must be an Indian critic who combines the acuteness and originality of the thinker with the learning and caution of the scholar, and who has also made such a study of Western thought and Western letters as will enable him to meet his readers on common ground If, in addition to these qualifications, he can speak to us m a Western language, he will be the ideal exponent of that mysterious philosophy which is known to most of us more by hearsay than by actual acquaintance, and which, so far as we have any knowledge of it, alternately fascinates and repels us
All these requirements are answered by Professor Radha- knshnan A clear and deep thinker, an acute critic and an erudite scholar, he is admirably qualified for the task which he has set himself of expounding to a 'lay' audience the mam movements of Indian thought His knowledge of Western thought and letters makes it easy for him to get into touch with a Western audience, and for the latter purpose he has the further qualification, which he shares with other cultured Hindus, of being a master of the English language and an accomplished writer of Enghsh prose
^ But the first volume of Indian Philosophy contains over 700 closely printed pages, and costs a guinea, and it is not every one, even of those who are interested in Indian thought,
9<f6 The Principal Upanisads
who can afford to devote so much time to serious study, while the price, though relatively most reasonable, is beyond the means of many readers That being so, it is good to know that Professor Radhaknshnan and his publisher have decided to bring out the section on The Philosophy of the Upamsads as a separate volume and at a modest price
For what is quintessential in Indian philosophy is its spiritual idealism; and the quintessence of its spiritual idealism is in the Upamsads, The thinkers of India in all ages have turned to the Upamsads as to the fountain-head of India's speculative thought 'They are the foundations,' says Professor Radha- knshnan, 'on which most of the later philosophies and religions of India rest . . Later systems of philosophy display an almost pathetic anxiety to accommodate their doctrines to the views of the Upamsads, even if they cannot father them all on them. Every revival of idealism in India has traced its ancestry to the teaching of the Upamsads ' "There is no important 'form of Hindu thought,' says an English exponent of Indian philosophy, 'heterodox Buddhism included, which is not rooted in the Upamsads '» It is to the Upamsads, then, that the Western student must turn for lllummation, who wishes to form a true idea of the general trend of Indian thought, but has neither tune nor inclination to make a close study of its various systems. And if he is to find the clue to the teaching of the Upamsads he cannot do better than study it under the guidance of Professor Radhaknshnan
It's tme that treatises on that philosophy have been written by Western scholars. But the Western nund, as i has Ten already suggested, is as a rule debarred by the ^prejudg in which it has been cradled from entering with sympathetic Kht Tnto idea* which belong to another world ^ ««£ aee Not only does it tend to survey those deas, and the pfobkms m which they centre, from distinctively Western, but it sometimes goes so far as to. assume Sie Western is tie only *^£fi&%S£i with mental samty. Can we wonder then, tW jben it cn
and^ven its ^y?P^^^J^ ^of'ffe^U^^^^^s^vre have a con- In Gough's Philosophy of ^X^^ dominate tpmotuouslv hostile criticism of the ideas wmcu temptUOUSiy The Rehgu* of the Veda.
Appendix B 947
that philosophy, based on obstinate misunderstanding of the Indian point of view— misunderstanding so complete that our author makes nonsense of what he criticizes before he has begun to study it. In Deussen's work on the same subject— a work of close thought and profound learning which deservedly commands respect— we have a singular combination of enthu- siastic appreciation with complete misunderstanding on at least one vital point. Speaking of the central conception of the Upamsads, that of the ideal identity of God and the soul, Gough says, 'this empty intellectual conception, void of spmtuality, is the highest form that the Indian mind is capable of ' Comment on this jttgemcnt sattgrenu is needless. Speaking of the same conception, Deussen says, 'it will be found to possess a significance reaching far beyond the Upanisads, their time and country; nay, we claim for it an inestimable value for the whole race of mankind . . . one thing we may assert with confidence— whatever new and unwonted paths the philosophy of the future may strike out, this principle will remain permanently unshaken, and from it no deviation can take place.' This is high praise. But when our author goes on to argue that the universe is pure illusion, and claims that this is the fundamental view of the Upanisads, he shows, as Pro- fessor Radhakrishnan has fully demonstrated, that he has not grasped the true inwardness of the conception which he honours so highly.
With these examples of the aberration of Western criticism before us, we shall perhaps think it desirable to turn for instruction and guidance to the exposition of the Upanisads which Professor Radhakrishnan, an Indian thinker, scholar and cntic, has given us. If we do so, we shall not be dis- appomted As the inheritor of a great philosophical tradition,
» Vr^ ^ bom rather &za indoctrinated, Professor Kaonaknshnan has an advantage over the Western student 01 Indian philosophy, which no weight of learning and no «tf f >. t. metaphysical acum en can counterbalance, and of 55? he ha f made m ™ e H's study of the Upanisads— if a
T^r er may Pre^e to say so— is worthy of its theme, flu >«L„ P a »" lsa £ are ae M Shest and purest expression of on S^ atl « th0Ught of Indla - ^ erabod v the meditations ers ? f a succ ession of seers who lived between W ^l 300 ? C - In tbem « ^J" 3 Professor J. S. Mackenzie, 'we
a ' e lhe earIies t attempt at a constructive theory of the
o fh The Principal Upamsads
co.-mo\ and certainly one of the most interesting and temnrl.ihh ,'
V>'hu\ do the Upamsids tucli us* Its authors did not all think .dike, but, taking their meditations as a whole, we may «iy that Uu-y arc dominated by one paramount conception, that of the ideal oneness of the soul of man with the soul of t)v vrnwi te» The Sancknt word for the soul of man is Atman, for the jnul of the universe Brahman 'God's dwelling place,' juji. Professor Kadhaknshnan in his exposition of the philo- sophy of flic l*pani«ads, 'is the heart of man. The inner immortal self and the great cofmicpower are one and the same. Brahman is the At man, and the Atman is the Brahman The one supn mc- powor throuqh v. Inch all things have been brought into being is one v.ith the inmost self m each man's heart.' Whnt is real in each of us is his self or soul What is real in the mmer-T t<; its self or s-oul, in urtue of which its All is One, and the name for which in our language is God And the mdi- urituboul i< one, potentially and ideally, with the divine or um\ tr-a! soul In the w ords of one of the Upamsads 'He who is Brahman m man and who is that m the sun, these are one
The significance of this conception is more than meta- nh\»ical There is a practical side to it which its exponents k : apt to ignore The unity of the all-pervading life, m and tbroih its ov.n essential spmtuahty-the unity of the tnmty of God and Nature and Man-is, from mans point oi m, an «kal to be realized rather than an accomphshed fact \i this it so, if oneness with the real, the universal, the divme
] s he deal end of man's being, it stands to reason that e tiZwn, the finding of the real which man can set himself In the Upamsads themsehes tje SSTSiwtions of their central conception ««e not My „S S Ft To do <o to elaborate the general ideal of self-
of annihilate as the fi^^^fSLl to the
West, is due to f ud ^ as , a j£, % « ^ that this mistake taken for comprehensive denial It is time ma
Appendix B 949
uas corrected It is only by affiliating the ethics of Buddhism to thTSaphysics of the Upanisads that we can pass behind L iSSt of Buddha and get mto touch with the philosophic^ ruled his mind, ideas which were not the less real or Sectvve because he deliberately held them in reserve This has lone been my own conviction, and now I am confirmed in by finding that it is shared by Professor Radhaknshnan "ho sets forth "the relation of Buddhism to the philosophy of the Upanisads m the following words 'The only metaphysics that can lustify Buddha's ethical discipline is the metaphysics underlying the Upanisads Buddhism helped to democratize the philosophy of the Upanisads, which was till then confined to a select few. The process demanded that the deep philo- sophical truths which cannot be made clear to the masses of men should for practical purposes be ignored It was Buddhas mission to accept the idealism of the Upanisads at its best and make it available for the daily needs of mankind Historical Buddhism means the spread of the Upamsad doctrines among the people It thus helped to create a heritage which is Irving to the present day.'
Given that oneness withhisownreal self, whichisalsothesoul of Nature and the spirit of God, union with the ultimate is the ideal end of man's being, the question arises How is that end to be achieved? In India, the land of psychological experiments, many ways to it were tried and are still being tried There was the way of }Mna, or intense mental concentration. There was the way of bhakti, or passionate love and devotion There was the way of Yoga, or severe and systematic self-discipline. These ways and the like of these might be available for exceptionally gifted persons. They were not available, as Buddha saw clearly, for the rank and file of mankind It was for the rank and file of mankind, it was for the plain average man, that Buddha devised his scheme of conduct. He saw that m one's everyday life, among one's fellow men, there were ample opportunities for the higher desires to assert themselves as higher, and for the lower desires to be placed under due control There were ample opportunities, m other words, for the path of self-mastery and self-transcendence, the path of emancipation from the false self and of affirmation of the true self, to be followed from day to day, from year to year, and even — for Buddha, like the seers of the Upanisads, took the reality of re-birth for granted— from life to life He who walked m that path had set his face
95° The Principal Ufianwds
towards the goal of his own perfection, and, in doing so, had, unknown to himself, accepted the philosophy of the Upam§ads as the ruling principle of his life
If this interpretation of the life-work of Buddha is correct, if it was his mission to make the dominant idea of the Upamsads available for the daily needs of ordinary men, it is impossible to assign limits to the influence which that philosophy has had and is capable of having m human affairs in general and in the moral life of man in particular The metaphysics of the Upanisads, when translated into the ethics of self- reahzation, provided and still provides for a spiritual need which has been felt m divers ages and which was never more urgent than it is to-day For it is to-day, when supernatural religion is losing its hold on us, that the secret desire of the heart for the support and guidance which the religion of nature can alone afford, is making itself felt as it has never been felt before And if the religion of nature is permanently to satisfy our deeper needs, it must take the form of devotion to the natural end of man"s being, the end which the seers of the Upanisads discerned and set before us, the end of oneness with that divine or universal self which is at once the soul of au things and the true being of each ^dividual man. In other worfc, it is as the gospel of spiritual evolution that the rehgion of nature must make its appeal to ^ semi-pagan world It was the gospel of spiritual evolution which Buddha, true to the spirit of the Upanisads, preached 2,500 years ag°,^d *is for a re-presentatfon of the same gospel, in the sport of the same philosophy, that the world is waiting now
. It was A. gospel of spinal ^olu^^C^ ^^
a later ag£ "° forms of thought Such at toast » m ^ !^ , ~\ , R „ perfect even as
i?j5«ssftsss s-jsks-* -
SSSTl.SC.ta ad (to KM «• "~
Btbho 951 SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY English Translations I SZ U TTf^ Sacred Books of the East. Vol. I. G. R?£d5id 8 J 4 C. Chattopadhyaya: The Upamsads. 2 Vols.
S.SftaramaSastnand Ganganatha Jha. Tfo Upamsads. 5 Vols. 1898-1901.
Sitanath Tattvabhusan: The Upamsads 2 Vols X900, xom
S C Vasu. Ua, Kern, Kaiha, Prasna, Muttdaha and Mand&kya
Upamsads, 1909 R. E Hume TU Thirteen Principal Upamsads 1931. Swimi Prabhavananda and Frederick Manchester. The Upmtsads.
Swami Nikhillnanda. The Upanisads 1951.
English Translations of Single Upanisads
E Roer. Brhai-Sranyaka Upantsad 1856.
S. C Vasu. Brhad-aranyaka Upantsad, mlh the Commentary of Sri
Samkaracarya 1913-1916 Swaim Madhavananda Brhad-aranyaka Upantsad with Samkara's
Commentary 1934 Rajendralal Mitra Chdndogya Upantsad
S. C Vasu. Ckandogya Upantsad with Commentary of Sn Madhva- carya 1917
H M Bhadkamkar Aitareya Upantsad 1899
S C Vidyamava and Mohan La.1 Sandal Attareya Upantsad. 1925
A Mahadeva Sastn TatUmya Upantsad mth ttte Commentaries of
Samkaracarya, Sttresvardcdrya and Sdyam. S. C. Vidyamava and Mohan Lai Sandal- TatttiHya Upantsad.
text and translation with notes and commentaries 1925. S C Vasu and A. C. Thirlwall Kena Upanisad, with the Sanskrit
text, anvaya, vrtti, word-meaning, translation, notes and
index 1902
M Hmyanna Kena Upantsad mth the Commentary of Samkara- carya. 1912
D ^"ey: Upantsad, with the Sanskrit text, anvaya, <; r v- ' w ?, rd - mean "ig, translation, notes and index, 1800 I C Vasu Kaiha Upantsad 1905.
L f y> Kafha u P antse ^ Introduction, text, translation and notes 1924.
Rmson- Kajha Ufamsad 1034 knshnaPrcm Kaput Upamsad.i
' No date is mentioned in the book.
95 2 The Principal Upamsads
Sir William Jones* Isa Upantsad. 1799
S C Vasu and A C. Thirlwall Ha Upamsad 1902.
M. N. Dvivedi: Mandilhya Vpatttsad. 1894.
SwamiNikhilananda* Mdndukya Upamsad.
Siddhesvar Yarma The Svetasvalara Upamsad 1916
E. B Cowell. Kausitakt Upamsad. 1861.
S. C. Vidyamava and Mohan Lai Sandal. The Kausilah Upantsad,
with notes and commentary 1925. E B. Cowell. The Maitrl or Matirayaiiiya Upanisad, with the
commentary of Ramatirtha, edited with an English translation
Expository and Cnltcal Works
A. E Gough: The Philosophy of the Upanisads and Ancient Indian
Metaphysics 1882. Paul Deussen The Philosophy of the Upamsads. E T 1906 L D Barnett Brahim Knowledge 1911 S C Vidyamava. Studies tn the first Six Upamsads 1919 R Gordon Milburn The Religious Mysticism of the Upamtads 1919 B M Barua- A History of Pre-Buddhistic Indian Philosophy. 1921. S. N Dasgupta History of Indian PMosoPJiy Vol I 1922 A. B. Keith The Religion and Philosophy of the Veda aiul the
R iffiade "a °CmSSctive Survey of Upantsadie Philosophy
S K Beivalkar and R. D Ranade History of Indian Philosophy Vol IL The Creative Penod Brahmana and Upamsad* Philosophy and post Upamsadic Thought, 1927.
Aoailard, Peter 59° Abhava 4+S
Abhdhama-KoSa, see Vasubandhn Abhinavagupta 113 n Aesehylns's Agamemnon 553 AgaiHa Sulta 686 Alrora Mazda 32*, 33, 60 « Aitareya Aranyaka 47 *, 91 ». 125 «,
270, 298, 418, 458. 513. 555. 568 Aitareya Brabmana 47 ». 3°4. 395.
4x6, s«l, 615. 75S. 770. 775 AlayavqfiSna 492, 837 Akibiaies 178 Alexander 464
Alexandrian Christian Mystics 17 » Al Ghazzali 103 it, 562 Ah 687
Amaru-Kola 30 «, 67 «, 176, 218 Amos IZ2 n
An Advanced History of India by R C. Majumdar, H C Ray Chaudan and K Datta 144 «
Ananda 271-2
Ananda-laharl 734
Anandagin passim
Anaxagoras 452
Anaximander 33 », 38 »
Anaximenes 404
Annambhatta'sTara*flJii%nj?j(J 448 AnnapBrna Upamsad 73 « Ansdro, St 53 » Antony, St 585 XnvMfMi-^raAaia 801 Apastawba 769, his Yajna-pan-
bhasa 30 n Appaya&Iksita's YcgaDarpa$a 137a Aquinas, St Thomas 65 «, 103 »,
107 », 144 n, 245, 777 Aristotle 23 «, 3511, 59, 121, 2g3,
32B, 464, 533. 547, 5J7, 652, 671 Artyaparyesana Sutla 563 Aruneya Upamsad 47 n Aryadcva's Citla-viiitddki-praharana
129 n
Aimarathya 286, 440 AsfSvakra Gila 702, 846 Aivatayarsn Grtya SBIra 339, 330,
768, 769 Athcnagoras 23 « Alma-bodha 79 n AoduloTni 124 n, 286 Augustine, St J21 n, 558, 575 «, 591, 699, his Confessions 55 w, 557
Anrobindo, Sri si » Avesta 31 Avidya 88-90
Badarayana. 71,125,126
Badan 125, 440
Bailey Shackleton, D R. 194
Baladeva 27
Bardosa 144* .
Baron von HugeVs The Mystical
Element 0} Religion 749 Barth, Karl, his The Knowledge of
God and the Service of Goi 65 » Barua, B M, his Ceylon Lectures
575 » „ Basflides 65 n
Bede.The Venerable,hisEa;fcsi«fcnrt History of the English If alum Sin
Belvalkar, Dr S K , his Four Un- published Upamsadtc Texts and the Paryanka VtdyS 751, 753. 755 «.
756 ». 757 * Benedict, St 680
Bernard, St 85 «, 102 «, 263, 411, 646, 749
Ehagavad-gtIS, 9, 70, 397, 485, 493, 528, 5 60 " 572. 576. 593. 6l °. 6l 5. 616, 617, 625, 636. 649. 677. 680, 687, 701, 710, 712, 713, 714, 720, 721, 727, 729, 744, 746. 747- 769. 806, 835, 886, 914, 916
Bhagavata 24 «, 51 «, ro8 «, 1x3 «, 136 «, 137 «• 140 «. H x n > 280, 718, 907
Bhagavata religion 625
Shakli-martanda 141 »
Bhartrprapafica 25
Bhaskara 27
Bhaskara JLaugak$i, his Artha-sam- graha 50 n
Bhattacarya Siddhesvar 10
Bhavabhuti 549
Birth. Control 324
Blake 60 «, his Auguries of Inno- cence 612
BIoomfieM, his Religton of the Veda 17 n, 29 n, 946
Bodhisattva 274
Bochme 36 11, 128 », 645, 884
Bocthms 94, his Consolations of Philosophy 113 «
Bona\cntnra, St G20, his Itinerary of the Mind 620
The Principal Upani$ads
Brahma-bmdu Vpamsad 718, 846 Brahmacarya no, 498 Brahma Purina 36 », 109 », 710 BrahmSnda Purina 36 n Brahma-randhra 76, 190 Brahma Sillra 25, 67, 71, 86, 125,
141 «, 286-7, 440, 547, 732 Brahma-vaivaria Purina 89 m, 468 »,
Brbad-dtvata 30
Brhai-samhxta 622
Browne, Professor E G , his ^ War
j4»xmgs< (Ae Pflwnns 32 « Buddha 38 it, 58, 67 n, 109, 120 n,
194, 271-2, 274, 5^8, 539. 557. 563.
Buddha-canla 712, 713
Buddhism 17, 67, 92, n6«, 119 », 168, ai8. 247, 279, 492, 606, 613, 623,645,678,793,796.949 ^ ,
Bunyan 135*1. his Holy War 636
Burkrtt, Professor 71 *
Butler, Dom Cuthbert, his Western Mysticism 303, 358, 563, 575*, his Benedictine Monachtsm 644
Cambridge Ancient History 38n,7iH Cambridge Review 132 « Cassian 608, 654 Caste 935-8
Catherine, St , of Genoa 76 n ChaTcravarti, N P.hised olVVdana 608
Chindogya Brahmana 335 Charpentier 599 _ Chatterji, Professor Sumti Kumar
10,353 Chattopadhyaya 21 « Chaucer 136 »
Cheng, F T, his CAimo A/onWeii 5y
Confucius 109 » Christianity 19 «. 33 ». 60 *• °97 ChuangTzu 68 n, 130 n Church Family Newspaper 120 n
Cicero 4° " „, Cloud of Unknowing, The 591
Colcfcrookc 21 Coleridge 53° Colossians 697 Confucius 109 «, 136 * , Cook. A B , hisZ«« 37 »>> « Coomaraswamy. Ananda 608. 617 Coomarasttamy, Dona Ltiisa 623 Corinthians I 62 », 568 . Comtord, Prolessorl- M J7 ' , Plato's rfeory o/ Knowledge 155
Cou ell 2i 11
Creation 35-9, 63, 163, 541 ff, 631-2 Crump, C G , his Legacy of the Miidk
Ages 171-7 Cuhka Vpamsad 123 «
Dante 7! Dara Slukoh 21 Darianopantfad 150 n Daia-kumara-canla 271 Demeter 276 Descartes 631
Dcussen, Paul iS, 21 «, 84, 221, 599, 645, 947: his The Philosophy of the Vpamsads 625
Deuteronomy 166
Devi BhSgavala 5011, S3 it, in n, 136 n, 658, 734
Devt Saptaialt 589
Devi Vpamsad 83 1»
Dhamma-pada 9, 25 «, 645, 719, 93 s
Dhyina-bmdu Vpamsad 7, 18, 886
Digha Ni/taya 204, 473, 783
Diogenes 404
Dionysius, the Arcopagitc 586 Dream 456, 500, 505-6, 632, 638,
660-2, 696, 699. 7°*. 8 35. 9«»-'3 Duperron, Anquctil 21 Durga SaptaSatt 590 Dvivedi si n
Ecfchart 17 ». 64 «, 65 «, 70 «, 71 «, 76 «, 84 «, g6«, 107 «, 120 n, 124 t44 «. 497. 562, 573. 583, 59'. 6l0 ' 638, 668, ogr Edgcrton, Professor Franklin 46 » Encyclopaedia of Religions and Ithxs
585 J Epimcmdcs 549 Epistle to the Hebrews 646 Engena Scotus 69 ti, 194 Eunpidcs, his Melamppe 38 », 114 « Eustochius 304 Exodus 54 n, in n
Falk, Dr Maryla, her A'fimu Wf «
and Dharma-Mpa 62 » Four/ft Gospel, The »94. 7°4 IYaneis.St io6», 22*
Galatians 120 »
Gandhi, M K i39«.5 6S
Carbha Vpamsad 712
Garuda Purana 676-7 . .
88 «, 122 «, 697. 099- J""* ° n SSmhhya KSnhS 713
General Index
GSyatri 199-302, 387-8 Genesis 35 n Giles, H A , his Chuang Tsu, Mystic,
Moralist and Social Reformer 69 « Gobhtla Crhya Satra 330, 769 Gopalayatlndra 599, 603 Gough 22, his Philosophy of the
Upanisads 940, 946, 947 Gregory of Nyasa 69 « Gregory, St, his Morals on Job 570 Guthne.W K C , his The Greeks and
their Cods 276, 293, 404
Hallaj 562 Hammond 533 Hanjan 568 HanvamSa 468
Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 623
Hebrews 62 n, 720 n Hegel 491, 700 Henotheism 33
Herachtus 77 n. jir n, 303, 608 Hildegrand, St 722 Hilleorandt 600 Hinyanna, Professor M 21 n History of the Early Kings of Persia 464
HtlopadcSa 628
Hobhouse. Stephen, his Selected Mystical Writings of William Law 36 B
Holmes, Edmond 10, 945-50 Homer 276, his lhad 35 n Hooker 194 Horace 567 Hosca ii2 «
Home, R E , 21 n. 612, 825 Huxley, Aldous. his Perennial Philo- sophy 76 n
I mtalton of Christ 486 Incarnation 40 « Indtan Antiquary 25 «, 600 Jrdian Irterpreter 19 »i Indo-Iranians 31 n, 43 Inge. Dr \V R i S0 V? Isaiah 110,302 Ilivutlaka 607
Jaimini 126, 440
/otirmua Uparifai Brahrrara 47 » , « «. 50 «. 3*8, 459, 760 Jamism 79, 67S James. St 569
James, William, his Principles of Ps)chlc& 533 ' J
, Jaspers, Karl 22 J aloha 623
Jayatirfha's Nyaya-sudhS 64 Jesus Chnst 58, 106 v, 131 «, 222,
2/4. 578, &>5. 628, 884, 950 Jews 60 r.
Jha Ganganatha 2, 12 Jlvanmukta 121-2, 915-16 Job 244
John X20 ji, 127 u, 128 «, 225, 227 274, 328, 466, 470, 562, 623, 641
John, St , of the Cross 106 u, 303, his Ascent of Carmtl 273, 586
Johnston, E H , his Some Samkhya and Yoga Conceptions of the 3vetaivatara Vpamsad 712
Jones. Sir William 28
Julian, Lady 84 n
Kafair 1 18 n, 12911
Kahdasa 549, his Raghuvathsa 127 «, his Sakuntala 267, 270-1, 375, KumSrasombhava 271, Meg- hadsta 312
Kalpaiaru 140 is
Karma 113-14
Kasakritsna 287
Katha SamhilS 46 n
Kaustlaki Brahmana 49 n
Keats 939
Keith, A. B, his The Religion and Philosophy of the Veda and the Upanisads 20 n, 21 ti, 77 n
KhSdira Grhya Sutra 769
Kierkegaard 222
Kings! 583
Koias 541-7. 551. 553 ff. gro Krama-mukti 122 Knshnade\a Raya 144 n Kundahnt 76
Kuranarayana 302, 575, 576
Lahla-xnslara 52S
Lambika-yoga 832
Lanhavatara SStra 123 «, 72J, 837
Lao Tsu 222, 549, 701-2
Law, \\ Jliara 36 r. 76 r. 99 n
Little. A. G , his Franciscan Papers
Lists ard Docurrents 222 Logos 61-2, 194. 247, 704 Louis of BIois 585 Luther 43 n
Mackenzie, Professor J S 947 Macnicol, Xicol, his Hindu ScnpUres 20 «
J.Sadhusudana's Prasthara-bheia 75!
The Principal Vpanisads
Madhva si w, 26, 52, 93 , 220 , 34a ,
on, 622, 632, 642, 673 Madhyamaha Vrtti 123 n Msdhyamika 67 » Mahabh5rata 94 n, 118 n, 275, 341,
712, 713, 833, 900, 938 Mahanardyaya U 618, 731 Mahamrvaya Tantra 141 rt, 897 MahayStia Sutralamkara 123 » Majjhtma Nikaya 120 », 121 «, 328,
MalluiStha 271
Mandala-Brahmam Upamsad 721-2 Manu 171, 180, 272, 330, 399, 493,
769, 796, 890 Marcel, Gabriel 178 Mark, The Gospel according to 128 n Murkandeya Puratta 589 Matrceta's Saiapailc&Satha 194, 198,
Matthew, The Gospel according to
567, 609, 628 Maxunus of Tyre 40 n Maya 78-go
McKenzte, John, his Two Religions
1x4 » Mead 21 n Mencius zn « Mikrepa 86 n Milburn, R. Gordon 19 « Mihndapailha 555 Mirror of Simple Soules, The 120 «
Mitbraism 33 «
Muhammad 38 n, 722
Muktika Vpanisad 21 », 24 n, 124 «.
t34 *. °93 *. 876 Muller, Max 21 «, 37 44 »> 612, 793, his Six Systems of Mian Philosophy 28 «, his Anaenl His- tory of Sanskrit Literature 28 n
Narada Bhahh SHIra 140 NarSyana 738 NSrayana-dipiH 726, 730 N&rayaniya 375 NSsadiya Suhta 487, 864 Neo-Platomcs 17 «, 66 «, 630
7«tf»o» Antiquary 608, 638 New Testament 569 Nicholas ofCusa 69 «. 586, 821 Nicholson 217,668 NididhySsana 135 ^ , _ Nietzsche, his Spake Zara-
' thtslra iim
Nilalcanfta 713 NimbSrka 27, 622, 635 Niralambopantsad 51 » Norns 142 n
Nrsmha-pBroa-tSpaniya Vpamsad 693
Old Testament 641
Oldenberg 27 «
Orpheus 20 «, 37 n, 38 «, 399
Otto, Rudolf, his Mysticism East and
West 96 «, 107 «, 124 », 573, 583,
Palgrave's Golden Treasury 567 Pailcadalt, see Vidyaranya PailcavttftSa Brahmatta 328 Paficlkarana 906 Pandava Glta 144 » Panmi 833 Para-psychology 218 Parashara Gfhya SWra 329, 330, 769
Para-tantra 485
Patafijala Yoga 645
Patafljah 357
Patanjali's MahabhSfya 529
Paul, St 114 », 142 n, 144 », 223, 596, 620
Pelagius 619
Perry, W J 35 «
Peter II itr «, 562
Philo 62, 207, 244, 328, 698, 704, 806
Plato 49, 59. 62, 68 *, 631, 641, 700. 806, his Timaeus 19 », 40 h, 94. Gorgtas 34*. Sophist s 55. Sym- posium 164: Republic 194. * 2 3. Laws 227, 272, Phaedrus 608, 623, Phaedo 623, 631, Apology 671
Plotmus 65 n, 66 », 67, 194. 3°j. 33*. S85. 644. 699. 7io. hB£"«nw* 68 «, 77 ti, 81 n, 96 n. »9 «. »*3 *» 701-5
Plutarch 40 n, 178. 276, 4 6 4 Pluto 5" Porphyry 331 Prqfiaparamiia 247 Pratltya-SamutpJda 485 Procreation ccrcmow» 3«-3i Psalms 303.J67.6?6 Pseudo-Dionysius 68 »s, »94> S°>'
O17, 6z6 Piifupo 381 PurusaSShta 632 Purva MimSmsS 805
General Index
Rabia 138 n
Radhaknsbnan 939. 945-5°". ^ Eastern Religions end Western Thought 17 n; An Idealist View of Lift 131 b; Indian Philosophy 887
Ragonn, his Vedie India 28 n
Ramanuja passim
Ramatirtha 793 S
Ranade's A Constructive Survey of Upamshadtc Phtosophy 533
Rangaramanuja passim Ralana Sulla 557 Rawson, Dr sg6, 617 Rebirth 115-17,815-19,268-75,309, 4Z6-34. 499-501. 638. 689-90, 753 ft 913 Religto Medici 62 n Renan, Eniest 106 n Revelation 553.634,641 Richard of St Victor 128 r., 263,
Roer 21 n RoQaiid, Rotoain 9 Romans 65 *, 114 n Rosetti, Christina 668 Hoy, Ram Mohan 21 * Runu, Jalal-tiddln 53 n, 57 n, 110 rs, _ "7. 274. 328, 459, 623, 667-8 Roysbmeck, John, bis Adornment of the Spiritual Marriage 263, 53T-2
Sahda-halpa-drwra 468 Saiva-siddhanta 714 Sakb 6,21 Samkara passim
Samkarananda 136 r., 547, 569, 570, 571. 597. 707 «, 726, 728-30, 738,
c- 74 ,!l 744 ' 748> 7S1 ' 754. 755 ba ™ 3s >" a 93. 452. 515. 627, 663,
c- h 7 °h 7, °- 734. 80s, 840, 865
Samkhya-KSrtka 712, 807
Saihkhya Siiira 712
Samfchyayana Aranyaka 48 r.
Samyutia Ntkaya 272, 607, 60S
Sanatsttjaitya 711
SSniHyana Grhya Sutra 329, 330
Sanaiarsanasarrgraha 833
SSstn Mahadeva 2t r,
Sistn Sitaram 21 r.
Satapatha Brahmara 47 n, 53 n, 77, ttzn, 11515, 117 «, nor, mob' '47. 149. 159, 1S5, 206, 207, 243, St H°' 3 «- 4»«. 43*. 434. 630,
SI* 7 * 7 "
Sa'-iarr-a-dtpika 99 n
Scandinavian Mythology 641 Scholasticism 72 Schopenhauer 17 « Senart, M. 450 Stddhanta-haurnxtdi 570 Siddhania-leSa-sarhgraka 70 n Sikes, G., his Piier Abailard 590 Sfleshis, Angelas 84 r. Sunpliaus 4x4
Singer, Charles, bis Studies in the History and Method of Science 722s
Singh, Guru Govind 139 is
S~iva-dharmottara 140 «, 716, 717
S~iva-glla 118 »
^tvo-nui&tfflisa S/ofra 715
Sivasvarodaya 672
Sleep 456, 495, 496, 507-8, 660-3, 696, 699, 700, 702-835, 911-13
Smith, John 99 «
Socrates 10, 58, 671
Solomon 5S3, 619, 714
Sophocles 276
Sphota 674
Spinoza 491
Sridhara 814
Srinivasa. 622
Stoics 76
Snfism 17, 38 n, 263, 562 SutnsumSra jataka 242 Suresvaracarya 542-3, 563; his
Naiskarmyasiddhi 121 is Snso 722
Sutta Ntpata 44 «, 121 n
Tagore, Rabmdranath 10, rig n,
939-944 , Tattttriya Aranyaka 634, 691, 726,
Tattttriya Brafmara 120 », 274, „, 2 79, 304. 310, 593. 6or, 605, 630 Taittirlya Sarrrxta 46 n, 303, 615
637. 719. 726, 775, S03, 847 r. Tandya Brafrrana 46 « Too Te CHng 63 *, 68 r., 582, 667 Tapas 35, 109, Sn Tattvabhusan Sitanath 21 n Tattva-samasa. 712, 713 Tattler 17 n
Taylor, H. O , his Mediaeval Mind 620
Thales 35*, 293 Theresa, St. 636, 722 Thessaloaians I 720 Traherne X26 n Trimurti 814 g Tnpura-Rakasya 6S7 Tnsmegistos Hermes 67 r.
The Principal Upani$ad$
Udana 679, 685
Udgitha 337 A
Udyotakara 288
Ullathorne, Bishop 6z8
Underhill, Evelyn, her Mysttctsm 552
Unmanibhava 832, 9*3
Upamsad Brahmayogin 811
Upasana 137-8, 822
Urban, W M, his The Intelligible
World 541 Vilara Gild 134, ig6 Viiara Mimamsa 865
Vacaspati, Misra, his BhamatI 606,
898, on Samkhya Kartka 713 Vaiiesjka 453
Vajasaneyt Samhtta 637, 719, 7*4.
7«°. 73 1 Vajracchedtka Satra 585 Vakya-padtya 104 «, 674 Valentmus 71 n Vamana PurSna 368 Varsagaiiya-pa&ca-parva-vtdya 713 Vasistha 107 «, 133 «, 53°. 676 Vasistha Dharma Sastra 104 » Vasistha Smrh 900
vasu. s c 21 «
Vasubandhu's Abhidhama-Kosa 716
Vaughan, Henry 797-^
Vedanta Deslka 142 ft, 3°4> 57*.
574. 576 Vedantasdra 24 «, 807 Vidyaranya 36 », 618, 703, his
Patica-dasi 75 «< 448, 449, 54°.
his Sarvopamsad-arthaMbhm-pra-
hSSa 21
Vijnana-bhiksfl 728,730,73^.74°. 74*. 744
VijSanavada 524 Vmaya 539 Virgil 144 n
Vtiesavaiyaka Bhasya 25 n Vtsnu-dkarma 713 Vtsnu-Dhamoltara 36 n, 13 «, 144 » K»jn» Pwana 164 Vts#wmrtt 116 n Vtsnu-taltva-mrnaya 27 » K»»ar«»o*/wflmfya-50fMj«rAo 197 Vtveha-cttdSmam toi n, 122 «, 129 Vyasa's Yc£o Bhasya 130 a Vyasarya 185
Waley, Arthur, his Way and lis Power 68 «, 382, TAw Ways of Thought tn Attaint China 69 n
Wall 263
Westeott, B F, his The Gospel according to St John 62 n
"Whitehead, AN 63. h's 5cio»« and the Modern World 18
Whitman, Walt 5
Winteraitz, his /I Htstory of Indian Literature 17*1,28 «, 29 "
Wordsworth 126 n
Wotton 5 6 7
Yahweh m* Yaska 22, 3°. 5° n Yeats, W B 18 n Yoga passim
Yoga SBIra 357, 5 02 - 7 10 « 7». 7*3' 830
Yoga-vSstslha 846
Zoroaster 32. 60 >t Zoroastnan Religion 641, 899